2017 Ssang Yong Rexton Y400 Om

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Descriptions Capacity Specifications
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30 or
D22DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
Engine Oil MB 229.52 5W30)
G20GDi ≒ 5.0ℓ Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30)
D22DTR ≒ 10.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine coolant

Engine Coolant Anti-Freeze SYC-1025, Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
G20GDi ≒ 11.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE, COLOR:BLUE
6A/T ≒ 9.6ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (NWS-9638)

Automatic Transmission Fluid
7A/T ≒ 9.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF 134 FE)
Manual Transmission Fluid 6M/T ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (HD MTF 75W/85 (SHELL) or HK MTF 75W/85 (SK))
Transfer Case Fluid Part Time ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Front ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Axle Oil Rigid ≒ 2.0ℓ

Rear Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
IRS ≒ 1.6ℓ
Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
Ssangyong genuine oil (S-PSF3)

Power Steering Fluid ≒ 1.1ℓ
* TOTAL FLUIDE DA (Extreme cold condition only)
D22DTR: Diesel 2.2, G20GDi: Gasoline 2.0
Warning
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants.
yy Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
yy Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
Rexton (G4) and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best and is
interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing Rexton (G4) and assure you of our
continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must remain with the vehicle
at the time of resale.
PYEONGTAEK, KOREA
GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
0 General Information 2 Safety Unit 3 S

tarting the Engine and
Driving Off the Vehicle
Dimensions.......................................... 0-2 Seat..................................................... 2-2
Vehicle identification............................ 0-7 Front seat............................................ 2-3 Starting the engine and driving
Quick guide (front side)....................... 0-8 Rear 1st seat....................................... 2-6 the vehicle...................................... 3-2
Quick guide (rear side)........................ 0-9 Rear 2nd seat*.................................... 2-9 Functions of ignition key...................... 3-6
Quick guide (interior I)....................... 0-10 Front seat heating*/ventilation Battery replacement for rekes key....... 3-8
Quick guide (interior II)...................... 0-11 switch*......................................... 2-12 Positions of engine start/stop
Quick guide (interior III)..................... 0-12 Rear 1st row seat heating switch* button (smart key)*........................ 3-9
Quick guide (interior - luggage (same for both sides)................... 2-13 Using emergency key (smart key)*... 3-14
compartment and rear seats)....... 0-13 Seat belt............................................ 2-16 Smart key battery low........................ 3-15
Quick guide (engine compartment How to fasten the three point seat Replacing smart key battery.............. 3-16
- diesel)........................................ 0-14 belt............................................... 2-18 Shift lever in manual transmission..... 3-17
Quick guide (engine compartment Front seat belt................................... 2-19 Gear selector lever in automatic
- gasoline).................................... 0-15 Rear 1st row seat belt....................... 2-20 transmission*............................... 3-20
Quick guide (warning and How to fasten the seat belts Gear selector lever positions............. 3-21
indicator lights)............................. 0-16 (2-point) in rear 1st seat............... 2-21 Driving tips for automatic
Important notice................................. 0-17 How to fasten the seat belt transmission................................. 3-28
Protection of the environment........... 0-18 (3-point) in rear 1st seat............... 2-22 Safety mode (automatic
Certification....................................... 0-19 Child restraints and pregnant transmission)............................... 3-30
woman......................................... 2-24 Road safety....................................... 3-31
1 Safety Precautions Warnings for seat belt........................ 2-33 Caring for your vehicle under 0°C
Air bag............................................... 2-35 (32°F)........................................... 3-34
Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2
Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 2-40 Four wheel drive system*.................. 3-38
Safety instructions............................... 1-8
Warning and caution.......................... 2-43 Brake system..................................... 3-41
Vehicle care....................................... 1-16
EPB (Electric Parking Brake)............ 3-49
Precautions regarding unauthorized
modification & alteration.............. 1-26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Double parking.................................. 3-51 Tailgate switch................................... 4-19 Operation of heater and A/C control.. 4-69
AUTO HOLD*.................................... 3-53 Tailgate operation (without power Manual heater/air conditioner............ 4-76
Cruise control switch......................... 3-55 tailgate)........................................ 4-20 Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 4-81
Parking assist system I (front/rear Power tailgate operation*.................. 4-21 Defogging and defrosting.................. 4-82
obstacle detection system)*......... 3-61 How to set power tailgate*................. 4-24 Multimedia......................................... 4-83
Parking assist system II (rearview Smart tailgate operation*................... 4-25 Steering wheel................................... 4-86
camera system)*.......................... 3-66 Safety release lever . ........................ 4-27 Storage compartments...................... 4-87
Parking assist system III* (around Door open lever, lock/unlock knob Sun visor........................................... 4-90
view monitoring system).............. 3-67 and switch.................................... 4-28 Front cup holder/rear cup holder
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and Opening and closing windows........... 4-30 and armrest.................................. 4-91
LCA (Lane Change Assist) Engine hood...................................... 4-33 Power outlet...................................... 4-92
systems*...................................... 3-71 Fuel filler door.................................... 4-34 USB................................................... 4-93
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Sunroof*............................................ 4-36 AC inverter power switch*................. 4-94
Braking)*...................................... 3-77
Driver seat easy access*................... 4-41 AC inverter........................................ 4-95
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning
Exterior lamp..................................... 4-43 Grip handle with coat hanger............ 4-96
System)*...................................... 3-87
Headlight leveling switch*.................. 4-52 Luggage compartment features........ 4-97
TSR* (Traffic Signal Recognition)...... 3-93
Interior lamp...................................... 4-53 Roof rack......................................... 4-100
Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-58
4 Convenience System I
Rain sensing wiper*........................... 4-60 5 Convenience System II
Remote control key and ignition key... 4-2 Outside rearview mirror control
switch........................................... 4-61 Instrument cluster................................ 5-2
Using smart key*................................. 4-6
Inside rearview mirror........................ 4-64 Gauges and display window................ 5-4
Additional functions of smart key*..... 4-10
Heater/air conditioner system............ 4-65 Warning lights and indicators.............. 5-9
Cautions for using smart key............. 4-14
Warnings and cautions...................... 4-66 LCD Display (main menu)................. 5-22
Immobilizer system............................ 4-15
Automatic heater/air conditioner*...... 4-68 Messages on LCD display................. 5-32
Theft deterrent system...................... 4-17
LCD display pop-up message........... 5-48
GETtheMANUALS.org
Spark plugs....................................... 7-28
6 In Case of Emergency 7 M
aintenance Schedule and
Management Wiper blade replacement.................. 7-29
OVM tools and warning triangle.......... 6-2 Fuse and relay box............................ 7-30
Starting the engine with jumper Maintenance schedule and Bulb specifications and functional
cables............................................ 6-3 service interval (EU) - D22DTR..... 7-2 check........................................... 7-32
When the engine is overheating.......... 6-5 Maintenance schedule and Location of exterior lamps................. 7-33
Tire pressure monitoring system service interval (GEN) - D22DTR.. 7-5 Exterior lamp replacement................ 7-35
(TPMS)*......................................... 6-6 Maintenance schedule and Location of interior lamps.................. 7-37
Cautions when a tire is flat................ 6-12 service interval - G20GDi............... 7-8
Interior lamp replacement.................. 7-38
How to use service kit Severe conditions.............................. 7-11
Replacing air conditioner filter........... 7-40
(emergency tire repair kit)............ 6-13 Locations in engine compartment..... 7-12
Tire.................................................... 7-42
Removing the spare tire.................... 6-21 Engine oil........................................... 7-14
Do-it-yourself operation..................... 7-47
Changing a spare tire........................ 6-22 Engine coolant................................... 7-18
Emission reduction device................. 7-48
Cautions when changing the tire....... 6-27 Air cleaner......................................... 7-20
Towing a disabled vehicle.................. 6-30 Fuel filter (D22DTR).......................... 7-22
8 Index
Emergency towing............................. 6-31 Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)....... 7-23
When the engine is overheating........ 6-33 Washer fluid....................................... 7-24
Trailer towing..................................... 6-35 Power steering fluid........................... 7-25
Accident or fire.................................. 6-40 Battery............................................... 7-26
GETtheMANUALS.org
General Information 0
Dimensions..........................................................0-2
0
Vehicle identification............................................0-7
1
Quick guide (front side)........................................0-8
Quick guide (rear side).........................................0-9 2
Quick guide (interior I)........................................0-10 3
Quick guide (interior II)....................................... 0-11
4
Quick guide (interior III)......................................0-12
Quick guide (interior - luggage compartment 5
and rear seats)...................................................0-13
6
Quick guide (engine compartment - diesel).......0-14
7
Quick guide (engine compartment - gasoline)...0-15
Quick guide (warning and indicator lights).........0-16 8
Important notice.................................................0-17
Protection of the environment............................0-18
Certification........................................................0-19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dimensions Unit: mm
Front View Top View
1,960
1,640 (1,620)
Rear View Side View
1,800
(1,825)
1,640 (1,620) 895 2,865 1,090

4,850
* ( ) : Optional
0-2 General Information

GETtheMANUALS.org
*( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD
Specifications (I) D22DTR: Diesel, G20GDi: Gasoline
Descriptions D22DTR G20GDi

Overall length (mm) 4,850 ←
Overall width (mm) 1,960 ←
Overall height (mm) 1,800 (1,825) ←
5 seat 2,860 [2,750] 2,840 [2,730]
Gross vehicle weight (kg)
7 seat 2,960 [2,850] 2,940 [2,830]
5 seat 2,206 [2,106] 2,186 [2,086]
General A/T
Curb vehicle weight 7 seat 2,243 [2,143] 2,223 [2,123]
(kg) 5 seat 2,165 [2,065] [2,045]
M/T
7 seat 2,202 [2,102] [2,082]
Fuel Diesel Gasoline
Fuel tank capacity (ℓ) 70L ←
Minimum turning radius 5.5m ←
Numbers of cylinders/
4 / 15.5:1 4 / 9.6:1
Compression ratio
Total displacement (cc) 2,157 1,998
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ←
Engine A/T 133.1 kw / 4,000 rpm 165 kw / 5,500 rpm

Max. power
M/T (181 ps / 4,000 rpm) (225 ps / 5,500 rpm)
A/T 420 Nm / 1,600 ~ 2,600 rpm

Max. torque 350 Nm / 1,500 ~ 4,500 rpm
M/T 400 Nm / 1,400 ~ 2,800 rpm
Idle speed 720 ± 50 rpm 750 ± 50 rpm
* ( ) Options, vehicle weights and gross weights are based on the maximum values and they depend on vehicle options and specifications.
General Information 0-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (II) *( ): Optional

Cooling system Water- cooled / forced circulation ←
Coolant capacity (ℓ) 10.2 11.0
Engine Lubrication type Gear pump, forced circulation ←
Max. oil capacity (ℓ) (when shipping) 6.0 5.0
Turbocharger and cooling type Turbocharger, air-cooled Turbocharger, water-cooled
_
Operating type Floor change type
1st 4.489 ←
2nd 2.337 ←
Manual 3rd 1.350 ←

Transmission Gear ratio 4th 1.000 ←
5th 0.784 ←
6th 0.679 ←
Reverse 4.253 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (III) *( ): Optional

Model Electronic, 7-speed Electronic, 6-speed
Operating type Floor change type ←
1st 4.377 3.600
2nd 2.859 2.090
3rd 1.921 1.488
Automatic
4th 1.368 1.000
Transmission
Gear ratio 5th 1.000 0.687
6th 0.820 0.580
_
7th 0.728
Reverse 1st 3.416 3.732
_
Reverse 2nd 2.231
Model Part-time Part-time (A/T only)
Type Planetary gear type ←
Transfer Case
High (4H) 1.000 : 1 ←
Gear ratio
Low (4L) 2.483 : 1 ←
Operating type Hydraulic type ←
Clutch (M/T)
Disc type Dry single diaphragm type ←
Type Rack and pinion ←
Power
Inner 39.61° ←
Steering Steering angle
Outer 33.65° ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (IV) *( ): Optional

Drive shaft type Ball joint type ←
Front Axle
Axle housing type Build-up type ←
Drive shaft type Semi-floating type ←
Rear Axle
Axle housing type Build-up type (IRS type) ←
Master cylinder type Tandem type ←
Booster type Vacuum assisted booster type ←
Brake Front wheels Disc type ←
Brake type
Rear wheels Disc type ←
Parking brake EPB ←
Front suspension Double - wishbone + coil spring ←
Suspension
Rear suspension 5-link + coil spring (Multi-link + Coil spring) ←
Refrigerant Type A R-1234yf / 520 ± 30g (R-1234yf / 800 ± 30g) -

Air Conditioner
(capacity) Type B R-134a / 550 ± 30g (R-134a / 850 ± 30g) ←
Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ←
Electrical Starter capacity (V-KW) 12 - 2.2 12 - 1.4
Alternator capacity (V-A) 14 - 140 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle identification
1. Engine Number 3. Chassis Number

The chassis number is stamped
on the frame behind the front
right tire.
G20GDi
Gasoline Engine: The engine

number is stamped on the lower
area of cylinder block in exhaust
manifold side.
4. Certification Label
Type A
2. Vin Label
Type B
D22DTR
Diesel Engine: The engine number is

stamped on the lower area of cylinder The certification label is located
block behind the Intake manifold. on the driver’s door sill.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (front side)
11
10
9
8
6
7
1 13
5
6
2 3
4 13
12
1. Headlamp (HBA, DRL, HID)..................................4-43, 7-34 8. Windshield wiper............................................................ 7-29

2. Cornering lamp............................................................... 4-47 9. FCM (Emergency braking and Lane departure
3. Front fog lamp................................................................. 7-33 warning).......................................................................... 3-77
4. Front towing hook........................................................... 6-32 10. AUTO light and Rain senor................................... 4-50, 4-60
5. Parking assist system (Front obstacle detection 11. Sunroof........................................................................... 4-36
system)........................................................................... 3-61 12. Outside door handle and switch..................................... 4-12
6. Around view monitoring system.....................................3-67 13. Approach (Welcome) lamp.................................... 4-11, 4-47
7. Engine hood................................................................... 4-33

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (rear side)
1
2
3
4
8 5
9 6 7
12
10
11
1. Antenna..........................................................................4-85 8. Rear lamp....................................................................... 7-33

2. High mounted stop lamp................................................. 7-33 9. Fuel filler.........................................................................4-34
3. Rear glass heater........................................................... 4-72 10. Wheel and tire (TPMS)............................................6-6, 7-42
4. Rear wiper...................................................................... 7-29 11. Rear parking assist system............................................ 3-61
5. License plate lamp.......................................................... 7-33 12. Rear towing hook............................................................ 6-32
6. Rear view camera...........................................................3-66
7. Tailgate switch................................................................ 4-19

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior I)
1 2 3 4 9
5 6 7 8
11
10
13
14
12
1. ESP OFF switch.............................................................3-45 8. Around view activation switch........................................3-67

2. HDC switch..................................................................... 3-47 9. Headlight leveling switch................................................ 4-52
3. LDWS Switch..................................................................3-87 10. Door lever....................................................................... 4-28
4. Tailgate interior switch.................................................... 4-19 11. Driver seat easy access................................................. 4-41
5. Front obstacle detection warning OFF switch................ 3-61 12. Opening/closing windows............................................... 4-30
6. AC inverter activation switch..........................................4-94 13. Outside rearview mirror control switch........................... 4-61
7. BSD system activation switch........................................ 3-71 14. Front seats........................................................................ 2-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior II)
2
3
4
11
5
7
6
10
1. Instrument cluster............................................................. 5-2 7. Foot brake (Emergency brake alert)..................... 3-42, 3-44
2. Light switch.....................................................................4-44 8. Cruise control switch......................................................3-55
3. Driver air bag.................................................................. 2-35 9. Instrument cluster User settings switch......................... 5-22
4. Steering wheel telescoping/tilt control lever..................4-86 10. Steering wheel multimedia switch..................................4-83
5. Interior fuse box.............................................................. 7-30 11. Steering wheel heater switch.........................................4-86
6. Opening/closing engine hood......................................... 4-33

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior III)
8 9
3
1
10
4 12
11 13
6
5
7
1. Wiper and washer switch...............................................4-58 8. Hazard warning lamp switch..........................................4-48

2. START/STOP switch........................................................ 3-9 9. Glass heater switch........................................................ 4-79
3. AVN, Smart audio...........................................................4-84 10. Heater and A/C controller......................................4-68, 4-76
4. Front seat heating/ventilation switch...............................2-12 11. EPB switch......................................................................3-49
5. Slots for multimedia........................................................4-85 12. 4WD selection switch..................................................... 3-38
6. Front power socket......................................................... 4-92 13. AUTO HOLD switch........................................................3-53
7. TGS lever........................................................................ 3-20

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior - luggage compartment and rear seats)
16
7
11
12 13
8
10
4
5
2 3
6
14 15
9
1. Luggage upper cover...................................................... 4-97 8. Rear cup holder and armrest.......................................... 4-91
2. Service kit....................................................................... 6-13 9. Rear 1st seats................................................................... 2-6
3. OVM tools......................................................................... 6-2 10. Child restraint system..................................................... 2-24
4. Rear power socket.......................................................... 4-92 11. Door lever....................................................................... 4-28
5. Luggage compartment...................................................4-89 12. Rear seat window switch................................................ 4-32
6. Luggage board...............................................................4-99 13. Rear 1st row seat heating switch.....................................2-13
7. Barrier net.......................................................................4-98 14. Rear USB charger.......................................................... 4-93
15. AC inverter......................................................................4-94
16. Rear 1st seatbelt............................................................. 2-20

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (engine compartment - diesel)
6
1
7
5 9
2
4 8
10
1. Checking coolant.............................................................7-18 6. Checking Brake fluid...................................................... 7-23

2. Air cleaner...................................................................... 7-20 7. Fuel filter................................................................ 6-29, 7-22
3. Checking and adding washer fluid................................. 7-24 8. Managing battery............................................................ 7-26
4. Checking engine oil.........................................................7-14 9. Fuse and relay................................................................ 7-30
5. Adding engine oil.............................................................7-14 10. Power steering oil........................................................... 7-25

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (engine compartment - gasoline)
6
1
8
5
2 7
4

2. Air cleaner...................................................................... 7-20 7. Managing battery............................................................ 7-26
3. Checking and adding washer fluid................................. 7-24 8. Fuse and relay................................................................ 7-30
4. Checking engine oil.........................................................7-14 9. Power steering oil........................................................... 7-25
5. Adding engine oil.............................................................7-14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (warning and indicator lights)
Engine oil Engine Water

Driver’s seat Engine hood Charge Air bag Door ajar SSPS warn-
pressure overheat separator
belt reminder open indicator warning light warning light warning light ing lamp
warning light warning light warning light
ESP ON
Brake ABS warning 4WD CHECK 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW ESP OFF Engine CHECK Low fuel level
indicator/
warning light light warning light indicator indicator indicator warning light warning light
warning light
Steering Immobilizer/
Global warning Smart key EPB warning AEBS OFF AEBS High beam
Glow indicator wheel heating Smart key
light check indicator lamp indicator warning light indicator
indicator warning light
Auto cruise High beam assist

Turn signal/hazard warning Illumination Front fog lamp Cruise control Winter mode HDC ON indica-
Ready system (HBAS)
lamp indicator ON indicator ON indicator indicator indicator tor/warning light
indicator indicator
AUTO HOLD Lane departure Over speed ESCL (Electrical Power mode
Rear fog lamp ECO
indicator/warn- indicator/warn- (120 km/h) Steering Column indicator
ON indicator (GSL only)
ing lamp ing lamp LDWS (GSL only) Lock warning light) (GSL only)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Important notice
Please read this manual and follow the instructions carefully. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are
Signal words such as “WARNING”, “CAUTION” and “NOTE” based on the latest product information available at the time of
have special meanings. publication.
Ssangyong reserves the right to change specifications or design
WARNING at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
Warning
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not This vehicle may not comply with the standards or regulations
avoided, could result in death or serious injury. of other countries. Before attempting to register this vehicle in
any other country, check all applicable regulations and make any
CAUTION necessary modifications.
This manual describes options and trim levels available at the
Caution time of printing, and therefore, some of the items covered may not
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not apply to your vehicle. If any doubt exists about any of the options
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
or trim levels, please do not hesitate to contact your Ssangyong
Distributor for information on the latest specifications.
This must absolutely be observed for safety precau- * : This asterisk in this manual signifies that an item of equipment
tions.
is not included in all vehicles (model variants, engine options,
models specific to one country, optional equipment, etc.).
NOTE We would like to point out that non Ssangyong Genuine parts
and accessories have not been examined and approved by
Note
Ssangyong, and in spite of continuous market product monitoring,
NOTE indicates information to assist maintenance and instruc- we cannot certify the suitability nor the safety of such products
tions.
whether they are installed or intended for fitment in our vehicles.
Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the use of
For product design changes non Ssangyong Genuine parts and accessories.
For a highest level of safety and quality, we are innovating our ve-
hicles through our continual research and development efforts. As
a result, the specifications are subject to change for the purpose of
improvement without any notice and you may find material in this
manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Protection of the environment
Cautions for environment
You can contribute to the protection of the environment by fol-
Ssangyong Motor Company is pursuing environmental friendly lowing the below rules.
policies and initiatives. This is the way we can save the natural
resources and humankind can live harmoniously with nature. Driving Conditions
You also can contribute to the protection of the environment while yy Drive off the vehicle slowly.
driving your Ssangyong vehicle. yy Avoid short trip.
The fuel consumption and engine speed, transmission, brake yy Keep the specified tire inflation pressure.
and wear of the tires are subject to the following factors: yy Unload the unnecessary goods from luggage compartment.
yy Driving conditions yy Always check the fuel economy.
yy Driving habits yy Have the maintenance service regularly.
yy V
isit Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center for maintenance service.
Driving Habits
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the
engine.
yy Keep the safe distance with vehicle ahead.
yy Avoid abrupt and frequent acceleration.
yy Avoid frequent accelerating (decelerating) or sudden accel-
erating (decelerating).
yy Shift the gear at proper time and do not overrun the engine
in each gear.
yy Turn off the engine when you stop the vehicle for a long time.
Recycling
yy Information about eco-friendly product development and
vehicle recycling can be found on the SYMC website www.
smotor.com/en

GETtheMANUALS.org
Certification
1. Tire pressure monitoring system
Hereby, SsangYong, declares that the in-vehicle mounted radio systems are in compliance
CE EU
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
Model: TSSSG4G5 and TSSRE4Db
FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4DB
ORD. No: 14778/DFRS19614/F-50
This device complies with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
FCC (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and AMERICA
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
LOGO
Certificate in the user manual due to product size

CU TR CIS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Model: TSSRE4Db
The device passed all the conformity assesment procedures to CU TR.
EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. FOB/FOLDING 3. jack label
FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
1
This device complies with Part 15 of the 2
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: 3 4
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and 1 Model name
FCC (2) this device must accept any interfer- AMERICA 2 Maximum allowable load
ence received, including interference 3 Representative company and address
that may cause undesired operation.
4 Production date
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly Caution
approved by the party responsible for CE EU
yy When using the jack, set your packing
compliance could void the user’s authority
brake.
to operate the equipment.
yy When using the jack, stop the engine.
LOGO yy Do not get under a vehicle that is supported
by a jack.
yy The designated locations under the frame
TR CIS yy When supporting the vehicle, the base
plate of jack must be vertical under the
Certificate in the user manual due to product lifting point.
size yy Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with
manual transmission or move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position on vehicles with
automatic transmission.
yy The jack should be used on firm level
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety Precautions 1
Checks before starting a journey....................... 1-2
0
Safety instructions.............................................1-8
1
Vehicle care.....................................................1-16
Precautions regarding unauthorized 2
modification & alteration..................................1-26
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Checks before starting a journey
Check The Vehicle Outside Inside Of Engine Compartment
OK OK
OK MAX
MIN MAX
OK OK MIN
Engine oil
Coolant
OK
OK OK
MAX
MIN MAX
MIN
Brake/clutch fluid
Washer
Reservoir Power steering fluid
yy Make sure to carry out the daily inspections before starting yy Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the engine
off your vehicle. compartment.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear. Clean the windshield and yy Check the washer fluid level and add if necessary.
rear glasses, side mirrors, and room mirror.
Caution
yy Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are properly closed.
If the level of various types of fluids goes down very fast, have the
yy Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger area vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
around the vehicle. Authorized Service Center.
yy Make sure that there is not any trace of leak around the vehicle.
yy Check the state of various lamps.
 For details, refer to chapter 7 “Service and maintenance”.
Note
Check the part that can be viewed with your own eyes, such as fluid
leaks on the battery or radiator.
1-2 Safety Precautions

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Tires
yy Using wheel and tire other than the specified sizes could
cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle
control, resulting in a serious accident.
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause
abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel
consumption, increase braking distance, vibration, improper
operation of ABS/ESP, or uneven tire wear. It may also dam-
age to the powertrain of the vehicle.
yy Use only the same tires from same tire manufacturer for all the
wheels. Otherwise, the powertrain may be damaged.
yy Check the conditions and pressure of the temporary (spare)
tire as needed and always keep it available. The temporary
tire should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as pos-
sible.
yy Check the conditions of the emergency puncture repair kit.
The air compressor and sealant canister should be available
at any time. Note
What is “Standing Wave”?
yy Check the tire inflation and wear everyday and replace if
During driving, the rotating tire repeats deformation and restoring
necessary.
movement in its tread portion. However, when a tire with insufficient
yy Be sure to keep the specified tire inflation pressure. inflation pressure rolls on the road with high speed, a wave-like
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the deformation occurs in the radial direction near and behind the tire
tread portion. This wavy deformation is called “standing wave”. If this
spare wheel, before any long journey. When driving the ve-
symptom lasts for an extended period of time, the tire could be blown
hicle with insufficient tire inflation pressure, the tire could be out in a short period of time.
blown out, because of standing wave symptom, resulting in
severe injury and death.
Safety Precautions 1-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
SITTING ON SEAT IN CORRECT POSITION
Note
The travel range of the driver seat and steering wheel may vary
depending on the vehicle model.
Sit on the seat in correct position before driving off for safety.
1. Sit upright in the center of the driver seat with the hip against
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
2. Adjust the driver seat position and height of the seat cushion
so that you can rest your foot on the clutch pedal (M/T) or
brake pedal (A/T) naturally.
3. Adjust the seatback angle and steering position with the back
is against the seatback so that you can put your hands on top
of the steering wheel comfortably.
4. Adjust the height of the head restraint so that the center of the
head restraint is aligned with the top of the ears.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Vehicle Inside
yy Do not put anything under driver’s seat.
Caution
yy Do not leave empty bottles or cans near or under the driver’s seat.
If it hinders the brake or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause
an unexpected accident.
yy Only use a floor mat with the correct size for your vehicle. And,
make sure not to move the mat while driving. If it hinders the brake
or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause an unexpected ac-
cident.
yy Do not wear the uncomfortable shoes such as high hills or slip-
pers when driving.
yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

comfortable driving.
yy Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
Caution
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, headrest, rear view mir-
rors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done
before driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Supervision cluster
Standard cluster
yy Check that all appropriate warning lights, indicators and yy Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator pedal,
gauges (fuel, vehicle speed, engine rpm) are operating when and brake pedal.
turning the ignition key to the “ON” position. yy Operate the EPB (Electric Parking Brake) switch and check if
an operating sound is heard and the parking brake is applied.
If the parking brake is not applied, have the vehicle checked
and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
rized Service Center.
Caution
Release the parking brake and check that the Brake warning light on
the instrument cluster is turned off.
Warning
When releasing the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal so
that the vehicle is completely stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants yy Keep the safety precautions for seat belt (refer to chapter 2).
have fastened theirs properly. yy Objects placed in the rear seat or luggage room must not
yy Do not drive with a twisted or tangled seat belt. exceed the height of the seat. It may fall down during the hard
yy Slide the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle until you braking and could result in an unexpected accident.
hear a “click”. yy Make sure that there are no person or obstacles in the dan-
gerous area around the vehicle.
Caution
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when releasing the parking
Do not recline the seatback with the seat belt fastened. You could brake.
slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or
death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety instructions
Air Bag Infant, Child, Old Person
yy The airbags must never be impacted by hand or with tools.
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt.
Make sure that you and your passengers always fasten the
seat belts properly even if the air bags are installed in the
vehicle.
yy Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. You
may be injured by those objects during deployment.
yy The air bag system should be inspected 10 years after instal-
lation regardless of its appearance and other conditions.
yy Repairs to the air bag system should be done only by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
ter.
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not attempt
to modify any air bag components including the steering
wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
yy Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The children
with the doors locked. They can move the vehicle unexpect-
sitting in the restraint could be seriously injured by the air
edly. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather.
bag in a collision.
yy To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac-
yy The deployed air bag unit should be removed from the vehicle
cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should
and replaced with a new one.
sit in the rear seat.
yy When the air bag is deployed, the relevant components will be
yy Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant woman
very hot, so do not touch them until they have cooled down.
sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. The degree of
yy A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in the rear shock of the airbag’s expansion can be fatal or inflict serious
seat. injuries to such passengers. An infant or small child should
yy The air bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet always be restrained in a proper infant or child restraint in
in an accident. Your pet should be restrained in the rear seat rear seat.
with pet harnesses or carriers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ANY CHILD MUST BE SEATED IN REAR No Alcohol, Drugs!
SEAT WITH PROPER RESTRAINT SYSTEM
yy Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con-

Warning
tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and
Always transport children in the rear seat and use appropriate child thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest every
restraints. Engage the child protection lock system of the rear doors, 2 hours.
so that children in rear seats cannot open the rear doors. Sudden
braking or a collision without proper child restraint can cause severe yy Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs is prohibited.
injury or death to children. It impairs judgment, making driving highly risky. Drunk driving
is also a legal offense.
yy Driving after taking medicine can be more dangerous than the
drunk driving depending on the medicine you took. Therefore
do not drive the car after taking medicine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Sleeping In Your Vehicle Do Not Drive with Tailgate Or
Doors Open
yy Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particu- yy Do not run the engine with the tailgate open to avoid exhaust
lar, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and gas entering into passenger compartment.
the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to yy If you drive your vehicle with the tailgate open, loose objects
death. inside the vehicle may cause an accident.
yy Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you yy Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the passenger at
at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts. risk of being thrown out, which can cause serious injury.
yy While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever yy Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate locked.
or accelerator and thereby cause an accident. Opening a door during driving, especially by children, may
yy While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may cause a serious accident.
accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the
engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do Not Stick Any Part Of Your Body Power Window
Out Of The Window Or Sunroof
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and sunroof yy When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s seat
while the car is running or while you are maneuvering to park. while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no body part of
You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other unseen the child is between the window and the window frame.
obstacles. yy When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear door
window lock switch to make the rear door switches inopera-
tive.
yy Make sure that all passengers have their body parts such as
hands inside the vehicle.
yy When closing the windows, be aware of safety conditions
before operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check For Any Passing Vehicle Stopping And Parking The Vehicle
When Getting Off yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
yy When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the parking
brake and chock the blocks under the wheels. And, place the
gear shift lever in “R” (when parked downhill) or “1” (when
parked uphill) for vehicles with the manual transmission or
place the gear shift lever in “P” for vehicles with the automatic
transmission.
yy If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
road.
yy If possible, do not park the vehicle in a humid area or en-
closed area.
yy Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil, or
other easily inflammable materials are kept. While driving or
after immediately driving, the muffler and exhaust pipe are
When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for passing hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might cause a
vehicles or pedestrians. fire.
Vehicles or motorcycles coming from the rear, if unchecked, yy When running the engine while stopping, keep enough
might stumble on you when you open the door. distance from the wall to avoid a fire and discoloration of
vehicle.
yy Apply the parking brake when you park the vehicle.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply
the parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warming Up The Engine Prohibition Of Sudden Accelerat-
yy Do not drive without warming up the engine. Driving imme- ing, Braking And Starting
diately after starting the engine may decrease the engine’s Do not accelerate, start and brake the vehicle suddenly. Other-
life expectancy. Warm up the engine before moving your wise, it may increase fuel consumption and cause risk of a car
vehicle. accident. Accelerate or decelerate softly.
yy Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the engine
just until the coolant temperature gauge begins to move.
Do Not Turn The Steering Wheel
yy Excessive engine warming increases the fuel consumption
and air pollution. An optimized warming up time is approx. 2 Abruptly
minutes.
Abrupt operation of steering wheel makes the vehicle unstable
yy Do not warm up in an airtight space. Exhaust fume may result and may cause an accident.
in toxicities.
 Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up period. Do Not Run The Engine In An En-
closed Area
Do Not Stop The Engine While Driv-
ing Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place with no air ven-
tilation, might result in death from carbon monoxide poisoning.
Do not stop the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the
steering wheel heavier, the brake performance lower and, con-
sequently, gets extremely dangerous.
Do not use a cellular phone or

watch DMB including DVD while
driving
Using your cellular phone or watching DMB (including DVD) while
driving will distract yourself and may cause an accident. If neces-
sary, pull over your vehicle safely to use your cellular phone.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Passing The Intersection Or Engine Brake
Railway Crossing When driving down a long slope, use the engine brake effect by
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the downshifting the transmission in steps according to the driving
vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can conditions while using the service brake. An excessive opera-
while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the tion of the service brake could result in a “Fade” or “Vapor Lock”
engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway effect.
crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe
place quickly. Fade?
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction
between the brake pads and discs, caused by heat build-up
Hazardous Materials through repeated or prolonged brake application.
Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the
Vapor Lock?
console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode
and cause a fire. When the brake is excessively applied on a downhill, some
bubbles can be formed in brake cylinder or in brake lines.
Because of these bubbles, hydraulic braking pressure cannot
Extinguisher be transferred to braking units of the vehicle despite the fully
depressed brake pedal.
For safety, we strongly recommend that you have an extinguisher
in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with
how to use it.
System Protection (Delayed Ac-
celeration)
Do not depress the brake pedal while driving with the accelera-
tor pedal depressed. Otherwise, the response from accelerator
pedal may be delayed. This symptom is the safety function to
protect the vehicle’s powertrain system. This symptom can be
eliminated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal once
with the brake pedal not depressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Being Careful With Accessories Using Ssangyong Dealer or
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to your Ssangyong Authorized Service
car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. Attached Center
accessories can work as a convex lens and cause a fire or cause
an accident. Have the vehicle serviced at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center. The customer warranty may be void
for any concerns with in your vehicle if the vehicle is serviced by
Being Careful While Checking a third party or another service center.
Coolant
To avoid being scalded, do not remove the engine coolant res-
ervoir cap when the engine is hot . Precautions on the dashboard
camera installation
Warning
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the en- The battery may be depleted if the vehicle remains unused
gine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system may for a long time with the permanent power supplied dashboard
spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious camera.
injuries.
Be sure to turn the dash camera off during a long period of
vehicle inactivity.
Cabin Ventilation
yy Volatile organic compounds, or VOCs, can be emitted from
the materials in the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time
in direct sunlight. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passen-
gers from being exposed to these harmful chemicals and keep
the comfortable indoor environment, open all windows of the
vehicle which is parked under the sun prior to entering.
yy Prolonged driving without proper ventilation can cause head-
aches and dizziness. Set the air source selection switch to
the fresh air intake mode for as long as possible or open the
windows periodically while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle care
BREAK-in Period Always Using Ssangyong Genuine
Parts
yy You can maintain the safety and performance of your car by
using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts.
yy You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers
and hologram.
There are no particular break-in rules for your new vehicle.

However, following a few simple precautions for the first 1000
km can add to good future performance, fuel economy and long
life of your vehicle.
yy Allow the engine to warm up after starting. Part numbers Hologram
yy Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt starts, sudden ac-
celeration and prolonged high speed driving.
Caution
yy Do not race the engine.
yy The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non-
yy Do not maintain a single speed for long period of time. Varying Ssangyong genuine parts.
engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine. yy You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its
yy Avoid overload when climbing. hologram.
yy Check the engine oil level more frequently until 5000 km of
driving and add the oil if necessary.
yy Do not tow a trailer during the first 1000 km of operation.
yy During the first 1000 km of towing a trailer, do not drive the
vehicle over 80 km/h or do not drive off the vehicle with full
acceleration. Otherwise, engine or its components could be
damaged due to overload.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cleaning Agents Vehicle Washing
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible after
or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of the driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road where the snow
vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or flammable, and removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) has been spreaded,
improper use may cause personal injury or damage. When in the area where the atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
cleaning the inside or outside of the vehicle, do not use volatile are exist, or on a muddy or dusty road. Also, immediately wash
cleaning solvents such as: acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel your vehicle when things such as tree sap or bird droppings get
reducers, nail polish removers; or cleaning materials such as on the painted surface.
laundry soaps, bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted in Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash
the fabric cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use carbon your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked under
tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning pur- direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently before
pose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any cleaning washing.
agents or other chemicals are used in the interior. Overexposure
to some vapors may result in a health problem which is more How To Wash:
likely to occur in small, unventilated spaces. To avoid possible
yy Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust
permanent discoloration of light colored seats, do not let materi-
and loose dirt.
als with non-fast colors come in contact with seat trim materials
until these materials are totally dry. This includes certain types yy Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or detergent
of casual clothing, such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the top and
and suedes; also, decorative paper, etc. work your way down.
yy Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal tar
or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while paying par-
ticular attention not to damage the painted surface.
yy Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to prevent
corrosion, touch them up immediately.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy You should allow enough space between a high-pressure Bumper Washing
water gun and your vehicle when washing the car with a high
pressure cleaner. When the water gun is too close to the yy Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
vehicle body, the high pressure of the water gun can cause yy If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any lubricants,
painted surface damage of the panels or malfunction of the wipe it off using mild soapy water.
sensors on the bumper.
Caution
Caution
Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as steel
yy Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper.
in an automatic car wash.
yy Wash your car by hand or using an automatic car washing ma-
chine. Avoid using a high pressure cleaner as much as possible
to maintain and manage the car performance. The high water
pressure can cause painted surface damage of the panels or mal-
function of the sensors on the bumper. In case where using a high
pressure cleaner is unavoidable, pay attention to the conditions
of your car by allowing enough space between a high-pressure
water gun and your vehicle.
yy If the engine compartment is cleaned with water (or high-pressure
car washing), the water may go into the electrical circuits or air
ducts located on the engine compartment, which causes the ve-
hicle not to maneuver properly.
yy After washing the vehicle, check whether the brake is affected
by water by testing the brake operation while driving the vehicle
at low speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Interior
Caution
yy Use only the mild detergent or cleaning agent with a small amount
of alcohol when cleaning the leather product (steering wheel, seats
etc.). Strong acid/alkali detergent or the cleaning agent with plenty
of alcohol may cause the discoloration and peeling of surface.
yy The Leather Seat Maintenance is necessary on Quarter basis with
dedicated Leather Milk or Cream in order to feed the Leather and
avoid any cracks on the seats and conserving the original look
and comfort of the seat.
Warning
To prevent from burning and electric shock, turn off the interior lights
before cleaning the vehicle interior.
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important that Seat Belt Care
you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Failing to do
this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, spot rings, or yy Keep belts clean and dry.
setting of stains or soils. All of which are more difficult to remove yy Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
in a second cleaning. yy Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics them.
should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean
damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be cleaned
with cleaners.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Glass Surfaces WARNINGS FOR WINDOW TINTING
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The use of
a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove yy All vehicles from our factory have tinted windshield and
normal tobacco smoke and dust films. rear window which meet the specified percentage of
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they may visible light transmission (VLT). Do not tint the windows
cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of of the vehicle delivered from the factory. Tinted window
the rear window, any electric demister element may be damaged. with certain percentage of VLT might be a legal require-
Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may ment.
have to be scraped off later. yy Make sure that no liquid solution for application of tint
film flows into the electronic components of the vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield to prevent error or malfunction.
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, yy Do not modify or apply additional sun films on the wind-
or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or another shield and rear window of the vehicle with heated window
material may be on the blade or windshield, clean the outside system. Sharp edge of a knife or work tool may damage
of the windshield with cleaning powder or an equivalent non the heated wire and cause electrical shocks.
abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form yy The tinted windshield and rear window with very low
when rinsing with water. VLT and enhanced solar control characteristics reduce
visibility significantly, especially at night or in the rain,
Caution causing unexpected safety problems.
yy Be careful not to damage the heated wire. yy Do not apply tinting film on the FCM detection area. This
yy Do not install the additional tinting film other than factory setting can cause malfunctions and abnormal operation of the
on the windshield and rear glass. Otherwise, it may affect the related systems.
operation of heated wire in the glasses.
yy The vehicle with the rain sensor and the auto light sensor on wind-
shield should be handled carefully. If the sensor installation area is
dirty or corrupted by agent, the sensor may not work properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Exterior Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their
Exterior Finish luster.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum trim.
gloss retention, and durability. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use automotive or
chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean the aluminum trim.
Washing your Vehicle A coating of wax is recommended for all bright metal parts.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean
by frequent washing. Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water. Wheel Covers
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. yy Do not use abrasive cleaners, polishes, solvents, wire brush-
Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent. es or cleaning brushes for cleaning, as they could damage
the finish.
All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the surface
and not allowed to dry on the finish. yy Use neutral detergents for cleaning the wheel, as acid or
alkaline detergents could damage the wheel cover.
Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal en-
vironmental conditions and to withstand the natural elements. yy Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road to prevent
However, unusual conditions, such as high pressure car washers, the wheel from being corroded.
may cause water to enter the inside of your vehicle.
Caution
Polishing and Waxing Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or
Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove alkalic detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be
damaged.
surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products are
supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Corrosion Protection Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should
Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built, be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may
special and protective finishes were used on most parts of your develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches
car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and reliable can be repaired with touch-up materials. Larger areas of finish
operation. Some parts which normally are not visible (such as damage can be corrected in your Distributor’s body and paint
certain parts located in the engine compartment and the un- shop.
derbody of the vehicle) are such that surface rust will not affect
their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protection is not needed or Underbody Maintenance
used on these parts.
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust con-
trol can accumulate on the underbody. If these materials are not
Sheet Metal Damage removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on underbody
If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or re- parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and the exhaust
placement, make sure the body repair shop applies proper system even though they have been provided with corrosion
anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced so that protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the
corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer to “Finish Damage” underbody with plain water. Take care to clean any area where
on the next page). mud and other debris can accumulate.
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened
Foreign Material Deposits before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong Distributor can
Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil and do this service for you.
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chim-
neys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle finishes
if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not completely
remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be needed.
When using chemical cleaners, be sure they are safe for use
on painted surfaces.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Ignition Key/Remote Control Key
yy When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are yy Never use any duplicated key not provided by Ssangyong. It
washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or a may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit.
Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in the
car wash bay. yy If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set
yy Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze, bat- to prevent from theft.
teries, and tires should be disposed by using the local authorized yy Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key and
waste disposal facilities, or have them disposed of by the vendor do not get it wet.
who is under a statutory obligation to do so when you replace
them. yy Only use the batteries with the same specifications to replace
yy None of these items should be placed in the household recycling the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity.
bins or poured into the sewage system.
yy Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
yy Help by doing your share.
yy When a strong multi-purpose, acid, or alkaline detergent is used to
CAUTIONS FOR VEHICLE KEY (SMART
clean up the surface of the painted body, side mirrors, windshield, KEY)
plastic moldings or leather, changes, fading of colors or rusting
can happen. yy Be careful not to lose any of your smart key. If you lose your
yy When the windshield is cleaned with an oil-contained or waxed keys, you have to replace the whole key set to prevent the
towel, strange sounds and vibrations may occur on the windshield vehicle from theft.
surface when the wipers are operating. Also, decreased visibility,
reflection at night, or poor removal of water on the windshield
yy Do not throw or drop a smart key. The key will be damaged
may happen. Do not clean the windshield with an oil-contained by the impact. Do not let the key fall into water.
or waxed towel. yy Use only the specified battery. Do not mistake the polarity.
yy An abrasive detergent may damage the painted surface of your
vehicle, including the bumper. Do not buff or polish your vehicle
with an abrasive detergent.
yy An acid or alkaline detergent may damage the painted surface of
the aluminum or alloyed wheels.
yy When chemical products are used to clean up the interior, the
chemical products may change some colors or distort the shape
of some interior parts.
yy When cleaning up interior parts, do not use chemical products
such as acetone, enamel or bleach.

GETtheMANUALS.org
System Safety Mode Fuel Recommendation
The protective measures including illumination of engine warn- Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. Fuel
ing lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned quality has a decisive influence on the power output, driveability
off in worst case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a and life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel play
malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates an important role in this connection. You should therefore use
the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s only high-quality fuels.
drive system.
Diesel Engine
DANGER
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher.
yy If the safety mode is activated, pull over and stop the vehicle to
a safe location immediately and contact your Ssangyong dealer. Gasoline Engine
Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center according to the dealer’s Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
instruction and have your vehicle checked by a mechanic. (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
yy If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not main- damage.
tained due to the fixed engine rpm and engine can stop. But even
more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage Caution
the drive system. For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer.
Caution
Engine and exhaust system will be damaged.
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel.
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Ssangyong.
It is not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not Use Methanol Water Separator Warning Light
Fuel containing methanol (wood alcohol) which is not qualified (Diesel)
EN228 and EN590 standards should not be used in your Rexton
(G4). This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and dam- When the water in the fuel filter exceeds
age components of the fuel system. a certain level, this warning light and
an alarming sound are activated. In ad-
Note dition, the driving force of the vehicle
decreases.
The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system and
any performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol Water separating interval: whenever changing the engine oil
or fuel containing methanol.
Warning
Operation in Foreign Countries yy If the water separator warning light comes on, have the system
checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
If you are going to drive your Rexton (G4) in another country, vice Center.
be sure to: yy The fuel system in the engine may suffer serious damage if you
yy Observe all regulations regarding registration and insur- keep driving while the warning light is on.
ance. yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel that has a high water content,
the warning light of the water separator comes on early. Never
yy Check that a suitable fuel is available.
use a low quality fuel.
Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers

For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommercial
fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses must be Engine Check Indicator
properly earthed.
The Engine check indicator on the instru-
Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmospheric ment cluster comes on when the fuel or
and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, particularly plastic, major electronic systems of the engine
are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump. are not working properly. As a result, the
It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally engine’s power output may decrease or the
earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be properly engine may stall. If this happens, please
earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations. visit the nearest Ssangyong dealer or
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions regarding unauthorized modification & alteration
Do not modify this vehicle.

If unauthorized notifications are made on the vehicle, In particular, modifying your vehicle by fitting LPG
the company is not liable for repairing the modified might bring serious damage to the vehicle’s perfor-
parts even during the term of warranty. Other part prob- mance and durability. Not only the engine but also the
lems caused by modification are also not covered. transmission and wheel alignment are excluded from
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of the warranty.
precision parts that have passed through countless experi- If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance the
ments and tests. These parts are deeply and systematically beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in braking
interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered might bring serious problems in performance, causing Vapor
without authorization, said parts may be damaged from the Lock and Fade phenomena.
decrease in performance or overloading, which can then
cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life.
Do not modify the car’s audio system and install other
additional electronic devices such as wireless com-
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear munication equipment, rear view camera, LCD TV, and
system, including the engine, just to upgrade the ve- remote starting device.
hicle’s performance and beauty.
This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic circuits
yy Unauthorized modification of the engine or parts for the and fuses for the installation of standard electric and elec-
exhaust is prohibited. tronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits using the
Changing without authorization the preset value in the fuel several existing devices and circuits at a time, electric and
supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric systems, and electronic devices can be damaged from overloading and
changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal and may may ignite. In addition, when you do drilling work in install-
cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durability. ing devices such as an antenna may expose the vehicle
to rusting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in
related parts. the market.
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater width Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are being
than prescribed can wear out the power delivery system or sold in the market may cause problems in parking and stop-
friction-damage related parts. In addition, other problems ping due to the extended length of vehicle, and increase in
such as increase of fuel consumption and braking distance, fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and rusting may
vehicle’s shudder, and decrease of steering power can all occur in the holes for equipping the guards. And because
degrade the vehicle’s performance. The speedometer and of the absence of shock absorber in the bumper guard,
odometer can also become inaccurate. The vehicle with even accidents during low-speed driving will be much
automatic transmission may have the shock in changing serious compared with the damage that unmodified cars
the speed. might sustain.
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition key seats at your discretion.
cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the original yy When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with lami-
state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged and may nated paper
ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rotation. To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
discretion. this may cause damage to the various electronic system
control units and wiring. This also may hinder the function
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust and
of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move forward
leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color glasses
and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix the
to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance may cause
location of seats may malfunction, which might lead to a
leakage and other many problems.
serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or backward
during an uphill climb or downhill descent.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy When exchanging the seats with new ones or equipping Do not install products that may decrease the driving
separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role and proofing products.
function although with the same vehicle type. Replacing the The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface of
seats with new ones may alter the wiring system or over-use the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach molding
the wires because a seat has various electric connections and other functional parts, the area near the holes will rust
and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, this may damage and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving. Espe-
the wiring and related equipment or cause fire due to the cially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may damage
overloading on the rated capacity. the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the
electronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally cop-
Such a situation may also cause ventilation problems, fire, ied CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such
or noise. discs can also cause malfunction of the audio head
unit and changer. In addition, such discs may also not
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant play properly.
device on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or modi-
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- fying it in ways including the cases mentioned previously,
celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver please keep in mind that the changed parts and related
prone to make a mistake while driving. problems with changed auto parts shall not be covered by
warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety Unit 2
Seat...................................................................2-2
0
Front seat..........................................................2-3
1
Rear 1st seat.....................................................2-6
Rear 2nd seat*..................................................2-9 2
Front seat heating*/ventilation switch*............ 2-12 3
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* (same
for both sides)..................................................2-13 4
Seat belt..........................................................2-16 5
How to fasten the three point seat belt............ 2-18
6
Front seat belt.................................................2-19
7
Rear 1st row seat belt.....................................2-20
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) in 8
rear 1st seat....................................................2-21
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in rear
1st seat............................................................2-22
Child restraints and pregnant woman.............. 2-24
Warnings for seat belt......................................2-33
Air bag.............................................................2-35
Airbag non-inflation conditions........................ 2-40
Warning and caution........................................2-43
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat
Configuration
Front Seat
1. Front seat
5 2. Sliding head restraint
3 4
3. Driver seat heating/ventilation
switch
4. Passenger seat heating/ventilation
switch
6 12 5. Driver seat easy access*
6. Seatback reclining adjustment
7. Seat cushion tilt adjustment
7 8 (driver seat)
9 1 1 8. Seat height adjustment
9. Seat slide adjustment
2 2
Rear Seat
10
6 13 10. Rear 1st row seat
9 8 11. Head restraint
11 11 11
12. Rear 1st row seat heating switch
13. Armrest (Cup holder)
16 16 14. Seat double folding lever (Strap)
15. Seatback folding (reclining) lever
(strap)
14 16. Rear 2nd row seat*
15
15 14
2-2 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat
Height Adjustment of Forward and Back- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Head Restraint ward Adjustment of OF HEAD RESTRAINT
Head Restraint
Sliding Head Restraint
1 1
To raise the head restraint, pull it up with- Removal

out pressing the release button. To lower 1. Recline the front seatback.
the head restraint, press the release but-
ton 1 on top of the seatback and push 2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
the head restraint down. The head restraint can be adjusted go and pull the head restraint up while
forward to three different positions by pressing the Release button ( 1 ).
Note pulling the headrest forward. To adjust
Adjust the height of the head restraint the head restraint backward, pull it fully Installation
so that the center of the head restraint is forward to the farthest position and 1. Recline the front seatback.
aligned with the eye level. release it. Adjust the head restraint so
2. Put the head restraint posts into the
that it properly supports the head and
holes on the seatback.
Caution neck.
Do not apply excessive force to the head
3. Push the head restraint downwards to
restraint during adjustment. It may be the desired position while pressing the
damaged. Release button ( 1 ).
4. Then return the seatback to the origi-
Warning nal position.
Removed or improperly adjusted head
restraints can result in serious head and Warning
neck injuries in case of a collision. Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the
vehicle is moving. Control of the vehicle
can be lost.
Safety Unit 2-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT*
Seat slide adjustment Seatback reclining adjustment Warning
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver/Passenger)
yy Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the
could be lost.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely
locked after adjusting.
yy Pay attention to the passenger in rear
seat when adjusting the seat.
yy Excessive operation of power seat
may cause a problem for other electric
devices. Stop operating the power seat
immediately after getting the desired
seat position.
yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment
buttons simultaneously. It may damage
the motor. Be sure to operate the elec-
Seat height adjustment Seat cushion tilt adjustment tric seat button one by one.
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver)
2-4 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Seat slide adjustment Seat height adjustment Seatback reclining adjustment
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver) (Driver/Passenger)
To move the seat forward or backward, To lower the seat cushion, push the lever To change the seatback angle, lean
pull and hold the seat slide lever up and down several times. forward slightly and raise the lever.
move the seat as desired. Then, release To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever Then, lean back to the desired angle and
the lever. up several times. release the lever. After adjusting, make
sure the lever is returned to its original
position and the seatback is locked.
Safety Unit 2-5

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st seat
Head restraint height adjustment
To raise the head restraint, hold the
head restraint and pull it upwards.
To lower the head restraint, push
Armrest the head restraint downwards to
(Cup holder) the desired position while pressing
the Release button ( 1 ).
Note
Adjust the height of the head restraint so that the center of the head restraint
is aligned with the eye level.
Warning
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result
in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Seatback reclining adjustment

Seat double folding lever lever
Reclining adjustment
A
A
B
B Folding
When the seatback is folded down fully, lift the rear end of the Pulling seatback reclining adjustment lever ( A ) or adjustment
seat while pulling the seat double folding lever ( A ) or seat double strap ( B ) releases the seatback lock. In this state, you can adjust
folding strap ( B ) to raise the folded seat. the seatback reclining or fold the seat.
2-6 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING AND TUMBLING REAR 1ST ROW SEAT
Warning
The seatback can be folded down fully.
Make sure that any body part of the
occupants is not caught by the folded
seatback.
B
Head
Webbing restraint
guide
1. To prevent the seat belt from being

damaged, insert the seat belt into the A
webbing guide.
2. Push down the head restraint fully.
Caution
3. Fold the seatback ( B ) by pulling the
Set the head restraint to the lowest posi- seatback reclining adjustment lever
tion and raise the seat backrest right in
( A ).
front of it upright.
If any interference occurs when folding or Caution
unfolding the seat, the intervention area
of the seat may be damaged. Make sure that the seatback is secured
by pressing down the top of the folded
seatback before tumbling the seat. If the
seatback is loose, it can interfere with
the front seat and damage to the seat
may occur.
Safety Unit 2-7

GETtheMANUALS.org
6. Unfold the seat in the reverse order
of folding. Make sure that the seat
is securely locked. If the seat is not
locked, the seat may be folded for-
ward.
D
Warning
Do not drive the vehicle or load any cargo while the

rear 1st row seat is in the vertical position.
C It may cause the rear 2nd row seat occupant to
suffer injury or cargo to be damaged.
Secure the rear 1st row seat in the correct posi-

tion when a occupant is seated on the rear 2nd
row seat.
4. Lift the rear end of the seat ( D ) while
pulling the seat folding lever ( C ) to When returning the rear 1st row seat to its original
position, be careful not to hit the feet and leg of the
raise the folded seat. passenger in the rear 2nd row seat.
5. Return the seat to its original condition
in the reverse of folding. Do not operate the rear 1st row seat while the rear
2nd row seat occupant is raising his/her feet on the
Warning seat backrest. The occupant may be injured due to
the rear 1st row seat.
yy Do not sit on the folded or double folded
seat. You cannot be protected by the
seat belt or proper restraint system
and could get seriously injured in an
accident.
yy Do not drive the vehicle or load any
cargo while the rear 1st row seat is in
the vertical position.
2-8 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 2nd seat*
Head Restraint Adjustment Seat Folding
To raise the head re- (Making a Luggage Compartment)
straint, pull it up without
pressing the release but- 1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
ton. To lower the head 2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, and fold the
restraint, press the re- seatback forward.
lease button ( 1 ) on top 3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the luggage
of seatback and push the compartment.
head restraint down.
Warning
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints
can result in serious head and neck injuries in
case of a collision.
Folding strap
Pull up the folding strap to fold down
the third row seat.
Safety Unit 2-9

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE BOARD
You can adjust the height of the folded seat and floor using the
Note
luggage board.
You can install the luggage board in 2-tier structure as shown in the
To adjust the height of the folded seat and floor, lift the luggage figure above and adjust the height of the floor evenly when folding
board up and insert it into the left and right grooves. the rear seats.
5 seat Caution
Put down the luggage board on the floor for using it, in the following
cases:
yy Transporting heavy cargo weighing more than 60 kg; it may
cause the luggage board to be damaged depending on driving
conditions.
yy Cargo which may slide to one side during travel; it may cause the
luggage board to be damaged.
One-tier installation Two-tier installation
The luggage board is divided into 2 parts and one-tier or two-tier

installation is possible depending on usage.
2-10 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
7 seat
Warning
yy When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the
luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while driv-
ing. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or
passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct
the field of the rearview.
yy Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety
devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
injury in case of accident.
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third row
seat” section)
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the second
row seat” section)
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the upper
portion of it.
4. Make a bed.
Safety Unit 2-11

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat heating*/ventilation switch*
A B A B
yy Press the ( B ) part of the seat heating and ventilation switch

with engine running to select one of 4 levels in the following
sequence: OFF → level 3 → level 2 → level 1 → OFF. The
indicator corresponding to the selected level is illuminated
in yellow.
Electric fan for ventilated yy Press the ( A ) part of the seat heating and ventilation switch
seat with engine running to select one of 4 levels in the following
When the seat ventilation switch
is operated, 4 ventilation fans run
in green.
to reduce the discomfort resulted
from the contact with the seat in Note
hot weather.
yy If the seat temperature exceeds the specified temperature range,
the seat heating will be turned off. If the seat temperature goes
below this range, the seat heating will resume function.
yy When you cycle the ignition key to the OFF position and back to
the ON position with the seat heating/ventilation activated, the
seat heating and ventilation will not work. In order to reactivate,
you have to turn the switch to the other positions.
Caution
yy The ventilated seat is not the cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it.
yy The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner.
yy Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you
to be frightened or injured.
yy The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation switch and current consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
2-12 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* (same for both sides)
Press the seat heating switch with
engine running to select one of 3 lev-
els in the following sequence: OFF
→ level 2 → level 1 → OFF. The indi-
cator corresponding to the selected
level is illuminated in yellow.
Note
Caution
yy Do not operate the seat heating for a long time when the passenger
is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with sensitive
skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or excessively fatigued
person. They might receive minor burns.
yy If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you
might get low temperature burns. Be careful.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion or seat cover.
yy If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have the
system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Warning Service Center.
If the ignition is turned off during operation of the rear seat heating yy In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated
of the rear 1st row seat, the seat heating will be turned off and will seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your
not resume operation at the next start up. Extended use of the seat safety.
heating can cause overheating or fire. Make sure that the heating is yy Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause damage
turned off when you leave the vehicle. to the seat heating.
Safety Unit 2-13

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result

yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made in serious head and neck injuries in case if a collision. Make
before any driving. sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted
before driving.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjust-
ing.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort Caution
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent bat-
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding tery discharge, operate your seats when the engine is
under the lap belt and getting injured are increased. running.
yy Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simulta-
position switch while the vehicle is in motion. neously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be electric seat button one by one.
placed on the seat. yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents
yy Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated lines. such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will
If the following types of persons sit on the heated seats, cause discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
they might receive minor burns. Extra caution is needed for yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if
them: children, elderly persons, ill persons, persons with the seat comes in contact with other object and cannot be
sensitive skin, excessively fatigued persons, persons under adjusted anymore.
the influence of alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
as cold medicine or sleeping pills. checked and fixed before any driving.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such
as a blanket, cushion or seat cover.
2-14 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries
can cause unexpected accident. and death, sit in the position so that the distance between
yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm, as long
seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette light- as you are comfortable with driving.
ers, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught between yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the
the seat and the center console. Wear protective gloves seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is
to prevent injury. potentially flammable when it is released from the container
yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. when the seat is moved.
yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can cause yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion re-
loss of control. duces the frictional force and could make you slide under
the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death.
yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
adjusting the seat position. yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the
seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fin-
yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
gers could get trapped between the seat and the frame.
around your hip and pelvic bones.
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You could
yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback move-
slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result
ment. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback
in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected
from being locked, causing severe injuries or death during
by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut
a collision.
into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by
yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position keeping your seatback upright while driving.
before driving.
yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, the seatback with your one hand and pull the release lever
you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protec- with the other hand. The more the seatback is reclined, the
tion the seat belt can provide. greater the restoring force of the seatback is. If you do not
hold the seatback while adjusting the seatback, you could
be injured by the restoring force.
Safety Unit 2-15

GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat belt
Configuration Seat Belt Pretensioner
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, yy The belt pretensioner is locks the seat belt by drawing back
it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and
all occupants inside of your vehicle. pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown
forwards in the event of a strong frontal impact. The seat belt
pretensioner combined with the seat belt and air bag further
increases safety.
yy The seat belt pretensioner is always triggered together with
the air bags of the front seats.
Warning
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the
deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an authorized dealer.
Driver seat belt warning lamp Operation of pretensioner Operation of load limiter
If the driver turns on the ignition switch without When a severe frontal impact After frontal collision, the load
fastening the seat belt, this warning lamp will occurs, seat belt pretension- limiters releases the seat
flash for about 6 sec. along with the warning ers rewind the seat belts belt to prevent the occupant
buzzer. If you fasten the seat belt, the warn- immediately to restrain the from being injured due to belt
ing buzzer will stop sounding but the warning occupants to their seats. force.
lamp will keep flashing for the remaining time
(total 6 sec.)
2-16 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fastening the seat belt Restraint of pregnant women
When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may
not work and can cause serious injury. In addition, air bags
can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if they
do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
Warning
yy Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not,
the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden
maneuvering of the vehicle.
yy Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing
out of the retract. yy Expectant mothers must position the lap portion of the
yy Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time. belt as low as possible below the rounding of the abdo-
yy Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury men to avoid the belt pushing the fetus when a collision
to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from or sudden braking occurs.
fatal collisions or injury. yy Driving while pregnant can be very dangerous, so avoid
yy Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems driving if possible.
could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts
should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong Dealer or yy Consult your doctor about seatbelt position during
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. pregnancy.
yy An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant yy The risk of injury in the event of an accident is increased
or child restraint. for both the pregnant woman and unborn child if the seat
belt is not worn.
Safety Unit 2-17

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the three point seat belt
1. Pull out the latch plate from the re- 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
tractor. If the seat belt is locked when body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
being pulled out, rewind it completely sible across the hips. Insert the latch greatly reduce the protection afforded
in the retractor, then pull it out to the plate into the buckle until it clicks. to the wearer.
desired length. 3. Adjust the seat belt height as need- 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
ed. red button on the buckle.
Caution
Sometimes you may have to apply strong Caution Warning
force for 2 to 3 sec. to pull the webbing out
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an Improperly worn seat belts could cause
of the retract.
upright position and wear the seat belt. serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across
Warning
the waist. In an accident, the belt may
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is apply pressure to your abdomen. This
not twisted. may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck.
2-18 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat belt
Seat Belt Height Adjustment
yy To adjust the height of the shoulder belt
anchorage, raise or lower the seat belt
holder while pressing the top of the seat
belt height adjuster ( A ).
yy Release it at the desired position.
A
Warning
yy Adjust the seat belt height before driving.
yy Shoulder belt should be positioned midway
over the shoulder, never across the neck.
Fastening the Seat Belt

yy Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks.
yy To unfasten the seat belt, press the but-
ton ( B ) on the buckle.
Safety Unit 2-19

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st row seat belt
Stowing the Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Rear Center Seat
Belt Release
If releasing the rear center seat belt is
necessary, follow the procedure below:
When you are not using the rear seat

belt, insert the buckle in the buckle stor-
B
age like shown in the picture.
Stowing Rear Seat Belt A
Insert the emergency key in the aux.

buckle hole ( A ) to press the lock device.
Webbing guide Aux. latch At this time, make sure that the seat belt
If you are not using the rear seat belt or aux. latch ( B ) retracts slowly.
trying to fold the rear seat, insert the seat
belt webbing into the webbing guide on Warning
the side wall. Aux. buckle yy If the latch retracts at high speed, oc-
cupant who is next to the latch can be
Caution injured.
To use the seat belt, remove the seat yy please ensure that the seat belt latch
belt from the guide before pulling out the is stowed properly and out of reach of
children.
webbing from the retractor. Pulling out Make sure that the rear center seat belt
the webbing from the retractor without aux. latch is inserted into the aux. buckle
removing it from the webbing guide can when not in use.
cause damage to the webbing guide or
the belt itself.
2-20 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) in rear 1st seat
1. Pull out the latch plate at the bight of the seat.
Warning
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it
across waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your
abdomen. This may cause serious internal injuries.
To lengthen, hold the metal latch plate

at a right angle to the belt and pull the
belt. To shorten, pull the free end of the
belt away from the latch plate, then pull
the belt clip to take up the slack.
2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the belt
as low as possible across your hips, not across your abdomen.
3. If the belt is too tight or slack on your hips,
readjust the belt.
4. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red button
on the buckle.
Safety Unit 2-21

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in rear 1st seat
1. Pull out the latch plate from the re- 2. Insert the latch plate into the left mini 3. Position the shoulder belt across the
tractor. If the seat belt is locked when buckle until it clicks. body and the lap belt as low as pos-
being pulled out, rewind it completely sible across the hips. Insert the latch
in the retractor, then pull it out to the plate into the buckle until it clicks.
desired length. 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
is securely locked. A slack belt will
greatly reduce the protection afforded
to the wearer.
5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
red button on the buckle.
Warning
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
Improperly worn seat belts could cause serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it across the waist. In an accident,
the belt may apply pressure to your abdomen. This may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck.
2-22 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR cENTER SEAT BELT (3-point type)*
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from upper re-
tractor (1).
2. Insert it into the black mini buckle (2) until it
clicks.
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and position the
seat belt across your shoulder, chest and hips.
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
Warning
yy Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the
order as described so that it functions properly.
yy To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the rear
glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
yy This seat belt is designed only for a passenger who
sits on the center seat in the rear seat.
yy Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch plate
is securely locked.
yy Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
yy Improper wearing of seat belts increases the chance
of injury or death in case of a collision.
yy Position the seat belt away from your neck and abdo-
men.
Caution
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in
use.
Safety Unit 2-23

GETtheMANUALS.org
Child restraints and pregnant woman
Pregnant Women Warning
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts through- yy Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant
out their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to or child restraint.
keep the baby safe. yy Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat with front
passenger air bag.
Warning yy A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure
yy Pregnant women should wear 3-point seat belt whenever possible a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
according to the professional recommendations by her doctor.
yy A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat
yy Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt across whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust
the thighs and as snugly and low as possible. the seat as far back as it will go.
yy When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Child Restraints yy When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate yy In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become
child restraint system should always be used. The child restraint a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an
system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are.
and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics indicate that
yy Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is mov-
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat rather
ing.
than in the front seat.
yy If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder
Securing Methods of Child Re- belt under an arm or behind their back.
yy Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person
straint System who is taller than 140 cm.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve-
hicle seats by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX seat - if
equipped).
2-24 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Infant and Child Safety
Child Seat
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be properly secured in a child restraint system.
WARNING
yy Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat with front passenger air bag, because of the danger that
an inflating passenger air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.
yy Use only the qualified child restraint systems. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child re-
straint systems.
yy Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot resist against the impact pressure in an accident. The child could
be crushed between you and the parts of vehicle.
yy Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed vehicle can cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface before
putting your child in the child restraint.
yy When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being
thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.
yy When installing a child restraint, do not let the seat belts come across the child’s neck.
Safety Unit 2-25

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE A TYPE B
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
Rear Rear 1st

Front
Mass group Restraint device figure 1st seat seat out Mounting method of vehicle
seat
center board
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X U U 3-point belt rear-facing
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X U U 3-point belt rear-facing
Forward facing child
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) X U U 3-point belt
seat
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X U U 3-point belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X U U 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
2-26 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Illustration of CRS secured by
the seatbelt.
Front-facing Child Seat
Warning
Do not use the car seat unless the followings are met.
The child seat may not perform as intended, which may result in a
serious injury.
Secure the child restraint with a seat belt as shown in the fig- yy Make sure that the buckle of the seat belt is securely engaged.
ure. yy Make sure that the seat belt is not loose or twisted.
yy Make sure that the base does not move due to excessive play in
Caution all directions.
When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions pro- yy You can’t adjust the angle of the backrest with the child seat in-
vided by the manufacturer. stalled. If you’re trying to do so, the seat belt will be slack, which
incurs danger. Always adjust the angle of the backrest before
installing the child seat.
Safety Unit 2-27

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear-facing Child Seat
Warning
Do not use the child seat unless the followings are met.
serious injury.
yy Check if the angle of the backrest is set to 4 stage.
Warning yy Make sure that the base does not move due to excessive play in
Never install a rear facing child restraint on the front seat without all directions.
ensuring that the front airbag is deactivated. Ssangyong Motor yy Make sure that the seat belt is routed through the rear-facing belt
Company recommends that a child restraint to be installed on the path and buckled up.
rear seat.
When installing a child restraint, adjust the seat back angle as

desired.
2-28 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
ISOFIX system is a standardised method of fitting child seats that
SECURING A CHILD RESTRAIN eliminates the need to use the stadard adult seatbelt to secure
SYSTEM WITH “ISOFIX” SYSTEM the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and
positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor installation.
3 ISOFIX child restrain

1 ISOFIX mark 2 Latch anchor
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
yy The ISOFIX lower latch anchors are located in the left and
Warning
right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations ( 1 ) are
shown in the illustration. yy When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system, all unused vehicle
rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in
yy Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted
latch anchors until it clicks. behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and
yy Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child re- taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts
straint.
which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to
yy There is no ISOFIX lower latch anchor provided for the center the child in the child restraint.
rear seating position. yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Safety Unit 2-29

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use the Rear Anchor
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 3rd row
seat. (7-seater) yy The rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 2nd row restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore,
do not secure the child restraint system only with the seatback
seat. (5-seater)
anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors
to break, causing serious injury or death.
1 yy If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a
child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child
3 could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow
the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
yy Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to
the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound.
yy Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unex-
pected personal injury.
2 yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
yy The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct rear anchor.
yy Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Re-
fer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
restraint.
yy Do not install the child restraint if it hinders the operations of
front seat.
yy All the procedures described here are to assist you in under-
standing the child restraint system. Use this as a reference
only. When you install a child restraint to your vehicle, observe
1. Remove the headrest from the second row seat. instructions for installation in the manual provided by the manu-
facturer.
2. Place the child restraint on the second row seat.
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the rear
anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the
webbing of the tether connector.
2-30 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability
for Various ISOFIX Positions
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Front 2nd seat row 2nd seat row
Passenger center out board
F ISO/L1 X X X
CARRYCOT
G ISO/L2 X X X
GROUP 0 UP TO 10KG E ISO/R1 X X IUF
E ISO/R1 X X IUF
GROUP 0+ UP TO 13KG D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X IL*
D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X IL*
GROUP I 9 TO 18KG B ISO/F2 X X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF
A ISO/F3 X X IUF
NOTE: Key of letters be inserted in the above table

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
Safety Unit 2-31

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning For Child Restraint
� Use only the officially approved child restraint.
Ssangyong is not responsible for the personal injury and
property damage due to the defect of child restraint.
� Use only the child restraint with proper type and size for
your baby.
� Use only the child restraint at proper location.
� Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as
below:
GROUP 0: 0 ~ 10KG
GROUP 0+: 0 ~ 13KG
GROUP I: 9 ~ 18KG
GROUP II: 15 ~ 25KG
GROUP III: 22 ~ 36KG
� Group 0 & 0+
Rear facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group I
Forward facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group II & III
Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened
Always follow the installation and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
2-32 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings for seat belt
WARNINGS FOR SEAT BELT
yy Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and across yy Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across your neck. work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious inju-
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put ries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt immediately
it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
to your abdomen. Center.
yy Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases the yy The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is switched
danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause serious injury on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat belt is securely
or even death. The belt may also tighten the chest which is fastened. If the light does not go off after fastening the seat
not as strong as the shoulders. This may also result in serious belt, it means that there is a malfunction in the system. Have
internal injuries. the seat belt system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the seat belt Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
is too loose, it may not protect your body from injury or death yy Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may result
in an accident. in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting devices which
yy Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts. Oth- restrict the seat belt operation.
erwise, occupants could be seriously injured in collisions or yy Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the damaged
sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there are regulations parts replaced. The belt that has been overstretched in an
regarding the use of the seat belts. Please observe local laws accident must be replaced with a new one. Ssangyong recom-
and regulations. mends replacing all component parts of the seat belt after a
yy Do not buckle up two or more persons with one seat belt. collision. No replacement is required after a minor collision if
a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
yy Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable objects
finds that no damage has occurred and everything is in proper
in pockets or on clothes.
working order. The seat belt components that were not used
yy An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child restraint
during a collision must also be inspected and replaced if they
system. Note that the three point seat belt is designed for a
show signs of damage or faulty operation.
person who is taller than 140 cm.
Safety Unit 2-33

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe impact yy Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the
even if the damage is not obvious. body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis
yy Never modify the seat belt. or the hips, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
yy Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should be taken lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be
to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oil and avoided.
chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Use mild soap and yy Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent
water for cleaning. The seat belt must be replaced if webbing with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
yy Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. afforded to the wearer.
yy Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright position yy Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned too high yy Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is
or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body from an dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the
injury or death in the event of a collision. occupant’s lap.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort yy No modifications or additions should be made by the user
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under from being adjusted to remove slack.
the lap belt and getting injured are increased. yy If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
yy If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt may the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your pelvis. This the belt out of the retractor.
may cause serious internal injury. yy Never unbuckle the seat belt while traveling. Careless driving
yy If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough contact of actions, such as fastening/releasing the seat belt repeatedly,
the belt to spread the impact pressure. may result in serious injury.
yy Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. yy Make sure that the seat belt does not go around any solid
yy When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with a doctor body or fragile objects.
for specific recommendations. yy Keep the buckle clean. Foreign materials caught inside
yy Keep the buckle clean. the buckle can prevent the seat belt latch plate from being
locked.
2-34 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air bag
Configuration Air bag crash sensor
Passenger air bag Curtain air bag
4
1
3
2 2
Front side 1. Air bag control module

air bag
Rear side 2. Front impact sensor (G-sensor type)
Driver air bag air bag 3. Side impact sensor (Pressure sensor type)
4. Side impact sensor (G-sensor type)
Air Bag Warning Label

Driver knee air bag
Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Switch

The front passenger air bag is disabled (not The air bag warning label is located on both sides of the pas-
inflatable) when placing the passenger air bag senger side sun visor reminding the occupant to understand the
ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position. This switch dangerousness of the air bag. Read and follow Instructions and
is located on the right side of the instrument safety information before driving.
panel, and you can see it when opening the front passenger
door. Press and turn this switch to operate.
Air Bag Inspection
“OFF” position: disabled (not inflatable)
“ON” position: enabled (inflatable) The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from its instal-
Safety Unit 2-35

GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bags are deployed in the event of a strong collision to
reduce the shock to the chest and face of the occupants. Wat is an air bag?
An air bag is a safety device which is deployed in the event
of a strong front (front air bag) or side collision (curtain air
Air Bag Warning Lamp bag) to reduce the risk of severe personal injury.
The air bag warning lamp comes on when Along with seat belts fastened, the air bags work to provide
the ignition switch is turned ON, and goes improved protection for the occupants. If an air bag is de-
off if the system is OK. ployed with the seat belt improperly fastened or unfastened,
the deployment of air bag can lead to serious injury. For
this reason, air bags are also called supplemental restraint
system.
SRS: Supplemental Restraint System
Warning
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Make
sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly,
even if air bags are installed in the vehicle.
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag may
not deploy.
yy The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously de-
ploy.
yy Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
yy The air bag warning label is located on the sun visor reminding the
occupant to understand the dangerousness of the air bag.
Warning
If this lamp stays on, it means that there is a fault in the air bag or seat
belt pretensioner system. Have the system checked immediately at a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
2-36 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver Air Bag Driver Knee Air Bag* Passenger Air Bag
The driver air bag is located in the Located on the dashboard under the The passenger air bag is located in the
center of the steering wheel. This air steering wheel, the driver's knee air bag front dash board. This air bag protects
bag protects the driver's head in a front can help protect the driver by inflating the front passenger's head in a front
collision. simultaneously with the front airbag in collision.
head-on collision.
Warning Warning
yy The driver should sit in the position so yy The rear seats are safer for children.
that your body is away from the steering yy Do not install the car seat on the front
wheel as far as possible while you are seat.
comfortable with driving. yy Seat as far as possible from the air
yy Do not put any object or attach stickers bag.
on the driver air bag cover (steering yy Use the seat belt and child restraint
wheel cover). system.
Safety Unit 2-37

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Seat Side Air Bag* Rear Seat Side Air Bag* Curtain Air Bag*
The front seat side air bag is mounted The rear seat side air bag is mounted The curtain air bag is mounted inside the
in the side of the driver seatback and in the side of the rear seatbacks. This area above the front/rear doors, which
passenger seatback. This air bag is de- air bag is deployed in a side collision meets the bottom of the roof on both
ployed in a side collision which meets the which meets the air bag deployment sides. This air bag is deployed in a side
air bag deployment conditions to protect conditions to protect the occupants in collision which meets the air bag deploy-
the occupants in the front seats. the rear seats. ment conditions to protect the occupants
in the front and rear seats.
Warning
yy The air bag operation may vary depend- Warning
ing on the impact level and collision yy Do not apply impact on the area where
angle. the collision detection sensors for
yy Do not use seat covers or hang clothes/ curtain air bag and side air bag are
accessories on the seats with side air installed. The air bag may be deployed
bag. accidently.
yy Do not slam the door as the curtain air
bag may be deployed unexpectedly.
yy The curtain air bags and side air bags
are deployed at the same time during a
side collision. Those air bags on each
side is activated independently of each
other.
2-38 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Air Bag Operation (Driver and Passenger Curtain Air Bag and Side Air Bag Operation
Side)
►►The air bag inflates when:
►►The air bag inflates when: yy A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
yy In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and front body’s side structure.
passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to supplement
►►The air bag can inflate when:
the seat belts to prevent or reduce any personal injuries.
yy Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side impact.
►►The air bag does not inflate when:
yy Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against the
curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the road yy Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
surface with a large angle speed.
yy Rear end collision
yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
yy Rollover, side impact or rear impact
yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant. ►►The air bag seldom inflates when:
yy Oblique impact (diagonal direction)
►►The air bag seldom inflates when:
yy Frontal impact or rear impact
yy Oblique impact, rollover
yy Rollover but without a severe impact
yy Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
the inflation requirements) yy The air bag warning lamp is on
yy Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a
tree
yy The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
yy The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point ve-
hicle such as a truck
yy Impact on the hood by falling stones
yy The air bag warning lamp is on
yy Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s
side structure. In that case, only the side air bags deploy.
Safety Unit 2-39

GETtheMANUALS.org
Airbag non-inflation conditions
Low Speed Collision Rear Collision Side Collision
In collisions, the seat belts are sufficient Air bags may not inflate in rear colli- Front air bags may not inflate in side
to protect the vehicle occupants and sions, because occupants are moved impact collision, because occupants
the air bags may not deploy. In some backward by the force of the impact. In move to the direction of the collision, and
cases, deploying air bags in low-speed this case, the air bags do not provide thus front air bag deployment does not
collisions can cause a secondary impact proper protection. provide proper protection.
to the occupants (light abrasions, cuts, However, side or curtain air bags(if
burns, etc.), or loss of vehicle control. equipped) may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
2-40 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Angled Collision Riding Rollover
In a slant impact or collision, the force At the moment of an accident, drivers Air bags may not inflate in rollover ac-
delivered will be relatively weaker than brake heavily with reflex. In such heavy cidents because air bag deployment
that of frontal collision. So, the air bags braking, the front portion of the vehicle would not provide proper protection to
may not inflate. is lowered by the force of the braking the occupants.
and the vehicle can go under a vehicle However, side air bags may inflate when
with a higher ground clearance. Air bags the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact
may not inflate in this situation because collision, if the vehicle is equipped with
impacts may not be delivered or may be side air bags and/or curtain air bags.
delivered with less intensity.
Safety Unit 2-41

GETtheMANUALS.org
Collision with Nar- Secondary Injury Due
row Object To Air Bag Deployment
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle If the air bag control module detects the
collides with objects such as utility poles impact during an accident, it transmits
or trees, where the point of impact is the signal to deploy the air bag. This sig-
concentrated to one area and the full nal triggers the explosion of the powder,
force of the impact is not delivered to which is included in the air bag module,
the sensors. and the air bag deploys in a very short
time to protect the occupants. When
the air bag inflates, there will be heavy
noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer
secondary injuries caused by inflated air
bag such as an abrasion, a bruise, a burn
or injury by broken glasses.
2-42 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning and caution
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Warning
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can
before any driving. cause unexpected accident.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjust- yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat
ing. when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins,
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and
on the seat. the center console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury.
yy Front seats are equipped with heated wires. If the following yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving.
types of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can cause
minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, loss of control.
elderly persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
excessively fatigued persons, persons under the influence of adjusting the seat position.
alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such as cold medicine yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
or sleeping pills. around your hip and pelvic bones.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback movement.
a blanket, cushion or seat cover. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback from being
yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result locked, causing severe injuries or death during a collision.
in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position
sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before before driving.
driving.
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, you
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protection
while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective the seat belt can provide.
when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If
yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and
the seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding
death, sit in the position so that the distance between the
under the lap belt and getting injured are increased.
steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm, as long as
yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in you are comfortable with driving.
serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Safety Unit 2-43

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Caution
yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery dis-
potentially flammable when it is released from the container charge, operate your seats only when the engine is running.
when the seat is moved. yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultane-
yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion reduces ously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric
the frictional force and could make you slide under the seat seat button one by one.
belt. This could result in serious injury or death. yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents
yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will
seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fingers cause discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
could get trapped between the seat and the frame. yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You could seat comes in contact with other object and cannot be ad-
slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in justed anymore.
severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your checked and fixed before any driving.
stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping
your seatback upright while driving.
yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold the
seatback with your one hand and pull the release lever with
the other hand. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater
the restoring force of the seatback is. If you do not hold the
seatback while adjusting the seatback, you could be injured
by the restoring force.
2-44 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving Off the Vehicle 3
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle..........3-2 Double parking...................................................3-51
0
Functions of ignition key......................................3-6 AUTO HOLD*.....................................................3-53
1
Battery replacement for rekes key.......................3-8 Cruise control switch..........................................3-55
Positions of engine start/stop button Parking assist system I (front/rear obstacle 2
(smart key)*..........................................................3-9 detection system)*.............................................3-61
3
Using emergency key (smart key)*....................3-14 Parking assist system II (rearview camera
system)*.............................................................3-66 4
Smart key battery low........................................3-15
Parking assist system III* (around view
Replacing smart key battery..............................3-16 5
monitoring system).............................................3-67
Shift lever in manual transmission.....................3-17
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and LCA 6
Gear selector lever in automatic (Lane Change Assist) systems*.........................3-71
transmission*......................................................3-20 7
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Braking)*.......3-77
Gear selector lever positions.............................3-21 8
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System)*.......3-87
Driving tips for automatic transmission..............3-28
TSR* (Traffic Signal Recognition)......................3-93
Safety mode (automatic transmission)..............3-30
Road safety........................................................3-31
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)..........3-34
Four wheel drive system*..................................3-38
Brake system.....................................................3-41
EPB (Electric Parking Brake).............................3-49
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle
ENGINE STARTING (REKES)
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. * Gasoline engine equipped vehicle
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to
gerous area around the vehicle. “START” position and hold it there without depressing the
accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a maximum of 10
Caution seconds), then release the key.
yy The engine in automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be * Diesel engine equipped vehicle
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N” posi- Insert the ignition key into the key cylinder and turn it to the
tion. The engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle can be “ON” position. As soon as the glow indicator ( ) goes out,
started only when the clutch pedal is fully depressed.
turn it to “START” position and hold it there without depress-
yy Do not turn the ignition key to the “START” position while the
ing the accelerator pedal until the engine starts (a maximum
engine is running. It could result in serious start motor damage.
of 10 seconds), then release the key.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle
CAUTION
Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position and depress
If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to “LOCK” position and
the brake pedal.
wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt to start the
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle engine.
Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position and fully
depress the brake pedal and the clutch pedal. 5. Warm up the engine properly according to the ambient tem-
perature.
Warning
Depress the brake pedal when the gear shift lever is at the “P” (A/T)
or “Neutral”(M/T) position. Never depress the accelerator pedal.
3-2 Starting the Engine and Driving Off the Vehicle

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE STARTING (SMART KEY*) Caution
1. Apply the parking brake. yy Do not press the engine start/stop button for a long time even
though the engine fails to start.
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- yy If you leave the engine start/stop button in the “ACC” or the “ON”
gerous area around the vehicle. position for a long time when the engine is not running, the battery
may be discharged.
Caution
yy The engine in automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be Warning
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
position. yy The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop button, only
when the smart key is in the vehicle. Never allow children or any
yy Do not press the engine start/stop button while the engine is run-
person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the engine start/
ning. It could result in serious start motor damage.
stop button or related parts.
yy If ESCL warning message appears on the display, immediately
3. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position and depress have the system checked by Ssangyong Authorized Service
the brake pedal. Center.
yy Continuous driving with this message may cause serious damage
to the steering system.
Warning
Depress the brake pedal when the gear selector lever is at the “P”
position. Never depress the accelerator pedal. Note
yy To make the engine start easy, start the engine as follows in very
cold weather.
4. Press the engine start/stop button and check that the indicator
1. Press the engine start/stop button twice without depressing
on the button comes on in green (Engine start/stop button ON the brake pedal.
position). 2. T he engine start/stop button becomes ON and the preglow
5. Press the engine start/stop button to start the engine with indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.
the engine start/stop button ON position (indicator ON). The 3. Wait until the indicator goes out, and depress the brake pedal
indicator on the button goes out when the engine is started. and press the engine start/stop button.
yy In the vehicle equipped with ESCL (Electrical Steering Column
Lock) system, you may hear an operating sound from motor
when starting and stopping the engine. This is normal operating
condition.
Starting the Engine and Driving Off the Vehicle 3-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING OFF STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- 1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
2. Release the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle * Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or “R” Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position.
position. Make sure that the position indicator of “D” or “R”
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin moving. 3. * REKES system equipped vehicle
Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and shift * SMART Key equipped vehicle
into the “1” or “R” position. Release the brake pedal and Press the engine start/stop button.
gradually depress the accelerator pedal while slowly releasing
4. Apply the parking brake.
the clutch to begin moving.
5. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder (REKES).
Note
Diesel engine learning mode: The learning mode of the fuel injector
is performed while the vehicle is driven or stationary to maintain the
optimized engine condition. Weak noise and vibration of the engine
may be accompanied by this mode. But, it is normal operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Starting the vehicle in the winter months or operating the A/C in yy If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud or sand, depressing
the summer months increases the engine rpm. Drivers must be the accelerator pedal harder only makes the tires slip more which
careful when driving at this time because the vehicle can move in turn causes damage to the transmission. If this happens, tow
faster than normal. the vehicle away or take other actions as appropriate.
yy Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle, including installa- yy Always contact the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
tion of an electronic device such as after-market remote starting Authorized Service Center for adding and changing transmission
system, could seriously affect its performance and safety and may fluid. A non-genuine fluid can cause various problems including
lead to a serious injury or death. malfunction and performance deterioration of the transmission,
yy Using a mobile telephone or two-way radio requires careful and those damages are not covered by the warranty.
considerations. The electronic control system of the vehicle is yy The application of tint film, especially metallic film, may interfere
subject to possible errors due to electronic interference caused with radio signals. Low visible light transmission (VLT) of the film
by improper use of these devices, and the electromagnetic waves can lead to malfunction in the headlamp. Also, make sure that no
can be harmful to the human body. liquid solution for application of tint film flows into the electronic
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, always turn off the engine components of the vehicle to prevent error or malfunction.
to prevent unexpected rolling away. yy The tinted glass with very low VLT and enhanced solar control
yy Always apply the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed characteristics reduces visibility through the glass significantly,
when the vehicle is stopped. especially at night or in the rain, thereby causing unforeseen
yy Do not store personal belongs and valuables inside the vehicle. safety problems.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always make sure all the yy The interior materials of the new vehicle within a year or use can
doors including the tailgate are closed and locked. emit volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Therefore, always open
yy Improper alignment of vibration dampers for the exhaust system all the windows for sufficient ventilation before entering. Those
(rubber hanger bracket) may result in serious vibration problems. chemicals can cause headaches and dizziness especially in
When reinstalling the exhaust system after undercoating, check the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time in direct sunlight.
the alignment of the dampers. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passengers from being ex-
posed to these harmful chemicals and keep the comfortable indoor
yy Always check the accelerator and brake pedals with your right foot
environment, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air
before starting the vehicle. Even an experienced driver can ac-
intake mode for as long as possible or open the windows periodi-
cidentally hit the wrong pedal if he/she drives different vehicles.
cally while driving.
yy Power unit of the vehicle operates independently of the braking
system of the vehicle, so just calmly depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle when it moves unintentionally due to the driver
error including pedal misapplication or a malfunction.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Functions of ignition key
ACC Position ON Position

yy The steering wheel is unlocked and yy The engine runs and all electrical
electrical accessories are operative. accessories can be used.
yy The ignition key cannot be removed. yy The steering wheel is unlocked.
START Position
LOCK Position Turn the ignition key to this posi-
yy The ignition key can only tion to start the engine. The engine
be inserted or removed. will crank until you release the key;
then it automatically returns to “ON”
yy The steering wheel can be
position.
locked.
From ACC to LOCK Position

Turn the key to LOCK position from ACC
position while pushing the key inward.
Unlocking the Steering Wheel Key Hole Illumination Key Reminder

To unlock the steering wheel, insert the The illumination lamp comes on when The buzzer will sound if the driver’s door is
key and gently turn it to the ACC or ON opening the door. This lamp goes out opened while the key is left in the ignition
position while slightly moving the steering about 10 seconds after closing the door. switch (ACC or LOCK position).
wheel right and left.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
yy To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently turn it to yy Never depress the accelerator pedal while starting.
the “ACC” position while slightly moving the steering wheel right yy Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. (The
and left. starter may be damaged.)
yy The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can only be yy To prevent any damage to the starter, put the ignition switch to the
started when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. “LOCK” position and wait for at least 10 seconds before restart-
yy Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key to the “ON” ing the engine.
position and wait until the glow indicator goes out. After then, turn yy Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or remove the ignition
the ignition key to the “START” position and hold it until the engine key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will
starts. But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” position for be locked and you may end up with serious injuries.
more than 10 seconds.
yy Never use any duplicated key not provided from Ssangyong.
yy The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can
be started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N” yy The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON” position. It may
position. cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. In addition,
the engine with the immobilizer system cannot be started with the
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the engine. duplicated key.
yy If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” posi- yy For a vehicle with automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
tion and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt with the gear selector lever in “P” position. Otherwise, the vehicle
to start the engine. can roll away unexpectedly causing a serious accident.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle yy Do not operate ignition switch or other switches while driving. You
speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up pe- will not be able to control the steering wheel or the vehicle and
riod. could be seriously or even fatally injured.
yy A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door with the yy Do not stack luggage or other cargo around the driver seat. Any
key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. such objects could interfere with your control of the vehicle and
yy Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position when engine can cause harm.
is not running. Otherwise, the battery could run down.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Battery replacement for rekes key
When the operational distance noticeably decreases or the Replacing Procedures:
remote control does not work occasionally, replace the battery 1. Remove the cover at the back side of the REKES key using
with a new one. a smallest flat-bladed screwdriver while taking care not to
The internal circuit of remote control key is vulnerable to static damage it.
electricity. If you are not familiar with replacing the battery, re- 2. Remove the rear cover and replace the battery.
place it at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
3. Use only specified battery (CR2032). Make sure that the bat-
tery is installed in correct direction.
4. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal.
Caution
yy Use only the specified battery. Otherwise, the remote control key
may not work properly.
yy Make sure that the battery is installed in correct direction.
yy Dispose the used battery in accordance with local regulations.
yy Both REKES key and smart key are not completely water-proof.
Repairing or replacing a damaged key due to water exposure (e.g.
Drink, moisture, etc.) will not covered by your warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Positions of engine start/stop button (smart key)*
Fully understand the functions in each position.
OFF Position ACC Position ON Position START Position

ON ON
RE RE
C
C
AD
AD
A
Y
Y
Indicator: OFF Indicator: Orange Indicator: Red Indicator: Green
yy The electric power is not yy Some electric accessories yy Almost electric accesso- yy Engine starting position
supplied to the electric are operative. ries are operative. To start the engine, depress
systems and the steering Press the engine start/stop Press the engine start/stop the brake pedal and press the
wheel is locked. button when the button is in button when the button is in engine start/stop button with
To turn off the engine, press the OFF position without de- the ACC position without de- the gear selector lever in P or
the engine start/stop button pressing the brake pedal. The pressing the brake pedal. Do N position.
with the engine start/stop but- steering wheel is unlocked not leave the button in the ON
ton ON and the gear selector and electrical accessories are position if the engine is not
lever in P position. operative. running to prevent the battery
from discharging.
Note
For double parking, refer to “DOUBLE PARK-
ING” in chapter 3.
Caution
Caution ON
RE
yy The ignition switch can be set to OFF (ve-
AD
yy Do not press the engine start/stop button while the engine is running.
Y
hicle power OFF) only when the gear se-
Otherwise, the engine start system could be damaged. After engine
lector lever is in the P position. (Door lock
start, the indicator on the engine start/stop button is turned OFF.
and theft deterrent arming not possible)
yy Make sure that the engine is turned off and the indicator on the
yy To set the ignition switch to OFF, shift the
engine start/stop button is off before leaving the vehicle.
gear selector lever in the P position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Starting Caution
yy The smart key may not work properly when you put it in the
To start the engine, depress blind spot such as under the pedals, on the floor or on the seat
the brake pedal and press the cushion.
RE
engine start/stop button with yy If the engine fails to start, refer to section “Emergency Engine
AD
Y
the gear selector lever in P or Starting” or have the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized
N position. Service Center.
yy Do not press and hold the ignition switch even if the engine is
not started.
yy If you put the ignition switch in ACC or ON position or activate
the audio system for an extended time period with the engine not
running, the battery may run down.
1. Carry the smart key inside the vehicle. yy The lower the temperature of the coolant, the longer the warm-up
2. Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants time will be. Under the high ambient temperature condition like
have fastened theirs properly. the summer season, the engine will start immediately without a
time delay.
3. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
4. Turn off all electric accessories. Note
5. Place the gear selector lever in P position. yy When the weather gets cold in the winter, pressing the engine
6. Depress the brake pedal fully. Check that the indicator on the start/stop button with the brake pedal depressed turns on the
button in green. And, press the engine start/stop button. The glow indicator on the instrument cluster, but the engine will not
start immediately. In this case, do not release the brake pedal until
indicator goes out after starting the engine.
the glow indicator goes out and the engine starts. (If the engine is
7. If you failed to start the engine, to prevent engine from dam- warmed up, the glow indicator may not come on.)
aging, put the ignition switch in “OFF” position and wait for yy To make the engine start easy, start the engine as follows in very
more than 10 seconds. cold weather.
8. Try to start the engine again (refer to step 6). 1. Press the engine start/stop button twice without depressing
the brake pedal.
9. When the engine is not running, do not put the ignition switch 2. T he engine start/stop button becomes ON and the preglow
in “ACC” or “ON” position for long time. In this case, do not indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.
use the audio system as well. This may cause the battery 3. Wait until the indicator goes out, and depress the brake pedal
discharge. and press the engine start/stop button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Turning Off the Engine
The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop button, only
1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

2. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Press the engine start/stop button to switch off the engine.
5. Make sure that the engine is turned off before leaving the
vehicle.
Note
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- Diesel engine learning mode:
gerous area around the vehicle. The diesel engine fuel injection injector learning mode is started
during driving or vehicle stop to achieve optimum performance of
2. Release the parking brake. the vehicle. It is normal for the vehicle engine to emit a slight noise
3. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or “R” and vibration during performing learning operation.
Engine self-cleaning operating sound:
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin moving.
When the engine stops after driving, the system automatically cleans
4. When you stop your vehicle on a uphill, securely depress the the valve through which the intake air and exhaust gases flow and
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle rolling down. performs position learning.
It is normal for the vehicle engine to emit operating sounds depending
on the engine condition and cleaning procedures.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Turning Off the Engine While Driving System Safety Mode
The protective measures including illumination of engine warn-
ing lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned
off in worst case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a
malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates
the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s
drive system.
DANGER
a safe location immediately and contact your Ssangyong dealer.
If you need to turn off the engine in an accident or emergency, Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Ssangyong Dealer
press and hold the ignition switch for 3 sec. or more or briefly or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center according to the dealer’s
press 3 times within 1.5 sec. The ignition switch will be set to instruction and have your vehicle checked by a mechanic.
ACC. yy If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not main-
Note more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage
the drive system.
If the vehicle keeps rolling even after you turn the ignition off during
driving, move the gear selector lever to the N position and press the
ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. The engine will
be started again.
Warning
If you are not in emergency situation, never press the engine start/
stop button while the vehicle is in motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking function, which could cause an
accident.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE WITH SMART KEY
yy The engine can be started only when the gear selector lever yy Make sure that the engine cannot be started when checking
is in “P” or “N” position. the engine compartment.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the en- yy Do not leave the button in the ON position if the engine is
gine. not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the yy If you are not in emergency situation, never press the en-
engine. gine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
yy If the engine fails to start, wait for more than 10 seconds. yy The smart key may not work properly when you put it in
And, try to start the engine again. the blind spot such as under the pedals, on the floor or on
the seat cushion.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at
idle speed. Especially in winter season, slowly drive your yy The engine may not be started when you place the smart
vehicle immediately after driving off. key near your smart phone or when you charge your smart
phone with the power outlet in the vehicle.
yy The warning message appears on the instrument cluster
and the buzzer sounds if you leave the vehicle with the yy When leaving the vehicle, turn the engine off and always
smart key when the engine start/stop button is in ON or take the smart key with you.
START position. yy If, for some reason, you happen to lose your smart key, you
will not be able to start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if neces-
yy The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop but-
sary, and contact Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
ton, only when the smart key is in the vehicle. Never allow
children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to yy Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid. It could
touch the engine start/stop button or related parts. be inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids. In this
case, it will not be covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Using emergency key (smart key)*
How to Remove Emer- Door LOCK/UNLOCK With Emergency Key
gency Key Follow the procedures to lock/unlock the doors by removing the driver door handle cover
in case of emergency.
Button for
emergency key
Emergency
key
1. Pull out the driver door handle cover 3. While pressing in the lever ( A ), push
yy Pull out the emergency key by press- in the direction of the arrow to access down the top side of the cover to
ing the button for emergency key. the emergency key cover release hole remove it.
lever ( A ).
yy To fold in the emergency key, press
and hold the button. 1 Lock
2
1
Caution 2 Unlock
Attempting to fold in the key without press-
ing the button can damage the emergency
key.
2. Insert the emergency key or flat 4. Insert the emergency key into the key
bladed screwdriver ( A ) into the emer- hole and turn it counterclockwise/
gency key cover release hole lever clockwise to lock/unlock the door.
and press in the lever ( A ).
Note
Caution If outside rearview mirror folding/unfolding
Be careful not to scratch the door panel or switch is not pressed, the theft deterrent
lose the removed handle cover. system will be disarmed and the side mir-
rors will be unfolded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart key battery low
Starting Engine With Smart Key Battery Dead
Opening/closing doors: If you cannot Door lock/unlock Engine start
lock/unlock the doors using a smart key
because of dead battery or wave inter-
2
ference, use the emergency key to lock/ 1
unlock the doors as shown below.
Engine Start: If you cannot start the en-
gine even with a smart key in the vehicle
1 Lock
because of dead battery or wave interfer-
ence, you can start the engine by using 2 Unlock
the smart key as shown below.
Insert the emergency key into the key Put the one end of the smart key against
Make sure to replace the battery or check
hole and turn it clockwise to unlock the the ignition switch and push it while
the smart key after locking or unlocking
door. depressing and holding the brake pedal
the doors by using these methods.
with the gear selector lever in P or N
Note position and. The warning buzzer will
If the vehicle theft deterrent system is stop if it was activated.
armed, warning buzzer will sound.
Note
If the door is opened after the engine start-
ing when the smart key battery is low, a
warning message "No smart key inside
vehicle" will be displayed. The message
will go off if you turn off the ignition and
then restart the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replacing smart key battery
If the operation range of your smart key is dramatically decreased or the smart key does not operate intermittently, replace the battery
of the smart key. The internal circuit of the smart key may be broken by the static electricity. Therefore, if you have any doubt about
your ability to replace the battery, visit SsangYong service center for servicing.
Type A Type B
Specification One battery (CR2032)
1. Remove the cover at the back side of the smart key using a
Caution
smallest flat-bladed screwdriver, taking care not to scratch
yy Use only the specified battery. The smart key may not work the cover.
properly because of improper contact when using a battery with
non-original dimensions. 2. Remove the rear cover and replace the battery.
yy Do not mistake the polarity. 3. Install a battery (one battery - CR2032) that meets the speci-
yy Used batteries should be disposed of in compliance with local fications with the correct polarity.
regulations. 4. Assemble in the reverse of removal.
yy The smart key is not water-proof. A damaged key due to water
exposure (e.g. beverages, moisture, etc.) will not covered by your
warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Shift lever in manual transmission
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change
gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. R 1 3 5
After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
3rd Gear 5th Gear

For low- or mid-speed driving. Position for high speed driving on
When upshifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear, a highway. When downshif ting
particular caution should be taken not to inad- from 5th gear to 4th gear, particular 2 4 6
vertently press the gear shift lever sideways in caution should be taken not to inad-
such a manner that 5th gear is engaged. vertently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that 2nd
1st Gear
gear is engaged.
Position for driving off and high traction force.
Depress the clutch pedal to its travel end and
move the shift lever to “1”. Then, slowly release
6th Gear
the clutch pedal while gently depressing the
Position for very high speed driv-
accelerator pedal to drive off.
ing on a highway.
Reverse Gear
4th Gear
Position for reverse driving.
Position for normal and high
speed driving
2nd Gear
Position for low speed driving
Neutral Position
Position for engine start, Note
vehicle stop, and parking Your vehicle is equipped with the gear shift point indicator,
which can be shown on LCD display. Refer to Chapter 5.
Instrument cluster for details.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Downshifting DRIVING TIPS FOR NORMAL STARTING
When you need to slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up OFF OR STARTING OFF ON UPHILL
steep hills, downshift the gear to release the load to the engine. 1. Depress the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, start the en-
Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better ac- gine and move the shift lever to the 1st gear (reverse gear
celeration when you need to increase the vehicle speed again. in reversing) position.
When the vehicle is driving down steep hills, downshifting pro-
vides a safe speed and prolongs the life span of brake system. 2. If the clutch pedal is released slightly with the brake pedal
depressed, the engine rpm increases. (The increase in engine
rpm varies depending on the road inclination).
Gear Position When Parking
Always apply the parking brake fully and shut the engine off after
parking. Shift the transmission into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level ground or uphill grade, and shift into “R” on a
downhill grade.
Using the Clutch Release the clutch pedal slightly Increase in engine rpm
The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way to its travel 3. The vehicle starts to move smoothly if you depress the ac-
end before shifting. The clutch pedal should be fully released celerator pedal while releasing the brake pedal after checking
while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while that the engine rpm is raising.
driving. This can cause unnecessary wear in clutch system. Do 4. Release the clutch pedal completely after the vehicle starts
not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly. off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Caution
yy The vehicles equipped with ESP system has HSA (Hill Start As- yy To start the engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle, you
sist) function, which keeps the brake pressure for a certain period must fully depress the clutch pedal.
of time to prevent the vehicle from slipping on a steep uphill when yy You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal
starting the engine so that you can move your vehicle more safely. before you shift into the reverse position.
HSA system is automatically deactivated after operating for ap- yy If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disc will
prox. 3 seconds, or the vehicle starts moving with accelerator be easily worn out. Use only as needed.
pedal depressed.
yy Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
yy HSA function does not work when you start the vehicle parked on
yy When shifting from a higher gear into a lower gear, ensure that the
an uphill in reverse gear, or when you start the vehicle parked on
RPM gauge pointer does not go into the red zone on the gauge.
downhill in drive gear.
Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear, moving the
gear shift lever to the left too much may result in shifting into the
Caution 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden increase of the engine speed
and may damage the engine and the transmission.
Because the HSA operation on the brake is automatically cancelled
after approx. 3 seconds, you have to release the brake pedal inten- yy When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a
tionally and depress the accelerator pedal so the vehicle does not cold day, you may have some difficulty for shifting gears. This is
slip down the hill. a normal phenomenon.
yy When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear,
put the gear shift lever into the neural position and release the
clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the
intended gear.
EPB OPERATION WHEN DRIVING UPHILL yy While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift
lever except to shift gears. Otherwise, the gear may be disengaged
When driving on a steep uphill, it is safer to use EPB as follows:
from the transmission and the internal transmission components
Apply EPB and then follow the steps (Vehicle with M/T: steps may be damaged.
1 - 3) EPB will automatically release when the accelerator pedal yy Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. Also,
is pressed while the driver’s door, hood and trunk are closed and while the engine is rotating fast, do not shift into a lower gear.
the seat belt is fastened. yy When using the half clutch mode, there is no need to abruptly de-
press the accelerator pedal because the engine power increases.
When the accelerator pedal is continuously depressed in half
clutch mode, the internal components can be worn or damaged.
Frequent use of half clutch mode is not recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gear selector lever in automatic transmission*
Gear Position Tip Switch in “M” Position

yy P : Parking (Manual Gear Shift)
The gear can be shifted by moving this
yy R : Reverse switch to forward and rearward when
yy N : Neutral the gear selector lever is in “M” position.
yy D : Driving
Mode Switch
Type A
yy W : Winter mode
yy S : Standard mode
Use the standard mode in normal
driving conditions.
Type B Shift Lock Release Button when

yy E : Eco mode locked in the “P” position
yy P : Power mode If you cannot move the selector lever from the “P”
yy W : Winter mode or “N” position, try to move the lever while pushing
Use the Eco mode in normal driving down here with a sharp object such as a ballpoint
conditions. pen. For your safety, turn off the engine and de-
press the brake pedal before the attempt.
Selection of Manual / To shift into any other positions from the “P”
Automatic Shift Function position after stopping the vehicle, you have
to depress the brake pedal with the ignition
yy D : Automatic shift according to the driving condition
switch “ON”
yy M : Manual shift

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gear selector lever positions
P: Park Position
Warning
yy Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmis-
sion will be damaged. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
into “P”.
yy To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch
must be turned to the “ON” position and the brake pedal should
be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever
from “P” without these two procedures may damage the selector
P
lever and transmission.
yy Do not use the “P” position in place of the parking brake. Always
make sure the shift lever is in “P” position and apply the parking
brake fully.
Use this position to park your vehicle, start the engine, warm up
the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.
To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY RELEASE FROM P POSITION R: Reverse position
R
Emergency key
To shift from the “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to ON and Use this position to reverse the vehicle.
the brake pedal must be depressed. If you cannot shift out of “P” To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the vehicle
with the ignition switch in ON, and the brake pedal depressed: and depress the brake pedal. When the selector lever is in “R”,
1. Turn the ignition off and apply the parking brake. the parking aid system will be activated (If equipped).
2. Push down the shift lock release button. Then, shift the lever
to the “N” position. Warning
yy Never shift into “R” when the vehicle is moving.
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake and shift the lever
yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the
to the “D” position to drive off.
selector lever is at “R”.
Warning
If the selector lever is locked in the “P” position, release it by follow-
ing the above instructions and have your vehicle serviced by the near-
est Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
N: Neutral position
Warning
yy Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may
not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
vehicle and is not a fault.
yy Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when the
vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
yy If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral posi-
N
tion, depress the brake pedal firmly.
yy Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
vehicle is in motion.
yy Never leave a child or pet alone in the vehicle when stopping
and parking the vehicle with the ignition ON and the shift lever in
neutral “N” position. Move the shift lever to the park “P” position
or turn the ignition off in order to prevent the safety accident due
to an unintentional operation.
No power is transferred in this position.
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels
and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety,
apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stopping
the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch “ON”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
D: Drive position
Warning
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
shifting into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially,
when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle,
wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake
pedal depressed.
yy Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down on an
uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the
D
brake pedal.
Caution
yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level
ground when the selector lever is in “D”.
yy Shifting to “D” position must be carried out with the vehicle com-
pletely stopped. Otherwise, the transmission can be damaged.
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission yy Shifting from “N” to “D” position when the ignition is turned ON
is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gears accord- without the brake pedal depressed is possible. But move the gear
ing to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal and the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed as much as possible
vehicle speed. for your own safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
M: MANUAL SHIFT
Manual Gear Selection
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch after
moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position.
M
If the gear selector lever is in this position, you can shift gear Selecting “M”:
manually using the tip switch on the lever and the tip switches Manual gear shift
on both sides of the steering wheel.
Caution
Upshifting should be done properly according to the road conditions, Note
taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. yy To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases,
the current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the
gear selector lever is moved to “M” position.
yy If you move the gear selector lever into M position (manual mode)
while the vehicle is stopping, you can shift to the lower gear and
the 2nd gear start is possible on snowy or rainy road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tip Switch on Gear Selector Lever Use of Engine Brake
To use the engine brake, shift the selector lever to the “M” position
first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable gear.
Caution
yy Operate the tip switch only once at a time. If you press and hold the
Shift up
switch, the gear may be shifted through several steps in series.
yy Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on roads
covered with snow or ice.
yy According to the driving conditions, the unexpected gear could
Shift down be selected during engine braking. In this case, you may feel the
shifting shock. Therefore, carefully use the engine brake effect.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRU- Manual Gear Shift Position
MENT CLUSTER Supervision cluster
yy 1st gear position

1 Use on a rugged road, mountain path and steep
hill. Engine braking effect on steep hill is avail-
able.
yy 2nd gear position
2 Use on a long and gentle slope. Engine braking
effect is available.
Standard cluster
yy 3rd gear position

yy 4th gear position

4
Warning
Use on a long and gentle slope. yy Do not downshift abruptly (3rd, 2nd or 1st) when the vehicle is
driven at high speed (D or 4th), or vehicle may be severely dam-
aged. Also, the vehicle may slip, resulting in an accident (especially
yy 5th gear position on a slippery road).
5 yy If low-range maximum speeds are exceeded when the selector

lever is in low gears, the transmission could be damaged.
yy 6th gear position Caution
6 yy If you press and hold the tip switch, the gear may be shifted
through several steps in series.
yy Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
yy 7th gear position (7A/T only)
7 yy If you apply excessive force to the tip switch, the gear may not
be shifted into other gears to protect the vehicle system. Soft and
smooth operation is recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving tips for automatic transmission
Starting and Driving Off Warning
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” and yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid starting the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
the engine from “N” even though you can do so. yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear se-
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal operat- lector lever.
yy If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely.
ing range (below 1000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal depressed
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator pedal depressed,
and shift into “D” or “R”. your vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and move yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a while several a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
seconds before driving off with the brake pedal depressed. the engine speed becomes stable.
yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
accelerator pedal gradually. yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addi-
Caution tion, your vehicle may lose its stability and be at a high risk.
yy For safe driving, there are P Lock (P => R) and R Lock (N => R) yy A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly
functions, in which the gear shift lever only works with the brake from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm
pedal depressed. becomes stable.
yy When you shift the gear suddenly from D to P, there might be inter- yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
mittent trapping in N gear, which is normal to protect the transmis- shifting into “D”. Otherwise, the transmission will be damaged.
Especially, when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking
sion, therefore avoid an abrupt gear shift for your safety.
the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on
with the brake pedal depressed.
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after
shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Es-
pecially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the
“D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed.
yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If
you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage-
ment can damage the drive train.
yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with the
selector lever in “P”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake
Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle
can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other is in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased
than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control engine speed creates an extra braking force. On a downhill,
your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without
excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the
Caution higher braking force.
yy On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the oppo-
site direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect.
When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. Caution
yy Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or
Kickdown Function the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator yy Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear
selector lever is in the “N” position.
pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically
yy Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires
engaged. This is called the Kickdown function.
may slip.
Caution
yy Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or
sharply curved roads.
yy If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and
fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety mode (automatic transmission)
Symptoms Resetting the safety mode when

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, the
the gear is fixed
transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain minimum
How to reset the safety mode
driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from being
damaged. 1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can oc- 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
cur are as follows: 3. Start the engine.
yy Heavy shock when moving the selector lever
Symptoms after resetting the safety mode
yy Decreased driving force while driving at high speed
yy If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the problems
yy Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate
are corrected.
the vehicle)
yy If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position
Caution
or the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked
by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
yy If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de-
Center.
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset
the safety mode.
yy If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the certain for-
ward gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have the
system checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
yy If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Road safety
Driving On A Snowy Or Icy Road Driving On A Sandy Or Muddy Road
yy Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. yy Keep your speed steady as low as possible.
yy Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a yy While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too quickly
longer following distance. because you might get stuck in sand or mud.
yy If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide and yy If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a piece
you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. When of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the accelerator
braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes only after pedal and gently shift back and forth between the reverse and
you have slowed down considerably. forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle out.
yy When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine brake
and drive slowly. Caution
When your vehicle is stuck in sand or mud and you step on the accel-
Caution erator pedal excessively in order to get out of there, the tire slip may oc-
cur which results in the damage of the transmission and corresponding
When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer
drive system. In that case, get another vehicle to tow you if possible.
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On Unpaved And Mountain Going Through Water
Roads yy If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might cause
yy Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain from un-
suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn in the derwater driving.
middle of the road. yy If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow spot
yy It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or with where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in water and
much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady. proceed slowly at a steady speed.
yy There is a danger of driving off the mountain road, so stay yy Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and check
alert. the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if the bottom
is sandy or covered with big rocks.
yy When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down slowly
by applying the engine brake. yy If several vehicles are going through water together, the first
vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful and cross
in a different place if possible.
Warning
In high mountain area ►►Important things to remember when going through
The operation stability of diesel engine is not guaranteed in high water
mountainous area over 2,500 meters. The short trip such as passing
through tunnel in this area is acceptable. However, do not keep driv-
yy If the engine stops while you are going through water, do not
ing there for a long time. If you drive your vehicle in very high altitude try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
for long time, the engine could be damaged. The engine power, yy Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the
climbing ability and emission are subject to the altitude. engine through the air cleaner.
yy Never change gears while going through water.
Warning
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the brakes
decreases. After going through water, move slowly and gently ap-
plying the brakes several times so that frictional heat dries the brake
pads and discs. Check if the brakes work properly before continuing
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Checking your vehicle after going through water Freeway Driving
yy Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transmission, axle
hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and underbody; if you yy Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast,
discover problems, get your vehicle checked immediately. prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system,
cooling system, and tires.
yy Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary, re-
place damaged components and get your vehicle checked. yy Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding.
yy Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if you yy Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steering
discover problems, get your vehicle checked immediately. movements.
yy If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it. yy When it rains or snows and the weather conditions are ad-
verse, double the distance between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed by half.
Driving On Hill Roads
Caution
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road condi-
Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
tions.
environmental pollution.
yy Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible.
Warning
yy Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff.
yy If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road, the yy Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes steady speed.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed. yy When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
yy If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they yy Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident
yy Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodically
might occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake
checking it and perform maintenance.
together with your brakes.
Caution
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
and then downshift the gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)
Caring For Your Vehicle Under 0°C Engine Oil
(32°F) When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-season
engine oil.
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently hap-
pen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergencies should Tires
occur. Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered road.
Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing day, Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driving on such
have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and old clothes a road.
in your vehicle.
Caution
Coolant
yy When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower speed
Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. than normal.
The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and yy Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may damage
antifreeze. the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the engine
and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously be damaged
when the water freezes as it gets below the freezing point.
Air Conditioner
When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended period
Caution of time, internal moving components may become seized because
the lubricating system has not worked for a prolonged amount of
yy When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a
four-season coolant. time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak or rusting may happen
yy Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a 50:50 to the system. Malfunction of the air conditioner may result.
mixture of water and antifreeze. To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recommended
yy Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant. that the air conditioner be turned on for approximately 5 to 10
minutes every week throughout all seasons.
Washer Fluid
Caution
Use a genuine washer fluid that does not freeze on a cold day.
Do not remove the refrigerant in winter, even though you do not use
When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid may the air conditioner.
form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and hinder your
safe driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving in Parking in Winter
Winter When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may form
on the brake system and cause some difficulty moving the ve-
Starting the Engine in Winter hicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the parking brake. Put
During winter, the engine experiences increased resistance the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position (Manual Transmission)
from the powertrain. Therefore, start the engine in an appropri- or into the “P” position (Automatic Transmission). Put a chock
ate way. under a tire and release the parking brake.
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before driving
the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its life expec- Warning
tancy and help you drive safely. When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle. Wait
Caution until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
yy The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts.
yy Change the engine oil and fuel filter according to the specified ser-
vice intervals. Contaminated engine oil will decrease its viscosity
and clog the fuel filter and oil filter, causing a difficulty of engine
start at low temperature.
yy Do not add any additives other than the genuine fuel for better
startability at owner’s disposal. The additive may decrease the
lubricating ability of the internal fuel system; the additive may
have a different flashing point. This will damage the fuel system
or produce an excessive exhaust fume.
Driving in Winter
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When stopping,
shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake.
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or drastic
maneuvering of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Other Maintenance Diesel Fuel in Winter
After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash the On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in diesel
bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any rust. fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This separation makes
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system may starting the engine difficult. During the winter season, Kerosene
begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease your vehicle’s is added to diesel in some markets to prevent the paraffin sepa-
braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low speed and use the ration and secure stable flow of the fuel through the fuel filter.
brake frequently to remove the ice. After regaining the braking The amount of added Kerosene into diesel can vary by location
ability, drive your vehicle at a normal speed. and their average winter temperatures. Therefore, to ensure an
easy start on a cold day, park your vehicle inside of a garage.
Warning If possible, fill up the fuel tank after each driving to prevent ice
from forming inside of the fuel system.
yy When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper switch
may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and damage it. Avoid
using the wipers when ice is on the blades. Caution
yy When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow yy Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the engine oil will lose its viscosity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow cause difficulties starting the engine.
buildup frequently. yy Do not add any additives other than the genuine fuel for better

GETtheMANUALS.org
Turbocharger System Using biodiesel fuel and low
Insufficient oil supply to the bearing assembly in turbocharger quality fuel
may cause the turbocharger to seize. Therefore, the following The fuel system of the common rail direct injection engine is pre-
cares are necessary to prevent the seizure. cisely machined component. Using low quality fuel and excessive
yy Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection and biodiesel fuel could result in a serious damage to the engine due
replacement intervals. to the water, impurities or suspended particles in fuel.
yy Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal Using fuel mixed with too much biodiesel fuel can cause fuel filter
engine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the tur- clogging, power loss, engine idling problem, engine stall, difficulty
bocharger to operate before the bearings are adequately with starting the engine in cold weather as well as damage to
lubricated creates unnecessary friction. the engine and the fuel system, due to the naturally produced
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle suspended particles.
speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle). Currently, the Ssangyong vehicle is designed so that only the
yy Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back from mixed fuel of biodiesel and diesel with mixing ratio within the
high load driving (such as high speed driving or driving on specified range can be used for safety. If any product in which
long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 1 minutes at idle the biodiesel fuel is exceeds the total amount of fuel is used
speed to cool it down. or the aftermarket biodiesel fuel is added to the regular fuel, it
yy After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the engine and can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle and this is not covered
let it run for approx. 1 minutes at idle speed (Avoid accelera- by warranty.
tion or driving off the vehicle).
What is “Bio-diesel”?
yy Do not rev the engine at high speed without air cleaner ele-
ment when checking the engine. The bio-diesel fuel is made by reacting vegetable oil extracted
from beans, rapeseed, rice bran, etc. with alcohol. This can
Turbocharger? be solely used or used mixed with the diesel fuel for the diesel
engine as its physical and chemical characteristics are similar
The turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine
to those of the diesel fuel. This is considered to be alternative
and a compressor, both of which are driven from the main
energy to the diesel fuel nowadays.
center shaft. The turbine rotates between 50000 ~ 160000
revolutions per minute and uses the energy of the exhaust
gas to drive the compressor. The compressor, in turn, draws
in fresh air which it supplies to the cylinders in the form of
compressed air.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Four wheel drive system*
4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH 4WD INDICATOR
4WD HIGH Indicator

yy When shifting the driving mode from “2H”
to “4H”, this indicator comes on.
When switching to 4WD mode select a proper driving mode ac-
yy When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to
cording to the road conditions (slippery, gradient, bump or dip).
“4H”, this indicator blinks until the shifting
operation is completed. After completion
Switching between 2H 4H
of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while the comes on.
vehicle is being driven. 4WD LOW Indicator
Switching between 2H and 4H 4L When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this
indicator blinks until the shifting operation
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift lever into is completed. After completion of the mode
the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the desired position change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
while depressing the clutch pedal.
4WD CHECK Warning Indicator
Warning
If this warning light comes on while driving,
Do not drive off before the 4WD indicator (4H/4L) is illuminated.
Driving off before illumination of this indicator can cause abnormal have the 4WD system checked by Ssangyong
wear or stuck of drive gears. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING MODE
2H : 2-Wheel Drive 4-Wheel Drive System
This is rear wheel drive with Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time four
high speed. Use this posi- wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and four-
tion for normal driving. This wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive vehicles, this
position gives greater fuel system provides more stable driving conditions. This system
economy, quieter ride and ensures a more stable drive on wet or slippery roads. In case
least drive train wear. the greater traction is needed, you can shift into 4 Wheel
Drive Low (4L).
4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
Use this position on wet or Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
slippery roads such as san-
dy, muddy or snow covered Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if needed,
roads. it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD Low (4L) by
pressing the switch. This is equipped with the control unit that
supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode, the system splits the
torque between the front (50%) and rear (50%) wheels.
4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
Use this position for maximum Tight Cornering
traction. Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the
vehicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the four-
wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be caused
by the resistance of the internal power system according to the
difference of rotation between the front and rear wheels. Please
avoid excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive mode to
Note
prevent the power train from being damaged.
In case of 6A/T, when driving in 4L (4-wheel Drive, Low) Mode, us-
ing 5~6th gear is prohibited.
Using 5~6th gear in 4L mode will damage the drive system

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
yy There could be mechanical noises and shocks during yy This helps to make the mode changes easily.
mode changes. However, these are normal conditions yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or less when
due to the mode changing operations. driving in 4H mode.
yy Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do yy We hope you will use 4L mode when high traction is
not drive your vehicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved required.
road surfaces. Doing so will result in damages to the drive
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fit-
train.
ted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive
yy Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface system.
will cause unwanted noises, premature wear of tires, or
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same
increased fuel consumption.
manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle character-
yy To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the istics can be maintained safely.
vehicle and depress the brake pedal before any shift.
yy The vehicle equipped with 4WD system should be towed
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the by flat-bed truck. If it is impossible to load the vehicle on a
4WD system checked by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer flat-bed truck, tow the vehicle after placing dollyies under
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. all tires. If you tow the vehicle equipped with 4WD system
yy When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode while front or rear tires are rolling on the road, the drive
(4L or 4H), there could be some mechanical shocks and system in the vehicle should be severely damaged.
resistances in vehicle’s drive train. These are normal con-
ditions due to internal resistance in the drive train when
the 4-wheel drive mode is properly working. To avoid
damages to the drive train, do not drive your vehicle at an
excessively high speed on a sharply curved road. Dolly

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake system
Warning Light and Indicator Related to Brake
ABS warning Brake warning EBD warning light ESP warning ESP OFF HDC indicator AUTO HOLD
light light light indicator indicator
HDC
switch
ESP OFF
switch
EPB switch AUTO HOLD switch

Brake pedal

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Pedal (Foot Brake)
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the vehicle Nothing Under Driver’s Seat
speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply the brake Do not leave empty bottles
pedal while going down a long hill. The brake system will overheat or cans near or under the
causing the vapor lock or fade phenomenon thus losing braking driver’s seat. If it hinders the
force. Use the foot brake along with the engine braking effects brake or accelerator pedal
by selecting lower gears. operation, it may cause an
unexpected accident.
Caution
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
slip.
Engine brake?
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is inde- Brake Disc
pendent of the conventional braking systems. A driver would
Check the brake discs at every 10000 km of driving, and replace
normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of a hill,
if necessary.
using engine compression. The engine brake increases the
effectiveness of this regarding force. When the brake disc is badly worn, you may hear a squeaking
sound from the brake system. If this happens, replace the brake
Fade? discs as a set (left and right) as soon as possible.
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction be-
Caution
tween brake pads and discs.
The life span of brake disc depends on the driving habits.
Vapor Lock?
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be com-
pressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the brakes When the Foot Brake Is Not Working
cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. When the foot brake is not working, decelerate the vehicle speed
by using the engine braking effect, then stop the vehicle by ap-
plying the parking brake slowly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? Warning
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the yy ABS is designed to secure more safety and increase the control
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking and of steering wheel during emergency braking situation. The braking
not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose stability distance for vehicles equipped with an ABS may be longer than
for those without it on uneven, gravel, rough or snow-covered
or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to maintain di-
roads.
rectional stability and control of the vehicle.
yy While driving on these roads, reduce the vehicle speed and main-
tain a safe distance from a proceding car.
yy To get the maximum benefit from ABS in an emergency situation,
ABS Warning Light
do not pump the brake pedal.
This warning light comes on when the igni- yy Even a vehicle equipped with ABS has a risk of skidding sideways.
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should go Therefore, always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
off in a few seconds. and drive at low speed on slippery surfaces.
Warning
If this light stays on after starting the engine or comes on while driv- Caution
ing, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong yy ABS system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
Authorized Service Center. In this case, the ABS function is not avail- sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
able, but the conventional brake system is properly working. This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is
properly functioning.
yy When the ABS is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ABS
is functioning properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Dis- ESS (Emergency Stop Signal)*
tribution)*
Emergency Stop Signal?
The hazard warning flashers very rapidly blink to inform the
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)?
emergency situation to the vehicles behind when your vehicle
When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking pressure is braked suddenly or ABS is operating.
electronically to effectively distribute the braking forces to the
front wheels and rear wheels. EBD operates when the speed
The hazard warning flashers will go off:
differences between the fastest front wheel and the rear wheel
are over 1 km/h. If ABS is engaged, it does not operate. yy When you press the hazard warning flasher switch
yy After 10 seconds
yy When the vehicle speed increases by 10 km/h
EBD Warning Light*
Note
yy The ESS does not work when the hazard warning flashers are
already ON.
yy Operation of ESS is subject to the vehicle speed and driving
conditions.
If the ABS warning light and the brake warning light come on
simultaneously, EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) system
is defective.
Caution
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked at the
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)* Warning
For your safety, reduce the vehicle speed when the indicator is blink-
ESP SYSTEM? ing or you are driving on a slippery or curved road.
The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control and
safe driving system and driving safety supplementary system Caution
that helps to avoid dangerous situations by controlling the yy ESP system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to compensate sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable under conditions This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ESP is
such as sharp cornering. properly functioning.
yy When the ESP is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ESP
ESP OFF Indicator

This indicator comes on when pressing the ESP
OFF switch to deactivate the ESP function.
When the wheels are slipping on a snow-covered
or iced road, you can stop ESP function by press-
ESP OFF switch ing ESP OFF switch. This may help to drive off
When the switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer, the vehicle.
the ESP is deactivated and the ESP OFF indicator is illuminated
Caution
on the instrument cluster. Pressing the switch again resumes
the ESP function. yy The vehicles equipped with ESP perform self-diagnosis on the
system when the vehicle starts to move after engine start. Dur-
ESP Indicator/Warning Light ing that time, a slight vibration can be felt which means ESP is
ON yy When the ESP system is operating, you may feel the slight pul-
This warning light comes on when ESP system sation. This is normal and indicates that the ESP is functioning
is defective. properly.
Blinking
This indicator blinks when the ESP system is Note
operating. For details, refer to ESP OFF switch and ESP system in Chapter 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function With ESP OFF Switch
Caution
If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads, the yy The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each
engine rpm may not increase even when you depress the ac- wheel than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden
celerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move decrease of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make
your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing the steering your vehicle a little difficult.
ESP OFF switch. When the ESP OFF switch is pressed, the ESP yy The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving.
function stops and the vehicle is driven independently from the yy The ESP system is activated when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
sensor outputs. rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP indicator is blinking, reduce
the speed and pay extra attention to the road.
Sensing ESP System In Operation yy The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle.
When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be con-
When ESP is activated (ESP indicator light blinks) due to sharp trolled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely.
cornering and etc., you will sense that the corresponding tire is yy It is normal for the vehicles with ESP to emit a slight vibration dur-
put on the brake, and brake pedal vibration and other noises can ing performing self-diagnosis procedures.
occur due to hydraulic pressure change in the system. Also the yy When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
engine torque may not increase even with the accelerator pedal the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by
depressed, due to engine power control function. pressure changes in the relevant systems.
yy Do not drive off the vehicle immediately after starting the engine.
Note The ESP system needs approx. 2 seconds to perform self-
diagnosis. If the system could not complete the self-diagnosis,
Vehicles equipped with ESP system have more auxiliary func-
the ESP system cannot be activated even when the vehicle is in
tions to reinforce the driving safety, other than major functions
unstable conditions.
below.
yy Do not accelerate the vehicle and drive slowly when the ESP
* BAS (Brake Assist System) Function indicator flashes.
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a driver with yy Do not press the ESP OFF switch when the ESP system is in
a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal as hard as neces- operation. Stopping the ESP function on the slippery road may
sary. When the ESP system recognizes any emergency situations cause a serious accident. To deactivate the ESP function, press
requiring hard braking, it automatically delivers an extra high braking the ESP OFF switch only on a long straight road.
pressure to the wheels.
* ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function Warning
This function is a part of the ESP system. When your vehicle moves If the ESP OFF indicator comes on with the ESP system still acti-
in an extremely unstable manner, this function helps the vehicle vated, the ESP related system is defective. Make sure to have the
maintain normal stability. vehicle checked at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (Hill Descent Control)* HDC Indicator
Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by pressing
HDC (Hill Descent Control)? the HDC switch).
HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down Green light blinking: HDC is being applied.
steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed Red light on: the HDC system is overheated or
without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function malfunctioning.
is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use this
function for anything other than driving down steep hills. Caution
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may
be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
HDC Operating Conditions

1. HDC switch ON (green HDC indicator on instrument cluster
comes on)
2. Gradient of more than specified value and vehicle speed
HDC Switch between 5 and 50 km/h
Pressing the HDC switch turns on the HDC indicator on the 3. ESP (including BAS) not activated
instrument cluster and set the HDC system in READY mode.
Pressing the HDC switch again turns off the HDC indicator and
deactivates the HDC function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Deactivation Conditions HDC Operation
1. HDC switch OFF (green HDC indicator on the instrument If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is activated
cluster goes off) and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument cluster. The
2. Gradient of less than specified value HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is below 5 km/h or
above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope becomes gentle while it
3. Vehicle speed of below 5 km/h or above 70 km/h
is in operation. It is normal that strong vibrations and noise occur
4. HDC malfunction from the brake system when the HDC is in operation.
5. HDC system overheated
Caution
Note yy HDC is designed to be used when driving on off-road with steep
While the HDC is activated, you can drive the vehicle at a speed grades (downhill).
between 5 and 30 km/h by depressing the brake pedal (deceleration) yy Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake
or accelerator pedal (acceleration). If the vehicle speed is below 5 system or ESP system. Do not use HDC when driving on normal
km/h or above 70 km/h, the HDC is deactivated. roads.
yy If driving on a level road with HDC ON and in ready state, the HDC
function can be operated during sharp cornering or passing over
a speed bump. Therefore, do not activate the HDC while driving
on normal roads.
yy If the red HDC indicator is turned on, the HDC system is over-
heated or faulty. If the red indicator stays on even after the HDC
related systems have been cooled down, have the vehicle checked
and service at the nearest SSangyong authorized dealer or
SSangyong service center.
yy It is normal for the HDC related system including the brake pedal to
emit operating sounds and vibration when HDC is operated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB (Electric Parking Brake)
The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is applied/released by simple Applying EPB
switch operation. This parking brake system improves vehicle
safety and stability. Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull
up the EPB switch.
The parking brake warning lamp on the
instrument cluster is turned on, indicating
that the parking brake is applied.
Releasing EPB
Press down the EPB switch with the
brake pedal depressed.
instrument cluster is turned off, indicating
that the parking brake is released.
AUTO Releasing EPB

1. Close the driver door, engine hood and tailgate and fasten
your seat belt.
2. Shift the gear selector lever to the R or D position.
3. Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator
pedal slowly.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forwards or
backwards movement of the vehicle.
Caution
The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the
driver door, engine hood or tailgate is not closed or the seat belt is
not fastened.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB Warning Lamp/Parking Brake EPB Emergency Mode
Warning Lamp If the brake pedal cannot be depressed because of the brake
Warning lamp ON: The warning lamp is turned system failure while driving the vehicle, brake the vehicle by
on when there is a fault in the EPB system. pulling up the EPB switch. The parking brake is applied as long
as the switch is pulled up. If this is the case, it may take longer
to stop the vehicle.
Warning lamp ON: Caution

- When parking brake is applied properly yy Activating this emergency mode may have a negative effect on the
- When brake fluid level is low vehicle. Therefore this feature only be used in an emergency.
yy If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related com-
- When gear selector lever is shifted to P position ponents after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle
with AUTO HOLD checked and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Caution
yy Check if the parking brake warning lamp is turned on or off on the
Warning
instrument cluster when applying or releasing the EPB.
yy Improper operation of EPB switch (operating with excessive force yy Do not use this feature while driving except for emergency. Using
applied, continuous operation) may turns on the EPB warning this feature not only damages the vehicle system, but also can
lamp. If this is the case, turn the ignition switch off and then on cause accidents due to braking force.
again. The warning lamp will be turned off, indicating that the EPB yy Keep the EPB switch out of the reach of children. Failure to do so
works normally. could cause an accident.
yy If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a yy If there is a critical fault in the brake system, the EPB emergency
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. mode may not work.
yy If you have to park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever
to the P position.
Warning
Do not let other people who are not familiar with the EPB system
or children operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents
depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Double parking
To park the vehicle in front of another vehicle allowing the vehicle to be pushed or pulled, perform the following procedure:
P
Emergency
key
1. Release the EPB with the ignition 2. Turn the ignition off with brake pedal 3. Shift the gear selector lever to the N
switch ON or engine running. depressed and gear selector lever in position after pressing the lever lock
the P position. release button with the brake pedal
Note depressed.
Make sure that the AUTO HOLD function Note
is deactivated by pressing the AUTO If the gear selector lever is in a position Caution
HOLD switch. If AUTO HOLD is acti- other than the P position, the vehicle In double parking mode, the vehicle may
vated, the EPB is automatically applied. power will not be turned off. roll away. Therefore, the vehicle should
be parked on a flat surface and taking
the appropriate action, such as installing
wheel chocks, is required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Before driving off, be sure to check if the parking brake warning yy When parking on an uphill, yy When parking on a downhill,
lamp or brake fluid low warning lamp is turned on. turn the front wheels away turn the front wheels toward
yy Driving with parking brake applied could damage the brake system. from the curb. the curb.
Before driving, fully release the parking brake.
Parking on uphill Parking on downhill
yy If the parking brake should be applied while driving the vehicle,
move the gear selector lever to the P or N position for safety.
yy If the brake warning lamp ( ) stays on after the parking brake is
released, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
yy For vehicles with A/T, never use the gear position P (parking) as
a substitute for the parking brake. When parking/stopping the
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
yy To park the vehicle with gear selector lever in the N position, turn
the ignition switch off with the gear in the P position and move the
gear selector lever to the N position after pressing the lever lock
release button.
yy If the gear selector lever of the parked/stopped vehicle is in a place
other than the P position, the vehicle can be rolled away based on
the external force applied or slopes of the road. Therefore, always
move the gear selector lever to the P position unless other gear
position is required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO HOLD*
If you are stopping briefly at traffic lights or in heavy traffic, de- AUTO HOLD Activation
pressing the brake pedal with AUTO HOLD activated applies the
parking brake automatically to keep the vehicle stationary. Press the AUTO HOLD switch.
Depress the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake.
Note
The indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch
is illuminated in white.
AUTO HOLD Deactivation

� Press the AUTO HOLD switch with
AUTO HOLD activated to deactivate
the feature.
� If the ignition switch is turned off and
then on again, the AUTO HOLD func-
tion will be deactivated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operating AUTO HOLD AUTO HOLD indicator
1. Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD yy O
N in white: AUTO HOLD operation
indicator (white). READY state (parking brake not applied)
2. Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle. yy O
N in green: AUTO HOLD activated and
3. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster parking brake applied
is changed from white to green and the brake is applied. � Flashing in yellow: fault in AUTO parking
4. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off. brake system
5. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster Caution
is changed from green to white and the brake is released.
yy The AUTO HOLD can be activated while reversing. To park/stop
the vehicle, deactivate the AUTO HOLD function.
Caution
yy During the break-in period of parking brake pad, the braking force
yy The AUTO HOLD function will not be activated when the driver of the parking brake may be reduced. (slight rolling may occur
door, engine hood or tailgate is not closed or the seat belt is not on a hill)
fastened.
yy Check the brake pad for wear and check the EPB operation every
yy When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, 10,000 km.
be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.
yy A mechanical noise can be heard during the EPB operation. This
is normal.
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO
HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is re-
leased and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.
yy If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB
system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If parking the
vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a
flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector
lever to the P position.
yy If the ignition is turned off during the AUTO HOLD ready state
(indicator ON in white)/AUTO HOLD operation (indicator ON in
green), the EPB will be released automatically.
yy If wheel drive is required when e.g. going through an automatic car
wash, make sure that the AUTO HOLD is deactivated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control switch
Cruise Control Auto cruise ready light READY
When the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pressed, READY

Cruise control
indicator light appears on the instrument cluster. (Cruise control
ON/OFF switch
is now ready to operate)
Auto cruise control indicator light

AUTO
CRUISE
Cruise control With the READY indicator appeared on the instrument cluster, if
adjustment you push the cruise control setting switch up or down, READY
switch indicator turns off and AUTO CRUISE indicator will turn on (Min.
vehicle speed is 40 km/h for operation).
RESUME
switch
Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control
Indicator light
Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not jammed,
READY AUTO driving on motorways or highways where there is no sudden
CRUISE
change in the driving condition due to traffic lights, pedestrian,
etc.
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that
maintains a desired driving speed without using the accelera- Caution
tor pedal. READY or AUTO CRUISE indicator will come on in
Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
the instrument cluster depending on the operation of the cruise
yy Do not use on winding roads.
control switch.
yy Do not use in heavy traffic.
The vehicle speed must be greater than 40 km/h to engage the yy Do not use on slippery, wet roads.
cruise control. This feature is especially useful for motorway This could result in a loss of control, collision, and/or personal
driving. injuries.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps Note
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to- conditions.
vehicle distance meets the legal requirement.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control (Setting the speed)
3. Maintaining the vehicle speed in the specified range, set the
desired speed by pushing the switch up in SET+ or SET- direc-
tion. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. Take your fingers off the cruise control switch.
5. Now the vehicle is cruised with the set speed (the speed set at
the moment when the cruise control starts operating) without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control 6. To reset the speed during cruise control operation, slowly
setting switch press the accelerator pedal down until the desired speed is
reached, and repeat the step 3.
7. Refer to the following contents for operation details depending
on vehicle conditions.
Caution
Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
comes on) and/or personal injuries.
2. In order to activate the cruise control system, depress the ac-

celerator pedal until the vehicle speed reaches to the proper
range.
- Cruise control speed range: between 40 km/h and 180
km/h
- For vehicles with manual transmission, the cruise control
will be available only when the gear shift lever position is
in 3rd or higher.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the cruise control system
While the cruise control system is not in opera-
tion
Following steps will describe how to set the speed by accelerat-
ing and start the cruise control while the cruise control system
is not running.
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator
appears in the instrument cluster)
Cruise control 2. Depress the accelerator pedal over 40 km/h to set the cruise
setting switch
control speed.
3. When the vehicle speed exceeds this value, push up or down
the cruise control switch in SET+ or SET- direction, respec-
tively to set the desired speed. Once the desired speed is
reached, release the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If the cruise control switch is pushed and held up in SET+
direction the vehicle set speed will continue to increase until
While the cruise control system is in operation the switch is released.
1. To increase the set speed during cruise control operation, push 5. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
the cruise control switch up in SET+ direction until reached to
the desired speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Increasing the set speed while the cruise control
Continue pushing the switch up until the desired speed is system is in operation
reached. If you want the fine increase of the control speed during the cruise
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the desired control system operation, follow the steps below.
speed is reached. 1. The speed will increase by approx. 1 km/h each time the
cruise control switch is tapped up in SET+ direction (within
0.5 second).
2. If you want to increase the control speed by 10 km/h while
driving with cruise control running, tap the control switch up
in SET+ direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the cruise control system
tion
is not running.
setting switch
control speed.
3. Push and hold the cruise control switch up in SET- direction.
Release the accelerator pedal slowly when the desired speed
is reached.
4. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
While the cruise control system is in operation Decreasing the set speed while the cruise control
1. To decrease the control speed during cruise control operation, system is in operation
push the cruise control switch down in SET- direction until If you want the fine decrease of the set speed during the cruise
reached to the desired speed without pressing brake pedal. control system operation, follow the steps below.
Continue pushing the switch down until the desired speed is 1. The speed will decrease by approx. 1.0 km/h each time the
reached. Be informed that the cruise control system will be cruise control switch is tapped down in SET- direction (within
deactivated when the vehicle speed gets lower than approx. 0.5 second).
40 km/h.
2. If you want to decrease the set speed by 10 km/h while driv-
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the desired ing with cruise control running, tap the control switch down
speed is reached. in SET- direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Resuming the set speed (RESUME) Deactivating the cruise control system
If the auto cruise stopping conditions are met during the activation The cruise control will be deactivated when any of the following
of the auto cruise, the function of the cruise control is deactivated. stopping conditions is met while it is activated. (READY indica-
But the last set speed memorized in the ECU will be resumed tor illuminated)
when the RES button is pressed.
The speed should be 40 km/h and the brake or accelerator pedal
Auto cruise stopping conditions (CANCEL)
should not be depressed. (Deactivation by cruise control OFF
switch will not restore the previous set speed.) yy The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated.
The set speed saved before the cruise control is OFF will be yy Drive the vehicle at less than 40 km/h.
resumed with the AUTO CRUISE indicator light appeared on the
yy Parking brake is applied while driving.
instrument cluster, if the recovery conditions are met.
yy Depress the clutch pedal to change the gear.
Caution yy ON/OFF switch operation (once) during auto cruise activa-
In order to response to a sudden speed change after resuming the tion (ON/OFF switch operation in auto cruise ready mode
set speed, you should always recognize how fast the saved speed deactivates cruise control)
is. If the vehicle speed increases rapidly, step on the brake pedal to
control the speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
According to the vehicle conditions, the cruise
Caution
control will be cancelled when: yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
1. The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated. engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
2. The speed is decelerated below 40 km/h. the set speed. Automatic transmission damage may result.
yy The speed that has been set may not be maintained on uphill or
3. Parking brake is applied while driving. downhill slopes.
4. Clutch pedal is depressed to shift (M/T only). yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
5. The speed increases or decreases drastically (GSL only). grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
- when driving at more than 20 km/h above the set speed yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
- when driving at less than 20 km/h below the set speed downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
- when driving at 140 km/h or more for 4 minutes or longer cruise control.
yy Always keep the safe stopping distance and depress the brake
6. The cruise control switch malfunction occurs pedal when necessary.
7. The brake switch malfunction or disconnection occurs
8. The shift lever is moved to the neutral position.
9. The engine rpm gauge shows the engine running at approx. Using the Cruise Control on Hills
4,400 rpm or higher. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the speed,
load, and the steepness of the hill.
If the cruise control is cancelled without normal conditions de-
scribed above, or an intermittent malfunction occurs, stop the When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
engine and remove the key. The system will reset and is back erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
on when restarting the engine. may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
down.
Caution Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
When not using the cruise control, press the cruise control ON/OFF
switch and then the READY indicator light will go off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system I (front/rear obstacle detection system)*
Front/Rear obstacle detection system is a parking aid system working when the gear shift lever is in D or R position, to inform the driver
with warning buzzer if an obstacle is detected by the ultrasonic sensor built in each bumper.
Instrument cluster Indicates distance from Warning buzzer ON/OFF switch Front obstacle warning buzzer
the obstacle on LCD dis- for front obstacle detection sys- OFF switch
Supervision Standard
play with audible signal tem with LED light OFF
- Supervision type
Front sensor location yy Front obstacle detecting sen- yy Rear obstacle detecting sen- Rear sensor location
sor (4EA) sor (4EA)
yy Operates when moving for- yy Operates when moving back-
ward/backward ward only
yy Operates with the speed be- yy Operates with the speed be-
low 10 km/h low 10 km/h
Left Right Left Center Right

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front/Rear obstacle detection system warning buzzer
If an obstacle is detected, the corresponding segment indicating the distance and the position will blink.
When driving Standard cluster

Obstacle detecting sensor (4EA)
forward (D)
Front sensor operates in drive mode (D) Instrument cluster

Drive mode Reverse mode
When driving
backward (R)
LCD display LCD display

(Front obstacle detected (Front/Rear obstacle detected
segments blink) segments blink)
Front/Rear sensor operate in reverse mode (R)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front obstacle detecting sensor
Distance to obstacle
Warning buzzer interval
1 Center Side
2
No buzzer 100cm 60cm
1 Approx. 0.15 second 50cm ~ 100cm 40cm ~ 60cm
2 Continuous 30cm ~ 50cm 30cm ~ 40cm

5
4
3
The warning buzzer sounds (in 2 stages) as shown above de-
pending on the distance from the obstacle while the front sensor
is running.
When no obstacle detected while Front/Rear Rear obstacle detecting sensor

detection system is running, Distance to obstacle
Front/Rear detection range of sensors Center Side
is shown without blinking and warning Approx. 0.3 second 80cm ~ 120cm
3 -
buzzer sound
4 Approx. 0.15 second 50cm ~ 80cm
When an obstacle detected in 40cm at front left side, 5 Continuous 30cm ~ 50cm
Line 1 removed and line 2 blinks with The warning buzzer sounds (in 3 stages) as shown above de-
warning buzzer sound pending on the distance from the obstacle while the front sensor
is running.
When an obstacle detected in 80cm at rear right side, Note

The obstacle detection indicator on LCD display can be shown in
supervision type of cluster.
Line removed and line
3 4 blinks with
warning buzzer sound

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sensor and system malfunction
Standard cluster
Caution
yy The alarm does not sound if the distance between sensor and
obstacle is less than 30 cm. However, if the sensor detects the
obvious obstacle, the alarm stays on.
yy The distance to the obstacle may be different from the actual dis-
tance by approx. ±10cm when the warning buzzer sounds.
yy Do not rely on the parking aid system while gear selector lever is
in “R” position. Drive backward while checking the rear side of
your vehicle.
yy If the buzzer sounds abnormally or sounds for over 3 seconds
when placing the gear selector lever to “R” position, the parking
LCD display aid system is defective. Have the system checked at Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
If malfunction occurs at front/rear sensor, “?” symbol appears on

affected sensor location. If you see this message on LCD display,
have your vehicle checked and serviced at Ssangyong dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION
You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turning The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
your head. When reversing, adhere to the common pre- proaches the obstacle.
cautions. ►►Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
yy The parking aid system is a supplementary system to help yy Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
your parking. It is not intended to replace the driver’s at-
yy Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic
tentiveness.
waves.
yy Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a
yy Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could
be damaged. ►►Sensor Cannot Detect
yy Normally, when you select the “R” position with the ignition yy When the sensing portion is frozen.
“ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once. yy When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
yy If the alarm sounds for 3 seconds when you select the snow or mud.
“R” position with the engine running or the ignition “ON”, ►►Weak Sensing Scopes
it means that there is a malfunction in the system. Have
yy When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
the parking aid system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
►►Not Defective But Improperly Working
yy When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
In the parking lot as shown in yy When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
the figure, the upper portion of
yy When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or air
the vehicle can be hit before the
braking noises from heavy-duty commercial vehicles).
sensor operation, so check with
the outside rearview mirrors yy When a high-power radio is turned on.
or by turning your head during yy When there is heavy rainfall or water drops.
parking. yy When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted acces-
sories.
►►When Towing Trailer
yy The sensor detects the trailer and the warning beep may
sound continuously.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system II (rearview camera system)*
The rearview camera system is a supplementary function for
Rearview monitor safe driving to display the condition behind the vehicle while the
gear selector lever in R position.
Gear selector
lever R
The monitor shows the view behind the vehicle when the gear
selector lever is in R position. Rearview monitor Rearview camera
Precautions for rearview camera system
yy The actual distance may differ from what you see from the
monitor because the rearview camera uses a wide-angle lens
to have a large clear view. Therefore, you should check the
rearview mirrors and the area behind the vehicle before and
while moving backward.
yy The rearview camera does not show the entire area behind The rearview monitor is applied
the vehicle.
depending on the vehicle speci-
yy Keep the camera lens clean using a camera lens cleaner so that
fications.
the lens is free of foreign matter.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system III* (around view monitoring system)
The AVM (Around View Monitoring) system is a parking assist
system which facilitates parking by helping the driver see objects
around the vehicle. The system is activated when the interior
switch is set to ON (indicator ON).
This system uses the 4 outside cameras and displays the infor-
mation received from the cameras on the display. The driver can
see the outside of the vehicle in the desired direction by using
the 3D view, if needed.
AVM : Around View Monitoring system
Around view activation switch Display monitor
Activation Conditions
The AVM system is activated when the following conditions are
met.
yy Ignition switch ON or engine running
yy Vehicle speed: less than 20 km/h
yy Gear selector lever in P, R, N, or D position
2 yy Around view activation switch ON (AVM is activated regard-
less of switch ON/OFF when gear selector lever is in R
position)
Note
1 3
yy Gear selector lever in R: AVM system is activated
yy Gear selector lever in P: AVM system can be activated but the
previous screen is displayed on the display.
2
1. Front view camera 3. Rear view camera
2. Side view camera

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution AVM Settings
yy The AVM system is a parking assist system. Press [ ] button to go to the setup screen.
yy This system displays the combined images from the 4 cameras.
Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual
vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Always park the ve-
hicle by checking your vehicle's mirrors and glancing over your
shoulder.
yy Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error.
Keep the lens surface clean.
About AVM
yy The AVM system is optional.
yy This system uses the 4 outside cameras and displays the im-
ages of front, left, right, rear regions of the vehicle.
yy PGS Guideline-Linked: Check the ON/OFF setting for the

PGS guideline-linked function.
yy PAS Proximity Warning Display: Check the ON/OFF setting for
the PAS proximity warning display.
yy 3D View: Check the settings for the 3D view screen (screen
is displayed in 3D mode when 3D View is set)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front AVM Operation
Turn the ignition ON and press the [ ] with the gear selector yy PAS information display: Information of objects detected in
lever in the N or D position to operate the front AVM system. the area in front of or behind the vehicle.
yy Front view camera screen: Image from front view camera is
displayed.
yy Left view camera screen: Image from left view camera is
displayed.
yy Right view camera screen: Image from right view camera is
displayed.
yy Full front view image/3D View:
- In 2D mode, full front view image is displayed.
- In 3D mode, full 3D view is displayed.
yy Settings screen ( ): Goes to AVM settings menu.
Note
yy When the front AVM is activated, driving at a speed of about 20
km/h or more deactivates the AVM. If this is the case, the AVM
system remains deactivated even if the vehicle speed goes below
20 km/h.
yy The AVM system uses wide angle cameras to provide the driver
a wider field of view. Because of the wide angle lens, there is a
slight difference between the distance displayed on the screen and
actual distance. Always check your vehicle's mirrors and glance
over your shoulder for safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear AVM Operation
Turn the ignition ON and move the gear selector lever to the R yy PAS information display: Information of objects detected in
position to operate the rear AVM system. the area behind the vehicle.
yy Rear view camera screen: Image from rear view camera is
displayed.
displayed.
displayed.
yy Full rear view image/3D View:
- In 2D mode, full rear view image is displayed.
Note
The AVM system uses wide angle cameras to provide the driver a
wider field of view. Because of the wide angle lens, there is a slight
difference between the distance displayed on the screen and actual
distance. Always check your vehicle's mirrors and glance over your
shoulder for safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and LCA (Lane Change Assist) systems*
The BSD (Blind Spot Detection) system detects an object ap-
proaching from the rear left/right blind spot where the driver
cannot view though the room mirror or outside rearview mirror
by using the sensors mounted in the bumper corners on both
sides. The system warns the driver using a visible and audible
warnings.
BSD sensor
Features
yy BSD: Blind Spot Detection
yy LCA: Lane Change Assist
yy RCTA: Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Outside rearview mirror BSD system activation Caution

warning lamp switch yy The foreign materials on both sides of the rear bumper can inter-
fere with the operation of the sensor integrated into the bumper.
Keep the rear bumper clean.
yy The detection performance of the system may deteriorate when
the rear bumper is replaced, repaired, or painted.
yy The system may not detect at all depending on the surrounding en-
vironment. Always check the road situations with your own eyes.
yy Strong electromagnetic waves around the vehicle may cause this
system malfunction.
Warning
The BSD system is only an assist system for safe driving. Parking
and other dangerous maneuvers are always the driver’s responsi-
bility. Make sure to check the road situations with your own eyes
while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BSD System and LCA System
BSD system ►►Activation conditions (BSD warning system)
This system detects another vehicle which is close to the rear The BSD system activates the warning system when the follow-
left/right blind spot of the vehicle and turns on the warning lamp ing conditions are met:
on the outside rearview mirror to warn the driver. yy IGN ON
LCA system yy Vehicle speed: 30 to 200 km/h
This system detects a vehicle which is approaching at high speed yy A vehicle in blind spot
and warns the driver using a visible (flashing warning lamp on
►►Activation conditions (LCA warning system)
the outside rearview mirror) and audible warnings.
The LCA system activates the warning system when the follow-
BSD system ing conditions are met:
yy IGN ON
yy Vehicle speed: 30 to 200 km/h
yy A vehicle approaching at a high speed in the detection area
yy Expected time to collision: less than 2.8 sec.
►►BSD audible alert settings

Blind spot
You can set the BSD system audible alert under the Instrument
cluster User settings menu > Sound > BSD system audible
alert.
LCA system
Note
yy When the BSD switch is turned on or off, the message "BSD sys-
tem ON/OFF" is displayed on the LCD screen of the instrument
cluster for about 2 sec.
yy If you do not use the BSD system, make sure that the BSD switch
is turned OFF.
Approaching at yy If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, the switch should be turned
high speed OFF to avoid malfunctions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Supervision Standard Supervision Standard
If there is a fault in the BSD system, this message is displayed If the warning conditions for the BSD system are not fulfilled
on the LCD screen. with BSD system is activated, this message is displayed on the
LCD screen.
Caution
If the message stays on, have the system checked and serviced at a Caution
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. In the following conditions, the sensor may not detect objects in
the rear left/right areas and the message shown above may be
displayed:
yy Foreign materials on outer or inner surface of rear bumper
yy An equipment, such as trailer, connected to rear side of vehicle
yy Wider road
yy Raining or snowing heavily

GETtheMANUALS.org
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) System
RCTA system ►►Activation conditions (RCTA)
When reversing the vehicle, the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) The RCTA system activates the warning system when the fol-
system detects a vehicle approaching from the rear left/right blind lowing conditions are met:
spot and warns the driver using a visible (displaying warning yy RCTA system alert ON (Instrument cluster User settings menu
message on LCD screen of instrument cluster, flashing warning > Sound > RCTA system alert)
lamp on the outside rearview mirror) and audible warnings.
yy Gear selector lever in R position
yy Vehicle is in warning area with approaching speed of less
than 24 km/h
yy Expected time to collision: less than 3 sec.
Note
You can set the RCTA system audible alert under the Instrument
cluster User settings menu > Sound > BSD system audible alert.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If a vehicle approaching your vehicle is detected with the RCTA
system ON, a approaching warning message for the corre-
sponding side will be displayed on the LCD screen along with
the audible warning.
Caution
The RCTA system may not be activated when:
yy the target vehicle is out of the detection area for RCTA system
yy the target vehicle is right behind the driving vehicle
yy the target vehicle is moving in the same direction of the driving
vehicle
yy the speed of target vehicle is higher than that of the driving ve-
hicle
yy the speed of target vehicle suddenly decreases
yy there is an obstacle which covers the area around the detection
sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►The driver must pay attention to the following points
as these situations can lead to system malfunction:
yy Foreign materials on the rear bumper (rain drops, snow, dust, yy Steep uphill/downhill or height difference of the lane sur-
stickers) faces
yy An equipment, such as trailer, connected to rear side of yy Target vehicle running very closely
vehicle
yy Target vehicle running very closely and passing
yy Damaged rear bumper and twisted vehicle body
yy Area around the sensor is covered by a vehicle, wall, or park-
yy Sharp turns (bends), at tollbooths ing lot pillar
yy Tire pressure imbalance and overloading yy When reversing, target vehicle is moving in the same direc-
yy Bad weather (snowing or raining heavily) tion
yy Objects fixed on the roads (median barriers, guardrails, noise yy Small moving object, such as a person, shopping cart, or
barrier walls) or road under construction pram
yy A heavy duty vehicle or small 2-wheel drive vehicle (bicycle) yy Vehicle with very low ground clearance
driving closely yy Narrow roads overgrown with grass and trees
yy Accelerating at the same time with target vehicle yy Very wide road
yy Driving speed of target vehicle is very high (passing) yy Wet road surface
yy Driving vehicle changes lane yy Sensor detection area changed due to rear-end collision

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Braking)*
The Autonomous Emergency Braking System (AEBS) helps the Collision alert - Level 1 → Collision alert - Level 2 → Col-
driver avoid a possible collision and reduces the risk of collision. lision alert - Level 3 → Vehicle stop
The system detects the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead or a pedestrian by using the camera and warns
the driver by means of visual and acoustic warnings on the basis
of the collision risk level. The system enhances the brake control
to protect the occupants.
Note
The factory default settings for AEBS is ‘ON’ and for FCW sensitivity
is ‘Normal’.
Warning
The AEBS is an aid to enhance the driver convenience. The safe
maneuvering and controls are always the driver’s responsibility. Read
and understand the safety information regarding when the system
cannot detect other vehicles or pedestrians.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS SYSTEM INDICATOR AND WARN- Caution
ING LAMP yy For safety reasons, activate or deactivate the AEBS only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Supervision cluster
yy If you switch off the ESP when the AEBS is activated, the AEBS
2 1 will also be turned off and the AEBS menu will be unavailable on
the instrument cluster.
3
2 AEBS Warning Light
Deactivating the system will cause the AEBS
warning light on the instrument cluster to be
illuminated. The ON/OFF status of the system
can be viewed in the User Setting menu on the
Standard cluster
instrument cluster. If the indicator is illuminated
continuously with the AEBS enabled, have the
vehicle checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or
3
3 AEBS is activated
2 1
1 AEBS OFF Indicator

The lamp comes on when the AEBS is deacti-
vated and when the ESP system is deactivated
by pressing the ESP OFF switch. 3 AEBS is faulty
The ON/OFF status of the system can be viewed in the Cluster

Setting menu on the instrument cluster. If the AEBS OFF Indi-
cator is illuminated continuously, have the vehicle checked at a

GETtheMANUALS.org
To Set System To Set FCW Sensitivity
Selecting Cluster Setting, Driving Assist, and AEBS in order To set the sensitivity of FCW system to Slow, Medium, or Fast,
from the instrument cluster menu with the ignition ON turns on select Cluster Setting, Driving Assist, FCW level in order from
the AEBS and the system is set to ready status. the instrument cluster menu with the ignition ON and choose
To deactivate the system, deselect AEBS from the instrument between 3 different options.
cluster menu. Deactivating the system will cause the AEBS OFF
Note
indicator on the instrument cluster to be illuminated.
yy The factory default setting for FCW level is Medium.
yy When the FCW is set to Fast, the system will give an fast warning.
If you think the warning is given too fast, change the sensitivity of
the system to Medium or Slow.
Caution
If the vehicle ahead brakes unexpectedly, it may seem as if the warn-
ing is given too slow even if the system is set to Fast.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operating Conditions Emergency
Collision alert Collision alert
The AEBS will be active when the system is turned on through braking Vehicle stop
(Level 1) (Level 2)
the menu in the instrument cluster and the following conditions Category (Level 3)
are met: Rear-end collision risk level
yy Detects a pedestrian: at a vehicle speed between 8 km/h

and 60 km/h LCD
display on
yy Forward collision warning: at a vehicle speed between 8 km/h
instru-
and 180 km/h. ment
cluster
A series of
Continuous Continuous
AEBS Warnings and Controls Buzzer 7 beeps for
tone tone
-
1 second
The AEBS warns the driver by means of visual and acoustic
warnings on the basis of the collision risk level when the vehicle Full brake Braking capac-
ahead brakes unexpectedly, your vehicle is too close to the ve- Vehicle control dur- ity reserved for
- -
control ing pre-crash 2 seconds after
hicle ahead, or there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian. The braking vehicle stop
system enhances the brake control to protect the occupants.
Warning
yy It is impossible to avoid a collision with the AEBS and the emer-
gency braking (level 3) may not be available when driving at a
speed of 60 km/h or higher.
yy Your vehicle could collide with another vehicle, or person even if
the Emergency braking control (level 3) is activated depending on
the condition of the road when driving on straight or slightly curved
roads at a speed of 60 km/h or less.
yy When driving on straight or slightly curved roads at a speed of 180
km/h or less, only the visual and audible warnings are provided
and the Emergency braking control is not available.
yy If the AEBS detects a pedestrian when driving at a speed of 70
km/h or higher, the Emergency braking control will not be acti-
vated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Operating Conditions
Note
After turning the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System is in a standby
ON, the system operates normally when: state to respond to emergency (and dangerous) situations, and is
yy AEB System is ON an assistive system that enables quickly reactions when the driver
engages the brake pedal.
yy ESP is ON
yy When activated, the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) Sys-
yy Normal recognition of passengers and other vehicles up tem delivers optimal braking power that is required to decrease
ahead by the FCM (Front Camera Module) is confirmed the speed of the vehicle.
yy Vehicle speed is above 8 km/h and below 60 km/h yy When the emergency (and dangerous) situation passes, the AEB
(Autonomous Emergency Braking) System disengages control.
►►Deactivation Conditions yy The primary warning operates for vehicle speeds of up to 180
km/h.
After turning the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System
ON, the system is automatically deactivated and the AEB System
is turned OFF when: Caution
yy AEB System is turned OFF The AEBS cannot detect the followings:
yy ESP is turned OFF yy Bicycles, two-wheeled vehicles
yy Buildings, overpasses, tunnels, guard rails, tollgate houses,
yy Vehicle speed is below 8 km/h or above 60 km/h
container, etc.
yy There is steering wheel input yy Trees, garden fences, streetlights, traffic lights, median barriers,
yy Transmission gear selector is put into “P” or “R” traffic signs, bus stop schedule signs, etc.
yy Crosswalks, tunnel entry and exit points, markings on the roads,
yy Accelerator pedal is depressed
shadow under overpasses
yy Man-made structures other than vehicles
Caution
AEBS cannot detect a pedestrian who:
yy does not stand up straight
yy is shown less than 70% of the body with the rest of the body
blocked by the surrounding objects on the image captured by the
front camera module
yy is outside the front camera angle of view

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy The AEBS is only an aid which helps the driver in cases of extreme The AEBS may not respond normally or malfunctions may occur
emergency and does not guarantee your safety in any condition. when:
yy The AEBS does not recognize all emergency situations. yy driving on a steep hill or sharp corners
yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System does not yy driving under specific conditions which cause severe vehicle
engage under all circumstances. Refrain from testing the system vibration
against people or objects. This can and will lead to serious injuries yy driving behind a vehicle with tail lamps off
and death. yy the tail lamp illumination of the preceding vehicle is unsymmetri-
yy The AEBS does not automatically brake the vehicle or avoid a cal
potential collision. The safe manoeuvring and controls are always yy a vehicle or a pedestrian recklessly cuts in front of you
the driver’s responsibility.
yy there is an animal in front of your vehicle or there is a vehicle com-
yy Always keep the safe braking distance and reduce the vehicle ing from the opposite lane of travel
speed by depressing the brake pedal, if needed.
yy there is an approaching or reversing vehicle
yy The AEBS detects the distance between your vehicle and the ve-
yy there is a pedestrian who blends well into the surrounding environ-
hicle ahead or a pedestrian, relative speed and driver’s reactions
ments or exhibits unusual behavior
to determine the most suitable operation.
yy there is a vehicle with arbitrary shape
yy The AEBS uses the front camera module to recognize the driving
situation. The system may not work properly in driving conditions yy there is rapid change of illumination, for example at tunnel entry
where the capability of the camera cannot cover. and exit points
yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System is automati- yy you cannot see the shape of a object because of the shadow
cally turned ON by default when the vehicle is on, and the system under overpasses
can be manually turned OFF from the instrument panel menu yy the visibility is poor, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily
settings. yy fog or mist appears on the windshield
yy Because unsecured passengers can be injured due to emergency yy the front camera module cannot work properly because of the
braking applied by the AEB system, please take the proper precau- reflections on the windshield from inside (objects on top of the
tions and operate your vehicle with care. instrument panel)
yy it is very hard to recognize other vehicles and pedestrians because
Caution of poor visibility
yy Extra care must be taken even if no warning messages are dis-
played or warning signals sound.
yy Take care not to collide with the surrounding environment during
Emergency braking operation, paying attention to road condi-
tions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Warning
yy The AEBS is set to ready status when it is enabled to act rapidly yy The AEBS is an aid to ensure the driver convenience. The safe
under critical control situations. manoeuvring and controls are always the driver’s responsibility.
yy The AEBS is an aid for braking which provides the optimal braking Never drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner relying
force during the Emergency braking operation. on the AEBS. Always keep the safe braking distance and reduce
yy The AEBS will be deactivated when the driver depresses the ac- the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, if needed.
celerator pedal or carries out a fast steering in an emergency. yy Under certain circumstances, unnecessary warnings and braking
yy The AEBS will be disabled after the emergency situation is re- force can be provided. And the sensors of the system does not al-
leased. ways fully recognize complex conditions because of its limitations,
which can result in missing warnings and braking force applied.
yy Your vehicle may collide with the vehicle ahead which stops sud-
denly if the braking force is insufficient during the Emergency
System Malfunction braking operation.
Warning
yy Take care not to endanger the occupants of the vehicle during the
Emergency braking operation.
yy The AEBS may not work when the driver depresses the brake
pedal in a possible crash situations.
yy Even when the AEBS is defective, normal braking is still effective.
yy If the warning message is displayed (stays on for a certain In this case, Emergency braking feature is not available.
period of time), there is a fault in the AEBS. Have the vehicle yy The AEBS is available only when the vehicle is driven forward and
detects vehicles ahead and pedestrians. The system cannot detect
checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
animals or vehicles coming from the opposite lane of travel.
Service Center.
yy The AEBS cannot detect a vehicle which moves or is parked per-
yy When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated, the AEBS warning pendicular to the direction of travel for your vehicle.
message may be displayed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Limitations of Operation yy driving behind a vehicle with tail lamps off at night or the tail
The AEBS is an aid to ensure the driver convenience. The safe lamp illumination of the preceding vehicle is unsymmetrical
manoeuvring and controls are always the driver’s responsibility. yy there is rapid change of illumination when passing the tunnel
The AEBS uses the front camera module to recognize the driving entry and exit points
situation. The system may not work properly in driving conditions yy the vehicle is driven in unstable condition
where the capability of the camera cannot cover.
yy the sensors of the system cannot fully recognize complex
The AEBS may not respond normally or malfunctions may occur conditions because of its limitations
in the following cases.
The AEBS cannot detect vehicles properly when:

yy the camera lens or surface of glass in front of the camera is
dirty or blocked by other objects
yy it is raining or snowing heavily
yy there is electromagnetic interference
yy driving off-road, over dips and bumps, on the hills with gradi-
ent varying from small to significant
yy driving through a construction zone, on railways, on the roads
with metal objects scattered on them
yy driving in an underground parking structure or indoor park-
ing lot
yy there is a thin-shaped object, such as motor cycle or bicycle,
in front of your vehicle
yy the visibility of the camera is too poor because of backlighting,
reflecting light, or darkness, etc.
yy the outline of the vehicle ahead is not within the camera field
of vision
yy the preceding vehicle is a special vehicle, such as a truck with
unique shaped cargo, trailer

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution Caution
Curve driving During a curve driving, the AEBS may rec- Hill driving
During a curve driving, the sensors of the ognize a vehicle in other lane as a preceding During a hill driving, the AEBS may not
system may not fully recognize a vehicle in vehicle and activate unnecessary warnings fully recognize a vehicle, which can result
your lane because of its limitations, which and braking force. Always be careful of mo- in unnecessary or missing warnings and
can result in unnecessary or missing warn- tor traffic and reduce the vehicle speed by braking force.
ings and braking force. depressing the brake pedal, if needed. The recognition of a preceding vehicle
Always be careful of motor traffic and re- If this occurs, depress the accelerator pedal might be delayed and this triggers sudden
duce the vehicle speed by depressing the to prevent the vehicle from braking. Adjust deceleration.
brake pedal, if needed. the speed of the vehicle to the current traf- Always be careful of motor traffic and re-
fic situation. duce the vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, if needed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution Caution
yy Release the AEB system using menu
settings on the instrument cluster when
other vehicle or trailer is towed. If the
brake is operated during towing, stability
of the vehicle will be affected.
yy Use caution when the garage of the
car in front is high or the load protrudes
rearward. There is a risk of occurrence
dangerous situation.
Caution
If there is a vehicle stopped in front of the Detecting vehicles

vehicle ahead and the vehicle ahead moves Your attention is always required while driv-
out of your lane, the AEBS may have not ing behind a vehicle carrying cargo longer
enough time to react. than the cargo bed or with high ground
clearance because the AEBS may not work
properly.
Warning
When the vehicle is being transported on
a truck, train or ship, turn the AEB System
OFF. (depending on how tightly the vehicle
Switching lanes is operated during transport, the AEB Sys-
When a vehicle in the lane next to you tem can activate)
enters the same lane, the system may fail
to recognize this vehicle until it enters into
the sensor detection area. Be cautious at
all times since the sensor may not detect a
vehicle cutting in suddenly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System)*
The LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) is an assist sys- Caution
tem that detects lanes up ahead using the FCM (Front Camera
yy Do not attach sticker, accessary, tinting films on the detection area
Module). If an unintentional lane departure occurs without turn of the FCM. This can cause malfunctions and abnormal operation
signal lamp operation, the vehicle warns the driver using a visible of the related systems.
and audible warnings, helping the driver to stay in lane. yy The LDWS recognizes the lanes by using the images from the
* LDWS: Lane Departure Warning System cameras. Keep in mind that the LDWS may be deactivated or
activated when it is not desired if the lanes are not recognized
A B successfully.
yy Pay close attention especially when the LKAS fails to detect the
lane markings.
yy Do not remove any part of the LDWS or apply impact on it.
yy Do not put any object with reflective surface (white paper, mirror,
etc.) on the instrument panel. Reflected lights can cause system
malfunction.
yy You may not hear the audible alert (chime) if the sound from your
audio source is too loud.
A Lane departure without activation of turn signal lamp de- Warning

tected
yy The LDWS assists the driver with audible and visual warnings so
B Warning message and warning buzzer output that the vehicle does not move out of the driving lane unintention-
ally. Do not drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner
relying on the LDWS. Always drive safely paying attention to the
►►Activation conditions road conditions.
The LDWS is activated when the following conditions are met. yy Do not release your hands from the steering wheel while driving.
yy The driver is responsible for safe driving of the vehicle by maneu-
yy LDWS switch operation with LDWS set vering the steering wheel.
yy Vehicle speed: 60 to 175 km/h yy Do not steer the vehicle rapidly while the LDWS is activated.
yy FCM recognizes left/right lanes yy The LDWS only provides visual and audible warnings. Therefore,
you (driver) should steer the vehicle to keep the vehicle in the
yy Driving on a straight road or slow curve lane.
yy Lane departure direction is opposite to direction indicated yy The LDWS may be deactivated, not work at all, or activated when
by turn signal it is not desired depending on the road conditions and surround-
ing environment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS Switch LDWS Indicator
Supervision cluster
Standard cluster
When the LDWS switch is turned ON, the LDWS

indicator will light up on the instrument cluster.
The system is activated by pressing the switch with the Power

ON state. Once the system is activated, the LDWS indicator is yy Indicator ON in white: System READY mode (Vehicle speed
illuminated on the instrument cluster. below specified value or no lane detected)
When the switch is pressed again with the LDWS is in active, the yy Indicator ON in green: LDWS is activated
system will be deactivated and the LDWS indicator will go off. yy Warning lamp ON/flashing in yellow: LDWS is faulty

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving Assist Menu ►►LDWS OFF
►►LDWS ON (READY) Supervision Standard
This message is displayed when the LDWS is turned off.
The lanes are shaded when the LDWS is turned ON but the ►►Only one lane detected
vehicle is driven at a low speed of less than 60 km/h or both
lanes are not detected. Supervision Standard
►►Both lanes detected

The lanes are displayed in white when the vehicle is driven at a

speed of 60 km/h or more and both lanes are detected.
If only one lane is detected while the vehicle is driven at a speed

of 60 km/h or more, the detected lane will be displayed in while
and the warning output is provided only for that lane.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Warnings for lane departure ►►System check
When the LDWS is activated and the vehicle is approaching one This message is displayed when the LDWS is faulty.
of the lanes without operating turn signal lamp, the corresponding
lane on the LCD screen flashes.
Supervision: Flashing in yellow ↔ white
Standard: Flashing in white ↔ inverse shading
►►System inoperative
This message is displayed when the LDWS is faulty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions yy There are other roadway markings on the roads, such as
crosswalk markings, arrows, symbols, along with the lane
The LDWS may not work at all or be activated when it is not markings.
desired in the following conditions: yy The visibility is poor, such as when it is snowing or raining
yy The system cannot recognize the lane markings because of heavily.
rain, snow, dust, standing water or puddles, other obstruction yy it is very hard to recognize other vehicles and pedestrians
on the road. because of poor visibility.
yy The color of the lane markings is not clearly distinct from the yy There is rapid change of illumination, for example at tunnel
road color. entry and exit points
yy The lane markings are not clear or tampered by the traffic, or yy The headlamps are not turned on or the brightness of the
there are 2 or more lane markings on one side. lamps is too low when driving at night or through tunnels.
yy There are other markings similar to the lane markings on yy When you are traveling within or near the outer edges of the
the roads. bus-only lane.
yy The lane markings are covered in shadows of the median yy The vehicle is driven on a steep hill or around sharp cor-
barriers, guardrails, noise barrier walls, roadside trees. ners.
yy There are environmental barriers, such as bollard. yy the vehicle is driven under specific conditions which cause
yy The traffic is heavy due to the construction in the area or traf- severe vibration.
fic control items, such as traffic cones, are used to separate yy Objects with reflective surface (white paper, mirror, etc.) are
traffic flows. on the dashboard.
yy The lane markings are suddenly discontinued at roundabouts yy The windshield glass in front of the camera module is covered
and road intersections. with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
yy The vehicle is passing through a certain section, such as yy The fog or mist appears on the windshield.
highway interchange, where the number of lanes increases
yy The temperature around the front view camera is too high
or decreases.
because of the direct sunlight.
yy The width of the driving lane is too narrow or wide.
yy The vehicle is moving towards a light source.
yy The distance to the vehicle ahead is too short or a wheel of
yy The light from the sun, streetlamps, or headlamps of oncom-
the vehicle ahead is touching the lane marker.
ing vehicles is reflected by the wet road surface.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS Not Activated When:
yy The driver activates the turn signal lamps or hazard warning Caution
lamp.
Do not apply tinting film on the
yy Both lanes are not detected FCM detection area. This can
yy The vehicle is driven too close to either side of the driving cause malfunctions and ab-
NG Tinting film coverage normal operation of the related
lane after changing the lane.
OK systems.
yy Switching lanes with abrupt steering wheel operation.
yy The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) system is activated.
yy Cornering at high speed.
yy The vehicle is driven at a speed of below 55 km/h or above
180 km/h. Warning
yy switching lanes abruptly. yy Never drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner to test
yy The width of the driving lane is too narrow or wide. the LDWS.
yy Activate the turn signal lamps before trying to make a lane-
yy There are 2 or more lane markings (e.g. construction zone). change.
yy The vehicle is driven around a curve with too small radius.
yy The vehicle is driven on steep hills.
yy Decelerating abruptly.
yy The tinting film on the windshield covers the front view camera
field of view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TSR* (Traffic Signal Recognition)
It is the system which recognizes the speed limit of the traffic Supervision cluster
sign and other major signs.
Sign
90
Standard cluster
Setting
Driver can set the function on the instrument cluster (Cluster
Setting -> Driving Assist) when the vehicle is switched on.
Note
Recognizable Signs
yy Vienna convention sign
yy Standard traffic sign, Electronic sign, Prism sign
Caution
yy TSR does not recognize all signs.
yy It is possible that recognition is not available due to location, color
or dents of sign.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience System I 4
Remote control key and ignition key....................4-2 Rain sensing wiper*...........................................4-60
0
Using smart key*..................................................4-6 Outside rearview mirror control switch..............4-61
Additional functions of smart key*......................4-10 Inside rearview mirror........................................4-64 1
Cautions for using smart key.............................4-14 Heater/air conditioner system............................4-65
2
Immobilizer system............................................4-15 Warnings and cautions......................................4-66
Theft deterrent system.......................................4-17 Automatic heater/air conditioner*.......................4-68 3
Tailgate switch....................................................4-19 Operation of heater and A/C control..................4-69
4
Tailgate operation (without power tailgate)........4-20 Manual heater/air conditioner............................4-76
Power tailgate operation*...................................4-21 Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C).........................4-81 5
How to set power tailgate*.................................4-24 Defogging and defrosting...................................4-82
6
Smart tailgate operation*...................................4-25 Multimedia..........................................................4-83
Safety release lever ..........................................4-27 Steering wheel...................................................4-86 7
Door open lever, lock/unlock knob and switch..4-28 Storage compartments......................................4-87
8
Opening and closing windows...........................4-30 Sun visor............................................................4-90
Engine hood.......................................................4-33 Front cup holder/rear cup holder and armrest...4-91
Fuel filler door....................................................4-34 Power outlet.......................................................4-92
Sunroof*.............................................................4-36 USB....................................................................4-93
Driver seat easy access*...................................4-41 AC inverter power switch*..................................4-94
Exterior lamp......................................................4-43 AC inverter.........................................................4-95
Headlight leveling switch*..................................4-52 Grip handle with coat hanger.............................4-96
Interior lamp.......................................................4-53 Luggage compartment features.........................4-97
Wiper and washer switch...................................4-58 Roof rack..........................................................4-100
GETtheMANUALS.org
Remote control key and ignition key
Door Lock Button

Lock (briefly press)
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are
locked and the theft deterrent mode is activated.
yy When the theft deterrent mode is activated, the hazard warn-
ing flashers blink twice. However, if you press this button
again in 4 seconds, the hazard warning flashers blink twice
and the buzzer sounds once.
Caution
yy To arm the theft deterrent mode, the ignition key should be re-
moved from the ignition switch, all doors including the tailgate
and the engine hood should be closed completely. If you press
this button when either tailgate or engine hood is open, the doors
will be locked but the theft deterrent mode will not be activated. In
this case, when you close the opened tailgate or engine hood, the
theft deterrent mode will be automatically activated with blinking
the hazard warning flashers twice.
Panic Button
yy To prevent REKES key damages, do not expose the key to high
temperature or do not get the key wet.
Panic Function (press and hold) yy When the doors are locked using the REKES key, make sure to
yy If you press and hold this button for approx. 1 seconds the check if they are securely locked including tailgate, in order to
hazard warning flashers blink and the siren sounds for ap- prevent from theft.
prox. 30 seconds. yy With one REKES key left in the ignition key hole, doors cannot be
yy The panic function will stop when only panic button on the locked using another REKES key.
remote control key is pressed.
Note
PANIC BUTTON (EU) yy For the setting procedures of automatic folding of outside rearview
mirrors, refer to Chapter 4.
(Operative only when the ignition key is inserted) yy Locking the doors from the driver’s door using the ignition key will
work the same.
4-2 Convenience System I

GETtheMANUALS.org
Short Press of UNLOCK Button
(Safety UNLOCK Disabled)
yy The doors including the tailgate are unlocked and the theft
deterrent system is disarmed.
yy The outside rearview mirror is unfolded automatically (outside
rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch not pressed).
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds
twice signifying that the theft deterrent is disarmed.
Note
Refer to "Outside rearview mirror control switch" in Chapter 4 for
Door Unlock Button details about setting the outside rearview mirror AUTO folding/
unfolding control.
Unlock (briefly press)
yy If you press this button briefly, all doors and the tailgate are
unlocked and the theft deterrent mode is deactivated.
yy The outside rearview mirrors are unfolded when the automatic
folding is selected.
yy When the deterrent mode is deactivated, hazard warning
flashers blink once.
yy If a door, tailgate or the engine hood is not open within 30
seconds after unlocking doors using REKES key (ignition key)
in theft deterrent mode, all doors will be automatically locked
and the hazard warning flasher will blink twice with one warn-
ing buzzer sound. (change to theft deterrent mode)
Note
For the setting procedures of automatic folding of outside rearview
mirrors, refer to Chapter 4.
Convenience System I 4-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Short Press of UNLOCK Button
(Safety UNLOCK Enabled)
yy Pressing the door UNLOCK button once briefly unlocks the
driver door only and disarms the theft deterrent system. Refer
to [Figure 1].
yy Pressing the door UNLOCK button again with the driver door
unlocked unlocks all doors including the tailgate. Refer to
[Figure 2].
yy Pressing the door UNLOCK button twice in a row unlocks the
driver door first and then other doors, and disarms the theft To use the mechanical key:
deterrent system.
Press the button. The mechanical key is automatically folded up.
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds
twice signifying that the theft deterrent is disarmed. To stow the mechanical key:
Press the button and push it into its slot.
Driver door unlocked All doors unlocked
[Figure 1] [Figure 2] Caution
The key can be broken when folding not to press button.
Pressing UNLOCK button once Pressing UNLOCK button once

with all doors locked and theft again with driver door un-
deterrent armed locked
How to Set Safety UNLOCK System

Instrument cluster User settings menu > Door/Tailgate > Unlock
with key in 2 stages (safety UNLOCK) > Tick the checkbox

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution When a Remote Control Key is Lost
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key does not oper-
ate. When one of remote control keys is lost and a new re-
- When the key is in the ignition switch mote control key is purchased, bring the other old key to
- When you are too far from your vehicle (over 10 m) the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
- When the battery in remote control key is discharged Service Center and have it recoded. Otherwise, the old
- When your vehicle is behind other vehicles or obstacles
key will not work.
- In very cold weather To prevent from being stolen by the lost key, Immediately
yy The remote control key could be damaged easily by moisture and heat. take a recoding for new key when you lost a key.
Be sure to keep away from them.
yy Operating range could be changed depending on the surrounding condi- Caution
tions. It is recommended to use the remote control key in 10 m from your If you lose your key, you have to replace the whole key set to
vehicle. prevent from theft.
yy Under the following conditions, the remote control key may not work due
to another radio wave. In these cases, open the doors using key and key
hole in door. Room Lamp ON
- In the place near police office, government office, broadcasting station,
military base, transmitting tower, airport, and port If the room lamp switch in overhead console is in DOOR
- When you have the radio or mobile phone with the remote control key position, the front and center room lamps come on for 30
- When another remote control key is using near your vehicle seconds when you press the unlock button on the remote
yy If your remote control key is not working properly, have the system checked control key. The lamps immediately go off when the remote
by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. lock button is pressed.
yy Opening the tailgate will not trigger the theft deterrent alarm even in theft
deterrent mode.
Puddle Lamp Function
The puddle lamps at bottom of outside rear view mirror
housings are illuminated for 30 seconds when you unlock
the door with the smart key or when you open the driver’s
door after the engine start/stop button to OFF from ON
position. The lamps immediately go off when pressing the
door lock button or starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Using smart key*
Smart key is a device which is designed to lock/unlock the doors Type A Type B
and start the engine by just carrying it.
Also, the common functions of the remote control key are avail-
able by using the buttons on the smart key.
Short Press of LOCK Button

(Locking Doors) Long Press of LOCK Button (Clos-
yy All doors and the tailgate are locked and the theft deterrent ing Windows)
system is armed.
yy You can close the windows by using the door LOCK button
yy The outside rearview mirror is folded automatically. (outside
on the smart key.
rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch is not pressed)
yy When the door LOCK button is pressed and held, the theft
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds
deterrent system is armed and the windows move to the fully
once as soon as the theft deterrent is armed.
closed position as long as the button is pressed.
Note yy When the door LOCK button is released the windows stop
Refer to "Outside rearview mirror control switch" in Chapter 4 for moving. The windows continue to move when the button is
details about setting the outside rearview mirror AUTO folding/ pressed again.
unfolding control.
Note
Caution This window close function is activated when the door is equipped
with window safety function and the corresponding vehicle system
yy All doors including the tailgate and engine hood should be closed
settings are set (Instrument cluster User settings menu > Door/Tail-
to arm the theft deterrent system. Locking the doors using the
gate > Window open/close by smart key > Tick the checkbox).
smart key with the tailgate and engine hood open only locks the
doors and does not arm the theft deterrent system. If you close the
tailgate or engine hood after locking the doors with a smart key, Caution
the hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds once yy Perform this remote control operation in a place where you can
signifying that the theft deterrent system is armed. see the windows of the vehicle for safety reasons.
yy Locking the door with door LOCK button on the smart key is not yy If the window closing operation is performed 9 times or more, the
possible when the ignition switch is in ACC/ON position or the function is deactivated for safe operation of the vehicle system.
engine is running. The function is available when the ignition is turned OFF and then
ON again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type A Type B Short Press of UNLOCK Button
to [Figure 1].
[Figure 2].
Short Press of UNLOCK Button yy Pressing the door UNLOCK button twice in a row unlocks the
(Safety UNLOCK Disabled) driver door first and then other doors, and disarms the theft
deterrent system.
yy The doors including the tailgate are unlocked and the theft yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds
deterrent system is disarmed. twice signifying that the theft deterrent is disarmed.
rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch not pressed). Driver door unlocked All doors unlocked
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds [Figure 1] [Figure 2]
Note
details about setting the outside rearview mirror AUTO folding/
unfolding control.



GETtheMANUALS.org
Long Press of UNLOCK Button Type A Type B
(Opening Windows)
yy You can open the windows by using the door UNLOCK button
on the smart key.
yy When the door UNLOCK button is pressed and held, the theft
deterrent system is disarmed and the windows move to the
fully open position as long as the button is pressed.
Tailgate Button (Type A)
yy When the door UNLOCK button is released the windows stop
moving. The windows continue to move when the button is yy For vehicles with power tailgate.
pressed again. yy Pressing the switch briefly deactivates the power tailgate
operation.
Note
yy Pressing and holding the switch activates the power tailgate
This window open function is activated when the door is equipped
AUTO open/close operation.
settings are set (Instrument cluster User settings menu > Door/Tail- yy The tailgate can be opened when you enter the area within a
gate > Window open/close by smart key > Tick the checkbox). 1-meter radius from the center of the tailgate while carrying
the smart key.
Caution
Note
yy Perform this remote control operation in a place where you can
see the windows of the vehicle for safety reasons. Refer to "Tailgate operation" for details about using the tailgate
button.
yy If the window opening/closing operation is performed 9 times or
more, the function is deactivated for safe operation of the vehicle
system. The function is available when the ignition is turned OFF
and then ON again.
Panic Button (Type B)
yy For vehicles without power tailgate.
yy Pressing and holding the button makes the hazard warning
lamps flash and buzzer sound for 30 sec.
yy To deactivate the theft deterrent alarm, press and hold the
panic button again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type A Type B Caution
Locking door Locking door
yy To prevent the smart key from being
Unlocking door Unlocking door damaged, avoid places with a high
temperature and high humidity.
yy Always check that locked status of the
Power tailgate Panic doors and tailgate after locking the
doors with the smart key. If the doors
are not locked, the vehicle itself or your
personal belongings in the vehicle can
be stolen.
Long press
yy If a key is lost, you cannot open the
Button name Short press Front doors with All doors with doors of the vehicle or start the engine.
safety window safety window If you don't have a spare key, take the
vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized
Front door Service Center by towing it and have
All door windows
Locking door Locking door windows close the vehicle serviced. Also, take the ap-
close control
control propriate action to prevent your car and
Unlocking door (When belongings from being stolen.
Front door
safety UNLOCK is All door windows yy Always check if the ignition switch is
Unlocking door windows open
enabled, only driver open control in OFF position and you are carrying a
control
door is unlocked) registered smart key after exiting your
vehicle.
Type A Tailgate Deactivation Power tailgate operation (open/close)
yy Carry only one smart key.
Type B Panic - Panic (ON/OFF) yy If the smart key which was last used
is inside the vehicle and the vehicle is
locked with another registered key, the
Note door is locked properly but you can-
yy The safety function for power window may be applied to only 2 front doors or all 4 doors not use the key inside the vehicle until
depending on the model. the next start up. This is a safeguard
yy The power window with safety function offers AUTO UP/DOWN control. against theft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Additional functions of smart key*
Smart Door AUTO Lock (AUTO Close)
Note
yy The smart door AUTO lock function can be enabled/disabled under
"User settings menu → Functions for driver comfort".
yy Refer to "Outside rearview mirror control switch" in Chapter 4 for
unfolding control.
Caution
yy The detection of smart key can vary depending on the walking
speed and surrounding environment.
yy When using the smart door AUTO lock function, always check
the locked state of the doors and tailgate after seeing the flash of
hazard warning lamp (twice) and hearing a buzzer sound (once).
yy If there is any smart key left inside the vehicle, the smart door
AUTO lock function will not be activated.
If you move a certain distance away from the vehicle while carry- yy When the smart key battery is fully depleted , the smart door AUTO
ing a smart key with all doors including tailgate closed, all doors lock function will be disabled automatically. Therefore, you should
including tailgate will be locked and the theft deterrent system reset the vehicle setting in the instrument cluster after replacing
will be armed. the smart key battery.
If you stay in the key detection area for 1 min. or more under
the same conditions, the AUTO lock function is activated for
theft protection.
The hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds once
as soon as the theft deterrent is armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Approach (AUTO) Lamp
3) Approach Lamp OFF (Welcome & Goodbye
Mode)
yy The approach lamp is turned off when the approach lamp
stays on for more than 30 sec., theft deterrent is armed, smart
door AUTO lock signal is received, and IGN is turned ON.
Note
The welcome mode can be activated 30 sec. after the theft deterrent
system is armed.
Puddle lamp Outside handle lamp
Caution
AUTO approach function is activated up to twice for 10 minutes.
1) Welcome Mode
yy When approaching the door handle of the vehicle while carry-
ing a smart key with the theft deterrent armed, the approach
lamp is turned ON (AUTO approach function).
2) Goodbye Mode
yy If the driver door is opened after turning the ignition switch
from ON to OFF, the approach lamp will be turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. Press on the door LOCK/UNLOCK Door Outside Handle
button on the front/rear door outside
handle. Switch Unlock (Safe-
3. The hazard warning lamp flashes ty UNLOCK disabled)
twice and buzzer sounds once signify-
1. Stay in a vehicle outside antenna area
ing that all doors including the tailgate
(within approx. 1.5 m) while carrying
are locked. (Theft deterrent system
a smart key.
is armed.)
2. Press on the door LOCK/UNLOCK
Note button on the front/rear door outside
Pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button does handle.
not lock the doors in the following cases: 3. The hazard warning lamp flashes
yy When trying to lock the door with the once and buzzer sounds twice signify-
smart key in the cabin ing that all doors including the tailgate
yy Ignition switch in ACC/ON or engine are unlocked. Pull the lever to open
running the door.
yy Any door is open
Caution
Caution If the doors are unlocked by using this
Door LOCK/UNLOCK function, anyone within the smart key
button yy Always check if the ignition switch is
in OFF position and you are carrying a actuation area can open the doors. Be
registered smart key after exiting your aware of the theft.
vehicle.
Door Outside Handle yy Carry only one smart key.
yy If the smart key which was last used
Switch Lock* is inside the vehicle and the vehicle is
1. Stay in a vehicle outside antenna area door is locked properly but you can-
(within approx. 1.5 m) while carrying a not use the key inside the vehicle until
smart key with all doors including the the next start up. This is a safeguard
tailgate are closed. against theft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door Outside Handle
Switch Unlock (Safety UN- Theft deterrent armed
LOCK Enabled)
Press on the driver door outside handle switch with
system settings are set [Instrument cluster User
settings menu > Door/Tailgate > Unlock with key in
2 stages (safety UNLOCK) > Tick the checkbox].
1. Press on the driver door outside handle switch
while carrying a smart key. Driver door
Driver door handle switch handle switch
2. Only the driver door is unlocked and the theft pressed pressed after
deterrent system is disarmed. 4 sec.
Pressed once
3. The hazard warning lamp flashes once and
buzzer sounds twice. Door handle
4. Press on the driver door outside handle switch switch on
within 4 sec. doors other
than driver
5. The hazard warning lamp flashes once and door pressed
buzzer sounds twice signifying that all doors
including the tailgate are unlocked.
Driver door handle switch
Note pressed within 4 sec.
Pressing the door handle switch on the doors other
than the driver door unlocks all doors even if the Pressed twice
safety UNLOCK is enabled.
Caution
If the driver door outside handle switch is pressed 4
sec. after the driver door is unlocked, all doors will be
locked and the theft deterrent system will be armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions for using smart key
CAUTIONS
yy If you lock the doors by pressing the door LOCK button yy Additional smart keys on the same key chain may cause
on the door outside handle or smart key from outside key related fault and engine starting failure.
the vehicle with another smart key inside the cabin, the
yy Therefore, the smart keys should be stored separately,
smart key functions available just by carrying it including
and no smart keys should be in the cabin when the vehicle
the remote control function will be disabled temporarily
doors are locked by LOCK button on the door outside
(buzzer sounds). To restore the functions, disarm the
handle.
theft deterrent system by pressing the button on the door
outside handle or smart key. yy If a smart key is in the cabin, you can start the engine
by pressing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de-
yy If the engine is not started with a smart key inside the
pressed. Do not leave other persons who don't know about
cabin or being carried, start the engine by putting the
the system, especially children, with a smart key inside the
smart key against the ignition switch and pushing to oper-
parked vehicles. The engine may be started accidently or
ate the switch.
the vehicle can be controlled incorrectly. This could result
yy The smart key may not function if the vehicle is in an area in a serious accident.
which has strong electric waves or noise, the vehicle is
yy When you leave the vehicle even for a very short time,
equipped with a third party two-way radio/transmit-receive
always turn the ignition off, carry the smart key in your
device, or a smart key for nearby vehicle is used.
pocket, and do not leave the spare key inside the vehicle.
yy If a smart key is located near the accelerator/brake pedal, Otherwise, the vehicle including valuables can be stolen
on the vehicle floor or seat cushion equipped with heated or malfunctions may occur.
wire, the key may not be detected. If this is the case, carry
yy Make sure that water or liquid does not enter the smart
the smart key in your pocket or put the key in a different
key. Failure to do so can lead to smart key failure and this
location in the cabin.
failure will not be covered by warranty.
yy If a key is lost, you cannot start the engine. Contact the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Immobilizer system
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being started
by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code. When the ignition
key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code of the key and,
if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
Standard cluster If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that
there is something wrong in the immobi-
lizer system. Have the system checked by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
Note
Supervision cluster
The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. If it is very short, the immobilizer indicator does
not come on.
Caution
yy In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the
Immobilizer Key vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install any
remote engine starter.
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned yy The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced, serviced,
to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the or coded by only qualified service personnel in a Ssangyong
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
the engine. yy When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
please observe the process personally.
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the reason (ex, key chain) other
Caution
than key itself, remove the key from the ignition switch and wait for
yy Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The transponder around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
could be damaged.
yy With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started.
Warning
yy Do not install any metal object near the ignition switch and on the
remote control key. Otherwise, they may disturb the signal be- In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from the
tween ignition switch and remote control key and result in engine vehicle. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other device
starting problem. to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle
inoperable.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Does Not Start Due To When the Transponder is Damaged
Communication Error When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it with a
new one and register a new code on the engine control unit at
If there is a communication error in immobilizer system, you a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
cannot start engine. In this case, the immobilizer indicator in Otherwise, the engine cannot be started.
meter cluster blinks.
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the vehicle
with the immobilizer. When You Lost The Key
yy When two or more immobilizer keys come into contact with When you lost the key, the encrypted code should be removed
(each) other(s). from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle theft. Please
yy When the key is close to any device sending or receiving contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
electromagnetic fields or waves. Center.
yy When the key is close to any electronic or electric devices
such as lighting equipment, security keys or security cards.
yy When the key is close to a magnetic or metal object or a
battery.
yy When you start the engine before completing the pre-glow
process.
Caution
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the communication error or
early start before completion of pre-glow, clear the reason and wait
for around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
vice Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Theft deterrent system
The theft deterrent system is activated when locking the doors using the remote control key or Smart key. When somebody tries to
open the door, tailgate or engine hood with any other way other than using remote control key or Smart key, the hazard flashers blink
and the siren sounds.
ARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM ALARM

yy When locking the vehicle with remote control key or Smart If somebody tries to open the door, the tailgate or the engine
key (including lock button on door handle), the anti-theft mode hood without using the remote control key or Smart key, the
will be activated. alarm will be activated.
- Remote control key: When the theft deterrent system is yy When one of the doors or the tailgate is opened with the igni-
armed, the hazard flashers blink twice. However, if you press tion key while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will
this button once again in 4 seconds, the hazard flashers be activated.
blink twice and the buzzer sound once. yy The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the outside
- Smart key: When the theft deterrent system is armed, the while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will be acti-
hazard flashers blink twice and the buzzer sound once. vated.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking the yy When the alarm is activated, the buzzer sounds and the haz-
doors with remote control key or Smart key in theft deterrent ard flashers will blink for 30 seconds.
mode, all doors will be automatically locked again (back to yy The alarm stops when (while keeping theft deterrent mode):
theft deterrent mode).
- Remote control key: pressing “Lock”, “Unlock”, “Panic” but-
yy If you lock the doors using key hole in door, doors will be ton on the remote control key, or turning the ignition switch
locked but the theft deterrent mode will not be armed. to “ON” position
Caution - Smart key: pressing “Lock” or “Unlock” button on the Smart
key, pressing the “Lock/Unlock” button on the outside door
Smart key: To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should
be in {OFF} or {ACC} position and all doors including the tailgate
handle, or turning the ignition switch to “ON” mode by press-
and the engine hood should be closed completely. If the ignition ing it.
switch is in {ACC} position, the switch will be automatically changed
to {OFF} position when arming the theft deterrent mode. When the
ignition switch is in {ON} position, the theft deterrent mode cannot
be activated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM
The alarm does not activate when:
yy Opening the tailgate with “Tailgate Open” button on the Smart
key
yy Opening the tailgate by pressing the “Open” switch behind
the tailgate door handle
All doors except tailgate are still in the theft deterrent mode,
and the tailgate returns to the theft deterrent mode again when
closing it.
DISARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT

MODE
yy The theft deterrent mode will be disarmed when unlocking the
doors with remote control key or Smart key (including “Lock/
Unlock switch on outside door handle).
- Remote control key: When the theft deterrent system is
disarmed, the hazard flashers blink once.
- Smart key: When the theft deterrent system is disarmed, the
hazard flashers blink once and the buzzer sound twice.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking the
doors with remote control key or Smart key in theft deterrent
mode, all doors will be automatically locked again (back to

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate switch
Tailgate interior switch Tailgate outside switch
1
2
Type A Type B
Tailgate inside switch*
4 4
3
Switch Configuration Depending

on Power Tailgate Installation
Item With power tailgate* Without power tailgate Caution
1 Tailgate interior switch Not available Do not operate the power tailgate manually if at all possible. If it
2 Tailgate outside switch ← needs to be operated manually because of malfunction, do not apply
excessive force to the power tailgate. The power tailgate mechanism
3 Tailgate inside switch Not available can be damaged.
4 Smart key tailgate button Smart key panic button
Warning
5 Smart tailgate open Not available
The power tailgate moves up when it is opened. Always check the in-
side or outside of the vehicle when opening or closing the tailgate for
Note safety. Be careful so that your face or head is not struck by the moving
yy For vehicles with power tailgate, the tailgate can be opened/closed tailgate or hands or feet are not trapped by the closing tailgate.
automatically by simple switch operation.
yy The power tailgate can be operated only when the gear selector
lever is in the P position. If the ignition is turned OFF, then it can
be operated regardless of the gear selector lever position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate operation (without power tailgate)
Tailgate Open Tailgate Close
Caution
If the tailgate is opened and closed with
the theft deterrent system disarmed,
the door LOCK button on the smart key
should be pressed to arm the theft deter-
rent system.
Warning
yy Always check your surroundings be-
fore opening or closing the tailgate for
safety.
yy Be careful not to let any part of your
body such as your hand get caught by
accident when closing the tailgate.
yy Close the tailgate as carefully as pos-
sible to avoid injury because the tail-
1. Stay in a tailgate antenna area (within 1. Pull the tailgate down by grabbing the gate can be closed abruptly by its own
approx. 1 m) while carrying a smart inner handle. weight or by outside factors.
key. 2. Slightly push the lowered tailgate to
2. Press the tailgate open switch on the close it completely.
inner side of the tailgate door handle.
Only the tailgate will be unlocked. Note
3. Open the tailgate by lifting it up. When only the tailgate is opened and
closed with the theft deterrent system
armed, the hazard warning lamp flashes
ing that the theft deterrent system is
re-armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power tailgate operation*
Power Tailgate Open
Type A
yy Pressing and holding the tailgate but-

ton on the smart key opens the power
tailgate after 2 blinks of hazard warn-
ing lamp and 2 beeping sounds.
yy Pressing the tailgate button during
power tailgate operation stops the
tailgate operation. Pressing and hold-
yy Pressing and holding the tailgate in- yy Pressing and holding the tailgate ing the tailgate button again reverses
terior switch with the tailgate closed outside switch with the theft deter- the direction of tailgate movement.
opens the power tailgate after 2 blinks rent armed while carrying a smart
of hazard warning lamp and 2 beep- key opens the power tailgate after 2 Caution
ing sounds. blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 yy The power tailgate can be opened au-
beeping sounds. tomatically with ignition switch ON and
yy Pressing the switch during power
tailgate operation stops the tailgate
Note yy The power tailgate cannot be opened
operation. Pressing and holding the automatically with ignition switch ON
switch again reverses the direction of Performing this function with the theft
and the vehicle speed of 4 km/h or
tailgate movement. deterrent system armed disarms only the
more.
power tailgate.
yy If you carry the key in your pocket, be
careful that the key may be pressed
unintentionally, which causes the power
trunk to be open.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power Tailgate Close
Type A

ton on the smart key closes the power
yy Pressing and release the tailgate yy Pressing and release the tailgate power tailgate operation stops the
interior switch with the tailgate open inside switch with the tailgate open tailgate operation. Pressing and hold-
closes the power tailgate after 2 closes the power tailgate after 2 ing the tailgate button again reverses
blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 the direction of tailgate movement.
beeping sounds. beeping sounds.
Note
If the power tailgate (Cinching motor)
tailgate operation stops the tailgate is operated 5 times consecutively, the
operation. Pressing and holding the drive motor of the power tailgate (spindle
switch again reverses the direction of part) may be under strain. The power
tailgate movement. tailgate stops operating after 3 warning
buzzer sounds to protect the motor from
overheating. If this is the case, wait for 1
min. or more before operating the tailgate
again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning Anti-Pinch Protection
yy Closing the tailgate urgently within a yy If the vehicle is driven at 4 km/h or more If a severe impact or constant force is
very short time may be difficult. This is with the tailgate open, warning buzzer applied from outside the vehicle during
not a fault. Try to close the tailgate after sounds 10 times. In this case, stop the car
a while. in a safe location as soon as possible and
the power tailgate operation, the tailgate
close the tailgate securely. Make sure that stops moving or moves up to the fully
yy Remove any obstacles inside or outside
the vehicle around the tailgate path before the tailgate open warning on the instrument open position automatically.
closing the tailgate. cluster is deactivated before driving off. However, this anti-pinch protection
yy The power tailgate can be operated with yy Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate function may not work in a certain part
ignition switch turned OFF. With extended open and cargo sticking out the back of of the tailgate path where resistance
use, the power tailgate may wear down the vehicle. This may endanger other road
force applied is insufficient to change
your battery. users behind your vehicle or can damage
the vehicle body or components related to
the movement direction or the tailgate
yy Do not apply excessive force to the tailgate is almost closed.
during power tailgate operation. The power the tailgate.
tailgate may be damaged. yy If the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
parked on a hill, cargo may fall out of the Note
yy Do not operate the power tailgate with
heavy objects attached to it. The power vehicle causing serious personal injury. If the anti-pinch protection operation
tailgate may be damaged. yy A child holding a smart key can operate the is repeated, open or close the tailgate
power (smart) tailgate accidently, causing manually to check if the tailgate operates
yy Never modify or attempt to repair any of the
personal injury or damage to the vehicle normally.
power tailgate parts.
including objects around the tailgate.
yy Do not operate the power tailgate if one
wheel of the vehicle is lifted up by a jack yy Be careful not to let any part of your body Warning
for tire rotation or vehicle service, a wheel such as your hand get caught by accident
when closing the tailgate. Do not put objects or part of your body in
of the vehicle is off the ground because the tailgate path intentionally during power
of uneven road surface, or the vehicle is yy Close the tailgate as carefully as possible
tailgate operation to check the anti-pinch
parked on a very hilly terrain. The power to avoid injury because the tailgate can be
protection operation.
tailgate may have a malfunction. closed abruptly by its own weight.
yy Driving with the tailgate open can draw
exhaust gases into the cabin resulting in
carbon monoxide poisoning, let the cargo
fall out of the vehicle, or cause accidents.
Be sure to close the tailgate securely be-
fore driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to set power tailgate*
Tailgate outside switch Re-setting Open/ Adjusting Opening
Close Operation Height
1 Perform the following procedure to reset You can adjust the opening height of the
the power tailgate setting when the bat- power tailgate as desired.
tery is fully depleted, the power supply is 1. Open the power tailgate manually to
reconnected, or the power tailgate does the desired position.
not function normally.
2. Press and hold the power tailgate
1. Park the vehicle on a level ground inside switch ( 2 ) for 3 sec. or more.
and shift the gear selector lever to
3. A beep will be heard indicating that
the P position.
the adjusting is completed.
4. Press the power tailgate switch to
outside switch ( 1 ) for 3 sec. or more
close the tailgate automatically until
while pressing the power tailgate
it is fully closed.
inside switch ( 2 ).
5. Press the power tailgate switch again
to check if the tailgate is opened to the
the resetting is completed.
set position.
4. Close the tailgate completely by
hand.
Tailgate inside switch 5. Press the power tailgate switch to
check the AUTO open/close opera-
2 tion.
Caution
If the power tailgate does not function
properly even after the resetting proce-
dures, contact a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart tailgate operation*
Smart Tailgate
The smart tailgate is a comfort function Deactivating Smart Tailgate
Caution
which opens the tailgate automatically Pressing any button on a smart key yy The smart tailgate operation may be
when a user carrying a smart key is ap- (shown in the figure below) or moving delayed or the operation distance may
proaching the vehicle. out of the smart key beyond detection change in the following situation be-
area during the smart tailgate operation cause of frequency interference:
Note deactivates the function immediately. - When you are in an area near a facility
yy The smart tailgate function can be which emits strong radio frequencies,
enabled/disabled under "User settings such as police stations, public of-
menu → Door/Tailgate". Door LOCK button fices, broadcasting stations, military
yy When the smart tailgate is enabled, the facilities, transmitting towers, airports,
smart tailgate indicator comes on the Door UNLOCK harbors.
LCD screen of the instrument cluster. button - When you are carrying a smart key
Power tailgate along with a cell phone.
operation button yy The size of the smart key detection area
may change if one wheel of the vehicle
is lifted up by a jack for vehicle service
or the vehicle is parked on a very hilly
terrain.
yy Familiarize yourself with deactivation of
the smart tailgate for emergency.
yy Disable the smart tailgate operation
before washing the vehicle. Otherwise,
the tailgate can be opened accidently
during washing.
yy The tailgate will be opened automati-
cally whenever you are in the smart key
detection area with a smart key.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart Tailgate Open
Within approx. 1 m
If you stay in the tailgate antenna area (within a 1-meter radius After a smart key is detected, the hazard warning lamp flashes
from the backside of the vehicle) for 3 sec. or more while carrying twice and the warning buzzer sounds twice signifying that the
a smart key with the theft deterrent system armed, the smart tail- smart tailgate is activated, and then the tailgate is opened.
gate is activated along with the alarm in the following stages:
Note
Stage 1 - Detection warning
Press the button on the smart key to deactivate the smart tailgate.
Hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds once at
1 sec. intervals for 0.5 sec. (beep-, beep-, beep-)
Hazard warning lamp flashes 3 times and buzzer sounds 3 times
(beep, beep, beep)
Stage 3 - Open warning
Hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds twice
after smart tailgate is ready to be opened (beep, beep)
Note
The smart tailgate is activated 30 sec. after the theft deterrent system
is armed to avoid malfunctions of the smart tailgate system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety release lever
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on
the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage com-
partment.
You can open the tailgate inside vehicle.
1. Open the cover.
2. To unlock the tailgate, push the emergency safety release lever inside the trim panel
to right side.
3. Push the tailgate to open.
Warning
yy Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
yy For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release
lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the lug-
gage compartment.
Push
yy Do not allow children to play in cargo area. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever
Release lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury.
yy No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door open lever, lock/unlock knob and switch
Driver’s side Door Lock/Unlock Knob ( 1 )
Lock All doors will be locked/unlocked when moving the
1 knob to the respective lock/unlock direction (only
available at driver’s and front passenger’s door).
Unlock
2 Door Opening Lever ( 2 )
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
Note
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically unlocked when opening the
driver’s door.
yy The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can only lock or unlock its
respective door.
Child Safety Door Lock
Unlocked Locked
Unlock Lock
Child safety door lock helps prevent from an accidental door open, espe-
cially when children are in the vehicle. When the child-safe lever is in
(LOCK) position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.
Warning
Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe lever
to (LOCK) position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door LOCK/UNLOCK Switch Warning
yy Always check that all doors including tailgate are securely locked
before driving off. Opening a door during driving, especially by
children, may cause a serious accident.
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically un-
locked when opening the driver’s door. Opening the driver’s door
may cause a serious accident. Pay particular attention not to open
the door during driving.
yy When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for passing
vehicles or pedestrians. Vehicles or motorcycles coming from
the rear, if unchecked, might stumble on you when you open the
door.
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle with the
doors locked. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather.
If the door LOCK/UNLOCK switch (push self-return type) is

pressed with all doors including the tailgate locked, the door
AUTO Door LOCK
state is changed between unlocked and locked every time the All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle is driven at
switch is pressed. a speed of above the specified value with the doors unlocked.
Note Note
yy The vehicle cannot be locked when any of doors is open with any The options for door AUTO lock speed setting can be selected under
method (door lock knob, door lock/unlock switch, remote control “Instrument cluster User settings menu → Door/Tailgate”.
key, Smart key).
yy This switch is not available when any of doors are not fully closed
and the vehicle is in theft deterrent mode.
AUTO Door UNLOCK with Collision
yy The options for door AUTO lock function can be selected under Detection
“Instrument cluster User settings menu → Door/Tailgate”. (OFF /
When driving / When shifting to R, N, D) If the air bag is deployed in an accident occurred during driving
yy The options for door AUTO unlock function can be selected under with the doors locked, all doors will be unlocked automatically.
When IGN OFF / When shifting to P) Warning
The AUTO door UNLOCK may not function properly when the door
or the body is deformed by collision.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Opening and closing windows
Window LOCK Switch
Driver door window switch (AUTO) Pressing the switch changes the door window state as follows:
yy Driver side: Windows of all doors open/close operation avail-
Rear left door window
switch (AUTO) able
yy Passenger side: Passenger door window open/close opera-
Door LOCK/UNLOCK
switch tion available
Passenger door window yy Rear left/right side: Rear left/right windows open/close opera-
switch (AUTO) tion not available
Rear right window switch
(AUTO) Caution
Window LOCK switch When closing the windows of other doors by operating the window
switch on the driver door trim, make sure that the any body part of
the occupants is not caught by the moving window.
Warning
Door LOCK/UNLOCK Switch
When carrying children in the rear seats, press the window LOCK
The door (including fuel filler door) state is changed between switch to prevent the children from operating the window switch.
locked and unlocked each time the switch is pressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver door/Passenger Door Win- ►►To close the window
dow Switch (AUTO)* yy To close the window to the desired position, gently pull up the
front portion of the switch (not fully pulled up). The window
To lift up/down the windows, the ignition should be turned ON keeps moving as long as the switch is pulled up in this way.
or engine should be running. However, you can still open/close yy Fully pull up the front portion of the switch and then release
the windows during delay time for window operation. it to close the window automatically. (AUTO up)
yy If you want to stop the window from going all the way up dur-
Note
ing AUTO up operation, lightly press the switch again or pull
The window switch can be operated for 30 sec. after the ignition up the switch.
switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF. If the front door is opened,
the window operation stops immediately.
Note
►►To open the window yy If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto up operation it will
reverse direction and then stop at the preset position.
yy To open the window to the desired position, gently press the yy If you keep pulling up the front portion of the switch, the window
front portion of the switch (not fully pressed). The window will not reverse direction. This is a safety precaution to protect the
keeps moving as long as the switch is pressed in this way. driver from a criminal.
yy Fully push down the front portion of the switch and then re-
lease it to open the window automatically. (AUTO down) Caution
yy If you want to stop the window from going all the way down yy Operating 2 window switches at the same time may blow the fuse
during AUTO down operation, lightly press the switch again or damage the window lifting device.
or pull up the switch. yy If the window switch on the driver door and window switch on an-
other door are operated at the same time in the opposite direction,
the window lifting system may fail.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Seat Window Switch Anti-Trap System for Driver’s Win-
Type A Type B
dow
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to automati-
cally reverse when something is caught in the window as it is
closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the window will
be lowered immediately.
You can open the window using To move windows up or down,

this switch in the same way as pull up or press the correspond-
the driver/passenger window ing switch for the window.
AUTO switch is operated.
Warning
yy Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can
be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
yy Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
from the vehicle while driving.
Caution
yy The anti-trap safety system is available only for the driver’s window
equipped with the automatic rolling up (Auto-up) function.
yy The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
top of the glass and window frame is very close.
yy If the window is stuck in very cold weather, anti safety function may
work. In this case, fully close the window by switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine hood
OPENING THE ENGINE HOOD CLOSING THE ENGINE HOOD
1. Observe the following precautions before closing the engine
hood.
Caution
yy Make sure that all filler caps in the engine compartment are closed
securely.
yy Check that no service tools or items, such as gloves, screwdrivers,
are left in the engine compartment.
A
2. Slightly push the lowered engine hood to close it com-
pletely.
1. Pull the release lever ( ) located on the lower left side of the Caution
steering wheel to unlatch the engine hood. If the closed engine hood is lifted up, open the engine hood again
and close the hood as hard as possible to close it securely.
Warning
B yy Make sure that your clothes or tools do not contact or tangle with
any moving parts in the engine compartment when the hood is
open with engine running.
yy Check that the engine hood is fully latched in position by pulling
at the front edge of the hood before driving.
yy Be cautious about strong wind that may cause a sudden close of
the engine hood, resulting in serious injuries.
yy Do not check the engine compartment in an area where strong
wind blows.
yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that none of your body
2. Hold the engine hood slightly open to pull the safety latch parts are trapped.
lever ( ) up using your fingers and lift up the engine hood
completely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filler door
Opening Fuel Filler Door
D
E
A
B
D
C
1. Move the gear selector lever to the 4. Pull the fuel filler cover ( C ) toward 6. Hang the fuel filler cap ( D ) on the
P position. yourself to open it. holder ( E ) mounted on the inner side
2. Turn off the engine. 5. Turn the fuel filler cap ( D ) counter- of the cover.
3. Press on the center edge ( B ) of the clockwise to open it. 7. After refueling, turn the cap ( D )
fuel filler cover ( A ) with all doors clockwise until you hear a “click”,
Caution and close the cover ( E ) by pushing
unlocked.
Stop the engine before refueling. it back.
Note
The fuel filler cover can be opened when
all doors are unlocked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy Be careful not to allow the fuel to contact the painted surface of yy Always pay attention when opening the fuel filler cap, as the fuel
the body as it can damage the paintwork. may be pressurized. If you hear a hissing sound with fuel leaks,
yy If the fuel filler door is frozen shut in the winter, do not attempt to wait until no sound is heard.
apply any excessive force on the fuel filler door. Lightly tap on the yy Discharge any static electricity by touching any metal part which
edge of the door to open it. is at a safe distance away from the fuel filler with your bare hands
yy Use only genuine parts when replacing the fuel filler cap. before grabbing a fuel supply gun or touching fuel filler cap.
yy To fill the tank completely, top up until the pump nozzle of the fuel yy Getting in and out of the vehicle during fueling can cause fire due
supply gun stops working. to charged static electricity. Do not get in or out of the vehicle
yy Do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling to avoid fuel spillage and during fueling.
overflowing due to thermal expansion. yy When fueling using a portable tank, make sure that the fueling is
carried out outdoors and the tank is on the ground during fueling.
Fueling with the portable tank placed on the vehicle or fueling
indoors can cause fire due to static electricity.
yy Always stop the engine when refueling. Use only the designated
fuel and low sulfur diesel.
yy Always turn off the engine, do not use a lighter, and never have any
smoking materials lit during fueling for fire protection.
yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel, fuel blended with water or im-
proper fuel additives to the fuel tank, the fuel system and exhaust
gas system may be seriously damaged.
yy Always check the fuel to be used before filling the fuel tank. If a
diesel-engine vehicle is misfueled with gasoline, the fuel system
and other vehicle systems can be seriously damaged.
yy Never use a cellular phone near a gas station. The electromagnetic
field emitted from the cellular phone can cause fire.
yy If a fire occurs during refueling, evacuate the area immediately
and call 911 or local fire station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sunroof* For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
Sunroof Switch
The sun-roof cover opens and closes manually.
OPEN
CLOSE
Caution
yy Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly
with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
yy When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in
winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the interior of
the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
yy When the sunroof is slid to its complete open position, the wind buffet phenomenon can increase. If this happens, adjust by opening the sunroof
or only open two thirds of the sunroof by using only the first step of the opening system.
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
yy Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution
yy Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car
wash or rain may lead to water entering
yy Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts
or particles entered can cause operating problems.
yy If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo
is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are
required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack
system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open
the sunroof.
Warning
yy Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of
his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a
risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
yy Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand,
finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of
personal injury or even death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF SLIDING OPERATION SUNROOF TILTING OPERATION
►►Open: 2-Step Opening ►►Tilt Up

yy Push up the switch briefly: 2-step auto sliding open The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the
When pushing up the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
automatically opened by two third of its travel (first step). When
pushing up and holding the sunroof switch again, the sunroof ►►Tilt Down
is completely opened (second step). The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up
yy Push up and hold the switch: manual sliding open the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
The sunroof is opened as long as pushing up the switch.
►►Close
yy Pull down the switch briefly: auto sliding close
When pulling down the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is
automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or
push the switch at desired position while moving.
yy Pull down and hold the switch: manual sliding close
The sunroof is closed as long as pulling down the switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Pinch Function* Sunroof Open Warning Buzzer
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed
sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof with the sunroof open, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the
when an object is trapped. sunroof is opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when
closing the door. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though
the door is opened again.
Wind Buffeting
When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at
a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears
or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This hap-
pens because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof
and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the
window or sunroof.
Caution
yy This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof Battery Discharge or Power Failure while Operat-
close. ing Sunroof
yy The anti-Pinch function is deactivated just before the sunroof
closes.
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point
yy Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable
depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the of the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
vehicle, etc.), therefore the driver should check safety at all times calibration.
before operating the sunroof. yy The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating
the switch once.
Warning yy The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. yy The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open
yy Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in or tilt up.
stationary.
yy The sunroof does not work.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Recalibrating the Sunroof Starting Point
yy If you pull and hold the Close switch for 5 seconds while the
rear side of the sunroof is tilted up, the sunroof starting point
will be recalibrated with a thumping sound.
yy If the sunroof still does not operate properly after recalibrating
the start point, bring your vehicle into a Ssangyong dealer or
Ssangyong authorized service center for an inspection.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver seat easy access*
Easy Access Operation
This system is designed to provide sufficient space for entering Easy exit: Opening the driver door with IGN OFF and gear selec-
and exiting the driver seat by moving the driver seat rearward. tor lever in the P position moves the driver seat rearward.
The driver seat has a memory function that can store and recall Easy entry: Opening the driver door after disarming the theft
the seat position and outside rearview mirror position settings deterrent system moves the driver seat rearward and closing the
for up to 3 different drivers. This memory function is controlled driver door returns the driver seat to its original position.
by a button, which is mounted on the driver seat.
yy Pressing the button ac-
tivates the easy access
function (Indicator lamp
ON).
yy Pressing the button again
deactivates the function
(Indicator lamp OFF).
1
Caution
yy The driver seat always move to its most rearward point of travel
2
regardless of the current position.
yy The final seat position will not be always the same when using easy
access function. There will be some differences within the accept-
able range depending on the occupant's weight and vehicle power
3 4 supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault.
yy Make sure that the parking brake is applied before adjusting the
seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle
1. Driver seat easy access ON/OFF switch cannot move.
2. Driver seat position memory set switch yy Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy
access function is activated as it can cause malfunctioning of the
3. Driver seat memory position switch easy access function.
4. Driver seat position memory clear switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting Driver Seat and Outside Caution
Rearview Mirror Memory yy If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while set-
ting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the
memory setting will be cancelled.
yy Press the driver seat position memory clear switch ( B ) to stop the
seat and outside rearview mirrors from moving.
yy If you do not press any memory switch within 5 sec. after press-
ing the driver seat position memory SET switch ( A ), the memory
setting will be cancelled.
A
Driver Seat Position Memory Re-

call
B
1. Press one of the ( ), ( ), and ( ) switches in which your
profile is stored. When the seat position recall operation is
completed, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
2. The driver seat and outside rearview mirrors move to the
1. Turn on the ignition switch (Do not start the engine for safety) memorized position. If the vehicle is driven during the memory
and move the gear selector lever to the P position (A/T). recall operation, the seat and outside rearview mirrors stop
2. Adjust the driver seat and outside rearview mirrors to the moving immediately.
desired positions. 3. Wait until they stop moving.
3. Press the driver seat memory set switch ( A ). The indicator
on the switch comes on.
4. Press one of the ( ), ( ), and ( ) switches within 5 sec. to
store the driver seat position.
5. When the memorizing process is completed, you will hear a
double chime.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Exterior lamp
Turn signal lamp & Tail lamp (DRL)
Headlamp (High beam) Headlamp (Low beam) Side repeater Puddle lamp
Front door outside handle lamp
Cornering lamp Front fog lamp
Bulb type
Front fog
lamp
Tail lamp/Stop lamp High mounted stop lamp
Back-up lamp or
Turn signal lamp
rear fog light
License plate lamp
Reflex reflector

GETtheMANUALS.org
Light Switch OFF Light OFF ( 1 )
Turns off the lights.
AUTO AUTO light ( 2 )
Headlamps and tail lamps are automatically turned on/off de-
pending on the intensity of the light analyzed by the automatic
light sensor.
Tail lamp ON ( 3 )
Side-marker lights, tail lamps, license plate lamps, front fog
lamps (with front fog lamp switch ON), and other indicators on
the interior switches are turned on.
Headlamp ON ( 4 )
Smart high beam ON
Headlamps, side marker lights, tail lamps, license plate lamps,
front fog lamps (with front fog lamp switch ON), and other interior
lights are turned on.
OFF Front fog lamp OFF ( 5 )

4 7 Front fog lamps are turned off.
3
6
2
Front fog lamp ON ( 6 )
5
1 With headlamps or tail lamps on, front fog lamps are turned on
when the switch is turned to ( ).
Rear fog lamp ( 7 )

With the headlights turned on, if the switch is turned in posi-
tion, the switch will return in front fog light position and the rear
fog lights will be on. The front and rear fog lights turn on at the
same time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Right turn signal lamp blink ( 1 )
Left turn signal lamp blink ( 2 )

Turning up or down the light switch in the direction of the arrow
1 makes the corresponding turn signal lamp flash.
Note
3 4 When the turn signal lamp is flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator on the instrument cluster also flashes.
High beam ON ( 3 )
2 To turn on the headlamp high beam, push the light switch towards
the instrument cluster with the low beam on.
Passing ( 4 )
Regardless of the position of the light switch, if you pull and hold
the light switch toward your body, the high beam and low beam
are turned on during the hold.
Note
When the high beam is turned on the high beam indicator ( ) on
the instrument cluster is turned on.
Caution
Driving visibility for the drivers on the opposite side road or drivers
of other vehicles may be interrupted by your headlamps. Therefore
always check the surroundings before turning on the headlamps.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Coming-Home Light Control Leaving-Home Light Control
Coming-home light ON Leaving-home light ON
yy If the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF with the head- If the theft deterrent is disarmed by pressing the door UNLOCK
lamps (low beam) ON, the headlamps (low beam) stay on for switch on the smart key or door handle switch, the headlamps
the set time. (low beam) come on and stay on for the set time.
Coming-home light OFF Leaving-home light OFF

yy The headlamps (low beam) are turned off after the set time yy The headlamps (low beam) are turned off after the set time
with all doors including the tailgate closed. for leaving-home light.
yy If any door or the tailgate is open during this set time, the yy Pressing the door LOCK switch on the smart key with leaving-
headlamps (low beam) will be turned off after 3 min. home light ON turns off the headlamps (low beam). (Theft
yy If any open door or the tailgate is closed during this set time, deterrent system is armed.)
the headlamps (low beam) will be turned off after the set yy Turning on the ignition switch with leaving-home light ON turns
time. off the light immediately.
yy Turning the AUTO light and headlamp (low beam) switch to
Note
the off position turns off the light immediately.
You can set the leaving-home light ON time under User settings →
Note Light. (Disable, 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec.)
You can set the coming-home light ON time under User settings →
Light. (Disable, 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Welcome Light Cornering Lamp
Puddle lamp
Right cornering lamp Left cornering lamp
The welcome lights on the side of the vehicle (puddle lamp and The cornering lamp automatically comes on when the vehicle
door handle lamp) improve the visibility and safety at night. makes a left or right turn to improve the visibility for the corre-
The welcome lights (puddle lamp and door handle lamp) are sponding side during night time driving.
turned on and stay on for 30 sec. if any of the following condi- The cornering lamp automatically comes on if any of the following
tions is fulfilled. conditions is fulfilled with the headlamps ON. At this time, the
yy The door LOCK/UNLOCK button on the smart key is pressed fog lamps do not come on.
with all doors closed. Gear selector
- Condition 1 Condition 2
yy The door LOCK/UNLOCK button on the door outside handle lever
switch is pressed with the theft deterrent armed and all doors Vehicle speed 3 to 10 km/h 10 to 40 km/h
closed. Position D Steering wheel
yy You enter the area within a 1-meter radius from the vehicle 100° or greater 35° or greater
angle
while carrying the smart key.
Position R Left/right cornering lamp AUTO ON

GETtheMANUALS.org
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
yy To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard

warning flasher switch.
yy Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
you stop or park under emergency conditions.
Warning
Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Battery
could be discharged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daytime Running Light* Daytime running light operation
For the vehicle equipped with DRL (Daytime Running Light), the yy With the key in IGN ON position (regardless of engine start),
DRL is turned on automatically when the ignition switch is turned DRL will operate at all times if the fog lights/headlamps
ON (regardless of engine running) to make your vehicle more switches are OFF.
visible to other drivers. yy Compared to the tail lamps, the DRL offers brighter light,
although the DRL and the tail lamps share the same light
bulb.
Daytime Running yy While the DRL is operating, the tail lamps of rear combination
Light (DRL)* lamp and license plate lamp will turn on simultaneously.
The DRL will be turned off when:

1. Front fog lamp ON
2. Headlamp low beam ON or Headlamp ON by AUTO light
3. Parking brake (EPB) applied at the vehicle speed of 3 km/h
or less (AUTO HOLD switch OFF)
4. Left/Right turn signal lamp activated (DRL on the correspond-
ing side)
5. Hazard warning lamp flashing
6. IGN OFF

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC LIGHT* AUTOMATIC LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR*
W/FCM W/O FCM
Auto light & Auto light &

rain sensor rain sensor
Front
camera
module
This senses the amount of rain to operate the windshield wiper

The auto light and rain sensor automatically (For detailed information of wiper operation, refer
senses the ambient illumina- to wiper and washer switch section).
tion intensity to determine the
timing for turning the head- Caution
lamps and tail lamps on or off Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly. On
AUTO automatically when the light uneven road, Auto Light may work improperly due to impacts and
switch is set to “AUTO”. vibrations from the ground.
Caution
Note
yy Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax.
yy In AUTO position (Light switch and Wiper switch), the head lamps
yy On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The
turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the climate, season,
are turned on when the wipers are started to operate by rain
or circumstances. sensing.
yy Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting system to mal- yy For vehicles with front camera module, pushing the light switch
function. lever toward the instrument panel with the light switch in AUTO
yy Ssangyong recommends you to use this function restrictively only at sunrise position activates the High Beam Assist System (HBAS). (HBAS
or sunset. indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster comes on at this time)
yy Usually turn the head or tail lights on or off manually.
yy Turn on the headlamps when passing through a dark area such as a tunnel.
yy On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn the head or
tail lights on or off manually.
yy When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights
might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognizing the
automatic setting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HBAS (HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM)* Note
HBAS automatically switches high beams to low beams when ap- yy Delay Time for High-Beams to turn OFF after Switching to Low-
proaching vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or a preceding Beams
vehicle so that the drivers of these vehicles are not dazzled. - After switching to low-beams, in that case that the high-beams
have been turned ON by the HBA (High Beam Assist) system,
* HBAS: High Beam Assist System the high-beams are automatically switched OFF after a few
seconds.
How To Turn ON HBAS yy When the smart HBA (High Beam Assist) system is activated, the
conditions for switching back to low-beams are as follows:
- HBAS detects that the vehicle ahead does not have its lights
ON
- Headlights of oncoming traffic are detected
- There are streetlamps or other sources of roadside light
AUTO - Tunnel lighting systems are detected
- Vehicle speed is 25 km/h or lower
1. Turn the light switch to 2. Push the light switch lever

AUTO position. toward the front of engine to Caution
activate the HBAS. HBAS may not be activated in the following situations:
yy The lamps of the oncoming or preceding vehicle are damaged.
HBAS Indicator yy The oncoming or preceding vehicle is blocked from your vision.
When the HBAS is activated, the HBAS indicator yy The windshield is contaminated (dust, fogging, sticker, snow, etc.)
on the instrument cluster is illuminated. or damaged.
yy The body of the oncoming or preceding vehicle is partially con-
cealed at road intersections or on sharp-curved roads.
yy Driving through a construction zone with reflective materials and
light sources.
►►Operating Conditions yy There is a light source or reflection resembling that of headlamps
HBAS is activated when all of the following conditions are met. ahead of the car
yy HBAS turned ON
yy Vehicle driving at 35 km/h or higher
yy It is considered to be night because of darkened environment.
yy There is no oncoming traffic or preceding vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Headlight leveling switch*
Headlight leveling guide
Level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
1 or 2 4 to 5/7 passen-
Condi- 4 to 5/7 1 passenger and
passenger(s) gers and heavy
tions passengers heavy goods
(Normal driving) goods
5-pas-
senger
seating
Approx. 200 kg Approx. 600 kg
Lowers
7-pas-
senger
Raises seating
Headlight Leveling Switch*

Caution
With the headlights ON, the level of headlight can be adjusted
by turning the switch when the vehicle heights of front and back yy For safety, perform the headlight leveling before driving your
vehicle.
are different due to the number of passengers and the loading
yy Adjust the level of headlight referring to the guide above, according
conditions of the vehicle.
to the number of passengers and the loading conditions.
4 stages (level 0 ~3) are available.
yy To raise the level of headlight: press the button down (level Warning
0 direction)
Inappropriate cases of leveling
yy To lower the level of headlight: press the button up (level 3 yy Driving with level 3 under level 0 conditions (lower the level): When
direction) an emergency occurs on the road ahead, safe driving may be af-
fected by late recognition of the emergency.
Note yy Driving with level 0 under level 3 conditions (Raise the level): Driv-
The higher the number on the headlight leveling switch, the smaller ing visibility for the vehicle driving ahead or opposite side road may
the headlight aiming angle. be interrupted by your inappropriate leveling.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior lamp
A Front room lamp Center, luggage compartment lamp E Foot lamp
Driver side Passenger side
B Sun visor lamp F Dashboard mood lamp (Passenger side)
B B
C F C
C Door inside handle lamp G Front door trim mood lamp
H
G D G
E E
D Dashboard lamp (Center) Door courtesy lamp H Glove box lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Room Lamp (Overhead Console) Caution
The battery may be depleted if a door is left open for an extended
period of time or you leave the vehicle with the room lamps ON
provided that the door switch is pressed in.
2 3
3 Passenger spot switch
1
5 The front room lamp of the passenger side comes on when this
switch is pressed.
4
4 Sunroof open/close switch
Pushing or pulling this switch opens or closes the sunroof.
Note
Note
Refer to Opening and Closing of Sunroof.
If the room lamps are turned on after the ignition switch is turned
off, the lamps will be turned off in approx. 10 minutes to prevent
battery discharge.
5 Interior mood lamp brightness control switch
The brightness of the interior mood lamp can be adjusted in 5
Caution steps by using the + and - buttons.
Do not turn on the room lamps during night time driving or driving in
low-light conditions. The room lamp can cause accidents by impairing Coupled Operation with Smart Key
the driver's field of vision.
If the door is unlocked by a smart key with the door coupled
1 Driver spot switch switch pressed in, the front room lamps are turned on and then
stay on for 30 sec. Pressing the LOCK button on the smart key
The front room lamp of the driver side comes on when this switch
turns off the lamps immediately.
is pressed.
2 Door coupled switch Note
If a door is open with the door coupled switch pressed in, the front
The front room lamp and center room lamp come on when open-
room lamps stay on regardless of the front room lamp switch opera-
ing a door with this switch pressed in. If the door is closed, the tion.
lamps fade to off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Center Room Lamp Luggage Compart- Sun Visor Lamp (Mir-
ment Lamp ror)
Sun visor lamp
Card holder
Vanity mirror
Pressing the center room lamp switch The luggage compartment lamp comes Swing the sun visor down and lift up
turns on the center room lamp. Pressing on when the tailgate is open and it goes the cover to reveal the mirror. The sun
the switch again turns off the center room out when the tailgate is closed. visor lamp is turned on when the cover
lamp. The center room lamp comes on is lifted up.
when the door is opened regardless of Caution
the center room lamp switch operation if The battery may be depleted if the tailgate Note
the door coupled switch is pressed in. is not closed completely or the luggage You can increase the sun block coverage
compartment lamp is left on for an ex- by using a pull out extension on the sun
Caution tended period of time. visor.
The battery may be depleted if a door is
left open for an extended period of time Caution
with the door coupled switch pressed in.
Always close the vanity mirror cover after
use. The battery may be depleted or you
could be injured in an accident if the sun
visor cover is left open.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door Courtesy Lamp Glove Box Lamp Foot Lamp
(Front Seat)
Driver side
The door courtesy lamp is turned on The glove box lamp is turned on when Passenger side
when the door is opened and goes off the glove box lid is opened and goes off
when the door is closed. when the glove box lid is closed.
Caution
Driving with glove box lid open can cause
injury in case of an accident or a sudden
stop. Make sure that the glove box lid is
closed when driving the vehicle.
When the driver or passenger door is

opened, the foot lamp on the correspond-
ing side is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior Mood Lamp*
B B
D
C
A
C C Front door trim mood lamp
Dashboard Lamp Door Handle Lamp

(Center)
D
B
A
Dashboard mood lamp
(Passenger side)
This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp

is turned on.
The mood lamps on the driver and pas-
This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp senger side are illuminated in light blue.
is turned on. is turned on. The brightness of the this lamp can be
This lamp illuminates the storage area The lamp illuminates the front door adjusted in 5 steps by using the interior
on the front side. handle softly. mood lamp control switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Wiper and washer switch
Front Wiper Switch
If you move the wiper switch to “MIST” position and
release it, the windshield wipers operate one wiping
MIST cycle. The wipers will operate continuously if the
switch is held in this position.
OFF Wipers are not in operation.
Operates automatically according to the vehicle

AUTO speed and amount of rainfall.
LO Continuous wipe, slow operation
HI Continuous wipe, fast operation
Front windshield wiper speed

control switch
With AUTO position selected, rotate the switch upward for high
speed and rotate the switch downward for low speed.
Note
Front Automatic Wiping Speed Control Switch
The interval of wiping speed can be adjusted by turning the control
knob upward or downward when the windshield wiper switch is in
AUTO position.
Fast: Fast interval
Slow: Slow interval

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front windshield and washer fluid linkage
REAR Wiper Switch Pulling the switch for less than 6 seconds: windshield
wipers operate once with washer fluid sprayed
HI Pulling the switch for longer than 6 seconds; windshield
wipers operate 3 times with washer fluid sprayed
Rear windshield wiper
The windshield wipers operate constantly while the
operates in high speed.
switch is pulled.
LO
operates in low speed. Front Auto Washer
Switch
OFF
When you press this switch with the front
Rear windshield wiper wiper switch in “OFF” position, washer fluid
stops operating. will be sprayed and the wiper will automati-
cally operate 4 times. Then, the fluid will be
sprayed again and the wiper will automatically
operate 3 times.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will be sprayed

Front windshield wiper onto the rear window glass and the wiper will also operate.
When the switch is released, it will return to the “OFF”
speed control switch position and turn off the wiper and washer.
With AUTO position selected, rotate the switch
upward for high speed and rotate the switch
downward for low speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rain sensing wiper*
Wiper AUTO Position When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor
detects the amount of rainfall, turns on the wiper, and controls
the intermittent wiper intervals.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR*

With front camera module Without front camera module

Front
Volume switch The wiping speed is adjustable camera
by the volume switch with the module
wiper switch in AUTO posi-

tion. It controls the wiping speed by detecting the amount of rain
drops.
AUTO Warning
When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes,
Caution the wiper may operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make
sure to place the wiper switch and ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
yy When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, the wiper will operate tion when not in use.
once if the initial engine start is made. This may wear the wiper blades
prematurely (especially in winter). Therefore, other than rainy days, set
the switch to the “OFF” position. In winter, ensure that the wiper blades Note
are not frozen and are not stuck to the windshield. Otherwise, this may yy When the light and wiper switches are in the “AUTO” position,
cause some damage to the wiper motor. headlights come on if the rain sensor detects any rain. The head-
yy If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch lights stay on for 3 minutes after the rain stops.
the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper with yy The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster when it is dark
the washer when the glass is dry. enough to turn on the automatic lights.
yy Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash to yy When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will auto-
avoid unwanted operation of the wipers. matically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF”
yy When it is not raining, place the wiper switch at the “OFF” position. to the “AUTO” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Outside rearview mirror control switch
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR AUTO TILT
DOWN CONTROL IN REVERSE*
If the gear selector lever is moved to the R position with the out-
1 side rearview mirror selection switch in left or right, the outside
rearview mirror will be tilted down to the set angle.
2
If the outside rearview mirror is tilted down automatically, it
returns to its original position automatically when the position
of mirror selection switch is changed or gear selector lever is
moved from the R to other position.
Note
3 The options for the outside rearview mirror AUTO tilt down control in
reverse (5 degrees, 4 degrees, 3 degrees, 2 degrees) can be selected
under “User settings menu > Functions for driver comfort > Outside
rearview mirror angle in reverse”. The outside rearview mirror angle
for the driver and passenger sides can be set independently from
each other.
1 Outside Rearview Mirror Folding/Unfolding Switch
To fold outside rearview mirror, press the right side of the switch Caution
down ( ). Operating the mirror selection switch intensively can deactivate the
mirror operation.
To unfold outside rearview mirror, press the left side of the switch
down ( ).
2 Mirror Selection Switch
yy “L”: Driver side mirror
yy “R”: Passenger side mirror
3 Aiming Switch
Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left, or right by pressing the
corresponding edges of the switch to get a desired view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Outside Rearview Mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding
Caution
yy To prevent from the mirror surface being damaged, do not scrape
Mode
the ice when the mirrors are frozen. While outside rearview mirror Folding/Unfolding switch is in neu-
yy If the frozen outside rearview mirrors are not moving, do not try to tral position (not pressed ( )), the outside rearview mirrors
move them with excessive force by hands. Otherwise, the mirrors are automatically folded when doors are locked by lock button
could be damaged. on REKES/Smart key (theft deterrent mode activated), and the
yy The outside rearview mirrors can be folded and unfolded even mirrors are unfolded when doors are unlocked (theft deterrent
after shutting off the engine. mode deactivated). This mode is activated as follows:
yy To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
- REKES key:
outside rearview mirrors with the ignition OFF.
yy The mirror folding operation is not available when the vehicle speed yy When pressing the Lock/Unlock button on the REKES key
exceeds 30 km/h. However, unfolding operation is available. yy When inserting the ignition key of the REKES key into the key
yy Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It may hole to unlock the door
cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system.
- Smart key:
yy The mirror cannot move beyond its operating range but the motor
continues running as long as the switch is pressed. To prevent the yy When pressing the Lock/Unlock button on the smart key
motor being damaged, stop operating the switch when the mirror yy When touching the Lock/Unlock button on the outside handle
is at desired position. of the front door
yy If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote-
controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in yy When inserting the mechanical key of the smart key into the
the mirror system. key hole to unlock the door
Warning
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting
Note
The outside rearview mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding mode will not yy Activation of Auto Folding/Unfold-
work while the switch is pressed in any position. (left ( ) or ing mode
right ( )) This mode is activated with the
outside rearview mirror Folding/
Caution Unfolding switch in neutral position
The outside rearview mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding mode is not (not pressed( )).
available when the theft deterrent system is not armed. yy Deactivation of Auto Folding/Unfold-
yy The doors are locked with the REKES key or emergency key of ing mode
the SMART key.
This mode is deactivated with the
yy One of the doors including tailgate and engine hood is not closed
outside rearview mirror Folding/Un-
completely.
folding switch pressed in any position
yy The ignition switch is not set to ON position (for vehicles with
SMART key). (right ( ) or left ( )).

GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
Inside rearview mirror to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (Anti-glare auto adjustment function)* Manual Type Inside Rearview Mirror
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side Manual Day/Night Adjustment
ways to obtain the best view. You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pull-
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automati- ing its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other
cally adjusted by the light intensity from the subsequent vehicle vehicles behind you.
you to prevent the driver from being dazzled.
Caution
Caution When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may not oper- the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling
ate properly. it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
yy When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the inside
rearview mirror’s sensor.
yy When the rear window has a dark tinted glass. Warning
yy When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti-glare For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview.
yy For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning
yy The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it
to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush
with water and see your doctor.
yy For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Heater/air conditioner system
Airflow direction
control lever
5
8 8 Vent open/
4 close dial
9 9
2 2
3 3 : Open
1 : Close
10 You can adjust the direction of the airflow

by moving the airflow direction control
lever on the air outlet.
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
7 7
using the vent dial.
6
Caution
Do not attach items such as cup holder
1. Heater and A/C control 6. Rear vent air outlet to the outlet guide fin. The guide fin may
be damaged.
2. Vent center air outlet 7. Rear foot duct (Bottom of front seat)
3. Vent side air outlet 8. Defroster center air outlet
4. Sun sensor 9. Defroster side air outlet
5. Windshield fog detection sensor 10. Interior temperature sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings and cautions
Refrigerant Specification & Capacity Warning
yy If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all
Item Type A Type B the windows closed, you may suffocate to death due to lack of
ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ven-
Specification R-1234yf R134a tilate frequently.
Single A/C 520 ± 30g 550 ± 30g yy Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the
Capacity interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do not use the
Dual A/C 800 ± 30g 850 ± 30g recirculation mode for a long period of time.
yy If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon monoxide
poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode after passing
through an area of smoke or fumes.
yy Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in the vehicle
with the air conditioner or heater on in hot or cold weather. The
child or handicapped person can be in serious danger by the heat
and lack of oxygen.
yy Refrigerant is flammable which can cause the fire by the gas
leakage or static, so be very careful when handling Refrigerant
(R-1234yf).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution
yy If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows
to extract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
yy Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle
is parked may cause the engine to overheat.
yy When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on
and off the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
yy To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended
period of time when the engine is not running.
yy To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubri-
cation of the air conditioner compressor and related components,
run the air conditioner at low speed once a week even during the
season than summer.
yy Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may
produce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off
and wait for a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping
the engine.
yy If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not
start easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle
to vibrate. Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
yy When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out.
Run the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened
and you could remove the odors.
yy During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run
the air conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
yy If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C
compressor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be
sure to turn the air conditioner at low speed.
yy When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is
operating, you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in
compressor. This is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner
system (by lowering the excessively high refrigerant pressure).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Automatic heater/air conditioner*
1 1
B D 2 3 B
A C C E
14
4 5 6 7 8 9
15
10 11 12 13
16
1. Operation indicator display 4. Driver side temperature control 10. Recirculation/Fresh air mode
A. Driver side set temperature switch switch
B. AQS indicator 5. AUTO switch 11. Vent/Foot mode switch
C. Fan speed indicator 6. Vent mode switch 12. Foot mode switch
D. AUTO defogger indicator 7. Defroster/Foot mode switch 13. Rear A/C switch (only DUAL A/C
8. SYNC switch (to sync with driver for 7 people)
E. Passenger side set temperature
side set temperature) 14. Fan speed dial
2. Defroster switch
9. Passenger side temperature control 15. A/C switch
3. Glass heater switch
switch 16. ON/OFF switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operation of heater and A/C control
Heater and A/C ON/OFF Driver/Passenger Side Tempera-
1. Pressing ON/OFF switch ( 1 ) turns ON the climate control sys- ture Control Switch
tem. The system is turned on with previous status resumed. Press the driver side temperature control switch ( 1 ) to set the
2. Pressing the ON/OFF switch again ( 1 ) turns off the sys- temperature on the driver side.
tem. yy Operating this switch with the SYNC indicator ( 3 ) ON chang-
es the passenger side temperature simultaneously.
yy The set temperature can be changed in 0.5°C graduations
with this switch.
3 Indicator
1
4
Note 1 2
If you press other control switch without pressing the heater and A/C
ON switch first, the temperature and air distribution mode can be
controlled but the fan remains off. (except for SYNC button)
Independent Temperature Control
1. Press the SYNC switch ( 4 ) or passenger side temperature
control switch ( 2 ).
2. The SYNC indicator ( 3 ) is turned off.
3. Under this condition the temperature setting for the driver and
front passenger sides are controlled independently.
SYNC With Driver Side Temperature

1. Press the SYNC switch ( 4 ).
3. The temperature setting for both the driver and front passenger
sides is controlled by the driver side temperature control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Manual Control
yy If temperature is set to LO Use this feature while the engine is running.
-T he system is automatically set to A/C ON, vent mode, recircula-
tion mode. 1. Press the ON/OFF switch ( 1 ).
yy If temperature is set to HI 2. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control
- The system is automatically set to A/C OFF, foot mode, fresh air switch ( 2 ).
mode.
3. Turn the fan speed dial ( 3 ) to adjust the amount of air flow.
4. Press the air distribution mode switch to select the direction
AUTO Control of the air flow.
5. Press the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 4 ) to select the air
Use this feature while the engine is running. source.
1. If the AUTO switch ( 1 ) is pressed, the indicator on the switch 6. Press the air conditioner switch ( 5 ) to use A/C.
is turned on.
2. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control Note
switch ( 2 ). Pressing the AUTO switch in manual mode changes the climate con-
trol system to AUTO mode and the climate functions are controlled
Note automatically based on the set temperature.
yy The fan speed and air distribution mode are controlled automati-
cally based on the set temperature, indoor temperature, and out- 3
door temperature.
yy Pressing recirculation/fresh air switch, fan speed dial, air distribu-
tion mode switch, A/C switch, or defroster switch in AUTO mode 5
deactivates the AUTO mode and the system is set to manual mode. 2 2
(The indicator on the AUTO switch goes off.) 1
4
Indicator
1
2 2

GETtheMANUALS.org
A 2 A
1 ecirculation/fresh air
R 2 Fan speed dial 3 A/C switch
switch The amount of air flow can be adjusted If this switch is pressed, the indicator
If this switch is pressed, the indicator on by turning the fan speed dial. The relative on the switch comes on and the A/C is
the switch comes on and the system is amount of air flow is displayed on the op- activated.
put into recirculate mode. eration indicator display ( A ) as the dial is Pressing this switch again turns off the
turned clockwise/counterclockwise. indicator and turns off the A/C.
Pressing this switch again turns off the
indicator and switches the system to
fresh air mode.
Warning
yy Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time. Doing so can
cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.
yy If exhaust gases flow in, there is a risk of Carbon monoxide poisoning. Use
recirculation mode while driving in dusty conditions and switch back to fresh
air mode as soon as you leave these areas.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air distribution mode switch Glass heater switch
You can select the direction of air flow using this switch. yy Pressing this switch turns on the heating element of the glass
The indicator of the switch pressed comes on. for 12 minutes (indicator ON).
yy Press the switch again to stop the operation (indicator OFF).
yy Use this switch to dehumidify the indoor air or defrost.
1
yy If the switch is pressed again within 10 minutes after comple-
2 4 tion of its first operation cycle (12 min.) the heating element of
the glass will be turned on for about 6 minutes.
3 5
yy The indicator on the switch comes on when the heating ele-
ment is in use.
1 Air is directed toward the windshield glass and door

windows. If you press the defroster switch, the system
is automatically switched to fresh air mode and the
A/C is turned on.
2 Air is directed toward the face.
(default mode when cooling)
3
Air is directed toward the face and feet. Note
The heating element of glass is activated only when the engine is
4 running. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating ele-
Air is directed toward the feet, windshield glass, ments of the rear window, windshield, and outside rearview mirrors
door windows. are turned on simultaneously.
5 Air is directed toward the feet. (default mode when
Windshield heater Rear window heater
heating)
Note
In this mode, some air flows to the windshield
glass d and door windows to prevent the wind-
shield from fogging up.
Outside rearview
mirror heater

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Dehumidify Window Glass Caution
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ) (indicator ON). yy Excessive use of A/C with air distribution in foot mode, defroster/
2. Rotate the fan speed dial ( 2 ) from the OFF position. foot mode, or defroster mode creates a higher difference between
indoor and outdoor temperature. This temperature difference
3. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial causes the fogging on the outside of the windshield. If this is the
( 2 ) to a high speed position. case, use the wiper blades to immediately clear fog on the wind-
4. To remove the fog on the outside of the glass, set the tem- shield and change the air distribution mode to vent mode (toward
face) to minimize the temperature difference.
perature high.
yy Make sure to remove any foreign materials such as snow and
leaves on the air inlets to avoid window fogging, especially in
2 winter and summer.
1
Warning
3 With rainy or highly humid condition, fog appears on the windshield
or front side windows even the A/C is ON. If windows are foggy, it
is dangerous to drive because of poor frontal and side visibilities. If
this is the case, press the recirculation/fresh air switch to select fresh
air source and select the defroster mode for air distribution to direct
Note
the air to the windshield.
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set
the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) to the fresh air mode.
Pressing the defroster switch ( 1 ) turns on the A/C, sets the system
to fresh air mode, and selects a fan speed (at least 1st fan speed).
Pressing this switch again returns the system to its original condi-
tion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AQS (Air Quality System) Deactivation conditions
The AQS (Air Quality System) blocks the fresh air inlet to prevent yy Air source is selected manually by pressing the recirculation/
the harmful gases from entering if the concentration of hazardous fresh air switch.
gases in air is higher than the specified value. yy The driver side set temperature is set to ‘LO (lowest)’, ‘HI
If the concentrations of hazardous gases go below the speci- (highest)’.
fied values, the system is automatically switched to the fresh yy AUTO defogger is activated (AUTO defogger overrides
air mode. AQS).
yy The defroster and defroster/foot mode switch is pressed.
AQS indicator yy The ON/OFF button is pressed to turn off the climate control
At initial engine start-up, the AQS indicator comes on ( 1 ) and the system.
recirculation air indicator comes on ( 2 ) for 40 seconds. During
this time, AQS is warmed-up and its function does not work. Enabling/disabling AQS
If hazardous gages are detected in the outside air in AUTO mode,
the system is switched to recirculation mode. At this time, the How to set
AQS indicator ( 1 ) and indicator on the recirculation/fresh air Press and hold the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) and briefly
switch ( 2 ) are turned on. press the OFF switch ( 4 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO indicator
The AQS blocks the intrusion of hazardous gages, such as NO, ( 5 ) + recirculation/fresh air indicator ( 2 ) flash for 3 sec.)
NO2, SO2, CO, with concentration higher than the reference
How to disable
value. It cannot protect the vehicle from odor.
Press and hold the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) and briefly
1 press the OFF switch ( 4 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO indicator
( 5 ) flashes for 3 sec.)
Caution
yy If driving in urban area or polluted area for a long time is neces-
sary, there is a risk for moisture accumulation in the cabin due
to prolonged operation of AQS. Because of this accumulated
moisture, the AUTO defogger may be activated resulting in AQS
5 deactivation.
2 4 yy The AQS activation may be delayed or it may not operate at all
depending on the driving conditions.
3

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO defogger system Indicator
If the inner side of windshield fogs up during heater or A/C opera- 1 2

tion, the AUTO defogger system removes the moisture on the
glass to guarantee optimum visibility for safety reasons.
If moisture on the glass is detected, the AUTO defogger indicator 3
( 1 ) comes on indicating that the moisture on the glass is being
removed automatically.
The higher the humidity, the higher the AUTO defogger operation Warning
level. For example, if operation level 1 does not help operation yy Pressing the recirculation/flesh air switch to activate recirculation
level is switched from level 2 to level 4 in sequence until the mode during AUTO defogger operation reduces defogging effect.
humidity is controlled properly. To maximize the visibility, do not press the recirculation/flesh air
Level 1 - Air source selection is changed to fresh air mode. switch during AUTO defogger operation.
yy Never remove the sensor cover on the upper side of the windshield.
Level 2 - A/C ON The AUTO fog detection sensor can be damaged while removing
Level 3 - Defrost mode(air is directed to windshield) the cover.
Level 4 - Fan speed increases (deforest mode)
Enabling/disabling AUTO defogger

How to disable Cluster Ionizer
Press and hold the defroster switch ( 2 ) and briefly press the
ON/OFF switch ( 3 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (Indicator on defroster The cluster ionizer produces ions by using high voltage when
switch flashes for 3 sec.) the climate control system is activated (heater and A/C) with the
engine running to suppress airborne germs, bacteria, odors.
How to set
Note
Press and hold the defroster switch ( 2 ) and briefly press the ON/
The ionizer is activated only when the vehicle engine is running.
OFF switch ( 3 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO defogger indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual heater/air conditioner
You can adjust the amount of air flow or turn on/off the heater/air conditioner by using the fan speed dial ( 3 ).
Using the temperature control dial ( 5 ) to adjust the temperature and selecting the air distribution mode ( 7 , 9 , 10 , 11 ) as desired can
make maintain pleasant interior conditions.
1 2
5
3
12
4 6 7 8
12
9 10 11
1. Defroster switch 6. Recirculation/Fresh air switch 11. Foot mode switch

2. Glass heater switch 7. Defroster/Foot mode switch 12. Dial position indicator (for indicate of
3. Fan speed dial 8. MAX A/C switch current dial position)
4. A/C switch 9. Vent mode switch
5. Temperature control dial 10. Vent/Foot mode switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Heater/Air conditioner operation Note
Use this feature while the engine is running. Turning the fan speed dial ( 1 ) without operating A/C switch ( 8 )
1. Adjust the amount of air flow by turning the fan speed dial ( 1 ). does not activate the air conditioner. It only changes the amount of
air flows through outlets.
2. Turn the temperature control dial ( 2 ) to set the desired indoor
temperature.
3. Press the mode selection switch ( 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 ) to select the Fan speed dial
desired air distribution mode.
1 Turning the fan speed dial ( 1 )
4. Press the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) to select the air toward ( A ) decreases the blow
source. speed, and turning the dial
5. Press the A/C switch ( 8 ) to use the air conditioner. toward ( B ) increases the blow
A B
The indicator on each switch comes on when the switch is speed. If the fan speed dial
pressed. Pressing the switch with indicator ON turns of the indica- position indicator ( C ) is in OFF
tor signifying that the corresponding feature is deactivated. position, the climate control
C system (heater and A/C) stops
The indicator on the recirculation/fresh air switch is turned on
working.
when the recirculation mode is selected.
1 2
Temperature control dial

8 3 4
2 Turning the temperature control
5 6 7 dial ( 2 ) toward ( A ) decreases
the set temperature, and turning
the dial toward ( B ) increases
A B
the set temperature.
Warning
Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time. Do-
ing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to
lack of oxygen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
3 MAX A/C switch
1 If the MAX A/C switch (3) is pressed during heater and A/C
operation, the system operates as follows:
2 3
1) A/C ON
2) Recirculation mode
3) Vent mode
4) Maintain Set Temperature Before Entering
1 Defroster switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting with IGN ON.
Pressing the defroster switch (1) turns on the indicator on the Note
switch and the air distribution mode is changed so that the air is 1. When system enters MAX A/C mode,
directed toward the windshield and door windows. At this time,
yy A/C stays on, recirculation air, vent mode, fan and temp dial
the A/C is activated and the air source selection is set to fresh remain in the state before entering MAX A/C mode
air mode.
2. MAX A/C activated when:
To cancel the defroster function, press any air distribution mode yy Fan dial on position (level 1 to level 7), temp dial turned to
switch or MAX A/C switch. COOL (blue) position (level 1 to level 7) and max A/C button
pressed
2 Recirculation/Fresh air switch 3. MAX A/C deactivated when:
If this switch is pressed, the indicator on the switch comes on yy All buttons excepting max A/C, hazard warning flasher and
and the system is put into recirculate mode. rear defroster buttons are operated
Pressing this switch again turns off the indicator and switches yy Fan dial is moved to OFF position or temp dial to hot position
the system to fresh air mode. (red position, 8-speed to 16-speed)
Warning
yy Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time.
Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window
due to lack of oxygen.
yy If exhaust gases flow in, there is a risk of Carbon monoxide poison-
ing. Use recirculation mode while driving in dusty conditions and
switch back to fresh air mode as soon as you leave these areas.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1 tion of its first operation cycle (12 min.) the heating element of
2 3 4
ment is in use.
1
Air is directed toward the feet, windshield glass,
door windows.

3 Note
Air is directed toward the face and feet. The heating element of glass is activated only when the engine is
running. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating ele-
ments of the rear window, windshield, and outside rearview mirrors
4
Air is directed toward the feet. (default mode
are turned on simultaneously.
when heating)
Note
Outside rearview
mirror heater

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Dehumidify Inner Side of Window Glass
2 3
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ). (Indicator ( C ) ON) 1
2. Turn the fan speed dial ( 2 ) in OFF position to the right.
4
3. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control
switch ( 3 ).
4. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial
( 2 ) to a high speed position.
Warning
Note
With rainy or highly humid condition, fog appears on the windshield
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set or front side windows even the A/C is ON. If windows are foggy, it
the air source selection switch ( 4 ) to the fresh air intake mode. is dangerous to drive because of poor frontal and side visibilities. If
How to Dehumidify Outer Side of Window Glass the air to the windshield.
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ).

Caution
yy An extended use of air conditioner in foot mode, vent/foot mode
3. Turn the temperature control switch ( 3 ) to a high temperature or defroster mode may cause the fogged up on the outside of the
position. windshield due to temperature difference. If this is the case, use
4. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial the wiper blades to immediately clear fog on the windshield and
( 2 ) to a high speed position. change the air distribution mode to vent mode (toward face) to
minimize the temperature difference.
Note yy Make sure to remove any foreign materials such as snow and
If you press the defroster switch ( 1 ), the fresh air flows in with A/C winter and summer.
ON.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)
Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
Rear A/C switch Rear Air Flow

Control Dial (A)
1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.

Air Flow Direction
2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3) from Control Lever (B)
“0” position.
3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control lever
(B).
Caution
yy If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear air
flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to fan
operation.
yy The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Defogging and defrosting
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner
1. Press the defroster switch.
Defroster switch
2. Adjust the fan speed with the fan speed control.
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan speed
button at a high speed position.
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is recom-
mended.
Outside of the Windshield

3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.
Warning Caution
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield yy An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the high
can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any fog on the glass, temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the
setting the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the fresh air intake
is recommended. mode and set the fan at a low speed.
yy Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove any
Note obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on au-
tomatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Multimedia
Steering Wheel Audio Switch
MODE + VOL
VOL -
yy Pressing the button briefly with the audio system off turns Increases/reduces volume
the system on.
yy Audio mode changes every time the MODE switch is
pressed.
SEEK
<
SEEK
<
On media screen
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next song
yy SEEK switch pushing up/down and holding: Plays current
track and shows list of previous/next songs
Using media player other than media screen
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to next /previous song
Bluetooth handsfree MUTE MUTE
track and shows list of next/previous songs
In radio screen Call switch used for Bluetooth yy When the switch is pressed
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next stored handsfree call with a mobile and held, the audio system
station phone. (AV) will be turned off.
yy SEEK switch pushing up/down: Searches for next/previous yy Pressing the switch briefly
Note
station with the audio system on
For more detailed information turns off all sound outputs.
Using other radio player other than media screen on audio and Bluetooth hands- To resume the audio output,
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next stored free system, refer to Audio
Operating Manual provided
press the switch again.
station
separately.
yy SEEK switch pushing up/down: Searches for next/previous
station

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Caution
This owner's manual describes information on features that are com- yy For safety reasons, only the voice is played without video during
mon between all audio models. For detailed information regarding the driving. (video played again when vehicle stops)
audio system installed to your vehicle, refer to the operating manual yy SD CARD slot supports only the sound data and the SD CARD
provided separately. may not be provided.
Smart Audio* AV/Navigation*

Steering wheel Steering wheel

audio switch USB port and AUX audio switch USB port and AUX
terminal terminal
The Smart audio system has a 8-inch touch panel and steering AV/Navigation system has a 9.2-inch touch panel and steering
wheel audio switch cluster. You can connect an external device wheel audio switch cluster (Voice recognition guidance). You
to this system using the USB (for i-Pod) and AUX terminal. The can connect an external device to this system using the USB
system also supports SD card (for playing music)/rear view (for i-Pod) and AUX terminal. The system also supports SD
camera/around view camera/WIFI mirroring (for Android), and card (for navigation)/rear view camera/around view camera and
Bluetooth. Bluetooth.
AV play through AUX terminal is not supported. AV play through AUX terminal is not supported.
Current mode and media information (title, playing time) dis- Current mode, media information (title, playing time) and navi-
played on the smart audio display can be displayed on instru- gation turn by turn information displayed on the AV/Navigation
ment cluster. displayed on instrument cluster.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Antenna
Do not use the AV/Navigation system for an extended time when
the engine is not running. This may cause the battery to become
fully depleted.
Warning
yy Watching a video including DMB while driving is prohibited by the
law for safety reasons.
yy For safe driving, stop your vehicle in a safe place when you need
to operate the AV/Navigation system.
Slots for Multimedia

If the audio system is turned ON, the antenna receives the fol-
lowing radio waves.
For vehicles with smart audio: GPS (GNSS), Radio signal
For vehicles with AV/Navigation: GPS (GNSS), Radio signal
You can connect an external audio device including MP3 player,

CDP, USB storage device and iPod (media file storage device) to
the vehicle to play the music files or video files though the audio
system of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel
STEERING WHEEL TILT- Horn STEERING WHEEL HEATER*
ING/TELESCOPING
Height adjustment Length adjustment
(Tilting) (Telescoping)
2
1 1
Press the horn pad on the steering wheel Pressing this switch with the engine run-
to sound the horn. ning turns on the indicator on the instru-
Push down the steering wheel lock/ ment cluster and activates the built-in
Caution heater of the steering wheel. Pressing
release lever ( 1 ) to tilt ( 2 ) or telescope
( 3 ) the steering wheel. Adjust the steer- The sound of the horn can startle pedes- the switch again turns off the indicator
trians. Use only when needed. and the heater.
ing wheel to the desired position and lock
it by pulling up the lever. The switch condition is maintained even
Hold and move the steering wheel to after the ignition switch is cycled OFF
check if it is locked in place. and ON.
Caution Caution
Avoid turning the steering wheel all the way to the left or right for Do not attach an assist knob on the steer-
more than 10 seconds with the engine running. This may cause ing wheel. It can damage the heating
the power steering system to be overloaded, causing damage element in the steering wheel and impede
to the system. safe steering.
Warning
yy Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is moving.
Always adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle stationary.
yy Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Storage compartments
Glove box Front storage Sunglass Holder
The glove box opens with the button The front storage is located under the Press the center of the cover to open the
pushed pulled. Use it to store items front center panel. You can use it for cover and push it up to close.
and etc. small items.
Caution
Note Caution If the holder cover is left open during
The glove box lamp comes on when open- Be cautious of items falling or interrupting driving, it can block the rearview mirror.
ing the glove box with the tail lamp on. the control of the gear selector lever. Also, it can cause personal injury in an
accident or sudden stop. Always close the
cover after use
Caution
yy Driving with the glove box lid open can
cause injury in case of an accident or a
sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed
when driving.
yy Do not store any flammable materials
such as cigarette lighter in the glove
box or other space. In hot weather, it
may explode and cause a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CONSOLE STORAGE BIN DOOR MAP POCKET SEATBACK POCKET
Swing the console storage bin cover up Various items including maps, books, or This pocket is suitable for thin objects
by pressing the lock knob. magazines can be put in here. such as maps, magazines, newspa-
Bottles for water or beverages can be pers.
Caution
stored in the bottle tray.
yy To avoid possible theft, do not leave Caution
valuables in the storage compartment. Do not store scissors, knives, or other
yy Do not store items that are damage- object with improper size in the seatback
able or cause noises since they can pocket. These items may cause the per-
move around in the compartment while sonal injury in the event of sudden braking
driving. or collision.
such as cigarette lighter in the console
box or other space. In hot weather, they

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Storage Box Luggage Compart-
ment Storage Bin
The rear storage boxes are located in the

left/right bottom of the luggage compart- The storage bin on the rear right side
ment to store small objects. of the luggage compartment can hold
some items.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sun visor
Sun Visor and Ticket Holder (DRIVER SIDE) Vanity Mirror and Lamp*
Illumination lamp
1
2
Ticket
Vanity mirror
holder
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror and Lamp

Swing the sun visor down ( 1 ) to block out the sun (front, left side). Swing the sun visor down and open the
Rotate the sun visor to the driver seat side to block out the sun from the left side. Pull cover to reveal the mirror, then the lamp
out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage (lengthwise) ( 2 ). will come on.
Ticket Holder
Tickets and cards can be stored.
Caution
yy Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder on the
sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your at-
tention away or blocking your view.
yy Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in move.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front cup holder/rear cup holder and armrest
FRONT CUP HOLDER REAR CUP HOLDER AND ARMREST
Rear armrest
Rear cup holder
The cup holder is located in front of the center console. Swing down the rear armrest and push in the lid of the cup holder
module to use the cup holder. You can put a cup, beverage can,
Caution portable ashtray in the cup holder.
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill.
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a cup with hot beverage in the Caution
cup holder. Insert the cup holder into the rear armrest when not in use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power outlet
Front Rear
An auxiliary power outlet for extra electrical devices is installed.

Warning
This power outlet supplies power when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. yy For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet. If
you alter the vehicle’s wire lines and leave the wires to hang freely,
Caution it could cause an accident like a fire.
yy Abide by the nominal capacity of 12V-120W.
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical defects
can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or water gets in. yy Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric
This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged or short circuit- shock.
ing. yy The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used exces-
sively when the engine is not running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
USB
USB Charger
USB charger (center fascia), Specification: 5 V-1.1 A Caution
yy Using this port to charge your device with the ignition turned OFF
may run down the vehicle battery faster.
yy Prevent the foreign body or moisture from entering the USB char-
ger socket. Otherwise, the USB charger can be damaged.
yy Do not connect a device with current consumption of higher than
2.1 A to this port.
yy Starting the engine or abrupt voltage change with a device con-
USB charger (rear side of center console), Specification: nected to the socket can lead to product damage. Therefore, con-
5 V-2.1 A nect a device only after the ignition is turned ON and disconnect
the device before IGN OFF.
yy Improper connection of a charging cable with the USB charger
can damage the vehicle fuse or the connected device because
of short circuit.
yy The charging speed varies depending on the device type, compat-
ibility, charging cable and other vehicle conditions.
You can charge your smart phones or tablet devices by using
this port.
yy Connect a USB cable connected to your device to the USB
charge port with the engine running.
yy USB charger located read side of center console has indicator
but it lights when ACC is on.
yy USB charger located center fascia has no indicator
yy For charging progress, check the display of your device.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AC inverter power switch*
AC Inverter Power Switch*
When this switch is pressed with the engine started or ignition
on, the indicator lamp comes on and voltage of 220 V is applied.
Pressing the switch again turns off the indicator lamp and the
inverter.
The switch maintains its status even if the ignition switch is turned
off and back on.
Caution
yy Always start the engine in order to use the AC inverter and un-
plug it after use. The battery may be flat when you use it with the
engine stopped or when plugging in the electrical appliance for a
prolonged time.
yy When you use the AC inverter in an enclosed or unventilated
place, there is a risk of poisoning by the exhaust gas. Keep the
engine idling at a well-ventilated place and ventilate the inside of
the cabin properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AC inverter
Caution
yy The some electronic equipment with power consumption less than
the inverter power rating may not work properly:
- Electrical appliances which need high current at startup
- Measuring equipment which should process the exact data
- Unit which needs stable power supply.
yy Close the AC inverter cover when the AC inverter is not in use.
prolonged time.
AC 220V (110V) inverter yy Do not plug in the electrical appliance with power consumption
higher than 200W (220V) [150W (110V)].
It is a digital power conversion system, which converts DC 12V
yy When you plug in an improper electrical appliance which causes
electricity provided by the automobile to AC 220V (110V) and
excessive electromagnetic wave noise, you should take care
enables you to use simple electrical appliances such as the since the noise comes from the audio system (or AV system) and
laptop, cellular phone battery charger, lights, TV. the smart key and electrical systems in the vehicle may occur
After turning on the AC inverter, open the socket cover and plug in malfunction.
the lead from the electrical appliance, with the engine started. yy Do not use the faulty electrical appliance. It may damage the AC
inverter and electrical systems in the vehicle.
Warning yy Do not use more than two electrical equipment and accessories
yy Not paying attention to the AC inverter is very dangerous when simultaneously.
it’s not in use. yy When input voltage from the AC inverter becomes low, the LED
yy Always follow the precautions below in order to prevent serious indicator flashes and the AC inverter is switched off automatically.
injury: It will work normally when voltage rises again.
- Do not use any electrical appliance using hot water. (e.g., electric yy When the smart key is in the vicinity of the AC inverter, it may
kettle, toaster and iron) not work very well due to the electromagnetic wave from the AC
inverter.
- Do not put any foreign object in the AC inverter or touch it with
hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock or fire.
- Don’t let child touch the AC inverter.
- Do not touch the inverter with wet hands. If so, electrical shock
and serious bodily injury may occur as a result.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Grip handle with coat hanger
Grip Handle With Coat Hanger Grip Handle (B-Pillar)
(Headlining)
Grip handle
Coat hanger
There are grip handles on top of the driver side and rear seat. There are grip handle in the front side of rear seat side to grab
The grip handle for the rear seat has a coat hanger. for easy entry.
Caution
Do not hang heavy cloth. It can damage the coat hanger and head-
lining.
Warning
Do not hang objects other than cloth. If the side air bag is deployed
in an accident or from an impact, the vehicle damage or personal
injury can occur by the objects.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Luggage compartment features
Luggage net* (without luggage board)
A
Luggage cover handle
Luggage cover*
Any loose objects can be stowed securely using the luggage net. The luggage upper cover is used to prevent the existence of the
Hook the net up to the luggage compartment. cargo and its condition from being checked from the outside.
Caution
yy Large or heavy Items can damage the net.
yy Do not stow any fragile items.
Warning
The restoring force in the elastic band can cause personal injury.
Hold the band securely when hooking the net to the loop of the
compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Barrier net* (without luggage
Installing: board)
1. Fit the luggage cover into the groove in the body of the vehicle
as pressing both ends of the cover to ( A ) direction.
2. The mounting position of the luggage cover can be changed
according to the angle of the rear seat seatback.
3. Pull the cover handle and slide the luggage cover into the
groove.
Caution
yy Do not attempt to change the mounting position with the luggage
screen pulled out. It could result in screen damage.
yy Do not forcibly adjust the angle of the rear seat backrest with the
luggage cover installed. It may damage the luggage cover.
This net prevents the items in the luggage compartment from

being thrown in the passenger compartment in an accident.
Warning
yy Never transport passenger in the area behind the barrier net.
yy Do not load cargo higher than the barrier net.
yy Just because you are using the barrier net does not mean over-
loading is allowed.
yy Loading heavy objects or hanging heavy objects to the net can
damage the net.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE BOARD
A
A
The luggage board is divided into 2 parts and one-tier or two-tier In order to shift between one-tier and two-tier installation, use the
installation is possible depending on usage. center groove ( A ) of the fastening part for two-tier installation
as shown in the figure above.
Note
figure above and adjust the height of the floor evenly when folding
the rear seats.
Caution
cases:
conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Roof rack
Roof rack
Warning
yy In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads
that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
yy The following specification is maximum weight when loading cargo
or luggage.
yy Roof rack: 100 kg (220 lbs.) evenly distributed
yy Loading cargo or luggage above specification on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
yy When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle.
yy To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check
frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
yy Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may
damage stability of your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your
vehicle. Caution
When loading, stowage on the vehicle should not damage the When loading the cargo on the roof rack over the vehicle equipped
vehicle as well as not interfere with the sunroof operation (for with the sun roof, be careful not to interrupt the sun roof operation.
sunroof equipped vehicle).
Use any auxiliary equipment for loading, such as a carrier, con-
sidering the vehicle condition and safety.
Note
It is recommended to put cloth or cushions between stowage and
roof to protect them.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience System II 5
Instrument cluster................................................5-2
0
Gauges and display window................................5-4
1
Warning lights and indicators...............................5-9
LCD Display (main menu)..................................5-22 2
Messages on LCD display.................................5-32 3
LCD display pop-up message...........................5-48
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
Instrument cluster * This figure is provided by way of example only. Some details of the image may
not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
Standard cluster
6 37 7 9
1 2 3 4 5 36 38 8 10 4
35
34
28
33
21
32
39
22 40
23 29
26
25 27 11 13 15 17 18 20 30 31
24 12 14 16 41 19
1. 4WD CHECK warning light 15. Engine CHECK warning lamp 29. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning lamp
2. 4WD LOW indicator light 16. Global warning light 30. Over speed warning light (GSL only)
3. 4WD HIGH indicator light 17. Warming up indicator 31. Steering wheel heater indicator
4. Turn signal/Hazard warning lamp 18. Smart key check indicator 32. EPB warning lamp
5. Engine overheat warning lamp 19. Auto cruise Ready indicator 33. ABS warning light
6. Water separator warning light 20. Auto cruise ON indicator 34. ESP ON indicator/warning lamp
7. Seat belt warning lamp 21. HBAS Indicator 35. ESP OFF indicator
8. Air bag warning lamp 22. Illumination ON indicator 36. SSPS warning lamp
9. Door ajar warning lamp 23. Front fog lamp ON indicator 37. Charge warning light
10. Hood open warning light 24. ESCL warning light 38. Engine oil pressure warning light
11. Power mode indicator (GSL only) 25. Immobilizer/Smart key warning light 39. High beam indicator
12. ECO (GSL only) 26. HDC ON indicator/warning light 40. Brake warning light
13. AEBS warning light 27. Winter mode indicator 41. Low fuel level warning light
14. AEBS OFF indicator 28. Lane departure indicator/warning lamp 33+40. EBD warning lamp
5-2 Convenience System II

GETtheMANUALS.org
Supervision cluster
6 39 7 9
1 2 3 4 5 38 40 8 10 4
11 13 15 17 18 20
12 14 16 43 19 37
36
35
21
34
41
22 42
23
24
25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1. 4WD CHECK warning light 13. AEBS warning light 26. Immobilizer/Smart key warning 34. EPB warning lamp
2. 4WD LOW indicator light 14. AEBS OFF indicator light 35. ABS warning light
3. 4WD HIGH indicator light 15. Engine CHECK warning lamp 27. HDC ON indicator/warning 36. ESP ON indicator/warning
4. Turn signal/Hazard warning 16. Global warning light light lamp
lamp 17. Warming up indicator 28. Winter mode indicator 37. ESP OFF indicator
5. Engine overheat warning lamp 18. Smart key check indicator 29. Lane departure indicator/ 38. SSPS warning lamp
6. Water separator warning light warning lamp 39. Charge warning light
19. Auto cruise Ready indicator
7. Seat belt warning lamp 30. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning 40. Engine oil pressure warning
20. Auto cruise ON indicator
lamp light
8. Air bag warning lamp 21. HBAS Indicator
31. Over speed warning light (GSL 41. High beam indicator
9. Door ajar warning lamp 22. Illumination ON indicator only)
10. Hood open warning light 23. Front fog lamp ON indicator 42. Brake warning light
32. Steering wheel heater
11. Power mode indicator (GSL 24. Rear fog lamp ON indicator 43. Low fuel level warning light
indicator
only) 25. ESCL warning light 35+42. EBD warning lamp
33. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning
12. ECO (GSL only) lamp
Convenience System II 5-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gauges and display window
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
Supervision cluster Standard cluster Supervision cluster Standard cluster
DSL DSL
GSL GSL The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers per
hour (km/h) or mile per hour (MPH).
Over speed warning light

(GCC only)
Sounds warning chime 5 times initially
Note Based on Standard cluster
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Multiply 1000 to the current number, then it will be the current
number of engine revolutions.
Warning
Do not operate the engine within the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage. Speedometer-KPH Speedometer-MPH

GETtheMANUALS.org
COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the engine This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
coolant. Fill up the fuel tank before the gauge pointer reaches “E”.
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward The gauge may slightly move during braking, turning, accelerat-
“H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage ing, or going up or down hills.
the engine. Allow engine to cool. :T
his symbole indicates that the fuel filler is located on the
left side of vehicle.
Warning
Warning
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. Always stop the engine before refueling.
Caution
yy Use only the designated fuel and low sulfur diesel. Otherwise, engine
could be seriously damaged.
yy If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives into
the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seriously be
damaged.
yy Do not drive your vehicle when the fuel level is low. Otherwise, the cata-
lytic converter could be damaged due to imcomplete combustion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Odometer Shift lever indicator
ODO 324756 km 324756 km

The total distance the vehicle has been driven is displayed in yy For vehicles with automatic transmission, the current position
kilometers. of shift lever is displayed.
Maximum number of kilometers is 999999 km. yy For vehicles with manual transmission, the indicator shows up
Odometer is always shown on the bottom in the display. only when the gear shifts or the shift lever is in R position.
yy For the manual mode of auto transmission vehicles or manual
transmission vehicles, the optimal shift point is indicated by an
arrow according to vehicle speed and rpm condition.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR shift INDICATOR Gear shift point indicator
Supervision cluster Gear shift point indicator is a supplementary function indicating
the optimal shift point for fuel efficiency. To operate this func-
tion, manual gear shift control is necessary according to road
and driving conditions.
yy Manual transmission: indicates 3rd
gear (target) shift point which is the
optimum shift range, while driving in
1st or 2nd gear position
Standard cluster yy 6A/T Automatic transmission (M
mode): indicates 4th gear (target)
shift point which is the optimum
shift range, while driving in 3rd gear
position
Note
While driving in 1st ~ 7th gear position without shifting gear in auto-
matic transmission (M mode) vehicle, the transmission may automati-
cally shifts up to protect the system if the engine RPM gets high
Automatic Transmission
This indicator shows the current position of the gear. yy Manual transmission: indicates 3rd gear (target)
In normal mode: P, R, N, D shift point which is the optimum shift range, while
Gear indication in “M” mode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 driving in 4th or higher gear position
P : Parking 1 : 1st gear
R : Reverse 2 : 2nd gear Note
N : Neutral 3 : 3rd gear While driving in 2nd ~ 7th gear position in automatic transmission (M
D:D riving (7A/T) 4 : 4th gear mode) vehicle, the indicator (arrow) does not appear on display
(1~7th gear shifting) 5 : 5th gear when downshifting. Drive shifting manually according to driving
Driving (6A/T) 6 : 6th gear conditions. If driving without manual shift, RPM will get low and the
(1~6th gear shifting) 7 : 7th gear system will shift down.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual transmission display
Automatic transmission display

- 7A/T
- 6A/T
Note
For vehicles with manual transmission, the indicator shows up only
when the gear shifts or the shift lever is in R position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning lights and indicators
SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT* ENGINE OIL pressure
WARNING LIGHT
This warning light blinks and the warn- When the ignition is switched on, this
ing buzzer sounds for 6 seconds when warning light illuminates and then should This warning light comes on when the oil
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” go off, to confirm that the air bag is op- pressure drops because of low engine
position unless the driver & passenger erational. oil level.
(EU) seat belt is securely fastened. This If it does not come on, or if it does not go
reminding operation stops when the driver If this light turns on while driving, safely
off, or if it flashes or illuminates continu- pull over and stop the vehicle to check the
fastens the seat belt even during its opera- ously while driving, it means that there is
tion period. engine oil level. Add engine oil, if neces- 5
a malfunction in the system. Have the air sary, to maintain the proper oil level.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h bag system checked without delay by a
(general: 10 km/h) without fastened Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- Continuous driving with this light on may
driver’s seat belt, this indicator comes on rized Service Center. lead to engine failure.
and the alarm sounds.
Note Caution
For more detailed information, refer to the If this light does not go off after engine
“Seat Belt and Air Bag” section. starting or comes on while driving, it means
there is a malfunction in the system. Run-
ning the engine with this warning light on
can cause serious damage to the engine.
Have the lubricating system checked by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY CHARGE WARN- DOOR AJAR WARNING HOOD OPEN WARNING
ING LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This light comes on when a door or the This light comes on when the engine hood
ignition switch is turned on and it goes off tailgate is either opened or not closed is open or not closed completely.
when the engine is started. securely.
Warning
If this light doesn’t go off after engine start-
Warning Driving with engine hood open can result in
ing or comes on while driving, it means
there is a malfunction in the system. Before driving, check that the door ajar hazards when driving. Make sure the engine
warning light is off. When a door is not hood is closed securely before driving off.
Have the charging system checked by a
completely closed, it may accidentally open
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- while driving.
Caution
Continued driving with the battery charge
warning light illuminated will lead to a sud-
den stop of vehicle, causing an accident and
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OVERHEAT SSPS WARNING LIGHT Fuel Filter WARNING
WARNING LIGHT light (DSL only)
This warning light comes on when the

When the engine coolant temperature SSPS system is defective. When this This warning light comes on when the igni-
is abnormally hot, the engine overheat warning light comes on, the steerability tion switch is turned to “ON” and should
warning light blinks and a warning buzzer becomes heavier. go off in a few seconds. When the water
sounds. When this happens, stop the inside the water separator in the fuel filter
vehicle in a safe place and let the engine What is SSPS? exceeds a certain level, this warning light
cool down. For more information, refer to Speed Sensing Power Steering (SSPS) is comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the
Chapter 6 “When the engine is overheat- the device that provides good driving con- driving force of the vehicle decreases. If
ing.” dition and steering stability by making the this warning light comes on while driving,
steerability heavier in high-speed driving, have the system checked by Ssangyong
Caution and lighter in stop or low-speed driving. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
If you keep driving the vehicle with the warn- Center.
ing light and buzzer on, the engine could be Caution
damaged and lead to a fire. After completely If the SSPS warning light comes on or when Caution
cooling down, have the system checked by you feel the steering wheel heavy, have yy The fuel system in the engine may get
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong serious damage if you keep driving while
rized Service Center. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service the warning light is on. Prompt correction
Operation. should be necessary.
yy Using low quality fuel could result in
serious damage to the engine due to the
water or impurities in fuel. Never use low
quality fuel.
yy If the amount of water in the fuel filter
exceeds the specified level, the warning
lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the
engine power decreases.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ABS WARNING LIGHT* EBD WARNING LIGHT*
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the igni- If the ABS warning light and the brake
parking brake is applied and/or the brake tion switch is turned to “ON” and should warning light come on simultaneously,
fluid level is lower than a specified level. go off in a few seconds. EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
system is defective. In this case, ABS
Caution Warning system also cannot be activated.
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds yy If this light stays on after starting the en- If this happens, have the system checked
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is gine or comes on while driving, have the by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
applied, the parking brake warning light system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
comes on and a warning buzzer sounds. If Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. In
thorized Service Center.
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and this case, the ABS function is not avail-
release the parking brake. able, but the conventional brake system Warning
is properly working. When the EBD system is not functioning,
yy ABS is a device that prevents wheels the vehicle could be unstable during hard
Warning braking. Therefore, you must pay particular
from locking during braking to allow
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warn- steering. However, the ABS system does attention to the driving conditions while this
ing light on is dangerous. not shorten the stopping distance. warning light is on.
If the parking brake light stays on, you must
immediately have your vehicle checked
and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or Caution
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. ABS system performs self diagnosis by
transferring hydraulic pressure to the brake
units for few seconds after starting the
engine. This may cause some noise and
vibrations. This means ABS is properly
functioning.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB WARNING LAMP AUTO HOLD INDICATOR/ ENGINE CHECK WARNING
WARNING LAMP* LIGHT
The lamp comes on when the ignition

switch is turned ON and then goes off after When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, This warning light comes on when the
about 4 seconds. the AUTO HOLD system will be switched ignition switch is turned on and it goes off
yy ON: The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) to READY mode and the "AUTO HOLD" when the engine is started.
system is faulty but the parking brake indicator on the instrument cluster will be If the light stays on or comes on while
works properly. illuminated in white. driving, some of the engine control com-
yy Flashing: The parking brake is not Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again ponents including sensors and devices
working with this lamp ON turns off the indicator and deactivates the are defective.
AUTO HOLD system.
WARNING CAUTION
yy Indicator ON in white: AUTO HOLD
yy If the warning lamp is turned on, have If the engine halts due to a completely
system READY mode empty fuel tank and the engine check light
the vehicle checked and serviced at a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- yy Indicator ON in green: AUTO HOLD comes on even after refueling, the engine’s
rized Service Center. system is activated power output may decrease within a certain
yy If you have to park the vehicle with faulty driving distance (about 30 km).
yy Warning lamp ON in yellow: fault in
EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle AUTO HOLD system
on a flat surface and shift the gear selec- WARNING
tor lever to the P position. When this warning light comes on, the ve-
WARNING
If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp hicle operates in safety mode to maintain
is turned on, have the vehicle checked minimum driving conditions and to prevent
and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or the system from being damaged. In this
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. mode, the engine driving force may be de-
creased or the engine may stall. When this
happens, have the system checked at the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
4WD Check Warning 4WD Low Indicator* 4WD High Indicator*
Light*
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to
This warning light comes on when the igni- indicator blinks until the shifting operation “4H”, this indicator blinks until the shifting
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should is completed. After completion of the mode operation is completed. After completion
go out if the system is normal. If the “4WD change to 4L, the indicator comes on. of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
CHECK” warning light stays on, have the comes on.
4WD system checked by a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
WARNING
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays
on, have the 4WD system checked.
yy Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h
in 4H mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STEERING WHEEL HEAT- ESP ON INDICATOR/ ESP OFF INDICATOR*
ER INDICATOR* WARNING LAMP*
This lamp comes on when the ignition

The steering wheel heater indicator lamp The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after
is turned on or off when the steering wheel switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds.
heater switch is turned to ON or OFF about 4 seconds. Pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch
with the ignition switch ON or the engine yy Indicator flashing: ESP system is ac- (for more than 3 seconds) turns on the
running. tivated indicator lamp indicating that the ESP
function is deactivated.
Note yy Warning lamp ON: fault in ESP sys-
When the indicator lamp is turned on, a
tem Note
message will be displayed for about 5 sec. For more details about the ESP, refer to "ESP
at the top of the LCD screen. CAUTION
OFF switch" in Chapter 3.
If the warning lamp comes on, have the
vehicle serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL GLOW INDICATOR GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT*
WARNING LIGHT (DSL ONLY)

This warning light indicates that the fuel When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, switch is turned ON and then goes off after
level in the tank is getting exhausted. this indicator comes on and stays for a about 4 seconds.
The illuminating point of this warning light short time or may go off right away. When If there is a fault in the TPMS, this light
varies according to the driving conditions the glow plugs are sufficiently heated, the flashes for about 70 sec. and then stays
such as driving angle and road conditions. light will go out. In the vehicle equipped on. If the tire pressure is abnormal (un-
If this warning light comes on while driving, with a direct injection type engine, this derinflated / overinflated / flatten), the
immediately refuel the tank. However, it is indicator may come on very shortly or may global warning light is also turned on. If
recommended that fuel should be added not even come on. the warning lamp comes on, have the
before this warning light will come on. vehicle serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or
Caution Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
Caution When the glow indicator comes on while
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, driving or the engine cannot be started prop- WARNING
this warning light may come on if the re- erly, have the glow plug system checked by If the global warning light comes on in the
maining fuel level is low. a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- cluster, pull over and stop the vehicle in a
rized Service Center. safe place as soon as possible and check
the tire pressure.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS WARNING LIGHT* AEBS OFF INDICATOR* HDC Indicator*
AEBS warning light is turned on when AEBS OFF indicator is turned on when the When the HDC switch is pressed once,
the ignition switch is turned to the ON ignition switch is turned to the ON position. HDC is ready for use. The green HDC in-
position. The lamp stays on for a short The lamp stays on for a short period of dicator in the instrument cluster comes on.
period of time and then goes out. time and then goes out. When the button is pressed again, HDC is
Stays on: Malfunction in AEBS The lamp comes on when the AEBS deactivated and the indicator goes off.
Flashing: AEBS in operating status is turned OFF, indicating the system is When HDC is applied, the green HDC
deactivated. indicator blinks.
(flashes only for 5 seconds in the event
of a potential collision) Note
When the red HDC indicator is on, the
HDC system is overheated or malfunction-
This indicator also comes on when the ESP
ing. For more information, refer to Chapter
system is deactivated by pressing the ESP
OFF switch. 3, HDC Switch.
Caution
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is
overheated or malfunctioning. If the indica-
tor is on even after the system has cooled
down enough, have the nearest authorized
dealer or service center check the system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LANE DEPARTURE INDI- LIGHT INDICATOR FRONT FOG LIGHT
CATOR/WARNING LAMP* INDICATOR*
This indicator comes on when the tail lamp

When the LDWS switch is activated, the or headlamp is switched on. This indicator comes on when the front fog
following lights will be turned on or flash light is switched on.
depending on the vehicle conditions.
Activating the LDWS switch again turns
off the system.
yy Indicator ON in white: System READY
mode (Vehicle speed below specified Rear fog light indica-
value or no lane detected)
yy Indicator ON in green: LDWS is acti-
tor*
vated
yy Warning lamp flashing in yellow:
Calibration fault in the front camera
module
yy Warning lamp ON in yellow: LDWS is
faulty With the headlights turned on, if you rotate
Note the switch in position, rear fog lights
For more detail information, refer to “LDWS (Lane De- turn on and the switch returns back in front
parture Warning System)” in chapter 3. fog light position. Rear and front fog lights
turn on simultaneously.
WARNING
If the lane departure warning lamp is turned on or flashes,
have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
HBAS INDICATOR* HIGH BEAM INDICATOR Immobilizer/Smart key
warning light
Pushing the light switch lever toward the This indicator comes on when the high
instrument panel with the light switch in beam headlamp is switched on. REKES key: blinks when immobilizer sys-
AUTO position activates the High Beam tem has malfunction
Assist System (HBAS) and turns on this Warning
indicator. Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs Smart key: blinks when smart key system
the approaching vehicle’s visibility. For safe has malfunction or key authentication
Warning driving, use the high beam headlamp only fails
HBAS is activated only when the vehicle is when it is very hard to see the road.
Caution
driven at a speed of at least 35 km/h.
HBAS may not be activated in the following If blinking continues, it means the system is
situations: defective. Bring your vehicle to Ssangyong
service center for checkup and servicing.
yy The lamps of the oncoming or preceding
vehicle are damaged.
yy The oncoming or preceding vehicle is
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR
blocked from your vision.
yy The windshield is contaminated (dust,
fogging, sticker, snow, etc.) or dam-
aged.
yy The body of the oncoming or preceding
vehicle is partially concealed at road in-
tersections or on sharp-curved roads. This indicator blinks when the turn signal
yy Driving through a construction zone with switch is turned on.
reflective materials and light sources. Both indicators blink when the hazard
warning switch is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER MODE INDICATOR* SMART KEY IN WARNING
LIGHT*
Note
For supervision type, the key warning mes-
sage appears on the LCD display instead of
warning light.
Pressing the mode switch (E → P → W)
on the switch panel located to the left yy When the door lock/unlock button on
switch cluster twice turns on the winter the outside door handle is pressed af-
mode indicator. ter the doors are closed with the smart
key inside the vehicle, the doors will not
be locked, this warning light will flash,
and the buzzer will sound.
POWER MODE INDICATOR*
yy This warning light comes on when a
driver carrying an invalid smart key
presses the engine start/stop button.
yy This warning light flashes when a driver
carrying a valid smart key opens a door
and gets off the vehicle with the igni-
Pressing the mode switch (E → P → W) tion switch ON or the engine running.
on the switch panel located to the left Closing the door under this condition
switch cluster once turns on the power triggers the buzzer and flashing indi-
mode indicator. cator.
Caution
If both the power mode and winter mode
indicators flash simultaneously because
of the system failure, see a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL escl* (ELECTRICAL over speed Warning
INDICATOR STEERING COLUMN LOCK Light (gcc ONly)
WARNING LIGHT)
ESCL
This indicator comes on when the cruise The warning light flashes with repeated
control system is switched on. (5 times) buzzer sound when the vehicle
This is the device which has the electronic
speed exceeds 120 km/h.
control of the locking and unlocking of the
steering wheel in the vehicle with the smart If the warning light flashes, slow down for
key. If the ESCL warning lamp comes on, your own safety.
the vehicle may not be started and driven.
In this case, have the system checked by
a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Auto cruise Ready
indicator
This indicator comes on when the cruise

control ON/OFF switch is turned on.
READY indicator will go off when press-
ing the cruise control ON/OFF switch
once more.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD Display (main menu)
There are 6 LCD main menu items. You can check the vehicle Main Menu Description
information and choose vehicle settings using the switches on
the right side of the steering wheel. Item Main menu Mode (sub menu)
- Distance to empty/Average fuel economy/
Instantaneous fuel economy
- Mileage A/Average vehicle speed/Driving
time
TRIP com- - Mileage B/Average vehicle speed/Driving
1 puter menu time
- Departure time/Driving time/Fuel consump-
tion
3 - Digital clock
2
- TPMS (tire pressure)
Digital
- Supervision instrument cluster (3 types)
speedometer
-S tandard instrument cluster (1 type)
menu
Driving as-
- Lane departure warning
sist menu
Switch
Item Function
operation
AV menu - Display linked to AV
1
Short press Move to main menu
TBT (Turn By - Compass
2 Turn) menu - Display linked to navigation
.07& Tap up/down Navigate through sub modes (menus)
- Instrument cluster illumination
- Driving assist
3 Enter menu - Language
Short press Check settings - Door/Tailgate
Select settings User settings - Light
Reset selected item menu - Functions for driver comfort
Long press Digital speedometer illumination ON/ - Sound
OFF - Service interval alert
- Instrument cluster settings & information
- Initializing mode settings

GETtheMANUALS.org
TRIP Computer Menu
►►Distance to empty/Average fuel economy/In- 2 Average fuel economy
stantaneous fuel economy This mode indicates the average fuel economy computed based
on the total amount of fuel used and the distance driven since
the reset to (--.--).
This value shows how far the vehicle could go (in km) with one
1 1 liter. This value will be updated every 10 sec. on the display.
2
2 The average fuel economy is calculated continuously as long as
3 3 the engine is running regardless of the vehicle movement.
3 Instantaneous fuel economy

1 Distance to empty
The instantaneous fuel economy is calculated based on the
The Distance To Empty (DTE) displayed on the LCD screen is a distance driven and the amount of fuel used.
calculated value based on the measured fuel volume in the fuel
This value is displayed when the vehicle is driven at 10 km/h or
tank, average fuel economy, and information about the driving
more and the value is between 0 and 30 km/L.
pattern.
The display range is from 0 to 1500 km. If the remaining distance Reset: Average fuel economy
is less than 50 km, “---“ symbol will blink on the display. Press and hold the ( ) switch in current mode.
Note The value will be reset and “--.--” will be displayed. Drive for a
few miles so that the average fuel economy values since the last
For supervision type, the color of the DTE value displayed on the
screen will change to yellow if the value becomes 100 km or less,
reset are shown again.
and the “----” symbol will be displayed in red. You can reset this value at the time of IGN OFF, IGN ON, or refuel-
ing depending on the vehicle settings.
Caution
Note
The actual amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank may differ from
You can select options for resetting the average fuel economy under
the amount estimated by the trip computer depending on the driving
"Instrument cluster User settings menu → Instrument cluster settings
conditions of the vehicle and whether the vehicle is level or not. That
& information".
is, the DTE is only for reference. It is recommended to refuel before
the fuel warning light comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Mileage (A), (B)/Average vehicle speed/Driving ►►After departure
time
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3 3 3
3
4 4
1 1
2 2 Distance driven after the engine start (km), departure time
3 3 (hh:mm), driving time (hh:mm), fuel consumption (L) are dis-
played.
Individual trip mileage (km), average vehicle speed (km/h), driving 1 After departure
time (hh:mm) are displayed.
Total distance driven accumulated since the last engine start.
1 Trip (A, B) Maximum number of kilometers is 9999.9 km.
Maximum number of kilometers is 9999.9 km. 2 Departure time
The value outside this range returns to 0.0 km. When the engine is started, the time on the left bottom of the
2 Average speed (A, B) LCD screen is displayed here.
The average vehicle speed is calculated based on time and dis- 3 Driving time
tance. This value will be updated every 10 sec. on the display. The display range is 0:00 to 99:59. The value outside this range
3 Driving time (A, B) returns to 0:00.
The display range is 00:00 to 99:59. The value outside this range 4 Fuel consumption
returns to 0:00. Total amount of fuel used since the last engine start (unit: L).
Reset: Trip (A, B), Average speed (A, B), Driving time (A, B) Reset: After departure, Departure time, Driving time,
Press and hold the ( ) switch in current mode. Fuel consumption
The average speed will be reset to “---”, and the driving time will These values will be automatically reset when the engine is
be reset to “0:00”. started again after the ignition is turned off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Clock mode ►►Tire pressure (TPMS)
Supervision Supervision Standard
This only applies to the supervision instrument cluster, and the Low pressure Check tires
time on the left bottom of the LCD screen is displayed in analog

format.
Low pressure Flat Tire
High pressure Unbalanced Pressure
yy This message is displayed when the tire pressure is normal.

yy If the tire pressure is normal, "Tire pressure normal" is dis-
played.
yy If the tire pressure is abnormal, corresponding message will
be displayed. The message can blink or stay on depending
on the tire conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Digital Speedometer Menu Driving Assist Menu
Supervision Standard ►►LDWS ON (READY)
Type A
Type B
The lanes are shaded when the LDWS is turned ON but the
lanes are not detected.
Type C Supervision Standard
The vehicle speed measured by the speedometer is shown in

digital display. Pressing the ( ) switch turns off all lights except
for the LCD screen light. If both lanes are detected while the vehicle is driven at a speed
of 60 km/h or more, the detected lanes will be displayed in white.
Note If only one lane is detected, the detected lane will be displayed
If you return to main menu, change the mode, press the ( ) switch,
in white.
or an event message pops up, the previous lighting conditions are The warning output is provided only for the detected lane.
restored.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►LDWS OFF ►►System inoperative
This message is displayed when the LDWS is turned off. This message is displayed when there is a fault in LDWS cali-
bration.


GETtheMANUALS.org
AV Menu TBT (Turn By Turn) Menu
►►Linked with AV system ►►Linked with navigation system
The instrument cluster is linked to the AV system. Therefore, the The instrument cluster is linked to the navigation system and
contents displayed on the AV system are also displayed on the displays part of the navigation screen information.
LCD screen of the instrument cluster.
The main menu logo at the top of the screen may vary depending
on the manufacturer of the device connected to the system.
Radio mode USB/SD photo mode
Bluetooth (hands-
AUX mode
free) mode
DAB mode Android Auto
i-Pod mode Apple Carplay mode
Bluetooth music play

USB/SD video mode
mode
USB USB/SD music mode

GETtheMANUALS.org
User Settings Manual
User settings User settings
Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2
menu menu
Tick (individual) / - OFF
Individual setting
Not tick (overall) - While driving
AUTO LOCK
Instrument Overall setting 0 to 20 stages - Shift lever is moved
cluster Illumination except for to R, N, D
0 to 20 stages
illumination LCD - OFF
LCD Illumination 0 to 20 stages - Ignition is turned
? HELP AUTO UNLOCK off
Tick/not tick (AEBS - Shift lever is moved
AEB system OFF warning lamp ON to P
when not tick) - 10 km/h
Driving FCW sensitivity Late, Normal, or Early - 20 km/h
assist Door/ AUTO LOCK speed
Rear cross traffic alert Tick/not tick - 30 km/h
Tailgate setting
TSR Tick/not tick - 40 km/h
? HELP - 50 km/h
Korean/English/ LOCK/UNLOCK alert
Tick/not tick
English Chinese/Russian/ sound
Language Turkish UNLOCK with key in 2
Tick/not tick
? HELP stages
Smart door AUTO LOCK Tick/not tick
Window open/close by
Tick/not tick
smart key
- Enable
Power tailgate
- Disable

GETtheMANUALS.org
menu menu
- Enable - ON
Steering wheel align alert
- Disable Functions - OFF
Door/ Smart tailgate (Enabled: smart for driver Wiper mode indicator Tick/not tick
Tailgate tailgate indicator comfort Light mode indicator Tick/not tick
comes on LCD
? HELP
screen)
Turn signal lamp sound - 5 different sounds
? HELP
Turn signal lamp sound
- Level 0 to 3
volume
Leaving home headlamp - OFF
Instrument cluster voice
- 10 sec. - Level 0 to 3
guidance volume
- 20 sec.
PAS sound - 5 different sounds
Light Coming home headlamp - 30 sec.
PAS sound volume - Level 0 to 3
Sound
Approach lamp Lane departure warning
- ON - 5 different sounds
system sound
AUTO Approach lamp - OFF
BSD system audible alert BSD audible alert
? HELP
RCTA audible alert
Outside rearview mirror Welcome & Goodbye
angle in reverse (driver - OFF Tick/not tick
sound
Functions side) - 2° ? HELP
for driver - 3°
Enable service interval
comfort Outside rearview - 4° Tick to use
alert
mirror angle in reverse - 5°
(passenger side) Service Oil & filter
Not set up to 99,500 km
interval alert Tire (increase by 500 km)
Others
? HELP

GETtheMANUALS.org
User settings
Level 1 Level 2
menu
- OFF
Average fuel economy - Reset at start up
AUTO reset - Reset when refilling
- Km/L
Fuel economy unit
- L/100 km
Instrument
- °C
cluster Temperature unit
settings & - °F
information - psi
- kPa
Tire pressure unit
- bar
- Kgf/cm²
Summary information
Tick/not tick
display
Trip information display Tick/not tick
Information displayed
Instrument for currently
cluster Warning lamp information illuminated warning
settings & lamp
information
? HELP
Initialization
of all Yes/No
settings

GETtheMANUALS.org
Messages on LCD display
Items Supervision Standard Display condition
- LCD display shows the message shown in the figure for 4

sec. when the driver door is open → closed and the theft
Welcome sound deterrent system is disarmed.
- If the ignition is turned on during this message display, the
message will disappear but the welcome sound will not stop.
- If the ignition switch is turned on, this message is displayed

for 4 sec. only once.
System check - If the message stays on, have the vehicle serviced at
a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
- If the ignition switch is turned off with the check box ticked
under Instrument cluster User settings menu > Instrument
cluster settings & information > Display trip information ,
Trip information the 'Driving info' will be displayed for 5 sec.
(Driving info) - The message overrides other messages. Only the "Low fuel
level" message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen
of this message when the Low fuel level warning lamp is
turned on.
under User settings menu > Service interval alert , ‘Checkup
Service interval Alert Status’ message will be displayed. However, This
alert message is not displayed when the distance left to the next
service is over 300 km.
- When it is past the due date, the number is preceded by "-".

GETtheMANUALS.org
If a vehicle speed greater than 0 km/h is detected after you

enter the Cluster Setting menu, LCD display shows this
Instrument warning message for 5 seconds.
cluster settings The message is not displayed when selecting settings for the
driving assist, instrument cluster illumination, vehicle warning
menus.
- The ICE warning lamp ( ) is turned on only when the ambient

ICE warning temperature is displayed at the bottom of LCD screen.
lamp - This lamp is turned on when the ambient temperature is 5°C
or less, and turned off when the ambient temperature is 7°C
or more.
Vehicle warning You can view the current warning messages here.
log No list is provided when there is no warning message.
This description only applies to models with supervision

Smart tailgate instrument cluster. The smart tailgate indicator is turned on
-
indicator when the Smart tailgate is enabled under User settings menu >
Door/Tailgate, indicating that the smart tailgate can be used.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you lock the door using the registered smart key with another
registered smart key left inside the vehicle and all doors closed,
this message will be displayed for 10 seconds.
When 2 or more valid smart keys are detected inside the

vehicle with IGN OFF and any door except for tailgate and
hood open, this message is displayed for 10 sec.
Smart key
warning
LCD display shows this message if no smart key is detected

inside the vehicle with the ignition switch ON or engine
running.
The LCD display shows this message for 10 sec. when the
ignition switch is set to ACC position twice without depressing
the brake pedal to inform you that the brake pedal should be
depressed when starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If the ignition switch is pressed and there is no valid smart key

detected inside the vehicle, this message is displayed on the
LCD screen for 10 sec.
If the gear selector lever is not in P or N position when you start

the engine, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
10 sec. to inform you that the gear selector lever should be in
P or N position.
Smart key
warning - If the SKM receives no signals or faulty/incorrect signals from
the vehicle power supply control or ignition switch after the
smart key authentication, this message is displayed for 10
seconds.
- If the message stays on, have the vehicle serviced at
Center.
If the gear selector lever is not in P position when you turn the
ignition switch to OFF, this message will be displayed on the
LCD screen for 10 sec. to inform you that the gear selector
lever should be in P position to turn OFF the power.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If low smart key battery is detected with AUTO LOCK function

deactivated, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
10 sec.
- If low smart key battery is detected with AUTO LOCK function
activated, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
Smart key 10 sec.
warning - This message is displayed for 10 sec. when the AUTO
LOCK function is deactivated → activated with low smart key
battery.
This message is displayed for 10 sec. when ignition switch is in

ACC for 12 minutes or more or the driver door is opened with
ACC ON to prevent battery discharge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
In R position
1) Rear PAS (shifting gear selector lever to R with IGN ON)

- When the gear selector lever is shifted to the R position, a
short beep is heard. If an obstacle is detected behind the
vehicle, the existence of the obstacles is displayed on the
LCD screen in 4 stages (Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3)
according to the distance from the vehicle and the location
of the obstacle. (Level 1 of rear PAS: Information of front
PAS is not displayed. Level 0 of rear PAS: Only the shape
of vehicle is displayed.)
- If there is a fault in the front/rear sensor, "?" is displayed in
the position corresponding the faulty sensor.
Front/rear area
detection
In D position 2) Front PAS (shifting gear selector lever to D with IGN ON)
- If an obstacle is detected in front of the vehicle, (a) the
existence of the obstacle is displayed on the LCD screen
in Level 2 and Level 3 indicators according to the distance
from the vehicle and the location of the obstacle; (b) no
information is displayed in Level 0 and Level 1.(Disabled
when the vehicle speed is 15 km/h or higher, Enabled
when the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver door open Passenger door open
Rear left door open Rear right door open

- Supervision type
Plays animation on the LCD screen when any door, hood, or
tailgate is open.
Door/Hood/ - Standard type

Tailgate Plays animation on the LCD screen when any door is open.
opening status Hood open Tailgate open If the hood or tailgate is open, corresponding image on the
screen flashes.
- When all doors are closed, the vehicle symbol with all doors
closed is displayed for 1 sec.
All doors closed

GETtheMANUALS.org
Left level 5 Left level 5
- When the ignition switch is turned to ON from OFF position,

Level 0 Level 0 the alignment status is displayed in level 1 to 5 according to
the tire direction. The tire alignment indicator is not displayed
on the screen when the level is 0.
Tire direction - The indicator is displayed for 5 sec. for up to level 2. For
level 3 to 5, the indicator stays on until the tire alignment
conditions are met.
- For vehicles with A/T, this indicator is displayed only when
the shift lever is in P or N.
Right level 5 Right level 5

GETtheMANUALS.org
The message is displayed on the LCD screen and the system

enters auto cruise ready mode when the cruise control ON/
OFF switch is pressed with IGN ON.
Supervision:
Standard:
The message is displayed on the LCD screen and auto cruise

is activated when the cruise control switch is operated in auto
Cruise control cruise ready mode.
Supervision:
Standard:
The message is displayed on the LCD screen when the cruise

control is switched off with cruise control in READY mode and
active mode.
Supervision:
Standard: No message displayed
- If there is a fault in the AUTO HOLD system, this message is

displayed on the LCD screen.
- If the message stays on, have the system checked and
serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
AUTO HOLD
system This message is displayed on the LCD screen in the following
conditions.
- When the EPB switch is activated without depressing the
brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
- When the AUTO HOLD switch is activated without depressing
the brake pedal to deactivate AUTO HOLD.

GETtheMANUALS.org
This message is displayed on the LCD screen when the AUTO

HOLD active state is changed to the EPB state.
This message is displayed on the LCD screen in the following

conditions.
- When the vehicle slips down with AUTO HOLD active and a
fault in EPB is detected.
- When the vehicle slips down after EPB is activated.
If the vehicle slips down, this message remains on the screen
EPB (Electric until the brake pedal apply is detected."
Parking Brake)
- If there is a fault in the EPB system, this message is displayed
on the LCD screen along with the flashing EPB warning
indicator.
Service Center.
This message is displayed on the LCD screen when the

accelerator pedal is depressed with EPB or AUTO HOLD
activated and the AUTO deactivation conditions are not met.

GETtheMANUALS.org
- When the AEBS activation (warning) conditions are met, the

'Collision alert' message is displayed for 5 sec. and the AEBS
indicator flashes for 5 sec. to warn the driver of a possible
collision.
- If the conditions for displaying warning message are met
again during the 5 sec. of the message display, the new
warning message will be displayed for 5 sec. with the same
flashing of the indicator.
This message is displayed after the vehicle has stopped by the

AEBS activation of emergency braking (maximum brake control) by
(Autonomous the 3rd warning of AEBS.
Emergency
Braking System)
LCD display shows this message after the first 3 sec. of starting
the engine when there is a fault in the AEBS. This message will
stay on for 5 sec.
This message is displayed when the front camera module

cannot detect the lane markings, preceding vehicles, people,
etc. because of the ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris on the
windshield glass.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The message is displayed at the top of the LCD screen for

about 5 sec. depending on the ON/OFF state of the BSD
switch.
BSD (Blind
Spot Detection)
system
- If there is a fault in the BSD system, this message is displayed
on the LCD screen.
Service Center.
If the warning conditions for the BSD system are not fulfilled
with BSD system is activated, this message is displayed on
the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
RCTA (Rear This message is displayed on the LCD screen when a vehicle
Cross Traffic or object is approaching rear left and/or rear right side of the
Alert) system vehicle during the operation of RCTA system.
LOW Fuel To This message is displayed when the fuel is not sufficient to
Destination drive to the destination set on the navigation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The message which recommends taking a break is displayed

on the LCD screen for 5 sec. for your safety after driving for
Rest warning some time.
For some time: message displayed every 2 hours starting from
the first engine start-up with IGN ON.
This message is displayed once on the LCD screen when the

Service interval ignition is turned ON from OFF, provided that the check box
alert for the Service interval alert under the User settings menu is
checked and the distance to destination is 0 km.
This message is displayed when navigation is linked to the

Destination
system with Turn By Turn (TBT) menu activated and the
arrival alert
distance to the destination is 0 km.
Add washer fluid.

If the level of washer fluid is low, Low washer fluid level
Low washer
message along with the corresponding indicator are displayed
fluid level
on the LCD screen. The remaining volume of washer fluid in
the tank when the indicator is activated is about 800 ml.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If there is a fault in the ECU and TCU 3 seconds after the

Engine system
engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are
warning
If there is a fault in the oil level and oil pressure 3 seconds after
Engine oil level
the engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are
check
If there is a fault in the ESP system 3 seconds after the engine

ESP system
start, a warning message and warning indicator are displayed
warning
on the LCD screen.
If there is a fault in the EBD system 3 seconds after the engine

EBD system
warning
on the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If there is a fault in the ABS system 3 seconds after the engine

ABS system
warning
on the LCD screen.
If the fuel level is detected as being low 3 seconds after the

Low fuel level engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are

Exterior lamp
exterior lamps are turned on by the opening of the driver door
ON alert
after IGN OFF.
HBA system If there is a fault in the HBA system 3 seconds after the engine
warning start, this warning message is displayed on the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD display pop-up message
This message is displayed on the upper part of the LCD screen

Steering wheel
for 5 sec. according to the operation (ON/OFF) of steering
heater
wheel heater switch with IGN ON or engine running.
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to W while

Winter mode
driving the vehicle displays this message on the upper part of
indicator
the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to P while

POWER mode
indicator
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to E while

ECO mode
indicator
When there is an incoming call with handsfree phone connected

Bluetooth phone to the vehicle, the caller ID or phone number is displayed on
call hold the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.
(priority: ID > phone number)

GETtheMANUALS.org

about 5 sec. depending on the ON/OFF state of the HDC
switch.
The indicator color may change based on the HDC operation
HDC ON/OFF status.
- Green HDC indicator ON: HDC in ready status
- Green HDC indicator flashing: HDC in operation
- Red HDC warning lamp ON: HDC in overheating condition
and system error
1 km to
destination
system and the distance to the destination is 1 km.
check

GETtheMANUALS.org
The current light mode between 4 modes, which was selected

Light mode by the operation of light multifunction switch, is displayed on
the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org

Windshield
by the operation of windshield wiper multifunction switch, is
wiper mode
displayed on the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org

Rear wiper
by the operation of rear wiper multifunction switch, is displayed
mode
on the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
In Case of Emergency 6
OVM tools and warning triangle...........................6-2
0
Starting the engine with jumper cables................6-3
1
When the engine is overheating..........................6-5
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*..........6-6 2
Cautions when a tire is flat.................................6-12 3
How to use service kit (emergency tire repair
kit).......................................................................6-13 4
Removing the spare tire.....................................6-21 5

Changing a spare tire.........................................6-22
6
Cautions when changing the tire.......................6-27
7
Towing a disabled vehicle..................................6-30
Emergency towing.............................................6-31 8
When the engine is overheating........................6-33
Trailer towing......................................................6-35
Accident or fire...................................................6-40
GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM tools and warning triangle
Set u
p
easy in a pos
to ide ition
from n
behin tify
d
The warning triangle is stored at the bot- When the vehicle has a serious
1 2 3
tom of the luggage board.
problem during driving
Caution 1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,
yy Set up a warning triangle on a place stop the vehicle on the shoulder or
9 a safe place and set up the warning
where it can be very visible while paying
7 attention to traffic conditions. triangle in a position where is easily
6 8 identified by the driver of the vehicle
yy On a highway or vehicle-designated
5 road, evacuate yourself to a safe place approaching from the rear.
after pulling over your vehicle. 2. Have all passengers get out of the
4 yy Set up the warning triangle in a position vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
where is easily identified by the driver of
When your safety is secured, contact
1. Jack 6. Screwdriver (+ and -) the vehicle approaching from the rear.
(Set out also a flare at night.) your Ssangyong dealer for your emer-
2. Compressor 7. Spanner gency service.
yy If your vehicle is operational or the prob-
3. Sealant 8. OVM tool roll
lem is fixed, resume driving paying extra
4. Jack connection 9. Wheel nut wrench attention to traffic conditions.
5. Tow eye
yy Spare tire*: 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
yy Service kit: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8
6-2 In Case of Emergency

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the engine with jumper cables
If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
Connecting order:
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery
(2) The + terminal of the booster battery
(3) The - terminal of the booster battery
(4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body of
the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or a front
towing hook.
Discharged battery
The positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal.
The minus (–) cable to the minus (–) terminal.
1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.

2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power near
to the discharged vehicle.
3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged ve-
hicle.
4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) position
(manual transmission).
5. Connect the jumper cables.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery,
and let the engine idle for a few minutes.
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
Booster battery 8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence of connection.
In Case of Emergency 6-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.
yy Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt
disconnection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical
short resulting in severe damage to electric components.
yy A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could
be exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that
the booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
yy While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and
positive (+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an
explosion of the battery.
yy Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor.
yy While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge.
Caution
yy When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
yy Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the
engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine is overheating
WHEN THE VEHICLE OVERHEATS
1. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe area. Then shift the
gear selector lever to the P position and apply the parking
brake.
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine
hood and idle the engine until it cools down.
3. If you see steam under the hood, stop the engine immedi-
ately.
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine run-
ning in idling speed.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range
Symptoms: even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down.
yy The engine overheat warning light blinks (Buzzer sounds) 5. Check the coolant level in the reservoir. If it is too low, check
for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections.
yy The gauge indicates beyond the normal range (or in the red
zone). 6. Add coolant into the reservoir if necessary.
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment. 7. If necessary, cover the reservoir cap with a cloth and turn the
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the
yy Reduced engine output. pressure, remove the cap and fill up the reservoir. Then, put
the cap back on the reservoir.
Engine Overheat Warning Lamp 8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system checked
by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Coolant Temperature Gauge Center.
When the engine overheats, steam or
spray may come out the engine compart-
ment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
touches “H”. If this happens, the engine
overheat warning light comes on and a
buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your
vehicle in a safe place.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
What’s TPMS? TIRE PRESSURE CHECK
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been B
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that A
illuminates an abnormal tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-inflated.
B
Tire pressure OK
A
TPMS ECU
34 34
34 34 psi
Select TPMS (tire pressure display) of the instrument cluster

main menu ( A ) to check the tire pressure of each wheel on the
LCD screen ( B ).
Wheel module (each wheel) Note

TPMS start to recognize the tire pressures in 5 minutes of continuous
The TPMS ECU receives various data including tire pressure driving (over 20 km/h) after starting the engine. If the system is not
and temperature from the wheel module mounted to each wheel ready yet, LCD display shows “--”.
and displays the tire pressure information through the instrument
cluster. Caution
yy The tire pressure displayed on the LCD screen may be changed by
Proper tire pressure : 34psi the vehicle driving conditions, number of passengers, tire inflation,
and other external factors.
The tire pressure should be checked when there is nobody inside
yy When inflating the tire, the tire pressure may be changed continu-
the vehicle and the tires are cold (approx. 20°C).
ously until the turbulent mixing of air with different temperature
subsides.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT FLASHING/ON
Caution
yy Even with proper inflation of tire pressure, the global warning light
( ) can be illuminated due to the difference between interior
and ambient temperatures. This is because the tire pressure gets
lower in proportion to the temperature and does not mean TPMS
system is defective.
yy If you need to drive while the ambient temperature rises or drops
sharply, make sure to check and adjust your tire pressure before
driving.
yy For safe driving, do not depend solely on the tire monitoring sys-
tem; instead check your tire pressure regularly.
Warning
yy If the global warning light comes on in the cluster, stop the vehicle
as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressures.
yy If the global warning light does not go off after checking tire pres-
sures and driving for more than 10 minutes with the speed over
20 km/h, have your vehicle checked and serviced at Ssangyong
service center.
This light blinks or stays on when tire pressure is abnormal or yy Sudden tire damages by external factors (nails, road debris and
TPMS system (including sensor) is faulty. etc.) will not be detected immediately. If you feel instability of the
yy Faulty TPMS (including sensor): Blinks (for approx. 70 sec- vehicle while driving, reduce your speed and move your vehicle
onds) and stays on at a safe place to check.
yy Do not remodel or modify your vehicle in any way to avoid inter-
yy Tire pressure abnormality (underinflated / overinflated / flat- rupting TPMS system operation.
ten): Stays on yy For safety, always use genuine wheels mounted with tire pressure
monitoring system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD DISPLAY REGARDING TPMS
Condition Supervision Standard Definition
Tire perssure OK
Normal Tire pressure is normal
Low perssure
-- -- Tire pressure is not recognized

-- -- psi
Low
pressure
Low perssure
Tire pressure needs to be checked. Affected tire symbol comes

on.
Check tires
Tire pressure needs to be checked. Affected tire symbol blinks

Check tire
for 70 seconds (1s interval) and then comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Flat Tire
Tire pressure significantly goes down or tire is flat. Affected tire

Puncture
symbol comes on.
High perssure
High
Tire pressure is too high. Affected tire symbol comes on.
pressure
Unbalanced Perssure
If the pressure difference between LH and RH tires is 5 psi or
Imbalanced more, the corresponding tires on the screen flash with the shad-
ing inverted alternatively.
Note
If some tire pressure is shown as “--” symbol, the TPMS wheel
module on that tire may be faulty. Have your vehicle checked and
serviced at a SsangYong service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire Rotation, Tire Replacement
Tire Rotation When Low Tire Pressure Detected
The TPMS reset the tire positon after tire rotation. If the vehicle yy The global warning light ( ) and the low pressure tire po-
is driven at a speed of 20 km/h or more, the TPMS starts the sition indicator on the instrument cluster come on when a
tire positon reset procedure. Typically, the reset is completed significantly under-inflated tire is detected. If this is the case,
within 5 min. slow down and have your vehicle checked and serviced at a
Caution yy If you drive continuously without replacing the under-inflated
yy During the first driving after tire rotation or replacing a wheel tire with a new one, the performance of the vehicle, breaking
module with a new one (with tire pressure sensor), previous tire force and tire life will be adversely affected and fuel economy
pressure (value before the change) may be displayed or the global will decrease.
warning light can be turned on.
yy If you cannot take the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized
yy The tire position reset time may vary depending on the driving
conditions. Service Center, refer to "How to use service kit" in Chapter
6 - In Case of Emergency.
Warning
yy If you have injected sealant into one of your tire for repairing, drive
the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center located
within a driving distance of 200 km at a speed of 80 km/h or slower
and replace the repaired tire with a new one.
yy When replacing the sealant injected tire, the TPMS sensors should
be checked for appearance and abnormality at a Ssangyong Au-

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions for TPMS
Caution
yy If there is any foreign object, such as snow or mud, caught between the transmitter of wheels
and the receiver of vehicle body, strong electric waves or noises affect the TPMS, or a metal
object is located near the TPMS antenna, the tire pressure may be displayed with time delay or
may not be displayed normally because of communication or electronic interference.
yy In some cases, the TPMS does not work properly because the snow chain fitted to the tires
disrupts the communication between the wheel module and TPMS antenna. This does not
mean that the vehicle driving is also impaired.
yy When you are in an area near a facility which emits strong radio frequencies, such as police sta-
tions, public offices, broadcasting stations, military facilities, transmitting towers, airports, harbors,
the TPMS may fail and the global warning light ( ) can be turned on.
yy If a wheel without wheel module (with tire pressure sensor) is fitted to the vehicle, the global
warning light is turned on and the TPMS does not work.
yy The service life of the tire pressure sensor (wheel module) battery inside the wheel may be
reduced by frequent tire pressure abnormality (underinflated / overinflated / deflated tire/ pres-
sure imbalance).
yy Do not rely too much on the TPMS. Always check the tire pressure before driving off.
yy When inflating the tire, the tire pressure displayed on the air compressor may be different from
the tire pressure read from the TPMS.
yy The TPMS communicates with the wheel module wirelessly. Therefore, the TPMS may not
work properly if there is an electronic device which can cause electronic interference, such as
mobile speed camera detector, in the vehicle.
yy Be careful not to damage the wheel module when replacing the tires. If the wheel module is
subjected to an impact or damaged during tire replacement, the TPMS may not work at all. If
you replace the tires at a tire dealer, tell the technician that the tires have TPMS.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions when a tire is flat
Warning
yy Don't be panic! Sharp turning of the steering wheel or abrupt brak-
ing may cause a tragic accident.
yy Do not drive even a short distance after a flat tire condition. The
damaged tire prevents normal driving and can lead to hazardous
conditions.
yy Turn on the hazard warning flasher, stop the vehicle on the shoul-
der or a safe place and set up the warning triangle in a position
where is easily identified by the driver of the vehicle approaching
from the rear.
yy If possible, park the vehicle on a flat, solid, and no slippery surface.
Repair the tire with no occupant in the vehicle.
yy If a tire is punctured during driving, turn the hazard warning

lamp on immediately, release the accelerate pedal to decel-
erate the vehicle while holding the steering wheel firmly, and
depress the brake pedal lightly to park the vehicle in a safe
place.
yy Place chocks in front of and behind the wheel diagonally op-
posite the flat tire.
yy Use the service kit to repair the flat tire.
Note
yy Refer to “How to use service kit” in Chapter 6.
yy If you are not familiar with repairing flat tires, contact your insur-
ance company or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center for
assistance.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use service kit (emergency tire repair kit)
The service kit is stored in the storage bin (OVM too box) on the
Warning
left side of the luggage compartment.
yy Use the service kit only when the hole size on the tread is about 6
mm or less. If the tire sidewall is torn or the hole size is too large, do
not use the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle serviced.
yy If the tire pressure is not increased even when the air is injected
using the service kit, stop immediately. And tow your vehicle or
take it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.
yy When driving with the repaired tire using the service kit, make sure
that the vehicle speed does not exceed 80 km/h.
yy If you feel or hear any vibrations, unstable steering, or noises,
stop the vehicle immediately. And tow your vehicle or take it to
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle
serviced.
yy The service kit is for emergency use only. Take your vehicle to
Principle of service kit Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible to
If you have a flat tire, you can put the sealant into the tire using a replace the tire repaired using sealant with a new one and check
compressor. After short driving, the sealant will be applied evenly TPMS. (Maximum driving distance allowed after sealant injection:
on the inner surface of the tire and the puncture is sealed by the 200 km)
sealant so that you can drive the vehicle for a short distance.
Evenly applied sealant

during driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
INFLATING A TIRE
When the tire pressure is low, you can 3. Remove the valve cap from the tire, in 5. Connect the red clamp ( A ) of the ser-
inflate the tire to the specified air pres- which the air will be added. vice kit to the positive battery terminal
sure using the service kit. 4. Securely connect the air hose of the and black clamp ( B ) to the negative
1. Take out the service kit stored in the kit body to the air valve on the tire. battery terminal.
storage bin (OVM too box) on the left 6. Start the engine.
side of the luggage compartment. Caution
2. Take out the air valve and power cable The power switch of the service kit should Warning
from the service kit unit. be in OFF position. To avoid a danger of suffocation due to the
exhaust gas, start the engine in the well
ventilated area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power switch A
7. Press the service kit power switch to 8. Wait until the pressure reaches the 10. If the tire is overinflated, press the
activate the compressor. specified pressure (34 psi, 2.3 bar) air pressure release button ( A ) to
while checking the pressure gauge adjust the tire pressure.
Caution of the service kit. 11. Turn the engine off and disconnect
To prevent overheating, do not operate the 9. Once the standard pressure is the air hose from the tire.
compressor for more than 10 minutes. reached, switch off the service kit. 12. Install the air valve cap of the tire.
Note 13. Place the service kit back to the
original position.
To measure the tire pressure, switch off
the service kit and read the pressure
gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repairing flat tire
Repair kit components When to use the repair kit
2 3 4 5 6 7 Tread
Shoulder
Side wall
9 yy If you have a flat tire, first check the position of the puncture
1 to decide whether or not you can use the repair kit. (Refer to
inflating a tire)
1. Sealant 6. Power switch yy The repair kit can be used only when the puncture size is less
than 6mm on tread.
2. Sealant mounting 7. Air hose
yy If the puncture is found on the shoulder or side wall of the tire,
3. Pressure release button 8. Power cable (+) do not use the repair kit and obtain help from your insurance
4. Pressure gauge 9. Power cable (-) company and Ssangyong network.
5. Compressor
Warning
Before using the repair kit, check the side wall/shoulder of the tire to
see if it is torn, cracked or damaged. If so, instead of using the repair
kit, obtain help from Ssangyong service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
B
If you have a flat tire, repair the tire us- 2. Remove the speed limit sticker from 3. Connect the air hose ( A ) of the
ing a service kit as per the following the service kit and affix it on the steer- service kit body to the sealant bottle
procedures: ing wheel. ( B ).
1. Take out the air valve and power cable
Caution Note
from the service kit unit.
yy The decal indicates the current tire is Shake the sealant bottle well before use.
sealed by repair kit. You should not
drive faster than 80 km/h after the
emergency puncture repair kit has
been used.
yy Check the expiration date for the seal-
ant. The expiration date is marked on
the side of the sealant container. Do not
use the sealant after the expiration date
as it can deteriorate over time. Always
read the precautions on the container
carefully before using it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
A
4. Fix the sealant bottle onto the service 5. Remove the air valve cap of the flat 7. Connect the red clamp ( A ) of the ser-
kit box firmly. tire. vice kit to the positive battery terminal
6. Connect the air hose of the service and black clamp ( B ) to the negative
kit to the air valve on the flat tire battery terminal.
securely. 8. Start the engine.
Caution Warning
yy The power switch of the service kit To avoid a danger of suffocation due to the
should be in OFF position. exhaust gas, start the engine in the well
yy If the sealant is injected with loose ventilated area.
connection between the air hose of the
service kit and the air valve on the flat,
the sealant may flow back causing the
valve to become blocked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power switch A
9. Press the service kit power switch to 10. Inject the sealant into the flat tire. 12. If the tire is overinflated, press the
activate the compressor. Wait until the pressure reaches 34 psi air pressure release button ( A ) to
while checking the pressure gauge of adjust the tire pressure.
Caution the service kit.
To prevent overheating, do not operate the Caution
11. Once the standard pressure is
compressor for more than 10 minutes. reached, switch off the service kit. yy Dispose of the used sealant bottle. Pre-
pare a new sealant bottle for later use.
Note yy Be careful not to touch the sealant with
your skin when removing the sealant
bottle. In the case of contact with skin,
wash away the sealant with soapy
gauge.
water.
yy The material of the sealant may vary
Caution in different products. Using an unap-
To prevent overheating, do not operate the proved sealant, not our genuine one
compressor for more than 10 minutes. If could result in damage of TPMS system
the tire pressure does not go above 26 psi sensor.
after 10 minutes, the tire is too damaged
to repair using a service kit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning TIRE PRESSURE CHECK
Never stand next to the sidewall of the yy Use the service kit only when the hole AFTER REPAIRING
tire when the compressor is operating. size on the tread is about 6 mm or less.
Instead, look at the sidewall of the tire. If the tire's sidewall or shoulder is torn
Check the pressure of the tire repaired
You may get injured severely in the event or the hole size is too large, do not use with the service kit as follows after driving
of tire rupture. the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take about 10km.
it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service 1. Take out the service kit stored in the
Center and have the vehicle serviced. storage bin (OVM too box) on the left
13. Disconnect the air hose from the tire
yy If the tire pressure is not increased side of the luggage compartment.
and install the protective cap.
even when the air is injected using the
14. Install the air valve cap of the tire. service kit, stop immediately. And tow 2. Take out the air hose from the service
15. Turn off the ignition, remove the your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong kit box.
Authorized Service Center and have the 3. Disengage the air valve cap of the
sealant bottle and air hose from the
vehicle serviced. repaired tire.
service kit and place the service kit
yy You should drive with the speed below
to the original position. 4. Unscrew the protective cap from the
80 km/h if using a tire repaired with the
16. Immediately drive the vehicle for service kit. The maximum distance you air hose and connect the air hose to
about 10 km so that the sealant is could drive with the repaired tire may the tire’s air valve.
applied on the inner surface of the differ depending on the tire condition, 5. Read the tire pressure displayed on
tire evenly. however do not exceed 200 km.
the pressure gauge of the service
yy If steering is unstable or wobbling/
17. Stop the vehicle at a safe place kit.
noise is felt, stop driving and contact
and check the tire pressure with the SsangYong service center for help. 6. If the value is higher or lower than the
service kit. yy The service kit is for emergency use specified tire inflation pressure (34
only. Take your vehicle to Ssangyong psi), adjust it to the specified value
Authorized Service Center as soon as using the air valve.
possible to replace the tire repaired us-
ing sealant with a new one and check Warning
TPMS.
If the tire pressure is not maintained at
yy Obtain a new bottle of sealant from the around 34psi, stop driving the vehicle and
dealer with returning the used sealant contact Ssangyong Authorized Service
bottle for disposal. Center for help.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Removing the spare tire
Warning
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
use it for normal driving. After installing the spare tire on a wheel,
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a tire-
specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
Caution
yy When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to securely
lock it to the carrier holder.
yy While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any im-
pact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured.
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper cen-
ter of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then connect
the wheel nut wrench to it.
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire.
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by prying
off the lift plate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Changing a spare tire
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them

counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
Warning
yy Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed, the
wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the vehicle
will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
yy Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
yy The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Caution
When reinstalling the wheel cap, be sure to completely fit it into its
location.
1. Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Warning
The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire
Front jack up point Rear jack up point
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Warning
yy The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
yy It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
yy No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
yy Jack working load limit 1,300 kg.
<Jack up points>

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut wrench 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by rotating the body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip off
combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off from the ground position.
about 3 cm.
5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is station-
ary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
Warning
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper posi-
tion, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may cause a
personal injury or vehicle damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench coun-
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with
ter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Remove
the sequence as shown in the figure.
the jack.
Warning
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you may
get injured.
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence

as shown in the figure.
10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat tire
in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emergency
tools in their storages.
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the wheel
nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose.
Warning
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you can
avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire touches
the ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
60 km/h.
yy The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a
tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering and
braking system.
yy This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut, you
may have a fatal accident.
yy Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench by
Caution
foot or using an assist pipe.
After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
- Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions when changing the tire
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TiRE

►►Before changing the tire yy Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare
yy Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe tire is securely locked into the carrier without any looseness.
place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level ground. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or fall out
from the carrier on the road while the vehicle is moving. This
yy Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under
may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian.
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While the ve-
hicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push yy If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to other
the vehicle. vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the wheel nuts
and tire pressure before driving.
yy Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a place
away from traffic. yy The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire is installed
►►During changing the tire on the vehicle.
yy Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten yy Repair or change the flat tire. Stow the emergency tire in its
the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3 steps. location properly.
yy Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as it yy Make sure to check the tightness and inflation pressure of
will cause them to overtighten. tires before driving.
yy In the vehicle equipped with TPMS, the TPMS warning
►►After changing the tire
lamp comes on and TPMS does not work when installing
yy Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the nearest the emergency tire.
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a qualified tire
shop after an emergency change.
Warning
yy Make sure that tighten the wheel nuts again after driving of about 1,000 km when the tires have been replaced.
yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 60km/h or less (maximum speed 80 km; maximum distance 200 km) when the vehicle is driven with the spare tire.
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be maintained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine check warning light ON
Engine check warning light Water separator warning light (Diesel vehicle)
This light turns on when sensors (including If the amount of water in the fuel filter ex-
automatic transmission) and equipment ceeds the specified level, the warning lamp
related with engine control have malfunc- comes on and chime sounds (with engine
tion. If this light comes on while driving, running). If this is the case, stop the vehicle
have your vehicle checked and serviced as soon as possible and have the vehicle
at Ssangyong dealer. checked and serviced at a Ssangyong
Caution
yy If the engine check warning light comes on, the engine power can
be reduced and the engine can be turned off. Caution
yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im- yy Driving with this warning light ON can cause serious damage to
mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down. the fuel system and engine.
yy Opening the reservoir cap should be performed when the engine yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel that has a high water content,
is off and has cooled down. the warning light of the water separator comes on early. Never
yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres- use a low quality fuel.
sure, which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
Warning
yy The engine may be damaged if you add cold water abruptly when
the engine is still hot. If the amount of water in the fuel filter exceeds the specified level,
the warning lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the engine power
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
decreases.
yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
Warning
yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
when the engine is running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Use Priming Pump
Priming
pump hole
Close
Open
1. Turn the priming pump in open direc- 2. Press the priming pump several times 3. Turn the priming pump in close direc-
tion while pressing and holding the with the pump open until the good tion while pressing and holding the
pump. amount of fuel flows out of the prim- pump.
ing hole. 4. Close the engine hood and start the
Caution
engine.
Do not use tools like pliers to open or Caution
close the priming pump as the pump can
When pressing the priming pump, pay at-
be damaged by those tools.
tention to prevent fuel spray from priming
pump hole which may cause injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Towing a disabled vehicle
yy Flat towing For 2WD vehicles
Warning
It is not allowed to use a tow truck or
yy The 4WD system equipped vehicle
should never be towed with the wheels
keep the rear wheels from moving with
on the ground. This can cause serious the parking brake released for towing, as
damage to the transmission or the 4WD shown in the following figure.
system. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear
yy Towing with front wheels on ground
yy If your vehicle should be towed due to wheels on the ground.
wheel slips in mud or sand, you can use
the towing hooks in your vehicle. How-
ever, if the load to hooks is too heavy,
the towing hook, rope or chain could be
Dolly
broken, resulting in serious personal
yy Towing with rear wheels on ground injury and vehicle damage.
yy To prevent damage to your vehicle, Caution
proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary. When you need a tow-
ing service, contact Ssangyong Dealer
Dolly or Ssangyong Authorized Ser vice
Center.
Towing with tow truck
The best towing method is to lift the entire
vehicle onto the flatbed so that all wheels
are off the ground. If it is impossible, put
the front or rear wheels on the jig and
tow the vehicle using a dolly, with other
wheels off the ground. yy Do not tow with the sling-type equip-
ment or the bumper and lower parts can
For 4WD vehicle be damaged.
yy If the vehicle is towed with the driving
Your vehicle must be towed with a wheel
wheels on the ground, the transmission
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with may be damaged.
all the wheels off the ground. yy Be careful not to damage the bumper
and lower parts during towing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emergency towing
yy When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:

1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Secure
the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front of the
vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white colored
cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and release
the parking brake.
Within 5 m 4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position.
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the towing
rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the vehicle within
25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The length of the rope
should be less than 5 m.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of Towing Hooks
Front towing hook Rear towing hook Caution
yy If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of the
towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But, never
use this emergency towing when the electrical system, steering
system, or brake system is not operative.
yy Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
towing hook.
yy If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
use this method.
yy Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when the
engine is not running.
yy When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
vehicle’s signals.
yy Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
yours.
yy Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
Warning wheel is not locked.
yy The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid using
it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
yy Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing
hook, towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent dam-
age, do not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
yy If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can’t get out by itself due to poor
traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the towing
hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain may be
broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle. For safe
towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice shop or a professional towing company.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine overheat warning lamp
C H
Coolant temperature gauge
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come out

the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine overheat warning
lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your
Symptoms:
yy The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
yy The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the red
zone),
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
yy Reduced engine output.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine overheats
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on a Caution
firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and shift the
yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im-
transmission to the P position (automatic transmission) or the mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down.
neutral position (manual transmission). yy Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine engine is off and has cooled down.
hood to ventilate the engine compartment. yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
reserve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
ately.
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine run- the engine is still hot.
ning in idling speed. yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low,
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections. Warning
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary. yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the cap
a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the pres- reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
sure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, put the cap yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
back on the tank. when the engine is running.
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system checked
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg)
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be
EU
affected by towing a trailer.
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of Trailer coupling weight
correct equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and Maximum Maximum permissible Maximum
Engine Type
other abusive use. Trailer static vertical load on trailer
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your the coupling device hitch
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special equip- with brake 2,700
ment has been installed on it. Before attempting any towing, D22DTR 108 25
ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your vehicle. without brake 750
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing with brake 3,000
D22DTR
equipment to suit your requirement. 120 25
(7A/T+4WD) without brake 750
Trailer Loading with brake 2,300

G20GDi 92 25
To load your trailer properly, you must know how to measure without brake 750
gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight
is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it. GENERAL
You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully - EU4, EU5
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. Trailer coupling weight
Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch Maximum Maximum permissible Maximum
Engine Type
by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight Trailer static vertical load on trailer
can be measured using a bathroom scale. the coupling device hitch
The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight) should
with brake 2,300
never exceed the specified values. D22DTR 92 25
The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients without brake 750
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied.
with brake 2,300
When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle G20GDi 92 25
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants) without brake 750
must not be exceeded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you want to pull a trailer
Important points:
yy You have to consider a sway control. You can check the sway
control to hitch dealer.
yy If the total driving distance of your new vehicle is under 800
km (500 miles), do not tow a trailer. For the first 800 km (500
miles) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 80 km/h (50
mph) and do not start off your vehicle at full throttle. Other-
wise, your engine and other parts could be damaged due to
heavier loads.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than
80 km/h).
yy You have to consider the weight of trailer.
yy The permissible trailer ball weight varies according to the
cargo weight on the deck.
yy It has to be limited to the number of passengers by 5 people
including a driver.
Weight of trailer
To keep the vehicle and trailer safely, you must consider many
factors except the maximum load limit.
The vehicle and trailer’s safety depends on how you use your
trailer. Vehicle speed, altitude, load, outside temperature and
frequency of using trailer are all very important. Any special
equipment on your vehicle also affects on your vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Weight of trailer tongue Trailer Brakes
The tongue load of a trailer is also considered very carefully be- If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instructions
cause it affects the gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake system
This weight includes the curb weight of vehicle, any luggage in of your vehicle.
trailer, and the passengers in vehicle. In addition to that, you must
add the trailer tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
carry all the weight. Trailer Lights
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 4% of total loaded Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet country
trailer weight. To check the weights are proper, you must weigh and local requirements.
the trailer and the tongue separately after loading. If the weights Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights before
are not proper, unload some items from the trailer. you start to tow.
Caution
yy Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear side than in the Tires
front side. (Recommendation - Front: approx. 60%, Rear: approx.
40%) When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated to
yy Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing the inflation pressure.
equipment. Improper loading may result in damage to your ve-
hicle. It may occur the personal injury. Before driving, check the
weight and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office
Safety Chains
equipped with scales.
Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer.
yy An improperly loaded trailer may cause the loss of vehicle con-
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
trol.
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the
hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack to permit full turn-
ing. Never allow safety chains to drag on the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Fluid yy Always have someone guide you when reversing.
yy Allow adequate stopping distance.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) under the Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
following conditions.
yy Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently,
yy Towing a trailer frequently. which will cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
yy Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. brake efficiency.
yy Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
Automatic Transmission Fluid parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
yy Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows trailer
frequently. You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached,
on a hill.
If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
Towing Tips becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both the
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently com- vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
pared with normal driving condition. yy If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind the
yy For safety, observe the following precautions: trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch slipped,
the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone removing
yy Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you begin
blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
towing in traffic.
yy Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can handle
the vehicle and trailer safely.
yy Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the trailer
works properly.
yy Do not drive faster than 90 km/h.
yy Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
avoid sudden maneuvers.
yy Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
yy Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving on hill 3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake,
a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or First
have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and or Reverse gear for a manual transmission.
no longer work well.
5. Release the regular brakes.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to a
level which minimizes the possibility of engine and transmission
overheating. When You Are Ready to Leave Af-
ter Parking on a Hill
Note
yy When towing a trailer on steep hill (over 12%), pay particular at- 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
tention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the you:
engine does not overheat. If the gauge reaches to the “H” mark, • Start your engine
stop your vehicle at a safe place and allow the engine to idle until
it cools down. When the engine has cooled sufficiently, you may • Shift into a gear and
proceed. • Release the parking brake.
yy To avoid the engine and transmission overheating, you must check
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
the driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, Maintenance When Towing Trailer
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re towing a
be damaged. trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do that are especially important in trailer operation are engine oil,
it: brake pads & discs, automatic transmission fluid. Each of these
is covered in this manual and the index will help you find them
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) for quickly. If you want to tow a trailer, it’s a good idea to review these
automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual trans- sections before you start your trip.
mission.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Accident or fire
If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.

Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
Accident Warning
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, move yy In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary accidents. stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and contact the nearest yy If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
police station.
Fire
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use fire
extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to extinguish
the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance Schedule and Management 7
Maintenance schedule and service interval Wiper blade replacement...................................7-29
0
(EU) - D22DTR....................................................7-2
Fuse and relay box............................................7-30
Maintenance schedule and service interval 1
Bulb specifications and functional check...........7-32
(GEN) - D22DTR..................................................7-5
Location of exterior lamps..................................7-33 2
Maintenance schedule and service interval -
G20GDi................................................................7-8 Exterior lamp replacement.................................7-35 3
Severe conditions.............................................. 7-11 Location of interior lamps...................................7-37
4
Locations in engine compartment......................7-12 Interior lamp replacement..................................7-38
Engine oil...........................................................7-14 Replacing air conditioner filter...........................7-40 5
Engine coolant...................................................7-18 Tire.....................................................................7-42 6

Air cleaner..........................................................7-20 Do-it-yourself operation......................................7-47
7
Fuel filter (D22DTR)...........................................7-22 Emission reduction device.................................7-48
8
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T).......................7-23
Washer fluid.......................................................7-24
Power steering fluid...........................................7-25
Battery................................................................7-26
Spark plugs........................................................7-28
GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval (EU) - D22DTR
Regular check, Adjustment, Replacement interval
Daily First 1,000 to
Maintenance item First 5,000 km Every 10,000 Every 20,000 Every 30,000 Remarks
check 1,500 km of
of driving km of driving km of driving km of driving
driving
Check frequently and fill up if
Engine oil level check and fill up ○
necessary
Engine oil level and oil filter replace- Replace at every 20,000 km of driving or every year
ment Check frequently and fill up if necessary
Coolant level check and fill up, cool- Check frequently and fill up if
○
ing system connection check necessary
Coolant replacement Replace at every 5 years or every 200,000 km of driving
Drive belt Check at every 20,000 km of driving, Replace if necessary
Engine
Air cleaner element cleaning and
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Fuel filter replacement and water � Fuel filter: Replace at every 40,000 km of driving
separation � Water separation: Perform at every 20,000 km of driving
Fuel line and connection Check Check
Each vacuum hose and connection Check
Battery check ○
Exhaust pipe and mounting Check Check
Steering wheel free play ○
Power steering fluid level check and
○
fill up
Power steering mounting bolt
Check
Power retighten
steering Power steering line check Check Check
Steering system connections, gear-
Check Check
box, boot check
Outer ball join check and replace- Replace at every 100,000 km
Check
ment of driving
7-2 Maintenance Schedule and Management

GETtheMANUALS.org
Regular check, Adjustment, Replacement interval (km)
Daily Remarks
Maintenance item First 1,000 to
First 5,000 km of Every 10,000 km Every 20,000 km Every 30,000 km
check 1,500 km of (Severe conditions)
driving of driving of driving of driving
driving
Brake fluid level check and fill up ○
Brake fluid replacement Replace at every 2 years
Check and adjust or
Check Check
replace if necessary
Brake pipe and hose
Check at first 1,000 km of driving, After that check at every 20,000 km of
Brake driving or every year, Replace if necessary
Adjust or replace if
Brake pad and disc Check
necessary
Brake pedal operation and free play ○
Check frequently and
Parking brake operation ○ Check
adjust
Manual transmis- Inspect at every 60,000 km or every 3 years and replace if necessary
6-speed M/T
sion fluid (Replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
Automatic trans- Check and fill up at every 20,000km of driving, Replace if necessary
7-speed A/T
mission fluid (Check and replace at every 60,000km under severe condition)
Replace at every
Transfer Case Check
60,000 km of driving
Replace at every
Front Common type Replace
Drive General axle Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
system and type 30,000 km of driving
chassis Rear
Independent Replace at every
Check
axle type 60,000 km of driving
Apply additional
Propeller shaft and drive shaft, boot
Check grease or replace if
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
A/C air filter replacement Replace km of driving, Re-
place if necessary
Cooling/Heating system operation ○
Maintenance Schedule and Management 7-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
Tire pressure check and inflation ○
Tire wear check Check Check
Tire and Tire rotation Perform at every 5,000 km
wheel
Wheel balance and wheel alignment Check
Wheel nut/bolt check-tighten Check Check
Various oil leakage and coolant leak-
○
age check
Lower bolt/nut of chassis and body
Ball joint: Replace
check-tighten, Ball joint grease
Check Check at every 100,000 km
leakage check, Free-play/tightness
of driving
check
Other
check Various system test with diagnostic
Check
items device
Seat belt, buckle operation check ○
Various warning lamps and indicator
○
lamps operation
Interior/Exterior lamps operation
○
check
Headlamp aiming angle check and
Check
adjustment
Wiper, washer operation and mirror
○
check
Other
check Wiper blade check and replacement ○
items
Washer fluid level check and fill up
○
if necessary
Engine hood, door, tailgate lubrica- Adjust or replace if
Check
tion and operation necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval (GEN) - D22DTR
check 1,500 km of
driving
necessary
Initial check: 7,500 km
○
Engine
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Battery check ○
○
fill up
Check
Power retighten
Check Check
box, boot check
Check
ment of driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
Check and adjust or
Check Check
Brake pipe and hose
necessary
adjust
Manual transmis- Inspect at every 60,000 km of driving replace if necessary (Check and
6-speed M/T
sion fluid replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
7-speed A/T
mission fluid (Check and replace at every 60,000km under severe conditions)
Replace at every
Transfer Case Check
Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
chassis Rear
Check
Apply additional
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
place if necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
wheel
○
age check
Ball joint: Replace
of driving
check
Other
Check
items device
○
lamps operation
○
check
Check
adjustment
○
check
Other
items
○
if necessary
Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval - G20GDi
check 1,500 km of
driving
necessary
Igniting timing Check
○
Engine Drive belt Check at every 15,000 km of driving, Replace if necessary
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Fuel filter Replace at every 100,000 km
Spark plugs Replace at every 60,000 km
Charcoal canister and vapor lines Check
Battery check ○
○
fill up
Check
Power retighten
Check Check
box, boot check
Check
ment of driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
Check and adjust or
Check Check
Brake pipe and hose
necessary
adjust
6-speed M/T
sion fluid (Check and replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
Automatic trans- Check and fill up at every 30,000 km of driving or every year, Replace if
6-speed A/T
mission fluid necessary (Check and replace at every 60,000 km under severe condition)
Replace at every
Transfer case Check
Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
chassis Rear
Check
Apply additional
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
place if necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
wheel
○
age check
Ball joint: Replace
of driving
check
Other
Check
items device
○
lamps operation
○
check
Check
adjustment
○
check
Other
items
○
if necessary
Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
Severe conditions

Maintenance item Remarks
D22DTR (EU) D22DTR (GEN), G20GDi
Engine oil and oil Replace at every 10,000 km of Replace at every 7,500 km of
Diesel engine 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
filter driving or every 6 months driving or every 6 months
Check frequently and clean or
Air cleaner filter ← 2, 5
Check frequently and adjust or
Brake disc and pad ← 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Lower arm ball joint cleaning ← 2, 4, 5
Drive shaft and boot ← 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
A/C air filter ← 2
Automatic transmission fluid Replace at every 60,000 km ← 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12
Manual transmission fluid Replace at every 120,000 km ← 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
When driving under the following severe conditions, check frequently by reducing the service interval and replace, if needed:
1. Driving a short distance repeatedly 7. Using the vehicle as a police car, taxi, fleet, tow truck, etc.
2. Driving in a dusty and sandy area 8. Driving at a high speed (170 km/h) frequently
3. Continuously idling foo too long 9. Repeating frequent stopping/starting
4. Driving in heavy traffic 10. Driving on salty road or road with corrosive substances. Or driving
5. Frequent driving on extremely rough roads (sand, gravel, snow, in cold area
off-roads) 11. Towing a trailer or off-road driving
6. Frequent driving up mountain roads or in hilly terrain 12. Driving in a Hot condition (more than 32 Celsius)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Locations in engine compartment
Diesel Engine
Coolant reservoir Brake fluid reservoir
Fuel filter
Engine oil filler cap Fuse and

relay box
Air cleaner
Engine oil dipstick Battery
Engine oil filter
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Washer fluid reservoir
Caution
yy Do not work on the engine compartment while the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, muffler or
catalytic converter is hot. Always turn the engine off and allow it to cool before starting the main-
tenance.
yy Keep hand clear.
yy Fan blade start at eng running

GETtheMANUALS.org
gasoline engine (G20GDi)
Coolant reservoir
Brake and clutch fluid

reservoir (for manual
transmission)
Fuse and
Engine oil filler cap
relay box
Air cleaner
Battery
Engine oil dipstick
Engine oil filter
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Caution
tenance.
yy Keep hand clear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine oil
Diesel Engine Level Check
Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking brake.
Stop the engine and wait for more than 5 minutes.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it out with a clean cloth. Reinsert
it all the way.
2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max) mark and
minimum (Min) mark on the oil dipstick. Oil should be replen-
ished before the level goes below the minimum mark.
MAX
Engine oil filter
Engine oil dipstick
MIN
Replenishment
1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filter cap on top of
the cylinder block and add the genuine oil without exceeding
the level of the upper mark.
Gasoline Engine 2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
Caution
yy Regularly check the engine oil level and add Ssangyong genuine
engine oil if necessary.
yy Clean the dipstick with clean cloth so that any foreign materials
Engine oil filter cannot get into the engine.
Engine oil yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick.
dipstick yy The engine oil may be consumed more if the engine is new.
MAX
Warning
MIN Operating vehicle with insufficient amount of oil can damage the
engine. Make sure the engine oil level is correct and add oil if nec-
essary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Function of Engine Oil * What’s Severe Driving Condition?
yy Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts inside
yy Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed
of the engine, which enables engine to work properly.
yy Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy
Consumption of Engine Oil roads
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity and yy Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be required being used
under the following conditions; yy Repeated driving in short-distance
yy Driving with the excessive idling
- When the Vehicle is New
yy High load driving such as trailing
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons,
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an optimal
condition.
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.5 Liter per 1000 km
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently the
oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle or you
drive the long distance until the first 5000 km.
Engine care
- When driving at High Engine Speeds
Observe the followings to keep the engine in good condition:
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent and yy Check the engine oil level frequently under severe driving
comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle. condition and add some if necessary. The change interval
should be shortened as well.
yy Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cycle
to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions. yy Do not run a new engine at high speed until its driving distance
gets 1000 km. Be extra careful when the engine is cold.
yy Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature yy After installing a new engine, do not tow another vehicle or a
remains below freezing for the first 1000 km. trailer until its driving distance gets 1000 km.
yy Do not use the trailing in the first 1000 km driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Change Interval Specification and Capacity
yy The engine oil filter element should be changed at the same Service interval
time with the engine oil. Specifi- Diesel Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter. cation (Approved by MB 229.51 5W30 or MB 229.52
5W30)
Engine oil
Gasoline Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”. (Approved by MB 229.51 5W30)
Capacity D22DTR 6.0 ℓ
Engine oil filter
G20GDi 5.0 ℓ
Service Interval
Same interval with the engine oil
Warning
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-
Caution recommended products could cause damage to the engine.
yy The service interval may be reduced if your vehicle is driven in
rough conditions.
yy Change the engine oil based on the driving distance or period, Warnings and Cautions When Checking
whichever comes first.
Warning
yy Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any foreign ma-
terials cannot get into the engine.
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil.
yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick.
yy Operating with insufficient or too much amount of oil can
damage the engine.
Caution
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the Ssangyong
genuine engine oil if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SAE viscosity classes
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accor-
dance with the average seasonal air temperature. Engine
Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature.
outside air temperatures would necessitate frequently Do not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief tempera-
changing the engine oil. The temperature limits for the ture fluctuations.
SAE classes should therefore be regarded as reference
temperatures and the actual air temperature may be higher
or lower for a short period of time.
* How to check engine oil specification

Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Winter oil viscosity Summer oil viscosity

(W: Winter)
yy The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates to vis-
cosity at particular temperature and the alphabet “W”
indicates the oil’s suitability for colder temperature.
yy For summer oil viscosity, higher numbers mean
higher viscosities.
Note
In severely cold or hot region, using the engine oil with SAE
(viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures is strongly recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine coolant
Diesel Engine
Level Check
Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools.
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN mark
MAX on the coolant reservoir.
MIN
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN” mark,
immediately add coolant.
Service Interval
Coolant surge tank
yy Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200000 km
Diesel Engine Ssangyong genuine coolant

10.2ℓ
(D22DTR) Anti-Freeze SYC-1025,
Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
Gasoline Engine Gasoline Engine ORGANIC ACID TYPE,
11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ
(G20GDi) COLOR:BLUE
yy Check: Everyday, before driving off

yy Replenishment: Replenish as necessary
MAX
MIN Warning
yy Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the
engine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system
may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing
Coolant surge tank serious injuries.
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replenishment Warning
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up abnor-
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine is mally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the Ssangyong
cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound. genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of coolants or
unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reactions can be
2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap from caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may cause the engine
the surge tank. to overheat or burning inside the engine.
3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the coolant
reservoir tank. Warning
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reservoir yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
cap. which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant surge
tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
Caution yy Use only the Ssangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of the
vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air cleaner
Diesel Engine Cleaning
Refer to Section “SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICES”.
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite
direction to normal air flow to clean the element.
Warning
yy Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner
element or without it. It may damage the engine or may cause a
fire.
yy Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air clean-
er. It may damage the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
Caution
yy If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will
be damaged due to foreign materials entering.
yy Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air
Gasoline Engine cleaner.
Caution
If vehicle is operated under severe condition
yy Pollutant area or off-road driving
yy Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air
cleaner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at the Blow the compressed air through the ele-
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. Clean the ment in the opposite direction to normal
inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. air flow to clean the element as shown
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the opposite above.
direction to normal air flow.
Warning
yy Engine can be damaged.
yy Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
Change
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make sure
that the element is correctly installed in the air cleaner hous-
ing.
3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filter (D22DTR)
Water Separating Function
If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may cause
serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter provides the
water separating function to block the inflow of water. When the
water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a
certain level, the warning light comes on and the buzzer sounds.
If it occurs, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
Service Interval
Change every 40,000 km (Draining water from fuel filter:

EU
whenever replacing the engine oil)
General
Caution
Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval.
Priming Pump Operating Conditions

1. If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
2. After draining water from the fuel filter
3. After replacing the fuel filter
If this happens, pump fuel until the fuel filter is fully filled. Then,
start the engine.
Warning
After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water from the fuel filter,
bleed the air from the fuel filter by using priming pump. Otherwise,
the engine cannot be started or the fuel system could be damaged
due to the air in fuel line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement
Specification DOT 4
Service interval Every 2 years
Level Check and Replenishment

yy The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” levels
on the reservoir.
yy Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below the
MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only use the
specified fluid.
Caution
yy Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine yy Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
yy After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely.
yy If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a
Warning
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If contact
happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of water. If
irritation persists, consult a doctor.
yy The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
Washer fluid
Top Up Washer Fluid

Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified
product as needed.
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter sea-
son.
Warning
yy The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent freezing.
It could cause a fire when directly contacted with flames. When
checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames near the washer fluid
tank.
yy If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will de-
crease your visibility through the windshield and may cause an
accident.
Caution
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the winter
Gasoline Engine and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only the
specified washer fluid.
yy If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the motor
could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor.
yy Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of your
vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your hand
or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
yy There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window.
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power steering fluid
Diesel Engine Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN mark,
refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use the specified
fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX marks shows
MAX fluctuations of the steering fluid between when it is hot and when
MIN it is cold.
Specification and Capacity
Specification S-PSF3
Approx. 1.1
Capacity (L) See NOTE 1: TOTAL FLUIDE DA
(Extreme cold condition only)
Gasoline Engine NOTE 1: Super multigrade fluid with an exceptionally high viscosity
index and a very low pour point, allowing functionality of hydraulic sys-
tems at extremely low temperatures. Excellent lubricating properties
even at very low and very high temperatures.
MAX
MIN Note
In severe cold weather, the viscosity of the power steering oil increas-
es, which can cause temporary abnormal noise at engine start-up.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Battery
Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instrument
cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging. If the
warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnecessary
electrical devices and have the system checked by a Ssangyong
Battery Maintenance
yy Make sure the terminal connections are securely tightened.
yy If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire brush
or sand paper.
yy The battery terminal should be disconnected only when the
ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Disconnect-
ing the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” position
may cause a sudden change in voltage and damage various
electrical systems.
Gasoline Engine
yy Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Replace
it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the battery
surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out with a
wet-soapy cloth.
Specification
Specification MF / 12V - 90AH
Capacity 90AH (20HR)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning
yy The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. yy Always use the battery with correct voltage for the vehicle. Other-
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked wise, there is a risk of fire.
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. yy Observe the indications on the battery.
yy Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly Always read the safety instructions in the User Manual
connect the terminals. before working on the battery.
yy At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a lighter,
The battery cell always contains highly flammable
but only use a battery-powered flashlight.
hydrogen gas which may explode if ignited. Be sure to
yy Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any direct keep it away from a cigarette, a spark or other flames.
contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or vehicle’s body. If
the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash your skin with fresh Wear a protective goggle when charging the battery or
water and see your doctor. Do the same on your vehicle. performing any work.
yy Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working in a In addition, ensure adequate ventilation of the enclosed
closed area, keep good ventilation. space.
The battery electrolyte solution contains a highly cor-
rosive sulfuric acid. Be careful not to contact it with
Caution
skin, eyes, clothes or paint. In particular, keep out of
yy If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is running, the children’s reach.
electrical systems could be damaged.
When in contact with the skin, wash off the contact area;
yy To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable first In case of eye contact, flush with running water for at
and be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you con- least 15 minutes, and seek medical help immediately.
nect the cables. The negative and the positive should not be
confused. The hydrogen gas in the battery is highly flammable and
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive and negative may explode if ignited.
cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-circuit the battery.
yy When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capacity will Do not throw out used battery as this pollutes the
drop and can be frozen. environment and is hazardous to our health. For envi-
ronmental protection, used, properly dispose of used
yy Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the electrolyte lev-
battery at designated disposal sites only.
el is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during battery charging
and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the battery can explode.
yy Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity. Oth-
erwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Spark plugs GASOLINE ENGINE
Service Interval
Replacement (G20GDi) Change every 60,000 km
NGK SILKAR8H9G
Specification (G20GDi)
Gap 0.9 ± 0.1 mm
Caution
yy When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative terminal
of the battery and turn off all the switches.
yy It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing
the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
yy Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon deposits. yy Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.
When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a strong spark may
not be produced.
Warning
Do not clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and carefully
Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file. The spark
plugs should then be blown clean with compressed air and the
upper insulator wiped clean. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Wiper blade replacement
Front Wiper Rear Wiper Specification
Front wiper
Rear wiper
Left Right
650 mm 500 mm 325 mm
26 inch 20 inch 13 inch
Caution
yy Do not open the hood when the wiper arm
is lifted up. The wiper and hood may be
1. Remove the ignition key and lift the 1. Remove the ignition key and lift the damaged.
wiper arm up from the windshield. wiper arm up from the rear glass. yy Do not operate the wiper when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
yy Be certain not to apply any fluid polish con-
taining oil to the windshield of your vehicle
since this will result in streaks which impair
B vision. Contamination of either the window or
the wiper blades with foreign materials can
A reduce the effectiveness of the windshield
wipers. Never clean up the windshield with a
waxed or oil-saturated cloth.
yy Always lift the wiper arm up on the driver side
first, and then on the passenger side.
yy The wiper arm on the driver side may inter-
fere with the one on the passenger side. It
is normal.
2. Press the wiper blade retainer ( A ). 2. Lay the wiper blade on its side and
3. Remove the wiper blade by pulling it remove it by pulling it out in the direc-
Warning
out in the direction of the arrow ( B ). tion of the arrow.
yy Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing
4. Install a new blade. 3. Install a new blade. day may be detrimental to your driving safety.
4. Put the wiper arm down. Never drive your vehicle with malfunctioning
5. Put the wiper arm down. wipers on a raining or snowing day.
yy Do not touch the running wipers. It may cause
a personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuse and relay box
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse. If the fuse is blown, replace it with the same
capacity.
Fuse and Relay Box in Engine Compartment Interior Fuse and Relay Box
Open the engine hood. Release the clips on the fuse and relay The fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument panel. To
box and open the cover. access the interior fuse box, open the driver’s door and remove
the fuse box cover with your finger.
Caution
Warning
yy When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first.
If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same If you do not use genuine parts or specified light bulb, and if you alter
capacity. the HID bulb or LED lamp wiring, fuse disconnection, malfunction
yy If you remove the fuse when the electrical power is supplying, elec- and other wiring damages could occur.
trical equipment could be damaged. Turn off all electrical equip-
ment and set the ignition switch to OFF when replacing fuses.
yy Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating.
yy If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
Higher amperage Specified amperage
Normal
Open
1. Turn off all electrical equipment and set the ignition switch to Warning
OFF. yy The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. yy The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position. Note
7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same ca- The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill the
pacity. fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indicated on
the upper surface of the fuse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Bulb specifications and functional check
BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Components Quantity
Specifica- 1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
tion switch.
High beam 2 H1-55W
2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t come
Bulb H7-55W
Headlamp
Low beam 2 on.
HID* D8S 25W
Turn signal lamp/Side-marker 3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
- LED
lamp/DRL For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emergency”
Front
Bulb 2 H16 section in this manual.
side Front fog lamp -
LED* LED
4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with a
Cornering lamp - LED
new one if needed.
Side repeater (Secondary turn signal lamp) - LED
Puddle lamp - LED 5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Welcome lamp (Door handle) - LED Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
Tail (stop) lamp - LED ter.
Rear lamp Turn signal lamp 2 PY21W
Rear Caution
Backup lamp 2 W16W
side yy Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
License plate lamp - LED
High mounted stop lamp - LED yy Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing the
Front room lamp - LED bulb. Remove the ignition key.
Center room lamp - LED yy Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
Luggage room lamp - LED yy Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
are turned off before replacing a bulb.
Glove box lamp 1 5W
Sun visor lamp 2 5W
yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning off
Interior the lamp.
Front/rear door courtesy lamp 4 5W
lamp yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or moisture
Foot lamp 2 5W
stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode. If you
Dashboard Lamp (Center) - LED
accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a soft cloth.
Front/rear inside handle lamp - LED
yy Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
Front door trim mood lamp* - LED by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Dashboard mood lamp (Passenger side)* - LED Authorized Service Center.
The LED is not replaxeable. If LED does not illuminate, replace the lamp
assembly with new one.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of exterior lamps
Inside of the lamps such as headlamps, brake lamps, etc. can be fogged
Caution
while raining or during a car wash. This is due to condensation created by the
temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lamps, and To remove exterior lamps or replace light bulbs, visit
the lamps will work normally. However, if large water drops occur or water gets Ssangyong service center for servicing.
into the inside, ask Ssangyong service center about it.
Turn signal lamp &

Tail lamp (DRL)
Turn signal lamp Backup

lamp
License plate lamp
Reflex reflector

GETtheMANUALS.org
HID (High Intensity Discharge)
headlamp
Caution
yy HID headlamp bulb is better than regular (halogen) bulb in yy While driving a vehicle equipped with HID headlamp, the leveling
terms of performance and lifetime; however frequent switching switch should be used depending on the number of passengers
(ON/OFF) of headlamp may shorten the life. and loading condition so that the lamp does not interrupt other
drivers’ views.
yy Unlike regular (halogen) light bulb, HID headlamp bulb slowly
yy If the light does not come on while operating HID type of headlamp
dims when turning on the headlamp even after the bulb ran
(low beam), more complex actions than fuse/relay replacement
out. Therefore, if the HID headlamp turns off and comes on needs to be taken. Therefore, visit SsangYong service center for
again with the headlamp switch ON, the light bulb needs to overall inspections of related systems.
be replaced.
yy HID headlamp is more complex than regular (halogen) head- Warning
lamp, so an extra charge will be applied when replacing.
yy Never remove nor disassemble any parts of HID headlamp (pro-
yy When removing/installing the HID headlamp bulb and unit, the jector, high voltage cable, ballast) to avoid serious injuries due to
angle adjustment (up/down, right/left) should be performed. an electrical shock.
Visit our SsangYong service center and ask about it. yy It is dangerous to contact your body part to the vehicle equipped
with HID headlamp due to the high voltage direct current flowing
through the system. Besides, more actions than bulb replacement
Note
should be performed. Therefore, ask SsangYong service center
Characteristics of HID headlamp bulb if malfunction occurs.
yy The color of the light changes during its initial lighting through 4 yy If discretionally modifying the vehicle equipped with regular
seconds later until stabilized. headlamp to HID headlamp, the system will underperform or be
yy Color change by the usage period is an unique characteristic of overloaded causing malfunction of the vehicle. Additionally, the
HID bulb. light will interrupt the driver’s view running on opposite side of the
yy Initial stage: light yellow road resulted in deadly accident.
yy Over 100 hours: light blue
yy Over 1000 hours: blue
yy Late stage: bright red, purple, get dark

GETtheMANUALS.org
Exterior lamp replacement
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Replacement
All lamps except for the following lamps
should be checked and replaced at a
1. Rear turn signal lamp
2. Backup lamp
Warning
yy HID type lamps have a risk of electrical
shock because of high voltage. The 1. Unscrew the 2 mounting screws for 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
check and replacement of this lamp
the rear combination assembly and remove the socket.
should be performed at a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
vice Center. Disconnect the connector to remove
yy Replacing with lamp which does not the rear combination assembly from
the vehicle. A
meet specifications can cause open
fuse or malfunction, resulting in fire.
yy Before replacing lamps, park the ve- Caution
B
hicle in a safe area, and turn the igni- Be careful not to damage the painted sur-
tion switch OFF, and then disconnect face of the vehicle body or rear combina-
the negative (-) battery cable. Some tion assembly when removing it.
functions are required to reset after
reconnecting the battery.
yy The surface of the lamp can be very
hot. Be careful not to burn when remov- 3. Remove the turn signal lamp from
ing lamps. the removed socket by rotating the
lamp in the direction of the arrow ( B )
while pressing it in the direction of the
arrow ( A ).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Backup Lamp Replacement
Bulb specification:
PY21W
4. Install in the reverse order of re- 1. Open the tailgate and remove the 3. Remove the backup lamp in the direc-
moval. backup lamp cover. tion of the arrow.
Caution
Be careful not to damage the components
around the cover when removing it.
Bulb specification:
W16W
4. Install in the reverse order of re-

moval.
Caution
yy When screwing in a new lamp clock-
wise, make sure that the socket fits into
the hole securely.
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to yy Use a genuine lamp only.
remove the socket. yy Do not install additional lamps or LEDs
to the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of interior lamps

B B
C F C
H
G D G
E E
D Dashboard Lamp (Center) Door courtesy lamp H Glove box lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior lamp replacement
Front Room Lamp Center/Rear Room Lamp Door Courtesy Lamp
LED type
LED type Bulb type
1. Turn the room lamp switch OFF, and 1. Turn the room lamp switch OFF, and 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
remove the cover using a flat bladed remove the cover using a flat bladed and remove the cover using a flat
screwdriver. screwdriver. bladed screwdriver.

When removing the cover, make sure When removing the cover, make sure to When removing the cover, make sure to
to remove the rear part of the cover first remove the front part of the cover first remove the top of the cover first (marked
(marked with arrows). If you remove the (marked with arrows). If you remove the with arrows). If you remove the bottom
front part of the cover first, the cover may rear part of the cover first, the cover may part of the cover first, the cover may be
be damaged, be damaged. damaged,
2. Remove the lamp by pulling it down 2. Remove the lamp by pulling it down 2. Remove the lamp by pulling it (arrow
(arrow direction) and replace it with (arrow direction) and replace it with direction) and replace it with a new
a new one. a new one. one. Keep the surface of the bulb free
3. Fit the cover. 3. Fit the cover. of foreign matter.
3. Fit the cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sun Visor Lamp Driver Side Foot Lamp
Common part
Bulb type
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
remove the cover using a flat bladed and remove the cover using a flat 2. Remove the lamp.
screwdriver. bladed screwdriver. 3. Replace the bulb with a new one.
Keep the surface of the bulb free of
finger print for foreign matter.
4. Fit the cover.
Glove Box Lamp Passenger Side Foot
Lamp Caution
When removing the cover (sun visor lamp,
glovebox lamp, driver/passenger lamp),
remove the part with arrow mark first.
Otherwise, the cover and connectors can
be damaged.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable

and remove the cover using a flat 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
bladed screwdriver. and remove the cover using a flat
bladed screwdriver.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replacing air conditioner filter
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
yy Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
yy Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
Caution Caution
yy Make sure to remove the glove box holder with care. If exces- yy Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
sive force is applied to it, it can be deformed and the glove box However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such
cannot be securely mounted. as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or
yy When replacing the A/C filter, make sure the direction of the heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
filter is not changed. yy When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heat-
ing capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
1. Open the glove box by pressing the 2. Pull the holder in the direction of the 3. Disengage the damper clip at the right
open switch. arrow shown in the picture to remove bottom side of the glove box.
it on each side.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Remove the A/C filter cover by press- 5. Remove the A/C filter cover. 6. Replace the A/C filter with a new
ing the right side of the A/C filter one. Install in the reverse order of
cover. removal.
When installing the A/C filter, “AIR FLOW

with a mark "↓” should face downward.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Under Proper Over

inflation inflation inflation
Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Inflation Caution
Type Tire Wheel
Pressure yy Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfortable
235/70R17 7.0JX17 riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation pressures
will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle handling,
Driving tire 255/60R18 7.5JX18 34 psi comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make sure that the
255/50R20 8.0JX20 tire inflation pressure is correct.
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
Caution wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
yy Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated prop-
For 255/50R20 tire, adjust the rear tire pressure to 38 psi if 6 or more
erly.
passengers are carried or heavy loads are carried.
Wheel Alignment and Balance Between Tire and Wheel Note

If the wheels are not aligned as specified, it leads to uneven and The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an tire
faster wear of tire and the vehicle pulls to one side. If the wheels pressure gauge. Increase the tire inflation pressure by 4~5 psi from
the specified value prior to any long journey.
and tires are not balanced, it could result in uneven wear of tire
and vehicle vibration. If the above symptoms occur, immediately
stop driving and have the vehicle checked at a Ssangyong Dealer

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE SIZING CHART
Manufactured week Manufactured year
Section Radial Load

width (mm) index
Tire Date of Manufacture
Aspect ratio Rim diameter Speed In general, all tires should be replaced after six years from the date of
(%) (inch) index manufacture regardless of the remaining tread.
You can check the date of manufacture by looking for the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The last 4 digits of TIN indicates the date
Load index Speed index of manufacture with the front 2 digits representing the week and the
last 2 digits representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Maximum Load Maximum
Symbol Symbol
(kg) speed (Km/h)
Temperature Inside the Tire
102 850 S 180
The temperature inside the tire increases during driv-
104 900 T 190 ing.
Overloaded vehicle, low tire pressure or driving at a
106 950 U 200 high speed creates more heat and the heat builds in
the tire. The limit temperature of tires is about 125°C. If the tempera-
108 1,000 H 210
ture exceeds this limit, the adhesion between the underlying layers of
110 1,060 V 240 tire is significantly reduced, and this may result in an accident.
Always maintain correct tire inflation pressure specified by the manufac-
112 1,120 Z Over 240 turer and take a break every 2 or 3 hours of highway driving.
The temperature inside the tire drops about 20°C for 10 minutes of
vehicle stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION
With spare tire
Front Rear
Without spare tire

Tire tread
Front Rear
Wear limit
Directional tire
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators Front Rear
that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be re-
placed when the wear indicators appear in two or more adjacent
grooves.
Warning Note
yy Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may A temporary tire is installed as a spare tire. Therefore, use the tire
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. rotation method for “Without spare tire”.
yy Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures,
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary. Warning
yy Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center or professional tire shops.
yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure
to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on
all wheels.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER TIRE TIRE CHAINS
Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads. Install tire chains on rear wheels for a 2-Wheel Drive vehicle.
If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels. And install tire chains on all wheels for a 4-Wheel Drive vehicle.
If installing chains on only two wheels is unavoidable, tire chains
Warning should be installed on rear wheels.
yy Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads. If at all possible, install snow tires instead of tire chains for
yy The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall should vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, since the aluminum
be installed according to the arrow direction. wheels can be damaged by chains. If installing tire chains is the
yy The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slippery only alternative, use wire-type tire chain with a thickness of less
road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden acceleration, brak- than 15 mm.
ing or movements of the steering wheel. Drive the vehicle with tire chains installed at a speed of 30 km/h
yy When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them or less or at the specified speed recommended by the chain
with ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and
manufacturer. If a sound of chains being slammed against the
shady place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease,
or fuel.
vehicle body, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately. Check
the installation of the chains carefully and tighten the chains, if
needed. Take tire chains off on dry pavement to avoid damag-
ing the chains.
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains installed on dry pave-
ment.
Warning
yy Check the installation of tire chains and inspect the vehicle body for
damage after driving about 0.5 to 1 km with the chains installed. If
tire chains have been loosened, retighten the chains.
yy Improper installation or use of incorrect tire chains can damage the
vehicle or seriously endanger the operating reliability of the vehicle
and road safety. Use tire chains that meet the specifications and
install them in a professional manner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions FOR Wheel and Tire
yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure to use the same size and type of tires of the same manufac-
turer on all wheels. If you do not use the same tires on the vehicle equipped with AWD, it may cause a serious damage to the
vehicle’s drive system.
yy Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires before driving.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be
sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts as specified before any long journey.
yy Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine wheel and tire may have inferior performance and function and danger-
ous for safe driving. Also, any defects due to using them cannot be covered by warranty.
yy Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a wheel is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be decreased and
the tire can be damaged.
yy If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other objects during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel con-
sumption, damage to the powertrain or the braking system, vibration, or uneven tire wear. Always use the specified tires from
the same manufacturer.
yy Do not combine the tire and wheel assembly installed in the factory with other types of tires and wheels. Combining with other
types of tires can affect the stability of the vehicle and cause an accident.
yy Make sure that the temporary tire is available at any time. After installing the temporary tire on a wheel, do not drive for a long
distance. Visit a nearby dealer or tire shop to replace the temporary tire with a regular tire for driving as soon as possible.
yy Check the state of emergency tire service kit. Always check the operation of the compressor and the amount of sealant left.
yy Always check the tire pressure before long distance and/or high speed driving and inflate the tires, if needed. Driving at a high
speed with low tire pressure can cause bursting because of standing wave effect, resulting in rollover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do-it-yourself operation
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
Warning Caution
yy Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, yy Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can be
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
engine cool down before any service. yy Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
yy When working with the battery or fuel related components, al- yy Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted
ways stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all flames surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas
yy Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when the immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
ignition key is in the “ON” position. yy Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and trans-
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the positive mission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
and negative cables, must not be interchanged. yy The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
yy The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to allow
Avoid any short circuit. contact with dust while refilling.
yy Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any yy In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their levels
yy Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a frequently.
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) yy Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
yy When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with local
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or environmental regulations.
“Neutral” (manual transmission) position and apply the parking yy When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your
brake. vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yy The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly yourself or damage to the vehicle.
even when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative bat-
tery cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby
parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emission reduction device
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) - EU5
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are exhaust
DOC DPF gas after-treatment devices.
LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) - EU6
The LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) is a
system to eliminate the nitrogen oxide from exhaust emissions.
Use the specified fuel to avoid exhaust smell due to the poor
quality fuel and to maintain the normal performance of the LNT
DPF.
LNT DPF
Regeneration Process
“Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates when
a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter. In this
process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx. 600°C
This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst by fuel control and particulates are effectively incinerated.
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission reduc-
tion devices. When the Engine CHECK Indicator Flashes
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and removes Regeneration may not be performed due to sev-
80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among particulate eral operating conditions. And in this case, the
materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of particulate materi- engine CHECK indicator flashes. This flashing
als. function is to inform the driver to take action for
the proper regeneration of the filter.
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and removes
them by combustion. This device removes 95% or more of par- If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at over
ticulate materials. 80 km/h for 20 minutes to regenerate the DPF. When the amount
of particulates is lowered down to a certain limit, the engine
CHECK indicator goes off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy The vehicle equipped with DPF system may generate the white yy The engine CHECK indicator blinking means an excessive amount
smoke when using the fuel with high sulfur content (over 100 of particulates accumulated in the DPF. If this happens, you must
ppm). This is caused by the sulfur attached and accumulated in drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or higher for 15~20
DPF. However, this is very natural situation, not caused by your minutes. If you keep driving the vehicle at the speed of less than
vehicle. 80 km/h without following this instruction, it may cause damage
yy How to fix the problem to the exhaust system related to the DPF.
Replace current fuel with high grade fuel as soon as possible. yy The regeneration process of the DPF produces so much heat, so
However, even after replacing the fuel, the white smoke may be never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to avoid
seen due to residual sulfur in DPF system. For safety driving, have causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust pipe and
the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. the DPF to avoid getting burned.
yy The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the DPF
may reduce the engine power.
yy An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage
the DPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 80 km/h or
more for 20 minutes at every 500 km.
yy When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen-
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is malfunc-
tioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
Index 8
0
GETtheMANUALS.org
A C E
AC inverter power switch*................. 4-94 Caring for your vehicle under 0°C Emergency towing............................. 6-31
AC inverter........................................ 4-95 (32°F)........................................... 3-34 Emission reduction device................. 7-48
Accident or fire.................................. 6-40 Cautions for using smart key............. 4-14 Engine coolant................................... 7-18
Additional functions of smart key*..... 4-10 Cautions when a tire is flat................ 6-12 Engine hood...................................... 4-33
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Cautions when changing the tire....... 6-27 Engine oil........................................... 7-14
Braking)*...................................... 3-77 Certification....................................... 0-19 EPB (Electric Parking Brake)............ 3-49
Air bag............................................... 2-35 Changing a spare tire........................ 6-22 Exterior lamp replacement................ 7-35
Air cleaner......................................... 7-20 Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2 Exterior lamp..................................... 4-43
Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 2-40 Child restraints and pregnant
AUTO HOLD*.................................... 3-53 woman......................................... 2-24 F
Automatic heater/air conditioner*...... 4-68 Cruise control switch......................... 3-55
Four wheel drive system*.................. 3-38
Front cup holder/rear cup holder and
B D armrest......................................... 4-91
Battery replacement for rekes key....... 3-8 Defogging and defrosting.................. 4-82 Front seat belt................................... 2-19
Battery............................................... 7-26 Dimensions.......................................... 0-2 Front seat heating*/ventilation
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)....... 7-23 Do-it-yourself operation..................... 7-47 switch*......................................... 2-12
Brake system..................................... 3-41 Door open lever, lock/unlock knob Front seat............................................ 2-3
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and and switch.................................... 4-28 Fuel filler door.................................... 4-34
LCA (Lane Change Assist) Double parking.................................. 3-51 Fuel filter (D22DTR).......................... 7-22
systems*...................................... 3-71 Driver seat easy access*................... 4-41 Functions of ignition key...................... 3-6
Bulb specifications and functional Driving tips for automatic Fuse and relay box............................ 7-30
check........................................... 7-32 transmission................................. 3-28
8-2 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
G Interior lamp replacement.................. 7-38 O
Gauges and display window................ 5-4 Interior lamp...................................... 4-53 Opening and closing windows........... 4-30
Gear selector lever in automatic Operation of heater and A/C
Gear selector lever positions............. 3-21 L control.......................................... 4-69
Grip handle with coat hanger............ 4-96 LCD Display (main menu)................. 5-22 Outside rearview mirror control
LCD display pop-up message........... 5-48 switch........................................... 4-61
H LDWS (Lane Departure Warning OVM tools and warning triangle.......... 6-2
System)*...................................... 3-87
Headlight leveling switch*.................. 4-52
Location of exterior lamps................. 7-33 P
Heater/air conditioner system............ 4-65
Location of interior lamps.................. 7-37 Parking assist system I (front/rear
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point)
in rear 1st seat............................. 2-22 Locations in engine compartment..... 7-12 obstacle detection system)*......... 3-61
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) Luggage compartment features........ 4-97 Parking assist system II (rearview
in rear 1st seat............................. 2-21 camera system)*.......................... 3-66
How to fasten the three point seat M Parking assist system III* (around
belt............................................... 2-18 Maintenance schedule and service view monitoring system).............. 3-67
How to set power tailgate*................. 4-24 interval - G20GDi........................... 7-8 Positions of engine start/stop button
How to use service kit (emergency Maintenance schedule and service (smart key)*................................... 3-9
tire repair kit)................................ 6-13 interval (EU) - D22DTR.................. 7-2 Power outlet...................................... 4-92
Maintenance schedule and service Power steering fluid........................... 7-25
I interval (GEN) - D22DTR............... 7-5 Power tailgate operation*.................. 4-21
Manual heater/air conditioner............ 4-76 Precautions regarding unauthorized
Messages on lcd display................... 5-32 modification & alteration.............. 1-26
Important notice................................. 0-17
Multimedia......................................... 4-83 Protection of the environment........... 0-18
Inside rearview mirror........................ 4-64
Instrument cluster................................ 5-2
Index 8-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Q Severe conditions.............................. 7-11 U
Quick guide......................................... 0-8 Shift lever in manual transmission..... 3-17 USB................................................... 4-93
Smart key battery low........................ 3-15 Using emergency key (smart key)*... 3-14
R Smart tailgate operation*................... 4-25 Using smart key*................................. 4-6
Spark plugs....................................... 7-28
Rain sensing wiper*........................... 4-60
Starting the engine and driving the V
Rear 1st row seat belt....................... 2-20
vehicle............................................ 3-2
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* Vehicle care....................................... 1-16
Starting the engine with jumper
(same for both sides)................... 2-13 Vehicle identification............................ 0-7
cables............................................ 6-3
Rear 1st seat....................................... 2-6
Steering wheel................................... 4-86
Rear 2nd seat*.................................... 2-9 W
Storage compartments...................... 4-87
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 4-81 Warning and caution.......................... 2-43
Sun visor........................................... 4-90
Remote control key and ignition key... 4-2 Warning lights and indicators.............. 5-9
Sunroof*............................................ 4-36
Removing the spare tire.................... 6-21 Warnings and cautions...................... 4-66
Replacing air conditioner filter........... 7-40 Warnings for seat belt........................ 2-33
T
Replacing smart key battery.............. 3-16 Washer fluid....................................... 7-24
Tailgate operation (without power
Road safety....................................... 3-31 When the engine is overheating........ 6-33
tailgate)........................................ 4-20
Roof rack......................................... 4-100 When the engine is overheating.......... 6-5
Tailgate switch................................... 4-19
Theft deterrent system...................... 4-17 Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-58
S Wiper blade replacement.................. 7-29
Tire pressure monitoring system
Safety instructions............................... 1-8 (TPMS)*......................................... 6-6
Safety mode (automatic Tire.................................................... 7-42
transmission)............................... 3-30
Towing a disabled vehicle.................. 6-30
Safety release lever . ........................ 4-27
Trailer towing..................................... 6-35
Seat belt............................................ 2-16
transmission*..................................... 3-20
Seat..................................................... 2-2
8-4 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL REMARKS
1 Y400OM1707E RX1-7OM0E-7G-300A July 01,2017 Y400
Rexton (G4) (LHD)

OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
EXPORT SERVICE TEAM
SsangYong Motor Company
455-12, Dongsak-ro, Pyeongtaek-si,

Gyeonggi-do, 17749, Korea
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SsangYong Motor Company.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Export Service Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Descriptions Capacity Specifications
Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30 or
D22DTR ≒ 6.0ℓ
Engine Oil MB 229.52 5W30)
G20GDi ≒ 5.0ℓ Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil (Approved by MB Sheet 229.51 SAE 5W30)
D22DTR ≒ 10.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine coolant

Engine Coolant Anti-Freeze SYC-1025, Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
G20GDi ≒ 11.0ℓ ORGANIC ACID TYPE, COLOR:BLUE
6A/T ≒ 9.6ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (NWS-9638)

Automatic Transmission Fluid
7A/T ≒ 9.0ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF 134 FE)
Manual Transmission Fluid 6M/T ≒ 2.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (HD MTF 75W/85 (SHELL) or HK MTF 75W/85 (SK))
Transfer Case Fluid Part Time ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (ATF DEXRON II or III)
Front ≒ 1.4ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
Axle Oil Rigid ≒ 2.0ℓ

Rear Ssangyong genuine oil (API GL-5 & SAE 80W/90)
IRS ≒ 1.6ℓ
Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)
Ssangyong genuine oil (S-PSF3)

Power Steering Fluid ≒ 1.1ℓ
* TOTAL FLUIDE DA (Extreme cold condition only)
D22DTR: Diesel 2.2, G20GDi: Gasoline 2.0
Warning
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended fluids and lubricants.
yy Do not mix any different types or brands of oils or fluids. This may cause damages.
yy Keep the specified levels when adding or replacing the fluids.
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
FOREWORD
This manual has been prepared to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your
Rexton (G4) and to provide important safety information. We urge you to read it carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure the most enjoyable, safe, and trouble-free operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer knows your vehicle best and is
interested in your complete satisfaction.
We would like to take this opportunity to thank you for choosing Rexton (G4) and assure you of our
continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction.
This manual should be considered as a permanent part of your vehicle, and must remain with the vehicle
at the time of resale.
PYEONGTAEK, KOREA
GETtheMANUALS.org
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Vehicle care....................................... 1-16 Warnings for seat belt........................ 2-33
0 General Information
Precautions regarding unauthorized Air bag............................................... 2-35
Dimensions.......................................... 0-2 modification & alteration.............. 1-26 Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 2-40
Vehicle identification............................ 0-7 Warning and caution.......................... 2-43
Quick guide (front side)....................... 0-8 2 Safety Unit
Quick guide (rear side)........................ 0-9 3 S
tarting the Engine and
Seat..................................................... 2-2
Quick guide (interior I)....................... 0-10 Driving Off the Vehicle
Front seat............................................ 2-3
Quick guide (interior II)...................... 0-11
Rear 1st seat....................................... 2-6 Starting the engine and driving
Quick guide (interior III)..................... 0-12
Rear 2nd seat*.................................... 2-9 the vehicle...................................... 3-2
Quick guide (interior - luggage
Front seat heating*/ventilation Positions of engine start/stop
compartment and rear seats)....... 0-13
switch*......................................... 2-12 button (smart key)*........................ 3-6
Quick guide (engine compartment
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* Using emergency key (smart key)*... 3-11
- diesel)........................................ 0-14
(same for both sides)................... 2-13 Smart key battery low........................ 3-12
Quick guide (engine compartment
Seat belt............................................ 2-16 Replacing smart key battery.............. 3-13
- gasoline).................................... 0-15
How to fasten the three point seat Shift lever in manual transmission..... 3-14
Quick guide (warning and
belt............................................... 2-18 Gear selector lever in automatic
indicator lights)............................. 0-16
Front seat belt................................... 2-19 transmission*............................... 3-17
Rear 1st row seat belt....................... 2-20 Gear selector lever positions............. 3-18
Protection of the environment........... 0-18
How to fasten the seat belts Driving tips for automatic
Certification....................................... 0-19
(2-point) in rear 1st seat............... 2-21 transmission................................. 3-25
1 Safety Precautions How to fasten the seat belt Safety mode (automatic
(3-point) in rear 1st seat............... 2-22 transmission)............................... 3-27
Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2 Child restraints and pregnant Road safety....................................... 3-28
Safety instructions............................... 1-8 woman......................................... 2-24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-54
4 Convenience System I
(32°F)........................................... 3-31 Rain sensing wiper*........................... 4-56
Four wheel drive system*.................. 3-35 Using smart key*................................. 4-2 Outside rearview mirror control
Brake system..................................... 3-38 Additional functions of smart key*....... 4-6 switch........................................... 4-57
EPB (Electric Parking Brake)............ 3-46 Cautions for using smart key............. 4-10 Inside rearview mirror........................ 4-60
Double parking.................................. 3-48 Immobilizer system............................ 4-11 Heater/air conditioner system............ 4-61
AUTO HOLD*.................................... 3-50 Theft deterrent system...................... 4-13 Warnings and cautions...................... 4-62
Cruise control switch......................... 3-52 Tailgate switch................................... 4-15 Automatic heater/air conditioner*...... 4-64
Parking assist system I (front/rear Tailgate operation (without power Operation of heater and A/C control.. 4-65
obstacle detection system)*......... 3-58 tailgate)........................................ 4-16 Manual heater/air conditioner............ 4-72
Parking assist system II (rearview Power tailgate operation*.................. 4-17 Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 4-77
camera system)*.......................... 3-63 How to set power tailgate*................. 4-20 Defogging and defrosting.................. 4-78
Parking assist system III* (around Smart tailgate operation*................... 4-21 Multimedia......................................... 4-79
view monitoring system).............. 3-64 Safety release lever . ........................ 4-23 Steering wheel................................... 4-82
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and Door open lever, lock/unlock knob Storage compartments...................... 4-83
LCA (Lane Change Assist) and switch.................................... 4-24 Sun visor........................................... 4-86
systems*...................................... 3-68
Opening and closing windows........... 4-26 Front cup holder/rear cup holder
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency
Engine hood...................................... 4-29 and armrest.................................. 4-87
Braking)*...................................... 3-74
Fuel filler door.................................... 4-30 Power outlet...................................... 4-88
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning
Sunroof*............................................ 4-32 USB................................................... 4-89
System)*...................................... 3-84
Driver seat easy access*................... 4-37 AC inverter power switch*................. 4-90
Exterior lamp..................................... 4-39 AC inverter........................................ 4-91
Headlight leveling switch*.................. 4-48 Grip handle with coat hanger............ 4-92
Interior lamp...................................... 4-49 Luggage compartment features........ 4-93
Roof rack........................................... 4-96
GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine is overheating........ 6-33 Fuse and relay box............................ 7-30
5 Convenience System II
Trailer towing..................................... 6-35 Bulb specifications and functional
Instrument cluster................................ 5-2 Accident or fire.................................. 6-40 check........................................... 7-32
Gauges and display window................ 5-4 Location of exterior lamps................. 7-33
Warning lights and indicators.............. 5-9 7 M
aintenance Schedule and Exterior lamp replacement................ 7-35
LCD Display (main menu)................. 5-22 Management Location of interior lamps.................. 7-37
Messages on LCD display................. 5-32 Interior lamp replacement.................. 7-38
Maintenance schedule and
LCD display pop-up message........... 5-48 Replacing air conditioner filter........... 7-40
service interval (EU) - D22DTR..... 7-2
Tire.................................................... 7-42
Maintenance schedule and
6 In Case of Emergency service interval (GEN) - D22DTR.. 7-5 Do-it-yourself operation..................... 7-47
Maintenance schedule and Emission reduction device................. 7-48

OVM tools and warning triangle.......... 6-2
service interval - G20GDi............... 7-8
Severe conditions.............................. 7-11 8 Index
cables............................................ 6-3
When the engine is overheating.......... 6-5 Locations in engine compartment..... 7-12
Tire pressure monitoring system Engine oil........................................... 7-14
(TPMS)*......................................... 6-6 Engine coolant................................... 7-18
Cautions when a tire is flat................ 6-12 Air cleaner......................................... 7-20
How to use service kit Fuel filter (D22DTR).......................... 7-22
(emergency tire repair kit)............ 6-13 Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)....... 7-23
Removing the spare tire.................... 6-21 Washer fluid....................................... 7-24
Changing a spare tire........................ 6-22 Power steering fluid........................... 7-25
Cautions when changing the tire....... 6-27 Battery............................................... 7-26
Towing a disabled vehicle.................. 6-30 Spark plugs....................................... 7-28
Emergency towing............................. 6-31 Wiper blade replacement.................. 7-29
GETtheMANUALS.org
General Information 0
Dimensions..........................................................0-2
0
Vehicle identification............................................0-7
1
Quick guide (front side)........................................0-8
Quick guide (rear side).........................................0-9 2
Quick guide (interior I)........................................0-10 3
Quick guide (interior II)....................................... 0-11
4
Quick guide (interior III)......................................0-12
Quick guide (interior - luggage compartment 5
and rear seats)...................................................0-13
6
Quick guide (engine compartment - diesel).......0-14
7
Quick guide (engine compartment - gasoline)...0-15
Quick guide (warning and indicator lights).........0-16 8
Important notice.................................................0-17
Protection of the environment............................0-18
Certification........................................................0-19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dimensions Unit: mm
Front View Top View
1,960
1,640 (1,620)
Rear View Side View
1,800
(1,825)
1,640 (1,620) 895 2,865 1,090

4,850
* ( ) : Optional

GETtheMANUALS.org
*( ): Optional, [ ]: 2WD
Specifications (I) D22DTR: Diesel, G20GDi: Gasoline

Overall length (mm) 4,850 ←
Overall width (mm) 1,960 ←
Overall height (mm) 1,800 (1,825) ←
5 seat 2,860 [2,750] 2,840 [2,730]
Gross vehicle weight (kg)
7 seat 2,960 [2,850] 2,940 [2,830]
5 seat 2,206 [2,106] 2,186 [2,086]
General A/T
Curb vehicle weight 7 seat 2,243 [2,143] 2,223 [2,123]
(kg) 5 seat 2,165 [2,065] [2,045]
M/T
7 seat 2,202 [2,102] [2,082]
Fuel Diesel Gasoline
Fuel tank capacity (ℓ) 70L ←
Minimum turning radius 5.5m ←
Numbers of cylinders/
4 / 15.5:1 4 / 9.6:1
Compression ratio
Total displacement (cc) 2,157 1,998
Camshaft arrangement DOHC ←
Engine A/T 133.1 kw / 4,000 rpm 165 kw / 5,500 rpm

Max. power
M/T (181 ps / 4,000 rpm) (225 ps / 5,500 rpm)
A/T 420 Nm / 1,600 ~ 2,600 rpm

Max. torque 350 Nm / 1,500 ~ 4,500 rpm
M/T 400 Nm / 1,400 ~ 2,800 rpm
Idle speed 720 ± 50 rpm 750 ± 50 rpm
* ( ) Options, vehicle weights and gross weights are based on the maximum values and they depend on vehicle options and specifications.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (II) *( ): Optional

Cooling system Water- cooled / forced circulation ←
Coolant capacity (ℓ) 10.2 11.0
Engine Lubrication type Gear pump, forced circulation ←
Max. oil capacity (ℓ) (when shipping) 6.0 5.0
Turbocharger and cooling type Turbocharger, air-cooled Turbocharger, water-cooled
_
Operating type Floor change type
1st 4.489 ←
2nd 2.337 ←
Manual 3rd 1.350 ←

Transmission Gear ratio 4th 1.000 ←
5th 0.784 ←
6th 0.679 ←
Reverse 4.253 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (III) *( ): Optional

Model Electronic, 7-speed Electronic, 6-speed
Operating type Floor change type ←
1st 4.377 3.600
2nd 2.859 2.090
3rd 1.921 1.488
Automatic
4th 1.368 1.000
Transmission
Gear ratio 5th 1.000 0.687
6th 0.820 0.580
_
7th 0.728
Reverse 1st 3.416 3.732
_
Reverse 2nd 2.231
Model Part-time Part-time (A/T only)
Type Planetary gear type ←
Transfer Case
High (4H) 1.000 : 1 ←
Gear ratio
Low (4L) 2.483 : 1 ←
Operating type Hydraulic type ←
Clutch (M/T)
Disc type Dry single diaphragm type ←
Type Rack and pinion ←
Power
Inner 39.61° ←
Steering Steering angle
Outer 33.65° ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifications (IV) *( ): Optional

Drive shaft type Ball joint type ←
Front Axle
Axle housing type Build-up type ←
Drive shaft type Semi-floating type ←
Rear Axle
Axle housing type Build-up type (IRS type) ←
Master cylinder type Tandem type ←
Booster type Vacuum assisted booster type ←
Brake Front wheels Disc type ←
Brake type
Rear wheels Disc type ←
Parking brake EPB ←
Front suspension Double - wishbone + coil spring ←
Suspension
Rear suspension 5-link + coil spring (Multi-link + Coil spring) ←
R-1234yf / 520 ± 30g (R-1234yf / 800 ±
Refrigerant Type A -
Air Conditioner 30g)
(capacity)
Type B R-134a / 550 ± 30g (R-134a / 850 ± 30g) ←
Battery type / Capacity (V-AH) MF / 12 - 90 ←
Electrical Starter capacity (V-KW) 12 - 2.2 12 - 1.4
Alternator capacity (V-A) 14 - 140 ←

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle identification
1. Engine Number 3. Chassis Number

The chassis number is stamped
on the frame behind the front
right tire.
G20GDi
Gasoline Engine: The engine

number is stamped on the lower
area of cylinder block in exhaust
manifold side.
4. Certification Label
Type A
2. Vin Label
Type B
D22DTR
Diesel Engine: The engine number is

stamped on the lower area of cylinder The certification label is located
block behind the Intake manifold. on the driver’s door sill.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (front side)
11
10
9
8
6
7
1 13
5
6
2 3
4 13
12
1. Headlamp (HBA, DRL, HID)..................................4-39, 7-34 8. Windshield wiper............................................................ 7-29

2. Cornering lamp...............................................................4-43 9. FCM (Emergency braking and Lane departure
3. Front fog lamp................................................................. 7-33 warning).......................................................................... 3-74
4. Front towing hook........................................................... 6-32 10. AUTO light and Rain senor................................... 4-46, 4-56
5. Parking assist system (Front obstacle detection 11. Sunroof........................................................................... 4-32
system)...........................................................................3-58 12. Outside door handle and switch.......................................4-8
6. Around view monitoring system.....................................3-64 13. Approach (Welcome) lamp......................................4-7, 4-43
7. Engine hood................................................................... 4-29

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (rear side)
1
2
3
4
8 5
9 6 7
12
10
11
1. Antenna.......................................................................... 4-81 7. Tailgate switch................................................................ 4-15

2. High mounted stop lamp................................................. 7-33 8. Rear lamp....................................................................... 7-33
3. Rear glass heater...........................................................4-68 9. Fuel filler......................................................................... 4-30
4. Rear wiper...................................................................... 7-29 10. Wheel and tire (TPMS)............................................6-6, 7-42
5. License plate lamp.......................................................... 7-33 11. Rear parking assist system............................................3-58
6. Rear view camera...........................................................3-63 12. Rear towing hook............................................................ 6-32

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior I)
1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
11
10
13
14
12
1. Headlight leveling switch................................................4-48 8. BSD system activation switch........................................3-68

2. ESP OFF switch.............................................................3-42 9. Around view activation switch........................................3-64
3. HDC switch.....................................................................3-44 10. Door lever....................................................................... 4-24
4. LDWS Switch..................................................................3-84 11. Driver seat easy access................................................. 4-37
5. Tailgate interior switch.................................................... 4-15 12. Opening/closing windows............................................... 4-26
6. Front obstacle detection warning OFF switch................3-58 13. Outside rearview mirror control switch........................... 4-57
7. AC inverter activation switch..........................................4-90 14. Front seats........................................................................ 2-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior II)
10
9
1
2
3
7 4
8 6
5
1. Instrument cluster............................................................. 5-2 6. Foot brake (Emergency brake alert)......................3-39, 3-41

2. Light switch.....................................................................4-40 7. Cruise control switch...................................................... 3-52
3. Driver air bag.................................................................. 2-35 8. Instrument cluster User settings switch......................... 5-22
4. Interior fuse box.............................................................. 7-30 9. Steering wheel multimedia switch.................................. 4-79
5. Opening/closing engine hood......................................... 4-29 10. Steering wheel heater switch.........................................4-82

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior III)
8 9
3 1
10
2
12
11 13 4
6
5
7
1. Wiper and washer switch...............................................4-54 8. Hazard warning lamp switch..........................................4-44

2. START/STOP switch........................................................3-6 9. Glass heater switch........................................................ 4-75
3. AVN, Smart audio...........................................................4-80 10. Heater and A/C controller......................................4-64, 4-72
4. Front seat heating/ventilation switch...............................2-12 11. EPB switch......................................................................3-46
5. Slots for multimedia........................................................ 4-81 12. 4WD selection switch..................................................... 3-35
6. Front power socket.........................................................4-88 13. AUTO HOLD switch........................................................3-50
7. TGS lever........................................................................ 3-17

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (interior - luggage compartment and rear seats)
16
7
11
12 13
8
10
4
5
2 3
6
14 15
9
1. Luggage upper cover...................................................... 4-93 8. Rear cup holder and armrest.......................................... 4-87
2. Service kit....................................................................... 6-13 9. Rear 1st seats................................................................... 2-6
3. OVM tools......................................................................... 6-2 10. Child restraint system..................................................... 2-24
4. Rear power socket..........................................................4-88 11. Door lever....................................................................... 4-24
5. Luggage compartment...................................................4-85 12. Rear seat window switch................................................ 4-28
6. Luggage board...............................................................4-95 13. Rear 1st row seat heating switch.....................................2-13
7. Barrier net.......................................................................4-94 14. Rear USB charger..........................................................4-89
15. AC inverter......................................................................4-90
16. Rear 1st seatbelt............................................................. 2-20

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (engine compartment - diesel)
9
5
2
8
4
10

2. Air cleaner...................................................................... 7-20 7. Fuel filter................................................................ 6-29, 7-22
3. Checking and adding washer fluid................................. 7-24 8. Managing battery............................................................ 7-26
4. Checking engine oil.........................................................7-14 9. Fuse and relay................................................................ 7-30
5. Adding engine oil.............................................................7-14 10. Power steering oil........................................................... 7-25

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (engine compartment - gasoline)
6
1
8
5
2 7
4

2. Air cleaner...................................................................... 7-20 7. Managing battery............................................................ 7-26
3. Checking and adding washer fluid................................. 7-24 8. Fuse and relay................................................................ 7-30
4. Checking engine oil.........................................................7-14 9. Power steering oil........................................................... 7-25
5. Adding engine oil.............................................................7-14

GETtheMANUALS.org
Quick guide (warning and indicator lights)
Engine oil Engine Water

Driver’s seat Engine hood Charge Air bag Door ajar SSPS warn-
pressure overheat separator
belt reminder open indicator warning light warning light warning light ing lamp
warning light warning light warning light
ESP ON
Brake ABS warning 4WD CHECK 4WD HIGH 4WD LOW ESP OFF Engine CHECK Low fuel level
indicator/
warning light light warning light indicator indicator indicator warning light warning light
warning light
Steering Immobilizer/
Global warning Smart key EPB warning AEBS OFF AEBS High beam
Glow indicator wheel heating Smart key
light check indicator lamp indicator warning light indicator
indicator warning light
Auto cruise High beam assist

Turn signal/hazard warning Illumination Front fog lamp Cruise control Winter mode HDC ON indica-
Ready system (HBAS)
lamp indicator ON indicator ON indicator indicator indicator tor/warning light
indicator indicator
AUTO HOLD Lane departure Over speed ESCL (Electrical Power mode
Rear fog lamp ECO
indicator/warn- indicator/warn- (120 km/h) Steering Column indicator
ON indicator (GSL only)
ing lamp ing lamp LDWS (GSL only) Lock warning light) (GSL only)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Important notice
Please read this manual and follow the instructions carefully. All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are
Signal words such as “WARNING”, “CAUTION” and “NOTE” based on the latest product information available at the time of
have special meanings. publication.
Ssangyong reserves the right to change specifications or design
WARNING at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
Warning
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not This vehicle may not comply with the standards or regulations
avoided, could result in death or serious injury. of other countries. Before attempting to register this vehicle in
any other country, check all applicable regulations and make any
CAUTION necessary modifications.
This manual describes options and trim levels available at the
Caution time of printing, and therefore, some of the items covered may not
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not apply to your vehicle. If any doubt exists about any of the options
avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage.
or trim levels, please do not hesitate to contact your Ssangyong
Distributor for information on the latest specifications.
This must absolutely be observed for safety precau- * : This asterisk in this manual signifies that an item of equipment
tions.
is not included in all vehicles (model variants, engine options,
models specific to one country, optional equipment, etc.).
NOTE We would like to point out that non Ssangyong Genuine parts
and accessories have not been examined and approved by
Note
Ssangyong, and in spite of continuous market product monitoring,
NOTE indicates information to assist maintenance and instruc- we cannot certify the suitability nor the safety of such products
tions.
whether they are installed or intended for fitment in our vehicles.
Ssangyong is not liable for any damage caused by the use of
For product design changes non Ssangyong Genuine parts and accessories.
For a highest level of safety and quality, we are innovating our ve-
hicles through our continual research and development efforts. As
a result, the specifications are subject to change for the purpose of
improvement without any notice and you may find material in this
manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Protection of the environment
Cautions for environment
You can contribute to the protection of the environment by fol-
Ssangyong Motor Company is pursuing environmental friendly lowing the below rules.
policies and initiatives. This is the way we can save the natural
resources and humankind can live harmoniously with nature. Driving Conditions
You also can contribute to the protection of the environment while yy Drive off the vehicle slowly.
driving your Ssangyong vehicle. yy Avoid short trip.
The fuel consumption and engine speed, transmission, brake yy Keep the specified tire inflation pressure.
and wear of the tires are subject to the following factors: yy Unload the unnecessary goods from luggage compartment.
yy Driving conditions yy Always check the fuel economy.
yy Driving habits yy Have the maintenance service regularly.
yy V
isit Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center for maintenance service.
Driving Habits
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the
engine.
yy Keep the safe distance with vehicle ahead.
yy Avoid abrupt and frequent acceleration.
yy Avoid frequent accelerating (decelerating) or sudden accel-
erating (decelerating).
yy Shift the gear at proper time and do not overrun the engine
in each gear.
yy Turn off the engine when you stop the vehicle for a long
time.
Recycling
yy Information about eco-friendly product development and
vehicle recycling can be found on the SYMC website www.
smotor.com/en
GETtheMANUALS.org
Certification
1. Tire pressure monitoring system
Hereby, SsangYong, declares that the in-vehicle mounted radio systems are in compliance
CE EU
with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC
Model: TSSSG4G5 and TSSRE4Db
FCC ID: OYGTSSRE4DB
ORD. No: 14778/DFRS19614/F-50
This device complies with Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
FCC (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and AMERICA
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
LOGO
Certificate in the user manual due to product size

CU TR CIS
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Model: TSSRE4Db
The device passed all the conformity assesment procedures to CU TR.
EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. FOB/FOLDING 3. jack label
FCC ID: DEO-MT-FLIP01
1
This device complies with Part 15 of the 2
Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: 3 4
(1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and 1 Model name
FCC (2) this device must accept any interfer- AMERICA 2 Maximum allowable load
ence received, including interference 3 Representative company and address
that may cause undesired operation.
4 Production date
Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly Caution
approved by the party responsible for CE EU
yy When using the jack, set your packing
compliance could void the user’s authority
brake.
to operate the equipment.
yy When using the jack, stop the engine.
LOGO yy Do not get under a vehicle that is supported
by a jack.
yy The designated locations under the frame
TR CIS yy When supporting the vehicle, the base
plate of jack must be vertical under the
Certificate in the user manual due to product lifting point.
size yy Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles with
manual transmission or move the shift lever
to the P (Park) position on vehicles with
automatic transmission.
yy The jack should be used on firm level
ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety Precautions 1
Checks before starting a journey....................... 1-2
0
Safety instructions.............................................1-8
1
Vehicle care.....................................................1-16
Precautions regarding unauthorized 2
modification & alteration..................................1-26
3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Checks before starting a journey
Check The Vehicle Outside Inside Of Engine Compartment
OK OK
OK MAX
MIN MAX
OK OK MIN
Engine oil
Coolant
OK
OK OK
MAX
MIN MAX
MIN
Brake/clutch fluid
Washer
Reservoir Power steering fluid
yy Make sure to carry out the daily inspections before starting yy Check the engine oil and other fluid/oil levels in the engine
off your vehicle. compartment.
yy Check the tire inflation and wear. Clean the windshield and yy Check the washer fluid level and add if necessary.
rear glasses, side mirrors, and room mirror.
Caution
yy Make sure that the engine hood and tailgate are properly closed.
If the level of various types of fluids goes down very fast, have the
yy Make sure that there are no obstacles in the danger area vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
around the vehicle. Authorized Service Center.
yy Make sure that there is not any trace of leak around the vehicle.
yy Check the state of various lamps.
 For details, refer to chapter 7 “Service and maintenance”.
Note
Check the part that can be viewed with your own eyes, such as fluid
leaks on the battery or radiator.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Tires
yy Using wheel and tire other than the specified sizes could
cause unusual handling characteristics and poor vehicle
control, resulting in a serious accident.
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause
abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel
consumption, increase braking distance, vibration, improper
operation of ABS/ESP, or uneven tire wear. It may also dam-
age to the powertrain of the vehicle.
yy Use only the same tires from same tire manufacturer for all the
wheels. Otherwise, the powertrain may be damaged.
yy Check the conditions and pressure of the temporary (spare)
tire as needed and always keep it available. The temporary
tire should be replaced with a regular tire as soon as pos-
sible.
yy Check the conditions of the emergency puncture repair kit.
The air compressor and sealant canister should be available
at any time. Note
What is “Standing Wave”?
yy Check the tire inflation and wear everyday and replace if
During driving, the rotating tire repeats deformation and restoring
necessary.
movement in its tread portion. However, when a tire with insufficient
yy Be sure to keep the specified tire inflation pressure. inflation pressure rolls on the road with high speed, a wave-like
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the deformation occurs in the radial direction near and behind the tire
tread portion. This wavy deformation is called “standing wave”. If this
spare wheel, before any long journey. When driving the ve-
symptom lasts for an extended period of time, the tire could be blown
hicle with insufficient tire inflation pressure, the tire could be out in a short period of time.
blown out, because of standing wave symptom, resulting in
severe injury and death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SITTING ON SEAT IN CORRECT POSITION
Note
The travel range of the driver seat and steering wheel may vary
depending on the vehicle model.
Sit on the seat in correct position before driving off for safety.
1. Sit upright in the center of the driver seat with the hip against
the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback.
2. Adjust the driver seat position and height of the seat cushion
so that you can rest your foot on the clutch pedal (M/T) or
brake pedal (A/T) naturally.
3. Adjust the seatback angle and steering position with the back
is against the seatback so that you can put your hands on top
of the steering wheel comfortably.
4. Adjust the height of the head restraint so that the center of the
head restraint is aligned with the top of the ears.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check The Vehicle Inside
yy Do not put anything under driver’s seat.
Caution
yy Do not leave empty bottles or cans near or under the driver’s seat.
If it hinders the brake or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause
an unexpected accident.
yy Only use a floor mat with the correct size for your vehicle. And,
make sure not to move the mat while driving. If it hinders the brake
or accelerator pedal operation, it may cause an unexpected ac-
cident.
yy Do not wear the uncomfortable shoes such as high hills or slip-
pers when driving.
yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

comfortable driving.
yy Adjust the outside and inside rear view mirrors.
Caution
Do not attempt to adjust the driver’s seat, headrest, rear view mir-
rors, or steering wheel while driving. Adjustments should be done
before driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Supervision cluster
Standard cluster
yy Check that all appropriate warning lights, indicators and yy Check the operations of the clutch pedal, accelerator pedal,
gauges (fuel, vehicle speed, engine rpm) are operating when and brake pedal.
turning the ignition key to the “ON” position. yy Operate the EPB (Electric Parking Brake) switch and check if
an operating sound is heard and the parking brake is applied.
If the parking brake is not applied, have the vehicle checked
and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Caution
Release the parking brake and check that the Brake warning light on
the instrument cluster is turned off.
Warning
When releasing the parking brake, firmly press the brake pedal so
that the vehicle is completely stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants yy Keep the safety precautions for seat belt (refer to chapter
have fastened theirs properly. 2).
yy Do not drive with a twisted or tangled seat belt. yy Objects placed in the rear seat or luggage room must not
yy Slide the latch plate of the seat belt into the buckle until you exceed the height of the seat. It may fall down during the hard
hear a “click”. braking and could result in an unexpected accident.
yy Make sure that there are no person or obstacles in the dan-
Caution gerous area around the vehicle.
Do not recline the seatback with the seat belt fastened. You could yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when releasing the parking
slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or brake.
death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety instructions
Air Bag Infant, Child, Old Person
yy The airbags must never be impacted by hand or with tools.
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt.
Make sure that you and your passengers always fasten the
seat belts properly even if the air bags are installed in the
vehicle.
yy Do not place any objects on the air bag inflation location. You
may be injured by those objects during deployment.
yy The air bag system should be inspected 10 years after instal-
yy Repairs to the air bag system should be done only by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
ter.
yy Do not diagnose the circuit with a circuit tester. Do not attempt
to modify any air bag components including the steering
wheel, air bag mounting area, and harness.
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
yy Never install a child restraint in the front seat. The children
sitting in the restraint could be seriously injured by the air
bag in a collision.
yy To prevent children from interfering with your driving by ac-
yy The deployed air bag unit should be removed from the vehicle
cidental movements or misusing of devices, children should
and replaced with a new one.
sit in the rear seat.
yy When the air bag is deployed, the relevant components will be
yy Do not let children, infants, old people, or a pregnant woman
very hot, so do not touch them until they have cooled down.
sit in the front passenger seat with the airbag. The degree of
yy A person who is smaller than 140 cm should sit in the rear shock of the airbag’s expansion can be fatal or inflict serious
seat. injuries to such passengers. An infant or small child should
yy The air bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet always be restrained in a proper infant or child restraint in
in an accident. Your pet should be restrained in the rear seat rear seat.
with pet harnesses or carriers.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ANY CHILD MUST BE SEATED IN REAR No Alcohol, Drugs!
SEAT WITH PROPER RESTRAINT SYSTEM
yy Avoid driving for an extended period of time. Driving con-

Warning
tinuously without rest makes you prone to dozing off and
Always transport children in the rear seat and use appropriate child thus causes an accident. For your safety, take a rest every
restraints. Engage the child protection lock system of the rear doors, 2 hours.
so that children in rear seats cannot open the rear doors. Sudden
braking or a collision without proper child restraint can cause severe yy Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs is prohibited.
injury or death to children. It impairs judgment, making driving highly risky. Drunk driving
is also a legal offense.
yy Driving after taking medicine can be more dangerous than the
drunk driving depending on the medicine you took. Therefore
do not drive the car after taking medicine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Sleeping In Your Vehicle Do Not Drive with Tailgate Or
Doors Open
yy Do not sleep in a parked car with closed windows. In particu- yy Do not run the engine with the tailgate open to avoid exhaust
lar, if you stay or sleep in the car with the engine running and gas entering into passenger compartment.
the air conditioner or heater turned on, you can suffocate to yy If you drive your vehicle with the tailgate open, loose objects
death. inside the vehicle may cause an accident.
yy Sleeping in a closed space with the engine running puts you yy Driving the vehicle with the doors open puts the passenger at
at high risk of suffocation from the exhausts. risk of being thrown out, which can cause serious injury.
yy While sleeping, you may accidentally touch the gear shift lever yy Always drive the vehicle with the doors and tailgate locked.
or accelerator and thereby cause an accident. Opening a door during driving, especially by children, may
yy While sleeping in the car with the engine running, you may cause a serious accident.
accidentally step on the accelerator, thereby overheating the
engine and exhaust pipe and causing a fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do Not Stick Any Part Of Your Body Power Window
Out Of The Window Or Sunroof
Do not stick any part of your body out of the window and sunroof yy When you operate the rear windows from the driver’s seat
while the car is running or while you are maneuvering to park. while a child sits in the rear, make sure that no body part of
You might be hurt by the passing vehicles or other unseen the child is between the window and the window frame.
obstacles. yy When carrying children in the rear seat, press the rear door
window lock switch to make the rear door switches inopera-
tive.
yy Make sure that all passengers have their body parts such as
hands inside the vehicle.
yy When closing the windows, be aware of safety conditions
before operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Check For Any Passing Vehicle Stopping And Parking The Vehicle
When Getting Off yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle
yy When parking the vehicle on a hilly road, apply the parking
brake and chock the blocks under the wheels. And, place the
gear shift lever in “R” (when parked downhill) or “1” (when
parked uphill) for vehicles with the manual transmission or
place the gear shift lever in “P” for vehicles with the automatic
transmission.
yy If possible, do not stop and park the vehicle on the steep
road.
yy If possible, do not park the vehicle in a humid area or en-
closed area.
yy Do not park in places where hay, foliage, paper, rags, oil, or
other easily inflammable materials are kept. While driving or
after immediately driving, the muffler and exhaust pipe are
When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for passing hot; inflammable materials near the vehicle might cause a
vehicles or pedestrians. fire.
Vehicles or motorcycles coming from the rear, if unchecked, yy When running the engine while stopping, keep enough
might stumble on you when you open the door. distance from the wall to avoid a fire and discoloration of
vehicle.
yy Apply the parking brake when you park the vehicle.
yy Do not use “P” position as a parking brake. Securely apply
the parking brake when you park the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warming Up The Engine Prohibition Of Sudden Accelerat-
yy Do not drive without warming up the engine. Driving imme- ing, Braking And Starting
diately after starting the engine may decrease the engine’s Do not accelerate, start and brake the vehicle suddenly. Other-
life expectancy. Warm up the engine before moving your wise, it may increase fuel consumption and cause risk of a car
vehicle. accident. Accelerate or decelerate softly.
yy Do not warm up the engine excessively. Warm up the engine
just until the coolant temperature gauge begins to move.
Do Not Turn The Steering Wheel
yy Excessive engine warming increases the fuel consumption
and air pollution. An optimized warming up time is approx. 2 Abruptly
minutes.
Abrupt operation of steering wheel makes the vehicle unstable
yy Do not warm up in an airtight space. Exhaust fume may result and may cause an accident.
in toxicities.
 Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up period. Do Not Run The Engine In An En-
closed Area
Do Not Stop The Engine While Driv-
ing Leaving the engine running in an enclosed place with no air ven-
tilation, might result in death from carbon monoxide poisoning.
Do not stop the engine while driving. Otherwise, it makes the
steering wheel heavier, the brake performance lower and, con-
sequently, gets extremely dangerous.
Do not use a cellular phone or

watch DMB including DVD while
driving
Using your cellular phone or watching DMB (including DVD) while
driving will distract yourself and may cause an accident. If neces-
sary, pull over your vehicle safely to use your cellular phone.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Passing The Intersection Or Engine Brake
Railway Crossing When driving down a long slope, use the engine brake effect by
When passing the intersection or railway crossing, stop the downshifting the transmission in steps according to the driving
vehicle to check the safety and drive through as fast as you can conditions while using the service brake. An excessive opera-
while using low speed gear and without shifting the gear. If the tion of the service brake could result in a “Fade” or “Vapor Lock”
engine is turned off in the middle of the intersection or railway effect.
crossing, get someone to help you and move the car to a safe
place quickly. Fade?
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction
between the brake pads and discs, caused by heat build-up
Hazardous Materials through repeated or prolonged brake application.
Do not store any flammable items or disposable lighters in the
Vapor Lock?
console box or other spaces. In hot weather, they can explode
and cause a fire. When the brake is excessively applied on a downhill, some
bubbles can be formed in brake cylinder or in brake lines.
Because of these bubbles, hydraulic braking pressure cannot
Extinguisher be transferred to braking units of the vehicle despite the fully
depressed brake pedal.
For safety, we strongly recommend that you have an extinguisher
in your vehicle. Keep it ready for use at any time. Be familiar with
how to use it.
System Protection (Delayed Ac-
celeration)
Do not depress the brake pedal while driving with the accelera-
tor pedal depressed. Otherwise, the response from accelerator
pedal may be delayed. This symptom is the safety function to
protect the vehicle’s powertrain system. This symptom can be
eliminated if you depress and release the accelerator pedal once
with the brake pedal not depressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Being Careful With Accessories Using Ssangyong Dealer or
Do not attach accessories or other unnecessary things to your Ssangyong Authorized Service
car’s windows as they might interfere with your driving. Attached Center
accessories can work as a convex lens and cause a fire or cause
an accident. Have the vehicle serviced at Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center. The customer warranty may be void
for any concerns with in your vehicle if the vehicle is serviced by
Being Careful While Checking a third party or another service center.
Coolant
To avoid being scalded, do not remove the engine coolant res-
ervoir cap when the engine is hot . Precautions on the dashboard
camera installation
Warning
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the en- The battery may be depleted if the vehicle remains unused
gine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system may for a long time with the permanent power supplied dashboard
spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious camera.
injuries.
Be sure to turn the dash camera off during a long period of
vehicle inactivity.
Cabin Ventilation
yy Volatile organic compounds, or VOCs, can be emitted from
the materials in the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time
in direct sunlight. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passen-
gers from being exposed to these harmful chemicals and keep
the comfortable indoor environment, open all windows of the
vehicle which is parked under the sun prior to entering.
yy Prolonged driving without proper ventilation can cause head-
aches and dizziness. Set the air source selection switch to
the fresh air intake mode for as long as possible or open the
windows periodically while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Vehicle care
BREAK-in Period Always Using Ssangyong Genuine
Parts
yy You can maintain the safety and performance of your car by
using only specified parts or Ssangyong genuine parts.
yy You can distinguish specified parts by their part numbers
and hologram.
There are no particular break-in rules for your new vehicle.

However, following a few simple precautions for the first 1000
km can add to good future performance, fuel economy and long
life of your vehicle.
yy Allow the engine to warm up after starting. Part numbers Hologram
yy Avoid harsh operations such as abrupt starts, sudden ac-
celeration and prolonged high speed driving.
Caution
yy Do not race the engine.
yy The warranty does not cover problems caused by using non-
yy Do not maintain a single speed for long period of time. Varying Ssangyong genuine parts.
engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine. yy You can distinguish an authentic Ssangyong genuine part by its
yy Avoid overload when climbing. hologram.
yy Check the engine oil level more frequently until 5000 km of
driving and add the oil if necessary.
yy Do not tow a trailer during the first 1000 km of operation.
yy During the first 1000 km of towing a trailer, do not drive the
vehicle over 80 km/h or do not drive off the vehicle with full
acceleration. Otherwise, engine or its components could be
damaged due to overload.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cleaning Agents Vehicle Washing
Follow the manufacturer’s advice whenever cleaning agents To avoid corrosion, wash your vehicle as soon as possible after
or other chemicals are used for the inside or the outside of the driving on a coastal road (salted road), on a road where the snow
vehicle. Some cleaners may be poisonous or flammable, and removal chemicals (calcium chloride etc.) has been spreaded,
improper use may cause personal injury or damage. When in the area where the atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
cleaning the inside or outside of the vehicle, do not use volatile are exist, or on a muddy or dusty road. Also, immediately wash
cleaning solvents such as: acetone, lacquer thinners, enamel your vehicle when things such as tree sap or bird droppings get
reducers, nail polish removers; or cleaning materials such as on the painted surface.
laundry soaps, bleaches or reducing agents, except as noted in Do not wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. Always wash
the fabric cleaning advice on stain removal. Never use carbon your vehicle in the shade. If your vehicle has been parked under
tetrachloride, petrol, benzene, or naphtha for any cleaning pur- direct sunlight for a long period, let it cool sufficiently before
pose. Open all vehicle doors for ventilation when any cleaning washing.
agents or other chemicals are used in the interior. Overexposure
to some vapors may result in a health problem which is more How To Wash:
likely to occur in small, unventilated spaces. To avoid possible
yy Rinse the vehicle throughly with cool water to remove dust
permanent discoloration of light colored seats, do not let materi-
and loose dirt.
als with non-fast colors come in contact with seat trim materials
until these materials are totally dry. This includes certain types yy Clean the vehicle throughly using a mild soap or detergent
of casual clothing, such as colored denims, corduroys, leathers mixed with clean and lukewarm water. Start at the top and
and suedes; also, decorative paper, etc. work your way down.
yy Check whether the vehicle is smeared with tree sap, coal tar
or other foreign materials. Rinse them off while paying par-
ticular attention not to damage the painted surface.
yy Remove the moisture using a soft cloth. If you detect any
stone chips or scratches in the painted surface, to prevent
corrosion, touch them up immediately.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy You should allow enough space between a high-pressure Bumper Washing
water gun and your vehicle when washing the car with a high
pressure cleaner. When the water gun is too close to the yy Remove the dirt or dust first with water and a sponge.
vehicle body, the high pressure of the water gun can cause yy If the bumper is contaminated by engine oil or any lubricants,
painted surface damage of the panels or malfunction of the wipe it off using mild soapy water.
sensors on the bumper.
Caution
Caution
Do not use abrasive wax and strong cleaning materials such as steel
yy Be careful not to damage the air spoiler when cleaning the vehicle wool which will scratch the vehicle body and bumper.
in an automatic car wash.
yy Wash your car by hand or using an automatic car washing ma-
chine. Avoid using a high pressure cleaner as much as possible
to maintain and manage the car performance. The high water
pressure can cause painted surface damage of the panels or mal-
function of the sensors on the bumper. In case where using a high
pressure cleaner is unavoidable, pay attention to the conditions
of your car by allowing enough space between a high-pressure
water gun and your vehicle.
yy If the engine compartment is cleaned with water (or high-pressure
car washing), the water may go into the electrical circuits or air
ducts located on the engine compartment, which causes the ve-
hicle not to maneuver properly.
yy After washing the vehicle, check whether the brake is affected
by water by testing the brake operation while driving the vehicle
at low speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Interior
Caution
yy Use only the mild detergent or cleaning agent with a small amount
of alcohol when cleaning the leather product (steering wheel, seats
etc.). Strong acid/alkali detergent or the cleaning agent with plenty
of alcohol may cause the discoloration and peeling of surface.
yy The Leather Seat Maintenance is necessary on Quarter basis with
dedicated Leather Milk or Cream in order to feed the Leather and
avoid any cracks on the seats and conserving the original look
and comfort of the seat.
Warning
To prevent from burning and electric shock, turn off the interior lights
before cleaning the vehicle interior.
With the use of modern trim materials, it is very important that Seat Belt Care
you use proper cleaning techniques and cleaners. Failing to do
this on the first cleaning may result in water spots, spot rings, or yy Keep belts clean and dry.
setting of stains or soils. All of which are more difficult to remove yy Clean seat belts only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
in a second cleaning. yy Do not bleach or dye belts since this may severely weaken
Dust and loose dirt that are accumulated on interior fabrics them.
should be frequently removed with a vacuum cleaner or soft
bristle brush. Wipe vinyl or leather trim regularly with a clean
damp cloth. Normal trim soils, spots or stains can be cleaned
with cleaners.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Glass Surfaces WARNINGS FOR WINDOW TINTING
Glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis. The use of
a glass cleaner or a liquid household glass cleaner will remove yy All vehicles from our factory have tinted windshield and
normal tobacco smoke and dust films. rear window which meet the specified percentage of
Never use abrasive cleaners on any vehicle glass, as they may visible light transmission (VLT). Do not tint the windows
cause scratches. If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of of the vehicle delivered from the factory. Tinted window
the rear window, any electric demister element may be damaged. with certain percentage of VLT might be a legal require-
Avoid placing decals on the inside rear window, since they may ment.
have to be scraped off later. yy Make sure that no liquid solution for application of tint
film flows into the electronic components of the vehicle
Cleaning the Outside of the Windshield to prevent error or malfunction.
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshield washer, yy Do not modify or apply additional sun films on the wind-
or if the wiper blade chatters when running, wax or another shield and rear window of the vehicle with heated window
material may be on the blade or windshield, clean the outside system. Sharp edge of a knife or work tool may damage
of the windshield with cleaning powder or an equivalent non the heated wire and cause electrical shocks.
abrasive cleaner. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form yy The tinted windshield and rear window with very low
when rinsing with water. VLT and enhanced solar control characteristics reduce
visibility significantly, especially at night or in the rain,
Caution causing unexpected safety problems.
yy Be careful not to damage the heated wire. yy Do not apply tinting film on the FCM detection area. This
yy Do not install the additional tinting film other than factory setting can cause malfunctions and abnormal operation of the
on the windshield and rear glass. Otherwise, it may affect the related systems.
operation of heated wire in the glasses.
yy The vehicle with the rain sensor and the auto light sensor on wind-
shield should be handled carefully. If the sensor installation area is
dirty or corrupted by agent, the sensor may not work properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Care And Cleaning Of The Exterior Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep their
Exterior Finish luster.
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth of color, Special care should be taken when cleaning the aluminum trim.
gloss retention, and durability. To avoid damaging the protective trim, never use automotive or
chrome polish, steam, or caustic soap to clean the aluminum trim.
Washing your Vehicle A coating of wax is recommended for all bright metal parts.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean
by frequent washing. Cleaning Aluminum Wheels, Alloy Wheels, and
Wash the vehicle with lukewarm or cold water. Wheel Covers
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle under direct sunlight. yy Do not use abrasive cleaners, polishes, solvents, wire brush-
Do not use a strong soap or chemical detergent. es or cleaning brushes for cleaning, as they could damage
the finish.
All cleaning agents should be washed promptly from the surface
and not allowed to dry on the finish. yy Use neutral detergents for cleaning the wheel, as acid or
alkaline detergents could damage the wheel cover.
Ssangyong vehicles are designed to operate under normal en-
vironmental conditions and to withstand the natural elements. yy Clean the wheels after driving on a coastal road to prevent
However, unusual conditions, such as high pressure car washers, the wheel from being corroded.
may cause water to enter the inside of your vehicle.
Caution
Polishing and Waxing Never clean the aluminum wheel or alloy wheel with acidic or
Periodic polishing and waxing is recommended to remove alkalic detergents. Otherwise, wheel’s protective finish could be
damaged.
surface residue from your paint finish. Approved products are
supplied through your Ssangyong Distributor.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Corrosion Protection Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should
Your car was designed to resist corrosion. When it was built, be repaired promptly. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may
special and protective finishes were used on most parts of your develop into a major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches
car to help maintain a good appearance, strength and reliable can be repaired with touch-up materials. Larger areas of finish
operation. Some parts which normally are not visible (such as damage can be corrected in your Distributor’s body and paint
certain parts located in the engine compartment and the un- shop.
derbody of the vehicle) are such that surface rust will not affect
their reliability. Therefore, corrosion protection is not needed or Underbody Maintenance
used on these parts.
Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust con-
trol can accumulate on the underbody. If these materials are not
Sheet Metal Damage removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on underbody
If your car is damaged and requires body panel repair or re- parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and the exhaust
placement, make sure the body repair shop applies proper system even though they have been provided with corrosion
anticorrosion material to the parts repaired or replaced so that protection. At least every spring, flush these materials from the
corrosion protection is restored. (Also refer to “Finish Damage” underbody with plain water. Take care to clean any area where
on the next page). mud and other debris can accumulate.
Sediment packed in closed areas of the frame should be loosened
Foreign Material Deposits before being flushed. If desired, your Ssangyong Distributor can
Calcium chloride and other salts, deicing agents, road oil and do this service for you.
tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chim-
neys and other foreign materials may damage vehicle finishes
if left on painted surface. Prompt washing may not completely
remove all of these deposits. Other cleaners may be needed.
When using chemical cleaners, be sure they are safe for use
on painted surfaces.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Ignition Key/Remote Control Key
yy When the engine is washed, fuel, grease or oil residues are yy Never use any duplicated key not provided by Ssangyong. It
washed off. Therefore you should use only a filling station or a may cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit.
Ssangyong Distributor who has oil separator equipment in the
car wash bay. yy If you lose your keys, you have to replace the whole key set
yy Used engine oil, brake fluid, transmission fluid, antifreeze, batteries, to prevent from theft.
and tires should be disposed by using the local authorized waste yy Avoid shock to the transmitter in the remote control key and
disposal facilities, or have them disposed of by the vendor who is do not get it wet.
under a statutory obligation to do so when you replace them.
yy None of these items should be placed in the household recycling yy Only use the batteries with the same specifications to replace
bins or poured into the sewage system. the discharged battery. Do not reverse the polarity.
yy Everyone should be concerned about environmental protection.
yy Help by doing your share.
yy When a strong multi-purpose, acid, or alkaline detergent is used to
clean up the surface of the painted body, side mirrors, windshield,
CAUTIONS FOR VEHICLE KEY (SMART
plastic moldings or leather, changes, fading of colors or rusting KEY)
can happen.
yy When the windshield is cleaned with an oil-contained or waxed yy Be careful not to lose any of your smart key. If you lose your
towel, strange sounds and vibrations may occur on the windshield keys, you have to replace the whole key set to prevent the
surface when the wipers are operating. Also, decreased visibility, vehicle from theft.
reflection at night, or poor removal of water on the windshield
may happen. Do not clean the windshield with an oil-contained
yy Do not throw or drop a smart key. The key will be damaged
or waxed towel. by the impact. Do not let the key fall into water.
yy An abrasive detergent may damage the painted surface of your yy Use only the specified battery. Do not mistake the polarity.
vehicle, including the bumper. Do not buff or polish your vehicle
with an abrasive detergent.
yy An acid or alkaline detergent may damage the painted surface of
the aluminum or alloyed wheels.
yy When chemical products are used to clean up the interior, the
chemical products may change some colors or distort the shape
of some interior parts.
yy When cleaning up interior parts, do not use chemical products
such as acetone, enamel or bleach.

GETtheMANUALS.org
System Safety Mode Fuel Recommendation
The protective measures including illumination of engine warn- Commercially available high-quality fuels are suitable. Fuel
ing lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned quality has a decisive influence on the power output, driveability
off in worst case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a and life of the engine. The additives contained in the fuel play
malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates an important role in this connection. You should therefore use
the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s only high-quality fuels.
drive system.
Diesel Engine
DANGER
Use diesel fuel at 50 cetane rating or higher.
a safe location immediately and contact your Ssangyong dealer. Gasoline Engine
Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Ssangyong Dealer
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center according to the dealer’s Fuel with too low an octane number can cause pre-ignition
instruction and have your vehicle checked by a mechanic. (detonation). Ssangyong can not be held liable for resultant
yy If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not main- damage.
more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage Caution
the drive system. For correct octane rating setting and other use of gasoline (ex.
Leaded), consult your Ssangyong Dealer.
Caution
Engine and exhaust system will be damaged.
yy Do not use leaded fuel to the vehicle for unleaded fuel.
yy Use the fuel with specified or higher Research Octane Number
recommended for your country by Ssangyong.
It is not covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not Use Methanol Water Separator Warning Light
Fuel containing methanol (wood alcohol) which is not qualified (Diesel)
EN228 and EN590 standards should not be used in your Rexton
(G4). This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and dam- When the water in the fuel filter exceeds
age components of the fuel system. a certain level, this warning light and
an alarming sound are activated. In ad-
Note dition, the driving force of the vehicle
decreases.
The warranty policy will not cover damage of the fuel system and
any performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol Water separating interval: whenever changing the engine oil
or fuel containing methanol.
Warning
Operation in Foreign Countries yy If the water separator warning light comes on, have the system
If you are going to drive your Rexton (G4) in another country, vice Center.
be sure to: yy The fuel system in the engine may suffer serious damage if you
yy Observe all regulations regarding registration and insur- keep driving while the warning light is on.
ance. yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel that has a high water content,
the warning light of the water separator comes on early. Never
yy Check that a suitable fuel is available.
use a low quality fuel.
Vehicle Fueling from Drums or Storage Containers

For safety reasons (particularly when using noncommercial
fueling systems) fuel containers, pumps and hoses must be Engine Check Indicator
properly earthed.
The Engine check indicator on the instru-
Static electricity build up can occur under certain atmospheric ment cluster comes on when the fuel or
and fuel flow conditions if unearthed hoses, particularly plastic, major electronic systems of the engine
are fitted to the fuel dispensing pump. are not working properly. As a result, the
It is therefore recommended that earthed pumps with integrally engine’s power output may decrease or the
earthed hoses be used, and that storage containers be properly engine may stall. If this happens, please
earthed during all noncommercial fueling operations. visit the nearest Ssangyong dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions regarding unauthorized modification & alteration
Do not modify this vehicle.

If unauthorized notifications are made on the vehicle, In particular, modifying your vehicle by fitting LPG
the company is not liable for repairing the modified might bring serious damage to the vehicle’s perfor-
parts even during the term of warranty. Other part prob- mance and durability. Not only the engine but also the
lems caused by modification are also not covered. transmission and wheel alignment are excluded from
The vehicle you bought is equipped with a large number of the warranty.
precision parts that have passed through countless experi- If you install a wheel dust cover on the tires to enhance the
ments and tests. These parts are deeply and systematically beauty of tire parts, the heat caused by friction in braking
interwoven. Therefore, if any part is modified or altered might bring serious problems in performance, causing Vapor
without authorization, said parts may be damaged from the Lock and Fade phenomena.
decrease in performance or overloading, which can then
cause critical damage to the vehicle and human life.
Do not modify the car’s audio system and install other
additional electronic devices such as wireless com-
Do not modify without authorization the driving gear munication equipment, rear view camera, LCD TV, and
system, including the engine, just to upgrade the ve- remote starting device.
hicle’s performance and beauty.
This vehicle’s electronic system contains electronic circuits
yy Unauthorized modification of the engine or parts for the and fuses for the installation of standard electric and elec-
exhaust is prohibited. tronic devices. If you add new devices or circuits using the
Changing without authorization the preset value in the fuel several existing devices and circuits at a time, electric and
supply system and inlet, exhaust and electric systems, and electronic devices can be damaged from overloading and
changing or adding unauthorized parts is illegal and may may ignite. In addition, when you do drilling work in install-
cause serious problem with the vehicle’s durability. ing devices such as an antenna may expose the vehicle
to rusting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do not use the nonstandard tires, wheels, and other Do not equip the vehicle with bumper guards sold in
related parts. the market.
Installing nonstandard tires such as tires with greater width Installing bumper guard or other guard bars that are being
than prescribed can wear out the power delivery system or sold in the market may cause problems in parking and stop-
friction-damage related parts. In addition, other problems ping due to the extended length of vehicle, and increase in
such as increase of fuel consumption and braking distance, fuel cost due to additional vehicle weight, and rusting may
vehicle’s shudder, and decrease of steering power can all occur in the holes for equipping the guards. And because
degrade the vehicle’s performance. The speedometer and of the absence of shock absorber in the bumper guard,
odometer can also become inaccurate. The vehicle with even accidents during low-speed driving will be much
automatic transmission may have the shock in changing serious compared with the damage that unmodified cars
the speed. might sustain.
Do not use duplicate key Do not modify or replace the vehicle flooring or the
A duplicate key might cause malfunction to the ignition key seats at your discretion.
cylinder and deter the ignition motor to return to the original yy When replacing the interior flooring of vehicle with lami-
state. If so, electronic circuitry can be damaged and may nated paper
ignite from the ignition motor’s continuing rotation. To improve the comfort of cushion and to facilitate the
cleaning of the vehicle, some drivers replace the flooring
Do not equip the sunroof or color glasses at your with laminated paper after removing the seats. However,
discretion. this may cause damage to the various electronic system
control units and wiring. This also may hinder the function
If you install a sunroof by cutting the vehicle’s roof, rust and
of the seat rail that enables for the seat to move forward
leakage may occur in the cut part. Installing color glasses
and backward. In this case, the locking system to fix the
to block ultraviolet rays and better appearance may cause
location of seats may malfunction, which might lead to a
leakage and other many problems.
serious accident if the loose seats tilt forward or backward
during an uphill climb or downhill descent.

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy When exchanging the seats with new ones or equipping Do not install products that may decrease the driving
separate seat covers. resistance such as sticker, molding, air dam, or wind-
There are several types of seat covers according to role and proofing products.
function although with the same vehicle type. Replacing the The sticker’s adhesives may damage the coated surface of
seats with new ones may alter the wiring system or over-use the vehicle. If parts of the car are drilled to attach molding
the wires because a seat has various electric connections and other functional parts, the area near the holes will rust
and wiring diagram. As mentioned earlier, this may damage and other unfamiliar sound may occur while driving. Espe-
the wiring and related equipment or cause fire due to the cially if the attached parts are not fixed well, it may damage
overloading on the rated capacity. the vehicle or even cause a fatal accident.
In addition, replacing the seat cover may damage the
electronic equipment caused by cut or pressured wire. In using audio in the vehicle, do not use illegally cop-
Such a situation may also cause ventilation problems, fire, ied CD and DVD, which violates relevant laws. Such
or noise. discs can also cause malfunction of the audio head
unit and changer. In addition, such discs may also not
Do not equip with a separate accessory or assistant play properly.
device on the vehicle operational device. When installing the vehicle with unauthorized parts or modi-
Making the selection lever longer or equipping with an ac- fying it in ways including the cases mentioned previously,
celerator pedal and brake pedal pad may make the driver please keep in mind that the changed parts and related
prone to make a mistake while driving. problems with changed auto parts shall not be covered by
warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety Unit 2
Seat......................................................................2-2
0
Front seat.............................................................2-3
1
Rear 1st seat........................................................2-6
Rear 2nd seat*.....................................................2-9 2
Front seat heating*/ventilation switch*...............2-12 3
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* (same for
both sides)..........................................................2-13 4
Seat belt.............................................................2-16 5
How to fasten the three point seat belt..............2-18
6
Front seat belt....................................................2-19
7
Rear 1st row seat belt........................................2-20
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) in rear 8
1st seat...............................................................2-21
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in rear
1st seat...............................................................2-22
Child restraints and pregnant woman................2-24
Warnings for seat belt........................................2-33
Air bag................................................................2-35
Airbag non-inflation conditions...........................2-40
Warning and caution..........................................2-43
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat
Configuration
Front Seat
1. Front seat
5 2. Sliding head restraint
4 3
3. Driver seat heating/ventilation
switch
4. Passenger seat heating/ventilation
switch
12 6 5. Driver seat easy access*
6. Seatback reclining adjustment
7. Seat cushion tilt adjustment
8 7 (driver seat)
1 1 9 8. Seat height adjustment
9. Seat slide adjustment
2 2
Rear Seat
10
6 13 10. Rear 1st row seat
9 8 11. Head restraint
11 11 11
12. Rear 1st row seat heating switch
13. Armrest (Cup holder)
16 16 14. Seat double folding lever (Strap)
15. Seatback folding (reclining) lever
(strap)
14 16. Rear 2nd row seat*
15
15 14
2-2 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat
Height Adjustment of Forward and Back- REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Head Restraint ward Adjustment of OF HEAD RESTRAINT
Head Restraint
Sliding Head Restraint
1 1
To raise the head restraint, pull it up with- Removal

out pressing the release button. To lower 1. Recline the front seatback.
the head restraint, press the release but-
ton 1 on top of the seatback and push 2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
the head restraint down. The head restraint can be adjusted go and pull the head restraint up while
forward to three different positions by pressing the Release button ( 1 ).
Note pulling the headrest forward. To adjust
Adjust the height of the head restraint the head restraint backward, pull it fully Installation
so that the center of the head restraint is forward to the farthest position and 1. Recline the front seatback.
aligned with the eye level. release it. Adjust the head restraint so
2. Put the head restraint posts into the
that it properly supports the head and
holes on the seatback.
Caution neck.
Do not apply excessive force to the head
3. Push the head restraint downwards to
restraint during adjustment. It may be the desired position while pressing the
damaged. Release button ( 1 ).
4. Then return the seatback to the origi-
Warning nal position.
Removed or improperly adjusted head
restraints can result in serious head and Warning
neck injuries in case of a collision. Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the
can be lost.
Safety Unit 2-3

GETtheMANUALS.org
POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT*
Seat slide adjustment Seatback reclining adjustment Warning
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver/Passenger)
yy Do not adjust the driver’s seat when the
could be lost.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely
locked after adjusting.
yy Pay attention to the passenger in rear
seat when adjusting the seat.
yy Excessive operation of power seat
may cause a problem for other electric
devices. Stop operating the power seat
immediately after getting the desired
seat position.
yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment
buttons simultaneously. It may damage
the motor. Be sure to operate the elec-
Seat height adjustment Seat cushion tilt adjustment tric seat button one by one.
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver)
2-4 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Seat slide adjustment Seat height adjustment Seatback reclining adjustment
(Driver/Passenger) (Driver) (Driver/Passenger)
To move the seat forward or backward, To lower the seat cushion, push the lever To change the seatback angle, lean
pull and hold the seat slide lever up and down several times. forward slightly and raise the lever.
move the seat as desired. Then, release To raise the seat cushion, pull the lever Then, lean back to the desired angle and
the lever. up several times. release the lever. After adjusting, make
sure the lever is returned to its original
position and the seatback is locked.
Safety Unit 2-5

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st seat
Head restraint height adjustment
To raise the head restraint, hold the
head restraint and pull it upwards.
To lower the head restraint, push
Armrest the head restraint downwards to
(Cup holder) the desired position while pressing
the Release button ( 1 ).
Note
Adjust the height of the head restraint so that the center of the head restraint
is aligned with the eye level.
Warning
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result
in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Seatback reclining adjustment

Seat double folding lever lever
Reclining adjustment
A
A
B
B Folding
When the seatback is folded down fully, lift the rear end of the Pulling seatback reclining adjustment lever ( A ) or adjustment
seat while pulling the seat double folding lever ( A ) or seat double strap ( B ) releases the seatback lock. In this state, you can adjust
folding strap ( B ) to raise the folded seat. the seatback reclining or fold the seat.
2-6 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
FOLDING AND TUMBLING REAR 1ST ROW SEAT
Warning
The seatback can be folded down fully.
Make sure that any body part of the
occupants is not caught by the folded
seatback.
B
Head
Webbing restraint
guide
1. To prevent the seat belt from being

damaged, insert the seat belt into the A
webbing guide.
2. Push down the head restraint fully.
Caution
3. Fold the seatback ( B ) by pulling the
Set the head restraint to the lowest posi- seatback reclining adjustment lever
tion and raise the seat backrest right in
( A ).
front of it upright.
If any interference occurs when folding or Caution
unfolding the seat, the intervention area
of the seat may be damaged. Make sure that the seatback is secured
by pressing down the top of the folded
seatback before tumbling the seat. If the
seatback is loose, it can interfere with
the front seat and damage to the seat
may occur.
Safety Unit 2-7

GETtheMANUALS.org
6. Unfold the seat in the reverse order
of folding. Make sure that the seat
is securely locked. If the seat is not
locked, the seat may be folded for-
ward.
D
Warning
Do not drive the vehicle or load any cargo while the

rear 1st row seat is in the vertical position.
C It may cause the rear 2nd row seat occupant to
suffer injury or cargo to be damaged.
Secure the rear 1st row seat in the correct posi-

tion when a occupant is seated on the rear 2nd
row seat.
4. Lift the rear end of the seat ( D ) while
pulling the seat folding lever ( C ) to When returning the rear 1st row seat to its original
position, be careful not to hit the feet and leg of the
raise the folded seat. passenger in the rear 2nd row seat.
5. Return the seat to its original condition
in the reverse of folding. Do not operate the rear 1st row seat while the rear
2nd row seat occupant is raising his/her feet on the
Warning seat backrest. The occupant may be injured due to
the rear 1st row seat.
yy Do not sit on the folded or double folded
seat. You cannot be protected by the
seat belt or proper restraint system
and could get seriously injured in an
accident.
yy Do not drive the vehicle or load any
cargo while the rear 1st row seat is in
the vertical position.
2-8 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 2nd seat*
Head Restraint Adjustment Seat Folding
To raise the head re- (Making a Luggage Compartment)
straint, pull it up without
pressing the release but- 1. Position the headrest to the lowest level.
ton. To lower the head 2. Pull up the folding loop of the third row seat, and fold the
restraint, press the re- seatback forward.
lease button ( 1 ) on top 3. Fold the seatback of the third row seat to make the luggage
of seatback and push the compartment.
head restraint down.
Warning
Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints
can result in serious head and neck injuries in
case of a collision.
Folding strap
Pull up the folding strap to fold down
the third row seat.
Safety Unit 2-9

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE BOARD
You can adjust the height of the folded seat and floor using the
Note
luggage board.
To adjust the height of the folded seat and floor, lift the luggage figure above and adjust the height of the floor evenly when folding
board up and insert it into the left and right grooves. the rear seats.
5 seat Caution
cases:
conditions.
The luggage board is divided into 2 parts and one-tier or two-tier

installation is possible depending on usage.
2-10 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
7 seat
Warning
yy When you put the luggage on the folded seat, make sure that the
luggage is placed firm enough to avoid being shaken while driv-
ing. A shaky or improperly fixed luggage may injure the driver or
passenger. Besides, ensure that the luggage does not obstruct
the field of the rearview.
yy Do not sit on the folded seat because the seatbelt and other safety
devices would not be able to protect you. It may cause serious
injury in case of accident.
1. Fold down the third row seats. (refer to “Folding the third row
seat” section)
2. Fold down the second row seats. (refer to “Folding the second
row seat” section)
3. Lock the seatback of second row seats by pressing the upper
portion of it.
4. Make a bed.
Safety Unit 2-11

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat heating*/ventilation switch*
A B A B
yy Press the ( B ) part of the seat heating and ventilation switch

with engine running to select one of 4 levels in the following
in yellow.
Electric fan for ventilated yy Press the ( A ) part of the seat heating and ventilation switch
seat with engine running to select one of 4 levels in the following
When the seat ventilation switch
is operated, 4 ventilation fans run
in green.
to reduce the discomfort resulted
from the contact with the seat in Note
hot weather.
Caution
yy The ventilated seat is not the cooling/heating seat which blows out cold air from it.
yy The ventilated seat uses the interior air for ventilation. Make sure that it is used together with the air conditioner.
yy Don’t put your hand in the bottom of the cushion when the ventilated seat is in operation. Otherwise, the running ventilation fan may cause you
to be frightened or injured.
yy The battery can be discharged when the seat heating/ventilation switch and current consumers are used with IGN ON (engine off).
2-12 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* (same for both sides)
Press the seat heating switch with
engine running to select one of 3 lev-
els in the following sequence: OFF
→ level 2 → level 1 → OFF. The indi-
cator corresponding to the selected
level is illuminated in yellow.
Note
Caution
yy Do not operate the seat heating for a long time when the passenger
is an infant, child, old or handicapped person, person with sensitive
skin, person under the influence of alcohol, or excessively fatigued
person. They might receive minor burns.
yy If your skin is in contact with the heated seat for a long time, you
might get low temperature burns. Be careful.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as a
blanket, cushion or seat cover.
yy If the temperature continues to rise, turn the switch off and have the
system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Warning Service Center.
If the ignition is turned off during operation of the rear seat heating yy In the case of the driver’s seat, an excessive usage of the heated
of the rear 1st row seat, the seat heating will be turned off and will seat might make you sleepy and could negatively affect your
not resume operation at the next start up. Extended use of the seat safety.
heating can cause overheating or fire. Make sure that the heating is yy Do not place anything sharp on the seat. This may cause damage
turned off when you leave the vehicle. to the seat heating.
Safety Unit 2-13

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result

yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made in serious head and neck injuries in case if a collision. Make
before any driving. sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted
before driving.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjust-
ing.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort Caution
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent bat-
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding tery discharge, operate your seats when the engine is
under the lap belt and getting injured are increased. running.
yy Never press the driver’s seat & outside rearview mirror yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simulta-
position switch while the vehicle is in motion. neously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be electric seat button one by one.
placed on the seat. yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents
yy Front seats and rear seats are equipped with heated lines. such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will
If the following types of persons sit on the heated seats, cause discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
they might receive minor burns. Extra caution is needed for yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if
them: children, elderly persons, ill persons, persons with the seat comes in contact with other object and cannot be
sensitive skin, excessively fatigued persons, persons under adjusted anymore.
the influence of alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
as cold medicine or sleeping pills. checked and fixed before any driving.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such
as a blanket, cushion or seat cover.
2-14 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING
yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries
can cause unexpected accident. and death, sit in the position so that the distance between
yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the the steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm, as long
seat when trying to get the small objects (cigarette light- as you are comfortable with driving.
ers, coins, credit cards) under the seat or caught between yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the
the seat and the center console. Wear protective gloves seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is
to prevent injury. potentially flammable when it is released from the container
yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. when the seat is moved.
yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can cause yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion re-
loss of control. duces the frictional force and could make you slide under
the seat belt. This could result in serious injury or death.
yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
adjusting the seat position. yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the
seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fin-
yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
gers could get trapped between the seat and the frame.
around your hip and pelvic bones.
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You could
yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback move-
slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result
ment. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback
in severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected
from being locked, causing severe injuries or death during
by the seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut
a collision.
into your stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by
yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position keeping your seatback upright while driving.
before driving.
yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, the seatback with your one hand and pull the release lever
you will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protec- with the other hand. The more the seatback is reclined, the
tion the seat belt can provide. greater the restoring force of the seatback is. If you do not
hold the seatback while adjusting the seatback, you could
be injured by the restoring force.
Safety Unit 2-15

GETtheMANUALS.org
Seat belt
Configuration Seat Belt Pretensioner
To protect you and your passengers in the event of an accident, yy The belt pretensioner is locks the seat belt by drawing back
it is highly recommended that the seat belts should be used by the seat belts on the driver’s and passenger’s torso and
all occupants inside of your vehicle. pelvis to prevent the driver and passenger being thrown
forwards in the event of a strong frontal impact. The seat belt
pretensioner combined with the seat belt and air bag further
increases safety.
yy The seat belt pretensioner is always triggered together with
the air bags of the front seats.
Warning
Deployed seat belt pretensioners cannot be deployed again. Have the
deployed seat belt pretensioners replaced by an authorized dealer.
Driver seat belt warning lamp Operation of pretensioner Operation of load limiter
If the driver turns on the ignition switch without When a severe frontal impact After frontal collision, the load
fastening the seat belt, this warning lamp will occurs, seat belt pretension- limiters releases the seat
flash for about 6 sec. along with the warning ers rewind the seat belts belt to prevent the occupant
buzzer. If you fasten the seat belt, the warn- immediately to restrain the from being injured due to belt
ing buzzer will stop sounding but the warning occupants to their seats. force.
lamp will keep flashing for the remaining time
(total 6 sec.)
2-16 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fastening the seat belt Restraint of pregnant women
When seat belts are not used or improperly worn, they may
not work and can cause serious injury. In addition, air bags
can protect occupants when the occupants are wearing their
seat belts. Air bags may cause injuries to occupants if they
do not wear or inappropriately use their seat belts.
Warning
yy Before driving, all occupants should fasten their seat belts. If not,
the occupants can seriously be injured in a collision or sudden
maneuvering of the vehicle.
yy Sometimes you may have to apply strong force to pull the webbing
out of the retract. yy Expectant mothers must position the lap portion of the
yy Each seat belt should be used by only one occupant at a time. belt as low as possible below the rounding of the abdo-
yy Seat belts and air bags can significantly minimize possible injury men to avoid the belt pushing the fetus when a collision
to occupants. But they cannot perfectly protect occupants from or sudden braking occurs.
fatal collisions or injury. yy Driving while pregnant can be very dangerous, so avoid
yy Modifications and improper maintenance for the safety systems driving if possible.
could cause serious injury. The safety systems including seat belts
should be checked and repaired by only a Ssangyong Dealer or yy Consult your doctor about seatbelt position during
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. pregnancy.
yy An infant or small child should always be restrained in an infant yy The risk of injury in the event of an accident is increased
or child restraint. for both the pregnant woman and unborn child if the seat
belt is not worn.
Safety Unit 2-17

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the three point seat belt
1. Pull out the latch plate from the re- 2. Position the shoulder belt across the 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
tractor. If the seat belt is locked when body and the lap belt as low as pos- is securely locked. A slack belt will
being pulled out, rewind it completely sible across the hips. Insert the latch greatly reduce the protection afforded
in the retractor, then pull it out to the plate into the buckle until it clicks. to the wearer.
desired length. 3. Adjust the seat belt height as need- 5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
ed. red button on the buckle.
Caution
Sometimes you may have to apply strong Caution Warning
force for 2 to 3 sec. to pull the webbing out
Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an Improperly worn seat belts could cause
of the retract.
upright position and wear the seat belt. serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible
across the hips. Do not put it across
Warning
the waist. In an accident, the belt may
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is apply pressure to your abdomen. This
not twisted. may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over the shoulder, never across
the neck.
2-18 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front seat belt
Seat Belt Height Adjustment
yy To adjust the height of the shoulder belt
anchorage, raise or lower the seat belt
holder while pressing the top of the seat
belt height adjuster ( A ).
yy Release it at the desired position.
A
Warning
yy Adjust the seat belt height before driving.
yy Shoulder belt should be positioned midway
over the shoulder, never across the neck.
Fastening the Seat Belt

yy Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle
until it clicks.
yy To unfasten the seat belt, press the but-
ton ( B ) on the buckle.
Safety Unit 2-19

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear 1st row seat belt
Stowing the Buckle Rear Center Seat Belt Rear Center Seat
Belt Release
If releasing the rear center seat belt is
necessary, follow the procedure below:
When you are not using the rear seat

belt, insert the buckle in the buckle stor-
B
age like shown in the picture.
Stowing Rear Seat Belt A
Insert the emergency key in the aux.

buckle hole ( A ) to press the lock device.
Webbing guide Aux. latch At this time, make sure that the seat belt
If you are not using the rear seat belt or aux. latch ( B ) retracts slowly.
trying to fold the rear seat, insert the seat
belt webbing into the webbing guide on Warning
the side wall. Aux. buckle yy If the latch retracts at high speed, oc-
cupant who is next to the latch can be
Caution injured.
To use the seat belt, remove the seat yy please ensure that the seat belt latch
belt from the guide before pulling out the is stowed properly and out of reach of
children.
webbing from the retractor. Pulling out Make sure that the rear center seat belt
the webbing from the retractor without aux. latch is inserted into the aux. buckle
removing it from the webbing guide can when not in use.
cause damage to the webbing guide or
the belt itself.
2-20 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) in rear 1st seat
1. Pull out the latch plate at the bight of the seat.
Warning
Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it
across waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure to your
abdomen. This may cause serious internal injuries.
To lengthen, hold the metal latch plate

at a right angle to the belt and pull the
belt. To shorten, pull the free end of the
belt away from the latch plate, then pull
the belt clip to take up the slack.
2. Insert the metal latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the belt
as low as possible across your hips, not across your abdomen.
3. If the belt is too tight or slack on your hips,
readjust the belt.
4. To unfasten the seat belt, press the red button
on the buckle.
Safety Unit 2-21

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) in rear 1st seat
1. Pull out the latch plate from the re- 2. Insert the latch plate into the left mini 3. Position the shoulder belt across the
tractor. If the seat belt is locked when buckle until it clicks. body and the lap belt as low as pos-
being pulled out, rewind it completely sible across the hips. Insert the latch
in the retractor, then pull it out to the plate into the buckle until it clicks.
desired length. 4. Pull the latch plate to make sure it
is securely locked. A slack belt will
greatly reduce the protection afforded
to the wearer.
5. To unfasten the seat belt, press the
red button on the buckle.
Warning
Make sure that the seat belt webbing is not twisted.
Improperly worn seat belts could cause serious injury or death.
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put it across the waist. In an accident,
the belt may apply pressure to your abdomen. This may cause internal injuries.
yy The shoulder belt should be positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck.
2-22 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
REAR cENTER SEAT BELT (3-point type)*
1. Pull out the smaller latch plate (B) from upper re-
tractor (1).
2. Insert it into the black mini buckle (2) until it
clicks.
3. Pull out the bigger latch plate (A) and position the
seat belt across your shoulder, chest and hips.
4. Insert it into the buckle (3) until it clicks.
Warning
yy Make sure to fasten the seat belt according to the
order as described so that it functions properly.
yy To prevent the seat belt from bumping against the rear
glass, unfasten the seat belt while holding it.
yy This seat belt is designed only for a passenger who
sits on the center seat in the rear seat.
yy Tug on the seat belt to make sure that the latch plate
is securely locked.
yy Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.
yy Improper wearing of seat belts increases the chance
of injury or death in case of a collision.
yy Position the seat belt away from your neck and abdo-
men.
Caution
Stow the seat belt into the console when it is not in
use.
Safety Unit 2-23

GETtheMANUALS.org
Child restraints and pregnant woman
Pregnant Women Warning
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts through- yy Infants and tiny children should always be restrained in an infant
out their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is the best way to or child restraint.
keep the baby safe. yy Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat with front
passenger air bag.
Warning yy A child in a rear-facing child restraint installed in the front seat can
be seriously injured if the front passenger air bag inflates. Secure
yy Pregnant women should wear 3-point seat belt whenever possible a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat.
according to the professional recommendations by her doctor.
yy A front-facing child restraint should be secured in the rear seat
yy Pregnant women should wear the lap portion of the belt across whenever possible. If installed in the front passenger seat, adjust
the thighs and as snugly and low as possible. the seat as far back as it will go.
yy When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions
provided by the manufacturer.
Child Restraints yy When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with
the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
When transporting infants or small children, an appropriate yy In a collision an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby, can become
child restraint system should always be used. The child restraint a missile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an
system should be appropriate for your child’s weight and height infant on your lap can become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are.
and properly fit the car’s seat. Accident statistics indicate that
yy Do not allow a child in the cargo areas while the vehicle is mov-
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat rather
ing.
than in the front seat.
yy If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a child to put the shoulder
Securing Methods of Child Re- belt under an arm or behind their back.
yy Please note that the three point seat belt is designed for a person
straint System who is taller than 140 cm.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in ve-
hicle seats by seat belts or the latch system (ISOFIX seat - if
equipped).
2-24 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Infant and Child Safety
Child Seat
Children that are too small to use the seat belts must be properly secured in a child restraint system.
WARNING
yy Never place a rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat with front passenger air bag, because of the danger that
an inflating passenger air bag could impact the rear-facing child restraint and kill the child.
yy Use only the qualified child restraint systems. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use of the child re-
straint systems.
yy Do not carry your child on your lap while driving. You cannot resist against the impact pressure in an accident. The child could
be crushed between you and the parts of vehicle.
yy Remember that a child restraint seat left in a concealed vehicle can cause it to be very hot. Check the seating surface before
putting your child in the child restraint.
yy When your child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or keep it secured with a seat belt to prevent it from being
thrown forward in case of a sudden stop or an accident.
yy When installing a child restraint, do not let the seat belts come across the child’s neck.
Safety Unit 2-25

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability for Various Seating Positions
TYPE A TYPE B
Rear-facing child seat Forward-facing child seat Booster seat
Rear Rear 1st

Front
Mass group Restraint device figure 1st seat seat out Mounting method of vehicle
seat
center board
O ~ up to 10 kg (0 ~ 9 month) Rear facing child seat X U U 3-point belt rear-facing
O+ ~ up to 13 kg (0 ~ 2 year) Rear facing child seat X U U 3-point belt rear-facing
Forward facing child
I ~ 9 to 18 kg (9 month ~ 4 year) X U U 3-point belt
seat
II ~ 15 to 25 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X U U 3-point belt
III ~ 22 to 36 kg (4 year ~ 12 years) Booster seat X U U 3-point belt
U: Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in the mass group.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints given on attached list. These restraints may be of the “semi-universal” categories.
X: Seat position not suitable for children in the mass group.
2-26 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Illustration of CRS secured by
the seatbelt.
Front-facing Child Seat
Warning
Do not use the car seat unless the followings are met.
serious injury.
yy Make sure that the base does not move due to excessive play in
Caution all directions.
When installing a child restraint system, follow the instructions pro- yy You can’t adjust the angle of the backrest with the child seat in-
vided by the manufacturer. stalled. If you’re trying to do so, the seat belt will be slack, which
incurs danger. Always adjust the angle of the backrest before
installing the child seat.
Safety Unit 2-27

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear-facing Child Seat
Warning
Do not use the child seat unless the followings are met.
serious injury.
yy Check if the angle of the backrest is set to 4 stage.
Warning yy Make sure that the base does not move due to excessive play in
Never install a rear facing child restraint on the front seat without all directions.
ensuring that the front airbag is deactivated. Ssangyong Motor yy Make sure that the seat belt is routed through the rear-facing belt
Company recommends that a child restraint to be installed on the path and buckled up.
rear seat.
When installing a child restraint, adjust the seat back angle as

desired.
2-28 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
ISOFIX system is a standardised method of fitting child seats that
SECURING A CHILD RESTRAIN eliminates the need to use the stadard adult seatbelt to secure
SYSTEM WITH “ISOFIX” SYSTEM the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and
positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker
How to use the ISOFIX Lower Latch Anchor installation.
3 ISOFIX child restrain

1 ISOFIX mark 2 Latch anchor
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
yy The ISOFIX lower latch anchors are located in the left and
Warning
right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations ( 1 ) are
shown in the illustration. yy When using the “ISOFIX” lower latch system, all unused vehicle
rear seat belt metal latch plates or tabs must be latched securely in
yy Insert the child restraint attachments into the ISOFIX lower their seat belt buckles and the seat belt webbing must be retracted
latch anchors until it clicks. behind the child restraint to prevent the child from reaching and
yy Do not use the seat belt for installing the ISOFIX child re- taking hold of unretracted seat belts. Unlatched metal latch plates
or tabs may allow the child to reach the unretracted seat belts
straint.
which may result in strangulation and a serious injury or death to
yy There is no ISOFIX lower latch anchor provided for the center the child in the child restraint.
rear seating position. yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circum-
stances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Safety Unit 2-29

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use the Rear Anchor
Cautions for ISOFIX Seat
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 3rd row
seat. (7-seater) yy The rear anchor is the supplemental device to secure the child
yy There are two rear anchors on the floor under the 2nd row restraint system after engaging it by the lower latches. Therefore,
do not secure the child restraint system only with the seatback
seat. (5-seater)
anchors. The increased load may cause the hooks or anchors
to break, causing serious injury or death.
1 yy If a child restraint is not properly secured to the vehicle and a
child is not properly restrained in the child restraint, the child
3 could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. Always follow
the instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation.
yy Make sure the latches of the child restraint system are latched to
the lower latches. In this case, you can hear the “click” sound.
yy Incorrectly installed child restraint system may cause an unex-
pected personal injury.
2 yy Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those
loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints.
yy The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere
other than the correct rear anchor.
yy Rock the child restraint to check if it is securely installed. Re-
fer to instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child
restraint.
yy Do not install the child restraint if it hinders the operations of
front seat.
yy All the procedures described here are to assist you in under-
(Type A: 2EA standing the child restraint system. Use this as a reference
Type B: 3EA) only. When you install a child restraint to your vehicle, observe
1. Remove the headrest from the second row seat. instructions for installation in the manual provided by the manu-
facturer.
2. Place the child restraint on the second row seat.
3. Connect the tether connector in child restraint to the rear
anchor. Securely tighten the child restraint by adjusting the
webbing of the tether connector.
2-30 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Table of Vehicle Handbook Information on ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems Installation Suitability
for Various ISOFIX Positions
Vehicle ISOFIX Positions
Mass group Size Class Fixture Front 2nd seat row 2nd seat row
Passenger center out board
F ISO/L1 X X X
CARRYCOT
G ISO/L2 X X X
GROUP 0 UP TO 10KG E ISO/R1 X X IUF
E ISO/R1 X X IUF
GROUP 0+ UP TO 13KG D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X IL*
D ISO/R2 X X IUF
C ISO/R3 X X IL*
GROUP I 9 TO 18KG B ISO/F2 X X IUF
B1 ISO/F2X X X IUF
A ISO/F3 X X IUF
NOTE: Key of letters be inserted in the above table

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in this mass group.
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in attached list.
These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semi-universal” categories.
X: ISOFIX position not suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.
Safety Unit 2-31

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning For Child Restraint
� Use only the officially approved child restraint.
Ssangyong is not responsible for the personal injury and
property damage due to the defect of child restraint.
� Use only the child restraint with proper type and size for
your baby.
� Use only the child restraint at proper location.
� Child restraint has 5 categories based on the weight as
below:
GROUP 0: 0 ~ 10KG
GROUP 0+: 0 ~ 13KG
GROUP I: 9 ~ 18KG
GROUP II: 15 ~ 25KG
GROUP III: 22 ~ 36KG
� Group 0 & 0+
Rear facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group I
Forward facing child restraint fitted on the rear seat
� Group II & III
Booster seat fitted on the rear seat with seat belt fastened
Always follow the installation and use instructions provided
by the manufacturer of the booster seat.
2-32 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings for seat belt
yy Always put on your shoulder belt over the shoulder and across yy Periodically check that the seat belt and its components
the chest. Do not put the shoulder belt across your neck. work properly. A damaged seat belt can cause serious inju-
yy Put the lap belt as low as possible across the hips. Do not put ries. Repair or replace the damaged seat belt immediately
it across the waist. In an accident, the belt may apply pressure at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
to your abdomen. Center.
yy Do not wear the shoulder belt under the arm. It increases the yy The warning light comes on whenever the ignition is switched
danger of sliding out of the belt and can cause serious injury on. The light goes out when the driver’s seat belt is securely
or even death. The belt may also tighten the chest which is fastened. If the light does not go off after fastening the seat
not as strong as the shoulders. This may also result in serious belt, it means that there is a malfunction in the system. Have
internal injuries. the seat belt system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy Do not lock the seat belt with a clip or a clamp. If the seat belt Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
is too loose, it may not protect your body from injury or death yy Additional devices or accessories on the seat belt may result
in an accident. in improper operation. Do not add any adjusting devices which
yy Before driving, all occupants should wear the seat belts. Oth- restrict the seat belt operation.
erwise, occupants could be seriously injured in collisions or yy Periodically inspect all parts of the belt and have the damaged
sudden maneuvers. In many countries, there are regulations parts replaced. The belt that has been overstretched in an
regarding the use of the seat belts. Please observe local laws accident must be replaced with a new one. Ssangyong recom-
and regulations. mends replacing all component parts of the seat belt after a
yy Do not buckle up two or more persons with one seat belt. collision. No replacement is required after a minor collision if
a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center
yy Do not wear the seat belt over any hard or breakable objects
finds that no damage has occurred and everything is in proper
in pockets or on clothes.
working order. The seat belt components that were not used
yy An infant and tiny child must be restrained in a child restraint
during a collision must also be inspected and replaced if they
system. Note that the three point seat belt is designed for a
show signs of damage or faulty operation.
person who is taller than 140 cm.
Safety Unit 2-33

GETtheMANUALS.org
yy Replace the entire seat belt assembly after a severe impact yy Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the
even if the damage is not obvious. body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis
yy Never modify the seat belt. or the hips, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the
yy Always keep the seat belts clean and dry. Care should be taken lap section of the belt across the abdominal area must be
to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oil and avoided.
chemicals, and particularly battery acid. Use mild soap and yy Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent
water for cleaning. The seat belt must be replaced if webbing with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have
becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. been designed. A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
yy Adjust the seat properly before wearing the seat belt. afforded to the wearer.
yy Sit back in the seat with the seatback in an upright position yy Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
and wear the seat belt. If the seat belt is positioned too high yy Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is
or fastened too loose, it may not protect your body from an dangerous to put a belt around a child being carried on the
injury or death in the event of a collision. occupant’s lap.
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort yy No modifications or additions should be made by the user
while vehicle is in use. Seat belt is the most effective when which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If the operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly
seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding under from being adjusted to remove slack.
the lap belt and getting injured are increased. yy If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
yy If the latch plate is inserted into a wrong buckle, the belt may the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
exert pressure on your abdomen instead of your pelvis. This the belt out of the retractor.
may cause serious internal injury. yy Never unbuckle the seat belt while traveling. Careless driving
yy If the seat belt is twisted, there will not be enough contact of actions, such as fastening/releasing the seat belt repeatedly,
the belt to spread the impact pressure. may result in serious injury.
yy Make sure that the latch plate is securely locked. yy Make sure that the seat belt does not go around any solid
yy When pregnant women use the seat belt, consult with a doctor body or fragile objects.
for specific recommendations. yy Keep the buckle clean. Foreign materials caught inside
yy Keep the buckle clean. the buckle can prevent the seat belt latch plate from being
locked.
2-34 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air bag
Configuration Air bag crash sensor
Driver air bag Curtain air bag
4
1
3
2 2
Front side 1. Air bag control module

air bag
Rear side 2. Front impact sensor (G-sensor type)
Passenger air bag air bag 3. Side impact sensor (Pressure sensor type)
4. Side impact sensor (G-sensor type)
Air Bag Warning Label

Driver knee air bag
Passenger Air Bag ON/OFF Switch*

The front passenger air bag is disabled (not The air bag warning label is located on both sides of the pas-
inflatable) when placing the passenger air bag senger side sun visor reminding the occupant to understand the
ON/OFF switch to “OFF” position. This switch is dangerousness of the air bag. Read and follow Instructions and
located on the left side of the instrument panel, safety information before driving.
and you can see it when opening the front passenger door. Press
and turn this switch to operate.
Air Bag Inspection
“OFF” position: disabled (not inflatable)
“ON” position: enabled (inflatable) The air bag system should be inspected 10 years from its instal-
Safety Unit 2-35

GETtheMANUALS.org
The air bags are deployed in the event of a strong collision to
reduce the shock to the chest and face of the occupants. Wat is an air bag?
An air bag is a safety device which is deployed in the event
of a strong front (front air bag) or side collision (curtain air
Air Bag Warning Lamp bag) to reduce the risk of severe personal injury.
The air bag warning lamp comes on when Along with seat belts fastened, the air bags work to provide
the ignition switch is turned ON, and goes improved protection for the occupants. If an air bag is de-
off if the system is OK. ployed with the seat belt improperly fastened or unfastened,
the deployment of air bag can lead to serious injury. For
this reason, air bags are also called supplemental restraint
system.
SRS: Supplemental Restraint System
Warning
yy The air bag system serves as a supplement to the seat belt. Make
sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts properly,
even if air bags are installed in the vehicle.
yy Depending on the severity or the angle of impact, the air bag may
not deploy.
yy The driver’s and front passenger’s air bags simultaneously de-
ploy.
yy Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an airbag in front of it.
yy The air bag warning label is located on the sun visor reminding the
occupant to understand the dangerousness of the air bag.
Warning
If this lamp stays on, it means that there is a fault in the air bag or seat
belt pretensioner system. Have the system checked immediately at a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Operation.
2-36 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver Air Bag Driver Knee Air Bag* Passenger Air Bag
The driver air bag is located in the Located on the dashboard under the The passenger air bag is located in the
center of the steering wheel. This air steering wheel, the driver's knee air bag front dash board. This air bag protects
bag protects the driver's head in a front can help protect the driver by inflating the front passenger's head in a front
collision. simultaneously with the front airbag in collision.
head-on collision.
Warning Warning
yy The driver should sit in the position so yy The rear seats are safer for children.
that your body is away from the steering yy Do not install the car seat on the front
wheel as far as possible while you are seat.
comfortable with driving. yy Seat as far as possible from the air
yy Do not put any object or attach stickers bag.
on the driver air bag cover (steering yy Use the seat belt and child restraint
wheel cover). system.
Safety Unit 2-37

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Seat Side Air Bag* Rear Seat Side Air Bag* Curtain Air Bag*
The front seat side air bag is mounted The rear seat side air bag is mounted The curtain air bag is mounted inside the
in the side of the driver seatback and in the side of the rear seatbacks. This area above the front/rear doors, which
passenger seatback. This air bag is de- air bag is deployed in a side collision meets the bottom of the roof on both
ployed in a side collision which meets the which meets the air bag deployment sides. This air bag is deployed in a side
air bag deployment conditions to protect conditions to protect the occupants in collision which meets the air bag deploy-
the occupants in the front seats. the rear seats. ment conditions to protect the occupants
in the front and rear seats.
Warning
yy The air bag operation may vary depend- Warning
ing on the impact level and collision yy Do not apply impact on the area where
angle. the collision detection sensors for
yy Do not use seat covers or hang clothes/ curtain air bag and side air bag are
accessories on the seats with side air installed. The air bag may be deployed
bag. accidently.
yy Do not slam the door as the curtain air
bag may be deployed unexpectedly.
yy The curtain air bags and side air bags
are deployed at the same time during a
side collision. Those air bags on each
side is activated independently of each
other.
2-38 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Air Bag Operation (Driver and Passenger Curtain Air Bag and Side Air Bag Operation
Side)
►►The air bag inflates when:
►►The air bag inflates when: yy A moderate to severe impact to the middle of the vehicle
yy In response to a severe frontal impact, the driver’s and front body’s side structure.
passenger’s air bags deploy at the same time to supplement
the seat belts to prevent or reduce any personal injuries.
yy Vehicle rolls onto its side and causes a severe side impact.
yy Underbody impact from the road surface; impact against the
curb at a very high speed; dropping impact onto the road yy Frontal collision while vehicle stops or is moving at a low
surface with a large angle speed.
yy Rear end collision
yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant.
yy Rollover, side impact or rear impact
yy If the severity of impact to the vehicle is not significant. ►►The air bag seldom inflates when:
yy Oblique impact (diagonal direction)
►►The air bag seldom inflates when:
yy Frontal impact or rear impact
yy Oblique impact, rollover
yy Rollover but without a severe impact
yy Weak impact in which the sensor is unable to detect (under
the inflation requirements) yy The air bag warning lamp is on
yy Impact against narrow objects such as a utility pole or a
tree
yy The vehicle falls into a drainage or a puddle
yy The front of the vehicle crashes into a high impact point ve-
hicle such as a truck
yy Impact on the hood by falling stones
yy The air bag warning lamp is on
yy Moderate or severe impact to the middle of the vehicle body’s
side structure. In that case, only the side air bags deploy.
Safety Unit 2-39

GETtheMANUALS.org
Airbag non-inflation conditions
Low Speed Collision Rear Collision Side Collision
In collisions, the seat belts are sufficient Air bags may not inflate in rear colli- Front air bags may not inflate in side
to protect the vehicle occupants and sions, because occupants are moved impact collision, because occupants
the air bags may not deploy. In some backward by the force of the impact. In move to the direction of the collision, and
cases, deploying air bags in low-speed this case, the air bags do not provide thus front air bag deployment does not
collisions can cause a secondary impact proper protection. provide proper protection.
to the occupants (light abrasions, cuts, However, side or curtain air bags(if
burns, etc.), or loss of vehicle control. equipped) may inflate depending on the
intensity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.
2-40 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Angled Collision Riding Rollover
In a slant impact or collision, the force At the moment of an accident, drivers Air bags may not inflate in rollover ac-
delivered will be relatively weaker than brake heavily with reflex. In such heavy cidents because air bag deployment
that of frontal collision. So, the air bags braking, the front portion of the vehicle would not provide proper protection to
may not inflate. is lowered by the force of the braking the occupants.
and the vehicle can go under a vehicle However, side air bags may inflate when
with a higher ground clearance. Air bags the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact
may not inflate in this situation because collision, if the vehicle is equipped with
impacts may not be delivered or may be side air bags and/or curtain air bags.
delivered with less intensity.
Safety Unit 2-41

GETtheMANUALS.org
Collision with Nar- Secondary Injury Due
row Object To Air Bag Deployment
Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle If the air bag control module detects the
collides with objects such as utility poles impact during an accident, it transmits
or trees, where the point of impact is the signal to deploy the air bag. This sig-
concentrated to one area and the full nal triggers the explosion of the powder,
force of the impact is not delivered to which is included in the air bag module,
the sensors. and the air bag deploys in a very short
time to protect the occupants. When
the air bag inflates, there will be heavy
noise, glare and smoke. You could suffer
secondary injuries caused by inflated air
bag such as an abrasion, a bruise, a burn
or injury by broken glasses.
2-42 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning and caution
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Warning
yy All necessary driver’s seat adjustments should be made yy Do not leave children unattended in parked vehicles. This can
before any driving. cause unexpected accident.
yy Make sure that your seat is completely locked after adjust- yy You can be hurt by the edges of the mechanism of the seat
ing. when trying to get the small objects (cigarette lighters, coins,
yy Any object that might damage the seat should not be placed credit cards) under the seat or caught between the seat and
on the seat. the center console. Wear protective gloves to prevent injury.
yy Front seats are equipped with heated wires. If the following yy Never try to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving.
types of persons sit on the heated seats, they might receive yy Unexpected movement of the seat or seatback can cause
minor burns. Extra caution is needed for them: children, loss of control.
elderly persons, ill persons, persons with sensitive skin, yy Take care not to bother the passenger behind you when
excessively fatigued persons, persons under the influence of adjusting the seat position.
alcohol or sleep-inducing medication such as cold medicine yy Sit upright in the center of the seat and wear the seat belt
or sleeping pills. around your hip and pelvic bones.
yy Do not put anything on the seat that insulates heat, such as yy Do not place any objects in the path of seatback movement.
a blanket, cushion or seat cover. Any obstruction in this path prevents the seatback from being
yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result locked, causing severe injuries or death during a collision.
in serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision. Make yy Always raise the seatback to the proper upright position
sure that the head restraints are in place and adjusted before before driving.
driving.
yy Never drive the vehicle with the seat folded. In a collision, you
yy Do not recline the seatback more than needed for comfort will be seriously killed or injured as you lose the protection
while vehicle is in motion. The seat belt is the most effective the seat belt can provide.
when the passenger sits back and straight up in the seat. If
yy To avoid unexpected accidents including severe injuries and
the seatback is reclined too much, then the risks of sliding
death, sit in the position so that the distance between the
under the lap belt and getting injured are increased.
steering wheel and your chest is at least 25 cm, as long as
yy Removed or improperly adjusted head restraints can result in you are comfortable with driving.
serious head and neck injuries in case of a collision.
Safety Unit 2-43

GETtheMANUALS.org
WARNING AND CAUTION
Warning Caution
yy Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or between the yy Power seats will be operated even when the ignition switch is
seats. The gas in the lighter container under the seat is turned to the “OFF” position. However, to prevent battery dis-
potentially flammable when it is released from the container charge, operate your seats only when the engine is running.
when the seat is moved. yy Do not use two or more seat adjustment buttons simultane-
yy Additional cushion between you and the seat cushion reduces ously. It can damage the motor. Be sure to operate the electric
the frictional force and could make you slide under the seat seat button one by one.
belt. This could result in serious injury or death. yy When cleaning leather seats, never use oil-based solvents
yy Do not insert your hands under the seat or in the path of the such as benzene, alcohol, gasoline, or thinner. Or they will
seat movement when adjusting the seat. Your hands or fingers cause discoloration and dull the surface of the seats.
could get trapped between the seat and the frame. yy Do not forcibly operate any power adjustment switch if the
yy Do not ride with the seatback reclined too much. You could seat comes in contact with other object and cannot be ad-
slide under the seat belt in a collision, which could result in justed anymore.
severe injury or death. Also, you cannot be protected by the yy If the power seats are not operational, the seats should be
seat belt and the belt can strangle you or even cut into your checked and fixed before any driving.
stomach. Therefore, sit up straight in your seat by keeping
your seatback upright while driving.
yy When returning the seatback to the upright position, hold the
seatback with your one hand and pull the release lever with
the other hand. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater
the restoring force of the seatback is. If you do not hold the
seatback while adjusting the seatback, you could be injured
by the restoring force.
2-44 Safety Unit

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving Off the Vehicle 3
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle..........3-2 Cruise control switch..........................................3-52
0
Positions of engine start/stop button (smart Parking assist system I (front/rear obstacle
key)*.....................................................................3-6 detection system)*.............................................3-58 1
Using emergency key (smart key)*.................... 3-11 Parking assist system II (rearview camera 2
system)*.............................................................3-63
Smart key battery low........................................3-12
Parking assist system III* (around view 3
Replacing smart key battery..............................3-13
monitoring system).............................................3-64
Shift lever in manual transmission.....................3-14 4
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and LCA (Lane
Gear selector lever in automatic transmission*.3-17 Change Assist) systems*...................................3-68 5
Gear selector lever positions.............................3-18 AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Braking)*.......3-74
6
Driving tips for automatic transmission..............3-25 LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System)*.......3-84
7
Safety mode (automatic transmission)..............3-27 TSR* (Traffic Signal Recognition)......................3-90
Road safety........................................................3-28 8
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)..........3-31
Four wheel drive system*..................................3-35
Brake system.....................................................3-38
EPB (Electric Parking Brake).............................3-46
Double parking...................................................3-48
AUTO HOLD*.....................................................3-50
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the engine and driving the vehicle
ENGINE STARTING (SMART KEY*) Caution
1. Apply the parking brake. yy Do not press the engine start/stop button for a long time even
though the engine fails to start.
2. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- yy If you leave the engine start/stop button in the “ACC” or the “ON”
gerous area around the vehicle. position for a long time when the engine is not running, the battery
may be discharged.
Caution
yy The engine in automatic transmission equipped vehicle can be Warning
started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N”
position. yy The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop button, only
yy Do not press the engine start/stop button while the engine is run-
ning. It could result in serious start motor damage.
yy If ESCL warning message appears on the display, immediately
3. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position and depress have the system checked by Ssangyong Authorized Service
the brake pedal. Center.
yy Continuous driving with this message may cause serious damage
to the steering system.
Warning
Depress the brake pedal when the gear selector lever is at the “P”
position. Never depress the accelerator pedal. Note
yy To make the engine start easy, start the engine as follows in very
cold weather.
4. Press the engine start/stop button and check that the indicator
1. Press the engine start/stop button twice without depressing
on the button comes on in green (Engine start/stop button ON the brake pedal.
position). 2. T he engine start/stop button becomes ON and the preglow
5. Press the engine start/stop button to start the engine with indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.
the engine start/stop button ON position (indicator ON). The 3. Wait until the indicator goes out, and depress the brake pedal
indicator on the button goes out when the engine is started. and press the engine start/stop button.
yy In the vehicle equipped with ESCL (Electrical Steering Column
Lock) system, you may hear an operating sound from motor
when starting and stopping the engine. This is normal operating
condition.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING OFF STOPPING THE ENGINE
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- 1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
2. Release the parking brake. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. * Automatic transmission equipped vehicle * Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or “R” Move the gear shift lever to the Neutral position.
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin moving. 3. * REKES system equipped vehicle
Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position.
* Manual transmission equipped vehicle
Keep the brake pedal and clutch pedal depressed and shift * SMART Key equipped vehicle
into the “1” or “R” position. Release the brake pedal and Press the engine start/stop button.
gradually depress the accelerator pedal while slowly releasing
4. Apply the parking brake.
the clutch to begin moving.
5. Remove the ignition key from the key cylinder (REKES).
Note
Diesel engine learning mode: The learning mode of the fuel injector
is performed while the vehicle is driven or stationary to maintain the
optimized engine condition. Weak noise and vibration of the engine
may be accompanied by this mode. But, it is normal operation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Starting the vehicle in the winter months or operating the A/C in yy If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud or sand, depressing
the summer months increases the engine rpm. Drivers must be the accelerator pedal harder only makes the tires slip more which
careful when driving at this time because the vehicle can move in turn causes damage to the transmission. If this happens, tow
faster than normal. the vehicle away or take other actions as appropriate.
yy Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle, including installa- yy Always contact the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
tion of an electronic device such as after-market remote starting Authorized Service Center for adding and changing transmission
system, could seriously affect its performance and safety and may fluid. A non-genuine fluid can cause various problems including
lead to a serious injury or death. malfunction and performance deterioration of the transmission,
yy Using a mobile telephone or two-way radio requires careful and those damages are not covered by the warranty.
considerations. The electronic control system of the vehicle is yy The application of tint film, especially metallic film, may interfere
subject to possible errors due to electronic interference caused with radio signals. Low visible light transmission (VLT) of the film
by improper use of these devices, and the electromagnetic waves can lead to malfunction in the headlamp. Also, make sure that no
can be harmful to the human body. liquid solution for application of tint film flows into the electronic
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, always turn off the engine components of the vehicle to prevent error or malfunction.
to prevent unexpected rolling away. yy The tinted glass with very low VLT and enhanced solar control
yy Always apply the parking brake with the brake pedal depressed characteristics reduces visibility through the glass significantly,
when the vehicle is stopped. especially at night or in the rain, thereby causing unforeseen
yy Do not store personal belongs and valuables inside the vehicle. safety problems.
When leaving the vehicle unattended, always make sure all the yy The interior materials of the new vehicle within a year or use can
doors including the tailgate are closed and locked. emit volatile organic compounds (VOCs). Therefore, always open
yy Improper alignment of vibration dampers for the exhaust system all the windows for sufficient ventilation before entering. Those
(rubber hanger bracket) may result in serious vibration problems. chemicals can cause headaches and dizziness especially in
When reinstalling the exhaust system after undercoating, check the cabin of the vehicle parked for a long time in direct sunlight.
the alignment of the dampers. Therefore, to prevent the driver and passengers from being ex-
posed to these harmful chemicals and keep the comfortable indoor
yy Always check the accelerator and brake pedals with your right foot
environment, set the air source selection switch to the fresh air
before starting the vehicle. Even an experienced driver can ac-
intake mode for as long as possible or open the windows periodi-
cidentally hit the wrong pedal if he/she drives different vehicles.
cally while driving.
yy Power unit of the vehicle operates independently of the braking
system of the vehicle, so just calmly depress the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle when it moves unintentionally due to the driver
error including pedal misapplication or a malfunction.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE
yy To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and gently turn it to yy Never depress the accelerator pedal while starting.
the “ACC” position while slightly moving the steering wheel right yy Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds at a time. (The
and left. starter may be damaged.)
yy The engine in a manual transmission equipped vehicle can only be yy To prevent any damage to the starter, put the ignition switch to the
started when the clutch pedal is fully depressed. “LOCK” position and wait for at least 10 seconds before restart-
yy Diesel engine equipped vehicle: Turn the ignition key to the “ON” ing the engine.
position and wait until the glow indicator goes out. After then, turn yy Never turn the key to the “LOCK” position or remove the ignition
the ignition key to the “START” position and hold it until the engine key from the ignition switch while driving. The steering wheel will
starts. But do not hold the ignition key at the “START” position for be locked and you may end up with serious injuries.
more than 10 seconds.
yy Never use any duplicated key not provided from Ssangyong.
yy The engine in an automatic transmission equipped vehicle can
be started only when the gear selector lever is at the “P” or “N” yy The duplicated key might not turn back to the “ON” position. It may
position. cause a fire due to an overload in the electric circuit. In addition,
the engine with the immobilizer system cannot be started with the
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the engine. duplicated key.
yy If the engine fails to start, turn the key back to the “LOCK” posi- yy For a vehicle with automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
tion and wait for 10 seconds. Then try again before any attempt with the gear selector lever in “P” position. Otherwise, the vehicle
to start the engine. can roll away unexpectedly causing a serious accident.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle yy Do not operate ignition switch or other switches while driving. You
speed. Do not accelerate the engine during the warming up pe- will not be able to control the steering wheel or the vehicle and
riod. could be seriously or even fatally injured.
yy A warning buzzer sounds when opening the driver’s door with the yy Do not stack luggage or other cargo around the driver seat. Any
key positioned at the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. such objects could interfere with your control of the vehicle and
yy Do not leave the key at the “ACC” or “ON” position when engine can cause harm.
is not running. Otherwise, the battery could run down.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Positions of engine start/stop button (smart key)*
Fully understand the functions in each position.
OFF Position ACC Position ON Position START Position

ON ON
RE RE
C
C
AD
AD
A
Y
Y
Indicator: OFF Indicator: Orange Indicator: Red Indicator: Green
yy The electric power is not yy Some electric accessories yy Almost electric accesso- yy Engine starting position
supplied to the electric are operative. ries are operative. To start the engine, depress
systems and the steering Press the engine start/stop Press the engine start/stop the brake pedal and press the
wheel is locked. button when the button is in button when the button is in engine start/stop button with
To turn off the engine, press the OFF position without de- the ACC position without de- the gear selector lever in P or
the engine start/stop button pressing the brake pedal. The pressing the brake pedal. Do N position.
with the engine start/stop but- steering wheel is unlocked not leave the button in the ON
ton ON and the gear selector and electrical accessories are position if the engine is not
lever in P position. operative. running to prevent the battery
from discharging.
Note
For double parking, refer to “DOUBLE PARK-
ING” in chapter 3.
Caution
Caution ON
RE
yy The ignition switch can be set to OFF (ve-
AD
yy Do not press the engine start/stop button while the engine is running.
Y
hicle power OFF) only when the gear se-
Otherwise, the engine start system could be damaged. After engine
lector lever is in the P position. (Door lock
start, the indicator on the engine start/stop button is turned OFF.
and theft deterrent arming not possible)
yy Make sure that the engine is turned off and the indicator on the
yy To set the ignition switch to OFF, shift the
engine start/stop button is off before leaving the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Starting Caution
yy The smart key may not work properly when you put it in the
To start the engine, depress blind spot such as under the pedals, on the floor or on the seat
the brake pedal and press the cushion.
RE
engine start/stop button with yy If the engine fails to start, refer to section “Emergency Engine
AD the gear selector lever in P or
Y
Starting” or have the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized
N position. Service Center.
yy Do not press and hold the ignition switch even if the engine is
not started.
yy If you put the ignition switch in ACC or ON position or activate
the audio system for an extended time period with the engine not
running, the battery may run down.
1. Carry the smart key inside the vehicle. yy The lower the temperature of the coolant, the longer the warm-up
2. Fasten the seat belts and be sure that all other occupants time will be. Under the high ambient temperature condition like
have fastened theirs properly. the summer season, the engine will start immediately without a
time delay.
3. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
4. Turn off all electric accessories. Note
5. Place the gear selector lever in P position. yy When the weather gets cold in the winter, pressing the engine
6. Depress the brake pedal fully. Check that the indicator on the start/stop button with the brake pedal depressed turns on the
button in green. And, press the engine start/stop button. The glow indicator on the instrument cluster, but the engine will not
start immediately. In this case, do not release the brake pedal until
indicator goes out after starting the engine.
the glow indicator goes out and the engine starts. (If the engine is
7. If you failed to start the engine, to prevent engine from dam- warmed up, the glow indicator may not come on.)
aging, put the ignition switch in “OFF” position and wait for yy To make the engine start easy, start the engine as follows in very
more than 10 seconds. cold weather.
8. Try to start the engine again (refer to step 6). 1. Press the engine start/stop button twice without depressing
the brake pedal.
9. When the engine is not running, do not put the ignition switch 2. T he engine start/stop button becomes ON and the preglow
in “ACC” or “ON” position for long time. In this case, do not indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.
use the audio system as well. This may cause the battery 3. Wait until the indicator goes out, and depress the brake pedal
discharge. and press the engine start/stop button.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Turning Off the Engine
The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop button, only
1. Depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.

2. Move the gear selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Apply the parking brake firmly.
4. Press the engine start/stop button to switch off the engine.
5. Make sure that the engine is turned off before leaving the
vehicle.
Note
1. Make sure that there are no persons or obstacles in the dan- Diesel engine learning mode:
gerous area around the vehicle. The diesel engine fuel injection injector learning mode is started
during driving or vehicle stop to achieve optimum performance of
2. Release the parking brake. the vehicle. It is normal for the vehicle engine to emit a slight noise
3. Keep the brake pedal depressed and shift into the “D” or “R” and vibration during performing learning operation.
Engine self-cleaning operating sound:
comes on. Slowly release the brake pedal to begin moving.
When the engine stops after driving, the system automatically cleans
4. When you stop your vehicle on a uphill, securely depress the the valve through which the intake air and exhaust gases flow and
brake pedal to prevent the vehicle rolling down. performs position learning.
It is normal for the vehicle engine to emit operating sounds depending
on the engine condition and cleaning procedures.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Turning Off the Engine While Driving System Safety Mode
The protective measures including illumination of engine warn-
ing lamp and reduced engine power are taken (engine turned
off in worst case) when there is a critical fault in the system or a
malfunction in the major electrical or fuel system. This indicates
the system entering the safety mode to protect the vehicle’s
drive system.
DANGER
a safe location immediately and contact your Ssangyong dealer.
If you need to turn off the engine in an accident or emergency, Then drive slowly or have the vehicle towed to a Ssangyong Dealer
press and hold the ignition switch for 3 sec. or more or briefly or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center according to the dealer’s
press 3 times within 1.5 sec. The ignition switch will be set to instruction and have your vehicle checked by a mechanic.
ACC. yy If you continue to drive in this state, normal driving is not main-
Note more importantly, continued driving with this state may damage
the drive system.
If the vehicle keeps rolling even after you turn the ignition off during
driving, move the gear selector lever to the N position and press the
ignition switch without depressing the brake pedal. The engine will
be started again.
Warning
If you are not in emergency situation, never press the engine start/
stop button while the vehicle is in motion. This would result in loss
of directional control and braking function, which could cause an
accident.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN STARTING THE ENGINE WITH SMART KEY
yy The engine can be started only when the gear selector lever yy Make sure that the engine cannot be started when checking
is in “P” or “N” position. the engine compartment.
yy Keep the brake pedal depressed when starting the en- yy Do not leave the button in the ON position if the engine is
gine. not running to prevent the battery from discharging.
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the yy If you are not in emergency situation, never press the en-
engine. gine start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
yy If the engine fails to start, wait for more than 10 seconds. yy The smart key may not work properly when you put it in
And, try to start the engine again. the blind spot such as under the pedals, on the floor or on
the seat cushion.
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at
idle speed. Especially in winter season, slowly drive your yy The engine may not be started when you place the smart
vehicle immediately after driving off. key near your smart phone or when you charge your smart
phone with the power outlet in the vehicle.
yy The warning message appears on the instrument cluster
and the buzzer sounds if you leave the vehicle with the yy When leaving the vehicle, turn the engine off and always
smart key when the engine start/stop button is in ON or take the smart key with you.
START position. yy If, for some reason, you happen to lose your smart key, you
will not be able to start the engine. Tow the vehicle, if neces-
yy The engine will start by pressing the engine start/stop but-
sary, and contact Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
ton, only when the smart key is in the vehicle. Never allow
children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to yy Keep the smart key away from water or any liquid. It could
touch the engine start/stop button or related parts. be inoperative due to exposure to water or liquids. In this
case, it will not be covered by warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Using emergency key (smart key)*
How to Remove Emer- Door LOCK/UNLOCK With Emergency Key
gency Key Follow the procedures to lock/unlock the doors by removing the driver door handle cover
in case of emergency.
Button for
emergency key
Emergency
key
1. Pull out the driver door handle cover 3. While pressing in the lever ( A ), push
yy Pull out the emergency key by press- in the direction of the arrow to access down the top side of the cover to
ing the button for emergency key. the emergency key cover release hole remove it.
lever ( A ).
yy To fold in the emergency key, press
and hold the button. 1 Lock
2 1 2 Unlock
Caution
Attempting to fold in the key without press-
ing the button can damage the emergency
key.
2. Insert the emergency key or flat 4. Insert the emergency key into the key
bladed screwdriver ( A ) into the emer- hole and turn it counterclockwise/
gency key cover release hole lever clockwise to lock/unlock the door.
and press in the lever ( A ).
Note
Caution If outside rearview mirror folding/unfolding
Be careful not to scratch the door panel or switch is not pressed, the theft deterrent
lose the removed handle cover. system will be disarmed and the side mir-
rors will be unfolded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart key battery low
Starting Engine With Smart Key Battery Dead
Opening/closing doors: If you cannot Door lock/unlock Engine start
lock/unlock the doors using a smart key
because of dead battery or wave inter-
ference, use the emergency key to lock/ 2 1
unlock the doors as shown below.
Engine Start: If you cannot start the en-
gine even with a smart key in the vehicle
1 Lock
because of dead battery or wave interfer-
ence, you can start the engine by using 2 Unlock
the smart key as shown below.
Insert the emergency key into the key Put the one end of the smart key against
Make sure to replace the battery or check
hole and turn it clockwise to unlock the the ignition switch and push it while
the smart key after locking or unlocking
door. depressing and holding the brake pedal
the doors by using these methods.
with the gear selector lever in P or N
Note position and. The warning buzzer will
If the vehicle theft deterrent system is stop if it was activated.
armed, warning buzzer will sound.
Note
If the door is opened after the engine start-
ing when the smart key battery is low, a
warning message "No smart key inside
vehicle" will be displayed. The message
will go off if you turn off the ignition and
then restart the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replacing smart key battery
If the operation range of your smart key is dramatically decreased or the smart key does not operate intermittently, replace the battery
of the smart key. The internal circuit of the smart key may be broken by the static electricity. Therefore, if you have any doubt about
your ability to replace the battery, visit SsangYong service center for servicing.
Type A Type B
Specification One battery (CR2032)
1. Remove the cover at the back side of the smart key using a
Caution
smallest flat-bladed screwdriver, taking care not to scratch
yy Use only the specified battery. The smart key may not work the cover.
properly because of improper contact when using a battery with
non-original dimensions. 2. Remove the rear cover and replace the battery.
yy Do not mistake the polarity. 3. Install a battery (one battery - CR2032)that meets the speci-
yy Used batteries should be disposed of in compliance with local fications with the correct polarity.
regulations. 4. Assemble in the reverse of removal.
yy The smart key is not water-proof. A damaged key due to water
exposure (e.g. beverages, moisture, etc.) will not covered by your
warranty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Shift lever in manual transmission
The manual transmission in your vehicle has 6 forward gears and 1 reverse gear. To change
gears, fully depress the clutch pedal. Then, move the gearshift lever into a desire gear. R 1 3 5
After shifting, release the clutch slowly.
3rd Gear 5th Gear

For low- or mid-speed driving. Position for high speed driving on
When upshifting from 2nd gear to 3rd gear, a highway. When downshif ting
particular caution should be taken not to inad- from 5th gear to 4th gear, particular 2 4 6
vertently press the gear shift lever sideways in caution should be taken not to inad-
such a manner that 5th gear is engaged. vertently press the gear shift lever
sideways in such a manner that 2nd
1st Gear
gear is engaged.
Position for driving off and high traction force.
Depress the clutch pedal to its travel end and
move the shift lever to “1”. Then, slowly release
6th Gear
the clutch pedal while gently depressing the
Position for very high speed driv-
accelerator pedal to drive off.
ing on a highway.
Reverse Gear
4th Gear
Position for reverse driving.
Position for normal and high
speed driving
2nd Gear
Position for low speed driving
Neutral Position
Position for engine start, Note
vehicle stop, and parking Your vehicle is equipped with the gear shift point indicator,
which can be shown on LCD display. Refer to Chapter 5.
Instrument cluster for details.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Downshifting DRIVING TIPS FOR NORMAL STARTING
When you need to slow down in heavy traffic or while driving up OFF OR STARTING OFF ON UPHILL
steep hills, downshift the gear to release the load to the engine. 1. Depress the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, start the en-
Downshifting reduces the chance of stalling and gives better ac- gine and move the shift lever to the 1st gear (reverse gear
celeration when you need to increase the vehicle speed again. in reversing) position.
When the vehicle is driving down steep hills, downshifting pro-
vides a safe speed and prolongs the life span of brake system. 2. If the clutch pedal is released slightly with the brake pedal
depressed, the engine rpm increases. (The increase in engine
rpm varies depending on the road inclination).
Gear Position When Parking
Always apply the parking brake fully and shut the engine off after
parking. Shift the transmission into 1st gear when the vehicle is
parked on a level ground or uphill grade, and shift into “R” on a
downhill grade.
Using the Clutch Release the clutch pedal slightly Increase in engine rpm
The clutch pedal should be depressed all the way to its travel 3. The vehicle starts to move smoothly if you depress the ac-
end before shifting. The clutch pedal should be fully released celerator pedal while releasing the brake pedal after checking
while driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while that the engine rpm is raising.
driving. This can cause unnecessary wear in clutch system. Do 4. Release the clutch pedal completely after the vehicle starts
not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly. off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Caution
yy The vehicles equipped with ESP system has HSA (Hill Start As- yy To start the engine in manual transmission equipped vehicle, you
sist) function, which keeps the brake pressure for a certain period must fully depress the clutch pedal.
of time to prevent the vehicle from slipping on a steep uphill when yy You should stop your vehicle and fully depress the clutch pedal
starting the engine so that you can move your vehicle more safely. before you shift into the reverse position.
HSA system is automatically deactivated after operating for ap- yy If the clutch pedal is frequently half-depressed, the clutch disc will
prox. 3 seconds, or the vehicle starts moving with accelerator be easily worn out. Use only as needed.
pedal depressed.
yy Do not put your foot on the clutch pedal if not shifting gears.
yy HSA function does not work when you start the vehicle parked on
yy When shifting from a higher gear into a lower gear, ensure that the
an uphill in reverse gear, or when you start the vehicle parked on
RPM gauge pointer does not go into the red zone on the gauge.
downhill in drive gear.
Especially, when shifting from the 5th to the 4th gear, moving the
gear shift lever to the left too much may result in shifting into the
Caution 2nd gear. This will cause a sudden increase of the engine speed
and may damage the engine and the transmission.
Because the HSA operation on the brake is automatically cancelled
after approx. 3 seconds, you have to release the brake pedal inten- yy When the temperature of the transmission oil is very low on a
tionally and depress the accelerator pedal so the vehicle does not cold day, you may have some difficulty for shifting gears. This is
slip down the hill. a normal phenomenon.
yy When you have difficulty for shifting into the 1st or reserve gear,
put the gear shift lever into the neural position and release the
clutch pedal. Then, depress the pedal again and shift into the
intended gear.
EPB OPERATION WHEN DRIVING UPHILL yy While your vehicle is moving, do not put your hand on the shift
lever except to shift gears. Otherwise, the gear may be disengaged
When driving on a steep uphill, it is safer to use EPB as follows:
from the transmission and the internal transmission components
Apply EPB and then follow the steps (Vehicle with M/T: steps may be damaged.
1 - 3) EPB will automatically release when the accelerator pedal yy Do not shift into the second next higher gear from a lower gear. Also,
is pressed while the driver’s door, hood and trunk are closed and while the engine is rotating fast, do not shift into a lower gear.
the seat belt is fastened. yy When using the half clutch mode, there is no need to abruptly de-
press the accelerator pedal because the engine power increases.
When the accelerator pedal is continuously depressed in half
clutch mode, the internal components can be worn or damaged.
Frequent use of half clutch mode is not recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gear selector lever in automatic transmission*
Gear Position Tip Switch in “M” Position

yy P : Parking (Manual Gear Shift)
The gear can be shifted by moving this
yy R : Reverse switch to forward and rearward when
yy N : Neutral the gear selector lever is in “M” position.
yy D : Driving
Mode Switch
Type A
yy W : Winter mode
yy S : Standard mode
Use the standard mode in normal
driving conditions.
Type B Shift Lock Release Button when

yy E : Eco mode locked in the “P” position
yy P : Power mode If you cannot move the selector lever from the “P”
yy W : Winter mode or “N” position, try to move the lever while pushing
Use the Eco mode in normal driving down here with a sharp object such as a ballpoint
conditions. pen. For your safety, turn off the engine and de-
press the brake pedal before the attempt.
Selection of Manual / To shift into any other positions from the “P”
Automatic Shift Function position after stopping the vehicle, you have
to depress the brake pedal with the ignition
yy D : Automatic shift according to the driving condition
switch “ON”
yy M : Manual shift

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gear selector lever positions
P: Park Position
Warning
yy Never shift into “P” when the vehicle is moving, or the transmis-
sion will be damaged. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
into “P”.
yy To shift from the “P” position to another position, the ignition switch
must be turned to the “ON” position and the brake pedal should
be depressed. Any forcible attempts to move the selector lever
from “P” without these two procedures may damage the selector
P
lever and transmission.
yy Do not use the “P” position in place of the parking brake. Always
make sure the shift lever is in “P” position and apply the parking
brake fully.
Use this position to park your vehicle, start the engine, warm up
the engine, or stay in a location for an extended length of time.
To shift into any other position, depress the brake pedal with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EMERGENCY RELEASE FROM P POSITION R: Reverse position
R
Emergency key
To shift from the “P”, the ignition switch must be turned to ON and Use this position to reverse the vehicle.
the brake pedal must be depressed. If you cannot shift out of “P” To shift into “R” from “P” or “N”, completely stop the vehicle
with the ignition switch in ON, and the brake pedal depressed: and depress the brake pedal. When the selector lever is in “R”,
1. Turn the ignition off and apply the parking brake. the parking aid system will be activated (If equipped).
2. Push down the shift lock release button. Then, shift the lever
to the “N” position. Warning
3. Start the engine, release the parking brake and shift the lever
yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move rearward when the
to the “D” position to drive off.
selector lever is at “R”.
Warning
If the selector lever is locked in the “P” position, release it by follow-
ing the above instructions and have your vehicle serviced by the near-
est Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
N: Neutral position
Warning
yy Warm up the engine for approx.3 minutes when the ambient tem-
perature is below -15°C. Otherwise, the gear selector lever may
not be moved smoothly (N→R). It is designed for protecting the
vehicle and is not a fault.
yy Never shift into “N” from the “D” position or vice versa when the
vehicle is moving, or the transmission will be damaged.
yy If you have to stop on a hill and would like to use this neutral posi-
N
tion, depress the brake pedal firmly.
yy Never attempt to move the gear selector lever to “N” when the
yy Never leave a child or pet alone in the vehicle when stopping
and parking the vehicle with the ignition ON and the shift lever in
neutral “N” position. Move the shift lever to the park “P” position
or turn the ignition off in order to prevent the safety accident due
to an unintentional operation.
No power is transferred in this position.
At this position, the engine does not transfer power to the wheels
and the vehicle will not move on a flat road. However, for safety,
apply the brake when the gear is in this position.
To shift into “D” or “R” position from “N” position after stopping
the vehicle, you have to depress the brake pedal with the igni-
tion switch “ON”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
D: Drive position
Warning
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
shifting into “D”, or the transmission will be damaged. Especially,
when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking the vehicle,
wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on with the brake
pedal depressed.
yy Even while the gear is in “D”, the vehicle can roll down on an
uphill according to the gradients, so you have to depress the
D
brake pedal.
Caution
yy Please note that the vehicle may slowly move forward on level
ground when the selector lever is in “D”.
yy Shifting to “D” position must be carried out with the vehicle com-
pletely stopped. Otherwise, the transmission can be damaged.
Use this position for normal driving conditions. The transmission yy Shifting from “N” to “D” position when the ignition is turned ON
is automatically shifted from 1st gear up to 6th gears accord- without the brake pedal depressed is possible. But move the gear
ing to the level of depression on the accelerator pedal and the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed as much as possible
vehicle speed. for your own safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
M: MANUAL SHIFT
Manual Gear Selection
Driving gear can be adjusted by operating the tip switch after
moving the gear selector lever from “D” to “M” position.
M
If the gear selector lever is in this position, you can shift gear Selecting “M”:
manually using the tip switch on the lever and the tip switches Manual gear shift
on both sides of the steering wheel.
Caution
Upshifting should be done properly according to the road conditions, Note
taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. yy To prevent shift shock and to protect the system, in some cases,
the current gear may not be shifted to the lower gear even if the
gear selector lever is moved to “M” position.
yy If you move the gear selector lever into M position (manual mode)
while the vehicle is stopping, you can shift to the lower gear and
the 2nd gear start is possible on snowy or rainy road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tip Switch on Gear Selector Lever Use of Engine Brake
To use the engine brake, shift the selector lever to the “M” position
first, then operate the tip switch to next lower shiftable gear.
Shift up
Caution
yy Operate the tip switch only once at a time. If you press and hold the
switch, the gear may be shifted through several steps in series.
yy Abruptly using the engine brake may make driving unstable. Do
not use the engine brake abruptly especially when driving on roads
Shift down covered with snow or ice.
yy According to the driving conditions, the unexpected gear could
be selected during engine braking. In this case, you may feel the
shifting shock. Therefore, carefully use the engine brake effect.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR POSITION DISPLAY ON INSTRU- Manual Gear Shift Position
MENT CLUSTER Supervision cluster
yy 1st gear position

1 Use on a rugged road, mountain path and steep
hill. Engine braking effect on steep hill is avail-
able.
yy 2nd gear position
Standard cluster
yy 3rd gear position

yy 4th gear position

4
Warning
Use on a long and gentle slope. yy Do not downshift abruptly (3rd, 2nd or 1st) when the vehicle is
driven at high speed (D or 4th), or vehicle may be severely dam-
aged. Also, the vehicle may slip, resulting in an accident (especially
yy 5th gear position on a slippery road).
5 yy If low-range maximum speeds are exceeded when the selector

lever is in low gears, the transmission could be damaged.
yy 6th gear position Caution
6 yy If you press and hold the tip switch, the gear may be shifted
through several steps in series.
yy Please note that the gear may be upshifted if you fully depress the
accelerator pedal while driving with 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gear.
yy 7th gear position (7A/T only)
7 yy If you apply excessive force to the tip switch, the gear may not
be shifted into other gears to protect the vehicle system. Soft and
smooth operation is recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving tips for automatic transmission
Starting and Driving Off Warning
1. Always start the engine while the selector lever is in “P” and yy For your safety, always depress the brake pedal before moving
the brake pedal is depressed. For your safety, avoid starting the gear selector lever with the vehicle stopped.
the engine from “N” even though you can do so. yy Never depress the accelerator pedal when moving the gear se-
2. Check whether or not the engine speed is in a normal operat- lector lever.
yy If you have to stop on a hill, depress the brake pedal securely.
ing range (below 1000 rpm). Keep the brake pedal depressed
yy When starting the engine with the accelerator pedal depressed,
and shift into “D” or “R”. your vehicle may abruptly move and cause an accident.
3. Depress the brake pedal, release the parking brake, and move yy When the parking brake is released while the engine is running at
the gear selector lever to “D” position. Wait for a while several a high rpm, your vehicle may abruptly move. Therefore, wait until
seconds before driving off with the brake pedal depressed. the engine speed becomes stable.
yy To avoid any mechanical damages or accidents, never shift into
4. To move the vehicle, release the brake pedal and depress the “P” or “N” while the vehicle is in motion.
accelerator pedal gradually. yy When driving at a high speed, any sudden attempt to shift from a
higher to a lower gear can severely damage the vehicle. In addi-
Caution tion, your vehicle may lose its stability and be at a high risk.
yy For safe driving, there are P Lock (P => R) and R Lock (N => R) yy A high engine speed can cause your vehicle to move abruptly
functions, in which the gear shift lever only works with the brake from the parked position. To avoid this, wait until the engine rpm
pedal depressed. becomes stable.
yy When you shift the gear suddenly from D to P, there might be inter- yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the vehicle after
mittent trapping in N gear, which is normal to protect the transmis- shifting into “D”. Otherwise, the transmission will be damaged.
Especially, when you start off on a hill after stopping and parking
sion, therefore avoid an abrupt gear shift for your safety.
the vehicle, wait for a while until the “D” shift indicator comes on
with the brake pedal depressed.
yy Do not abruptly drive off or sharply accelerate the engine after
shifting into “D”. Otherwise the transmission will be damaged. Es-
pecially, when you start off after stopping, wait for a while until the
“D” shift indicator comes on with the brake pedal depressed.
yy When driving on a downhill, never shift the selector lever to “N”. If
you try to shift the lever to “D” from “N”, a sudden gear engage-
ment can damage the drive train.
yy Even though you can start the engine with the selector lever in
both “P” or “N”, for your safety, always start the engine with the
selector lever in “P”.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Creep Phenomenon Engine Brake
Without any depression of the accelerator pedal, your vehicle When the accelerator pedal is released while the vehicle
can move slowly if the selector lever is in any position other is in motion, the engine speed decreases. This decreased
than “P” or “N”. This is called the creep effect. You can control engine speed creates an extra braking force. On a downhill,
your vehicle’s movement by only applying the brake in heavy engaging a lower gear can generate a slower engine speed
traffic or narrow areas. and eventually slow down the vehicle speed. By using this
engine brake, you can decrease your vehicle speed without
excessively using the brake system. The lower gear, the
Caution higher braking force.
yy On a steep decline or incline, your vehicle may move in the oppo-
site direction of the intended direction in spite of the creep effect.
When stopping on a steep hill, always depress the brake pedal. Caution
yy Do not excessively apply the brake pedal while going down a long
slope. The brake system will overheat, experience vapor lock or
Kickdown Function the fade phenomenon, and lose the braking force.
If you need to accelerate rapidly, depress the accelerator yy Be aware that the engine brake does not work when the gear
selector lever is in the “N” position.
pedal to its travel end. Then, a lower gear will be automatically
yy Avoid any abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires
engaged. This is called the Kickdown function.
may slip.
Caution
yy Do not use the kickdown function while driving on slippery or
sharply curved roads.
yy If you use the kickdown function too frequently, the durability and
fuel economy of the vehicle will get worse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety mode (automatic transmission)
Symptoms Resetting the safety mode when

When the transmission has an electrical or mechanical fault, the
the gear is fixed
transmission operates in the safety mode to maintain minimum
How to reset the safety mode
driving conditions and to prevent the transmission from being
damaged. 1. Park the vehicle and place the selector lever to “P”.
When the transmission is defective, the symptoms that can oc- 2. Stop the engine and wait for more than 10 seconds.
cur are as follows: 3. Start the engine.
yy Heavy shock when moving the selector lever
Symptoms after resetting the safety mode
yy Decreased driving force while driving at high speed
yy If the vehicle operates normally after resetting, the problems
yy Fixed gear position during driving (cannot accelerate
are corrected.
the vehicle)
yy If gear is fixed at the 2nd forward gear in the “D” position
Caution
or the 2nd reverse gear in “R”. Have the system checked
by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
yy If you find any symptoms caused by mechanical or electrical de-
Center.
fects in the transmission, stop the vehicle immediately and reset
the safety mode.
yy If abnormal operation of the transmission (fixed at the certain for-
ward gear in “D” or 2nd reverse gear in “R”) still exists, have the
system checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
yy If the mechanical or electrical problem still exists, have the sys-
tem checked by a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Road safety
Driving On A Snowy Or Icy Road Driving On A Sandy Or Muddy Road
yy Shift to the lowest possible gear and drive slowly. yy Keep your speed steady as low as possible.
yy Since your braking distance is longer than usual, allow a yy While driving, be careful not to accelerate or stop too quickly
longer following distance. because you might get stuck in sand or mud.
yy If you accelerate or brake too fast, your vehicle will slide and yy If your vehicle gets stuck in sand or mud, insert a rock or a piece
you might get in an accident, so drive with caution. When of wood under the stuck wheel, lightly apply the accelerator
braking, use the engine brake; apply your brakes only after pedal and gently shift back and forth between the reverse and
you have slowed down considerably. forward gear to allow inertia to get your vehicle out.
yy When going down a slippery downhill, use the engine brake
and drive slowly. Caution
When your vehicle is stuck in sand or mud and you step on the accel-
Caution erator pedal excessively in order to get out of there, the tire slip may oc-
cur which results in the damage of the transmission and corresponding
When traveling on a snowy or icy road, use snow tires for safer
drive system. In that case, get another vehicle to tow you if possible.
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving On Unpaved And Mountain Going Through Water
Roads yy If water gets into the electric system or engine, it might cause
yy Before driving, check road conditions such as if the road irreparable damage to your vehicle. Please refrain from un-
suddenly ends, or if there is enough space for a U-turn in the derwater driving.
middle of the road. yy If going through water is unavoidable, choose a shallow spot
yy It’s easy to slide in a road covered with much sand or with where the exhaust outlet wouldn’t get submerged in water and
much dry dirt. Keep your speed low and steady. proceed slowly at a steady speed.
yy There is a danger of driving off the mountain road, so stay yy Before going through water, get out of your vehicle and check
alert. the bottom of the river. Do not go through water if the bottom
is sandy or covered with big rocks.
yy When coasting downhill, do not change gears; go down slowly
by applying the engine brake. yy If several vehicles are going through water together, the first
vehicle might burrow into the bottom, so be careful and cross
in a different place if possible.
Warning
In high mountain area ►►Important things to remember when going through
The operation stability of diesel engine is not guaranteed in high water
mountainous area over 2,500 meters. The short trip such as passing
through tunnel in this area is acceptable. However, do not keep driv-
yy If the engine stops while you are going through water, do not
ing there for a long time. If you drive your vehicle in very high altitude try to restart. Get your vehicle towed.
for long time, the engine could be damaged. The engine power, yy Be particularly careful not to allow water to enter into the
climbing ability and emission are subject to the altitude. engine through the air cleaner.
yy Never change gears while going through water.
Warning
If water gets into the brake system, the effectiveness of the brakes
decreases. After going through water, move slowly and gently ap-
plying the brakes several times so that frictional heat dries the brake
pads and discs. Check if the brakes work properly before continuing
driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Checking your vehicle after going through water Freeway Driving
yy Check the front, rear, right and left sides, transmission, axle
hubs, propeller shaft, oil and fluid levels, and underbody; if you yy Before getting on a freeway, listen to the weather forecast,
discover problems, get your vehicle checked immediately. prepare thoroughly and check the fuel level, brake system,
cooling system, and tires.
yy Check all lamps and other electrical devices. If necessary, re-
place damaged components and get your vehicle checked. yy Always respect the speed limit and refrain from speeding.
yy Check for damages to the vehicle body and underbody; if you yy Allow for a safe following distance, avoid sudden steering
discover problems, get your vehicle checked immediately. movements.
yy If the vehicle body is very dirty, wash your car to protect it. yy When it rains or snows and the weather conditions are ad-
verse, double the distance between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle running in front of you. And reduce your speed by half.
Driving On Hill Roads
Caution
Position the gearshift lever in accordance with the road condi-
Do not idle the engine for a long time; it wastes fuel and causes
tions.
environmental pollution.
yy Drive at a slow speed for the first 2 km if possible.
Warning
yy Do not load your vehicle with unnecessary stuff.
yy If you suddenly use the engine brake on an icy or slippery road, the yy Refrain from quick accelerating and abrupt braking, travel at a
vehicle might slide and get in an accident. Use the engine brakes steady speed.
after fully reducing your vehicle speed. yy When you park or stop for a long time, turn the engine off.
yy If you repeatedly apply your brakes on a long downgrade, they yy Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
may overheat, their effectiveness decreases and an accident
yy Keep your vehicle in the best possible condition by periodically
might occur. When on a long downgrade, use the engine brake
checking it and perform maintenance.
together with your brakes.
Caution
If you suddenly apply the engine brake while traveling at a high
speed, the engine may get damaged. Slow down the vehicle speed
and then downshift the gear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caring for your vehicle under 0°C (32°F)
Caring For Your Vehicle Under 0°C Engine Oil
(32°F) When the vehicle is shipped, the engine is filled with four-season
engine oil.
During the winter, undesirable road conditions frequently hap-
pen. Therefore, appropriate preparations for emergencies should Tires
occur. Snow tires are more desirable on an icy or snow-covered road.
Before driving in suburban or rural areas, or on a snowing day, Have snow tires installed on your vehicle before driving on such
have bags of sand, snow chains, a shovel, gloves, and old clothes a road.
in your vehicle.
Caution
Coolant
yy When snow tires are installed, drive your vehicle at a lower speed
Before it gets cold, check the coolant level. than normal.
The conventional coolant is the 50:50 mixture of water and yy Install snow chains correctly. Otherwise, the chains may damage
antifreeze. the wheelhouses or the body of your vehicle.
If only water has been added into the coolant reservoir, the engine
and the cooling system of your vehicle may seriously be damaged
when the water freezes as it gets below the freezing point.
Air Conditioner
When the air conditioner has not been used for an extended period
Caution of time, internal moving components may become seized because
the lubricating system has not worked for a prolonged amount of
yy When the vehicle is shipped, the cooling system is filled with a
four-season coolant. time. As a result, the refrigerant may leak or rusting may happen
yy Before adding or refilling coolant, ensure that the coolant is a 50:50 to the system. Malfunction of the air conditioner may result.
mixture of water and antifreeze. To maintain its optimal operating condition, it is recommended
yy Use only Ssangyong genuine coolant. that the air conditioner be turned on for approximately 5 to 10
minutes every week throughout all seasons.
Washer Fluid
Caution
Use a genuine washer fluid that does not freeze on a cold day.
Do not remove the refrigerant in winter, even though you do not use
When non-recommended washer liquid is used, the liquid may the air conditioner.
form an ice. This will damage the wiper motor and hinder your
safe driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the Engine and Driving in Parking in Winter
Winter When the parking brake is applied in cold weather, ice may form
on the brake system and cause some difficulty moving the ve-
Starting the Engine in Winter hicle. When parking on a hill, first, apply the parking brake. Put
During winter, the engine experiences increased resistance the shift lever into the “1” or “R” position (Manual Transmission)
from the powertrain. Therefore, start the engine in an appropri- or into the “P” position (Automatic Transmission). Put a chock
ate way. under a tire and release the parking brake.
After starting the engine, allow time to warm it up before driving
the vehicle. Warming up the engine will increase its life expec- Warning
tancy and help you drive safely. When ice forms on the parking brake system, an attempt to move
the vehicle without removing the ice may damage your vehicle. Wait
Caution until the ice melts away and gently move your vehicle.
yy The glow plugs of the diesel engine should sufficiently be warmed
up before the engine starts.
yy Change the engine oil and fuel filter according to the specified ser-
vice intervals. Contaminated engine oil will decrease its viscosity
and clog the fuel filter and oil filter, causing a difficulty of engine
start at low temperature.
yy Do not add any additives other than the genuine fuel for better
Driving in Winter
Maintain at least twice as long of a normal driving distance be-
tween your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. When stopping,
shift into a lower gear to use the engine brake.
Avoid speeding, abrupt acceleration, sudden braking, or drastic
maneuvering of the steering wheel.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Other Maintenance Diesel Fuel in Winter
After driving on a calcium chloride (salt) spayed road, wash the On an extremely cold day, paraffin, one of the chemicals in diesel
bottom of your vehicle as soon as possible to avoid any rust. fuel, may separate from the diesel fuel. This separation makes
When parking on a snow-covered road, the brake system may starting the engine difficult. During the winter season, Kerosene
begin to have some ice on it. The ice will decrease your vehicle’s is added to diesel in some markets to prevent the paraffin sepa-
braking ability. If this happens, drive at a low speed and use the ration and secure stable flow of the fuel through the fuel filter.
brake frequently to remove the ice. After regaining the braking The amount of added Kerosene into diesel can vary by location
ability, drive your vehicle at a normal speed. and their average winter temperatures. Therefore, to ensure an
easy start on a cold day, park your vehicle inside of a garage.
Warning If possible, fill up the fuel tank after each driving to prevent ice
from forming inside of the fuel system.
yy When there is ice on the wiper blades, turning on the wiper switch
may put an extra burden on the wiper motor and damage it. Avoid
using the wipers when ice is on the blades. Caution
yy When driving on a snow-covered road, a large amount of snow yy Change engine oil and the fuel filter as scheduled. Contaminated
may build up under each wheelhouse. This buildup prevents the engine oil will lose its viscosity, clog the fuel filter and oil filter and
steering wheel from moving freely. Therefore, remove the snow cause difficulties starting the engine.
buildup frequently. yy Do not add any additives other than the genuine fuel for better

GETtheMANUALS.org
Turbocharger System Using biodiesel fuel and low
Insufficient oil supply to the bearing assembly in turbocharger quality fuel
may cause the turbocharger to seize. Therefore, the following The fuel system of the common rail direct injection engine is pre-
cares are necessary to prevent the seizure. cisely machined component. Using low quality fuel and excessive
yy Use only the specified engine oil and observe inspection and biodiesel fuel could result in a serious damage to the engine due
replacement intervals. to the water, impurities or suspended particles in fuel.
yy Operate the engine over the idling speed only after normal Using fuel mixed with too much biodiesel fuel can cause fuel filter
engine oil pressure has been established. Forcing the tur- clogging, power loss, engine idling problem, engine stall, difficulty
bocharger to operate before the bearings are adequately with starting the engine in cold weather as well as damage to
lubricated creates unnecessary friction. the engine and the fuel system, due to the naturally produced
yy After starting the engine, let it run for approx. 2 minutes at idle suspended particles.
speed (Avoid acceleration or driving off the vehicle). Currently, the Ssangyong vehicle is designed so that only the
yy Do not stop the engine immediately after coming back from mixed fuel of biodiesel and diesel with mixing ratio within the
high load driving (such as high speed driving or driving on specified range can be used for safety. If any product in which
long slope). Let the engine run for approx. 1 minutes at idle the biodiesel fuel is exceeds the total amount of fuel is used
speed to cool it down. or the aftermarket biodiesel fuel is added to the regular fuel, it
yy After changing the engine oil and oil filter, start the engine and can lead to malfunctions in the vehicle and this is not covered
let it run for approx. 1 minutes at idle speed (Avoid accelera- by warranty.
tion or driving off the vehicle).
What is “Bio-diesel”?
yy Do not rev the engine at high speed without air cleaner ele-
ment when checking the engine. The bio-diesel fuel is made by reacting vegetable oil extracted
from beans, rapeseed, rice bran, etc. with alcohol. This can
Turbocharger? be solely used or used mixed with the diesel fuel for the diesel
engine as its physical and chemical characteristics are similar
The turbocharger consists of two turbo elements, a turbine and
to those of the diesel fuel. This is considered to be alternative
a compressor, both of which are driven from the main center
energy to the diesel fuel nowadays.
shaft. The turbine rotates between 50000 ~ 160000 revolutions
per minute and uses the energy of the exhaust gas to drive the
compressor. The compressor, in turn, draws in fresh air which
it supplies to the cylinders in the form of compressed air.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Four wheel drive system*
4-WHEEL DRIVE SWITCH 4WD INDICATOR
4WD HIGH Indicator

yy When shifting the driving mode from “2H”
to “4H”, this indicator comes on.
When switching to 4WD mode select a proper driving mode ac-
yy When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to
cording to the road conditions (slippery, gradient, bump or dip).
“4H”, this indicator blinks until the shifting
operation is completed. After completion
Switching between 2H 4H
of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
It is recommended to shift under a speed of 70 km while the comes on.
vehicle is being driven. 4WD LOW Indicator
Switching between 2H and 4H 4L When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this
indicator blinks until the shifting operation
Stop the vehicle on a level ground and place the shift lever into is completed. After completion of the mode
the “Neutral” position. Turn the switch to the desired position change to 4L, the indicator comes on.
while depressing the clutch pedal.
4WD CHECK Warning Indicator
Warning
If this warning light comes on while driving,
Do not drive off before the 4WD indicator (4H/4L) is illuminated.
Driving off before illumination of this indicator can cause abnormal have the 4WD system checked by Ssangyong
wear or stuck of drive gears. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DRIVING MODE
2H : 2-Wheel Drive 4-Wheel Drive System
This is rear wheel drive with Transfer case which allows you, in the case of part-time four
high speed. Use this posi- wheel drive, to switch between two-wheel drive and four-
tion for normal driving. This wheel drive. Compared with two-wheel drive vehicles, this
position gives greater fuel system provides more stable driving conditions. This system
economy, quieter ride and ensures a more stable drive on wet or slippery roads. In case
least drive train wear. the greater traction is needed, you can shift into 4 Wheel
Drive Low (4L).
4H : 4-Wheel Drive, High
Use this position on wet or Part-Time 4-Wheel Drive
slippery roads such as san-
dy, muddy or snow covered Normally, the vehicle is driving in 2WD mode. But if needed,
roads. it can be changed into 4WD High (4H), and 4WD Low (4L) by
pressing the switch. This is equipped with the control unit that
supports the mode transfer. In 4WD mode, the system splits the
torque between the front (50%) and rear (50%) wheels.
4L : 4-Wheel Drive, Low
Use this position for maximum Tight Cornering
traction. Cornering a curve in 4WD mode (4L or 4H) may shake up the
vehicle or cause skidding. Such phenomena indicate that the four-
wheel drive is operated normally, because they can be caused
by the resistance of the internal power system according to the
difference of rotation between the front and rear wheels. Please
avoid excessive and tight cornering in four-wheel drive mode to
Note
prevent the power train from being damaged.
In case of 6A/T, when driving in 4L (4-wheel Drive, Low) Mode, us-
ing 5~6th gear is prohibited.
Using 5~6th gear in 4L mode will damage the drive system

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTIONS WHEN USING 4-WHEEL DRIVE MODE
yy There could be mechanical noises and shocks during yy This helps to make the mode changes easily.
mode changes. However, these are normal conditions yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or less when
due to the mode changing operations. driving in 4H mode.
yy Use only the 2H mode on a normal paved surface. Do yy We hope you will use 4L mode when high traction is
not drive your vehicle in the “4H” or “4L” position on paved required.
road surfaces. Doing so will result in damages to the drive
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fit-
train.
ted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive
yy Driving in a 4 wheel mode on a normal paved surface system.
will cause unwanted noises, premature wear of tires, or
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same
increased fuel consumption.
manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle character-
yy To shift from “4L” into another mode or vice versa, stop the istics can be maintained safely.
vehicle and depress the brake pedal before any shift.
yy The vehicle equipped with 4WD system should be towed
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays on, have the by flat-bed truck. If it is impossible to load the vehicle on a
4WD system checked by the nearest Ssangyong Dealer flat-bed truck, tow the vehicle after placing dollyies under
or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. all tires. If you tow the vehicle equipped with 4WD system
yy When cornering a curved road in a 4-wheel drive mode while front or rear tires are rolling on the road, the drive
(4L or 4H), there could be some mechanical shocks and system in the vehicle should be severely damaged.
resistances in vehicle’s drive train. These are normal con-
ditions due to internal resistance in the drive train when
the 4-wheel drive mode is properly working. To avoid
damages to the drive train, do not drive your vehicle at an
excessively high speed on a sharply curved road. Dolly

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake system
Warning Light and Indicator Related to Brake
ABS warning Brake warning EBD warning light ESP warning ESP OFF HDC indicator AUTO HOLD
light light light indicator indicator
ESP OFF
switch
HDC
switch
Brake pedal
EPB switch AUTO HOLD switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Pedal (Foot Brake)
The brake pedal (foot brake) is designed to decrease the vehicle Nothing Under Driver’s Seat
speed and stop the vehicle. Do not excessively apply the brake Do not leave empty bottles
pedal while going down a long hill. The brake system will overheat or cans near or under the
causing the vapor lock or fade phenomenon thus losing braking driver’s seat. If it hinders the
force. Use the foot brake along with the engine braking effects brake or accelerator pedal
by selecting lower gears. operation, it may cause an
unexpected accident.
Caution
Avoid abrupt engine braking on slippery roads, or the tires may
slip.
Engine brake?
A system that allows for the slowing of a vehicle that is inde- Brake Disc
pendent of the conventional braking systems. A driver would
Check the brake discs at every 10000 km of driving, and replace
normally down-shift to slow the driver’s descent of a hill,
if necessary.
using engine compression. The engine brake increases the
effectiveness of this regarding force. When the brake disc is badly worn, you may hear a squeaking
sound from the brake system. If this happens, replace the brake
Fade? discs as a set (left and right) as soon as possible.
Reduction or loss in braking force due to loss of friction be-
Caution
tween brake pads and discs.
The life span of brake disc depends on the driving habits.
Vapor Lock?
When the brake system is overheated, the fluid in the brake
lines will boil and form bubbles. Only the bubbles will be com-
pressed when the brake pedal is depressed. So the brakes When the Foot Brake Is Not Working
cannot work properly due to loss of braking force. When the foot brake is not working, decelerate the vehicle speed
by using the engine braking effect, then stop the vehicle by ap-
plying the parking brake slowly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)? Warning
When braking suddenly or braking on slippery roads, the yy ABS is designed to secure more safety and increase the control
vehicle keeps moving forward but the wheels are locking and of steering wheel during emergency braking situation. The braking
not rotating. If these happen, your vehicle may lose stability distance for vehicles equipped with an ABS may be longer than
for those without it on uneven, gravel, rough or snow-covered
or rotate resulting in an accident. ABS helps to maintain di-
roads.
rectional stability and control of the vehicle.
yy While driving on these roads, reduce the vehicle speed and main-
tain a safe distance from a proceding car.
yy To get the maximum benefit from ABS in an emergency situation,
ABS Warning Light
do not pump the brake pedal.
This warning light comes on when the igni- yy Even a vehicle equipped with ABS has a risk of skidding sideways.
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should go Therefore, always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle ahead
off in a few seconds. and drive at low speed on slippery surfaces.
Warning
If this light stays on after starting the engine or comes on while driv- Caution
ing, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong yy ABS system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
Authorized Service Center. In this case, the ABS function is not avail- sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
able, but the conventional brake system is properly working. This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ABS is
yy When the ABS is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ABS

GETtheMANUALS.org
EBD (Electronic Brake-Force Dis- ESS (Emergency Stop Signal)*
tribution)*
Emergency Stop Signal?
The hazard warning flashers very rapidly blink to inform the
EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)?
emergency situation to the vehicles behind when your vehicle
When the brake pedal is applied, it controls the braking pressure is braked suddenly or ABS is operating.
electronically to effectively distribute the braking forces to the
front wheels and rear wheels. EBD operates when the speed
The hazard warning flashers will go off:
differences between the fastest front wheel and the rear wheel
are over 1 km/h. If ABS is engaged, it does not operate. yy When you press the hazard warning flasher switch
yy After 10 seconds
yy When the vehicle speed increases by 10 km/h
EBD Warning Light*
Note
yy The ESS does not work when the hazard warning flashers are
already ON.
yy Operation of ESS is subject to the vehicle speed and driving
conditions.
If the ABS warning light and the brake warning light come on
simultaneously, EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) system
is defective.
Caution
If the EBD warning light stays on, have the system checked at the

GETtheMANUALS.org
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)* Warning
For your safety, reduce the vehicle speed when the indicator is blink-
ESP SYSTEM? ing or you are driving on a slippery or curved road.
The ESP system is an electronic vehicle stability control and
safe driving system and driving safety supplementary system Caution
that helps to avoid dangerous situations by controlling the yy ESP system performs self diagnosis by transferring hydraulic pres-
brakes on the wheels or the engine torque to compensate sure to the brake units for few seconds after starting the engine.
vehicle stability when it is extremely unstable under conditions This may cause some noise and vibrations. This means ESP is
such as sharp cornering. properly functioning.
yy When the ESP is operating, you may feel pulsations from the brake
pedal along with noise. This is normal and indicates that the ESP
ESP OFF Indicator

This indicator comes on when pressing the ESP
OFF switch to deactivate the ESP function.
When the wheels are slipping on a snow-covered
or iced road, you can stop ESP function by press-
ESP OFF switch ing ESP OFF switch. This may help to drive off
When the switch is pressed and held for 3 seconds or longer, the vehicle.
the ESP is deactivated and the ESP OFF indicator is illuminated
Caution
on the instrument cluster. Pressing the switch again resumes
the ESP function. yy The vehicles equipped with ESP perform self-diagnosis on the
system when the vehicle starts to move after engine start. Dur-
ESP Indicator/Warning Light ing that time, a slight vibration can be felt which means ESP is
ON yy When the ESP system is operating, you may feel the slight pul-
This warning light comes on when ESP system sation. This is normal and indicates that the ESP is functioning
is defective. properly.
Blinking
This indicator blinks when the ESP system is Note
operating. For details, refer to ESP OFF switch and ESP system in Chapter 3.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Stopping ESP Function With ESP OFF Switch
Caution
If the driving wheels are slipping on snowy or icy roads, the yy The ARP system more powerfully controls the engine and each
engine rpm may not increase even when you depress the ac- wheel than the ESP function. When the ARP is applied, a sudden
celerator pedal, and accordingly, you may not be able to move decrease of vehicle speed or powerful braking force can make
your vehicle. In this case, stop the ESP function by pressing the steering your vehicle a little difficult.
ESP OFF switch. When the ESP OFF switch is pressed, the ESP yy The ESP system does not operate during reverse driving.
function stops and the vehicle is driven independently from the yy The ESP system is activated when the vehicle is unstable to cor-
sensor outputs. rect the vehicle stability. When the ESP indicator is blinking, reduce
the speed and pay extra attention to the road.
Sensing ESP System In Operation yy The ESP system is only a supplementary device for the vehicle.
When the vehicle exceeds its physical limits, it cannot be con-
When ESP is activated (ESP indicator light blinks) due to sharp trolled. Do not rely on the system. Keep driving safely.
cornering and etc., you will sense that the corresponding tire is yy It is normal for the vehicles with ESP to emit a slight vibration dur-
put on the brake, and brake pedal vibration and other noises can ing performing self-diagnosis procedures.
occur due to hydraulic pressure change in the system. Also the yy When ESP is applied, you may feel some noise or vibration from
engine torque may not increase even with the accelerator pedal the brake pedal or other relevant systems. They are caused by
depressed, due to engine power control function. pressure changes in the relevant systems.
yy Do not drive off the vehicle immediately after starting the engine.
Note The ESP system needs approx. 2 seconds to perform self-
diagnosis. If the system could not complete the self-diagnosis,
Vehicles equipped with ESP system have more auxiliary func-
the ESP system cannot be activated even when the vehicle is in
tions to reinforce the driving safety, other than major functions
unstable conditions.
below.
yy Do not accelerate the vehicle and drive slowly when the ESP
* BAS (Brake Assist System) Function indicator flashes.
A certain driver such as a female driver, aged driver, or a driver with yy Do not press the ESP OFF switch when the ESP system is in
a disability is unable to depress the brake pedal as hard as neces- operation. Stopping the ESP function on the slippery road may
sary. When the ESP system recognizes any emergency situations cause a serious accident. To deactivate the ESP function, press
requiring hard braking, it automatically delivers an extra high braking the ESP OFF switch only on a long straight road.
pressure to the wheels.
* ARP (Active Rollover Protection) Function Warning
This function is a part of the ESP system. When your vehicle moves If the ESP OFF indicator comes on with the ESP system still acti-
in an extremely unstable manner, this function helps the vehicle vated, the ESP related system is defective. Make sure to have the
maintain normal stability. vehicle checked at the nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC (Hill Descent Control)* HDC Indicator
Green light on: HDC is ready for use (by pressing
HDC (Hill Descent Control)? the HDC switch).
HDC stands for Hill Descent Control. When traveling down Green light blinking: HDC is being applied.
steep grades, this function allows you to travel at a low speed Red light on: the HDC system is overheated or
without depressing the brake pedal. This convenient function malfunctioning.
is only for driving down steep grades. Therefore do not use this
function for anything other than driving down steep hills. Caution
If driving on a level road with HDC on and ready for use, HDC may
be applied during sharp cornering or passing over a speed bump.
Therefore, do not activate HDC while driving on normal roads.
HDC Operating Conditions

1. HDC switch ON (green HDC indicator on instrument cluster
comes on)
2. Gradient of more than specified value and vehicle speed
HDC Switch between 5 and 50 km/h
Pressing the HDC switch turns on the HDC indicator on the 3. ESP (including BAS) not activated
instrument cluster and set the HDC system in READY mode.
Pressing the HDC switch again turns off the HDC indicator and
deactivates the HDC function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HDC Deactivation Conditions HDC Operation
1. HDC switch OFF (green HDC indicator on the instrument If the conditions for activating the HDC are met, HDC is activated
cluster goes off) and the green HDC indicator blinks on the instrument cluster. The
2. Gradient of less than specified value HDC is deactivated when the vehicle speed is below 5 km/h or
above 70 km/h or the gradient of the slope becomes gentle while it
3. Vehicle speed of below 5 km/h or above 70 km/h
is in operation. It is normal that strong vibrations and noise occur
4. HDC malfunction from the brake system when the HDC is in operation.
5. HDC system overheated
Caution
Note yy HDC is designed to be used when driving on off-road with steep
While the HDC is activated, you can drive the vehicle at a speed grades (downhill).
between 5 and 30 km/h by depressing the brake pedal (deceleration) yy Unnecessary usage of HDC can cause malfunctions in the brake
or accelerator pedal (acceleration). If the vehicle speed is below 5 system or ESP system. Do not use HDC when driving on normal
km/h or above 70 km/h, the HDC is deactivated. roads.
yy If driving on a level road with HDC ON and in ready state, the HDC
function can be operated during sharp cornering or passing over
a speed bump. Therefore, do not activate the HDC while driving
on normal roads.
yy If the red HDC indicator is turned on, the HDC system is over-
heated or faulty. If the red indicator stays on even after the HDC
related systems have been cooled down, have the vehicle checked
and service at the nearest SSangyong authorized dealer or
SSangyong service center.
yy It is normal for the HDC related system including the brake pedal to
emit operating sounds and vibration when HDC is operated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB (Electric Parking Brake)
The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) is applied/released by simple Applying EPB
switch operation. This parking brake system improves vehicle
safety and stability. Park the vehicle in a safe place and pull
up the EPB switch.
instrument cluster is turned on, indicating
that the parking brake is applied.
Releasing EPB
Press down the EPB switch with the
brake pedal depressed.
instrument cluster is turned off, indicating
that the parking brake is released.
AUTO Releasing EPB

1. Close the driver door, engine hood and tailgate and fasten
your seat belt.
2. Shift the gear selector lever to the R or D position.
3. Release the brake pedal and then depress the accelerator
pedal slowly.
4. The EPB is released automatically, thus enabling forwards or
backwards movement of the vehicle.
Caution
The EPB AUTO release function will not be activated when the
driver door, engine hood or tailgate is not closed or the seat belt is
not fastened.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB Warning Lamp/Parking Brake EPB Emergency Mode
Warning Lamp If the brake pedal cannot be depressed because of the brake
Warning lamp ON: The warning lamp is turned system failure while driving the vehicle, brake the vehicle by
on when there is a fault in the EPB system. pulling up the EPB switch. The parking brake is applied as long
as the switch is pulled up. If this is the case, it may take longer
to stop the vehicle.
Warning lamp ON: Caution

- When parking brake is applied properly yy Activating this emergency mode may have a negative effect on the
- When brake fluid level is low vehicle. Therefore this feature only be used in an emergency.
yy If you hear noises or smell a burnt odor from the related com-
- When gear selector lever is shifted to P position ponents after using the EPB emergency mode, have the vehicle
with AUTO HOLD checked and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Caution
yy Check if the parking brake warning lamp is turned on or off on the
Warning
instrument cluster when applying or releasing the EPB.
yy Improper operation of EPB switch (operating with excessive force yy Do not use this feature while driving except for emergency. Using
applied, continuous operation) may turns on the EPB warning this feature not only damages the vehicle system, but also can
lamp. If this is the case, turn the ignition switch off and then on cause accidents due to braking force.
again. The warning lamp will be turned off, indicating that the EPB yy Keep the EPB switch out of the reach of children. Failure to do so
works normally. could cause an accident.
yy If the EPB warning lamp stays on, have the vehicle serviced at a yy If there is a critical fault in the brake system, the EPB emergency
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. mode may not work.
yy If you have to park the vehicle with faulty EPB, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle on a flat surface and shift the gear selector lever
to the P position.
Warning
Do not let other people who are not familiar with the EPB system
or children operate the EPB switch. There is a danger of accidents
depending on the parking/stationary state of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Double parking
To park the vehicle in front of another vehicle allowing the vehicle to be pushed or pulled, perform the following procedure:
P
Emergency
key
1. Release the EPB with the ignition 2. Turn the ignition off with brake pedal 3. Shift the gear selector lever to the N
switch ON or engine running. depressed and gear selector lever in position after pressing the lever lock
the P position. release button with the brake pedal
Note depressed.
Make sure that the AUTO HOLD function Note
is deactivated by pressing the AUTO If the gear selector lever is in a position Caution
HOLD switch. If AUTO HOLD is acti- other than the P position, the vehicle In double parking mode, the vehicle may
vated, the EPB is automatically applied. power will not be turned off. roll away. Therefore, the vehicle should
be parked on a flat surface and taking
the appropriate action, such as installing
wheel chocks, is required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Caution
yy Before driving off, be sure to check if the parking brake warning yy When parking on an uphill, yy When parking on a downhill,
lamp or brake fluid low warning lamp is turned on. turn the front wheels away turn the front wheels toward
yy Driving with parking brake applied could damage the brake system. from the curb. the curb.
Before driving, fully release the parking brake.
Parking on uphill Parking on downhill
yy If the parking brake should be applied while driving the vehicle,
move the gear selector lever to the P or N position for safety.
yy If the brake warning lamp ( ) stays on after the parking brake is
released, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong
yy For vehicles with A/T, never use the gear position P (parking) as
a substitute for the parking brake. When parking/stopping the
vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
yy To park the vehicle with gear selector lever in the N position, turn
the ignition switch off with the gear in the P position and move the
gear selector lever to the N position after pressing the lever lock
release button.
yy If the gear selector lever of the parked/stopped vehicle is in a place
other than the P position, the vehicle can be rolled away based on
the external force applied or slopes of the road. Therefore, always
move the gear selector lever to the P position unless other gear
position is required.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO HOLD*
If you are stopping briefly at traffic lights or in heavy traffic, de- AUTO HOLD Activation
pressing the brake pedal with AUTO HOLD activated applies the
parking brake automatically to keep the vehicle stationary. Press the AUTO HOLD switch.
Depress the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake.
Note
The indicator on the AUTO HOLD switch
is illuminated in white.
AUTO HOLD Deactivation

� Press the AUTO HOLD switch with
AUTO HOLD activated to deactivate
the feature.
� If the ignition switch is turned off and
then on again, the AUTO HOLD func-
tion will be deactivated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operating AUTO HOLD AUTO HOLD indicator
1. Pressing the AUTO HOLD switch turns on the AUTO HOLD yy O
N in white: AUTO HOLD operation
indicator (white). READY state (parking brake not applied)
2. Depress the brake pedal while driving to stop the vehicle. yy O
N in green: AUTO HOLD activated and
3. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster parking brake applied
is changed from white to green and the brake is applied. � Flashing in yellow: fault in AUTO parking
4. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal when driving off. brake system
5. The color of AUTO HOLD indicator on the instrument cluster Caution
is changed from green to white and the brake is released.
yy The AUTO HOLD can be activated while reversing. To park/stop
the vehicle, deactivate the AUTO HOLD function.
Caution
yy During the break-in period of parking brake pad, the braking force
yy The AUTO HOLD function will not be activated when the driver of the parking brake may be reduced. (slight rolling may occur
door, engine hood or tailgate is not closed or the seat belt is not on a hill)
fastened.
yy Check the brake pad for wear and check the EPB operation every
yy When driving off on a downhill by depressing the accelerator pedal, 10,000 km.
be careful as the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.
yy A mechanical noise can be heard during the EPB operation. This
is normal.
yy Do not depress the accelerator pedal abruptly with the AUTO
HOLD function is activated. Otherwise, the parking brake is re-
leased and the vehicle can accelerate suddenly.
yy If the EPB warning lamp is turned on or there is a fault in the EPB
system, have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. If parking the
vehicle is required in an emergency, pull over the vehicle on a
flat surface and chock the wheels after shifting the gear selector
lever to the P position.
yy If the ignition is turned off during the AUTO HOLD ready state
(indicator ON in white)/AUTO HOLD operation (indicator ON in
green), the EPB will be released automatically.
yy If wheel drive is required when e.g. going through an automatic car
wash, make sure that the AUTO HOLD is deactivated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control switch
Cruise Control Auto cruise ready light READY
When the cruise control ON/OFF switch is pressed, READY

Cruise control
indicator light appears on the instrument cluster. (Cruise control
ON/OFF switch
is now ready to operate)
Auto cruise control indicator light

AUTO
CRUISE
Cruise control With the READY indicator appeared on the instrument cluster, if
adjustment you push the cruise control setting switch up or down, READY
switch indicator turns off and AUTO CRUISE indicator will turn on (Min.
vehicle speed is 40 km/h for operation).
RESUME
switch
Traffic Conditions for Using Cruise Control
Indicator light
Use the cruise control system only when the traffic is not jammed,
READY AUTO driving on motorways or highways where there is no sudden
CRUISE
change in the driving condition due to traffic lights, pedestrian,
etc.
The cruise control is an automatic speed control system that
maintains a desired driving speed without using the accelera- Caution
tor pedal. READY or AUTO CRUISE indicator will come on in
Improper use of the cruise control could be dangerous.
the instrument cluster depending on the operation of the cruise
yy Do not use on winding roads.
control switch.
yy Do not use in heavy traffic.
The vehicle speed must be greater than 40 km/h to engage the yy Do not use on slippery, wet roads.
cruise control. This feature is especially useful for motorway This could result in a loss of control, collision, and/or personal
driving. injuries.
Caution
The cruise control system is a supplementary system, which helps Note
the driver to drive the vehicle at a desired speed without using the The described speed value may vary slightly depending on the road
accelerator pedal under the traffic condition where the vehicle-to- conditions.
vehicle distance meets the legal requirement.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cruise control (Setting the speed)
3. Maintaining the vehicle speed in the specified range, set the
desired speed by pushing the switch up in SET+ or SET- direc-
tion. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. Take your fingers off the cruise control switch.
5. Now the vehicle is cruised with the set speed (the speed set at
the moment when the cruise control starts operating) without
depressing the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control 6. To reset the speed during cruise control operation, slowly
setting switch press the accelerator pedal down until the desired speed is
reached, and repeat the step 3.
7. Refer to the following contents for operation details depending
on vehicle conditions.
Caution
Never use the cruise control system until you get used to it.
1. Press the cruise control ON/OFF switch. (READY indicator Improper use or not fully aware of this function could result in collision
comes on) and/or personal injuries.
2. In order to activate the cruise control system, depress the ac-

celerator pedal until the vehicle speed reaches to the proper
range.
- Cruise control speed range: between 40 km/h and 180
km/h
- For vehicles with manual transmission, the cruise control
will be available only when the gear shift lever position is
in 3rd or higher.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Accelerating with the cruise control system
tion
is not running.
setting switch
control speed.
3. When the vehicle speed exceeds this value, push up or down
the cruise control switch in SET+ or SET- direction, respec-
tively to set the desired speed. Once the desired speed is
reached, release the accelerator pedal slowly.
4. If the cruise control switch is pushed and held up in SET+
direction the vehicle set speed will continue to increase until
While the cruise control system is in operation the switch is released.
1. To increase the set speed during cruise control operation, push 5. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
the cruise control switch up in SET+ direction until reached to
the desired speed without depressing accelerator pedal. Increasing the set speed while the cruise control
Continue pushing the switch up until the desired speed is system is in operation
reached. If you want the fine increase of the control speed during the cruise
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the desired control system operation, follow the steps below.
speed is reached. 1. The speed will increase by approx. 1 km/h each time the
cruise control switch is tapped up in SET+ direction (within
0.5 second).
2. If you want to increase the control speed by 10 km/h while
driving with cruise control running, tap the control switch up
in SET+ direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Decelerating with the cruise control system
tion
is not running.
setting switch
control speed.
3. Push and hold the cruise control switch up in SET- direction.
Release the accelerator pedal slowly when the desired speed
is reached.
4. Take your finger off the cruise control switch.
While the cruise control system is in operation Decreasing the set speed while the cruise control
1. To decrease the control speed during cruise control operation, system is in operation
push the cruise control switch down in SET- direction until If you want the fine decrease of the set speed during the cruise
reached to the desired speed without pressing brake pedal. control system operation, follow the steps below.
Continue pushing the switch down until the desired speed is 1. The speed will decrease by approx. 1.0 km/h each time the
reached. Be informed that the cruise control system will be cruise control switch is tapped down in SET- direction (within
deactivated when the vehicle speed gets lower than approx. 0.5 second).
40 km/h.
2. If you want to decrease the set speed by 10 km/h while driv-
2. Remove your finger from the control switch once the desired ing with cruise control running, tap the control switch down
speed is reached. in SET- direction 10 times.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Resuming the set speed (RESUME) Deactivating the cruise control system
If the auto cruise stopping conditions are met during the activation The cruise control will be deactivated when any of the following
of the auto cruise, the function of the cruise control is deactivated. stopping conditions is met while it is activated. (READY indica-
But the last set speed memorized in the ECU will be resumed tor illuminated)
when the RES button is pressed.
The speed should be 40 km/h and the brake or accelerator pedal
Auto cruise stopping conditions (CANCEL)
should not be depressed. (Deactivation by cruise control OFF
switch will not restore the previous set speed.) yy The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated.
The set speed saved before the cruise control is OFF will be yy Drive the vehicle at less than 40 km/h.
resumed with the AUTO CRUISE indicator light appeared on the
yy Parking brake is applied while driving.
instrument cluster, if the recovery conditions are met.
yy Depress the clutch pedal to change the gear.
Caution yy ON/OFF switch operation (once) during auto cruise activa-
In order to response to a sudden speed change after resuming the tion (ON/OFF switch operation in auto cruise ready mode
set speed, you should always recognize how fast the saved speed deactivates cruise control)
is. If the vehicle speed increases rapidly, step on the brake pedal to
control the speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
According to the vehicle conditions, the cruise
Caution
control will be cancelled when: yy Abnormal changes of the gear selector lever can damage the
1. The brake pedal is depressed or ESP is activated. engine. Do not move the gear shift lever to Neutral while driving at
2. The speed is decelerated below 40 km/h. the set speed. Automatic transmission damage may result.
yy The speed that has been set may not be maintained on uphill or
3. Parking brake is applied while driving. downhill slopes.
4. Clutch pedal is depressed to shift (M/T only). yy The speed may drop to less than the set speed on a steep uphill
5. The speed increases or decreases drastically (GSL only). grade. The accelerator must be used if you want to maintain that
speed.
- when driving at more than 20 km/h above the set speed yy The speed may increase to more than the set speed on a steep
- when driving at less than 20 km/h below the set speed downhill grade. When the speed increases too much, turn off the
- when driving at 140 km/h or more for 4 minutes or longer cruise control.
yy Always keep the safe stopping distance and depress the brake
6. The cruise control switch malfunction occurs pedal when necessary.
7. The brake switch malfunction or disconnection occurs
8. The shift lever is moved to the neutral position.
9. The engine rpm gauge shows the engine running at approx. Using the Cruise Control on Hills
4,400 rpm or higher. How well the cruise control works on hills depends on the speed,
load, and the steepness of the hill.
If the cruise control is cancelled without normal conditions de-
scribed above, or an intermittent malfunction occurs, stop the When going up steep hills, you may have to depress the accel-
engine and remove the key. The system will reset and is back erator pedal to maintain your speed. When going downhill, you
on when restarting the engine. may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to keep your speed
down.
Caution Applying the brake takes you out of the cruise control.
When not using the cruise control, press the cruise control ON/OFF
switch and then the READY indicator light will go off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system I (front/rear obstacle detection system)*
Instrument cluster Indicates distance from Warning buzzer ON/OFF switch Front obstacle warning buzzer
the obstacle on LCD dis- for front obstacle detection sys- OFF switch
play with audible signal tem with LED light OFF
- Supervision type
Front sensor location yy Front obstacle detecting sen- yy Rear obstacle detecting sen- Rear sensor location
sor (4EA) sor (4EA)
yy Operates when moving for- yy Operates when moving back-
ward/backward ward only
yy Operates with the speed be- yy Operates with the speed be-
low 10 km/h low 10 km/h
Left Right Left Center Right

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front/Rear obstacle detection system warning buzzer
If an obstacle is detected, the corresponding segment indicating the distance and the position will blink.
When driving for- Standard cluster

ward (D)
Front sensor operates in drive mode (D) Instrument cluster

When driving
backward (R)
LCD display LCD display

(Front obstacle detected (Front/Rear obstacle detected
segments blink) segments blink)
Front/Rear sensor operate in reverse mode (R)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front obstacle detecting sensor
Distance to obstacle
1 Center Side
2
No buzzer 100cm 60cm
1 Approx. 0.15 second 50cm ~ 100cm 40cm ~ 60cm
2 Continuous 30cm ~ 50cm 30cm ~ 40cm

5
4
3
The warning buzzer sounds (in 2 stages) as shown above de-
pending on the distance from the obstacle while the front sensor
is running.
When no obstacle detected while Front/Rear Rear obstacle detecting sensor

detection system is running, Distance to obstacle
Front/Rear detection range of sensors Center Side
is shown without blinking and warning Approx. 0.3 second 80cm ~ 120cm
3 -
buzzer sound
4 Approx. 0.15 second 50cm ~ 80cm
When an obstacle detected in 40cm at front left side, 5 Continuous 30cm ~ 50cm
Line 1 removed and line 2 blinks with The warning buzzer sounds (in 3 stages) as shown above de-
warning buzzer sound pending on the distance from the obstacle while the front sensor
is running.
When an obstacle detected in 80cm at rear right side, Note

The obstacle detection indicator on LCD display can be shown in
supervision type of cluster.
Line removed and line
3 4 blinks with
warning buzzer sound

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sensor and system malfunction
Standard cluster
Caution
yy The alarm does not sound if the distance between sensor and
obstacle is less than 30 cm. However, if the sensor detects the
obvious obstacle, the alarm stays on.
yy The distance to the obstacle may be different from the actual dis-
tance by approx. ±10cm when the warning buzzer sounds.
yy Do not rely on the parking aid system while gear selector lever is
in “R” position. Drive backward while checking the rear side of
your vehicle.
yy If the buzzer sounds abnormally or sounds for over 3 seconds
when placing the gear selector lever to “R” position, the parking
LCD display aid system is defective. Have the system checked at Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service center.
If malfunction occurs at front/rear sensor, “?” symbol appears on

affected sensor location. If you see this message on LCD display,
have your vehicle checked and serviced at Ssangyong dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CAUTION
You should continue to utilize the mirrors or turning The alarm interval becomes faster as your vehicle ap-
your head. When reversing, adhere to the common pre- proaches the obstacle.
cautions. ►►Certain obstacles that sensors cannot detect
yy The parking aid system is a supplementary system to help yy Thin and narrow objects, such as wires, ropes, or chains
your parking. It is not intended to replace the driver’s at-
yy Cotton, sponge, clothes, snow that absorb ultrasonic
tentiveness.
waves.
yy Do not press or shock the sensors by hitting or using a
yy Obstacles lower than the bumper: Drainage or puddle
high-pressure water gun while washing. The sensors could
be damaged. ►►Sensor Cannot Detect
yy Normally, when you select the “R” position with the ignition yy When the sensing portion is frozen.
“ON”, the alarm sounds “beep” once. yy When the sensing portion is covered by rain, water drops,
yy If the alarm sounds for 3 seconds when you select the snow or mud.
“R” position with the engine running or the ignition “ON”, ►►Weak Sensing Scopes
it means that there is a malfunction in the system. Have
yy When they are partially covered by snow or mud.
the parking aid system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or
yy When the ambient temperature is too high or too low.
►►Not Defective But Improperly Working
yy When driving on rough roads, gravel roads, hills, or grass.
In the parking lot as shown in yy When the bumper height is changed due to a heavy load.
the figure, the upper portion of
yy When receiving other ultrasonic signals (metal sounds or air
the vehicle can be hit before the
braking noises from heavy-duty commercial vehicles).
sensor operation, so check with
the outside rearview mirrors yy When a high-power radio is turned on.
or by turning your head during yy When there is heavy rainfall or water drops.
parking. yy When the sensor is hindered by improperly fitted acces-
sories.
►►When Towing Trailer
yy The sensor detects the trailer and the warning beep may
sound continuously.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system II (rearview camera system)*
The rearview camera system is a supplementary function for
safe driving to display the condition behind the vehicle while the
Rearview monitor
gear selector lever in R position.
Gear selector
lever R
The monitor shows the view behind the vehicle when the gear
selector lever is in R position. Rearview monitor Rearview camera
Precautions for rearview camera system
yy The actual distance may differ from what you see from the
monitor because the rearview camera uses a wide-angle lens
to have a large clear view. Therefore, you should check the
rearview mirrors and the area behind the vehicle before and
while moving backward.
yy The rearview camera does not show the entire area behind The rearview monitor is applied
the vehicle.
depending on the vehicle speci-
yy Keep the camera lens clean using a camera lens cleaner so that
fications.
the lens is free of foreign matter.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Parking assist system III* (around view monitoring system)
The AVM (Around View Monitoring) system is a parking assist
system which facilitates parking by helping the driver see objects
around the vehicle. The system is activated when the interior
switch is set to ON (indicator ON).
This system uses the 4 outside cameras and displays the infor-
mation received from the cameras on the display. The driver can
see the outside of the vehicle in the desired direction by using
the 3D view, if needed.
AVM : Around View Monitoring system
Display monitor Around view activation switch
Activation Conditions
The AVM system is activated when the following conditions are
met.
yy Ignition switch ON or engine running
yy Gear selector lever in P, R, N, or D position
2 yy Around view activation switch ON (AVM is activated regard-
less of switch ON/OFF when gear selector lever is in R
position)
Note
1 3
yy Gear selector lever in R: AVM system is activated
yy Gear selector lever in P: AVM system can be activated but the
previous screen is displayed on the display.
2
1. Front view camera 3. Rear view camera
2. Side view camera

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution AVM Settings
yy The AVM system is a parking assist system. Press [ ] button to go to the setup screen.
yy This system displays the combined images from the 4 cameras.
Therefore, the displayed image may be different from the actual
vehicle position and parking guideline, etc. Always park the ve-
hicle by checking your vehicle's mirrors and glancing over your
shoulder.
yy Foreign materials on the camera lens can cause system error.
Keep the lens surface clean.
About AVM
yy The AVM system is optional.
yy This system uses the 4 outside cameras and displays the im-
ages of front, left, right, rear regions of the vehicle.
yy PGS Guideline-Linked: Check the ON/OFF setting for the

PGS guideline-linked function.
yy PAS Proximity Warning Display: Check the ON/OFF setting for
the PAS proximity warning display.
yy 3D View: Check the settings for the 3D view screen (screen
is displayed in 3D mode when 3D View is set)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front AVM Operation
Turn the ignition ON and press the [ ] with the gear selector yy PAS information display: Information of objects detected in
lever in the N or D position to operate the front AVM system. the area in front of or behind the vehicle.
yy Front view camera screen: Image from front view camera is
displayed.
displayed.
displayed.
yy Full front view image/3D View:
- In 2D mode, full front view image is displayed.
Note
yy When the front AVM is activated, driving at a speed of about 20
km/h or more deactivates the AVM. If this is the case, the AVM
system remains deactivated even if the vehicle speed goes below
20 km/h.
yy The AVM system uses wide angle cameras to provide the driver
a wider field of view. Because of the wide angle lens, there is a
slight difference between the distance displayed on the screen and
actual distance. Always check your vehicle's mirrors and glance
over your shoulder for safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear AVM Operation
Turn the ignition ON and move the gear selector lever to the R yy PAS information display: Information of objects detected in
position to operate the rear AVM system. the area behind the vehicle.
yy Rear view camera screen: Image from rear view camera is
displayed.
displayed.
displayed.
yy Full rear view image/3D View:
- In 2D mode, full rear view image is displayed.
Note
The AVM system uses wide angle cameras to provide the driver a
wider field of view. Because of the wide angle lens, there is a slight
difference between the distance displayed on the screen and actual
distance. Always check your vehicle's mirrors and glance over your
shoulder for safety.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and LCA (Lane Change Assist) systems*
The BSD (Blind Spot Detection) system detects an object ap-
Outside rearview mirror BSD system activation proaching from the rear left/right blind spot where the driver
warning lamp switch cannot view though the room mirror or outside rearview mirror
by using the sensors mounted in the bumper corners on both
sides. The system warns the driver using a visible and audible
warnings.
Features
yy BSD: Blind Spot Detection
yy LCA: Lane Change Assist
yy RCTA: Rear Cross Traffic Alert
Caution
yy The foreign materials on both sides of the rear bumper can inter-
BSD sensor fere with the operation of the sensor integrated into the bumper.
Keep the rear bumper clean.
yy The detection performance of the system may deteriorate when
the rear bumper is replaced, repaired, or painted.
yy The system may not detect at all depending on the surrounding en-
vironment. Always check the road situations with your own eyes.
yy Strong electromagnetic waves around the vehicle may cause this
system malfunction.
Warning
The BSD system is only an assist system for safe driving. Parking
and other dangerous maneuvers are always the driver’s responsi-
bility. Make sure to check the road situations with your own eyes
while driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BSD System and LCA System
BSD system ►►Activation conditions (BSD warning system)
This system detects another vehicle which is close to the rear The BSD system activates the warning system when the follow-
left/right blind spot of the vehicle and turns on the warning lamp ing conditions are met:
on the outside rearview mirror to warn the driver. yy IGN ON
LCA system yy Vehicle speed: 30 to 200 km/h
This system detects a vehicle which is approaching at high speed yy A vehicle in blind spot
and warns the driver using a visible (flashing warning lamp on
►►Activation conditions (LCA warning system)
the outside rearview mirror) and audible warnings.
The LCA system activates the warning system when the follow-
BSD system ing conditions are met:
yy IGN ON
yy Vehicle speed: 30 to 200 km/h
yy A vehicle approaching at a high speed in the detection area
yy Expected time to collision: less than 2.8 sec.
►►BSD audible alert settings

Blind spot
You can set the BSD system audible alert under the Instrument
cluster User settings menu > Sound > BSD system audible
alert.
LCA system
Note
yy When the BSD switch is turned on or off, the message "BSD sys-
tem ON/OFF" is displayed on the LCD screen of the instrument
cluster for about 2 sec.
yy If you do not use the BSD system, make sure that the BSD switch
is turned OFF.
Approaching at yy If a trailer is connected to the vehicle, the switch should be turned
high speed OFF to avoid malfunctions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If there is a fault in the BSD system, this message is displayed If the warning conditions for the BSD system are not fulfilled
on the LCD screen. with BSD system is activated, this message is displayed on the
LCD screen.
Caution
If the message stays on, have the system checked and serviced at a Caution
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. In the following conditions, the sensor may not detect objects in
the rear left/right areas and the message shown above may be
displayed:
yy Foreign materials on outer or inner surface of rear bumper
yy An equipment, such as trailer, connected to rear side of vehicle
yy Wider road
yy Raining or snowing heavily

GETtheMANUALS.org
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) System
RCTA system ►►Activation conditions (RCTA)
When reversing the vehicle, the RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) The RCTA system activates the warning system when the fol-
system detects a vehicle approaching from the rear left/right blind lowing conditions are met:
spot and warns the driver using a visible (displaying warning yy RCTA system alert ON (Instrument cluster User settings menu
message on LCD screen of instrument cluster, flashing warning > Sound > RCTA system alert)
lamp on the outside rearview mirror) and audible warnings.
yy Gear selector lever in R position
yy Vehicle is in warning area with approaching speed of less
than 24 km/h
yy Expected time to collision: less than 3 sec.
Note
You can set the RCTA system audible alert under the Instrument
cluster User settings menu > Sound > BSD system audible alert.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If a vehicle approaching your vehicle is detected with the RCTA
system ON, a approaching warning message for the corre-
sponding side will be displayed on the LCD screen along with
the audible warning.
Caution
The RCTA system may not be activated when:
yy the target vehicle is out of the detection area for RCTA system
yy the target vehicle is right behind the driving vehicle
yy the target vehicle is moving in the same direction of the driving
vehicle
yy the speed of target vehicle is higher than that of the driving ve-
hicle
yy the speed of target vehicle suddenly decreases
yy there is an obstacle which covers the area around the detection
sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►The driver must pay attention to the following points
as these situations can lead to system malfunction:
yy Foreign materials on the rear bumper (rain drops, snow, dust, yy Steep uphill/downhill or height difference of the lane sur-
stickers) faces
yy An equipment, such as trailer, connected to rear side of yy Target vehicle running very closely
vehicle
yy Target vehicle running very closely and passing
yy Damaged rear bumper and twisted vehicle body
yy Area around the sensor is covered by a vehicle, wall, or park-
yy Sharp turns (bends), at tollbooths ing lot pillar
yy Tire pressure imbalance and overloading yy When reversing, target vehicle is moving in the same direc-
yy Bad weather (snowing or raining heavily) tion
yy Objects fixed on the roads (median barriers, guardrails, noise yy Small moving object, such as a person, shopping cart, or
barrier walls) or road under construction pram
yy A heavy duty vehicle or small 2-wheel drive vehicle (bicycle) yy Vehicle with very low ground clearance
driving closely yy Narrow roads overgrown with grass and trees
yy Accelerating at the same time with target vehicle yy Very wide road
yy Driving speed of target vehicle is very high (passing) yy Wet road surface
yy Driving vehicle changes lane yy Sensor detection area changed due to rear-end collision

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Braking)*
The Autonomous Emergency Braking System (AEBS) helps the Collision alert - Level 1 → Collision alert - Level 2 →
driver avoid a possible collision and reduces the risk of collision. Collision alert - Level 3 → Vehicle stop
The system detects the distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead or a pedestrian by using the camera and warns
the driver by means of visual and acoustic warnings on the basis
of the collision risk level. The system enhances the brake control
to protect the occupants.
Note
The factory default settings for AEBS is ‘ON’ and for FCW sensitivity
is ‘Normal’.
Warning
The AEBS is an aid to enhance the driver convenience. The safe
maneuvering and controls are always the driver’s responsibility. Read
and understand the safety information regarding when the system
cannot detect other vehicles or pedestrians.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS SYSTEM INDICATOR AND WARN- Caution
ING LAMP yy For safety reasons, activate or deactivate the AEBS only when
the vehicle is stationary.
Supervision cluster
yy If you switch off the ESP when the AEBS is activated, the AEBS
2 1 will also be turned off and the AEBS menu will be unavailable on
the instrument cluster.
3
2 AEBS Warning Light
Deactivating the system will cause the AEBS
warning light on the instrument cluster to be
illuminated. The ON/OFF status of the system
can be viewed in the User Setting menu on the
Standard cluster
instrument cluster. If the indicator is illuminated
continuously with the AEBS enabled, have the
vehicle checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or
3
3 AEBS is activated
2 1
1 AEBS OFF Indicator

The lamp comes on when the AEBS is deacti-
vated and when the ESP system is deactivated
by pressing the ESP OFF switch. 3 AEBS is faulty
The ON/OFF status of the system can be viewed in the Cluster

Setting menu on the instrument cluster. If the AEBS OFF Indi-
cator is illuminated continuously, have the vehicle checked at a

GETtheMANUALS.org
To Set System To Set FCW Sensitivity
Selecting Cluster Setting, Driving Assist, and AEBS in order To set the sensitivity of FCW system to Slow, Medium, or Fast,
from the instrument cluster menu with the ignition ON turns on select Cluster Setting, Driving Assist, FCW level in order from
the AEBS and the system is set to ready status. the instrument cluster menu with the ignition ON and choose
To deactivate the system, deselect AEBS from the instrument between 3 different options.
cluster menu. Deactivating the system will cause the AEBS OFF
Note
indicator on the instrument cluster to be illuminated.
yy The factory default setting for FCW level is Medium.
yy When the FCW is set to Fast, the system will give an fast warning.
If you think the warning is given too fast, change the sensitivity of
the system to Medium or Slow.
Caution
If the vehicle ahead brakes unexpectedly, it may seem as if the warn-
ing is given too slow even if the system is set to Fast.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operating Conditions Emergency
Collision alert Collision alert
The AEBS will be active when the system is turned on through braking Vehicle stop
(Level 1) (Level 2)
the menu in the instrument cluster and the following conditions Category (Level 3)
are met: Rear-end collision risk level
yy Detects a pedestrian: at a vehicle speed between 8 km/h

and 60 km/h LCD
display on
yy Forward collision warning: at a vehicle speed between 8 km/h
instru-
and 180 km/h. ment
cluster
A series of
Continuous Continuous
AEBS Warnings and Controls Buzzer 7 beeps for
tone tone
-
1 second
The AEBS warns the driver by means of visual and acoustic
warnings on the basis of the collision risk level when the vehicle Full brake Braking capac-
ahead brakes unexpectedly, your vehicle is too close to the ve- Vehicle control dur- ity reserved for
- -
control ing pre-crash 2 seconds after
hicle ahead, or there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian. The braking vehicle stop
system enhances the brake control to protect the occupants.
Warning
yy It is impossible to avoid a collision with the AEBS and the emer-
gency braking (level 3) may not be available when driving at a
speed of 60 km/h or higher.
yy Your vehicle could collide with another vehicle, or person even if
the Emergency braking control (level 3) is activated depending on
the condition of the road when driving on straight or slightly curved
roads at a speed of 60 km/h or less.
yy When driving on straight or slightly curved roads at a speed of 180
km/h or less, only the visual and audible warnings are provided
and the Emergency braking control is not available.
yy If the AEBS detects a pedestrian when driving at a speed of 70
km/h or higher, the Emergency braking control will not be acti-
vated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Operating Conditions
Note
After turning the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System is in a standby
ON, the system operates normally when: state to respond to emergency (and dangerous) situations, and is
yy AEB System is ON an assistive system that enables quickly reactions when the driver
engages the brake pedal.
yy ESP is ON
yy When activated, the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) Sys-
yy Normal recognition of passengers and other vehicles up tem delivers optimal braking power that is required to decrease
ahead by the FCM (Front Camera Module) is confirmed the speed of the vehicle.
yy Vehicle speed is above 8 km/h and below 60 km/h yy When the emergency (and dangerous) situation passes, the AEB
(Autonomous Emergency Braking) System disengages control.
►►Deactivation Conditions yy The primary warning operates for vehicle speeds of up to 180
km/h.
After turning the AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System
ON, the system is automatically deactivated and the AEB System
is turned OFF when: Caution
yy AEB System is turned OFF The AEBS cannot detect the followings:
yy ESP is turned OFF yy Bicycles, two-wheeled vehicles
yy Buildings, overpasses, tunnels, guard rails, tollgate houses,
yy Vehicle speed is below 8 km/h or above 60 km/h
container, etc.
yy There is steering wheel input yy Trees, garden fences, streetlights, traffic lights, median barriers,
yy Transmission gear selector is put into “P” or “R” traffic signs, bus stop schedule signs, etc.
yy Crosswalks, tunnel entry and exit points, markings on the roads,
yy Accelerator pedal is depressed
shadow under overpasses
yy Man-made structures other than vehicles
Caution
AEBS cannot detect a pedestrian who:
yy does not stand up straight
yy is shown less than 70% of the body with the rest of the body
blocked by the surrounding objects on the image captured by the
front camera module
yy is outside the front camera angle of view

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution
yy The AEBS is only an aid which helps the driver in cases of extreme The AEBS may not respond normally or malfunctions may occur
emergency and does not guarantee your safety in any condition. when:
yy The AEBS does not recognize all emergency situations. yy driving on a steep hill or sharp corners
yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System does not yy driving under specific conditions which cause severe vehicle
engage under all circumstances. Refrain from testing the system vibration
against people or objects. This can and will lead to serious injuries yy driving behind a vehicle with tail lamps off
and death. yy the tail lamp illumination of the preceding vehicle is unsymmetri-
yy The AEBS does not automatically brake the vehicle or avoid a cal
potential collision. The safe manoeuvring and controls are always yy a vehicle or a pedestrian recklessly cuts in front of you
the driver’s responsibility.
yy there is an animal in front of your vehicle or there is a vehicle com-
yy Always keep the safe braking distance and reduce the vehicle ing from the opposite lane of travel
speed by depressing the brake pedal, if needed.
yy there is an approaching or reversing vehicle
yy The AEBS detects the distance between your vehicle and the ve-
yy there is a pedestrian who blends well into the surrounding environ-
hicle ahead or a pedestrian, relative speed and driver’s reactions
ments or exhibits unusual behavior
to determine the most suitable operation.
yy there is a vehicle with arbitrary shape
yy The AEBS uses the front camera module to recognize the driving
situation. The system may not work properly in driving conditions yy there is rapid change of illumination, for example at tunnel entry
where the capability of the camera cannot cover. and exit points
yy The AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) System is automati- yy you cannot see the shape of a object because of the shadow
cally turned ON by default when the vehicle is on, and the system under overpasses
can be manually turned OFF from the instrument panel menu yy the visibility is poor, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily
settings. yy fog or mist appears on the windshield
yy Because unsecured passengers can be injured due to emergency yy the front camera module cannot work properly because of the
braking applied by the AEB system, please take the proper precau- reflections on the windshield from inside (objects on top of the
tions and operate your vehicle with care. instrument panel)
yy it is very hard to recognize other vehicles and pedestrians because
Caution of poor visibility
yy Extra care must be taken even if no warning messages are dis-
played or warning signals sound.
yy Take care not to collide with the surrounding environment during
Emergency braking operation, paying attention to road condi-
tions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Warning
yy The AEBS is set to ready status when it is enabled to act rapidly yy The AEBS is an aid to ensure the driver convenience. The safe
under critical control situations. manoeuvring and controls are always the driver’s responsibility.
yy The AEBS is an aid for braking which provides the optimal braking Never drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner relying
force during the Emergency braking operation. on the AEBS. Always keep the safe braking distance and reduce
yy The AEBS will be deactivated when the driver depresses the ac- the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, if needed.
celerator pedal or carries out a fast steering in an emergency. yy Under certain circumstances, unnecessary warnings and braking
yy The AEBS will be disabled after the emergency situation is re- force can be provided. And the sensors of the system does not al-
leased. ways fully recognize complex conditions because of its limitations,
which can result in missing warnings and braking force applied.
yy Your vehicle may collide with the vehicle ahead which stops sud-
denly if the braking force is insufficient during the Emergency
System Malfunction braking operation.
Warning
yy Take care not to endanger the occupants of the vehicle during the
Emergency braking operation.
yy The AEBS may not work when the driver depresses the brake
pedal in a possible crash situations.
yy Even when the AEBS is defective, normal braking is still effective.
yy If the warning message is displayed (stays on for a certain In this case, Emergency braking feature is not available.
period of time), there is a fault in the AEBS. Have the vehicle yy The AEBS is available only when the vehicle is driven forward and
detects vehicles ahead and pedestrians. The system cannot detect
checked at a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
animals or vehicles coming from the opposite lane of travel.
Service Center.
yy The AEBS cannot detect a vehicle which moves or is parked per-
yy When the ESP warning lamp is illuminated, the AEBS warning pendicular to the direction of travel for your vehicle.
message may be displayed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Limitations of Operation yy driving behind a vehicle with tail lamps off at night or the tail
The AEBS is an aid to ensure the driver convenience. The safe lamp illumination of the preceding vehicle is unsymmetrical
manoeuvring and controls are always the driver’s responsibility. yy there is rapid change of illumination when passing the tunnel
The AEBS uses the front camera module to recognize the driving entry and exit points
situation. The system may not work properly in driving conditions yy the vehicle is driven in unstable condition
where the capability of the camera cannot cover.
yy the sensors of the system cannot fully recognize complex
The AEBS may not respond normally or malfunctions may occur conditions because of its limitations
in the following cases.
The AEBS cannot detect vehicles properly when:

yy the camera lens or surface of glass in front of the camera is
dirty or blocked by other objects
yy it is raining or snowing heavily
yy there is electromagnetic interference
yy driving off-road, over dips and bumps, on the hills with gradi-
ent varying from small to significant
yy driving through a construction zone, on railways, on the roads
with metal objects scattered on them
yy driving in an underground parking structure or indoor park-
ing lot
yy there is a thin-shaped object, such as motor cycle or bicycle,
in front of your vehicle
yy the visibility of the camera is too poor because of backlighting,
reflecting light, or darkness, etc.
yy the outline of the vehicle ahead is not within the camera field
of vision
yy the preceding vehicle is a special vehicle, such as a truck with
unique shaped cargo, trailer

GETtheMANUALS.org
Curve driving During a curve driving, the AEBS may rec- Hill driving
During a curve driving, the sensors of the ognize a vehicle in other lane as a preceding During a hill driving, the AEBS may not
system may not fully recognize a vehicle in vehicle and activate unnecessary warnings fully recognize a vehicle, which can result
your lane because of its limitations, which and braking force. Always be careful of mo- in unnecessary or missing warnings and
can result in unnecessary or missing warn- tor traffic and reduce the vehicle speed by braking force.
ings and braking force. depressing the brake pedal, if needed. The recognition of a preceding vehicle
Always be careful of motor traffic and re- If this occurs, depress the accelerator pedal might be delayed and this triggers sudden
duce the vehicle speed by depressing the to prevent the vehicle from braking. Adjust deceleration.
brake pedal, if needed. the speed of the vehicle to the current traf- Always be careful of motor traffic and re-
fic situation. duce the vehicle speed by depressing the
brake pedal, if needed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Caution Caution
yy Release the AEB system using menu
settings on the instrument cluster when
other vehicle or trailer is towed. If the
brake is operated during towing, stability
of the vehicle will be affected.
yy Use caution when the garage of the
car in front is high or the load protrudes
rearward. There is a risk of occurrence
dangerous situation.
Caution
If there is a vehicle stopped in front of the Detecting vehicles

vehicle ahead and the vehicle ahead moves Your attention is always required while driv-
out of your lane, the AEBS may have not ing behind a vehicle carrying cargo longer
enough time to react. than the cargo bed or with high ground
clearance because the AEBS may not work
properly.
Warning
When the vehicle is being transported on
a truck, train or ship, turn the AEB System
OFF. (depending on how tightly the vehicle
Switching lanes is operated during transport, the AEB Sys-
When a vehicle in the lane next to you tem can activate)
enters the same lane, the system may fail
to recognize this vehicle until it enters into
the sensor detection area. Be cautious at
all times since the sensor may not detect a
vehicle cutting in suddenly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System)*
The LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) is an assist sys- Caution
tem that detects lanes up ahead using the FCM (Front Camera
yy Do not attach sticker, accessary, tinting films on the detection area
Module). If an unintentional lane departure occurs without turn of the FCM. This can cause malfunctions and abnormal operation
signal lamp operation, the vehicle warns the driver using a visible of the related systems.
and audible warnings, helping the driver to stay in lane. yy The LDWS recognizes the lanes by using the images from the
* LDWS: Lane Departure Warning System cameras. Keep in mind that the LDWS may be deactivated or
activated when it is not desired if the lanes are not recognized
A B successfully.
yy Pay close attention especially when the LKAS fails to detect the
lane markings.
yy Do not remove any part of the LDWS or apply impact on it.
yy Do not put any object with reflective surface (white paper, mirror,
etc.) on the instrument panel. Reflected lights can cause system
malfunction.
yy You may not hear the audible alert (chime) if the sound from your
audio source is too loud.
A Lane departure without activation of turn signal lamp de- Warning

tected
yy The LDWS assists the driver with audible and visual warnings so
B Warning message and warning buzzer output that the vehicle does not move out of the driving lane unintention-
ally. Do not drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner
relying on the LDWS. Always drive safely paying attention to the
►►Activation conditions road conditions.
The LDWS is activated when the following conditions are met. yy Do not release your hands from the steering wheel while driving.
yy The driver is responsible for safe driving of the vehicle by maneu-
yy LDWS switch operation with LDWS set vering the steering wheel.
yy Vehicle speed: 60 to 175 km/h yy Do not steer the vehicle rapidly while the LDWS is activated.
yy FCM recognizes left/right lanes yy The LDWS only provides visual and audible warnings. Therefore,
you (driver) should steer the vehicle to keep the vehicle in the
yy Driving on a straight road or slow curve lane.
yy Lane departure direction is opposite to direction indicated yy The LDWS may be deactivated, not work at all, or activated when
by turn signal it is not desired depending on the road conditions and surround-
ing environment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS Switch LDWS Indicator
Supervision cluster
Standard cluster
When the LDWS switch is turned ON, the LDWS

indicator will light up on the instrument cluster.
The system is activated by pressing the switch with the Power

ON state. Once the system is activated, the LDWS indicator is yy Indicator ON in white: System READY mode (Vehicle speed
illuminated on the instrument cluster. below specified value or no lane detected)
When the switch is pressed again with the LDWS is in active, the yy Indicator ON in green: LDWS is activated
system will be deactivated and the LDWS indicator will go off. yy Warning lamp ON/flashing in yellow: LDWS is faulty

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving Assist Menu ►►LDWS OFF
►►LDWS ON (READY) Supervision Standard
This message is displayed when the LDWS is turned off.
The lanes are shaded when the LDWS is turned ON but the ►►Only one lane detected
lanes are not detected. Supervision Standard

The lanes are displayed in white when the vehicle is driven at a

speed of 60 km/h or more and both lanes are detected.
If only one lane is detected while the vehicle is driven at a speed

of 60 km/h or more, the detected lane will be displayed in while
and the warning output is provided only for that lane.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►System inoperative
This message is displayed when the LDWS is faulty.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions yy There are other roadway markings on the roads, such as
crosswalk markings, arrows, symbols, along with the lane
The LDWS may not work at all or be activated when it is not markings.
desired in the following conditions: yy The visibility is poor, such as when it is snowing or raining
yy The system cannot recognize the lane markings because of heavily.
rain, snow, dust, standing water or puddles, other obstruction yy it is very hard to recognize other vehicles and pedestrians
on the road. because of poor visibility.
yy The color of the lane markings is not clearly distinct from the yy There is rapid change of illumination, for example at tunnel
road color. entry and exit points
yy The lane markings are not clear or tampered by the traffic, or yy The headlamps are not turned on or the brightness of the
there are 2 or more lane markings on one side. lamps is too low when driving at night or through tunnels.
yy There are other markings similar to the lane markings on yy When you are traveling within or near the outer edges of the
the roads. bus-only lane.
yy The lane markings are covered in shadows of the median yy The vehicle is driven on a steep hill or around sharp cor-
barriers, guardrails, noise barrier walls, roadside trees. ners.
yy There are environmental barriers, such as bollard. yy the vehicle is driven under specific conditions which cause
yy The traffic is heavy due to the construction in the area or traf- severe vibration.
fic control items, such as traffic cones, are used to separate yy Objects with reflective surface (white paper, mirror, etc.) are
traffic flows. on the dashboard.
yy The lane markings are suddenly discontinued at roundabouts yy The windshield glass in front of the camera module is covered
and road intersections. with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
yy The vehicle is passing through a certain section, such as yy The fog or mist appears on the windshield.
highway interchange, where the number of lanes increases
yy The temperature around the front view camera is too high
or decreases.
because of the direct sunlight.
yy The width of the driving lane is too narrow or wide.
yy The vehicle is moving towards a light source.
yy The distance to the vehicle ahead is too short or a wheel of
yy The light from the sun, streetlamps, or headlamps of oncom-
the vehicle ahead is touching the lane marker.
ing vehicles is reflected by the wet road surface.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LDWS Not Activated When:
yy The driver activates the turn signal lamps or hazard warning Caution
lamp.
Do not apply tinting film on the
yy Both lanes are not detected FCM detection area. This can
yy The vehicle is driven too close to either side of the driving cause malfunctions and ab-
NG Tinting film coverage normal operation of the related
lane after changing the lane.
OK systems.
yy Switching lanes with abrupt steering wheel operation.
yy The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) system is activated.
yy Cornering at high speed.
yy The vehicle is driven at a speed of below 55 km/h or above
180 km/h. Warning
yy switching lanes abruptly. yy Never drive the vehicle in a dangerous or reckless manner to test
yy The width of the driving lane is too narrow or wide. the LDWS.
yy Activate the turn signal lamps before trying to make a lane-
yy There are 2 or more lane markings (e.g. construction zone). change.
yy The vehicle is driven around a curve with too small radius.
yy The vehicle is driven on steep hills.
yy Decelerating abruptly.
yy The tinting film on the windshield covers the front view camera
field of view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TSR* (Traffic Signal Recognition)
It is the system which recognizes the speed limit of the traffic Supervision cluster
sign and other major signs.
Sign
90
Standard cluster
Setting
Driver can set the function on the instrument cluster (Cluster
Setting -> Driving Assist) when the vehicle is switched on.
Note
Recognizable Signs
yy Vienna convention sign
yy Standard traffic sign, Electronic sign, Prism sign
Caution
yy TSR does not recognize all signs.
yy It is possible that recognition is not available due to location, color
or dents of sign.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience System I 4
Using smart key*..................................................4-2 Outside rearview mirror control switch..............4-57
0
Additional functions of smart key*........................4-6 Inside rearview mirror........................................4-60
Cautions for using smart key.............................4-10 Heater/air conditioner system............................4-61 1
Immobilizer system............................................ 4-11 Warnings and cautions......................................4-62
2
Theft deterrent system.......................................4-13 Automatic heater/air conditioner*.......................4-64
Tailgate switch....................................................4-15 Operation of heater and A/C control..................4-65 3
Tailgate operation (without power tailgate)........4-16 Manual heater/air conditioner............................4-72
4
Power tailgate operation*...................................4-17 Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C).........................4-77
How to set power tailgate*.................................4-20 Defogging and defrosting...................................4-78 5
Smart tailgate operation*...................................4-21 Multimedia..........................................................4-79
6
Safety release lever ..........................................4-23 Steering wheel...................................................4-82
Door open lever, lock/unlock knob and switch..4-24 Storage compartments......................................4-83 7
Opening and closing windows...........................4-26 Sun visor............................................................4-86
8
Engine hood.......................................................4-29 Front cup holder/rear cup holder and armrest...4-87
Fuel filler door....................................................4-30 Power outlet.......................................................4-88
Sunroof*.............................................................4-32 USB....................................................................4-89
Driver seat easy access*...................................4-37 AC inverter power switch*..................................4-90
Exterior lamp......................................................4-39 AC inverter.........................................................4-91
Headlight leveling switch*..................................4-48 Grip handle with coat hanger.............................4-92
Interior lamp.......................................................4-49 Luggage compartment features.........................4-93
Wiper and washer switch...................................4-54 Roof rack............................................................4-96
Rain sensing wiper*...........................................4-56
GETtheMANUALS.org
Using smart key*
Smart key is a device which is designed to lock/unlock the doors Type A Type B
and start the engine by just carrying it.
Also, the common functions of the remote control key are avail-
able by using the buttons on the smart key.
Short Press of LOCK Button

(Locking Doors) Long Press of LOCK Button (Closing
Windows)
yy All doors and the tailgate are locked and the theft deterrent
system is armed. yy You can close the windows by using the door LOCK button on the
smart key.
yy The outside rearview mirror is folded automatically. (outside
yy When the door LOCK button is pressed and held, the theft deterrent
rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch is not pressed) system is armed and the windows move to the fully closed position
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds as long as the button is pressed.
once as soon as the theft deterrent is armed. yy When the door LOCK button is released the windows stop moving.
The windows continue to move when the button is pressed again.
Note
Refer to "Outside rearview mirror control switch" in Chapter 4 for Note
details about setting the outside rearview mirror AUTO folding/ yy This window close function is activated when the door is equipped with
unfolding control. window safety function and the corresponding vehicle system settings are
set (Instrument cluster User settings menu > Door/Tailgate > Window open/
close by smart key > Tick the checkbox).
Caution yy A vehicle with Low Version Smart key doesn’t offer window close function
yy All doors including the tailgate and engine hood should be closed by smartkey
to arm the theft deterrent system. Locking the doors using the yy Low Version Smart key :
smart key with the tailgate and engine hood open only locks the - Passive Entry by Door Handle Trigger Switch : X
doors and does not arm the theft deterrent system. If you close the - Passive Start by Start switch : O
tailgate or engine hood after locking the doors with a smart key,
the hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds once Caution
signifying that the theft deterrent system is armed.
yy Perform this remote control operation in a place where you can see the
yy Locking the door with door LOCK button on the smart key is not windows of the vehicle for safety reasons.
possible when the ignition switch is in ACC/ON position or the yy If the window closing operation is performed 9 times or more, the function
engine is running. is deactivated for safe operation of the vehicle system. The function is
available when the ignition is turned OFF and then ON again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type A Type B Short Press of UNLOCK Button
to [Figure 1].
[Figure 2].
Short Press of UNLOCK Button yy Pressing the door UNLOCK button twice in a row unlocks the
(Safety UNLOCK Disabled) driver door first and then other doors, and disarms the theft
deterrent system.
yy The doors including the tailgate are unlocked and the theft yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds
deterrent system is disarmed. twice signifying that the theft deterrent is disarmed.
rearview mirror folding/unfolding switch not pressed). Driver door unlocked All doors unlocked
yy The hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds [Figure 1] [Figure 2]
Note
unfolding control.



GETtheMANUALS.org
Long Press of UNLOCK Button Type A Type B
(Opening Windows)
yy You can open the windows by using the door UNLOCK button
on the smart key.
yy When the door UNLOCK button is pressed and held, the theft
deterrent system is disarmed and the windows move to the
fully open position as long as the button is pressed.
Tailgate Button (Type A)
yy When the door UNLOCK button is released the windows stop
moving. The windows continue to move when the button is yy For vehicles with power tailgate.
pressed again. yy Pressing the switch briefly deactivates the power tailgate
operation.
Note
yy Pressing and holding the switch activates the power tailgate
yy This window open function is activated when the door is equipped
AUTO open/close operation.
settings are set (Instrument cluster User settings menu > Door/Tail- yy The tailgate can be opened when you enter the area within a
gate > Window open/close by smart key > Tick the checkbox). 1-meter radius from the center of the tailgate while carrying
yy A vehicle with Low Version Smart key doesn’t offer window open the smart key.
function by smartkey
yy Low Version Smart key : Note
- Passive Entry by Door Handle Trigger Switch : X Refer to "Tailgate operation" for details about using the tailgate
- Passive Start by Start switch : O button.
Caution Panic Button (Type B)

yy Perform this remote control operation in a place where you can
see the windows of the vehicle for safety reasons. yy For vehicles without power tailgate.
yy If the window opening/closing operation is performed 9 times or yy Pressing and holding the button makes the hazard warning
more, the function is deactivated for safe operation of the vehicle lamps flash and buzzer sound for 30 sec.
system. The function is available when the ignition is turned OFF
and then ON again. yy To deactivate the theft deterrent alarm, press and hold the
panic button again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Type A Type B Caution
Locking door Locking door
yy To prevent the smart key from being
Unlocking door Unlocking door damaged, avoid places with a high
temperature and high humidity.
yy Always check that locked status of the
Power tailgate Panic doors and tailgate after locking the
doors with the smart key. If the doors
are not locked, the vehicle itself or your
personal belongings in the vehicle can
be stolen.
Long press
yy If a key is lost, you cannot open the
Button name Short press Front doors with All doors with doors of the vehicle or start the engine.
safety window safety window If you don't have a spare key, take the
vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized
Front door Service Center by towing it and have
All door windows
Locking door Locking door windows close the vehicle serviced. Also, take the ap-
close control
control propriate action to prevent your car and
Unlocking door (When belongings from being stolen.
Front door
safety UNLOCK is All door windows yy Always check if the ignition switch is
Unlocking door windows open
enabled, only driver open control in OFF position and you are carrying a
control
door is unlocked) registered smart key after exiting your
vehicle.
Type A Tailgate Deactivation Power tailgate operation (open/close)
yy Carry only one smart key.
Type B Panic - Panic (ON/OFF) yy If the smart key which was last used
is inside the vehicle and the vehicle is
Note door is locked properly but you can-
yy The safety function for power window may be applied to only 2 front doors or all 4 doors not use the key inside the vehicle until
depending on the model. the next start up. This is a safeguard
yy The power window with safety function offers AUTO UP/DOWN control. against theft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Additional functions of smart key*
Smart Door AUTO Lock (AUTO Close)
Note
yy The smart door AUTO lock function can be enabled/disabled under
"User settings menu → Functions for driver comfort".
yy Refer to "Outside rearview mirror control switch" in Chapter 4 for
unfolding control.
yy A vehicle with Low Version Smart key doesn’t offer Smart Door
Auto Lock function.
yy Low Version Smart key :
- Passive Entry by Door Handle Trigger Switch : X
- Passive Start by Start switch : O
Caution
yy The detection of smart key can vary depending on the walking
speed and surrounding environment.
If you move a certain distance away from the vehicle while carry-
ing a smart key with all doors including tailgate closed, all doors yy When using the smart door AUTO lock function, always check
the locked state of the doors and tailgate after seeing the flash of
including tailgate will be locked and the theft deterrent system hazard warning lamp (twice) and hearing a buzzer sound (once).
will be armed.
yy If there is any smart key left inside the vehicle, the smart door
If you stay in the key detection area for 1 min. or more under AUTO lock function will not be activated.
the same conditions, the AUTO lock function is activated for yy When the smart key battery is fully depleted , the smart door AUTO
theft protection. lock function will be disabled automatically. Therefore, you should
reset the vehicle setting in the instrument cluster after replacing
The hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds once
the smart key battery.
as soon as the theft deterrent is armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Approach (AUTO) Lamp
2) Goodbye Mode
yy If the driver door is opened after turning the ignition switch
from ON to OFF, the approach lamp will be turned on.
3) Approach Lamp OFF (Welcome & Goodbye

Mode)
yy The approach lamp is turned off when the approach lamp
stays on for more than 30 sec., theft deterrent is armed, smart
door AUTO lock signal is received, and IGN is turned ON.
Outside handle lamp Puddle lamp
Note
The welcome mode can be activated 30 sec. after the theft deterrent
system is armed.
Caution
AUTO approach function is activated up to twice for 10 minutes.
1) Welcome Mode
yy When approaching the door handle of the vehicle while carry-
ing a smart key with the theft deterrent armed, the approach
lamp is turned ON (AUTO approach function).
Note
yy A vehicle with Low-Version Smart key doesn’t offer Welcome mode
when approaching door.
yy Low Version Smart key :
- Passive Entry by Door Handle Trigger Switch : X
- Passive Start by Start switch : O

GETtheMANUALS.org
2. Press on the door LOCK/UNLOCK Door Outside Handle
button on the front/rear door outside
handle. Switch Unlock (Safe-
3. The hazard warning lamp flashes ty UNLOCK disabled)
1. Stay in a vehicle outside antenna area
ing that all doors including the tailgate
(within approx. 1.5 m) while carrying
are locked. (Theft deterrent system
a smart key.
is armed.)
2. Press on the door LOCK/UNLOCK
Note button on the front/rear door outside
Pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK button does handle.
not lock the doors in the following cases: 3. The hazard warning lamp flashes
yy When trying to lock the door with the once and buzzer sounds twice signify-
smart key in the cabin ing that all doors including the tailgate
yy Ignition switch in ACC/ON or engine are unlocked. Pull the lever to open
running the door.
yy Any door is open
Caution
Caution If the doors are unlocked by using this
Door LOCK/UNLOCK function, anyone within the smart key
button yy Always check if the ignition switch is
in OFF position and you are carrying a actuation area can open the doors. Be
registered smart key after exiting your aware of the theft.
vehicle.
Door Outside Handle yy Carry only one smart key.
yy If the smart key which was last used
Switch Lock* is inside the vehicle and the vehicle is
1. Stay in a vehicle outside antenna area door is locked properly but you can-
(within approx. 1.5 m) while carrying a not use the key inside the vehicle until
smart key with all doors including the the next start up. This is a safeguard
tailgate are closed. against theft.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door Outside Handle
Switch Unlock (Safety UN- Theft deterrent armed
LOCK Enabled)
Press on the driver door outside handle switch with
system settings are set [Instrument cluster User
settings menu > Door/Tailgate > Unlock with key in
2 stages (safety UNLOCK) > Tick the checkbox].
1. Press on the driver door outside handle switch
while carrying a smart key. Driver door
Driver door handle switch handle switch
2. Only the driver door is unlocked and the theft pressed pressed after
deterrent system is disarmed. 4 sec.
Pressed once
3. The hazard warning lamp flashes once and
buzzer sounds twice. Door handle
4. Press on the driver door outside handle switch switch on
within 4 sec. doors other
than driver
5. The hazard warning lamp flashes once and door pressed
buzzer sounds twice signifying that all doors
including the tailgate are unlocked.
Driver door handle switch
Note pressed within 4 sec.
Pressing the door handle switch on the doors other
than the driver door unlocks all doors even if the Pressed twice
safety UNLOCK is enabled.
Caution
If the driver door outside handle switch is pressed 4
sec. after the driver door is unlocked, all doors will be
locked and the theft deterrent system will be armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions for using smart key
CAUTIONS
yy If you lock the doors by pressing the door LOCK button yy Additional smart keys on the same key chain may cause
on the door outside handle or smart key from outside key related fault and engine starting failure.
the vehicle with another smart key inside the cabin, the
yy Therefore, the smart keys should be stored separately,
smart key functions available just by carrying it including
and no smart keys should be in the cabin when the vehicle
the remote control function will be disabled temporarily
doors are locked by LOCK button on the door outside
(buzzer sounds). To restore the functions, disarm the
handle.
theft deterrent system by pressing the button on the door
outside handle or smart key. yy If a smart key is in the cabin, you can start the engine
by pressing the ignition switch with the brake pedal de-
yy If the engine is not started with a smart key inside the
pressed. Do not leave other persons who don't know about
cabin or being carried, start the engine by putting the
the system, especially children, with a smart key inside the
smart key against the ignition switch and pushing to oper-
parked vehicles. The engine may be started accidently or
ate the switch.
the vehicle can be controlled incorrectly. This could result
yy The smart key may not function if the vehicle is in an area in a serious accident.
which has strong electric waves or noise, the vehicle is
yy When you leave the vehicle even for a very short time,
equipped with a third party two-way radio/transmit-receive
always turn the ignition off, carry the smart key in your
device, or a smart key for nearby vehicle is used.
pocket, and do not leave the spare key inside the vehicle.
yy If a smart key is located near the accelerator/brake pedal, Otherwise, the vehicle including valuables can be stolen
on the vehicle floor or seat cushion equipped with heated or malfunctions may occur.
wire, the key may not be detected. If this is the case, carry
yy Make sure that water or liquid does not enter the smart
the smart key in your pocket or put the key in a different
key. Failure to do so can lead to smart key failure and this
location in the cabin.
failure will not be covered by warranty.
yy If a key is lost, you cannot start the engine. Contact the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Immobilizer system
The Immobilizer System provides an additional theft deterrent to the vehicle in which it is installed and prevents it from being started
by unauthorized persons. The transponder integrated in the key and the engine control unit have the same code. When the ignition
key with the integrated transponder is turned to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the crypto code of the key and,
if correct, allows your vehicle to start the engine.
Immobilizer Indicator
Standard cluster If this indicator blinks, it may indicate that
there is something wrong in the immobi-
lizer system. Have the system checked by a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center.
Note
Supervision cluster
The time needed for communication between the immobilizer key
and ECU can vary. If it is very short, the immobilizer indicator does
not come on.
Caution
yy In addition, any remote engine starter cannot be installed to the
Immobilizer Key vehicle equipped with the immobilizer system. So never install any
remote engine starter.
When the ignition key with the integrated transponder is turned yy The immobilizer system should be inspected, replaced, serviced,
to the ON position, the ECU (Engine Control Unit) checks the or coded by only qualified service personnel in a Ssangyong
crypto code of the key and, if correct, allows your vehicle to start Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
the engine. yy When an old code should be replaced or another key is added,
please observe the process personally.
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the reason (ex, key chain) other
Caution
than key itself, remove the key from the ignition switch and wait for
yy Avoid impact to the transponder inside of the key. The transponder around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
could be damaged.
yy With a damaged transponder, the engine cannot be started.
Warning
yy Do not install any metal object near the ignition switch and on the
remote control key. Otherwise, they may disturb the signal be- In any case, the immobilizer system cannot be removed from the
tween ignition switch and remote control key and result in engine vehicle. Do not attempt to alter this system or add other device
starting problem. to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle
inoperable.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine Does Not Start Due To When the Transponder is Damaged
Communication Error When the transponder is damaged, you must replace it with a
new one and register a new code on the engine control unit at
If there is a communication error in immobilizer system, you a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
cannot start engine. In this case, the immobilizer indicator in Otherwise, the engine cannot be started.
meter cluster blinks.
In the following cases, you may be unable to start the vehicle
with the immobilizer. When You Lost The Key
yy When two or more immobilizer keys come into contact with When you lost the key, the encrypted code should be removed
(each) other(s). from the Engine Control Unit to avoid any vehicle theft. Please
yy When the key is close to any device sending or receiving contact a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
electromagnetic fields or waves. Center.
yy When the key is close to any electronic or electric devices
such as lighting equipment, security keys or security cards.
yy When the key is close to a magnetic or metal object or a
battery.
yy When you start the engine before completing the pre-glow
process.
Caution
yy If you fail to start the engine due to the communication error or
early start before completion of pre-glow, clear the reason and wait
for around 10 seconds. And, try to start the engine again.
yy If the indicator remains blinking, have the immobilizer system
vice Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Theft deterrent system
The theft deterrent system is activated when locking the doors using the remote control key or Smart key. When somebody tries to
open the door, tailgate or engine hood with any other way other than using remote control key or Smart key, the hazard flashers blink
and the siren sounds.
ARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM ALARM

yy When locking the vehicle with remote control key or Smart If somebody tries to open the door, the tailgate or the engine
key (including lock button on door handle), the anti-theft mode hood without using the remote control key or Smart key, the
will be activated. alarm will be activated.
- Remote control key: When the theft deterrent system is yy When one of the doors or the tailgate is opened with the igni-
armed, the hazard flashers blink twice. However, if you press tion key while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will
this button once again in 4 seconds, the hazard flashers be activated.
blink twice and the buzzer sound once. yy The engine hood or the tailgate is opened from the outside
- Smart key: When the theft deterrent system is armed, the while the deterrent system is armed, the alarm will be acti-
hazard flashers blink twice and the buzzer sound once. vated.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking the yy When the alarm is activated, the buzzer sounds and the haz-
doors with remote control key or Smart key in theft deterrent ard flashers will blink for 30 seconds.
mode, all doors will be automatically locked again (back to yy The alarm stops when (while keeping theft deterrent mode):
- Remote control key: pressing “Lock”, “Unlock”, “Panic” but-
yy If you lock the doors using key hole in door, doors will be ton on the remote control key, or turning the ignition switch
locked but the theft deterrent mode will not be armed. to “ON” position
Caution - Smart key: pressing “Lock” or “Unlock” button on the Smart
key, pressing the “Lock/Unlock” button on the outside door
Smart key: To arm the theft deterrent system, the ignition key should
be in {OFF} or {ACC} position and all doors including the tailgate
handle, or turning the ignition switch to “ON” mode by press-
and the engine hood should be closed completely. If the ignition ing it.
switch is in {ACC} position, the switch will be automatically changed
to {OFF} position when arming the theft deterrent mode. When the
ignition switch is in {ON} position, the theft deterrent mode cannot
be activated.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM
The alarm does not activate when:
yy Opening the tailgate with “Tailgate Open” button on the Smart
key
yy Opening the tailgate by pressing the “Open” switch behind
the tailgate door handle
All doors except tailgate are still in the theft deterrent mode,
and the tailgate returns to the theft deterrent mode again when
closing it.
DISARMING THE THEFT DETERRENT

MODE
yy The theft deterrent mode will be disarmed when unlocking the
doors with remote control key or Smart key (including “Lock/
Unlock switch on outside door handle).
- Remote control key: When the theft deterrent system is
disarmed, the hazard flashers blink once.
- Smart key: When the theft deterrent system is disarmed, the
hazard flashers blink once and the buzzer sound twice.
yy If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after unlocking the
doors with remote control key or Smart key in theft deterrent
mode, all doors will be automatically locked again (back to

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate switch
Tailgate outside switch Tailgate interior switch
1
2
Tailgate inside switch* Type A Type B
3
4 4
Switch Configuration Depending

on Power Tailgate Installation
Item With power tailgate* Without power tailgate Caution
1 Tailgate interior switch Not available Do not operate the power tailgate manually if at all possible. If it
2 Tailgate outside switch ← needs to be operated manually because of malfunction, do not apply
excessive force to the power tailgate. The power tailgate mechanism
3 Tailgate inside switch Not available can be damaged.
4 Smart key tailgate button Smart key panic button
Warning
5 Smart tailgate open Not available
The power tailgate moves up when it is opened. Always check the in-
side or outside of the vehicle when opening or closing the tailgate for
Note safety. Be careful so that your face or head is not struck by the moving
yy For vehicles with power tailgate, the tailgate can be opened/closed tailgate or hands or feet are not trapped by the closing tailgate.
automatically by simple switch operation.
yy The power tailgate can be operated only when the gear selector
lever is in the P position. If the ignition is turned OFF, then it can
be operated regardless of the gear selector lever position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tailgate operation (without power tailgate)
Tailgate Open Tailgate Close
Caution
If the tailgate is opened and closed with
the theft deterrent system disarmed,
the door LOCK button on the smart key
should be pressed to arm the theft deter-
rent system.
Warning
yy Always check your surroundings be-
fore opening or closing the tailgate for
safety.
yy Be careful not to let any part of your
body such as your hand get caught by
accident when closing the tailgate.
yy Close the tailgate as carefully as pos-
sible to avoid injury because the tail-
1. Stay in a tailgate antenna area (within 1. Pull the tailgate down by grabbing the gate can be closed abruptly by its own
approx. 1 m) while carrying a smart inner handle. weight or by outside factors.
key. 2. Slightly push the lowered tailgate to
2. Press the tailgate open switch on the close it completely.
inner side of the tailgate door handle.
Only the tailgate will be unlocked. Note
3. Open the tailgate by lifting it up. When only the tailgate is opened and
closed with the theft deterrent system
armed, the hazard warning lamp flashes
ing that the theft deterrent system is
re-armed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power tailgate operation*
Power Tailgate Open
Type A

ton on the smart key opens the power
power tailgate operation stops the
tailgate operation. Pressing and hold-
yy Pressing and holding the tailgate in- yy Pressing and holding the tailgate ing the tailgate button again reverses
terior switch with the tailgate closed outside switch with the theft deter- the direction of tailgate movement.
opens the power tailgate after 2 blinks rent armed while carrying a smart
of hazard warning lamp and 2 beep- key opens the power tailgate after 2 Caution
ing sounds. blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 yy The power tailgate can be opened au-
beeping sounds. tomatically with ignition switch ON and
tailgate operation stops the tailgate
Note yy The power tailgate cannot be opened
operation. Pressing and holding the automatically with ignition switch ON
switch again reverses the direction of Performing this function with the theft
and the vehicle speed of 4 km/h or
tailgate movement. deterrent system armed disarms only the
more.
power tailgate.
yy If you carry the key in your pocket, be
careful that the key may be pressed
unintentionally, which causes the power
trunk to be open.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power Tailgate Close
Type A

ton on the smart key closes the power
yy Pressing and release the tailgate yy Pressing and release the tailgate power tailgate operation stops the
interior switch with the tailgate open inside switch with the tailgate open tailgate operation. Pressing and hold-
closes the power tailgate after 2 closes the power tailgate after 2 ing the tailgate button again reverses
blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 blinks of hazard warning lamp and 2 the direction of tailgate movement.
beeping sounds. beeping sounds.
Note
If the power tailgate (Cinching motor)
tailgate operation stops the tailgate is operated 5 times consecutively, the
operation. Pressing and holding the drive motor of the power tailgate (spindle
switch again reverses the direction of part) may be under strain. The power
tailgate movement. tailgate stops operating after 3 warning
buzzer sounds to protect the motor from
overheating. If this is the case, wait for 1
min. or more before operating the tailgate
again.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning Anti-Pinch Protection
yy Closing the tailgate urgently within a yy If the vehicle is driven at 4 km/h or more If a severe impact or constant force is
very short time may be difficult. This is with the tailgate open, warning buzzer applied from outside the vehicle during
not a fault. Try to close the tailgate after sounds 10 times. In this case, stop the car
a while. in a safe location as soon as possible and
the power tailgate operation, the tailgate
close the tailgate securely. Make sure that stops moving or moves up to the fully
yy Remove any obstacles inside or outside
the vehicle around the tailgate path before the tailgate open warning on the instrument open position automatically.
closing the tailgate. cluster is deactivated before driving off. However, this anti-pinch protection
yy The power tailgate can be operated with yy Do not drive the vehicle with the tailgate function may not work in a certain part
ignition switch turned OFF. With extended open and cargo sticking out the back of of the tailgate path where resistance
use, the power tailgate may wear down the vehicle. This may endanger other road
force applied is insufficient to change
your battery. users behind your vehicle or can damage
the vehicle body or components related to
the movement direction or the tailgate
yy Do not apply excessive force to the tailgate is almost closed.
during power tailgate operation. The power the tailgate.
tailgate may be damaged. yy If the tailgate is opened with the vehicle
parked on a hill, cargo may fall out of the Note
yy Do not operate the power tailgate with
heavy objects attached to it. The power vehicle causing serious personal injury. If the anti-pinch protection operation
tailgate may be damaged. yy A child holding a smart key can operate the is repeated, open or close the tailgate
power (smart) tailgate accidently, causing manually to check if the tailgate operates
yy Never modify or attempt to repair any of the
personal injury or damage to the vehicle normally.
power tailgate parts.
including objects around the tailgate.
yy Do not operate the power tailgate if one
wheel of the vehicle is lifted up by a jack yy Be careful not to let any part of your body Warning
for tire rotation or vehicle service, a wheel such as your hand get caught by accident
when closing the tailgate. Do not put objects or part of your body in
of the vehicle is off the ground because the tailgate path intentionally during power
of uneven road surface, or the vehicle is yy Close the tailgate as carefully as possible
tailgate operation to check the anti-pinch
parked on a very hilly terrain. The power to avoid injury because the tailgate can be
protection operation.
tailgate may have a malfunction. closed abruptly by its own weight.
yy Driving with the tailgate open can draw
exhaust gases into the cabin resulting in
carbon monoxide poisoning, let the cargo
fall out of the vehicle, or cause accidents.
Be sure to close the tailgate securely be-
fore driving.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to set power tailgate*
Tailgate outside switch Re-setting Open/ Adjusting Opening
Close Operation Height
1 Perform the following procedure to reset You can adjust the opening height of the
the power tailgate setting when the bat- power tailgate as desired.
tery is fully depleted, the power supply is 1. Open the power tailgate manually to
reconnected, or the power tailgate does the desired position.
not function normally.
1. Park the vehicle on a level ground inside switch ( 2 ) for 3 sec. or more.
and shift the gear selector lever to
the P position.
the adjusting is completed.
4. Press the power tailgate switch to
outside switch ( 1 ) for 3 sec. or more
close the tailgate automatically until
while pressing the power tailgate
it is fully closed.
inside switch ( 2 ).
5. Press the power tailgate switch again
to check if the tailgate is opened to the
the resetting is completed.
set position.
4. Close the tailgate completely by
hand.
Tailgate inside switch 5. Press the power tailgate switch to
check the AUTO open/close opera-
2 tion.
Caution
If the power tailgate does not function
properly even after the resetting proce-
dures, contact a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart tailgate operation*
Smart Tailgate
The smart tailgate is a comfort function Deactivating Smart Tailgate
Caution
which opens the tailgate automatically Pressing any button on a smart key yy The smart tailgate operation may be
when a user carrying a smart key is ap- (shown in the figure below) or moving delayed or the operation distance may
proaching the vehicle. out of the smart key beyond detection change in the following situation be-
area during the smart tailgate operation cause of frequency interference:
Note deactivates the function immediately. - When you are in an area near a facility
yy The smart tailgate function can be which emits strong radio frequencies,
enabled/disabled under "User settings such as police stations, public of-
menu → Door/Tailgate". Door LOCK button fices, broadcasting stations, military
yy When the smart tailgate is enabled, the facilities, transmitting towers, airports,
smart tailgate indicator comes on the Door UNLOCK harbors.
LCD screen of the instrument cluster. button - When you are carrying a smart key
Power tailgate along with a cell phone.
operation button yy The size of the smart key detection area
may change if one wheel of the vehicle
is lifted up by a jack for vehicle service
or the vehicle is parked on a very hilly
terrain.
yy Familiarize yourself with deactivation of
the smart tailgate for emergency.
yy Disable the smart tailgate operation
before washing the vehicle. Otherwise,
the tailgate can be opened accidently
during washing.
yy The tailgate will be opened automati-
cally whenever you are in the smart key
detection area with a smart key.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Smart Tailgate Open
Within approx. 1 m
If you stay in the tailgate antenna area (within a 1-meter radius After a smart key is detected, the hazard warning lamp flashes
from the backside of the vehicle) for 3 sec. or more while carrying twice and the warning buzzer sounds twice signifying that the
a smart key with the theft deterrent system armed, the smart tail- smart tailgate is activated, and then the tailgate is opened.
gate is activated along with the alarm in the following stages:
Note
Press the button on the smart key to deactivate the smart tailgate.
Hazard warning lamp flashes once and buzzer sounds once at
1 sec. intervals for 0.5 sec. (beep-, beep-, beep-)
Hazard warning lamp flashes 3 times and buzzer sounds 3 times
(beep, beep, beep)
Stage 3 - Open warning
Hazard warning lamp flashes twice and buzzer sounds twice
after smart tailgate is ready to be opened (beep, beep)
Note
The smart tailgate is activated 30 sec. after the theft deterrent system
is armed to avoid malfunctions of the smart tailgate system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Safety release lever
Your vehicle is equipped with the emergency tailgate safety release lever located on
the bottom of the tailgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage com-
partment.
You can open the tailgate inside vehicle.
1. Open the cover.
2. To unlock the tailgate, push the emergency safety release lever inside the trim panel
to right side.
3. Push the tailgate to open.
Warning
yy Use the release lever for emergencies only. Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle
is in motion.
yy For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency tailgate safety release
lever in this vehicle and how to open the tailgate if you are accidentally locked in the lug-
gage compartment.
Push
yy Do not allow children to play in cargo area. If they open the tailgate with the opening lever
Release lever abruptly, it may cause a serious personal injury.
yy No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door open lever, lock/unlock knob and switch
Driver’s side Door Lock/Unlock Knob ( 1 )
Lock All doors will be locked/unlocked when moving the
1 knob to the respective lock/unlock direction (only
available at driver’s and front passenger’s door).
Unlock
2 Door Opening Lever ( 2 )
Pull the door opening lever to open the door.
Note
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically unlocked when opening the
driver’s door.
yy The door lock/unlock knob on the rear right or rear left door can only lock or unlock its
respective door.
Child Safety Door Lock
Unlocked Locked
Unlock Lock
Child safety door lock helps prevent from an accidental door open, espe-
cially when children are in the vehicle. When the child-safe lever is in
(LOCK) position, the rear door can be opened only from the outside.
Warning
Children in rear seats can open rear doors. Move the child-safe lever
to (LOCK) position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door LOCK/UNLOCK Switch Warning
yy Always check that all doors including tailgate are securely locked
before driving off. Opening a door during driving, especially by
children, may cause a serious accident.
yy Even though all doors are locked, they will be automatically un-
locked when opening the driver’s door. Opening the driver’s door
may cause a serious accident. Pay particular attention not to open
the door during driving.
yy When getting off, check the rear and side of the car for passing
vehicles or pedestrians. Vehicles or motorcycles coming from
the rear, if unchecked, might stumble on you when you open the
door.
yy Never leave infants and children unattended in the vehicle with the
doors locked. They can be suffocated in especially hot weather.
If the door LOCK/UNLOCK switch (push self-return type) is

pressed with all doors including the tailgate locked, the door
AUTO Door LOCK
state is changed between unlocked and locked every time the All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle is driven at
switch is pressed. a speed of above the specified value with the doors unlocked.
Note Note
yy The vehicle cannot be locked when any of doors is open with any The options for door AUTO lock speed setting can be selected under
method (door lock knob, door lock/unlock switch, remote control “Instrument cluster User settings menu → Door/Tailgate”.
key, Smart key).
yy This switch is not available when any of doors are not fully closed
and the vehicle is in theft deterrent mode.
AUTO Door UNLOCK with Collision
yy The options for door AUTO lock function can be selected under Detection
When driving / When shifting to R, N, D) If the air bag is deployed in an accident occurred during driving
yy The options for door AUTO unlock function can be selected under with the doors locked, all doors will be unlocked automatically.
When IGN OFF / When shifting to P) Warning
The AUTO door UNLOCK may not function properly when the door
or the body is deformed by collision.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Opening and closing windows
Window LOCK Switch
Driver door window switch (AUTO) Pressing the switch changes the door window state as follows:
yy Driver side: Windows of all doors open/close operation avail-
Rear right window switch
(AUTO)
able
yy Passenger side: Passenger door window open/close opera-
Window LOCK switch tion available
Passenger door window yy Rear left/right side: Rear left/right windows open/close opera-
switch (AUTO) tion not available
Rear left door window
switch (AUTO) Caution
Door LOCK/UNLOCK When closing the windows of other doors by operating the window
switch switch on the driver door trim, make sure that the any body part of
the occupants is not caught by the moving window.
Warning
Door LOCK/UNLOCK Switch
When carrying children in the rear seats, press the window LOCK
The door (including fuel filler door) state is changed between switch to prevent the children from operating the window switch.
locked and unlocked each time the switch is pressed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver door/Passenger Door Win- ►►To close the window
dow Switch (AUTO)* yy To close the window to the desired position, gently pull up the
front portion of the switch (not fully pulled up). The window
To lift up/down the windows, the ignition should be turned ON keeps moving as long as the switch is pulled up in this way.
or engine should be running. However, you can still open/close yy Fully pull up the front portion of the switch and then release
the windows during delay time for window operation. it to close the window automatically. (AUTO up)
yy If you want to stop the window from going all the way up dur-
Note
ing AUTO up operation, lightly press the switch again or pull
The window switch can be operated for 30 sec. after the ignition up the switch.
switch is turned from ON to ACC or OFF. If the front door is opened,
the window operation stops immediately.
Note
►►To open the window yy If the window runs into any obstacle during Auto up operation it will
reverse direction and then stop at the preset position.
yy To open the window to the desired position, gently press the yy If you keep pulling up the front portion of the switch, the window
front portion of the switch (not fully pressed). The window will not reverse direction. This is a safety precaution to protect the
keeps moving as long as the switch is pressed in this way. driver from a criminal.
yy Fully push down the front portion of the switch and then re-
lease it to open the window automatically. (AUTO down) Caution
yy If you want to stop the window from going all the way down yy Operating 2 window switches at the same time may blow the fuse
during AUTO down operation, lightly press the switch again or damage the window lifting device.
or pull up the switch. yy If the window switch on the driver door and window switch on an-
other door are operated at the same time in the opposite direction,
the window lifting system may fail.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Seat Window Switch Anti-Trap System for Driver’s Win-
Type A Type B
dow
The anti-trap system enables the driver’s window to automati-
cally reverse when something is caught in the window as it is
closing. When the sensor detects an obstacle, the window will
be lowered immediately.
You can open the window using To move windows up or down,

this switch in the same way as pull up or press the correspond-
the driver/passenger window ing switch for the window.
AUTO switch is operated.
Warning
yy Before operating the power windows, make sure that nothing can
be trapped (such as heads, hands, or fingers) in the window.
yy Make sure that passengers do not stick out their hands or heads
from the vehicle while driving.
Caution
yy The anti-trap safety system is available only for the driver’s window
equipped with the automatic rolling up (Auto-up) function.
yy The anti-trap system does not operate where the space between
top of the glass and window frame is very close.
yy If the window is stuck in very cold weather, anti safety function may
work. In this case, fully close the window by switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine hood
OPENING THE ENGINE HOOD CLOSING THE ENGINE HOOD
1. Observe the following precautions before closing the engine
hood.
Caution
yy Make sure that all filler caps in the engine compartment are closed
securely.
yy Check that no service tools or items, such as gloves, screwdrivers,
are left in the engine compartment.
A
2. Slightly push the lowered engine hood to close it com-

pletely.
Caution
1. Pull the release lever ( ) located on the lower left side of the
steering wheel to unlatch the engine hood. If the closed engine hood is lifted up, open the engine hood again
and close the hood as hard as possible to close it securely.
Warning
B yy Make sure that your clothes or tools do not contact or tangle with
any moving parts in the engine compartment when the hood is
open with engine running.
yy Check that the engine hood is fully latched in position by pulling
at the front edge of the hood before driving.
yy Be cautious about strong wind that may cause a sudden close of
the engine hood, resulting in serious injuries.
yy Do not check the engine compartment in an area where strong
wind blows.
yy Before closing the engine hood, ensure that none of your body
2. Hold the engine hood slightly open to pull the safety latch parts are trapped.
lever ( ) up using your fingers and lift up the engine hood
completely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filler door
Opening Fuel Filler Door
D
E
A
B
D
C
1. Move the gear selector lever to the 4. Pull the fuel filler cover ( C ) toward 6. Hang the fuel filler cap ( D ) on the
P position. yourself to open it. holder ( E ) mounted on the inner side
2. Turn off the engine. 5. Turn the fuel filler cap ( D ) counter- of the cover.
3. Press on the center edge ( B ) of the clockwise to open it. 7. After refueling, turn the cap ( D )
fuel filler cover ( A ) with all doors clockwise until you hear a “click”,
Caution and close the cover ( E ) by pushing
unlocked.
Stop the engine before refueling. it back.
Note
The fuel filler cover can be opened when
all doors are unlocked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy Be careful not to allow the fuel to contact the painted surface of yy Always pay attention when opening the fuel filler cap, as the fuel
the body as it can damage the paintwork. may be pressurized. If you hear a hissing sound with fuel leaks,
yy If the fuel filler door is frozen shut in the winter, do not attempt to wait until no sound is heard.
apply any excessive force on the fuel filler door. Lightly tap on the yy Discharge any static electricity by touching any metal part which
edge of the door to open it. is at a safe distance away from the fuel filler with your bare hands
yy Use only genuine parts when replacing the fuel filler cap. before grabbing a fuel supply gun or touching fuel filler cap.
yy To fill the tank completely, top up until the pump nozzle of the fuel yy Getting in and out of the vehicle during fueling can cause fire due
supply gun stops working. to charged static electricity. Do not get in or out of the vehicle
yy Do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling to avoid fuel spillage and during fueling.
overflowing due to thermal expansion. yy When fueling using a portable tank, make sure that the fueling is
carried out outdoors and the tank is on the ground during fueling.
Fueling with the portable tank placed on the vehicle or fueling
indoors can cause fire due to static electricity.
yy Always stop the engine when refueling. Use only the designated
fuel and low sulfur diesel.
yy Always turn off the engine, do not use a lighter, and never have any
smoking materials lit during fueling for fire protection.
yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel, fuel blended with water or im-
proper fuel additives to the fuel tank, the fuel system and exhaust
gas system may be seriously damaged.
yy Always check the fuel to be used before filling the fuel tank. If a
diesel-engine vehicle is misfueled with gasoline, the fuel system
and other vehicle systems can be seriously damaged.
yy Never use a cellular phone near a gas station. The electromagnetic
field emitted from the cellular phone can cause fire.
yy If a fire occurs during refueling, evacuate the area immediately
and call 911 or local fire station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sunroof* For your safety, never operate the sunroof when the vehicle is moving.
Sunroof Switch
The sun-roof cover opens and closes manually.
OPEN
CLOSE
Caution
yy Even though the sunroof can be operated when the ignition key is in the ON position (the engine is not running), operating the sunroof repeatedly
with the engine turned off will run down the battery. Operate the sunroof while the engine is running.
yy When a desired sunroof operation is completed, release the switch. If you keep pressing the switch, it could cause a malfunction. Especially in
winter, never operate the sunroof if moving areas are iced. Wait until the areas are deiced.
yy When leaving the vehicle unattended, be sure to completely close the sunroof. Otherwise, there is a great risk of vehicle theft. Or, the interior of
the vehicle will be wet when it rains or snows.
yy When the sunroof is slid to its complete open position, the wind buffet phenomenon can increase. If this happens, adjust by opening the sunroof
or only open two thirds of the sunroof by using only the first step of the opening system.
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before operation. Parts of the body can be trapped.
yy Clean up the circumference of sunroof regularly. Otherwise, operating the sunroof may cause a noise due to foreign material and dirt.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution
yy Opening the sunroof or driving with the sunroof open after a car
wash or rain may lead to water entering
yy Close the sunroof while driving in the dusty environment. The dusts
or particles entered can cause operating problems.
yy If a roof rack system is installed on the vehicle roof or any cargo
is secured to the roof rack, do not operate the sunroof. If you are
required to operate the sunroof, carefully check that the roof rack
system does not interfere with the sunroof and it is safe to open
the sunroof.
Warning
yy Make sure that no passenger sticks out head, hand or any part of
his/her body out of the sunroof opening while driving. There is a
risk of personal injury when the vehicle is stopped suddenly.
yy Before operating the sunroof, make sure that no head, hand,
finger, or any object is capable of being trapped. There is a risk of
personal injury or even death.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SUNROOF SLIDING OPERATION SUNROOF TILTING OPERATION
►►Open: 2-Step Opening ►►Tilt Up

yy Push up the switch briefly: 2-step auto sliding open The rear side of the sunroof is tilted up when pulling down the
When pushing up the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is sunroof switch with the sunroof closed.
automatically opened by two third of its travel (first step). When
pushing up and holding the sunroof switch again, the sunroof ►►Tilt Down
is completely opened (second step). The rear side of the sunroof is tilted down when pushing up
yy Push up and hold the switch: manual sliding open the sunroof switch with the sunroof tilted up.
The sunroof is opened as long as pushing up the switch.
►►Close
yy Pull down the switch briefly: auto sliding close
When pulling down the sunroof switch briefly, the sunroof is
automatically closed completely. To stop the sunroof, pull or
push the switch at desired position while moving.
yy Pull down and hold the switch: manual sliding close
The sunroof is closed as long as pulling down the switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Anti-Pinch Function* Sunroof Open Warning Buzzer
To prevent any body parts from being trapped by the sliding When opening the driver’s door after the ignition key is removed
sunroof, an Anti-Pinch Function automatically opens the sunroof with the sunroof open, the buzzer will sound to alert you that the
when an object is trapped. sunroof is opened. The buzzer will automatically turn off when
closing the door. After this, the buzzer will not sound even though
the door is opened again.
Wind Buffeting
When you drive this vehicle with the window or sunroof open at
a certain position, you may feel some pressure upon your ears
or hear some noises similar to those from a helicopter. This hap-
pens because of an influx in air through the window or sunroof
and its resonance effect. If this happens, adjust by opening the
window or sunroof.
Caution
yy This safety function is available for the auto sliding sunroof Battery Discharge or Power Failure while Operat-
close. ing Sunroof
yy The anti-Pinch function is deactivated just before the sunroof
closes.
If the sunroof is stopped midway due to a discharged battery
or power failure, you need to re-calibrate the starting point
yy Sunroof safety function is supplemental and not always operable
depending on circumstances (e.g. any electrical device in the of the sunroof. In addition, the following cases need the re-
vehicle, etc.), therefore the driver should check safety at all times calibration.
before operating the sunroof. yy The sunroof does not completely close or open by operating
the switch once.
Warning yy The sunroof slides back to close. But the operation does not
yy When operating the sunroof, be aware of safety conditions before stop even after a complete close and tilts up the sunroof.
operation. Parts of the body can be trapped. yy The opening gap remarkably decreases for the sliding open
yy Do not stick out any part of your body out of the sunroof even in or tilt up.
stationary.
yy The sunroof does not work.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Recalibrating the Sunroof Starting Point
yy If you pull and hold the Close switch for 5 seconds while the
rear side of the sunroof is tilted up, the sunroof starting point
will be recalibrated with a thumping sound.
yy If the sunroof still does not operate properly after recalibrating
the start point, bring your vehicle into a Ssangyong dealer or
Ssangyong authorized service center for an inspection.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver seat easy access*
Easy Access Operation
This system is designed to provide sufficient space for entering Easy exit: Opening the driver door with IGN OFF and gear selec-
and exiting the driver seat by moving the driver seat rearward. tor lever in the P position moves the driver seat rearward.
The driver seat has a memory function that can store and recall Easy entry: Opening the driver door after disarming the theft
the seat position and outside rearview mirror position settings deterrent system moves the driver seat rearward and closing the
for up to 3 different drivers. This memory function is controlled driver door returns the driver seat to its original position.
by a button, which is mounted on the driver seat.
yy Pressing the button ac-
tivates the easy access
function (Indicator lamp
ON).
yy Pressing the button again
1
deactivates the function
(Indicator lamp OFF).
2
Caution
yy The driver seat always move to its most rearward point of travel
3 4 regardless of the current position.
yy The final seat position will not be always the same when using easy
access function. There will be some differences within the accept-
able range depending on the occupant's weight and vehicle power
supply status. This is completely normal and not a fault.
yy Make sure that the parking brake is applied before adjusting the
seat position or operating easy access function so that the vehicle
1. Driver seat easy access ON/OFF switch cannot move.
2. Driver seat position memory set switch yy Do not operate seat memory switch or other switch while the easy
access function is activated as it can cause malfunctioning of the
3. Driver seat memory position switch easy access function.
4. Driver seat position memory clear switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting Driver Seat and Outside Caution
Rearview Mirror Memory yy If the outside rearview mirror control switch is operated while set-
ting up the driver seat and outside rearview mirror position, the
memory setting will be cancelled.
yy Press the driver seat position memory clear switch ( B ) to stop the
seat and outside rearview mirrors from moving.
yy If you do not press any memory switch within 5 sec. after press-
ing the driver seat position memory SET switch ( A ), the memory
setting will be cancelled.
A
Driver Seat Position Memory Re-

B call
1. Press one of the ( ), ( ), and ( ) switches in which your
profile is stored. When the seat position recall operation is
completed, a chime will sound to alert the driver.
2. The driver seat and outside rearview mirrors move to the
1. Turn on the ignition switch (Do not start the engine for safety) memorized position. If the vehicle is driven during the memory
and move the gear selector lever to the P position (A/T). recall operation, the seat and outside rearview mirrors stop
2. Adjust the driver seat and outside rearview mirrors to the moving immediately.
desired positions. 3. Wait until they stop moving.
3. Press the driver seat memory set switch ( A ). The indicator
on the switch comes on.
4. Press one of the ( ), ( ), and ( ) switches within 5 sec. to
store the driver seat position.
5. When the memorizing process is completed, you will hear a
double chime.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Exterior lamp
Turn signal lamp & Tail lamp (DRL)
Bulb type
Front fog
lamp
Back-up lamp or
Turn signal lamp
rear fog light
License plate lamp
Reflex reflector

GETtheMANUALS.org
Light Switch OFF Light OFF ( 1 )
Turns off the lights.
AUTO AUTO light ( 2 )
Headlamps and tail lamps are automatically turned on/off de-
pending on the intensity of the light analyzed by the automatic
light sensor.
Tail lamp ON ( 3 )
Side-marker lights, tail lamps, license plate lamps, front fog
lamps (with front fog lamp switch ON), and other indicators on
the interior switches are turned on.
Headlamp ON ( 4 )
Smart high beam ON
Headlamps, side marker lights, tail lamps, license plate lamps,
front fog lamps (with front fog lamp switch ON), and other interior
lights are turned on.
OFF Front fog lamp OFF ( 5 )

4 7 Front fog lamps are turned off.
3
6
2
Front fog lamp ON ( 6 )
5
1 With headlamps or tail lamps on, front fog lamps are turned on
when the switch is turned to ( ).
Rear fog lamp ( 7 )

With the headlights turned on, if the switch is turned in posi-
tion, the switch will return in front fog light position and the rear
fog lights will be on. The front and rear fog lights turn on at the
same time.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1 Right turn signal lamp blink ( 1 )
Left turn signal lamp blink ( 2 )

Turning up or down the light switch in the direction of the arrow
3 4
makes the corresponding turn signal lamp flash.
Note
2 When the turn signal lamp is flashing, the corresponding turn signal
indicator on the instrument cluster also flashes.
High beam ON ( 3 )
To turn on the headlamp high beam, push the light switch towards
the instrument cluster with the low beam on.
Passing ( 4 )
Regardless of the position of the light switch, if you pull and hold
the light switch toward your body, the high beam and low beam
are turned on during the hold.
Note
When the high beam is turned on the high beam indicator ( ) on
the instrument cluster is turned on.
Caution
Driving visibility for the drivers on the opposite side road or drivers
of other vehicles may be interrupted by your headlamps. Therefore
always check the surroundings before turning on the headlamps.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Coming-Home Light Control Leaving-Home Light Control
Coming-home light ON Leaving-home light ON
yy If the ignition switch is turned from ON to OFF with the head- If the theft deterrent is disarmed by pressing the door UNLOCK
lamps (low beam) ON, the headlamps (low beam) stay on for switch on the smart key or door handle switch, the headlamps
the set time. (low beam) come on and stay on for the set time.
Coming-home light OFF Leaving-home light OFF

yy The headlamps (low beam) are turned off after the set time yy The headlamps (low beam) are turned off after the set time
with all doors including the tailgate closed. for leaving-home light.
yy If any door or the tailgate is open during this set time, the yy Pressing the door LOCK switch on the smart key with leaving-
headlamps (low beam) will be turned off after 3 min. home light ON turns off the headlamps (low beam). (Theft
yy If any open door or the tailgate is closed during this set time, deterrent system is armed.)
the headlamps (low beam) will be turned off after the set yy Turning on the ignition switch with leaving-home light ON turns
time. off the light immediately.
yy Turning the AUTO light and headlamp (low beam) switch to
Note
the off position turns off the light immediately.
You can set the leaving-home light ON time under User settings →
Note Light. (Disable, 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec.)
You can set the coming-home light ON time under User settings →
Light. (Disable, 10 sec., 20 sec., 30 sec.)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Welcome Light Cornering Lamp
Puddle lamp
Right cornering lamp Left cornering lamp
The welcome lights on the side of the vehicle (puddle lamp and The cornering lamp automatically comes on when the vehicle
door handle lamp) improve the visibility and safety at night. makes a left or right turn to improve the visibility for the corre-
The welcome lights (puddle lamp and door handle lamp) are sponding side during night time driving.
turned on and stay on for 30 sec. if any of the following condi- The cornering lamp automatically comes on if any of the following
tions is fulfilled. conditions is fulfilled with the headlamps ON. At this time, the
yy The door LOCK/UNLOCK button on the smart key is pressed fog lamps do not come on.
with all doors closed. Gear selector
- Condition 1 Condition 2
yy The door LOCK/UNLOCK button on the door outside handle lever
switch is pressed with the theft deterrent armed and all doors Vehicle speed 3 to 10 km/h 10 to 40 km/h
closed. Position D Steering wheel
yy You enter the area within a 1-meter radius from the vehicle 100° or greater 35° or greater
angle
while carrying the smart key.
Position R Left/right cornering lamp AUTO ON

GETtheMANUALS.org
Hazard Warning Flasher Switch
yy To turn on the hazard warning flashers, push the hazard

warning flasher switch.
yy Use the hazard warning flasher to warn other drivers when
you stop or park under emergency conditions.
Warning
Do not leave the flashers on for an extended period of time. Battery
could be discharged.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daytime Running Light* Daytime running light operation
For the vehicle equipped with DRL (Daytime Running Light), the yy With the key in IGN ON position (regardless of engine start),
DRL is turned on automatically when the ignition switch is turned DRL will operate at all times if the fog lights/headlamps
ON (regardless of engine running) to make your vehicle more switches are OFF.
visible to other drivers. yy Compared to the tail lamps, the DRL offers brighter light,
although the DRL and the tail lamps share the same light
bulb.
Daytime Running yy While the DRL is operating, the tail lamps of rear combination
Light (DRL)* lamp and license plate lamp will turn on simultaneously.
The DRL will be turned off when:

1. Front fog lamp ON
2. Headlamp low beam ON or Headlamp ON by AUTO light
3. Parking brake (EPB) applied at the vehicle speed of 3 km/h
or less (AUTO HOLD switch OFF)
4. Left/Right turn signal lamp activated (DRL on the correspond-
ing side)
5. Hazard warning lamp flashing
6. IGN OFF

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTOMATIC LIGHT* AUTOMATIC LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR*
W/FCM W/O FCM

Front
camera
module
This senses the amount of rain to operate the windshield wiper

The auto light and rain sensor automatically (For detailed information of wiper operation, refer
senses the ambient illumina- to wiper and washer switch section).
tion intensity to determine the
timing for turning the head- Caution
lamps and tail lamps on or off Do not shake and impact the sensor. It may not work properly. On
AUTO automatically when the light uneven road, Auto Light may work improperly due to impacts and
switch is set to “AUTO”. vibrations from the ground.
Caution
Note
yy Do not clean the sensor with detergent or wax.
yy In AUTO position (Light switch and Wiper switch), the head lamps
yy On a foggy, snowy, rainy, or cloudy day, be sure to use manual mode. The
turning on or off time of the lamps varies depending on the climate, season,
are turned on when the wipers are started to operate by rain
or circumstances. sensing.
yy Any aftermarket tanning film or spray may cause the lighting system to mal- yy For vehicles with front camera module, pushing the light switch
function. lever toward the instrument panel with the light switch in AUTO
yy Ssangyong recommends you to use this function restrictively only at sunrise position activates the High Beam Assist System (HBAS). (HBAS
or sunset. indicator ( ) on the instrument cluster comes on at this time)
yy Usually turn the head or tail lights on or off manually.
yy Turn on the headlamps when passing through a dark area such as a tunnel.
yy On a gloomy day, do not rely on this automatic function. But turn the head or
tail lights on or off manually.
yy When the switch is turned to the “AUTO” position, room, tail, and head lights
might blink for a very short time. It is a normal phenomenon recognizing the
automatic setting.

GETtheMANUALS.org
HBAS (HIGH BEAM ASSIST SYSTEM)* Note
HBAS automatically switches high beams to low beams when ap- yy Delay Time for High-Beams to turn OFF after Switching to Low-
proaching vehicles travelling in the opposite direction or a preceding Beams
vehicle so that the drivers of these vehicles are not dazzled. - After switching to low-beams, in that case that the high-beams
have been turned ON by the HBA (High Beam Assist) system,
* HBAS: High Beam Assist System the high-beams are automatically switched OFF after a few
seconds.
How To Turn ON HBAS yy When the smart HBA (High Beam Assist) system is activated, the
conditions for switching back to low-beams are as follows:
- HBAS detects that the vehicle ahead does not have its lights
ON
- Headlights of oncoming traffic are detected
- There are streetlamps or other sources of roadside light
AUTO - Tunnel lighting systems are detected
- Vehicle speed is 25 km/h or lower
1. Turn the light switch to 2. Push the light switch lever

AUTO position. toward the front of engine to Caution
activate the HBAS. HBAS may not be activated in the following situations:
yy The lamps of the oncoming or preceding vehicle are damaged.
HBAS Indicator yy The oncoming or preceding vehicle is blocked from your vision.
When the HBAS is activated, the HBAS indicator yy The windshield is contaminated (dust, fogging, sticker, snow, etc.)
on the instrument cluster is illuminated. or damaged.
yy The body of the oncoming or preceding vehicle is partially con-
cealed at road intersections or on sharp-curved roads.
yy Driving through a construction zone with reflective materials and
light sources.
►►Operating Conditions yy There is a light source or reflection resembling that of headlamps
HBAS is activated when all of the following conditions are met. ahead of the car
yy HBAS turned ON
yy Vehicle driving at 35 km/h or higher
yy It is considered to be night because of darkened environment.
yy There is no oncoming traffic or preceding vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Headlight leveling switch*
Headlight leveling guide
Level Level 0 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3
1 or 2 4 to 5/7 passen-
Condi- 4 to 5/7 1 passenger and
passenger(s) gers and heavy
tions passengers heavy goods
(Normal driving) goods
5-pas-
senger
seating
Lowers
7-pas-
senger
seating
Raises
Headlight Leveling Switch*

Caution
With the headlights ON, the level of headlight can be adjusted
by turning the switch when the vehicle heights of front and back yy For safety, perform the headlight leveling before driving your
vehicle.
are different due to the number of passengers and the loading
yy Adjust the level of headlight referring to the guide above, according
conditions of the vehicle.
to the number of passengers and the loading conditions.
4 stages (level 0 ~3) are available.
yy To raise the level of headlight: press the button down (level Warning
0 direction)
Inappropriate cases of leveling
yy To lower the level of headlight: press the button up (level 3 yy Driving with level 3 under level 0 conditions (lower the level): When
direction) an emergency occurs on the road ahead, safe driving may be af-
fected by late recognition of the emergency.
Note yy Driving with level 0 under level 3 conditions (Raise the level): Driv-
The higher the number on the headlight leveling switch, the smaller ing visibility for the vehicle driving ahead or opposite side road may
the headlight aiming angle. be interrupted by your inappropriate leveling.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior lamp
B B
C F C
H
G D G
E E

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front Room Lamp (Overhead Console) Caution
The battery may be depleted if a door is left open for an extended
period of time or you leave the vehicle with the room lamps ON
provided that the door switch is pressed in.
2 1 3 Passenger spot switch
3 The front room lamp of the passenger side comes on when this
5 switch is pressed.
4 4 Sunroof open/close switch
Pushing or pulling this switch opens or closes the sunroof.
Note
Note Refer to Opening and Closing of Sunroof.
If the room lamps are turned on after the ignition switch is turned
off, the lamps will be turned off in approx. 10 minutes to prevent
5 Interior mood lamp brightness control switch
battery discharge. The brightness of the interior mood lamp can be adjusted in 5
steps by using the + and - buttons.
Caution
Do not turn on the room lamps during night time driving or driving in Coupled Operation with Smart Key
low-light conditions. The room lamp can cause accidents by impairing
the driver's field of vision. If the door is unlocked by a smart key with the door coupled
switch pressed in, the front room lamps are turned on and then
stay on for 30 sec. Pressing the LOCK button on the smart key
1 Driver spot switch turns off the lamps immediately.
The front room lamp of the driver side comes on when this switch
is pressed. Note
If a door is open with the door coupled switch pressed in, the front
2 Door coupled switch room lamps stay on regardless of the front room lamp switch opera-
The front room lamp and center room lamp come on when open- tion.
ing a door with this switch pressed in. If the door is closed, the
lamps fade to off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Center Room Lamp Luggage Compart- Sun Visor Lamp
ment Lamp (Mirror)
Sun visor lamp
Card holder
Vanity mirror
Pressing the center room lamp switch The luggage compartment lamp comes Swing the sun visor down and lift up
turns on the center room lamp. Pressing on when the tailgate is open and it goes the cover to reveal the mirror. The sun
the switch again turns off the center room out when the tailgate is closed. visor lamp is turned on when the cover
lamp. The center room lamp comes on is lifted up.
when the door is opened regardless of Caution
the center room lamp switch operation if The battery may be depleted if the tailgate Note
the door coupled switch is pressed in. is not closed completely or the luggage You can increase the sun block coverage
compartment lamp is left on for an ex- by using a pull out extension on the sun
Caution tended period of time. visor.
The battery may be depleted if a door is
left open for an extended period of time Caution
with the door coupled switch pressed in.
Always close the vanity mirror cover after
use. The battery may be depleted or you
could be injured in an accident if the sun
visor cover is left open.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Door Courtesy Lamp Glove Box Lamp Foot Lamp
(Front Seat)
Driver side
The door courtesy lamp is turned on The glove box lamp is turned on when Passenger side
when the door is opened and goes off the glove box lid is opened and goes off
when the door is closed. when the glove box lid is closed.
Caution
Driving with glove box lid open can cause
injury in case of an accident or a sudden
stop. Make sure that the glove box lid is
closed when driving the vehicle.
When the driver or passenger door is

opened, the foot lamp on the correspond-
ing side is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior Mood Lamp*
B B
D
C
A
C C Front door trim mood lamp
Dashboard Lamp Door Handle Lamp

(Center)
D
B
A
Dashboard mood lamp
(Passenger side)
This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp

is turned on.
The mood lamps on the driver and pas-
This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp This lamp is turned on when the tail lamp senger side are illuminated in light blue.
is turned on. is turned on. The brightness of the this lamp can be
This lamp illuminates the storage area The lamp illuminates the front door adjusted in 5 steps by using the interior
on the front side. handle softly. mood lamp control switch.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Wiper and washer switch
Front Wiper Switch
If you move the wiper switch to “MIST” position and
release it, the windshield wipers operate one wiping
MIST cycle. The wipers will operate continuously if the
switch is held in this position.
OFF Wipers are not in operation.
Operates automatically according to the vehicle

AUTO speed and amount of rainfall.
LO Continuous wipe, slow operation
HI Continuous wipe, fast operation
Front windshield wiper speed

control switch
With AUTO position selected, rotate the switch upward for high
speed and rotate the switch downward for low speed.
Note
Front Automatic Wiping Speed Control Switch
The interval of wiping speed can be adjusted by turning the control
knob upward or downward when the windshield wiper switch is in
AUTO position.
Fast: Fast interval
Slow: Slow interval

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front windshield and washer fluid linkage
REAR Wiper Switch Pulling the switch for less than 6 seconds: windshield
wipers operate once with washer fluid sprayed
HI Pulling the switch for longer than 6 seconds; windshield
wipers operate 3 times with washer fluid sprayed
The windshield wipers operate constantly while the
operates in high speed.
switch is pulled.
LO
operates in low speed. Front Auto Washer
Switch
OFF
When you press this switch with the front
Rear windshield wiper wiper switch in “OFF” position, washer fluid
stops operating. will be sprayed and the wiper will automati-
cally operate 4 times. Then, the fluid will be
sprayed again and the wiper will automatically
operate 3 times.
When the switch is fully turned, washer fluid will be sprayed

Front windshield wiper onto the rear window glass and the wiper will also operate.
When the switch is released, it will return to the “OFF”
speed control switch position and turn off the wiper and washer.
With AUTO position selected, rotate the switch
upward for high speed and rotate the switch
downward for low speed.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rain sensing wiper*
Wiper AUTO Position When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, this sensor
detects the amount of rainfall, turns on the wiper, and controls
the intermittent wiper intervals.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT & RAIN SENSOR*

With front camera module Without front camera module

Front
The wiping speed is adjustable Volume switch
camera
by the volume switch with the module
wiper switch in AUTO posi-

tion. It controls the wiping speed by detecting the amount of rain
drops.
AUTO Warning
When you clean the windshield over the sensor with damp clothes,
Caution the wiper may operate suddenly. It could cause serious injury. Make
sure to place the wiper switch and ignition switch to the “OFF” posi-
yy When the wiper switch is in the “AUTO” position, the wiper will operate tion when not in use.
once if the initial engine start is made. This may wear the wiper blades
prematurely (especially in winter). Therefore, other than rainy days, set
the switch to the “OFF” position. In winter, ensure that the wiper blades Note
are not frozen and are not stuck to the windshield. Otherwise, this may yy When the light and wiper switches are in the “AUTO” position,
cause some damage to the wiper motor. headlights come on if the rain sensor detects any rain. The head-
yy If you use only the wipers when the glass is dry, this could scratch lights stay on for 3 minutes after the rain stops.
the glass and wear the wiper blades prematurely. Use the wiper with yy The speed of the wipers becomes a little faster when it is dark
the washer when the glass is dry. enough to turn on the automatic lights.
yy Turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position before any car wash to yy When the ignition key is in the “ON” position, the wiper will auto-
avoid unwanted operation of the wipers. matically operate once if the wiper switch is turned from the “OFF”
yy When it is not raining, place the wiper switch at the “OFF” position. to the “AUTO” position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Outside rearview mirror control switch
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR AUTO TILT
DOWN CONTROL IN REVERSE*
If the gear selector lever is moved to the R position with the out-
1 side rearview mirror selection switch in left or right, the outside
rearview mirror will be tilted down to the set angle.
2
If the outside rearview mirror is tilted down automatically, it
returns to its original position automatically when the position
of mirror selection switch is changed or gear selector lever is
moved from the R to other position.
Note
3 The options for the outside rearview mirror AUTO tilt down control in
reverse (5 degrees, 4 degrees, 3 degrees, 2 degrees) can be selected
under “User settings menu > Functions for driver comfort > Outside
rearview mirror angle in reverse”. The outside rearview mirror angle
for the driver and passenger sides can be set independently from
each other.
1 Outside Rearview Mirror Folding/Unfolding Switch
To fold outside rearview mirror, press the right side of the switch Caution
down ( ). Operating the mirror selection switch intensively can deactivate the
mirror operation.
To unfold outside rearview mirror, press the left side of the switch
down ( ).
2 Mirror Selection Switch
yy “L”: Driver side mirror
yy “R”: Passenger side mirror
3 Aiming Switch
Adjust the selected mirror up, down, left, or right by pressing the
corresponding edges of the switch to get a desired view.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Outside Rearview Mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding
Caution
yy To prevent from the mirror surface being damaged, do not scrape
Mode
the ice when the mirrors are frozen. While outside rearview mirror Folding/Unfolding switch is in neu-
yy If the frozen outside rearview mirrors are not moving, do not try to tral position (not pressed ( )), the outside rearview mirrors
move them with excessive force by hands. Otherwise, the mirrors are automatically folded when doors are locked by lock button
could be damaged. on REKES/Smart key (theft deterrent mode activated), and the
yy The outside rearview mirrors can be folded and unfolded even mirrors are unfolded when doors are unlocked (theft deterrent
after shutting off the engine. mode deactivated). This mode is activated as follows:
yy To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not operate the
- REKES key:
outside rearview mirrors with the ignition OFF.
yy The mirror folding operation is not available when the vehicle speed yy When pressing the Lock/Unlock button on the REKES key
exceeds 30 km/h. However, unfolding operation is available. yy When inserting the ignition key of the REKES key into the key
yy Do not fold or unfold the outside rearview mirrors manually. It may hole to unlock the door
cause a malfunction of the mirror folding system.
- Smart key:
yy The mirror cannot move beyond its operating range but the motor
continues running as long as the switch is pressed. To prevent the yy When pressing the Lock/Unlock button on the smart key
motor being damaged, stop operating the switch when the mirror yy When touching the Lock/Unlock button on the outside handle
is at desired position. of the front door
yy If you directly spray high-pressured water to the electric remote-
controlled outside mirrors, this may cause some malfunctions in yy When inserting the mechanical key of the smart key into the
the mirror system. key hole to unlock the door
Warning
Do not put any tinting film on the door glasses of the front seats.
Otherwise, your visibility will decrease.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting
Note
The outside rearview mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding mode will not yy Activation of Auto Folding/Unfold-
work while the switch is pressed in any position. (left ( ) or ing mode
right ( )) This mode is activated with the
outside rearview mirror Folding/
Caution Unfolding switch in neutral position
The outside rearview mirror Auto Folding/Unfolding mode is not (not pressed( )).
available when the theft deterrent system is not armed. yy Deactivation of Auto Folding/Unfold-
yy The doors are locked with the REKES key or emergency key of ing mode
the SMART key.
This mode is deactivated with the
yy One of the doors including tailgate and engine hood is not closed
outside rearview mirror Folding/Un-
completely.
folding switch pressed in any position
yy The ignition switch is not set to ON position (for vehicles with
SMART key). (right ( ) or left ( )).

GETtheMANUALS.org
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side ways
Inside rearview mirror to obtain the best rear view.
ECM (Anti-glare auto adjustment function)* Manual Type Inside Rearview Mirror
The inside rearview mirror can be adjusted up, down or side Manual Day/Night Adjustment
ways to obtain the best view. You can manually adjust the rearview mirror by pushing or pull-
The reflection rate of the inside rearview mirror can be automati- ing its adjusting lever to avoid blindness at night due to other
cally adjusted by the light intensity from the subsequent vehicle vehicles behind you.
you to prevent the driver from being dazzled.
Caution
Caution When you are not able to see the back of your vehicle at night, adjust
Under the following conditions, automatic anti-glare function may not oper- the rearview mirror by holding the mirror body and pushing or pulling
ate properly. it to a desired angle so that you can secure a clear rear view.
yy When the rear vehicle’s headlamp is not beamed directly to the inside
rearview mirror’s sensor.
yy When the rear window has a dark tinted glass. Warning
yy When the gear selector lever is in the R position, automatic anti-glare For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.
function will be cancelled to obtain the best rearview.
yy For your safety, never adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion.
Warning
yy The electrolyte may come out when the mirror is broken. Do not allow it
to contact your skin or eyes. If you accidentally get it in your eyes, flush
with water and see your doctor.
yy For your safety, adjust the mirror before driving off the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Heater/air conditioner system
Airflow direction
control lever
5
8 8 Vent open/
4 close dial
9 9
2 2
3 3 : Open
1 : Close
10 You can adjust the direction of the airflow

by moving the airflow direction control
lever on the air outlet.
The outlet vents can be opened or closed
7 7
using the vent dial.
6
Caution
Do not attach items such as cup holder
1. Heater and A/C control 6. Rear vent air outlet to the outlet guide fin. The guide fin may
be damaged.
2. Vent center air outlet 7. Rear foot duct (Bottom of front seat)
3. Vent side air outlet 8. Defroster center air outlet
4. Sun sensor 9. Defroster side air outlet
5. Windshield fog detection sensor 10. Interior temperature sensor

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warnings and cautions
Refrigerant Specification & Capacity Warning
yy If you sleep while operating the air conditioner or heater with all
Item Type A Type B the windows closed, you may suffocate to death due to lack of
ventilation. When you operate the air conditioner or heater, ven-
Specification R-1234yf R134a tilate frequently.
Single A/C 520 ± 30g 550 ± 30g yy Continued operation in the recirculation mode may cause the
Capacity interior to become stuffy and windows to fog. Do not use the
Dual A/C 800 ± 30g 850 ± 30g recirculation mode for a long period of time.
yy If exhaust gas comes in, there is danger of carbon monoxide
poisoning. Be sure to switch back to fresh air mode after passing
through an area of smoke or fumes.
yy Never leave a child or a handicapped person alone in the vehicle
with the air conditioner or heater on in hot or cold weather. The
child or handicapped person can be in serious danger by the heat
and lack of oxygen.
yy Refrigerant is flammable which can cause the fire by the gas
leakage or static, so be very careful when handling Refrigerant
(R-1234yf).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution
yy If your vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight, open all windows
to extract heat before turning on the air conditioning (A/C).
yy Operating the air conditioning (A/C) for a long time while the vehicle
is parked may cause the engine to overheat.
yy When driving up a long hill for an extended period of time, turn on
and off the air conditioner every 3 to 5 minutes.
yy To prevent battery discharge, do not run the fan for an extended
period of time when the engine is not running.
yy To maintain the system at its optimum state and to keep the lubri-
cation of the air conditioner compressor and related components,
run the air conditioner at low speed once a week even during the
season than summer.
yy Do not stop the engine when the air conditioner is operating. It may
produce an unpleasant odor trapped in the duct. Turn the A/C off
and wait for a few minutes in the fresh air mode before stopping
the engine.
yy If you start the engine with the air conditioner on, the engine may not
start easily and the engine idling can be unstable causing the vehicle
to vibrate. Be sure to turn off electrical systems such as the fan.
yy When the air conditioner is not used in periods, odors will come out.
Run the air conditioner for 20 ~ 30 minutes with the windows opened
and you could remove the odors.
yy During the winter when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run
the air conditioner once or twice every month for 5 ~ 10 minutes.
yy If the air conditioner is not used regularly, the lubricant in the A/C
compressor will not circulate causing the A/C to malfunction. Be
sure to turn the air conditioner at low speed.
yy When sharply accelerating the vehicle while the air conditioner is
operating, you may hear a “click” sound from the magnetic clutch in
compressor. This is a normal operation to protect the air conditioner
system (by lowering the excessively high refrigerant pressure).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Automatic heater/air conditioner*
1 1
B D 2 3 B
A C C E
14
4 5 6 7 8 9
15
10 11 12 13
16
1. Operation indicator display 4. Driver side temperature control 10. Recirculation/Fresh air mode
A. Driver side set temperature switch switch
B. AQS indicator 5. SYNC switch (to sync with driver 11. Foot mode switch
side set temperature) 12. Vent/Foot mode switch
C. Fan speed indicator
6. Defroster/Foot mode switch 13. Rear A/C switch (only DUAL A/C
D. AUTO defogger indicator
7. Vent mode switch for 7 people)
E. Passenger side set temperature
8. AUTO switch 14. Fan speed dial
2. Defroster switch
9. Passenger side temperature control 15. A/C switch
3. Glass heater switch
switch 16. ON/OFF switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Operation of heater and A/C control
Heater and A/C ON/OFF Driver/Passenger Side Tempera-
1. Pressing ON/OFF switch ( 1 ) turns ON the climate control sys- ture Control Switch
tem. The system is turned on with previous status resumed. Press the driver side temperature control switch ( 1 ) to set the
2. Pressing the ON/OFF switch again ( 1 ) turns off the sys- temperature on the driver side.
tem. yy Operating this switch with the SYNC indicator ( 3 ) ON chang-
es the passenger side temperature simultaneously.
yy The set temperature can be changed in 0.5°C graduations
with this switch.
3 Indicator
1
4
Note 1 2
If you press other control switch without pressing the heater and A/C
ON switch first, the temperature and air distribution mode can be
controlled but the fan remains off. (except for SYNC button)
Independent Temperature Control
1. Press the SYNC switch ( 4 ) or passenger side temperature
control switch ( 2 ).
3. Under this condition the temperature setting for the driver and
front passenger sides are controlled independently.
SYNC With Driver Side Temperature

1. Press the SYNC switch ( 4 ).
3. The temperature setting for both the driver and front passenger
sides is controlled by the driver side temperature control.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Manual Control
yy If temperature is set to LO Use this feature while the engine is running.
-T he system is automatically set to A/C ON, vent mode, recircula-
tion mode. 1. Press the ON/OFF switch ( 1 ).
yy If temperature is set to HI 2. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control
- The system is automatically set to A/C OFF, foot mode, fresh air switch ( 2 ).
mode.
3. Turn the fan speed dial ( 3 ) to adjust the amount of air flow.
4. Press the air distribution mode switch to select the direction
AUTO Control of the air flow.
5. Press the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 4 ) to select the air
Use this feature while the engine is running. source.
1. If the AUTO switch ( 1 ) is pressed, the indicator on the switch 6. Press the air conditioner switch ( 5 ) to use A/C.
is turned on.
2. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control Note
switch ( 2 ). Pressing the AUTO switch in manual mode changes the climate con-
trol system to AUTO mode and the climate functions are controlled
Note automatically based on the set temperature.
yy The fan speed and air distribution mode are controlled automati-
cally based on the set temperature, indoor temperature, and out- 3
door temperature.
yy Pressing recirculation/fresh air switch, fan speed dial, air distribu-
tion mode switch, A/C switch, or defroster switch in AUTO mode 5
deactivates the AUTO mode and the system is set to manual mode. 2 2
(The indicator on the AUTO switch goes off.) 1
4
Indicator
1
2 2

GETtheMANUALS.org
A 2 A
1 Recirculation/fresh air 2 Fan speed dial 3 A/C switch

switch The amount of air flow can be adjusted If this switch is pressed, the indicator
If this switch is pressed, the indicator on by turning the fan speed dial. The relative on the switch comes on and the A/C is
the switch comes on and the system is amount of air flow is displayed on the op- activated.
put into recirculate mode. eration indicator display ( A ) as the dial is Pressing this switch again turns off the
turned clockwise/counterclockwise. indicator and turns off the A/C.
Pressing this switch again turns off the
indicator and switches the system to
fresh air mode.
Warning
yy Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time. Doing so can
cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to lack of oxygen.
yy If exhaust gases flow in, there is a risk of Carbon monoxide poisoning. Use
recirculation mode while driving in dusty conditions and switch back to fresh
air mode as soon as you leave these areas.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1
2 4 tion of its first operation cycle (12 min.) the heating element of
3 5
ment is in use.
1 Air is directed toward the windshield glass and door
windows. If you press the defroster switch, the system
is automatically switched to fresh air mode and the
A/C is turned on.
2
door windows.
3 Air is directed toward the feet. (default mode when

heating) Note
The heating element of glass is activated only when the engine is
Note running. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating ele-
5
Air is directed toward the face and feet.
Outside rearview
mirror heater

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Dehumidify Window Glass Caution
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ) (indicator ON). yy Excessive use of A/C with air distribution in foot mode, defroster/
2. Rotate the fan speed dial ( 2 ) from the OFF position. foot mode, or defroster mode creates a higher difference between
indoor and outdoor temperature. This temperature difference
3. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial causes the fogging on the outside of the windshield. If this is the
( 2 ) to a high speed position. case, use the wiper blades to immediately clear fog on the wind-
4. To remove the fog on the outside of the glass, set the tem- shield and change the air distribution mode to vent mode (toward
face) to minimize the temperature difference.
perature high.
yy Make sure to remove any foreign materials such as snow and
2 winter and summer.
1
Warning
3 With rainy or highly humid condition, fog appears on the windshield
or front side windows even the A/C is ON. If windows are foggy, it
is dangerous to drive because of poor frontal and side visibilities. If
Note
the air to the windshield.
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set
the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) to the fresh air mode.
Pressing the defroster switch ( 1 ) turns on the A/C, sets the system
to fresh air mode, and selects a fan speed (at least 1st fan speed).
Pressing this switch again returns the system to its original condi-
tion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AQS (Air Quality System) Deactivation conditions
The AQS (Air Quality System) blocks the fresh air inlet to prevent yy Air source is selected manually by pressing the recirculation/
the harmful gases from entering if the concentration of hazardous fresh air switch.
gases in air is higher than the specified value. yy The driver side set temperature is set to ‘LO (lowest)’, ‘HI
If the concentrations of hazardous gases go below the speci- (highest)’.
fied values, the system is automatically switched to the fresh yy AUTO defogger is activated (AUTO defogger overrides
air mode. AQS).
yy The defroster and defroster/foot mode switch is pressed.
AQS indicator yy The ON/OFF button is pressed to turn off the climate control
At initial engine start-up, the AQS indicator comes on ( 1 ) and the system.
recirculation air indicator comes on ( 2 ) for 40 seconds. During
this time, AQS is warmed-up and its function does not work. Enabling/disabling AQS
If hazardous gages are detected in the outside air in AUTO mode,
the system is switched to recirculation mode. At this time, the How to set
AQS indicator ( 1 ) and indicator on the recirculation/fresh air Press and hold the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) and briefly
switch ( 2 ) are turned on. press the OFF switch ( 4 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO indicator
The AQS blocks the intrusion of hazardous gages, such as NO, ( 5 ) + recirculation/fresh air indicator ( 2 ) flash for 3 sec.)
NO2, SO2, CO, with concentration higher than the reference
How to disable
value. It cannot protect the vehicle from odor.
Press and hold the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) and briefly
1 press the OFF switch ( 4 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO indicator
Caution
yy If driving in urban area or polluted area for a long time is neces-
sary, there is a risk for moisture accumulation in the cabin due
to prolonged operation of AQS. Because of this accumulated
moisture, the AUTO defogger may be activated resulting in AQS
5 deactivation.
2 4 yy The AQS activation may be delayed or it may not operate at all
depending on the driving conditions.
3

GETtheMANUALS.org
AUTO defogger system Indicator
If the inner side of windshield fogs up during heater or A/C opera- 1 2

tion, the AUTO defogger system removes the moisture on the
glass to guarantee optimum visibility for safety reasons.
If moisture on the glass is detected, the AUTO defogger indicator 3
( 1 ) comes on indicating that the moisture on the glass is being
removed automatically.
The higher the humidity, the higher the AUTO defogger operation Warning
level. For example, if operation level 1 does not help operation yy Pressing the recirculation/flesh air switch to activate recirculation
level is switched from level 2 to level 4 in sequence until the mode during AUTO defogger operation reduces defogging effect.
humidity is controlled properly. To maximize the visibility, do not press the recirculation/flesh air
Level 1 - Air source selection is changed to fresh air mode. switch during AUTO defogger operation.
yy Never remove the sensor cover on the upper side of the windshield.
Level 2 - A/C ON The AUTO fog detection sensor can be damaged while removing
Level 3 - Defrost mode(air is directed to windshield) the cover.
Level 4 - Fan speed increases (deforest mode)
Enabling/disabling AUTO defogger

How to disable Cluster Ionizer
Press and hold the defroster switch ( 2 ) and briefly press the
ON/OFF switch ( 3 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (Indicator on defroster The cluster ionizer produces ions by using high voltage when
switch flashes for 3 sec.) the climate control system is activated (heater and A/C) with the
engine running to suppress airborne germs, bacteria, odors.
How to set
Note
Press and hold the defroster switch ( 2 ) and briefly press the ON/
The ionizer is activated only when the vehicle engine is running.
OFF switch ( 3 ) 5 times within 3 sec. (AUTO defogger indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual heater/air conditioner
You can adjust the amount of air flow or turn on/off the heater/air conditioner by using the fan speed dial ( 3 ).
Using the temperature control dial ( 5 ) to adjust the temperature and selecting the air distribution mode ( 7 , 9 , 10 , 11 ) as desired can
make maintain pleasant interior conditions.
1 2
5
3
12
4 6 7 8
12
9 10 11
1. Defroster switch 6. Recirculation/Fresh air switch 11. Foot mode switch

2. Glass heater switch 7. Defroster/Foot mode switch 12. Dial position indicator (for indicate of
3. Fan speed dial 8. MAX A/C switch current dial position)
4. A/C switch 9. Vent mode switch
5. Temperature control dial 10. Vent/Foot mode switch

GETtheMANUALS.org
Heater/Air conditioner operation Note
Use this feature while the engine is running. Turning the fan speed dial ( 1 ) without operating A/C switch ( 8 )
1. Adjust the amount of air flow by turning the fan speed dial ( 1 ). does not activate the air conditioner. It only changes the amount of
air flows through outlets.
2. Turn the temperature control dial ( 2 ) to set the desired indoor
temperature.
3. Press the mode selection switch ( 4 , 5 , 6 , 7 ) to select the Fan speed dial
desired air distribution mode.
1 Turning the fan speed dial ( 1 )
4. Press the recirculation/fresh air switch ( 3 ) to select the air toward ( A ) decreases the blow
source. speed, and turning the dial
5. Press the A/C switch ( 8 ) to use the air conditioner. toward ( B ) increases the blow
A B
The indicator on each switch comes on when the switch is speed. If the fan speed dial
pressed. Pressing the switch with indicator ON turns of the indica- position indicator ( C ) is in OFF
tor signifying that the corresponding feature is deactivated. position, the climate control
C system (heater and A/C) stops
The indicator on the recirculation/fresh air switch is turned on
working.
when the recirculation mode is selected.
1 2
Temperature control dial

8 3 4
2 Turning the temperature control
5 6 7 dial ( 2 ) toward ( A ) decreases
the set temperature, and turning
the dial toward ( B ) increases
A B
the set temperature.
Warning
Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time. Do-
ing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window due to
lack of oxygen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
3 MAX A/C switch
1 If the MAX A/C switch (3) is pressed during heater and A/C
operation, the system operates as follows:
2 3
1) A/C ON
2) Recirculation mode
3) Vent mode
4) Maintain Set Temperature Before Entering
1 Defroster switch
Use this switch for quick defrosting with IGN ON.
Pressing the defroster switch (1) turns on the indicator on the Note
switch and the air distribution mode is changed so that the air is 1. When system enters MAX A/C mode,
directed toward the windshield and door windows. At this time,
yy A/C stays on, recirculation air, vent mode, fan and temp dial
the A/C is activated and the air source selection is set to fresh remain in the state before entering MAX A/C mode
air mode.
2. MAX A/C activated when:
To cancel the defroster function, press any air distribution mode yy Fan dial on position (level 1 to level 7), temp dial turned to
switch or MAX A/C switch. COOL (blue) position (level 1 to level 7) and max A/C button
pressed
2 Recirculation/Fresh air switch 3. MAX A/C deactivated when:
If this switch is pressed, the indicator on the switch comes on yy All buttons excepting max A/C, hazard warning flasher and
and the system is put into recirculate mode. rear defroster buttons are operated
Pressing this switch again turns off the indicator and switches yy Fan dial is moved to OFF position or temp dial to hot position
the system to fresh air mode. (red position, 8-speed to 16-speed)
Warning
yy Do not use recirculation mode for an extended period of time.
Doing so can cause headache, drowsiness and fogged window
due to lack of oxygen.
yy If exhaust gases flow in, there is a risk of Carbon monoxide poison-
ing. Use recirculation mode while driving in dusty conditions and
switch back to fresh air mode as soon as you leave these areas.

GETtheMANUALS.org
1 tion of its first operation cycle (12 min.) the heating element of
2 3 4
ment is in use.
1
door windows.

3 Note
Air is directed toward the face and feet. The heating element of glass is activated only when the engine is
running. When the glass heater switch is pressed, the heating ele-
4
Air is directed toward the feet. (default mode
when heating)
Note
Outside rearview
mirror heater

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Dehumidify Inner Side of Window Glass
2 3
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ). (Indicator ( C ) ON) 1
4
3. Set the temperature as desired using the temperature control
switch ( 3 ).
4. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial
( 2 ) to a high speed position.
Warning
Note
With rainy or highly humid condition, fog appears on the windshield
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, it is recommended to set or front side windows even the A/C is ON. If windows are foggy, it
the air source selection switch ( 4 ) to the fresh air intake mode. is dangerous to drive because of poor frontal and side visibilities. If
How to Dehumidify Outer Side of Window Glass the air to the windshield.
1. Press the defroster switch ( 1 ).

Caution
yy An extended use of air conditioner in foot mode, vent/foot mode
3. Turn the temperature control switch ( 3 ) to a high temperature or defroster mode may cause the fogged up on the outside of the
position. windshield due to temperature difference. If this is the case, use
4. To quickly remove the fog on the glass, set the fan speed dial the wiper blades to immediately clear fog on the windshield and
( 2 ) to a high speed position. change the air distribution mode to vent mode (toward face) to
minimize the temperature difference.
Note yy Make sure to remove any foreign materials such as snow and
If you press the defroster switch ( 1 ), the fresh air flows in with A/C winter and summer.
ON.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)
Operation of Rear Air Conditioner
Rear A/C switch Rear Air Flow

Control Dial (A)
1. Press the rear air conditioner switch.

Air Flow Direction
2. Turn the rear air flow control dial (A) to any position (1 ~ 3) from Control Lever (B)
“0” position.
3. Adjust the air flow direction with the flow direction control lever
(B).
Caution
yy If the rear air conditioner switch in front control panel is turned
off, the rear air conditioner does not work even when the rear air
flow control dial is operated. However, the air flows due to fan
operation.
yy The rear air conditioner is only for air cooling. It does not include
the air heating function.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Defogging and defrosting
Inside of the Windshield Automatic Heater & Air Conditioner
Defroster switch
3. To quickly remove the moisture on the glass, set the fan speed
4. To prevent fog from forming on the glass, setting the air
source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode is recom-
mended.
Outside of the Windshield

3. To quickly remove the frost on the glass, set the fan speed
4. Set the temperature control switch to a hot position.
Warning Caution
When it rains and is very humid, you may have fog on the windshield yy An extended air conditioner operation in the bi-level mode or
and windows. The fog will block your view through all windows and defrost mode may cause the outside glass to fog due to the high
can create a dangerous situation. To prevent any fog on the glass, temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the
setting the air source selection switch to the fresh air intake mode vehicle. In this case, change the air flow to the fresh air intake
is recommended. mode and set the fan at a low speed.
yy Especially in winter or summer, to avoid glass fogging, remove any
Note obstacles such as snow or leaves on the air inlets.
When you press this defrost switch, the air conditioner turns on au-
tomatically and the system selects the fresh air intake mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Multimedia
Steering Wheel Audio Switch
+
MODE VOL -
VOL
yy Pressing the button briefly with the audio system off turns Increases/reduces volume
the system on.
yy Audio mode changes every time the MODE switch is
pressed.
SEEK
<
SEEK
<
On media screen
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next song
track and shows list of previous/next songs
Using media player other than media screen
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to next /previous song
Bluetooth handsfree MUTE MUTE
track and shows list of next/previous songs
In radio screen Call switch used for Bluetooth yy When the switch is pressed
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next stored handsfree call with a mobile and held, the audio system
station phone. (AV) will be turned off.
yy SEEK switch pushing up/down: Searches for next/previous yy Pressing the switch briefly
Note
station with the audio system on
For more detailed information turns off all sound outputs.
Using other radio player other than media screen on audio and Bluetooth hands- To resume the audio output,
yy SEEK switch tapping up/down: Goes to previous/next stored free system, refer to Audio
Operating Manual provided
press the switch again.
station
separately.
yy SEEK switch pushing up/down: Searches for next/previous
station

GETtheMANUALS.org
Note Caution
This owner's manual describes information on features that are com- yy For safety reasons, only the voice is played without video during
mon between all audio models. For detailed information regarding the driving. (video played again when vehicle stops)
audio system installed to your vehicle, refer to the operating manual yy SD CARD slot supports only the sound data and the SD CARD
provided separately. may not be provided.

Smart Audio* Steering wheel AV/Navigation* Steering wheel
audio switch audio switch
USB port and AUX USB port and AUX

terminal terminal
The Smart audio system has a 8-inch touch panel and steering AV/Navigation system has a 9.2-inch touch panel and steering
wheel audio switch cluster. You can connect an external device wheel audio switch cluster (Voice recognition guidance). You
to this system using the USB (for i-Pod) and AUX terminal. The can connect an external device to this system using the USB
system also supports SD card (for playing music)/rear view (for i-Pod) and AUX terminal. The system also supports SD
camera/around view camera/WIFI mirroring (for Android), and card (for navigation)/rear view camera/around view camera and
Bluetooth. Bluetooth.
AV play through AUX terminal is not supported. AV play through AUX terminal is not supported.
Current mode and media information (title, playing time) dis- Current mode, media information (title, playing time) and navi-
played on the smart audio display can be displayed on instru- gation turn by turn information displayed on the AV/Navigation
ment cluster. displayed on instrument cluster.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Antenna
Do not use the AV/Navigation system for an extended time when
the engine is not running. This may cause the battery to become
fully depleted.
Warning
yy Watching a video including DMB while driving is prohibited by the
law for safety reasons.
yy For safe driving, stop your vehicle in a safe place when you need
to operate the AV/Navigation system.
Slots for Multimedia

If the audio system is turned ON, the antenna receives the fol-
lowing radio waves.
For vehicles with smart audio: GPS (GNSS), Radio signal
For vehicles with AV/Navigation: GPS (GNSS), Radio signal
You can connect an external audio device including MP3 player,

CDP, USB storage device and iPod (media file storage device) to
the vehicle to play the music files or video files though the audio
system of the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering wheel
STEERING WHEEL TILT- Horn STEERING WHEEL HEATER*
ING/TELESCOPING
Height adjustment Length adjustment
(Tilting) (Telescoping)
2
1 1
Press the horn pad on the steering wheel Pressing this switch with the engine run-
to sound the horn. ning turns on the indicator on the instru-
Push down the steering wheel lock/ ment cluster and activates the built-in
Caution heater of the steering wheel. Pressing
release lever ( 1 ) to tilt ( 2 ) or telescope
( 3 ) the steering wheel. Adjust the steer- The sound of the horn can startle pedes- the switch again turns off the indicator
trians. Use only when needed. and the heater.
ing wheel to the desired position and lock
it by pulling up the lever. The switch condition is maintained even
Hold and move the steering wheel to after the ignition switch is cycled OFF
check if it is locked in place. and ON.
Caution Caution
Avoid turning the steering wheel all the way to the left or right for Do not attach an assist knob on the steer-
more than 10 seconds with the engine running. This may cause ing wheel. It can damage the heating
the power steering system to be overloaded, causing damage element in the steering wheel and impede
to the system. safe steering.
Warning
yy Do not adjust the steering wheel while your vehicle is moving.
Always adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle stationary.
yy Before driving, make sure that the steering wheel is locked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Storage compartments
Glove box Front storage Sunglass Holder
The glove box opens with the button The front storage is located under the Press the center of the cover to open the
pushed pulled. Use it to store items front center panel. You can use it for cover and push it up to close.
and etc. small items.
Caution
Note Caution If the holder cover is left open during
The glove box lamp comes on when open- Be cautious of items falling or interrupting driving, it can block the rearview mirror.
ing the glove box with the tail lamp on. the control of the gear selector lever. Also, it can cause personal injury in an
accident or sudden stop. Always close the
cover after use
Caution
yy Driving with the glove box lid open can
cause injury in case of an accident or a
sudden stop. Keep glove box lid closed
when driving.
such as cigarette lighter in the glove
box or other space. In hot weather, it

GETtheMANUALS.org
CONSOLE STORAGE BIN DOOR MAP POCKET SEATBACK POCKET
Swing the console storage bin cover up Various items including maps, books, or This pocket is suitable for thin objects
by pressing the lock knob. magazines can be put in here. such as maps, magazines, newspa-
Bottles for water or beverages can be pers.
Caution
stored in the bottle tray.
yy To avoid possible theft, do not leave Caution
valuables in the storage compartment. Do not store scissors, knives, or other
yy Do not store items that are damage- object with improper size in the seatback
able or cause noises since they can pocket. These items may cause the per-
move around in the compartment while sonal injury in the event of sudden braking
driving. or collision.
such as cigarette lighter in the console
box or other space. In hot weather, they

GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear Storage Box Luggage Compart-
ment Storage Bin
The rear storage boxes are located in the

left/right bottom of the luggage compart- The storage bin on the rear right side
ment to store small objects. of the luggage compartment can hold
some items.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sun visor
Sun Visor and Ticket Holder (DRIVER SIDE) Vanity Mirror and Lamp*
Illumination lamp
1
2
Ticket holder Vanity mirror
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror and Lamp

Swing the sun visor down ( 1 ) to block out the sun (front, left side). Swing the sun visor down and open the
Rotate the sun visor to the driver seat side to block out the sun from the left side. Pull cover to reveal the mirror, then the lamp
out extension on the sun visor for increased coverage (lengthwise) ( 2 ). will come on.
Ticket Holder
Tickets and cards can be stored.
Caution
yy Adjusting the sun visor or using the mirror or ticket holder on the
sun visor while driving may cause an accident by taking your at-
tention away or blocking your view.
yy Adjust and use the sun visor when the vehicle is not in move.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Front cup holder/rear cup holder and armrest
FRONT CUP HOLDER REAR CUP HOLDER AND ARMREST
Rear armrest
Rear cup holder
The cup holder is located in front of the center console. Swing down the rear armrest and push in the lid of the cup holder
module to use the cup holder. You can put a cup, beverage can,
Caution portable ashtray in the cup holder.
yy When the vehicle suddenly brakes or starts, the liquid may spill.
yy Danger of burning! Do not store a cup with hot beverage in the Caution
cup holder. Insert the cup holder into the rear armrest when not in use.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power outlet
Front Rear
An auxiliary power outlet for extra electrical devices is installed.

Warning
This power outlet supplies power when the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position. yy For the extra electrical devices, you must use this power outlet. If
you alter the vehicle’s wire lines and leave the wires to hang freely,
Caution it could cause an accident like a fire.
yy Abide by the nominal capacity of 12V-120W.
Keep the power outlet cover closed if not in use. Electrical defects
can occur if objects other than power outlet plugs or water gets in. yy Do not put a finger into the outlet. It may cause an electric
This will prevent the socket from becoming clogged or short circuit- shock.
ing. yy The battery can be discharged if the power outlet is used exces-
sively when the engine is not running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
USB
USB Charger
USB charger (center fascia), Specification: 5 V-1.1 A Caution
yy Using this port to charge your device with the ignition turned OFF
may run down the vehicle battery faster.
yy Prevent the foreign body or moisture from entering the USB char-
ger socket. Otherwise, the USB charger can be damaged.
yy Do not connect a device with current consumption of higher than
2.1 A to this port.
yy Starting the engine or abrupt voltage change with a device con-
USB charger (rear side of center console), Specification: nected to the socket can lead to product damage. Therefore, con-
5 V-2.1 A nect a device only after the ignition is turned ON and disconnect
the device before IGN OFF.
yy Improper connection of a charging cable with the USB charger
can damage the vehicle fuse or the connected device because
of short circuit.
yy The charging speed varies depending on the device type, compat-
ibility, charging cable and other vehicle conditions.
You can charge your smart phones or tablet devices by using
this port.
yy Connect a USB cable connected to your device to the USB
charge port with the engine running.
yy USB charger located read side of center console has indicator
but it lights when ACC is on.
yy USB charger located center fascia has no indicator
yy For charging progress, check the display of your device.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AC inverter power switch*
AC Inverter Power Switch*
When this switch is pressed with the engine started or ignition
on, the indicator lamp comes on and voltage of 220 V is applied.
Pressing the switch again turns off the indicator lamp and the
inverter.
The switch maintains its status even if the ignition switch is turned
off and back on.
Caution
prolonged time.
yy When you use the AC inverter in an enclosed or unventilated
place, there is a risk of poisoning by the exhaust gas. Keep the
engine idling at a well-ventilated place and ventilate the inside of
the cabin properly.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AC inverter
Caution
yy The some electronic equipment with power consumption less than
the inverter power rating may not work properly:
- Electrical appliances which need high current at startup
- Measuring equipment which should process the exact data
- Unit which needs stable power supply.
yy Close the AC inverter cover when the AC inverter is not in use.
prolonged time.
AC 220V (110V) inverter yy Do not plug in the electrical appliance with power consumption
higher than 200W (220V) [150W (110V)].
It is a digital power conversion system, which converts DC 12V
yy When you plug in an improper electrical appliance which causes
electricity provided by the automobile to AC 220V (110V) and
excessive electromagnetic wave noise, you should take care
enables you to use simple electrical appliances such as the since the noise comes from the audio system (or AV system) and
laptop, cellular phone battery charger, lights, TV. the smart key and electrical systems in the vehicle may occur
After turning on the AC inverter, open the socket cover and plug in malfunction.
the lead from the electrical appliance, with the engine started. yy Do not use the faulty electrical appliance. It may damage the AC
inverter and electrical systems in the vehicle.
Warning yy Do not use more than two electrical equipment and accessories
yy Not paying attention to the AC inverter is very dangerous when simultaneously.
it’s not in use. yy When input voltage from the AC inverter becomes low, the LED
yy Always follow the precautions below in order to prevent serious indicator flashes and the AC inverter is switched off automatically.
injury: It will work normally when voltage rises again.
- Do not use any electrical appliance using hot water. (e.g., electric yy When the smart key is in the vicinity of the AC inverter, it may
kettle, toaster and iron) not work very well due to the electromagnetic wave from the AC
inverter.
- Do not put any foreign object in the AC inverter or touch it with
hands. Doing so may cause an electric shock or fire.
- Don’t let child touch the AC inverter.
- Do not touch the inverter with wet hands. If so, electrical shock
and serious bodily injury may occur as a result.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Grip handle with coat hanger
Grip Handle With Coat Hanger Grip Handle (B-Pillar)
(Headlining)
Grip handle
Coat hanger
There are grip handles on top of the driver side and rear seat. There are grip handle in the front side of rear seat side to grab
The grip handle for the rear seat has a coat hanger. for easy entry.
Caution
Do not hang heavy cloth. It can damage the coat hanger and head-
lining.
Warning
Do not hang objects other than cloth. If the side air bag is deployed
in an accident or from an impact, the vehicle damage or personal
injury can occur by the objects.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Luggage compartment features
Luggage net* (without luggage board)
A
Luggage cover handle
Luggage cover*
Any loose objects can be stowed securely using the luggage net. The luggage upper cover is used to prevent the existence of the
Hook the net up to the luggage compartment. cargo and its condition from being checked from the outside.
Caution
yy Large or heavy Items can damage the net.
yy Do not stow any fragile items.
Warning
The restoring force in the elastic band can cause personal injury.
Hold the band securely when hooking the net to the loop of the
compartment.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Barrier net* (without luggage
Installing: board)
1. Fit the luggage cover into the groove in the body of the vehicle
as pressing both ends of the cover to ( A ) direction.
2. The mounting position of the luggage cover can be changed
according to the angle of the rear seat seatback.
3. Pull the cover handle and slide the luggage cover into the
groove.
Caution
yy Do not attempt to change the mounting position with the luggage
screen pulled out. It could result in screen damage.
yy Do not forcibly adjust the angle of the rear seat backrest with the
luggage cover installed. It may damage the luggage cover.
This net prevents the items in the luggage compartment from

being thrown in the passenger compartment in an accident.
Warning
yy Never transport passenger in the area behind the barrier net.
yy Do not load cargo higher than the barrier net.
yy Just because you are using the barrier net does not mean over-
loading is allowed.
yy Loading heavy objects or hanging heavy objects to the net can
damage the net.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LUGGAGE BOARD
A
A
The luggage board is divided into 2 parts and one-tier or two-tier In order to shift between one-tier and two-tier installation, use the
installation is possible depending on usage. center groove ( A ) of the fastening part for two-tier installation
as shown in the figure above.
Note
figure above and adjust the height of the floor evenly when folding
the rear seats.
Caution
cases:
conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Roof rack
Roof rack
Warning
yy In case the sunroof is equipped, do not position roof rack loads
that could interfere with opening of the sunroof.
yy The following specification is maximum weight when loading cargo
or luggage.
yy Roof rack: 100 kg (220 lbs.) evenly distributed
yy Loading cargo or luggage above specification on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
yy When you carry large objects, never let them hang over the rear
or the sides of your vehicle.
yy To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are driving, check
frequently to make sure the luggage carrier and cargo are still
securely fastened.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed.
yy Loading cargo or luggage over specification on the roof rack may
damage stability of your vehicle.
If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can load things on top of your
vehicle. Caution
When loading, stowage on the vehicle should not damage the When loading the cargo on the roof rack over the vehicle equipped
vehicle as well as not interfere with the sunroof operation (for with the sun roof, be careful not to interrupt the sun roof operation.
sunroof equipped vehicle).
Use any auxiliary equipment for loading, such as a carrier, con-
sidering the vehicle condition and safety.
Note
It is recommended to put cloth or cushions between stowage and
roof to protect them.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Convenience System II 5
Instrument cluster................................................5-2
0
Gauges and display window................................5-4
1
Warning lights and indicators...............................5-9
LCD Display (main menu)..................................5-22 2
Messages on LCD display.................................5-32 3
LCD display pop-up message...........................5-48
4
GETtheMANUALS.org
Instrument cluster * This figure is provided by way of example only. Some details of the image may
not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
Standard cluster
6 37 7 9
1 2 3 4 5 36 38 8 10 4
35
34
28
33
21
32
39
22 40
23 29
26
25 27 11 13 15 17 18 20 30 31
24 12 14 16 41 19
1. 4WD CHECK warning light 15. Engine CHECK warning lamp 29. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning lamp
2. 4WD LOW indicator light 16. Global warning light 30. Over speed warning light (GSL only)
3. 4WD HIGH indicator light 17. Warming up indicator 31. Steering wheel heater indicator
4. Turn signal/Hazard warning lamp 18. Smart key check indicator 32. EPB warning lamp
5. Engine overheat warning lamp 19. Auto cruise Ready indicator 33. ABS warning light
6. Water separator warning light 20. Auto cruise ON indicator 34. ESP ON indicator/warning lamp
7. Seat belt warning lamp 21. HBAS Indicator 35. ESP OFF indicator
8. Air bag warning lamp 22. Illumination ON indicator 36. SSPS warning lamp
9. Door ajar warning lamp 23. Front fog lamp ON indicator 37. Charge warning light
10. Hood open warning light 24. ESCL warning light 38. Engine oil pressure warning light
11. Power mode indicator (GSL only) 25. Immobilizer/Smart key warning light 39. High beam indicator
12. ECO (GSL only) 26. HDC ON indicator/warning light 40. Brake warning light
13. AEBS warning light 27. Winter mode indicator 41. Low fuel level warning light
14. AEBS OFF indicator 28. Lane departure indicator/warning lamp 33+40. EBD warning lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
Supervision cluster
6 39 7 9
1 2 3 4 5 38 40 8 10 4
11 13 15 17 18 20
12 14 16 43 19 37
36
35
21
34
41
22 42
23
24
25
26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1. 4WD CHECK warning light 13. AEBS warning light 26. Immobilizer/Smart key warning 34. EPB warning lamp
2. 4WD LOW indicator light 14. AEBS OFF indicator light 35. ABS warning light
3. 4WD HIGH indicator light 15. Engine CHECK warning lamp 27. HDC ON indicator/warning 36. ESP ON indicator/warning
4. Turn signal/Hazard warning 16. Global warning light light lamp
lamp 17. Warming up indicator 28. Winter mode indicator 37. ESP OFF indicator
5. Engine overheat warning lamp 18. Smart key check indicator 29. Lane departure indicator/ 38. SSPS warning lamp
6. Water separator warning light warning lamp 39. Charge warning light
19. Auto cruise Ready indicator
7. Seat belt warning lamp 30. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning 40. Engine oil pressure warning
20. Auto cruise ON indicator
lamp light
8. Air bag warning lamp 21. HBAS Indicator
31. Over speed warning light (GSL 41. High beam indicator
9. Door ajar warning lamp 22. Illumination ON indicator only)
10. Hood open warning light 23. Front fog lamp ON indicator 42. Brake warning light
32. Steering wheel heater
11. Power mode indicator (GSL 24. Rear fog lamp ON indicator 43. Low fuel level warning light
indicator
only) 25. ESCL warning light 35+42. EBD warning lamp
33. AUTO HOLD indicator/warning
12. ECO (GSL only) lamp

GETtheMANUALS.org
Gauges and display window
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER
DSL DSL
GSL GSL The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in kilometers per
hour (km/h) or mile per hour (MPH).
Over speed warning light

(GCC only)
Sounds warning chime 5 times initially
Note Based on Standard cluster
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Multiply 1000 to the current number, then it will be the current
number of engine revolutions.
Warning
Do not operate the engine within the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage. Speedometer-KPH Speedometer-MPH

GETtheMANUALS.org
COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL GAUGE
The temperature gauge indicates the temperature of the engine This gauge indicates the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
coolant. Fill up the fuel tank before the gauge pointer reaches “E”.
If the gauge moves beyond the normal operating range toward The gauge may slightly move during braking, turning, accelerat-
“H” mark. it indicates the engine overheating that may damage ing, or going up or down hills.
the engine. Allow engine to cool. :T
his symbole indicates that the fuel filler is located on the
left side of vehicle.
Warning
Warning
If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may
seriously damage the engine. Always stop the engine before refueling.
Caution
yy Use only the designated fuel and low sulfur diesel. Otherwise, engine
could be seriously damaged.
yy If you use inappropriate grade fuel or put improper fuel additives into
the fuel tank, the engine and catalytic converter may seriously be
damaged.
yy Do not drive your vehicle when the fuel level is low. Otherwise, the cata-
lytic converter could be damaged due to imcomplete combustion.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Odometer Shift lever indicator
ODO 324756 km 324756 km

The total distance the vehicle has been driven is displayed in yy For vehicles with automatic transmission, the current position
kilometers. of shift lever is displayed.
Maximum number of kilometers is 999999 km. yy For vehicles with manual transmission, the indicator shows up
Odometer is always shown on the bottom in the display. only when the gear shifts or the shift lever is in R position.
yy For the manual mode of auto transmission vehicles or manual
transmission vehicles, the optimal shift point is indicated by an
arrow according to vehicle speed and rpm condition.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GEAR shift INDICATOR Gear shift point indicator
Supervision cluster Gear shift point indicator is a supplementary function indicating
the optimal shift point for fuel efficiency. To operate this func-
tion, manual gear shift control is necessary according to road
and driving conditions.
yy Manual transmission: indicates 3rd
gear (target) shift point which is the
optimum shift range, while driving in
1st or 2nd gear position
Standard cluster yy 6A/T Automatic transmission (M
mode): indicates 4th gear (target)
shift point which is the optimum
shift range, while driving in 3rd gear
position
Note
While driving in 1st ~ 7th gear position without shifting gear in auto-
matic transmission (M mode) vehicle, the transmission may automati-
cally shifts up to protect the system if the engine RPM gets high
Automatic Transmission
This indicator shows the current position of the gear. yy Manual transmission: indicates 3rd gear (target)
In normal mode: P, R, N, D shift point which is the optimum shift range, while
Gear indication in “M” mode: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 driving in 4th or higher gear position
P : Parking 1 : 1st gear

Note
R : Reverse 2 : 2nd gear
N : Neutral 3 : 3rd gear While driving in 2nd ~ 7th gear position in automatic transmission (M
D:D riving (7A/T) 4 : 4th gear mode) vehicle, the indicator (arrow) does not appear on display
(1~7th gear shifting) 5 : 5th gear when downshifting. Drive shifting manually according to driving
Driving (6A/T) 6 : 6th gear conditions. If driving without manual shift, RPM will get low and the
(1~6th gear shifting) 7 : 7th gear system will shift down.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Manual transmission display
Automatic transmission display

- 7A/T
- 6A/T
Note
For vehicles with manual transmission, the indicator shows up only
when the gear shifts or the shift lever is in R position.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning lights and indicators
SEAT BELT REMINDER AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT* ENGINE OIL pressure
WARNING LIGHT
This warning light blinks and the warn- When the ignition is switched on, this
ing buzzer sounds for 6 seconds when warning light illuminates and then should This warning light comes on when the oil
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” go off, to confirm that the air bag is op- pressure drops because of low engine
position unless the driver & passenger erational. oil level.
(EU) seat belt is securely fastened. This If it does not come on, or if it does not go
reminding operation stops when the driver If this light turns on while driving, safely
off, or if it flashes or illuminates continu- pull over and stop the vehicle to check the
fastens the seat belt even during its opera- ously while driving, it means that there is
tion period. engine oil level. Add engine oil, if neces- 5
a malfunction in the system. Have the air sary, to maintain the proper oil level.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h bag system checked without delay by a
(general: 10 km/h) without fastened Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- Continuous driving with this light on may
driver’s seat belt, this indicator comes on rized Service Center. lead to engine failure.
and the alarm sounds.
Note Caution
For more detailed information, refer to the If this light does not go off after engine
“Seat Belt and Air Bag” section. starting or comes on while driving, it means
there is a malfunction in the system. Run-
ning the engine with this warning light on
can cause serious damage to the engine.
Have the lubricating system checked by a

GETtheMANUALS.org
BATTERY CHARGE WARN- DOOR AJAR WARNING HOOD OPEN WARNING
ING LIGHT LIGHT LIGHT
This warning light comes on when the This light comes on when a door or the This light comes on when the engine hood
ignition switch is turned on and it goes off tailgate is either opened or not closed is open or not closed completely.
when the engine is started. securely.
Warning
If this light doesn’t go off after engine start-
Warning Driving with engine hood open can result in
ing or comes on while driving, it means
there is a malfunction in the system. Before driving, check that the door ajar hazards when driving. Make sure the engine
warning light is off. When a door is not hood is closed securely before driving off.
Have the charging system checked by a
completely closed, it may accidentally open
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- while driving.
Caution
Continued driving with the battery charge
warning light illuminated will lead to a sud-
den stop of vehicle, causing an accident and
serious injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
ENGINE OVERHEAT SSPS WARNING LIGHT Fuel Filter WARNING
WARNING LIGHT light (DSL only)
This warning light comes on when the

When the engine coolant temperature SSPS system is defective. When this This warning light comes on when the igni-
is abnormally hot, the engine overheat warning light comes on, the steerability tion switch is turned to “ON” and should
warning light blinks and a warning buzzer becomes heavier. go off in a few seconds. When the water
sounds. When this happens, stop the inside the water separator in the fuel filter
vehicle in a safe place and let the engine What is SSPS? exceeds a certain level, this warning light
cool down. For more information, refer to Speed Sensing Power Steering (SSPS) is comes on and a buzzer sounds. Also, the
Chapter 6 “When the engine is overheat- the device that provides good driving con- driving force of the vehicle decreases. If
ing.” dition and steering stability by making the this warning light comes on while driving,
steerability heavier in high-speed driving, have the system checked by Ssangyong
Caution and lighter in stop or low-speed driving. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
If you keep driving the vehicle with the warn- Center.
ing light and buzzer on, the engine could be Caution
damaged and lead to a fire. After completely If the SSPS warning light comes on or when Caution
cooling down, have the system checked by you feel the steering wheel heavy, have yy The fuel system in the engine may get
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- the SSPS system checked by Ssangyong serious damage if you keep driving while
rized Service Center. Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service the warning light is on. Prompt correction
Operation. should be necessary.
yy Using low quality fuel could result in
serious damage to the engine due to the
water or impurities in fuel. Never use low
quality fuel.
yy If the amount of water in the fuel filter
exceeds the specified level, the warning
lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the
engine power decreases.

GETtheMANUALS.org
BRAKE WARNING LIGHT ABS WARNING LIGHT* EBD WARNING LIGHT*
This warning light comes on when the This warning light comes on when the igni- If the ABS warning light and the brake
parking brake is applied and/or the brake tion switch is turned to “ON” and should warning light come on simultaneously,
fluid level is lower than a specified level. go off in a few seconds. EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
system is defective. In this case, ABS
Caution Warning system also cannot be activated.
If the vehicle is driven for over 2 seconds yy If this light stays on after starting the en- If this happens, have the system checked
(over 10 km/h) while the parking brake is gine or comes on while driving, have the by Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Au-
applied, the parking brake warning light system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
comes on and a warning buzzer sounds. If Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. In
it occurs, immediately stop the vehicle and this case, the ABS function is not avail-
release the parking brake. able, but the conventional brake system Warning
is properly working. When the EBD system is not functioning,
yy ABS is a device that prevents wheels the vehicle could be unstable during hard
Warning braking. Therefore, you must pay particular
from locking during braking to allow
Driving the vehicle with the brake fluid warn- steering. However, the ABS system does attention to the driving conditions while this
ing light on is dangerous. not shorten the stopping distance. warning light is on.
If the parking brake light stays on, you must
immediately have your vehicle checked
and serviced by Ssangyong Dealer or Caution
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. ABS system performs self diagnosis by
transferring hydraulic pressure to the brake
units for few seconds after starting the
engine. This may cause some noise and
vibrations. This means ABS is properly
functioning.

GETtheMANUALS.org
EPB WARNING LAMP AUTO HOLD INDICATOR/ ENGINE CHECK WARNING
WARNING LAMP* LIGHT
The lamp comes on when the ignition

switch is turned ON and then goes off after When the AUTO HOLD switch is operated, This warning light comes on when the
about 4 seconds. the AUTO HOLD system will be switched ignition switch is turned on and it goes off
yy ON: The EPB (Electric Parking Brake) to READY mode and the "AUTO HOLD" when the engine is started.
system is faulty but the parking brake indicator on the instrument cluster will be If the light stays on or comes on while
works properly. illuminated in white. driving, some of the engine control com-
yy Flashing: The parking brake is not Operating the AUTO HOLD switch again ponents including sensors and devices
working with this lamp ON turns off the indicator and deactivates the are defective.
AUTO HOLD system.
WARNING CAUTION
yy Indicator ON in white: AUTO HOLD
yy If the warning lamp is turned on, have If the engine halts due to a completely
system READY mode empty fuel tank and the engine check light
the vehicle checked and serviced at a
Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- yy Indicator ON in green: AUTO HOLD comes on even after refueling, the engine’s
rized Service Center. system is activated power output may decrease within a certain
yy If you have to park the vehicle with faulty driving distance (about 30 km).
yy Warning lamp ON in yellow: fault in
EPB, safely pull over and stop the vehicle AUTO HOLD system
on a flat surface and shift the gear selec- WARNING
tor lever to the P position. When this warning light comes on, the ve-
WARNING
If the yellow AUTO HOLD warning lamp hicle operates in safety mode to maintain
is turned on, have the vehicle checked minimum driving conditions and to prevent
and serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or the system from being damaged. In this
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. mode, the engine driving force may be de-
creased or the engine may stall. When this
happens, have the system checked at the
nearest Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
4WD Check Warning 4WD Low Indicator* 4WD High Indicator*
Light*
When shifting the driving mode to “4L”, this When shifting the driving mode from “4L” to
This warning light comes on when the igni- indicator blinks until the shifting operation “4H”, this indicator blinks until the shifting
tion switch is turned to “ON” and should is completed. After completion of the mode operation is completed. After completion
go out if the system is normal. If the “4WD change to 4L, the indicator comes on. of the mode change to 4H, the indicator
CHECK” warning light stays on, have the comes on.
4WD system checked by a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service
Center.
WARNING
yy If the “4WD CHECK” warning light stays
on, have the 4WD system checked.
yy Do not drive your vehicle over 80 km/h
in 4H mode.

GETtheMANUALS.org
STEERING WHEEL HEAT- ESP ON INDICATOR/ ESP OFF INDICATOR*
ER INDICATOR* WARNING LAMP*

The steering wheel heater indicator lamp The lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned ON and then goes off after
is turned on or off when the steering wheel switch is turned ON and then goes off after about 4 seconds.
heater switch is turned to ON or OFF about 4 seconds. Pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch
with the ignition switch ON or the engine yy Indicator flashing: ESP system is ac- (for more than 3 seconds) turns on the
running. tivated indicator lamp indicating that the ESP
function is deactivated.
Note yy Warning lamp ON: fault in ESP sys-
When the indicator lamp is turned on, a
tem Note
message will be displayed for about 5 sec. For more details about the ESP, refer to "ESP
at the top of the LCD screen. CAUTION
OFF switch" in Chapter 3.
If the warning lamp comes on, have the
vehicle serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
LOW FUEL LEVEL GLOW INDICATOR GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT*
WARNING LIGHT (DSL ONLY)

This warning light indicates that the fuel When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, switch is turned ON and then goes off after
level in the tank is getting exhausted. this indicator comes on and stays for a about 4 seconds.
The illuminating point of this warning light short time or may go off right away. When If there is a fault in the TPMS, this light
varies according to the driving conditions the glow plugs are sufficiently heated, the flashes for about 70 sec. and then stays
such as driving angle and road conditions. light will go out. In the vehicle equipped on. If the tire pressure is abnormal (un-
If this warning light comes on while driving, with a direct injection type engine, this derinflated / overinflated / flatten), the
immediately refuel the tank. However, it is indicator may come on very shortly or may global warning light is also turned on. If
recommended that fuel should be added not even come on. the warning lamp comes on, have the
before this warning light will come on. vehicle serviced at a Ssangyong Dealer or
Caution Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
Caution When the glow indicator comes on while
While driving on steep hills or rough roads, driving or the engine cannot be started prop- WARNING
this warning light may come on if the re- erly, have the glow plug system checked by If the global warning light comes on in the
maining fuel level is low. a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Autho- cluster, pull over and stop the vehicle in a
rized Service Center. safe place as soon as possible and check
the tire pressure.

GETtheMANUALS.org
AEBS WARNING LIGHT* AEBS OFF INDICATOR* HDC Indicator*
AEBS warning light is turned on when AEBS OFF indicator is turned on when the When the HDC switch is pressed once,
the ignition switch is turned to the ON ignition switch is turned to the ON position. HDC is ready for use. The green HDC in-
position. The lamp stays on for a short The lamp stays on for a short period of dicator in the instrument cluster comes on.
period of time and then goes out. time and then goes out. When the button is pressed again, HDC is
Stays on: Malfunction in AEBS The lamp comes on when the AEBS deactivated and the indicator goes off.
Flashing: AEBS in operating status is turned OFF, indicating the system is When HDC is applied, the green HDC
deactivated. indicator blinks.
(flashes only for 5 seconds in the event
of a potential collision) Note
When the red HDC indicator is on, the
HDC system is overheated or malfunction-
This indicator also comes on when the ESP
ing. For more information, refer to Chapter
system is deactivated by pressing the ESP
OFF switch. 3, HDC Switch.
Caution
If the red HDC indicator illuminates, HDC is
overheated or malfunctioning. If the indica-
tor is on even after the system has cooled
down enough, have the nearest authorized
dealer or service center check the system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LANE DEPARTURE INDI- LIGHT INDICATOR FRONT FOG LIGHT
CATOR/WARNING LAMP* INDICATOR*
This indicator comes on when the tail lamp

When the LDWS switch is activated, the or headlamp is switched on. This indicator comes on when the front fog
following lights will be turned on or flash light is switched on.
depending on the vehicle conditions.
Activating the LDWS switch again turns
off the system.
yy Indicator ON in white: System READY
mode (Vehicle speed below specified Rear fog light indica-
value or no lane detected)
tor*
yy Indicator ON in green: LDWS is acti-
vated
yy Warning lamp flashing in yellow:
Calibration fault in the front camera
module
yy Warning lamp ON in yellow: LDWS is
faulty With the headlights turned on, if you rotate
Note the switch in position, rear fog lights
turn on and the switch returns back in front
For more detail information, refer to “LDWS (Lane De-
parture Warning System)” in chapter 3. fog light position. Rear and front fog lights
turn on simultaneously.
WARNING
If the lane departure warning lamp is turned on or flashes,
have the vehicle checked and serviced at a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
HBAS INDICATOR* HIGH BEAM INDICATOR Immobilizer/Smart key
warning light
Pushing the light switch lever toward the This indicator comes on when the high
instrument panel with the light switch in beam headlamp is switched on. REKES key: blinks when immobilizer sys-
AUTO position activates the High Beam tem has malfunction
Assist System (HBAS) and turns on this Warning
indicator. Driving with high beam headlamp disturbs Smart key: blinks when smart key system
the approaching vehicle’s visibility. For safe has malfunction or key authentication
Warning driving, use the high beam headlamp only fails
HBAS is activated only when the vehicle is when it is very hard to see the road.
Caution
driven at a speed of at least 35 km/h.
HBAS may not be activated in the following If blinking continues, it means the system is
situations: defective. Bring your vehicle to Ssangyong
service center for checkup and servicing.
yy The lamps of the oncoming or preceding
vehicle are damaged.
yy The oncoming or preceding vehicle is
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR
blocked from your vision.
yy The windshield is contaminated (dust,
fogging, sticker, snow, etc.) or dam-
aged.
yy The body of the oncoming or preceding
vehicle is partially concealed at road in-
tersections or on sharp-curved roads. This indicator blinks when the turn signal
yy Driving through a construction zone with switch is turned on.
reflective materials and light sources. Both indicators blink when the hazard
warning switch is turned on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER MODE INDICATOR* SMART KEY IN WARNING
LIGHT*
Note
For supervision type, the key warning mes-
sage appears on the LCD display instead of
warning light.
Pressing the mode switch (E → P → W)
on the switch panel located to the left yy When the door lock/unlock button on
switch cluster twice turns on the winter the outside door handle is pressed af-
mode indicator. ter the doors are closed with the smart
key inside the vehicle, the doors will not
be locked, this warning light will flash,
and the buzzer will sound.
POWER MODE INDICATOR*
yy This warning light comes on when a
driver carrying an invalid smart key
presses the engine start/stop button.
yy This warning light flashes when a driver
carrying a valid smart key opens a door
and gets off the vehicle with the igni-
Pressing the mode switch (E → P → W) tion switch ON or the engine running.
on the switch panel located to the left Closing the door under this condition
switch cluster once turns on the power triggers the buzzer and flashing indi-
mode indicator. cator.
Caution
If both the power mode and winter mode
indicators flash simultaneously because
of the system failure, see a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.

GETtheMANUALS.org
CRUISE CONTROL escl* (ELECTRICAL over speed Warning
INDICATOR STEERING COLUMN LOCK Light (gcc ONly)
WARNING LIGHT)
ESCL
This indicator comes on when the cruise The warning light flashes with repeated
control system is switched on. (5 times) buzzer sound when the vehicle
This is the device which has the electronic
speed exceeds 120 km/h.
control of the locking and unlocking of the
steering wheel in the vehicle with the smart If the warning light flashes, slow down for
key. If the ESCL warning lamp comes on, your own safety.
the vehicle may not be started and driven.
In this case, have the system checked by
a Ssangyong dealer or Ssangyong Autho-
Auto cruise Ready
indicator
This indicator comes on when the cruise

control ON/OFF switch is turned on.
READY indicator will go off when press-
ing the cruise control ON/OFF switch
once more.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD Display (main menu)
There are 6 LCD main menu items. You can check the vehicle Main Menu Description
information and choose vehicle settings using the switches on
the right side of the steering wheel. Item Main menu Mode (sub menu)
- Distance to empty/Average fuel economy/
Instantaneous fuel economy
- Mileage A/Average vehicle speed/Driving
time
TRIP com- - Mileage B/Average vehicle speed/Driving
1 puter menu time
- Departure time/Driving time/Fuel consump-
tion
3 - Digital clock
2
- TPMS (tire pressure)
Digital
- Supervision instrument cluster (3 types)
speedometer
-S tandard instrument cluster (1 type)
menu
Driving as-
- Lane departure warning
sist menu
Switch
Item Function
operation
AV menu - Display linked to AV
1
Short press Move to main menu
TBT (Turn By - Compass
2 Turn) menu - Display linked to navigation
.07& Tap up/down Navigate through sub modes (menus)
- Instrument cluster illumination
- Driving assist
3 Enter menu - Language
Short press Check settings - Door/Tailgate
Select settings User settings - Light
Reset selected item menu - Functions for driver comfort
Long press Digital speedometer illumination ON/ - Sound
OFF - Service interval alert
- Instrument cluster settings & information
- Initializing mode settings

GETtheMANUALS.org
TRIP Computer Menu
►►Distance to empty/Average fuel economy/In- 2 Average fuel economy
stantaneous fuel economy This mode indicates the average fuel economy computed based
on the total amount of fuel used and the distance driven since
the reset to (--.--).
This value shows how far the vehicle could go (in km) with one
1 1 liter. This value will be updated every 10 sec. on the display.
2
2 The average fuel economy is calculated continuously as long as
3 3 the engine is running regardless of the vehicle movement.
3 Instantaneous fuel economy

1 Distance to empty
The instantaneous fuel economy is calculated based on the
The Distance To Empty (DTE) displayed on the LCD screen is a distance driven and the amount of fuel used.
calculated value based on the measured fuel volume in the fuel
This value is displayed when the vehicle is driven at 10 km/h or
tank, average fuel economy, and information about the driving
more and the value is between 0 and 30 km/L.
pattern.
The display range is from 0 to 1500 km. If the remaining distance Reset: Average fuel economy
is less than 50 km, “---“ symbol will blink on the display. Press and hold the ( ) switch in current mode.
Note The value will be reset and “--.--” will be displayed. Drive for a
few miles so that the average fuel economy values since the last
For supervision type, the color of the DTE value displayed on the
screen will change to yellow if the value becomes 100 km or less,
reset are shown again.
and the “----” symbol will be displayed in red. You can reset this value at the time of IGN OFF, IGN ON, or refuel-
ing depending on the vehicle settings.
Caution
Note
The actual amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank may differ from
You can select options for resetting the average fuel economy under
the amount estimated by the trip computer depending on the driving
"Instrument cluster User settings menu → Instrument cluster settings
conditions of the vehicle and whether the vehicle is level or not. That
& information".
is, the DTE is only for reference. It is recommended to refuel before
the fuel warning light comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Mileage (A), (B)/Average vehicle speed/Driving ►►After departure
time
1 1
1 1
2 2
2 2
3 3 3
3
4 4
1 1
2 2 Distance driven after the engine start (km), departure time
3 3 (hh:mm), driving time (hh:mm), fuel consumption (L) are dis-
played.
Individual trip mileage (km), average vehicle speed (km/h), driving 1 After departure
time (hh:mm) are displayed.
Total distance driven accumulated since the last engine start.
1 Trip (A, B) Maximum number of kilometers is 9999.9 km.
Maximum number of kilometers is 9999.9 km. 2 Departure time
The value outside this range returns to 0.0 km. When the engine is started, the time on the left bottom of the
2 Average speed (A, B) LCD screen is displayed here.
The average vehicle speed is calculated based on time and dis- 3 Driving time
tance. This value will be updated every 10 sec. on the display. The display range is 0:00 to 99:59. The value outside this range
3 Driving time (A, B) returns to 0:00.
The display range is 00:00 to 99:59. The value outside this range 4 Fuel consumption
returns to 0:00. Total amount of fuel used since the last engine start (unit: L).
Reset: Trip (A, B), Average speed (A, B), Driving time (A, B) Reset: After departure, Departure time, Driving time,
Press and hold the ( ) switch in current mode. Fuel consumption
The average speed will be reset to “---”, and the driving time will These values will be automatically reset when the engine is
be reset to “0:00”. started again after the ignition is turned off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►Clock mode ►►Tire pressure (TPMS)
Supervision Supervision Standard
This only applies to the supervision instrument cluster, and the Low pressure Check tires
time on the left bottom of the LCD screen is displayed in analog

format.
Low pressure Flat Tire
High pressure Unbalanced Pressure
yy This message is displayed when the tire pressure is normal.

yy If the tire pressure is normal, "Tire pressure normal" is dis-
played.
yy If the tire pressure is abnormal, corresponding message will
be displayed. The message can blink or stay on depending
on the tire conditions.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Digital Speedometer Menu Driving Assist Menu
Supervision Standard ►►LDWS ON (READY)
Type A
Type B
The lanes are shaded when the LDWS is turned ON but the
lanes are not detected.
Type C Supervision Standard
The vehicle speed measured by the speedometer is shown in

digital display. Pressing the ( ) switch turns off all lights except
for the LCD screen light. If both lanes are detected while the vehicle is driven at a speed
of 60 km/h or more, the detected lanes will be displayed in white.
Note If only one lane is detected, the detected lane will be displayed
If you return to main menu, change the mode, press the ( ) switch,
in white.
or an event message pops up, the previous lighting conditions are The warning output is provided only for the detected lane.
restored.

GETtheMANUALS.org
►►LDWS OFF ►►System inoperative
This message is displayed when the LDWS is turned off. This message is displayed when there is a fault in LDWS cali-
bration.


GETtheMANUALS.org
AV Menu TBT (Turn By Turn) Menu
►►Linked with AV system ►►Linked with navigation system
The instrument cluster is linked to the AV system. Therefore, the The instrument cluster is linked to the navigation system and
contents displayed on the AV system are also displayed on the displays part of the navigation screen information.
LCD screen of the instrument cluster.
The main menu logo at the top of the screen may vary depending
on the manufacturer of the device connected to the system.
Radio mode USB/SD photo mode
Bluetooth (hands-
AUX mode
free) mode
DAB mode Android Auto
i-Pod mode Apple Carplay mode
Bluetooth music play

USB/SD video mode
mode
USB USB/SD music mode

GETtheMANUALS.org
User Settings Manual
menu menu
Tick (individual) / - OFF
Individual setting
Not tick (overall) - While driving
AUTO LOCK
Instrument Overall setting 0 to 20 stages - Shift lever is moved
cluster Illumination except for to R, N, D
0 to 20 stages
illumination LCD - OFF
LCD Illumination 0 to 20 stages - Ignition is turned
? HELP AUTO UNLOCK off
Tick/not tick (AEBS - Shift lever is moved
AEB system OFF warning lamp ON to P
when not tick) - 10 km/h
Driving FCW sensitivity Late, Normal, or Early - 20 km/h
assist Door/ AUTO LOCK speed
Rear cross traffic alert Tick/not tick - 30 km/h
Tailgate setting
TSR Tick/not tick - 40 km/h
? HELP - 50 km/h
Korean/English/ LOCK/UNLOCK alert
Tick/not tick
English Chinese/Russian/ sound
Language Turkish UNLOCK with key in 2
Tick/not tick
? HELP stages
Smart door AUTO LOCK Tick/not tick
Window open/close by
Tick/not tick
smart key
- Enable
Power tailgate
- Disable

GETtheMANUALS.org
menu menu
- Enable - ON
Steering wheel align alert
- Disable Functions - OFF
Door/ Smart tailgate (Enabled: smart for driver Wiper mode indicator Tick/not tick
Tailgate tailgate indicator comfort Light mode indicator Tick/not tick
comes on LCD
? HELP
screen)
Turn signal lamp sound - 5 different sounds
? HELP
Turn signal lamp sound
- Level 0 to 3
volume
Leaving home headlamp - OFF
Instrument cluster voice
- 10 sec. - Level 0 to 3
guidance volume
- 20 sec.
PAS sound - 5 different sounds
Light Coming home headlamp - 30 sec.
PAS sound volume - Level 0 to 3
Sound
Approach lamp Lane departure warning
- ON - 5 different sounds
system sound
AUTO Approach lamp - OFF
BSD system audible alert BSD audible alert
? HELP
RCTA audible alert
Outside rearview mirror Welcome & Goodbye
angle in reverse (driver - OFF Tick/not tick
sound
Functions side) - 2° ? HELP
for driver - 3°
Enable service interval
comfort Outside rearview - 4° Tick to use
alert
mirror angle in reverse - 5°
(passenger side) Service Oil & filter
Not set up to 99,500 km
interval alert Tire (increase by 500 km)
Others
? HELP

GETtheMANUALS.org
User settings
Level 1 Level 2
menu
- OFF
Average fuel economy - Reset at start up
AUTO reset - Reset when refilling
- Km/L
Fuel economy unit
- L/100 km
Instrument
- °C
cluster Temperature unit
settings & - °F
information - psi
- kPa
Tire pressure unit
- bar
- Kgf/cm²
Summary information
Tick/not tick
display
Trip information display Tick/not tick
Information displayed
Instrument for currently
cluster Warning lamp information illuminated warning
settings & lamp
information
? HELP
Initialization
of all Yes/No
settings

GETtheMANUALS.org
Messages on LCD display
- LCD display shows the message shown in the figure for 4

sec. when the driver door is open → closed and the theft
Welcome sound deterrent system is disarmed.
- If the ignition is turned on during this message display, the
message will disappear but the welcome sound will not stop.
- If the ignition switch is turned on, this message is displayed

for 4 sec. only once.
System check - If the message stays on, have the vehicle serviced at
Center.
under Instrument cluster User settings menu > Instrument
cluster settings & information > Display trip information ,
Trip information the 'Driving info' will be displayed for 5 sec.
(Driving info) - The message overrides other messages. Only the "Low fuel
level" message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen
of this message when the Low fuel level warning lamp is
turned on.
under User settings menu > Service interval alert , ‘Checkup
Service interval Alert Status’ message will be displayed. However, This
alert message is not displayed when the distance left to the next
service is over 300 km.
- When it is past the due date, the number is preceded by "-".

GETtheMANUALS.org
If a vehicle speed greater than 0 km/h is detected after you

enter the Cluster Setting menu, LCD display shows this
Instrument warning message for 5 seconds.
cluster settings The message is not displayed when selecting settings for the
driving assist, instrument cluster illumination, vehicle warning
menus.
- The ICE warning lamp ( ) is turned on only when the ambient

ICE warning temperature is displayed at the bottom of LCD screen.
lamp - This lamp is turned on when the ambient temperature is 5°C
or less, and turned off when the ambient temperature is 7°C
or more.
Vehicle warning You can view the current warning messages here.
log No list is provided when there is no warning message.
This description only applies to models with supervision

Smart tailgate instrument cluster. The smart tailgate indicator is turned on
-
indicator when the Smart tailgate is enabled under User settings menu >
Door/Tailgate, indicating that the smart tailgate can be used.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you lock the door using the registered smart key with another
registered smart key left inside the vehicle and all doors closed,
this message will be displayed for 10 seconds.
When 2 or more valid smart keys are detected inside the

vehicle with IGN OFF and any door except for tailgate and
hood open, this message is displayed for 10 sec.
Smart key
warning
LCD display shows this message if no smart key is detected

inside the vehicle with the ignition switch ON or engine
running.
The LCD display shows this message for 10 sec. when the
ignition switch is set to ACC position twice without depressing
the brake pedal to inform you that the brake pedal should be
depressed when starting the engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If the ignition switch is pressed and there is no valid smart key

detected inside the vehicle, this message is displayed on the
LCD screen for 10 sec.
If the gear selector lever is not in P or N position when you start

the engine, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
10 sec. to inform you that the gear selector lever should be in
P or N position.
Smart key
warning - If the SKM receives no signals or faulty/incorrect signals from
the vehicle power supply control or ignition switch after the
smart key authentication, this message is displayed for 10
seconds.
- If the message stays on, have the vehicle serviced at
Center.
If the gear selector lever is not in P position when you turn the
ignition switch to OFF, this message will be displayed on the
LCD screen for 10 sec. to inform you that the gear selector
lever should be in P position to turn OFF the power.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If low smart key battery is detected with AUTO LOCK function

deactivated, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
10 sec.
- If low smart key battery is detected with AUTO LOCK function
activated, this message is displayed on the LCD screen for
Smart key 10 sec.
warning - This message is displayed for 10 sec. when the AUTO
LOCK function is deactivated → activated with low smart key
battery.
This message is displayed for 10 sec. when ignition switch is in

ACC for 12 minutes or more or the driver door is opened with
ACC ON to prevent battery discharge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
In R position
1) Rear PAS (shifting gear selector lever to R with IGN ON)

- When the gear selector lever is shifted to the R position, a
short beep is heard. If an obstacle is detected behind the
vehicle, the existence of the obstacles is displayed on the
LCD screen in 4 stages (Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3)
according to the distance from the vehicle and the location
of the obstacle. (Level 1 of rear PAS: Information of front
PAS is not displayed. Level 0 of rear PAS: Only the shape
of vehicle is displayed.)
Front/rear area
detection
In D position 2) Front PAS (shifting gear selector lever to D with IGN ON)
- If an obstacle is detected in front of the vehicle, (a) the
existence of the obstacle is displayed on the LCD screen
in Level 2 and Level 3 indicators according to the distance
from the vehicle and the location of the obstacle; (b) no
information is displayed in Level 0 and Level 1.(Disabled
when the vehicle speed is 15 km/h or higher, Enabled
when the vehicle speed is less than 10 km/h)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driver door open Passenger door open
Rear left door open Rear right door open

- Supervision type
Plays animation on the LCD screen when any door, hood, or
tailgate is open.
Door/Hood/ - Standard type

Tailgate Plays animation on the LCD screen when any door is open.
opening status Hood open Tailgate open If the hood or tailgate is open, corresponding image on the
screen flashes.
- When all doors are closed, the vehicle symbol with all doors
closed is displayed for 1 sec.
All doors closed

GETtheMANUALS.org
Left level 5 Left level 5
- When the ignition switch is turned to ON from OFF position,

Level 0 Level 0 the alignment status is displayed in level 1 to 5 according to
the tire direction. The tire alignment indicator is not displayed
on the screen when the level is 0.
Tire direction - The indicator is displayed for 5 sec. for up to level 2. For
level 3 to 5, the indicator stays on until the tire alignment
conditions are met.
- For vehicles with A/T, this indicator is displayed only when
the shift lever is in P or N.
Right level 5 Right level 5

GETtheMANUALS.org
The message is displayed on the LCD screen and the system

enters auto cruise ready mode when the cruise control ON/
OFF switch is pressed with IGN ON.
Supervision:
Standard:
The message is displayed on the LCD screen and auto cruise

is activated when the cruise control switch is operated in auto
Cruise control cruise ready mode.
Supervision:
Standard:
The message is displayed on the LCD screen when the cruise

control is switched off with cruise control in READY mode and
active mode.
Supervision:
Standard: No message displayed
- If there is a fault in the AUTO HOLD system, this message is

Service Center.
AUTO HOLD
system This message is displayed on the LCD screen in the following
conditions.
- When the EPB switch is activated without depressing the
brake pedal to deactivate EPB.
- When the AUTO HOLD switch is activated without depressing
the brake pedal to deactivate AUTO HOLD.

GETtheMANUALS.org
This message is displayed on the LCD screen when the AUTO

HOLD active state is changed to the EPB state.
This message is displayed on the LCD screen in the following

conditions.
- When the vehicle slips down with AUTO HOLD active and a
fault in EPB is detected.
- When the vehicle slips down after EPB is activated.
If the vehicle slips down, this message remains on the screen
EPB (Electric until the brake pedal apply is detected."
Parking Brake)
- If there is a fault in the EPB system, this message is displayed
on the LCD screen along with the flashing EPB warning
indicator.
Service Center.

accelerator pedal is depressed with EPB or AUTO HOLD
activated and the AUTO deactivation conditions are not met.

GETtheMANUALS.org
- When the AEBS activation (warning) conditions are met, the

'Collision alert' message is displayed for 5 sec. and the AEBS
indicator flashes for 5 sec. to warn the driver of a possible
collision.
- If the conditions for displaying warning message are met
again during the 5 sec. of the message display, the new
warning message will be displayed for 5 sec. with the same
flashing of the indicator.
This message is displayed after the vehicle has stopped by the

AEBS activation of emergency braking (maximum brake control) by
(Autonomous the 3rd warning of AEBS.
Emergency
Braking System)
LCD display shows this message after the first 3 sec. of starting
the engine when there is a fault in the AEBS. This message will
stay on for 5 sec.
This message is displayed when the front camera module

cannot detect the lane markings, preceding vehicles, people,
etc. because of the ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris on the
windshield glass.

GETtheMANUALS.org

about 5 sec. depending on the ON/OFF state of the BSD
switch.
BSD (Blind
Spot Detection)
system
- If there is a fault in the BSD system, this message is displayed
on the LCD screen.
Service Center.
If the warning conditions for the BSD system are not fulfilled
with BSD system is activated, this message is displayed on
the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
RCTA (Rear This message is displayed on the LCD screen when a vehicle
Cross Traffic or object is approaching rear left and/or rear right side of the
Alert) system vehicle during the operation of RCTA system.
LOW Fuel To This message is displayed when the fuel is not sufficient to
Destination drive to the destination set on the navigation.

GETtheMANUALS.org
The message which recommends taking a break is displayed

on the LCD screen for 5 sec. for your safety after driving for
Rest warning some time.
For some time: message displayed every 2 hours starting from
the first engine start-up with IGN ON.
This message is displayed once on the LCD screen when the

Service interval ignition is turned ON from OFF, provided that the check box
alert for the Service interval alert under the User settings menu is
checked and the distance to destination is 0 km.

Destination
system with Turn By Turn (TBT) menu activated and the
arrival alert
distance to the destination is 0 km.
Add washer fluid.

If the level of washer fluid is low, Low washer fluid level
Low washer
message along with the corresponding indicator are displayed
fluid level
on the LCD screen. The remaining volume of washer fluid in
the tank when the indicator is activated is about 800 ml.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If there is a fault in the ECU and TCU 3 seconds after the

Engine system
engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are
warning
If there is a fault in the oil level and oil pressure 3 seconds after
Engine oil level
the engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are
check
If there is a fault in the ESP system 3 seconds after the engine

ESP system
warning
on the LCD screen.
If there is a fault in the EBD system 3 seconds after the engine

EBD system
warning
on the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If there is a fault in the ABS system 3 seconds after the engine

ABS system
warning
on the LCD screen.
If the fuel level is detected as being low 3 seconds after the

Low fuel level engine start, a warning message and warning indicator are

Exterior lamp
exterior lamps are turned on by the opening of the driver door
ON alert
after IGN OFF.
HBA system If there is a fault in the HBA system 3 seconds after the engine
warning start, this warning message is displayed on the LCD screen.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD display pop-up message
This message is displayed on the upper part of the LCD screen

Steering wheel
for 5 sec. according to the operation (ON/OFF) of steering
heater
wheel heater switch with IGN ON or engine running.
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to W while

Winter mode
indicator

GETtheMANUALS.org
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to P while

POWER mode
indicator
Setting the driving mode switch on the shift lever to E while

ECO mode
indicator
When there is an incoming call with handsfree phone connected

Bluetooth phone to the vehicle, the caller ID or phone number is displayed on
call hold the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.
(priority: ID > phone number)

GETtheMANUALS.org

about 5 sec. depending on the ON/OFF state of the HDC
switch.
The indicator color may change based on the HDC operation
HDC ON/OFF status.
- Green HDC indicator ON: HDC in ready status
- Green HDC indicator flashing: HDC in operation
- Red HDC warning lamp ON: HDC in overheating condition
and system error
1 km to
destination
system and the distance to the destination is 1 km.
check

GETtheMANUALS.org

Light mode by the operation of light multifunction switch, is displayed on
the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org

Windshield
by the operation of windshield wiper multifunction switch, is
wiper mode
displayed on the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org

Rear wiper
by the operation of rear wiper multifunction switch, is displayed
mode
on the upper part of the LCD screen for 5 sec.

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
In Case of Emergency 6
OVM tools and warning triangle...........................6-2
0
Starting the engine with jumper cables................6-3
1
When the engine is overheating..........................6-5
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*..........6-6 2
Cautions when a tire is flat.................................6-12 3
How to use service kit (emergency tire repair
kit).......................................................................6-13 4
Removing the spare tire.....................................6-21 5

Changing a spare tire.........................................6-22
6
Cautions when changing the tire.......................6-27
7
Towing a disabled vehicle..................................6-30
Emergency towing.............................................6-31 8
When the engine is overheating........................6-33
Trailer towing......................................................6-35
Accident or fire...................................................6-40
GETtheMANUALS.org
OVM tools and warning triangle
Set u
p
easy in a pos
to ide ition
from n
behin tify
d
The warning triangle is stored at the bot- When the vehicle has a serious
1 2 3
tom of the luggage board.
problem during driving
Caution 1. Turn on the hazard warning flasher,
yy Set up a warning triangle on a place stop the vehicle on the shoulder or
9 a safe place and set up the warning
where it can be very visible while paying
7 attention to traffic conditions. triangle in a position where is easily
6 8 identified by the driver of the vehicle
yy On a highway or vehicle-designated
5 road, evacuate yourself to a safe place approaching from the rear.
after pulling over your vehicle. 2. Have all passengers get out of the
4 yy Set up the warning triangle in a position vehicle and stay away from the traffic.
where is easily identified by the driver of
When your safety is secured, contact
1. Jack 6. Screwdriver (+ and -) the vehicle approaching from the rear.
(Set out also a flare at night.) your Ssangyong dealer for your emer-
2. Compressor 7. Spanner gency service.
yy If your vehicle is operational or the prob-
3. Sealant 8. OVM tool roll
lem is fixed, resume driving paying extra
4. Jack connection 9. Wheel nut wrench attention to traffic conditions.
5. Tow eye
yy Spare tire*: 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
yy Service kit: 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8

GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting the engine with jumper cables
If the batter is weak or dead, the battery from another vehicle can be used with jumper cables to start the engine.
Connecting order:
(1) The + terminal of the discharged battery
(2) The + terminal of the booster battery
(3) The - terminal of the booster battery
(4) Connect one end of the other jumper cable to the body of
the discharged vehicle, such as the engine block or a front
towing hook.
Discharged battery
The positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal.
The minus (–) cable to the minus (–) terminal.
1. Prepare a set of jumper cables.

2. Place another vehicle that has the same 12 V of power near
to the discharged vehicle.
3. Switch off all electrical accessories for the discharged ve-
hicle.
4. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to the
P position (automatic transmission) or neutral (N) position
(manual transmission).
5. Connect the jumper cables.
6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has the booster battery,
and let the engine idle for a few minutes.
7. Attempt to start the engine with the discharged battery.
Booster battery 8. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the jumper
cables in the reverse sequence of connection.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy Connecting the jumper cable to the negative terminal of the discharged battery
could result in arcing and possibly a battery explosion. Serious personal injury
or vehicle damage can result.
yy Make sure that the jumper leads are securely connected. Otherwise, an abrupt
disconnection due to vibration during engine starting may cause an electrical
short resulting in severe damage to electric components.
yy A battery generates the gas which is flammable and explosive. This gas could
be exploded due to the spark when connecting the jump cables. Make sure that
the booster battery has the same voltage rate with the discharged battery.
yy While connecting the jumper cables, make sure that the negative (–) and
positive (+) cables never touch each other. Otherwise sparks might cause an
explosion of the battery.
yy Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact
eyes, skin, or painted surfaces. If you accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and contact your doctor.
yy While being transported in an ambulance, gently wipe out the contacted area
with a water-wet cloth or sponge.
Caution
yy When starting your vehicle with jumper cable, turn off the engine of the boost
vehicle and connect the jumper cables
yy Ensure that the jumper cables are clear away fan blades before starting the
engine.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WHEN THE VEHICLE OVERHEATS
1. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe area. Then shift the
gear selector lever to the P position and apply the parking
brake.
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine
hood and idle the engine until it cools down.
ately.
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine run-
ning in idling speed.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range
Symptoms: even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down.
yy The engine overheat warning light blinks (Buzzer sounds) 5. Check the coolant level in the reservoir. If it is too low, check
for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections.
yy The gauge indicates beyond the normal range (or in the red
zone). 6. Add coolant into the reservoir if necessary.
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment. 7. If necessary, cover the reservoir cap with a cloth and turn the
cap a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the
yy Reduced engine output. pressure, remove the cap and fill up the reservoir. Then, put
the cap back on the reservoir.
Engine Overheat Warning Lamp 8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system checked
Coolant Temperature Gauge Center.
When the engine overheats, steam or
spray may come out the engine compart-
ment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
touches “H”. If this happens, the engine
overheat warning light comes on and a
buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)*
What’s TPMS? TIRE PRESSURE CHECK
As an additional safety feature, your vehicle has been B
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that A
illuminates an abnormal tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires are significantly under-inflated or over-inflated.
B
Tire pressure OK
A
TPMS ECU
34 34
34 34 psi
Select TPMS (tire pressure display) of the instrument cluster

main menu ( A ) to check the tire pressure of each wheel on the
LCD screen ( B ).
Wheel module (each wheel) Note

TPMS start to recognize the tire pressures in 5 minutes of continuous
The TPMS ECU receives various data including tire pressure driving (over 20 km/h) after starting the engine. If the system is not
and temperature from the wheel module mounted to each wheel ready yet, LCD display shows “--”.
and displays the tire pressure information through the instrument
cluster. Caution
yy The tire pressure displayed on the LCD screen may be changed by
Proper tire pressure : 34psi the vehicle driving conditions, number of passengers, tire inflation,
and other external factors.
The tire pressure should be checked when there is nobody inside
yy When inflating the tire, the tire pressure may be changed continu-
the vehicle and the tires are cold (approx. 20°C).
ously until the turbulent mixing of air with different temperature
subsides.

GETtheMANUALS.org
GLOBAL WARNING LIGHT FLASHING/ON
Caution
yy Even with proper inflation of tire pressure, the global warning light
( ) can be illuminated due to the difference between interior
and ambient temperatures. This is because the tire pressure gets
lower in proportion to the temperature and does not mean TPMS
system is defective.
yy If you need to drive while the ambient temperature rises or drops
sharply, make sure to check and adjust your tire pressure before
driving.
yy For safe driving, do not depend solely on the tire monitoring sys-
tem; instead check your tire pressure regularly.
Warning
yy If the global warning light comes on in the cluster, stop the vehicle
as soon as possible and check the tires and their pressures.
yy If the global warning light does not go off after checking tire pres-
sures and driving for more than 10 minutes with the speed over
20 km/h, have your vehicle checked and serviced at Ssangyong
service center.
This light blinks or stays on when tire pressure is abnormal or yy Sudden tire damages by external factors (nails, road debris and
TPMS system (including sensor) is faulty. etc.) will not be detected immediately. If you feel instability of the
yy Faulty TPMS (including sensor): Blinks (for approx. 70 sec- vehicle while driving, reduce your speed and move your vehicle
onds) and stays on at a safe place to check.
yy Do not remodel or modify your vehicle in any way to avoid inter-
yy Tire pressure abnormality (underinflated / overinflated / flat- rupting TPMS system operation.
ten): Stays on yy For safety, always use genuine wheels mounted with tire pressure
monitoring system.

GETtheMANUALS.org
LCD DISPLAY REGARDING TPMS
Tire perssure OK
Normal Tire pressure is normal
Low perssure
-- -- Tire pressure is not recognized

-- -- psi
Low
pressure
Low perssure
Tire pressure needs to be checked. Affected tire symbol comes

on.
Check tires
Tire pressure needs to be checked. Affected tire symbol blinks

Check tire
for 70 seconds (1s interval) and then comes on.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Flat Tire
Tire pressure significantly goes down or tire is flat. Affected tire

Puncture
symbol comes on.
High perssure
High
pressure
Tire pressure is too high. Affected tire symbol comes on.
Unbalanced Perssure
If the pressure difference between LH and RH tires is 5 psi or
Imbalanced more, the corresponding tires on the screen flash with the shad-
ing inverted alternatively.
Note
If some tire pressure is shown as “--” symbol, the TPMS wheel
module on that tire may be faulty. Have your vehicle checked and
serviced at a SsangYong service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire Rotation, Tire Replacement
Tire Rotation When Low Tire Pressure Detected
The TPMS reset the tire positon after tire rotation. If the vehicle yy The global warning light ( ) and the low pressure tire po-
is driven at a speed of 20 km/h or more, the TPMS starts the sition indicator on the instrument cluster come on when a
tire positon reset procedure. Typically, the reset is completed significantly under-inflated tire is detected. If this is the case,
within 5 min. slow down and have your vehicle checked and serviced at a
Caution yy If you drive continuously without replacing the under-inflated
yy During the first driving after tire rotation or replacing a wheel tire with a new one, the performance of the vehicle, breaking
module with a new one (with tire pressure sensor), previous tire force and tire life will be adversely affected and fuel economy
pressure (value before the change) may be displayed or the global will decrease.
warning light can be turned on.
yy If you cannot take the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized
yy The tire position reset time may vary depending on the driving
conditions. Service Center, refer to "How to use service kit" in Chapter
6 - In Case of Emergency.
Warning
yy If you have injected sealant into one of your tire for repairing, drive
the vehicle to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center located
within a driving distance of 200 km at a speed of 80 km/h or slower
and replace the repaired tire with a new one.
yy When replacing the sealant injected tire, the TPMS sensors should
be checked for appearance and abnormality at a Ssangyong Au-

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions for TPMS
Caution
yy If there is any foreign object, such as snow or mud, caught between the transmitter of wheels
and the receiver of vehicle body, strong electric waves or noises affect the TPMS, or a metal
object is located near the TPMS antenna, the tire pressure may be displayed with time delay or
may not be displayed normally because of communication or electronic interference.
yy In some cases, the TPMS does not work properly because the snow chain fitted to the tires
disrupts the communication between the wheel module and TPMS antenna. This does not
mean that the vehicle driving is also impaired.
yy When you are in an area near a facility which emits strong radio frequencies, such as police sta-
tions, public offices, broadcasting stations, military facilities, transmitting towers, airports, harbors,
the TPMS may fail and the global warning light ( ) can be turned on.
yy If a wheel without wheel module (with tire pressure sensor) is fitted to the vehicle, the global
warning light is turned on and the TPMS does not work.
yy The service life of the tire pressure sensor (wheel module) battery inside the wheel may be
reduced by frequent tire pressure abnormality (underinflated / overinflated / deflated tire/ pres-
sure imbalance).
yy Do not rely too much on the TPMS. Always check the tire pressure before driving off.
yy When inflating the tire, the tire pressure displayed on the air compressor may be different from
the tire pressure read from the TPMS.
yy The TPMS communicates with the wheel module wirelessly. Therefore, the TPMS may not
work properly if there is an electronic device which can cause electronic interference, such as
mobile speed camera detector, in the vehicle.
yy Be careful not to damage the wheel module when replacing the tires. If the wheel module is
subjected to an impact or damaged during tire replacement, the TPMS may not work at all. If
you replace the tires at a tire dealer, tell the technician that the tires have TPMS.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions when a tire is flat
Warning
yy Don't be panic! Sharp turning of the steering wheel or abrupt brak-
ing may cause a tragic accident.
yy Do not drive even a short distance after a flat tire condition. The
damaged tire prevents normal driving and can lead to hazardous
conditions.
yy Turn on the hazard warning flasher, stop the vehicle on the shoul-
der or a safe place and set up the warning triangle in a position
where is easily identified by the driver of the vehicle approaching
from the rear.
yy If possible, park the vehicle on a flat, solid, and no slippery surface.
Repair the tire with no occupant in the vehicle.
yy If a tire is punctured during driving, turn the hazard warning

lamp on immediately, release the accelerate pedal to decel-
erate the vehicle while holding the steering wheel firmly, and
depress the brake pedal lightly to park the vehicle in a safe
place.
yy Place chocks in front of and behind the wheel diagonally op-
posite the flat tire.
yy Use the service kit to repair the flat tire.
Note
yy Refer to “How to use service kit” in Chapter 6.
yy If you are not familiar with repairing flat tires, contact your insur-
ance company or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center for
assistance.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to use service kit (emergency tire repair kit)
The service kit is stored in the storage bin (OVM too box) on the
Warning
left side of the luggage compartment.
yy Use the service kit only when the hole size on the tread is about 6
mm or less. If the tire sidewall is torn or the hole size is too large, do
not use the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong
Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle serviced.
yy If the tire pressure is not increased even when the air is injected
using the service kit, stop immediately. And tow your vehicle or
take it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the
vehicle serviced.
yy When driving with the repaired tire using the service kit, make sure
that the vehicle speed does not exceed 80 km/h.
yy If you feel or hear any vibrations, unstable steering, or noises,
stop the vehicle immediately. And tow your vehicle or take it to
a Ssangyong Authorized Service Center and have the vehicle
serviced.
yy The service kit is for emergency use only. Take your vehicle to
Principle of service kit Ssangyong Authorized Service Center as soon as possible to
If you have a flat tire, you can put the sealant into the tire using a replace the tire repaired using sealant with a new one and check
compressor. After short driving, the sealant will be applied evenly TPMS. (Maximum driving distance allowed after sealant injection:
on the inner surface of the tire and the puncture is sealed by the 200 km)
sealant so that you can drive the vehicle for a short distance.
Evenly applied sealant

during driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
INFLATING A TIRE
When the tire pressure is low, you can 3. Remove the valve cap from the tire, in 5. Connect the red clamp ( A ) of the ser-
inflate the tire to the specified air pres- which the air will be added. vice kit to the positive battery terminal
sure using the service kit. 4. Securely connect the air hose of the and black clamp ( B ) to the negative
1. Take out the service kit stored in the kit body to the air valve on the tire. battery terminal.
storage bin (OVM too box) on the left 6. Start the engine.
side of the luggage compartment. Caution
2. Take out the air valve and power cable The power switch of the service kit should Warning
from the service kit unit. be in OFF position. To avoid a danger of suffocation due to the
exhaust gas, start the engine in the well
ventilated area.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power switch A
7. Press the service kit power switch to 8. Wait until the pressure reaches the 10. If the tire is overinflated, press the
activate the compressor. specified pressure (34 psi, 2.3 bar) air pressure release button ( A ) to
while checking the pressure gauge adjust the tire pressure.
Caution of the service kit. 11. Turn the engine off and disconnect
To prevent overheating, do not operate the 9. Once the standard pressure is the air hose from the tire.
compressor for more than 10 minutes. reached, switch off the service kit. 12. Install the air valve cap of the tire.
Note 13. Place the service kit back to the
original position.
gauge.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Repairing flat tire
Repair kit components When to use the repair kit
2 3 4 5 6 7 Tread
Shoulder
Side wall
9 yy If you have a flat tire, first check the position of the puncture
1 to decide whether or not you can use the repair kit. (Refer to
inflating a tire)
1. Sealant 6. Power switch yy The repair kit can be used only when the puncture size is less
than 6mm on tread.
2. Sealant mounting 7. Air hose
yy If the puncture is found on the shoulder or side wall of the tire,
3. Pressure release button 8. Power cable (+) do not use the repair kit and obtain help from your insurance
4. Pressure gauge 9. Power cable (-) company and Ssangyong network.
5. Compressor
Warning
Before using the repair kit, check the side wall/shoulder of the tire to
see if it is torn, cracked or damaged. If so, instead of using the repair
kit, obtain help from Ssangyong service center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
B
If you have a flat tire, repair the tire us- 2. Remove the speed limit sticker from 3. Connect the air hose ( A ) of the
ing a service kit as per the following the service kit and affix it on the steer- service kit body to the sealant bottle
procedures: ing wheel. ( B ).
1. Take out the air valve and power cable
Caution Note
from the service kit unit.
yy The decal indicates the current tire is Shake the sealant bottle well before use.
sealed by repair kit. You should not
drive faster than 80 km/h after the
emergency puncture repair kit has
been used.
yy Check the expiration date for the seal-
ant. The expiration date is marked on
the side of the sealant container. Do not
use the sealant after the expiration date
as it can deteriorate over time. Always
read the precautions on the container
carefully before using it.

GETtheMANUALS.org
A
4. Fix the sealant bottle onto the service 5. Remove the air valve cap of the flat 7. Connect the red clamp ( A ) of the ser-
kit box firmly. tire. vice kit to the positive battery terminal
6. Connect the air hose of the service and black clamp ( B ) to the negative
kit to the air valve on the flat tire battery terminal.
securely. 8. Start the engine.
Caution Warning
yy The power switch of the service kit To avoid a danger of suffocation due to the
should be in OFF position. exhaust gas, start the engine in the well
yy If the sealant is injected with loose ventilated area.
connection between the air hose of the
service kit and the air valve on the flat,
the sealant may flow back causing the
valve to become blocked.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power switch A
9. Press the service kit power switch to 10. Inject the sealant into the flat tire. 12. If the tire is overinflated, press the
activate the compressor. Wait until the pressure reaches 34 psi air pressure release button ( A ) to
while checking the pressure gauge of adjust the tire pressure.
Caution the service kit.
To prevent overheating, do not operate the Caution
11. Once the standard pressure is
compressor for more than 10 minutes. reached, switch off the service kit. yy Dispose of the used sealant bottle. Pre-
pare a new sealant bottle for later use.
Note yy Be careful not to touch the sealant with
your skin when removing the sealant
bottle. In the case of contact with skin,
wash away the sealant with soapy
gauge.
water.
yy The material of the sealant may vary
Caution in different products. Using an unap-
To prevent overheating, do not operate the proved sealant, not our genuine one
compressor for more than 10 minutes. If could result in damage of TPMS system
the tire pressure does not go above 26 psi sensor.
after 10 minutes, the tire is too damaged
to repair using a service kit.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning TIRE PRESSURE CHECK
Never stand next to the sidewall of the yy Use the service kit only when the hole AFTER REPAIRING
tire when the compressor is operating. size on the tread is about 6 mm or less.
Instead, look at the sidewall of the tire. If the tire's sidewall or shoulder is torn
Check the pressure of the tire repaired
You may get injured severely in the event or the hole size is too large, do not use with the service kit as follows after driving
of tire rupture. the service kit. Tow your vehicle or take about 10km.
it to a Ssangyong Authorized Service 1. Take out the service kit stored in the
Center and have the vehicle serviced. storage bin (OVM too box) on the left
13. Disconnect the air hose from the tire
yy If the tire pressure is not increased side of the luggage compartment.
and install the protective cap.
even when the air is injected using the
14. Install the air valve cap of the tire. service kit, stop immediately. And tow 2. Take out the air hose from the service
15. Turn off the ignition, remove the your vehicle or take it to a Ssangyong kit box.
Authorized Service Center and have the 3. Disengage the air valve cap of the
sealant bottle and air hose from the
vehicle serviced. repaired tire.
service kit and place the service kit
yy You should drive with the speed below
to the original position. 4. Unscrew the protective cap from the
80 km/h if using a tire repaired with the
16. Immediately drive the vehicle for service kit. The maximum distance you air hose and connect the air hose to
about 10 km so that the sealant is could drive with the repaired tire may the tire’s air valve.
applied on the inner surface of the differ depending on the tire condition, 5. Read the tire pressure displayed on
tire evenly. however do not exceed 200 km.
the pressure gauge of the service
yy If steering is unstable or wobbling/
17. Stop the vehicle at a safe place kit.
noise is felt, stop driving and contact
and check the tire pressure with the SsangYong service center for help. 6. If the value is higher or lower than the
service kit. yy The service kit is for emergency use specified tire inflation pressure (34
only. Take your vehicle to Ssangyong psi), adjust it to the specified value
Authorized Service Center as soon as using the air valve.
possible to replace the tire repaired us-
ing sealant with a new one and check Warning
TPMS.
If the tire pressure is not maintained at
yy Obtain a new bottle of sealant from the around 34psi, stop driving the vehicle and
dealer with returning the used sealant contact Ssangyong Authorized Service
bottle for disposal. Center for help.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Removing the spare tire
Warning
The emergency spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a tire-
specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
Caution
yy When reinstalling the spare tire to the carrier, be sure to securely
lock it to the carrier holder.
yy While your vehicle is being raised up with the jack, avoid any im-
pact on your vehicle. Otherwise, you may get injured.
1. Insert the connection rod in the hole located in the upper cen-
ter of the bumper after opening the tailgate, and then connect
the wheel nut wrench to it.
2. Turn the wheel nut wrench counter-clockwise to lower the
spare tire.
3. When the spare tire is on the ground, remove the tire by prying
off the lift plate.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Changing a spare tire
2. Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns by turning them

counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench.
Warning
yy Do not remove the nuts yet from the wheel. If they are removed, the
wheel could slip off from the vehicle. Then, the body of the vehicle
will fall down on you and you may get seriously injured.
yy Loosen the wheel nuts two or three turns.
yy The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.
yy Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to the
wheel being changed.
Caution
When reinstalling the wheel cap, be sure to completely fit it into its
location.
1. Chock the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite to
the wheel being changed.
Warning
The parking brake should always be applied when replacing the
flat tire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When Replacing a Front Tire When Replacing a Rear Tire
Front jack up point Rear jack up point
3. Place the jack directly under the jack-up points so that the top
of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Warning
yy The jack should be used on level firm ground wherever possible.
yy It is recommended that the wheels of the vehicle be chocked, and
that no person should remain in a vehicle that is being jacked.
yy No person should place any portion of their body under a vehicle
that is supported by a jack.
yy Jack working load limit 1,300 kg.
<Jack up points>

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Combine the jack, jack extension and the wheel nut wrench 6. Take the wheel off and place the wheel under the vehicle
as shown in the figure. Raise up the vehicle by rotating the body. This helps to minimize any danger if the jack slip off
combined wrench clockwise until the tire is off from the ground position.
about 3 cm.
5. Remove the wheel nuts by hands while the vehicle is station-
ary. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
Warning
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle until the jack is in the proper posi-
tion, and secure both to the vehicle and the ground. It may cause a
personal injury or vehicle damage.

GETtheMANUALS.org
8. Lower the vehicle by rotating the combined wrench coun-
Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with
ter-clockwise until the tire touches the ground. Remove
the sequence as shown in the figure.
the jack.
Warning
While the jack is supporting your vehicle, do not use too much force
to tighten the nuts. Otherwise, the vehicle may slip off and you may
get injured.
9. Tighten the wheel nuts in 2 or 3 steps with the sequence

as shown in the figure.
10. When done with mounting the spare tire, place the flat tire
in the luggage room. Store the jack and other emergency
tools in their storages.
7. Then mount the spare tire and temporarily tighten the wheel
nuts until the spare tire wheel is no longer loose.
Warning
By tightening up the spare tire until it is not loose any more, you can
avoid any tilting of the tire on the wheel hub when the tire touches
the ground.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning
yy With the emergency spare tire, do not drive any faster than
60 km/h.
yy The temporary spare tire is only for emergency situations. Never
take your vehicle to a Ssangyong authorized service center or a
tire-specialized shop to replace it with a new regular tire.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off or any malfunctioning in the steering and
braking system.
yy This could lead to an accident. Be sure to tighten the wheel nuts
as specified. If the wheel comes off due to a loose wheel nut, you
may have a fatal accident.
yy Using different tires could cause you to lose control while driving.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires from the same manu-
facturer on all wheels.
If over tightened, the wheel nuts could be damaged. Do not
overtighten the wheel nuts by pressing the wheel nut wrench by
Caution
foot or using an assist pipe.
After changing the tire and driving the vehicle about 1000 km, re-
tighten the wheel nuts.
- Wheel nut tightening torque: 120 ~ 140 Nm

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions when changing the tire
CAUTIONS WHEN CHANGING THE TiRE

►►Before changing the tire yy Securely fix the tire in its carrier. Check to see if the spare
yy Turn on hazard flashers and move off the road to a safe tire is securely locked into the carrier without any looseness.
place away from traffic. Park on a firm and level ground. Otherwise, it may make some abnormal noises or fall out
from the carrier on the road while the vehicle is moving. This
yy Set up the jack at the specified position. Never get under
may cause an accident or hit a pedestrian.
the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. While the ve-
hicle is on the jack, never start or run the engine or push yy If this happens, the fallen tire can be a great danger to other
the vehicle. vehicles or people. Check the tightness of the wheel nuts
and tire pressure before driving.
yy Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stay in a place
away from traffic. yy The spare tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
not exceed 60 km/h speed when the spare tire is installed
►►During changing the tire on the vehicle.
yy Do not completely tighten the wheel nuts at a time. Tighten yy Repair or change the flat tire. Stow the emergency tire in its
the wheel nuts in the diagonal sequence in 2 or 3 steps. location properly.
yy Never apply oil or grease to either wheel studs or nuts as it yy Make sure to check the tightness and inflation pressure of
will cause them to overtighten. tires before driving.
yy In the vehicle equipped with TPMS, the TPMS warning
►►After changing the tire
lamp comes on and TPMS does not work when installing
yy Check, repair, and retighten the replaced tire at the nearest the emergency tire.
Ssangyong Authorized Service Center or a qualified tire
shop after an emergency change.
Warning
yy Make sure that tighten the wheel nuts again after driving of about 1,000 km when the tires have been replaced.
yy Drive the vehicle at the speed of 60km/h or less (maximum speed 80 km; maximum distance 200 km) when the vehicle is driven with the spare tire.
yy Drive the vehicle in 2H mode when the spare tire is fitted. When driving in 4H mode, it will damage the drive system.
yy Be sure to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on all wheels so that the vehicle characteristics can be maintained safely.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine check warning light ON
Engine check warning light Water separator warning light (Diesel vehicle)
This light turns on when sensors (including If the amount of water in the fuel filter
automatic transmission) and equipment exceeds the specified level, the warning
related with engine control have malfunc- lamp comes on and chime sounds (with
tion. If this light comes on while driving, engine running). If this is the case, stop
have your vehicle checked and serviced the vehicle as soon as possible and have
at Ssangyong dealer. the vehicle checked and serviced at a
Caution
yy If the engine check warning light comes on, the engine power can
be reduced and the engine can be turned off. Caution
yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im- yy Driving with this warning light ON can cause serious damage to
mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down. the fuel system and engine.
yy Opening the reservoir cap should be performed when the engine yy If you add inappropriate grade fuel that has a high water content,
is off and has cooled down. the warning light of the water separator comes on early. Never
yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres- use a low quality fuel.
reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
Warning
the engine is still hot. If the amount of water in the fuel filter exceeds the specified level,
the warning lamp comes on, a chime sounds or the engine power
yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
decreases.
yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
Warning
yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
when the engine is running.

GETtheMANUALS.org
How to Use Priming Pump
Priming
pump hole
Close
Open
1. Turn the priming pump in open direc- 2. Press the priming pump several times 3. Turn the priming pump in close direc-
tion while pressing and holding the with the pump open until the good tion while pressing and holding the
pump. amount of fuel flows out of the prim- pump.
ing hole. 4. Close the engine hood and start the
Caution
engine.
Do not use tools like pliers to open or Caution
close the priming pump as the pump can
When pressing the priming pump, pay at-
be damaged by those tools.
tention to prevent fuel spray from priming
pump hole which may cause injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Towing a disabled vehicle
yy Flat towing For 2WD vehicles
Warning
It is not allowed to use a tow truck or
yy The 4WD system equipped vehicle
should never be towed with the wheels
keep the rear wheels from moving with
on the ground. This can cause serious the parking brake released for towing, as
damage to the transmission or the 4WD shown in the following figure.
system. Do not tow the vehicle with the rear
yy Towing with front wheels on ground
yy If your vehicle should be towed due to wheels on the ground.
wheel slips in mud or sand, you can use
the towing hooks in your vehicle. How-
ever, if the load to hooks is too heavy,
the towing hook, rope or chain could be
Dolly
broken, resulting in serious personal
yy Towing with rear wheels on ground injury and vehicle damage.
yy To prevent damage to your vehicle, Caution
proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary. When you need a tow-
ing service, contact Ssangyong Dealer
Dolly or Ssangyong Authorized Ser vice
Center.
Towing with tow truck
The best towing method is to lift the entire
vehicle onto the flatbed so that all wheels
are off the ground. If it is impossible, put
the front or rear wheels on the jig and
tow the vehicle using a dolly, with other
wheels off the ground. yy Do not tow with the sling-type equip-
ment or the bumper and lower parts can
For 4WD vehicle be damaged.
yy If the vehicle is towed with the driving
Your vehicle must be towed with a wheel
wheels on the ground, the transmission
lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with may be damaged.
all the wheels off the ground. yy Be careful not to damage the bumper
and lower parts during towing.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emergency towing
yy When towing your vehicle with the towing rope:

1. Securely tie up the towing rope to the towing hooks. Secure
the rope to both of the towing hooks under the front of the
vehicle as tight as possible.
2. To make the rope conspicuously visible, bind a white colored
cloth on the center of the rope.
3. Place the gearshift lever in the neutral position and release
the parking brake.
Within 5 m 4. Switch on the hazard warning flashers of both vehicles.
5. Maintain the towing distance. Apply more force to depress
the brake pedal of the vehicle that will be towed.
6. Set the ignition in the ON position.
7. Total length of the towing and towed vehicle and the towing
rope should be less than 25 meters. And tow the vehicle within
25 km with 5 km/h of the towing speed. The length of the rope
should be less than 5 m.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of Towing Hooks
Front towing hook Rear towing hook Caution
yy If you cannot use a professional towing service, the driver of the
towed vehicle should stay behind the steering wheel. But, never
use this emergency towing when the electrical system, steering
system, or brake system is not operative.
yy Ensure that only horizontal tension is applied to the front or rear
towing hook.
yy If there are steep hills or sharp turns in your towing path, do not
use this method.
yy Depress the brake pedal stronger than normal condition when the
engine is not running.
yy When your electrical systems operate properly, turn on the haz-
ard warning lamps or turn signal lamps according to the towing
vehicle’s signals.
yy Avoid overloaded towing and do not tow a heavier vehicle than
yours.
yy Position the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” so that the steering
Warning wheel is not locked.
yy The towing hook should be used only for temporary and short-
distance recovery or towing in an emergency situation. Avoid using
it all the time. Misusing can have serious consequences.
yy Special cares should be taken when towing. Avoid an abrupt start-
off or reckless driving because it could over-tighten the towing
hook, towing rope or chain with excessive force. To prevent dam-
age, do not take up slack in the towing rope or chain too quickly.
yy If the towing hook is required for towing as the vehicle becomes
stuck in snow, mud or sand or it can’t get out by itself due to poor
traction, make sure no excessive force is applied to the towing
hook. Otherwise, the towing hook, towing rope or chain may be
broken, resulting in an injury or damage to the vehicle. For safe
towing, it is recommended to contact Ssangyong authorized ser-
vice shop or a professional towing company.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine overheat warning lamp
C H
Coolant temperature gauge
When the engine overheats, steam or spray may come out

the engine compartment. Or, the coolant temperature gauge
is closed to “H”. If this happens, the engine overheat warning
lamp comes on and a buzzer will sound. Immediately stop your
Symptoms:
yy The engine overheat warning lamp blinks (Buzzer
sounds)
yy The gauge indicates over the normal range (or in the red
zone),
yy Steam or spray from the engine compartment.
yy Reduced engine output.

GETtheMANUALS.org
When the engine overheats
1. Move off the road to a safe place away from traffic. Park on a Caution
firm and level ground. Apply the parking brake and shift the
yy When the engine overheats because of the low coolant level, im-
transmission to the P position (automatic transmission) or the mediately turn off the engine and let it cool down.
neutral position (manual transmission). yy Opening the reserve tank cap should be performed when the
2. Turn off the air conditioner or heater if used. Open the engine engine is off and has cooled down.
hood to ventilate the engine compartment. yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pres-
reserve tank cap when the engine and the radiator are hot.
ately.
If there is no steam, open the hood and leave the engine run- the engine is still hot.
ning in idling speed. yy Use only Ssangyong recommended (antifreeze) coolants.
4. However, if the gauge doesn’t go down to the normal range yy If the problem continues, have the cooling system checked by a
even in idling, stop the engine and cool it down. Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Center.
5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank. If it is too low,
check for leaks in the radiator hoses and connections. Warning
6. Add coolant into the reserve tank if necessary. yy To avoid being scalded, carefully open the engine hood.
7. If necessary, cover the tank cap with a cloth and turn the cap
a little to release any pressure. After fully releasing the pres- reservoir cap when the engine and the radiator are still hot.
sure, remove the cap and fill up the tank. Then, put the cap yy Extremely careful not to contact to running parts such as drive belt
back on the tank. when the engine is running.
8. If the coolant level is normal, have the cooling system checked
Center.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger vehicle Maximum Load Limits (unit: kg)
therefore handling, braking, durability and economy will be
EU
affected by towing a trailer.
Your safety and satisfaction depend upon proper use of Trailer coupling weight
correct equipment. Also, you should avoid overloading and Maximum Maximum
Engine Type Maximum permissible
other abusive use. Trailer static vertical load on the trailer
coupling device hitch
The maximum loaded trailer weight you can pull with your
vehicle depends on your intended use and what special equip- with brake 2,700
ment has been installed on it. Before attempting any towing, D22DTR 108 25
ensure that the correct equipment is fitted to your vehicle. without brake 750
Your Ssangyong Dealer will help supply and install towing with brake 3,000
D22DTR
equipment to suit your requirement. 120 25
(7A/T+4WD) without brake 750
Trailer Loading with brake 2,300

G20GDi 92 25
To load your trailer properly, you must know how to measure without brake 750
gross trailer weight and trailer ball weight. Gross trailer weight
is the weight of the trailer plus all cargo in it. GENERAL
You can measure gross trailer weight by putting the fully - EU4, EU5
loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. Trailer coupling weight
Trailer ball weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch Maximum
Engine Type Maximum permissible Maximum
by the trailer coupler at its normal towing height. This weight Trailer static vertical load on the trailer
can be measured using a bathroom scale. coupling device hitch
The weight of your loaded trailer (gross trailer weight) should
with brake 2,300
never exceed the specified values. D22DTR 92 25
The permissible trailer loads are valid for several gradients without brake 750
from 6.8% to 12.6% according to engine power applied.
with brake 2,300
When the trailer has been coupled, the permissible rear axle G20GDi 92 25
load for the fully loaded towing vehicle (including occupants) without brake 750
must not be exceeded.

GETtheMANUALS.org
If you want to pull a trailer
Important points:
yy You have to consider a sway control. You can check the sway
control to hitch dealer.
yy If the total driving distance of your new vehicle is under 800
km (500 miles), do not tow a trailer. For the first 800 km (500
miles) that you tow a trailer, do not drive over 80 km/h (50
mph) and do not start off your vehicle at full throttle. Other-
wise, your engine and other parts could be damaged due to
heavier loads.
yy Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than
80 km/h).
yy You have to consider the weight of trailer.
yy The permissible trailer ball weight varies according to the
cargo weight on the deck.
yy It has to be limited to the number of passengers by 5 people
including a driver.
Weight of trailer
To keep the vehicle and trailer safely, you must consider many
factors except the maximum load limit.
The vehicle and trailer’s safety depends on how you use your
trailer. Vehicle speed, altitude, load, outside temperature and
frequency of using trailer are all very important. Any special
equipment on your vehicle also affects on your vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Weight of trailer tongue Trailer Brakes
The tongue load of a trailer is also considered very carefully be- If the trailer brakes are used, you should follow all instructions
cause it affects the gross vehicle weight (GVW) of your vehicle. provided by the manufacturer. Never modify the brake system
This weight includes the curb weight of vehicle, any luggage in of your vehicle.
trailer, and the passengers in vehicle. In addition to that, you must
add the trailer tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will
carry all the weight. Trailer Lights
The trailer tongue should weigh a maximum of 4% of total loaded Make sure your trailer is equipped with lights which meet country
trailer weight. To check the weights are proper, you must weigh and local requirements.
the trailer and the tongue separately after loading. If the weights Always check for the proper operation of all trailer lights before
are not proper, unload some items from the trailer. you start to tow.
Caution
yy Never load a trailer with more weight in the rear side than in the Tires
front side. (Recommendation - Front: approx. 60%, Rear: approx.
40%) When towing trailers, be sure your tires are properly inflated to
yy Never exceed the maximum load limits of trailer or trailer towing the inflation pressure.
equipment. Improper loading may result in damage to your ve-
hicle. It may occur the personal injury. Before driving, check the
weight and loading at a commercial scale or highway patrol office
Safety Chains
equipped with scales.
Always attach safety chains between your vehicle and the trailer.
yy An improperly loaded trailer may cause the loss of vehicle con-
Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer so that the
trol.
tongue will not drop to the road if it becomes separated from the
hitch. Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack to permit full turn-
ing. Never allow safety chains to drag on the road.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake Fluid yy Always have someone guide you when reversing.
yy Allow adequate stopping distance.
Change the brake fluid every 15,000 km (9,000 miles) under the Stopping distance is increased when you tow a trailer.
following conditions.
yy Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too frequently,
yy Towing a trailer frequently. which will cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced
yy Driving in hilly or mountainous terrain. brake efficiency.
yy Always block the wheels on both vehicle and trailer when
Automatic Transmission Fluid parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
yy Parking on a steep slope is not recommended.
More frequent maintenance is required if your vehicle tows trailer
frequently. You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached,
on a hill.
If something goes wrong, such as the trailer/caravan hitch
Towing Tips becoming disengaged, people can be injured and both the
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently com- vehicle and trailer can be damaged.
pared with normal driving condition. yy If someone removing the blocks stands directly behind the
yy For safety, observe the following precautions: trailer, he could be injured. If your brakes or the hitch slipped,
the trailer could roll backward. Make sure anyone removing
yy Practice turning, stopping, and reversing before you begin
blocks from your wheels stands to one side.
towing in traffic.
yy Take note of trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
Do not tow in traffic until you are confident that you can handle
the vehicle and trailer safely.
yy Before driving, make sure that the lighting system of the trailer
works properly.
yy Do not drive faster than 90 km/h.
yy Make sure that you have enough room when cornering and
avoid sudden maneuvers.
yy Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
yy Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Driving on hill 3. When the wheel chocks are in place release the regular brakes
until the chocks absorb the load.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start down 4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking brake,
a long or sleep downgrade. If you don’t shift down, you might and then shift to PARK (P) for automatic transmission, or First
have to use your brakes so much that they would get hot and or Reverse gear for a manual transmission.
no longer work well.
5. Release the regular brakes.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce your speed to a
level which minimizes the possibility of engine and transmission
overheating. When You Are Ready to Leave Af-
ter Parking on a Hill
Note
yy When towing a trailer on steep hill (over 12%), pay particular at- 1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down while
tention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the you:
engine does not overheat. If the gauge reaches to the “H” mark, • Start your engine
stop your vehicle at a safe place and allow the engine to idle until
it cools down. When the engine has cooled sufficiently, you may • Shift into a gear and
proceed. • Release the parking brake.
yy To avoid the engine and transmission overheating, you must check
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
the driving speed depending on trailer weight and uphill grade.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Parking on Hills
You really should not park your vehicle, with a trailer attached, Maintenance When Towing Trailer
on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both your vehicle and the trailer can Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re towing a
be damaged. trailer. See the maintenance Schedule for more on this. Things
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s how to do that are especially important in trailer operation are engine oil,
it: brake pads & discs, automatic transmission fluid. Each of these
is covered in this manual and the index will help you find them
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into PARK (P) for quickly. If you want to tow a trailer, it’s a good idea to review these
automatic transmission yet, or into a gear for a manual trans- sections before you start your trip.
mission.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Accident or fire
If your vehicle catches on fire, don’t panic.

Evacuate any occupants and use the extinguisher.
Accident Warning
Turn on the emergency hazard warning switch. If possible, move yy In an accident, fuel can be released from the vehicle. Therefore,
your vehicle to a safe place to avoid any secondary accidents. stop the engine and avoid any sparks or flames.
If anyone is injured, call an ambulance and contact the nearest yy If you have even a minor burn, see your doctor.
police station.
Fire
Stop immediately in a safe place. Turn off the engine. Use fire
extinguishers to put out the fire. If it is impossible to extinguish
the fire, contact the nearest fire or police station.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance Schedule and Management 7
Maintenance schedule and service interval Wiper blade replacement...................................7-29
0
(EU) - D22DTR....................................................7-2
Fuse and relay box............................................7-30
Maintenance schedule and service interval 1
Bulb specifications and functional check...........7-32
(GEN) - D22DTR..................................................7-5
Location of exterior lamps..................................7-33 2
Maintenance schedule and service interval -
G20GDi................................................................7-8 Exterior lamp replacement.................................7-35 3
Severe conditions.............................................. 7-11 Location of interior lamps...................................7-37
4
Locations in engine compartment......................7-12 Interior lamp replacement..................................7-38
Engine oil...........................................................7-14 Replacing air conditioner filter...........................7-40 5
Engine coolant...................................................7-18 Tire.....................................................................7-42 6

Air cleaner..........................................................7-20 Do-it-yourself operation......................................7-47
7
Fuel filter (D22DTR)...........................................7-22 Emission reduction device.................................7-48
8
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T).......................7-23
Washer fluid.......................................................7-24
Power steering fluid...........................................7-25
Battery................................................................7-26
Spark plugs........................................................7-28
GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval (EU) - D22DTR
check 1,500 km of
driving
necessary
○
Engine
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Battery check ○
○
fill up
Check
Power retighten
Check Check
box, boot check
Check
ment of driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily Remarks
check 1,500 km of (Severe conditions)
driving
Check and adjust or
Check Check
Brake pipe and hose
necessary
adjust
6-speed M/T
sion fluid (Replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
7-speed A/T
mission fluid (Check and replace at every 60,000km under severe condition)
Replace at every
Transfer Case Check
Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
chassis Rear
Check
Apply additional
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
place if necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
wheel
○
age check
Ball joint: Replace
of driving
check
Other
Check
items device
○
lamps operation
○
check
Check
adjustment
○
check
Other
items
○
if necessary
Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval (GEN) - D22DTR
check 1,500 km of
driving
necessary
○
Engine
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Battery check ○
○
fill up
Check
Power retighten
Check Check
box, boot check
Check
ment of driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
Check and adjust or
Check Check
Brake pipe and hose
necessary
adjust
Manual transmis- Inspect at every 60,000 km of driving replace if necessary (Check and
6-speed M/T
sion fluid replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
7-speed A/T
mission fluid (Check and replace at every 60,000km under severe conditions)
Replace at every
Transfer Case Check
Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
chassis Rear
Check
Apply additional
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
place if necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
wheel
○
age check
Ball joint: Replace
of driving
check
Other
Check
items device
○
lamps operation
○
check
Check
adjustment
○
check
Other
items
○
if necessary
Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
Maintenance schedule and service interval - G20GDi
check 1,500 km of
driving
necessary
Igniting timing Check
○
Engine Drive belt Check at every 15,000 km of driving, Replace if necessary
Clean Clean Replace
replacement
Fuel filter Replace at every 100,000 km
Spark plugs Replace at every 60,000 km
Charcoal canister and vapor lines Check
Battery check ○
○
fill up
Check
Power retighten
Check Check
box, boot check
Check
ment of driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
Check and adjust or
Check Check
Brake pipe and hose
necessary
adjust
6-speed M/T
sion fluid (Check and replace at every 100,000 km under severe conditions)
Automatic trans- Check and fill up at every 30,000 km of driving or every year, Replace if
6-speed A/T
mission fluid necessary (Check and replace at every 60,000 km under severe condition)
Replace at every
Transfer case Check
Replace at every
Axle oil Replace
chassis Rear
Check
Apply additional
check
necessary
Check within 10,000
place if necessary

GETtheMANUALS.org
Daily
Remarks
check 1,500 km of
driving
wheel
○
age check
Ball joint: Replace
of driving
check
Other
Check
items device
○
lamps operation
○
check
Check
adjustment
○
check
Other
items
○
if necessary
Check

GETtheMANUALS.org
Severe conditions

Maintenance item Remarks
D22DTR (EU) D22DTR (GEN), G20GDi
Engine oil and oil Replace at every 10,000 km of Replace at every 7,500 km of
Diesel engine 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
filter driving or every 6 months driving or every 6 months
Air cleaner filter ← 2, 5
Brake disc and pad ← 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Lower arm ball joint cleaning ← 2, 4, 5
Drive shaft and boot ← 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
A/C air filter ← 2
Automatic transmission fluid Replace at every 60,000 km ← 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12
Manual transmission fluid Replace at every 120,000 km ← 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11
When driving under the following severe conditions, check frequently by reducing the service interval and replace, if needed:
1. Driving a short distance repeatedly 7. Using the vehicle as a police car, taxi, fleet, tow truck, etc.
2. Driving in a dusty and sandy area 8. Driving at a high speed (170 km/h) frequently
3. Continuously idling foo too long 9. Repeating frequent stopping/starting
4. Driving in heavy traffic 10. Driving on salty road or road with corrosive substances. Or driving
5. Frequent driving on extremely rough roads (sand, gravel, snow, in cold area
off-roads) 11. Towing a trailer or off-road driving
6. Frequent driving up mountain roads or in hilly terrain 12. Driving in a Hot condition (more than 32 Celsius)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Locations in engine compartment
Diesel Engine
Coolant reservoir
Brake fluid
reservoir
Fuel filter
Engine oil filler

Fuse and
cap
relay box
Air cleaner Engine oil
dipstick Battery
Engine oil filter
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Caution
tenance.
yy Keep hand clear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
gasoline engine (G20GDi)
Coolant reservoir
Brake and clutch fluid

reservoir (for manual
transmission)
Engine oil filler cap Fuse and

relay box
Air cleaner Engine oil dipstick Battery
Engine oil filter
Power steering
fluid reservoir
Caution
tenance.
yy Keep hand clear.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine oil
Diesel Engine Level Check
Park the vehicle on a level ground and apply the parking brake.
Stop the engine and wait for more than 5 minutes.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it out with a clean cloth. Reinsert
it all the way.
2. Pull out it again and check the oil level.
3. The oil level should be between the maximum (Max) mark and
minimum (Min) mark on the oil dipstick. Oil should be replen-
ished before the level goes below the minimum mark.
MAX
Engine oil filter
Engine oil dipstick
MIN
Replenishment
1. If the level gets to the lower point, open the filter cap on top of
the cylinder block and add the genuine oil without exceeding
the level of the upper mark.
Gasoline Engine 2. Recheck the oil level after 5 minutes.
Caution
yy Regularly check the engine oil level and add Ssangyong genuine
engine oil if necessary.
yy Clean the dipstick with clean cloth so that any foreign materials
Engine oil filter cannot get into the engine.
Engine oil yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick.
dipstick yy The engine oil may be consumed more if the engine is new.
MAX
Warning
MIN Operating vehicle with insufficient amount of oil can damage the
engine. Make sure the engine oil level is correct and add oil if nec-
essary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Function of Engine Oil * What’s Severe Driving Condition?
yy Driving at the high engine speed or at high-speed
Engine oil’s major function is to lubricate and cool the parts inside
yy Driving for consecutive two hours at high speed
of the engine, which enables engine to work properly.
yy Driving the rough road, off-road, dirt-laden road, and muddy
Consumption of Engine Oil roads
The consumption of engine oil is depending on the viscosity and yy Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are
quality of the oil, and the driving habit. More oil may be required being used
under the following conditions; yy Repeated driving in short-distance
yy Driving with the excessive idling
- When the Vehicle is New
yy High load driving such as trailing
A new engine usually consumes more oil because its pistons,
piston ring and cylinder walls are not yet adjusted with an optimal
condition.
Oil Consumption : Max. 0.5 Liter per 1000 km
Accordingly, it is necessary for the driver to check frequently the
oil level and to replenish oil if needed. SYMC recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle or you
drive the long distance until the first 5000 km.
Engine care
- When driving at High Engine Speeds
Observe the followings to keep the engine in good condition:
As long as you keep the followings with sufficient care in your
first running the vehicle, it will guarantee you to get excellent and yy Check the engine oil level frequently under severe driving
comfortable performance for a long with your vehicle. condition and add some if necessary. The change interval
should be shortened as well.
yy Remember to check the engine oil level and shorten the cycle
to refuel the engine oil under severe driving conditions. yy Do not run a new engine at high speed until its driving distance
gets 1000 km. Be extra careful when the engine is cold.
yy Avoid subjecting to engine to heavy loads by driving at full
throttle, especially be careful when the outside temperature yy After installing a new engine, do not tow another vehicle or a
remains below freezing for the first 1000 km. trailer until its driving distance gets 1000 km.
yy Do not use the trailing in the first 1000 km driving

GETtheMANUALS.org
Change Interval Specification and Capacity
yy The engine oil filter element should be changed at the same Service interval
time with the engine oil. Specifi- DieselQuality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filter. cation (Approved by MB 229.51 5W30 or MB 229.52
5W30)
Engine oil Gasoline Quality class: Ssangyong genuine engine oil
(Approved by MB 229.51 5W30)
Capacity D22DTR 6.0 ℓ
Engine oil filter G20GDi 5.0 ℓ
Service Interval
Warning
Same interval with the engine oil
Use only Ssangyong genuine engine oil and filters. Use of non-
recommended products could cause damage to the engine.
Caution
yy The service interval may be reduced if your vehicle is driven in
rough conditions.
yy Change the engine oil based on the driving distance or period, Warnings and Cautions When Checking
whichever comes first.
Warning
yy Clean the dipstick with a clean cloth so that any foreign ma-
terials cannot get into the engine.
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine engine oil.
yy The oil should not go above the upper mark on the dipstick.
yy Operating with insufficient or too much amount of oil can
damage the engine.
Caution
Regularly check the engine oil level and add the Ssangyong
genuine engine oil if necessary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
SAE viscosity classes
The SAE classes (viscosity) should be selected in accor-
dance with the average seasonal air temperature. Engine
Applying the SAE classes exactly on the basis of the The viscosity should be selected according to outside temperature.
outside air temperatures would necessitate frequently Do not switch to a different viscosity in the event of brief tempera-
changing the engine oil. The temperature limits for the ture fluctuations.
SAE classes should therefore be regarded as reference
temperatures and the actual air temperature may be higher
or lower for a short period of time.
* How to check engine oil specification

Example:
0W, 5W, 10W, 15W, 20W, 25W 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
Winter oil viscosity Summer oil viscosity

(W: Winter)
yy The numerical, for example SAE 10W, relates to vis-
cosity at particular temperature and the alphabet “W”
indicates the oil’s suitability for colder temperature.
yy For summer oil viscosity, higher numbers mean
higher viscosities.
Note
In severely cold or hot region, using the engine oil with SAE
(viscosity) classification suitable for the prevailing outside
temperatures is strongly recommended.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Engine coolant
Diesel Engine
Level Check
Park the vehicle on level ground and apply the parking brake.
Stop the engine and wait until it cools.
1. The coolant level should be between the MAX and MIN mark
MAX on the coolant reservoir.
MIN
2. Check the coolant level. If the level is below the “MIN” mark,
immediately add coolant.
Coolant surge tank

Service Interval
yy Replacement: Every 5 years or every 200000 km
Diesel Engine Ssangyong genuine coolant

10.2ℓ
(D22DTR) Anti-Freeze SYC-1025,
Anti-Freeze:Water = 50:50
Gasoline Engine Gasoline Engine ORGANIC ACID TYPE,
11.5 ~ 12.0ℓ
(G20GDi) COLOR:BLUE
yy Check: Everyday, before driving off

yy Replenishment: Replenish as necessary
MAX
MIN Warning
yy Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap when the
engine and the radiator are hot. The cooling system
may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing
Coolant surge tank
serious injuries.
yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine coolant and anti-freeze.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replenishment Warning
Use only the 50/50 mixture of soft water and antifreeze as When the coolant level is too low, the engine can overheat. If the
specified. coolant temperature gauge in the instrument cluster goes up abnor-
1. Open the coolant surge tank cap slowly when the engine is mally, immediately check the coolant level. Use only the Ssangyong
cold. At this time, you can hear a “hissing” sound. genuine coolant and anti-freeze. If different types of coolants or
unapproved coolants are used to refill, chemical reactions can be
2. When there is no more “hissing” sound, remove the cap from caused and block the flow of the coolant. This may cause the engine
the surge tank. to overheat or burning inside the engine.
3. Add the 50:50 mixture of water and antifreeze to the coolant
reservoir tank. Warning
4. If no unusual things happen, tighten the coolant reservoir yy Scalding hot coolant and steam could be blown out under pressure,
cap. which could cause serious injury. Never remove the coolant surge
tank cap when the engine and radiator are hot.
Caution yy Use only the Ssangyoug genuine coolant and anti-freeze.
Avoid any direct contact of the coolant to the painted body of the
vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Air cleaner
Diesel Engine Cleaning
Blow the compressed air through the element in the opposite
direction to normal air flow to clean the element.
Warning
yy Do not drive your vehicle with an improperly installed air cleaner
element or without it. It may damage the engine or may cause a
fire.
yy Do not let any object enter the housing when cleaning the air clean-
er. It may damage the engine or may cause an engine to stall.
Caution
yy If you blow the compressed air to normal air flow, the engine will
be damaged due to foreign materials entering.
yy Be careful with the direction of the compressed air on the air
Gasoline Engine cleaner.
Caution
If vehicle is operated under severe condition
yy Pollutant area or off-road driving
yy Driving in dusty condition or sandy condition
frequently inspect the air cleaner, if necessary, change the air
cleaner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
DI Diesel Engine Gasoline Engine
If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, replace more often than at the Blow the compressed air through the ele-
usual recommended intervals. If it is dirty, shake the element to remove dust. Clean the ment in the opposite direction to normal
inside of the air cleaner housing and cover with a damp cloth. air flow to clean the element as shown
Clean the air cleaner element by blowing compressed air through it in the opposite above.
direction to normal air flow.
Warning
yy Engine can be damaged.
yy Do not operate the vehicle without air cleaner element.
Change
1. Unscrew the cover bolts and remove the cover.
2. Replace the air cleaner element with a new one. Make sure
that the element is correctly installed in the air cleaner hous-
ing.
3. Close the cover and tighten the bolts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuel filter (D22DTR)
Water Separating Function
If water in fuel gets into the engine and fuel system, it may cause
serious damage to the fuel system. The fuel filter provides the
water separating function to block the inflow of water. When the
water level inside the water separator in the fuel filter exceeds a
certain level, the warning light comes on and the buzzer sounds.
If it occurs, have the system checked by Ssangyong Dealer or
Service Interval

EU
General
Caution
Change the fuel filter according to the specified service interval.
Priming Pump Operating Conditions

1. If the vehicle has been run out of fuel
2. After draining water from the fuel filter
3. After replacing the fuel filter
If this happens, pump fuel until the fuel filter is fully filled. Then,
start the engine.
Warning
After replacing the fuel filter or draining the water from the fuel filter,
bleed the air from the fuel filter by using priming pump. Otherwise,
the engine cannot be started or the fuel system could be damaged
due to the air in fuel line.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)
Diesel Engine Specification and Replacement
Specification DOT 4
Service interval Every 2 years
MAX
Level Check and Replenishment
MIN yy The fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” levels
on the reservoir.
yy Check the level on a level surface. If it drops to or below the
MIN mark, refill the tank with the specified fluid. Only use the
specified fluid.
Caution
yy Be careful not to let any foreign materials enter the tank when
adding the fluid.
Gasoline Engine yy Do not add the fluid above the “MAX” level.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with the body paintwork.
yy After adding the fluid, tighten the cap securely.
yy If frequent refills are required, have the system checked by a
MAX
Warning
MIN yy Use only the Ssangyong genuine brake fluid.
yy Do not allow the fluid to make contact with skin or eyes. If contact
happens, rinse affected areas immediately with plenty of water. If
irritation persists, consult a doctor.
yy The fluid gradually decreases according to brake pad wear. A
sudden drop of the fluid level may indicate a leak in the system.
In this case, have the system checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or

GETtheMANUALS.org
Washer fluid
Top Up Washer Fluid

Diesel Engine Frequently check the washer fluid level and add the specified
product as needed.
In winter, use only the specified washer liquid for winter sea-
son.
Warning
yy The washer fluid includes flammable materials to prevent freezing.
It could cause a fire when directly contacted with flames. When
checking the washer fluid, avoid the flames near the washer fluid
tank.
yy If engine oil or antifreeze is used as the washer fluid, it will de-
crease your visibility through the windshield and may cause an
accident.
Caution
yy If you use plain water as washer fluid, it will freeze during the winter
Gasoline Engine and damage the washer fluid reservoir and motor. Use only the
specified washer fluid.
yy If you operate the washer switch without washer fluid, the motor
could be damaged due to overloads. Therefore, if there is no
washer fluid, do not operate the washer motor.
yy Operating the wipers on a dry surface on the windshield or rear
window without any washer fluid may cause damage to the glass.
Operate the wipers after sufficiently spraying the washer fluid.
yy Avoid any spills of washer fluid on the engine or body paint of your
vehicle during replenishment. If washer fluid spills onto your hand
or other body part, wash it away under a clean water flow.
yy There is no independent washer reservoir for the tailgate window.
The front washer reservoir is also for the tailgate window.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Power steering fluid
Diesel Engine Check the fluid level on a level ground with the engine turned
off. The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks
on the reservoir cap gauge. If it drops to or below the MIN mark,
refill the reservoir with the specified fluid. Only use the specified
fluid. The difference between the MIN and MAX marks shows
MAX fluctuations of the steering fluid between when it is hot and when
MIN it is cold.
Specification and Capacity
Specification S-PSF3
Approx. 1.1
Capacity (L) See NOTE 1: TOTAL FLUIDE DA
(Extreme cold condition only)
Gasoline Engine NOTE 1: Super multigrade fluid with an exceptionally high viscosity
index and a very low pour point, allowing functionality of hydraulic sys-
tems at extremely low temperatures. Excellent lubricating properties
even at very low and very high temperatures.
MAX
MIN Note
In severe cold weather, the viscosity of the power steering oil increas-
es, which can cause temporary abnormal noise at engine start-up.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Battery
Diesel Engine When the battery charge warning light ( ) on the instrument
cluster comes on, the battery is not normally charging. If the
warning light comes on while driving, turn off all unnecessary
electrical devices and have the system checked by a Ssangyong
Battery Maintenance
yy Make sure the terminal connections are securely tightened.
yy If the terminals are corroded, clean them with a wire brush
or sand paper.
yy The battery terminal should be disconnected only when the
ignition key is removed from the key cylinder. Disconnect-
ing the terminal with the key in the “ON” or “ACC” position
may cause a sudden change in voltage and damage various
electrical systems.
Gasoline Engine
yy Check the battery for any cracks, damages or leaks. Replace
it if necessary. To remove any battery fluid on the battery
surface, wear rubber gloves and wipe the fluid out with a
wet-soapy cloth.
Specification
Specification MF / 12V - 90AH
Capacity 90AH (20HR)

GETtheMANUALS.org
Warning Warning
yy The battery has acid that can burn you. And its gas can explode. yy Always use the battery with correct voltage for the vehicle. Other-
You can get serious injuries if you are not careful. Keep naked wise, there is a risk of fire.
flames, sparks and smoking items away from the battery. yy Observe the indications on the battery.
yy Loosely connected batter terminals can set up sparks. These
sparks can cause a fire with flammable gas. Therefore, tightly Always read the safety instructions in the User Manual
connect the terminals. before working on the battery.
yy At night, if you need to check the engine room, do not use a lighter,
The battery cell always contains highly flammable
but only use a battery-powered flashlight.
hydrogen gas which may explode if ignited. Be sure to
yy Because the battery electrolyte is very strong acid, avoid any direct keep it away from a cigarette, a spark or other flames.
contact of the battery electrolyte on your skin or vehicle’s body. If
the acid contacts your skin, thoroughly wash your skin with fresh Wear a protective goggle when charging the battery or
water and see your doctor. Do the same on your vehicle. performing any work.
yy Wear eye protection when working with a battery. If working in a In addition, ensure adequate ventilation of the enclosed
closed area, keep good ventilation. space.
The battery electrolyte solution contains a highly cor-
rosive sulfuric acid. Be careful not to contact it with
Caution
skin, eyes, clothes or paint. In particular, keep out of
yy If you disconnect the battery terminal when the engine is running, the children’s reach.
electrical systems could be damaged.
When in contact with the skin, wash off the contact area;
yy To remove the battery cable, disconnect the negative cable first In case of eye contact, flush with running water for at
and be careful on the battery terminal polarity when you con- least 15 minutes, and seek medical help immediately.
nect the cables. The negative and the positive should not be
confused. The hydrogen gas in the battery is highly flammable and
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for positive and negative may explode if ignited.
cables, must not be interchanged. Never short-circuit the battery.
yy When the ambient temperature is too low, the battery capacity will Do not throw out used battery as this pollutes the
drop and can be frozen. environment and is hazardous to our health. For envi-
ronmental protection, used, properly dispose of used
yy Keep the battery electrolyte at its specified level. If the electrolyte lev-
battery at designated disposal sites only.
el is higher than the MAX level, it can overflow during battery charging
and if the electrolyte is overcharged, the battery can explode.
yy Only use a battery with the approved voltage and capacity. Oth-
erwise, an incompatible battery can catch fire.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Spark plugs GASOLINE ENGINE
Service Interval
Replacement (G20GDi) Change every 60,000 km
NGK SILKAR8H9G
Specification (G20GDi)
Gap 0.9 ± 0.1 mm
Caution
yy When replacing the spark plugs, disconnect the negative terminal
of the battery and turn off all the switches.
yy It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing
the spark plugs (you could burn yourself).
yy Do not use non-recommended spark plugs.
Spark plugs should be inspected periodically for carbon deposits. yy Do not allow contaminants to enter spark plug hole.
When carbon accumulates on a spark plug, a strong spark may
not be produced.
Warning
Do not clean the electrodes with a fine wire brush and carefully
Spark plugs may be very hot. Be careful not to burn yourself.
scrape the carbon off the insulator with a small file. The spark
plugs should then be blown clean with compressed air and the
upper insulator wiped clean. Do not adjust the spark plug gap.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Wiper blade replacement
Front Wiper Rear Wiper Specification
Front wiper
Rear wiper
Left Right
500 mm 650 mm 325 mm
20 inch 26 inch 13 inch
Caution
yy Do not open the hood when the wiper arm
is lifted up. The wiper and hood may be
1. Remove the ignition key and lift the 1. Remove the ignition key and lift the damaged.
wiper arm up from the windshield. wiper arm up from the rear glass. yy Do not operate the wiper when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
yy Be certain not to apply any fluid polish con-
taining oil to the windshield of your vehicle
since this will result in streaks which impair
B vision. Contamination of either the window or
the wiper blades with foreign materials can
A reduce the effectiveness of the windshield
wipers. Never clean up the windshield with a
waxed or oil-saturated cloth.
yy Always lift the wiper arm up on the driver side
first, and then on the passenger side.
yy The wiper arm on the driver side may inter-
fere with the one on the passenger side. It
is normal.
2. Press the wiper blade retainer ( A ). 2. Lay the wiper blade on its side and
3. Remove the wiper blade by pulling it remove it by pulling it out in the direc-
Warning
out in the direction of the arrow ( B ). tion of the arrow.
yy Malfunctioning wipers on a raining or snowing
4. Install a new blade. 3. Install a new blade. day may be detrimental to your driving safety.
4. Put the wiper arm down. Never drive your vehicle with malfunctioning
5. Put the wiper arm down. wipers on a raining or snowing day.
yy Do not touch the running wipers. It may cause
a personal injury.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Fuse and relay box
If any of the electrical system components do not operate, check its corresponding fuse. If the fuse is blown, replace it with the same
capacity.
Fuse and Relay Box in Engine Compartment Interior Fuse and Relay Box
Open the engine hood. Release the clips on the fuse and relay The fuse box is located at the left side of the instrument panel. To
box and open the cover. access the interior fuse box, open the driver’s door and remove
the fuse box cover with your finger.
Caution
Warning
yy When an electrical system does not operate, check its fuse first.
If a fuse is blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same If you do not use genuine parts or specified light bulb, and if you alter
capacity. the HID bulb or LED lamp wiring, fuse disconnection, malfunction
yy If you remove the fuse when the electrical power is supplying, elec- and other wiring damages could occur.
trical equipment could be damaged. Turn off all electrical equip-
ment and set the ignition switch to OFF when replacing fuses.
yy Always replace a specified fuse with the same rating.
yy If a newly inserted fuse blows again after a short time, have the
electrical system checked and repaired by a Ssangyong Dealer

GETtheMANUALS.org
HOW TO CHECK AND REPLACE FUSE
Higher amperage Specified amperage
Normal
Open
1. Turn off all electrical equipment and set the ignition switch to Warning
OFF. yy The use of anything other than the specified fuse could cause
2. Open the fuse and relay box cover. damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire.
3. Locate the defective fuse. yy The use of different types or different rating fuses could cause
damage to the electrical system and even cause a fire. Always
4. Pull out the relevant fuse by using the fuse puller. replace a fuse with the one with the same rating.
5. Visually check whether it is blown or not.
6. If normal, insert it to its original position. Note
7. If blown, check its capacity and replace it with the same ca- The underhood fuse and relay box has some spare fuses. Refill the
pacity. fuses immediately as you use them. The fuse rating is indicated on
the upper surface of the fuse.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Bulb specifications and functional check
BULB SPECIFICATIONS FUNCTIONAL CHECK
Components Quantity
Specifica- 1. Check whether the lamp comes on or off by turning its
tion switch.
High beam 2 H1-55W
2. Check the corresponding fuse when the lamp doesn’t come
Bulb H7-55W
Headlamp
Low beam 2 on.
HID* D8S 25W
Turn signal lamp/Side-marker 3. If the fuse is blown, replace it with a new one.
- LED
lamp/DRL For replacing procedures, refer to the “In Case of Emergency”
Front
Bulb 2 H16 section in this manual.
side Front fog lamp -
LED* LED
4. If the fuse is not blown, check the bulb and replace it with a
Cornering lamp - LED
new one if needed.
Side repeater (Secondary turn signal lamp) - LED
Puddle lamp - LED 5. If the bulb is not defective, have the system checked by a
Welcome lamp (Door handle) - LED Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Service Cen-
Tail (stop) lamp - LED ter.
Rear lamp Turn signal lamp 2 PY21W
Rear Caution
Backup lamp 2 W16W
side yy Use only a specified capacity bulb for replacement.
License plate lamp - LED
High mounted stop lamp - LED yy Disconnect the negative cable on the battery before replacing the
Front room lamp - LED bulb. Remove the ignition key.
Center room lamp - LED yy Do not apply excessive force to remove the bulb cover.
Luggage room lamp - LED yy Make sure that the corresponding switch and the ignition switch
are turned off before replacing a bulb.
Glove box lamp 1 5W
Sun visor lamp 2 5W
yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands immediately after turning off
Interior the lamp.
Front/rear door courtesy lamp 4 5W
lamp yy Do not touch a bulb with bare hands. Fingerprints, dust, or moisture
Foot lamp 2 5W
stuck to the bulb may shorten its life or cause it to explode. If you
Dashboard Lamp (Center) - LED
accidentally touch the bulb, wipe the bulb glass with a soft cloth.
Front/rear inside handle lamp - LED
yy Never try to adjust the headlamp aiming angle. It should be done
Front door trim mood lamp* - LED by a qualified technician in a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
Dashboard mood lamp (Passenger side)* - LED Authorized Service Center.
The LED is not replaxeable. If LED does not illuminate, replace
the lamp assembly with new one.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of exterior lamps
Inside of the lamps such as headlamps, brake lamps, etc. can be fogged
Caution
while raining or during a car wash. This is due to condensation created by the
temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lamps, and To remove exterior lamps or replace light bulbs, visit
the lamps will work normally. However, if large water drops occur or water gets Ssangyong service center for servicing.
into the inside, ask Ssangyong service center about it.
Turn signal lamp &

Tail lamp (DRL)
Turn signal lamp Backup

lamp
License plate lamp
Reflex reflector

GETtheMANUALS.org
HID (High Intensity Discharge)
headlamp
Caution
yy HID headlamp bulb is better than regular (halogen) bulb in yy While driving a vehicle equipped with HID headlamp, the leveling
terms of performance and lifetime; however frequent switching switch should be used depending on the number of passengers
(ON/OFF) of headlamp may shorten the life. and loading condition so that the lamp does not interrupt other
drivers’ views.
yy Unlike regular (halogen) light bulb, HID headlamp bulb slowly
yy If the light does not come on while operating HID type of headlamp
dims when turning on the headlamp even after the bulb ran
(low beam), more complex actions than fuse/relay replacement
out. Therefore, if the HID headlamp turns off and comes on needs to be taken. Therefore, visit SsangYong service center for
again with the headlamp switch ON, the light bulb needs to overall inspections of related systems.
be replaced.
yy HID headlamp is more complex than regular (halogen) head- Warning
lamp, so an extra charge will be applied when replacing.
yy Never remove nor disassemble any parts of HID headlamp (pro-
yy When removing/installing the HID headlamp bulb and unit, the jector, high voltage cable, ballast) to avoid serious injuries due to
angle adjustment (up/down, right/left) should be performed. an electrical shock.
Visit our SsangYong service center and ask about it. yy It is dangerous to contact your body part to the vehicle equipped
with HID headlamp due to the high voltage direct current flowing
Note through the system. Besides, more actions than bulb replacement
Characteristics of HID headlamp bulb should be performed. Therefore, ask SsangYong service center
if malfunction occurs.
yy The color of the light changes during its initial lighting through 4
seconds later until stabilized. yy If discretionally modifying the vehicle equipped with regular
headlamp to HID headlamp, the system will underperform or be
yy Color change by the usage period is an unique characteristic of
overloaded causing malfunction of the vehicle. Additionally, the
HID bulb.
light will interrupt the driver’s view running on opposite side of the
yy Initial stage: light yellow
road resulted in deadly accident.
yy Over 100 hours: light blue
yy Over 1000 hours: blue
yy Late stage: bright red, purple, get dark

GETtheMANUALS.org
Exterior lamp replacement
Rear Turn Signal Lamp Replacement
All lamps except for the following lamps
should be checked and replaced at a
1. Rear turn signal lamp
2. Backup lamp
Warning
yy HID type lamps have a risk of electrical
shock because of high voltage. The 1. Unscrew the 2 mounting screws for 2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to
check and replacement of this lamp
the rear combination assembly and remove the socket.
should be performed at a Ssangyong
Dealer or Ssangyong Authorized Ser-
pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
vice Center. Disconnect the connector to remove
yy Replacing with lamp which does not the rear combination assembly from
the vehicle. A
meet specifications can cause open
fuse or malfunction, resulting in fire.
yy Before replacing lamps, park the ve- Caution
B
hicle in a safe area, and turn the igni- Be careful not to damage the painted sur-
tion switch OFF, and then disconnect face of the vehicle body or rear combina-
the negative (-) battery cable. Some tion assembly when removing it.
functions are required to reset after
reconnecting the battery.
yy The surface of the lamp can be very
hot. Be careful not to burn when remov- 3. Remove the turn signal lamp from
ing lamps. the removed socket by rotating the
lamp in the direction of the arrow ( B )
while pressing it in the direction of the
arrow ( A ).

GETtheMANUALS.org
Backup Lamp Replacement
Bulb specification:
PY21W
4. Install in the reverse order of re- 1. Open the tailgate and remove the 3. Remove the backup lamp in the direc-
moval. backup lamp cover. tion of the arrow.
Caution
Be careful not to damage the components
around the cover when removing it.
Bulb specification:
W16W
4. Install in the reverse order of re-

moval.
Caution
yy When screwing in a new lamp clock-
wise, make sure that the socket fits into
the hole securely.
2. Turn the socket counterclockwise to yy Use a genuine lamp only.
remove the socket. yy Do not install additional lamps or LEDs
to the vehicle.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of interior lamps

B B
C F C
H
G D G
E E

GETtheMANUALS.org
Interior lamp replacement
Front Room Lamp Center/Rear Room Lamp Door Courtesy Lamp
LED type
LED type Bulb type
1. Turn the room lamp switch OFF, and 1. Turn the room lamp switch OFF, and 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
remove the cover using a flat bladed remove the cover using a flat bladed and remove the cover using a flat
screwdriver. screwdriver. bladed screwdriver.

When removing the cover, make sure When removing the cover, make sure to When removing the cover, make sure to
to remove the rear part of the cover first remove the front part of the cover first remove the top of the cover first (marked
(marked with arrows). If you remove the (marked with arrows). If you remove the with arrows). If you remove the bottom
front part of the cover first, the cover may rear part of the cover first, the cover may part of the cover first, the cover may be
be damaged, be damaged. damaged,
2. Remove the lamp by pulling it down 2. Remove the lamp by pulling it down 2. Remove the lamp by pulling it (arrow
(arrow direction) and replace it with (arrow direction) and replace it with direction) and replace it with a new
a new one. a new one. one. Keep the surface of the bulb free
3. Fit the cover. 3. Fit the cover. of foreign matter.
3. Fit the cover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Sun Visor Lamp Driver Side Foot Lamp
Common part
Bulb type
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
remove the cover using a flat bladed and remove the cover using a flat 2. Remove the lamp.
screwdriver. bladed screwdriver. 3. Replace the bulb with a new one.
Keep the surface of the bulb free of
finger print for foreign matter.
4. Fit the cover.
Glove Box Lamp Passenger Side Foot
Lamp Caution
When removing the cover (sun visor lamp,
glovebox lamp, driver/passenger lamp),
remove the part with arrow mark first.
Otherwise, the cover and connectors can
be damaged.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable

and remove the cover using a flat 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable
bladed screwdriver. and remove the cover using a flat
bladed screwdriver.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Replacing air conditioner filter
Replace the Air Conditioner Filter When
yy Unpleasant odor is generated at the first operation after a long unused period.
yy Cooling and blowing capacity have decreased.
Caution Caution
yy Make sure to remove the glove box holder with care. If exces- yy Replace the air conditioner filter at every 10,000 km of driving.
sive force is applied to it, it can be deformed and the glove box However, if the vehicle is operated under severe conditions, such
cannot be securely mounted. as on dusty or unpaved roads, and excessive air conditioner or
yy When replacing the A/C filter, make sure the direction of the heater use, the replacement interval can be shortened.
filter is not changed. yy When the filter is contaminated, it will decrease the cooling or heat-
ing capacity of the system and creates unpleasant odors.
1. Open the glove box by pressing the 2. Pull the holder in the direction of the 3. Disengage the damper clip at the right
open switch. arrow shown in the picture to remove bottom side of the glove box.
it on each side.

GETtheMANUALS.org
4. Remove the A/C filter cover by press- 5. Remove the A/C filter cover. 6. Replace the A/C filter with a new
ing the right side of the A/C filter one. Install in the reverse order of
cover. removal.
When installing the A/C filter, “AIR FLOW

with a mark "↓” should face downward.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Tire
TIRE INFLATION PRESSURE
Under Proper Over

inflation inflation inflation
Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire Inflation Caution
Type Tire Wheel
Pressure yy Maintaining the specified tire pressure is essential for comfortable
235/70R17 7.0JX17 riding, driving safety, and long tire life. Incorrect inflation pressures
will increase tire wear and will impair safety, vehicle handling,
Driving tire 255/60R18 7.5JX18 34 psi comfortable driving and fuel economy. Always make sure that the
255/50R20 8.0JX20 tire inflation pressure is correct.
yy Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure, including the spare
Caution wheel, prior to any long journey (before the tire is heated up).
yy Even the temporarily installed spare tire should be inflated prop-
For 255/50R20 tire, adjust the rear tire pressure to 38 psi if 6 or more
erly.
passengers are carried or heavy loads are carried.
Wheel Alignment and Balance Between Tire and Wheel Note

If the wheels are not aligned as specified, it leads to uneven and The tires should be checked before they are heated up using an tire
faster wear of tire and the vehicle pulls to one side. If the wheels pressure gauge. Increase the tire inflation pressure by 4~5 psi from
the specified value prior to any long journey.
and tires are not balanced, it could result in uneven wear of tire
and vehicle vibration. If the above symptoms occur, immediately
stop driving and have the vehicle checked at a Ssangyong Dealer

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE SIZING CHART
Manufactured week Manufactured year
Section Radial Load

width(mm) index
Tire Date of Manufacture
Aspect ratio Rim diameter Speed In general, all tires should be replaced after six years from the date of
(%) (inch) index manufacture regardless of the remaining tread.
You can check the date of manufacture by looking for the DOT Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The last 4 digits of TIN indicates the date
Load index Speed index of manufacture with the front 2 digits representing the week and the
last 2 digits representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Maximum Load Maximum
Symbol Symbol
(kg) speed (Km/h)
Temperature Inside the Tire
102 850 S 180
The temperature inside the tire increases during driv-
104 900 T 190 ing.
Overloaded vehicle, low tire pressure or driving at a
106 950 U 200 high speed creates more heat and the heat builds in
the tire. The limit temperature of tires is about 125°C. If the tempera-
108 1,000 H 210
ture exceeds this limit, the adhesion between the underlying layers of
110 1,060 V 240 tire is significantly reduced, and this may result in an accident.
Always maintain correct tire inflation pressure specified by the manufac-
112 1,120 Z Over 240 turer and take a break every 2 or 3 hours of highway driving.
The temperature inside the tire drops about 20°C for 10 minutes of
vehicle stationary.

GETtheMANUALS.org
TIRE WEAR CHECK TIRE ROTATION
With spare tire
Front Rear
Without spare tire

Tire tread
Front Rear
Wear limit
Directional tire
The tires on your vehicle have built-in tread wear indicators Front Rear
that appear between the tread grooves. The tire should be re-
placed when the wear indicators appear in two or more adjacent
grooves.
Warning Note
yy Driving on worn or damaged tires is very dangerous and may A temporary tire is installed as a spare tire. Therefore, use the tire
cause an accident. Also, a damaged tire could burst. rotation method for “Without spare tire”.
yy Check tires regularly for any damage (foreign objects, punctures,
cuts, cracks, bulges in side walls) and replace if necessary. Warning
yy Be sure to replace and rotate the tires at a Ssangyong Authorized
Service Center or professional tire shops.
yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure
to use the same size and type tires of the same manufacturer on
all wheels.

GETtheMANUALS.org
WINTER TIRE TIRE CHAINS
Use snow tires when driving on snowy or icy roads. Install tire chains on rear wheels for a 2-Wheel Drive vehicle.
If winter tires are used, they must be installed to all 4 wheels. And install tire chains on all wheels for a 4-Wheel Drive vehicle.
If installing chains on only two wheels is unavoidable, tire chains
Warning should be installed on rear wheels.
yy Drive very slowly with extra caution on snowy or icy roads. If at all possible, install snow tires instead of tire chains for
yy The snow tire with arrow direction markings on its side wall should vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels, since the aluminum
be installed according to the arrow direction. wheels can be damaged by chains. If installing tire chains is the
yy The snow tires cannot guarantee your safety on icy and slippery only alternative, use wire-type tire chain with a thickness of less
road. Drive with extra caution, avoiding sudden acceleration, brak- than 15 mm.
ing or movements of the steering wheel. Drive the vehicle with tire chains installed at a speed of 30 km/h
yy When the snow tires are not needed anymore, replace them or less or at the specified speed recommended by the chain
with ordinary tires. Keep the removed snow tires in a cool and
manufacturer. If a sound of chains being slammed against the
shady place. Be careful not to contact them with any oil, grease,
or fuel.
vehicle body, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately. Check
the installation of the chains carefully and tighten the chains, if
needed. Take tire chains off on dry pavement to avoid damag-
ing the chains.
Do not drive the vehicle with tire chains installed on dry pave-
ment.
Warning
yy Check the installation of tire chains and inspect the vehicle body for
damage after driving about 0.5 to 1 km with the chains installed. If
tire chains have been loosened, retighten the chains.
yy Improper installation or use of incorrect tire chains can damage the
vehicle or seriously endanger the operating reliability of the vehicle
and road safety. Use tire chains that meet the specifications and
install them in a professional manner.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Cautions FOR Wheel and Tire
yy Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. Be sure to use the same size and type of tires of the same manufac-
turer on all wheels. If you do not use the same tires on the vehicle equipped with AWD, it may cause a serious damage to the
vehicle’s drive system.
yy Check the inflation pressure, cracks and tearing of tires before driving.
yy Improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose and even come off. This could lead to an accident. Be
sure to check and tighten the wheel nuts as specified before any long journey.
yy Do not use non-genuine wheel and tire. Non-genuine wheel and tire may have inferior performance and function and danger-
ous for safe driving. Also, any defects due to using them cannot be covered by warranty.
yy Be sure to check the tires and wheels before driving. If a wheel is damaged, the tire inflation pressure can be decreased and
the tire can be damaged.
yy If a tire has been impacted by a stone or any other objects during driving, have it checked by a Ssangyong Dealer or Ssangyong
yy The use of tire sizes other than the specified sizes may cause abnormal operation of the steering wheel, increased fuel con-
sumption, damage to the powertrain or the braking system, vibration, or uneven tire wear. Always use the specified tires from
the same manufacturer.
yy Do not combine the tire and wheel assembly installed in the factory with other types of tires and wheels. Combining with other
types of tires can affect the stability of the vehicle and cause an accident.
yy Make sure that the temporary tire is available at any time. After installing the temporary tire on a wheel, do not drive for a long
distance. Visit a nearby dealer or tire shop to replace the temporary tire with a regular tire for driving as soon as possible.
yy Check the state of emergency tire service kit. Always check the operation of the compressor and the amount of sealant left.
yy Always check the tire pressure before long distance and/or high speed driving and inflate the tires, if needed. Driving at a high
speed with low tire pressure can cause bursting because of standing wave effect, resulting in rollover.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Do-it-yourself operation
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS WHEN PERFORMING DO-IT-YOURSELF OPERATION
Warning Caution
yy Be careful not to touch any hot components such as the engine, yy Check the level of the engine oil and every fluid including coolant
radiator, exhaust manifold, catalytic converter, or muffler when daily. If you drive while the fluid levels are low, your vehicle can be
the engine is just stopped. They may burn you badly. Let the damaged and such damages will not be covered by warranty.
engine cool down before any service. yy Use only the genuine Ssangyong oils and fluids.
yy When working with the battery or fuel related components, al- yy Do not allow oils and coolant to make contact with skin or painted
ways stop the engine and do not smoke. Also, remove all flames surfaces during inspection or refill of them. They can also dam-
or sparks near the vehicle. age paint finish. If skin contact happens, rinse affected areas
yy Do not connect and disconnect the battery terminals when the immediately with plenty of water and then consult a doctor.
ignition key is in the “ON” position. yy Do not overfill the oil or coolant, otherwise the engine and trans-
yy The polarity of the battery, i.e. the connections for the positive mission may be damaged. Maintain the specified level.
and negative cables, must not be interchanged. yy The performance of oils and coolant may be deteriorated when
yy The battery cables and wires transfer high voltage and current. they are exposed to dust and moisture. Be careful not to allow
Avoid any short circuit. contact with dust while refilling.
yy Make sure that the ignition key is “OFF” when performing any yy In spite of very limited driving of your vehicle, oils and other
work in an enclosed space such as a garage. fluids can disappear over the time. Therefore, check their levels
yy Keep the used oil and coolant out of reach of children. (For a frequently.
proper disposal of them, contact a professional service.) yy Improperly disposed engine oil and/or other fluids can pollute
yy When checking your vehicle, you must turn off the engine first. the environment. Dispose used fluids in accordance with local
Then, put the shift lever into the “P” (automatic transmission) or environmental regulations.
“Neutral” (manual transmission) position and apply the parking yy When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your
brake. vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to
yy The electrical cooling fan can start to operate unexpectedly yourself or damage to the vehicle.
even when the engine is stopped. Disconnect the negative bat-
tery cable before you check the radiator, cooling fan or nearby
parts.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Emission reduction device
Catalyst Diesel Particulate Filter (CDPF) - EU5
The CDPF is a compound word for Diesel Oxidation Catalyst
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF), which are exhaust
DOC DPF gas after-treatment devices.
LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) - EU6
The LNT (Lean & NOx Trap) DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) is a
system to eliminate the nitrogen oxide from exhaust emissions.
Use the specified fuel to avoid exhaust smell due to the poor
quality fuel and to maintain the normal performance of the LNT
DPF.
LNT DPF
Regeneration Process
“Regeneration” is the process of combusting particulates when
a certain amount of particulates is collected in the filter. In this
process, the temperature of exhaust gas rises to approx. 600°C
This vehicle is equipped with the Diesel Oxidation Catalyst by fuel control and particulates are effectively incinerated.
(DOC) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) for emission reduc-
tion devices. When the Engine CHECK Indicator Flashes
The DOC converts HC and CO2 in the fuel to H2O and removes Regeneration may not be performed due to sev-
80% of the Soluble Organic Fraction (SOF) among particulate eral operating conditions. And in this case, the
materials, thereby reducing 25% or more of particulate materi- engine CHECK indicator flashes. This flashing
als. function is to inform the driver to take action for
the proper regeneration of the filter.
The DPF collects particulate materials to the filter and removes
them by combustion. This device removes 95% or more of par- If the engine CHECK indicator flashes, drive the vehicle at over
ticulate materials. 80 km/h for 20 minutes to regenerate the DPF. When the amount
of particulates is lowered down to a certain limit, the engine
CHECK indicator goes off.

GETtheMANUALS.org
Caution Warning
yy The vehicle equipped with DPF system may generate the white yy The engine CHECK indicator blinking means an excessive amount
smoke when using the fuel with high sulfur content (over 100 of particulates accumulated in the DPF. If this happens, you must
ppm). This is caused by the sulfur attached and accumulated in drive the vehicle at the speed of 80 km/h or higher for 15~20
DPF. However, this is very natural situation, not caused by your minutes. If you keep driving the vehicle at the speed of less than
vehicle. 80 km/h without following this instruction, it may cause damage
yy How to fix the problem to the exhaust system related to the DPF.
Replace current fuel with high grade fuel as soon as possible. yy The regeneration process of the DPF produces so much heat, so
However, even after replacing the fuel, the white smoke may be never drive or stop the vehicle near flammable materials to avoid
seen due to residual sulfur in DPF system. For safety driving, have causing fire. Also, be sure to stay away from the exhaust pipe and
the system checked at Ssangyong Authorized Service Center. the DPF to avoid getting burned.
yy The presence of an excessive amount of particulates in the DPF
may reduce the engine power.
yy An excessive amount of accumulated particulates can damage
the DPF. Therefore, make sure to drive the vehicle at 80 km/h or
more for 20 minutes at every 500 km.
yy When the engine CHECK indicator comes on, it means that a sen-
sor related to the engine control or an electric device is malfunc-
tioning. In this case, have your vehicle checked by a Ssangyong

GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GETtheMANUALS.org
Index 8
0
GETtheMANUALS.org
A C E
AC inverter power switch*................. 4-90 Caring for your vehicle under 0°C Emergency towing............................. 6-31
AC inverter........................................ 4-91 (32°F)........................................... 3-31 Emission reduction device................. 7-48
Accident or fire.................................. 6-40 Cautions for using smart key............. 4-10 Engine coolant................................... 7-18
Additional functions of smart key*....... 4-6 Cautions when a tire is flat................ 6-12 Engine hood...................................... 4-29
AEBS (Autonomous Emergency Cautions when changing the tire....... 6-27 Engine oil........................................... 7-14
Braking)*...................................... 3-74 Certification....................................... 0-19 EPB (Electric Parking Brake)............ 3-46
Air bag............................................... 2-35 Changing a spare tire........................ 6-22 Exterior lamp replacement................ 7-35
Air cleaner......................................... 7-20 Checks before starting a journey......... 1-2 Exterior lamp..................................... 4-39
Airbag non-inflation conditions.......... 2-40 Child restraints and pregnant
AUTO HOLD*.................................... 3-50 woman......................................... 2-24 F
Automatic heater/air conditioner*...... 4-64 Cruise control switch......................... 3-52
Four wheel drive system*.................. 3-35
Front cup holder/rear cup holder
B D and armrest.................................. 4-87
Battery............................................... 7-26 Defogging and defrosting.................. 4-78 Front seat belt................................... 2-19
Brake and clutch fluid (with M/T)....... 7-23 Dimensions.......................................... 0-2 Front seat heating*/ventilation
Brake system..................................... 3-38 Do-it-yourself operation..................... 7-47 switch*......................................... 2-12
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and Door open lever, lock/unlock knob Front seat............................................ 2-3
LCA (Lane Change Assist) and switch.................................... 4-24 Fuel filler door.................................... 4-30
systems*...................................... 3-68 Double parking.................................. 3-48 Fuel filter (D22DTR).......................... 7-22
Bulb specifications and functional Driver seat easy access*................... 4-37 Fuse and relay box............................ 7-30
check........................................... 7-32 Driving tips for automatic
transmission................................. 3-25
8-2 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
G Instrument cluster................................ 5-2 O
Gauges and display window................ 5-4 Interior lamp replacement.................. 7-38 Opening and closing windows........... 4-26
Gear selector lever in automatic Interior lamp...................................... 4-49 Operation of heater and A/C
transmission*............................... 3-17 control.......................................... 4-65
Gear selector lever positions............. 3-18 L Outside rearview mirror control
Grip handle with coat hanger............ 4-92 LCD Display (main menu)................. 5-22 switch........................................... 4-57
LCD display pop-up message........... 5-48 OVM tools and warning triangle.......... 6-2
H LDWS (Lane Departure Warning
Headlight leveling switch*.................. 4-48 System)*...................................... 3-84 P
Heater/air conditioner system............ 4-61 Location of exterior lamps................. 7-33 Parking assist system I (front/rear
How to fasten the seat belt (3-point) Location of interior lamps.................. 7-37 obstacle detection system)*......... 3-58
in rear 1st seat............................. 2-22 Locations in engine compartment..... 7-12 Parking assist system II (rearview
How to fasten the seat belts (2-point) Luggage compartment features........ 4-93 camera system)*.......................... 3-63
in rear 1st seat............................. 2-21 Parking assist system III* (around
How to fasten the three point seat M view monitoring system).............. 3-64
belt............................................... 2-18 Maintenance schedule and service Positions of engine start/stop button
How to set power tailgate*................. 4-20 interval - G20GDi........................... 7-8 (smart key)*................................... 3-6
How to use service kit (emergency Maintenance schedule and service Power outlet...................................... 4-88
tire repair kit)................................ 6-13 interval (EU) - D22DTR.................. 7-2 Power steering fluid........................... 7-25
Maintenance schedule and service Power tailgate operation*.................. 4-17
I interval (GEN) - D22DTR............... 7-5 Precautions regarding unauthorized
Manual heater/air conditioner............ 4-72 modification & alteration.............. 1-26
Messages on LCD display................. 5-32 Protection of the environment........... 0-18
Inside rearview mirror........................ 4-60 Multimedia......................................... 4-79
Index 8-3
GETtheMANUALS.org
Q Severe conditions.............................. 7-11 U
Quick guide ........................................ 0-8 Shift lever in manual transmission..... 3-14 USB................................................... 4-89
Smart key battery low........................ 3-12 Using emergency key (smart key)*... 3-11
R Smart tailgate operation*................... 4-21 Using smart key*................................. 4-2
Spark plugs....................................... 7-28
Rain sensing wiper*........................... 4-56
Starting the engine and driving the V
Rear 1st row seat belt....................... 2-20
vehicle............................................ 3-2
Rear 1st row seat heating switch* Vehicle care....................................... 1-16
(same for both sides)................... 2-13 Vehicle identification............................ 0-7
cables............................................ 6-3
Rear 1st seat....................................... 2-6
Steering wheel................................... 4-82
Rear 2nd seat*.................................... 2-9 W
Storage compartments...................... 4-83
Rear air conditioner* (dual A/C)......... 4-77 Warning and caution.......................... 2-43
Sun visor........................................... 4-86
Removing the spare tire.................... 6-21 Warning lights and indicators.............. 5-9
Sunroof*............................................ 4-32
Replacing air conditioner filter........... 7-40 Warnings and cautions...................... 4-62
Replacing smart key battery.............. 3-13 Warnings for seat belt........................ 2-33
T
Road safety....................................... 3-28 Washer fluid....................................... 7-24
Tailgate operation (without power
Roof rack........................................... 4-96 When the engine is overheating........ 6-33
tailgate)........................................ 4-16
Tailgate switch................................... 4-15 When the engine is overheating.......... 6-5
S Wiper and washer switch.................. 4-54
Theft deterrent system...................... 4-13
Safety instructions............................... 1-8 Wiper blade replacement.................. 7-29
Tire pressure monitoring system
Safety mode (automatic (TPMS)*......................................... 6-6
transmission)............................... 3-27
Tire.................................................... 7-42
Safety release lever . ........................ 4-23
Towing a disabled vehicle.................. 6-30
Seat belt............................................ 2-16
Trailer towing..................................... 6-35
Seat..................................................... 2-2
8-4 Index
GETtheMANUALS.org
GETtheMANUALS.org
No. PART NO. CODE NO. PRINTING DATE MODEL REMARKS
1 Y400OM1707ER RRX1-7OM0E-7G-300A July 01,2017 Y400
Rexton (G4) (RHD)

OWNER’S MANUAL
ISSUED BY
EXPORT SERVICE TEAM
SsangYong Motor Company
455-12, Dongsak-ro, Pyeongtaek-si,

Gyeonggi-do, 17749, Korea
TELEPHONE : 82-31-610-2740
FACSIMILE : 82-31-610-3762
NOTE: All rights reserved. Printed in SsangYong Motor Company.

No part of this book may be used or reproduced without the
written permission of Export Service Team.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Car Navigation System USER MANUAL Y400 AVN
User Manual
English
Manuel de l’utilisateur
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Gebruikershandleiding
Руководство пользователя
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Please read this manual carefully before operating your set and retain it for future reference.
Designs and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Please visit the Ssangyong Motor website for detailed information about the Car Navigation system.
- AVN manual download website address : http://www.smotor.com
Ver 1.0 1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contents
Precautions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 3
English
Key Product Information · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 4

Key Product Features ················································································································· 5
Component Names and Functions ···································································· ······················· ······ 6

Steering Wheel Controller · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8
Basic Operation ············································································ ··········································· 9
System Settings · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 11
Selecting MODE ······················································································································· 13
Restrictions on Features for Safety Measures · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 16
AVM (Around View Monitor) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 17
Starting Rear Detection Camera Mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 18
Product Specifications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 19
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
Safety Warnings Safety Cautions
English
Even when receiving route guidance from the Multimedia, please abide by Pay attention to traffic conditions while driving.
actual traffic and road regulations.
In some instances, the navigation may provide guidance through restricted
Following only the Navigation route guidance may lead to violations of areas.
actual traffic and road regulations and lead to traffic accidents.
Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of
Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for pro- attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating
longed periods of time could lead to traffic accidents. the device. In addition, the touch screen may not work for some functions
Do not operate the Multimedia system while driving, such as entering POIs when the vehicle is in motion. The touch screen feature will be supported
or conducting route searches. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents. once the vehicle has stopped.
Park the vehicle before operating the device. This product is intended for use within only automobiles. Refrain from
installing this device in products other than automobiles.
Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the Multimedia system. Such
acts could lead to accidents, fire or electric shock. If you want to change the position of device installation, please inquire with
your place of purchase or service maintenance center. Technical expertise
Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. is required to install or disassemble the device.
Such acts could lead to smoke, fire or malfunction.
When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry
If abnormalities occur, such as introduction of foreign materials or smoke and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents
due to exposure to water, immediately discontinue use and inquire with (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the de-
your place of purchase or designated maintenance center. vice panel or cause color/quality deterioration. When experiencing product
malfunctions, inquire with your place of purchase or service maintenance
Continued use as is could result in product malfunction. center.
Refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard. These Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact.
signs indicate product malfunction and continued use may lead to ac-
cidents (fires, electric shock). Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product.
Such acts could lead to traffic accidents. Operating the device for long periods of time with the ignition turned off
will display a battery discharge warning on the screen. Operate the system
with the ignition turned on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Key Product Information
iPod Dolby
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
English
Dolby and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. TomTom
© 1992-2017 TomTom. All rights reserved.TomTom and the “two hands” logo are trade-
Bluetooth marks or registered trademarks of TomTom N.V. or one of its subsidiaries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blue- © 1992-2017 TomTom. All rights reserved. This material is proprietary and the subject of
tooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks is under license. copyright protection and/or database rights protection and/or other intellectual property
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone is required to use Bluetooth wireless technology. rights owned by TomTom or its suppliers. The use of this material is subject to the terms
of a licence agreement. Any unauthorised copying or disclosure of this material will lead to
DivX criminal and civil liabilities.
As a DivX-certified product, this product can play premium HD DivX videos.
(Including .avi and .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX and LLC,
and are used under license.
The are protected by at least one of the following U.S. patents: : 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Using SD Memory Cards

1. The SD Card slot within this device is for map files.
2. The map file has been saved on the SD card for this device.
Do not add, delete, or format files within the SD card. Eject/insert SD card only to update the map with a new version.
3. Please use only the SD card that was provided from the dealer. Do not separate or copy the Map file into a different SD card that you may own.
Such may result in malfunctions or incorrect operation.
4. Ejecting and inserting SD cards while the system is operating may result in SD card or System errors.
To eject or insert the SD card, first turn off the the vehicle ignition.
5. Repeatedly connecting/disconnecting the SD card in a short period of time may cause device damage.
6. The SD card is formatted to include only Map data file.
Saving other files in the SD card may result in system errors or malfunctions.
Upgrade Map & AVN Software download

1. Connect the SD card with your computer.
2. Go to the Upgrade page (URL).
3. URL: http://ssangyong.navshop.com/downloads/
GETtheMANUALS.org
Key Product Features
English
Feature Description Feature Description
With Apple CarPlay, you can make phone calls, exchange
Wide LCD Display Apple CarPlay text messages, use the map, listen to music, and use Siri
Display Provides high quality video and music simultaneously through features.
the 9.2-inch wide screen display with added convenience
through the touchscreen display.
Android Auto With Android Auto, you can use Google map, phone,
voice recognition and music features.
Digital Tuner Feature
Digital Tuner supports memory of 12 broadcast stations for each
Radio FM1, FM2, AM and DAB mode. Bluetooth Connection Feature
Bluetooth Provides Hands-Free feature that enables drivers to make wire-
RDS Services less calls while driving as well as music enjoyment through Audio
Provides AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY features among RDS Services. Streaming.
Media Auto Search Feature

Automatically identifies media files, including video, audio and Digital Screen Control Features
USB Media photos, saved in the USB and SD card and displays as lists for Easy control of screen brightness through the touch screen for
convenience. convenient viewing.
Rear Detection Camera

Miscellaneous Allows you to see the rear through the HD camera when shifting
Uses TomTom Map to reverse.
Navigation Precise guidance can be received using the GPS engine and
accurate map through the high-sensitivity antenna. Around View Monitor - Optional
Allows you to see the front, rear, left and right sides through the
four cameras installed within the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Location of controls
Front View
Button Description
English
1 POWER / VOLUME
1. Used to turn the power on/off or control the volume.
2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to turn the power off.
3. Press shortly to turn the AV on/off.
4. Turn left/right to control volume. (volume control range 0~45)
2 Home
1 1. Moves to Home screen (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5 2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to move to Bookmark mode.
3 MODE
1. Moves to the main mode screen.
2. In Navigation mode, press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to operate
the last AV mode before operated before Navigation mode.
NAVI
4
1. Converts to Navigation mode and displays the current location
regardless of whether AV is On/Off.
2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to move to the screen
where you can search for your destination.
5 SETUP
In any mode, press and hold to display the Settings screen.
In the Radio/Audio/Video/Navigation/Bluetooth Phone mode,
press to display the corresponding settings screen.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear View AVN 42P CONNECTOR
English
6
AVN
PIN NO. SPEC PIN NO. SPEC
1 A1 RL+ B1 NC MM CAN H
2 3 4 5 A2 FL+ B2 CLUSTER CAN H
A3 FR+ B3 AVM ON / OFF SW L
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
A5 NC B / V GND B5 NC SPDIF+
A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
1) Radio Antenna Jack A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- To plug the radio antenna cable A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
2) GPS Antenna Jack A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- To plug the GPS antenna cable A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Rear view camera connector A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- To connect a rear view camera connector A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
A15 NC B / V VIDEO B15 AVM LED ON OFF L
4) USB Port A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- To connect a USB connector for USB function A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
A18 AUTO ANT B18 NC SPDIF GND
5) I/O Connector (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) DAB Connector B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- To connect a DAB antenna cable B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
GETtheMANUALS.org
Steering Wheel Controller
Button Description
English
1 During a Bluetooth Handsfree call, press and hold to end the call.
When not on a call, press to turn Mute on/off.
6
In any mode
2 - Each press of the key will change the mode in order of Radio →Media →
2 3
4 Bluetooth Music → iPod → My Music mode. (If the media device is not con-
nected, corresponding modes will be disabled)
5 In Radio mode
1 - Press and hold to change the radio mode in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM →
DAB mode.
In Media mode
- Press and hold to change the mode in order of USB Music → USB Video →
USB Image mode.
3
Adjusts the volume.
4 While playing
-p ress up/down to move the previous/next file.
In Radio mode
-p ress up/down to move the previous/next preset.
-p ress and hold up/down to move the previous/next broadcast frequency.
5
Operates Bluetooth Handsfree mode.
In Apply CarPlay mode

6 - operates Siri.
In Android Auto mode
- operates Google Voice.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Basic Operation
Starting the System Turning the System Off
English
1. Press the engine start button or set the 2. T
he Ssangyong Motors logo is displayed 1. P
ress and hold (over 1.5 seconds) the POWER/VOL
ignition key to ON or ACC. and the system will boot. button to turn the power off. When the system power
is turned off, the final operating mode is saved.
3. The safety warning page is displayed and 4. O

nce booting is complete, the most recent 2. Current time is displayed when power off.
user consent is enabled. mode will operate. (Default mode is Radio
FM1)
Information Information
- Check the [Auto Disappear] box to turn on the most recently operated mode without pressing the [Agree] button. - When the ignition is turned on again, the system
will automatically turn on the most recently oper-
ated mode.
- The system will automatically turn off if more than
3 minutes has passed in ignition off state and the
driver-side door is opened.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resetting the System Audio Off Audio On
English
1. P
ress the RADIO and SETUP button simul- 1. When the AV is on, shortly press (under 1.5 1. When the AV is off, shortly press (under 1.5
taneously. seconds) the PWR/VOL button to turn the seconds) the PWR/VOL button to turn the
AV off. AV on.
2. The system will turn off and reboot. 2. When audio is turned off, the most recently 2. When audio is turned on, the navigation
operated navigation mode screen will be screen is maintained but the most recently
displayed. operated Audio will start playing.
Information
- Resetting the system will restore all
existing settings and configurations back
to their default states. This is to ensure
device stability.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
System Settings
Settings Menu Radio Settings Navigation Settings Clock Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press 1. Used to set RDS, PTY Seek 1. In the Navigation settings screen, 1. Used to set the time. Press the
and hold the SETUP button. settings. sets whether to automatically start the button at the upper right side
Navigation at start-up. Press the reset to initialize the settings.
button at the top right side to initialize
the settings.
Sound Settings Bookmark Settings Language Settings
2. In the Settings screen, select

the desired settings mode.
1. Used to set sound fader/balance, 1. Used to add/delete/move the 1. Used to set language. After
EQ and other sound settings. bookmark menu. selecting the desired language,
Press the button at the press the button at the up-
upper right side to initialize the per right side. The system will
settings. automatically restart.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Screen Settings
English
1. Used to set the illumination, ratio,

screen off, and other display
settings. Press the button at
the upper right side to initialize
the settings.
System Settings
1. Used to check system information

and Reset/Upgrade the system.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Selecting MODE
Main Mode Media Mode Bluetooth Phone Mode Bluetooth Music Mode
English
1. From the system hard keys, 1. Through Media mode, music, 1. This feature allows the user to 1. This feature allows users to play music
shortly press the MODE button. video, image files in the USB conveniently make phone calls saved in the mobile phone in the car
through Bluetooth audio streaming.
device can be played. with Bluetooth phones.
2. Music may not automatically play de-
2. The feature will not operate unless 2. Before you use the Bluetooth pending on the music player program
there is at least one music, feature, you must first pair/ within the connected device. If Auto
video or image file in the USB connect your mobile phone to Play does not work, re-press the play
device. your car. button.
Radio Mode DAB Mode My Music Mode
2. In Mode screen, select the

desired mode.
1. Plays radio broadcasting from 1. In Radio Mode, press the 1. Radio broadcasts can be played
FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. by saving them through the Radio
button to enter the DAB mode to Recording feature.
listen to Digital Audio Broadcast- 2. Music files within Media mode that
ing. you listen to frequently can be saved
to AVN to create your unique Music
Lists.
Caution
-Up to 100 lists can be saved.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX Mode e-Manual mode Navigation MODE
English
1. Music can be played by connecting 1. Method of using the key 1. The current location of the car is
an external device through AUX. features of this device can be displayed.
conveniently checked through
AVN.
Caution
- When connecting an external
device, the use of a 3-pole
AUX cable is recommended. REMARK
- Connecting an AUX connec- Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
tor jack without connecting an
You can receive traffic information on your AVN.
external device will convert the
system to AUX mode, but only The Traffic Message Channel (TMC) is not
a AVN Service. FM radio stations in several
output noise. When AUX mode countries broadcast TMC information as part
is not in use, make sure to also of their programming. TMC is also known as
remove the connector jack. RDS-TMC traffic information.
Your AVN device uses this information to warn
you about traffic delays along your route and
how you can avoid them.
Note: AVN is not responsible for the availability
or quality of traffic information provided by
TMC.
TMC is not available in all countries or regions.
Visit tomtom.com to check if it is available in
your country or region.
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto Mode Apple CarPlay Mode iPod Mode
English
1. Android Auto can be used by 1. By connecting your iPhone with 1. You can enjoy music by connecting
connecting an Android Smart AVN, you can conveniently use your iPod device with AVN.
Phone with AVN. various features, including
Phone, Navigation, Messages, Caution
Music, and Siri.
-W
hen using iPod mode through an
Connecting Android Auto Connecting Apple CarPlay and iPod iPhone, the Use CarPlay setting in
iPhone Settings must be disabled.
USB Cable USB Cable
Caution
- When connecting USB Cable, use only authentic connection Cable.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Restrictions on Features for Safety Measures
English
If you try to use features such as video mode that may distract
you when you are driving, the system will turn the screen off or the
function will be disabled
- Video is not available while driving. The audio player is not affected
when video is off.
- Slideshow is not available while driving.
T
he restriction screen will disappear when changing gear to P or put-
ting the parking brake on.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Around View Monitor) - Optional
This device also supports Around View Monitor (AVM) for added safety.
AVM is an optional feature.
Pressing the AVM switch or shifting to R will switch the monitor into AVM mode regardless of your current mode.
English
Pressing the AVM switch again or shifting out of R to another gear will automatically turn off AVM mode and restore your previous mode.
When AVM is operating, it is possible to use the volume and mute features.
To change between 2D and 3D View modes, use the View Mode features within AVM Settings.
2D View 3D View
Caution
- AVM screen may appear different from the actual distance. For your safety, always use caution and directly check the rear and left/right sides.
- When AVM is operating, only the volume and incoming call features are supported.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
This system has been equipped with a rear view camera for a wider range of vision for your safefy.
The rear camera will operate automatically when the ignition key is turned ON and the transmission lever is shifted to R.
The rear camera will automatically stop operating when shifted to a different position.
English
When the rear camera is operating, it is possible to use the volume and mute features.
1. Position the ignition key in ACC or ON.

2. Position the transmission lever to R.
Caution
- Rear detection camera screen may appear different from the actual distance. For your safety, always use caution and directly check the rear and left/
right sides.
- When the rear camera is operating, only the volume and incoming call features are supported.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Product Specifications
Name Car TFT LCD Display AVN UNIT MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Supported Files
TS, WMV
English
Power Supply DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Operating Power DC 9V ~ DC 16V Subtitle Support/
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Resolution
Current Con- 2A
Common sumption Supported Files MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Sleep Current 3mA(Head Unit Only) Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Sampling Fre- 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Operating Tem- -30℃ ~ +75℃ quency
perature
Photo File Format JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Storage Tempera- -40℃ ~ +85℃
ture Compatibility BLUTOOTH V4.1
Dimensions 278.4(W) x 175.5(H) x 191.5(D) Frequency Band-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
width
Weight 2.5 Kg Supported A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Profiles
Screen Size 203.90 mm (W) x 114.70 (H) mm (Active area) Bluetooth
Transmission 3.0 dBm
Resolution 921,600 pixel Output
Display
Operating Method TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix Modulation Type FHSS(GFSK)
Backlight LED Channel 79
Frequency Range FM : 87.5~108.0MHz (Step : 100kHz)

AM : 522~1620 kHz (Step:9kHz)
Radio
Sensitivity FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 slot, 16GB Certifica-

Storage tion
USB 1 port , USB2.0 HOST
Device Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Declares that the radio equipment type [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of confirmity is available at the following internet address : http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 A copy of the DoC in the original language is enclosed with the equipment.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
English
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Système de navigation pour véhicules MANUEL D’UTILISATEUR Y400 AVN
User Manual
Français
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel avant d’utiliser votre appareil et de le conserver pour référence ultérieure.
Les modèles et les spécifications sont sujets à changement sans préavis.
Visitez la page Web de Ssangyong Motor pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur le système de navigation pour véhicules.
- Adresse du site Web de téléchargement du manuel AVN : http://www.smotor.com
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contents
Précautions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 23
Informations clés relatives ·au
· · · ·produit 24
Français
························································································· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ··
Caractéristiques clés du· ·produit

· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 25
Noms et fonctions des composants ··································································· ······················· ······ 26

Dispositif de commande à volant
· · · · · · ·de
· · · direction
· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 28
Fonctionnement de· · base

·········································································· ··········································· 29
Réglages du système
············································································ · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 31
Sélection du mode · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 33
Restrictions relatives aux caractéristiques des mesures

· · · · · · · de
· · · · sécurité
······································ · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 36
AVM (Écran de visualisation du
· · ·périmètre)
··································································· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 37
Caméra de détection arrière · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 38
Spécifications du produit· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 39
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Précautions
Avertissements en matière de sécurité Mises en garde en matière de sécurité
Même si vous recevez des conseils sur le guidage routier du système Prêtez attention aux conditions de la circulation pendant que vous conduisez.
Français
Multimédia, veuillez respecter les règles de circulation en vigueur.
Dans certains cas, le système de navigation peut fournir une orientation
Respecter uniquement le système de navigation ou de guidage peut dans les zones d’accès limité.
entrainer une violation des règles de circulation routière et causer des
accidents de circulation. L’utilisation du dispositif pendant la conduite peut causer des accidents, faute
d’attention à l’environnement extérieur. Garez d’abord votre véhicule avant
Évitez de fixer l’écran lorsque vous conduisez. Si vous le faites pendant de mettre le dispositif en marche. De plus, certaines fonctionnalités pourront
une période prolongée, vous pouvez causer des accidents de circulation. ne peut pas être activées via l’écran tactile lorsque le véhicule roule. L’écran
Évitez de mettre en marche le système Multimédia lorsque vous condui- tactile fonctionne uniquement lorsque le véhicule est à l’arrêt.
sez, comme entrer les POI ou rechercher les itinéraires. Ces actions
peuvent causer des accidents de circulation. Cet appareil est réservé à un usage dans les automobiles seulement. Évi-
tez d’installer ce dispositif dans des appareils autres que les automobiles.
Garez votre véhicule avant de mettre le dispositif en marche.
Si vous souhaitez modifier la position d’installation de l’appareil, contac-
Ne démontez pas, ne montez pas et ne modifiez pas le système Multi- tez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien. Une expertise technique est
média. Ces actions peuvent provoquer des accidents de circulation, des exigée lors de l’installation ou du démontage de l’appareil.
incendies ou des chocs électriques.
Évitez de verser l’eau ou d’introduire des objets étrangers dans l’appa- Pendant le nettoyage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’éteindre l’appareil et
reil. Ces actions peuvent provoquer de la fumée, des incendies ou des d’utiliser un chiffon doux et sec. N’utilisez jamais des matériaux durs, des
dysfonctionnements. produits chimiques ou des solvants (alcool, benzène, diluants, etc.) car ceux-
ci peuvent endommager le panneau de l’appareil ou entraîner la détérioration
En cas d’irrégularités, comme l’introduction des corps étrangers ou la fu- de la couleur ou la dégradation de la qualité. Lorsque l’appareil connaît des
mée due à l’exposition à l’eau, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil dysfonctionnements, contactez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien.
et contactez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien.
N’exposez pas l’appareil à des chocs ou impacts violents.
Une utilisation continue pourrait entraîner les dysfonctionnements de l’appareil.
Évitez d’utiliser l’appareil si l’écran est blanc ou si aucun son n’est perçu. Une pression directe sur la partie avant du moniteur peut endommager
Ces signes sont de nature à indiquer le dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. l’écran LCD ou l’écran tactile.
Une utilisation continue peut provoquer des accidents (incendie ou chocs En cas d’utilisation prolongée de l’appareil avec le contact coupé, un
électriques). signal d’avertissement de décharge de batterie s’affiche à l’écran. Utilisez
Évitez d’arrêter ou de stationner le véhicule dans les zones de station- le système avec la clé de contact en position de marche.
nement interdit pour mettre en marche l’appareil. Ces actions peuvent
causer des accidents de circulation.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Informations relatives au produit clés
iPod Dolby
iPod est une marque déposée d’Apple Inc. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby et le symbole double-D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Français
Apple CarPlay est une marque déposée d’Apple Inc. TomTom

Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tous droits réservés. TomTom et le logo « deux mains » sont des
marques de commerce ou des marques déposées de TomTom N.V. ou l’une de ses filiales.
La marque verbale et les logos Bluetooth sont des marques déposées apparte-
nant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation de ces marques se fait sous licence. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tous droits réservés. Ces données sont exclusives et font l’objet
Vous devez disposer d’un téléphone mobile Bluetooth pour utiliser la technologie d’une protection de droits d’auteur ou une protection des droits de base de données et
sans fil Bluetooth. d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par TomTom ou ses fournisseurs. L’uti-
lisation de ces données est soumise aux clauses d’un contrat de licence. Toute copie ou
DivX divulgation non autorisée engage votre responsabilité civile et pénale.
En tant que produit certifié DivX, il peut lire des vidéos HD DivX haut de
gamme. (Notamment .avi et .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified et les logos associés sont des marques commerciales de
DivX et LLC, et sont utilisés sous licence.
Ils sont protégés par au moins un des brevets américains suivants : : 7, 295,
673 ; 7, 460, 668 ; 7, 515, 710 ; 7, 519, 274
Utilisation des cartes mémoire SD

1. La fente de la carte SD dans cet appareil est réservée aux fichiers de carte.
2. Le fichier de carte a été enregistré sur la carte SD de cet appareil.
Évitez d’ajouter, de supprimer ou de formater les fichiers sur la carte SD. Éjectez/insérez la carte SD uniquement pour mettre à jour la carte avec une nouvelle version.
3. Utilisez seulement la carte SD qui a été fournie par le revendeur. Évitez de séparer ou de copier le fichier de carte sur une autre carte SD que vous possédez.
Une telle action pourra entraîner des dysfonctionnements ou une mauvaise manipulation.
4. L’éjection et l’insertion des cartes SD pendant la mise sous tension du système peut causer des pannes du système ou des cartes SD.
Pour éjecter ou insérer la carte SD, coupez d’abord le contact du véhicule.
5. L’insertion ou le retrait à plusieurs reprises de la carte SD pendant une courte période peut endommager l’appareil.
6. La carte SD est formatée pour inclure uniquement le fichier des données de carte.
L’enregistrement d’autres fichiers dans la carte SD peut entraîner des erreurs de système ou des dysfonctionnements.
Téléchargement de la carte mise à niveau et du logiciel AVN

1. Connectez la carte SD à votre ordinateur.
2. Accédez à la page Mise à niveau (URL).
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fonctionnalités clés du produit
Fonctionnalités Description Fonctionnalités Description
Français
Grâce à Apple CarPlay, vous pouvez passer des ap-
Écran large LCD Apple CarPlay pels, échanger des messages texte, utiliser la carte,
Écran Fournit en même temps un contenu vidéo et musical de écouter la musique, et utiliser les fonctionnalités Siri.
qualité supérieure à travers un grand écran tactile de
9,2 pouces pour plus de facilité. Avec Android Auto, vous pouvez utiliser Google map,
Android Auto le téléphone, la reconnaissance vocale et les fonc-
tionnalités musicales.
Caractéristique de syntoniseur numérique
Le syntoniseur numérique prend en charge la mémoire de
12 stations de diffusion pour chaque mode FM1, FM2, AM Fonction de connexion Bluetooth
Radio et DAB. Fournit une caractéristique mains libres qui permet aux
Services RDS Bluetooth conducteurs d’émettre des appels sans fil tout en condui-
Fournit les fonctions AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY avec les sant et d’apprécier la musique grâce à la diffusion audio en
services RDS. continu.
Fonction de recherche automatique de médias

Identifie automatiquement les fichiers multimédias, y com- Fonctions de commandes d’écran numérique
Périphérique USB pris les fichiers vidéo, audio et les photos enregistrés sur Contrôlez facilement la luminosité de l’écran sur l’écran
les cartes USB et SD et les affichent comme des listes pour tactile pour un visionnement en tout confort.
plus de commodité.
Caméra de détection arrière
Divers Vous permet de voir l’arrière via la caméra HD lorsque vous
Usages de la carte TomTom effectuez la marche arrière.
Grâce à un moteur GPS, vous pouvez recevoir un guidage
Navigation très précis et une carte fiable via une antenne à haute Écran de visualisation du périmètre - En option
sensibilité. Permet une vision des côtés avant, arrière, gauche et droit à
travers les quatre caméras installées dans le véhicule.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Noms et fonctions des composants
Vue avant
Bouton Description
ALIMENTATION / VOLUME
Français
1 1. Utilisé pour allumer / éteindre l’appareil ou contrôler le volume.

2. Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée (plus d’une seconde et
demie) pour éteindre l’appareil.
3. Appuyez brièvement sur la touche pour activer / désactiver AV.
4. Tournez le bouton à gauche/droite pour régler le volume. (plage de
contrôle du volume 0~45)
2 Accueil
1 1. Passez à l’écran d’accueil (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5
2. Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée (plus d’une seconde
et demie) pour passer au mode Marque-page.
3 MODE
1. Passe à l’écran du mode principal.
2. Dans le mode Navigation, appuyez et maintenez la touche en-
foncée (plus d’une seconde et demie) pour exécuter le dernier
mode AV activé avant le mode Navigation.
4 NAVI
1. Conversion au mode Navigation et affichage de l’emplacement
actuel que AV soit activé ou non.
et demie) pour passer à l’écran qui vous permettra de recher-
cher votre destination.
5 CONFIGURATION
Quel que soit le mode activé, maintenez la touche enfoncée pour
afficher l’écran Paramètres.
Dans le mode Radio/Audio/Vidéo/Navigation/Téléphone Bluetooth,
appuyez pour afficher l’écran de réglages correspondant.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Français
6
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
B20 E-CALL MUTE
B22 MIC-
B24 PGND
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dispositif de commande à volant de direction
Bouton Description
1 Pendant l’appel mains-libres Bluetooth, appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée
pour mettre fin à l’appel.
Français
Lorsque vous ne passez pas d’appel, appuyez pour activer ou désactiver le son.
6
Quel que soit le mode activé
2 - Chaque pression sur la touche modifie le mode selon l’ordre de mode Radio →Multimédia
2 3 → Musique Bluetooth → iPod → Ma Musique. (Si le périphérique multimédia n’est pas
4 connecté, les modes correspondants seront désactivés)
En mode Radio
- Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée pour modifier le mode Radio selon l’ordre de
5 1 mode FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
En mode Multimédia
- Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée pour modifier ce mode selon l’ordre de mode
Musique USB → Vidéo USB → Image USB.
3
Règle le volume.
4 Pendant la lecture
- appuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS pour déplacer le fichier précédent/suivant.
En mode Radio
- appuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS pour déplacer la présélection précédente/
suivante.
-a ppuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS et maintenez-la enfoncée pour déplacer la
fréquence de radiodiffusion précédente/suivante.
5
Active le mode mains libres Bluetooth.
En mode Apple CarPlay

6 - exécute Siri.
En mode Android Auto
- exécute Google Voice.
28
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fonctionnement de base
Démarrage du système Arrêt du système
Français
1. Alors que le système est en marche, appuyez sur le bouton ALI-
1. Appuyez sur le bouton du démarreur ou 2. Une fois le système mis sous tension, le MENTATION/VOLUME (pendant plus de 1,5 secondes) et main-
réglez la clé de contact sur ON ou ACC. processus de démarrage est enclenché et tenez-le enfoncé pour éteindre la machine. Lorsque le système est
l’écran du logo s’affiche. mis hors tension, le dernier mode de fonctionnement est enregistré.
3. L
a page d’avertissement en matière de sécurité 4. Appuyez sur le bouton [Accepter] pour afficher 2. L’heure actuelle s’affiche lorsque le sys-
s’affiche et l’accord de l’utilisateur est activé. le mode le plus récent. (Le mode par défaut est tème est à l’arrêt.
Radio FM1)
Informations Informations
- Cochez la case [Disparition auto] pour activer le mode récemment utilisé sans appuyer sur le bouton [Accepter]. - Après un nouveau démarrage, le système active
automatiquement le mode de fonctionnement le
plus récent.
- Si plus de 3 minutes se sont écoulées dans l’état du
contact d’allumage éteint, le système s’arrête auto-
matiquement et la porte côté conducteur s’ouvre.
29
GETtheMANUALS.org
Réinitialisation des réglages Audio désactivé Audio activé
Français
1. Appuyez simultanément sur les boutons 1. L

orsque AV est activé, appuyez brièvement sur 1. L
orsque AV est désactivé, appuyez brièvement
MODE et CONFIGURATION. le bouton ALIMENTATION/VOLUME (pendant sur le bouton ALIMENTATION/VOLUME (pen-
plus de 1,5 secondes) pour désactiver AV. dant plus de 1,5 secondes) pour activer AV.
2. Le système s’éteint et redémarre. 2. Lorsque le son est coupé, l’écran du mode 2. Lorsque le son est activé, l’écran de navi-
de navigation le plus récent s’affiche. gation est maintenu, toutefois le contenu
Audio le plus récent commence à jouer.
Informations
-L
a réinitialisation du système va restaurer tous
les paramètres et les configurations existants aux
valeurs d’usine. Ceci pour garantir la stabilité de
l’appareil et ne constitue pas un défaut de système.
30
GETtheMANUALS.org
Réglages du système Paramètres radio Paramètres de navigation Paramètres de l’horloge
Français
1. À partir des touches non program- 1. Utilisé pour définir les para- 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres de Naviga- 1. Utilisé pour régler l’heure.
tion, définissez si la navigation sera lancée
mables du système, appuyez sur mètres RDS, PTY. automatiquement au démarrage. Appuyez
Appuyez sur le bouton situé
le bouton CONFIGURATION et sur le bouton de réinitialisation sur au coin supérieur droit pour
maintenez-le enfoncé. le côté supérieur droit pour initialiser les initialiser les paramètres.
paramètres.
Paramètres de son Paramètres des signets Paramètres de langues
2. Dans l’écran Paramètres, sélec-

tionnez le mode de réglages de
1. Utilisé pour régler l’atténuation 1. Utilisé pour ajouter/supprimer 1. Utilisé pour définir la langue.
votre choix. ou l’équilibre sonore, l’EQ et les signets ou aller au menu des Après avoir sélectionné la
d’autres réglages sonores. signets. Appuyez sur le bouton langue de votre choix, appuyez
Appuyez sur le bouton situé situé au coin supérieur droit
au coin supérieur droit pour sur le bouton situé au coin
pour initialiser les paramètres.
initialiser les paramètres. supérieur droit. Le système
redémarre automatiquement.
31
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres de l’écran
Français
1. Utilisé pour régler l’éclairage, le

ratio, l’écran éteint, et d’autres
paramètres d’affichage.
Appuyez sur le bouton situé
au coin supérieur droit pour
initialiser les paramètres.
1. Utilisé pour vérifier les informa-

tions du système et Réinitialiser/
Mettre à niveau le système.
32
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sélection du mode
Mode principal Mode multimédia Mode Téléphone Bluetooth Bluetooth Music Mode
Français
1. À partir des touches non 1. Grâce au mode multimédia, il est pos- 1. Cette fonctionnalité permet à 1. Cette fonctionnalité permet à l’utilisateur de
sible de lire les fichiers audio/vidéoet l’utilisateur de passer des appels jouer la musique stockée dans le téléphone
programmables du système, portable dans le véhicule par diffusion
les images stockés dans une clé USB. en toute simplicité à l’aide des
appuyez de façon brève sur le audio Bluetooth.
téléphones Bluetooth.
bouton MODE. 2. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas active 2. La lecture de la musique n’est pas auto-
2. Avant d’utiliser la fonctionnalité matique en fonction du programme de
lorsque la clé USB ne contient aucun Bluetooth, vous devez d’abord lecteur de musique installé sur l’appareil
fichier musique, vidéo ou image. coupler/connecter votre téléphone connecté. Si Auto Play ne fonctionne pas,
portable à votre véhicule. appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton Lire.
Mode Radio Mode DAB Mode Ma Musique
2. Dans l’écran Mode, sélectionnez

le mode de votre choix.
1. Diffuse les émissions radio 1. En mode Radio, Appuyez sur le 1. Vous pouvez écouter les émissions radio
en les enregistrant grâce à la fonctionnalité
FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. bouton pour passer au mode Enregistrement radio.
DAB et écouter la radiodiﬀusion 2. Vous pouvez également enregistrer les fi-
chiers audio du mode multimédia que vous
sonore numérique. écoutez fréquemment dans AVN pour créer
vos Listes musicales personnalisées.
Mise en garde
- 100 listes au maximum peuvent
être enregistrées.
33
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode AUX Mode e-manuel Mode NAVIGATION
Français
1. Vous pouvez écouter la mu- 1. Vous pouvez correctement 1. La localisation actuelle du véhi-
sique en connectant un périphé- contrôler la méthode d’utilisation cule s’affiche.
rique externe via AUX. des principales fonctionnalités
de cet appareil via AVN.
REMARQUE
Mise en garde
Canal de messages routiers (TMC)
- Lorsque vous connectez un
périphérique externe, l’utilisa- Vous pouvez recevoir des informations relative à la
tion d’un câble AUX à 3 pôles circulation sur votre AVN.
est recommandée.
Le canal des messages routiers (TMC) n’est pas un
- Le raccordement d’un service AVN. Des stations radio FM dans plusieurs
connecteur AUX sans la pays diffusent des informations relatives à la circu-
connexion d’un périphé- lation dans leurs programmes. Les messages TMC
rique externe fait basculer sont également connus sous le nom d’informations
le système vers le mode RDS-TMC relatives à la circulation.
AUX, toutefois, seul un bruit
Votre périphérique AVN utilise ces informations
parasite est émis. Lorsque le pour vous avertir sur des éventuels retards liés à
mode AUX n’est pas utilisé, la circulation sur l’itinéraire que vous avez choisi et
assurez-vous de retirer le comment les éviter.
connecteur.
Remarque : AVN décline toute responsabilité pour
la disponibilité ou la qualité des informations rela-
tives à la circulation routière présentée par le TMC.
Le TMC n’est pas disponible dans tous les pays, ni

dans toutes les régions.
Rendez-vous sur tomtom.com pour vérifier s’il est

disponible dans votre pays.
34
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Android Auto Mode Apple CarPlay Mode iPod
Français
1. Vous pouvez utiliser Android 1. En connectant votre iPhone 1. Vous pouvez profiter de la
Auto en connectant un smart- à AVN, vous pouvez utiliser musique en connectant votre
phone Android à AVN. aisément diverses fonctionnalités, appareil iPod à AVN.
notamment Téléphone, Navigation,
Messages, Musique, et Siri. Mise en garde
Connexion d’Android Auto Connexion d’Apple CarPlay et de l’iPod -L
orsque vous utilisez le mode iPod
via un iPhone, vous devez désac-
tiver le paramètre Utiliser CarPlay
dans les Paramètres de l’iPhone.
Câble USB Câble USB
Mise en garde
- Lors de la connexion du câble USB, utilisez uniquement un câble de
connexion authentique.
35
GETtheMANUALS.org
Restrictions relatives aux caractéristiques des mesures de sécurité
Restrictions relatives aux caractéristiques des
mesures de sécurité
S
i vous essayez d’utiliser des fonctionnalités comme le mode vidéo, qui
peuvent vous distraire pendant la conduite, le système éteint l’écran ou
Français
désactive la fonction
- La vidéo est indisponible pendant la conduite. Le lecteur audio n’est pas
affecté lorsque la vidéo est arrêtée.
- Le diaporama est indisponible pendant la conduite.
L
’écran de restriction disparaît lorsque vous placez le levier à la position P
ou lorsque vous actionnez le frein de stationnement.
36
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Écran de visualisation du périmètre) - En option
Cet appareil prend également en charge la fonction AVM (Écran de visualisation du périmètre) pour une sécurité accrue.
AVM est une fonctionnalité en option.
Lorsque vous appuyez sur le commutateur AVM ou positionnez le levier sur R, l’écran bascule vers le mode AVM indépendamment du mode en cours.
Lorsque vous appuyez à nouveau sur le commutateur AVM ou passez de R vers une autre vitesse, le mode AVM se désactive automatiquement et
Français
le mode précédent est restauré.
Lorsque l’AVM est en marche, il est possible d’utiliser les fonctionnalités du volume et de la mise en sourdine.
Pour basculer entre les modes d’affichage 2D et 3D, utilisez les fonctionnalités du Mode d’affichage dans les Réglages de l’AVM.
Affichage 2D Affichage 3D
Mise en garde
-L a distance indiquée par l’écran AVM peut être différente de la distance réelle. Pour votre sécurité, soyez toujours prudents et contrôlez directement les côtés
arrière et gauche/droite.
- Lorsque l’AVM est en marche, seules les fonctionnalités du volume et des appels entrants sont prises en charge.
37
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ce système est équipé d’une caméra de recul pour une portée visuelle élargie qui garantit votre sécurité.
La caméra de recul fonctionne automatiquement lorsque la clé de contact est sur la position « ON » et le levier de changement de vitesses se trouve
sur la position R.
La ccaméra de recul arrête de fonctionner automatiquement lorsque vous changez de position.
Français
Lorsque la caméra de recul est en marche, vous pouvez utiliser les fonctionnalités du volume et de la mise en sourdine.
1. Placez la clé de contact sur ACC ou sur ON.

2. Placez le levier de changement de vitesses sur R.
Mise en garde
- L’écran de la caméra de détection arrière peut sembler différent de la distance réelle. Pour votre sécurité, soyez toujours prudents et contrôlez direc-
tement les côtés arrière et gauche/droite.
- Lorsque la caméra de recul est en marche, seules les fonctionnalités du volume et des appels entrants sont prises en charge.
38
GETtheMANUALS.org
Spécifications du produit
Nom Unité AVN à écran LCD TFT du véhicule Fichiers pris en MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
charge TS, WMV
Alimentation
14,4 V CC Vidéo MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
électrique Codec
WMV7/8
Français
Puissance de 9 V CC ~ 16 V CC
fonctionnement Support / Réso-
lution de sous-titre SMI / D1 720 X 480 (729 X 590), HD 1280 X 720P (1289 X 729)
Consommation de 2 A
courant Fichiers pris en MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
charge
Commun Courant en veille 3 mA (Unité centrale uniquement)
Audio Débit binaire 32 Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Température de -30 ℃ ~ +75 ℃ Fréquence
fonctionnement 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz
d’échantillonnage
Température de -40 ℃ ~ +85 ℃ Photo Format de fichier JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
stockage
Compatibilité BLUETOOTH V4.1
Dimensions 278,4 (L) x 175,5 (H) x 191,5 (P) Largeur de bande
2 402 ~ 2 480 MHz
de fréquence
Poids 2,5 kg
Profils pris en A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
charge
Taille de l’écran 203,90 mm (L) x 114,70 mm (H) (zone active) Bluetooth
Sortie de trans- 3,0 dBm
Résolution 921 600 pixels mission
Écran Mode de fonction- TFT, Commutation en plan (IPS), matrice active Type de modu-
FHSS (GFSK)
nement lation
Rétroéclairage LED Canal 79
Gamme de fré- FM : 87.5 ~ 108.0 MHz (Étape : 100 kHz)

quences AM : 522 ~ 1620 kHz (Étape : 9 kHz)
Radio
Sensibilité FM : 10 dBuV, AM : 40dBuV EMF
Certifica-
SD 1 fente, 16 Go tion
Dispositif
de stoc- USB 1 port, USB2.0 HOST Digen Co., Ltd., soussigné, déclare par la présente que le type d’équipement radio [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] est conforme à
kage la Directive 2014/53/UE.
Vous trouverez le texte intégral de la déclaration de conformité de l’UE sur le site : http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 Une copie de la DdC dans la langue originale est jointe à cet équipement.
39
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Français
40
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistema di navigazione per auto MANUALE DELL’UTENTE Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Italiano
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Leggere attentamente questo manuale prima di utilizzare il navigatore. Conservare il manuale per riferimento futuro.
Gli schemi e le caratteristiche tecniche sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso.
Per ulteriori informazioni sul sistema di navigazione, visitare il sito web di Ssangyong Motor.
41
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommario
Precauzioni · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 43
Informazioni principali sul prodotto · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 44
Caratteristiche principali del prodotto ······························································································· 45
Nomi e funzioni dei componenti 46
Italiano
········································································ ······················· ······
Comando sul volante · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 48

Funzionamento di base ··································································· ··········································· 49
Impostazioni del sistema · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 51
Selezione della modalità ············································································································· 53
Limitazioni delle funzioni come misura di sicurezza · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 56
AVM (Around View Monitor) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 57
Videocamera posteriore · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 58
Specifiche del prodotto · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 59
42
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauzioni
Avvertenze di sicurezza Note di sicurezza

Anche quando si ricevono direzioni di guida dal sistema Multimedia, si Fare attenzione alle condizioni del traffico durante la guida.
prega di rispettare il traffico effettivo e le regole della strada.
In alcuni casi, la navigazione potrebbe dirigere ad aree limitate al traffico.
Seguire solo le direzioni di guida può causare violazioni del traffico effetti-
vo e delle regole della strada e dare luogo a incidenti stradali. L’uso dell'apparecchio durante la guida potrebbe causare incidenti a
causa della diminuita attenzione verso l’ambiente esterno. Parcheggiare il
Italiano
Non fissare lo schermo durante la guida. Fissare lo schermo per lunghi veicolo prima di usare l'apparecchio. Il touch screen potrebbe inoltre non
periodi di tempo potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. funzionare per alcune modalità quando il veicolo è in moto. Il touch screen
funziona solo quando il veicolo è fermo.
Non utilizzare il sistema Multimedia (inserire POI o cercare percorsi)
durante la guida. Ciò potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. Questo prodotto è riservato all’uso nelle automobili. Non installare questo
apparecchio in ambienti diversi dalle automobili.
Parcheggiare il veicolo prima di usare l'apparecchio.
Se si desidera cambiare la posizione di installazione del dispositivo,
Non assemblare, smontare o modificare il sistema Multimedia. Potrebbero contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato. Per installare o
verificarsi incidenti, incendi o scosse elettriche. smontare l'apparecchio è richiesta un’esperienza tecnica.
Fare attenzione a non bagnare l’apparecchio e a non introdurvi oggetti
Quando si pulisce l'apparecchio, accertarsi che sia spento; utilizzare un
estranei. Tali azioni potrebbero dare luogo a fumo, incendio o guasto.
panno morbido e asciutto. Non utilizzare mai materiali abrasivi, panni
Se si verificano anomalie, ad esempio l’introduzione di corpi estranei o intrisi di sostanze chimiche o solventi (alcool, benzene, diluenti, ecc.):
fumo a causa dell’esposizione all’acqua, interrompere subito l’utilizzo e possono danneggiare la superficie dell’apparecchio o causare una de-
contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato. teriorazione del colore o della qualità. Se il prodotto presenta un guasto,
contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato.
L’uso prolungato in queste condizioni potrebbe causare un guasto al prodotto.
Non esporre l'apparecchio a forti impatti o shock.
Non utilizzare se lo schermo è bianco o non emette suoni. Questi segni
indicano un guasto al prodotto. Il continuo utilizzo del dispositivo in questi Una pressione diretta sulla parte frontale del monitor potrebbe danneggia-
casi può dare luogo a incidenti (incendio, scosse elettriche). re il sistema LCD o il touch screen.
Non fermarsi o parcheggiare in aree non autorizzate alla sosta per utilizza- L’uso dell'apparecchio per lunghi periodi di tempo a motore spento scari-
re il prodotto. Ciò potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. cherà le batterie (apparirà un allarme sullo schermo). Utilizzare il sistema
con il motore del veicolo acceso.
43
GETtheMANUALS.org
Informazioni principali sul prodotto
iPod Dolby
iPod è un marchio di fabbrica registrato di Apple Inc. Prodotto protetto da licenza di Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby e il simbolo con la doppia D sono marchi di fabbrica di Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay è un marchio di fabbrica registrato di Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tutti i diritti riservati. TomTom e il logo con le "due mani" sono
marchi di fabbrica o marchi di fabbrica registrati di TomTom N.V. o di una delle sue affiliate.
Il marchio e i logo Bluetooth sono marchi di fabbrica registrati di proprietà di
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. e qualsiasi utilizzo di tali marchi è protetto da licenza. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tutti i diritti riservati. Il presente materiale è proprietario e soggetto
Italiano
Per utilizzare la tecnologia wireless Bluetooth è necessario possedere un a copyright e/o diritti di riservatezza del database e/o altri diritti di proprietà intellettuale di
cellulare abilitato. TomTom o dei suoi fornitori. L'uso di questo materiale è soggetto ai termini dell’accordo di
licenza. Qualsiasi copia o pubblicazione non autorizzata di questo materiale è passiva di
DivX conseguenze civili e penali.
Questi prodotto è certificato per DivX e può quindi riprodurre video HD DivX in
alta qualità. (tra cui .avi e .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified, e i relativi loghi sono marchi di fabbrica di DivX e LLC, e
sono utilizzati dietro licenza.
Essi sono protetti da almeno uno dei seguenti brevetti USA: 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Uso di Schede di Memoria SD

1. Lo slot per scheda SD di questo apparecchio è per file mappe.
2. Il file mappa è stato salvato sulla scheda SD di questo apparecchio.
Non aggiungere, cancellare, o formattare i file all’interno della scheda SD. Estrarre/inserire la scheda SD solo per aggiornare la mappa con una nuova versione.
3. Utilizzare solo la scheda SD offerta dal rivenditore. Non separare o copiare il file mappa in una diversa scheda SD in vostro possesso.
Ciò potrebbe causare guasti o funzionamenti errati.
4. Estrarre e inserire schede SD mentre il sistema è attivo può causare errori nel sistema o nella scheda SD.
Prima di estrarre o inserire la scheda SD, spegnere il motore del veicolo.
5. Collegare e scollegare ripetutamente la scheda SD in un breve periodo di tempo può danneggiare il dispositivo.
6. La scheda SD è formattata in modo da includere solo file di tipo Map.
Salvare altri tipi di file nella scheda SD può causare errori di sistema o guasti.
Download dell’aggiornamento del software Map & AVN

1. Collegare la scheda SD al computer.
2. Andare alla pagina degli aggiornamenti (URL).
44
GETtheMANUALS.org
Caratteristiche principali del prodotto
Funzionalità Descrizione Funzionalità Descrizione

Con Apple CarPlay, è possibile eseguire chiamate con
Schermo LCD di grandi dimensioni Apple CarPlay il cellulare, inviare e ricevere SMS, utilizzare la mappa,
Offre simultaneamente video e musica di alta qualità sul ascoltare musica e utilizzare le funzioni di Siri.
Visualizza
Italiano
display da 9.2 pollici, con la comodità addizionale del touch
screen.
Con Android Auto è possibile utilizzare Google Maps,
Android Auto il telefono, il riconoscimento vocale e la riproduzione
Funzione Sintonizzatore Digitale di musica.
Il Sintonizzatore Digitale salva in memoria 12 stazioni per
ciascuna modalità FM1, FM2, AM e DAB.
Radio Funzione collegamento Bluetooth
Servizi RDS Offre una funzione “mani libere” che permette ai guidatori di
Bluetooth eseguire chiamate wireless durante la guida o di ascoltare
Offre le funzioni AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY come parte dei
Servizi RDS. musica tramite lo streaming audio.
Funzione Media Auto Search

Identifica automaticamente file audiovisivi, tra cui video, au- Funzioni di controllo digitali dello schermo
USB Media dio e foto, salvati su USB e nella scheda SD e li visualizza Facile controllo della luminosità dello schermo attraverso il
come elenchi per comodità di riferimento. touch screen per una comoda visualizzazione.
Telecamera posteriore
Varie Permette una visione posteriore attraverso la telecamera HD
Utilizza TomTom Map quando si va in retromarcia.
La massima precisione delle direzioni si ottiene tramite il
Navigazione motore GPS e una mappa accurata, ricevibile attraverso Around View Monitor - Opzionale
l’antenna ad alta sensibilità. Permette di vedere davanti, all’indietro, a sinistra e a destra
grazie alla quattro telecamere installate sul veicolo.
45
GETtheMANUALS.org
Nomi e funzioni dei componenti
Vista anteriore
Tasto Descrizione
1 ACCENSIONE / VOLUME
1. Utilizzato per accendere/spegnere il dispositivo o controllare il volume.
2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per spegnere.
3. Premere brevemente per accendere/spegnere l’AV.
Italiano
4. Ruotare a destra/sinistra per regolare il volume. (Gamma volume: 0~45)
2 Pagina principale
1. Passa allo schermo Home (PIP, Picture in Picture).
1
2 3 4 5 2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per passare alla modalità
Preferiti.
MODALITÀ
3
1. Passa alla modalità schermo principale.
2. In modalità Navigazione, tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi)
per utilizzare la più recente modalità AV prima del passaggio alla
modalità Navigazione.
NAVI
4
1. Passa alla modalità Navigazione e visualizza la posizione
attuale, indifferentemente se l’AV è acceso o spento.
2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per passare allo
schermo su cui cercare la propria destinazione.
5 SETUP
In qualsiasi modalità, tenere premuto per visualizzare lo schermo
Impostazioni.
In modalità Radio/Audio/Video/Navigazione/Bluetooth su cellulare,
premere per visualizzare il relativo schermo con le impostazioni.
46
GETtheMANUALS.org
Italiano
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
B20 E-CALL MUTE
B22 MIC-
B24 PGND
47
GETtheMANUALS.org
Controllo del volante
Tasto Descrizione
1 Durante una chiamata handfree con Bluetooth, tenere premuto per
terminare la chiamata.
Quando non è in corso una chiamata, premere per attivare/disattivare
6 la funzione Mute.
In qualsiasi modalità
2 3 2
Italiano
- Ogni volta che si preme il tasto la modalità cambia secondo la sequenza

4
Radio →Media → Bluetooth Music → iPod → My Music. (Se il dispositivo
audiovisivo non è collegato, la modalità corrispondente viene disattivata)
5 1 In modalità Radio
- Tenere premuto per cambiare la modalità della radio secondo la sequenza
FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
In modalità Media
- Tenere premuto per cambiare la modalità secondo la sequenza USB Music
→ USB Video → USB Image.
3
Regola il volume.
4 Durante la riproduzione
- Premere in alto/in basso per passare al file precedente/successivo.
In modalità Radio
- Premere in alto/in basso per passare alla preimpostazione precedente/successiva.
- Tenere premuto alto/basso per passare alla frequenza precedente/successiva.
5
Attiva la modalità handfree di Bluetooth.
In modalità Apply CarPlay

6 - utilizza Siri.
In modalità Android Auto
- utilizza Google Voice.
48
GETtheMANUALS.org
Funzionamento base
Avvio del sistema Spegnere il sistema
Italiano
1. Mentre il sistema è in funzione, tenere premuto
1. Premere il tasto di avvio del motore o impo- 2. Quando il sistema è acceso, inizia il riavvio (per più di 1,5 secondi) il tasto POWER/VOL per
stare la chiave del motore su ON o ACC. e viene visualizzato lo schermo con il logo. spegnere. Quando il sistema viene spento, viene
salvata la più recente modalità di utilizzo.
3. La pagina degli allarmi di sicurezza è visua- 4. Premere il tasto [Accetta] per visualizzare la modali- 2. L’ora non viene visualizzata quando il si-
lizzata e il consenso dell'utente è abilitato. tà più recente. (La modalità di default è Radio FM1) stema è spento.
Informazioni Informazioni
- Controllare il tasto [Auto Disappear] per attivare la modalità usata più recentemente senza premere il tasto [Accetta]. - Quando il motore viene riacceso, il sistema ri-
torna automaticamente alla modalità usata più di
recente.
- Il sistema si spegne automaticamente se sono
passati più di tre minuti con la macchina spenta e
se lo sportello del guidatore è aperto.
49
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reset del sistema Audio Off Audio On
Italiano
1. Premere i tasti MODE e SETUP simulta- 1. Quando l’AV è accesa, premere brevemente 1. Quando l’AV è spenta, premere brevemente
neamente. (per meno di 1,5 secondi) il tasto PWR/VOL (per meno di 1,5 secondi) il tasto PWR/VOL
per spegnere l’AV. per accendere l’AV.
2. Il sistema si spegne e si riavvia. 2. Quando l’audio è spento, viene salvata la 2. Quando l’audio viene acceso, la navigazio-
più recente modalità di navigazione dello ne su schermo continua e l’audio ascoltato
schermo. più di recente inizia la riproduzione.
Informazioni
-D
opo il reset, il sistema riporta le impostazioni e le
configurazioni alla loro situazione di default. Ciò ga-
rantisce la stabilità del dispositivo e non è un guasto
del sistema.
50
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni del sistema
Impostazioni del sistema Impostazioni della radio Impostazioni Navigazione Impostazioni dell’orologio
Italiano
1. Dai tasti meccanici del sistema, 1. Utilizzato per impostare RDS, 1. Sullo schermo di impostazione naviga- 1. Regolazione dell’ora. Premere
tenere premuto il pulsante SETUP. PTY Seek. zione, scegliere se iniziare automatica- il pulsante in alto a destra
mente la navigazione all’avvio. Premere per inizializzare le impostazioni,
il tasto Reset in alto a destra per
ovvero per ripristinare le impo-
inizializzare le impostazioni.
stazioni predefinite.
Impostazioni del suono Impostazioni Preferiti Impostazioni della lingua
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni,

selezionare la modalità deside-
1. Regolazione di fader/balance, EQ 1. Utilizzato per aggiungere/ 1. Impostazione della lingua.
rata. cancellare/spostare il menu
e altre impostazioni del suono. Una volta selezionata la lingua
Premere il pulsante in alto a Preferiti. Premere il pulsante desiderata, premere il pulsante
destra per inizializzare le impo- in alto a destra per inizializzare le in alto a destra. Il sistema si
stazioni, ovvero per ripristinare le impostazioni, ovvero per ripristi- riavvia automaticamente.
impostazioni predefinite. nare le impostazioni predefinite.
51
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni dello schermo
Italiano
1. Impostazione dell’illuminazione,
del rapporto, dello spegnimento
dello schermo e altre imposta-
zioni di visualizzazione. Preme-
re il pulsante in alto a destra
per inizializzare le impostazioni,
ovvero per ripristinare le impo-
stazioni predefinite.
Impostazioni del sistema
1. Controllo delle impostazioni di

sistema e ripristino/aggiorna-
mento del sistema.
52
GETtheMANUALS.org
Selezione della modalità
Modalità principale Modalità Media Modalità Telefono Bluetooth Modalità Musica Bluetooth
Italiano
1. Dai tasti meccanici del sistema, 1. Nella modalità Media è possibile 1. Questa funzione consente all’u- 1.Questa funzione consente all’utente di
riprodurre file musicali, video e di riprodurre la musica memorizzata nel tele-
premere brevemente il pulsante tente di telefonare comodamen- fono cellulare presente nell’auto mediante
immagine contenuti nel dispositivo streaming audio Bluetooth.
SETUP. te usando telefoni Bluetooth.
USB.
2. Per poter usare la funzione 2. La musica potrebbe non venire riprodotta
2. La funzione non è disponibile se automaticamente, a seconda del program-
nel dispositivo USB non è presente Bluetooth, è necessario prima ma di riproduzione musicale presente nel
abbinare/collegare il telefono dispositivo collegato. Se la riproduzione
almeno un file musicale, video o di automatica non funziona, premere nuova-
immagine. cellulare all’auto. mente il pulsante di riproduzione.
Modalità Radio Modalità DAB Modalità La mia musica
2. Nella schermata MODE (Mo-

dalità), selezionare la modalità
desiderata.
1. Riproduce le trasmissioni in 1. In modalità Radio, premere il 1. Consente di riprodurre le trasmissioni radio
memorizzandole con la funzione Registra-
radiodiffusione sulle frequenze pulsante per passare alla zione radio.
FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. modalità DAB e ascoltare le 2. I file musicali ascoltati frequentemente in
modalità Media possono essere memo-
trasmissioni radio digitali. rizzati in AVN per creare elenchi musicali
personalizzati.
Attenzione
- È possibile memorizzare fino a
100 elenchi.
53
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità AUX Modalità Manuale elettronica MODALITÀ Navigazione
Italiano
1. Consente di riprodurre musica 1. Consente di verificare comoda- 1. Visualizza l’ubicazione attuale

collegando un dispositivo esterno mente tramite AVN il metodo di del veicolo
tramite AUX. utilizzo delle funzioni principali
di questo dispositivo.
Attenzione
- Per il collegamento di un di- NOTA
spositivo esterno è consigliato
l’uso di un cavo AUX tripolare. Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
- Se si collega un connettore E’ possibile ricevere informazioni TMC sul traf-
jack AUX senza collegare un fico tramite AVN.
dispositivo esterno, il sistema
passa alla modalità AUX, ma Il Traffic Message Channel (TMC) non è un
emette solo rumore. Quando Servizio AVN. Le stazioni radio FM radio di
non si utilizza la modalità vari paesi trasmettono informazioni sul traffico
AUX, assicurarsi di scollegare all’interno del loro palinsesto. TMC è noto
anche come RDS-TMC Traffic Information.
anche il connettore jack AUX.
Il dispositivo AVN fa uso di questa informazione
per informare riguardo ai ritardi del traffico sul
proprio percorso e a come evitarli.
Nota: AVN non è responsabile per la disponi-

bilità o la qualità delle informazioni sul traffico
offerte da TMC.
TMC non è disponibile in tutti i paesi o regioni.
Visitare tomtom.com per controllare se è dis-

ponibile nel proprio paese o regione.
54
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità Android Auto Modalità Apply CarPlay Modalità iPod
Italiano
1. Consente di usare Android Auto 1. Collegando un iPhone a AVN, è 1. Consente di ascoltare musica
collegando a AVN uno smar- possibile utilizzare comodamen- collegando un iPod a AVN.
tphone Android. te svariate funzioni quali Tele-
fono, Navigazione, Messaggi,
Musica e Siri. Attenzione
Collegamento di Android Auto Collegamento di Apple CarPlay e iPod - Per utilizzare la modalità
iPod mediante un iPhone, è
necessario disattivare l’uso
di CarPlay nelle Impostazioni
dell’iPhone.
Cavo USB Cavo USB
Attenzione
- Per il collegamento con cavo USB, utilizzare solo cavi di connessione
originali.
55
GETtheMANUALS.org
Limitazioni delle funzioni come misura di sicurezza
Limitazioni delle funzioni come misura di sicurezza
S
e si tenta di usare funzioni quali la modalità video, che possono distrarre
durante la guida, il sistema spegne lo schermo o disattiva la funzione.
- La modalità Video non è disponibile durante la guida. Lo spegnimento del
video non influisce sul lettore audio.
- La modalità Presentazione non è disponibile durante la guida.
Italiano
L
a schermata di limitazione scompare quando si porta il cambio in P o si
inserisce il freno di stazionamento.
56
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Around View Monitor) - Opzionale
Questo dispositivo supporta anche l’Around View Monitor (AVM), che offre una maggiore sicurezza.
L’AVM è una funzione opzionale.
La pressione dell’interruttore AVM o l’inserimento della retromarcia (R) attiva la modalità AVM indipendentemente dalla modalità corrente.
Premendo nuovamente l’interruttore o portando il cambio in una marcia diversa da R, si disattiva la modalità AVM e il sistema torna alla modalità precedente.
Quando è attiva la modalità AVM, è possibile utilizzare le funzioni di regolazione del volume e disattivazione audio.
Per passare tra le “modalità Vista” (remove “di”) 2D e 3D, utilizzare le funzioni Modalità vista in Impostazioni AVM.
Italiano
Vista 2D Vista 3D
Attenzione
- Le distanze effettive potrebbero differire da quelle che appaiono sullo schermo AVM. Ai fini della sicurezza, prestare sempre attenzione e controllare
direttamente i lati sinistro/destro.
- Durante l’uso dell’AVM, sono disponibili solo la regolazione del volume e le chiamate in arrivo.
57
GETtheMANUALS.org
Videocamera posteriore
Questo sistema è dotato di una videocamera posteriore che assicura una maggiore sicurezza offrendo una visuale più ampia.
La videocamera posteriore si attiva automaticamente quando la chiave di accensione è in posizione ON e la leva del cambio viene portata in R.
La videocamera posteriore si disattiva automaticamente quando viene inserita una marcia diversa.
Quando è attiva la videocamera posteriore, è possibile utilizzare le funzioni di regolazione del volume e disattivazione audio.
Italiano
1. Portare la chiave di accensione in posizione ACC o ON.

2. Portare la leva del cambio in R.
Attenzione
- Le distanze effettive potrebbero differire da quelle che appaiono sullo schermo della videocamera posteriore. Ai fini della sicurezza, prestare sempre
attenzione e controllare direttamente i lati sinistro/destro.
- Durante l’uso della videocamera posteriore, sono disponibili solo la regolazione del volume e le chiamate in arrivo.
58
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifiche del prodotto
Nome Car TFT LCD Display AVN UNIT MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
File supportati
TS, WMV
Alimentazione DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Alimentazione DC 9V ~ DC 16V Supporto/Risolu-
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
zione Sottotitoli
Consumo cor- 2A
rente File supportati MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Comune
Italiano
Corrente in Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
3mA (solo unità principale)
standby
Frequenza di 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Temperatura di campionamento
-30℃ ~ +75℃
esercizio
Foto Formato di file JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, Gse
Temperatura di -40℃ ~ +85℃
stoccaggio Compatibilità BLUETOOTH V4.1
Dimensioni 278,4(L) x 175,5(H) x 191,5(P) Frequenza lar-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
ghezza di banda
Peso 2.5 kg
Profili supportati A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Formato schermo 203,90 mm (L) x 114,70 (H) mm (Area attiva) Bluetooth
Uscita di trasmis-
sione 3.0 dBm
Risoluzione 921.600 pixel
Visualizza Metodo di funzio- TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix
Tipo di modula-
FHSS(GFSK)
namento zione
Retroillumina- LED Canale 79
zione
Gamma di fre- FM: 87.5~108.0MHz (Step: 100kHz)
quenza AM: 522~1620 kHz (Step:9kHz)
Radio
Sensibilità FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
Certifica-
SD 1 slot, 16GB zione
Dispositivo
di archivia- USB 1 porta, USB2.0 HOST
Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Dichiara che l’apparecchio radio di tipo [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] è conforme alla Direttiva 2014/53/EU.
zione Il testo integrale della dichiarazione di conformità EU è disponibile al seguente indirizzo Internet: http://www.digen.co.kr
Formato FAT 16/32 Una copia del DoC in lingua originale è allegata al dispositivo.
59
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Italiano
60
GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto-Navigationssystem Y400 AVN-BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Deutsch
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lesen Sie dieses Handbuch vor dem Gerätebetrieb sorgfältig durch und bewahren Sie es zum späteren Gebrauch gut auf.
Änderungen von Design und Spezifikationen ohne vorherige Mitteilung vorbehalten.
Weitere Informationen über das Auto-Navigationssystem finden Sie online auf der Website von Ssangyong Motor.
- Website-Adresse für den Download des AVN-Handbuches: http://www.smotor.com
61
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommario
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 63
Wichtige Produktinformationen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 64
Wichtige Produktfunktionen ··········································································································· 65
Komponentennamen und -funktionen ································································ ······················· ······ 66
Im Lenkrad integrierte Fernbedienung · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 68
Deutsch
Grundlegende Funktionen ································································· ··········································· 69

Systemeinstellungen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 71
Modus wählen ·························································································································· 73
Einschränkung der Funktionen aus Sicherheitsgründen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 76
AVM (Around View Monitor - Rundumsicht-Monitor) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 77
Rückfahrkamera · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 78
Produktspezifikation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 79
62
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
Sicherheitswarnungen Sicherheitshinweise
Auch wenn Sie Navigationsanweisungen vom Multimediasystem erhalten, Achten Sie während der Fahrt auf die Verkehrsbedingungen.
befolgen Sie bitte immer die aktuellen Straßenverkehrsregeln.
In manchen Fällen kann die Routenführung des Navigationssystems durch
Das ausschließliche Befolgen der Routenführung kann zu Verletzungen Gebiete mit Verkehrsbeschränkungen verlaufen.
der Straßenverkehrsregeln und zu Unfällen führen.
Sehen Sie während der Fahrt nicht längere Zeit auf den Bildschirm. Wenn Sie Die Bedienung des Geräts während der Fahrt kann durch die verminderte
zu lange auf den Bildschirm sehen, kann dies zu Verkehrsunfällen führen. Aufmerksamkeit für die Umgebung zu Unfällen führen. Halten Sie das
Fahrzeug an, bevor Sie das Gerät bedienen. Darüber hinaus gibt es einige
Bedienen Sie das Multimediasystem nicht während der Fahrt, zum Bei- Funktionen des Touchscreens, die zu Ihrer eigenen Sicherheit nicht funk-
spiel zum Eingeben von Sehenswürdigkeiten oder zur Suche nach der tionieren, wenn das Fahrzeug in Bewegung ist. Die Touchscreen-Funktion
Deutsch
Route. Dies kann zu Unfällen führen. ist nur verfügbar, wenn das Fahrzeug steht.
Halten Sie das Fahrzeug an, bevor Sie das Gerät bedienen.
Dieses Produkt ist ausschließlich für den Gebrauch in Autos bestimmt.
Das Multimediasystem darf nicht zerlegt, eingebaut oder verändert wer- Installieren Sie dieses Gerät nur in Autos.
den. Dies könnte zu Unfällen, Brand oder Stromschlag führen.
Wenn Sie die Position des Geräts verändern wollen, wenden Sie sich bitte an
Achten Sie darauf, dass kein Wasser und keine Fremdkörper in das Gerät
ihren Händler oder an das Service- und Wartungszentrum. Für den Einbau
eindringen. Dies kann zur Entwicklung von Rauch, Feuer oder zu Funkti-
oder die Demontage des Geräts ist technisches Fachwissen erforderlich.
onsstörungen führen.
Bei ungewöhnlichen Zuständen, wie Eindringen von Fremdkörpern oder Achten Sie darauf, dass das Gerät bei der Reinigung abgeschaltet ist und
Rauchentwicklung aufgrund von Kontakt mit Wasser, schalten Sie das verwenden Sie ein trockenes, weiches Tuch. Verwenden Sie nie harte
Gerät sofort ab und wenden Sie sich bitte an ihren Händler oder an das Materialien, chemische Tücher oder Lösungsmittel (Alkohol, Benzol, Ver-
Servicezentrum. dünner, etc.) da diese Materialien das Bedienfeld des Geräts beschädigen
oder die Farbe/Qualität beeinträchtigen können. Wenn Gerätestörungen
Wenn Sie das Gerät in diesem Zustand weiter verwenden, kann es zu festgestellt werden, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Händler oder an das Ser-
Funktionsstörungen kommen. vice- und Wartungszentrum.
Bitte verwenden Sie das System nicht, wenn der Bildschirm leer ist oder
Setzen Sie das Gerät keinen starken Schlägen oder Erschütterungen aus.
kein Ton hörbar ist. Dies kann ein Anzeichen für eine Funktionsstörung
des Produkts sein. Die Verwendung des Produkts unter diesen Bedingun- Direkter Druck auf die Vorderseite des Bildschirms kann den LCD- oder
gen könnte zu Unfällen (Brände, Stromschlag) führen. Touchscreen beschädigen.
Halten oder parken Sie nicht in Park- oder Halteverboten, um das Gerät
Wenn Sie das Gerät über einen längeren Zeitraum bei ausgeschalteter
zu bedienen. Dies kann zu Unfällen führen.
Zündung verwenden, wird auf dem Bildschirm eine Warnung wegen Bat-
terieentladung angezeigt. Verwenden Sie das System nur mit eingeschal-
teter Zündung.
63
GETtheMANUALS.org
Wichtige Produktinformationen
iPod Dolby
iPod ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Apple Inc. Hergestellt unter Lizenz von Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay Dolby und das Doppel-D-Symbol sind Markenzeichen von Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. TomTom und das „Hände-Logo“ sind Waren-
Die Wortmarke Bluetooth und die Bluetooth-Logos sind eingetragene Waren- zeichen oder eingetragene Warenzeichen von TomTom N.V. oder einer Tochtergesellschaft.
zeichen im Eigentum der Firma Bluetooth SIG, Inc. und jegliche Verwendung © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Dieses Material ist eigentumsrechtlich
dieser Marken steht unter Lizenz. und/oder durch Datenbankrechte geschützt und unterliegt Urheber- und anderen geistigen
Für die Verwendung der Bluetooth-Technologie ist ein Bluetooth-fähiges Eigentumsrechten im Besitz von TomTom oder seinen Lieferanten. Die Verwendung
Handy erforderlich. dieses Materials unterliegt Lizenzbedingungen. Die unerlaubte Vervielfältigung oder Veröf-
Deutsch
DivX fentlichung dieses Materials wird zivil- und strafrechtlich verfolgt.

Da das Produkt DivX-zertifiziert ist, können damit Premium HD DivX Videos
abgespielt werden. (Inklusive .avi und .divX)
DivX, DivX-zertifiziert und die entsprechenden Logos sind eingetragene Wa-
renzeichen von DivX und LLC und jegliche Verwendung steht unter Lizenz.
Die Warenzeichen sind durch mindestens eines der unten aufgeführten
US-Patente geschützt: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Verwendung von SD-Speicherkarten

1. Der SD-Kartenschlitz in diesem Gerät dient für Kartendateien.
2. Die Kartendatei wurde für dieses Gerät auf der SD-Karte gespeichert.
Auf der SD-Karte dürfen keine Dateien gespeichert, gelöscht oder bearbeitet werden. Die SD-Karte sollte nur zum Einspielen der neuen Version der Karte ausgeworfen/
eingelegt werden.
3. Bitte verwenden Sie nur die vom Händler bereitgestellte SD-Karte. Die Kartendatei darf nicht geteilt oder auf eine andere SD-Karte kopiert werden.
Das kann zu Funktionsstörungen und Fehlfunktionen führen.
4. Das Auswerfen und Einlegen von SD-Karten während das System in Betrieb ist, kann zu einem SD-Karten- oder Systemfehler führen.
Zum Auswerfen oder Einlegen der SD-Karte schalten Sie zuerst die Zündung des Fahrzeugs aus.
5. Wenn Sie in kurzen Abständen die SD-Karte wiederholt anschließen und wieder trennen, kann das Gerät beschädigt werden.
6. Die SD-Karte ist so formatiert, dass sie nur Kartendateien enthält.
Das Speichern anderer Dateien auf der SD-Karte kann zu Systemfehlern oder Funktionsstörungen führen.
Karte aktualisieren und AVN-Software herunterladen

1. Verbinden Sie die SD-Karte mit Ihrem Computer.
2. Gehen Sie zur Update-Seite (URL).
64
GETtheMANUALS.org
Wichtige Produktfunktionen
Funktion Beschreibung Funktion Beschreibung

Mit Apple CarPlay können Sie Telefonanrufe tätigen,
Breiter LCD-Bildschirm Apple CarPlay Textnachrichten austauschen, die Karte verwenden,
Bildschirm Bietet die gleichzeitige Wiedergabe von Qualitätsvideos und Musik hören und Siri-Funktionen verwenden.
Musik auf dem 9,2 Zoll breiten Bildschirm mit zusätzlichem
Komfort durch die Bedienung per Touchscreen.
Mit Android Auto können Sie die Funktionen für
Deutsch
Android Auto Google Map, Telefon, Spracherkennung und Musik
verwenden.
Digitaler Tuner
Der digitale Tuner unterstützt die Speicherung von 12 Sen-
Radio dern für die Modi FM1, FM2, AM und DAB. Bluetooth-Verbindungssymbol
Bietet eine Freisprechfunktion, mit der der Fahrer während
RDS-Dienste
Bluetooth des Fahrens drahtlos telefonieren und Musik über Audio
Bietet die Funktionen AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY mit RDS-Diensten. Streaming hören kann.
Medienautosuchfunktion Einstellfunktionen für den Digitalbildschirm

Erkennt automatisch Mediendateien, einschließlich Video-, Einfache Steuerung der Bildschirmhelligkeit über den Touch
USB Medien Audio- und Fotodateien, die auf dem USB-Stick oder der Screen für mehr Bedienerfreundlichkeit.
SD-Karte gespeichert sind und zeigt diese der Einfachheit
halber in Listenform an. Rückfahrkamera
Verschiedenes Gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, durch die HD-Kamera nach hin-
ten zu sehen, wenn Sie den Rückwärtsgang einlegen.
Verwendet TomTom Map
Navigation Über die hochempfindliche Antenne können mithilfe der Around View Monitor (Rundumsicht-Monitor) - Optional
GPS-Einheit und exakter Karten präzise Routeninformatio- Dieses System gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, durch die vier im
nen empfangen werden. Fahrzeug installierten Kameras nach vorne, hinten, links und
rechts zu sehen.
65
GETtheMANUALS.org
Komponentennamen und -funktionen
Vorderansicht
Taste Beschreibung
1 EIN/AUS / LAUTSTÄRKE
1. Diese Taste wird verwendet, um das Gerät ein- bzw. auszuschalten und um die Lautstärke
einzustellen.
2. Drücken und halten Sie zum Ausschalten des Geräts die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden) gedrückt.
3. Zum Ein- bzw. Ausschalten des AV-Modus die Taste kurz drücken.
4. Zum Regeln der Lautstärke den Knopf nach links/rechts drehen. (Bereich für Lautstärkeregelung
0~45)
Deutsch
2 Home
1 1. Öffnet den Startbildschirm (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5
2. Drücken und halten Sie die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden) ge-
drückt, um zum Bookmark-Modus zu wechseln.
3 MODE
1. Öffnet den Haupt-Modusbildschirm.
2. Drücken und halten Sie (über 1,5 Sekunden) diese Taste im
Navigations-Modus gedrückt, um den AV-Modus, der vor dem
Navigationsmodus zuletzt verwendet wurde, zu starten.
NAVI
4
1. Schaltet in den Navigationsmodus um und zeigt den aktuellen
Standort an, egal ob AV ein- oder ausgeschaltet ist.
2. D
rücken und halten Sie die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden), um den
Bildschirm zu öffnen, auf dem Sie Ihre Destination suchen können.
5 SETUP
Drücken und halten Sie in einem beliebigen Modus die Taste, um
den Bildschirm „Einstellungen“ zu öffnen.
Drücken Sie die Taste im Modus Radio/Audio/Video/Navigation/
Bluetooth -Telefon,
um den entsprechenden Einstellungsbildschirm anzuzeigen.
66
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rückansicht AVN 42-poliger STECKER
AVN
Deutsch
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Radio-Antennenbuchse A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
-Zum Anstecken des Radio-Antennenkabels A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS-Antennenbuchse A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Zum Anstecken des GPS-Antennenkabels A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Stecker der Rückfahrkamera
A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Zum Anstecken eines Rückfahrkamerasteckers A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-Schnittstelle
A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Zum Anstecken eines USB-Steckers für USB-Funktion A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) E/A-Anschluss (42-polig) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) DAB-Buchse B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Zum Anschließen eines DAB-Antennenkabels B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
67
GETtheMANUALS.org
Im Lenkrad integrierte Fernbedienung
Taste Beschreibung
1 Drücken und halten Sie die Taste während eines Anrufs mit dem
Bluetooth-Freisprechmodus, um den Anruf zu beenden.
Wenn Sie nicht telefonieren, können Sie hier Stummschalten und
6 die Stummschaltung wieder aufheben.
In jedem Modus
2 3 2 - Bei jedem Drücken der Taste wechselt der Modus in der Reihenfolge Radio → Medien →
4 Bluetooth Musik → iPod → Meine Musik. (Wenn das Gerät für das Medium nicht ange-
schlossen ist, sind die dazugehörigen Modi deaktiviert)
Im Radiomodus
5
Deutsch
1 - Drücken und halten Sie die Taste, um den Radiomodus in der Reihenfolge FM1 → FM2
→ AM → DAB zu wechseln.
Im Medienmodus
- Drücken und halten Sie die Taste, um den Modus in der Reihenfolge USB Audio→USB
Video→USB Bild zu wechseln.
3
Einstellen der Lautstärke.
4 Beim Abspielen
- Drücken Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zur vorherigen/nächsten Datei zu
wechseln.
Im Radiomodus
- Drücken Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zum vorherigen/nächsten voreingestell-
ten Kanal zu wechseln.
-D rücken und halten Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zur vorherigen/nächsten
Sendefrequenz zu wechseln.
5
Startet den Bluetooth Freisprechmodus.
Im Apply CarPlay-Modus
6 - startet Siri.
Im Android Auto-Modus
- startet Google Voice.
68
GETtheMANUALS.org
Grundlegende Funktionen
System starten Ausschalten des Systems
Deutsch
1. Drücken und halten Sie (länger als 1,5 Sekunden)
1. Drücken Sie den Motorstartknopf oder 2. Sobald das System eingeschaltet wird, während das System in Betrieb ist die Taste EIN-AUS/
stellen Sie den Zündschlüssel auf ON oder wird das Hochfahren gestartet und der LAUTSTÄRKE, um das Gerät auszuschalten. Wenn die
Energiezufuhr zum System ausgeschaltet wird, wird der
ACC. Bildschirm mit dem Logo wird angezeigt. letzte Betriebsmodus gespeichert.
3. Die Seite mit den Sicherheitswarnungen 4. Drücken Sie die Taste [Stimme zu], um den zuletzt 2. Wenn das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist, wird die
wird angezeigt und die Benutzereinwilli- verwendeten Modus anzuzeigen. (Der Standard- aktuelle Uhrzeit angezeigt.
gung ist aktiviert. modus ist Radio FM1)
Hinweis Hinweis
- Markieren Sie das Kästchen [Autom. Verschwinden], um den zuletzt verwendeten Modus einzuschalten, ohne die - Wenn die Zündung wieder eingeschaltet wird,
Taste [Stimme zu] zu drücken. schaltet das System automatisch zum zuletzt
verwendeten Modus.
- Wenn die Zündung vor mehr als 3 Minuten aus-
geschaltet wurde und die Fahrertür geöffnet wird,
wird das System automatisch ausgeschaltet.
69
GETtheMANUALS.org
Systemreset Audio Aus Audio Ein
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Tasten MODE 1. D

rücken und halten Sie kurz (kürzer als 1,5 Sekun- 1. Wenn AV ausgeschaltet ist, drücken Sie
und SETUP. den) die Taste EIN-AUS/LAUTSTÄRKE, während kurz (unter 1,5 Sekunden) die Taste EIN-
während AV eingeschaltet ist, um AV auszuschalten. AUS/LAUTSTÄRKE, um AV einzuschalten.
2. Das System wird ausgeschaltet und neu 2. Wenn Audio ausgeschaltet wird, wird 2. Wenn Audio eingeschaltet wird, wird der
gestartet. der zuletzt verwendete Navigationsmo- Navigations-Bildschirm beibehalten, aber
dus-Bildschirm angezeigt. die Wiedergabe der zuletzt verwendeten
Audio-Funktion gestartet.
Hinweis
- Bei einem Systemreset werden die bestehenden
Einstellungen und Konfigurationen wieder auf
die Standardwerte zurückgestellt. Dies dient der
Sicherstellung der Gerätestabilität und ist kein
Systemdefekt.
70
GETtheMANUALS.org
Systemeinstellungen
Systemeinstellungen Radioeinstellungen Navigationseinstellungen Uhreinstellungen
1. Drücken und halten Sie auf den 1. Wird verwendet, um die Ein- 1. Stellen Sie am Bildschirm für die Naviga- 1. Wird verwendet, um die Zeit
tionseinstellungen ein, ob die Navigation
Drucktasten des Systems die stellungen für RDS, PTY Seek beim Starten automatisch beginnen soll.
einzustellen. Drücken Sie die
Deutsch
Taste SETUP. festzulegen. Drücken Sie die Taste Zurücksetzen Taste oben rechts, um die
oben rechts um die Einstellungen zurück- Einstellungen zurückzusetzen.
zusetzen.
Audioeinstellungen Bookmarkeinstellungen Spracheinstellungen
2. Wählen Sie im Bildschirm „Ein-

stellungen“ den gewünschten
1. Wird verwendet, um Fader/Balan- 1. Verwendet für das Hinzufügen/ 1. Wird verwendet, um die Spra-
Einstellungsmodus. Löschen/Verschieben des
ce, EQ und andere Audioeinstel- che einzustellen. Nachdem
lungen vorzunehmen. Drücken Bookmark Menüs. Sie die gewünschte Sprache
Sie die Taste oben rechts, um ausgewählt haben, Drücken Sie
die Einstellungen zurückzusetzen. die Taste oben rechts, um.
Das System wird automatisch
neu gestartet.
71
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirmeinstellungen
1. Wird verwendet, um Be-

leuchtung, Anzeigeverhältnis,
Deutsch
Bildschirm AUS und andere An-

zeigeeinstellungen einzustellen.
Drücken Sie die Taste oben
rechts, um die Einstellungen
zurückzusetzen.
Systemeinstellungen
1. Wird verwendet, um die Syste-

minformationen zu prüfen und
ein Reset/Upgrade des Systems
durchzuführen.
72
GETtheMANUALS.org
Selezione della modalità
Hauptmodus Medienmodus Modus „Bluetooth-Telefon“ Bluetooth-Musik-Modus
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktas- 1.Über den Medienmodus können 1. Mit dieser Funktion können be- 1.Mit dieser Funktion können Sie auf dem Mobil-
ten des Systems kurz die Taste Musik, Video, Bilddateien auf dem quem Anrufe mit Bluetooth-Tele-
telefon gespeicherte Musik über Bluetooth-Au-
USB-Gerät abgespielt werden. dio-Streaming im Fahrzeug abspielen.
Deutsch
MODE. 2. Diese Funktion funktioniert nur,
fonen durchgeführt werden. 2. Abhängig vom Music Player-Programm,
wenn es mindestens eine Musik-, 2. Bevor Sie die Bluetooth-Funkti- das auf dem angeschlossenen Gerät vor-
Video- oder Bilddatei auf dem handen ist, wird die Musik mitunter nicht
on verwenden können, müssen automatisch abgespielt. Wenn Auto Play
USB-Gerät gibt.
Sie Ihr Handy mit dem Fahr- nicht funktioniert, drücken Sie nochmals
zeug koppeln/verbinden. die Wiedergabetaste.
Radiomodus DAB-Modus My Music-Modus
2. Wählen Sie im Bildschirm „Mode“

den gewünschten Modus.
1. Wiedergabe von Radiosendungen 1. Drücken Sie im Radiomodus die 1. Radiosendungen können durch Speichern
über die Funktion „Radioaufnahme“ abge-
von FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. Taste um den DAB-Modus zu spielt werden.
starten und Digital Audio Broad- 2. Sie können Musikdateien im Medienmodus,
casting zu hören. die Sie oft anhören, in AVN speichern und so
Ihre eigenen Musiklisten erstellen.
Vorsicht
- Es können bis zu 100 Listen
gespeichert werden.
73
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX-Modus e-Manual-Modus Navigations-MODUS
1. Musik kann auch durch An- 1. Die Verwendungsart der we- 1. Der aktuelle Standort des
schließen eines externen Geräts sentlichen Funktionen dieses Fahrzeugs wird angezeigt.
Deutsch
über AUX abgespielt werden. Geräts kann auf einfache Weise

mit AVN überprüft werden.
ANMERKUNG
Vorsicht
Traffic Message Channel (TMC)
- Für den Anschluss eines
externen Geräts wird die Sie können Verkehrsinformationen auf Ihrem
Verwendung eines 3-poligen AVN empfangen.
AUX-Kabels empfohlen.
Der Traffic Message Channel (TMC) ist kein
- Wenn eine AUX-Buchse ohne AVN-Dienst. FM-Radiosender in mehreren
externes Gerät angesteckt Ländern strahlen TMC-Informationen als Teil
wird, schaltet das System ihrer Programmgestaltung aus. TMC ist auch
auf AUX-Modus um, es ist als RDS-TMC Verkehrsinformation bekannt.
allerdings nur Rauschen zu
hören. Achten Sie darauf, die Ihr AVN-Gerät verwendet diese Information,
AUX-Buchse abzuziehen, um Sie über Verkehrsstörungen auf Ihrer
Strecke und wie Sie diese umgehen können,
wenn der AUX-Modus nicht zu informieren.
verwendet wird.
Hinweis: AVN ist nicht für die Verfügbarkeit
oder Qualität der von TMC zur Verfügung ges-
tellten Verkehrsinformationen verantwortlich.
TMC steht nicht in allen Ländern oder Re-

gionen zur Verfügung.
Besuchen Sie tomtom.com um zu überprüfen,

ob TMC in Ihrem Land oder in Ihrer Region
verfügbar ist.
74
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto-Modus Apple CarPlay-Modus iPod-Modus
1. Wenn Sie ein Android Smart- 1. Wenn Sie Ihr iPhone mit AVN 1. Wenn Sie Ihr iPod-Gerät mit
phone mit AVN verbinden, verbinden, können Sie bequem AVN verbinden, können Sie
Deutsch
verschiedene Funktionen verwen-
können Sie Android Auto den, einschließlich Phone (Telefon), Musik hören.
verwenden. Navigation, Messages (Nachrichten),
Music (Musik) und Siri. Attenzione
Android Auto anschließen Apple CarPlay und iPod anschließen - Per utilizzare la modalità
iPod mediante un iPhone, è
necessario disattivare l’uso
di CarPlay nelle Impostazioni
dell’iPhone.
USB-Kabel USB-Kabel
Vorsicht
- Verwenden Sie beim Anschließen von USB-Kabeln nur richtige Verbin-
dungskabel.
75
GETtheMANUALS.org
Einschränkung der Funktionen aus Sicherheitsgründen
Einschränkung der Funktionen aus Sicherheits-
gründen
W
enn Sie versuchen, Funktionen, die Sie während der Fahrt ablenken könn-
ten - zum Beispiel den Videomodus - zu verwenden, schaltet das System
den Bildschirm aus oder die Funktion wird deaktiviert
- Während der Fahrt ist die Video-Funktion nicht verfügbar. Der Audio-Player
ist vom Ausschalten der Videofunktion nicht betroffen.
- Während der Fahrt ist die Funktion Diashow nicht verfügbar.
W
enn sich die Gangschaltung in der Position P befindet oder wenn die Fest-
stellbremse aktiviert wird, wird der Sperrbildschirm geschlossen.
Deutsch
76
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Around View Monitor, Rundumsicht-Monitor) - Optional
Dieses Gerät unterstützt auch Around View Monitor (AVM) für zusätzliche Sicherheit.
AVM ist eine optionale Funktion.
Durch Betätigen des AVM-Schalters oder durch Schalten in den Gang R wird der Monitor automatisch in den Modus AVM umgestellt, egal welcher
Modus derzeit aktiv ist.
Wenn Sie den AVM-Schalter nochmals betätigen oder einen anderen Gang einlegen, wird der AVM-Modus automatisch beendet und der vorherige
Modus wieder gestartet.
Im AVM-Modus kann die Lautstärke verändert und auf stumm gestellt werden.
Das Umschalten zwischen 2D- und 3D-Ansicht ist mit der Ansichtsmodus-Funktion in den AVM-Einstellungen möglich.
2D-Anzeige 3D-Anzeige
Deutsch
Vorsicht
- Die Darstellung der Distanz im AVM-Bildschirm kann von der tatsächlichen Distanz abweichen. Fahren Sie immer vorsichtig und sehen Sie vor
dem Fahren zur Sicherheit nach hinten, nach rechts und nach links.
- Im AVM-Modus werden nur die Funktionen Lautstärke und ankommende Anrufe unterstützt.
77
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rückfahrkamera
Dieses System ist zu Ihrer Sicherheit mit einer Rückfahrkamera ausgestattet, um den Sichtbereich zu erweitern.
Die Rückfahrkamera wird automatisch eingeschaltet, wenn die Zündung eingeschaltet ist und der Schalthebel in die Position R gestellt wird.
Wenn der Schalthebel in eine andere Position gestellt wird, wird die Rückfahrkamera automatisch ausgeschaltet.
Wenn die Rückfahrkamera im Betrieb ist, kann die Lautstärke verändert und auf stumm gestellt werden.
Deutsch
1. Stellen Sie den Zündschlüssel auf ACC oder ON.

2. Stellen Sie den Schalthebel in Position R.
Vorsicht
- Die Darstellung der Distanz im Rückfahrkamerabildschirm weicht möglicherweise von der tatsächlichen Distanz ab. Fahren Sie immer vorsichtig und
sehen Sie vor dem Fahren zur Sicherheit nach hinten, nach rechts und nach links.
- Wenn die Rückfahrkamera im Betrieb ist, werden nur die Funktionen Lautstärke und ankommende Anrufe unterstützt.
78
GETtheMANUALS.org
Produktspezifikationen
Name TFT LCD-Display AVN EINHEIT für Fahrzeuge Unterstützte MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Dateien TS, WMV
Stromversorgung 14,4 V DC Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Betriebsstrom 9 V DC ~ 16 V DC Unterstützung von
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Untertiteln / Auflösung
Stromaufnahme 2A
Allgemein Unterstützte Dateien MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Schlafstrom 3 mA (nur Hauptgerät) Audio Bitrate 32 Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Betriebstempe- Samplingfrequenz 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz

-30℃ ~ +75℃
Deutsch
ratur
Foto Dateiformat JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Lagertemperatur -40℃ ~ +85℃
Kompatibilität BLUTOOTH V4.1
Abmessungen 278,4 (B) x 175,5 (H) X 191,5 (T) mm Frequenzband-
2402 ~ 2480 MHz
breite
Gewicht 2.5 kg Unterstützte
Profile A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Bildschirmgröße 203,90 mm (B) x 114,70 (H) mm (aktive Fläche) Bluetooth
Sende-Ausgang
3,0 dBm
Auflösung 921.600 Pixel
Bildschirm
Betriebsart TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), Aktivmatrix Modulationsart FHSS(GFSK)
Hintergrundbeleuch- Kanal 79
LED
tung
Frequenzbereich FM: 87,5 ~ 108,0 MHz (Schritt: 100 kHz)

AM: 522~1620 kHz (Schritt: 9 kHz)
Radio
Empfindlichkeit FM: 10 dBuV, AM: 40 dBuV EMF
Konformi-
SD 1 Schlitz, 16 GB tätserklä-
rung
Speicher- USB 1 Anschluss, USB2.0 HOST
gerät Hiermit erklärt Digen Co., Ltd., dass der Funkanlagentyp [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse erhältlich: http://www.digen.co.kr.
Format FAT 16/32 Eine Kopie der Konformitätserklärung in der Originalsprache ist dem Gerät beigelegt.
79
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Deutsch
80
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistema de navegación del automóvil Manual del usuario Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Español
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lea atentamente este manual antes de realizar operaciones y consérvelo como referencia futura.
Los diseños y especificaciones están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso.
Visite el sitio en línea de Ssangyoung Motor para mayor información sobre el sistema de navegación del automóvil.
- Dirección de descarga del manual de AVN: http://www.smotor.com
81
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommario
Precauciones · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 83
Información principal del producto · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 84
Funciones principales del producto ································································································· 85
Nombres y funciones de los componentes ·························································· ······················· ······ 86
Controlador del volante · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 88
Operación básica ·········································································· ··········································· 89
Español
Ajustes de sistema · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 91
Seleccionar modo ···················································································································· 93
Restricción de funciones como medida de seguridad · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 96
AVM (Monitor de entorno) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 97
Cámara de detección trasera · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 98
Especificaciones del producto · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 99
82
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
Precauciones de seguridad Advertencias de seguridad

Incluso al recibir orientación de ruta del sistema multimedia, cumpla con Preste atención a las condiciones del tráfico al conducir.
el reglamento de tránsito y siga las condiciones reales del camino.
En algunos casos, el navegador podría guiarlo a través de áreas restringidas.
Seguir solo la orientación de ruta del navegador podría llevarlo a cometer
infracciones viales y causar accidentes. Operar el dispositivo mientras conduce podría ocasionar accidentes al
desviar su atención de los alrededores. Aparque el vehículo antes de ope-
No mire la pantalla mientras conduce. Mirar la pantalla por mucho tiempo rar el dispositivo. Además, algunas funciones de la pantalla táctil podrían
podría ocasionar accidentes viales. no estar disponibles cuando el vehículo se encuentre en movimiento.
Al conducir, no realice operaciones del sistema multimedia, tales como in- Dichas funciones estarán disponibles cuando el vehículo se detenga.
gresar puntos de interés o buscar rutas. Esto podría ocasionar accidentes.
Este producto solo debe usarse en automóviles. Absténgase de instalar
Aparque el vehículo antes de operar el dispositivo. este dispositivo en otros sitios que no sean automóviles.
Español
No desarme, arme o modifique el sistema multimedia. Esto podría ocasio- Si quiere cambiar la posición en la que se instaló el dispositivo, consulte
nar accidentes, incendios o descargas eléctricas. con su punto de venta o centro de mantenimiento y servicio. Se requiere
de un técnico experto para instalar o desarmar el dispositivo.
Tenga cuidado de no derramar líquidos ni introducir objetos extraños en el dispo-
sitivo. Esto podría ocasionar humo, incendios o fallas en el funcionamiento. Al limpiar el dispositivo, apáguelo y use un paño seco y limpio. Nunca
use materiales corrosivos, paños impregnados de químicos o solventes
De ocurrir anormalidades, como que se hayan introducido materiales (alcohol, benceno, tíners, etcétera) dado que dichos materiales pueden
extraños o salga humo a causa de la exposición a líquidos, descontinúe el dañar el panel o causar deterioros en la calidad o el color. Si experimenta
uso de manera inmediata y consulte en el sitio donde adquirió el equipo o fallas en el funcionamiento del producto, consulte con su punto de venta o
en el centro de mantenimiento autorizado. centro de mantenimiento y servicio.
Seguir usando el equipo en este estado podría ocasionar fallas en el No golpee ni azote el dispositivo.
funcionamiento.
Si se ejerce presión directa en la parte frontal del monitor, se puede dañar
el LCD o la pantalla táctil.
No lo use si la pantalla está en blanco o si no emite sonidos. Estos son
indicios de fallas en el funcionamiento. El uso en estas condiciones podría Operar el dispositivo por largo tiempo con el motor apagado hará que se
ocasionar accidentes (incendios o descargas eléctricas ). muestre una advertencia de batería baja en la pantalla. Use el sistema
con el motor encendido.
No se detenga ni estacione en áreas restringidas con el fin de operar el
producto. Esto podría ocasionar accidentes.
83
GETtheMANUALS.org
Información principal del producto
iPod Dolby
iPod es una marca registrada de Apple Inc. Manufacturado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas registradas de Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay es una marca registrada de Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Todos los derechos reservados. TomTom y el logo de las “dos
El nombre de marca y logos de Bluetooth son marcas registradas que perte- manos” son marcas registradas de TomTom N.V. o de una de sus subsidiarias.
necen a Bluetooth SIG. Inc. y se usan bajo licencia. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Todos los derechos reservados. Este material se encuentra registrado
Se requiere de un teléfono móvil con Bluetooth para poder usar la tecnología y es sujeto de la protección por derechos de autor y/o derechos sobre bases de datos, así
inalámbrica de Bluetooth. como otros derechos de propiedad intelectual en posesión de TomTom y sus subsidiarias. El
uso de este material esta sujeto a acuerdos de licencia. Las copias o revelaciones no autori-
DivX
zadas de este material conllevan responsabilidades civiles o criminales.
Como un producto certificado por DivX, puede reproducir vídeos HD DivX
premium. (Incluyendo .avi y ,divX)
DivX, DivX Certified, y sus logos y marcas asociadas son propiedad de DivX y
Español
LLC y se usan bajo licencia.

DivX está protegida por al menos una de las siguientes patentes en los Esta-
dos Unidos: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Usar tarjetas de memoria SD

1. La ranura de la tarjeta SD en este dispositivo es para los archivos del mapa.
2. Los archivos del mapa se encuentran guardados en la tarjeta SD de este dispositivo.
No añada, elimine o dé formato a los archivos dentro de la tarjeta SD. Saque o inserte la tarjeta solo para actualizar el mapa con una nueva versión.
3. Solo use la tarjeta SD que le fue proporcionada por el vendedor. No separe o copie el archivo del mapa en una tarjeta SD diferente.
Esto podría ocasionar fallas en el funcionamiento u operación incorrecta.
4. Expulsar e insertar la tarjeta SD mientras el sistema se encuentra en operación podría causar errores en la tarjeta o en el sistema.
Para expulsar o insertar la tarjeta SD, primero apague el motor del vehículo.
5. Conectar y desconectar repetidamente la tarjeta SD durante un periodo corto de tiempo puede causar daños al dispositivo.
6. La tarjeta SD está formateada para incluir solo el archivo de datos del mapa.
Guardar otros archivos en la tarjeta SD podría causar errores o fallas en el sistema.
Actualizar el mapa y descargar el software AVN

1. Conecte la tarjeta SD a su ordenador.
2. Vaya a la página Actualizar (URL).
84
GETtheMANUALS.org
Funciones principales del producto
Función. Descripción Función. Descripción

Con Apple CarPlay, puede hacer llamadas, inter-
Pantalla ancha LCD Apple CarPlay cambiar mensajes de texto, usar el mapa, escuchar
Pantalla Proporciona vídeo y música de alta calidad de manera si- música y usar las funciones de Siri.
multánea por medio de una pantalla ancha de 9,2 pulgadas
que ofrece mayor conveniencia con una pantalla táctil.
Con Android Auto puede usar las funciones de mapas
Android Auto de Google, teléfono, reconocimiento de voz y música.
Función de sintonizador digital
El sintonizador digital tiene capacidad de almacenar 12 esta-
Español
ciones para FM1, FM2, AM y DAB respectivamente. Función de conexión por Bluetooth
Radio Proporciona una función de manos libres que permite a los con-
Servicios RDS Bluetooth ductores hacer llamadas inalámbricas mientras conducen, así
Proporciona AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY junto con los servicios como escuchar música por medio de la transmisión de audio.
RDS.
Función de búsqueda automática de medios

Identifica de forma automática los archivos multimedia, inclu- Funciones del control de pantalla digital
Medios de USB yendo vídeo, audio y fotos guardados en la USB y la tarjeta Control fácil del brillo de la pantalla por medio de la pantalla
SD y los muestra en forma de lista para su conveniencia. táctil para visualizar convenientemente.
Cámara de detección trasera

Misceláneo Le permite ver la parte trasera por medio de una cámara de
Usa el mapa de TomTom HD cuando se pone la marcha en reversa.
Navegación Se puede recibir orientación precisa con un sistema de
GPS y un mapa preciso y a través una antena de alta Monitor de entorno - Opcional
sensibilidad. Le permite ver al frente, atrás, a izquierda y a derecha a
través de cuatro cámaras instaladas dentro del vehículo.
85
GETtheMANUALS.org
Nombres y funciones de los componentes
Vista frontal
Botón Descripción
1 POWER / VOLUME
1. Se usa para encender/apagar o controlar el volumen.
2. Mantenga presionada (1.5 segundos) para apagar.
3. Presione brevemente para encender/apagar el AV.
4. Gire a derecha/izquierda para controlar el volumen. (rango de
control de volumen de 0 a 45)
2 Inicio
1 1. Lleva a la pantalla de inicio (PIP, Picture in Picture)
2 3 4 5 2. Mantenga presionada (1.5 segundos) para ir al modo de
Favorito.
Español
3 MODE
1. Cambia a la pantalla del modo principal.
2. En el modo de navegación, mantenga presionado (más de
1.5 segundos) para operar el último modo AV que estaba en
operación antes del navegador.
4 NAVI
1. Convierte al modo de navegador y muestra la ubicación actual
sin importar si el AV se encuentra encendido o apagado.
2. Mantenga presionado (más de 1.5 segundos) para ir a la
pantalla donde pueda buscar su lugar de destino.
5 SETUP
En cualquier modo, mantenga presionado para mostrar la panta-
lla de Ajustes.
En el modo de Radio/ Audio/ Vídeo/ Navegación/ Teléfono con
Bluetooth,
Presione para mostrar la pantalla de ajustes correspondiente.
86
GETtheMANUALS.org
Vista trasera Conector de 42P AVN
AVN
Español
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Conector de antena de radio A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
- Para conectar el cable de la antena de radio A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) Conector de antena de GPS A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Para conectar el cable de la antena de GPS A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Conector de la cámara trasera
- Para conectar un conector la cámara trasera A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) Puerto USB
- Para conectar un conector USB para la función USB A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Conector I/O (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Conector DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Para conectar el cable de la antena DAB B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
87
GETtheMANUALS.org
Controlador del volante
Botón Descripción
1 Durante una llamada con Bluetooth, mantenga presionado para
terminar la llamada.
Cuando no esté realizando una llamada, presione para encender/
6 apagar el silencio.
2 En cualquier modo
2 3 - Cada vez que se presione la tecla, se cambiará el modo en el orden
4
siguiente: Radio→Medios→Música Bluetooth→iPod→Mi música. (Si no se
encuentra conectado el dispositivo de medios, se desactivarán los modos
5 1 relacionados)
En el modo de Radio
- Mantenga presionado para cambiar el modo en el orden siguiente: FM1→-
Español
FM2→AM→DAB.
En el modo de medios
- Mantenga presionado para cambiar el modo en el orden siguiente: Música
de USB→Vídeo de USB→Imagen de USB.
3
Ajustes de volumen.
4 Durante la reproducción
- presione hacia arriba/abajo para ir al archivo anterior/siguiente.
En el modo de Radio
- presione hacia arriba/abajo para ir a la presintonía anterior/siguiente.
-p resione hacia arriba/abajo para ir a la frecuencia anterior/siguiente.
5
Opera el modo manos libres por Bluetooth.
En el modo de Apple CarPlay

6 - opera Siri.
En el modo Android Auto
- opera Google Voice.
88
GETtheMANUALS.org
Operación básica
Iniciar el sistema Apagar el sistema
1. Cuando esté encendido el sistema, mantenga

1. Presione el botón de encendido del motor 2. Una vez que el sistema esté encendido, presionado (más de 1.5 segundos) el botón de
o llave de ignición en ON o ACC. va a iniciar el proceso de inicialización y POWER/VOL para apagar. Cuando el sistema se
se mostrará la pantalla del logo. apague, se guardará el modo más reciente.
Español
3. La página de seguridad se muestra y se 4. P
resione el botón [Aceptar] para mostrar el modo más 2. C
uando se apaga se muestra la hora actual.
habilita la pantalla solicitando el consenti- reciente. (El modo predeterminado es Radio FM1)
miento del usuario.
Información Información
- Verifique la casilla [Auto ocultar] para encender el modo operado más recientemente sin presionar el botón - Cuando se vuelva a encender, el sistema encen-
[Aceptar]. derá el modo más recientemente operado.
- El sistema lo apagará automáticamente si han
pasado más de tres minutos con el motor apa-
gado y la puerta del conductor se encuentra
abierta.
89
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reiniciar el sistema Encender audio Apagar Audio
1. Presione al mismo tiempo los botones 1. Cuando esté encendido el AV, presione 1. Cuando esté encendido el AV, presione
MODE y SETUP. brevemente (más de 1.5 segundos) el brevemente (más de 1.5 segundos) el bo-
botón de POWER/VOL para apagar el AV. tón de POWER/VOL para encender el AV.
Español
2. El sistema se encenderá y reiniciará. 2. Cuando se apaga el audio, se muestra el 2. Cuando se apaga, la pantalla de navega-
modo de pantalla de navegación mostrado ción se mantiene pero comienza a operar
más recientemente. el audio operado más recientemente.
Información
- Reiniciar el sistema restaura todos ajustes y
configuraciones existentes al estado predetermi-
nado. Esto tiene el fin de asegurar la estabilidad
del dispositivo y no es un defecto del sistema.
90
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes de sistema
Ajustes de sistema Ajustes de Radio Ajustes de navegación Ajustes de Reloj
1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, 1. Se usa para establecer los ajus- 1. En la pantalla del menú de navegación, 1. Se usa para ajustar la hora. Pre-
mantenga presionado el botón tes de RDS y PTY Seek. ajusta si la navegación inicial automáti- sione el botón en la esquina
SETUP. camente en el arranque. Presione el bo- superior derecha para iniciar los
tón de reinicio en la esquina superior
ajustes.
derecha para inicializar los ajustes.
Español
Ajustes de Sonido Ajustes de Favoritos Ajustes de idioma
2. En la pantalla de ajustes,
seleccione el modo de ajustes
1. Se usa para ajustar el atenua- 1. Se usa para añadir/eliminar/ 1. Se usa para establecer el idi-
deseado. mover el menú de favoritos.
dor/balanceo, EQ y otros ajustes oma. Después de seleccionar el
de sonido. Presione el botón Presione el botón en la lenguaje deseado, presione el
en la esquina superior derecha esquina superior derecha para botón en la esquina superior
para iniciar los ajustes. iniciar los ajustes. derecha. El sistema se reiniciará
automáticamente.
91
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes de pantalla
1. Se usa para establecer la tasa

de iluminación, pantalla apa-
gada y otros ajustes de pantalla.
Presione el botón en la
esquina superior derecha para
Español
iniciar los ajustes.
Ajustes de sistema
1. Se usa para verificar la infor-

mación del sistema y reiniciar/
actualizar.
92
GETtheMANUALS.org
Seleccionar modo
Modo principal Modo de medios Modo de teléfono Bluetooth Modo de música Bluetooth
1. Desde las teclas fijas del sistema, 1.A través del modo de medios se 1. Esta función permite al usuario hacer 1.Esta función permite reproducir dentro
pueden reproducir archivos de llamadas telefónicas conveniente- del automóvil la música guardada en el
presione el botón MODE. música, vídeo e imágenes conteni- teléfono móvil por medio de transmisión de
mente por medio de teléfonos con audio por Bluetooth.
dos en el dispositivo USB. Bluetooth. 2. La música podría no reproducirse de
2. Esta función no operará a menos forma automática dependiendo del pro-
2. Antes de usar la función de Blue- grama de reproducción en del dispositivo
Español
de que haya al menos un archivo tooth, debe primero asociar/conectar conectado. Si no funciona la reproducción
de música, vídeo o imagen en el su teléfono móvil con el auto. automática, vuelva a presionar el botón
dispositivo USB. de reproducir.
Modo de Radio Modo DAB Modo Mi música
2. En la pantalla de ajustes, selec-

cione el modo deseado.
1. Reproduce las estaciones de radio 1. En el modo de radio, presione el 1. Las estaciones de radio se pueden
reproducir guardándolas en la función de
FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. botón para ingresar en el modo grabación de radio.
DAB para escuchar las transmi-
siones de audio digital. 2. Los archivos de música dentro del modo
de medios que escuche con más frecuen-
cia se pueden guardar en AVN para crear
listas de música únicas.
Precaución
- Se pueden guardar hasta 100 listas.
93
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo AUX Modo e-Manual Modo de navegación
1. La música se reproduce al 1. El método de usar las funciones 1. Se muestra la ubicación actual

conectar un dispositivo externo clave de este dispositivo se del vehículo.
por medio de AUX. puede verificar conveniente-
mente por medio de AVN.
Español
Precaución
NOTA
- Cuando conecta un disposi-
tivo externo, se recomienda Canal de mensajes de tráfico (CMT)
el uso de un cable AUX de 3
polos. Puede recibir información de tráfico en su AVN.
- Conectar un conector AUX El canal de mensajes de tráfico (CMT) no es
sin conectar un dispositivo un servicio del AVN. Las estaciones de radio
externo convertirá el sistema FM en diferentes países transmiten información
al modo AUX, pero solo se CMT como parte de su programación. CMT
escuchará ruido. Cuando el también se conoce como información de tráfico
modo AUX no esté en uso, RDS-CMT.
asegúrese de desconectar Su dispositivo AVN usa esta información para
también el conector. advertirle sobre retrasos por el tráfico en su
ruta y cómo evitarlos.
Nota: AVN no es responsable de la disponi-

bilidad o calidad de la información de tráfico
proporcionada por CTM.
CTM no está disponible en todos los países y

regiones.
Visite tomtom.com para verificar si está dis-

ponible en su país o región.
94
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo Android Auto Modo de Apple CarPlay Modo iPod
1. Android Auto se puede usar al 1. Al conectar su iPhone con AVN, 1. Puede escuchar música si
conectar un teléfono inteligente puede usar convenientemente conecta su dispositivo iPod con
Android con AVN. varias funciones, incluyendo AVN.
Teléfono, Navegación, Men-
sajes, Música y Siri. Precaución
Español
Conectar Android Auto Conectar Apple CarPlay y iPod - Cuando usa el modo iPod por
medio de un iPhone, debe des-
habilitar el ajuste Usar CarPlay
en los ajustes del iPhone.
Cable USB Cable USB
Precaución
- Cuando conecte el cable USB, use solo cables auténticos.
95
GETtheMANUALS.org
Restricción de funciones como medida de seguridad
S
i intenta usar funciones como el modo de vídeo que pudiesen distraerlo mien-
tras conduce, el sistema apagará la pantalla o la función se deshabilitará.
- El vídeo no está disponible al conducir. El reproductor de audio no resulta
afectado cuando el vídeo esté apagado.
- La presentación de diapositivas no está disponible al conducir.
L
a pantalla de restricción desaparecerá cuando se cambie la marcha a P o
cuando se ponga el freno de aparcamiento.
Español
96
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Monitor de entorno) - Opcional
Para mayor seguridad, este dispositivo también es compatible con el monitor de entorno.
AVM es una función opcional.
Presionar el interruptor AVM o cambiar a R convertirá el monitor a AVM sin importar el modo actual.
Presionar de nuevo el interruptor AVM o cambiar de R a otro estado, apagará automáticamente el modo AVM y restablecerá el modo anterior.
Cuando esté funcionando AVM, es posible usar las funciones de volumen y silencio.
Para cambiar entre los modos de vista en 2D o 3D, use las funciones del modo de vista dentro de los ajustes de AVM.
Vista 2D Vista 3D
Español
Precaución
- La pantalla AVM puede verse diferente a la distancia real. Por su seguridad, siempre mantenga sus precauciones y verifique las partes traseras y los costados.
- Cuando opere AVM, solo se pueden usar las funciones de volumen y llamadas entrantes.
97
GETtheMANUALS.org
Por su seguridad, el sistema ha sido equipado con una cámara de vista trasera para un rango de visión más amplia.
La cámara trasera funcionará de forma automática cuando se encienda el motor y la transmisión se cambia a R.
La cámara trasera se detendrá de forma automática cuando la transmisión se cambie a una posición diferente.
Cuando esté funcionando la cámara, es posible usar las funciones de volumen y silencio.
Español
1. Ponga la llave de ignición en ON o ACC.

2. Ponga la palanca de transmisión en R.
Precaución
- La pantalla de la cámara de detección trasera puede verse diferente a la distancia real. Por su seguridad, siempre mantenga sus precauciones y
verifique las partes traseras y los costados.
- Cuando opere la cámara trasera, solo se pueden usar las funciones de volumen y llamadas entrantes.
98
GETtheMANUALS.org
Especificaciones del producto
Archivos compa- MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Nombre UNIDAD AVN con pantalla LCD TFT para automóvil
tibles TS, WMV
Suministro de MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
DC 14.4V Vídeo Codec
energía WMV7/8
Energía de ope- DC 9V ~ DC 16V Subtítulos compa-
ración tibles/ Resolución SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Consumo de 2A Archivos compa-
corriente MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
tibles
Común Corriente de Audio
3mA (Solo unidad principal) Tasa de bits 32Kbps a 320 Kbps
espera
Frecuencia de 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Temperatura -30℃ ~ +75℃ muestreo
operativa Formato de
Foto archivo
JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Temperatura de -40℃ ~ +85℃
almacenamiento Compatibilidad BLUETOOTH V4.1
Español
Dimensiones 278.4(W) x 175.5(H) x 191.5(D) Frecuencia de
2402 ~ 2480MHz
ancho de banda
Peso 2.5 kg Perfiles compa-
tibles A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Tamaño de
203.90 mm (Ancho) x 114.70 (Alto) mm (Área activa) Bluetooth
pantalla Salida de trans-
misión 3.0 dBm
Resolución 921,600 pixeles
Pantalla
Tipo de modu-
Modo de operación TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), matriz activa FHSS(GFSK)
lación
Luz de fondo LED Canal 79
Rango de fre- FM : 87.5~108.0MHz (Paso : 100kHz)

cuencia AM : 522~1620 kHz (Paso:9kHz)
Radio
Sensibilidad FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 ranura, 16GB Certifica-

Dispositivo ción
de almace- USB 1 puerto, USB2.0 HOST
namiento Por este medio Digen Co., declara que el equipo de radio tipo [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] cumple con las Directrices 2014/53/EU.
El texto completo de la declaración de conformidad con la EU se puede encontrar en la siguiente dirección : http://www.digen.co.kr
Formato FAT 16/32 Una copia de esta se encuentra dentro del equipo en el idioma original.
99
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Español
100
GETtheMANUALS.org
Autonavigatiesysteem GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Nederlands
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lees deze handleiding alstublieft zorgvuldig door voordat u uw apparaat gebruikt en bewaar het voor raadpleging in de toekomst.
Ontwerpen en specificaties zijn onderhevig aan wijzigingen zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving.
Bezoek de Ssangyong Motor website alstublieft voor gedetailleerde informatie over het autonavigatiesysteem.
- Adres van de website voor het downloaden van de AVN handleiding: http://www.smotor.com
101
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommario
Voorzorgsmaatregelen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 103
Belangrijkste productgegevens · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 104
Belangrijkste productfuncties ········································································································ 105
Onderdelen en functies van componenten ·························································· ······················· ······ 106
Knoppen op het stuurwiel · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 108
Basiswerking ··············································································· ··········································· 109
Systeeminstellingen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 111
Nederlands
Modus selecteren ····················································································································· 113

Beperkingen van de functies als veiligheidsvoorzorg · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 116
AVM (rondzichtmonitor) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 117
Achteruitrijcamera · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 118
Productspecificaties · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 119
102
GETtheMANUALS.org
Voorzorgsmaatregelen
Veiligheidswaarschuwingen Veiligheidsmaatregelen
Zelfs indien u routegeleiding van het multimedia-systeem ontvangt, s.v.p. Let op verkeersomstandigheden bij het autorijden.
de huidige verkeers- en wegregels in acht nemen.
In enkele ogenblikken kan de navigatie geleiding verstrekken in afge-
Het uitsluitend volgen van de routegeleiding van de navigatie kan leiden schermde gebieden.
tot overtredingen van huidige verkeers- en wegregels en resulteren in
verkeersongelukken. Gebruik van het apparaat tijdens het rijden kan leiden tot ongelukken als
gevolg van gebrek van aandacht voor de omgeving. Parkeer de auto eerst
Kijk niet op het scherm tijdens het autorijden. Naar het scherm kijken alvorens het apparaat te gebruiken. Bovendien is het mogelijk dat het tou-
tijdens langere perioden kan leiden tot verkeersongelukken. chscreen niet werkt voor sommige functies wanneer de auto in beweging
Gebruik het multimediasysteem niet tijdens het rijden, zoals POI´s ingeven is. De touchscreen-functie werkt alleen wanneer het voertuig gestopt is.
of routes opzoeken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot verkeersongelukken.
Dit product is alleen bestemd voor gebruik in voertuigen. Onthoudt u van
Parkeer de auto alvorens het apparaat te gebruiken. het installeren van dit apparaat in producten anders dan auto´s.
Het multimediasysteem niet demonteren, monteren of wijzigen. Zulke Indien u de positie van de installatie van het apparaat wilt wijzigen, s.v.p. navra-
Nederlands
acties kunnen leiden tot ongelukken, brand of elektrische schok. gen bij de plaats van aankoop of het serviceonderhoudscentrum. Er is technische
deskundigheid vereist bij het installeren of demonteren van het apparaat.
Wees voorzichtig om geen water te morsen of vreemde voorwerpen in het
apparaat te steken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot rook, vuur of storing. Bij het reinigen van het apparaat, dient u ervoor te zorgen om het appa-
raat uit te schakelen en een droge schone doek te gebruiken. Gebruik
Indien er afwijkingen optreden, zoals het insteken van vreemde materialen
nooit hard materiaal, chemische doekjes of oplosmiddelen (alcohol,
of rook als gevolg van blootstelling aan water, onmiddellijk het gebruik
benzine, thinners, etc.), aangezien dergelijke materialen het paneel van
stoppen en bij de plaats van aankoop of aangewezen onderhoudscentrum
het apparaat kunnen beschadigen of kleur/kwaliteitsvermindering kunnen
navragen.
veroorzaken. Indien u storingen van het product ondervindt, bij de plaats
Doorgaan met het gebruik kan resulteren in storing van het product. van aankoop of onderhoudsservicecentrum navragen.
Gebruik het apparaat niet indien het scherm blanco is of er geen geluid Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan ernstige schok of stoot.
wordt gehoord. Deze signalen geven storing van het product aan. Door-
gaan met het gebruik kan leiden tot ongelukken (brand, elektrische schok). Directe druk op de voorkant van de monitor kan schade aan het LCD- of
touchscreen veroorzaken.
Stop of parkeer niet op plaatsen waar dit niet is toegestaan om het product
te gebruiken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot verkeersongelukken. Bij gebruik van het apparaat met het contact uit zal een lege batterij-waar-
schuwing op het scherm worden weergegeven. Gebruik het systeem met
het contact ingeschakeld.
103
GETtheMANUALS.org
Belangrijke productinformatie
iPod Dolby
iPod is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Apple Inc. Gefabriceerd onder licentie van Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby en het dubbele-D symbool zijn handelsmerken van Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle rechten voorbehouden. TomTom en het „twee handen“-logo zijn han-
delsmerken of geregistreerde handelsmerken van TomTom N.V. of een van haar dochterbedrijven.
Het Bluetooth woordmerk en logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken eigendom
van Bluetooth SIG, Inc. en ieder gebruik van dergelijke merken is onder licentie. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle rechten voorbehouden. Dit materiaal is eigendom en wordt be-
Er is een mobiele telefoon met Bluetooth nodig om de draadloze Bluetooth-tech- schermd door auteursrechten en/of databaserechten en/of intellectuele eigendomsrechten die
nologie te gebruiken. eigendom zijn van TomTom of zijn leveranciers. Het gebruik van dit materiaal is onderworpen
aan de voorwaarden van een licentieovereenkomst. Iedere ongeautoriseerde kopie of bekend-
DivX making van dit materiaal leidt tot strafrechtelijke en civiele aansprakelijkheid.
Als DivX-gecertificeerd product kan dit product premium HD DivX video´s
afspelen. (Inclusief .avi en .divX)
DivX, DivX-gecertificeerd en geassocieerde logo´s zijn handelsmerken van
DivX en LLC en worden onder licentie gebruikt.
Zij worden beschermd door tenminste één van de volgende Amerikaanse
Nederlands
patenten: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Gebruikt SD geheugenkaarten
1. De kaartlezer in dit apparaat is voor kaartenbestanden.
2. Het kaartenbestand voor dit apparaat is opgeslagen op de SD-kaart.
Geen bestanden op de SD-kaart toevoegen, verwijderen of formatteren. SD-kaart alleen verwijderen/insteken om de kaart met een nieuwe versie te updaten.
3. Gebruik s.v.p. alleen de SD-kaart die door de dealer werd verstrekt. Verdeel of kopieer het kaartenbestand niet naar een andere SD-kaart die u eventueel heeft.
Dit kan leiden tot storingen of onjuiste werking.
4. Het verwijderen en insteken van SD-kaarten terwijl het systeem in gebruik is kan leiden tot SD-kaart of systeemfouten.
Om de SD-kaart te verwijderen of in te steken, eerst het contact van het voertuig uitzetten.
5. Herhaaldelijk aansluiten/uitschakelen van de SD-kaart in een korte periode kan het apparaat beschadigen.
6. De SD-kaart is geformatteerd om slechts een kaartgegevensbestand te bevatten.
Het opslaan van andere bestanden op de SD-kaart kan resulteren in systeemfouten of storingen.
Kaart upgraden en AVN-software downloaden

1. Steek de SD-kaart in uw computer.
2. Ga naar de Upgrade-pagina (URL).
104
GETtheMANUALS.org
Belangrijke producteigenschappen
Functie Beschrijving Functie Beschrijving

Met Apple CarPlay kunt u telefoongesprekken voe-
Breed LCD-display Apple CarPlay ren, tekstberichten uitwisselen, de kaart gebruiken,
Levert simultaan hoge kwaliteitsvideo en muziek via het 9,2 naar muziek luisteren en Siri-functies gebruiken.
Display inch brede schermweergave met aanvullend gebruiksge-
mak via de touchscreen-weergave.
Met Android Auto kunt u Google Maps, telefoon,
Android Auto stemherkenning en muziekfuncties gebruiken.
Digitale tuner-functie
De digitale functie ondersteunt een geheugen van 12 zend-
stations voor iedere FM1, FM2, AM en DAB. Bluetooth aansluit-functie
Radio Levert de handenvrij-functie die bestuurders in staat stelt om
Nederlands
RDS Services Bluetooth draadloze gesprekken te voeren en ook van muziek te genie-
Biedt AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY functies tussen RDS
ten met het streamen van audio terwijl ze autorijden.
Services.
Automatische zoekfunctie voor media

Bedieningsfuncties digitaal beeldscherm
Identificeert automatisch mediabestanden, inclusief video,
USB Media audio en foto´s, die op USB en SD-kaart zijn opgeslagen en
Gemakkelijke bediening van de helderheid van het scherm
geeft ze voor uw gemak weer als lijsten. door het touchscreen voor gerieflijk kijken.
Achteraanzicht-camera
Diversen Stelt u in staat om de achterkant te zien via de HD-camera
Gebruikt TomTom Map wanneer u de achteruit inschakelt.
Nauwkeurige geleiding kan ontvangen worden met gebruik
Navigatie van de GPS-motor en een nauwkeurige kaart via de hoog- Rondom zicht-monitor - Optioneel
gevoelige antenne. Stelt u in staat om de voor-, achter- en zijkanten te zien met
de vier camera´s die in het voertuig geïnstalleerd zijn.
105
GETtheMANUALS.org
Onderdelen en functies van componenten
Vooraanzicht
Knop Beschrijving
1 AAN-UIT / VOLUME
1. Gebruiken om de stroom aan/uit te zetten of het volume te regelen.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om de stroom uit te
schakelen.
3. Kort indrukken om de AV aan/uit te zetten.
4. N aar links/rechts draaien om het volume te regelen. (bereik regeling
volume 0-45)
1 2 Home
2 3 4 5
1. Naar beginscherm (PIP, beeld-in-beeld) gaan.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om naar de Bladwij-
zer-modus te gaan.
Nederlands
3 MODUS
1. Gaat naar het hoofd-modus scherm.
2. In de Navigatie-modus, (meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt hou-
den om de laatste AV-modus te gebruiken die werd gebruikt voor
de navigatie-modus.
4 NAVI
1. Schakelt over naar navigatie-modus en geeft de huidige loca-
tie weer, onafhankelijk of AV aan/uit is.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om naar het
scherm te gaan om uw bestemming op te zoeken.
5 INSTELLINGEN
In iedere modus ingedrukt houden om het instellingenscherm te tonen.
In de Radio/Audio/Video/Navigatie/Bluetooth Telefoonmodus,
indrukken om het betreffende instellingenscherm te tonen.
106
GETtheMANUALS.org
Achteraanzicht AVN 42P Connector
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
Nederlands
1) Radioantenne plug A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
- Om de radioantennekabel aan te sluiten A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS-antenne plug A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Om de GPS-antennekabel aan te sluiten A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Connector camera achteraanzicht
- Om een connector van een achteraanzicht-camera aan te sluiten A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-poort
- Om een USB-connector aan te sluiten voor de USB functie A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
B22 MIC-
- Om een DAB-antennekabel aan te sluiten B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
107
GETtheMANUALS.org
Stuurwiel-bediening
Stuurwiel-bediening
Knop Beschrijving
1 Tijdens een Bluetooth handenvrijgesprek ingedrukt houden om het gesprek
te beëindigen.
Wanneer niet aan het bellen, indrukken om Mute aan/uit te zetten.
6
2 In iedere modus
- Ieder keer verandert het indrukken van de toets in de volgorde Radio
2 3 →Media → Bluetooth Muziek → iPod → Mijn muziek-modus. (Indien het
4 media-apparaat niet is aangesloten zullen de betreffende modi worden
uitgeschakeld)
5 1 In Radio-modus
- Ingedrukt houden om de radio-modus te wijzigen in de volgorde FM1 → FM2
→ AM → DAB modus.
In Media-modus
- Ingedrukt houden om de modus te wijzigen in de volgorde USB Muziek →
USB Video → USB Beeld modus.
Nederlands
3
Regelt het volume.
4 Tijdens het spelen

- op omhoog/omlaag drukken om naar het vorige/volgende bestand te gaan.
In Radio-modus
- omhoog/omlaag drukken om naar de vorige/volgende voorinstelling te gaan.
-o mhoog/omlaag ingedrukt houden om naar de vorige/volgende uitzendfrequentie
te gaan.
5
Maakt gebruik van de Bluetooth handenvrij-modus.
In CarPlay gebruiken modus

6 - gebruikt Siri.
In Android Auto-modus
- gebruikt Google Voice.
108
GETtheMANUALS.org
Basis Gebruik
Starten van het systeem Afsluiten van het systeem
1. Indien het systeem in gebruik is, de AAN-UIT/VOLU-

1. Druk op de motor starten-knop of zet het 2. Zodra het systeem is aangezet zal het ME-knop ingedrukt houden (1,5 seconden) om de
contact op AAN of ACC. opstartproces beginnen en wordt het stroom uit te schakelen. Indien de stroom is uitgescha-
logo-scherm weergegeven. keld wordt de laatste gebruiksmodus bewaard.
Nederlands
3. De veiligheidswaarschuwingenpagina 4. Druk op de [Agree] knop om de meest recente mo- 2. De huidige tijd wordt getoond wanneer de
wordt getoond en de gebruikersinhoud is dus te tonen. (De standaardmodus is Radio FM1) stroom uit is.
uitgeschakeld.
Informatie Informatie
- Kijk op de [Auto Verdwijnen] box om de meest recent gebruikte modus aan te zetten zonder de [Accoord]-knop in te drukken. - Indien het contact weer wordt aangezet, zet het
systeem automatisch de meest recent gebruikte
modus aan.
- Het systeem schakelt automatisch uit indien het
contact meer dan 3 minuten aanstaat en de deur
aan de bestuurderskant openstaat.
109
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resetten van het systeem Audio uit Audio aan
1. Druk tegelijkertijd op de MODUS en IN- 1. Indien de AV is on, kort (minder dan 1,5 1. Indien de AV uit staat, kort (minder dan 1,5
STELLINGEN- knop. seconden) de AAN-UIT/VOL-knop ingedrukt seconden) de AAN-UIT/VOL-knop ingedrukt
houden om de AV uit te zetten. houden om de AV aan te zetten.
Nederlands
2. Het systeem wordt uitgeschakeld en op- 2. Indien de audio uit is, wordt de meest 2. Indien de audio aan is, wordt het naviga-
nieuw opgestart. recent gebruikte navigatiemodus getoond. tiescherm getoond, maar de meest recent
gebruikte Audio begint te spelen.
Informatie
- Herstarten van het systeem herstelt bestaande instellin-
gen en configuraties terug naar hun standaardwaarden.
Dit is om de stabiliteit van het apparaat te garanderen
en is geen systeemfout.
110
GETtheMANUALS.org
Systeeminstellingen
Systeeminstellingen Radio-instellingen Navigatie instellingen Klokinstellingen
1. Druk (langer dan 1,5 seconden) 1. Gebruikt voor het instellen van 1. In het Navigation instellingenscherm, 1. Wordt gebruikt om de tijd in te
op de SETUP-apparaatknop en RDS en instellingen voor PTY stelt in of de Navigatie automatisch dient stellen. Druk op de knop om
houd hem ingedrukt. zoeken. te beginnen bij het opstarten. Druk op de instellingen te initialiseren.
de reset -knop rechtsboven om te
beginnen met de instellingen.
Geluidsinstellingen Bladwijzer instellingen Taalinstellingen
Nederlands
2. Selecteer de gewenste instel-
lingenmodus op het instellingen-
scherm. 1. Wordt gebruikt om de fader/ 1. Gebruikt om het bladwijzermenu 1. Wordt gebruikt om de taal in te
balans van het geluid, de EQ en toe te voegen/te annuleren/te stellen. Nadat u de gewenste
andere geluidsinstellingen in verplaatsen. Druk op de knop taal geselecteerd hebt, druk op
te stellen. Druk op de knop rechts bovenaan om de instel- de knop rechts bovenaan.
rechts bovenaan om de instellingen te initialiseren.
lingen te initialiseren. Het systeem Het systeem zal
automatisch opnieuw opstarten.
111
GETtheMANUALS.org
Scherminstellingen
1. Wordt gebruikt om de helderheid,

ratio, schermuitschakeling en
andere scherminstellingen in
te stellen. Druk op de knop
rechts bovenaan om de instel-
lingen te initialiseren.
Nederlands
Systeeminstellingen
1. Wordt gebruikt om de systeem-

informatie te controleren en om
het systeem opnieuw in te stel-
len/te upgraden.
112
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modus selecteren
Startmodus Mediamodus Bluetooth-telefoonmodus Bluetooth-muziekmodus
1. Druk kort op de MODE-appa- 1. In de mediamodus kunnen er 1. Met deze functie kan de gebruiker 1.Met deze functie kunnen gebruikers muziek
raatknop. muziek-, video- en afbeeld- gemakkelijk oproepen maken met die opgeslagen is op hun mobiele telefoon
ingsbestanden van het USB een Bluetooth-telefoon. afspelen in de auto via Bluetooth-audios-
-apparaat worden afgespeeld. treaming.
2. Voordat u de Bluetooth-functie 2. Het kan zijn dat de muziek niet automatisch
2. De functie zal niet werken, tenzij wordt afgespeeld, afhangende van het muz-
er ten minste één muziek-, gebruikt moet u eerst uw mo-
iekspelerprogramma op het aangesloten
video- of fotobestand staat op biele telefoon koppelen/aanlu- apparaat. Als de automatische afspeling niet
het USB-apparaat. iten op uw auto. werkt, druk opnieuw op de afspeelknop.
Nederlands
Radiomodus DAB-modus Mijn muziekmodus
2. Selecteer de gewenste modus

op het modusscherm.
1. Speelt de radio-uitzendingen van 1. Druk in de radiomodus op de 1. Radio-uitzendingen kunnen worden

afgespeeld door ze met de radio-opname-
FM1/FM2/AM/DAB af. knop om de DAB-modus functie op te slaan.
te openen en te luisteren naar 2. Muziekbestanden in de mediamodus die u
digitale radio-uitzendingen. vaak beluistert kunnen worden opgeslagen
in de AVN om uw unieke muzieklijsten te
creëren.
Opgelet
- U kunt tot 100 lijsten opslaan.
113
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX-modus e-manuele modus Navigatie MODUS
1. Er kan muziek worden af- 1. De gebruiksmethode van de 1. De huidige locatie van de auto
gespeeld door een extern ap- belangrijkste functies van dit ap- wordt getoond.
paraat aan te sluiten via AUX. paraat kan gemakkelijk geraad-
pleegd worden op de AVN.
Opgelet
- Wanneer u een externappa-
OPMERKING
Nederlands
raat aansluit is het aan-

bevolen een AUX-kabel met 3
polen te gebruiken. Verkeersinfokanaal (TMC)
- Als u een AUX-connec- U kunt verkeersinformatie ontvangen op uw AVN.
toraansluiting aansluit zonder
een extern apparaat aan te Het verkeersinfokanaal (TMC) is geen AVN
sluiten zal het systeem naar service. FM radiostations in verschillende landen
de AUX-modus gaan maar zenden TMC informatie uit als onderdeel van hun
zal er enkel ruis hoorbaar zijn. programmering. TMC staat ook bekend als RDS-
TMC verkeersinformatie.
Wanneer de AUX-modus niet in
gebruik is, zorg er dan voor dat Uw AVN-apparaat gebruikt deze informatie om u
u ook de connectoraansluiting te waarschuwen over vertragingen in het verkeer
verwijderd hebt. langs uw route en hoe u deze kunt vermijden.
Opmerking: AVN is niet verantwoordelijk voor de

beschikbaarheid of kwaliteit van de verkeersinfor-
matie die door TMC verstrekt wordt.
TMC is niet in alle landen en regio‘s beschikbaar.
Bezoek tomtom.com om te checken of het in uw

land en regio beschikbaar is.
114
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto-modus Apple CarPlay-modus iPod-modus
1. Android Auto kan worden gebruikt 1. Door uw iPhone aan te sluiten 1. U kunt genieten van muziek
door een Android-smartphone op op de AVN kunt u gemakkelijk door uw iPod-toestel aan te
de AVN aan te sluiten. verschillende functies gebruiken, sluiten op de AVN.
waaronder de functies telefoon,
berichten, muziek en Siri. Opgelet
-W
anneer u de iPod-modus
gebruikt via een iPhone moet
Nederlands
Conectar Android Auto Conectar Apple CarPlay y iPod
de instelling ‘CarPlay gebruiken‘
gedeactiveerd zijn in de iPhone-
instellingen.
Cable USB Cable USB
Precaución
- Cuando conecte el cable USB, use solo cables auténticos.
115
GETtheMANUALS.org
Beperkingen van de functies als veiligheidsvoorzorg
Beperkingen van de functies als veiligheidsvoorzorg
I ndien u functies, zoals de videomodus, die u kunnen afleiden van het rijden,
probeert te gebruiken zal het systeem het scherm uitschakelen of zal de
functie gedeactiveerd worden
- De videofunctie is niet beschikbaar tijdens het rijden. De uitschakeling van de
video heeft geen invloed op de audiospeler.
- Het afspelen van diavoorstellingen is niet mogelijk tijdens het rijden.
H
et restrictiescherm zal verdwijnen wanneer u de versnelling naar P schakelt of
wanneer u de parkeerrem opzet.
Nederlands
116
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (rondzichtmonitor) - optioneel
Dit apparaat ondersteunt ook rondzichtmonitors (AVM) voor extra veiligheid.
AVM is een optionele functie.
Wanneer u op de AVM-schakelaar drukt of naar R schakelt zal de monitor overgaan naar de AVM-modus, ongeacht uw huidige modus.
Wanneer u opnieuw op de AVM-schakelaar drukt of naar een andere versnelling dan R schakelt zal de AVM-modus automatisch worden uit-
geschakeld en zal uw vorige modus hersteld worden.
Wanneer AVM aan het werken is, is het mogelijk om de volume- en dempfuncties te gebruiken.
Gebruik de weergavemodusfuncties in de AV-instellingen om te schakelen tussen de 2D- en 3D-weergavemodi.
2D-weergave 3D-weergave
Nederlands
Opgelet
- De afstand op het AVM-scherm kan er anders uitzien dan de werkelijke afstand. Wees altijd voorzichtig en controleer rechtstreeks de achter- en
linker-/rechterkanten voor uw veiligheid.
- Wanneer AVM aan het werken is worden enkel de functies volume en inkomende oproepen ondersteund.
117
GETtheMANUALS.org
Achteruitrijcamera
Dit systeem is voor uw veiligheid uitgerust met een achteruitrijcamera waardoor u een breder gezichtsveld hebt.
De achteruitrijcamera zal automatisch beginnen werken wanneer de contactsleutel naar de ON-stand gedraaid wordt en de versnellingshendel naar
R geschakeld wordt.
De achteruitrijcamera zal automatisch stoppen met werken wanneer u naar een andere positie schakelt.
Wanneer de achteruitrijcamera aan het werken is, is het mogelijk om de volume- en dempfuncties te gebruiken.
Nederlands
1. Draai de contactsleutel naar ACC of ON.

2. Zet de versnellingshendel in R.
Opgelet
- De afstand op het scherm van de achteruitrijcamera kan er anders uitzien dan de werkelijke afstand. Wees altijd voorzichtig en controleer rechtstreeks
de achter- en linker-/rechterkanten voor uw veiligheid.
- Wanneer de achteruitrijcamera aan het werken is worden enkel de functies volume en inkomende oproepen ondersteund.
118
GETtheMANUALS.org
Productspecificaties
Naam Car TFT LCD Display AVN EENHEID Ondersteunde MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
bestanden TS, WMV
Stroomvoorziening DC 14.4V MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Video Codec
WMV7/8
Voeding DC 9V ~ DC 16V Ondersteuning/Re-
solutie Ondertitels SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Huidig verbruik 2A Ondersteunde MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Normaal bestanden
Slaapstand 3mA(Alleen Hoofdeenheid) Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Stroom
Sample Fre- 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Werkingstempe- -30℃ ~ +75℃ quentie
ratuur
Foto Bestandsformaat JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Bewaartempe- -40℃ ~ +85℃
ratuur Compatibiliteit BLUETOOTH V4.1
Afmetingen 278,4(B) x 175,5(H) x 191,5(D) Frequentie band-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
breedte
Nederlands
Gewicht 2,5 Kg Ondersteunde
profielen A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Schermformaat 203,90 mm (B) x 114,70 (H) mm (Actieve zone) Bluetooth
Resolutie 921.600 pixels Zendvermogen 3,0 dBm
Display Bedrijfsmodus TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix Type modulatie FHSS(GFSK)
Achtergrondver- LED
lichting Kanaal 79
Frequentiebereik FM : 87,5~108,0MHz (Stap: 100kHz)

AM: 522~1620 kHz (Stap:9kHz)
Radio
Sensitiviteit FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 slot, 16GB Certifice-

Opslagap- ring
USB 1 poort , USB2.0 HOST
paraat Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Verklaart dat de radioapparatuur type [AVN DGU-9745- Y400A] voldoet aan de Richtlijn 2014/53/EU.
De volledige tekst van de EU conformiteitsverklaring is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres : http://www.digen.co.kr
Formaat FAT 16/32 Er is een kopie van de conformiteitsverklaring bijgesloten bij de installatie.
119
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Nederlands
120
GETtheMANUALS.org
Автомобильная навигационная система РУКОВОДСТВО ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Pусский
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Внимательно прочтите это руководство перед эксплуатацией системы и сохраните его для обращения в будущем.
Параметры и характеристики могут измениться без предварительного уведомления.
Посетите веб-сайт Ssangyong Motor, чтобы получить подробную информацию об автомобильной навигационной системе.
- Адрес для скачивания руководства AVN: http://www.smotor.com
121
GETtheMANUALS.org
Содержание
Предостережения · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 123
Ключевая информация об устройстве · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 124
Ключевые особенности устройства ······························································································ 125
Названия и функции компонентов ·································································· ······················· ······ 126
Элементы управления на руле · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
Основные операции ······································································ ··········································· 129
Настройки системы · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 131
Выбор режима ························································································································ 133
Pусский
Ограничения функций в целях безопасности · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 136

Система кругового обзора · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 137
Камера заднего вида · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 138
Характеристики изделия · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 139
122
GETtheMANUALS.org
Предостережения
Предупреждения о безопасности Меры предосторожности

Несмотря на получение навигационных указаний от мультимедийной Следите за ситуацией на дороге во время движения.
системы, соблюдайте действующие правила дорожного движения.
В некоторых случаях система может прокладывать маршруты через
Использование одних лишь навигационных инструкций из системы запретные зоны.
может привести к нарушениям действующих правил дорожного
движения и привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям. Использование устройства во время движения может привести
к авариям из-за отсутствия внимания к внешней обстановке.
Не сморите на экран во время движения. Если долго смотреть на Используйте устройство только когда автомобиль не движется. Кроме
экран, вы можете попасть в аварию. того, некоторые функции сенсорного экрана могут отключаться при
Не используйте мультимедийную систему во время движения, движении автомобиля. Сенсорный экран работает только после
например, для поиска интересных мест или маршрутов. Такие остановки автомобиля.
действия могут привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям.
Устройство предназначено для использования только в автомобилях.
Используйте устройство только когда автомобиль не движется. Воздержитесь от установки этого устройства в других местах, кроме
Не разбирайте, не собираетесь и не вносите изменений в автомобилей.
мультимедийную систему. Такие действия могут привести к авариям, Если вы хотите изменить положение установки устройства,
пожарам или удару током. обратитесь к продавцу или в сервисный центр. При установке или
Будьте осторожны, не проливайте воду и не допускайте попадания в демонтаже устройства требуются технические знания.
устройство инородных предметов. Такие действия могут привести к
Pусский
При очистке устройства убедитесь, что оно выключено, и вы
задымлению, пожару или неисправности.
используете сухую и мягкую ткань. Никогда не применяйте
Если происходит непредвиденная ситуация, например, попадание жесткие материалы, грязные тряпки или растворители (спирт,
инородных предметов или задымление в результате воздействия бензол, разбавители и т. д.), поскольку такие материалы могут
воды, немедленно прекратите использование устройства и повредить панель устройства или привести к ухудшению качества/
обратитесь за помощью к продавцу или в сервисный центр. цветопередачи. При возникновении сбоев в устройстве обратитесь к
Если продолжить использование, может возникнуть неисправность. продавцу или в сервисный центр.
Не используйте устройство, если на экране ничего не отображается, Не подвергайте устройство сильным ударам или тряске.
а звук не работает. Эти признаки свидетельствуют о неисправности Не давите на переднюю сторону монитора, поскольку это может
устройства. Если продолжить использование, может произойти привести к повреждению ЖК-монитора или сенсорного экрана.
несчастный случай (пожар, удар током).
Не останавливайтесь и не паркуйтесь в непредназначенных для этого При работе устройства в течение длительного с выключенным
местах, чтобы воспользоваться устройством. Такие действия могут зажиганием вы увидите предупреждение о разрядке аккумулятора.
привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям. Используйте систему при включенном зажигании.
123
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ключевая информация об устройстве
iPod Dolby
iPod является зарегистрированной торговой маркой Apple Inc. Произведено по лицензии Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby и символ из двух букв D являются торговыми марками Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay является зарегистрированной торговой маркой Apple Inc. TomTom
© 1992-2017 TomTom. Все права защищены. TomTom и логотип "двух рук" являются
Bluetooth
товарными знаками или зарегистрированными товарными знаками TomTom N.V. или
Словесный знак и логотипы Bluetooth являются зарегистрированными торговыми
марками Bluetooth SIG, Inc., и любое использование таких марок регулируется лицензией. одной из ее дочерних компаний.
Для использования беспроводной технологии Bluetooth требуется мобильный телефон с © 1992-2017 TomTom. Все права защищены. Этот материал является
поддержкой Bluetooth. собственностью компании и защищен авторским правом и/или правом на
базу данных и/или другими правами на интеллектуальную собственность,
DivX
принадлежащих компании TomTom или ее поставщикам. Использование
Будучи сертифицированным DivX-устройством, данное изделие может воспроизводить
этого материала регулируется условиями лицензионного соглашения. Любое
файлы в формате DivX с высоким разрешением (включая .avi и .divX).
DivX, DivX Certified и соответствующие логотипы являются зарегистрированными несанкционированное копирование или разглашение этого материала влечет
торговыми марками DivX LLC и используются по лицензии. уголовную и гражданскую ответственность.
Они защищены как минимум одним из следующих патентов США: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668;
7,515,710; 7,519,274
Использование карт памяти SD

Pусский
1. На картах памяти SD для данного устройства хранятся файлы географических карт.

2. Файл карты был сохранен на карте памяти для этого устройства.
Не добавляйте, не удаляйте и не форматируйте файлы на карте памяти SD. Извлекайте карту памяти только для обновления географической карты до новой версии.
3. Используйте только карту памяти SD, предоставленную продавцом. Не разделяйте и не копируйте файл географической карты на другую карту памяти.
Это может привести к сбоям или неправильной работе.
4. Извлечение и вставка карт памяти SD во время работы системы может привести к ошибкам карты памяти или системным ошибкам.
Чтобы извлечь или вставить карту памяти, сначала отключите зажигания автомобиля.
5. Многократное вставка/извлечение карты памяти в короткий промежуток времени может привести к повреждению устройства.
6. Карта памяти отформатирована так, что содержит только файл данных географической карты.
Сохранение других файлов на карте памяти может привести к возникновению системных ошибок или сбоев.
Обновить карту и скачать программное обеспечение AVN

1. Подключите карту памяти к компьютеру.
2. Перейдите на страницу обновления (по ссылке).
3. Ссылка: http://ssangyong.navshop.com/downloads/
124
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ключевые особенности устройства
Особенность Описание Особенность Описание

С помощью Apple CarPlay можно выполнять
Широкий ЖК-экран телефонные звонки, обмениваться текстовыми
Apple CarPlay сообщениями, использовать карту, слушать
Экран 9,2-дюймовый сенсорный экран обеспечивает высокое
качество воспроизведения видео и музыки. музыку и использовать функции Siri.
Благодаря Android Auto вы можете использовать

Android Auto карты Google, телефон, распознавание голоса и
Цифровой радиоприемник воспроизведение музыки.
Цифровой радиоприемник может сохранять в памяти до
12 станций для каждого из диапазонов FM1, FM2, AM
Функция подключения по Bluetooth
Радио и DAB.
Позволяет водителю совершать звонки без рук во время
Службы RDS Bluetooth вождения, а также слушать музыку за счет потокового
Обеспечивает функции AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY за счет воспроизведения.
служб RDS.
Pусский
Функция автоматического поиска мультимедиа
Автоматически находит мультимедиа файлы, включая Цифровые средства управления экраном
Файлы на USB видео, музыку и фото, сохраненные на USB-носителе и Простое управление яркостью экрана с помощью
SD-карте, и отображает их в виде списка для удобства. сенсорного экрана для удобства просмотра.
Камера заднего вида

Прочее HD-камера показывает обстановку позади вашего
Используется карта TomTom автомобиля при переключении на заднюю передачу.
Точная навигация обеспечивается за счет системы
Навигация GPS и точной географической карты благодаря Система кругового обзора - дополнительно
высокочувствительной антенне. Обеспечивает обзор вперед, налево, направо и назад при
помощи четырех камер, установленных на автомобиле.
125
GETtheMANUALS.org
Названия и функции компонентов
Вид спереди
Кнопка Описание
1 ПИТАНИЕ / ГРОМКОСТЬ
1. Используется для включения/выключения питания или регулировки
громкости.
2. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы выключить питание.
3. Нажмите, чтобы включить/выключить AV.
4. Вращайте влево/вправо для регулировки громкости (диапазон
регулировки 0 ~ 45).
1 2 Главная
2 3 4 5
1. Переход на главную страницу (PIP, картинка в картинке).
2. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы перейти в
режим закладок.
3 MODE
1. Переход на главную страницу режима.
Pусский
2. В режиме навигации нажмите и удерживайте (более 1,5

секунд), чтобы включить последний AV-режим, который
использовался до режима навигации.
4 NAVI
1. Включает режим навигации и отображает текущее местоположение
независимо от того, включен или отключен AV.
2. Нажмите и удерживайте (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы перейти на
страницу, где можно найти ваше место назначения.
5 SETUP
В любом режиме нажмите и удерживайте, чтобы открыть окно «Настройки».
В режиме Радио/Аудио/Видео/Навигация/Телефон Bluetooth
нажмите, чтобы перейти на соответствующую страницу настроек.
126
GETtheMANUALS.org
Вид сзади Разъем AVN на 42 контакта
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Разъем для радиоантенны A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
- Для подключения кабеля радиоантенны A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
Pусский
2) Разъем для антенны GPS A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Для подключения кабеля антенны GPS
A11 FL- B11 ACC
3) Разъем камеры заднего вида A12 FR- B12 BATT+
- Для подключения камеры заднего вида
A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-порт A15 NC B / V VIDEO B15 AVM LED ON OFF L
- Для подключения USB-носителя A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Разъем ввода/вывода (42 контакта) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Разъем DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Для подключения кабеля антенны DAB
B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
127
GETtheMANUALS.org
Элементы управления на руле
1 Во время вызова по гарнитуре Bluetooth нажмите и удерживайте,
чтобы завершить вызов.
При отсутствии вызова нажмите, чтобы включить/выключить звук.
6
В любом режиме
2 -Каждое нажатие клавиши изменяет режим в следующем порядке: Радио →
2 3 Мультимедиа → Музыка по Bluetooth → iPod → Моя музыка (если устройство
4 мультимедиа не подключено, соответствующие режимы будут отключены).
В режиме «Радио»
-Нажмите и удерживайте для переключения режимов радио в следующем порядке:
5 1 FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
В режиме «Мультимедиа»
-Нажмите и удерживайте для переключения режимов в следующем порядке: Музыка
с USB → Видео с USB → Изображения с USB.
3
Регулирует громкость
Pусский
4 Во время воспроизведения
- нажимайте вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущему/следующему файлу.
- нажимайте вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущей/следующей сохраненной
станции.
-н ажимайте и держите вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущей/следующей
частоте вещания.
5
Включает режим гарнитуры Bluetooth.
В режиме Apply CarPlay

6 - включает Siri.
В режиме Android Auto
- включает распознавание голоса Google.
128
GETtheMANUALS.org
Основные операции
Запуск системы Выключение системы
1. П
осле включения системы нажмите и держите
1. Нажмите кнопку пуска двигателя или 2. После включения системы начнется (более 1,5 секунд) кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ГРОМКОСТЬ,
поверните ключ зажигания в положение процесс загрузки и появится экран с чтобы выключить питание. При выключении
ON или ACC. логотипом. сохраняется последний используемый режим.
Pусский
3. Выводится страница предупреждения 4. Нажмите кнопку [Cогласен] для отображения 2. Текущее время отображается при
о безопасности, где требуется согласие последнего режима. (Режим по умолчанию — выключенном питании.
пользователя. Радио FM1)
Информация Информация
-Установите флажок [Автоматическое скрытие], чтобы включить последний использованный режим без нажатия - При включении зажигания система
кнопки [Согласен]. автоматически возвращается к последнему
использованному режиму.
- Система автоматически отключается, если
после отключения зажигания прошло более 3
минут, а дверь водителя открыта.
129
GETtheMANUALS.org
Сброс системы Отключение звука Включение звука
1. Нажмите кнопки MODE и SETUP 1. В режиме AV нажмите кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ 1. Когда режим AV отключен, нажмите
одновременно. ГРОМКОСТЬ, чтобы выключить AV. кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ГРОМКОСТЬ, чтобы
включить AV.
Pусский
2. Система выключится и перезагрузится. 2. Когда звук выключен, появится экран с 2. При включении звука экран навигации
последним режимом навигации. не исчезает, но при этом начнется
воспроизведение последнего
использованного аудиоисточника.
Информация
- При сбросе системы восстанавливаются
заводские настройки. Это обеспечивает
стабильность устройства и не является
дефектом системы.
130
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки системы
Настройки системы Настройки радио Настройки навигации Настройки часов
1. Нажмите и держите кнопку 1. Используется для настройки 1. В на странице настроек навигации 1. Используется для настройки
укажите, следует ли автоматически
НАСТРОЙКИ. RDS, поиска PTY. запускать навигацию при запуске
времени. Нажмите кнопку
устройства. Нажмите кнопку сброса вверху справа, чтобы
в верхней правой части, чтобы сбросить сбросить настройки.
настройки
Настройки звука Настройки закладок Настройки языка
Pусский
2. В окне «Настройки» выберите
нужные настройки режима.
1. Используется для настройки 1. Используется для добавления/ 1. Используется для выбора языка.
микшера/баланса, эквалайзера удаления или перемещения После выбора нужного языка
и прочих настроек звука. меню закладок. Нажмите нажмите кнопку вверху
Нажмите кнопку вверху кнопку вверху справа, чтобы
справа, чтобы сбросить справа. Система автоматически
сбросить настройки. перезапустится.
настройки.
131
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки экрана
1. Используется для настройки

подсветки, соотношения
сторон, выключения экрана
и прочих настроек экрана.
Нажмите кнопку вверху
справа, чтобы сбросить
настройки.
Настройки системы
Pусский
1. Используется для проверки

системной информации и
сброса/обновления системы.
132
GETtheMANUALS.org
Выбор режима
Основной режим Режим «Мультимедиа» Режим «Телефон Bluetooth» Режим «Музыка Bluetooth»
1. Нажмите и держите кнопку 1. В режиме «Мультимедиа» можно 1. Эта функция позволяет 1.Эта функция позволяет воспроизводить
в автомобиле музыку, сохраненную
РЕЖИМ. открывать файлы с музыкой, видео, удобно совершать звонки с
на мобильном телефоне, при помощи
изображениями с USB-носителя. использованием телефонов с потоковой передачи по Bluetooth.
2. Чтобы эта функция работала, на поддержкой Bluetooth. 2. Воспроизведение может не запускаться
USB-носителе должен быть хотя бы 2. Перед использованием функции автоматически в зависимости от
один файл с музыкой, видео или Bluetooth необходимо сначала проигрывателя на подключенном
выполнить сопряжение вашего устройстве. Если автовоспроизведение
изображением.
не работает, нажмите кнопку
телефона с автомобилем. воспроизведения.
Режим «Радио» Режим DAB Режим «Моя Музыка»
Pусский
2. В окне «Режим» выберите
нужный режим.
1. Воспроизводит радио в 1. В режиме “Радио” нажмите 1. Радиопередачи можно записывать при

помощи функции записи радио.
диапазонах FM1/FM2/AM/DAB. кнопку , чтобы перейти в
режим DAB для прослушивания 2. Музыкальные файлы в режиме
мультимедиа, которые вы часто открываете,
цифрового аудиовещания. можно сохранить в системе AVN, чтобы
создать собственный плейлист.
Осторожно
- Можно сохранить до 100 списков.
133
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим AUX Режим электронного Режим навигации
руководства
1. Для воспроизведения 1. Отображается текущее

музыки подключите внешнее 1. De gebruiksmethode van de местоположение автомобиля.
устройство ко входу AUX. belangrijkste functies van dit ap-
paraat kan gemakkelijk geraad-
pleegd worden op de AVN. ПРИМЕЧАНИЕ
Осторожно
- При подключении внешнего Канал дорожных сообщений (TMC)
устройства рекомендуется
использовать 3-жильный Система AVN умеет принимать информацию
кабель AUX. о дорожном движении.
- При подключении штекера

Pусский
Канал дорожных сообщений (TMC) не

AUX без подключенного является службой AVN. Радиостанции УКВ в
внешнего устройства ряде стран транслируют информацию TMC в
система переходит в режим рамках своих программ. TMC также известен
AUX, но вы услышите как служба RDS-TMC.
только шум. Когда режим Ваше устройство AVN использует эти
AUX не используется, сведения для предупреждения о пробках на
извлеките штекер из маршруте и о том, как их можно избежать.
разъема.
Примечание: AVN не отвечает за наличие
или качество информации, предоставляемой
TMC.
TMC доступен не во всех странах или

регионах.
Посетите сайт tomtom.com, чтобы

проверить, доступен ли он в вашей стране
или регионе.
134
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим Android Auto Режим Apply CarPlay Режим iPod
1. Android Auto можно 1. При подключении iPhone к 1. Подключите iPod к AVN, чтобы
использовать при AVN можно использовать такие наслаждаться музыкой.
подключении смартфона на функции телефона, как звонки,
Android к AVN. навигация, сообщения, музыка
и Siri. Осторожно
- При использовании режима iPod
на iPhone необходимо отключить
Подключение Android Auto Подключение Apple CarPlay и iPod функцию «Использовать CarPlay»
в настройках iPhone.
Pусский
Кабель USB Кабель USB
Осторожно
-П
ри подключении кабеля USB используйте только оригинальный
соединительный кабель.
135
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ограничения функций в целях безопасности
Е
сли вы попытаетесь использовать такие функции, как воспроизведение
видео, которые могут отвлечь вас во время движения, система
выключит экран или отключит функцию.
- Воспроизведение видео недоступно во время движения.
Проигрыватель музыки работает, когда видео отключено.
- Слайдшоу недоступно во время движения.
О
граничения будут сняты при переключении коробки передач в режим
стоянки (Р) или при использовании стояночного тормоза.
Pусский
136
GETtheMANUALS.org
Система кругового обзора - дополнительно
Это устройство также поддерживает систему кругового обзора для дополнительной безопасности.
Система кругового обзора - это дополнительная функция.
Нажмите включатель системы или переведите рычаг КПП в положение R для перехода в режим кругового обзора вне зависимости от
текущего режима.
Нажмите включатель системы еще раз или переведите рычаг КПП в другое положение из R для автоматического отключения режима
кругового обзора и возврата в предыдущий режим.
Когда система кругового обзора работает, можно использовать функции регулировки и отключения громкости.
Чтобы переключаться между режимами 2- и 3-мерного вида, используйте функцию «Режим вида» в настройках системы кругового обзора.
2-мерный вид 3-мерный вид
Pусский
Осторожно
- Экран системы кругового обзора может выглядеть по-другому в зависимости от фактического расстояния. В целях безопасности всегда
будьте осторожны и самостоятельно проверяйте пространство сзади и справа/слева.
- Когда система кругового обзора работает, поддерживаются только функции регулировки громкости и приема вызовов.
137
GETtheMANUALS.org
Система оснащена камерой заднего вида с широким углом обзора для вашей безопасности.
Задняя камера включается автоматически при включении зажигания и переводе рычага КПП в положение R.
Задняя камера автоматически отключается при переводе рычага КПП в другое положение.
Когда задняя камера работает, можно использовать функции регулировки и отключения громкости.
Pусский
1. Переведите ключ зажигания в положение ON или ACC.

2. Переведите рычаг КПП в положение R.
Осторожно
- Экран камеры заднего вида может выглядеть по-другому в зависимости от фактического расстояния. В целях безопасности всегда будьте
осторожны и самостоятельно проверяйте пространство сзади и справа/слева.
- Когда камера заднего вида работает, поддерживаются только функции регулировки громкости и приема вызовов.
138
GETtheMANUALS.org
Характеристики изделия
Название Автомобильное устройство AVN с плоским ЖК-экраном Поддерживаемые MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
файлы TS, WMV
Питание 14,4 В пост. тока Видео MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Кодек
WMV7/8
Рабочее
9-16 В пост. тока
напряжение Поддержка/разрешение
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
субтитров
Потребление 2A
Общее тока Поддерживаемые
MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
файлы
Ток в режиме
3 мА (только головное устройство) Звук
ожидания Битрейт 32 ~ 320 кбит/с
Рабочая -30℃ ~ +75℃ Частота
температура 32 кГц, 44,1 кГц, 48 кГц
дискретизации
Температура
хранения
-40℃ ~ +85℃ Фото Формат файлов JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Совместимость BLUTOOTH V4.1

Габариты 278,4 (Ш) x 175,5 (В) x 191,5 (Г)
Диапазон частот 2402 - 2480 МГц
Масса 2,5 кг Поддерживаемые A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
профили
Размер экрана 203,90 мм (Ш) x 114,70 (В) мм (активная область) Bluetooth
Pусский
Выходной 3,0 дБм
Разрешение 921 600 пикселей сигнал
Экран
Технология TFT, активная матрица с плоскостным переключением (IPS) Тип модуляции FHSS(GFSK)
Подсветка Индикатор Канал 79
Диапазон частот FM : 87,5 ~ 108,0 МГц (шаг: 100 кГц)

AM : 522 ~ 1620 МГц (шаг: 9 кГц)
Радио
Чувствительность FM: 10 дБмкВ, АМ: 40 дБмкВ EMF
Карта памяти 1 слот, 16 ГБ Сертификация

Устройство
1 порт, ХОСТ USB2.0
хранения USB Настоящим Digen Co., Ltd. заявляет, что радиоаппаратура модели [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] соответствует директиве
2014/53/EU.
Полный текст декларации соответствия ЕС доступен по следующему адресу: http://www.digen.co.kr
Формат FAT 16/32 Копия декларации соответствия на исходном языке приложена к оборудованию.
139
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Pусский
140
GETtheMANUALS.org
Araç Navigayon Sistemi KULLANIM KILAVUZU Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Türkçe
Lütfen sisteminizi çalıştırmadan önce bu kılavuzu dikkatli bir şekilde okuyun ve ileride başvurmak üzere saklayın.
Tasarım ve teknik özellikler önceden haber verilmeksizin değiştirilebilir.
Araç Navigasyon sistemi hakkında daha detaylı bilgi için lütfen Ssangyong Motor internet sitesini ziyaret edin.
- AVN kullanım kılavuzunu indirmek için web adresi : http://www.smotor.com
141
GETtheMANUALS.org
İçindekiler
Önlemler · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 143
Temel Ürün Bilgisi · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· 144
Temel Ürün Özellikleri ················································································································ 145
Bileşen Adları ve İşlevleri ·············································································· ······················· ······ 146
Direksiyon Kumandası · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 148
Temel Kullanım ············································································ ··········································· 149
Sistem Ayarları · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 151
Mod Seçme ··························································································································· 153
Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde Uygulanan Kısıtlamalar · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 156
AVM (Çevre Görüş Monitörü) - İsteğe bağlı 157
Türkçe
· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · ·
Arka Görüş Kamerası · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 158

Ürün Özellikleri · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · 159
142
GETtheMANUALS.org
Önlemler
Güvenlik Uyarıları Güvenlik İkazları

Çoklu ortam sisteminden yol yardımı alırken bile lütfen her zaman gerçek Sürüş esnasında trafik koşullarına dikkat ediniz.
trafik ve yol kurallarına uyunuz.
Bazı durumlarda, navigasyon sizi yasak bölgelerden geçmenize sebep
Yalnızca Navigasyonun yol yardımını izlemek, gerçek trafik ve yol olacak şekilde yönlendirebilir.
kurallarının ihlaline ve dolayısıyla trafik kazalarına neden olabilir.
Cihazın sürüş esnasında kullanılması, dikkatin çevreye yeterince ver-
Sürüş esnasında ekrana uzun süre bakmayınız. Ekrana uzun süre bak- ilmemesi sebebiyle kazalara yol açabilir. Cihazı kullanmaya başlamadan
mak trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. önce aracınızı park edin. Bunun yanında, araç hareket halindeyken do-
Sürüş esnasında Çoklu Ortam Sistemini çalıştırmayın; POI girmek veya kunmatik ekranda bazı işlevler çalışmayabilir. Dokunmatik ekran özelliği
yol araması yapmak gibi. Bu tür eylemler trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. sadece araç durduğunda çalışacaktır.
Cihazı kullanmaya başlamadan önce aracınızı park edin. Bu ürün sadece otomobillerde kullanılmak üzere tasarlanmıştır. Bu cihazı
otomobilden başka araçlara yüklemeyiniz.
Çoklu Ortam sistemini sökmeyin, takmayın ya da değiştirmeyin. Bu tür
eylemler trafik kazalarına, yangına veya elektrik çarpmalarına yol açabilir. Cihaz kurulumunun pozisyonunu değiştirmek isterseniz lütfen satın
aldığınız yerden veya hizmet bakım merkezinizden bilgi alınız. Cihazın
Cihaza su dökülmemesine ve içine yabancı madde kaçmamasına özellikle dikkat kurulumu veya sökülmesi için teknik uzmanlık gerekmektedir.
edin. Bu tür eylemler duman çıkmasına, yangına veya arızaya yol açabilir.
Cihazı temizlerken cihazın kapalı olduğundan emin olun ve kuru ve
Cihaza yabancı madde kaçması veya su dökülüp duman çıkması gibi pürüzsüz bir bez kullanın. Asla sert malzemeler, kimyasal bezler veya
anormal bir durumla karşılaşırsanız derhal cihazı kullanmayı bırakın ve çözücüler (alkol, benzen, tiner vb.) kullanmayın; bu tür maddeler cihaz
Türkçe
satın aldığınız yer veya yetki bakım merkezi ile iletişime geçiniz. paneline zarar verebileceği gibi renk/kalitenin bozulmasına da neden
Bu tür bir durumda cihazı kullanmaya devam etmek ürünün olabilir. Ürün arızalandığında, satın aldığınız yerden veya hizmet bakım
arızalanmasına neden olabilir. merkezinizden bilgi alınız.
Ekranda görüntü yoksa veya ses duyulmuyorsa cihazı kullanmaya devam et- Cihazı sert sarsıntılara veya darbelere maruz bırakmayın.
meyin. Bu işaretler ürünün arızalandığını gösterir. Bu durumda cihazı kullanmaya
devam etmek, trafik kazalarına (yangın, elektrik çarpmalarına) yol açabilir. Monitörün ön kısmına doğrudan basınç uygulamak LCD'nin ya da dokun-
matik ekranın zarar görmesine neden olabilir.
Ürünü kullanmak için aracınızı park yasağı olan bölgelere park etmeyin
veya buralarda durdurmayın. Bu tür eylemler trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. Kontak kapalıyken cihazı uzun süre kullanmak, ekranda akü boşalıyor
uyarısının görülmesine neden olur. Sistemi kontak açıkken kullanın.
143
GETtheMANUALS.org
Temel Ürün Bilgisi
iPod Dolby
iPod, Apple Inc.'in tescilli ticari markasıdır. Dolby Laboratories lisansıyla üretilmiştir.
Dolby ve çift-D sembolü Dolby Laboratories'in tescilli markalarıdır.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay, Apple Inc.'in tescilli ticari markasıdır. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Her hakkı saklıdır.TomTom ve "iki el" logosu TomTom N.V.'nin veya
Bluetooth marka işareti ve logoları, Bluetooth SIG, Inc. şirketine ait tescilli bağlı kuruluşlarından birinin ticari markaları ya da tescilli ticari markalarıdır.
ticari markalardır ve bu işaretlerin kullanımı lisansa tabidir. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Her hakkı saklıdır. Bu materyal TomTom veya tedarikçilerinin mülki-
Bluetooth kablosuz (wireless) teknolojisini kullanmak için Bluetooth özellikli bir yeti olup, söz konusu şirketlerin telif hakkı koruması ve/veya veritabanı hakkı koruması ve/
cep telefonu gerekir. veya diğer fikri mülkiyet haklarının konusunu teşkil eder. Bu materyalin kullanımı, lisans
anlaşmasının hükümlerine tabidir. Bu materyalin izinsiz çoğaltılması veya açıklanması
DivX
cezai ve hukuki sorumluluklara yol açabilir.
DivX sertifikalı bir ürün olarak bu cihaz, yüksek kaliteli HD DivX videolarını
oynatabilir. (.avi ve .divX dahil)
DivX, DivX Certified ve ilişkili logolar, DivX ve LLC'nin tescilli markalarıdır ve
kullanımları lisansa tabidir.
Bunlar, aşağıdaki ABD patentlerinden en az biriyle korunmaktadır: : 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
SD Hafıza Kartlarının Kullanımı

1. Bu cihazdaki SD Kart yuvası map dosyaları içindir.
2. Map dosyası, bu cihaz için SD karta kaydedilmiştir.
SD karttaki dosyalara eklemeyin, dosyaları silmeyin veya biçimlendirmeyin. SD kartı sadece haritayı yeni sürümüne güncelleyeceğinizde çıkarın/takın.
Türkçe
3. Lütfen sadece bayiden verilen SD kartı kullanın. Map dosyasını sahip olduğunuz başka bir SD karta yüklemeyin veya kopyalamayın.
Bu tür bir işlem arızaya veya hatalı çalışmaya neden olabilir.
4. Sistem çalışırken SD kartların çıkarılması ve takılması, SD kart veya Sistem hatalarına yol açabilir.
SD kartı çıkarmak veya takmak için önce aracın kontağını kapatın.
5. SD kartın kısa süre için ardı ardına sökülüp takılması cihaza zarar verebilir.
6. SD Kart sadece Map veri dosyasını içerecek şekilde biçimlendirilmiştir.
SD karta başka dosyaların kaydedilmesi sistem hatalarına veya arızalara neden olabilir.
Haritanın Sürümünün Yükseltilmesi & AVN Yazılımının İndirilmesi

1. SD kartınızı bilgisayarınıza bağlayın.
2. Sürüm yükseltme sayfasına gidin (URL).
144
GETtheMANUALS.org
Temel Ürün Özellikleri
Özellik Açıklama Özellik Açıklama

Apple CarPlay ile telefon görüşmesi yapabilir, kısa
Geniş LCD Ekran Apple CarPlay mesaj gönderip alabilir, haritayı kullanabilir, müzik
Ekran 9.2-inç geniş ekran ve ekstra dokunmatik ekran kolaylığı ile dinleyebilir ve Siri özelliklerini kullanabilirsiniz.
aynı anda yüksek kalite video ve müzik oynatır.
Android Auto ile Google harita, telefon, ses tanıma ve
Android Auto müzik özelliklerini kullanabilirsiniz.
Dijital Radyo Alıcısı Özelliği
Dijital Radyo; her bir FM1, FM2, AM ve DAB modu için ayrı
ayrı 12 yayın istasyonu kaydetme özelliğini destekler.
Radyo Bluetooth Bağlantı Özelliği
Sürüş esnasında sürücülerin kablosuz görüşme yapmalarını
RDS Hizmetleri Bluetooth ve aynı zamanda Ses Yayını ile müziğin keyfini çıkarmalarını
RDS Hizmetleri arasından AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY özel- sağlayan Ahizesiz özelliğini sunar.
liklerini sağlar.
Otomatik Ortam Arama Özelliği

USB ve SD karta kaydedilmiş video, ses ve fotoğraf içeren Dijital Ekran Kontrolü Özellikleri
USB Ortamı ortam dosyalarını otomatik olarak tanımlar ve kolaylık İzleme rahatığı için ekran parlaklığının dokunmatik ekran
Türkçe
sağlamak için listeler halinde görüntüler. üzerinden kolay kontrolü.
Diğer Arka Görüş Kamerası

Geri vitese takınca, HD kamera ile arkanızı görmenizi sağlar.
TomTom Haritası kullanır
Navigasyon Yüksek duyarlılıklı anten ile GPS engine ve doğru bir harita
kullanılarak hatasız yol yardımı alınabilir. Çevre Görüş Monitörü - İsteğe bağlı
Araca yerleştirilen dört kamera ile ön, arka, sağ ve sol
tarafları görmenizi sağlar.
145
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bileşen Adları ve İşlevleri
Önden Görünüm
Düğme Açıklama
1 AÇMA-KAPAMA/SES
1. Gücü açık/kapalı konuma getirmek veya ses düzeyini kontrol etmek için
kullanılır.
2. Gücü kapatmak için basılı tutun (en az 1,5 saniye).
3. AV sistemini açık/kapalı konuma getirmek için kısa süre basın.
4. Ses seviyesini kontrol etmek için sağa/sola çevirin. (ses kontrol aralığı 0~45)
2 Ana
1. Ana ekrana gider (PIP, Resim içinde Resim)
1
2 3 4 5 2. Yer imi moduna geçmek için basılı tutun (en az 1,5 saniye).
3 MOD
1. Ana mod ekranına gider.
2. Navigasyon modunda, Navigasyon modundan önceki son
kullanılan AV modunu çalıştırmak için basılı tutun (en az 1,5
saniye).
4 NAVI
Türkçe
1. Navigasyon moduna geçer ve AV sisteminin Açık/Kapalı

olduğuna bakılmaksızın mevcut konumu gösterir.
2. Varış noktanızı arayabileceğiniz ekrana gitmek için basılı tutun
(en az 1,5 saniye).
5 AYARLAR
Herhangi bir moddayken, Ayarlar ekranını görüntülemek için
düğmeye basılı tutun.
Radyo/Ses/Video/Navigasyon/Bluetooth Telefon modunda, ilgili
ayarlar ekranını görüntülemek için bir kere basın.
146
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arkadan Görünüm AVN 42P Konnektörü
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Radyo Anten Girişi A6 NC B/V POWER B6 NC SPDIF-
- Radyo anten kablosunu takmak için A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS Anten Girişi A9 REVERSE B9 AUX GND
A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- GPS anten kablosunu takmak için A11 FL- B11 ACC
Türkçe
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Arka görüş kamerası konnektörü
- Bir arka görüş kamerası konnektörü bağlamak için A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB Portu
- USB işlevine yönelik bir USB konnektör bağlamak için A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) I/O Konnektörü (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) DAB Konnektörü B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- DAB anten kablosu bağlamak için B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
147
GETtheMANUALS.org
Direksiyon Kumandası
Düğme Açıklama
1 Bluetooth Ahizesiz arama sırasında, aramayı sonlandırmak için düğmeye basılı tutun.
Görüşmede olmadığınız zaman, Sesi açmak/kapatmak için bir kere basın.
6
2 Herhangi bir moddayken
- Düğmeye her basıldığında mod Radyo→Ortam→Bluetooth
2 3 Müzik→iPod→Müziğim sırasıyla değişir. (Ortam cihazı bağlı değilse, ilgili
4 modlar devredışı olacaktır)
Radyo modundayken
5 1 - Radyo modunu FM1→FM2→AM→DAB sırasıyla değiştirmek için basılı tutun.
Ortam modundayken
- Modu USB Müzik→USB Video→USB Görsel sırasıyla değiştirmek için basılı
tutun.
3
Ses düzeyini ayarlar.
4 Oynatma sırasında
- önceki/sonraki dosyaya geçmek için yukarı/aşağı düğmesine basın.
Türkçe
Radyo modundayken
- önceki/sonraki ön ayarlı kanala geçmek için yukarı/aşağı
düğmesine basın.
- önceki/sonraki yayın frekansına geçmek için yukarı/aşağı
düğmesine basılı tutun.
5
Bluetooth ahizesiz modunu çalıştırır.
Apple CarPlay modundayken

6 -Siri'yi çalıştırır.
Android Auto modundayken
-Google Voice sistemini çalıştırır.
148
GETtheMANUALS.org
Temel Kullanım
Sistemi Başlatma Sistemi Kapatma
1. Sistem çalışırken, gücü kapatmak (OFF) için

1. Motor start düğmesine basın veya kontak 2. Sistem tekrar açıldığında, yükleme işlemi POWER/VOL düğmesine basılı tutun (en az 1,5
anahtarını ON veya ACC konumuna getirin. başlayacak ve logo ekranı görüntülenecektir. saniye). Sistem kapatıldığında, son kullanılan
mod kaydedilir.
Türkçe
3. Güvenlik uyarı sayfası görüntülenir ve 4. En son kullanılan modu görüntülemek için [Ka- 2. Güç kapalıyken güncel saat gösterilir.
kullanıcı içeri etkinleştirilir. bul Et] düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan mod Radyo
FM1'dir)
Bilgi Bilgi
En son kullanılan modu açmak için [Kabul Et] düğmesine basmadan [Oto Kaybol] kutusunu işaretleyin. - Kontak tekrar açıldığında, sistem en son
kullanılan modu otomatik olarak açacaktır.
- 3 dakikadan uzun süre kontak kapalı konumda
ve sürücü kapısı açık bırakılırsa sistem otomatik
olarak kapanacaktır.
149
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistemi Sıfırlama Ses Kapalı Ses Açık
1. MODE ve SETUP düğmesine aynı anda 1. AV açıkken, AV'yi kapatmak için PWR/VOL 1. AV kapalıyken, AV'yi açmak için PWR/VOL
basın. düğmesine kısa bir süre basın (en çok 1,5 düğmesine kısa bir süre basın (en çok 1,5
saniye). saniye).
Türkçe
2. Sistem kapanacak ve yeniden 2. Ses kapatıldığında, en son kullanılan navi- 2. Ses açıldığında, navigasyon ekranı açık
başlayacaktır. gasyon modu ekranı görüntülenir. kalmaya devam ederken, en son kullanılan
Ses çalmaya başlayacaktır.
Bilgi
-Sistemi sıfırlama işlemi, mevcut tüm ayarları ve
kurulumları fabrika ayarlarına geri döndürecektir.
Bu işlem cihazın kararlılığını sağlamak için olup,
bir sistem hatası değildir.
150
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistem Ayarları
Sistem Ayarları Radyo Ayarları Navigasyon Ayarları Saat Ayarları
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden 1. RDS, PTY Arama ayarlarını 1. Navigasyon ayarları ekranında, sistem 1. Ayarları başlatmak için sağ üst
çalıştırıldığında Navigasyonun otomatik
SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun. belirlemek için kullanılır. olarak başlatılma durumunu ayarlar.
köşedeki düğmesine basın.
Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ üst
taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın.
Ses Ayarları Yer imi Ayarları Dil Ayarları
Türkçe
2. Ayarlar ekranında, istenen ayar-
lar modunu seçin.
1. Fader/balance, EQ ve diğer ses 1. Sık kullanılanlar menüsüne 1. Dili ayarlamak için kullanılır.
ayarlarını belirlemek için kullanılır. eklemek/kaldırmak/taşımak için İstediğiniz dili seçtikten sonra
Ayarları başlatmak için sağ üst kullanılır. Ayarları başlatmak için sağ üst köşedeki düğmesine
köşedeki düğmesine basın. sağ üst köşedeki düğmesine basın. Sistem otomatik olarak
basın. yeniden başlatılacaktır.
151
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ekran Ayarları
1. Aydınlatma, oran, ekran kapama

ve diğer görüntü seçeneklerini
belirlemek için kullanılır. Ayarları
başlatmak için sağ üst köşedeki
düğmesine basın.
Sistem Ayarları
Türkçe
1. Sistem bilgilerini görüntülemek

ve sistemi Sıfırlamak/Yükselt-
mek için kullanılır.
152
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mod Seçme
Ana Mod Ortam Modu Bluetooth Telefon Modu Bluetooth Müzik Modu
1. Sistem üzerindeki fiziksel 1.Ortam modu üzerinden USB aygıtı 1. Bu özellik, kullanıcının telefon 1. Bu özellik, kullanıcıların cep telefonuna
müzik, video ve görüntü dosyaları görüşmelerini Bluetooth telefon kayıtlı müziği Bluetooth ses yayını
düğmelerden, Mode düğmesine üzerinden arabanın sisteminde
kısa bir süre basın. oynatılabilir. üzerinden kolaylıkla yapmasını çalmalarını sağlar.
2. USB cihazında en azından bir sağlar.
2. Bağlı cihazda kullanılan müzik çalar
adet müzik, video veya görsel 2. Bluetooth özelliğini kullanmadan programa bağlı olarak, müzik otoma-
dosyası bulunmuyorsa, bu özellik önce ilk olarak, cep telefonunu- tik olarak çalmaya başlamayabilir. Oto
çalışmayacaktır. zu arabanızla eşleştirmeniz/ çalma çalışmıyorsa, oynat düğmesine
bağlanmanız gerekir. tekrar basın.
Radyo Modu DAB Modu Müziğim Modu
Türkçe
2. Mod ekranında istediğiniz modu
seçin.
1. FM1/FM2/AM/DAB modlarında 1. Radyo moduna girip Dijital Ses 1. Radyo yayınlarını radyo kaydı özelliği
radyo yayını çalar. Yayını (Digital Audio Broad- ile kaydederek çalınabilir.
casting) dinlemek için 2. Ortam modunda sık sık dinlediğiniz
müzik dosyaları, size özel Müzik
düğmesine basın. Listeleri oluşturmak için Akıllı Ses
özelliği ile kaydedilebilir.
Dikkat!
- En fazla 100 liste kaydedilebilir.
153
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX Modu e-Manuel modu Navigasyon MODU
1. AUX üzerinden harici bir cihaz 1. Bu cihazın temel özelliklerinin 1. Arabanın mevcut konumu
bağlanarak müzik çalınabilir. kullanılma yöntemi, Akıllı Ses gösterilir.
üzerinden kolaylıkla kontrol
edilebilir.
AÇIKLAMA
Dikkat!
Trafik Mesaj Kanalı (TMC)
- Harici bir cihaz bağlarken
3 kutuplu bir AUX kablosu Trafik bilgilerinin AVN’nize gelmesini
kullanmanız önerilir. sağlayabilirsiniz.
- Diğer ucunda bağlı ha- Trafik Mesaj Kanalı (TMC) bir AVN Hizmeti
rici bir cihaz olmadan değildir. Bazı ülkelerdeki FM radyo istasyonları,
sisteme bir AUX konnektör TMC bilgilerini programlamaları kapsamında
bağlandığında, sistem AUX yayınlamaktadır. TMC, RDS-TMC trafik bilgileri
olarak da bilinir.
Türkçe
moduna otomatik olarak

geçecektir fakat dışarıya AVN cihazınız bu bilgileri kullanarak sizi
sadece gürültü sesi verir. güzergâhınız üzerindeki trafik gecikmelerine
AUX modu kullanılmadığı karşı uyarır ve bundan nasıl kaçınabileceğiniz
zaman kablo konnektörünün konusunda yönlendirir.
bağlantısını kestiğinizden
emin olunuz. Not: TMC tarafından sağlanan trafik bilgilerinin
ulaşılabilirliği veya kalitesinden AVN sorumlu
değildir.
TMC her ülkede veya her bölgede

kullanılmamaktadır.
Ülkenizde veya bölgenizde kullanılıp

kullanılmadığını öğrenmek için tomtom.com
adresini ziyaret ediniz.
154
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto Modu Apple CarPlay Modu iPod Modu
1. Android Auto, bir Android akıllı 1. iPhone’unuzu Akıllı Ses ile 1. iPod cihazınızı Akıllı Ses ile
telefonu Akıllı Ses’e bağlayarak bağlayarak Telefon, Navigasyon, bağlayarak müziğin keyfini
kullanılabilir. Mesajlar, Müzik ve Siri gibi çıkarabilirsiniz.
çeşitli özellikleri kolaylıkla kul-
lanabilirsiniz. Dikkat!
- bir iPhone üzerinden iPod
modu kullanırken, iPhone
Android Auto Bağlanma Apple CarPlay ve iPod bağlama ayarlarından CarPlay Kullan
ayarı devre dışı bırakılmalıdır.
Türkçe
USB Kablo USB Kablo
Dikkat!
- USB kablosu bağlarken sadece orijinal bağlantı kablosunu kullanın.
155
GETtheMANUALS.org
Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde Uygulanan Kısıtlamalar
Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde
Uygulanan Kısıtlamalar
A
racı sürerken video modu gibi dikkatinizi dağıtabilecek özellikler kullanmaya
çalışırsanız, sistem ekranı kapatır veya fonksiyon devre dışı bırakılır.
- Video sürüş esnasında kullanılabilir değil. Video kapalıyken ses çalar
etkilenmez.
- Slayt gösterisi sürüş sırasında kullanılabilir değil.
V
ites P konumuna getirildiğinde veya el freni çekildiği zaman, kısıtlama
ekranı kaybolacaktır.
Türkçe
156
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM (Çevre Görüş Monitörü) - İsteğe bağlı
Bu cihaz aynı zamanda arttırılmış güvenlik önlemleri için Çevre Görüş Monitörü (AVM) sistemini destekler.
AVM isteğe bağlı bir özelliktir.
AVM düğmesine basmak veya vitesi R konumuna getirmek, kullandığınız mevcut moddan bağımsız olarak ekranı AVM moduna geçirir.
AVM düğmesine tekrar basmak veya vitesi R konumundan çıkararak başka konuma getirmek AVM modunu otomatik olarak kapatacak ve ekranı
önceki moduna geri döndürecektir.
AVM çalışırken, ses düzeyi ve sessiz özellikleri kullanılabilir.
2B ve 3B görüntüleme modları arasında değişim yapmak için AVM Ayarları içinde Görünüm Modu özelliklerini kullanın.
2B Görünüm 3B Görünüm
Türkçe
Dikkat!
AVM ekranı, gerçek mesafeden farklı görünebilir. Güvenliğiniz için dikkatli kullanın ve arkanızı ve sağ/solunuzu kendiniz kontrol edin.
AVM kullanılıyorken, yalnızca ses düzeyi ve gelen arama özellikleri desteklenir.
157
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arka Görüş Kamerası
Bu sistem güvenliğiniz için daha geniş bir görüş alanı sağlamak amacıyla bir arka görüş kamerasıyla donatılmıştır.
Arka kamera, kontak anahtarı ON konumuna getirildiğinde ve vites kolu R konumuna geldiğinde otomatik olarak devreye girecektir.
Vites başka bir konuma getirildiğinde, arka kamera otomatik olarak çalışmayı durduracaktır.
Arka kamera çalışırken, ses düzeyi ve sessiz özellikleri kullanılabilir.
Türkçe
1. Kontak anahtarını ON veya ACC konumuna getirin.

2. Vitesi R konumuna alın.
Dikkat!
- Arka görüş kamera ekranı gerçek mesafeden farklı görünebilir. Güvenliğiniz için dikkatli kullanın ve arkanızı ve sağ/solunuzu kendiniz kontrol edin
- Arka görüş kamerası kullanılıyorken, yalnızca ses düzeyi ve gelen arama özellikleri desteklenir.
158
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ürün Özellikleri
Adı Araba TFT LCD Ekran AVN ÜNİTESİ Desteklenen MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Formatlar TS, WMV
Güç Kaynağı DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Çalışma Gücü DC 9V ~ DC 16V Altyazı Desteği/
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Çözünürlük
Çalışma Akımı 2A Desteklenen MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Formatlar
Genel Ses
Uyku Akımı 3mA (Sadece Ana Ünite) Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Örnekleme 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Çalışma Sıcaklığı -30℃ ~ +75℃ Frekansı
Görsel Dosya Biçimi JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Saklama Sıcaklığı -40℃ ~ +85℃
Uyumluluk BLUTOOTH V4.1
Boyutlar 278.4 (En) x 175.5 (Boy) x 191.5 (Derinlik) Frekans Bant
2402 ~ 2480MHz
Genişliği
Ağırlık 2.5 Kg Desteklenen A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Bluetooth Profiller
Ekran Boyutu 203.90 mm (G) x 114.70 (Y) mm (Aktif alan)
İletim Çıkışı 3.0 dBm
Çözünürlük 921,600 pixel
Ekran
Çalışma Metodu Modülasyon Tipi FHSS(GFSK)
Türkçe
TFT, Düzlem İçi Anahtarlama (IPS), aktif matris
Arka Aydınlatma LED Kanal 79
Frekans Aralığı FM : 87.5 ~ 108.0 MHz (Adım: 100 kHz)

AM : 531 ~ 1602 kHz (Adım: 9 kHz)
Radyo
Hassasiyet FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
Sertifikasy-
SD 1 yuva, 16GB on
Depolama USB 1 port , USB2.0 HOST
Cihazı Digen Co., Ltd. işbu radyo teçhizat tipinin [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] 2014/53/EU Direktifi ile uyumluluğunu beyan eder.
AB uygunluk beyanının tam metnine aşağıdaki adresten ulaşabilirsiniz: http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 DoC belgesinin orijinal dildeki kopyası cihazda mevcuttur.
159
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Türkçe
160
GETtheMANUALS.org
Car Navigation System USER MANUAL Y400 AVN
User Manual
English
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Please read this manual carefully before operating your set and retain it for future reference.
Designs and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
Please visit the Ssangyong Motor website for detailed information about the Car Navigation system.
Ver 1.0 1
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contents
Basic
English
Precautions 3 Pairing Bluetooth Devices 25

Key Product Information 4 Disconnecting and Deleting Bluetooth Devices 27
Key Product Features 5 Bluetooth Call Screen 28
Component Names and Functions 6 Making a Call 29
Steering Wheel Controller 8 Answering a Call 31
Bluetooth Settings 32
Operating Basic Menus Bluetooth Music 36
Basic Operation 9 My Music Screen 37
Home Screen 11 AUX Mode 38
Bookmark 12 Settings 39
iPod Mode 48
Operating AV Mode Starting iPod Mode 49
Radio Mode 13 Apple CarPlay 50
Using Presets & Recording Radio 14 Apple CarPlay Mode 51
DAB 15 Android Auto 52
Media Mode 16 Starting Android Auto Mode 53
(1) USB Music Mode e-Manual 54
USB Music Mode 17 Restrictions on Features for Safety Measures 55
USB Music Screen 18 Rear Detection Camera 56
(2) USB Video Mode AVM Mode - Optional 57
Starting USB Video Mode 19 AVM Settings 58
USB Video Screen 20 Product Specifications 59
(3) USB Image Mode
Starting USB Image Mode 21
Appendix
USB Image Screen 22 Before Thinking the Product has Malfunctioned 60
Bluetooth Mode 23 Before Thinking There is a Product Malfunction 62
Bluetooth Main Menu 24 Troubleshooting 63
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precautions
Safety Warnings Safety Cautions
English
Even when receiving route guidance from the Multimedia system, please Pay attention to traffic conditions while driving.
abide by actual traffic and road regulations.
In some instances, the navigation may provide guidance through restricted
Following only the Navigation route guidance may lead to violations of areas.
actual traffic and road regulations and result in traffic accidents.
Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of
Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for pro- attention to external surroundings. First park the vehicle before operating
longed periods of time could lead to traffic accidents. the device. In addition, the touch screen may not work for some functions
Do not operate the Multimedia system while driving, such as entering POIs when the vehicle is in motion. The touch screen feature will operate only
or conducting route searches. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents. when the vehicle has stopped.
Park the vehicle before operating the device. This product is intended for use within only automobiles. Refrain from
installing this device in products other than automobiles.
Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the Multimedia system. Such
acts could lead to accidents, fires or electric shock. If you want to change the position of device installation, please inquire with
your place of purchase or service maintenance center. Technical expertise
Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. is required when installin or disassembling the device.
Such acts could lead to smoke, fire or malfunction.
When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry
If abnormalities occur, such as introduction of foreign materials or smoke and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents
due to exposure to water, immediately discontinue use and inquire with (alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.) as such materials may damage the de-
your place of purchase or designated maintenance center. vice panel or cause color/quality deterioration. When experiencing product
malfunctions, inquire with your place of purchase or service maintenance
Continued use as is could result in product malfunction. center.
Refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard. These Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact.
signs are indicative of product malfunction. Continued use may lead to
accidents (fires, electric shock). Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to
the LCD or touch screen.
Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product.
Such acts could lead to traffic accidents. Operating the device for long periods of time with the ignition turned off
will display a battery discharge warning on the screen. Operate the system
with the ignition turned on.
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
English
Dolby and double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. TomTom
© 1992-2017 TomTom. All rights reserved.TomTom and the “two hands” logo are trade-
Bluetooth marks or registered trademarks of TomTom N.V. or one of its subsidiaries.
The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Blue- © 1992-2017 TomTom. All rights reserved. This material is proprietary and the subject of
tooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks is under license. copyright protection and/or database rights protection and/or other intellectual property
Bluetooth enabled mobile phone is required to use Bluetooth wireless technology. rights owned by TomTom or its suppliers. The use of this material is subject to the terms
of a licence agreement. Any unauthorised copying or disclosure of this material will lead to
DivX criminal and civil liabilities.
As a DivX-certified product, this product can play premium HD DivX videos.
(Including .avi and .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX and LLC,
and are used under license.
The are protected by at least one of the following U.S. patents: : 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Using SD Memory Cards

1. The SD Card slot within this device is for map files.
2. The map file has been saved on the SD card for this device.
Do not add, delete, or format files within the SD card. Eject/insert SD card only to update the map with a new version.
3. Please use only the SD card that was provided from the dealer. Do not separate or copy the Map file into a different SD card that you may own.
Such may result in malfunctions or incorrect operation.
4. Ejecting and inserting SD cards while the system is operating may result in SD card or System errors.
To eject or insert the SD card, first turn off the the vehicle ignition.
5. Repeatedly connecting/disconnecting the SD card in a short period of time may cause device damage.
6. The SD card is formatted to include only Map data file.
Saving other files in the SD card may result in system errors or malfunctions.
Upgrade Map & AVN Software download

1. Connect the SD card with your computer.
2. Go to the Upgrade page (URL).
GETtheMANUALS.org
Key Product Features
English
Feature Description Feature Description
With Apple CarPlay, you can make phone calls, ex-
Wide LCD Display Apple CarPlay change text messages, use the map, listen to music,
Display Provides high quality video and music simultaneously and use Siri features.
through the 9.2-inch wide screen display with added con-
venience through the touchscreen display.
Android Auto With Android Auto, you can use Google map, phone,
voice recognition and music features.
Digital Tuner Feature
Digital Tuner supports memory of 12 broadcast stations for
each FM1, FM2, AM and DAB mode.
Radio Bluetooth Connection Feature
RDS Services Bluetooth Provides Hands-Free feature that enables drivers to make
wireless calls while driving as well as music enjoyment
Provides AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY features among RDS
through Audio Streaming.
Services.
Media Auto Search Feature

Automatically identifies media files, including video, audio
Digital Screen Control Features
USB Media and photos, saved in the USB and SD card and displays as
Easy control of screen brightness through the touch screen
for convenient viewing.
lists for convenience.

Miscellaneous Allows you to see the rear through the HD camera when
shifting to reverse.
Uses TomTom Map
Navigation Precise guidance can be received using the GPS engine
and accurate map through the high-sensitivity antenna. Around View Monitor - Optional
Allows you to see the front, rear, left and right sides through
the four cameras installed within the vehicle.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Component Names and Functions
Front View
Button Description
English
1 POWER / VOLUME
1. Used to turn the power on/off or control the volume.
2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to turn the power off.
3. Press shortly to turn the AV on/off.
4. Turn left/right to control volume. (volume control range 0~45)
2 Home
1 1. Moves to Home screen (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5 2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to move to Bookmark mode.
3 MODE
1. Moves to the main mode screen.
2. In Navigation mode, press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to operate
the last AV mode before operated before Navigation mode.
NAVI
4
1. Converts to Navigation mode and displays the current location
regardless of whether AV is On/Off.
2. Press and hold (over 1.5 seconds) to move to the screen
where you can search for your destination.
5 SETUP
In any mode, press and hold to display the Settings screen.
In the Radio/Audio/Video/Navigation/Bluetooth Phone mode,
press to display the corresponding settings screen.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rear View AVN 42P Connector
English
6
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
B20 E-CALL MUTE
B22 MIC-
B24 PGND
GETtheMANUALS.org
Button Description
English
1 During a Bluetooth Handsfree call, press and hold to end the call.
When not on a call, press to turn Mute on/off.
6
In any mode
2 - Each press of the key will change the mode in order of Radio →Media →
2 3
4 Bluetooth Music → iPod → My Music mode. (If the media device is not
connected, corresponding modes will be disabled)
5 In Radio mode
1 - Press and hold to change the radio mode in order of FM1 → FM2 → AM →
DAB mode.
In Media mode
- Press and hold to change the mode in order of USB Music → USB Video →
USB Image mode.
3
Adjusts the volume.
4 While playing
-p ress up/down to move the previous/next file.
In Radio mode
-p ress up/down to move the previous/next preset.
-p ress and hold up/down to move the previous/next broadcast frequency.
5
Operates Bluetooth Handsfree mode.
In Apply CarPlay mode

6 - operates Siri.
In Android Auto mode
- operates Google Voice.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Basic Operation
Starting the System Turning the System Off
English
1. While the system is operating, press and hold
1. Press the engine start button or set the 2. Once the system is turned on, the booting (over 1.5 seconds) the POWER/VOL button to
ignition key to ON or ACC. process will start and the logo screen is turn the power off. When the system power is
displayed. turned off, the final operating mode is saved.
3. The safety warning page is displayed and 4. Press the [Agree] button to display the most re- 2. Current time is displayed when power off.
user consent is enabled. cent mode. (Default mode is Radio FM1)
- Check the [Auto Disappear] box to turn on the most recently operated mode without pressing the [Agree] button. - When the ignition is turned on again, the system
will automatically turn on the most recently oper-
ated mode.
- The system will automatically turn off if more than
3 minutes has passed in ignition off state and the
driver-side door is opened.
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resetting the System Audio Off Audio On
English
1. Press the MODE and SETUP button 1. When the AV is on, shortly press (under 1.5 1. When the AV is off, shortly press (under 1.5
simultaneously. seconds) the PWR/VOL button to turn the seconds) the PWR/VOL button to turn the
AV off. AV on.
2. The system will turn off and reboot. 2. When audio is turned off, the most recently 2. When audio is turned on, the navigation
operated navigation mode screen will be screen is maintained but the most recently
displayed. operated Audio will start playing.
Information
-R
esetting the system will restore existing settings and
configurations back to their default states. This is to
ensure device stability and is not a system defect.
10
GETtheMANUALS.org
Home Screen
Home Screen
1 Provides a brief view of the navigation map and the route screen. /
1
Touch any area on the screen to move to the full screen navigation
English
6
screen.
2 Shows brief information about the currently playing radio media. /

Touch the screen to move to the currently playing mode screen.
2
3 Bookmark
Add your Favorite menu items for quick and easy access.
4 Mode
Shows all of the items in the system menu.
3 4 5
5 Destination
Moves to the screen where you can search for your destination.
6 Display Off
Press to turn display off. Touch any area on the screen to turn the
display back on.
Information
- Press the [HOME] button to display the Home screen.
- Press and hold the [HOME] button to display the Bookmark screen.
11
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bookmark
Starting Bookmark Bookmark Screen
English
4 2
1
1. From the Home screen, select 2. From the Bookmark List screen,
[Bookmark]. press [Add].
1 Menu List
Bookmark Menu List
3. Press and hold menu items, then 4. Bookmark List 2 Confirm
drag and drop them to the de- Upon selection, saves changes to the Bookmark menu and restores
sired place to add/delete/move the Home screen.
them. Then press the Confirm Area for adding menus
3
button.
Menu list items are dragged and moved to the adding area to add as
Bookmark menus.
4 Reset
Resets the Bookmark settings.
When Bookmark is already added, press the edit button. - Press the [HOME] button to display the Home screen.
- Press and hold the [HOME] button to display the Bookmark screen.
12
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting Radio Mode
Starting Radio Mode Radio Screen
1
English
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
1. Press the MODE button to display the 7

main menu screen, then press [Radio].
1 Mode Display 7 Radio Band Tab

Displays the currently operating mode. If you select the desired tab, the selected Radio mode will operate.
8 Home
2 Preset Moves to Home screen.
Displays the preset list.
* Press and hold the preset button to save current 9 Back
frequency to the selected preset button. Moves to the previous screen.
* Up to 12 preset frequencies each can be saved for 10 DAB
FM1/FM2/AM modes. Operates DAB mode.
Frequency Info 11 TA On / Off

3 Turns Traffic Announcement On/Off. (for details,
Displays the current frequency.
refer to the “DAB” section.)
* Each time this area is dragged to the right, the mode
is changed in the order FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1. 12 DLS On / Off
Turns DLS Text On/Off. (ffor details, refer to the
4 Indicator “DAB” section.)
Displays the On/Off state of the REG/AF/TP/PTY/ 13 Scan
SCAN/AST/STEREO features. Plays frequencies with superior reception for 5
seconds each.
5 Tune Up
Press to tune up by FM: 0.1MHz, AM : 9KHz) 14 AST
Saves frequencies with superior reception to Preset buttons.
6 Tune Down 15 Recording Radio
Press to tune down by FM: 0.1MHz, AM : 9KHz) Records currently operating radio broadcast.
13
GETtheMANUALS.org
Using Presets & Recording Radio
Saving Preset Automatically
(Autostore) Saving Preset Manually Recording Radio
English
1. In the radio screen, press [AST]. 1. Select frequency to save. 1. In the radio screen, press . 2. In the screen that asks whether
to record radio, press [OK] to
start recording.
2. Saves frequencies with superior 2. Press and hold the preset button 3. Pressing the stop button will stop recording and save audio automatical-
reception to preset buttons in you want to save. The current ly in My Music Radio folder.
ascending order. frequency to the desired preset
button with a beep.
- If there are less than 12 radio frequencies with superior reception states, then the - Recordings must be more than 5 seconds and up to 60 minutes can be recorded with one
previously saved presets will be saved into the remaining preset channels. recording.
- Recorded radio files can be played in My Music.
- While Autostore is operating, pressing the AST button again will cancel the func-
- Up to 100 files can be saved. If the storage capacity becomes exceeded with less than 100 files,
tion and play the previous frequency. then recording will automatically terminate and additional recordings will not be supported.
14
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Starting DAB Mode DAB Screen
1 8 Back
English
9 10 11 12 13 Moves to the previous screen.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Operates FM/AM radio mode.
4
10 Service Follow On / Off
SF(AF) ON / OFF
2 * SF(AF) : This feature provides continuous recep-
5 3 6
tion by automatically searching for the identical
1. In the radio screen, press DAB channel in nearby frequencies when the current
to operate DAB mode. channel reception becomes weak.
11 TA(Traffic Announcement) On / Off

Turns Traffic Announcement on/off.
* TA : This feature provides traffic announcements
and bulletins in real-time.
12 DLS Text(Dynamic Label Segment Text) On / Off

1 Mode Display Turns DLS Text on/off.
Displays the currently operating mode. * DLS Text : This feature displays text transmitted
by the current radio station on the device. Types
2 Preset of information include programme information,
Displays saved station for user selection. including station slogans or the title and artist of
* Press and hold the preset button to save current station to the selected the currently playing song.
preset button.
* Up to 12 stations can be saved. 13 List
3 Station Info Displays automatically updated lists.
Displays the current station.
4 Indicator
Displays the on/off state of the DAB/TP features.
5 Channel Down
Moves to previous station.
6 Channel Up
Moves to next station.
7 Home
Moves to Home screen.
15
GETtheMANUALS.org
Media Mode
About USB Memory Devices
1. Connect the USB device after starting the ignition. The USB device may become damaged if it is already connected when the ignition is turned on.
English
USB devices are not automotive electronic components.

2. Turning the ignition on or off with the USB device connected may result in improper USB operation.
3. Heed caution to static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external USB devices.
4. Encoded MP3 players will not be recognized when connected as an external device.
5. When connecting an external USB device, the system may not recognize the USB device in certain conditions.
6. This system recognizes USB devices formatted in FAT16/32 file formats. USB media with NTFS or exFAT type file systems are not supported.
7. Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues. Before starting use, check to see that the device is operating normally.
8. Repeatedly connecting/disconnecting USB device in a short period of time may result in product damage.
9. An abnormal sound may occasionally occur when disconnecting the USB device.
10. Disconnecting the USB device while playing media in USB mode may result in USB device damage or improper operation. When disconnecting the
USB device, first turn the system off or change the mode to a different mode.
11. The amount of time required to recognise the external USB device may differ depending on the type, size, or file formats stored on the USB. Such
differences in required time do not indicate a malfunction.
12. Using USB devices for purposes other than playing music or image files is prohibited.
13. Do not use the USB cable to charge batteries or USB accessories that generate heat. Such acts may lead to worsened performance or cause sys-
tem damage.
14. The device may not recognise the USB device if separately purchased USB hubs and extension cables are being used. Connect the USB directly
with the multimedia terminal of the vehicle.
15. When using mass storage USB devices, there are cases when the logical drives are separated for user convenience. In such a case, only files with-
in the logical drive of the root directory will be played. When using a USB with separate partitions (logical drives), save files you wish to play within
the root directory. When application programs are installed to specific USBs, the files within such USBs may not play properly for reasons described
above.
16. The device may not operate properly if MP3 players, mobile phones, digital cameras or other electronic devices (USB devices not recognised as
portable disk drives) are connected with the device.
17. Charging through the USB may not work for some mobile devices.
18. Normal operation is warranted for only metal cover type USB memory devices.
19. The device may not operate properly when using formats such as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
20. USB memory sticks used by connecting an adapter, including SD Type USB memory sticks and CF Type USB memory sticks, may not be properly
recognized.
16
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Music Mode
Starting USB Music Mode Saving music file
English
1. Press the MODE button to display main 1. After playing the file you wish to save, 2. In the Save Music File window, press [OK].
menu screen then press [Media]. press in the Music screen.
2. The default Media mode is USB Music. 3. You can check files you have saved in My
Information Music.
The feature will not operate unless there is at least one
music file in the USB device. (The feature will not operate
if there is no media file in the USB device)
- Audio Codec : MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC,
WMA9/10, LPCM, FLAC
- Extension : MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Sampling Frequency : 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
- Bit Rate : 32Kbps~320Kbps
- Caution : This device supports audio files using
320Kbps bit rate range and the use of files in
192kbps bit rate range is recommended. When using Information
files without fixed bit rates, some features (FF/REW
features) may not properly operate. - It is possible to save up to 100 songs.
17
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Music Screen
USB Music Screen
6 Next File
1
English
Plays the next file.

9 10 11 * Press and hold the key to search the next file quickly in USB device. And file name
2 is displayed. Once the key is released, the file will begin playing at normal speed.
7 Previous File
3 Plays the previous file.
12
* Press and hold the key to search the previous file quickly in USB device. And file
5 name is displayed. Once the key is released, the file will begin playing at normal
speed.
4
7 8 6 8 Pausing/Playing
Plays/pauses the current file.
13
9 Repeat
Repeats the current file or all files in USB device.
* Each time the button is pressed, the option is changed from Repeat File →
14 Repeat Folder → Repeat One.
10 Shuffle
Plays files in random order.
1 Mode Display 11 Saving Music File

Displays the currently operating mode. Saves the current file to My Music.
2 Parent Folder 12 File Index

Moves to the Parent Folder Displays the current file/total files in the current folder.
3 Folder Name 13 Play Time
Displays the current folder. Displays the current play time/total play time.
* Drag or touch the bar to move to the desired time.
4 Music List
Displays the music file list of the current folder. 14 USB Mode Tab
* Currently playing song name becomes highlighted If you select the desired tab, the selected mode will operate.
5 Song Info
Displays the folder, artist, title, album, and album art information of the current file.
18
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting USB Video Mode
Starting USB Video Mode
English
1. Press the MODE button to display 2 - 1. When USB Music screen is 2 - 2. Or touch the USB Video tab 3. Once video control panel is
main menu screen then press displayed, drag the screen to to operate USB Video mode. displayed, Video will be played in
[Media]. right to operate USB Video full screen.
mode.
Information
The feature will not operate unless there is at least one video file in the USB device. (The feature will not operate if are no media files in the USB device)
- The default Media mode is USB Music.
- Video Codec : MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Extensions : MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Image Resolution: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Subtitles : SMI (Subtitles may not properly operate if the name of the video file is different from the name of the subtitle file.)
- Caution : High resolution files using bit rates over 2Mbps may not operate properly.
19
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Video Screen
USB Video Screen
5 Next File
1
English

8 9 * While the button is being pressed, the current file is played and next file name is
2 displayed.
6 Previous File
3 Plays the previous file.
10 * While the button is being pressed, the current file is played and previous file name
4 is displayed.
7 Pausing/Playing
6 7 5 Plays/pauses the current file.
8 Subtitle Size
11 Changes the subtitle size.
* This button is available only when there is subtitle.
9 Full Screen
12 Changes display from normal screen to full screen.
* Upon touching a non-button area on the screen, the screen will convert into Full
Screen mode..
10 File Index
1 Mode Display Displays the current file/total files in the current folder.
Displays the currently operating mode.
11 Play Time
2 Parent Folder Displays the current play time/total play time.
Moves to the Parent Folder * Drag or touch the bar to move to the desired time.
3 File/Folder Name 12 USB Mode Tab

Displays the current file and folder. If you select the desired tab, the selected mode will operate.
4 Video List
Displays the video file list of the current folder.
* Currently playing video name becomes highlighted
20
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting USB Image Mode
Starting USB Image Mode
English
1. Press the MODE button to 2 - 1. When USB Music screen is 2 - 2. Or touch the USB Image tab 3. Once image control panel is
display main menu screen then displayed, drag the screen to to operate USB Image mode. displayed, image will be played
press [Media]. right to operate USB Image in full screen.
mode. (Music → Video →
Image)
Information
The feature will not operate unless there is at least one image file in the USB device. (The feature will not operate if there is no media file in the USB device)
- The default Media mode is USB Music.
- When changing from Music mode to Image mode, the playing Music sound will continue to be played.
- When changing from Video mode to Image mode, the playing Video sound will continue to be played.
- Supported Image format : JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
21
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Image Screen
USB Image Screen
4 Music List
1
English
7 8 9 Displays the Image list of the current folder.

* Currently displayed image name becomes highlighted
2
5 Next File
3 Plays the next file.
10
4 * While the button is being pressed, the current file is played and next file name is
displayed.
6 Previous File
6 5 Plays the next file.
* While the button is being pressed, the current file is played and previous file name
is displayed.
11 7 Slide Show
All images within the USB device are shown sequentially accordingly the
selected time interval
* Zoom in/out feature is not supported.
* Slides sow is not available while driving.
1 Mode Display 8 Rotate

Displays the currently operating mode. Rotates image in a clockwise direction.
2 Parent Folder
9 Saving Image
Moves to the Parent Folder
Saves the image shown when the display is turned off.
3 File/Folder Name
Displays the folder, file name, file type and resolution of current image. 10 File Index
Displays the current file/total files in the current folder.
11 USB Mode Tab

If you select the desired tab, the selected mode will operate.
22
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Mode
Before Using Bluetooth
1. Before connecting the head unit to the mobile phone, turn Bluetooth on and and disable the hidden state of mobile phone.
English
2. Up to five Bluetooth devices can be paired.
3. Only one Bluetooth device can be connected at a time.
4. For Handsfree volume, min. volume is 6 and max. volume is 40.
Starting Bluetooth Mode
1. Press the MODE button to 2. Bluetooth connection notice is 3-1. Press [Yes] to display Blue- 3.-2. If the [No] button is pressed,
display main menu screen then displayed. (When no phones tooth connection screen. Bluetooth Phone screen(key-
press [Bluetooth]. have been paired) pad) will be displayed. You
can also pair a device by
pressing [Connect] within this
screen.
Information
- To add more devices, you must delete one of the previously added devices.
23
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Main Menu
Bluetooth Main Menu
7 1 Mode Display
1
English

2
2 Call History
Displays recent dialled/received/missed call history.
3
8
3 Contacts
4
Displays contacts list screen.
* Contacts can be viewed only when contacts have been downloaded.
5
4 Keypad
6 Displays the dial pad screen.
5 Connect
Displays Bluetooth connection screen.
6 Bluetooth Settings
Displays Bluetooth Settings Screen.
7 Status Icons
Display the current phone status in the top right side of the display.
8 Phone Name
Displays name of currently connected device.
24
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pairing Bluetooth Devices
Search from Car Auto Connection
- The Bluetooth device will automat-
English
ically be connected according to
the set option when the car ignition
is turned on(ACC ON).
- When the user selected phone
cannot be connected, the system
automatically attempts to con-
nect the most recently connected
1. Press [Search from Car]. 2. Search devices. (Disable the hid- 3. Select the name of the device to phone. When the most recently
den state of mobile phone.) connect. connected phone cannot be con-
nected, the system attempts to
connect all paired phones sequen-
tially. (If connection fails after at-
tempting for 1 cycle, then attempt-
ing Auto Connection will end.)
4. Verify the passkey and proceed 5. The Bluetooth connection screen 6. Once Bluetooth connection is
with pairing from your Bluetooth is displayed. successful, the name of the
device. connected mobile phone is
displayed.
Information
- Max. search time : 15 seconds, max. searched devices : 20 devices
- The passkey is created randomly.
- If the device is not found, please check the following.
* Is the Bluetooth feature turned on in your Bluetooth device?
* Has the Bluetooth been set to hidden state?
- If search and connection continues to not work, please reboot your Bluetooth device and try again.
- If the device has been paired before, select the device from the list to connect.
25
GETtheMANUALS.org
Search from Device
English
1. Press [Search from Device]. 2. Search for the car name and pair 3. The Bluetooth connection screen 4. Once Bluetooth connection is
the device. Verify the passkey is displayed. successful, the name of the
and proceed with pairing from connected mobile phone is
your Bluetooth device. displayed.
Information
- The passkey is created randomly.
- If the device is not found, please check the following.
* Is the Bluetooth feature turned on in your Bluetooth device?
* Has the Bluetooth been set to hidden state?
- If search and connection continues to not work, please reboot your Bluetooth device and try again.
26
GETtheMANUALS.org
Disconnecting and Deleting Bluetooth Devices
Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, 2. Select the name of the device to 1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, 2. Check the box with the name of
press [Connect]. disconnect. press [Connect]. the device to delete.
3. Press [OK] to disconnect. 3. Select the enabled trash bin icon to to select the device within the Delete
Device screen.
Information
- A device cannot be deleted if it is connected. (Only disconnected devices can be deleted.)
27
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Call Screen
Bluetooth Call Screen
1 Phone Name and Contact Name/Number
English
Displays name of currently connected device and other party’s name/num-

3 4 5
ber during a call.
2 Call Time
Displays the call time.
1 2
3 Handsfree Call / Private Call
Displays the current call state (press to switch from the Handsfree to the
Bluetooth mobile phone).
4 MIC Volume
7
6 Adjusts outgoing volume during calls. Sets call volume as heard by the
other party (Levels 1~5). (This feature can be used only during a Hands-
free call)
5 Mute
Turns the Mic On/Off. (This feature can be used only during a Handsfree
call)
6 Send / Call / End

Calls the number / Ends a call.
7 Keypad
Used to enter/delete numbers.
28
GETtheMANUALS.org
Making a Call
Making a Call Downloading Contacts
English
1. Enter number. 2. Press the call button. 1. Select the contact button. Press 2. Please check your phone and accept
[Download Contacts]. the download request. (Phones
require additional confirmation.)
3. Displays call time during a call. 3. Press [OK] 4. Contacts are downloaded.
(Maintains previous state upon
cancelling)
Information
- Upon downloading, phones require additional confirmation. (Can be set separately
within your mobile device)
- This feature may not be supported for some contact types (Google, T Contacts, etc).
- Download will continue even if you change to a different mode while downloading is
in progress.
- Up to 1,000 contacts can be downloaded.
- Contacts can only be downloaded from the phone. Deleting or adding is not supported.
- Upon downloading contacts, the most recent 150 call histories are also downloaded.
(Up to 50 dialled, incoming, and missed call history lists are each saved.)
29
GETtheMANUALS.org
Making a Call from Contact
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, 2. Press the call button to make a 3. Press the magnifying glass icon
press [Contacts]. call from the list screen. to search contacts.
4. Enter a name or phone number and press [Search]. 5. Press the call button to make a 6. The Bluetooth call will be start.
call from the list screen.
30
GETtheMANUALS.org
Answering a Call
Answering a Call
English
1. When there is an incoming call, displays 2. Displays other party’s information and call 3. After ends a call, the previously operated
information of the other party on incoming time. mode will be restored.
call pop-up. Press [Handsfree] or [Private]
to answer a call. (Pressing [Reject] will end
notice and restore the previously operated
mode.)
Information
- When the incoming call pop-up is displayed, most functions within AV mode will not operate. After ends a call, the previously operated media will be played.
- However, USB Image Slideshow will end.
- Handfree volume can be adjusted separately from AV mode volume.
31
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Settings
Turning Bluetooth On/Off
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, press 2. Press [Use Bluetooth]. 3. Sets whether to use Bluetooth Auto Con-
[Bluetooth Settings]. nection, (Default state : Use)
Information
- If you press [Do Not Use], the most features will be disabled except [Use Bluetooth] and [Reset].
Changing Device Name
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, press 2. Press [Change Device Name]. 3. Press the name and press [Done]. (The
[Bluetooth Settings]. default device name is SSANGYONG
AVN)
32
GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto Connection Settings
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, press 2. Press [Auto Connection].
[Bluetooth Settings].
Contacts Settings
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, press 2. Press [Contacts]. 3. Sets whether to automatically download
[Bluetooth Settings]. Contacts upon Bluetooth connection.
(Default state : [Do not use].)
33
GETtheMANUALS.org
Deleting Call History.
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, 2. Press [Delete Call History]. 3. Press [OK]. 4. Call history is deleted.
press [Bluetooth Settings].
Reseting Bluetooth
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, 2. Press [Reset]. 3. When the resetting notification
press [Bluetooth Settings]. pop-up is displayed, press [OK].
34
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ringtone Settings
English
1. In the Bluetooth Phone screen, press 2. Press [Ringtone]. 3. Select the desired ring tone.
[Bluetooth Settings].
Information
- Upon selecting a ringtone, a preview of the ringtone will be played once.
35
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Music
Before Using Bluetooth Music Bluetooth Music Screen
1. Bluetooth Music Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth phone has been
1
English
connected.
6
2. When Bluetooth is connected, music will automatically play when you enter
Bluetooth Music Mode.
- If Auto Play does not work, re-press the play button.
2
- Music may not automatically play depending on the music player program
within the connected device.
3 4 5
1 Mode Display
2 Song Info
Displays the song, artist, album information.
3 Previous File
Plays the previous file.
4 Pausing/Playing
5 Next File
6 Bluetooth Phone
Operates Bluetooth Phone mode.
36
GETtheMANUALS.org
My Music
What is My Music? My Music Screen
- My Music refers to a feature 7 Next File
1
English
where music files within USB 9 10 11
memory drives or radio recording * While the button is being pressed, the current file is
played and next file name is displayed.
files are saved into the system to
play them within in vehicle. 2
Album Art
8
8 Displays album art.
- The feature will not operate 4
unless there is at least one music 5 6 7 9 Repeat
file in the system. Repeats the current file or all files in My Music.
3 12 * Each time the button is pressed, the option is
changed from Repeat File → Repeat Folder →
Repeat One.
Starting My Music
10 Shuffle
Plays files in random order.
11 Deleting File
1 Mode Display Deletes the current file.
2 Radio Recording Folder 12 Play Time

Displays radio recording files saved in My Music. Displays the current play time/total play time.
* Drag or touch the bar to move to the desired time.
3 Music List
1. In the Main Menu screen, press Displays the music list of the current folder.
* Currently playing song name becomes highlighted
[My Music].
4 File Info
Displays the current file information.
*song, artist and album.
5 Previous File
Plays the previous file.
* While the button is being pressed, the current file is played and next file
name is displayed.
6 Pausing/Playing
37
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX Mode
Starting AUX Mode AUX Mode Screen
1 1 Mode Display
English

2 3
2 Home Screen
Moves to home screen(PIP).
3 Back
Moves to the previous screen.
1. In the Main Menu screen, press
[AUX].
2. If an external device connector

is connected with the AUX termi-
nal, then AUX mode will operate.
Caution!
- When connecting an external device, the use of a 3-pole AUX cable is recommended.
- Connecting an AUX connector jack without connecting an external device will convert the system to AUX mode, but only output noise. When AUX mode is not in use, make
sure to also remove the connector jack.
- When the external device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use.
38
GETtheMANUALS.org
Settings
Displaying Radio Settings Screen RDS Settings Displaying Navigation Settings Screen Navigation Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press 1. Press [RDS] and sets whether to 1. From the system hard keys, 1. In the Navigation settings
and hold the SETUP button. use RDS feature. Press the reset press and hold the SETUP screen, sets whether to auto-
button at the top right side button. matically start the Navigation
to initialize the settings. (Default at start-up. Press the reset
state : AF) button at the top right side to
PTY Seek Settings initialize the settings. (Default
state : Auto Start)
2. In the Settings screen, press 2. In the Settings screen, press
[Radio]. [Navigation].
1. Press [PTY Seek] and select the

desired options. Press the reset
button at the top right side
to initialize the settings. (Default
state : None)
39
GETtheMANUALS.org
Displaying Clock Settings Screen Time Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press and 1. Press [Time] to set the current time. Press
hold the SETUP button. the reset button at the top right side to
initialize the settings. (Default state : 2015-
01-01, time is as shown within the system)
Clock Settings
2. In the Settings screen, press [Clock].
1. Press [Clock] to set the clock type. Press

the reset button at the top right side
to initialize the settings. (Default state:
Analog, 12 hour)
40
GETtheMANUALS.org
Displaying Sound Settings Screen Balance/Fade Settings EQ Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press and hold the 1. In the Balance/Fader settings screen, press the up/down/ 1. In the EQ settings screen, press +/- button to set
SETUP button. left/right button or touch the position to set the desired sound the Bass/Middle/Treble levels. Press the reset
position. Press the reset button at the top right side to
button at the top right side to initialize the
initialize the settings. (Default state : Fader 00, Balance 00)
settings. (Default state : Treble 00, Middle 00,
Information
Bass 00)
- Fader/Balance is used to set the intensity of the speak-
ers by location.
Sound Settings Other Settings
2. In the Settings screen, press [Sound].
1. In the Sound settings screen, press [Navigation] to set 1. Press [Others] to set the Beep and AVC settings.
Navigation prioritised. Press the reset button at the Press the reset button at the top right side to
top right side to initialize the settings. (Default state :
initialize the settings. (Default state: Beep - On,
Navigation Priority)
AVC - Off)
Information
Information
- Navigation Priority : audio volume for the front seat is
muted upon Navigation Guidance - Beep : sounds with each touch of the button.
- Audio Priority : Navigation outputs fixed volume. - AVC(Auto Volume Control) : When AVC is on, volume is
- Same Ratio : Possible to adjust the guidance sound controlled automatically according to vehicle speed.
through the volume control
41
GETtheMANUALS.org
Displaying Bookmark Settings Screen Adding Bookmark
English
1. From the system hard keys, press 1. P

ress and hold menu items you 2. Then drag and drop them to the 3. Menu items are added. Press
and hold the SETUP button. want to add from the list on the left. desired place on the right. the reset button at the top
right side to initialize the settings.
(Default state : None)
Deleting Bookmark
2. In the Settings screen, press

[Bookmark].
1. Press and hold the menu item 2. Then drag and drop them to the 3. Menu items are deleted. Press
you want to delete. list on the left. the reset button at the top
right side to initialize the settings.
(Default state : None)
42
GETtheMANUALS.org
Changing Bookmark Order
English
1. Press and hold the menu items you want 2. Then drag and drop them to the desired 3. Menu items are moved. Press the reset
to move. place. button at the top right side to initialize the
settings. (Default state : None)
43
GETtheMANUALS.org
Displaying Language Settings Screen Language Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press and 1. In the Language settings screen, select the
hold the SETUP button. desired language and press the Confirm
button at the top right side. The system
will automatically restart and the system
language is changed. Press the reset
button at the top right side to initialize the
settings. (Default state : English)
2. In the Settings screen, press [Language].
44
GETtheMANUALS.org
Displaying Radio Settings Screen Illumination Settings
English
1. From the system hard keys, press 1. In the Illumination settings screen, 2. Auto Illumination 3. Day Mode
and hold the SETUP button. press +/- button to adjust the display - Automatically adjusts the display - Maintains the display brightness
brightness. (Default state : Auto
Illumination) brightness and colors. on bright and map colors in Day
mode.
2. In the Settings screen, press 4. Night Mode 5. Sync Navigation

[Display]. - Maintains the display brightness - Navigation map screen display is
on dark and map colors in Night set to Day or Night mode accord-
mode. ing to the Illumination Setting.
ress the reset

P button at
the top right side to initialize the
settings.
45
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ratio Settings Screen Off Settings Other Settings Displaying System Settings Screen
English
1. Press [Ratio] to set the video 1. Press [Screen Off] to turn off 1. This feature is used to set the 1. From the system hard keys,
display ratio. Press the reset the display. Press the reset blank screen, image, clock and press and hold the SETUP
button at the top right side button at the top right side to parking guide settings. button.
to initialize the settings. (Default initialize the settings. (Default
state : Full Screen) state : Off)
2. Press the reset button at 2. In the Settings screen, press

the top right side to initialize the [System].
settings. (Default state: display
Clock and Parking Guide)
- While only using the device to listen - In the Other settings, you can set the
to audio, this feature can be very view when power off.
helpful.
- Image feature be available when
- Even when the screen is off, sound user save images to the system.
will be played. - Displays the user selected image.
- Touch anywhere on the touch screen
to turn the display back on.
46
GETtheMANUALS.org
Version Reset Update Caution!
- Upon resetting the system, the user-gen-
erate system data and the user specified
settings are restored to the factory release
English
state.
Feature Mode State
Radio FM1 89.1 MHz
Shuffle Off
Music
Repeat All
1. Press [Version] to display the system 1. In the System settings screen, press 1. In the System settings screen, press
information. This feature is used to [Reset]. [Update]. Subtitle
Small
Size
display boot loader, OS, application, Video
Media
firmware and other system version Screen
Full Screen
information. Size
Slide
Off
Show
Image
Rotate Default
Disconnects a device
Bluetooth Handsfree and deletes all paired
devices
2. Press [OK]. 2. Press [OK] to update the system. Sound Navigation Priority
Settings Navigation Auto Start
Bookmark Deletes items
3. Initialization will proceed after selecting

whether to delete music files in My Music.
- Resetting the system will restore existing - A USB memory with the update files is
settings and configurations back to their required.
default states.
- It is possible for the user to select whether
to delete music files saved in My Music.
47
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Mode
Before Using iPod iPod Screen
The use of genuine iPod cables supplied by Apple is recommended. 1
English
9 10
2
Apple CarPlay is unavailable when iPod is being used.
8
hen using iPod mode through an iPhone, the Use CarPlay setting
W
in iPhone Settings must be disabled. 4
3
5 6 7
11
1 Mode Display 7 Next File

Displays the currently operating mode. Plays the next file.
2 Category * when pressed and held, operation follows
the iPod device operation.
Displays the current category.
3 Category List 8 Album Art
Displays all category lists. Displays album art.
* The category list may differ depending 9 Repeat
on type of iPod device. Repeats the current file or all files in My Music.
4 File Info * Each time the button is pressed, the option
Displays the current file information. is changed from Repeat Off → Repeat One
*song, artist, album and total files. → Repeat All.
5 Previous File 10 Shuffle

Plays the previous file. Plays files in random order.
* when pressed and held, operation fol- 11 Play Time
lows the iPod device operation. Displays the current play time/total play time.
6 Pausing/Playing * Drag or touch the bar to move to the desired
Plays/pauses the current file. time. (This features may not be supported de-
pending on device.)
48
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting iPod Mode
Starting iPod Automatically Starting iPod Manually
English
1. Use an iPod connector cable to connect 1. From the system hard keys, press the 2. Slide from the bottom to the top side of the
the iPod device with the USB connection MODE button. screen or press the page display area on
terminal. the left-side of the screen.
2. Once an iPod is connected, iPod mode will 3. Press [iPod] to operate the iPod mode. 4. The song information is displayed and the
operate automatically. song is played automatically.
Information
If the iPod is already connected and you wish to play iPod from a different mode, refer to the “Starting iPod
Manually”.section.
49
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
What is Apple CarPlay? Apple CarPlay Screen
1. By connecting your iPhone with the system, you can conveniently
2
English
use various features, including Phone, Navigation, Messages,

Music, and Siri.
2. Available functions and operations may differ depending on the
iPhone model.
3. Apple CarPlay may not be available in your country or region.
(http://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availability/#applecarplay-apple-
carplay)
Before Using Apple CarPlay 3
1. Before connecting your mobile phone, check whether Apple Car-

Play is set to be used in Setting → General → Restrictions.
2. Before connecting your mobile phone, check whether Siri is set to
be used in Setting → General → Siri. 1
3. Apple CarPlay works with iPhone 5 or higher.
4. Apple CarPlay works with iOS 7.1 but the most recent version is
recommended.
5. It is not possible to use oncar, iPod and Apple CarPlay at the same 1 Home
time. Moves to the Apple CarPlay home screen
6. The use of genuine iPhone cables supplied by Apple is recom-
mended. 2 Home Screen
7. Upon connecting and entering Apple CarPlay, the sound of the Apple CarPlay home screen
previous mode is maintained. Only the screen will be converted.
8. It is not possible to use Apple CarPlay and Bluetooth Audio at the 3 Now Playing
same time. Moves to the current audio source.
9. Most features of Apple CarPlay require data usage. Before using
Apple CarPlay, make sure that your phone is on a data plan.
10. Upon connecting Apple CarPlay, voice recognition operates based
on Siri. The vehicle voice recognition feature will not operate.
11. For more information, refer to the Apple website (http://www.apple.
com/kr/ios/carplay/)
50
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay Mode
How to use Siri Starting Apple CarPlay Mode
English
1. Press the voice control button on the steer- 2. Or press and hold the home button on the 1. Connect your iPhone to your car using a
ing wheel to operate Siri. Apple CarPlay home screen to operate USB cable.
Siri.
3. Or press and hold the home button on the 2. Press [Apple CarPlay].
iPhone to operate Siri.
Information
- If Bluetooth was connected, Bluetooth will be
disconnected upon connecting Apple CarPlay.
51
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Before Using Android Auto Android Auto Screen
1. Download the Android Auto app to your Android phone with Android
6
English
5.0 Lollipop or higher. 7

2. The use of genuine Android phone cables is recommended.
3. Upon connecting Android Auto, Bluetooth will be automatically
connected.
- Upon exceeding the max. number of registered devices, a device
that had not been recently connected will be deleted.
4. Bluetooth Music is not connected.
5. It is not possible to use CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay and Android
Auto at the same time.
6. Android Auto may not be available in your country or region. Please
refer to the site: (http://www.android.com/auto/#what-you-need)
7. Upon connecting and entering Android Auto, the sound of the previ-
ous mode is maintained. Only the screen will be converted.
8. Most features of Android Auto require data usage. Before using 1 2 3 4 5
Apple CarPlay, make sure that your phone is on a data plan.
9. For details about Android Auto, Please refer to the Google support
site : (http://support.google.com/androidauto)
1 Map 5 Returning to the system
Operates map(navigation) feature. Moves to the Main Menu screen of
Phone the system.
2
Operates phone feature. 6 Voice Recognition
3 Home Screen Operates voice recognition feature.
Moves to he home screen. 7 Home Screen
4 Music Home screen of Android Auto.
Operates music feature. * Displays music and weather widget.
52
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starting Android Auto Mode
Get started
English
1. Connect your Android phone to your vehicle 2. The Main Menu screen will be displayed 3. Press [Android Auto] to enter the mode.
using a USB cable. automatically and Android Auto button will
be enabled. (If Android Auto is already
connected, press [MODE] from the sys-
tem hard keys to move to the Main Menu
screen.)
* Upon connecting Android Auto, Bluetooth

will be automatically connected.
Information
* Upon connecting Android Auto, Bluetooth will be automatically connected.
* Bluetooth Music is not connected.
* It is not possible to use iPod, Apple CarPlay and Android Auto at the same time.
* The dedicated cable is recommended to use.
53
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Manual
What is e-Manual?
English
This feature allows you to conveniently check methods of using

key system features.
This e-manual may differ from the actual feature of the product.
1. Select the desired menu on the left-side. For detailed operation meth-
ods, use the / buttons to move between pages.
54
GETtheMANUALS.org
English
T
he video and some other features will be disabled for your safety when the
- Video is not available while driving. The audio player is not affected when
video is off.
- Slideshow is not available while driving.
The restriction screen will disappear when putting the parking brake on.
55
GETtheMANUALS.org
This system has been equipped with a rear view camera for a wider range of vision for your safety.
The rear camera will operate automatically when the transmission lever is shifted to R regardless of your current mode.
English
The rear camera will automatically stop operating when shifted to a different position.
When the rear camera is operating, it is possible to use the volume and mute features.
1. Position the ignition key in ACC or ON.

2. Position the transmission lever to R.
Caution!
- Rear detection camera screen may appear different from the actual distance. For your safety, always use caution and directly check the rear and left/right sides.
- When the rear camera is operating, only the volume and incoming call features are supported.
56
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Mode - Optional
This device also supports Around View Monitor (AVM) for added safety.
AVM is an optional feature.
English
Pressing the AVM switch or shifting to R will switch the monitor into AVM mode regardless of your current mode.
Pressing the AVM switch again or shifting out of R to another gear will automatically turn off AVM mode and restore your previous mode.
When AVM is operating, it is possible to use the volume and mute features.
To change between 2D and 3D View modes, use the View Mode features within AVM Settings.
2D View 3D View
Caution!
- AVM screen may appear different from the actual distance. For your safety, always use caution and directly check the rear and left/right sides.
- When AVM is operating, only the volume and incoming call features are supported.
57
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Settings
Sync PGS Guidelines PAS Proximity Warning View Mode
English
1. Sets whether to use PGS guide line. (De- 1. Sets whether to use PAS Proximity Warn- 1. Sets the view mode. (Default state : 2D
fault state : On) ing. (Default state : On) View)
58
GETtheMANUALS.org
Product Specifications
Name Car TFT LCD Display AVN UNIT MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Supported Files
TS, WMV
English
Power Supply DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Operating Power DC 9V ~ DC 16V Subtitle Support/
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Resolution
Current Con- 2A
Common sumption Supported Files MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Sleep Current 3mA(Head Unit Only) Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Sampling Fre- 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Operating Tem- -30℃ ~ +75℃ quency
perature
Photo File Format JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Storage Temper- -40℃ ~ +85℃
ature Compatibility BLUTOOTH V4.1
Dimensions 278.4(W) x 175.5(H) x 191.5(D) Frequency Band-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
width
Weight 2.5 Kg Supported A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Profiles
Screen Size 203.90 mm (W) x 114.70 (H) mm (Active area) Bluetooth
Transmission 3.0 dBm
Resolution 921,600 pixel Output
Display
Operating Method TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix Modulation Type FHSS(GFSK)
Backlight LED Channel 79
Frequency Range FM : 87.5~108.0MHz (Step : 100kHz)

AM : 522~1620 kHz (Step:9kHz)
Radio
Sensitivity FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 slot, 16GB Certifica-

Storage tion
USB 1 port , USB2.0 HOST
Device Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Declares that the radio equipment type [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] is in compliance with Directive
2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of confirmity is available at the following internet address : http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 A copy of the DoC in the original language is enclosed with the equipment.
59
GETtheMANUALS.org
Before Thinking the Product has Malfunctioned

English
The current position shown on the navigation may differ from the actual position(driving location and conditions) in the following conditions.
The following instances are not malfunctions.

When driving on Y-shaped roads with narrow angles the current position When driving in heavy traffic or intersections with frequent starts and stops
may be displayed in the different direction
When driving under slippery conditions, such as heavy sand, snow, etc.
The current position mark may be displayed in the opposite direction. When driving equipped with tire chains.
Within city streets, the current position may be displayed on the opposite When the tires have recently been replaced (Especially upon use of spare
side or on an off-road position or studless tires).
When changing the zoom level from maximum to a different level, the When using tires of improper size.
current position may become displayed on a different road When the tire pressure for the 4 tires are different.
If the vehicle is loaded onto a ferry or car transport vehicle, the current When the replacement tire is worn or used (Especially studless tires hav-
position may stall on the last position prior to loading. ing passed a second season).
When removing the battery terminal. When driving near high-rise buildings
When a roof carrier has been installed.
When driving on a spiral-shaped road.
When a long distance route is calculated while driving on an expressway.
When driving in mountain regions with sharp turns or sudden brakes.
In such cases, continued driving will automatically enable the system to
When entering a road after passing an underground parking structure, conduct map matching or use updated GPS information to provide the
building parking structure, or roads with many rotations. current position. (In such cases, up to several minutes may be required)
60
GETtheMANUALS.org
English
Proper route guidance may not occur due to search conditions or driving location.

Guidance to go straight may be given while driving on a straight road. Route guidance signaling entrance into a No-entry zone may occur
(No-entry zone, road under construction, etc.)
Guidance may not be given even when having turned at an intersection. Guidance may be given to a position that is not the actual destination if
roads to reach the actual destination do not exist or are too narrow.
There are certain intersections in which guidance may not occur.
Faulty voice guidance may be given if the vehicle breaks away from the
A route guidance signaling for a u-turn may occur in some No u-turn designated route. (e.g. if a turn is made at an intersection while the navi-
intersections. gation provided guidance to go straight.)
These situations may occur after conducting route calculation.

Guidance may be given to a position differing from the current position Route guidance signaling entrance into a No-entry zone may occur
when turning at an intersection (No-entry zone, road under construction, etc.)
Guidance may be given to a position that is not the actual destination if
When driving in high speeds, route recalculation may take a longer period roads to reach the actual destination do not exist or are too narrow.
of time.
Faulty voice guidance may be given if the vehicle breaks away from the
A route guidance signaling for a u-turn may occur in some No u-turn designated route. (e.g. if a turn is made at an intersection while the navi-
intersections. gation provided guidance to go straight.)
61
GETtheMANUALS.org
Before Thinking There is a Product Malfunction
Before Thinking There is a Product Malfunction

English
1. Errors which occur during the operation or installation of the device may be mistaken as a malfunction of the actual device.
2. If you are having problems with the device, try the suggestions listed below.
3. If the problems persist, contact your dealer or service center.
Problem Countermeasure
Has the Switch for the vehicle been turned to “ACC” or “ON”?
The sound or image is not working.
Is the connection cord unstable or disconnected?
The screen is being displayed but sound Has the volume been set to a low level?
is not working. Is the AMP and speaker connection cable unstable or disconnected? Has the volume been muted?
I turned the power on but the screen LCD panels normally appear dark when used for prolonged periods of time and is not a malfunction.
corners appear dark. If the display is very dark, contact your dealer or service center.
Check the speaker connection cord.
Sound is working from only one speaker.
Are the positions of Fader or Balance sound controls adjusted to only one side?
I connected an external device, but it is
Are the audio connector jacks fully inserted into the AUX terminal?
not working properly.
62
GETtheMANUALS.org
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause Countermeasure
Replace with a suitable fuse. If the fuse is disconnected again, please contact
The fuse is disconnected.
English
your point of purchase or service center.
The power does not turn on.
Device is not properly connected. Check to see that the device has been properly connected.
The image color/tone qual- The brightness, saturation, hue, and con- Properly adjust the brightness, saturation, hue, and contrast levels through
ity is low. trast levels are not set properly. Display Setup.
The brightness level is set to low level. Adjust the brightness level.
Image does not work.
Device is not properly connected. Check to see that the device has been properly connected.
The volume level is set to low level Adjust the volume level
Sound does not work Device is not properly connected. Check to see that the device has been properly connected.
The device is currently fast-forwarding, re- The sound will not work when the device is fast-forwarding, rewinding, scan-
winding, scanning, or playing in slow mode. ning, or playing in slow mode.
Please use after formatting the USB into FAT 12/16/32 format. This device does not recognize
USB memory is damaged. files in NTFS and exFAT file format.
Remove any foreign substances on the contact surface of the USB memory and multime-
USB memory has been contaminated. dia terminal.
A separately purchased USB HUB is being used. Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia terminal on the vehicle.
Directly connect the USB memory with the multimedia terminal on the
The USB does not work. A USB extension cable is being used vehicle.
A USB which is not a Metal Cover Type USB
Use standard USB Memory.
Memory is being used.
An HDD type, CF, SD Memory is being used. Use standard USB Memory.
Only MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC and WAV file formats are supported.
There are no music files which can be played.
Please use only the supported music file formats.
Information - While operating the device, if an abnormality occurs that cannot be corrected with the above measures, reset the system.
- Press the HOME key and SETIP key simultaneously. The device power will turn off and the system will reset.
63
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
English
64
GETtheMANUALS.org
Système de navigation pour véhicules MANUEL D’UTILISATEUR Y400 AVN
User Manual
Français
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Veuillez lire attentivement ce manuel avant d’utiliser votre appareil et de le conserver pour référence ultérieure.
Les modèles et les spécifications sont sujets à changement sans préavis.
Visitez la page Web de Ssangyong Motor pour obtenir des informations détaillées sur le système de navigation pour véhicules.
- Adresse du site Web de téléchargement du manuel AVN : http://www.smotor.com
65
GETtheMANUALS.org
Table des matières
Éléments de base
Précautions 67 Appairage de périphériques Bluetooth 89
Français
Informations relatives au produit clés 68 Déconnexion et suppression des périphériques Bluetooth 91

Fonctionnalités clés du produit 69 Écran d’appel Bluetooth 92
Noms et fonctions des composants 70 Effectuer un appel 93
Dispositif de commande à volant de direction 72 Répondre à un appel 95
Paramètres Bluetooth 96
Exécution des menus de base Musique Bluetooth 100
Fonctionnement de base 73 Écran Ma musique 101
Écran Accueil 75 Mode AUX 102
Signet 76 Paramètres 103
Mode iPod 112
Exécution du mode AV Démarrage du mode iPod 113
Mode Radio 77 Apple CarPlay 114
Utilisation des préréglages et enregistrement radio 78 Mode Apple CarPlay 115
Mode multimédia 80 Démarrage du mode Android Auto 117
(1) Mode Musique USB Mode e-Manual 118
Mode Musique USB 81 Restrictions relatives aux fonctionnalités des mesures de sécurité 119
Écran Musique USB 82 Caméra de détection arrière 120
(2) Mode Vidéo USB Mode AVM - en option 121
Démarrage du mode Vidéo USB 83 Paramètres AVM 122
Écran vidéo USB 84 Spécifications du produit 123
(3) Mode Image USB
Démarrage du mode Image USB 85
Annexe
Écran image USB 86 Avant de penser que le produit présente des dysfonctionnements 124
Mode Bluetooth 87 Avant de penser qu’il s’agit d’un dysfonctionnement 126
Menu principal Bluetooth 88 Dépannage 127
66
GETtheMANUALS.org
Précautions
Avertissements en matière de sécurité Mises en garde en matière de sécurité
Même si vous recevez des conseils sur le guidage routier du système Prêtez attention aux conditions de la circulation pendant que vous conduisez.
Français
Multimédia, veuillez respecter les règles de circulation en vigueur.
Dans certains cas, le système de navigation peut fournir une orientation
Respecter uniquement le système de navigation ou de guidage peut dans les zones d’accès limité.
entrainer une violation des règles de circulation routière et causer des
accidents de circulation. L’utilisation du dispositif pendant la conduite peut causer des accidents, faute
d’attention à l’environnement extérieur. Garez d’abord votre véhicule avant
Évitez de fixer l’écran lorsque vous conduisez. Si vous le faites pendant de mettre le dispositif en marche. De plus, certaines fonctionnalités pourront
une période prolongée, vous pouvez causer des accidents de circulation. ne peut pas être activées via l’écran tactile lorsque le véhicule roule. L’écran
Évitez de mettre en marche le système Multimédia lorsque vous condui- tactile fonctionne uniquement lorsque le véhicule est à l’arrêt.
sez, comme entrer les POI ou rechercher les itinéraires. Ces actions
peuvent causer des accidents de circulation. Cet appareil est réservé à un usage dans les automobiles seulement. Évi-
tez d’installer ce dispositif dans des appareils autres que les automobiles.
Garez votre véhicule avant de mettre le dispositif en marche.
Si vous souhaitez modifier la position d’installation de l’appareil, contac-
Ne démontez pas, ne montez pas et ne modifiez pas le système Multi- tez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien. Une expertise technique est
média. Ces actions peuvent provoquer des accidents de circulation, des exigée lors de l’installation ou du démontage de l’appareil.
incendies ou des chocs électriques.
Évitez de verser l’eau ou d’introduire des objets étrangers dans l’appa- Pendant le nettoyage de l’appareil, assurez-vous d’éteindre l’appareil et
reil. Ces actions peuvent provoquer de la fumée, des incendies ou des d’utiliser un chiffon doux et sec. N’utilisez jamais des matériaux durs, des
dysfonctionnements. produits chimiques ou des solvants (alcool, benzène, diluants, etc.) car ceux-
ci peuvent endommager le panneau de l’appareil ou entraîner la détérioration
En cas d’irrégularités, comme l’introduction des corps étrangers ou la fu- de la couleur ou la dégradation de la qualité. Lorsque l’appareil connaît des
mée due à l’exposition à l’eau, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil dysfonctionnements, contactez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien.
et contactez votre lieu d’achat ou centre d’entretien.
N’exposez pas l’appareil à des chocs ou impacts violents.
Une utilisation continue pourrait entraîner les dysfonctionnements de l’appareil.
Évitez d’utiliser l’appareil si l’écran est blanc ou si aucun son n’est perçu. Une pression directe sur la partie avant du moniteur peut endommager
Ces signes sont de nature à indiquer le dysfonctionnement de l’appareil. l’écran LCD ou l’écran tactile.
Une utilisation continue peut provoquer des accidents (incendie ou chocs En cas d’utilisation prolongée de l’appareil avec le contact coupé, un
électriques). signal d’avertissement de décharge de batterie s’affiche à l’écran. Utilisez
Évitez d’arrêter ou de stationner le véhicule dans les zones de station- le système avec la clé de contact en position de marche.
nement interdit pour mettre en marche l’appareil. Ces actions peuvent
causer des accidents de circulation.
67
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod est une marque déposée d’Apple Inc. Fabriqué sous licence de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby et le symbole double-D sont des marques déposées de Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Français
Apple CarPlay est une marque déposée d’Apple Inc. TomTom

Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tous droits réservés. TomTom et le logo « deux mains » sont des
marques de commerce ou des marques déposées de TomTom N.V. ou l’une de ses filiales.
La marque verbale et les logos Bluetooth sont des marques déposées apparte-
nant à Bluetooth SIG, Inc. et toute utilisation de ces marques se fait sous licence. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tous droits réservés. Ces données sont exclusives et font l’objet
Vous devez disposer d’un téléphone mobile Bluetooth pour utiliser la technologie d’une protection de droits d’auteur ou une protection des droits de base de données et
sans fil Bluetooth. d’autres droits de propriété intellectuelle détenus par TomTom ou ses fournisseurs. L’uti-
lisation de ces données est soumise aux clauses d’un contrat de licence. Toute copie ou
DivX divulgation non autorisée engage votre responsabilité civile et pénale.
En tant que produit certifié DivX, il peut lire des vidéos HD DivX haut de
gamme. (Notamment .avi et .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified et les logos associés sont des marques commerciales de
DivX et LLC, et sont utilisés sous licence.
Ils sont protégés par au moins un des brevets américains suivants : : 7, 295,
673 ; 7, 460, 668 ; 7, 515, 710 ; 7, 519, 274
Utilisation des cartes mémoire SD

1. La fente de la carte SD dans cet appareil est réservée aux fichiers de carte.
2. Le fichier de carte a été enregistré sur la carte SD de cet appareil.
Évitez d’ajouter, de supprimer ou de formater les fichiers sur la carte SD. Éjectez/insérez la carte SD uniquement pour mettre à jour la carte avec une nouvelle version.
3. Utilisez seulement la carte SD qui a été fournie par le revendeur. Évitez de séparer ou de copier le fichier de carte sur une autre carte SD que vous possédez.
Une telle action pourra entraîner des dysfonctionnements ou une mauvaise manipulation.
4. L’éjection et l’insertion des cartes SD pendant la mise sous tension du système peut causer des pannes du système ou des cartes SD.
Pour éjecter ou insérer la carte SD, coupez d’abord le contact du véhicule.
5. L’insertion ou le retrait à plusieurs reprises de la carte SD pendant une courte période peut endommager l’appareil.
6. La carte SD est formatée pour inclure uniquement le fichier des données de carte.
L’enregistrement d’autres fichiers dans la carte SD peut entraîner des erreurs de système ou des dysfonctionnements.
Téléchargement de la carte mise à niveau et du logiciel AVN

1. Connectez la carte SD à votre ordinateur.
2. Accédez à la page Mise à niveau (URL).
68
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fonctionnalités clés du produit
Fonctionnalités Description Fonctionnalités Description
Français
Grâce à Apple CarPlay, vous pouvez passer des ap-
Écran large LCD Apple CarPlay pels, échanger des messages texte, utiliser la carte,
Écran Fournit en même temps un contenu vidéo et musical de écouter la musique, et utiliser les fonctionnalités Siri.
qualité supérieure à travers un grand écran tactile de
9,2 pouces pour plus de facilité. Avec Android Auto, vous pouvez utiliser Google map,
Android Auto le téléphone, la reconnaissance vocale et les fonc-
tionnalités musicales.
Caractéristique de syntoniseur numérique
Le syntoniseur numérique prend en charge la mémoire de
12 stations de diffusion pour chaque mode FM1, FM2, AM Fonction de connexion Bluetooth
Radio et DAB. Fournit une caractéristique mains libres qui permet aux
Services RDS Bluetooth conducteurs d’émettre des appels sans fil tout en condui-
Fournit les fonctions AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY avec les sant et d’apprécier la musique grâce à la diffusion audio en
services RDS. continu.
Fonction de recherche automatique de médias

Identifie automatiquement les fichiers multimédias, y com- Fonctions de commandes d’écran numérique
Périphérique USB pris les fichiers vidéo, audio et les photos enregistrés sur Contrôlez facilement la luminosité de l’écran sur l’écran
les cartes USB et SD et les affichent comme des listes pour tactile pour un visionnement en tout confort.
plus de commodité.
Divers Vous permet de voir l’arrière via la caméra HD lorsque vous
Usages de la carte TomTom effectuez la marche arrière.
Grâce à un moteur GPS, vous pouvez recevoir un guidage
Navigation très précis et une carte fiable via une antenne à haute Écran de visualisation du périmètre - En option
sensibilité. Permet une vision des côtés avant, arrière, gauche et droit à
travers les quatre caméras installées dans le véhicule.
69
GETtheMANUALS.org
Noms et fonctions des composants
Vue avant
Bouton Description
Français
ALIMENTATION / VOLUME
1 1. Utilisé pour allumer / éteindre l’appareil ou contrôler le volume.
2. Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée (plus d’une seconde et
demie) pour éteindre l’appareil.
3. Appuyez brièvement sur la touche pour activer / désactiver AV.
4. Tournez le bouton à gauche/droite pour régler le volume. (plage de
contrôle du volume 0~45)
2 Accueil
1 1. Passez à l’écran d’accueil (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5
et demie) pour passer au mode Marque-page.
3 MODE
1. Passe à l’écran du mode principal.
2. Dans le mode Navigation, appuyez et maintenez la touche en-
foncée (plus d’une seconde et demie) pour exécuter le dernier
mode AV activé avant le mode Navigation.
4 NAVI
1. Conversion au mode Navigation et affichage de l’emplacement
actuel que AV soit activé ou non.
et demie) pour passer à l’écran qui vous permettra de recher-
cher votre destination.
5 CONFIGURATION
Quel que soit le mode activé, maintenez la touche enfoncée pour
afficher l’écran Paramètres.
Dans le mode Radio/Audio/Vidéo/Navigation/Téléphone Bluetooth,
appuyez pour afficher l’écran de réglages correspondant.
70
GETtheMANUALS.org
Vue arrière Connecteur AVN 42P
Français
6
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Prise d’antenne radio A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Pour connecter le câble d’antenne radio A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) Prise d’antenne GPS A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Pour connecter le câble d’antenne GPS A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Connecteur de la caméra de recul A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Pour connecter un connecteur de caméra de recul A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) Port USB A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Pour connecter un connecteur USB pour une fonction USB A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Connecteur d’E/S (42 broches) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Connecteur DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Pour connecter un câble d’antenne DAB B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
71
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bouton Description
1 Pendant l’appel mains-libres Bluetooth, appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée
pour mettre fin à l’appel.
Français
Lorsque vous ne passez pas d’appel, appuyez pour activer ou désactiver le son.
6
Quel que soit le mode activé
2 - Chaque pression sur la touche modifie le mode selon l’ordre de mode Radio →Multimédia
2 3 → Musique Bluetooth → iPod → Ma Musique. (Si le périphérique multimédia n’est pas
4 connecté, les modes correspondants seront désactivés)
En mode Radio
- Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée pour modifier le mode Radio selon l’ordre de
5 1 mode FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
En mode Multimédia
- Appuyez et maintenez la touche enfoncée pour modifier ce mode selon l’ordre de mode
Musique USB → Vidéo USB → Image USB.
3
Règle le volume.
4 Pendant la lecture
- appuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS pour déplacer le fichier précédent/suivant.
En mode Radio
- appuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS pour déplacer la présélection précédente/
suivante.
-a ppuyez sur la touche HAUT ou BAS et maintenez-la enfoncée pour déplacer la
fréquence de radiodiffusion précédente/suivante.
5
Active le mode mains libres Bluetooth.
En mode Apple CarPlay

6 - exécute Siri.
En mode Android Auto
- exécute Google Voice.
72
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fonctionnement de base
Démarrage du système Arrêt du système
Français
1. Alors que le système est en marche, appuyez sur le bouton ALI-
1. Appuyez sur le bouton du démarreur ou 2. Une fois le système mis sous tension, le MENTATION/VOLUME (pendant plus de 1,5 secondes) et main-
réglez la clé de contact sur ON ou ACC. processus de démarrage est enclenché et tenez-le enfoncé pour éteindre la machine. Lorsque le système est
l’écran du logo s’affiche. mis hors tension, le dernier mode de fonctionnement est enregistré.
3. L
a page d’avertissement en matière de sécurité 4. Appuyez sur le bouton [Accepter] pour afficher 2. L’heure actuelle s’affiche lorsque le sys-
s’affiche et l’accord de l’utilisateur est activé. le mode le plus récent. (Le mode par défaut est tème est à l’arrêt.
Radio FM1)
- Cochez la case [Disparition auto] pour activer le mode récemment utilisé sans appuyer sur le bouton [Accepter]. - Après un nouveau démarrage, le système active
automatiquement le mode de fonctionnement le
plus récent.
- Si plus de 3 minutes se sont écoulées dans l’état du
contact d’allumage éteint, le système s’arrête auto-
matiquement et la porte côté conducteur s’ouvre.
73
GETtheMANUALS.org
Réinitialisation des réglages Audio désactivé Audio activé
Français
1. Appuyez simultanément sur les boutons 1. L

orsque AV est activé, appuyez brièvement sur 1. L
orsque AV est désactivé, appuyez brièvement
MODE et CONFIGURATION. le bouton ALIMENTATION/VOLUME (pendant sur le bouton ALIMENTATION/VOLUME (pen-
plus de 1,5 secondes) pour désactiver AV. dant plus de 1,5 secondes) pour activer AV.
2. Le système s’éteint et redémarre. 2. Lorsque le son est coupé, l’écran du mode 2. Lorsque le son est activé, l’écran de navi-
de navigation le plus récent s’affiche. gation est maintenu, toutefois le contenu
Audio le plus récent commence à jouer.
Informations
-L
a réinitialisation du système va restaurer tous
les paramètres et les configurations existants aux
valeurs d’usine. Ceci pour garantir la stabilité de
l’appareil et ne constitue pas un défaut de système.
74
GETtheMANUALS.org
Écran Accueil
Écran Accueil
1 Présente un bref aperçu de la carte de navigation et l’écran d’iti-
1
néraire. / Touchez n’importe quelle zone de l’écran pour accéder
6
à l’écran de navigation en mode plein écran.
Français
2 Affiche des informations succinctes sur le support radio en cours
de lecture / Touchez l’écran pour accéder à l’écran du mode en
2
cours d’exécution.
3 Signet
Ajoutez vos éléments du menu Favoris pour un accès rapide et facile.
4 Mode
Affiche tous les éléments dans le menu du système.
3 4 5
5 Destination
Passe à l’écran sur lequel vous pouvez rechercher votre destination.
6 Écran éteint
Appuyez pour éteindre l’écran. Touchez n’importe quelle zone de
l’écran pour allumer à nouveau l’afficheur.
Informations
- Appuyez sur le bouton [ACCUEIL] pour afficher l’écran d’accueil.
- Appuyez sur le bouton [ACCUEIL] et maintenez-le enfoncé pour afficher l’écran Marque-page.
75
GETtheMANUALS.org
Signet
Démarrage du Marque-page Écran de marque-page
4 2
Français
1
1. À partir de l’écran d’accueil, sé- 2. À partir de l’écran Liste de
lectionnez [Marque-page]. marque-page, appuyez sur
[Ajouter].
1 Liste de menu
Liste de menu Marque-page
3. Appuyez et maintenez enfoncés 4. Liste de Marque-page 2 Confirmer
les éléments du menu, puis glis- Après sélection, enregistrez les modifications dans le menu Marque-
sez-déplacez-les vers l’emplace- page et restaurez l’écran d’accueil.
ment souhaité pour les ajouter/ Zone d’ajout des menus
3
supprimer/déplacer. Ensuite, ap-
puyez sur le bouton Confirmer. Les éléments de la liste de menu sont glissés et déplacés vers la zone
d’ajout comme menus de marque-page.
4 Réinitialisation
Réinitialise les réglages du marque-page.
Lorsque le Marque-page est déjà ajouté, appuyez sur le bouton Modifier. - Appuyez sur le bouton [ACCUEIL] pour afficher l’écran d’accueil.
- Appuyez sur le bouton [ACCUEIL] et maintenez-le enfoncé pour afficher l’écran Marque-page.
76
GETtheMANUALS.org
Démarrage du mode Radio
Démarrage du mode Radio Écran de la radio
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Français
4
3
2
6 5
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE pour afficher 7

l’écran du menu principal, ensuite appuyez
sur [Radio].
1 Mode Affichage 7 Onglet de bande radio
Affiche le mode en cours. Si vous sélectionnez l’onglet désiré, le mode Radio sélec-
tionné s’active.
2 Préréglage
Affiche la liste de préréglages. 8 Accueil
* Appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton de préréglage Passe à l’écran d’accueil.
pour enregistrer la fréquence actuelle sur le bouton de 9 Précédent
préréglage sélectionné. Passe à l’écran précédent.
* Vous pouvez enregistrer 12 fréquences de préréglage 10 DAB
pour les modes FM1/FM2/AM. Exécution du mode DAB.
3 Infos de fréquences 11 TA marche / arrêt
Affiche la fréquence en cours. Active ou désactive les annonces de circulation.
*C
haque fois que cette zone est tirée vers la droite, le (pour les détails, consultez la section « DAB ».)
mode est modifié dans l’ordre FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1. DLS marche / arrêt
12
4 Indicateur Active ou désactive le texte DLS. (pour les détails,
Affiche l’état Marche/Arrêt des fonctionnalités REG/ consultez la section « DAB ».)
AF/TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO. 13 Numérisation
5 Syntonisation haut Lit les fréquences avec une réception supérieure
Appuyez sur la touche pour rechercher vers le haut de 5 secondes chacune.
par FM : 0.1MHz, AM : 9KHz) 14 AST
6 Syntonisation bas Enregistre les fréquences avec une réception supérieure
Appuyez sur la touche pour rechercher vers le bas sur les boutons de préréglage.
par FM : 0.1MHz, AM : 9KHz) 15 Enregistrement radio
Enregistre les émissions radio en cours de lecture.
77
GETtheMANUALS.org
Utilisation des préréglages et enregistrement radio
Enregistrement automatique Enregistrement manuel des
des préréglages (Autostore) préréglages
Enregistrement radio
Français
1. Sur l’écran de la radio, appuyez 1. Sélectionnez la fréquence à 1. Sur l’écran de la radio, appuyez 2. Sur l’écran qui vous invite à enre-
sur [AST]. enregistrer. sur . gistrer la radio, appuyez sur [OK]
pour lancer l’enregistrement.
2. Enregistre les fréquences avec 2. Appuyez et maintenez enfoncé 3. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton Arrêt, l’enregistrement s’interrompt et
une réception supérieure sur les le bouton de préréglage que vous enregistrez le contenu audio automatiquement dans le dossier Ma
boutons de préréglage par ordre vous souhaitez enregistrer. La Musique Radio.
croissant. fréquence actuelle vers le bouton
de préréglage souhaité avec un
bip.
-S ’il existe moins de 12 fréquences radio avec des états de réception supérieure, alors les - Les enregistrements de plus de 5 secondes et de 60 minutes au maximum peuvent être stockés
préréglages déjà enregistrés seront sauvegardés dans les canaux préréglés restants. sur un support d’enregistrement.
- Vous pouvez lire les fichiers radio enregistrés dans Ma Musique.
- Alors que Autostore est en marche, appuyez à nouveau sur le bouton AST pour désactiver
- 100 listes au maximum peuvent être enregistrées. Si la capacité de stockage est dépassée
la fonction et lire la fréquence précédente. avec moins de 100 fichiers, l’enregistrement sera par la suite interrompu automatiquement et les
enregistrements supplémentaires ne sont pas pris en charge.
78
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Démarrage du mode DAB Écran DAB
1 8 Précédent
9 10 11 12 13 Passe à l’écran précédent.
7 8
Français
9 FM/AM
Active le mode Radio FM/AM.
4 10 Activer / désactiver le suivi de service
SF (AF) Activé / Désactivé
2 * SF (AF) : Cette fonctionnalité assure une récep-
5 3 6 tion continue par une recherche automatique
1. Sur l’écran de la radio, appuyez des chaînes identiques dans des fréquences
adjacentes lorsque le signal de réception de
sur DAB pour exécuter le mode chaîne en cours devient faible.
DAB.
11 TA (Annonces de circulation) activé ou désactivé
Active ou désactive les annonces de circulation.
* TA : Cette fonctionnalité fournit les annonces de
circulation et les bulletins en temps réel.
12 Texte DLS (Programme des textes défilant)

1 Mode Affichage activé / désactivé
Affiche le mode en cours. Active ou désactive le texte DLS.
2 Préréglage * Texte DLS : Cette fonctionnalité affiche les textes
Affiche la station enregistrée pour la sélection de l’utilisateur. diffusés par la station radio en cours sur l’appareil.
* Appuyez et maintenez enfoncé le bouton de préréglage pour enregistrer la Parmi les types d’informations figurent les infor-
station actuelle sur le bouton de préréglage sélectionné. mations de programme, notamment les slogans
* 12 stations au maximum peuvent être enregistrées. de station ou le titre et l’artiste de la chanson en
cours de lecture.
3 Infos sur la station
Affiche la station en cours. 13 Liste
Affiche automatiquement les listes actualisées.
4 Indicateur
Affiche l’état marche-arrêt des fonctionnalités DAB/TP.
5 Canal vers le bas
Passe à la station précédente.
6 Canal vers le haut
Passe à la station suivante.
7 Accueil
Passe à l’écran d’accueil.
79
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode multimédia
À propos des périphériques de mémoire USB
1. Connectez le périphérique USB après le démarrage du circuit d’allumage. Le périphérique USB risque d’être endommagé s’il est déjà connecté
lorsque le circuit d’allumage est sous tension. Les périphériques USB ne sont pas des composants électroniques pour l’industrie automobile.
2. Mettre le circuit d’allumage sous ou hors tension avec le périphérique USB connecté peut entraîner un fonctionnement incorrect de la clé USB.
Français
3. Faites attention à l’électricité statique lorsque vous connectez/déconnectez les périphériques USB externes.
4. Les lecteurs MP3 encodés ne seront pas reconnus lorsqu’ils sont connectés comme périphérique externe.
5. Lors de la connexion d’un périphérique USB externe, le système peut ne pas reconnaître le périphérique USB dans certaines conditions.
6. Ce système reconnaît les périphériques USB formatés aux formats de fichier FAT16/32. Les périphériques USB avec les systèmes de fichiers de type
NTFS ou exFAT ne sont pas pris en charge.
7. Certains périphériques USB peuvent ne pas être pris en charge à cause des questions de compatibilité. Avant d’utiliser l’appareil, assurez-vous qu’il
fonctionne normalement.
8. L’insertion ou le retrait à plusieurs reprises du périphérique USB pendant une courte période peut endommager l’appareil.
9. Vous pourriez entendre à des occasions un son anormal au moment de la déconnexion du périphérique USB.
10. Déconnecter le périphérique USB pendant la lecture d’un fichier multimédia en mode USB peut endommager le périphérique ou causer son dys-
fonctionnement. Avant de déconnecter le périphérique USB, arrêtez le système ou changez de mode.
11. Le temps nécessaire pour la reconnaissance d’un périphérique USB externe peut varier en fonction du type, de la taille ou du format de fichier stoc-
ké dans le périphérique. Cette différence de temps n’indique pas forcément un dysfonctionnement.
12. L’utilisation des périphériques USB à d’autres fins que celle de lecture de fichiers audio ou d’images est interdite.
13. Évitez d’utiliser des câbles USB pour le chargement de batteries ou d’accessoires USB générant de la chaleur. Cela pourrait affaiblir le système ou
l’endommager.
14. En cas d’utilisation d’un périphérique et d’un câble USB achetés séparément, il est possible que l’appareil ne reconnaisse pas le périphérique USB.
Connectez le périphérique USB directement au terminal multimédia du véhicule.
15. Lors de l’utilisation de périphériques de stockage de masse USB, les lecteurs logiques peuvent êtres séparés pour être mieux utilisés. Auxquels
cas, seul les fichiers contenus dans le lecteur logique du dossier racine sont lus. Lors de l’utilisation d’un périphérique USB à partitions (lecteurs
logiques) séparées, enregistrez les fichiers à lire dans le dossier racine. Lors de l’installation d’applications dans des périphériques USB spécifiques,
les fichiers s’y trouvant peuvent ne pas se lire correctement pour les raisons suscitées.
16. L’appareil pourrait présenter des dysfonctionnements si vous y connectez des lecteurs MP3, des téléphones portables, des caméras numériques ou
d’autres périphériques USB non reconnus tels que des disques durs externes.
17. Le chargement par USB peut ne pas fonctionner avec certains appareils mobiles.
18. Seuls des clés USB à couvercle métalliques sont normalement compatibles avec l’appareil selon la garantie.
19. Il pourrait y avoir incompatibilité en cas d’utilisation de périphériques tels que des disques durs, des CF ou des cartes SD.
20. Les clés USB de type SD ou CF peuvent ne pas être correctement reconnus s’ils sont utilisés avec un adaptateur.
80
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Musique USB
Démarrage du mode Musique USB Enregistrement du fichier de musique
Français
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE pour afficher l’écran 1. Après la lecture du fichier à enregistrer, 2. Dans la fenêtre Enregistrer le fichier de
du menu principal, puis appuyez sur [Media]. appuyez sur à l’écran Musique. musique, appuyez sur [OK].
2. Le type de fichier multimédia sélectionné par 3. Vous pouvez vérifier les fichiers enregis-
défaut est le type de fichier de musique USB. trés dans le dossier Ma musique.
Informations
Cette fonctionnalité n’est disponible que si le périphérique USB contient au
moins un fichier de musique. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible si le
périphérique USB ne contient pas de fichier de musique.
-C odec audio : MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10, LPCM, FLAC
- Extension : MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Fréquence d’échantillonnage : 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz
- Débit binaire : 32 Kbps- 320 Kbps
-M ise en garde : L’appareil prend en charge des fichiers d’une plage de
débit binaire de 320 Kbps, et l’utilisation de fichiers de débit binaire de
l’ordre de 192 kbps est recommandée. En cas d’utilisation de fichiers à Informations
débit binaire variable, certaines fonctionnalités (les fonctionnalités FF/
REW) peuvent ne pas être disponibles. - Il est possible d’enregistrer jusqu’à 100 chants.
81
GETtheMANUALS.org
Écran Musique USB
Écran Musique USB
6 Fichier suivant
1 Joue le fichier suivant.
9 10 11 * Appuyez longuement sur cette touche pour rechercher rapidement le fichier suivant
Français
2 dans le périphérique USB. Et le nom du fichier s’affiche. Une fois que vous relâ-
chez la touche, le fichier est lu à la vitesse normale.
3 7 Fichier précédent
12 Joue le fichier précédent.
* Appuyez longuement sur cette touche pour rechercher rapidement le fichier pré-
5 cédent dans le périphérique USB. Et le nom du fichier s’affiche. Une fois que vous
4 relâchez la touche, le fichier est lu à la vitesse normale.
7 8 6
8 Lecture / Pause
Lecture / Pause du fichier en cours.
13
9 Répétition
Répète la lecture du fichier actuel ou de tous les fichiers contenus dans le
périphérique USB.
14
* Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur ce bouton, une option disponible se présente,
dans l’ordre Répéter le fichier → Répéter le dossier → Répéter un élément.
10 Lecture aléatoire
Mode Affichage Joue les fichiers dans l’ordre aléatoire.
1
Affiche le mode en cours. Enregistrement du fichier de musique
11
Enregistre le fichier de musique actuel dans Ma musique.
2 Dossier parent
Permet d’aller au dossier parent 12 Index de fichiers
Affiche le fichier actuel/le nombre total de fichier dans le dossier actuel.
3 Nom du dossier
Affiche le nom du dossier actuel. 13 Temps de lecture
Affiche le temps de lecture en cours / total.
4 Liste des morceaux * Glissez ou touchez la barre pour atteindre la période de temps désirée.
Affiche la liste des fichiers de musique contenue dans le dossier actuel.
* Le nom du fichier en cours de lecture s’affiche en surbrillance 14 Onglet Mode USB
Vous accédez au mode USB en sélectionnant l’onglet correspondant à ce mode.
5 Informations sur le morceau
Affiche le dossier, l’artiste, le titre, l’album, et les informations relatives à l’album du
fichier actuel.
82
GETtheMANUALS.org
Démarrage du mode Vidéo USB
Démarrage du mode Vidéo USB
Français
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE 2 - 1. Lorsque l’écran Musique USB 2 - 2. Vous pouvez aussi toucher 3. Une fois que le panneau de
pour afficher l’écran du menu s’affiche, tirez cet écran vers l’onglet Vidéo USB pour ac- commande du mode Vidéo s’af-
principal, puis appuyez sur la droite pour accéder au céder au mode Vidéo USB. fiche, la vidéo est lue en mode
[Media]. mode Vidéo USB. plein écran.
Informations
Cette fonctionnalité n’est disponible que si le périphérique USB contient au moins un fichier vidéo. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible si le périphérique USB ne contient aucun fichier vidéo.
- Le type de fichier multimédia sélectionné par défaut est le type de fichier de musique USB.
- Codec vidéo : MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Extensions : MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
Résolution d’image : D1 720 X 480 (729 X 590), HD 1280 X 720P(1289 X 729)
- Sous-titres : SMI (les sous-titres pourraient ne pas complètement disponible si le nom du fichier vidéo est différent du nom du fichier des sous-titres.)
- Mise en garde : Les films à haute résolution utilisant des débits binaires supérieurs à 2 Mbps peuvent ne pas se lire correctement.
83
GETtheMANUALS.org
Écran vidéo USB
Écran vidéo USB
5 Fichier suivant
8 9 * Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier sélectionné commence et le
Français
2 nom du fichier suivant s’affiche.
6 Fichier précédent
3 Joue le fichier précédent.
10 * Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier sélectionné commence et le
4 nom du fichier précédent s’affiche.
7 Lecture / Pause
6 7 5 Lecture / Pause du fichier en cours.
8 Taille des sous-titres

11 Modifie la taille des sous-titres.
* Ce bouton n’est disponible que s’il existe un sous-titre..
9 Plein écran
12 Modifie l’affichage du mode normal au mode plein écran.
* Dès que vous touchez une zone hors du bouton sur l’écran, l’affichage passe en
mode plein écran.
10 Index de fichiers
1 Mode Affichage Affiche le fichier actuel/le nombre total de fichier dans le dossier actuel.
Affiche le mode en cours.
11 Temps de lecture
2 Dossier parent Affiche le temps de lecture en cours / total.
Permet d’aller au dossier parent * Glissez ou touchez la barre pour atteindre la période de temps désirée.
3 Nom du dossier du dossier 12 Onglet Mode USB

Affiche le nom du fichier et du dossier actuel. Vous accédez au mode USB en sélectionnant l’onglet correspondant à ce mode.
4 Liste des vidéos

Affiche la liste des fichiers vidéo contenue dans le dossier actuel.
* Le nom de la vidéo en cours de lecture s’affiche en surbrillance
84
GETtheMANUALS.org
Démarrage du mode Image USB
Démarrage du mode Image USB
Français
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE 2 - 1. Lorsque l’écran Musique USB 2 - 2. Vous pouvez aussi toucher 3. Une fois que le panneau de
pour afficher l’écran du menu s’affiche, tirez cet écran vers l’onglet Image USB pour ac- commande du mode Image s’af-
principal, puis appuyez sur la droite pour accéder au céder au mode Image USB. fiche, l’image est lue en mode
[Media]. mode Image USB. (Musique plein écran.
→ Vidéo → Image)
Informations
Cette fonctionnalité n’est disponible que si le périphérique USB contient au moins un fichier image. Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas disponible si le périphérique USB ne contient
pas de fichier de musique.
- Le type de fichier multimédia sélectionné par défaut est le type de fichier de musique USB.
- Lorsque vous passez du mode Musique au mode Image, la lecture du morceau en cours de lecture se poursuit.
- Lorsque vous passez du mode Vidéo au mode Image, la lecture de la vidéo en cours de lecture se poursuit.
- Formats d’image pris en charge : JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
85
GETtheMANUALS.org
Écran image USB
Écran image USB
4 Liste des morceaux
1
7 8 9 Affiche la liste des fichiers image contenue dans le dossier actuel.
Français
* Le nom de l’image en cours de lecture s’affiche en surbrillance

2
5 Fichier suivant
10
4 * Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier sélectionné commence et le nom
du fichier suivant s’affiche.
6 5 Joue le fichier suivant.
* Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier sélectionné commence et le nom
du fichier précédent s’affiche.
11 7 Diaporama
Tous les images figurant dans le périphérique USB s’affichent en sé-
quence, en fonction de l’intervalle de sélection
La fonctionnalité de zoom avant/zoom arrière n’est pas prise en charge.
* La diffusion en diaporama n’est pas disponible durant la conduite.
1 Mode Affichage 8 Tourner

Affiche le mode en cours. Fait pivoter l’image dans le sens antihoraire.
2 Dossier parent
9 Enregistrement de l’image
Permet d’aller au dossier parent
Enregistre l’image qui s’affiche au moment de l’extinction de l’écran.
3 Nom du dossier du dossier
Affiche le nom du dossier, le nom du fichier, le type de fichier et la résolution de l’image actuelle 10 Index de fichiers
Affiche le fichier actuel/le nombre total de fichier dans le dossier actuel.
11 Onglet Mode USB

Vous accédez au mode USB en sélectionnant l’onglet correspondant à ce mode.
86
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Bluetooth
Avant d’utiliser le Bluetooth
1. Avant de connecter la tête au téléphone portable, activez le Bluetooth et désactivez le statut de restriction de visibilité sur le net.
Français
2. Jusqu’à cinq périphériques Bluetooth peuvent être appariés.
3. Un seul périphérique Bluetooth peut être connecté à la fois.
4. Le réglage minimal en mode mains libres et de 6, et le volume maximal est de 40.
Lancer le mode Bluetooth
1. Appuyez sur le bouton MODE 2. Une fenêtre contextuelle noti- 3-1. Appuyez sur [Oui] pour afficher 3.-2. Si vous appuyez sur le bouton
pour afficher l’écran du menu fiant de l’établissement de la l’écran de connexion Blue- [Non], c’est l’écran Bluetooth
principal, puis appuyez sur [Blue- connexion Bluetooth est émise. tooth. (clavier) du téléphone qui s’af-
tooth (Lorsqu’aucun téléphone n’a été fiche. Vous pouvez également
apparié) appairer un périphérique en
appuyant sur [Connexion]
dans cet écran.
Informations
- Pour ajouter des périphériques, vous devez supprimer les périphériques précédemment appariés.
87
GETtheMANUALS.org
Menu principal Bluetooth
Menu principal Bluetooth
7 1 Mode Affichage
1
Français
2
2 Historique des appels
Affiche l’historique des numéros récemment composés/récemment reçus/
3
8 les appels manqués
4 3 Contacts
Affiche la liste des contacts
5 * Il n’est possible d’accéder aux contacts que s’ils ont été téléchargés.
6 4 Clavier
Il affiche le clavier numérique.
5 Connecter.
Affiche l’écran de connexion Bluetooth.
6 Paramètres Bluetooth
Affiche l’écran des paramètres Bluetooth.
7 Icônes de statut
Affiche le statut actuel du téléphone au coin supérieur droit de l’écran.
8 Nom du téléphone
Affiche le nom du téléphone actuellement connecté.
88
GETtheMANUALS.org
Appairage de périphériques Bluetooth
Rechercher à partir de la voiture Connexion automatique
- Le périphérique est automati-
quement connecté en fonction
Français
de l’option choisie au moment du
démarrage de la voiture (ACC
MARCHE).
- S’il n’est pas possible de connec-
ter un téléphone choisi, le sys-
tème essaie automatiquement
1. Appuyez sur [Rechercher à partir 2. C
hercher des appareils. (Désactiver 3. Sélectionnez le nom du fichier à de connecter le téléphone le plus
de la voiture]. le statut de restriction de la visibilité connecter. récemment connecté. S’il n’est
des téléphones portables). pas possible de connecter même
le téléphone récemment utilisé,
le système essaie de connecter
tous les périphériques Bluetooth
connectés séparément. (En cas
d’échec de connexion après un
essai pendant 1 cycle, l’essai de
connexion automatique s’arrête).
4. Vérifiez le mot de passe et 5. L’écran de connexion de la fonc- 6. Une fois la connexion réussie,
poursuivez avec l’appariement tionnalité Bluetooth. le nom du téléphone portable
à partir de votre périphérique connecté s’affiche.
Bluetooth.
Informations
- Temps de recherche maximal : 15 secondes , maximum ; périphériques recherchés : 20 appareils
Le mot de passe est créé de façon aléatoire.
- Si le périphérique n’est pas détecté, veillez vérifier :
* SI le Bluetooth est activé sur votre périphérique Bluetooth ;
* Si la visibilité du Bluetooth est restreinte ;
- En cas d’impossibilité persistante à se connecter, veuillez redémarrer votre périphérique Bluetooth et réessayez.
- Si le périphérique avait auparavant été apparié, sélectionnez-le dans la liste et connectez-le.
89
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rechercher à partir de l’appareil
Français
1. Appuyez sur [Rechercher à partir 2. Recherchez la voiture et appa- 3. L’écran de connexion de la fonc- 4. Une fois la connexion réussie,
du périphérique]. riez-la au périphérique. Vérifiez tionnalité Bluetooth. le nom du téléphone portable
le mot de passe et poursuivez connecté s’affiche.
avec l’appariement à partir de
votre périphérique Bluetooth.
Informations
Le mot de passe est créé de façon aléatoire.
- Si le périphérique n’est pas détecté, veillez vérifier :
* SI le Bluetooth est activé sur votre périphérique Bluetooth ;
* Si la visibilité du Bluetooth est restreinte ;
- En cas d’impossibilité persistante à se connecter, veuillez redémarrer votre périphérique Bluetooth et réessayez.
90
GETtheMANUALS.org
Déconnexion et suppression des périphériques Bluetooth
Déconnecter un périphérique Suppression d’un périphérique
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du télé- 2. Sélectionnez le nom du fichier à 1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du télé- 2. Vérifiez la fenêtre affichant le nom
phone, appuyez sur [Connexion]. déconnecter. phone, appuyez sur [Connexion]. du périphérique à supprimer.
3. Appuyez sur [OK] pour le décon- 3. Sélectionnez l’icône activée de la poubelle pour supprimer le périphé-
necter. rique de l’écran des périphériques connectés.
Informations
- Un périphérique ne peut être supprimé tant qu’il est connecté. (Seul des appareils
déconnectés peuvent être supprimés.)
91
GETtheMANUALS.org
Écran d’appel Bluetooth
Écran d’appel Bluetooth
1 Nom du téléphone et nom/numéro de contact
Affiche le nom du périphérique actuellement connecté et le nom et le nu-
3 4 5
Français
méro du correspondant pendant l’appel.
2 Durée de l’appel
Affiche la durée de l’appel.
1 2
3 Appel mains libres / Appel privé
Affiche le statut actuel de l’appel (appuyez dessus pour passer du mode
mains libres au téléphone portable Bluetooth).
7 4 Volume du micro
6 Ajuste le volume de l’appel en cours. Ajuste le volume des appel de sorte
à vous faire mieux entendre de votre correspondant (niveaux 1 à 5). (Cette
fonctionnalité ne peut être utilisée que durant un appel mains libres)
5 Muet
Active ou désactive le micro. (Cette fonctionnalité ne peut être utilisée que
durant un appel mains libres)
6 Envoyer/appeler/terminer
Appelle un numéro/termine l’appel.
7 Clavier
Utilisé pour composer/supprimer des numéros.
92
GETtheMANUALS.org
Effectuer un appel
Effectuer un appel Télécharger des contacts
Français
1. Composez le numéro 2. Appuyez sur le bouton d’appel. 1. Sélectionnez le bouton de 2. Veuillez vérifier votre téléphone et accepter la
demande de téléchargement. (Les téléphones
contacts Appuyez sur [Téléchar- demandent une confirmation supplémentaire.)
ger contacts].
3. Affiche la durée de l’appel pen- 3. Appuyez sur [OK]. 4. Des contacts sont téléchargés.
dant l’appel. (Le statut précédent est mainte-
nu en cas d’annulation)
Informations
- Après le téléchargement, les téléphones demandent une confirmation supplémentaire. (Peut être configu-
ré distinctement dans votre appareil mobile)
- Cette fonctionnalité n’est pas prise en charge pour certains types de contacts (Google, T Contacts, etc).
-L e téléchargement se poursuit si vous passez à un autre mode sans le suspendre.
- Jusqu’à 1 000 contacts peuvent être téléchargés.
-V ous ne pouvez télécharger des contacts qu’à partir d’un téléphone. L’ajout ou la suppression de contacts
ne sont pas pris en charge.
- Avec le téléchargement des contacts est aussi fourni un historique des 150 derniers appels. (Soit jusqu’à
50 appels composés, 50 appels entrants et 50 appels manqués sont enregistrés)
93
GETtheMANUALS.org
Appeler un contact
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du télé- 2. Appuyez sur le bouton d’appel 3. Appuyez sur l’icône de loupe
phone, appuyez sur [Contact]. pour effectuer un appel à partir pour rechercher des contacts.
de l’écran de liste.
4. Entrez un nom ou un numéro de téléphone et appuyez sur [Rechercher] 5. Appuyez sur le bouton d’appel 6. L’appel Bluetooth peut commencer.
pour effectuer un appel à partir
de l’écran de liste.
94
GETtheMANUALS.org
Répondre à un appel
Répondre à un appel
Français
1. Lorsque vous recevez un appel, ce menu 2. Affiche les informations et la durée de 3. Dès la fin de l’appel, l’appareil retourne au
permet d’afficher la fenêtre des informa- l’appel du correspondant. mode précédemment actif.
tions sur l’appelant. Appuyez sur [Mains
libres] ou sur [Privé] (Appuyer sur [Rejeter]
vous permet de fermer la fenêtre contex-
tuelle et de revenir au mode actif avant
l’appel.)
Informations
- Lorsque vous recevez une notification d’appel entrant, la plupart des fonctions en mode AV ne sont pas disponibles. Dès la fin de l’appel, l’appareil retourne au fichier multi-
média en cours de lecture avant l’appel.
- Cependant, la diffusion en diaporama des images du périphérique USB est suspendue.
- Vous pouvez régler le volume des mains libres distinctement du volume du mode AV.
95
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres Bluetooth
Activer/désactiver le Bluetooth
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du téléphone, 2. Appuyez sur [Utiliser Bluetooth]. 3. Permet choisir d’utiliser ou non la
appuyez sur [Paramètres Bluetooth]. connexion Bluetooth automatique, (Confi-
Informations guration d’usine : Utiliser)
- Si vous appuyez sur Ne pas utiliser], la plupart des fonctions sont désactivées, à l’exception des fonctions [Utiliser Bluetooth] et [Réinitialiser].
Modifier le nom de l’appareil
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du téléphone, 2. Appuyez sur [Modifier le nom de l’appareil]. 3. Sélectionnez le nom et appuyez sur [Effec-
appuyez sur [Paramètres Bluetooth]. tué]. (Le nom par défaut de l’appareil est
SSANGYONG AVN)
96
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres de connexion automatique
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du téléphone, 2. Appuyez sur [Connexion automatique].
appuyez sur [Paramètres Bluetooth].
Paramètres des contacts
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du téléphone, 2. Appuyez sur [Contacts]. 3. Choisissez de télécharger ou non automa-
appuyez sur [Paramètres Bluetooth]. tiquement les contact en cas de connexion
Bluetooth. (Configuration d’usine : [Ne pas
utiliser].)
97
GETtheMANUALS.org
Supprimer l’historique des appels
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du télé- 2. Appuyez sur [Supprimer l’histo- 3. Appuyez sur [OK]. 4. L’historique des appels a été
phone, appuyez sur [Paramètres rique des appels]. supprimé.
Bluetooth].
Réinitialiser le Bluetooth
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du télé- 2. Appuyez sur [Réinitialiser]. 3. Lorsque la boîte de dialogue de
phone, appuyez sur [Paramètres réinitialisation s’affiche, appuyez
Bluetooth]. sur [OK].
98
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres de sonnerie
Français
1. Dans l’écran Bluetooth du téléphone, 2. Appuyez sur [Sonnerie]. 3. Sélectionnez la sonnerie désirée;
appuyez sur [Paramètres Bluetooth].
Informations
- Lorsque vous sélectionnez une sonnerie, la sonnerie sélectionnée est lue en aperçu une fois.
99
GETtheMANUALS.org
Musique Bluetooth
Avant d’utiliser la fonction Musique Bluetooth Écran Musique Bluetooth
1. Le mode Musique Bluetooth ne peut être utilisé que lorsqu’un téléphone
doté de la fonctionnalité Bluetooth a été connecté. 1
6
Français
2. Lorsqu’une connexion Bluetooth est établie, vous pouvez automatiquement

lire des fichiers lorsque vous accédez au mode Musique Bluetooth.
- Si la fonction Lecture automatique n’est pas disponible, appuyez à nou-
veau sur le bouton de lecture. 2
- Il est possible que les fichiers musicaux ne puissent pas se lire, en fonc-
tion du programme de lecture de morceaux de musique installé dans le
périphérique connecté. 3 4 5
1 Mode Affichage
2 Informations sur le morceau
Affiche les informations relatives au morceau, à l’artiste et à l’album.
Joue le fichier précédent.
4 Lecture / Pause
5 Fichier suivant
Joue le fichier suivant.
6 Téléphone Bluetooth
Fait fonctionner le mode Bluetooth du téléphone.
100
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ma musique
Qu’est-ce que Ma musique Écran Ma musique
- Ma musique est un dossier dans 7 Fichier suivant
1
lequel sont enregistrés les fichiers 9 10 11
Joue le fichier suivant.
de musique dans les périphé- * Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier
Français
sélectionné commence et le nom du fichier suivant
riques de mémoire USB ou des s’affiche.
fichiers d’enregistrement des 2
émissions radio, qui sont enregis- 8 8 Pochette d’album
4 Affiche la pochette d’album.
trés dans le système pour pouvoir
se lire dans le véhicule. 9 Répétition
5 6 7 Répète le fichier en cours ou tous les fichiers
3 12 dans Ma musique.
ette fonctionnalité n’est disponible
C * Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur ce bouton,
que si le périphérique USB contient une option disponible se présente, dans l’ordre
au moins un fichier de musique. Répéter le fichier → Répéter le dossier → Répéter
un élément.
Lancer la lecture du dossier 10 Lecture aléatoire

Ma musique Joue les fichiers dans l’ordre aléatoire.
1 Mode Affichage 11 Suppression d’un fichier

Affiche le mode en cours. Supprime le fichier actuel.
2 Dossier d’enregistrement d’émissions radio 12 Temps de lecture

Affiche les fichiers radio enregistrés dans le dossier Ma musique. Affiche le temps de lecture en cours / total.
* Glissez ou touchez la barre pour atteindre la pé-
3 Liste des morceaux riode de temps désirée.
Affiche la liste des fichiers de musique contenue dans le dossier actuel.
* Le nom du fichier en cours de lecture s’affiche en surbrillance
1. Dans l’écran du menu principal, 4 Informations sur les fichiers

appuyez sur [Ma Musique]. Affiche les informations relatives au fichier en cours.
*Chant, artiste et album
Joue le fichier précédent.
* Si vous appuyez sur ce bouton, la lecture du fichier sélectionné commence
et le nom du fichier suivant s’affiche.
6 Lecture / Pause
101
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode AUX
Lancer le mode AUX Écran du mode AUX
1 1 Mode Affichage
2 3
Français
2 Écran Accueil
Permet de passer à l’écran d’accueil (PIP).
3 Précédent
Passe à l’écran précédent.
1. Dans l’écran du menu principal,
appuyez sur [AUX].
2. Si le connecteur d’un périphé-

rique externe est connecté aux
prises AUX, alors le mode AUX
s’active.
Mise en garde !
- Lorsque vous connectez un périphérique externe, l’utilisation d’un câble AUX à 3 pôles est recommandée.
- Le raccordement d’un connecteur AUX sans la connexion d’un périphérique externe bascule le système au mode AUX, toutefois, seul un bruit parasite est émis. Lorsque le
mode AUX n’est pas utilisé, assurez-vous de retirer le connecteur.
- Lorsque l’alimentation du périphérique externe est connectée à la prise d’alimentation, faire jouer le périphérique peut générer du bruit. Dans ce cas, déconnectez l’alimen-
tation avant l’utilisation.
102
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres
Affichage de l’écran des para- Afficher l’écran des para-
mètres de Radio
Paramètres RDS mètres de navigation
Paramètres de navigation
Français
1. À partir des touches non program- 1. Appuyez sur [RDS] et choisissez ou 1. À partir des touches non program- 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres de
mables du système, appuyez sur non d’utiliser la fonctionnalité RDS. mables du système, appuyez sur Navigation, définissez si la navi-
Appuyez sur le bouton de réinitia-
le bouton CONFIGURATION. lisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour le bouton CONFIGURATION. gation sera lancée automatique-
initialiser les paramètres. (Configura- ment au démarrage. Appuyez
tion d’usine : AF)
sur le bouton de réinitialisa-
Paramètres de PTY Seek tion sur le côté supérieur droit
pour initialiser les paramètres.
(Configuration d’usine : Démar-
rage automatique)
2. Dans l’écran des paramètres, 2. Dans l’écran des paramètres,

appuyez sur [Radio]. appuyez sur [Navigation].
1. Appuyez sur [PTY Seek] et

sélectionnez les options sou-
haitées. Appuyez sur le bouton
de réinitialisation sur le côté
supérieur droit pour initialiser
les paramètres. (Configuration
d’usine : aucune)
103
GETtheMANUALS.org
Affichage de l’écran des para-
Paramètres de la minuterie
mètres de l’horloge
Français
1. À partir des touches non programmables 1. Appuyez sur [Heure] pour régler l’heure actuelle.
du système, appuyez sur le bouton Appuyez sur le bouton de réinitialisation sur le
CONFIGURATION. côté supérieur droit pour initialiser les paramètres.
(Configuration d’usine : 2015-01-01, l’heure appa-
raît tel que présentée dans le système)
Paramètres de l’horloge
2. Dans l’écran des paramètres, appuyez sur

[Horloge].
1. Appuyez sur [Horloge] pour configurer le

type d’horloge. Appuyez sur le bouton
de réinitialisation sur le côté supérieur droit
pour initialiser les paramètres. (Configura-
tion d’usine : Analogique, 12 heures)
104
GETtheMANUALS.org
Affichage de l’écran des paramètres audio Paramètres d’équilibre / atténuateur Paramètres de l’égaliseur
Français
1. À partir des touches non programmables du sys- 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres d’équilibre / atténuateur, appuyez sur 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres de l’égaliseur,
le bouton haut / bas / gauche / droite ou touchez la position pour
tème, appuyez sur le bouton CONFIGURATION. configurer le niveau de son désiré. Appuyez sur le bouton de ré- appuyez sur le bouton +/- pour régler les niveaux
initialisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour initialiser les paramètres. Basse / Médium / Aigu. Appuyez sur le bouton
(Configuration d’usine : Atténuateur 00, Équilibre 00)
de réinitialisation sur le côté supérieur droit
Informations
pour initialiser les paramètres. (Configuration
- Atténuateur / Équilibre est utilisée pour configurer l’inten-
sité des baffles en fonction de l’emplacement.
d’usine : Aigu 00, Médium 00, Basse 00)
Paramètres de son Autres paramètres
2. Dans l’écran des paramètres, appuyez sur [Son].
1. D
ans l’écran des paramètres de son, appuyez sur [Navigation] 1. Appuyez sur [Autres] pour définir les paramètres de signal
pour définir la Navigation prioritaire. Appuyez sur le bouton sonore et du RAV. Appuyez sur le bouton de réinitialisa-
de réinitialisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour initialiser les tion sur le côté supérieur droit pour initialiser les paramètres.
paramètres. (Configuration d’usine : Navigation prioritaire) (Configuration d’usine : Signal sonore - Marche, RAV - Arrêt)
-N avigation prioritaire : le volume du son pour le siège avant - Signal sonore : sons retentissant à chaque touche d’un bouton.
est muté pendant le guidage de navigation
- Priorité audio : La navigation produit un niveau de volume fixe. - RAV (Réglage automatique du volume) : Lorsque le RAV est
-M ême rapport : Possible d’ajuster le son du guidage à l’aide activé, le volume est automatiquement contrôlé en fonction de la
de la commande du volume vitesse du véhicule.
105
GETtheMANUALS.org
mètres de Signet Ajouter un Signet
Français
1. À partir des touches non program- 1. Appuyez longuement sur les éléments 2. Puis, glissez et déposez-les à 3. Vous avez ajouté des éléments du
mables du système, appuyez sur du menu que vous souhaitez ajouter à l’endroit souhaité sur la droite. menu. Appuyez sur le bouton de
le bouton CONFIGURATION. partir de la liste sur la gauche. réinitialisation sur le côté supérieur
droit pour initialiser les paramètres.
(Configuration d’usine : aucune)
Supprimer un Signet
2. Dans l’écran des paramètres,

appuyez sur [Signet].
1. Appuyez longuement sur les 2. Puis, glissez et déposez-les 3. Vous avez supprimé des élé-
éléments du menu que vous dans la liste sur la gauche. ments du menu. Appuyez sur
souhaitez supprimer. le bouton de réinitialisation
sur le côté supérieur droit pour
initialiser les paramètres. (Confi-
guration d’usine : aucune)
106
GETtheMANUALS.org
Changer l’ordre des signets
Français
1. Appuyez longuement sur les éléments du 2. Puis, glissez et déposez-les à l’endroit 3. Vous avez déplacé des éléments du
menu que vous souhaitez déplacer. souhaité. menu. Appuyez sur le bouton de réini-
tialisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour
initialiser les paramètres. (Configuration
d’usine : aucune)
107
GETtheMANUALS.org
mètres de Langue
Paramètres de langues
Français
1. À partir des touches non programmables 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres de Langue,
du système, appuyez sur le bouton CONFI- sélectionnez la langue désirée et appuyez
GURATION. sur le bouton Confirmer sur le côté
supérieur droit. Le système redémarre
automatiquement et la langue du système
change. Appuyez sur le bouton de ré-
initialisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour
initialiser les paramètres. (Configuration
d’usine : Anglais)
2. Dans l’écran Paramètres, appuyez sur

[Langue].
108
GETtheMANUALS.org
mètres de Radio
Paramètres d’éclairage
Français
1. À partir des touches non program- 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres d’éclai- 2. Éclairage automatique 3. Mode Jour
mables du système, appuyez sur rage, appuyez sur le bouton +/- pour - Ajuste automatiquement la lumino- - Maintient la luminosité de
ajuster la luminosité. (Configuration
le bouton CONFIGURATION. d’usine : Éclairage automatique) sité et les couleurs de l’affichage. l’affichage sur clair et affiche les
couleurs en mode Jour.
2. Dans l’écran Paramètres, 4. Mode Nuit 5. Navigation synchronisée

appuyez sur [Affichage]. - Maintient la luminosité de l’affi- - L’affichage de l’écran de la carte
chage sur sombre et affiche les de navigation est défini au mode
couleurs en mode Nuit. Jour ou Nuit en fonction de la
configuration de l’éclairage.
ppuyez sur le bouton

A de
réinitialisation sur le côté supérieur
droit pour initialiser les paramètres.
109
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres d’extinction Affichage de l’écran des para-
Paramètres de radio Autres paramètres
de l’écran mètres du système
Français
1. Appuyez sur [Rapport] pour 1. Appuyez sur [Éteindre l’écran] 1. Cette fonctionnalité est utilisée pour 1. À partir des touches non program-
configurer le rapport de l’affi- pour éteindre l’écran. Appuyez définir les paramètres de l’écran vide, mables du système, appuyez sur
de l’image, de l’horloge et du guide de
chage vidéo. Appuyez sur le sur le bouton de réinitialisa- stationnement. le bouton CONFIGURATION.
bouton de réinitialisation sur tion sur le côté supérieur droit
le côté supérieur droit pour initia- pour initialiser les paramètres.
liser les paramètres. (Configura- (Configuration d’usine : Arrêt)
tion d’usine : Plein écran)
2. Appuyez sur le bouton de réinitia- 2. Dans l’écran Paramètres, ap-

lisation sur le côté supérieur droit pour puyez sur [Système].
initialiser les paramètres. (Configura-
tion d’usine : affichage de l’horloge et
le guide de stationnement)
- Tout en utilisant le périphérique - Dans Autres paramètres, vous
uniquement pour écouter de la pouvez configurer l’affichage lors de
musique, cette fonction peut être la mise en arrêt.
bien plus utile.
- La fonction Image est disponible
- Même lorsque l’écran est éteint, le lorsque l’utilisateur enregistre des
son continue de jouer. images dans le système.
- Touchez n’importe où sur l’écran - Affiche les images sélectionnées par
tactile pour réactiver l’affichage. l’utilisateur.
110
GETtheMANUALS.org
Version Réinitialisation Mise à jour Mise en garde !
- Lors de la réinitialisation du système, les
données du systèmes générées par l’utili-
sateur et les paramètres spécifiés par l’uti-
lisateur sont restaurés à la configuration
Français
d’usine.
Fonction-
Mode Statut
nalités
Radio FM1 89,1 MHz
1. Appuyez sur [Version] pour afficher 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres du Sys- 1. Dans l’écran des paramètres du Sys- Lecture
Arrêt
tème, appuyez sur [Réinitialiser]. aléatoire
les informations du système. Cette tème, appuyez sur [Mise à jour]. Musique
fonctionnalité est utilisée pour afficher Répétition Lire tout
le gestionnaire de démarrage, le Taille des
SE, l’application, le micrologiciel et sous- Petite
titres
d’autres informations sur la version du Multimédia Vidéo
système. Taille de
Plein écran
l’écran
Diapora-
Arrêt
ma
Image
Tourner Défaut
2. Appuyez sur [OK].
2. Appuyez sur [OK] pour mettre à jour Déconnecte un
le système. Bluetooth Mains-libres
périphérique et supprime
tous les périphériques
appariés
Son Navigation prioritaire

Para-
Navigation Démarrage automatique
mètres
Signet Supprime des éléments
3. L’initialisation démarre une fois que

vous avez choisi de supprimer des fi-
chiers de musique dans Ma Musique.
Informations
Informations
- La réinitialisation du système va restaurer
tous les paramètres et les configurations - Une mémoire USB contenant les fichiers à
existants aux valeurs d’usine. jour est requise.
- L’utilisateur a la possibilité de choisir s’il
souhaite supprimer des fichiers de musique
dans Ma musique.
111
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode iPod
Avant d’utiliser l’iPod Écran de l’iPod
Il est recommandé d’utiliser des câbles pour iPod d’origine fournis 1
par Apple.
9 10
Français
Apple CarPlay est indisponible lorsque le mode iPod est activé.

8
Lorsque vous utilisez le mode iPod via un iPhone, le paramètre Utili- 4

ser CarPlay dans les Réglages de l’iPhone doit être désactivé. 3
5 6 7
11
1 Mode Affichage 7 Fichier suivant

Affiche le mode en cours. Joue le fichier suivant.
2 Catégorie * lorsque vous appuyez longuement dessus, le fonc-
tionnement s’adapte à celui du périphérique iPod.
Affiche la catégorie en cours.
3 Liste de catégorie 8 Pochette d’album
Affiche les listes de catégorie. Affiche la pochette d’album.
* La liste de catégorie peut varier en Répétition
9
fonction du type de périphérique iPod. Répète le fichier en cours ou tous les fichiers
4 Informations sur les fichiers dans Ma musique.
Affiche les informations relatives au fichier en cours. * Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur le bouton, l’op-
* c hanson, artiste, album et nombre total de fichiers. tion change : Répétition désactivée → Répéter un →
5 Fichier précédent Répéter tout.
Joue le fichier précédent. 10 Lecture aléatoire
* lorsque vous appuyez longuement Joue les fichiers dans l’ordre aléatoire.
dessus, le fonctionnement s’adapte à
celui du périphérique iPod. 11 Temps de lecture
6 Lecture / Pause Affiche le temps de lecture en cours / total.
* Glissez ou touchez la barre pour atteindre la période
Lecture / Pause du fichier en cours. de temps désirée. (Cette fonction peut ne pas être
prise en charge sur certains périphériques.)
112
GETtheMANUALS.org
Démarrage du mode iPod
Démarrage automatique de l’iPod Démarrage manuel de l’iPod
Français
1. Utilisez un câble connecteur pour iPod 1. À partir des touches non programmables 2. Glissez du bas vers le haut de l’écran ou
pour connecter l’iPod au terminal de du système, appuyez sur le bouton MODE. appuyez sur la zone d’affichage de la page
connexion USB. sur le côté gauche de l’écran.
2. Lorsqu’un iPod est connecté, le mode iPod 3. Appuyez sur [iPod] pour faire fonctionner 4. Les informations sur les chansons sont
s’active automatiquement. le mode iPod. affichées et les chansons sont jouées
automatiquement.
Informations
Si l’iPod est déjà connecté et vous souhaitez le jouer dans un mode différent, référez-vous à la section « Dé-
marrage manuel de l’iPod ».
113
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Qu’est ce qu’Apple CarPlay ? Écran Apple CarPlay
1. En connectant votre iPhone au système, vous pouvez utiliser ai-
2
sément diverses fonctionnalités, telles que Téléphone, Navigation,
Messages, Musique, et Siri.
Français
2. Les fonctions disponibles et le fonctionnement peuvent varier en

fonction du modèle d’iPhone.
3. Apple CarPlay peut ne pas être disponible dans votre pays ou dans
votre région. (http://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availability/#apple-
carplay-applecarplay)
Avant d’utiliser Apple CarPlay 3

1. Avant de connecter votre téléphone mobile, vérifiez que la fonction Apple
CarPlay est configurée pour utilisation dans Paramètres → Paramètres
généraux → Restrictions.
2. Avant de connecter votre téléphone mobile, vérifiez que la fonction Siri est
configurée pour utilisation dans Paramètres → Paramètres généraux → Siri. 1
3. Apple CarPlay fonctionne avec l’iPhone 5 ou les versions ultérieures.
4. Apple CarPlay fonctionne avec iOS 7.1 mais la version la plus récente est
recommandée.
5. Dans le véhicule, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’iPod et Apple CarPlay au 1 Accueil
même moment. Passe à l’écran d’accueil d’Apple CarPlay
6. Il est recommandé d’utiliser des câbles pour iPhone d’origine fournis par
Apple.
7. Lors de la connexion et de l’accès à Apple CarPlay, le son du mode précé- 2 Écran Accueil
dent est maintenu. Seul l’écran sera converti. Écran d’accueil d’Apple CarPlay
8. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser Apple CarPlay et le Bluetooth Audio au même
moment. 3 Lecture en cours
9. La plupart des fonctionnalités d’Apple CarPlay nécessite l’utilisation de don- Passe à la source audio en cours.
nées. Avant d’utiliser Apple CarPlay, assurez-vous qu’un forfait de données
est activé sur votre téléphone.
10. À la connexion d’Apple CarPlay, la reconnaissance vocale se met en
marche selon Siri. La fonction de reconnaissance vocale du véhicule ne
fonctionne pas.
11. Pour plus d’informations, veuillez-vous reporter au site internet d’Apple
(http://www.apple.com/kr/ios/carplay/)
114
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode Apple CarPlay
Comment utiliser Siri Démarrage du mode Apple CarPlay
Français
1. Appuyez sur le bouton de reconnaissance 2. Ou appuyez longuement sur le bouton 1. Connectez votre iPhone à votre véhicule à
vocale sur le volant pour exécuter Siri. d’accueil dans l’écran d’accueil d’Apple l’aide d’un câble USB.
CarPlay pour exécuter Siri.
3. Ou appuyez longuement sur le bouton 2. Appuyez sur [Apple CarPlay].

d’accueil sur l’iPhone pour exécuter Siri.
Informations
-S
i le Bluetooth était connecté, le Bluetooth sera
déconnecté pendant la connexion à Apple CarPlay.
115
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Avant d’utiliser Android Auto Écran Android Auto
1. Téléchargez l’application Android Auto sur votre téléphone exécu-
6
tant la système Android 5.0 Lollipop ou une version ultérieure. 7
2. L’utilisation de câbles android d’origine est recommandée.
Français
3. Lors de la connexion d’Android Auto, le Bluetooth sera automati-

quement connecté.
- Lorsque vous dépassez le nombre maximal de périphériques
enregistrés, un périphérique qui n’a pas été récemment connecté
sera supprimé de la liste.
4. La musique via Bluetooth n’est pas connectée.
5. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay et An-
droid Auto au même moment.
6. Android Auto peut ne pas être disponible dans votre pays ou dans
votre région. Veuillez vous référer au site : (http://www.android.
com/auto/#what-you-need)
7. Lors de la connexion et de l’accès à Android Auto, le son du mode 1 2 3 4 5
précédent est maintenu. Seul l’écran sera converti.
8. La plupart des fonctionnalités d’Android Auto nécessite l’utilisation
de données. Avant d’utiliser Apple CarPlay, assurez-vous qu’un
forfait de données est activé sur votre téléphone. 1 Carte 5 Retour au système
9. Pour obtenir des détails sur Android Auto, veuillez vous référer au Exécute la fonction de carte (navi- Passe à l’écran du menu principal
site support de Google : (http://support.google.com/androidauto) gation) du système. du système.
2 Téléphone 6 Reconnaissance vocale

Exécute les fonctions du téléphones. Exécute la fonction de reconnais-
sance vocale.
3 Écran Accueil
Passe à l’écran d’accueil. 7 Écran Accueil
Écran d’accueil d’Android Auto.
4 Musique * Affiche la musique et les signets
Exécute la fonction de musique. de météo.
116
GETtheMANUALS.org
Démarrage du mode Android Auto
Démarrage rapide
Français
1. Connectez votre téléphone android à votre 2. L’écran du menu principal s’affiche auto- 3. Appuyez sur [Android Auto] pour accéder
véhicule à l’aide d’un câble USB. matiquement et le bouton Android Auto est au mode.
activé. (Si Android Auto est déjà connecté,
appuyez sur [MODE] à partir des touches
non programmables du système pour accé-
der au menu de l’écran du menu principal.)
* Lors de la connexion d’Android Auto, le

Bluetooth sera automatiquement connecté.
Informations
* Lors de la connexion d’Android Auto, le Bluetooth sera automatiquement connecté.
* La musique via Bluetooth n’est pas connectée.
* Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser l’iPod, Apple CarPlay et Android Auto au même moment.
* Il est recommandé d’utiliser le câble d’origine.
117
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode e-Manual
Qu’est ce que le mode e-Manual ?
Cette fonction vous permet de contrôler facilement les méthodes

d’utilisation des fonctions clés du système.
Français
Ce mode e-manual peut différer des fonctions actuelles du produit.
1. Sélectionnez le menu désiré sur le côté gauche. Pour les détails sur
les méthodes d’opération, utilisez les boutons / pour passer
d’une page à l’autre.
118
GETtheMANUALS.org
Restrictions relatives aux fonctionnalités des mesures de sécurité
Restrictions relatives aux fonctionnalités des mesures
de sécurité
L
a vidéo et quelques autres fonctionnalités seront désactivées pour votre
sécurité lorsque le véhicule est en mouvement.
Français
- La vidéo est indisponible pendant la conduite. Le lecteur audio n’est pas
affecté lorsque la vidéo est arrêtée.
- Le diaporama est indisponible pendant la conduite.
L’écran de restriction disparaît lorsque vous actionnez le frein de stationnement.
119
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ce système est équipé d’une caméra de recul pour une portée visuelle élargie qui garantit votre sécurité.
La caméra arrière fonctionne automatiquement lorsque le levier de vitesse est placé sur la position R quel que soit le mode en cours.
La caméra arrière arrête de fonctionner automatiquement lorsque vous changez de position.
Français
Lorsque la caméra arrière est en marche, il est possible d’utiliser les fonctionnalités du volume et de la mise en sourdine.
1. Placez la clé de contact sur ACC ou ON.

2. Placez le levier de changement de vitesses sur R.
Mise en garde !
- L’écran de la caméra de détection arrière peut sembler différent de la distance réelle. Pour votre sécurité, soyez toujours prudents et contrôlez directement les côtés
arrière et gauche/droite.
- Lorsque la caméra arrière est en marche, seules les fonctionnalités du volume et des appels entrants sont prises en charge.
120
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mode AVM - en option
Cet appareil prend également en charge la fonction AVM (Écran de visualisation du périmètre) pour une sécurité accrue.
AVM est une fonctionnalité en option.
Appuyer sur le commutateur AVM ou placer le levier sur la position R bascule le moniteur au mode AVM indépendamment du mode en cours.
Français
En appuyant à nouveau sur le commutateur AVM ou en passant de la position R vers une autre vitesse, le mode AVM se désactive automatiquement
et le mode précédent est restauré.
Lorsque l’AVM est en marche, il est possible d’utiliser les fonctionnalités du volume et de la mise en sourdine.
Pour basculer entre les modes d’affichage 2D et 3D, utilisez les fonctionnalités du Mode d’affichage dans les Réglages de l’AVM.
Affichage 2D Affichage 3D
Mise en garde !
- L’écran AVM peut sembler différent de la distance réelle. Pour votre sécurité, soyez toujours prudents et contrôlez directement les côtés arrière et gauche/droite.
- Lorsque l’AVM est en marche, seules les fonctionnalités du volume et des appels entrants sont prises en charge.
121
GETtheMANUALS.org
Paramètres AVM
Directives Sync PGS Avertisseur de proximité PAS Mode d’affichage
Français
1. Définit les conditions d’utilisation des direc- 1. Définit les conditions d’utilisation de l’aver- 1. Définit le mode d’affichage. (Configuration
tives PGS. (Configuration d’usine : Marche) tisseur de proximité PAS. (Configuration d’usine : Affichage 2D)
d’usine : Marche)
122
GETtheMANUALS.org
Spécifications du produit
Nom Unité AVN à écran LCD TFT du véhicule Fichiers pris en MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
charge TS, WMV
Alimentation
14,4 V CC Vidéo MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
électrique Codec
WMV7/8
Français
Puissance de 9 V CC ~ 16 V CC
fonctionnement Support / Réso-
lution de sous-titre SMI / D1 720 X 480 (729 X 590), HD 1280 X 720P (1289 X 729)
Consommation de 2 A
Commun courant Fichiers pris en MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
charge
Courant en veille 3 mA (Unité centrale uniquement) Audio
Débit binaire 32 Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Température de -30 ℃ ~ +75 ℃ Fréquence
fonctionnement 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz
d’échantillonnage
Température de -40 ℃ ~ +85 ℃ Photo Format de fichier JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
stockage
Compatibilité BLUETOOTH V4.1
Dimensions 278,4 (L) x 175,5 (H) x 191,5 (P) Largeur de bande
2 402 ~ 2 480 MHz
de fréquence
Poids 2,5 kg
Profils pris en A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
charge
Taille de l’écran 203,90 mm (L) x 114,70 mm (H) (zone active) Bluetooth
Sortie de trans- 3,0 dBm
Résolution 921 600 pixels mission
Écran Mode de fonction- TFT, Commutation en plan (IPS), matrice active Type de modu-
FHSS (GFSK)
nement lation
Rétroéclairage LED Canal 79
Gamme de fré- FM : 87.5 ~ 108.0 MHz (Étape : 100 kHz)

quences AM : 522 ~ 1620 kHz (Étape : 9 kHz)
Radio
Sensibilité FM : 10 dBuV, AM : 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 fente, 16 Go Certifica-

Dispositif tion
USB 1 port, USB2.0 HOST
de stoc- Digen Co., Ltd., soussigné, déclare par la présente que le type d’équipement radio [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] est conforme à
kage
la Directive 2014/53/UE.
Vous trouverez le texte intégral de la déclaration de conformité de l’UE sur le site : http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 Une copie de la DdC dans la langue originale est jointe à cet équipement.
123
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avant de penser que le produit présente des dysfonctionnements
La position actuelle affichée sur la navigation peut différer de la position réelle (lieu et conditions de conduite) dans les conditions suivantes.
Français
Les problèmes suivants ne constituent pas des dysfonctionnements.

Lorsque vous conduisez sur des routes en forme de Y, présentant des virages Lorsque vous conduisez en circulation intense ou sur une route avec
étroits, la position actuelle peut être affichée dans la direction opposée d’importants croisements et des arrêts et démarrages fréquents
La marque de la position actuelle peut être affichée dans la direction opposée. Lorsque vous conduisez dans des conditions glissantes, telles que les
sables lourds ou la neige, etc.
Dans les rues des villes, la position actuelle peut être affichée dans la Lorsque vous conduisez équipé de chaînes de pneus.
direction opposée ou dans une position hors route Lorsque les pneus ont été récemment remplacés (précisément en cas
Lorsque vous changez le niveau de zoom du maximum à un niveau diffé- d’utilisation de pneus de rechange ou sans crampons).
rent, la position actuelle peut s’afficher sur une autre route Lorsque vous utilisez des pneus de taille inappropriée.
Lorsque les 4 pneus ont des pressions différentes.
Si le véhicule est chargé sur un ferry ou un véhicule de transport de voitures, la
Lorsque le pneu de secours est usé (en particulier des pneus sans cram-
position actuelle peut rester sur la dernière position connue avant le chargement.
pons ayant passé une deuxième saison).
Lorsque vous démonter le terminal de batterie. Lorsque vous conduisez à proximité de bâtiments de grande hauteur
Lorsque vous conduisez sur une route en forme de spirale. Lorsqu’un porte-charge est installé.
Lorsqu’un itinéraire de longue distance est calculé alors que vous condui-
Lorsque vous conduisez en régions montagneuses avec des virages serrés et sez sur une autoroute.
des freins soudains. Dans de tels cas, continuer de conduire permet automatiquement au
Lorsque vous entrez sur une route en sortant d’un parking souterrain, d’un système d’effectuer une correspondance de carte ou d’utiliser les données
aménagement de parc de stationnement ou de routes à plusieurs tours. mises à jour du GPS pour fournir la position actuelle. (Dans de tels cas,
cela peut prendre plusieurs minutes)
124
GETtheMANUALS.org
Le guidage routier approprié peut ne pas se produire en raison des conditions de recherche ou du lieu de conduite.
Français
L’indication de rouler droit devant peut vous être donnée alors que vous Vous pouvez recevoir une alerte du guidage routier, signalant l’entrée dans
conduisez sur une ligne droite. une zone d’accès restreint (zone interdite, route en construction, etc.)
Le guidage peut ne pas donner vous indiquer de tourner à un croisement. Le guidage put vous indiquer une position qui n’est pas votre destination
réelle si les routes d’accès à la destination actuelle n’existent pas où sont
Le guidage routier peut ne pas vous indiquer la présence de certains trop étroites.
croisements. Vous pouvez recevoir un guidage erroné si le véhicule s’écarte de l’itiné-
Le guidage routier peut vous signaler un demi-tour lorsque vous arrivez à raire désigné. (ex : si vous tournez à un croisement alors que la navigation
un croisement qui ne vous le permet pas. a indiqué d’aller tout droit.)
Ces situations peuvent se présenter après l’exécution du calcul d’itinéraire.

Le guidage peut vous indiquer une position différente de la position ac- Vous pouvez recevoir une alerte du guidage routier, signalant l’entrée dans
tuelle lorsque vous tournez à un croisement une zone d’accès restreint (zone interdite, route en construction, etc.)
Le guidage put vous indiquer une position qui n’est pas votre destination réelle si
Lorsque vous conduisez à grande vitesse, le calcul de l’itinéraire peut
les routes d’accès à la destination actuelle n’existent pas où sont trop étroites.
prendre plus de temps.
Vous pouvez recevoir un guidage erroné si le véhicule s’écarte de l’itiné-
Le guidage routier peut vous signaler un demi-tour lorsque vous arrivez à raire désigné. (ex : si vous tournez à un croisement alors que la navigation
un croisement qui ne vous le permet pas. a indiqué d’aller tout droit.)
125
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avant de penser qu’il s’agit d’un dysfonctionnement
Avant de penser qu’il s’agit d’un dysfonctionnement

1. Les erreurs qui se produisent pendant le fonctionnement ou l’installation du périphérique peuvent être prises par erreur pour un dys-
fonctionnement du périphérique.
Français
2. Si le périphérique pose un problème, essayez les suggestions énumérées.

3. Si le problème persiste, contactez votre vendeur ou le centre de service.
Problème Solution
Le contact du véhicule a-t-il été placé sur « ACC » ou « ON » ?
Le son ou l’image ne fonctionnent pas.
Le cordon de connexion est-il instable ou déconnecté ?
L’écran affiche mais le son ne fonctionne Le volume a-t-il été défini à un niveau bas ?
pas. L’amplificateur et le câble de connexion des haut-parleurs sont-ils instables ou déconnectés ? Le volume est-il muté ?
J’ai mis en marche mais les coins de Les panneaux LCD apparaissent normalement sombres lorsqu’ils sont utilisés pendant des périodes prolongées. Ce n’est pas un dysfonctionnement.
l’écran sont sombres. Si l’écran est très sombre, contactez votre vendeur ou le centre de service.
Le son ne sort que depuis un seul haut- Vérifiez le cordon de connexion des haut-parleurs.
parleur. Les positions des commandes de son Fader (atténuateur) ou Balance (équilibre) sont-elles ajustées sur un seul côté ?
j’ai connecté un périphérique externe,
Les fiches jack de connexion audio sont-elles entièrement enfichées dans les prises AUX ?
mais il ne fonctionne pas correctement.
126
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dépannage
Problème Cause possible Solution
Remplacez par un fusible approprié. Si le fusible se déconnecte à nouveau,
Le fusible est déconnecté.
rapprochez-vous du point d’achat ou du centre de service.
Pas d’alimentation.
Français
Le périphérique n’est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez que le périphérique est correctement connecté.
La couleur / le ton de l’image Les niveaux de luminosité, de saturation, de teinte Ajustez correctement les niveaux de luminosité, de saturation, de teinte et de
est de faible qualité. et de contraste ne sont pas correctement réglés. contraste à partir des réglages de l’écran.
Le niveau de volume est défini au niveau minimum. Ajustez le niveau de luminosité.
L’image ne fonctionne pas.
Le périphérique n’est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez que le périphérique est correctement connecté.
Le niveau de volume est défini au niveau minimum. Ajustez le niveau de volume
Pas de son Le périphérique n’est pas correctement connecté. Vérifiez que le périphérique est correctement connecté.
Le périphérique est actuellement au mode avance Aucun son ne se produit lorsque le périphérique est au mode avance rapide,
rapide, retour rapide, recherche ou lecture lente. retour rapide, recherche ou lecture lente.
Veuillez configurer le périphérique USB au format FAT 12/16/32 après le formatage. Ce
La mémoire USB est endommagée. périphérique ne reconnaît pas les fichiers aux formats NTFS et exFAT.
Retirez toute substance étrangère sur la surface de contact de la mémoire USB et du
La mémoire USB a été corrompue.
terminal multimédia.
Utilisez un concentrateur USB acheté séparément. Connectez directement la mémoire USB au terminal multimédia du véhicule.
Le dispositif USB ne fonc- Utilisez un câble d’extension USB. Connectez directement la mémoire USB au terminal multimédia du véhicule.
tionne pas. Utilisez un périphérique USB de type sans
Utilisez une mémoire USB standard.
couverture métallique.
Vous pouvez également utiliser des mé-
Utilisez une mémoire USB standard.
moires de type HDD, CF ou SD.
Seuls les formats MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC et WAV sont pris en charge.
Aucun fichier musique ne peut être lu.
Veuillez utiliser uniquement des fichiers musiques aux formats pris en charge.
Informations - Lorsque vous utilisez le périphérique, si une anomalie se produit et qu’aucune des mesures ci-dessus ne permet de la corriger, réinitialisez le système.
- Appuyez simultanément sur les touches ACCUEIL et CONFIGURATION. L’alimentation sera coupée et le système sera réinitialisé.
127
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Français
128
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistema di navigazione per auto MANUALE DELL’UTENTE Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Italiano
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Leggere attentamente questo manuale prima di utilizzare il navigatore. Conservare il manuale per riferimento futuro.
Gli schemi e le caratteristiche tecniche sono soggetti a modifiche senza preavviso.
Per ulteriori informazioni sul sistema di navigazione, visitare il sito web di Ssangyong Motor.
129
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sommario
Base
Precauzioni 131 Collegamento di due apparecchi Bluetooth 153
Informazioni principali sul prodotto 132 Disconnessione e cancellazione di apparecchi Bluetooth 155
Caratteristiche principali del prodotto 133 Schermo chiamate Bluetooth 156
Nomi e funzioni dei componenti 134 Effettuare una chiamata 157
Controllo del volante 136 Rispondere a una chiamata 159
Italiano
Impostazioni Bluetooth 160

Funzionamento dei menu principali Musica via Bluetooth 164
Funzionamento base 137 My Music Screen 165
Schermata principale 139 Modalità AUX 166
Preferiti 140 Impostazioni 167
Modalità iPod 176
Uso della modalità AV Avvio modalità iPod 177
Modalità Radio 141 Apple CarPlay 178
Uso delle preimpostazioni e registrazione dalla radio 142 Modalità Apple CarPlay 179
Modalità Media 144 Avvio modalità Android Auto 181
(1) modalità Musica USB e-Manual 182
Modalità Musica USB 145 Limitazioni alle funzioni per motivi di sicurezza 183
Schermo musica USB 146 Telecamera posteriore 184
(2) modalità USB Video Modalità AVM - opzionale 185
Avvio modalità USB Video 147 Impostazioni AVM 186
Schermo video USB 148 Specifiche del prodotto 187
(3) modalità USB Immagine
Avvio modalità USB Immagine 149
Appendice
Schermo immagine USB 150 Il prodotto è davvero guasto? 188
Modalità Bluetooth 151 Prima di affermare che il prodotto sia guasto 190
Menu principale Bluetooth 152 Risoluzione dei problemi 191
130
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauzioni
Avvertenze di sicurezza Note di sicurezza

Anche quando si ricevono direzioni di guida dal sistema Multimedia, si Fare attenzione alle condizioni del traffico durante la guida.
prega di rispettare il traffico effettivo e le regole della strada.
In alcuni casi, la navigazione potrebbe dirigere ad aree limitate al traffico.
Seguire solo le direzioni di guida può causare violazioni del traffico effetti-
vo e delle regole della strada e dare luogo a incidenti stradali. L’uso dell'apparecchio durante la guida potrebbe causare incidenti a
causa della diminuita attenzione verso l’ambiente esterno. Parcheggiare il
Italiano
Non fissare lo schermo durante la guida. Fissare lo schermo per lunghi veicolo prima di usare l'apparecchio. Il touch screen potrebbe inoltre non
periodi di tempo potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. funzionare per alcune modalità quando il veicolo è in moto. Il touch screen
funziona solo quando il veicolo è fermo.
Non utilizzare il sistema Multimedia (inserire POI o cercare percorsi)
durante la guida. Ciò potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. Questo prodotto è riservato all’uso nelle automobili. Non installare questo
apparecchio in ambienti diversi dalle automobili.
Parcheggiare il veicolo prima di usare l'apparecchio.
Se si desidera cambiare la posizione di installazione del dispositivo,
Non assemblare, smontare o modificare il sistema Multimedia. Potrebbero contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato. Per installare o
verificarsi incidenti, incendi o scosse elettriche. smontare l'apparecchio è richiesta un’esperienza tecnica.
Fare attenzione a non bagnare l’apparecchio e a non introdurvi oggetti
Quando si pulisce l'apparecchio, accertarsi che sia spento; utilizzare un
estranei. Tali azioni potrebbero dare luogo a fumo, incendio o guasto.
panno morbido e asciutto. Non utilizzare mai materiali abrasivi, panni
Se si verificano anomalie, ad esempio l’introduzione di corpi estranei o intrisi di sostanze chimiche o solventi (alcool, benzene, diluenti, ecc.):
fumo a causa dell’esposizione all’acqua, interrompere subito l’utilizzo e possono danneggiare la superficie dell’apparecchio o causare una de-
contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato. teriorazione del colore o della qualità. Se il prodotto presenta un guasto,
contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza autorizzato.
L’uso prolungato in queste condizioni potrebbe causare un guasto al prodotto.
Non esporre l'apparecchio a forti impatti o shock.
Non utilizzare se lo schermo è bianco o non emette suoni. Questi segni
indicano un guasto al prodotto. Il continuo utilizzo del dispositivo in questi Una pressione diretta sulla parte frontale del monitor potrebbe danneggia-
casi può dare luogo a incidenti (incendio, scosse elettriche). re il sistema LCD o il touch screen.
Non fermarsi o parcheggiare in aree non autorizzate alla sosta per utilizza- L’uso dell'apparecchio per lunghi periodi di tempo a motore spento scari-
re il prodotto. Ciò potrebbe dare luogo a incidenti stradali. cherà le batterie (apparirà un allarme sullo schermo). Utilizzare il sistema
con il motore del veicolo acceso.
131
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod è un marchio di fabbrica registrato di Apple Inc. Prodotto protetto da licenza di Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby e il simbolo con la doppia D sono marchi di fabbrica di Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay è un marchio di fabbrica registrato di Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tutti i diritti riservati. TomTom e il logo con le "due mani" sono
marchi di fabbrica o marchi di fabbrica registrati di TomTom N.V. o di una delle sue affiliate.
Il marchio e i logo Bluetooth sono marchi di fabbrica registrati di proprietà di
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. e qualsiasi utilizzo di tali marchi è protetto da licenza. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Tutti i diritti riservati. Il presente materiale è proprietario e soggetto
Italiano
Per utilizzare la tecnologia wireless Bluetooth è necessario possedere un a copyright e/o diritti di riservatezza del database e/o altri diritti di proprietà intellettuale di
cellulare abilitato. TomTom o dei suoi fornitori. L'uso di questo materiale è soggetto ai termini dell’accordo di
licenza. Qualsiasi copia o pubblicazione non autorizzata di questo materiale è passiva di
DivX conseguenze civili e penali.
Questi prodotto è certificato per DivX e può quindi riprodurre video HD DivX in
alta qualità. (tra cui .avi e .divX)
DivX, DivX Certified, e i relativi loghi sono marchi di fabbrica di DivX e LLC, e
sono utilizzati dietro licenza.
Essi sono protetti da almeno uno dei seguenti brevetti USA: 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Uso di Schede di Memoria SD

1. Lo slot per scheda SD di questo apparecchio è per file mappe.
2. Il file mappa è stato salvato sulla scheda SD di questo apparecchio.
Non aggiungere, cancellare, o formattare i file all’interno della scheda SD. Estrarre/inserire la scheda SD solo per aggiornare la mappa con una nuova versione.
3. Utilizzare solo la scheda SD offerta dal rivenditore. Non separare o copiare il file mappa in una diversa scheda SD in vostro possesso.
Ciò potrebbe causare guasti o funzionamenti errati.
4. Estrarre e inserire schede SD mentre il sistema è attivo può causare errori nel sistema o nella scheda SD.
Prima di estrarre o inserire la scheda SD, spegnere il motore del veicolo.
5. Collegare e scollegare ripetutamente la scheda SD in un breve periodo di tempo può danneggiare il dispositivo.
6. La scheda SD è formattata in modo da includere solo file di tipo Map.
Salvare altri tipi di file nella scheda SD può causare errori di sistema o guasti.
Download dell’aggiornamento del software Map & AVN

1. Collegare la scheda SD al computer.
2. Andare alla pagina degli aggiornamenti (URL).
132
GETtheMANUALS.org
Caratteristiche principali del prodotto
Funzionalità Descrizione Funzionalità Descrizione

Con Apple CarPlay, è possibile eseguire chiamate con
Schermo LCD di grandi dimensioni Apple CarPlay il cellulare, inviare e ricevere SMS, utilizzare la mappa,
Offre simultaneamente video e musica di alta qualità sul ascoltare musica e utilizzare le funzioni di Siri.
Visualizza
Italiano
display da 9.2 pollici, con la comodità addizionale del touch
screen.
Con Android Auto è possibile utilizzare Google Maps,
Android Auto il telefono, il riconoscimento vocale e la riproduzione
Funzione Sintonizzatore Digitale di musica.
Il Sintonizzatore Digitale salva in memoria 12 stazioni per
ciascuna modalità FM1, FM2, AM e DAB.
Radio Funzione collegamento Bluetooth
Servizi RDS Offre una funzione “mani libere” che permette ai guidatori di
Bluetooth eseguire chiamate wireless durante la guida o di ascoltare
Offre le funzioni AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY come parte dei
Servizi RDS. musica tramite lo streaming audio.
Funzione Media Auto Search

Identifica automaticamente file audiovisivi, tra cui video, au- Funzioni di controllo digitali dello schermo
USB Media dio e foto, salvati su USB e nella scheda SD e li visualizza Facile controllo della luminosità dello schermo attraverso il
come elenchi per comodità di riferimento. touch screen per una comoda visualizzazione.
Varie Permette una visione posteriore attraverso la telecamera HD
Utilizza TomTom Map quando si va in retromarcia.
La massima precisione delle direzioni si ottiene tramite il
Navigazione motore GPS e una mappa accurata, ricevibile attraverso Around View Monitor - Opzionale
l’antenna ad alta sensibilità. Permette di vedere davanti, all’indietro, a sinistra e a destra
grazie alla quattro telecamere installate sul veicolo.
133
GETtheMANUALS.org
Nomi e funzioni dei componenti
Vista anteriore
Tasto Descrizione
1 ACCENSIONE / VOLUME
1. Utilizzato per accendere/spegnere il dispositivo o controllare il volume.
2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per spegnere.
3. Premere brevemente per accendere/spegnere l’AV.
Italiano
4. Ruotare a destra/sinistra per regolare il volume. (Gamma volume: 0~45)
2 Pagina principale
1. Passa allo schermo Home (PIP, Picture in Picture).
1
2 3 4 5 2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per passare alla modalità
Preferiti.
MODALITÀ
3
1. Passa alla modalità schermo principale.
2. In modalità Navigazione, tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi)
per utilizzare la più recente modalità AV prima del passaggio alla
modalità Navigazione.
NAVI
4
1. Passa alla modalità Navigazione e visualizza la posizione
attuale, indifferentemente se l’AV è acceso o spento.
2. Tenere premuto (per più di 1,5 secondi) per passare allo
schermo su cui cercare la propria destinazione.
5 SETUP
In qualsiasi modalità, tenere premuto per visualizzare lo schermo
Impostazioni.
In modalità Radio/Audio/Video/Navigazione/Bluetooth su cellulare,
premere per visualizzare il relativo schermo con le impostazioni.
134
GETtheMANUALS.org
Vista posteriore Connettore AVN 42P
Italiano
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Jack antenna radio A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Per inserire il cavo antenna radio A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) Jack antenna GPS A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Per inserire il cavo antenna GPS A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Connettore della telecamera posteriore A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Per collegare la telecamera posteriore A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) Porta USB A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Per collegare un collegamento USB per la funzione USB A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Connettore I/O (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Connettore DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Per collegare un cavo antenna DAB B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
135
GETtheMANUALS.org
Tasto Descrizione
1 Durante una chiamata handfree con Bluetooth, tenere premuto per
terminare la chiamata.
Quando non è in corso una chiamata, premere per attivare/disattivare
6 la funzione Mute.
In qualsiasi modalità
2 3 2
Italiano
- Ogni volta che si preme il tasto la modalità cambia secondo la sequenza

4
Radio →Media → Bluetooth Music → iPod → My Music. (Se il dispositivo
audiovisivo non è collegato, la modalità corrispondente viene disattivata)
5 1 In modalità Radio
- Tenere premuto per cambiare la modalità della radio secondo la sequenza
FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
In modalità Media
- Tenere premuto per cambiare la modalità secondo la sequenza USB Music
→ USB Video → USB Image.
3
Regola il volume.
4 Durante la riproduzione
- Premere in alto/in basso per passare al file precedente/successivo.
In modalità Radio
- Premere in alto/in basso per passare alla preimpostazione precedente/successiva.
- Tenere premuto alto/basso per passare alla frequenza precedente/successiva.
5
Attiva la modalità handfree di Bluetooth.
In modalità Apply CarPlay

6 - utilizza Siri.
In modalità Android Auto
- utilizza Google Voice.
136
GETtheMANUALS.org
Funzionamento base
Avvio del sistema Spegnere il sistema
Italiano
1. Mentre il sistema è in funzione, tenere premuto
1. Premere il tasto di avvio del motore o impo- 2. Quando il sistema è acceso, inizia il riavvio (per più di 1,5 secondi) il tasto POWER/VOL per
stare la chiave del motore su ON o ACC. e viene visualizzato lo schermo con il logo. spegnere. Quando il sistema viene spento, viene
salvata la più recente modalità di utilizzo.
3. La pagina degli allarmi di sicurezza è visua- 4. Premere il tasto [Accetta] per visualizzare la modali- 2. L’ora non viene visualizzata quando il si-
lizzata e il consenso dell'utente è abilitato. tà più recente. (La modalità di default è Radio FM1) stema è spento.
- Controllare il tasto [Auto Disappear] per attivare la modalità usata più recentemente senza premere il tasto [Accetta]. - Quando il motore viene riacceso, il sistema ri-
torna automaticamente alla modalità usata più di
recente.
- Il sistema si spegne automaticamente se sono
passati più di tre minuti con la macchina spenta e
se lo sportello del guidatore è aperto.
137
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reset del sistema Audio Off Audio On
Italiano
1. Premere i tasti MODE e SETUP simulta- 1. Quando l’AV è accesa, premere brevemente 1. Quando l’AV è spenta, premere brevemente
neamente. (per meno di 1,5 secondi) il tasto PWR/VOL (per meno di 1,5 secondi) il tasto PWR/VOL
per spegnere l’AV. per accendere l’AV.
2. Il sistema si spegne e si riavvia. 2. Quando l’audio è spento, viene salvata la 2. Quando l’audio viene acceso, la navigazio-
più recente modalità di navigazione dello ne su schermo continua e l’audio ascoltato
schermo. più di recente inizia la riproduzione.
Informazioni
-D
opo il reset, il sistema riporta le impostazioni e le
configurazioni alla loro situazione di default. Ciò ga-
rantisce la stabilità del dispositivo e non è un guasto
del sistema.
138
GETtheMANUALS.org
Schermata principale
Schermata principale
1 Offre una breve visualizzazione della mappa di navigazione e dello
1
schermo con il percorso. / Toccare qualsiasi area sullo schermo per
6
passare allo schermo di navigazione intero.
2 Visualizza delle brevi informazioni sulla radio attualmente in

ascolto. / Toccare lo schermo per passare allo schermo attual-
2
mente in uso.
Italiano
3 Preferiti
Aggiungere i propri Preferiti al menu per un accesso facile e veloce.
4 Modalità
Visualizza tutte le voci del menu di sistema.
3 4 5
5 Destinazione
Passa allo schermo da dove cercare la propria destinazione.
6 Spegnimento del display

Premere per spegnere il display. Toccare qualsiasi area sullo
schermo per riaccendere il display.
Informazioni
- Premere il tasto [HOME] per visualizzare la schermata principale.
- Tenere premuto il tasto [HOME] per visualizzare lo schermo dei Preferiti.
139
GETtheMANUALS.org
Preferiti
Avvio Preferiti Schermo Preferiti
4 2
Italiano
1
1. Dalla schermata principale, sele- 2. Sullo schermo Elenco Preferiti,
zionare [Preferiti]. premere [Aggiungi].
1 Elenco Menu
Elenco menu Preferiti
3. Tenere premute le voci del menu 4. Elenco Preferiti 2 Conferma
e trascinarle al posto desiderato Selezionando questa funzione, le modifiche vengono salvate nel menu
per aggiungerle/cancellarle/spo- Preferiti e viene visualizzata la schermata principale.
starle. Quindi premere il tasto Area dove aggiungere i menu
3
Conferma.
Trascinare e spostare le voci del menu per aggiungerle come menu
Preferiti.
4 Reset
Reimposta i Preferiti.
Quando il Preferito è già aggiunto, premere il tasto di modifica. - Premere il tasto [HOME] per visualizzare la schermata principale.
- Tenere premuto il tasto [HOME] per visualizzare lo schermo dei Preferiti.
140
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avvio modalità Radio
Avvio modalità Radio Schermo Radio
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
Italiano
6 5
1. Premere il tasto MODE per visualizzare 7

la schermata del menu principale, quindi
premere [Radio].
1 Display modalità 7 Schermo frequenze radio
Visualizza la modalità corrente. Selezionando la casella desiderata, verrà avviata la modalità Ra-
dio prescelta.
2 Preimpostazione 8 Pagina principale
Visualizza l’elenco preimpostato. Passa alla schermata principale.
* Tenere premuto il tasto preimpostato per salvare l'at- Indietro
9
tuale frequenza sul tasto preimpostato selezionato.
* È possibile salvare fino a 12 frequenze preimpostate
Torna alla schermata precedente.
per le modalità FM1/FM2/AM. 10 DAB
Avvia la modalità DAB.
3 Informazioni sulla frequenza 11 TA On / Off
Visualizza la frequenza corrente. Attiva/disattiva le news sul traffico. (Per ulteriori
* Ogni volta che questa area è trascinata a destra, la informazioni, consultare la sezione “DAB”.)
modalità cambia secondo la sequenza FM1 → FM2 →
AM → FM1.
12 DLS On / Off
Attiva/disattiva il DLS Text. (Per ulteriori informazio-
4 Indicatore ni consultare la sezione “DAB”.)
Visualizza lo stato On/Off delle funzioni REG/AF/ 13 Scan
TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO. Riproduce le frequenze dalla ricezione di ottimo
livello per cinque secondi ciascuna.
5 Sintonizzazione in avanti AST
Premere per salire nella scala FM: 0.1MHz, AM: 9KHz) 14
Salva le frequenze dalla ricezione di ottimo livello sui tasti
6 Sintonizzazione all’indietro preimpostati.
Premere per scendere nella scala FM: 0.1MHz, AM: 9KHz) 15 Registrazione radio
Registra il programma radio corrente.
141
GETtheMANUALS.org
Uso delle preimpostazioni e registrazione dalla radio
Salvataggio automatico delle Salvataggio manuale delle
preimpostazioni (Autostore) preimpostazioni
Registrazione radio
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Radio, premere 1. Selezionare la frequenza da 1. S

ullo schermo Radio, premere . 2. Nello schermo che domanda se
[AST]. salvare. registrare dalla radio, premere
[OK] per iniziare la registrazione.
2. Salva le frequenze dalla ricezione 2. Tenere premuto il tasto preim- 3. Premendo il tasto Stop la registrazione si interrompe e l’audio viene
di ottimo livello sui tasti preimpo- postato che si desidera salvare. salvato automaticamente nella cartella My Music Radio.
stati, in ordine crescente. La frequenza corrente al tasto
preimpostato desiderato con un
tono (beep).
-S
e sono presenti meno di 12 radio frequenze dalla ricezione di qualità eccellente, le impo- -L e registrazioni devono essere più lunghe di cinque secondi e ogni registrazione può durare fino a 60
stazioni memorizzate in precedenza verranno salvate nei canali preimpostati rimanenti. minuti.
- I file registrati dalla radio possono essere riprodotti dalla cartella My Music.
-M
entre Autostore è in funzione, premere di nuovo il tasto AST per cancellare la funzione e
-E ’ possibile salvare fino a 100 file. Se la capacità di archiviazione viene superata con meno di 100 file, la
tornare alla frequenza radio precedente. registrazione verrà automaticamente interrotta e ulteriori registrazioni non saranno supportate.
142
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Avvio modalità DAB Schermo DAB
1 8 Indietro
9 10 11 12 13 Torna alla schermata precedente.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Regola la modalità radio FM/AM.
4 10 Service Follow Attivo / Disattivo
SF(AF) ON / OFF
Italiano
* SF(AF): Questa funzione offre una ricezione
2
5 3 6 continua, cercando automaticamente lo stesso
canale nelle frequenze attigue quando la ricezio-
1. Sullo schermo Radio, premere ne del canale diventa più debole.
DAB per attivare la modalità
DAB. 11 TA (notizie sul traffico) On / Off
Attiva/Disattiva le notizie sul traffico.
* TA: Questa funzione offre notizie e aggiorna-
menti sul traffico in tempo reale.
12 DLS Text (Dynamic Label Segment Text) On / Off

Attiva/Disattiva Testo DLS.
1 Display modalità * Testo DLS: Questa funzione visualizza il testo
Visualizza la modalità corrente. trasmesso dalla stazione radio corrente sull'ap-
parecchio. I tipi di informazioni includono infor-
2 Preimpostazione mazioni sui programmi, tra cui gli slogan della
Visualizza la stazione salvata per la selezione da parte dell'utente. stazione radio o il titolo o l’artista della canzone
* Tenere premuto il tasto preimpostato per salvare l'attuale stazione sul tasto trasmessa.
preimpostato selezionato.
* è possibile salvare fino a 12 stazioni. 13 Elenco
Visualizza automaticamente gli elenchi ag-
3 Informazioni stazione giornati.
Visualizza la stazione corrente.
4 Indicatore
Visualizza lo stato on/off delle funzioni DAB/TP.
5 Canale all’indietro
Passa alla stazione precedente.
6 Canale successivo
Passa alla stazione successiva.
7 Pagina principale
Passa alla schermata principale.
143
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità Media
I dispositivi di memoria USB
1. Collegare l'apparecchio USB dopo aver acceso il motore. L'apparecchio USB può danneggiarsi se è già connesso quando il motore è acceso. Gli apparec-
chi USB non sono componenti di un veicolo.
2. Accendere o spegnere il motore quando l’USB è connesso può causare anomalie nel funzionamento dell’USB.
3. Fare attenzione all’elettricità statica quando si collegano/scollegano apparecchi USB esterni.
4. I lettori Mp3 codificati non saranno riconosciuti se vengono collegati come dispositivi esterni.
5. Collegando un apparecchio USB esterno, il sistema potrebbe non riconoscere l'apparecchio USB in alcune condizioni.
6. Questo sistema riconosce apparecchi USB con formato FAT16/32. I media USB con file di tipo NTFS o exFAT non sono supportati.
Italiano
7. Alcuni apparecchi USB potrebbero non essere supportati a causa di problemi di compatibilità. Prima di iniziare l’uso, controllare che l'apparecchio funzioni
normalmente.
8. Collegare e scollegare ripetutamente l’apparecchio USB in un breve periodo di tempo può danneggiare il dispositivo.
9. A volte si potrebbe creare un suono anomalo quando si scollega l'apparecchio USB.
10. Scollegare l'apparecchio USB durante la riproduzione di audiovisivi in modalità USB può danneggiare il dispositivo USB o interferire con il funzionamento.
Quando si scollega l'apparecchio USB, spegnere prima il sistema o passare ad una modalità differente.
11. La quantità di tempo necessaria a riconoscere l'apparecchio USB esterno può differire a seconda del tipo, della dimensione o del formato dei file archiviati
su USB. Queste differenze nel tempo necessario non rappresentano un guasto.
12. L’uso di apparecchi USB per scopi diversi dalla riproduzione di musica o immagini è proibito.
13. Non usare il cavo USB per caricare batterie o accessori USB che generano calore. Questi comportamenti possono influire negativamente sulla prestazione
del sistema o danneggiarlo.
14. L’apparecchio potrebbe non riconoscere il dispositivo USB se gli hub e i cavi di prolunga USB vengono acquistati separatamente. Collegare l’USB diretta-
mente al terminale multimedia del veicolo.
15. Se si utilizzano dispositivi USB per l’archiviazione di massa, in alcuni casi i drive logici sono separati, per comodità d’uso. In questo caso, verranno riprodotti
solo i file all’interno del drive logico della directory principale. Se si utilizza un USB con partizioni separate (drive logici), salvare i file che si desidera ripro-
durre all’interno della directory principale. Quando i programmi applicativi sono installati su USB specifici, i file all’interno del dispositivo USB potrebbero
non essere riprodotti correttamente, per le ragioni indicate in alto.
16. L'apparecchio potrebbe non funzionare correttamente se ad esso sono collegati lettori Mp3, cellulari, telecamere digitali o altri dispositivi elettronici (appa-
recchi USB non riconosciuti come drive rimovibili).
17. Il caricamento attraverso USB potrebbe non funzionare per alcuni apparecchi mobili.
18. Il funzionamento normale è garantito solo per supporti di memoria USB con corpo in metallo.
19. L'apparecchio potrebbe non funzionare correttamente in presenza di formati come HDD Type, CF, o SD Memory.
20. Le chiavette USB utilizzate collegando un adattatore, ad esempio le chiavette USB di tipo SD o CF, potrebbero non essere correttamente riconosciute.
144
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità Musica USB
Avvio modalità USB Music Salvare file musicali
Italiano
1. Premere il tasto MODE per visualizzare la scher- 1. Dopo aver riprodotto il file da salvare, 2. Nella finestra Save Music File, premere [OK].
mata del menu principale, quindi premere [Media]. premere sullo schermo Music.
2. La modalità di default per i Media è USB Music. 3. E’ possibile controllare i file salvati in My
Informazioni Music.
La funzione non si attiva se non è presente almeno un file
musicale nell'apparecchio USB. (La funzione non si attiva se
non sono presenti file audiovisivi nell'apparecchio USB)
- Audio Codec: MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10,
LPCM, FLAC
- Estensione: MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Frequenza di campionamento: 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
- Bit Rate: 32Kbps~320Kbps
- Attenzione: Questo apparecchio supporta file audio con
bit rate da 320Kbps e si raccomanda l'uso di file con bit
rate da 192kbps. Utilizzando file senza bit rate fissi, al- Informazioni
cune funzionalità (FF/REW) potrebbero non funzionare
correttamente. - È possibile salvare fino a 100 brani.
145
GETtheMANUALS.org
Schermo musica USB
Schermo musica USB
6 File successivo
1 Riproduce il file successivo.
9 10 11 * Tenere premuto il tasto per cercare il file successivo in modo rapido nell'apparec-
2 chio USB. E il nome file è visualizzato. Una volta rilasciato il tasto, il file inizierà la
riproduzione a velocità normale.
3 7 File precedente
12 Riproduce il file precedente.
Italiano
* tenere premuto il tasto per cercare il file precedente in modo rapido nell'apparec-
5 chio USB. E il nome file è visualizzato. Una volta rilasciato il tasto, il file inizierà la
4 riproduzione a velocità normale.
7 8 6
8 Pausa/Riproduzione
Mette in pausa/riproduzione il file corrente.
13
9 Ripeti
Ripete il file corrente o tutti i file nell’apparecchio USB.
* Ogni volta che si preme il tasto, l'opzione passa in sequenza da Ripeti File →
14 Ripeti Cartella → Ripeti Uno.
10 Casuale
Riproduce i file in ordine casuale.
1 Display modalità 11 Salvare file musicali

Visualizza la modalità corrente. Salva il file corrente in My Music.
2 Cartella superiore 12 Indice file

Spostare nella cartella principale Visualizza il file corrente/il totale dei file nella cartella corrente.
3 Nome cartella 13 Durata di riproduzione

Visualizza la cartella corrente. Visualizza il tempo di riproduzione corrente e quello totale.
* Trascinare o toccare la barra per passare al punto desiderato.
4 Elenco musica
Visualizza l’elenco di brani musicali nella cartella corrente. 14 Tasto modalità USB
Selezionando la casella desiderata, verrà avviata la modalità prescelta.
* Il nome del brano in riproduzione viene illuminato
5 Informazioni sui brani

Visualizza cartella, artista, titolo, album, e copertina dell’album del file corrente.
146
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avvio modalità USB Video
Avvio modalità USB Video
Italiano
1. Premere il tasto MODE per vi- 2 - 1. Quando viene visualizzato lo 2 - 2. In alternativa, toccare il riqua- 3. Quando viene visualizzato il
sualizzare la schermata del menu schermo USB Music, trasci- dro USB Video per passare pannello di controllo video, il
principale, quindi premere [Media]. nare lo schermo verso destra alla modalità USB Video. video verrà riprodotto a schermo
per passare alla modalità intero.
USB Video.
Informazioni
La funzione non si attiva se non è presente almeno un file video nell'apparecchio USB. (La funzione non si attiva se non sono presenti file audiovisivi nell'apparecchio USB)
- La modalità di default per i Media è USB Music.
- Video Codec: MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Estensioni: MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Risoluzione immagine: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Sottotitoli: SMI (i sottotitoli potrebbero non funzionare correttamente se il nome del file video è diverso dal nome del file dei sottotitoli.)
- Attenzione: I file ad alta risoluzione con bit rate superiori a 2Mbps potrebbero non funzionare correttamente.
147
GETtheMANUALS.org
Schermo video USB
Schermo video USB
5 File successivo
8 9 * Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file corrente e viene visualizzato il nome
2 del file successivo.
6 File precedente
3 Riproduce il file precedente.
10 * Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file corrente e viene visualizzato il nome
4
Italiano
del file precedente.
6 7 5 Mette in pausa/riproduzione il file corrente.
8 Dimensione sottotitoli
11 Modifica la dimensione dei sottotitoli.
* Questo tasto è disponibile solo quando sono presenti sottotitoli.
9 Schermo intero
12 Modifica la dimensione del display da schermo normale a schermo intero.
* Toccando un’area dello schermo dove non è presente un tasto, lo schermo passa
alla modalità Schermo intero.
10 Indice file
1 Display modalità Visualizza il file corrente/il totale dei file nella cartella corrente.
Visualizza la modalità corrente.
11 Durata di riproduzione
2 Cartella superiore Visualizza il tempo di riproduzione corrente e quello totale.
Spostare nella cartella principale * Trascinare o toccare la barra per passare al punto desiderato.
3 Nome File/Cartella 12 Tasto modalità USB

Visualizza il file e la cartella correnti. Selezionando la casella desiderata, verrà avviata la modalità prescelta.
4 Elenco video
Visualizza l'elenco di file video nella cartella corrente.
* Il nome del video in riproduzione viene illuminato
148
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avvio modalità USB Immagine
Avvio modalità USB Immagine
Italiano
1. Premere il tasto MODE per 2 - 1. Quando viene visualizzato lo 2 - 2. In alternativa, toccare il riqua- 3. Quando viene visualizzato il
visualizzare la schermata del schermo USB Music, trasci- dro USB Image per passare pannello di controllo immagine,
menu principale, quindi premere nare lo schermo verso destra alla modalità USB Image. l’immagine verrà riprodotta a
[Media]. per passare alla modalità schermo intero.
USB Immagine. (Music →
Video → Image)
Informazioni
La funzione non si attiva se non è presente almeno un file immagine nell'apparecchio USB. (La funzione non si attiva se non sono presenti file audiovisivi nell'apparecchio USB)
- La modalità di default per i Media è USB Music.
- Passando dalla modalità Musica alla modalità Image, la musica continua ad essere riprodotta.
- Passando dalla modalità Video alla modalità Image, l’audio del video continua ad essere riprodotto.
- Formati immagine supportati: JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, Gse
149
GETtheMANUALS.org
Schermo immagine USB
Schermo immagine USB
4 Elenco musica
1
7 8 9 Visualizza l'elenco di immagini nella cartella corrente.
* Il nome dell’immagine visualizzata viene illuminato
2
5 File successivo
10 * Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file corrente e viene visualizzato il nome
4
Italiano
del file successivo.
6 File precedente
Riproduce il file successivo.
6 5 * Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file corrente e viene visualizzato il nome
del file precedente.
7 Diapositive
11 Tutte le immagini presenti nell’apparecchio USB vengono visualizzate in
sequenza, secondo l’intervallo di tempo selezionato.
* La funzione zoom in/out non è supportata.
* La funzione slideshow diapositive non è disponibile durante la guida.
8 Ruota
1 Display modalità Ruota l’immagine in senso orario.
9 Salvare un’immagine
2 Cartella superiore
Salva l’immagine visualizzata quando il display è spento.
Spostare nella cartella principale
10 Indice file
3 Nome File/Cartella
Visualizza il file corrente/il totale dei file nella cartella corrente.
Visualizza cartella, nome file, tipo file e risoluzione dell’immagine corrente.
11 Tasto modalità USB
Selezionando la casella desiderata, verrà avviata la modalità prescelta.
150
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità Bluetooth
Prima di utilizzare il Bluetooth
1. Prima di collegare l’unità principale al cellulare, attivare il Bluetooth e rendere visibile il cellulare al Bluetooth.
2. Si possono collegare fino a cinque dispositivi Bluetooth.
Italiano
3. Si può collegare un solo dispositivo Bluetooth alla volta.
4. Il volume minimo per l’handfree è 6 e il volume massimo è 40.
Avvio della modalità Bluetooth
1. Premere il tasto MODE per 2. La notifica di collegamen- 3-1. Premere [Sì] per visualizzare 3.-2. P
remendo il tasto [No], verrà vi-
visualizzare la schermata del to Bluetooth è visualizzata. lo schermo di collegamento sualizzato lo schermo del telefono
menu principale, quindi premere (quando nessun cellulare è stato Bluetooth. Bluetooth (tastiera numerica).
[Bluetooth]. collegato) Inoltre è possibile collegare un
dispositivo premendo [Connetti]
su questo schermo.
Informazioni
- Per aggiungere più dispositivi, è necessario cancellare uno dei dispositivi aggiunti in precedenza.
151
GETtheMANUALS.org
Menu principale Bluetooth
Menu principale Bluetooth
7 1 Display modalità
1
2 2 Cronologia chiamate
Visualizza la cronologia delle chiamare recenti (in entrata, in uscita, chia-
3 mate perse).
8
Contatti
Italiano
3
4
Visualizza la schermata con l’elenco dei contatti.
* I contatti possono essere visualizzati solo dopo essere stati scaricati.
5
4 Tastierino
Visualizza lo schermo numerico per la composizione numeri.
6
5 Collegamento
Visualizza lo schermo di collegamento Bluetooth.
6 Impostazioni Bluetooth
Visualizza lo schermo Impostazioni Bluetooth.
7 Icone di stato
Visualizza lo stato attuale del cellulare in alto a destra sul display.
8 Nome cellulare
Visualizza il nome del dispositivo attualmente collegato.
152
GETtheMANUALS.org
Collegamento di due apparecchi Bluetooth
Cerca dall’auto Auto Connection
- Il dispositivo Bluetooth si collega
automaticamente secondo l’opzio-
ne impostata quando viene acce-
so il motore del veicolo (ACC ON).
- Quando il cellulare selezionato
dall’utente non può essere colle-
gato, il sistema tenta automatica-
Italiano
mente di collegarsi al cellulare che
1. Premere [Cerca dall’auto]. 2. Cerca dispositivi. (Disattiva lo 3. Selezionare il nome dell'appa- è stato collegato più di recente.
stato invisibile del cellulare.) recchio da collegare. Quando il cellulare collegato più
di recente non è disponibile, il si-
stema tenta automaticamente di
collegarsi in sequenza a tutti i cel-
lulari precedentemente collegati.
(Se la connessione fallisce dopo
un ciclo di tentativi, la Auto Con-
nection si interrompe.)
4. Verificare la passkey ed eseguire 5. Lo schermo di collegamento 6. Una volta stabilito il collegamen-
il collegamento dal dispositivo Bluetooth è visualizzato. to Bluetooth, viene visualizzato il
Bluetooth. nome del cellulare collegato.
Informazioni
- Tempo massimo di ricerca: 15 secondi, max. dispositivi ricercati: 20 dispositivi
- La passkey viene creata in modo casuale.
- Se l'apparecchio non viene rilevato, controllare le voci seguenti.
* La funzione Bluetooth è attivata sul dispositivo Bluetooth?
* Il Bluetooth è impostato in modalità non visibile?
- Se la ricerca e il collegamento non hanno luogo, riavviare il dispositivo Bluetooth e riprovare.
- Se l'apparecchio è già stato connesso precedentemente, selezionarlo dall’elenco per connetterlo di nuovo.
153
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cerca da dispositivo
Italiano
1. Premere [Cerca da dispositivo]. 2. Cerca il nome dell’auto e colle- 3. Lo schermo di collegamento 4. Una volta stabilito il collegamen-
gala all’apparecchio Bluetooth. Bluetooth è visualizzato. to Bluetooth, viene visualizzato il
Verificare la passkey ed eseguire nome del cellulare collegato.
il collegamento dal dispositivo
Bluetooth.
Informazioni
- La passkey viene creata in modo casuale.
- Se l'apparecchio non viene rilevato, controllare le voci seguenti.
* La funzione Bluetooth è attivata sul dispositivo Bluetooth?
* Il Bluetooth è impostato in modalità non visibile?
- Se la ricerca e il collegamento non hanno luogo, riavviare il dispositivo Bluetooth e riprovare.
154
GETtheMANUALS.org
Disconnessione e cancellazione di apparecchi Bluetooth
Scollegamento di un dispositivo Cancella un dispositivo
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del 2. Selezionare il nome dell'appa- 1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del 2. Controllare il box con il nome
cellulare, premere [Connect]. recchio da scollegare. cellulare, premere [Connect]. dell'apparecchio da cancellare.
3. Premere [OK] per la disconnes- 3. Selezionare l’icona Cestino abilitata per selezionare il dispositivo all’in-
sione. terno dello schermo Cancella Dispositivo.
Informazioni
-U
n dispositivo non può essere cancellato se è collegato. (Solo i dispositivi scollegati
possono essere cancellati.)
155
GETtheMANUALS.org
Schermo chiamate Bluetooth
Schermo chiamate Bluetooth
1 Nome del cellulare e Nome/Numero del contatto
Visualizza il nome del dispositivo attualmente collegato e il nome e numero
3 4 5
del chiamante durante la chiamata.
2 Durata della chiamata

Visualizza la durata della chiamata.
1 2
Italiano
3 Chiamata handfree / Chiamata privata

Visualizza lo stato della chiamata attuale (premere per passare dalla mo-
dalità handfree al cellulare con Bluetooth).
4 Volume MIC
7
6 Regola il volume in uscita durante le chiamate. Imposta il volume della
chiamata percepito dall’altra persona (Livelli 1~5). (Questa funzione è uti-
lizzabile solo durante una chiamata handfree)
5 Mute
Accende/Spegne il microfono. (Questa funzione è utilizzabile solo durante
una chiamata handfree)
6 Invia / Chiama / Termina

Chiama il numero / Termina la chiamata.
7 Tastierino
Utilizzato per inserire/cancellare numeri.
156
GETtheMANUALS.org
Effettuare una chiamata
Effettuare una chiamata Scaricare i contatti
Italiano
1. Inserire il numero. 2. Premere il tasto Chiama. 1. Selezionare il tasto di contatto. 2. Controllare il cellulare e accettare
Premere [Download contatti]. la richiesta di download. (I telefoni
richiedono una conferma ulteriore.)
3. Visualizza la durata della chia- 3. Premere [OK] 4. I contatti sono stati scaricati. (Con-
mata in corso. serva lo stato precedente dopo la
cancellazione)
Informazioni
-D urante il download, i telefoni richiedono un’ulteriore conferma. (Può essere impostato separatamente dal
proprio cellulare)
-Q uesta funzione potrebbe non essere supportata per alcuni tipi di contatti (Google, T contatti, ecc).
- Il download continua anche se si passa ad una modalità differente mentre il download è in corso.
- Possono essere scaricati fino a 1000 contatti.
- I contatti possono essere scaricati solo dal cellulare. L’aggiunta o la cancellazione non sono supportate.
-Q uando si scaricano i contatti, viene scaricata anche la cronologia delle 150 chiamate più recenti. (Viene
salvata la cronologia di fino a 50 chiamate, rispettivamente in entrata, in uscita e perse.)
157
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fare una chiamata partendo dai Contatti
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del 2. Premere il tasto Chiama per fare 3. Premere l’icona della lente di
cellulare, premere [Contatti]. una chiamata dall’elenco sullo ingrandimento per cercare i
schermo. contatti.
4. Inserire un nome o un numero di cellulare e premere [Cerca]. 5. Premere il tasto Chiama per fare 6. Verrà avviata la chiamata Bluetooth.
una chiamata dall’elenco sullo
schermo.
158
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rispondere a una chiamata
Rispondere a una chiamata
Italiano
1. Quando arriva una chiamata in entrata, 2. Visualizza le informazioni dell’altra perso- 3. Alla fine di una chiamata, il sistema torna
visualizza le informazioni del chiaman- na e la durata della chiamata. alla modalità precedente.
te sul pop-up della chiamata. Premere
[handfree] o [Private] per rispondere a una
chiamata. (Premendo [Rifiuta] la notifica si
interrompe e il sistema torna alla modalità
precedentemente in uso.)
Informazioni
- Quando viene visualizzato il pop-up di chiamata in arrivo, la maggior parte delle funzioni della modalità AV si interrompe. Alla fine di una chiamata, il sistema torna a ripro-
durre l’audiovisivo precedente.
- Tuttavia, lo slideshow USB Image verrà interrotto.
- Il volume handfree può essere regolato separatamente dal volume in modalità AV.
159
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni Bluetooth
Attivare/Disattivare Bluetooth
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del cellulare, 2. Premere [Usa Bluetooth]. 3. Imposta se utilizzare Bluetooth Auto Con-
premere [Impostazioni Bluetooth]. nection, (Situazione di default: utilizza)
Informazioni
- Premendo [Non Usare], quasi tutte le funzioni verranno disattivate, eccetto [Usa Bluetooth] e [Reset].
Modifica del nome del dispositivo
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del cellulare, 2. Premere [Modifica nome dispositivo]. 3. Premere il nome e premere [Fatto]. (Il
premere [Impostazioni Bluetooth]. nome di default del dispositivo è SSAN-
GYONG AVN)
160
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni di connessione automatica
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del cellulare, 2. Premere [Auto Connection].
premere [Impostazioni Bluetooth].
Impostazioni dei contatti
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del cellulare, 2. Premere [Contatti]. 3. Imposta se scaricare automaticamente i
premere [Impostazioni Bluetooth]. contatti collegando il Bluetooth. (Situazio-
ne di default: [Non utilizzare].)
161
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cancellare cronologia chiamate.
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del 2. Premere [Cancella cronologia 3. Premere [OK]. 4. La cronologia chiamate viene
cellulare, premere [Impostazioni chiamate]. cancellata.
Bluetooth].
Reimpostazione del Bluetooth
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del 2. Premere [Reimposta]. 3. Quando viene visualizzato il pop-
cellulare, premere [Impostazioni up del reset, premere [OK].
Bluetooth].
162
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni Suoneria
Italiano
1. Sullo schermo Bluetooth del cellulare, 2. Premere [Suoneria]. 3. Selezionare la suoneria desiderata.
premere [Impostazioni Bluetooth].
Informazioni
- Selezionando una suoneria, un’anteprima della suoneria verrà suonata una volta sola.
163
GETtheMANUALS.org
Musica via Bluetooth
Prima di usare Bluetooth Music Schermata Bluetooth Music
1. La modalità Bluetooth Music può essere utilizzata solo quando è collegato
un cellulare Bluetooth. 1
6
2. Quando il Bluetooth è collegato, la musica viene riprodotta automaticamente
entrando nella modalità Bluetooth Music.
- Se Auto Play non funziona, premere di nuovo il tasto Play.
2
- La musica potrebbe non riprodursi automaticamente, a seconda del
Italiano
software del lettore del dispositivo collegato.
3 4 5
1 Display modalità
2 Informazioni sui brani
Visualizza informazioni su brano, artista, album.
3 File precedente
Riproduce il file precedente.
5 File successivo
6 Telefono Bluetooth
Attiva la modalità cellulare Bluetooth.
164
GETtheMANUALS.org
My Music
Cos'è My Music? My Music Screen
- My Music è una funzione che 7 File successivo
1
permette di salvare nel sistema 9 10 11
i file musicali su memorie USB o * Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file
corrente e viene visualizzato il nome del file
registrati dalla radio e di riprodurli successivo.
nel veicolo. 2
8 8 Copertina album
4 Visualizza copertina album.
- La funzione non si attiva se non è
Italiano
presente almeno un file musicale 5 6 7 9 Ripeti
nel sistema. Ripete il file corrente o tutti i file in My Music.
3 12 * Ogni volta che si preme il tasto, l'opzione passa
in sequenza da Ripeti File → Ripeti Cartella →
Ripeti Uno.
Avvio di My Music 10 Casuale
11 Cancellazione file
Cancella il file corrente.
1 Display modalità
Visualizza la modalità corrente. 12 Durata di riproduzione
Visualizza il tempo di riproduzione corrente e
2 Cartella Registrazioni Radio
Visualizza i file registrati dalla radio e salvati in My Music. quello totale.
* Trascinare o toccare la barra per passare al punto
3 Elenco musica desiderato.
1. Sulla schermata Menu Principa- Visualizza l’elenco di musica della cartella corrente.
* Il nome del brano in riproduzione viene illuminato
le, Premere [My Music].
4 Informazioni sul file
Visualizza le informazioni sul file corrente.
*brano, artista e album.
5 File precedente
Riproduce il file precedente.
* Tenendo premuto il tasto, viene riprodotto il file corrente e viene visualizzato
il nome del file successivo.
165
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità AUX
Avvio della modalità AUX Schermo modalità AUX
1 1 Display modalità
2 3
2 Schermata principale
Passa alla schermata principale (PIP).
Indietro
Italiano
3
Torna alla schermata precedente.
1. Sulla schermata Menu Principa-
le, premere [AUX].
2. Se un connettore ad un dispo-

sitivo esterno è collegato sul
terminale AUX, verrà avviata la
modalità AUX.
Attenzione!
- Quando ci si collega a un dispositivo esterno, si raccomanda l'uso di un cavo AUX a tre poli.
- Collegare un jack AUX senza collegare un dispositivo esterno convertirà il sistema alla modalità AUX, ma solo come output. Quando la modalità AUX non è in uso, accertar-
si di rimuovere il jack audio.
- Quando l’alimentazione del dispositivo esterno è collegata al jack di alimentazione, l’utilizzo del dispositivo esterno potrebbe causare rumore in uscita. In questi casi, scolle-
gare l’alimentazione prima dell’uso.
166
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni
Visualizzazione dello schermo di Visualizzazione dello schermo di
impostazione della radio
Impostazioni RDS impostazione navigazione
Impostazioni Navigazione
Italiano
1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere 1. Premere [RDS] e impostare se uti- 1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere 1. Sullo schermo di impostazione
premuto il tasto SETUP. lizzare la funzione RDS. Premere premuto il tasto SETUP. navigazione, scegliere se iniziare
il tasto Reset in alto a destra automaticamente la navigazione
per inizializzare le impostazioni. all’avvio. Premere il tasto Reset
(Situazione di default: AF) in alto a destra per inizializ-
Impostazioni PTY Seek zare le impostazioni. (Situazione
di default: avvio automatico)
2. Sullo schermo Impostazioni, 2. Sullo schermo Impostazioni,

premere [Radio]. premere [Navigazione].
1. Premere [PTY Seek] e sele-

zionare le opzioni desiderate.
Premere il tasto Reset in alto
a destra per inizializzare le impo-
stazioni. (Situazione di default:
Nessuno)
167
GETtheMANUALS.org
Visualizzazione dello schermo di
Impostazioni data/ora
impostazione dell’orologio
Italiano
1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere premuto 1. P

remere [Ora] per impostare l’ora attuale.
il tasto SETUP. Premere il tasto reset in alto a destra per
avviare le impostazioni. (Situazione di default:
2015-01-01, l’ora è quella indicata dal sistema)
Impostazioni orologio
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni, premere

[Orologio].
1. Premere [Orologio] per impostare il tipo di

orologio. Premere il tasto reset in alto
a destra per avviare le impostazioni. (Stato
di default: Analogico, 12 ore)
168
GETtheMANUALS.org
Visualizzazione dello schermo di imposta- Impostazioni Balance/Fade Impostazioni EQ
zione del suono
Italiano
1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere premuto il tasto
1. Nella schermata Impostazioni Balance/Fader, premere il tasto alto/basso/ 1. Nella schermata Impostazioni EQ, premere i
sinistra/destra o toccare la posizione per impostare la posizione desidera-
SETUP. ta del suono. Premere il tasto Reset in alto a destra per inizializzare
tasti +/- per impostare i livelli Bass/Middle/Treble.
le impostazioni. (Situazione di default: Fader 00, Balance 00) Premere il tasto Reset in alto a destra per ini-
Informazioni zializzare le impostazioni. (Situazione di default:
- Fader/Balance è utilizzato per impostare l’intensità degli Treble 00, Middle 00, Bass 00)
altoparlanti.
Impostazioni audio Altre impostazioni
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni, premere [Suono].
1. Nella schermata Impostazioni Audio, premere [Navigazio-

1. Premere [Altri] per impostare Beep e AVC.
ne] per impostare la priorità della navigazione. Premere il
tasto Reset in alto a destra per inizializzare le impo- Premere il tasto Reset in alto a destra per ini-
stazioni. (Situazione di default: Priorità di navigazione) zializzare le impostazioni. ((Situazione di default:
Informazioni Beep - Acceso, AVC - Spento)
- Priorità alla Navigazione: il volume dell’audio per il sedile Informazioni
del guidatore viene abbassato fino a Mute durante le - Beep: emette un tono ogni volta che viene toccato un tasto.
direzioni vocali - AVC (Auto Volume Control): Quando l’AVC è attivo, il
- Priorità audio: Volume fisso degli output della navigazione. volume è controllato automaticamente a seconda della
- Stesso rapporto: È possibile regolare il volume delle
direzioni vocali attraverso il controllo volume velocità del veicolo.
169
GETtheMANUALS.org
impostazione dei Preferiti Aggiunta di un Preferito
Italiano
1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere 1. Tenere premute le voci del menu da 2. Quindi trascinarli al posto desi- 3. Le voci del menu sono aggiunte.
premuto il tasto SETUP. aggiungere all’elenco a sinistra. derato a destra. Premere il tasto Reset in alto a
destra per inizializzare le impostazio-
ni. (Situazione di default: Nessuno)
Cancellazione Preferito
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni,

premere [Preferiti].
1. Tenere premuta la voce del 2. Quindi trascinare la voce nell’e- 3. Le voci del menu sono state can-
menu da cancellare. lenco a sinistra. cellate. Premere il tasto Reset
in alto a destra per inizializ-
zare le impostazioni. (Situazione
di default: Nessuno)
170
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modifica dell’ordine dei Preferiti
Italiano
1. Tenere premute le voci del menu da 2. Quindi trascinarli al posto desiderato. 3. Le voci del menu sono state spostate. Pre-
spostare. mere il tasto Reset in alto a destra per
inizializzare le impostazioni. (Situazione di
default: Nessuno)
171
GETtheMANUALS.org
impostazione della lingua
Impostazioni Lingua
Italiano
1. Tenere premuto il tasto SETUP (tra i tasti 1. Sullo schermo Impostazioni Lingua, sele-
fisici del sistema). zionare la lingua desiderata e premere il
tasto Conferma in alto a destra. il sistema
si riavvia automaticamente e presenta la
nuova lingua selezionata. Premere il tasto
Reset in alto a destra per inizializzare
le impostazioni. (Situazione di default:
inglese)
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni, premere

[Lingua].
172
GETtheMANUALS.org
impostazione della radio
Impostazione illuminazione
Italiano
1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere 1. Nella schermata di impostazioni Illumi- 2. Auto illuminazione 3. Modalità diurna
premuto il tasto SETUP. nazione, premere i tasti +/- per regolare - Regola automaticamente la lumi- - Mantiene la luminosità del
la luminosità del display. (Situazione di
default: Auto illuminazione) nosità e i colori del display. display su ‘chiaro’ e i colori della
mappa in modalità Diurna.
2. Nella schermata Impostazioni, 4. Modalità Notturna 5. Sincronizza navigazione

premere [Display]. - Mantiene la luminosità del - Lo schermo della mappa di
display su ‘scuro’ e i colori della navigazione è impostato sulla
mappa in modalità Notturna. modalità Diurna o Notturna a
seconda dell’impostazione dell’il-
luminazione.
remere il tasto Reset

P in
alto a destra per inizializzare le
impostazioni.
173
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni rapporto Impostazioni schermo spento Altre impostazioni impostazione del sistema
Italiano
1. Premere [Rapporto] per imposta- 1. Premere [Schermo Off] per 1. Questa funzione è utilizzata per impo- 1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, tenere
re il rapporto del display video. spegnere il display. Premere il stare lo schermo bianco, l’immagine, premuto il tasto SETUP.
Premere il tasto Reset in alto tasto Reset in alto a destra l’orologio e la guida al parcheggio.
a destra per inizializzare le impo- per inizializzare le impostazioni.
stazioni. (Situazione di default: (Situazione di default: Off)
Schermo intero)
2. Premere il tasto Reset in alto 2. Nelle Impostazioni schermo,

a destra per avviare le imposta- premere [Sistema].
zioni. (Visualizzazioni di default:
Orologio e Guida al parcheggio)
- Se si usa l’apparecchio solo per - In Altre Impostazioni, è possibile
ascoltare audio, questa funzione può impostare l’immagine quando l’appa-
essere molto utile. recchio è spento.
- Anche quando lo schermo è spento, - La funzione Immagine è disponibile
l’audio continua ad essere riprodotto. quando l'utente salva immagini nel
sistema.
- Toccare un qualsiasi punto del touch
screen per riaccendere il display. - Visualizza l’immagine selezionata
dall’utente.
174
GETtheMANUALS.org
Versione Reset Aggiornamento Attenzione!
- Dopo il reset del sistema, i dati di sistema
generati dall’utente e le impostazioni scelte
dall’utente tornano alle impostazioni di fab-
brica.
Funzio-
Modalità Stato
nalità
Radio FM1 89.1 MHz
Casuale Spento
Italiano
Musica
1. Premere [Versione] per visualizzare 1. Nello schermo Impostazioni di siste- 1. Nello schermo Impostazioni di siste- Ripeti Tutti
le informazioni sul sistema. Questa ma, premere [Reset]. ma, premere [Aggiorna].
Dimen-
funzione è utilizzata per visualizzare sione Piccolo
boot loader, OS, applicazione, firmwa- Video sottotitoli
Supporto
re e altre informazioni sulla versione Formato Schermo
del sistema. schermo intero
Diaposi-
Spento
tive
Immagine
Ruota Default
Scollega un dispositivo e
Bluetooth handfree cancella tutti i dispositivi
2. Premere [OK]. 2. Premere [OK] per aggiornare il sistema. collegabili al Bluetooth
Audio Priorità di navigazione

Imposta-
Navigazione Auto Start
zioni
Preferiti Cancella le voci
3. L
’inizializzazione ha luogo dopo aver scel-
to se cancellare file musicali in My Music.
- Dopo il reset, il sistema riporta le imposta- - È necessaria una memoria USB con i file
zioni e le configurazioni alla loro situazione aggiornati.
di default.
- L’utente può scegliere se cancellare i file
musicali salvati in My Music.
175
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità iPod
Prima di usare l’iPod Schermo iPod
Si raccomanda l'uso di cavi iPod autentici e forniti da Apple. 1
9 10
2
Apple CarPlay non è disponibile quando si utilizza un iPod.
8
tilizzando la modalità iPod attraverso un iPhone, l’impostazione
U
Italiano
Use CarPlay deve essere disattivata dalle impostazioni dell’iPhone. 4

3
5 6 7
11
1 Display modalità 7 File successivo

Visualizza la modalità corrente. Riproduce il file successivo.
2 Categoria * Quando viene tenuto premuto, il funziona-
mento segue quello dell'iPod.
Visualizza la categoria corrente.
8 Copertina album
3 Elenco categorie Visualizza copertina album.
Visualizza tutti gli elenchi di categorie.
* L’elenco categorie può essere diverso 9 Ripeti
Ripete il file corrente o tutti i file in My Music.
a seconda del tipo di iPod.
* Ogni volta che si preme il tasto, l'opzione
4 Informazioni sul file passa in sequenza da Non Ripetere → Ri-
Visualizza le informazioni sul file corrente. peti Uno → Ripeti Tutto.
* brano, artista, album e numero di Casuale
10
file totali.
5 File precedente 11 Durata di riproduzione
Riproduce il file precedente. Visualizza il tempo di riproduzione corrente e
* Quando viene tenuto premuto, il fun- quello totale.
zionamento segue quello dell'iPod. * Trascinare o toccare la barra per passare al punto
6 Pausa/Riproduzione desiderato. (Queste funzioni potrebbero non
Mette in pausa/riproduzione il file corrente. essere supportate a seconda del dispositivo.)
176
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avvio modalità iPod
Avvio automatico dell’iPod Avvio manuale dell’iPod
Italiano
1. Utilizzare un cavo iPod per collegare il 1. Dai tasti fisici del sistema, premere il tasto 2. Fare scorrere dal fondo dello schermo ver-
dispositivo iPod al terminale di collega- MODE. so l’alto o premere l’area del display della
mento USB. pagina a sinistra dello schermo.
2. Quando viene collegato un iPod, la modali- 3. Premere [iPod] per utilizzare la modalità iPod. 4. Vengono visualizzate le informazioni sul
tà iPod si attiva automaticamente. brano, che è riprodotto automaticamente.
Informazioni
Se l'iPod è già collegato e desiderate usare un iPod da una modalità differente, consultare la sezione “Avvio
manuale di iPod”.
177
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Cos'è Apple CarPlay? Schermata principale Apple CarPlay
1. Collegando il vostro iPhone al sistema, è possibile utilizzare
2
comodamente varie funzioni, tra cui Telefono, Navigazione, SMS,
Musica e Siri.
2. Le funzioni e le attività disponibili possono essere diverse a secon-
da del modello di iPhone.
3. Apple CarPlay potrebbe non essere disponibile nel proprio paese
o regione. (http://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availability/#applecar-
Italiano
play-applecarplay)
Prima di usare Apple CarPlay 3
1. Prima di collegare il cellulare, controllare che Apple CarPlay sia

impostato per l’uso in Impostazioni → Generali → Restrizioni.
2. Prima di collegare il cellulare, controllare che Siri sia impostata per
l’uso in Impostazioni → Generali → Siri. 1
3. Apple CarPlay funziona con iPhone 5 o superiore.
4. Apple CarPlay funziona con iOS 7.1, ma è consigliata la versione
più recente.
5. Non è possibile usare oncar, iPod e Apple CarPlay contemporane- 1 Pagina principale
amente. Passa alla schermata principale Apple CarPlay
6. Si raccomanda l'uso di cavi iPhone autentici e forniti da Apple.
7. Collegandosi e entrando in Apple CarPlay, l'audio della modalità 2 Schermata principale
precedente continua a funzionare. Solo lo schermo verrà conver- Schermata principale Apple CarPlay
tito.
8. Non è possibile usare Apple CarPlay e Bluetooth Audio contempo- 3 In riproduzione
raneamente. Passa alla fonte audio corrente.
9. La maggior parte delle funzioni di Apple CarPlay richiede l’uso di
dati. Prima di utilizzare Apple CarPlay, accertarsi che il cellulare sia
provvisto di un piano dati tariffario.
10. Collegando Apple CarPlay, si avvia il riconoscimento vocale di
Siri. Il riconoscimento vocale del veicolo non funzionerà.
11. Per ulteriori informazioni, consultare il sito della Apple (http://www.
apple.com/kr/ios/carplay/)
178
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità Apple CarPlay
Come usare Siri Avvio della modalità Apple CarPlay
Italiano
1. Premere il tasto di controllo della voce sul 2. Oppure tenere premuto il tasto Home sullo 1. Collegare il vostro iPhone al veicolo con
volante per usare Siri. schermo di Apple CarPlay per attivare Siri. un cavo USB.
3. Oppure tenere premuto il tasto Home sull’i- 2. Premere [Apple CarPlay].

Phone per attivare Siri.
Informazioni
- Se Bluetooth era attivo, verrà scollegato al
momento di collegare Apple CarPlay.
179
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Prima di usare Android Auto Schermata Android Auto
1. Scaricare l’app Android Auto su un cellulare Android con Android
6
5.0 Lollipop o superiore. 7
2. Si raccomanda l'uso di cavi autentici per cellulare Android.
3. Collegando Android Auto, Bluetooth verrà automaticamente colle-
gato.
- Se viene superato il numero massimo di dispositivi registrati, i
dispositivi che non sono stati collegati di recente verranno can-
Italiano
cellati.
4. Bluetooth Music non è collegato.
5. Non è possibile usare CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay e Android Auto
contemporaneamente.
6. Android Auto potrebbe non essere disponibile nel proprio pa-
ese o regione. Consultare il sito: (http://www.android.com/au-
to/#what-you-need)
7. Collegandosi e entrando in Android Auto, l'audio della modalità pre- 1 2 3 4 5
cedente continua a funzionare. Solo lo schermo verrà convertito.
8. La maggior parte delle funzioni di Android Auto richiede l’uso di
dati. Prima di utilizzare Apple CarPlay, accertarsi che il cellulare sia
provvisto di un piano dati tariffario. 1 Mappa 5 Ritorno al sistema
9. Per ulteriori informazioni su Android Auto, consultare il sito di sup- Attiva la funzione mappa (Navigazione). Passa allo schermo del Menu Prin-
porto di Google: (http://support.google.com/androidauto) Telefono cipale del sistema.
2
Attiva la funzione telefono. 6 Riconoscimento vocale
3 Schermata principale Attiva la funzione di riconoscimen-
to vocale.
Passa alla schermata principale.
4 Musica 7 Schermata principale
Attiva la funzione musicale. Schermata principale di Android Auto.
* Visualizza i widget per la musica
e il meteo.
180
GETtheMANUALS.org
Avvio modalità Android Auto
Operazioni preliminari
Italiano
1. Collegare il telefono Android al veicolo con 2. Lo schermo con il Menu Principale verrà 3. Premere [Android Auto] per entrare nella
un cavo USB. visualizzato automaticamente e il tasto modalità.
Android Auto verrà abilitato. (Se Android
Auto è già collegato, premere [MODE] dai
tasti fisici del sistema per passare al Menu
Principale.)
* Collegando Android Auto, Bluetooth verrà

automaticamente collegato.
Informazioni
* Collegando Android Auto, Bluetooth verrà automaticamente collegato.
* Bluetooth Music non è collegato.
* Non è possibile usare iPod, Apple CarPlay e Android Auto contemporaneamente.
* Si raccomanda di utilizzare il cavo dedicato.
181
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Manual
Cos'è un e-Manual?
Questa funzione permette di controllare comodamente i metodi

per l’uso delle funzioni di sistema principali.
Questo e-manual potrebbe differire dalle funzioni effettive del

prodotto.
Italiano
1. Selezionare il menu desiderato a sinistra. Per i metodi dettagliati di

funzionamento, usare i tasti / per scorrere le pagine.
182
GETtheMANUALS.org
Limitazioni alle funzioni per motivi di sicurezza
Limitazioni alle funzioni per motivi di sicurezza
Il video e alcune altre funzioni vengono disattivate per motivi di sicurezza
quando il veicolo è in movimento.
- Il video non è disponibile durante la guida. La riproduzione audio continua
quando il video è spento.
- Lo Slideshow non è disponibile durante la guida.
Italiano
Lo schermo di restrizione sparisce quando si attiva il freno a mano.
183
GETtheMANUALS.org
Il sistema è dotato di una telecamera posteriore per una visione più ampia, quindi maggiore sicurezza.
La telecamera posteriore funzionerà automaticamente quando il cambio è su R, qualsiasi sia la modalità corrente.
La telecamera posteriore si spegne automaticamente se si sposta in un’altra posizione.
Quando la telecamera posteriore è in funzione, è possibile utilizzare le funzioni Volume e Mute.
Italiano
1. Posizionare la chiave di accensione su ACC o ON.

2. Posizionare la leva del cambio su R.
Attenzione!
- Lo schermo della telecamera posteriore potrebbe apparire differente dalla distanza effettiva. Per la vostra sicurezza, guidare sempre con prudenza e controllare diret-
tamente la situazione sui lati e sul retro.
- Quando la telecamera posteriore è in funzione, sono supportati solo il volume e le chiamate in arrivo.
184
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modalità AVM - opzionale
Questo apparecchio supporta anche l’Around View Monitor (AVM) per ulteriore sicurezza.
AVM è una funzione opzionale.
Premendo l'interruttore AVM o passando a R il monitor passerà alla modalità AVM, qualsiasi sia la modalità corrente.
Premendo di nuovo l'interruttore AVM o passando da R a un’altra marcia si spegne automaticamente la modalità AVM e il dispositivo torna alla modalità precedente.
Quando AVM è in funzione, è possibile utilizzare le funzioni Volume e Mute.
Per passare dalla modalità 2D a 3D, utilizzare la modalità Visione all’interno delle Impostazioni AVM.
Italiano
2D View 3D View
Attenzione!
- Lo schermo AVM potrebbe apparire differente dalla distanza effettiva. Per la vostra sicurezza, guidare sempre con prudenza e controllare direttamente la situazione sui lati e sul retro.
- Quando AVM è in funzione, sono supportati solo il volume e le chiamate in arrivo.
185
GETtheMANUALS.org
Impostazioni AVM
Linee guida Sync PGS PAS Proximity Warning Modalità visualizzazione
Italiano
1. Imposta se utilizzare le linee guida PGS. 1. Imposta se utilizzare il PAS Proximity War- 1. Imposta la modalità di visualizzazione. (Si-
(Situazione di default: On) ning. (Situazione di default: On) tuazione di default: 2D View)
186
GETtheMANUALS.org
Specifiche del prodotto
Nome Car TFT LCD Display AVN UNIT MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
File supportati
TS, WMV
Alimentazione DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Alimentazione DC 9V ~ DC 16V Supporto/Risolu-
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
zione Sottotitoli
Consumo cor- 2A
rente File supportati MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Comune
Italiano
Corrente in Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
3mA (solo unità principale)
standby
Frequenza di 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Temperatura di campionamento
-30℃ ~ +75℃
esercizio
Foto Formato di file JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, Gse
Temperatura di -40℃ ~ +85℃
stoccaggio Compatibilità BLUETOOTH V4.1
Dimensioni 278,4(L) x 175,5(H) x 191,5(P) Frequenza lar-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
ghezza di banda
Peso 2.5 kg
Profili supportati A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Formato schermo 203,90 mm (L) x 114,70 (H) mm (Area attiva) Bluetooth
Uscita di trasmis-
sione 3.0 dBm
Risoluzione 921.600 pixel
Visualizza Metodo di funzio- TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix
Tipo di modula-
FHSS(GFSK)
namento zione
Retroillumina- LED Canale 79
zione
Gamma di fre- FM: 87.5~108.0MHz (Step: 100kHz)
quenza AM: 522~1620 kHz (Step:9kHz)
Radio
Sensibilità FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
Certifica-
SD 1 slot, 16GB zione
Dispositivo
di archivia- USB 1 porta, USB2.0 HOST
Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Dichiara che l’apparecchio radio di tipo [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] è conforme alla Direttiva 2014/53/EU.
zione Il testo integrale della dichiarazione di conformità EU è disponibile al seguente indirizzo Internet: http://www.digen.co.kr
Formato FAT 16/32 Una copia del DoC in lingua originale è allegata al dispositivo.
187
GETtheMANUALS.org
Il prodotto è davvero guasto?
La posizione attuale visualizzata sulla navigazione può differire dalla posizione effettiva (ubicazione e condizioni di guida) nelle seguenti condizioni.
Le seguenti situazioni non indicano un guasto.

Durante la guida su strade a forma di Y con angoli stretti, la posizione Durante la guida in traffico intenso o ad incroci con frequenti frenate e riprese
attuale potrebbe essere visualizzata nella direzione opposta
Italiano
Durante la guida su superfici scivolose, ad esempio su sabbia pesante, neve ecc.

Il segno della posizione attuale potrebbe essere visualizzato nella direzi- Durante la guida con catene.
one opposta.
Quando le gomme sono state sostituite di recente (specialmente se si
In città, la posizione attuale può essere visualizzata sul lato opposto o non utilizzano pneumatici di ricambio o non chiodati).
su una strada
Utilizzando pneumatici di dimensioni non adatte.
Nel cambiare il livello di zoom dal massimo a un livello minore, la po- Quando la pressione nei quattro pneumatici è diversa.
sizione attuale potrebbe essere visualizzata su una strada differente
Quando la ruota di scorta è usurata o già usata (specialmente pneumatici
Se il veicolo viene caricato su un traghetto o un veicolo di trasporto, la non chiodati e già usati per due stagioni).
posizione attuale potrebbe rimanere bloccata sull’ultima posizione prima
Durante la guida vicino a grattacieli
del caricamento.
Quando è installato un portapacchi.
Quando viene rimosso il terminale batterie.
Quando viene calcolato un percorso molto lungo durante la guida in
Durante la guida su una strada a spirale. autostrada.
Durante la guida in zone di montagna, con curve strette e frenate improvvise. In questi casi, continuando a guidare, il sistema confronterà automaticamente
Quando si entra in una strada dopo aver passato un parcheggio sotterra- le mappe o utilizzerà le informazioni GPS aggiornate per fornire la posizione
neo, un parcheggio sopraelevato o una strada con molte rotazioni. corrente. (In questi casi, possono essere necessari parecchi minuti)
188
GETtheMANUALS.org
Le direzioni di guida potrebbero essere errate a causa delle condizioni di ricerca o del luogo.

La direzione che consiglia di proseguire dritto può essere data durante la Le direzioni potrebbero portare ad una zona non accessibile (zona chiusa,
guida su una strada dritta. lavori in corso, ecc.)
Italiano
Le direzioni potrebbero non essere comunicate dopo aver svoltato a un Le direzioni di guida potrebbero portare ad una posizione diversa dalla
incrocio. destinazione se le strade che portano alla destinazione non esistono o
sono troppo strette.
Le direzioni potrebbero non funzionare in alcuni incroci.
Le direzioni vocali possono essere errate se il veicolo devia dal percorso
Può capitare che una direzione che indica un’inversione a U venga data in designato (ad esempio se gira ad un incrocio, mentre le direzioni di navi-
incroci in cui tali inversioni non sono concesse. gazione indicano di andare dritto.)
Queste situazioni possono verificarsi dopo il ricalcolo del percorso.

Le direzioni potrebbero essere comunicate in modo errato dopo aver Le direzioni potrebbero portare ad una zona non accessibile (zona chiusa,
svoltato a un incrocio lavori in corso, ecc.)
Le direzioni di guida potrebbero portare ad una posizione diversa dalla destinazi-
Durante la guida ad alta velocità, il ricalcolo del percorso potrebbe richie-
one se le strade che portano alla destinazione non esistono o sono troppo strette.
dere più tempo.
Le direzioni vocali possono essere errate se il veicolo devia dal percorso
Può capitare che una direzione che indica un’inversione a U venga data in designato (ad esempio se gira ad un incrocio, mentre le direzioni di navi-
incroci in cui tali inversioni non sono concesse. gazione indicano di andare dritto.)
189
GETtheMANUALS.org
Prima di affermare che il prodotto sia guasto
Prima di affermare che il prodotto sia guasto
1. Errori che si verificano durante il funzionamento o l’installazione dell'apparecchio possono essere scambiati per un guasto del dispositivo.
2. Se ci sono problemi con l'apparecchio, provare a mettere in pratica questi suggerimenti.
3. Se i problemi persistono, contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza.
Problema Misura da adottare

Italiano
L’accensione del veicolo è su “ACC” o “ON”?

L'audio o l’immagine non funzionano.
Il cavo di collegamento è instabile o scollegato?
Lo schermo viene visualizzato, ma il suo- Il volume è stato impostato su basso?
no non funziona. I cavi AMP e il cavo di collegamento allo speaker sono instabili o scollegati? Il volume è stato impostato su Mute?
Ho acceso lo schermo, ma gli angoli dello Gli schermi LCD in genere appaiono scuri quando non vengono utilizzati per lunghi periodi di tempo: ciò non è un guasto.
schermo sono scuri. Se il display è molto scuro, contattare il rivenditore o il centro assistenza.
Controllare il cavo dell’altoparlante.

Il suono esce da un solo altoparlante.
Le posizioni dei controlli sonori Fader o Balance sono regolate verso un solo lato?
Ho collegato un dispositivo esterno, ma
I jack di collegamento audio sono inseriti correttamente nel terminale AUX?
non funziona come dovrebbe.
190
GETtheMANUALS.org
Risoluzione dei problemi
Problema Possibile causa Misura da adottare
Sostituire con un fusibile idoneo. Se il fusibile è scollegato di nuovo, contattare
Il fusibile è scollegato.
L’alimentazione non si accende.
il rivenditore o il centro assistenza.
Il dispositivo non è collegato correttamente. Controllare che l'apparecchio sia collegato correttamente.
La qualità del colore/tono Luminosità, saturazione, tono, e contrasto Regolare correttamente luminosità, saturazione, tono e contrasto attraverso
dell’immagine è bassa. non sono impostati correttamente. Impostazioni del display.
Italiano
La luminosità è impostata su un livello basso. Regolare il livello di luminosità.
L’immagine non funziona.
Il dispositivo non è collegato correttamente. Controllare che l'apparecchio sia collegato correttamente.
Il volume è impostato su basso Regolare il livello del volume
L’audio non funziona Il dispositivo non è collegato correttamente. Controllare che l'apparecchio sia collegato correttamente.
L’apparecchio è in modalità avanzamento ve- L’audio non funziona quando l'apparecchio è in modalità avanzamento veloce,
loce, rewind, scan o riproduzione al rallentatore. rewind, scan o riproduzione al rallentatore.
Utilizzare dopo aver formattato il dispositivo USB nel formato FAT 12/16/32. Questo apparec-
La memoria USB è stata danneggiata. chio non riconosce file in formato NTFS e exFAT.
Rimuovere qualsiasi sostanza estranea dalla superficie di contatto della memoria USB e
La memoria USB è stata contaminata. dal terminale multimedia.
Viene utilizzato un hub USB acquistato separatamente. Collegare direttamente la memoria USB al terminale multimedia sul veicolo.
L’USB non funziona. Viene utilizzato un cavo prolunga USB Collegare direttamente la memoria USB al terminale multimedia sul veicolo.
Viene utilizzata una memoria USB con corpo

Utilizzare USB Memory standard.
non in metallo.
Viene utilizzata una memoria HDD tipo, CF, SD. Utilizzare USB Memory standard.
Sono supportati solo i formati MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC e WAV.
Non viene riprodotto nessun file di musica.
Utilizzare solo i formati musicali supportati.
Informazioni - Durante l’uso dell'apparecchio, se si verifica un’anomalia non correggibile seguendo i consigli in alto, riavviare il sistema.
- Premere i tasti MODE e SETUP simultaneamente. L’apparecchio si spegne e il sistema viene resettato
191
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Italiano
192
GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto-Navigationssystem Y400 AVN-BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Deutsch
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lesen Sie dieses Handbuch vor dem Gerätebetrieb sorgfältig durch und bewahren Sie es zum späteren Gebrauch gut auf.
Änderungen von Design und Spezifikationen ohne vorherige Mitteilung vorbehalten.
Weitere Informationen über das Auto-Navigationssystem finden Sie online auf der Website von Ssangyong Motor.
- Website-Adresse für den Download des AVN-Handbuches: http://www.smotor.com
193
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inhalt
Grundlegendes
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen 195 Bluetooth-Geräte koppeln 217
Wichtige Produktinformationen 196 Trennen und Löschen von Bluetooth-Geräten 219
Wichtige Produktfunktionen 197 Bildschirm „Bluetooth-Anruf“ 220
Komponentennamen und -funktionen 198 Anrufen 221
Im Lenkrad integrierte Fernbedienung 200 Annehmen eines Anrufs 223
Bluetooth-Einstellungen 224
Verwendung des Basismenüs Bluetooth-Musik 228
Deutsch
Grundlegende Funktionen 201 Bildschirm „Meine Musik“ 229

Startbildschirm 203 AUX-Modus 230
Bookmark 204 Einstellungen 231
iPod-Modus 240
Bedienung des AV-Modus iPod-Modus starten 241
Radiomodus 205 Apple CarPlay 242
Verwendung von voreingestellten Kanälen und Radioaufnahme 206 Apple CarPlay-Modus 243
Medienmodus 208 Android Auto-Modus starten 245
(1) USB Musik-Modus e-Manual 246
USB Musik-Modus 209 Einschränkung von Funktionen aus Sicherheitsgründen 247
Bildschirm „USB Musik“ 210 Rückfahrkamera 248
(2) USB Video-Modus AVM-Modus - Optional 249
USB Video-Modus starten 211 AVM-Einstellungen 250
Bildschirm „USB-Video“ 212 Produktspezifikationen 251
(3) USB Bilder-Modus
USB Bilder-Modus starten 213
Anhang
Bildschirm „USB-Bilder“ 214 Bevor Sie annehmen, dass das Produkt nicht richtig funktioniert 252
Bluetooth-Modus 215 Bevor Sie annehmen, dass ein Produktfehler vorliegt 254
Bluetooth Hauptmenü 216 Fehlerbehebung 255
194
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
Sicherheitswarnungen Sicherheitshinweise
Auch wenn Sie Navigationsanweisungen vom Multimediasystem erhalten, Achten Sie während der Fahrt auf die Verkehrsbedingungen.
befolgen Sie bitte immer die aktuellen Straßenverkehrsregeln.
In manchen Fällen kann die Routenführung des Navigationssystems durch
Das ausschließliche Befolgen der Routenführung kann zu Verletzungen Gebiete mit Verkehrsbeschränkungen verlaufen.
der Straßenverkehrsregeln und zu Unfällen führen.
Sehen Sie während der Fahrt nicht längere Zeit auf den Bildschirm. Wenn Sie Die Bedienung des Geräts während der Fahrt kann durch die verminderte
zu lange auf den Bildschirm sehen, kann dies zu Verkehrsunfällen führen. Aufmerksamkeit für die Umgebung zu Unfällen führen. Halten Sie das
Fahrzeug an, bevor Sie das Gerät bedienen. Darüber hinaus gibt es einige
Bedienen Sie das Multimediasystem nicht während der Fahrt, zum Bei- Funktionen des Touchscreens, die zu Ihrer eigenen Sicherheit nicht funk-
spiel zum Eingeben von Sehenswürdigkeiten oder zur Suche nach der tionieren, wenn das Fahrzeug in Bewegung ist. Die Touchscreen-Funktion
Deutsch
Route. Dies kann zu Unfällen führen. ist nur verfügbar, wenn das Fahrzeug steht.
Halten Sie das Fahrzeug an, bevor Sie das Gerät bedienen.
Dieses Produkt ist ausschließlich für den Gebrauch in Autos bestimmt.
Das Multimediasystem darf nicht zerlegt, eingebaut oder verändert wer- Installieren Sie dieses Gerät nur in Autos.
den. Dies könnte zu Unfällen, Brand oder Stromschlag führen.
Wenn Sie die Position des Geräts verändern wollen, wenden Sie sich bitte an
Achten Sie darauf, dass kein Wasser und keine Fremdkörper in das Gerät
ihren Händler oder an das Service- und Wartungszentrum. Für den Einbau
eindringen. Dies kann zur Entwicklung von Rauch, Feuer oder zu Funkti-
oder die Demontage des Geräts ist technisches Fachwissen erforderlich.
onsstörungen führen.
Bei ungewöhnlichen Zuständen, wie Eindringen von Fremdkörpern oder Achten Sie darauf, dass das Gerät bei der Reinigung abgeschaltet ist und
Rauchentwicklung aufgrund von Kontakt mit Wasser, schalten Sie das verwenden Sie ein trockenes, weiches Tuch. Verwenden Sie nie harte
Gerät sofort ab und wenden Sie sich bitte an ihren Händler oder an das Materialien, chemische Tücher oder Lösungsmittel (Alkohol, Benzol, Ver-
Servicezentrum. dünner, etc.) da diese Materialien das Bedienfeld des Geräts beschädigen
oder die Farbe/Qualität beeinträchtigen können. Wenn Gerätestörungen
Wenn Sie das Gerät in diesem Zustand weiter verwenden, kann es zu festgestellt werden, wenden Sie sich an Ihren Händler oder an das Ser-
Funktionsstörungen kommen. vice- und Wartungszentrum.
Bitte verwenden Sie das System nicht, wenn der Bildschirm leer ist oder
Setzen Sie das Gerät keinen starken Schlägen oder Erschütterungen aus.
kein Ton hörbar ist. Dies kann ein Anzeichen für eine Funktionsstörung
des Produkts sein. Die Verwendung des Produkts unter diesen Bedingun- Direkter Druck auf die Vorderseite des Bildschirms kann den LCD- oder
gen könnte zu Unfällen (Brände, Stromschlag) führen. Touchscreen beschädigen.
Halten oder parken Sie nicht in Park- oder Halteverboten, um das Gerät
Wenn Sie das Gerät über einen längeren Zeitraum bei ausgeschalteter
zu bedienen. Dies kann zu Unfällen führen.
Zündung verwenden, wird auf dem Bildschirm eine Warnung wegen Bat-
terieentladung angezeigt. Verwenden Sie das System nur mit eingeschal-
teter Zündung.
195
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Apple Inc. Hergestellt unter Lizenz von Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay Dolby und das Doppel-D-Symbol sind Markenzeichen von Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen von Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. TomTom und das „Hände-Logo“ sind Waren-
Die Wortmarke Bluetooth und die Bluetooth-Logos sind eingetragene Waren- zeichen oder eingetragene Warenzeichen von TomTom N.V. oder einer Tochtergesellschaft.
zeichen im Eigentum der Firma Bluetooth SIG, Inc. und jegliche Verwendung © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle Rechte vorbehalten. Dieses Material ist eigentumsrechtlich
dieser Marken steht unter Lizenz. und/oder durch Datenbankrechte geschützt und unterliegt Urheber- und anderen geistigen
Für die Verwendung der Bluetooth-Technologie ist ein Bluetooth-fähiges Eigentumsrechten im Besitz von TomTom oder seinen Lieferanten. Die Verwendung
Handy erforderlich. dieses Materials unterliegt Lizenzbedingungen. Die unerlaubte Vervielfältigung oder Veröf-
Deutsch
DivX fentlichung dieses Materials wird zivil- und strafrechtlich verfolgt.

Da das Produkt DivX-zertifiziert ist, können damit Premium HD DivX Videos
abgespielt werden. (Inklusive .avi und .divX)
DivX, DivX-zertifiziert und die entsprechenden Logos sind eingetragene Wa-
renzeichen von DivX und LLC und jegliche Verwendung steht unter Lizenz.
Die Warenzeichen sind durch mindestens eines der unten aufgeführten
US-Patente geschützt: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Verwendung von SD-Speicherkarten

1. Der SD-Kartenschlitz in diesem Gerät dient für Kartendateien.
2. Die Kartendatei wurde für dieses Gerät auf der SD-Karte gespeichert.
Auf der SD-Karte dürfen keine Dateien gespeichert, gelöscht oder bearbeitet werden. Die SD-Karte sollte nur zum Einspielen der neuen Version der Karte ausgeworfen/
eingelegt werden.
3. Bitte verwenden Sie nur die vom Händler bereitgestellte SD-Karte. Die Kartendatei darf nicht geteilt oder auf eine andere SD-Karte kopiert werden.
Das kann zu Funktionsstörungen und Fehlfunktionen führen.
4. Das Auswerfen und Einlegen von SD-Karten während das System in Betrieb ist, kann zu einem SD-Karten- oder Systemfehler führen.
Zum Auswerfen oder Einlegen der SD-Karte schalten Sie zuerst die Zündung des Fahrzeugs aus.
5. Wenn Sie in kurzen Abständen die SD-Karte wiederholt anschließen und wieder trennen, kann das Gerät beschädigt werden.
6. Die SD-Karte ist so formatiert, dass sie nur Kartendateien enthält.
Das Speichern anderer Dateien auf der SD-Karte kann zu Systemfehlern oder Funktionsstörungen führen.
Karte aktualisieren und AVN-Software herunterladen

1. Verbinden Sie die SD-Karte mit Ihrem Computer.
2. Gehen Sie zur Update-Seite (URL).
196
GETtheMANUALS.org
Wichtige Produktfunktionen
Funktion Beschreibung Funktion Beschreibung

Mit Apple CarPlay können Sie Telefonanrufe tätigen,
Breiter LCD-Bildschirm Apple CarPlay Textnachrichten austauschen, die Karte verwenden,
Bildschirm Bietet die gleichzeitige Wiedergabe von Qualitätsvideos und Musik hören und Siri-Funktionen verwenden.
Musik auf dem 9,2 Zoll breiten Bildschirm mit zusätzlichem
Komfort durch die Bedienung per Touchscreen.
Mit Android Auto können Sie die Funktionen für
Deutsch
Android Auto Google Map, Telefon, Spracherkennung und Musik
verwenden.
Digitaler Tuner
Der digitale Tuner unterstützt die Speicherung von 12 Sen-
Radio dern für die Modi FM1, FM2, AM und DAB. Bluetooth-Verbindungssymbol
Bietet eine Freisprechfunktion, mit der der Fahrer während
RDS-Dienste
Bluetooth des Fahrens drahtlos telefonieren und Musik über Audio
Bietet die Funktionen AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY mit RDS-Diensten. Streaming hören kann.
Medienautosuchfunktion Einstellfunktionen für den Digitalbildschirm

Erkennt automatisch Mediendateien, einschließlich Video-, Einfache Steuerung der Bildschirmhelligkeit über den Touch
USB Medien Audio- und Fotodateien, die auf dem USB-Stick oder der Screen für mehr Bedienerfreundlichkeit.
SD-Karte gespeichert sind und zeigt diese der Einfachheit
halber in Listenform an. Rückfahrkamera
Verschiedenes Gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, durch die HD-Kamera nach hin-
ten zu sehen, wenn Sie den Rückwärtsgang einlegen.
Verwendet TomTom Map
Navigation Über die hochempfindliche Antenne können mithilfe der Around View Monitor (Rundumsicht-Monitor) - Optional
GPS-Einheit und exakter Karten präzise Routeninformatio- Dieses System gibt Ihnen die Möglichkeit, durch die vier im
nen empfangen werden. Fahrzeug installierten Kameras nach vorne, hinten, links und
rechts zu sehen.
197
GETtheMANUALS.org
Komponentennamen und -funktionen
Vorderansicht
Taste Beschreibung
1 EIN/AUS / LAUTSTÄRKE
1. Diese Taste wird verwendet, um das Gerät ein- bzw. auszuschalten und um die Lautstärke
einzustellen.
2. Drücken und halten Sie zum Ausschalten des Geräts die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden) gedrückt.
3. Zum Ein- bzw. Ausschalten des AV-Modus die Taste kurz drücken.
4. Zum Regeln der Lautstärke den Knopf nach links/rechts drehen. (Bereich für Lautstärkeregelung
0~45)
Deutsch
2 Home
1 1. Öffnet den Startbildschirm (PIP, Picture in Picture).
2 3 4 5
2. Drücken und halten Sie die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden) ge-
drückt, um zum Bookmark-Modus zu wechseln.
3 MODE
1. Öffnet den Haupt-Modusbildschirm.
2. Drücken und halten Sie (über 1,5 Sekunden) diese Taste im
Navigations-Modus gedrückt, um den AV-Modus, der vor dem
Navigationsmodus zuletzt verwendet wurde, zu starten.
NAVI
4
1. Schaltet in den Navigationsmodus um und zeigt den aktuellen
Standort an, egal ob AV ein- oder ausgeschaltet ist.
2. D
rücken und halten Sie die Taste (über 1,5 Sekunden), um den
Bildschirm zu öffnen, auf dem Sie Ihre Destination suchen können.
5 SETUP
Drücken und halten Sie in einem beliebigen Modus die Taste, um
den Bildschirm „Einstellungen“ zu öffnen.
Drücken Sie die Taste im Modus Radio/Audio/Video/Navigation/
Bluetooth -Telefon,
um den entsprechenden Einstellungsbildschirm anzuzeigen.
198
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rückansicht AVN 42-poliger STECKER
AVN
Deutsch
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Radio-Antennenbuchse A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
-Zum Anstecken des Radio-Antennenkabels A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS-Antennenbuchse A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Zum Anstecken des GPS-Antennenkabels A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Stecker der Rückfahrkamera A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Zum Anstecken eines Rückfahrkamerasteckers A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-Schnittstelle A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Zum Anstecken eines USB-Steckers für USB-Funktion A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) E/A-Anschluss (42-polig) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) DAB-Buchse B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Zum Anschließen eines DAB-Antennenkabels B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
199
GETtheMANUALS.org
Taste Beschreibung
1 Drücken und halten Sie die Taste während eines Anrufs mit dem
Bluetooth-Freisprechmodus, um den Anruf zu beenden.
Wenn Sie nicht telefonieren, können Sie hier Stummschalten und
6 die Stummschaltung wieder aufheben.
In jedem Modus
2 3 2 - Bei jedem Drücken der Taste wechselt der Modus in der Reihenfolge Radio → Medien →
4 Bluetooth Musik → iPod → Meine Musik. (Wenn das Gerät für das Medium nicht ange-
schlossen ist, sind die dazugehörigen Modi deaktiviert)
Im Radiomodus
5
Deutsch
1 - Drücken und halten Sie die Taste, um den Radiomodus in der Reihenfolge FM1 → FM2
→ AM → DAB zu wechseln.
Im Medienmodus
- Drücken und halten Sie die Taste, um den Modus in der Reihenfolge USB Musik→USB
Video→USB Bild zu wechseln.
3
Einstellen der Lautstärke.
4 Beim Abspielen
- Drücken Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zur vorherigen/nächsten Datei zu
wechseln.
Im Radiomodus
- Drücken Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zum vorherigen/nächsten voreingestell-
ten Kanal zu wechseln.
-D rücken und halten Sie die Taste nach oben/unten, um zur vorherigen/nächsten
Sendefrequenz zu wechseln.
5
Startet den Bluetooth Freisprechmodus.
Im Apply CarPlay-Modus
6 - startet Siri.
Im Android Auto-Modus
- startet Google Voice.
200
GETtheMANUALS.org
Grundlegende Funktionen
System starten Ausschalten des Systems
Deutsch
1. Drücken und halten Sie (länger als 1,5 Sekunden)
1. Drücken Sie den Motorstartknopf oder 2. Sobald das System eingeschaltet wird, während das System in Betrieb ist die Taste EIN-AUS/
stellen Sie den Zündschlüssel auf ON oder wird das Hochfahren gestartet und der LAUTSTÄRKE, um das Gerät auszuschalten. Wenn die
Energiezufuhr zum System ausgeschaltet wird, wird der
ACC. Bildschirm mit dem Logo wird angezeigt. letzte Betriebsmodus gespeichert.
3. Die Seite mit den Sicherheitswarnungen 4. Drücken Sie die Taste [Stimme zu], um den zuletzt 2. Wenn das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist, wird die
wird angezeigt und die Benutzereinwilli- verwendeten Modus anzuzeigen. (Der Standard- aktuelle Uhrzeit angezeigt.
gung ist aktiviert. modus ist Radio FM1)
Hinweis Hinweis
- Markieren Sie das Kästchen [Autom. Verschwinden], um den zuletzt verwendeten Modus einzuschalten, ohne die - Wenn die Zündung wieder eingeschaltet wird,
Taste [Stimme zu] zu drücken. schaltet das System automatisch zum zuletzt
verwendeten Modus.
- Wenn die Zündung vor mehr als 3 Minuten aus-
geschaltet wurde und die Fahrertür geöffnet wird,
wird das System automatisch ausgeschaltet.
201
GETtheMANUALS.org
Systemreset Audio Aus Audio Ein
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Tasten MODE 1. D

rücken und halten Sie kurz (kürzer als 1,5 Sekun- 1. Wenn AV ausgeschaltet ist, drücken Sie
und SETUP. den) die Taste EIN-AUS/LAUTSTÄRKE, während kurz (unter 1,5 Sekunden) die Taste EIN-
während AV eingeschaltet ist, um AV auszuschalten. AUS/LAUTSTÄRKE, um AV einzuschalten.
2. Das System wird ausgeschaltet und neu 2. Wenn Audio ausgeschaltet wird, wird 2. Wenn Audio eingeschaltet wird, wird der
gestartet. der zuletzt verwendete Navigationsmo- Navigations-Bildschirm beibehalten, aber
dus-Bildschirm angezeigt. die Wiedergabe der zuletzt verwendeten
Audio-Funktion gestartet.
Hinweis
- Bei einem Systemreset werden die bestehenden
Einstellungen und Konfigurationen wieder auf
die Standardwerte zurückgestellt. Dies dient der
Sicherstellung der Gerätestabilität und ist kein
Systemdefekt.
202
GETtheMANUALS.org
Startbildschirm
Startbildschirm
1 Bietet eine kurze Übersicht über die Navigationskarte und den
1
Bildschirm „Route“. / Berühren Sie den Bildschirm an einer belie-
6
bigen Stelle, um die Navigationskarte im Vollbildmodus zu öffnen.
2 Anzeige einer kurzen Information über das aktuell wiedergegebe-

ne Radio-Medium. / Berühren Sie den Bildschirm, um den derzeit
2
verwendeten Modus-Bildschirm zu öffnen.
3 Bookmark
Fügen Sie Ihre wichtigsten Menüpunkte hinzu, um schnell und
Deutsch
einfach darauf zugreifen zu können.
4 Modus
3 4 5 Anzeige aller Punkte im Systemmenü.
5 Destination
Öffnet den Bildschirm, auf dem Sie Ihren Zielort suchen können.
6 Bildschirm Aus
Drücken Sie hier, um den Bildschirm auszuschalten. Berühren Sie
den Touchscreen an einer beliebigen Stelle, um den Bildschirm
wieder einzuschalten.
Hinweis
- Drücken Sie die Taste [HOME], um den Startbildschirm anzuzeigen.
- Drücken und halten Sie die Taste [HOME], um den Bookmark-Bildschirm anzuzeigen.
203
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bookmark
Bookmark starten Bookmark-Bildschirm
4 2
1
1.
Wählen Sie auf dem Startbild- 2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm Book-
Deutsch
schirm [Bookmark]. mark-Liste [Hinzufügen].
1 Menüliste
Bookmark Menüliste
3.
Drücken und halten Sie die 4. B
ookmark-Liste 2 Bestätigungstaste
Menüpunkte, dann positionieren Speichert die Änderungen im Bookmark-Menü und stellt den Startbild-
Sie sie durch Drag & Drop an die schirm wieder her.
gewünschte Stelle, um sie hinzu- Bereich zum Hinzufügen von Menüs
3
zufügen/zu löschen/oder zu ver-
schieben. Dann drücken Sie die Menüpunkte werden zum Hinzufügen als Bookmark-Menüs in den Be-
Bestätigungstaste. reich zum Hinzufügen von Menüs gezogen und verschoben.
4 Zurücksetzen
Setzt die Bookmarkeinstellungen zurück.
Hinweis Hinweis
Wenn ein Bookmark hinzugefügt ist, drücken Sie die Taste „Bearbeiten“. - Drücken Sie die Taste [HOME], um den Startbildschirm anzuzeigen.
- Drücken und halten Sie die Taste [HOME], um den Bookmark-Bildschirm anzuzeigen.
204
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radiomodus starten
Radiomodus starten Bildschirm „Radio“
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MODE, um den 7
Bildschirm mit dem Hauptmenü zu öffnen,
dann drücken Sie [Radio].
1 Betriebsmodus 7 Frequenzband-Registerkarte
Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus. Wenn Sie die gewünschte Registerkarte auswählen, wird der
2 Preset gewählte Radiomodus eingeschaltet.
Anzeige der „Preset“-Liste. 8 Home
* Drücken und halten Sie die Taste [Preset], um die Öffnet den Startbildschirm.
aktuelle Frequenz für die gewählte [Preset]-Taste zu 9 Zurück
speichern. Öffnet den vorherigen Bildschirm.
* Bis zu 12 voreingestellte Frequenzen können jeweils
10 DAB
für die Modi FM1/FM2/AM gespeichert werden.
Startet den DAB-Modus.
3 Frequenz-Info 11 TA Ein / Aus
Anzeige der aktuellen Frequenz. Ein- bzw. Ausschalten der Verkehrsdurchsage. (für
* Jedes Mal, wenn dieser Bereich nach rechts gezo- weitere Informationen siehe den Abschnitt „DAB“.)
gen wird, ändert sich der Modus in der Reihenfolge
FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1. 12 DLS Ein / Aus
Ein- bzw. Ausschalten von DLS-Text. (für weitere
4 Indikator
Anzeige des Status Ein/Aus der Funktionen REG/ Informationen, siehe den Abschnitt „DAB“.)
AF/TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO. 13 Scan
Wiedergabe der Frequenzen mit gutem Empfang für jeweils
5 Tune Up (Frequenz erhöhen) 5 Sekunden.
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Frequenz durch
14 AST
FM zu erhöhen: 0,1 MHz, AM: 9 KHz) Speichert die Frequenzen mit gutem Empfang auf die
6 Tune Down (Frequenz reduzieren) Preset-Tasten.
Drücken Sie diese Taste, um die Frequenz durch 15 Radioaufnahme
FM zu reduzieren: 0,1 MHz, AM: 9 KHz) Nimmt die derzeit wiedergegebene Radiosendung auf.
205
GETtheMANUALS.org
Verwendung von Presets und Radioaufnahme
Preset automatisch speichern
Autostore (Automatisch speichern) Preset manuell speichern Radioaufnahme
1. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm 1. Wählen Sie die Frequenz, die 1. Drücken Sie auf dem Radio-Bild- 2. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm mit der Frage,
ob die Radiosendung aufgenommen werden
Deutsch
„Radio“ auf [AST] (Automatisch gespeichert werden soll. schirm die Taste . soll, [OK], um die Aufnahme zu starten.
speichern).
2. Speichert die Frequenzen mit 2. Drücken und halten Sie die 3. Durch Drücken der Stopp-Taste wird die Aufnahme beendet und auto-
gutem Empfang in aufsteigender Preset-Taste, die Sie speichern matisch im Ordner Meine Musik Radio gespeichert.
Reihenfolge auf die Preset-Tasten. wollen. Die aktuelle Frequenz
auf die gewünschte Preset-Taste
mit einem Piepton.
Hinweis Hinweis
- Wenn es weniger als 12 Radio-Frequenzen mit gutem Empfang gibt, dann werden - Aufnahmen müssen mindestens 5 Sekunden lang sein, in einer Aufnahme können maximal
auf den restlichen Preset-Kanälen die zuvor gespeicherten voreingestellten 60 Minuten aufgenommen werden.
- Aufgenommene Radiodateien können mit Meine Musik abgespielt werden.
Kanäle gespeichert.
- Es können bis zu 100 Dateien gespeichert werden. Wenn die Speicherkapazität mit weniger
- Wenn während der automatischen Speicherung die Taste [AST] noch einmal ge- als 100 Dateien überschritten wird, wird die Aufnahme automatisch beendet und weitere Aufnah-
drückt wird, wird die Funktion abgebrochen und die vorherige Frequenz gespielt. men werden nicht unterstützt.
206
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
DAB-Modus starten DAB-Bildschirm
1 8 Zurück
9 10 11 12 13 Öffnet den vorherigen Bildschirm.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Startet den FM/AM Radio-Modus.
4
10 Senderverfolgung (SF) Ein / Aus
SF(AF) EIN/AUS
2 * SF(AF) : Diese Funktion bietet unterbrechungs-
5 3 6
freien Empfang durch die automatische Suche
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Radiobild- nach demselben Kanal in angrenzenden Fre-
Deutsch
schirm die Taste „DAB“, um den quenzbereichen, wenn der Empfang des aktu-
ellen Kanals zu schwach wird.
DAB-Modus zu starten.
11 TA (Verkehrsdurchsage) Ein / Aus
Ein- bzw. Ausschalten der Verkehrsdurchsage.
* TA : Diese Funktion dient zum Empfang von Ver-
kehrsdurchsagen und Nachrichten in Echtzeit.
1 Betriebsmodus 12 DLS (Dynamic Label Segment text - digitaler

Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus. Begleittext) Ein / Aus
Ein- bzw. Ausschalten von DLS-Text.
2 Preset * DLS-Text : Mit dieser Funktion wird Text, der von
Zeigt die zur Auswahl gespeicherten Sender. der aktuellen Radiostation übertragen wird, auf
* Drücken und halten Sie die Taste [Preset], um den aktuellen Sender unter der dem Gerät angezeigt. Zu den Informationsarten
gewählten [Preset]-Taste zu speichern. zählen Programminformationen, einschließlich
- Es können bis zu 12 Sender gespeichert werden. Slogan des Senders oder Titel und Interpret des
Sender-Info gerade gespielten Liedes.
3
Anzeige des aktuellen Senders.
13 Liste
4 Indikator Anzeige der automatisch aktualisierten Listen.
Zeigt an, ob die Funktionen DAB/TP ein- oder ausgeschaltet sind.
5 Kanal abwärts
Wechselt zum vorherigen Sender.
6 Kanal aufwärts
Wechselt zum nächsten Sender.
7 Home
Öffnet den Startbildschirm.
207
GETtheMANUALS.org
Medienmodus
Über USB-Speichergeräte
1. Verbinden Sie das USB-Gerät, nachdem Sie den Motor gestartet haben. Das USB-Gerät könnte beschädigt werden, wenn es beim Einschalten der
Zündung schon verbunden ist. USB-Geräte sind keine elektronischen Automobilkomponenten.
2. Wenn die Zündung ein- oder ausgeschaltet wird, während ein USB-Gerät angeschlossen ist, kann der Betrieb des USB-Geräts gestört werden.
3. Achten Sie beim Verbinden/Trennen von externen USB-Geräten auf die statische Elektrizität.
4. Codierte MP3-Player werden nicht erkannt, wenn sie als externes Gerät angeschlossen werden.
5. Wenn ein externes USB-Gerät angeschlossen wird, wird dieses unter Umständen vom Gerät nicht erkannt.
6. Dieses System erkennt USB-Geräte, die in FAT 16/32 formatiert sind. USB-Medien mit NTFS- oder exFAT-Dateisystem werden nicht unterstützt.
7. Manche USB-Geräte werden aufgrund von Kompatibilitätsproblemen nicht unterstützt. Überprüfen Sie vor dem Gebrauch, ob das Gerät korrekt
funktioniert.
8. Wenn Sie in kurzen Abständen das USB-Gerät wiederholt anschließen und wieder trennen, kann das Gerät beschädigt werden.
Deutsch
9. Beim Trennen eines USB-Geräts kann ein ungewohntes Geräusch zu hören sein.
10. Wenn das USB-Gerät getrennt wird, während Medien im USB-Modus wiedergegeben werden, kann dies zu Schäden oder Funktionsstörungen am
USB-Gerät führen. Schalten Sie zum Trennen des USB-Geräts zuerst das System aus oder wechseln Sie in einen anderen Modus.
11. Die Zeit, die erforderlich ist, um das externe USB-Gerät zu erkennen, kann abhängig von Typ, Größe oder Format der Dateien auf dem USB-Gerät
variieren. Diese Unterschiede bei der erforderlichen Zeit sind kein Hinweis auf eine Funktionsstörung.
12. Die Verwendung von USB-Geräten für andere Zwecke als die Wiedergabe von Musik oder Bilddateien ist nicht gestattet.
13. Verwenden Sie das USB-Kabel nicht zum Aufladen von Batterien oder von USB-Zubehör, das Wärme erzeugt. Dies kann zur Verschlechterung der
Leistung oder zu Schäden am System führen.
14. Unter Umständen kann das Gerät das USB-Gerät nicht erkennen, wenn separat gekaufte USB-Hubs und Verlängerungskabel verwendet werden.
Verbinden Sie das USB-Gerät direkt mit dem Multimediaterminal des Fahrzeugs.
15. Wenn Sie ein USB-Massenspeichergerät verwenden, gibt es Fälle, in denen die logischen Laufwerke aus Gründen des Bedienkomforts getrennt
sind. In diesen Fällen werden nur Dateien, die auf dem logischen Laufwerk des Stammverzeichnisses gespeichert sind, abgespielt. Wenn Sie ein
USB-Speichergerät mit mehreren Partitionen (logischen Laufwerken) verwenden, speichern Sie die Dateien, die Sie wiedergeben wollen, in das
Stammverzeichnis. Wenn Anwendungsprogramme auf dem USB-Gerät installiert sind, werden die Dateien auf diesen USB-Geräten aus den oben
genannten Gründen unter Umständen nicht korrekt abgespielt.
16. Das Gerät funktioniert unter Umständen nicht normal, wenn MP3-Player, Mobiltelefone, Digitalkameras oder andere elektronische Geräte (USB-Ge-
räte, die nicht als tragbare Festplattenlaufwerke erkannt werden), mit dem Gerät verbunden sind.
17. Das Laden über USB funktioniert bei manchen Mobilgeräten nicht.
18. Eine normale Funktionsweise wird nur für USB-Speichergeräte, deren Abdeckung ausschließlich aus Metall besteht, garantiert.
19. Wenn Formate wie HDD Type, CF oder SD Memory verwendet werden, funktioniert das Gerät unter Umständen nicht einwandfrei.
20. USB-Speichersticks, die mit einem Adapter angeschlossen werden, einschließlich USB-Speichersticks vom Typ SD und CF werden unter Umstän-
den nicht korrekt erkannt.
208
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Musik-Modus
USB Musik-Modus starten Musikdatei speichern
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MODE, um den 1. Nach der Wiedergabe der Datei, die Sie 2. Drücken Sie [OK] im Fenster „Musikdatei
Bildschirm mit dem Hauptmenü zu öffnen, speichern wollen, drücken Sie auf dem speichern“.
dann drücken Sie [Medien]. Musikbildschirm.
2. Der Standardmodus für Medien ist USB Musik. 3. Sie können Dateien prüfen, die Sie in
Hinweis Meine Musik gespeichert haben.
Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich mindestens
eine Musikdatei auf dem USB-Gerät befindet. (Diese
Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich Mediendateien auf
dem USB-Gerät befinden)
- Audio-Codec: MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC,
WMA9/10, LPCM, FLAC
- Dateiendung: MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Samplingfrequenz: 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz
- Bitrate: 32 Kbps~320 Kbps
- Vorsicht: Dieses Gerät unterstützt Audio-Dateien
mit einer Bitrate von 320 Kbps, es wird jedoch die
Verwendung von Dateien mit einer Bitrate von
192 kbps empfohlen. Wenn Dateien ohne fixe Bitrate Hinweis
verwendet werden, funktionieren einige Funktionen - Sie können bis zu 100 Lieder speichern.
(FF/REW) unter Umständen nicht korrekt.
209
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „USB Musik“
Bildschirm „USB Musik“
6 Nächste Datei
1 Wiedergabe der nächsten Datei.
9 10 11 * Drücken und halten Sie die Taste um die nächste Datei schnell im USB-Gerät zu
2 suchen. Und der Dateiname wird angezeigt. Sobald die Taste losgelassen wird,
wird die Datei wieder mit normaler Geschwindigkeit abgespielt.
3 7 Vorherige Datei
12
Wiedergabe der vorherigen Datei.
5 * Drücken und halten Sie die Taste, um die vorherige Datei schnell im USB-Gerät
zu suchen. Und der Dateiname wird angezeigt. Sobald die Taste losgelassen wird,
4 wird die Datei wieder mit normaler Geschwindigkeit abgespielt.
Deutsch
7 8 6
8 Pause/Wiedergabe
13 Spielt/Unterbricht die aktuelle Datei.
9 Wiederholung
Wiederholt die aktuelle Datei / alle Dateien im USB-Gerät.
14 * Jedes Mal, wenn die Taste gedrückt wird, wechselt die Option zwischen: Datei
wiederholen → Ordner wiederholen → Eine wiederholen.
10 Zufallswiedergabe
Wiedergabe der Dateien in zufälliger Reihenfolge.
1 Betriebsmodus
Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus.
11 Musikdatei speichern
Übergeordneter Ordner Speichert die aktuelle Datei in Meine Musik.
2
Öffnet den übergeordneten Ordner
12 Dateiindex
3 Ordnername Anzeige der aktuellen Datei/aller Dateien im aktuellen Ordner.
Anzeige des aktuellen Ordners.
13 Spielzeit
4 Musikliste Anzeige der aktuellen Spielzeit/Gesamtspielzeit.
Anzeige der Liste der Musikdateien im aktuellen Ordner. * Ziehen oder berühren Sie den Balken, um die gewünschte Zeit auszuwählen.
* Der Titel des derzeit gespielten Liedes wird hervorgehoben
14 Registerkarte USB-Modus
5 Songinformationen Wenn Sie die gewünschte Registerkarte auswählen, wird der gewählte
Anzeige von Informationen über Ordner, Künstler, Titel, Album und Albumgrafik für die Modus eingeschaltet.
aktuelle Datei.
210
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Video-Modus starten
USB Video-Modus starten
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MODE, 2 - 1. Wenn der Bildschirm „USB 2 - 2. Oder berühren Sie die Regis- 3. Sobald das Bedienfeld für „DVD
Deutsch
um den Bildschirm mit dem Musik“ angezeigt wird, terkarte „USB Video“, um den Video“ angezeigt wird, wird das
Hauptmenü zu öffnen, dann ziehen Sie den Bildschirm USB Video-Modus zu starten. Video im Vollbildmodus wieder-
drücken Sie [Medien]. nach rechts, um den USB gegeben.
Video-Modus zu starten.
Hinweis
Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich mindestens eine Videodatei auf dem USB-Gerät befindet. (Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich Mediendateien auf dem
USB-Gerät befinden)
- Der Standardmodus für Medien ist USB Musik.
- Video-Codec: MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Dateiendungen: MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Bildauflösung: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Untertitel: SMI (Untertitel funktionieren unter Umständen nicht korrekt, wenn die Videodatei nicht denselben Namen hat wie die Datei mit den Untertiteln.)
- Vorsicht: Hochauflösende Dateien mit Bitraten über 2 Mbps funktionieren unter Umständen nicht korrekt.
211
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „USB-Video“
Bildschirm „USB-Video“
5 Nächste Datei
8 9 * Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle Datei gespielt und der Name der
2 nächsten Datei wird angezeigt.
6 Vorherige Datei
3 Wiedergabe der vorherigen Datei.
10 * Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle Datei gespielt und der Name der
4 vorherigen Datei wird angezeigt.
7 Pause/Wiedergabe
Spielt/Unterbricht die aktuelle Datei.
Deutsch
6 7 5
11 8 Untertitelgröße
Ändert die Untertitelgröße.
* Diese Taste ist nur vorhanden, wenn es einen Untertitel gibt.
9 Vollbild
12 Ändert die Anzeige von Normalbildschirm auf Vollbildmodus.
* Beim Berühren eines Bereichs des Bildschirms ohne Tasten wird der Bildschirm auf
Vollbildmodus umgeschaltet.
10 Dateiindex
1 Betriebsmodus Anzeige der aktuellen Datei/aller Dateien im aktuellen Ordner.
11 Spielzeit
2 Übergeordneter Ordner Anzeige der aktuellen Spielzeit/Gesamtspielzeit.
Öffnet den übergeordneten Ordner * Ziehen oder berühren Sie den Balken, um die gewünschte Zeit auszuwählen.
3 Datei-/Ordnername 12 Registerkarte USB-Modus

Zeigt die aktuelle Datei und den aktuellen Ordner an. Wenn Sie die gewünschte Registerkarte auswählen, wird der gewählte
4 Videoliste Modus eingeschaltet.
Anzeige der Liste der Videodateien im aktuellen Ordner.
* Der Titel des derzeit gespielten Videos wird hervorgehoben
212
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Bilder-Modus starten
USB Bilder-Modus starten
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MODE, 2 - 1. Wenn der Bildschirm „USB 2 - 2. Oder berühren Sie die Regis- 3. Sobald das Bedienfeld für Bilder
Deutsch
um den Bildschirm mit dem Musik“ angezeigt wird, ziehen terkarte „USB Video“, um den angezeigt wird, wird das Bild im
Hauptmenü zu öffnen, dann Sie den Bildschirm nach USB Bilder-Modus zu starten. Vollbildmodus gezeigt.
drücken Sie [Medien]. rechts, um den USB Bil-
der-Modus zu starten. (Musik
→ Video → Bilder)
Hinweis
Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich mindestens eine Bilddatei auf dem USB-Gerät befindet. (Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, wenn sich Mediendateien auf dem USB-Ge-
rät befinden)
- Der Standardmodus für Medien ist USB Musik.
- Wenn man vom Musikmodus zum Bildmodus wechselt, wird die wiedergegebene Musik weiter gespielt.
- Wenn man vom Videomodus zum Bildmodus wechselt, wird der wiedergegebene Videoton weiter gespielt.
- Unterstütztes Bild-Format: JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
213
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „USB-Bilder“
Bildschirm „USB-Bilder“
4 Musikliste
1
7 8 9 Anzeige der Bilderliste des aktuellen Ordners.
* Der Titel des derzeit angezeigten Bildes wird hervorgehoben
2
5 Nächste Datei
10
4 * Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle Datei gespielt und der Name der
nächsten Datei wird angezeigt.
6 Vorherige Datei
Deutsch
6 5 Wiedergabe der nächsten Datei.

* Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle Datei gespielt und der Name der
vorherigen Datei wird angezeigt.
11 7 Diashow
Alle Bilder im USB-Gerät werden im gewählten Zeitintervall der Reihe nach
gezeigt
* Die Funktion Vergrößern/Verkleinern wird nicht unterstützt.
* Während der Fahrt ist die Funktion Diashow nicht verfügbar.
1 Betriebsmodus 8 Drehen
Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus. Dreht das Bild im Uhrzeigersinn.
2 Übergeordneter Ordner
9 Bild speichern
Öffnet den übergeordneten Ordner
Speichert das Bild, das gezeigt wird, wenn der Bildschirm ausgeschaltet ist.
3 Datei-/Ordnername
Anzeige von Ordner, Dateiname, Dateityp und Auflösung des aktuellen Bildes. 10 Dateiindex
Anzeige der aktuellen Datei/aller Dateien im aktuellen Ordner.
11 Registerkarte USB-Modus
Wenn Sie die gewünschte Registerkarte auswählen, wird der gewählte
Modus eingeschaltet.
214
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth-Modus
Vor der Verwendung von Bluetooth
1. Schalten Sie Bluetooth ein und setzen Sie das Telefon auf sichtbar, bevor Sie das Hauptgerät mit dem Handy verbinden.
2. Es können bis zu 5 Bluetooth-Geräte gekoppelt werden.
3. Es kann immer nur ein Bluetooth-Gerät gleichzeitig verbunden werden.
Deutsch
4. Die Lautstärke für die Freisprecheinrichtung beträgt mind. 6 und max. 40.
Bluetooth-Modus starten
1. Drücken Sie die Taste MODE, 2. Benachrichtigung für Bluetoo- 3-1. Drücken Sie [Ja], um den Bild- 3.-2 Wenn die Taste [Nein] ge-
um den Bildschirm mit dem th-Verbindung wird angezeigt. schirm für die Bluetooth-Ver- drückt wird, wird der Bildschirm
Hauptmenü zu öffnen, dann (Wenn keine Telefone gekoppelt bindung anzuzeigen. für Bluetooth-Telefon (Tastatur)
drücken Sie [Bluetooth]. wurden) angezeigt. Sie können auch
ein Gerät koppeln, indem Sie
auf diesem Bildschirm [Verbin-
den] drücken.
Hinweis
- Um mehr Geräte hinzuzufügen, müssen Sie eines der zuvor hinzugefügten Geräte löschen.
215
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Hauptmenü
Bluetooth Hauptmenü
7 1 Betriebsmodus
1
2
2 Anrufliste
Anzeige der Anrufliste mit den zuletzt gewählten/empfangenen/versäum-
3
8 ten Anrufen.
4 3 Kontakte
Anzeige des Bildschirms mit der Kontaktliste.
Deutsch
5 * Kontakte können nur angezeigt werden, wenn Sie heruntergeladen wurden.
6 4 Tastatur
Anzeige des Tastatur-Bildschirms.
5 Verbinden
Öffnet den Bildschirm „Bluetooth-Verbindungen“.
6 Bluetooth-Einstellungen
Öffnet den Bildschirm „Bluetooth-Einstellungen“.
7 Statussymbole
Anzeige des aktuellen Telefonstatus im Bildschirm rechts oben.
8 Name des Telefons

Zeigt den Namen des aktuell verbundenen Geräts an.
216
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth-Geräte koppeln
Suche vom Fahrzeug aus Automatische Verbindung
- Wenn die Zündung des Fahrzeugs
eingeschaltet wird (ACC, ON),
wird das Bluetooth-Gerät automa-
tisch gemäß der eingestellten Op-
tion verbunden.
- Wenn das vom Benutzer gewählte
Telefon nicht verbunden werden
kann, versucht das System auto-
1. Drücken Sie [Suche vom Fahr- 2. Geräte suchen. (Setzen Sie das 3. Wählen Sie den Namen des Ge- matisch, das zuletzt verbundene
Deutsch
zeug aus]. Mobiltelefon auf sichtbar.) räts, das verbunden werden soll. Telefon zu verbinden. Wenn das
zuletzt verbundene Telefon nicht
verbunden werden kann, versucht
das System, die gekoppelten Tele-
fone der Reihe nach zu verbinden.
(Wenn die Verbindung nach 1 Zy-
klus von Versuchen nicht gelingt,
wird der Versuch der automati-
schen Verbindung beendet.)
4. Überprüfen Sie den Code und 5. Der Bildschirm „Gekoppelte 6. Sobald die Bluetooth-Verbindung
fahren Sie fort mit dem Koppeln Geräte“ wird angezeigt. hergestellt wurde, wird der Name
über Ihr Bluetooth-Gerät. des verbundenen Mobiltelefons
angezeigt.
Hinweis
- Max. Suchzeit: 15 Sekunden, max. gesuchte Geräte: 20 Geräte
- Der Code wird in zufälliger Reihenfolge generiert.
- Wenn das Gerät nicht gefunden wird, überprüfen Sie bitte Folgendes.
* Ist die Bluetooth-Funktion auf Ihrem Bluetooth-Gerät eingeschaltet?
* Wurde Bluetooth auf nicht sichtbar gesetzt?
- Wenn Suchen und Verbinden weiterhin nicht funktioniert, starten Sie bitte Ihr Bluetooth-Gerät neu und versuchen Sie es noch einmal.
- Wenn das Gerät zuvor schon gekoppelt wurde, wählen Sie das Gerät aus der Liste der zu verbindenden Geräte aus.
217
GETtheMANUALS.org
Suche vom Gerät aus
1. Drücken Sie [Suche vom Gerät 2. Suchen Sie nach dem Fahr- 3. Der Bildschirm „Gekoppelte 4. Sobald die Bluetooth-Verbindung
Deutsch
aus]. zeugnamen und koppeln Sie das Geräte“ wird angezeigt. hergestellt wurde, wird der Name
Gerät. Überprüfen Sie den Code des verbundenen Mobiltelefons
und fahren Sie fort mit dem Kop- angezeigt.
peln über Ihr Bluetooth-Gerät.
Hinweis
- Der Code wird in zufälliger Reihenfolge generiert.
- Wenn das Gerät nicht gefunden wird, überprüfen Sie bitte Folgendes.
* Ist die Bluetooth-Funktion in Ihrem Bluetooth-Gerät eingeschaltet?
* Wurde Bluetooth auf nicht sichtbar gesetzt?
- Wenn Suchen und Verbinden weiterhin nicht funktioniert, starten Sie bitte Ihr Bluetooth-Gerät neu und versuchen Sie es noch einmal.
218
GETtheMANUALS.org
Trennen und Löschen von Bluetooth-Geräten
Trennen eines Geräts Löschen eines Geräts
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm 2. Wählen Sie den Namen des Ge- 1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm 2. Markieren Sie das Kästchen mit
Deutsch
„Bluetooth-Telefon“ [Verbinden]. räts, das getrennt werden soll. „Bluetooth-Telefon“ [Verbinden]. dem Namen des Geräts, das
gelöscht werden soll.
3. Drücken Sie zum Trennen auf [OK]. 3. Wählen Sie das aktivierte Papierkorb-Symbol, um das Gerät auf dem
Bildschirm „Gerät löschen“ zu wählen.
Hinweis
- Ein Gerät kann nicht gelöscht werden, wenn es verbunden ist. (Nur getrennte
Geräte können gelöscht werden.)
219
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „Bluetooth-Anruf“
Bildschirm „Bluetooth-Anruf“
1 Name des Telefons und Kontaktname/-nummer
Anzeige des Namens des aktuell verbundenen Geräts und des Namens/
3 4 5
der Nummer des anderen Gesprächsteilnehmers während eines Anrufs.
2 Anrufdauer
Zeigt die Anrufdauer an.
1 2
3 Anruf mit der Freisprecheinrichtung / Privater Anruf
Anzeige des aktuellen Anrufstatus (Drücken Sie hier um von der Freispre-
cheinrichtung auf Bluetooth Mobiltelefon umzuschalten).
Deutsch
4 Mikrofonlautstärke
7
6 Einstellung der Lautstärke abgehender Anrufe während des Anrufs. Stellt
die Lautstärke ein, die der andere Gesprächspartner hört (Werte 1~5).
(Diese Funktion kann nur während eines Anrufs mit der Freisprecheinrich-
tung verwendet werden)
5 Stumm
Ein- bzw. Ausschalten des Mikrofons. (Diese Funktion kann nur während
eines Anrufs mit der Freisprecheinrichtung verwendet werden)
6 Senden / Anruf / Ende

Ruft die Nummer an / beendet einen Anruf.
7 Tastatur
Wird zum Eingeben und Löschen der Nummern verwendet.
220
GETtheMANUALS.org
Anrufen
Anrufen Kontakte herunterladen
1. Geben Sie die Nummer ein. 2. Drücken Sie die Anruftaste. 1. W

ählen Sie die Taste [Kontakt]. Drü- 2. Bitte überprüfen Sie Ihr Handy und akzeptie-
ren Sie die Downloadanfrage. (Für Telefone
Deutsch
cken Sie [Kontakte herunterladen]. ist eine zusätzliche Bestätigung erforderlich.)
3. Anzeige der Anrufdauer während 3. Drücken Sie [OK] 4. Kontakte werden herunterge-
eines Anrufs. laden. (Erhält bei Abbruch den
vorherigen Status)
Hinweis
-B
eim Herunterladen ist für Telefone eine zusätzliche Bestätigung erforderlich. (Kann
separat mit Ihrem Mobilgerät eingestellt werden)
-D
iese Funktion wird bei manchen Kontaktarten nicht unterstützt (Google, T Contacts, etc).
-D
er Download wird fortgesetzt, auch wenn Sie zu einem anderen Modus wechseln,
während das Herunterladen noch im Gange ist.
-E
s können bis zu 1.000 Kontakte heruntergeladen werden.
-K
ontakte können nur vom Telefon heruntergeladen werden. Löschen oder Hinzufügen
wird nicht unterstützt.
-B
eim Herunterladen von Kontakten werden auch die letzten 150 Anruflisten herunter-
geladen. (Bis zu 50 gewählte, ankommende und versäumte Anruflisten werden jeweils
gespeichert.)
221
GETtheMANUALS.org
Einen Anruf über einen Kontakt tätigen
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm 2. Drücken Sie die Anruftaste um 3. Drücken Sie auf das Vergröße-
Deutsch
„Bluetooth-Telefon“ [Kontakte]. über den Listenbildschirm einen rungsglas, um nach Kontakten

Anruf zu tätigen. zu suchen.
4. Geben Sie einen Namen oder eine Telefonnummer ein und drücken Sie [Suche]. 5. Drücken Sie die Anruftaste, um 6. Der Bluetooth-Anruf beginnt.
über den Listenbildschirm einen
Anruf zu tätigen.
222
GETtheMANUALS.org
Annehmen eines Anrufs
Annehmen eines Anrufs
Deutsch
1. Bei einem eingehenden Anruf werden in 2. Zeigt Informationen über den Gesprächs- 3. Nach dem Ende eines Anrufs wird der
einem Fenster über den eingehenden partner und die Anrufzeit an davor verwendete Betriebsmodus wieder
Anruf Informationen über den anderen aktiviert.
Gesprächspartner angezeigt. Drücken Sie
[Freisprecheinrichtung] oder [Privat], um
den Anruf entgegenzunehmen. (Durch
Drücken von [Ablehnen] wird die Benach-
richtigung beendet und der davor verwen-
dete Betriebsmodus wieder aktiviert.)
Hinweis
- Wenn das Benachrichtigungsfenster über den eingehenden Anruf angezeigt wird, können die meisten Funktionen des AV-Modus nicht verwendet werden. Nach dem Ende
eines Anrufs werden die davor verwendeten Medien wiedergegeben.
- Die Diashow von USB Bilder wird jedoch beendet.
- Die Lautstärke im Freisprechmodus kann unabhängig von der Lautstärke im AV-Modus eingestellt werden.
223
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth-Einstellungen
Bluetooth ein-/ausschalten
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm „Bluetoo- 2. Drücken Sie [Bluetooth verwenden]. 3. Stellt ein, ob Bluetooth Auto Connection
th Telefon“ [Bluetooth Einstellungen]. verwendet werden soll, (Standardwert:
Hinweis Verwenden)
- Wenn Sie [Nicht verwenden] drücken, werden die meisten Funktionen deaktiviert ausgenommen [Bluetooth verwenden] und [Zurücksetzen].
Gerätenamen ändern
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm „Bluetooth 2. Drücken Sie [Gerätenamen ändern]. 3. Drücken Sie den Namen und dann
Telefon“ [Bluetooth Einstellungen]. [Fertig]. (Der Standardgerätename ist
SSANGYONG AVN)
224
GETtheMANUALS.org
Automatische Verbindung einrichten
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm „Bluetooth 2. Drücken Sie [Autoverbindung].
Telefon“ [Bluetooth Einstellungen].
Kontakteinstellungen
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm „Bluetooth 2. Drücken Sie [Kontakte]. 3. Stellt ein, ob die Kontakte beim Verbinden
Telefon“ [Bluetooth Einstellungen]. mit Bluetooth automatisch heruntergela-
den werden sollen. (Standardwert: [Nicht
verwenden].)
225
GETtheMANUALS.org
Anrufliste löschen.
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm 2. Drücken Sie [Anrufliste löschen]. 3. Drücken Sie [OK]. 4. Anrufliste ist gelöscht.
Deutsch
„Bluetooth Telefon“ [Bluetooth

Einstellungen].
Bluetooth zurücksetzen
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm 2. Drücken Sie [Zurücksetzen]. 3. Wenn das Benachrichtigungs-
„Bluetooth Telefon“ [Bluetooth fenster über die Rücksetzung
Einstellungen]. angezeigt wird, drücken Sie
[OK].
226
GETtheMANUALS.org
Klingelton-Einstellungen
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm „Bluetooth 2. Drücken Sie [Klingelton]. 3. Wählen Sie den gewünschten Klingelton.
Telefon“ [Bluetooth Einstellungen].
Hinweis
- Bei der Auswahl eines Klingeltons wird eine eine Vorschau auf den Klingelton einmal abgespielt.
227
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Musik
Vor der Verwendung von Bluetooth Musik Bildschirm „Bluetooth Musik“
1. Der Bluetooth Musik-Modus kann nur verwendet werden, wenn ein Bluetoo-
th-Telefon angeschlossen ist. 1
6
2. Wenn Bluetooth verbunden ist, wird automatisch Musik wiedergegeben,
wenn Sie den Bluetooth Musik-Modus eingeben.
- Wenn Auto Play nicht funktioniert, drücken Sie nochmals die Wiedergabetaste.
2
- Abhängig vom Music Player-Programm, das auf dem angeschlossenen
Gerät vorhanden ist, wird die Musik mitunter nicht automatisch abgespielt.
3 4 5
Deutsch
1 Betriebsmodus
2 Songinformationen
Anzeige von Lied-, Künstler-, Albuminformationen.
3 Vorherige Datei
4 Pause/Wiedergabe
5 Nächste Datei
Wiedergabe der nächsten Datei.
6 Bluetooth-Telefon
Startet den Bluetooth Telefon-Modus.
228
GETtheMANUALS.org
Meine Musik
Was ist Meine Musik? Bildschirm „Meine Musik“
- Meine Musik bezieht sich auf eine 7 Nächste Datei
1
Funktion, in der Musikdateien 9 10 11
Wiedergabe der nächsten Datei.
in einem USB-Speicher oder * Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle
Datei gespielt und der Name der nächsten Datei
Dateien von Radioaufnahmen im angezeigt wird.
System gespeichert werden, um 2
Albumgrafik
8
sie im Fahrzeug abzuspielen. 8 Anzeige der Albumgrafik.
4
- Diese Funktion funktioniert nur, 5 6 7 9 Wiederholung
wenn sich mindestens eine Mu- Wiederholt die aktuelle Datei oder alle Dateien
3 in Meine Musik.
Deutsch
sikdatei im System befindet. 12
* Jedes Mal, wenn die Taste gedrückt wird, wechselt
die Option zwischen: Datei wiederholen → Ordner
Meine Musik starten wiederholen → Eine wiederholen.
10 Zufallswiedergabe
Wiedergabe der Dateien in zufälliger Reihenfolge.
1 Betriebsmodus 11 Datei löschen

Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus. Löscht die aktuelle Datei.
2 Radioaufnahme-Ordner
Anzeige der in Meine Musik gespeicherten Radioaufnahme-Dateien. 12 Spielzeit
Anzeige der aktuellen Spielzeit/Gesamtspielzeit.
3 Musikliste * Ziehen oder berühren Sie den Balken, um die ge-
1. Drücken Sie im Bildschirm mit Anzeige der Musikliste im aktuellen Ordner. wünschte Zeit auszuwählen.
* Der Titel des derzeit gespielten Liedes wird hervorgehoben
dem Hauptmenü [Meine Musik].
4 Dateiinformation
Zeigt die aktuelle Dateiinformation an.
*Lied, Künstler und Album.
5 Vorherige Datei
* Während die Taste gedrückt ist, wird die aktuelle Datei gespielt und der
Name der nächsten Datei wird angezeigt.
6 Pause/Wiedergabe
229
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX-Modus
AUX-Modus starten Bildschirm „AUX-Modus“
1 1 Betriebsmodus
2 3
2 Startbildschirm
Öffnet den Startbildschirm (PIP).
3 Zurück
Öffnet den vorherigen Bildschirm.
1. Drücken Sie im Bildschirm mit
Deutsch
dem Hauptmenü auf [AUX].
2. Wenn ein Stecker eines exter-

nen Geräts am AUX-Eingang
angeschlossen ist, startet der
AUX-Modus.
Vorsicht!
- Für den Anschluss eines externen Geräts wird die Verwendung eines 3-poligen AUX-Kabels empfohlen.
- Wenn eine AUX-Buchse ohne externes Gerät angesteckt wird, schaltet das System auf AUX-Modus um, es ist allerdings nur Rauschen zu hören. Achten Sie darauf, die
AUX-Buchse abzuziehen, wenn der AUX-Modus nicht verwendet wird.
- Wenn das externe Gerät an die Strombuchse angeschlossen ist, kann bei der Wiedergabe von diesem Gerät ein Rauschen zu hören sein. In diesen Fällen trennen Sie vor
der Verwendung den Stromanschluss.
230
GETtheMANUALS.org
Einstellungen
Anzeige des Bildschirms für Anzeige des Bildschirms für
die Radioeinstellungen
RDS-Einstellungen die Navigationseinstellungen
Navigationseinstellungen
1. D
rücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des 1. Drücken Sie [RDS] und stellen 1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten 1. Stellen Sie am Bildschirm für die
Deutsch
Systems die Taste EINSTELLUN- Sie ein, ob RDS-Funktionen ver- des Systems die Taste EIN- Navigationseinstellungen ein,
GEN und halten Sie sie gedrückt. wendet werden sollen. Drücken STELLUNGEN und halten Sie ob die Navigation beim Starten
Sie die Taste Zurücksetzen sie gedrückt. automatisch beginnen soll.
oben rechts um die Einstellun- Drücken Sie die Taste Zurück-
gen zurückzusetzen. (Standard- setzen oben rechts um die
wert: AF) Einstellungen zurückzusetzen.
(Standardwert: Auto-Start)
Einstellung der PTY-Suche
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Ein-

stellungen“ auf [Radio]. 2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Ein-
stellungen“ auf [Navigation].
1. Drücken Sie [PTY Seek] und

wählen Sie die gewünschten
Optionen. Drücken Sie die Taste
Zurücksetzen oben rechts,
um die Einstellungen zurückzu-
setzen. (Standardwert: keiner)
231
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „Uhreinstellungen“ anzeigen Uhrzeiteinstellungen
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des 1. D

rücken Sie [Zeit], um die aktuelle Uhrzeit
Systems die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN und einzustellen. Drücken Sie die TasteZurück-
halten Sie sie gedrückt. setzen oben rechts, um die Einstellungen
zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert: 2015-01-01,
Uhrzeit ist wie im System angezeigt)
Uhreinstellungen
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Einstellungen“

auf [Uhr].
1. Drücken Sie [Uhr], um den Uhrentyp ein-

zustellen. Drücken Sie die Taste Zurück-
setzen oben rechts, um die Einstel-
lungen zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert:
Analog, 12 Stunden)
232
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bildschirm „Audioeinstellungen“ anzeigen Einstellungen für Balance/Fade EQ-Einstellungen
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des Systems 1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm für die Balance/Fader-Einstellungen 1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm für die EQ-Ein-
Deutsch
die Taste nach oben/unten/rechts/links oder berühren Sie die Position,
die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN und halten Sie sie um die gewünschte Tonposition einzustellen. Drücken Sie die Taste stellungen auf die Taste +/-, um die Werte für
Zurücksetzen oben rechts, um die Einstellungen zurückzusetzen.
gedrückt. (Standardwert: Fader 00, Balance 00)
Bässe/Mitten/Höhen einzustellen. Drücken Sie
die Taste Zurücksetzen oben rechts, um die
Hinweis
Einstellungen zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert:
- Fader/Balance wird verwendet, um die Intensität der
Lautsprecher für bestimmte Positionen einzustellen.
Höhen 00, Mitte 00, Bässe 00)
Audioeinstellungen Andere Einstellungen
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Einstellungen“ auf

[Ton].
1. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Audioeinstellungen“ [Naviga- 1. Drücken Sie [Andere], um den Piepton und AVC
tion], um die Navigation priorisiert einzustellen. Drücken Sie einzustellen. Drücken Sie die Taste Zurücksetzen
die Taste Zurücksetzen oben rechts, um die Einstellun-
oben rechts, um die Einstellungen zurückzuset-
gen zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert: Priorität Navigation)
zen. (Standardwert: Piepton - Ein, AVC - Aus)
Hinweis
Hinweis
- Navigation Priorität: Audiolautstärke für den Vordersitz ist
bei Navigationsinformationen auf stumm geschaltet - Piepton: ertönt jedes Mal, wenn die Taste berührt wird.
- Priorität Audio: Navigation hat fixe Lautstärke. - AVC(Auto Volume Control): Bei eingeschaltetem AVC
- Gleiches Verhältnis: Der Ton der Navigationsinformatio- wird die Lautstärke automatisch an die Fahrzeugge-
nen kann über die Lautstärkeregelung geregelt werden, schwindigkeit angepasst
233
GETtheMANUALS.org
Anzeige des Bildschirms für
die Bookmarkeinstellungen
Bookmark hinzufügen
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des 1. Drücken und halten Sie die 2. Dann positionieren Sie sie durch 3. Die Menüpunkte werden hinzugefügt.
Deutsch
Systems die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN Menüpunkte, die Sie aus der Drag & Drop an die gewünschte Drücken Sie die Taste Zurücksetzen
und halten Sie sie gedrückt. Liste auf der linken Seite hinzu- Stelle auf der rechten Seite. oben rechts, um die Einstellungen
zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert: keiner)
fügen wollen.
Bookmark löschen
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Ein-

stellungen“ auf [Bookmark].
1. Drücken und halten Sie die 2. Dann positionieren Sie sie durch 3. Die Menüpunkte werden ge-
Menüpunkte, die Sie löschen Drag & Drop in die Liste auf der löscht. Drücken Sie die Taste
wollen. linken Seite. Zurücksetzen oben rechts,
um die Einstellungen zurückzu-
setzen. (Standardwert: keiner)
234
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ändern der Bookmarkreihenfolge
Deutsch
1. Drücken und halten Sie die Menüpunkte, 2. Dann positionieren Sie sie durch Drag & 3. Die Menüpunkte werden verschoben. Drü-
die Sie verschieben wollen. Drop an die gewünschte Stelle. cken Sie die Taste Zurücksetzen oben
rechts, um die Einstellungen zurückzuset-
zen. (Standardwert: keiner)
235
GETtheMANUALS.org
Anzeige des Bildschirms für die
Spracheinstellungen
Spracheinstellungen
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des Sys- 1. Wählen Sie auf dem Bildschirm für die
tems die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN und halten Spracheinstellungen die gewünschte Spra-
Sie sie gedrückt. che und drücken Sie die Bestätigungstaste
rechts oben. Das System wird automatisch
neu gestartet und die Systemsprache wird
geändert. Drücken Sie die Taste Zurück-
setzen oben rechts, um die Einstel-
lungen zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert:
Englisch)
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Einstellungen“

auf [Sprache].
236
GETtheMANUALS.org
Anzeige des Bildschirms für
die Radioeinstellungen
Einstellung der Beleuchtung
1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des 1. Drücken Sie auf dem Bildschirm für die Be- 2. Autobeleuchtung 3. Tagmodus
Deutsch
Systems die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN leuchtungseinstellung auf die Taste +/-, um
-S tellt automatisch die Helligkeit des - Bildschirmhelligkeit bleibt auf
und halten Sie sie gedrückt. die Helligkeit des Bildschirms einzustellen.
(Standardwert: Autobeleuchtung) Bildschirms und die Farben ein. hell, Kartenfarben bleiben auf
Tagmodus eingestellt.
2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm 4. Nachtmodus 5. Sync-Navigation

„Einstellungen“ [Bildschirm]. - Bildschirmhelligkeit bleibt auf - Der Bildschirm für die Naviga-
dunkel, Kartenfarben bleiben auf tionskarte ist je nach Beleuch-
Nachtmodus eingestellt. tungseinstellung auf Tag- oder
Nachtmodus eingestellt.
Drücken Sie die Taste Zurück-

setzen oben rechts, um die
Einstellungen zurückzusetzen.
237
GETtheMANUALS.org
Einstellungen des Anzeige- Einstellungen für ausgeschal- Anzeige des Bildschirms für
verhältnisses teten Bildschirm
Andere Einstellungen die Systemeinstellungen
1. Drücken Sie [Verhältnis], um das 1. Drücken Sie [Bildschirm AUS], 1. D

iese Funktion wird verwendet, um die 1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des
Deutsch
Anzeigeverhältnis der Videoan- um den Bildschirm auszuschal- Einstellungen für leeren Bildschirm, Bild, Systems die Taste EINSTELLUNGEN
zeige anzuzeigen. Drücken Sie ten. Drücken Sie die Taste Uhr und Einparkhilfe vorzunehmen. und halten Sie sie gedrückt.
die Taste Zurücksetzen oben Zurücksetzen oben rechts,
rechts, um die Einstellungen um die Einstellungen zurückzu-
zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert: setzen. (Standardwert: Aus)
Vollbild)
2. D
rücken Sie die Taste Reset 2. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Ein-
oben rechts, um die Einstellungen stellungen“ auf [System].
zurückzusetzen. (Standardwert:
Uhr und Einparkhilfe anzeigen)
Hinweis Hinweis
- Wenn Sie das Gerät nur zur Au- - In „andere Einstellungen“ können Sie
diowiedergabe nützen, kann diese die Ansicht einstellen, die zu sehen ist,
Funktion sehr nützlich sein. wenn das Gerät ausgeschaltet ist.
- Der Ton wird auch bei abgeschalte- - Die Funktion Bilder ist verfügbar, wenn
tem Bildschirm wiedergegeben. der Benutzer Bilder in das System
gespeichert hat.
- Berühren Sie den Touchscreen an
einer beliebigen Stelle, um den Bild- - Zeigt das vom Benutzer gewählte
schirm wieder einzuschalten. Bild an.
238
GETtheMANUALS.org
Version Zurücksetzen Aktualisieren Vorsicht!
- Beim Zurücksetzen des Systems werden vom
Benutzer generierte Systemdaten und vom
Benutzer vorgenommene Einstellungen auf
die Werkseinstellungen zurückgesetzt.
Funktion Modus Status
Radio FM1 89,1 MHz
Zufallswie-
AUS
dergabe
Musik
1. Drücken Sie [Version], um die Sys- 1. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Syste- 1. Drücken Sie am Bildschirm „Syste- Wiederho-
Alle
teminformationen anzuzeigen. Diese meinstellungen“ [Zurücksetzen]. meinstellungen“ [Aktualisieren]. lung
Funktion wird verwendet, um Boot- Untertitel-
Deutsch
Klein
loader, Betriebssystem, Anwendung, größe
Medien Video
Firmware und andere Informationen Bild-
über die Systemversion anzuzeigen. schirm- Vollbild
größe
Diashow AUS
Bild
Rotate Werksein-
(Drehen) stellungen
Trennt ein Gerät und

Freisprech-
2. Drücken Sie [OK]. 2. Durch Drücken von [OK] wird das Bluetooth
funktion
löscht alle gekoppelten
Geräte
System zurückgesetzt.
Ton Priorität Navigation
Einstellun-
Navigation Auto-Start
gen
Bookmark Löscht Menüpunkte
3. D
ie Initialisierung wird fortgesetzt, nachdem Sie
ausgewählt haben, ob Musikdateien in Meine
Musik gelöscht werden sollen.
Hinweis Hinweis
-B
ei einem Systemreset werden die bestehen- - Ein USB-Speicher mit den Update-Dateien
den Einstellungen und Konfigurationen wieder ist erforderlich.
auf die Standardwerte zurückgestellt.
-D
er Benutzer kann wählen, ob die in Meine
Musik gespeicherte Musikdateien gelöscht
werden sollen.
239
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod-Modus
Vor der Verwendung von iPod Bildschirm „iPod“
Wir empfehlen die Verwendung des von Apple gelieferten iPod-Kabels. 1
9 10
2
Apple CarPlay ist nicht verfügbar, wenn iPod verwendet wird.
8
enn Sie den iPod-Modus über ein iPhone verwenden, muss die
W
Einstellung „CarPlay verwendet werden“ in den iPhone Einstellungen 4
deaktiviert werden. 3
5 6 7
Deutsch
11
1 Betriebsmodus 7 Nächste Datei

Anzeige des aktuellen Betriebsmodus. Wiedergabe der nächsten Datei.
2 Kategorie * wenn diese Taste gedrückt und gehalten wird, läuft der
der Vorgang wie die Gerätevorgänge des iPods ab.
Anzeige der aktuellen Kategorie.
3 Kategorienliste 8 Albumgrafik
Anzeige aller Kategorienlisten. Anzeige der Albumgrafik.
* Je nach iPod-Gerät kann die Kategori-
enliste unterschiedlich sein. 9 Wiederholung
Wiederholt die aktuelle Datei oder alle Dateien
4 Dateiinformation in Meine Musik.
Zeigt die aktuelle Dateiinformation an. * Jedes Mal, wenn die Taste gedrückt wird, wechselt
*Lied, Künstler, Album und alle Dateien. die Option zwischen: Wiederholen aus → Eine wie-
derholen → Alle wiederholen.
5 Vorherige Datei
Wiedergabe der vorherigen Datei. 10 Zufallswiedergabe
* wenn diese Taste gedrückt und gehal- Wiedergabe der Dateien in zufälliger Reihenfolge.
ten wird, läuft der der Vorgang wie die
Gerätevorgänge des iPods ab. 11 Spielzeit
6 Pause/Wiedergabe Anzeige der aktuellen Spielzeit/Gesamtspielzeit.
*Z
iehen oder berühren Sie den Balken, um die gewünschte
Spielt/Unterbricht die aktuelle Datei. Zeit auszuwählen. (Diese Funktion wird möglicherweise
von manchen Mobiltelefonen nicht unterstützt.)
240
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod-Modus starten
iPod-Modus automatisch starten iPod-Modus manuell starten
Deutsch
1. Verwenden Sie ein iPod-Anschlusskabel, 1. Drücken Sie auf den Drucktasten des 2. Gleiten Sie von unten nach oben über den
um das iPod-Gerät an den USB-Anschluss Systems die Taste MODE. Bildschirm oder drücken Sie den Seitenanzeige-
anzuschließen. bereich an der linken Seite des Bildschirms.
2. Sobald ein iPod verbunden ist, wird auto- 3. Drücken Sie [iPod], um den iPod-Modus 4. Die Liedinformation wird angezeigt und
matisch der iPod-Modus gestartet. zu starten. das Lied wird automatisch wiedergegeben.
Hinweis
Wenn das iPod schon verbunden ist und Sie das iPod in einem anderen Modus abspielen wollen, siehe den
Abschnitt „iPod manuell starten“.
241
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Was ist Apple CarPlay? Apple CarPlay-Bildschirm
1. Wenn Sie Ihr iPhone mit dem System verbinden, können Sie be-
2
quem verschiedene Funktionen verwenden, einschließlich Telefon,
Navigation, Nachrichten, Musik und Siri.
2. Die verfügbaren Funktionen und Vorgänge können je nach iPho-
ne-Modell variieren.
3. Apple CarPlay ist möglicherweise in Ihrem Land oder in Ihrer
Region nicht verfügbar. (http://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availabili-
ty/#applecarplay-applecarplay)
Vor der Verwendung von Apple CarPlay

Deutsch
3
1. Bevor Sie Ihr Handy anschließen, überprüfen Sie in Einstellung → Allgemein →
Einschränkungen, ob die Verwendung von Apple CarPlay eingestellt ist.
2. Bevor Sie Ihr Handy anschließen, überprüfen Sie in Einstellung → Allgemein →
Siri, ob Siri eingestellt ist.
3. Apple CarPlay funktioniert mit iPhone 5 oder höheren Versionen. 1
4. Apple CarPlay funktioniert mit iOS 7.1, es wird jedoch die neueste Version
empfohlen.
5. Es ist nicht möglich, oncar, iPod und Apple CarPlay gleichzeitig zu verwenden.
6. Wir empfehlen die Verwendung der von Apple gelieferten iPhone-Kabel. 1 Home
7. Beim Verbinden von und Einstieg in Apple CarPlay, wird der Ton des vorherigen Zurück zum Startbildschirm von CarPlay
Modus beibehalten. Nur der Bildschirm wird umgestellt.
8. Es ist nicht möglich, Apple CarPlay und Bluetooth Audio gleichzeitig zu verwen-
den. 2 Startbildschirm
9. Die meisten Funktionen von Apple CarPlay erfordern eine Datennutzung. Stellen Apple CarPlay Startbildschirm
Sie vor der Verwendung von Apple CarPlay sicher, dass Sie für Ihr Handy ein
Datenkontingent haben. 3 Aktuelle Wiedergabe
10. Beim Verbinden von Apple CarPlay startet die Spracherkennung basierend auf Öffnet die aktuelle Audioquelle.
Siri. Die Funktion Fahrzeug-Spracherkennung kann nicht verwendet werden-
11. Weitere Informationen erhalten Sie auf der Website von Apple (http://www.
apple.com/kr/ios/carplay/)
242
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay-Modus
Verwendung von Siri Apple CarPlay-Modus starten
Deutsch
1. Drücken Sie die Sprachsteuerungstaste 2. Oder drücken und halten Sie die Taste 1. Verbinden Sie Ihr iPhone mit einem
auf dem Lenkrad, um Siri zu starten. Home auf dem Apple CarPlay Startbild- USB-Kabel mit Ihrem Fahrzeug.
schirm, um Siri zu starten.
3. Oder Drücken und halten Sie die Taste 2. Drücken Sie [Apple CarPlay].
Home auf dem iPhone, um Siri zu starten.
Hinweis
- Wenn Bluetooth verbunden war, wird Bluetooth beim
Verbinden von Apple CarPlay getrennt.
243
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Vor der Verwendung von Android Auto Android Auto-Bildschirm
1. Laden Sie die Android Auto App auf Ihr Android-Telefon mit Android
6
5.0 Lollipop oder höher herunter. 7
2. Wir empfehlen die Verwendung des mitgelieferten Android-Telefon
Kabels.
3. Beim Verbinden von Android Auto wird Bluetooth automatisch
verbunden.
- Wenn die maximale Anzahl der registrierten Geräte überschrit-
ten wird, wird ein Gerät, das in letzter Zeit nicht verbunden war,
gelöscht.
Deutsch
4. Bluetooth Musik ist nicht verbunden.

5. Es ist nicht möglich, CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay und Android
Auto gleichzeitig zu verwenden.
6. Android Auto ist möglicherweise in Ihrem Land oder in Ihrer Region
nicht verfügbar. Informationen dazu finden Sie auf der Website:
(http://www.android.com/auto/#what-you-need) 1 2 3 4 5
7. Beim Verbinden von und Einstieg in Android Auto wird der Ton des
vorherigen Modus beibehalten. Nur der Bildschirm wird umgestellt.
8. Die meisten Funktionen von Android Auto erfordern eine Datennut-
zung. Stellen Sie vor der Verwendung von Apple CarPlay sicher, 1 Karte 5 Zum System zurückkehren
dass Sie für Ihr Handy ein Datenkontingent haben. Startet die Funktion Karte(Navigation). Öffnet den Bildschirm mit dem
9. Für weitere Informationen über Android Auto besuchen Sie bitte die Telefon Hauptmenü des Systems.
2
Support-Seite von Google: (http://support.google.com/androidauto) Startet die Funktion Telefon. 6 Spracherkennung
3 Startbildschirm Startet die Funktion Spracherkennung.
Öffnet den Startbildschirm. 7 Startbildschirm
4 Musik Startbildschirm von Android Auto.
Startet die Funktion Musik. * Anzeige des Musik- und Wetter-Widget.
244
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto-Modus starten
Erste Schritte
Deutsch
1. Verbinden Sie Ihr Android-Telefon über ein 2. Der Bildschirm mit dem Hauptmenü wird 3. Drücken Sie [Android Auto], um den Modus
USB-Kabel mit Ihrem Fahrzeug. automatisch angezeigt und die Taste And- einzugeben.
roid Auto wird aktiviert. (Wenn Android
Auto schon verbunden ist, Drücken Sie
auf den Drucktasten des Systems die Tas-
te [MODE], um zum Bildschirm mit dem
Hauptmenü zurückzukehren.)
eim Verbinden von Android Auto wird Blue-

B
tooth automatisch verbunden.
Hinweis
* Beim Verbinden von Android Auto wird Bluetooth automatisch verbunden.
* Bluetooth Musik ist nicht verbunden.
* Es ist nicht möglich, iPod, Apple CarPlay und Android Auto gleichzeitig zu verwenden.
* Es wird empfohlen, das vorgesehene Kabel zu verwenden.
245
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Manual
Was ist e-Manual?
Mit dieser Funktion können Sie bequem die Methoden für die Ver-
wendung der wesentlichen Funktionen des Systems überprüfen.
Dieses e-manual kann von den tatsächlichen Funktionen des

Produktes abweichen.
Deutsch
1. Wählen Sie auf der linken Seite das gewünschte Menü aus. Für De-
tails über die Funktionsweise verwenden Sie die Tasten / , um
zwischen den Seiten zu navigieren.
246
GETtheMANUALS.org
Einschränkung von Funktionen aus Sicherheitsgründen
Einschränkung von Funktionen aus Sicherheitsgründen
D
ie Funktion „Video“ und einige andere Funktionen, sind zu Ihrer eigenen
Sicherheit deaktiviert, wenn das Fahrzeug in Bewegung ist.
- Während der Fahrt ist die Video-Funktion nicht verfügbar. Der Audio-Player
ist vom Ausschalten der Videofunktion nicht betroffen.
- Während der Fahrt ist die Funktion Diashow nicht verfügbar.
Wenn die Feststellbremse aktiviert ist, wird der Sperrbildschirm geschlossen.
Deutsch
247
GETtheMANUALS.org
Rückfahrkamera
Dieses System ist zu Ihrer Sicherheit mit einer Rückfahrkamera ausgestattet, um den Sichtbereich zu erweitern.
Die Rückfahrkamera wird automatisch eingeschaltet, wenn der Schalthebel in die Position R gestellt wird, egal welcher Modus derzeit aktiv ist.
Wenn der Schalthebel in eine andere Position gestellt wird, wird die Rückfahrkamera automatisch ausgeschaltet.
Wenn die Rückfahrkamera in Betrieb ist, kann die Lautstärke verändert und auf stumm gestellt werden.
Deutsch
1. Stellen Sie den Zündschlüssel auf ACC oder ON.

2. Stellen Sie den Schalthebel in Position R.
Vorsicht!
- Die Darstellung der Distanz im Rückfahrkamerabildschirm weicht möglicherweise von der tatsächlichen Distanz ab. Fahren Sie immer vorsichtig und sehen Sie vor dem
Fahren zur Sicherheit nach hinten, nach rechts und nach links.
- Wenn die Rückfahrkamera im Betrieb ist, werden nur die Funktionen Lautstärke und ankommende Anrufe unterstützt.
248
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM-Modus - Optional
Dieses Gerät unterstützt auch Around View Monitor (AVM) für zusätzliche Sicherheit.
AVM ist eine optionale Funktion.
Durch Betätigen des AVM-Schalters oder durch Schalten in den Gang R wird der Monitor automatisch in den Modus AVM umgestellt, egal welcher
Modus derzeit aktiv ist.
Wenn Sie den AVM-Schalter nochmals betätigen oder einen anderen Gang einlegen, wird der AVM-Modus automatisch beendet und der vorherige
Modus wieder gestartet.
Im AVM-Modus kann die Lautstärke verändert und auf stumm gestellt werden.
Das Umschalten zwischen 2D- und 3D-Ansicht ist mit der Ansichtsmodus-Funktion in den AVM-Einstellungen möglich.
2D-Anzeige 3D-Anzeige
Deutsch
Vorsicht!
- Die Darstellung der Distanz im AVM-Bildschirm kann von der tatsächlichen Distanz abweichen. Fahren Sie immer vorsichtig und sehen Sie vor dem Fahren zur Sicherheit
nach hinten, nach rechts und nach links.
- Im AVM-Modus werden nur die Funktionen Lautstärke und ankommende Anrufe unterstützt.
249
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM-Einstellungen
Sync PGS-Richtlinien PAS Abstandswarnung Ansichtsmodus
Deutsch
1. Stellt ein, ob die PGS-Richtlinie verwendet 1. Stellt ein, ob die PAS-Abstandswarnung 1.

Stellt den Ansichtsmodus ein. (Standard-
werden soll. (Standardwert: Ein) verwendet werden soll. (Standardwert: Ein) wert: 2D-Anzeige)
250
GETtheMANUALS.org
Produktspezifikationen
Name TFT LCD-Display AVN EINHEIT für Fahrzeuge Unterstützte MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Dateien TS, WMV
Stromversorgung 14,4 V DC Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Betriebsstrom 9 V DC ~ 16 V DC Unterstützung von
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Untertiteln / Auflösung
Stromaufnahme 2A
Allgemein Unterstützte Dateien MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Schlafstrom 3 mA (nur Hauptgerät) Audio Bitrate 32 Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Betriebstempe- Samplingfrequenz 32 KHz, 44,1 KHz, 48 KHz

-30℃ ~ +75℃
Deutsch
ratur
Foto Dateiformat JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Lagertemperatur -40℃ ~ +85℃
Kompatibilität BLUTOOTH V4.1
Abmessungen 278,4 (B) x 175,5 (H) X 191,5 (T) mm Frequenzband-
2402 ~ 2480 MHz
breite
Gewicht 2.5 kg Unterstützte
Profile A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Bildschirmgröße 203,90 mm (B) x 114,70 (H) mm (aktive Fläche) Bluetooth
Sende-Ausgang
3,0 dBm
Auflösung 921.600 Pixel
Bildschirm
Betriebsart TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), Aktivmatrix Modulationsart FHSS(GFSK)
Hintergrundbeleuch- Kanal 79
LED
tung
Frequenzbereich FM: 87,5 ~ 108,0 MHz (Schritt: 100 kHz)

AM: 522~1620 kHz (Schritt: 9 kHz)
Radio
Empfindlichkeit FM: 10 dBuV, AM: 40 dBuV EMF
Konformi-
SD 1 Schlitz, 16 GB tätserklä-
rung
Speicher- USB 1 Anschluss, USB2.0 HOST
gerät Hiermit erklärt Digen Co., Ltd., dass der Funkanlagentyp [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] der Richtlinie 2014/53/EU entspricht.
Der vollständige Text der EU-Konformitätserklärung ist unter der folgenden Internetadresse erhältlich: http://www.digen.co.kr.
Format FAT 16/32 Eine Kopie der Konformitätserklärung in der Originalsprache ist dem Gerät beigelegt.
251
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bevor Sie annehmen, dass das Produkt nicht richtig funktioniert

Die auf dem Navigationsgerät angezeigte aktuelle Position kann von der tatsächlichen Position (Fahrposition und Fahrverhältnisse) unter
den folgenden Umständen abweichen.
Die folgenden Situationen sind keine Funktionsstörung.
Wenn Sie Y-förmig verzweigte Straßen mit spitzem Winkel befahren, kann Wenn Sie in einer Fahrzeugkolonne oder an Kreuzungen häufig anhalten
die aktuelle Position in die andere Richtung angezeigt werden. und wieder anfahren.
Die aktuelle Positionsmarke kann in die entgegengesetzte Richtung ange- Wenn Sie auf rutschigen Untergründen fahren wie tiefem Sand, Schnee, etc.
zeigt werden. Wenn Sie mit angelegten Schneeketten fahren.
Deutsch
Auf Straßen innerhalb von Städten kann die aktuelle Position auf der
Wenn die Reifen vor Kurzem erneuert wurden. (Vor allem, wenn Sie mit
anderen Straßenseite oder außerhalb der Fahrbahn dargestellt werden.
einem Ersatzrad oder Studless-Reifen fahren).
Wenn die Vergrößerungsstufe von maximaler Vergrößerung verringert
Wenn Sie Reifen mit einer ungeeigneten Größe verwenden.
wird, kann es vorkommen, dass die aktuelle Position auf einer anderen
Straße dargestellt wird Wenn die 4 Reifen einen unterschiedlichen Reifendruck aufweisen.
Wenn das Fahrzeug auf eine Fähre oder auf einen Autotransporter Wenn der Ersatzreifen abgefahren oder verschlissen ist. (Vor allem Stud-
verladen wird, kann die aktuelle Position auf der letzten Position vor dem less-Reifen, die mehr als zwei Saisonen verwendet wurden)
Verladen stagnieren. Wenn Sie in der Nähe von Hochhäusern fahren.
Wenn die Batterieklemme entfernt wird. Wenn ein Dachträger installiert ist.
Wenn Sie auf einer spiralförmigen Straße fahren. Wenn Sie eine Langstrecke berechnen, während Sie auf einer Autobahn fahren.
Wenn Sie in Bergregionen mit engen Kurven oder plötzlichen Bremsma-
In diesen Fällen ist das System durch das Weiterfahren automatisch in der
növern fahren.
Lage, einen Kartenabgleich durchzuführen oder die aktualisierten GPS-In-
Wenn Sie eine Tiefgarage, ein Parkhaus oder eine Straße mit vielen formation zu verwenden, um die aktuelle Position zu liefern. (Das kann in
Kurven verlassen. solchen Fällen einige Minuten dauern.)
252
GETtheMANUALS.org
Die Routeninfo kann unter bestimmten Suchbedingungen oder an bestimmen Orten unkorrekt sein.

Beim Fahren auf einer geraden Straße kann die Routeninfo dazu auffor- Die Routeninfo kann zum Einfahren in eine Straße mit Fahrverbot auffordern
dern, geradeaus zu fahren. (Straße, bei der die Zufahrt verboten ist, in Bau befindliche Straße, etc.)
Wenn man an einer Kreuzung abgebogen ist, steht möglicherweise keine Wenn die Straßen, die zu Ihrem Ziel führen, zu schmal sind oder nicht
Routeninfo zur Verfügung. existieren, kann die Routeninfo zu einem Ort führen, der etwas von Ihrem
Deutsch
aktuellen Ziel entfernt liegt.
Es gibt bestimmte Kreuzungen, an denen es keine Routeninfo gibt.
Wenn das Fahrzeug die angezeigte Route verlässt, kann dies zu einer
Die Routeninfo kann an Kreuzungen, an denen eine Kehrtwende verboten falschen Routeninfo führen. (z. B.: Wenn an einer Kreuzung abgebogen wird,
ist, zu einer Kehrtwende auffordern. obwohl die Routeninfo den Fahrer dazu auffordert, geradeaus zu fahren.)
Nach einer Neuberechnung der Route sind diese Situationen möglich.

Wenn Sie an einer Kreuzung abbiegen, kann die Routeninfo für eine Die Routeninfo kann zum Einfahren in eine Straße mit Fahrverbot auffordern
andere Position angezeigt werden. (Straße, bei der die Zufahrt verboten ist, in Bau befindliche Straße, etc.)
Wenn die Straßen, die zu Ihrem Ziel führen, zu schmal sind oder nicht
Beim Fahren mit hoher Geschwindigkeit kann die Neuberechnung der existieren, kann die Routeninfo zu einem Ort führen, der etwas von Ihrem
Route einen längeren Zeitraum in Anspruch nehmen. aktuellen Ziel entfernt liegt.
Wenn das Fahrzeug die angezeigte Route verlässt, kann dies zu einer
Die Routeninfo kann an Kreuzungen, an denen eine Kehrtwende verboten falschen Routeninfo führen. (z. B.: Wenn an einer Kreuzung abgebogen wird,
ist, zu einer Kehrtwende auffordern. obwohl die Routeninfo den Fahrer dazu auffordert, geradeaus zu fahren.)
253
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bevor Sie annehmen, dass ein Produktfehler vorliegt
Bevor Sie annehmen, dass ein Produktfehler vorliegt
1. Fehler, die während des Betriebs oder der Installation des Geräts auftreten, können irrtümlich für eine Störung dieses Gerätes gehalten werden.
2. Wenn Sie Probleme mit dem Gerät haben, versuchen Sie eine der folgenden Lösungen.
3. Wenn die Probleme weiter bestehen, kontaktieren Sie Ihren Händler oder ein Servicezentrum.
Problem Gegenmaßnahme
Wurde die Zündung eingeschaltet, d. h. sie steht auf „ACC“ oder „ON“?
Ton oder Video funktionieren nicht.
Ist das Anschlusskabel instabil oder getrennt?
Deutsch
Der Bildschirm wird angezeigt aber der Wurde die Lautstärke zu schwach eingestellt?
Ton funktioniert nicht. Ist das Verstärker- und Lautsprecherverbindungskabel instabil oder getrennt? Wurde die Lautstärke auf stumm gestellt?
Ich habe den Bildschirm eingeschaltet, LCD-Bildschirme werden normalerweise dunkel, wenn sie über einen längeren Zeitraum verwendet werden, dies ist kein Hinweis auf eine Störung.
aber die Ecken erscheinen dunkel. Wenn der Bildschirm sehr dunkel ist, kontaktieren Sie Ihren Händler oder ein Servicezentrum.
Überprüfen Sie das Lautsprecher-Anschlusskabel.

Der Ton kommt nur aus einem Lautsprecher.
Sind die Positionen für Fader oder Balance Tonsteuerung nur auf einer Seite eingestellt?
Ich habe ein externes Gerät angeschlos-
Sind die Audioanschlüsse am AUX-Eingang vollständig angesteckt?
sen aber es funktioniert nicht korrekt.
254
GETtheMANUALS.org
Fehlerbehebung
Problem Mögliche Ursache Gegenmaßnahme
Ersetzen Sie sie durch eine geeignete Sicherung. Wenn die Sicherung wieder
Das Gerät lässt sich nicht Die Sicherung hat ausgelöst.
auslöst, wenden Sie sich bitte an ihren Händler oder an das Servicezentrum.
einschalten.
Das Gerät ist nicht richtig angeschlossen. Prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät korrekt angeschlossen ist.
Die Bild- oder Tonqualität Helligkeit, Sättigung, Farbton und Kontrast Stellen Sie in der Bildschirm-Anzeige Helligkeit, Sättigung, Farbton und Kont-
ist schlecht. sind nicht richtig eingestellt. rast richtig ein.
Die Helligkeit ist zu schwach. Stellen Sie die Helligkeit ein.
Das Bild funktioniert nicht.
Das Gerät ist nicht richtig angeschlossen. Prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät korrekt angeschlossen ist.
Deutsch
Die Lautstärke ist zu schwach. Stellen Sie die Lautstärke ein
Der Ton funktioniert nicht Das Gerät ist nicht richtig angeschlossen. Prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät korrekt angeschlossen ist.
Das Gerät arbeitet derzeit im Modus schnell Vorspulen, Beim schnellen Vorspulen, Zurückspulen, Scannen oder Abspielen im Slow
Zurückspulen, Scannen oder Abspielen im Slow Mode. Mode funktioniert der Ton nicht.
Bitte verwenden Sie nach dem Formatieren das USB-Gerät im Format FAT 12/16/32.
USB-Speicher ist beschädigt. Dieses Gerät erkennt keine Dateien im NTFS- und exFAT-Dateiformat.
Entfernen Sie alle Fremdkörper von der Kontaktfläche des USB-Speichers und vom
USB-Speicher ist verschmutzt. Multimediaterminal.
Ein separat gekaufter USB-Hub wird verwendet. Verbinden Sie den USB-Speicher direkt mit dem Multimediaterminal des Fahrzeugs.
Verbinden Sie den USB-Speicher direkt mit dem Multimediaterminal
USB funktioniert nicht. Ein USB Verlängerungskabel wird verwendet
des Fahrzeugs.
Es wird ein USB-Gerät verwendet, das kein
Verwenden Sie einen Standard-USB-Speicher.
Metal Cover hat.
Ein HDD Typ, CF, SD-Speicher wird verwendet. Verwenden Sie einen Standard-USB-Speicher.
Es gibt keine Musikdateien, die abgespielt Nur die Dateiformate MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC und WAV werden
werden können. unterstützt. Bitte verwenden Sie nur die unterstützten Musikdateiformate.
Hinweis -W enn beim Betrieb des Gerätes ein Problem auftritt, das nicht mit den genannten Maßnahmen behoben werden kann, setzen Sie das System zurück.
- Drücken Sie gleichzeitig die Tasten HOME und SETIP. Das Gerät wird ausgeschaltet und das System wird zurückgesetzt.
255
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Deutsch
256
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistema de navegación del automóvil Manual del usuario Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Español
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lea atentamente este manual antes de realizar operaciones y consérvelo como referencia futura.
Los diseños y especificaciones están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso.
Visite el sitio en línea de Ssangyoung Motor para mayor información sobre el sistema de navegación del automóvil.
- Dirección de descarga del manual de AVN: http://www.smotor.com
257
GETtheMANUALS.org
Contenidos
Básico
Precauciones 259 Asociar dispositivos con Bluetooth 281
Información principal del producto 260 Desconectar y eliminar dispositivos con Bluetooth 283
Funciones principales del producto 261 Pantalla de Llamada por Bluetooth 284
Nombres y funciones de los componentes 262 Hacer una llamada 285
Controlador del volante 264 Responder una llamada 287
Ajustes de Bluetooth 288
Operación de los menús básicos Música de Bluetooth 292
Operación básica 265 Pantalla de Mi música 293
Pantalla de inicio 267 Modo AUX 294
Favorito 268 Ajustes 295
Español
Modo iPod 304

Operar el modo de AV Iniciar el modo iPod 305
Modo de Radio 269 Apple CarPlay 306
Usar presintonías y grabar radio 270 Modo de Apple CarPlay 307
Modo de medios 272 Iniciar el modo Android Auto 309
(1) Modo de música de USB e-Manual 310
Modo de música de USB 273 Restricción de funciones como medida de seguridad 311
Pantalla de música de USB 274 Cámara de detección trasera 312
(2) Modo de vídeo de USB Modo AVN - Opcional 313
Iniciar modo de vídeo de USB 275 Ajustes AVM 314
Pantalla de vídeo de USB 276 Especificaciones del producto 315
(3) Modo de Imagen de USB
Iniciar modo de Imagen de USB 277
Apéndice
Pantalla de Imagen de USB 278 Antes de pensar que se trata de una falla del producto 316
Modo de Bluetooth 279 Antes de pensar que el producto falla 318
Menú principal de Bluetooth 280 Resolución de problemas 319
258
GETtheMANUALS.org
Precauciones
Precauciones de seguridad Advertencias de seguridad

Incluso al recibir orientación de ruta del sistema multimedia, cumpla con Preste atención a las condiciones del tráfico al conducir.
el reglamento de tránsito y siga las condiciones reales del camino.
En algunos casos, el navegador podría guiarlo a través de áreas restringidas.
Seguir solo la orientación de ruta del navegador podría llevarlo a cometer
infracciones viales y causar accidentes. Operar el dispositivo mientras conduce podría ocasionar accidentes al
desviar su atención de los alrededores. Aparque el vehículo antes de ope-
No mire la pantalla mientras conduce. Mirar la pantalla por mucho tiempo rar el dispositivo. Además, algunas funciones de la pantalla táctil podrían
podría ocasionar accidentes viales. no estar disponibles cuando el vehículo se encuentre en movimiento.
Al conducir, no realice operaciones del sistema multimedia, tales como in- Dichas funciones estarán disponibles cuando el vehículo se detenga.
gresar puntos de interés o buscar rutas. Esto podría ocasionar accidentes.
Este producto solo debe usarse en automóviles. Absténgase de instalar
Aparque el vehículo antes de operar el dispositivo. este dispositivo en otros sitios que no sean automóviles.
Español
No desarme, arme o modifique el sistema multimedia. Esto podría ocasio- Si quiere cambiar la posición en la que se instaló el dispositivo, consulte
nar accidentes, incendios o descargas eléctricas. con su punto de venta o centro de mantenimiento y servicio. Se requiere
de un técnico experto para instalar o desarmar el dispositivo.
Tenga cuidado de no derramar líquidos ni introducir objetos extraños en el dispo-
sitivo. Esto podría ocasionar humo, incendios o fallas en el funcionamiento. Al limpiar el dispositivo, apáguelo y use un paño seco y limpio. Nunca
use materiales corrosivos, paños impregnados de químicos o solventes
De ocurrir anormalidades, como que se hayan introducido materiales (alcohol, benceno, tíners, etcétera) dado que dichos materiales pueden
extraños o salga humo a causa de la exposición a líquidos, descontinúe el dañar el panel o causar deterioros en la calidad o el color. Si experimenta
uso de manera inmediata y consulte en el sitio donde adquirió el equipo o fallas en el funcionamiento del producto, consulte con su punto de venta o
en el centro de mantenimiento autorizado. centro de mantenimiento y servicio.
Seguir usando el equipo en este estado podría ocasionar fallas en el No golpee ni azote el dispositivo.
funcionamiento.
Si se ejerce presión directa en la parte frontal del monitor, se puede dañar
el LCD o la pantalla táctil.
No lo use si la pantalla está en blanco o si no emite sonidos. Estos son
indicios de fallas en el funcionamiento. El uso en estas condiciones podría Operar el dispositivo por largo tiempo con el motor apagado hará que se
ocasionar accidentes (incendios o descargas eléctricas ). muestre una advertencia de batería baja en la pantalla. Use el sistema
con el motor encendido.
No se detenga ni estacione en áreas restringidas con el fin de operar el
producto. Esto podría ocasionar accidentes.
259
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod es una marca registrada de Apple Inc. Manufacturado bajo licencia de Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby y el símbolo de la doble D son marcas registradas de Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay es una marca registrada de Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Todos los derechos reservados. TomTom y el logo de las “dos
El nombre de marca y logos de Bluetooth son marcas registradas que perte- manos” son marcas registradas de TomTom N.V. o de una de sus subsidiarias.
necen a Bluetooth SIG. Inc. y se usan bajo licencia. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Todos los derechos reservados. Este material se encuentra registrado
Se requiere de un teléfono móvil con Bluetooth para poder usar la tecnología y es sujeto de la protección por derechos de autor y/o derechos sobre bases de datos, así
inalámbrica de Bluetooth. como otros derechos de propiedad intelectual en posesión de TomTom y sus subsidiarias. El
uso de este material esta sujeto a acuerdos de licencia. Las copias o revelaciones no autori-
DivX
zadas de este material conllevan responsabilidades civiles o criminales.
Como un producto certificado por DivX, puede reproducir vídeos HD DivX
premium. (Incluyendo .avi y ,divX)
Español
DivX, DivX Certified, y sus logos y marcas asociadas son propiedad de DivX y
LLC y se usan bajo licencia.
DivX está protegida por al menos una de las siguientes patentes en los Esta-
dos Unidos: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Usar tarjetas de memoria SD

1. La ranura de la tarjeta SD en este dispositivo es para los archivos del mapa.
2. Los archivos del mapa se encuentran guardados en la tarjeta SD de este dispositivo.
No añada, elimine o dé formato a los archivos dentro de la tarjeta SD. Saque o inserte la tarjeta solo para actualizar el mapa con una nueva versión.
3. Solo use la tarjeta SD que le fue proporcionada por el vendedor. No separe o copie el archivo del mapa en una tarjeta SD diferente.
Esto podría ocasionar fallas en el funcionamiento u operación incorrecta.
4. Expulsar e insertar la tarjeta SD mientras el sistema se encuentra en operación podría causar errores en la tarjeta o en el sistema.
Para expulsar o insertar la tarjeta SD, primero apague el motor del vehículo.
5. Conectar y desconectar repetidamente la tarjeta SD durante un periodo corto de tiempo puede causar daños al dispositivo.
6. La tarjeta SD está formateada para incluir solo el archivo de datos del mapa.
Guardar otros archivos en la tarjeta SD podría causar errores o fallas en el sistema.
Actualizar el mapa y descargar el software AVN

1. Conecte la tarjeta SD a su ordenador.
2. Vaya a la página Actualizar (URL).
260
GETtheMANUALS.org
Funciones principales del producto
Función. Descripción Función. Descripción

Con Apple CarPlay, puede hacer llamadas, inter-
Pantalla ancha LCD Apple CarPlay cambiar mensajes de texto, usar el mapa, escuchar
Pantalla Proporciona vídeo y música de alta calidad de manera si- música y usar las funciones de Siri.
multánea por medio de una pantalla ancha de 9,2 pulgadas
que ofrece mayor conveniencia con una pantalla táctil.
Con Android Auto puede usar las funciones de mapas
Android Auto de Google, teléfono, reconocimiento de voz y música.
Función de sintonizador digital
El sintonizador digital tiene capacidad de almacenar 12 esta-
Español
ciones para FM1, FM2, AM y DAB respectivamente. Función de conexión por Bluetooth
Radio Proporciona una función de manos libres que permite a los con-
Servicios RDS Bluetooth ductores hacer llamadas inalámbricas mientras conducen, así
Proporciona AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY junto con los como escuchar música por medio de la transmisión de audio.
servicios RDS.
Función de búsqueda automática de medios

Identifica de forma automática los archivos multimedia, inclu- Funciones del control de pantalla digital
Medios de USB yendo vídeo, audio y fotos guardados en la USB y la tarjeta Control fácil del brillo de la pantalla por medio de la pantalla
SD y los muestra en forma de lista para su conveniencia. táctil para visualizar convenientemente.

Misceláneo Le permite ver la parte trasera por medio de una cámara de
Usa el mapa de TomTom HD cuando se pone la marcha en reversa.
Navegación Se puede recibir orientación precisa con un sistema de
GPS y un mapa preciso y a través una antena de alta Monitor de entorno - Opcional
sensibilidad. Le permite ver al frente, atrás, a izquierda y a derecha a
través de cuatro cámaras instaladas dentro del vehículo.
261
GETtheMANUALS.org
Nombres y funciones de los componentes
Vista frontal
Botón Descripción
1 POWER / VOLUME
1. Se usa para encender/apagar o controlar el volumen.
2. Mantenga presionada (1.5 segundos) para apagar.
3. Presione brevemente para encender/apagar el AV.
4. Gire a derecha/izquierda para controlar el volumen. (rango de
control de volumen de 0 a 45)
2 Inicio
1 1. Lleva a la pantalla de inicio (PIP, Picture in Picture)
2 3 4 5 2. Mantenga presionada (1.5 segundos) para ir al modo de
Español
Favorito.
3 MODE
1. Cambia a la pantalla del modo principal.
2. En el modo de navegación, mantenga presionado (más de
1.5 segundos) para operar el último modo AV que estaba en
operación antes del navegador.
4 NAVI
1. Convierte al modo de navegador y muestra la ubicación actual
sin importar si el AV se encuentra encendido o apagado.
2. Mantenga presionado (más de 1.5 segundos) para ir a la
pantalla donde pueda buscar su lugar de destino.
5 SETUP
En cualquier modo, mantenga presionado para mostrar la panta-
lla de Ajustes.
En el modo de Radio/ Audio/ Vídeo/ Navegación/ Teléfono con
Bluetooth,
Presione para mostrar la pantalla de ajustes correspondiente.
262
GETtheMANUALS.org
Vista trasera Conector de 42P AVN
AVN
2 3 4 5
Español
A2 FL+ B2 CLUSTER CAN H
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Conector de antena de radio A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Para conectar el cable de la antena de radio A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) Conector de antena de GPS A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Para conectar el cable de la antena de GPS A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Conector de la cámara trasera A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Para conectar un conector la cámara trasera A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) Puerto USB A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Para conectar un conector USB para la función USB A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Conector I/O (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Conector DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Para conectar el cable de la antena DAB B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
263
GETtheMANUALS.org
Botón Descripción
1 Durante una llamada con Bluetooth, mantenga presionado para
terminar la llamada.
Cuando no esté realizando una llamada, presione para encender/
6 apagar el silencio.
2 En cualquier modo
2 3 - Cada vez que se presione la tecla, se cambiará el modo en el orden
4
siguiente: Radio→Medios→Música Bluetooth→iPod→Mi música. (Si no se
encuentra conectado el dispositivo de medios, se desactivarán los modos
5 1 relacionados)
En el modo de Radio
- Mantenga presionado para cambiar el modo en el orden siguiente: FM1→-
Español
FM2→AM→DAB.
En el modo de medios
- Mantenga presionado para cambiar el modo en el orden siguiente: Música
de USB→Vídeo de USB→Imagen de USB.
3
Ajustes de volumen.
4 Durante la reproducción
- presione hacia arriba/abajo para ir al archivo anterior/siguiente.
En el modo de Radio
- presione hacia arriba/abajo para ir a la presintonía anterior/siguiente.
-p resione hacia arriba/abajo para ir a la frecuencia anterior/siguiente.
5
Opera el modo manos libres por Bluetooth.
En el modo de Apple CarPlay

6 - opera Siri.
En el modo Android Auto
- opera Google Voice.
264
GETtheMANUALS.org
Operación básica
Iniciar el sistema Apagar el sistema
1. Cuando esté encendido el sistema, mantenga

1. Presione el botón de encendido del motor 2. Una vez que el sistema esté encendido, presionado (más de 1.5 segundos) el botón de
o llave de ignición en ON o ACC. va a iniciar el proceso de inicialización y POWER/VOL para apagar. Cuando el sistema se
Español
se mostrará la pantalla del logo. apague, se guardará el modo más reciente.
3. La página de seguridad se muestra y se 4. P

resione el botón [Aceptar] para mostrar el modo más 2. C
uando se apaga se muestra la hora actual.
habilita la pantalla solicitando el consenti- reciente. (El modo predeterminado es Radio FM1)
miento del usuario.
- Verifique la casilla [Auto ocultar] para encender el modo operado más recientemente sin presionar el botón - Cuando se vuelva a encender, el sistema encen-
[Aceptar]. derá el modo más recientemente operado.
- El sistema lo apagará automáticamente si han
pasado más de tres minutos con el motor apa-
gado y la puerta del conductor se encuentra
abierta.
265
GETtheMANUALS.org
Reiniciar el sistema Encender audio Apagar Audio
1. Presione al mismo tiempo los botones 1. Cuando esté encendido el AV, presione 1. Cuando esté encendido el AV, presione
MODE y SETUP. brevemente (más de 1.5 segundos) el brevemente (más de 1.5 segundos) el bo-
Español
botón de POWER/VOL para apagar el AV. tón de POWER/VOL para encender el AV.
2. El sistema se encenderá y reiniciará. 2. Cuando se apaga el audio, se muestra el 2. Cuando se apaga, la pantalla de navega-
modo de pantalla de navegación mostrado ción se mantiene pero comienza a operar
más recientemente. el audio operado más recientemente.
Información
- Reiniciar el sistema restaura todos ajustes y
configuraciones existentes al estado predetermi-
nado. Esto tiene el fin de asegurar la estabilidad
del dispositivo y no es un defecto del sistema.
266
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pantalla de inicio
Pantalla de inicio
1 Proporciona una breve vista del mapa de navegación y la pantalla
1
de la ruta. / Toque cualquier área en la pantalla para ir a la nave-
6
gación en modo de pantalla completa.
2 Muestra información breve sobre los medios de radio actualmen-

te en reproducción. / Toque la pantalla para ir a la pantalla del
2
modo actualmente en reproducción.
3 Favorito
Añada sus elementos al menú de Favoritos para acceso rápido y fácil.
4 Modo
Muestra todos los elementos el el menú del sistema.
Español
3 4 5 Destino
5
Lleva a la pantalla donde se puede buscar el lugar de destino.
6 Apagar pantalla
Presione para apagar la pantalla. Toque cualquier área de la
pantalla para encenderla.
Información
- Presione el botón [INICIO] para mostrar la pantalla de inicio.
- Mantenga presionado [INICIO] para mostrar la pantalla de Favoritos.
267
GETtheMANUALS.org
Favoritos
Iniciar Favoritos Pantalla de Favoritos
4 2
1
1. Desde la pantalla de inicio, selec- 2. Desde la pantalla de la lista de
cione [Favoritos]. favoritos, presione [Añadir].
Español
1 Lista del menú

Lista del menú de favoritos
3.
Mantenga presionado un ele- 4. Lista de favoritos 2 Confirmar
mento del menú, luego arrastre y Al seleccionar, guarda los cambios hechos al menú de favoritos y res-
suelte en el lugar deseado para tablece la pantalla de inicio.
añadir/ eliminar/ mover. Luego Área para añadir menús
3
presione el botón Confirmar.
Los elementos de la lista del menú se arrastran y mueven al área para
añadirlos como menús de Favoritos.
4 Reiniciar
Reinicia los ajustes de Favoritos.
Cuando haya añadido un favorito, presione el botón editar. - Presione el botón [INICIO] para mostrar la pantalla de inicio.
- Mantenga presionado [INICIO] para mostrar la pantalla de Favoritos.
268
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciar el modo de Radio
Iniciar el modo de Radio Pantalla del radio
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
1. Presione el botón MODO para mostrar la 7

pantalla del menú principal, luego presione
Español
[Radio].
1 Pantalla del modo 7 Pestaña de la banda de Radio
Muestra el modo actualmente en operación. Si selecciona la pestaña deseada, funcionará el modo de
Radio seleccionado.
2 Presintonías
Muestra la lista de presintonías. 8 Inicio
* Mantenga presionado el botón de presintonías para Lleva a la pantalla de inicio.
guardar la frecuencia actual en el botón de presinto- 9 Atrás
nías seleccionado. Lleva a la pantalla anterior.
* Se pueden guardar hasta 12 frecuencias de presinto- 10 DAB
nía en los modos FM1/FM2/AM. Operar el modo de DAB.
3 Información de la frecuencia 11 AT encendido/apagado.
Muestra la frecuencia actual. Enciende y apaga los anuncios de tráfico (para
*C
ada vez que esta área se arrastra a la derecha, el modo mayores detalles, remítase a la sección “DAB”).
cambia en el orden siguiente: FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1. DLS encendido/apagado.
12
4 Indicador Enciende y apaga el texto DLS (para mayores
Muestra el estado de encendido/apagado de las detalles, remítase a la sección “DAB”).
funciones REG/AF/TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO. 13 Escanear
5 Sintonizar hacia arriba Reproduce las frecuencias con mejor recepción durante 5
Presione para sintonizar hacia arriba en FM: 0.1MHz, segundos cada una.
AM : 9KHz) 14 AST
Guarda las frecuencias con mejor recepción en los botones
6 Sintonizar hacia abajo de presintonías.
Presione para sintonizar hacia abajo en FM: 0.1MHz, Grabación de radio
15
AM : 9KHz) Graba la estación de radio que se encuentre en operación.
269
GETtheMANUALS.org
Usar presintonías y grabar radio
Guarda la presintonía automática- Guarda la presintonía auto-
mente (Guardado automático) máticamente
Grabación de radio
1. En la pantalla del radio, presio- 1. S

eleccione la frecuencia a guardar. 1. En la pantalla del radio, presione 2. En la pantalla que pregunta si se
ne [AST]. . quiere grabar el radio, presione
[Aceptar] para iniciar la grabación.
Español
2. Guarda las frecuencias con 2. Mantenga presionado el botón 3. Al presionar el botón detener, se detiene y se guarda el audio automáti-
mejor recepción en los boto- que desee guardar. La frecuen- camente en la carpeta de Radio de Mi música.
nes de presintonías en orden cia actual se guardará en el
ascendente. botón de presintonías deseado
con un pitido.
- Si hay menos de 12 frecuencias de radio con buenos estados de recepción, las - Las grabaciones en un mismo archivo deben durar entre 5 segundos y 60 minutos.
presintonías anteriores se quedarán guardadas en los canales de presintonías - Los archivos de radio grabados se pueden reproducir en Mi música.
- Se pueden guardar hasta 100 archivos. Si se excede la capacidad de almacenamiento con
restantes.
menos de 100 archivos, la grabación se interrumpirá de forma automática y ya no se podrán
- Cuando se está guardando automáticamente, presionar de nuevo el botón AST realizar más grabaciones.
cancelará la función y reproducirá la frecuencia anterior.
270
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Iniciar el modo de DAB Pantalla de DAB
1 8 Atrás
9 10 11 12 13 Lleva a la pantalla anterior.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Opera el modo de radio AM/FM.
4
10 Encender/apagar el servicio de seguimiento
Enciende o apaga el servicio SF(AF)
2 * SF(AF) : Esta función proporciona la recepción
5 3 6
continua al buscar automáticamente el mismo
1. En la pantalla del radio, presione canal en las frecuencias cercanas cuando se
DAB para operar el modo de DAB. debilita la recepción del canal actual.
11 Enciende y apaga los anuncios de tráfico (AT)

Enciende y apaga los anuncios de tráfico
Español
* TA : Esta función proporciona anuncios y boleti-
nes de tráfico en tiempo real.
12 Encender/ Apagar el texto DLS (Texto de seg-

1 Pantalla del modo mentación de etiquetas dinámicas)
Muestra el modo actualmente en operación. Enciende y apaga el texto DLS.
Presintonías * Texto DLS : Esta función muestra el texto transmiti-
2
do en el dispositivo por la estación actual. La infor-
Muestra la estación guardada para que la seleccione el usuario.
mación comprende la relacionada con el programa,
* Mantenga presionado el botón de presintonías para guardar la frecuencia incluyendo el lema de la estación o el título y artista
actual en el botón de presintonías seleccionado. de la canción en reproducción.
* Se pueden guardar hasta 12 estaciones.
3 Información de la estación 13 Lista

Muestra la frecuencia actual. Muestra automáticamente las listas actualizadas.
4 Indicador
Muestra el estado de encendido o apagado de las funciones DAB/TP.
5 Canal abajo
Lleva a la estación previa.
6 Canal arriba
Lleva a la estación siguiente.
7 Inicio
Lleva a la pantalla de inicio.
271
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo de medios
Acerca de los dispositivos de memoria USB
1. Conecte el dispositivo USB después de encender el motor. El dispositivo USB podría dañarse si ya está conectado cuando se enciende el motor. Los
dispositivos USB no son componentes electrónicos del automóvil.
2. Apagar y el encender el motor con el dispositivo conectado podría causar fallas en la operación de la USB externa.
3. Tenga cuidado de la electricidad estática al conectar o desconectar los dispositivos de USB externos.
4. Los reproductores de MP3 codificados no serán reconocidos cuando se conecten como un dispositivo externo.
5. Al conectar un dispositivo de USB externo, el sistema podría no reconocerlo bajo ciertas condiciones.
6. El sistema reconoce dispositivos USB con formatos de archivo FAT16/32. No son compatibles los medios de USB con sistemas de archivo NFTS o
exFAT.
7. Algunos dispositivos USB podrían presentar problemas de compatibilidad. Antes de usar, verifique que el dispositivo funcione normalmente.
8. Conectar y desconectar repetidamente la USB durante un periodo corto de tiempo puede causar daños al dispositivo.
9. Podría escucharse un sonido anormal ocasionalmente al desconectar el dispositivo USB.
10. Desconectar el dispositivo USB mientras se reproducen los medios podría ocasionar daños en el dispositivo USB o mal funcionamiento. Cuando
desconecte el dispositivo USB, primero apague el sistema o cambie a un modo diferente.
Español
11. El tiempo necesario para reconocer el dispositivo de USB externo puede variar dependiendo del tipo, tamaño o formato de los archivos almacena-
dos en la USB. Dichas diferencias en el tiempo necesario no son indicativas de mal funcionamiento.
12. Está prohibido usar los dispositivos USB para propósitos ajenos a la reproducción de archivos de música o imagen.
13. No use el cable de USB para cargar baterías o accesorios USB que generen calor. Esto podría ocasionar un mal funcionamiento o dañar el siste-
ma.
14. El dispositivo podría no reconocer la USB si los cables extensores o conectores se adquirieron por separado. Conecte el cable USB directamente a
la terminal multimedia del vehículo.
15. Cuando se utilizan dispositivos USB de almacenamiento masivo, hay casos en que las unidades lógicas se separan para conveniencia del usuario.
En dichos casos, solo los archivos dentro de la unidad lógica del directorio raíz se reproducirán. Cuando use un USB con particiones separadas
(unidades lógicas), guarde los archivos que quiera reproducir en el directorio raíz. Cuando se instalen programas en la USB, los archivos en ella
podrían no reproducirse adecuadamente por los motivos mencionados anteriormente.
16. El dispositivo podría no funcionar adecuadamente si los reproductores de MP3, teléfonos móviles, cámaras digitales u otros dispositivos electróni-
cos (dispositivos USb no reconocidos como unidades de disco portátil) se conectan con el dispositivo.
17. La carga por medio de USB podría no funcionar para algunos dispositivos.
18. La operación normal solo está garantizada para dispositivos de memoria USB tipo cubierta de metal.
19. Los dispositivos podrían no funcionar adecuadamente cuando usan formatos tipo HDD, CF o memoria SD.
20. Podrian no reconocerse adecuadamente las memorias de USB que se usan por medio de un adaptador, incluyendo las tipo SD y CF.
272
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo de música de USB
Iniciar modo de Música de USB Guardar archivos de música
1. P
resione el botón MODE para mostrar la pantalla 1. D
espués de reproducir el archivo que desea 2. En la ventana de guardar archivos de
del menú principal luego presione [Medios]. guardar, presione en la pantalla de música. música, presione [Aceptar].
Español
2. El modo de modo de medios predeterminado 3. Puede verificar los archivos que ha guar-
es el de música de USB. dado en Mi música.
Información
Esta función no operará a menos de que haya al menos un ar-
chivo de música o imagen en el dispositivo USB. (Esta función
no operará si no hay archivos de medios en el dispositivo USB)
- Audio Codec : MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10,
LPCM, FLAC
-E xtensión : MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Frecuencia de muestreo: 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
- Tasa de bits: 32Kbps ~ 320Kbps
- Precaución: Este dispositivo es compatible con archivos
de audio en el rango de bits de 320Kbps y se recomienda el
uso de una tasa de bits de 192Kbps. Cuando use archivos sin Información
tasas de bits fijas, algunas funciones (FF/REW ) podrían no
operar adecuadamente. - Es posible guardar hasta 100 canciones.
273
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pantalla de música de USB
Pantalla de música de USB
6 Archivo siguiente
1 Reproduce el archivo siguiente.
9 10 11 * Mantenga presionada la tecla para buscar el archivo siguiente rápidamente en el
2 dispositivo USB. Y se muestra el nombre del archivo. Una vez que se libera la
tecla, el archivo comenzará a reproducirse a velocidad normal.
3 7 Archivo anterior
12
Reproduce el archivo anterior.
5 * Mantenga presionada la tecla para buscar el archivo anterior rápidamente en el
dispositivo USB. Y se muestra el nombre del archivo. Una vez que se libera la
4 tecla, el archivo comenzará a reproducirse a velocidad normal.
7 8 6
8 Pausa/Reproducción
13 Pausa o reproduce el archivo actual.
Español
9 Repetir
Repite al archivo actual o todos los archivos en el USB.
14 * Cada vez que se presiona el botón, la opción cambia de Repetir archivo → Repetir
carpeta → Repetir una vez.
10 Aleatorio
Reproduce los archivos en orden aleatorio.
1 Pantalla del modo
Muestra el modo actualmente en operación. 11 Guardar archivos de música
Guarda el archivo actual en Mi música
2 Carpeta superior
Lleva a la carpeta superior 12 Índice de archivos
Muestra el archivo actual/ archivos totales en la carpeta actual.
3 Nombre de carpeta
Muestra la carpeta actual. 13 Tiempo de reproducción
Muestra el tiempo de reproducción actual y total.
4 Lista de música * Arrastre o toque la barra para ir hacia el tiempo deseado.
Muestra la lista de archivos de música de la carpeta actual.
* Se resalta el nombre de la canción actualmente en reproducción 14 Pestaña del modo USB
Si selecciona la pestaña deseada, funcionará el modo de seleccionado.
5 Información de canción
Muestra la información de carpeta, artista, título, álbum y arte del álbum del archivo actual.
274
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciar modo de Vídeo de USB
Iniciar modo de Vídeo de USB
1. Presione el botón MODE para 2 - 1. Cuando se muestre la 2 - 2 O toque la pestaña de vídeo 3. Cuando se muestre el panel de
mostrar la pantalla del menú pantalla de música de USB, de USB para operar el modo control del vídeo, este se repro-
principal luego presione [Me- arrastre la pantalla a la dere- de vídeo de USB. ducirá en pantalla completa.
dios]. cha para operar el modo de
Español
vídeo de USB.
Información
Esta función no operará a menos de que haya al menos un archivo de vídeo en el dispositivo USB. (Esta función no operará si no hay archivos de medios en el dispositivo USB)
- El modo de medios predeterminado es el de música de USB.
- Codecs de vídeo: MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Extensiones: MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Resolución de imagen: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Subtítulos SMI (Los subtítulos podrían no funcionar adecuadamente si el nombre del archivo de vídeo es diferente al nombre del archivo de subtítulos).
- Precaución: Podrían no funcionar correctamente los archivos de alta resolución que usen tasa de bits superiores a 2Mbps.
275
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pantalla de Vídeo de USB
Pantalla de Vídeo de USB
5 Archivo siguiente
8 9 * Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo actual y se muestra el siguiente.
2
6 Archivo anterior
3 Reproduce el archivo anterior.
10 * Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo actual y se muestra el anterior.
4
6 7 5 Pausa o reproduce el archivo actual.
11 8 Tamaño de los subtítulos

Español
Cambia el tamaño de los subtítulos.

* Este botón está disponible solo cuando hay subtítulos.
12
9 Pantalla completa
Cambia la pantalla de pantalla normal a pantalla completa.
* Al tocar un área sin botones en la pantalla, esta se convertirá al modo de pantalla
completa.
1 Pantalla del modo
Muestra el modo actualmente en operación.
10 Índice de archivos
2 Carpeta superior Muestra el archivo actual/ archivos totales en la carpeta actual.
Lleva a la carpeta superior
3 Nombre de carpeta/archivo 11 Tiempo de reproducción

Muestra el archivo y carpeta actuales. Muestra el tiempo de reproducción actual y total.
* Arrastre o toque la barra para ir hacia el tiempo deseado.
4 Lista de vídeo
Muestra la lista de archivos de vídeo de la carpeta actual.
* Se resalta el nombre del vídeo actualmente en reproducción
12 Pestaña del modo USB
276
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciar modo de Imagen de USB
Iniciar modo de Imagen de USB
1. Presione el botón MODO para 2 - 1 Cuando se muestre la 2 - 2 O toque la pestaña de imagen 3. Cuando se muestre el panel de
mostrar la pantalla del menú pantalla de música de USB, de USB para operar el modo control de imagen, esta se repro-
principal luego presione [Me- arrastre la pantalla a la dere- de imagen de USB. ducirá en pantalla completa.
dios]. cha para operar el modo de
Español
imagen de USB. (Música →
Vídeo → Imagen)
Información
Esta función no operará a menos de que haya al menos un archivo de imagen en el dispositivo USB. (Esta función no operará si no hay archivos de medios en el dispositivo USB)
- El modo de medios predeterminado es el de música de USB.
- Cuando se cambie del modo de música al de imagen, la música seguirá reproduciéndose.
- Cuando se cambie del modo de vídeo al de imagen, el sonido del vídeo seguirá reproduciéndose.
- Formatos de archivo compatibles: JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
277
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pantalla de Imagen de USB
Pantalla de Imagen de USB
4 Lista de música
1
7 8 9 Muestra la lista de archivos de imagen de la carpeta actual.
* Se resalta el nombre de la imagen actualmente en reproducción
2
5 Archivo siguiente
10
4 * Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo actual y se muestra el siguiente.
6 Archivo anterior
6 5 * Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo actual y se muestra el anterior.
7 Presentación de diapositivas
Español
Todas las imágenes en el dispositivo de USB se muestran de manera se-

11 cuencial de acuerdo con los intervalos de tiempo seleccionados.
* No es compatible con la función de acercar y alejar.
*No está disponible al conducir.
8 Rotar
1 Pantalla del modo Gira la imagen en el sentido de las manecillas del reloj.
9 Guardar imagen
2 Carpeta superior Guarda la imagen que se muestra cuando se apaga la pantalla.
Lleva a la carpeta superior
10 Índice de archivos
3 Nombre de carpeta/archivo
Muestra el archivo actual/ archivos totales en la carpeta actual.
Muestra la carpeta, nombre y tipo de archivo, así como resolución de la imagen actual.
11 Pestaña del modo USB
278
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo de Bluetooth
Antes de usar el modo de Bluetooth
1. Antes de conectar la unidad principal al teléfono celular, encienda el Bluetooth y deshabilite el modo de estado oculto del teléfono.
2. Se pueden asociar hasta cinco dispositivos con Bluetooth.
3. Solo se puede conectar un dispositivo con Bluetooth a la vez.
4. Para el manos libres, el volumen mínimo es 6 y el máximo es 40.
Español
Iniciar el modo de Bluetooth
1. Presione el botón MODO para 2. Se muestra un aviso de cone- 3 -1 Presione [Sí] para mostrar 3 -2 Presione [No] para mostrar la
mostrar la pantalla del menú xión por Bluetooth (cuando no la pantalla de conexiones de pantalla (teclado) del teléfono
principal luego presione [Blue- hay teléfonos asociados). Bluetooth. con Bluetooth. También puede
tooth]. asociar un dispositivo pre-
sionando [Conectar] en esta
pantalla.
Información
- Para añadir más dispositivos, debe eliminar uno de los dispositivos conectados anteriormente.
279
GETtheMANUALS.org
Menú principal de Bluetooth
Menú principal de Bluetooth
7 1 Pantalla del modo
1
2
2 Historial de llamadas
Muestra el historial de llamadas marcadas/ recibidas/ perdidas recientemente.
3
8
3 Contactos
4
Muestra la pantalla de la lista de contactos.
* Los contactos se pueden ver solo cuando estos han sido descargados.
5
4 Teclado
6 Muestra la pantalla de marcación.
Español
5 Conectar
Muestra la pantalla de conexiones de Bluetooth.
6 Ajustes de Bluetooth
Muestra la pantalla de ajustes de Bluetooth.
7 Íconos de estatus
Muestra el estado actual del teléfono en la parte superior derecha de la pantalla.
8 Nombre del teléfono

Muestra el nombre del dispositivo conectado actualmente.
280
GETtheMANUALS.org
Asociar dispositivos con Bluetooth
Buscar desde el automóvil Autoconexión
- El dispositivo con Bluetooth se
conectará automáticamente de
acuerdo con la opción establecida
cuando el motor del automóvil se
encienda (ACC ON).
- Cuando no se pueda seleccionar
el teléfono usado por el usuario,
el sistema intentará conectarse
1. Presione [Buscar desde el auto- 2. Buscar dispositivos (deshabilite el 3. Seleccione el nombre del dispo- al teléfono más reciente. Cuando
móvil]. estado oculto del teléfono móvil). sitivo a conectar. el teléfono conectado más recien-
temente no pueda conectarse, el
sistema intentará conectar todos
Español
los teléfonos asociados de mane-
ra secuencial (si la conexión falla
después de intentar durante 1 ci-
clo, entonces la autoconexión se
detendrá)
4. Verifique la clave y proceda con 5. Se muestra la pantalla de cone- 6. Una vez que se logre la cone-
la asociación desde su dispositi- xión por Bluetooth xión por Bluetooth, se mostrará
vo con Bluetooth. el nombre del teléfono móvil
conectado.
Información
- Tiempo de búsqueda máximo: 15 segundos- Número máximo de dispositivos buscados. 20
- La clave se crea aleatoriamente.
- Si no se encuentra el dispositivo, verifique lo siguiente:
* ¿Está encendida la función de Bluetooth en su dispositivo?
* ¿El dispositivo se encuentra en el modo oculto?
- Si la búsqueda y conexión siguen sin funcionar, reinicie el dispositivo e inténtelo de nuevo.
- Si el dispositivo ha sido asociado anteriormente, seleccione el dispositivo de la lista y conéctese.
281
GETtheMANUALS.org
Buscar desde el dispositivo
1. Presione [Buscar desde el dispo- 2. Busque el nombre del automóvil 3. Se muestra la pantalla de cone- 4. Una vez que se logre la cone-
sitivo]. y asocie el dispositivo. Verifique xión por Bluetooth xión por Bluetooth, se mostrará
la clave y proceda con la aso- el nombre del teléfono móvil
ciación desde su dispositivo con conectado.
Español
Bluetooth.
Información
- La clave se crea aleatoriamente.
- Si no se encuentra el dispositivo, verifique lo siguiente:
* ¿Está encendida la función de Bluetooth en su dispositivo?
* ¿El dispositivo se encuentra en el modo oculto?
- Si la búsqueda y conexión siguen sin funcionar, reinicie el dispositivo e inténtelo de nuevo.
282
GETtheMANUALS.org
Desconectar y eliminar dispositivos con Bluetooth
Desconectar un dispositivo Eliminar un dispositivo
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con 2. Seleccione el nombre del dispo- 1. En la pantalla de teléfono con 2. Verifique la casilla con el nombre
Bluetooth, presione [Conectar]. sitivo a desconectar. Bluetooth, presione [Conectar]. del dispositivo a eliminar.
Español
3. Presione [Aceptar] para desco- 3. Seleccione el ícono de papelera para seleccionar el dispositivo en la
nectar. pantalla de eliminación.
Información
- No se puede eliminar un dispositivo que se encuentre conectado (solo los disposi-
tivos desconectados se pueden eliminar).
283
GETtheMANUALS.org
Pantalla de Llamada por Bluetooth
Pantalla de Llamada por Bluetooth
1 Nombre del teléfono y nombre/ número del contacto
Muestra el dispositivo conectado actualmente y el nombre y número del
3 4 5
otro durante una llamada.
2 Tiempo de llamada
Muestra el tiempo de una llamada.
1 2
3 Llamada por manos libres / Llamada privada
Muestra el estado actual de llamada (presione para cambiar del manos
libres al teléfono móvil con Bluetooth).
4 Volumen MIC
7
Ajusta el volumen de salida durante una llamada. Ajusta el volumen de
Español
6
llamada como lo escucha el otro (niveles del 1 al 5). (Esta función se puede
usar solo durante una llamada con manos libres).
5 Silenciar
Enciende y apaga el micrófono. (Esta función se puede usar solo durante
una llamada con manos libres).
6 Enviar/ Llamar/ Finalizar

Llama al número / Finaliza una llamada.
7 Teclado
Se usa para ingresar/ eliminar números.
284
GETtheMANUALS.org
Hacer una llamada
Hacer una llamada Descargar contactos
1. Ingresar número. 2. Presione el botón de llamada. 1. Seleccione el botón de contactos. 2. Verifique su teléfono y acepte la
Presione [Descargar contactos]. solicitud de descarga (algunos teléfonos
requieren confirmación adicional).
Español
3. Muestra el tiempo de llamada 3. Presione [Aceptar]. 4. Los contactos se descargan.
durante una llamada. (Mantiene el estado anterior al
cancelar)
Información
- Al descargar, los teléfono requiere confirmación adicional (se puede ajustar por separado
desde su teléfono móvil).
- Esta función no es compatible con algunos tipos de contactos (Google, T Contacts, etc.)
-L a descarga continuará aunque cambie a un modo diferente mientras la descarga está
en proceso.
-Se pueden descargar hasta 1.000 contactos.
- Los contactos solo se pueden descargar del teléfono. No es posible eliminar o añadir.
- Al descargar los contactos, también se descargan las 150 llamadas más recientes (se
guardan hasta 50 llamadas marcadas, entrantes y permitidas en cada lista).
285
GETtheMANUALS.org
Hacer una llamada desde Contactos
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con 2. P

resione el botón de llamada, para 3. Presione el ícono de lupa para
Bluetooth, presione [Contactos]. llamar desde la pantalla de la lista. buscar contactos.
Español
4. Ingrese un nombre o número de teléfono y presione [Buscar]. 5. P

resione el botón de llamada, para 6. La llamada por Bluetooth iniciará.
llamar desde la pantalla de la lista.
286
GETtheMANUALS.org
Responder una llamada
Responder una llamada
1. Cuando hay una llamada entrante, muestra 2. Muestra la información del otro y el tiempo 3. Al terminar una llamada, se restaurará el
la información del otro en una ventana emer- de llamada. modo previamente en operación.
Español
gente. Presione [Manos libres] o [Privado]
para responder la llamada (presione [Recha-
zar] para eliminar la notificación y restaurar
el modo previamente en operación).
Información
- Cuando se muestra la ventana emergente, la mayoría de las funciones dentro del modo AV no funcionarán. Al terminar una llamada, se restaurará el modo previamente en operación.
- Sin embargo, la presentación de dispositivas se interrumpirá.
- El volumen del manos libres se puede ajustar independientemente del volumen del AV.
287
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes de Bluetooth
Encender/ apagar el Bluetooth
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con Bluetooth, 2. Presione [Usar Bluetooth]. 3. Ajusta si se usara la autoconexión por
presione [Ajustes de Bluetooth]. Bluetooth, (estado predeterminado: Usar)
Español
Información
- Si presiona [No usar], la mayoría de las funciones se deshabilitarán excepto [Usar Bluetooth] y [Reiniciar].
Cambiar el nombre del dispositivo
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con Bluetooth, 2. Presione [Cambiar el nombre del dispositivo]. 3. Introduzca el nombre y presione [Listo] (el
presione [Ajustes de Bluetooth]. nombre predeterminado del dispositivo es
SSANGYONG AVN).
288
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes de autoconexión
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con Bluetooth, 2. Presione [Autoconexión].

presione [Ajustes de Bluetooth].
Español
Ajustes de contactos
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con Bluetooth, 2. Presione [Contactos]. 3. Ajusta si los contactos se descargan
presione [Ajustes de Bluetooth]. automáticamente al conectar el Bluetooth.
(Estado predeterminado: [No usar]).
289
GETtheMANUALS.org
Eliminar historial de llamadas.
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con 2. Presione [Eliminar historial de 3. Presione [Aceptar]. 4. Se elimina el historial de llamadas.
Bluetooth, presione [Ajustes de llamadas].
Bluetooth].
Español
Reiniciar Bluetooth
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con 2. Presione [Reiniciar]. 3. Cuando la ventana emergente

Bluetooth, presione [Ajustes de de notificaciones de reinicia se
Bluetooth]. muestra, presione [Aceptar].
290
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes de tonos
1. En la pantalla de teléfono con Bluetooth, 2. Presione [Tonos]. 3. Seleccione el tono deseado.
presione [Ajustes de Bluetooth].
Español
Información
- Al seleccionar un tono, una muestra previa se reproducirá una vez.
291
GETtheMANUALS.org
Música de Bluetooth
Antes de usar el modo de Música de Bluetooth Pantalla de Música de Bluetooth
1. El modo de música Bluetooth solo puede usarse cuando el teléfono con
Bluetooth se encuentra conectado. 1
6
2. Cuando está conectado el Bluetooth, la música se reproducirá automática-
mente cuando ingrese en el modo de música de Bluetooth.
- Si no funciona la reproducción automática, vuelva a presionar el botón de
reproducir. 2
- La música podría no reproducirse de forma automática dependiendo del
programa de reproducción en del dispositivo conectado.
3 4 5
Español
1 Pantalla del modo

2 Información de canción
Muestra la información de canción, artista y álbum.
3 Archivo anterior
Pausa o reproduce el archivo actual.
5 Archivo siguiente
Reproduce el archivo siguiente.
6 Teléfono con Bluetooth
Opera el modo teléfono con Bluetooth.
292
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mi música
¿Qué es Mi música? Pantalla de Mi música
- Mi música se refiere a la función 7 Archivo siguiente
1
en la que los archivos de música 9 10 11
Reproduce el archivo siguiente.
dentro de una memoria USB o * Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo
actual y se muestra el siguiente.
los archivos grabados de radio se
guardan en el sistema para repro- 2
8 Arte del álbum
ducirlos dentro del vehículo. 8 Muestra el arte del álbum.
4
- Esta función no operará a menos 9 Repetir
5 6 7 Repite al archivo actual o todos los archivos
de que haya al menos un archivo
3 en Mi música.
de música en el sistema. 12
* Cada vez que se presiona el botón, la opción
cambia de Repetir archivo → Repetir carpeta →
Repetir una vez.
Iniciar Mi música
Español
10 Aleatorio
Reproduce los archivos en orden aleatorio.
1 Pantalla del modo 11 Eliminar archivo

Muestra el modo actualmente en operación. Elimina el archivo actual.
2 Carpeta de reproducción de radio 12 Tiempo de reproducción

Muestra los archivos de reproducción de radio guardados en Mi música. Muestra el tiempo de reproducción actual y total.
* Arrastre o toque la barra para ir hacia el tiempo
3 Lista de música deseado.
1. En la pantalla principal, presione Muestra la lista de de música de la carpeta actual.
* Se resalta el nombre de la canción actualmente en reproducción
[Mi música].
4 Información de archivo
Muestra la información de archivo actual.
*canción, artista y álbum.
5 Archivo anterior
* Al presionar el botón, se reproduce el archivo actual y se muestra el siguiente.
Pausa o reproduce el archivo actual.
293
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo AUX
Iniciar el modo AUX Pantalla del modo AUX
1 1 Pantalla del modo
2 3
2 Pantalla de inicio
Lleva a la pantalla de inicio (PIP).
3 Atrás
Lleva a la pantalla anterior.
1. En la pantalla principal, presione
[AUX].
Español
2. Si se conecta un dispositivo

externo en la terminal AUX, el
modo comenzará a operar.
¡Precaución!
- Cuando conecta un dispositivo externo, se recomienda el uso de un cable AUX de 3 polos.
- Conectar un conector AUX sin conectar un dispositivo externo convertirá el sistema al modo AUX, pero solo se escuchará ruido. Cuando el modo AUX no esté en uso,
asegúrese de desconectar también el conector.
- Cuando el dispositivo se conecte a la toma de energía, podría escucharse ruido al reproducir el dispositivo externo. En dado caso, desconecte la conexión antes de usar.
294
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes
Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes
de Radio
Ajustes RDS de Navegación
Ajustes de navegación
1. E
n las teclas fijas del sistema, man- 1. P
resione [RDS] y ajuste si usar esta 1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, 1. En la pantalla del menú de nave-
tenga presionado el botón SETUP. función o no. Presione el botón de mantenga presionado el botón gación, ajusta si la navegación
reinicio en la esquina superior SETUP. inicial automáticamente en el
derecha para inicializar los ajustes. arranque. Presione el botón
Español
(Estado predeterminado: AF) de reinicio en la esquina
Ajustes de PTY Seek superior derecha para inicializar
los ajustes. (Estado predetermi-
nado: Inicio automático).
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presio- 2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presio-

ne [Radio]. ne [Navegación].
1. Presione [PTY Seek] y seleccio-

ne las opciones deseadas. Pre-
sione el botón de reinicio en
la esquina superior derecha para
inicializar los ajustes. (Estado
predeterminado: Ninguno)
295
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes de Reloj Ajustes de hora
1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, mantenga 1. Presione [Hora] para introducir la hora
presionado el botón SETUP. actual. Presioneel botón de reincio en
Español
la esquina superior derecha para inicializar

los ajustes para incializar los ajustes. (Es-
tado predeterminado: 2015-01-01, como
se muestra la hora en el sistema)
Ajustes de reloj
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presione [Reloj].
1. P
resione [Reloj] para establecer el tipo de reloj.
Presione el botón de reinicio en la esquina
superior derecha para inicializar los ajustes.
(Estado predeterminado: Análogo, 12 horas).
296
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes de Sonido Ajustes de balance/ atenuación Ajustes EQ
1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, mantenga presio- 1. En la pantalla de balance/ atenuación, presione el botón 1. En la pantalla de ajustes de EQ, presione el botón
nado el botón SETUP. arriba/ abajo/ derecha/ izquierda o toque la posición de +/- para ajustar los bajos/ medios/ agudos. Presio-
sonido deseada. Presione el botón de reinicio en
ne el botón de reinicio en la esquina superior
la esquina superior derecha para inicializar los ajustes.
derecha para inicializar los ajustes. (Estado prede-
Español
(Estado predeterminado: Atenuador 00, Balance 00)
Información terminado: Agudos 00, Medios 00, Bajos 00)
- Atenuador/ Balance se usa para ajustar la intensidad de
las bocinas por ubicación.
Otros ajustes
Ajustes de sonido
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presione [Sonido].
1. E
n la pantalla de ajustes de sonido, presione [Navegación] para 1. P
resione [Otros] para establecer los ajustes de pitido y
establecer el navegador como prioritario. Presione el botón de AVC. Presione el botón de reinicio en la esquina
reinicio en la esquina superior derecha para inicializar los superior derecha para inicializar los ajustes. (Estado
ajustes. (Estado predeterminado: Prioridad del navegador) predeterminado: Pitido - Encendido, AVC - Apagado)
- Prioridad del navegador: el volumen de audio de los asientos de- - Pitido: suena cada vez que se toca un botón.
lanteros se silencia cuando se dan instrucciones de navegación.
- Prioridad de audio: La navegación se escucha a un volumen fijo. - AVC(Control del volumen del auto): Cuando el AVC está
- Misma proporción: Es posible ajustar el sonido de la orientación encendido, el volumen se controla de forma automática
por medio del control de volumen. de acuerdo con la velocidad del vehículo.
297
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes
de Favoritos
Añadir Favorito
1. E
n las teclas fijas del sistema, man- 1. Mantenga presionado el elemen- 2. Luego arrastre y suéltelo en el 3. S
e añaden los elementos del menú.
tenga presionado el botón SETUP. to del menú que desee añadir a lugar deseado a la derecha. Presione el botón de reinicio
la lista en la izquierda. en la esquina superior derecha
para inicializar los ajustes. (Estado
Español
predeterminado: Ninguno)
Eliminar favorito
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presio-

ne [Favoritos].
1. Mantenga presionado el elemen- 2. Luego arrastre y suéltelo en el 3. Se eliminan los elementos del
to que desee eliminar. lugar deseado a la derecha. menú. Presione el botón de
reinicio en la esquina supe-
rior derecha para inicializar los
ajustes. (Estado predetermina-
do: Ninguno)
298
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cambiar el orden de los favoritos
1. Mantenga presionado el elemento que 2. Luego arrastre y suéltello en el lugar 3. Se moverán los elementos del menú.
desee mover. deseado. Presione el botón de reinicio en la es-
Español
quina superior derecha para inicializar los
ajustes. (Estado predeterminado: Ninguno)
299
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de ajustes de Idioma Ajustes de idioma
1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, mantenga 1. En la pantalla de ajustes de idioma, selec-
presionado el botón SETUP. cione el lenguaje deseado y presione el
Español
botón de confirmar en la esquina superior

derecha. El sistema se reiniciará automáti-
camente y el idioma cambiará. Presione el
botón de reinicio en la esquina superior
derecha para inicializar los ajustes. (Esta-
do predeterminado: Inglés)
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presione [Idioma].
300
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de
Ajustes de iluminación
ajustes de Radio
1. En las teclas fijas del sistema, 1. En la pantalla de ajustes de ilumi- 2. Iluminación 3. Modo diurno
mantenga presionado el botón nación, presione el botón +/- para - Ajusta automáticamente el brillo - Mantiene alto el brillo de la pan-
ajustar el brillo de la pantalla. (Estado
SETUP. predeterminado: Iluminación) y los colores. talla y los colores del mapa en
modo diurno.
Español
2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, pre- 4. Modo nocturno 5. Sincronizar
sione [Pantalla]. - Mantiene bajo el brillo de la - El mapa del navegador se mues-
pantalla y los colores del mapa tra en modo diurno o nocturno
en modo nocturno. de acuerdo con el ajuste de
iluminación.
resione el botón de reinicio

P
en la esquina superior derecha
para inicializar los ajustes.
301
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mostrar la pantalla de
Ajustes de relación Ajustes de pantalla apagada Otros ajustes
ajustes de Sistema
1. Presione [Relación] para ajustar 1. Presione [Pantalla apagada] 1. Esta función se usa para ajustar 1. En las teclas fijas del sistema,
la relación de la pantalla de para apagar la pantalla. Presio- la pantalla en blanco, la imagen, mantenga presionado el botón
vídeo. Presione el botón de reini- ne el botón de reinicio en la el reloj y las guías de aparcado. SETUP.
cio en la esquina superior esquina superior derecha para
Español
derecha para inicializar los ajus- inicializar los ajustes. (Estado

tes. (Estado predeterminado: predeterminado: Apagada)
Pantalla completa)
2. Presione el botón de reinicio 2. En la pantalla de Ajustes, presio-

en la esquina superior derecha ne [Sistema].
para inicializar los ajustes. (Esta-
do predeterminado: Se muestra
el reloj y las guías de aparcado)
-E
sta función puede ser muy útil cuando - En Otros ajustes, puede establecer lo que
solo se usa el dispositivo para escuchar se ve cuando la pantalla está apagada.
audio.
- La función de imagen está disponible
- Incluso cuando la pantalla está apaga- cuando el usuario ha guardado imágenes
da, el sonido se reproducirá. en el sistema.
- Toque cualquier área de la pantalla para - Muestra la imagen seleccionada por el
encenderla. usuario.
302
GETtheMANUALS.org
Versión Reiniciar Actualizar ¡Precaución!
- Al reiniciar el sistema, la información gene-
rada y los ajustes especificados por el usua-
rio se restablecen al estado de fábrica.
Función. Modo Estado
Radio FM1 89,1 MHz
Aleatorio Apagado
Música
Repetir Todo
1. Presione [Versión] para mostrar la 1. En la pantalla de Ajustes de sistema, 1. En la pantalla de Ajustes de sistema, Tamaño
información del sistema. Esta función presione [Reiniciar]. presione [Actualizar]. de los Pequeños
subtítulos
se usa para mostrar la información de Vídeo
la versión del gestor de arranque, SO, Tamaño
Medios Pantalla
de pan-
aplicación, firmware, entre otras. talla
completa
Español
Presen-
tación de
Apagado
diapositi-
Imagen vas
Predeter-
Rotar
minado
2. Presione [Aceptar].
2. Presione [Aceptar] para actualizar el Desconectar un disposi-
Bluetooth Manos libres tivo y elimina todos los
sistema dispositivos asociados
Sonido Prioridad del navegador
Ajustes Navegación Inicio automático
Favoritos Eliminar elementos
3. E
l proceso de inicialización procederá
después de seleccionar si quiere eliminar
los archivos de música en Mi música.
- Reiniciar el sistema restaura todos ajustes - Se requiere una memoria USB con los
y configuraciones existentes al estado archivos de actualización.
predeterminado.
- Es posible que el usuario seleccione si
quiere eliminar los archivos de música
guardados en Mi música.
303
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo iPod
Antes de usar iPod Pantalla del iPod
Se recomienda el uso de cables iPod originales suministrados por Apple. 1
9 10
2
Apple CarPlay no está disponible cuando el iPod se está usando.
8
uando usa el modo iPod por medio de un iPhone, debe deshabilitar
C
el ajuste Usar CarPlay en los ajustes del iPhone. 4
3
5 6 7
11
Español
1 Pantalla del modo 7 Archivo siguiente

Muestra el modo actualmente en Reproduce el archivo siguiente.
operación. * Cuando se mantiene presionado, la opera-
ción sigue la del dispositivo iPod.
2 Categoría
Muestra la categoría actual. 8 Arte del álbum
Muestra el arte del álbum.
3 Lista de categorías
Muestra todas las listas de categorías 9 Repetir
Repite al archivo actual o todos los archivos
* La lista de categorías puede variar de-
en Mi música.
pendiendo del tipo de dispositivo iPod.
* Cada vez que se presiona el botón, la op-
4 Información de archivo ción cambia de Repetir Apagado → Repetir
Muestra la información de archivo actual. una vez → Repetir todo.
*Canción, artista, álbum y archivos totales.
10 Aleatorio
5 Archivo anterior Reproduce los archivos en orden aleatorio.
Reproduce el archivo anterior. 11 Tiempo de reproducción
* Cuando se mantiene presionado, la Muestra el tiempo de reproducción actual y total.
operación sigue la del dispositivo iPod.
* Arrastre o toque la barra para ir hacia el
6 Pausa/Reproducción tiempo deseado. (Esta función podría no
Pausa o reproduce el archivo actual. estar disponible para ciertos dispositivos)
304
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciar el modo iPod
Iniciar el modo iPod automáticamente Iniciar el modo iPod manualmente
1. Use un conector de iPod para conectar el 1. Desde las teclas fijas del sistema, presio- 2. D
eslice desde la parte inferior hasta la parte superior
dispositivo iPod con la terminal de cone- ne el botón MODE. de la pantalla o presione el área de muestra de la
Español
xión USB. página en la parte izquierda de la pantalla.
2. Una vez que esté conectado el iPod, el 3. Presione [iPod] para operar el modo iPod. 4. La información de canción se mostrará y la
modo iPod comenzará a funcionar auto- canción se reproducirá automáticamente.
máticamente.
Información
Si el iPod ya está conectado y desea reproducirlo desde un modo diferente, remítase a la sección “Iniciar el
modo iPod manualmente”.
305
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
¿Qué es Apple CarPlay? Pantalla de Apple CarPlay
1. Al conectar su iPhone con Sistema, puede usar convenientemente
2
varias funciones, incluyendo Teléfono, Navegación, Mensajes,
Música y Siri.
2. Las funciones y operaciones disponibles pueden diferir dependien-
do del modelo de iPhone.
3. Apple CarPlay podría no estar disponible en su país o región.
carplay)
Antes de usar Apple CarPlay 3

1. Antes de conectar su teléfono móvil, verifique si Apple CarPlay puede usarse
en Ajustes → General → Restricciones.
Español
2. Antes de conectar su teléfono móvil, verifique si Siri puede usarse en Ajustes

→ General → Restricciones.
3. Apple CarPlay funciona con IPhone 5 o mayor 1
4. Apple CarPlay funciona con iOS 7.1 pero se recomienda una versión más
reciente.
5. No es posible usar en el vehículo iPod y Apple CarPlay al mismo tiempo.
6. Se recomienda el uso de cables iPhone originales suministrados por Apple. 1 Inicio
7. Al conectarse e ingresar a Apple CarPlay, se mantendrá el sonido del modo Lleva a la pantalla de inicio de Apple CarPlay
anterior. Solo se transformará la pantalla.
8. No es posible usar Apple CarPlay y audio por Bluetooth al mismo tiempo.
9. La mayoría de las funciones de Apple CarPlay requiere el uso de datos. 2 Pantalla de inicio
Antes de usar Apple CarPlay, asegúrese de que su teléfono tenga un plan Pantalla de inicio de Apple CarPlay
de datos.
10. Al conectar Apple CarPlay, el reconocimiento de voz opera basado en Siri. 3 Reproduciendo
La función de reconocimiento de voz del vehículo no funcionará. Lleva a la fuente de audio actual.
11. Para mayor información, remítase al sitio web de Apple (http://www.apple.
com/kr/ios/carplay/)
306
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo de Apple CarPlay
Cómo usar Siri Iniciar el modo de Apple CarPlay
1. Presione el botón de control de voz del man- 2. O mantenga presionado el botón de inicio 1. Conecte su iPhone al vehículo usando un
do a distancia del volante para operar Siri. en la pantalla de inicio de Apple CarPlay cable USB.
Español
para operar Siri.
3. O
mantenga presionado el botón de inicio en la 2. Presione [Apple CarPlay].
pantalla de inicio del iPhone para operar Siri.
Información
- Si Bluetooth estaba conectado, se desconectará
al conectar Apple CarPlay.
307
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Antes de usar Android Auto Pantalla Android Auto
1. Descargue la aplicación de Android Auto en su teléfono Android
6
con al menos Android 5.0 Lollipop. 7
2. Se recomienda el uso de cables originales de Android.
3. Al conectar Android Auto, Bluetooth se conectará de inmediato.
- Al exceder el número máximo de dispositivos registrados, se
eliminará uno de los dispositivos que no haya sido conectado
recientemente.
4. El modo de música de Bluetooth no se conecta.
5. No es posible usar CarLink, Apple CarPlay y Android Auto al mis-
mo tiempo.
6. Android Auto podría no estar disponible en su país o región. Remí-
tase al sitio: (http://www.android.com/auto/#what-you-need)
Español
7. Al conectarse e ingresar a Android Auto, se mantendrá el sonido

del modo anterior. Solo se transformará la pantalla.
8. La mayoría de las funciones de Android Auto requiere el uso de 1 2 3 4 5
datos. Antes de usar Apple CarPlay, asegúrese de que su teléfono
tenga un plan de datos.
9. Para mayores detalles sobre Android Auto, remítase al sitio de
apoyo de Google: (http://support.google.com/androidauto) 1 Mapa 5 Regresar al sistema
Opera la función de mapa (navegador). Lleva a la pantalla del menú princi-
Teléfono pal del sistema
2
Opera la función de teléfono. 6 Reconocimiento de voz
3 Pantalla de inicio Opera la función de reconocimien-
to de voz.
Lleva a la pantalla de inicio.
4 Música 7 Pantalla de inicio
Opera la función de Música. Pantalla de inicio para Android Auto.
* Muestra la música y el widget de clima.
308
GETtheMANUALS.org
Iniciar el modo Android Auto
Cómo comenzar
1. Conecte su teléfono Android al vehículo 2. La pantalla del menú principal se desple- 3. P
resione [Android Auto] para ingresar el modo.
usando un cable USB. gará de forma automática y se habilitará el
Español
botón de Android Auto. (Si Android Auto ya
está conectado, presione [MODE] desde
las teclas fijas del sistema para ir a la
pantalla del menú principal).
* Al conectar Android Auto, Bluetooth se

conectará de inmediato.
Información
*Al conectar Android Auto, Bluetooth se conectará de inmediato.
El modo de música de Bluetooth no se conecta.
*No es posible usar al iPod, Apple CarPlay y Android Auto al mismo tiempo.
* Se recomienda el uso de cables específicos.
309
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Manual
¿Qué es e-Manual?
sta función le permite verificar de forma conveniente los méto-

E
dos para usar las funciones clave del sistema.
Este e-manual podría diferir de las funciones reales del producto.

Español
1. Seleccione el menú deseado a la izquierda. Para métodos detallados

de operación, use los botones / para moverse entre páginas.
310
GETtheMANUALS.org
C
uando el vehículo esté en movimiento, se deshabilitarán el vídeo y otras
funciones para su seguridad.
- El vídeo no está disponible al conducir. El reproductor de audio no resulta
afectado cuando el vídeo esté apagado.
- La presentación de diapositivas no está disponible al conducir.
La pantalla de restricción desaparecerá cuando se ponga el freno de aparcamiento.
Español
311
GETtheMANUALS.org
Por su seguridad, el sistema ha sido equipado con una cámara de vista trasera para un rango de visión más amplio.
La cámara trasera funcionará automáticamente cuando la palanca de transmisión se cambie a R sin importar el modo actual.
La cámara trasera se detendrá de forma automática cuando la transmisión se cambie a una posición diferente.
Cuando esté funcionando la cámara, es posible usar las funciones de volumen y silencio.
Español
1. Ponga la llave de ignición en ON o ACC.

2. Ponga la palanca de transmisión en R.
¡Precaución!
-L a pantalla de la cámara de detección trasera puede verse diferente a la distancia real. Por su seguridad, siempre mantenga sus precauciones y verifique las partes trase-
ras y los costados.
- Cuando opere la cámara trasera, solo se pueden usar las funciones de volumen y llamadas entrantes.
312
GETtheMANUALS.org
Modo AVN - Opcional
Para mayor seguridad, este dispositivo también es compatible con el monitor de entorno.
AVM es una función opcional.
Presionar el interruptor AVM o cambiar a R convertirá el monitor a AVM sin importar el modo actual.
Presionar de nuevo el interruptor AVM o cambiar de R a otro estado, apagará automáticamente el modo AVM y restablecerá el modo anterior.
Cuando esté funcionando AVM, es posible usar las funciones de volumen y silencio.
Para cambiar entre los modos de vista en 2D o 3D, use las funciones del modo de vista dentro de los ajustes de AVM.
Vista 2D Vista 3D
Español
¡Precaución!
- La pantalla AVM puede verse diferente a la distancia real.. Por su seguridad, siempre mantenga sus precauciones y verifique las partes traseras y los costados.
- Cuando opere AVM, solo se pueden usar las funciones de volumen y llamadas entrantes.
313
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ajustes AVM
Lineamientos de sincronización PGS Advertencia de proximidad PAS Modo de vista
1.
Establece si se usan las líneas de guía 1.
Establece si se usan la advertencia de 1. Ajusta el modo de vista. (Estado predeter-
PGS. (Estado predeterminado: Encendido) proximidad PAS. (Estado predeterminado: minado: Vista 2D)
Español
Encendido)
314
GETtheMANUALS.org
Especificaciones del producto
Archivos compa- MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Nombre UNIDAD AVN con pantalla LCD TFT para automóvil
tibles TS, WMV
Suministro de MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
DC 14.4V Vídeo Codec
energía WMV7/8
Energía de ope- DC 9V ~ DC 16V Subtítulos compa-
ración tibles/ Resolución SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Consumo de 2A Archivos compa-
corriente MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
tibles
Común Corriente de Audio
3mA (Solo unidad principal) Tasa de bits 32Kbps a 320 Kbps
espera
Frecuencia de 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Temperatura -30℃ ~ +75℃ muestreo
operativa Formato de
Foto archivo
JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Temperatura de -40℃ ~ +85℃
almacenamiento Compatibilidad BLUETOOTH V4.1
Español
Dimensiones 278.4(W) x 175.5(H) x 191.5(D) Frecuencia de
2402 ~ 2480MHz
ancho de banda
Peso 2.5 kg Perfiles compa-
tibles A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Tamaño de
203.90 mm (Ancho) x 114.70 (Alto) mm (Área activa) Bluetooth
pantalla Salida de trans-
misión 3.0 dBm
Resolución 921,600 pixeles
Pantalla
Tipo de modu-
Modo de operación TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), matriz activa FHSS(GFSK)
lación
Luz de fondo LED Canal 79
Rango de fre- FM : 87.5~108.0MHz (Paso : 100kHz)

cuencia AM : 522~1620 kHz (Paso:9kHz)
Radio
Sensibilidad FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 ranura, 16GB Certifica-

Dispositivo ción
de almace- USB 1 puerto, USB2.0 HOST
namiento Por este medio Digen Co., declara que el equipo de radio tipo [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] cumple con las Directrices 2014/53/EU.
El texto completo de la declaración de conformidad con la EU se puede encontrar en la siguiente dirección : http://www.digen.co.kr
Formato FAT 16/32 Una copia de esta se encuentra dentro del equipo en el idioma original.
315
GETtheMANUALS.org
Antes de pensar que se trata de una falla del producto
La posición actual que se muestra en el navegador puede diferir de la posición real (ubicación y condiciones de manejo) en los casos siguientes:
Los casos siguientes no son fallas en el funcionamiento.

Al conducir por bifurcaciones con ángulos cerrados, la posición podría Al conducir con tráfico pesado o en intersecciones con paradas frecuentes.
mostrarse en la dirección opuesta.
Al conducir en condiciones resbalosas, como en la arena, nieve, etc.
La marca de posición podría mostrarse en la dirección opuesta. Al conducir con cadenas para llantas.
Dentro de las ciudades, la posición actual podría mostrarse en la dirección Cuando las llantas han sido reemplazadas recientemente (especialmente
opuesta en un punto fuera del camino. al usar la llanta de refacción o llantas para nieve con clavos).
Español
Al cambiar el nivel de acercamiento del máximo a otro nivel, la posición Al usar llantas del tamaño incorrecto.
podría mostrarse en otro camino. Cuando la presión de las 4 llantas es diferente.
Si el vehículo está embarcado en un ferri o un transportador de vehículos, Cuando la llanta de repuesto está gastada o usada (en especial con llan-
la posición podría detenerse en la posición anterior a ser cargado. tas para nieves con clavos usadas más allá de la segunda temporada).
Cuando se quita la terminal de la batería. Cuando se conduce cerca de edificios altos.

Cuando se ha instalado un portaequipaje para el toldo.
Cuando se conduce en un camino en forma de espiral.
Cuando se calcula una ruta de larga distancia al manejar en una carretera.
Cuando se maneja en regiones montañosa con giros y frenos bruscos.
En dichos casos, al seguir manejando el sistema hará una búsqueda
Al entrar en un camino después de pasar por un aparcamiento subterrá- o usará información actualizada del GPS para proporcionar la posición
neo, un aparcamiento en un edificio o por caminos con muchos giros. actual. (Esto podría tomar varios minutos)
316
GETtheMANUALS.org
Podría no haber una guía de ruta adecuada por las condiciones de búsqueda o la ubicación de manejo.

Se podría indicar seguir derecho al ir por un camino recto. Podría indicarse entrar en una zona restringida (zona restringida, camino
en construcción, etc.)
Podría no darse una indicación incluso al llegar a una intersección. Podría indicarse ir hacia un lugar que no es realmente el destino si los
caminos para llegar a ese lugar no existen o son muy angostos.
Hay ciertas intersecciones en que podrían no darse indicaciones.
Podrían darse indicaciones incorrectas si el vehículo se separa de la ruta
Se podría indicar que se dé vuelta en u en intersecciones donde no está designada. (Por ejemplo, si se gira en una intersección cuando se había
Español
permitido. indicado que se siguiera derecho)
Estas situaciones podrían ocurrir después de calcular la ruta.

Se podría dar una indicación correspondiente a una posición diferente a la Podría indicarse entrar en una zona restringida (zona restringida, camino
actual al girar en una intersección. en construcción, etc.)
Podría indicarse ir hacia un lugar que no es realmente el destino si los
Al manejar a gran velocidad, volver a calcular la ruta podría tomar más caminos para llegar a ese lugar no existen o son muy angostos.
tiempo.
Podrían darse indicaciones incorrectas si el vehículo se separa de la ruta
Se podría indicar que se dé vuelta en u en intersecciones donde no está designada. (Por ejemplo, si se gira en una intersección cuando se había
permitido. indicado que se siguiera derecho)
317
GETtheMANUALS.org
Antes de pensar que el producto falla
Antes de pensar que el producto falla
1. Los errores que ocurren durante la operación o instalación del dispositivo podrían confundirse con una falla del dispositivo.
2. Si tiene problemas con el dispositivo, intente las sugerencias siguientes.
3. Si el problema persiste, contacte con su vendedor o centro de servicio.
Problema Medidas
¿Puso el interruptor del vehículo en “ACC” o “ON”?
El sonido o imagen no funcionan.
¿El cable de conexión está desconectado o es inestable?
La pantalla se muestra pero el sonido no ¿Puso el volumen en nivel bajo?
funciona. ¿Desconectó o es inestable el cable de conexión AMP y de las bocinas? ¿Ha silenciado el volumen?
Español
Encendí la pantalla pero las esquinas Los paneles de LCD se ven más oscuros cuando se usan por periodos prolongados y esto no representa una falla.
están oscuras. Si la pantalla está demasiado oscura, contacte con su vendedor o centro de servicio.
Verifique el cable de conexión de las bocinas.
El sonido solo funciona en una de las bocinas.
¿Están ajustadas hacia un solo lado las posiciones de atenuador y balance?
Conecte un dispositivo externo pero no
¿Están bien conectados los conectores en la terminal AUX?
funciona adecuadamente.
318
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resolución de problemas
Problema Causa posible Medidas
Reemplace con un fusible adecuado. Si se desconecta de nuevo el fusible,
El fusible está desconectado.
contacte con su vendedor o centro de servicio.
No enciende.
El dispositivo no está conectado adecuadamente. Verifique que el dispositivo se haya conectado adecuadamente.
El color/tono de la imagen Los niveles de brillo, saturación, tono y Ajuste adecuadamente los niveles de brillo, saturación, tono y contraste a
es de baja calidad. contraste no están bien ajustados. través de los ajustes de pantalla.
El nivel de brillo está en bajo. Ajuste los niveles de brillo.
La imagen no funciona.
El volumen está en nivel bajo Mantenga el nivel del volumen
Español
El sonido no funciona
El dispositivo se encuentra adelantando, retrasan- El sonido no funciona cuando el dispositivo se encuentra adelantando, retra-
do, escaneando o reproduciendo en modo lento. sando, escaneando o reproduciendo en modo lento.
Use después de formatearla al formato FAT 12/16/32. Este dispositivo no reconoce
La memoria USB está dañada. archivos NFTS ni exFAT.
Elimine cualquier sustancia extraña de la superficie de contacto de la memoria USB y la
La memoria USB se encuentra contaminada. terminal multimedia.
Se está usando un cable USB por separado. Conecte la memoria USB directamente a la terminal multimedia del vehículo.
La USB no funciona. Se está usando un cable de extensión USB. Conecte la memoria USB directamente a la terminal multimedia del vehículo.
Se está usando una USB que no es del tipo

Use una USB estándar.
de cubierta de metal.
Se está usando una memoria tipo HDD, CF o SD. Use una USB estándar.
Solo los formatos MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC y WAV son compati-
No se pueden reproducir los archivos de música.
bles. Use solo los formatos de archivos de música compatibles.
Información - Reinicie el sistema si ocurre alguna anormalidad que no pueda resolverse con las medidas anteriores.
- Presione la teclas HOME y SETUP al mismo tiempo. Se apagará el dispositivo y se reiniciará el sistema-
319
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Español
320
GETtheMANUALS.org
Autonavigatiesysteem GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDING Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Nederlands
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Lees deze handleiding alstublieft zorgvuldig door voordat u uw apparaat gebruikt en bewaar het voor raadpleging in de toekomst.
Ontwerpen en specificaties zijn onderhevig aan wijzigingen zonder voorafgaande kennisgeving.
Bezoek de Ssangyong Motor website alstublieft voor gedetailleerde informatie over het autonavigatiesysteem.
- Adres van de website voor het downloaden van de AVN handleiding: http://www.smotor.com
321
GETtheMANUALS.org
Inhoud
Basis
Voorzorgsmaatregelen 323 Koppelen van Bluetoothapparaten 345
Belangrijke productinformatie 324 Uitschakelen en verwijderen van Bluetoothapparaten 347
Belangrijke producteigenschappen 325 Bluetooth oproepscherm 348
Onderdelen en functies van componenten 326 Bellen 349
Stuurwiel-bediening 328 Een telefoonoproep beantwoorden 351
Bluetooth-instellingen 352
Basismenu´s gebruik Bluetooth Muziek 356
Basis Gebruik 329 Mijn Muziek Scherm 357
Beginscherm 331 AUX-modus 358
Bladwijzer 332 Instellingen 359
iPod modus 368
Gebruik van AV-modus Starten van iPod-modus 369
Nederlands
Radio-modus 333 Apple CarPlay 370

Gebruik van Voorinstellingen & Radio opnemen 334 Apple CarPlay-modus 371
Media-modus 336 Staren Android Auto-modus 373
(1) USB muziek-modus e-Handleiding 374
USB Muziek-modus 337 Beperkingen van functies om veiligheidsmaatregelen 375
USB Muziek-scherm 338 Achteraanzicht-camera 376
(2) USB Video modus AVM Modus - Optioneel 377
USB Video modus starten 339 AVM Instellingen 378
USB Videoscherm 340 Productspecificaties 379
(3) USB Beeld-modus
USB Beeld-modus starten 341
Bijlage
USB Beeldscherm 342 Voordat u denkt dat het product een storing heeft gehad 380
Bluetooth-modus 343 Voordat u denkt dat het product een storing heeft 382
Bluetooth hoofdmenu 344 Problemen oplossen 383
322
GETtheMANUALS.org
Voorzorgsmaatregelen
Veiligheidswaarschuwingen Veiligheidsmaatregelen
Zelfs indien u routegeleiding van het multimedia-systeem ontvangt, s.v.p. Let op verkeersomstandigheden bij het autorijden.
de huidige verkeers- en wegregels in acht nemen.
In enkele ogenblikken kan de navigatie geleiding verstrekken in afge-
Het uitsluitend volgen van de routegeleiding van de navigatie kan leiden schermde gebieden.
tot overtredingen van huidige verkeers- en wegregels en resulteren in
verkeersongelukken. Gebruik van het apparaat tijdens het rijden kan leiden tot ongelukken als
gevolg van gebrek van aandacht voor de omgeving. Parkeer de auto eerst
Kijk niet op het scherm tijdens het autorijden. Naar het scherm kijken alvorens het apparaat te gebruiken. Bovendien is het mogelijk dat het tou-
tijdens langere perioden kan leiden tot verkeersongelukken. chscreen niet werkt voor sommige functies wanneer de auto in beweging
Gebruik het multimediasysteem niet tijdens het rijden, zoals POI´s ingeven is. De touchscreen-functie werkt alleen wanneer het voertuig gestopt is.
of routes opzoeken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot verkeersongelukken.
Dit product is alleen bestemd voor gebruik in voertuigen. Onthoudt u van
Parkeer de auto alvorens het apparaat te gebruiken. het installeren van dit apparaat in producten anders dan auto´s.
Het multimediasysteem niet demonteren, monteren of wijzigen. Zulke Indien u de positie van de installatie van het apparaat wilt wijzigen, s.v.p. navra-
Nederlands
acties kunnen leiden tot ongelukken, brand of elektrische schok. gen bij de plaats van aankoop of het serviceonderhoudscentrum. Er is technische
deskundigheid vereist bij het installeren of demonteren van het apparaat.
Wees voorzichtig om geen water te morsen of vreemde voorwerpen in het
apparaat te steken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot rook, vuur of storing. Bij het reinigen van het apparaat, dient u ervoor te zorgen om het appa-
raat uit te schakelen en een droge schone doek te gebruiken. Gebruik
Indien er afwijkingen optreden, zoals het insteken van vreemde materialen
nooit hard materiaal, chemische doekjes of oplosmiddelen (alcohol,
of rook als gevolg van blootstelling aan water, onmiddellijk het gebruik
benzine, thinners, etc.), aangezien dergelijke materialen het paneel van
stoppen en bij de plaats van aankoop of aangewezen onderhoudscentrum
het apparaat kunnen beschadigen of kleur/kwaliteitsvermindering kunnen
navragen.
veroorzaken. Indien u storingen van het product ondervindt, bij de plaats
Doorgaan met het gebruik kan resulteren in storing van het product. van aankoop of onderhoudsservicecentrum navragen.
Gebruik het apparaat niet indien het scherm blanco is of er geen geluid Stel het apparaat niet bloot aan ernstige schok of stoot.
wordt gehoord. Deze signalen geven storing van het product aan. Door-
gaan met het gebruik kan leiden tot ongelukken (brand, elektrische schok). Directe druk op de voorkant van de monitor kan schade aan het LCD- of
touchscreen veroorzaken.
Stop of parkeer niet op plaatsen waar dit niet is toegestaan om het product
te gebruiken. Zulke acties kunnen leiden tot verkeersongelukken. Bij gebruik van het apparaat met het contact uit zal een lege batterij-waar-
schuwing op het scherm worden weergegeven. Gebruik het systeem met
het contact ingeschakeld.
323
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Apple Inc. Gefabriceerd onder licentie van Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby en het dubbele-D symbool zijn handelsmerken van Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Apple Inc. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle rechten voorbehouden. TomTom en het „twee handen“-logo zijn han-
delsmerken of geregistreerde handelsmerken van TomTom N.V. of een van haar dochterbedrijven.
Het Bluetooth woordmerk en logo zijn geregistreerde handelsmerken eigendom
van Bluetooth SIG, Inc. en ieder gebruik van dergelijke merken is onder licentie. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Alle rechten voorbehouden. Dit materiaal is eigendom en wordt be-
Er is een mobiele telefoon met Bluetooth nodig om de draadloze Bluetooth-tech- schermd door auteursrechten en/of databaserechten en/of intellectuele eigendomsrechten die
nologie te gebruiken. eigendom zijn van TomTom of zijn leveranciers. Het gebruik van dit materiaal is onderworpen
aan de voorwaarden van een licentieovereenkomst. Iedere ongeautoriseerde kopie of bekend-
DivX making van dit materiaal leidt tot strafrechtelijke en civiele aansprakelijkheid.
Als DivX-gecertificeerd product kan dit product premium HD DivX video´s
afspelen. (Inclusief .avi en .divX)
DivX, DivX-gecertificeerd en geassocieerde logo´s zijn handelsmerken van
DivX en LLC en worden onder licentie gebruikt.
Nederlands
Zij worden beschermd door tenminste één van de volgende Amerikaanse

patenten: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
Gebruikt SD geheugenkaarten
1. De kaartlezer in dit apparaat is voor kaartenbestanden.
2. Het kaartenbestand voor dit apparaat is opgeslagen op de SD-kaart.
Geen bestanden op de SD-kaart toevoegen, verwijderen of formatteren. SD-kaart alleen verwijderen/insteken om de kaart met een nieuwe versie te updaten.
3. Gebruik s.v.p. alleen de SD-kaart die door de dealer werd verstrekt. Verdeel of kopieer het kaartenbestand niet naar een andere SD-kaart die u eventueel heeft.
Dit kan leiden tot storingen of onjuiste werking.
4. Het verwijderen en insteken van SD-kaarten terwijl het systeem in gebruik is kan leiden tot SD-kaart of systeemfouten.
Om de SD-kaart te verwijderen of in te steken, eerst het contact van het voertuig uitzetten.
5. Herhaaldelijk aansluiten/uitschakelen van de SD-kaart in een korte periode kan het apparaat beschadigen.
6. De SD-kaart is geformatteerd om slechts een kaartgegevensbestand te bevatten.
Het opslaan van andere bestanden op de SD-kaart kan resulteren in systeemfouten of storingen.
Kaart upgraden en AVN-software downloaden

1. Steek de SD-kaart in uw computer.
2. Ga naar de Upgrade-pagina (URL).
324
GETtheMANUALS.org
Belangrijke producteigenschappen
Functie Beschrijving Functie Beschrijving

Met Apple CarPlay kunt u telefoongesprekken voe-
Breed LCD-display Apple CarPlay ren, tekstberichten uitwisselen, de kaart gebruiken,
Levert simultaan hoge kwaliteitsvideo en muziek via het 9,2 naar muziek luisteren en Siri-functies gebruiken.
Display inch brede schermweergave met aanvullend gebruiksge-
mak via de touchscreen-weergave.
Met Android Auto kunt u Google Maps, telefoon,
Android Auto stemherkenning en muziekfuncties gebruiken.
Digitale tuner-functie
De digitale functie ondersteunt een geheugen van 12 zend-
stations voor iedere FM1, FM2, AM en DAB. Bluetooth aansluit-functie
Radio Levert de handenvrij-functie die bestuurders in staat stelt om
Nederlands
RDS Services Bluetooth draadloze gesprekken te voeren en ook van muziek te genie-
Biedt AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY functies tussen RDS
ten met het streamen van audio terwijl ze autorijden.
Services.
Automatische zoekfunctie voor media

Bedieningsfuncties digitaal beeldscherm
Identificeert automatisch mediabestanden, inclusief video,
USB Media audio en foto´s, die op USB en SD-kaart zijn opgeslagen en
Gemakkelijke bediening van de helderheid van het scherm
geeft ze voor uw gemak weer als lijsten. door het touchscreen voor gerieflijk kijken.
Diversen Stelt u in staat om de achterkant te zien via de HD-camera
Gebruikt TomTom Map wanneer u de achteruit inschakelt.
Nauwkeurige geleiding kan ontvangen worden met gebruik
Navigatie van de GPS-motor en een nauwkeurige kaart via de hoog- Rondom zicht-monitor - Optioneel
gevoelige antenne. Stelt u in staat om de voor-, achter- en zijkanten te zien met
de vier camera´s die in het voertuig geïnstalleerd zijn.
325
GETtheMANUALS.org
Onderdelen en functies van componenten
Vooraanzicht
Knop Beschrijving
1 AAN-UIT / VOLUME
1. Gebruiken om de stroom aan/uit te zetten of het volume te regelen.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om de stroom uit te
schakelen.
3. Kort indrukken om de AV aan/uit te zetten.
4. N aar links/rechts draaien om het volume te regelen. (bereik regeling
volume 0-45)
1 2 Home
2 3 4 5
1. Naar beginscherm (PIP, beeld-in-beeld) gaan.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om naar de Bladwij-
Nederlands
zer-modus te gaan.
3 MODUS
1. Gaat naar het hoofd-modus scherm.
2. In de Navigatie-modus, (meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt hou-
den om de laatste AV-modus te gebruiken die werd gebruikt voor
de navigatie-modus.
4 NAVI
1. Schakelt over naar navigatie-modus en geeft de huidige loca-
tie weer, onafhankelijk of AV aan/uit is.
2. (Meer dan 1,5 seconden) ingedrukt houden om naar het
scherm te gaan om uw bestemming op te zoeken.
5 INSTELLINGEN
In iedere modus ingedrukt houden om het instellingenscherm te tonen.
In de Radio/Audio/Video/Navigatie/Bluetooth Telefoonmodus,
indrukken om het betreffende instellingenscherm te tonen.
326
GETtheMANUALS.org
Achteraanzicht AVN 42P Connector
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
Nederlands
1) Radioantenne plug A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Om de radioantennekabel aan te sluiten A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS-antenne plug A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Om de GPS-antennekabel aan te sluiten A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Connector camera achteraanzicht A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Om een connector van een achteraanzicht-camera aan te sluiten A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-poort A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Om een USB-connector aan te sluiten voor de USB functie A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
B22 MIC-
- Om een DAB-antennekabel aan te sluiten B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
327
GETtheMANUALS.org
Stuurwiel-bediening
Stuurwiel-bediening
Knop Beschrijving
1 Tijdens een Bluetooth handenvrijgesprek ingedrukt houden om het gesprek
te beëindigen.
Wanneer niet aan het bellen, indrukken om Mute aan/uit te zetten.
6
2 In iedere modus
- Ieder keer verandert het indrukken van de toets in de volgorde Radio
2 3 →Media → Bluetooth Muziek → iPod → Mijn muziek-modus. (Indien het
4 media-apparaat niet is aangesloten zullen de betreffende modi worden
uitgeschakeld)
5 1 In Radio-modus
- Ingedrukt houden om de radio-modus te wijzigen in de volgorde FM1 → FM2
→ AM → DAB modus.
In Media-modus
- Ingedrukt houden om de modus te wijzigen in de volgorde USB Muziek →
USB Video → USB Beeld modus.
Nederlands
3
Regelt het volume.
4 Tijdens het spelen

- op omhoog/omlaag drukken om naar het vorige/volgende bestand te gaan.
In Radio-modus
- omhoog/omlaag drukken om naar de vorige/volgende voorinstelling te gaan.
-o mhoog/omlaag ingedrukt houden om naar de vorige/volgende uitzendfrequentie
te gaan.
5
Maakt gebruik van de Bluetooth handenvrij-modus.
In CarPlay gebruiken modus

6 - gebruikt Siri.
In Android Auto-modus
- gebruikt Google Voice.
328
GETtheMANUALS.org
Basis Gebruik
Starten van het systeem Afsluiten van het systeem
1. Indien het systeem in gebruik is, de AAN-UIT/VOLU-

1. Druk op de motor starten-knop of zet het 2. Zodra het systeem is aangezet zal het ME-knop ingedrukt houden (1,5 seconden) om de
contact op AAN of ACC. opstartproces beginnen en wordt het stroom uit te schakelen. Indien de stroom is uitgescha-
logo-scherm weergegeven. keld wordt de laatste gebruiksmodus bewaard.
Nederlands
3. De veiligheidswaarschuwingenpagina 4. Druk op de [Agree] knop om de meest recente mo- 2. De huidige tijd wordt getoond wanneer de
wordt getoond en de gebruikersinhoud is dus te tonen. (De standaardmodus is Radio FM1) stroom uit is.
uitgeschakeld.
- Kijk op de [Auto Verdwijnen] box om de meest recent gebruikte modus aan te zetten zonder de [Accoord]-knop in te drukken. - Indien het contact weer wordt aangezet, zet het
systeem automatisch de meest recent gebruikte
modus aan.
- Het systeem schakelt automatisch uit indien het
contact meer dan 3 minuten aanstaat en de deur
aan de bestuurderskant openstaat.
329
GETtheMANUALS.org
Resetten van het systeem Audio uit Audio aan
1. Druk tegelijkertijd op de MODUS en IN- 1. Indien de AV is on, kort (minder dan 1,5 1. Indien de AV uit staat, kort (minder dan 1,5
STELLINGEN- knop. seconden) de AAN-UIT/VOL-knop ingedrukt seconden) de AAN-UIT/VOL-knop ingedrukt
houden om de AV uit te zetten. houden om de AV aan te zetten.
Nederlands
2. Het systeem wordt uitgeschakeld en op- 2. Indien de audio uit is, wordt de meest 2. Indien de audio aan is, wordt het naviga-
nieuw opgestart. recent gebruikte navigatiemodus getoond. tiescherm getoond, maar de meest recent
gebruikte Audio begint te spelen.
Informatie
- Herstarten van het systeem herstelt bestaande instellin-
gen en configuraties terug naar hun standaardwaarden.
Dit is om de stabiliteit van het apparaat te garanderen
en is geen systeemfout.
330
GETtheMANUALS.org
Beginscherm
Beginscherm
1 Biedt een kort overzicht van de navigatiekaart en het routescherm.
1
/ Raak het scherm aan om naar het volledige navigatiescherm te
6
gaan.
2 Toont korte informatie over de nu afgespeelde radiomedia./ Raak het

2 scherm aan om naar het nu afgespeelde modus-scherm te gaan.
3 Bladwijzer
Voeg uw favoriete menu-items toe voor snelle en eenvoudige toegang.
4 Modus
3 4 5 Toont alle items in het systeemmenu.
Nederlands
5 Bestemming
Gaat naar het scherm waar u uw bestemming op kunt zoeken.
6 Display uit
Indrukken om de display uit te schakelen. Raak het scherm aan
om de display weer in te schakelen.
Informatie
- Druk op de [HOME]-knop om het Beginscherm te tonen.
- - Houdt de [HOME] knop ingedrukt om het Bladwijzerscherm te tonen.
331
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bladwijzer
Starten Bladwijzer Bladwijzerscherm
4 2
1
1. Op het Beginscherm [Bladwijzer] 2. Op het Bladwijzer Lijst scherm,
selecteren. op [Add] drukken.
3
Nederlands
1 Menu lijst
Bladwijzer Menu Lijst
3. Menu-items ingedrukt houden en 4. Bladwijzer lijst 2 Bevestigen
dan naar de gewenste plaats sle- Bij selectie, worden de wijzigen aan het Bladwijzermenu bewaard en
pen en neerzetten om ze toe te het Beginscherm hersteld.
voegen/verwijderen/verplaatsen. Zone om menu´s toe te voegen
3
Druk dan op de Bevestigen-knop.
De menu lijst items worden gesleept en naar de zone waar ze worden
toegevoegd verplaatst om ze als Bladwijzermenu´s toe te voegen.
4 Resetten
Reset de Bladwijzer-instellingen.
Indien de Bladwijzer reeds is toegevoegd, op de Bewerken-knop drukken. - Druk op de [HOME]-knop om het Beginscherm te tonen.
- - Houdt de [HOME] knop ingedrukt om het Bladwijzerscherm te tonen.
332
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starten Radiomodus
Starten Radiomodus Radioscherm
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
1. Druk op de MODE knop om het hoofd- 7

menuscherm te tonen, en dan op [Radio]
drukken.
1 Display-modus 7 Radio Band Tab
Nederlands
Toont de nu gebruikte modus. Indien u de gewenste tab selecteert, wordt de geselecteerde Ra-
dio-modus gebruikt.
2 Voorinstelling
Toont de lijst met voorinstellingen. 8 Home
* De preset-knop ingedrukt houden om de huidige
Gaat naar beginscherm.
frequentie te bewaren onder de geselecteerde voorin- 9 Terug
stellingen-knop. Gaat naar het vorige scherm.
* Er kunnen tot 12 vooraf ingestelde frequenties bewaard 10 DAB
worden voor FM1/FM2/AM modi. Gebruikt de DAB-modus.
3 Frequentie 11 TA On / Off
Toont de huidige frequentie. Zet verkeersmeldingen Aan/Uit. (Voor details, zie
* Iedere keer dat deze zone naar rechts wordt ge- de „DAB“-sectie.)
sleept, wordt de modus gewijzigd in de volgorde FM1 12 DLS Aan /Uit
→ FM2 → AM → FM1. Zet DLS Text Aan/Uit. (Voor details, zie de „DAB“-sectie.)
4 Indicator 13 Scannen
Toont de Aan/Uit status van de REG/AF/TP/PTY/ Speelt frequenties met een uitstekende ontvangst
SCAN/AST/STEREO functies. 5 seconden af.
5 Omhoog tunen 14 AST
Indrukken om per FM omhoog te tunen: 0,1MHz, AM: 9KHz) Bewaart frequenties met een uitstekende ontvangst onder
vooraf ingestelde-toetsen.
6 Tune Down Opnemen Radio
Indrukken om per FM omlaag te tunen: 0,1MHz, AM: 9KHz) 15
Neemt de nu gebruikte radio-uitzending op.
333
GETtheMANUALS.org
Gebruik van Voorinstellingen & Radio opnemen
Bewaart voorinstellingen Bewaart voorinstellingen
automatisch (Autostore) handmatig
Opnemen Radio
1. In het radioscherm op [AST] 1. De frequentie selecteren om te 1. In het radioscherm op drukken. 2. In het scherm dat vraagt of u radio
drukken. bewaren. wilt opnemen, op [OK] drukken om
te beginnen met opnemen.
Nederlands
2. Bewaart frequenties met een uit- 2. De knop van voorinstellingen 3. Het indrukken van de stop-knop beëindigt het opnemen en bewaart de
stekende ontvangst onder vooraf ingedrukt houden die u wilt audio automatisch in de Mijn muziek Radio map.
ingestelde-toetsen in aflopende bewaren. De huidige frequentie
volgorde. naar de gewenste voorinstellin-
gen-knop met een beep.
- Indien er minder dan 12 radiofrequenties met uitstekende ontvangst zijn, worden - De opnamen dienen meer dan 5 seconden en kunnen tot aan 60 minuten duren met een
de eerder bewaarde voorinstellingen opgeslagen onder de resterende voorinstel- opname.
- Opgenomen radiobestanden kunnen in Mijn muziek worden afgespeeld.
lingen-kanalen.
- Er kunnen tot 100 bestanden worden bewaard. Indien de opslagcapaciteit overschreden wordt
- Tijdens het gebruik van Autostore de AST knop opnieuw indrukken om de functie met minder dan 100 bestanden, wordt het opnemen automatisch gestopt en additionele opna-
te annuleren en de vorige frequentie af te spelen. mes worden niet meer ondersteund.
334
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Starten DAB-modus DAB-scherm
1 8 Terug
9 10 11 12 13 Gaat naar het vorige scherm.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Gebruikt de FM/AM modus.
4
10 Service volgen Aan / Uit
SF(AF) AAN / UIT
2 * SF(AF) : Deze functies biedt continue ontvangst
5 3 6
door automatisch het identieke kanaal in de
1. In het radioscherm op DAB naburige frequenties op te zoeken wanneer de
drukken om de DAB-modus te ontvangst van het huidige kanaal zwak wordt.
gebruiken. TA(Verkeersmeldingen) Aan/Uit
11
Zet Verkeersmeldingen aan/uit.
* TA: Deze functies biedt verkeersmeldingen en
-bulletins in realtime aan.
Nederlands
12 DLS Text(Dynamic Label Segment Text) On / Off
1 Display-modus Zet DLS tekst aan/uit.
Toont de nu gebruikte modus. *D
LS Tekst : Deze functie toont de tekst die uitge-
zonden wordt door het huidige radiostation op het
2 Voorinstelling apparaat. Types informatie zijn onder andere pro-
Toont het bewaarde station voor selectie door de gebruiker. gramma-informatie, inclusief slogans van stations, of
* De Voorinstellingen-knop ingedrukt houden om het huidige station te bewaren de titel en de artiest van het nu afgespeelde nummer.
onder de geselecteerde knop van voorinstellingen.
* Er kunnen tot 12 stations worden bewaard. 13 Lijst
3 Stationsinfo Toont automatisch geactualiseerde lijsten.
Toont het huidige station.
4 Indicator
Toont de aan/uit-status van de DAB/TP-functies.
5 Kanaal omlaag
Gaat naar het vorige station.
6 Kanaal omhoog
Gaat naar het volgende station.
7 Home
Gaat naar beginscherm.
335
GETtheMANUALS.org
Media-modus
Over USB-geheugenapparaten
1. Sluit het USB-apparaat aan na het aanzetten van het contact. Het USB-apparaat kan worden beschadigd indien het reeds is aangesloten als het
contact wordt aangezet. USB-apparaten zijn geen elektronische componenten van automobielen.
2. Het aan- of uitzetten met het USB-apparaat aangesloten, kan leiden tot onjuiste USB-werking.
3. Wees voorzichtig met statische elektriciteit bij het aansluiten/uitschakelen van externe USB-apparaten.
4. Encoded MP3-spelers worden niet herkend indien ze als extern apparaat worden aangesloten.
5. Wanneer u een extern USB-apparaat aansluit, is het mogelijk dat het systeem onder bepaalde omstandigheden het USB-apparaat niet herkent..
6. Dit systeem herkent USB-apparaten die zijn geformatteerd in het FAT16/32 bestandsformaat. USB-media met NTFS of exFAT type bestandssyste-
men worden niet ondersteund.
7. Sommige USB-apparaten worden niet ondersteund door compabiliteitsproblemen. Voor het beginnen met het gebruik, s.v.p. controleren of het appa-
raat normaal werkt.
8. Herhaaldelijk aansluiten/uitschakelen van het USB-apparaat in een korte periode kan het product beschadigen.
9. Er kan soms een abnormaal geluid optreden bij het afsluiten van het USB-apparaat.
10. Afsluiten van het USB-apparaat terwijl er media in USB-modus worden afgespeeld kan leiden tot schade aan het USB-apparaat of onjuiste werking.
Voor het afsluiten van het USB-apparaat eerst het systeem uitzetten of de modus wijzigen.
11. De tijd die nodig is om het externe USB-apparaat te herkennen kan variëren, afhankelijk van het type, grootte of bestandsformaten opgeslagen op
Nederlands
de USB. Zulke verschillen in benodigde tijd geven geen storing aan.

12. Gebruik van USB-apparaten voor andere doeleinden dan muziekbestanden afspelen of beeldbestanden weergeven is verboden.
13. Gebruik geen USB-kabel om batterijen op te laden of voor USB-accessoires die hitte genereren. Dergelijke acties kunnen leiden tot verminderde
prestaties of schade aan het systeem veroorzaken.
14. Het is mogelijk dat het apparaat het USB-apparaat niet herkent indien apart aangeschafte USB-hubs en verlengkabels worden gebruikt. Sluit de
USB direct aan op de multimedia-aansluiting van het voertuig.
15. Indien u USB-apparaten voor massa-opslag gebruikt, zijn er gevallen waarbij de logische drives gescheiden zijn voor gebruiksgemak. In zo´n
geval worden alleen bestanden in de logische drive van de root directory afgespeeld. Indien u een USB met gescheiden partities (logische drives)
gebruikt, bestanden die u wilt afspelen opslaan in de root directory. Indien applicaties zijn geïnstalleerd op specifieke USB´s, is het mogelijk dat de
bestanden in deze USB´s niet correct worden afgespeeld, om de bovenstaande redenen.
16. Het apparaat werkt mogelijk niet juist indien MP3-spelers, mobiele telefoons, digitale camera´s of andere elektronische apparaten (USB-apparaten
niet herkend als draagbare disk drives) worden aangesloten op het apparaat.
17. Het is mogelijk dat het opladen met de USB voor sommige apparaten niet werkt.
18. Normaal gebruik wordt alleen gegarandeerd voor types USB-geheugen apparaten met metalen kap.
19. Het apparaat werkt mogelijk niet juist wanneer er formaten als HDD type, CF, of SD Memory gebruikt worden.
20. USB memory sticks gebruikt door het aansluiten van een adapter, inclusief SD Type USB memory sticks en CF Type USB memory sticks, kunnen
mogelijk niet juist worden herkend.
336
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Muziek-modus
Starten van USB muziek-modus Bewaren muziekbestand
1. D
ruk op de MODE-toets om het hoofdmenus- 1. N
a het afspelen van het bestand dat u wilt 2. In het Muziekbestand opslaan scherm op
cherm weer te geven en druk dan op [Media]. opslaan, op drukken in het Muziekscherm. [OK] drukken.
Nederlands
2. De standaard media-modus is USB Muziek. 3. U kunt de bestanden die u heeft bewaard
Informatie checken in Mijn muziek.
De functie werkt niet tenzij er tenminste een muziekbestand op
het USB-apparaat staat. (De functie werkt niet indien er geen
mediabestand op het USB-apparaat staat)
- Audio Codec : MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10,
LPCM, FLAC
- Extensie : MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Sample frequentie: 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
- Bit Rate : 32Kbps~320Kbps
-W aarschuwing: Dit apparaat ondersteunt audiobestanden
die een bit rate van 320Kbps gebruiken en het gebruik van
bestanden in het 192Kbps bit rate bereik wordt aanbevo-
len. Indien u bestanden zonder vaste bit rates gebruikt, Informatie
functioneren sommige functies (FF/REW) functies mogelijk
niet. - Het is mogelijk om tot 100 nummers op te slaan.
337
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Muziek-scherm
USB Muziek-scherm
6 Volgend bestand
1 Speelt het volgende bestand af.
9 10 11 * De toets ingedrukt houden om snel het volgende bestand op het USB-apparaat op
2 te zoeken. En de naam wordt getoond. Zodra de toets wordt vrijgegeven, begint
het bestand op normale snelheid te spelen.
3 7 Vorig bestand
12 Speelt het vorige bestand af.
* De toets ingedrukt houden om snel het vorige bestand op het USB-apparaat op te
5 zoeken. En de naam wordt getoond. Zodra de toets wordt vrijgegeven, begint het
4 bestand op normale snelheid te spelen.
7 8 6
8 Pauzeren/Spelen
13 Speelt/pauzeert het huidige bestand.
9 Herhalen
Herhaalt het huidige of alle bestanden op een USB-apparaat.
Nederlands
14 * Iedere keer dat de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt de optie gewijzigd van Bestand
herhalen → Map herhalen → Een herhalen.
10 Shuffle
Speelt bestanden in willekeurige volgorde.
1 Display-modus Bewaren Muziekbestand
Toont de nu gebruikte modus. 11
Bewaart het huidige bestand in Mijn muziek.
2 Bovenliggende map 12 Bestandsindex
Gaat naar de bovenliggende map Toont het huidige bestand/totaal aantal bestanden in de huidige map.
3 Map-naam 13 Speeltijd
Toont de huidige map. Toont de huidige speeltijd/totale speeltijd.
* Sleep of raak de balk aan om naar de gewenste tijd te gaan.
4 Muziek lijst
Toont de lijst met muziekbestanden van de huidige map. 14 USB Mode Tab
* De naam van het nu afgespeelde nummer wordt gemarkeerd Indien u de gewenste tab selecteert, wordt de geselecteerde modus gebruikt.
5 Nummer-info
Toont informatie van de map, artiest, titel, album en albumkunst van het huidige bestand.
338
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Video modus starten
USB Video modus starten
1. Druk op de MODE-toets om het 2 - 1. Wanneer het USB Muziek- 2 - 2. Of raak de USB Video tab 3. Zodra het video bedie-
hoofdmenuscherm weer te geven scherm wordt getoond, het aan om de USB Video modus ningspaneel wordt weergege-
en druk dan op [Media]. scherm naar rechts slepen te gebruiken. ven, wordt de Video in volledig
om de USB Video-modus te scherm afgespeeld.
gebruiken.
Nederlands
Informatie
De functie werkt niet tenzij er tenminste een videobestand op het USB-apparaat staat. (De functie werkt niet indien er geen mediabestanden op het USB-apparaat staan)
- De standaard media-modus is USB Muziek.
- Extensies : MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Beeldresolutie: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Ondertitels: SMI (Ondertitels werken mogelijk niet juist indien de naam van het videobestand afwijkt van de naam van het ondertitelbestand.)
- Waarschuwing: Hoge resolutie-bestanden die bit rates hoger dan 2Mbps gebruiken werken mogelijk niet goed.
339
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Videoscherm
USB Videoscherm
5 Volgend bestand
8 9 * Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige bestand afgespeeld en de volgen-
2 de bestandsnaam weergegeven.
6 Vorig bestand
3 Speelt het vorige bestand af.
10 * Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige bestand afgespeeld en de vorige
4 bestandsnaam weergegeven.
7 Pauzeren/Spelen
6 7 5 Speelt/pauzeert het huidige bestand.
8 Ondertitel-grootte
11 Wijzigt de ondertitel-grootte.
* Deze toets is beschikbaar wanneer er ondertitels zijn.
9 Volledig scherm
Nederlands
12 Wijzigt de display van normaal naar volledig scherm.

* Bij het aanraken van een zone zonder toets op het scherm, wordt het scherm naar
volledig scherm-modus geschakeld.
10 Bestandsindex
1 Display-modus Toont het huidige bestand/totaal aantal bestanden in de huidige map.
Toont de nu gebruikte modus.
11 Speeltijd
2 Bovenliggende map Toont de huidige speeltijd/totale speeltijd.
Gaat naar de bovenliggende map * Sleep of raak de balk aan om naar de gewenste tijd te gaan.
3 Bestands/Map-naam 12 USB Mode Tab

Toont het huidige bestand en map. Indien u de gewenste tab selecteert, wordt de geselecteerde modus gebruikt.
4 Video Lijst
Toont de lijst met videobestanden van de huidige map.
* De naam van de nu afgespeelde video wordt gemarkeerd
340
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Beeld-modus starten
USB Beeld-modus starten
1. Druk op de MODE-toets om 2 - 1. Wanneer het USB Muziek- 2 - 2. Of raak de USB Video tab 3. Zodra het afbeelding bedie-
het hoofdmenuscherm weer te scherm wordt getoond, het aan om de USB Afbeel- ningspaneel wordt weergegeven,
geven en druk dan op [Media]. scherm naar rechts slepen ding-modus te gebruiken. wordt de afbeelding in volledig
om de USB Afbeelding-mo- scherm afgespeeld.
dus te gebruiken. (Muziek →
Video → Afbeelding)
Nederlands
Informatie
De functie werkt niet tenzij er tenminste een afbeeldingsbestand op het USB-apparaat staat. (De functie werkt niet indien er geen mediabestand op het USB-apparaat staat)
- De standaard media-modus is USB Muziek.
- Bij het wijzigen van Muziek-modus naar afbeelding-modus wordt verder gegaan met het afspelen van het geluid van de muziek die gespeeld wordt.
- Bij het wijzigen van Video-modus naar Afbeelding-modus wordt verder gegaan met het afspelen van het geluid van de video die gespeeld wordt.
- Ondersteund afbeeldingsformaat: JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
341
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Beeldscherm
USB Beeldscherm
4 Muziek lijst
1
7 8 9 Toont de lijst met afbeeldingsbestanden van de huidige map.
* De nu weeergegeven afbeeldingsnaam wordt gemaarkeerd
2
5 Volgend bestand
10
4 *Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige bestand afgespeeld en de volgen-
de bestandsnaam weergegeven.
6 Vorig bestand
6 5 Speelt het volgende bestand af.
* Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige bestand afgespeeld en de vorige
bestandsnaam weergegeven.
11 7 Diashow
Nederlands
Alle afbeeldingen op het USB.apparaat worden opeenvolgend getoond vol-

gens het geselecteerde tijdsinterval
* De in-/uitzoom-functie wordt niet ondersteund.
* Diashow is niet beschikbaar onder het rijden.
1 Display-modus 8 Draaien
Toont de nu gebruikte modus. Draait de afbeelding kloksgewijs.
2 Bovenliggende map
9 Bewaren afbeelding
Gaat naar de bovenliggende map
Bewaart de afbeelding die getoond wordt wanneer de display uitgezet wordt.
3 Bestands/Map-naam
Toont de map, bestandsnaam, bestandstype en resolutie van de huidige afbeelding. 10 Bestandsindex
Toont het huidige bestand/totaal aantal bestanden in de huidige map.
11 USB Mode Tab

Indien u de gewenste tab selecteert, wordt de geselecteerde modus gebruikt.
342
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth-modus
Voor het gebruik van Bluetooth
1. Voor het aansluiten van de headset op de mobiele telefoon, Bluetooth aanzetten en de verborgen status van de mobiele telefoon uitschakelen.
2. Er kunnen tot vijf Bluetooth-apparaten gekoppeld worden.
3. Er kan slechts een Bluetooth apparaat tegelijk aangesloten worden.
4. Voor handenvrij-volume is het min.volume 6 en max. volume 40.
Bluetooth-modus starten
Nederlands
1. Druk op de MODE-toets om het 2. De melding Bluetooth-aansluiting 3-1. Druk op [Ja] om het Blue- 3.-2. Indien de [Nee] toets wordt
hoofdmenuscherm weer te ge- wordt weergegeven. (Indien er tooth-aansluiting scherm te ingedrukt, wordt het Bluetooth
ven en druk dan op [Bluetooth]. geen telefoons zijn gekoppeld) tonen. telefoonscherm (toetsenbord) ge-
toond. U kunt ook een apparaat
koppelen door op [Aansluiten] te
drukken in dit scherm.
Informatie
- Om meer apparaten toe te voegen, dient u een van de vorige toegevoegde apparaten te verwijderen.
343
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth hoofdmenu
Bluetooth hoofdmenu
7 1 Display-modus
1
2
2 Belgeschiedenis
Toont de recente gebelde/ontvangen/gemiste belgeschiedenis.
3
8
3 Contacten
4
Toont het contacten lijstscherm.
* De contacten kunnen alleen bekeken worden indien er contacten zijn gedownload.
5
4 Toetsenblok
6 Toont het telefoontoetsenbord-scherm.
5 Aansluiten
Nederlands
Toont het Bluetooth-aansluiting scherm.
6 Bluetooth-instellingen
Toont het Bluetooth-instellingen scherm.
7 Status iconen
Toont de huidige status van de telefoon rechtsboven op het scherm.
8 Naam telefoon
Toont de naam van het nu aangesloten apparaat.
344
GETtheMANUALS.org
Koppelen van Bluetoothapparaten
Zoeken vanaf Auto Auto-aansluiting
- Het Bluetooth apparaat wordt
automatisch aangesloten over-
eenkomstig de instellingsoptie,
wanneer het contact van de auto
aangezet wordt (ACC ON).
- Indien de door de gebruiker gese-
lecteerde telefoon niet kan worden
aangesloten, probeert het sys-
1. Druk op [Zoeken vanaf Auto]. 2. Apparaten zoeken. (Verborgen 3. Selecteer de naam van het teem automatisch om de meest
status van mobiele telefoon apparaat om aan te sluiten. recent aangesloten telefoon aan
uitschakelen.) te sluiten. Indien de meest recent
aangesloten telefoon niet kan
worden aangesloten, probeert
het systeem om alle gekoppelde
Nederlands
telefoons opeenvolgend aan te
sluiten. (indien aansluiten mislukt
na 1 cyclus proberen, wordt het
Auto-aansluiting proberen beëin-
digd.)
4. Controleer het wachtwoord en 5. Het Bluetooth aansluiting scherm 6. Zodra de Bluetooth verbinding
ga door met koppelen van uw wordt getoond. succes heeft, wordt de naam van
Bluetooth apparaat. de aangesloten mobiele telefoon
weergegeven.
Informatie
- Max. zoektijd: 15 seconden, max. opgezochte apparaten: 20 apparaten
- Het wachtwoord wodrdt random gecreëerd.
- Indien het apparaat niet wordt gevonden, s.v.p. het volgende controleren.
* Is de Bluetooth-functie op uw Bluetooth-apparaat ingeschakeld?
* Is de Bluetooth ingesteld op verborgen status?
- Indien opzoeken en verbinden nog steeds niet werken, s.v.p. uw Bluetooth-apparaat herstarten en opnieuw proberen.
- Indien het apparaat voorheen gekoppeld is, het apparaat uit de lijst selecteren om te verbinden.
345
GETtheMANUALS.org
Zoeken vanaf het apparaat
1. Druk op [Zoeken vanaf het appa- 2. Zoek naar de naam van de auto 3. Het Bluetooth aansluiting scherm 4. Zodra de Bluetooth verbinding
raat]. en koppel het apparaat. Contro- wordt getoond. succes heeft, wordt de naam van
leer het wachtwoord en ga door de aangesloten mobiele telefoon
met koppelen van uw Bluetooth weergegeven.
apparaat.
Nederlands
Informatie
- Het wachtwoord wodrdt random gecreëerd.
- Indien het apparaat niet wordt gevonden, s.v.p. het volgende controleren.
* Is de Bluetooth-functie op uw Bluetooth-apparaat ingeschakeld?
* Is de Bluetooth ingesteld op verborgen status?
- Indien opzoeken en verbinden nog steeds niet werken, s.v.p. uw Bluetooth-apparaat herstarten en opnieuw proberen.
346
GETtheMANUALS.org
Uitschakelen en verwijderen van Bluetoothapparaten
Een apparaat uitschakelen Een apparaat verwijderen
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, 2. Selecteer de naam van het 1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, 2. Markeer het vak met de naam van
op [Aansluiten] drukken. apparaat om af te sluiten. op [Aansluiten] drukken. het apparaat om te verwijderen.
Nederlands
3. Druk op [OK] om uit te schakelen. 3. Selecteer de ingeschakelde prullenbak om het apparaat te selecteren
vanaf het Apparaat Verwijderen- scherm.
Informatie
-E
en apparaat kan niet verwijderd worden indien het aangesloten is. (Alleen uitgeschakel-
de apparaten kunnen verwijderd worden.)
347
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth oproepscherm
Bluetooth oproepscherm
1 Naam telefoon en naam/nummer contact
Toont de naam van het nu verbonden apparaat en de naam/het nummer
3 4 5
van de andere partij tijdens een gesprek.
2 Gesprekstijd
Toont de gesprekstijd.
1 2
3 Handenvrij gesprek / Privé gesprek
Toont de status van het huidige gesprek (indrukken om van handenvrij naar
de Bluetooth mobiele telefoon te schakelen).
4 MIC Volume
7
6 Regelt het uitgaande volume tijdens gesprekken. Stelt het gespreksvolume
in zoals dat door de andere partij gehoord wordt (niveaus 1-5). (Deze func-
tie kan alleen worden gebruikt tijdens een handenvrij gesprek)
Nederlands
5 Mute
Zet de Mic aan/uit. (Deze functie kan alleen worden gebruikt tijdens een
handenvrij gesprek)
6 Zenden / Bellen / Eindigen

Belt het nummer / Eindigt een gesprek.
7 Toetsenblok
Dient om nummers in te voeren/te verwijderen.
348
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bellen
Bellen Contacten downloaden
1. Nummer ingeven. 2. Druk op de Bel-toets. 1. Selecteer de contact-toets. Druk 2. Controleer uw telefoon alstublieft en
accepteer het downloadverzoek. (Telefoons
op [Contacten downloaden]. hebben aanvullende bevestiging nodig.)
Nederlands
3. Toon de gesprekstijd tijdens een 3. Druk op [OK] 4. D
e Contacten zijn gedownload. (Behoudt
gesprek. de voorgaande status tot aan annuleren)
Informatie
- Na het downloaden hebben telefoons aanvullende bevestiging nodig. (Dit kan apart
worden ingesteld in uw mobiele apparaat)
- Deze functies wordt mogelijk niet ondersteund voor sommige types contacten (Goog-
le, T Contacts, etc).
- Het downloaden gaat ook door als u naar een andere modus wijzigt terwijl het down-
loaden bezig is.
- Er kunnen tot aan 1.000 contacten gedownload worden.
-D e contacten kunnen alleen worden gedownload vanaf de telefoon. Verwijderen of
toevoegen wordt niet ondersteund.
- Na het downloaden van de contacten wordt de geschiedenis van de meest recente
150 gesprekken ook gedownload. (De lijst met de geschiedenis van tot aan 50 gebel-
de, inkomende en gemiste gesprekken wordt opgeslagen,)
349
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bellen vanaf Contacten
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, 2. Druk op de Bel-toets om te bel- 3. Druk op het vergrootglas om in
op [Contacten] drukken. len vanaf het lijst-scherm. contacten te zoeken.
Nederlands
4. Voer een naam of telefoonnummer in en druk op [Zoeken]. 5. Druk op de Bel-toets om te bel- 6. De Bluetooth-oproep wordt gestart.
len vanaf het lijst-scherm.
350
GETtheMANUALS.org
Een telefoonoproep beantwoorden
Een telefoonoproep beantwoorden
1. Indien er een inkomend gesprek is, wordt 2. Toont de informatie van de andere partij en 3. Nadat het gesprek eindigt, wordt de ge-
de informatie van de andere partij getoond de gesprekstijd. bruikte modus hersteld.
op de pop-up van het inkomende gesprek.
Druk op [Handenvrij] of [Privé] om een
Nederlands
gesprek te beantwoorden. (Op [Weigeren]
drukken beëindigt de melding en hersteld
de voorgaand gebruikte modus.)
Informatie
- Indien de pop-up Inkomend gesprek wordt getoond, werken de meeste functies in de AV-modus niet. Nadat een gesprek eindigt, wordt de voorgaand gebruikte media afgespeeld.
- De USB Diashow eindigt echter.
- Het handenvrij volume kan apart van het AV-modus volume worden ingesteld.
351
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth-instellingen
Bluetooth aan/uitzetten
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, op [Blue- 2. Druk op [Bluetooth gebruiken]. 3. Stelt in of Bluetooth Auto Connection
tooth instellingen] drukken. gebruikt dient te worden, (standaardstatus
Informatie : Gebruiken)
- Indien u op [Niet gebruiken] drukt, worden de meeste functies behalve [Bluetooth gebruiken] en [Resetten] uitgeschakeld.
Nederlands
Naam apparaat wijzigen
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, op [Blue- 2. Druk op [Naam apparaat wijzigen]. 3. Druk op de naam en druk op [Gereed].
tooth instellingen] drukken. (De standaard naam van het apparaat is
SSANGYONG AVN)
352
GETtheMANUALS.org
Auto aansluiten instellingen
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, op [Blue- 2. Druk op [Auto Connection].

tooth instellingen] drukken.
Nederlands
Instellingen contacten
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, op [Blue- 2. Druk op [Contacten]. 3. Stelt in of contacten automatisch gedown-
tooth instellingen] drukken. load moeten worden zodra Bluetooth
aangesloten wordt. (Standaard status:
[Niet gebruiken].)
353
GETtheMANUALS.org
Belgeschiedenis wissen.
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, 2. Druk op [Belgeschiedenis wissen]. 3. Druk op [OK]. 4. De belgeschiedenis is gewist.
op [Bluetooth instellingen]
drukken.
Nederlands
Bluetooth resetten
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, 2. Druk op [Resetten]. 3. Indien de pop-up met reset-mel-
op [Bluetooth instellingen] ding wordt getoond, op [OK]
drukken. drukken.
354
GETtheMANUALS.org
Beltoon instellingen
1. In het Bluetooth telefoonscherm, op [Blue- 2. Druk op [Beltoon]. 3. Selecteer de gewenste beltoon.
tooth instellingen] drukken.
Nederlands
Informatie
- Zodra een beltoon wordt geselecteerd, wordt er eenmalig een preview van de beltoon afgespeeld.
355
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Muziek
Voor het gebruik van Bluetooth Muziek Bluetooth Muziek scherm
1. De Bluetooth Muziek-modus kan alleen gebruikt worden wanneer er een
Bluetooth telefoon is aangesloten. 1
6
2. Indien Bluetooth is aangesloten zal de muziek automatisch afgespeeld
worden wanneer u de Bluetooth Music Mode inschakelt.
- Indien Auto Play niet werkt, de afspelen-knop opnieuw indrukken.
2
- De muziek speelt mogelijk niet automatisch af, afhankelijk van het pro-
gramma dat muziek afspeelt op het aangesloten apparaat.
3 4 5
Nederlands
1 Display-modus
2 Nummer-info
Toont informatie over nummer, artiest, album.
3 Vorig bestand
Speelt het vorige bestand af.
4 Pauzeren/Spelen
Speelt/pauzeert het huidige bestand.
5 Volgend bestand
Speelt het volgende bestand af.
6 Bluetooth telefoon
Gebruikt de Bluetooth telefoon-modus.
356
GETtheMANUALS.org
Mijn muziek
Was is Mijn muziek? Mijn Muziek Scherm
- Min Muziek geeft een functie aan 7 Volgend bestand
1
waar muziekbestanden op een 9 10 11
Speelt het volgende bestand af.
USB-geheugen drive of radio op- * Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige
bestand afgespeeld en de volgende bestandsnaam
name-bestanden in het systeem weergegeven.
worden opgeslagen om ze af te 2
spelen in het voertuig. 8 8 Album kunst
4 Toont de albumkunst.
- De functie werkt niet tenzij er 5 6 7
tenminste een muziekbestand in 9 Herhalen
3 12 Herhaalt het huidige of alle bestanden in Mijn
het systeem is. muziek.
* Iedere keer dat de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt
Mijn muziek starten de optie gewijzigd van Bestand herhalen → Map
herhalen → Een herhalen.
10 Shuffle
Nederlands
Speelt bestanden in willekeurige volgorde.
1 Display-modus
Toont de nu gebruikte modus. 11 Bestand verwijderen
Verwijdert het huidige bestand.
2 Radio opname map
Toont de bestanden met radio opnames bewaard in Mijn muziek. 12 Speeltijd
Muziek lijst Toont de huidige speeltijd/totale speeltijd.
3
* Sleep of raak de balk aan om naar de gewenste
1. In het hoofdmenuscherm op Toont de muzieklijst van de huidige map.
tijd te gaan.
* De naam van het nu afgespeelde nummer wordt gemarkeerd
[Mijn Muziek] drukken.
4 Bestandsinfo
Toont informatie over het huidige bestand.
*nummer, artiest en album.
5 Vorig bestand
Speelt het vorige bestand af.
* Indien de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt het huidige bestand afgespeeld en de
volgende bestandsnaam weergegeven.
6 Pauzeren/Spelen
Speelt/pauzeert het huidige bestand.
357
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX-modus
AUX-modus starten AUX-modus scherm
1 1 Display-modus
2 3
2 Beginscherm
Gaat naar beginscherm (PIP).
3 Terug
Gaat naar het vorige scherm.
1. In het hoofdmenuscherm op
[AUX] drukken.
Nederlands
2. Indien er een connector van een

extern apparaat is aangesloten
op de AUX aansluiting, wordt de
AUX modus gebruikt.
Voorzichtig!
- Bij het aansluiten van een extern apparaat wordt het gebruik van een 3-polige AUX-kabel aanbevolen.
- Het aansluiten van een AUX-connector jack zonder het aansluiten van een extern apparaat zal het systeem naar de AUX-modus schakelen, maar slechts lawaai produce-
ren. Indien de AUX-modus niet gebruikt wordt, zorg er dan voor om ook de connector jack te verwijderen.
- Indien het vermogen van het externe apparaat is aangesloten op de voedingsaansluiting, kan het afspelen van het externe apparaat geluid produceren. In dergelijke geval-
len de voedingsaansluiting voor gebruik uitschakelen.
358
GETtheMANUALS.org
Instellingen
Toont het radio instellingen- Toont het Navigatie-instellingen-
scherm
RDS Instellingen scherm
Navigatie instellingen
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, 1. D

ruk op [RDS] en stel in of een 1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, 1. In het Navigation instellingen-
de INSTELLINGEN-knop inge- RDS-functie gebruikt dient te de INSTELLINGEN-knop inge- scherm, stelt in of de Navigatie
drukt houden. worden. Druk op de reset -knop drukt houden. automatisch dient te beginnen
rechtsboven om te beginnen met de bij het opstarten. Druk op de
instellingen. (Standaard status: AF) reset -knop rechtsboven om
PTY Zoekinstellingen te beginnen met de instellingen.
Nederlands
(Standaard status: Auto Start)
2. In het Instellingenscherm op [Ra- 2. In het Instellingenscherm op [Na-

dio] drukken. vigatie] drukken.
1. Druk op [PTY Zoeken] en selec-

teer de gewenste opties. Druk op
de reset -knop rechtsboven
om te beginnen met de instellin-
gen. (Standaard status: Geen)
359
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het tijd-instellingenscherm Instellingen tijd
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, de IN- 1. Druk op [Tijd] om de huidige tijd in te stellen.

STELLINGEN-knop ingedrukt houden. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsboven om
met de instellingen te beginnen. (Standaard-
waarde: 2015-01-01, tijd zoals weergegeven
in het systeem)
Nederlands
Tijdinstellingen
2. In het Instellingenscherm op [Klok] drukken.
1. Druk op [Klok] om het type klok in te stel-

len. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsbo-
ven om te beginnen met de instellingen.
(Standaard waarde: Analoog, 12 uur)
360
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het Geluid instellingenscherm Balans/Fade instellingen EQ Instellingen
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, de INSTELLIN- 1. In het Balans/Fader instellingenscherm, de omhoog/omlaag/links/rechts- 1. In het EQ instellingenscherm op de +/- toets druk-
toets indrukken of de positie aanraken om de gewenste geluidspositie in
GEN-knop ingedrukt houden. te stellen. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsboven om te beginnen met
ken om de Bas/Midden/Hoge tonen-niveau´s in te
de instellingen. (Standaard status: Fader 00, Balance 00) stellen. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsboven om
Informatie te beginnen met de instellingen. (Standaard status:
- De Fader/Balans wordt gebruikt om de intensiteit van de Hoge tonen 00, Midden 00, Bas 00)
speakers per locatie in te stellen.
Nederlands
Geluidsinstellingen Overige instellingen
2. In het Instellingenscherm op [Geluid] drukken.
1. In het Geluidsinstellingenscherm, op [Navigatie] drukken 1. Druk op [Overige] om de Beep en AVC in te

om de navigatievoorkeur in te stellen. Druk op de reset stellen. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsboven
-knop rechtsboven om te beginnen met de instellin-
om te beginnen met de instellingen. (Standaard
gen. (Standaard status: Voorkeur navigatie)
waarde: Beep - Aan, AVC - Uit)
Informatie
Informatie
- Voorkeur Navigatie: audiovolume voor de voorstoelen
wordt gedempt bij Navigatie geleiding - Beep: klinkt met iedere aanraking van de knop.
- Audio Voorkeur: De Navigatie produceert een vast volume. - AVC(Auto Volume Controle) : Wanneer de AVC aanstaat,
- Dezelfde Ratio: Optie om het geluid van de geleiding via de wordt het volume automatisch geregeld in overeenstem-
volumecontrole in te stellen ming met de snelheid van het voertuig.
361
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het Bladwijzer-instellin-
genscherm
Toevoegen Bladwijzer
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, 1. H

oudt de menu items van de lijst 2. Sleep en zet ze dan neer op de 3. D
e Menu items zijn toegevoegd.
de INSTELLINGEN-knop inge- links die u wilt toevoegen ingedrukt. gewenste plaats rechts. Druk op de reset -knop rechts-
drukt houden. boven om te beginnen met de instel-
lingen. (Standaard status: Geen)
Nederlands
Wissen Bladwijzer
2. In het Instellingenscherm op

[Bladwijzer] drukken.
1. Houdt het menu item dat u wilt 2. Sleep en zet ze dan op de lijst 3. D
e Menu items zijn verwijderd. Druk
wissen ingedrukt. links. op de reset -knop rechtsboven
om te beginnen met de instellingen.
(Standaard status: Geen)
362
GETtheMANUALS.org
Wijzigen Bladwijzer-volgorde
1. Houdt de menu items die u wilt verplaat- 2. Sleep en zet ze dan neer op de gewenste 3. De Menu items zijn verplaatst. Druk op
sen ingedrukt. plaats. de reset -knop rechtsboven om te
beginnen met de instellingen. (Standaard
status: Geen)
Nederlands
363
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het taal-instellingenscherm Taalinstellingen
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, de IN- 1. In het taalinstellingenscherm de gewens-

STELLINGEN-knop ingedrukt houden. te tal kiezen en op de Bevestigen-knop
drukken rechtsboven. Het systeem herstart
automatisch en de systeemtaal is gewij-
Nederlands
zigd. Druk op de reset -knop rechtsbo-

ven om te beginnen met de instellingen.
(Standaard status: Engels)
2. In het Instellingenscherm op [Taal] drukken.
364
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het radio instellingen-
scherm
Verlichtingsinstellingen
1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, 1. In het verlichtingsinstellingenscherm 2. Auto Verlichting 3. Dagmodus

de INSTELLINGEN-knop inge- op de +/- knop drukken om de hel- - Stelt de helderheid en kleuren - Houdt de helderheid van de
derheid van de display in te stellen.
drukt houden. (Standaard status: Auto Verlichting) van de display automatisch in. display en kleuren van de kaart
in de Dagmodus.
Nederlands
2. In het Instellingenscherm op 4. Nachtmodus 5. Navigatie synchroniseren
[Display] drukken. - Houdt de helderheid van de - De Navigatie kaart scherm-
display en kleuren van de kaart weergave is ingesteld op Dag of
in de Nachtmodus. Nachtmodus, afhankelijk van de
verlichtingsinstelling.
ruk op de reset
D -knop
rechtsboven om te beginnen met
de instellingen.
365
GETtheMANUALS.org
Toont het Systeeminstellingen-
Ratio instellingen Scherm uit-instellingen Overige instellingen scherm
1. Op [Ratio] drukken om de video- 1. Druk op [Scherm uit] om de 1. Deze functie wordt gebruikt om 1. Van de harde systeemknoppen,
weergave ratio in te stellen. Druk display uit te zetten. Druk op de blanco scherm, beeld, klok en de INSTELLINGEN-knop inge-
op de reset -knop rechts- reset -knop rechtsboven om parkeergids in te stellen. drukt houden.
boven om te beginnen met de te beginnen met de instellingen.
instellingen. (Standaard status: (Standaard status: Uit)
Volledig scherm)
Nederlands
2. Druk op de reset -knop 2. In het Instellingenscherm op

rechtsboven om te beginnen met [Systeem] drukken.
de instellingen. (Standaard status:
klok en parkeergids weergave)
- Wanneer het apparaat gebruikt wordt - In de Overige instellingen, kunt u
om naar audio te luisteren kan deze het beeld dat in de uitstand wordt
functie zeer nuttig zijn. weergegeven instellen.
- Zelfs wanneer het scherm uit staat, - Beeldfunctie is beschikbaar wanneer
wordt er geluid afgespeeld. de gebruiker afbeeldingen bewaard
in het systeem.
- Raak het scherm aan om de display
opnieuw in te schakelen. - Toont de door de gebruiker geselec-
teerde afbeelding.
366
GETtheMANUALS.org
Versie Resetten Update Voorzichtig!
- Tijdens het resetten van het systeem, wor-
den de door de gebruiker gegenereerde
systeemdata en de door de gebruiker be-
paalde instellingen hersteld naar de Fa-
brieksinstelling.
Functie Modus Status
Radio FM1 89.1 MHz
Shuffle Uit
1. In het Instellingenscherm op [Reset]
1. Druk op [Versie] om de systeemin- 1. In het Instellingenscherm op Update] Muziek
drukken. Herhalen Alle
formatie te tonen. Deze functie wordt drukken.
gebruikt om systeemversie-informatie Onderti-
Klein
over bootloader, OS, applicatie, firm- tel-grootte
Media Video
ware en andere te tonen. Scherm- Volledig
formaat scherm
Diashow Uit
Beeld
Nederlands
Draaien Standaard
Sluit een apparaat af en

Bluetooth Handenvrij verwijderd alle gekoppel-
2. Druk op [OK]. de apparaten
2. Druk op [OK] om het systeem te updaten.
Geluid Voorkeur navigatie
Instellin-
Navigatie Auto Start
gen
Bladwijzer Verwijdert items
3. D
e Initialisatie vindt plaats nadat geselec-
teerd wordt of er muziekbestanden in Mijn
Muziek verwijderd dienen te worden.
Informatie
Informatie
-H
erstarten van het systeem herstelt bestaande
instellingen en configuraties terug naar hun - Er is een USB-geheugen met de up-
standaardwaarden. date-bestanden nodig.
-H
et is mogelijk voor de gebruiker om te selec-
teren of muziekbestanden die in Mijn Muziek
opgeslagen zijn verwijderd dienen te worden.
367
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod modus
Voor het gebruik van iPod iPod scherm
Het gebruik van originele, door Apple geleverde iPod-kabels wordt 1
aanbevolen.
9 10
2
Apple CarPlay is niet beschikbaar wanneer iPod in gebruik is.

8
Indien de iPod-modus via een iPhone in gebruik is, dient de CarPlay 4

gebruiken-instelling in iPhone-instellingen uitgeschakeld te worden. 3
5 6 7
11
Nederlands
1 Display-modus 7 Volgend bestand

Toont de nu gebruikte modus. Speelt het volgende bestand af.
2 Categorie * wanneer ingedrukt gehouden, volgt de
Toont de huidige categorie. werking de iPod-apparaatwerking.
3 Categorie lijst 8 Album kunst
Toont alle categorie-lijsten. Toont de albumkunst.
* De categorie-lijsten kunnen afwijken, 9 Herhalen
afhankelijk van het type iPod-apparaat. Herhaalt het huidige of alle bestanden in Mijn mu-
4 Bestandsinfo ziek.
Toont informatie over het huidige * Iedere keer dat de toets wordt ingedrukt, wordt de
optie gewijzigd van Herhalen Uit →Een Herhalen →
bestand. Alles Herhalen.
* nummer, artiest, album en totaal be-
standen. 10 Shuffle
Vorig bestand Speelt bestanden in willekeurige volgorde.
5
Speelt het vorige bestand af. 11 Speeltijd
* wanneer ingedrukt gehouden, volgt Toont de huidige speeltijd/totale speeltijd.
de werking de iPod-apparaatwerking. * Sleep of raak de balk aan om naar de ge-
Pauzeren/Spelen wenste tijd te gaan. (Deze functies worden
6
mogelijk niet ondersteund, afhankelijk van
Speelt/pauzeert het huidige be-
het apparaat.)
stand.
368
GETtheMANUALS.org
Starten van iPod-modus
iPod automatisch starten iPod handmatig starten
1. Gebruik een iPod aansluitkabel om 1. Van de harde systeemknoppen, op de 2. Sleep van de onder- naar de bovenkant van
het iPod-apparaat aan te sluiten op de MODE-knop drukken. het scherm of druk op de paginaweerga-
USB-aansluiting. ve-zone aan de linkerkant van het scherm.
Nederlands
2. Zodra er een iPod is aangesloten, wordt 3. Druk op [iPod] om de iPod modus te 4. De informatie over het nummer wordt
de iPod automatisch gebruikt. gebruiken. weergegeven en het nummer wordt auto-
matisch afgespeeld.
Informatie
Indien de iPod reeds is aangesloten en u de iPod vanuit een andere modus wenst af te spelen, zie de ïPod
handmatig starten¨-sectie.
369
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Wat is Apple CarPlay? Apple CarPlay-scherm
1. Door uw iPhone op het systeem aan te sluiten, kunt u gemakkelijk
2
verschillende functies, zoals iPhone, Navigatie, Berichten, Muziek
en Siri, gebruiken.
2. De beschikbare functies en werkingen kunnen verschillen, afhan-
kelijk van het iPhone model.
3. Apple CarPlay is mogelijk niet beschikbaar in uw land of regio.
carplay)
Voor het gebruik van Apple CarPlay 3
1. V oordat u uw mobiele telefoon aansluit controleren of Apple CarPlay is

ingesteld voor gebruik in Instellingen → Algemeen → Beperkingen.
2. V oordat u uw mobiele telefoon aansluit controleren of Siri is ingesteld voor
gebruik in Instellingen → Algemeen → Siri.
Nederlands
1
3. Apple CarPlay werkt met iPhone 5 of later.
4. Apple CarPlay werkt met iOS 7.1 maar de meest recente versie wordt
aanbevolen.
5. H et is niet mogelijk om oncar, iPod en Apple CarPlay tegelijkertijd te 1 Home
gebruiken. Gaat naar het beginscherm van Apple CarPlay
6. H et gebruik van originele, door Apple geleverde iPhone-kabels wordt
aanbevolen. 2 Beginscherm
7. N a het aansluiten en binnengaan van Apple CarPlay, wordt het geluid van Beginscherm van Apple CarPlay
de vorige modus gehandhaafd. Alleen het scherm wordt omgeschakeld.
8. H et is niet mogelijk om Apple CarPlay en Bluetooth Audio tegelijkertijd te 3 Speelt nu
gebruiken. Gaat naar de huidige audiobron.
9. D e meeste functies van Apple CarPlay vereisen datagebruik. Voor het ge-
bruik van Apple CarPlay dient u ervoor te zorgen dat uw een data-abon-
nement voor uw telefoon heeft.
10. Z odra Apple CarPlay is aangesloten, is de spraakherkenning gebaseerd
op Siri. De spraakherkenningsfunctie van het voertuig werkt niet.
11. Voor meer informatie, zie de Apple website (http://www.apple.com/kr/ios/
carplay/)
370
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay-modus
Hoe Siri te gebruiken Apple CarPlay-modus starten
1. Druk op de Spraakbesturing-knop op het 2. Of houdt de home-toets op het Apple 1. Sluit uw iPhone aan op uw auto met een
stuurwiel om Siri te gebruiken. CarPlay beginscherm ingedrukt om Siri te USB-kabel.
gebruiken.
Nederlands
3. Of houdt de home-toets op de iPhone 2. Druk op [Apple CarPlay].
ingedrukt om Siri te gebruiken.
Informatie
- Indien Bluetooth was aangesloten, wordt Blue-
tooth uitgeschakeld zodra Apple CarPlay wordt
aangesloten.
371
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Voor het gebruik van Android Auto Android Auto-scherm
1. Download de Android Auto-app naar uw Android telefoon met
6
Android 5.0 Lollipop of later. 7
2. Het gebruik van originele Android telefoonkabels wordt aanbevo-
len.
3. Na het inschakelen van Android Auto wordt Bluetooth automatisch
aangesloten.
- Bij het overschrijden van het max. aantal geregistreerde appa-
raten wordt een apparaat dat recentelijk niet werd aangesloten
verwijderd.
4. Bluetooth Muziek wordt niet ingeschakeld.
5. Het is niet mogelijk om CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay en Android
Audio tegelijkertijd te gebruiken.
6. Android Auto is mogelijk niet beschikbaar in uw land of regio. Zie
s.v.p. de site: (http://www.android.com/auto/#what-you-need)
Nederlands
7. Na het aansluiten en binnengaan van Android Auto, wordt het 1 2 3 4 5

geluid van de vorige modus gehandhaafd. Alleen het scherm wordt
omgeschakeld.
8. De meeste functies van Android Auto vereisen datagebruik. Voor
het gebruik van Apple CarPlay dient u ervoor te zorgen dat uw een 1 Kaart 5 Terugkeren naar het systeem
data-abonnement voor uw telefoon heeft. Gebruikt de kaart(navigatie)functie. Gaat naar het Hoofdmenuscherm
9. Voor details over Android Auto, zie de Google support site: (http:// Telefoon van het systeem.
2
support.google.com/androidauto) Gebruikt de telefoonfunctie. 6 Spraakherkenning
3 Beginscherm Gebruikt de spraakherkennings-
functie.
Gaat naar het beginscherm.
4 Muziek 7 Beginscherm
Gebruikt de muziekfunctie. Beginscherm van Android Auto.
* Toont de muziek- en weerwidget.
372
GETtheMANUALS.org
Staren Android Auto-modus
Om te beginnen
1. Sluit uw Android telefoon op uw voertuig 2. Het beginmenuscherm wordt automatisch 3. Druk op [Android Auto] om in de modus te gaan.
aan met een USB-kabel. weergegeven en de Android Auto-knop
wordt ingeschakeld. (Indien Android Auto
reeds is ingeschakeld, op [MODE] van de
Nederlands
harde systeemknoppen drukken om naar
het Beginmenuscherm te gaan.)
* Na het inschakelen van Android Auto wordt

Bluetooth automatisch aangesloten.
Informatie
* Na het inschakelen van Android Auto wordt Bluetooth automatisch aangesloten.
* Bluetooth Muziek wordt niet ingeschakeld.
* Het is niet mogelijk om iPod, Apple CarPlay en Android Audio tegelijkertijd te gebruiken.
* De speciale kabel wordt aanbevolen voor gebruik.
373
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Handleiding
Was is e-Handleiding?
D
eze functie stelt u in staat om gemakkelijk methodes om de belangrijk-
ste systeemfuncties te gebruiken te checken.
D
eze e-Handleiding kan afwijken van de huidige functie van het product.
Nederlands
1. Selecteer het gewenste menu aan de linkerkant. Voor gedetailleerde ge-

bruiksmethoden, de / -knoppen om tussen pagina´s te bewegen.
374
GETtheMANUALS.org
Beperkingen van functies om veiligheidsmaatregelen
Beperkingen van functies om veiligheidsmaatregelen
D
e video en enkele andere functies worden voor uw veiligheid uitgeschakeld
indien het voertuig in beweging is.
- Video is niet beschikbaar onder het rijden. De audiospeler wordt niet beïn-
vloed wanneer de video uitstaat.
- Diashow is niet beschikbaar onder het rijden.
Het beperkingenscherm verdwijnt wanneer de parkeerrem wordt ingeschakeld.
Nederlands
375
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dit systeem is voor uw veiligheid uitgerust met een achteraanzicht-camera voor een groter gezichtsveld.
De achtercamera wordt automatisch gebruikt wanneer de versnellingshendel in R wordt geschakeld, onafhankelijk van uw huidige modus.
Het gebruik van de achtercamera stopt automatisch wanneer in een andere positie geschakeld wordt.
Indien de achtercamera werkt, is het mogelijk om de volume- en mute-functies te gebruiken.
Nederlands
1. Zet de contactsleutel in ACC of ON.

2. Zet de versnellingshendel in R.
Voorzichtig!
- Het beeld van de achteraanzicht-camera kan afwijken van de werkelijke afstand. Voor uw veiligheid dient u altijd voorzichtig te zijn en rechtstreeks de achterkant en
zijkanten te checken.
- Wanneer de achtercamera gebruikt wordt, worden alleen de volume en inkomende gesprek-functies ondersteund.
376
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Modus - Optioneel
Dit apparaat ondersteunt ook Rondom Uitzicht Monitor (AVM) voor toegevoegde veiligheid.
AVM is een optionele functie.
Op de AVM-schakelaar of in R schakelen schakelt de monitor in de AVM-modus, onafhankelijk van uw huidige modus.
Opnieuw op de AVM-schakelaar drukken of vanuit R naar een andere versnelling schakelen, zet de AVM-modus automatisch uit en herstelt uw voorgaande modus.
Indien de AVM werkt, is het mogelijk om de volume- en mute-functies te gebruiken.
Om tussen 2D en 3D-beeld-modi te schakelen, de Beeldmodus-functies gebruiken binnen de AVM-instellingen.
2D-Beeld 3D-Beeld
Nederlands
Voorzichtig!
- Het AVM-beeld kan afwijken van de werkelijke afstand. Voor uw veiligheid dient u altijd voorzichtig te zijn en rechtstreeks de achterkant en zijkanten te checken.
- Wanneer AVM gebruikt wordt, worden alleen de volume en inkomende gesprek-functies ondersteund.
377
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Instellingen
PSG aanwijzingen synchroniseren PAS Naderingswaarschuwing Beeldmodus
1. Stelt in of PSG-richtlijn gebruikt dient te 1. Stelt in of PAS naderingswaarschuwing ge- 1. Stelt de beeldmodus in. (Standaard status:
worden. (Standaard status: Aan) bruikt dient te worden. (Standaard status: 2D-Beeld)
Aan)
Nederlands
378
GETtheMANUALS.org
Productspecificaties
Naam Car TFT LCD Display AVN EENHEID Ondersteunde MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
bestanden TS, WMV
Stroomvoorziening DC 14.4V MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Video Codec
WMV7/8
Voeding DC 9V ~ DC 16V Ondersteuning/Re-
solutie Ondertitels SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Huidig verbruik 2A Ondersteunde MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Normaal bestanden
Slaapstand 3mA(Alleen Hoofdeenheid) Audio Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Stroom
Sample Fre- 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Werkingstempe- -30℃ ~ +75℃ quentie
ratuur
Foto Bestandsformaat JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Bewaartempe- -40℃ ~ +85℃
ratuur Compatibiliteit BLUETOOTH V4.1
Afmetingen 278,4(B) x 175,5(H) x 191,5(D) Frequentie band-
2402 ~ 2480MHz
breedte
Nederlands
Gewicht 2,5 Kg Ondersteunde
profielen A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Schermformaat 203,90 mm (B) x 114,70 (H) mm (Actieve zone) Bluetooth
Resolutie 921.600 pixels Zendvermogen 3,0 dBm
Display Bedrijfsmodus TFT, In Plane Switching (IPS), active matrix Type modulatie FHSS(GFSK)
Achtergrondver- LED
lichting Kanaal 79
Frequentiebereik FM : 87,5~108,0MHz (Stap: 100kHz)

AM: 522~1620 kHz (Stap:9kHz)
Radio
Sensitiviteit FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
SD 1 slot, 16GB Certifice-

Opslagap- ring
USB 1 poort , USB2.0 HOST
paraat Hereby, Digen Co., Ltd. Verklaart dat de radioapparatuur type [AVN DGU-9745- Y400A] voldoet aan de Richtlijn 2014/53/EU.
De volledige tekst van de EU conformiteitsverklaring is beschikbaar op het volgende internetadres : http://www.digen.co.kr
Formaat FAT 16/32 Er is een kopie van de conformiteitsverklaring bijgesloten bij de installatie.
379
GETtheMANUALS.org
Voordat u denkt dat het product een storing heeft gehad

De huidige positie die op de navigatie wordt getoond kan afwijken van de werkelijke positie (locatie en omstandigheden van rijden) in de
volgende omstandigheden.
De volgende gevallen zijn geen storingen.
Wanneer er op Y-vormige wegen met nauwe hoeken gereden wordt, kan Indien u in druk verkeer of kruispunten met frequent starten en stoppen rijdt
de huidige positie worden weergegeven in de andere richting Wanneer u onder gladde omstandigheden, zoals zwaar zand, sneeuw, etc. rijdt.
De markering van de huidige positie kan weergegeven worden in de Indien u met sneeuwketttingen rijdt.
tegenovergestelde richting. Indien de banden recentelijk vervangen zijn (vooral na het gebruik van
Op stadswegen kan de huidige positie op de tegengestelde zijde of een reserve- of spijkerloze banden).
terrein getoond worden
Indien er banden van het verkeerde formaat gebruikt worden.
Indien het zoomniveau van maximum naar een ander niveau gewijzigd
Indien de bandendruk van de 4 banden verschillend is.
wordt, kan de huidige positie op een andere weg getoond worden
Indien de reserveband is versleten of gebruikt (Vooral spijkerloze banden
Nederlands
Indien het voertuig op een veerboot of autotransportvoertuig geladen

wordt, kan de huidige positie op de laatste positie voorafgaand het laden die een tweede seizoen voorbij zijn).
vastlopen. Indien er naast hoge gebouwen gereden wordt
Indien de batterijaansluiting verwijderd wordt. Wanneer er een dakdrager gemonteerd is.
Wanneer er op een spiraalvormige weg gereden wordt. Wanneer er een route voor een lange afstand is berekend terwijl men op
Indien u in bergachtige regio´s rijdt met scherpe bochten of plotseling een autosnelweg rijdt.
remmen. In dergelijke gevallen, schakelt het doorrijden automatisch het systeem in
Wanneer een weg wordt opgegaan na het passeren van een onder- om een kaartvergelijking uit te voeren of geactualiseerde GPS-informatie
grondse parkeergarage, parkeerplaats van een gebouw, of wegen met te gebruiken om de huidige positie te geven. (In dergelijke gevallen, kun-
veel draaiingen. nen er tot enkele minuten nodig zijn)
380
GETtheMANUALS.org
Een correcte routegeleiding kan niet plaatsvinden door zoekomstandigheden of rijdlocatie.

Geleiding om rechtdoor te gaan kan worden gegeven wanneer er op een Er kan een signalering van de routegeleiding naar een Niet-binnen-
rechte weg wordt gereden. gaan-zone optreden (Niet-binnengaan-zone, weg in aanleg, etc.)
Er kan geleiding naar een positie gegeven worden die niet de huidige be-
Er kan zelfs geen geleiding gegeven worden wanneer u bij een kruispunt
stemming is indien er geen wegen om de huidige bestemming te bereiken
de hoek om gegaan bent.
bestaan of ze te smal zijn.
Er zijn bepaalde kruispunten waarin geleiding niet kan plaatsvinden.
Er kan gebrekkige stemgeleiding gegeven worden indien het voertuig van de
Een routegeleiding die een u-bocht aangeeft kan in sommige Niet om- aangewezen route afwijkt. (bijv. indien er omgekeerd wordt op een kruispunt
keren kruispunten optreden. terwijl de gegeven navigatiegeleiding aangeeft om rechtdoor te gaan.)
Nederlands
Deze situaties kunnen voorkomen na het uitvoeren van een routeberekening.
Er kan geleiding gegeven worden naar een positie die afwijkt van de Er kan een signalering van de routegeleiding naar een Niet-binnen-
huidige positie bij het afslaan op een kruispunt gaan-zone optreden (Niet-binnengaan-zone, weg in aanleg, etc.)
Er kan geleiding naar een positie gegeven worden die niet de huidige be-
Wanneer er met hoge snelheden gereden wordt, kan het herberekenen stemming is indien er geen wegen om de huidige bestemming te bereiken
van de route meer tijd in beslag nemen. bestaan of ze te smal zijn.
Er kan gebrekkige stemgeleiding gegeven worden indien het voertuig van de
Een routegeleiding die een u-bocht aangeeft kan in sommige Niet om- aangewezen route afwijkt. (bijv. indien er omgekeerd wordt op een kruispunt
keren kruispunten optreden. terwijl de gegeven navigatiegeleiding aangeeft om rechtdoor te gaan.)
381
GETtheMANUALS.org
Voordat u denkt dat het product een storing heeft
Voordat u denkt dat het product een storing heeft
1. Fouten die optreden tijdens gebruik of installatie van het apparaat kunnen worden verward met storingen van het huidige apparaat.
2. Indien u problemen heeft met het apparaat, s.v.p. de hieronder opgegeven suggesties proberen.
3. Indien de problemen aanhouden, s.v.p. contact opnemen met uw dealer of servicecentrum.
Probleem Tegenmaatregel
Is het contact van de auto op „ACC“ of „ON“ gezet?
Het geluid of beeld werkt niet.
Is de aansluitingskabel onstabiel of niet aangesloten?
Het scherm wordt getoond maar het gelu- Is het volume op een laag niveau ingesteld?
id werkt niet. Zijn de AMP en luidsprekerkabel onstabiel of niet aangesloten? Is het volume gedempt?
Ik schakelde de stroom in maar de hoek- LCD-panelen zien er normaliter donker uit wanneer ze voor langere tijdsperiodes gebruikt worden en dat is geen storing.
en van het scherm zien er donker uit. Indien de display erg donker is, s.v.p. contact opnemen met uw dealer of servicecentrum.
Nederlands
Controleer de luidsprekerkabel.
Het geluid werkt slechts van een luidspreker.
Zijn de posities van de geluidscontroles van Fader of Balans alleen op een kant ingesteld?
Ik heb een extern apparaat aangesloten,
Zijn de audio connector jacks geheel in de AUX-aansluiting gestoken?
maar het werkt niet goed.
382
GETtheMANUALS.org
Problemen oplossen
Probleem Mogelijke oorzaak Tegenmaatregel
Vervangen door een geschikte zekering. Indien de zekering opnieuw uitschakelt,
De zekering is uitgeschakeld.
s.v.p. contact opnemen met uw plaats van aankoop of servicecentrum.
De stroom schakelt niet in.
Het apparaat is niet juist aangesloten. Controleren om te zien of het apparaat juist is aangesloten.
De kleur van het beeld/ge- De helderheid, verzadiging, kleurschakering Stel de helderheid, verzadiging, kleurschakering en contrastniveau´s juist in
luidskwaliteit is laag. en contrastniveau´s zijn niet juist ingesteld. met de Display-Instelling.
Het helderheidsniveau is op laag niveau ingesteld. Stel het helderheidsniveau in.
Het beeld werkt niet.
Het apparaat is niet juist aangesloten. Controleren om te zien of het apparaat juist is aangesloten.
Het volume is op een laag niveau ingesteld Stel het volumeniveau in
Het geluid werkt niet Het apparaat is niet juist aangesloten. Controleren om te zien of het apparaat juist is aangesloten.
Het apparaat is momenteel snel aan het vooruit Het geluid werkt niet wanneer het apparaat snel vooruit spoelt, terug spoelt,
Nederlands
spoelen, terugspoelen, scannen of in slow modus
aan het afspelen. scant of in slow modus afspeelt.
Gebruik de USB s.v.p. na formatteren in FAT 12/16/32-formaat. Dit apparaat herkent geen
Het USB-geheugen is beschadigd. bestanden in NTFS en exFAT- bestandsformaat.
Verwijder alle vreemde stoffen van het oppervlak van het contact van het USB-geheugen
Het USB-geheugen is gecontamineerd. en de multimedia terminal.
Er wordt een apart aangekochte USB-hub gebruikt. Sluit de USB rechtstreeks aan op de multimedia-aansluiting van het voertuig.
Sluit de USB rechtstreeks aan op de multimedia-aansluiting van het
De USB werkt niet. Er wordt een USB-verlengkabel gebruikt
voertuig.
Er wordt een USB die niet van het type
Gebruik standaard USB-geheugen.
USB-geheugen met metalen kap is gebruikt.
Er wordt een type HDD, CF, SD Geheugen gebruikt. Gebruik standaard USB-geheugen.
Er zijn geen muziekbestanden die kunnen Er wordt alleen MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC en WAV bestandsformaten
worden afgespeeld. ondersteund. Gebruik alleen de ondersteunde formaten van muziekbestanden.
Informatie - Indien er tijdens het gebruik van het apparaat iets abnormaals gebeurt dat niet kan worden gecorrigeerd met bovenstaande maatregel-
en, het systeem resetten.
- Druk simultaan op de HOME-toets en de SETUP-toets. De voeding wordt uitgeschakeld en het systeem gereset.
383
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Nederlands
384
GETtheMANUALS.org
Автомобильная навигационная система РУКОВОДСТВО ПОЛЬЗОВАТЕЛЯ Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Pусский
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Внимательно прочтите это руководство перед эксплуатацией системы и сохраните его для обращения в будущем.
Параметры и характеристики могут измениться без предварительного уведомления.
Посетите веб-сайт Ssangyong Motor, чтобы получить подробную информацию об автомобильной навигационной системе.
- Адрес для скачивания руководства AVN: http://www.smotor.com
385
GETtheMANUALS.org
Содержание
Основная информация
Предостережения 387 Сопряжение устройств Bluetooth 409
Ключевая информация об устройстве 388 Отключение и удаление устройств Bluetooth 411
Ключевые особенности устройства 389 Экран вызова Bluetooth 412
Названия и функции компонентов 390 Выполнение звонка 413
Элементы управления на руле 392 Ответ на звонок 415
Настройки Bluetooth 416
Использование основных меню Музыка по Bluetooth 420
Основные операции 393 Страница «Моя музыка» 421
Главная страница 395 Режим AUX 422
Закладка 396 Настройки 423
Режим iPod 432
Работа в режиме AV Запуск режима iPod 433
Режим радио 397 Apple CarPlay 434
Использование фиксированных частот и запись радио 398 Режим Apple CarPlay 435
Android Auto 436
Pусский
DAB 399
Режим «Мультимедиа» 400 Запуск режима Android Auto 437
(1) Режим музыки с USB Электронное руководство 438
Режим музыки с USB 401 Ограничения функций в целях безопасности 439
Страница музыки с USB 402 Камера заднего вида 440
(2) Режим видео с USB Режим AVM - необязательный 441
Запуск режима видео с USB 403 Параметры AVM 442
Страница видео с USB 404 Характеристики изделия 443
(3) Режим изображений с USB
Запуск режима изображений с USB 405
Приложение
Страница изображений с USB 406 Прежде чем думать, что устройство неисправно 444
Режим Bluetooth 407 Прежде чем думать, что устройство неисправно 446
Главное меню Bluetooth 408 Устранение неполадок 447
386
GETtheMANUALS.org
Предостережения
Предупреждения о безопасности Меры предосторожности

Несмотря на получение навигационных указаний от мультимедийной Следите за ситуацией на дороге во время движения.
системы, соблюдайте действующие правила дорожного движения.
В некоторых случаях система может прокладывать маршруты через
Использование одних лишь навигационных инструкций из системы запретные зоны.
может привести к нарушениям действующих правил дорожного
движения и привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям. Использование устройства во время движения может привести
к авариям из-за отсутствия внимания к внешней обстановке.
Не сморите на экран во время движения. Если долго смотреть на Используйте устройство только когда автомобиль не движется. Кроме
экран, вы можете попасть в аварию. того, некоторые функции сенсорного экрана могут отключаться при
Не используйте мультимедийную систему во время движения, движении автомобиля. Сенсорный экран работает только после
например, для поиска интересных мест или маршрутов. Такие остановки автомобиля.
действия могут привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям.
Устройство предназначено для использования только в автомобилях.
Используйте устройство только когда автомобиль не движется. Воздержитесь от установки этого устройства в других местах, кроме
Не разбирайте, не собираетесь и не вносите изменений в автомобилей.
мультимедийную систему. Такие действия могут привести к авариям, Если вы хотите изменить положение установки устройства,
пожарам или удару током. обратитесь к продавцу или в сервисный центр. При установке или
Будьте осторожны, не проливайте воду и не допускайте попадания в демонтаже устройства требуются технические знания.
устройство инородных предметов. Такие действия могут привести к
Pусский
При очистке устройства убедитесь, что оно выключено, и вы
задымлению, пожару или неисправности.
используете сухую и мягкую ткань. Никогда не применяйте
Если происходит непредвиденная ситуация, например, попадание жесткие материалы, грязные тряпки или растворители (спирт,
инородных предметов или задымление в результате воздействия бензол, разбавители и т. д.), поскольку такие материалы могут
воды, немедленно прекратите использование устройства и повредить панель устройства или привести к ухудшению качества/
обратитесь за помощью к продавцу или в сервисный центр. цветопередачи. При возникновении сбоев в устройстве обратитесь к
Если продолжить использование, может возникнуть неисправность. продавцу или в сервисный центр.
Не используйте устройство, если на экране ничего не отображается, Не подвергайте устройство сильным ударам или тряске.
а звук не работает. Эти признаки свидетельствуют о неисправности Не давите на переднюю сторону монитора, поскольку это может
устройства. Если продолжить использование, может произойти привести к повреждению ЖК-монитора или сенсорного экрана.
несчастный случай (пожар, удар током).
Не останавливайтесь и не паркуйтесь в непредназначенных для этого При работе устройства в течение длительного с выключенным
местах, чтобы воспользоваться устройством. Такие действия могут зажиганием вы увидите предупреждение о разрядке аккумулятора.
привести к дорожно-транспортным происшествиям. Используйте систему при включенном зажигании.
387
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod является зарегистрированной торговой маркой Apple Inc. Произведено по лицензии Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby и символ из двух букв D являются торговыми марками Dolby Laboratories.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay является зарегистрированной торговой маркой Apple Inc. TomTom
© 1992-2017 TomTom. Все права защищены. TomTom и логотип "двух рук" являются
Bluetooth
товарными знаками или зарегистрированными товарными знаками TomTom N.V. или
Словесный знак и логотипы Bluetooth являются зарегистрированными торговыми
марками Bluetooth SIG, Inc., и любое использование таких марок регулируется лицензией. одной из ее дочерних компаний.
Для использования беспроводной технологии Bluetooth требуется мобильный телефон с © 1992-2017 TomTom. Все права защищены. Этот материал является
поддержкой Bluetooth. собственностью компании и защищен авторским правом и/или правом на
базу данных и/или другими правами на интеллектуальную собственность,
DivX
принадлежащих компании TomTom или ее поставщикам. Использование
Будучи сертифицированным DivX-устройством, данное изделие может воспроизводить
этого материала регулируется условиями лицензионного соглашения. Любое
файлы в формате DivX с высоким разрешением (включая .avi и .divX).
DivX, DivX Certified и соответствующие логотипы являются зарегистрированными несанкционированное копирование или разглашение этого материала влечет
торговыми марками DivX LLC и используются по лицензии. уголовную и гражданскую ответственность.
Они защищены как минимум одним из следующих патентов США: : 7,295,673; 7,460,668;
7,515,710; 7,519,274
Использование карт памяти SD

Pусский
1. На картах памяти SD для данного устройства хранятся файлы географических карт.

2. Файл карты был сохранен на карте памяти для этого устройства.
Не добавляйте, не удаляйте и не форматируйте файлы на карте памяти SD. Извлекайте карту памяти только для обновления географической карты до новой версии.
3. Используйте только карту памяти SD, предоставленную продавцом. Не разделяйте и не копируйте файл географической карты на другую карту памяти.
Это может привести к сбоям или неправильной работе.
4. Извлечение и вставка карт памяти SD во время работы системы может привести к ошибкам карты памяти или системным ошибкам.
Чтобы извлечь или вставить карту памяти, сначала отключите зажигания автомобиля.
5. Многократное вставка/извлечение карты памяти в короткий промежуток времени может привести к повреждению устройства.
6. Карта памяти отформатирована так, что содержит только файл данных географической карты.
Сохранение других файлов на карте памяти может привести к возникновению системных ошибок или сбоев.
Обновить карту и скачать программное обеспечение AVN

1. Подключите карту памяти к компьютеру.
2. Перейдите на страницу обновления (по ссылке).
3. Ссылка: http://ssangyong.navshop.com/downloads/
388
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ключевые особенности устройства
Особенность Описание Особенность Описание

С помощью Apple CarPlay можно выполнять
Широкий ЖК-экран телефонные звонки, обмениваться текстовыми
Apple CarPlay сообщениями, использовать карту, слушать
Экран 9,2-дюймовый сенсорный экран обеспечивает высокое
качество воспроизведения видео и музыки. музыку и использовать функции Siri.
Благодаря Android Auto вы можете использовать

Android Auto карты Google, телефон, распознавание голоса и
Цифровой радиоприемник воспроизведение музыки.
Цифровой радиоприемник может сохранять в памяти до
12 станций для каждого из диапазонов FM1, FM2, AM
Функция подключения по Bluetooth
Радио и DAB.
Позволяет водителю совершать звонки без рук во время
Службы RDS Bluetooth вождения, а также слушать музыку за счет потокового
Обеспечивает функции AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY за счет воспроизведения.
служб RDS.
Pусский
Функция автоматического поиска мультимедиа
Автоматически находит мультимедиа файлы, включая Цифровые средства управления экраном
Файлы на USB видео, музыку и фото, сохраненные на USB-носителе и Простое управление яркостью экрана с помощью
SD-карте, и отображает их в виде списка для удобства. сенсорного экрана для удобства просмотра.

Прочее HD-камера показывает обстановку позади вашего
Используется карта TomTom автомобиля при переключении на заднюю передачу.
Точная навигация обеспечивается за счет системы
Навигация GPS и точной географической карты благодаря Система кругового обзора - дополнительно
высокочувствительной антенне. Обеспечивает обзор вперед, налево, направо и назад при
помощи четырех камер, установленных на автомобиле.
389
GETtheMANUALS.org
Названия и функции компонентов
Вид спереди
1 ПИТАНИЕ / ГРОМКОСТЬ
1. Используется для включения/выключения питания или регулировки
громкости.
2. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы выключить питание.
3. Нажмите, чтобы включить/выключить AV.
4. Вращайте влево/вправо для регулировки громкости (диапазон
регулировки 0 ~ 45).
1 2 Главная
2 3 4 5
1. Переход на главную страницу (PIP, картинка в картинке).
2. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы перейти в
режим закладок.
3 MODE
Pусский
1. Переход на главную страницу режима.

2. В режиме навигации нажмите и удерживайте (более 1,5
секунд), чтобы включить последний AV-режим, который
использовался до режима навигации.
4 NAVI
1. Включает режим навигации и отображает текущее местоположение
независимо от того, включен или отключен AV.
2. Нажмите и удерживайте (более 1,5 секунд), чтобы перейти на
страницу, где можно найти ваше место назначения.
5 SETUP
В любом режиме нажмите и удерживайте, чтобы открыть окно «Настройки».
В режиме Радио/Аудио/Видео/Навигация/Телефон Bluetooth
нажмите, чтобы перейти на соответствующую страницу настроек.
390
GETtheMANUALS.org
Вид сзади Разъем AVN на 42 контакта
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Разъем для радиоантенны A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Для подключения кабеля радиоантенны
Pусский
A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) Разъем для антенны GPS A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- Для подключения кабеля антенны GPS A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Разъем камеры заднего вида A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Для подключения камеры заднего вида A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB-порт A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- Для подключения USB-носителя A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) Разъем ввода/вывода (42 контакта) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) Разъем DAB B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- Для подключения кабеля антенны DAB B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
391
GETtheMANUALS.org
1 Во время вызова по гарнитуре Bluetooth нажмите и удерживайте,
чтобы завершить вызов.
При отсутствии вызова нажмите, чтобы включить/выключить звук.
6
В любом режиме
2 -Каждое нажатие клавиши изменяет режим в следующем порядке: Радио →
2 3 Мультимедиа → Музыка по Bluetooth → iPod → Моя музыка (если устройство
4 мультимедиа не подключено, соответствующие режимы будут отключены).
-Нажмите и удерживайте для переключения режимов радио в следующем порядке:
5 1 FM1 → FM2 → AM → DAB.
В режиме «Мультимедиа»
-Нажмите и удерживайте для переключения режимов в следующем порядке: Музыка
с USB → Видео с USB → Изображения с USB.
3
Регулирует громкость
Pусский
4 Во время воспроизведения
- нажимайте вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущему/следующему файлу.
- нажимайте вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущей/следующей сохраненной
станции.
-н ажимайте и держите вверх/вниз для перехода к предыдущей/следующей
частоте вещания.
5
Включает режим гарнитуры Bluetooth.
В режиме Apply CarPlay

6 - включает Siri.
В режиме Android Auto
- включает распознавание голоса Google.
392
GETtheMANUALS.org
Основные операции
Запуск системы Выключение системы
1. П
осле включения системы нажмите и держите
1. Нажмите кнопку пуска двигателя или 2. После включения системы начнется (более 1,5 секунд) кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ГРОМКОСТЬ,
поверните ключ зажигания в положение процесс загрузки и появится экран с чтобы выключить питание. При выключении
ON или ACC. логотипом. сохраняется последний используемый режим.
Pусский
3. Выводится страница предупреждения 4. Нажмите кнопку [Cогласен] для отображения 2. Текущее время отображается при
о безопасности, где требуется согласие последнего режима. (Режим по умолчанию — выключенном питании.
пользователя. Радио FM1)
-Установите флажок [Автоматическое скрытие], чтобы включить последний использованный режим без нажатия - При включении зажигания система
кнопки [Согласен]. автоматически возвращается к последнему
использованному режиму.
- Система автоматически отключается, если
после отключения зажигания прошло более 3
минут, а дверь водителя открыта.
393
GETtheMANUALS.org
Сброс системы Отключение звука Включение звука
1. Нажмите кнопки MODE и SETUP 1. В режиме AV нажмите кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ 1. Когда режим AV отключен, нажмите
одновременно. ГРОМКОСТЬ, чтобы выключить AV. кнопку ПИТАНИЕ/ГРОМКОСТЬ, чтобы
включить AV.
Pусский
2. Система выключится и перезагрузится. 2. Когда звук выключен, появится экран с 2. При включении звука экран навигации
последним режимом навигации. не исчезает, но при этом начнется
воспроизведение последнего
использованного аудиоисточника.
- При сбросе системы восстанавливаются
заводские настройки. Это обеспечивает
стабильность устройства и не является
дефектом системы.
394
GETtheMANUALS.org
Главная страница
Главная страница
1 Здесь показана карта и маршрут движения. / Нажмите на любую
1
точку экрана, чтобы перейти в полноэкранный режим навигации.
6
2 Здесь показана краткая информация о включенном в данный
момент режиме радио. / Прикоснитесь к экрану, чтобы
перейти на страницу воспроизведения.
2
3 Закладка
Добавьте часто используемые пункты меню для быстрого и
удобного доступа к ним.
4 Режим
Показывает всех пункты в системном меню.
3 4 5
5 Место назначения
Переход на страницу, где можно найти место назначения.
6 Выключить экран
Pусский
Нажмите, чтобы выключить экран. Чтобы включить экран,
коснитесь любой области экрана.
- Нажмите кнопку [HOME], чтобы перейти на главную страницу.
- Нажмите и удерживайте кнопку [HOME], чтобы перейти на страницу закладок.
395
GETtheMANUALS.org
Закладка
Как сделать закладку Страница закладок
4 2
1
1. На главной странице выберите 2. На странице "список закладок"
[Закладка]. нажмите [Добавить].
1 Список меню
Pусский
Список меню закладок

3. Перетаскивайте пункты 4. Список закладок 2 Подтвердить
меню в нужное место, чтобы После выбора сохраняет изменения в меню закладок и открывает
добавить/удалить/переместить главную страницу.
их. Нажмите кнопку Область для добавления меню
3
подтверждения.
Перетащите сюда пункты меню для добавления в качестве
закладок.
4 Сброс
Сбрасывает настройки закладок.
Если закладка уже добавлена, нажмите кнопку редактирования. - Нажмите кнопку [HOME], чтобы перейти на главную страницу.
- Нажмите и удерживайте кнопку [HOME], чтобы перейти на страницу закладок.
396
GETtheMANUALS.org
Запуск режима радио
Запуск режима радио Страница радио
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
1. Нажмите кнопку MODE, чтобы открыть 7

главное меню, а затем нажмите [Радио].
1 Отображение режима 7 Вкладка "Диапазон частот"

Показывает текущий режим работы. При выборе нужной вкладки включится выбранный
режим радио.
2 Фиксированная частота
Показывает список фиксированных частот. 8 Главная
Открыть главную страницу.
Pусский
* Нажмите и удерживайте кнопку фиксированных
частот, чтобы привязать текущую частоту к 9 Назад
выбранной кнопке. Переход к предыдущему экрану.
* Для режимов FM1/FM2/AM можно сохранить до 12 DAB
10
стандартных частот.
Включает режим DAB.
3 Информация о частоте 11 ТА вкл/выкл
Показывает текущую частоту. Включает/выключает дорожные сообщения
*П
ри каждом перетаскивании этой области вправо (подробности см. в разделе "DAB").
режим изменяется в порядке FM1 → FM2 → AM → FM1.
12 DLS вкл/выкл
4 Индикатор Включает/выключает текст DLS (подробности в разделе "DAB").
Показывает состояние "Вкл/Выкл" для функций Сканирование
13
REG/AF/TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO. Воспроизводит частоты с высоким качеством
5 Настройка в сторону увеличения приема по 5 секунд каждую.
Нажмите для настройки в сторону увеличения. В 14 AST
диапазоне FM: 0,1 МГц, AM: 9 кГц) Привязывает частоты с отличным качеством према к
6 Настройка в сторону уменьшения кнопкам фиксированных частот.
Нажмите для настройки в сторону уменьшения. 15 Запись радио
В диапазоне FM: 0,1 МГц, AM: 9 кГц) Записывает текущую радиотрансляцию.
397
GETtheMANUALS.org
Использование фиксированных частот и запись радио
Автоматическое сохранение Сохранение фиксированных
фиксированных частот частот вручную Запись радио
(Автосохранение)
1. На странице радио нажмите 2. На страница с вопросом о

1. На странице радио нажмите 1. Выберите частоту для . записи радио нажмите [OK]
[AST]. сохранения. для начала записи.
Pусский
2. Привязывает частоты 2. Нажмите и удерживайте кнопку 3. При нажатии кнопки остановки запись будет остановлена и
с отличным качеством фиксированной частоты, в сохранена в папке "Моя музыка".
приема к кнопкам в порядке которую нужно выполнить
возрастания. сохранение. Текущая частота
привязывается к нужной
кнопке, вы услышите звуковой
сигнал.
- Если частот с отличным качеством приема меньше 12, то ранее сохраненные - Длительность записей должна превышать 5 секунд, одна запись ограничена 60 минутами.
частоты будут сохраняться в оставшиеся ячейки фиксированных частот. - Записанные файлы радио можно воспроизводить в "Моей музыке".
- Можно сохранить до 100 файлов. Если в памяти хранится 100 файлов, запись
- Если включено автосохранение, повторное нажатие кнопки AST приведет к
автоматически прервется, и вы не сможете сохранить новые записи.
отмене функции и воспроизведению предыдущей частоты.
398
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
Запуск режима DAB Страница DAB
1 8 Назад
9 10 11 12 13 Переход к предыдущему экрану.
7 8
9 FM/AM
Управлять режимом радио FM/AM.
4
10 Service Follow вкл/выкл
SF(AF) ВКЛ / ВЫКЛ
2 * SF(AF) : Эта функция обеспечивает
5 3 6
непрерывный прием за счет автоматического
1. Н
а странице радио нажмите DAB, поиска идентичного канала на соседних
чтобы перейти в режим DAB. частотах, когда сигнал текущего канала
становится слабым.
11 TA (дорожные сообщения) вкл/выкл

Включить/выключить дорожные сообщения.
* TA : Эта функция позволяет получать
дорожные сообщения и сводки в реальном
времени.
1 Отображение режима
Показывает текущий режим работы. 12 Текст DLS (Dynamic Label Segment) вкл/выкл
Включить/выключить текст DLS.
Pусский
2 Фиксированная частота * Текст DLS: Эта функция показывает текст,
Показывает сохраненную станцию, выбранную пользователем. переданный текущей радиостанцией на
* Нажмите и удерживайте кнопку фиксированных частот, чтобы привязать устройство. Передаются такие сведения, как
текущую станцию к выбранной кнопке. информация о программе, включая слоганы
* Можно сохранить до 12 станций. станции или название и исполнитель
текущей песни.
3 Информация о станции
Показывает текущую станцию. Список
13
4 Индикатор Показывает автоматически
Показать состояние (вкл/выкл) функций DAB/TP обновляемые списки.
5 Предыдущий канал
Переход к предыдущей станции.
6 Следующий канал
Переход к следующей станции.
7 Главная
Открыть главную страницу.
399
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим «Мультимедиа»
О USB-накопителях
1. Подключите устройство USB после включения зажигания. Устройство USB может быть повреждено, если оно было подключено до
включения зажигания. USB-устройства не являются автомобильными электронными компонентами.
2. Включение или выключение зажигания при подключенном USB-устройстве может привести к неправильной работе USB.
3. При подключении/отключении внешних USB-устройств следует соблюдать осторожность и не допускать воздействия статического
электричества.
4. Зашифрованные MP3-плееры не будут распознаны при подключении в качестве внешнего устройства.
5. При подключении внешнего USB-устройства система может не распознать его в определенных условиях.
6. Эта система распознает USB-устройства, отформатированные в файловой системе FAT16/32. USB-носители с файловой системой NTFS
или exFAT не поддерживаются.
7. Некоторые USB-устройства могут не поддерживаться из-за проблем совместимости. Перед началом использования убедитесь, что
устройство работает нормально.
8. Неоднократное подключение/отключение USB-устройства в течение короткого промежутка времени может привести к повреждению
устройства.
9. При отключении USB-устройства вы иногда можете услышать странный звук.
10. Отключение USB-устройства во время воспроизведения мультимедиа в режиме USB может привести к повреждению или неправильной
работе устройства USB. При отключении USB-устройства сначала выключите систему или измените режим на другой.
11. Время, необходимое для распознавания внешнего USB-устройства, может отличаться в зависимости от типа, размера или форматов
файлов, хранящихся на USB-устройстве. Такие различия в требуемом времени не означают неисправность.
12. Запрещается использовать USB-устройства для целей, отличных от воспроизведения музыки или просмотра изображений.
Pусский
13. Не используйте USB-кабель для зарядки батарей или USB-устройств, выделяющих тепло. Такие действия могут привести к ухудшению
производительности или к повреждению системы.
14. Система может не распознать USB-устройство, если вы используете дополнительные USB-концентраторы и удлинители. Подключайте
USB-устройство непосредственно к мультимедийному разъему автомобиля.
15. При использовании USB-носителей данных возможно разделение на логические диски для удобства пользователей. В таком случае будут
воспроизводиться только файлы, находящиеся на логическом диске корневого каталога. При использовании USB-носителя с разделами
(логические диски) сохраните файлы, которые нужно воспроизвести, в корневом каталоге. При установке приложений на USB-носители
файлы на таких носителях могут не воспроизводиться по причинам, описанным выше.
16. Устройство может работать неправильно, если к нему подключены MP3-плееры, мобильные телефоны, цифровые фотокамеры или другие
электронные устройства (USB-устройства, не распознанные как портативные диски).
17. Зарядка через USB может не работать для некоторых мобильных устройств.
18. Нормальная работа гарантируется только для USB-носителей с металлическим корпусом.
19. Устройство может работать неправильно при использовании таких форматов, как HDD, CF или память SD.
20. USB-накопители, подключенные через переходник, в том числе USB-флешки типа SD и CF, могут не распознаваться.
400
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим музыки с USB
Запуск режима музыки с USB Сохранение музыкального файла
1. Нажмите кнопку MODE, чтобы открыть главное 1. П

осле воспроизведения файла, который вы хотите 2. В окне "Сохарнить аудио-файл"
меню, а затем нажмите [Мультимедиа]. сохранить, нажмите на странице "Музыка". нажмите [OK].
Pусский
2. Режимом мультимедиа по умолчанию 3. Можно проверить файлы, сохраненные
является музыка с USB. в "Моей музыке".
Эта функция не будет работать, если на устройстве USB нет ни одного
музыкального файла (функция не будет работать, если на устройстве
USB отсутствуют файлы мультимедиа).
-А удиокодек: MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10, LPCM, FLAC
- Расширение: MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Частота дискретизации: 32 кГц, 44,1 кГц, 48 кГц
- Битрейт: 32 ~ 320 кбит/с
-О сторожно: Это устройство поддерживает аудиофайлы с
битрейтом 320 кбит/с, но рекомендуется использовать файлы
с битрейтом 192 кбит/с. При использовании файлов без Информация
фиксированных битрейтов некоторые функции (перемотка
вперед/назад) могут работать неправильно. - Можно сохранить до 100 песен.
401
GETtheMANUALS.org
Страница музыки с USB
Страница музыки с USB
6 Следующий файл
1 Воспроизведение следующего файла.
9 10 11 * Нажмите и удерживайте клавишу для быстрого перехода к следующему
2 файлу на устройстве USB. Отображается имя файла. После отпускания
клавиши начнется воспроизведение файла с обычной скоростью.
3 7 Предыдущий файл
12 Воспроизведение предыдущего файла.
* Нажмите и удерживайте клавишу для быстрого перехода к предыдущему
5
файлу на устройстве USB. Отображается имя файла. После отпускания
4 клавиши начнется воспроизведение файла с обычной скоростью.
7 8 6
8 Приостановка/воспроизведение
13 Воспроизводит/ставит на паузу текущий файл.
9 Повторить
Повторение текущего файла или всех файлов на устройстве USB.
14 * При каждом нажатии кнопки этот параметр изменяется в следующем
порядке: Повторить файл → Повторить папку → Повторить один раз.
10 Вперемешку
Pусский
Воспроизведение файлов в произвольном порядке.

Показывает текущий режим работы. 11 Сохранение музыкального файла
Сохранение текущего файла в "Мою музыку".
2 Корневая папка
Переход в корневую папку 12 Количество файлов
Показывает номер текущего файла/количество файлов в текущей папке.
3 Имя папки
Показывает текущую папку. 13 Время воспроизведения
Показывает текущее / общее время воспроизведения.
4 Плейлист * Прикоснитесь полоске или перетащите ее, чтобы перейти на нужное время.
Показывает список музыкальных файлов в текущей папке.
* Выделяется название песни, которая воспроизводится в данный момент 14 Вкладка «Режим USB»
При выборе нужной вкладки включится выбранный режим.
5 Сведения о песне
Отображает сведения о папке, исполнителе, название, альбом и обложку
альбома текущего файла.
402
GETtheMANUALS.org
Запуск режима видео с USB
Запуск режима видео с USB
1. Нажмите кнопку MODE, чтобы 2 - 1. Когда отображается 2 - 2. Или перейдите на вкладку 3. После появления панели
открыть главное меню, а затем страница "Музыка с USB", "Видео с USB", чтобы управления видео
нажмите [Мультимедиа]. перетащите экран вправо, включить одноименный воспроизведение будет
чтобы включить режим режим. происходить в полноэкранном
"Видео с USB". режиме.
Pусский
Эта функция не будет работать, если на устройстве USB нет ни одного видеофайла (функция не будет работать, если на устройстве USB отсутствуют файлы
мультимедиа).
- Режимом мультимедиа по умолчанию является "Музыка с USB".
- Видеокодек: MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8, WMV7/8
- Расширения: MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Разрешение изображения: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Субтитры: SMI (субтитры могут работать неправильно, если имя видеофайла отличается от имени файла субтитров).
- Осторожно: Файлы с высоким разрешением и битрейтом выше 2 Мбит/с могут воспроизводиться неправильно.
403
GETtheMANUALS.org
Страница видео с USB
Страница видео с USB
8 9 * Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл воспроизводится, и отображается
2 имя следующего файла.
6 Предыдущий файл
3 Воспроизведение предыдущего файла.
10 * Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл воспроизводится, и отображается
4 имя предыдущего файла.
6 7 5 Воспроизводит/ставит на паузу текущий файл.
8 Размер субтитров
11 Изменяет размер субтитров.
* Эта кнопка доступна только при наличии субтитров.
9 Полноэкранный режим
12 Включает полноэкранный режим.
* Если нажать на участок экрана вне кнопок, будет включен полноэкранный режим.
10 Количество файлов
Pусский
Показывает номер текущего файла/количество файлов в текущей папке.

Показывает текущий режим работы. 11 Время воспроизведения
Показывает текущее / общее время воспроизведения.
2 Корневая папка * Прикоснитесь полоске или перетащите ее, чтобы перейти на нужное время.
Переход в корневую папку
12 Вкладка «Режим USB»
3 Имя файла/папки При выборе нужной вкладки включится выбранный режим.
Показывает имя текущей папки и файла.
4 Список видео
Показывает список видеофайлов в текущей папке.
* Выделяется название видео, которое воспроизводится в данный момент
404
GETtheMANUALS.org
Запуск режима изображений с USB
Запуск режима изображений с USB
1. Нажмите кнопку MODE, чтобы 2 - 1. Когда отображается 2 - 2. Или перейдите на 3. После появления панели
открыть главное меню, а затем страница "Музыка с вкладку "Изображения управления изображениями
нажмите [Мультимедиа]. USB", перетащите экран с USB", чтобы включить они будут отображаться в
вправо, чтобы включить одноименный режим. полноэкранном режиме.
режим "Изображения с
USB" (Музыка → Видео →
Изображения).
Pусский
Эта функция не будет работать, если на устройстве USB нет ни одного файла изображений (функция не будет работать, если на устройстве USB отсутствуют файлы мультимедиа).
- Режимом мультимедиа по умолчанию является "Музыка с USB".
- При переходе из режима музыки в режим изображений воспроизведение музыки не останавливается.
- При переходе из режима видео в режим изображений воспроизведение звука не останавливается.
- Поддерживаемые форматы изображений: JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
405
GETtheMANUALS.org
Страница изображений с USB
Страница изображений с USB
4 Плейлист
1
7 8 9 Показывает список изобаржений в текущей папке.
* Выделяется название изображения, которое показано в данный момент
2
10 * Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл воспроизводится, и отображается
4 имя следующего файла.
Воспроизведение следующего файла.
6 5 * Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл воспроизводится, и отображается
имя предыдущего файла.
7 Показ слайдов
11 Все изображения на устройстве USB отображаются по очереди в
зависимости от выбранного интервала
* Функция увеличения/уменьшения не поддерживается.
* При вождении слайдшоу нельзя включить.
Вращать
Pусский
8
1 Отображение режима Вращение изображения по часовой стрелке.
Показывает текущий режим работы.
9 Сохранение изображения
2 Корневая папка Сохраняет показанное изображение при выключении экрана.
Переход в корневую папку
10 Количество файлов
3 Имя файла/папки Показывает номер текущего файла/количество файлов в текущей
Показывает папку, имя файла, тип файла и разрешение текущего изображения. папке.
11 Вкладка «Режим USB»

При выборе нужной вкладки включится выбранный режим.
406
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим Bluetooth
Перед использованием Bluetooth
1. Перед подключением гарнитуры к мобильному телефону включите Bluetooth и убедитесь, что телефон можно обнаружить по Bluetooth.
2. Можно выполнить сопряжение с пятью устройствами Bluetooth.
3. Одновременно может быть подключено только одно устройство Bluetooth.
4. Минимальная громкость гарнитуры – 6, максимальная – 40.
Запуск режима Bluetooth
Pусский
1. Нажмите кнопку MODE, чтобы 2. Отображается уведомление 3-1. Нажмите [Да] для 3.-2. Если нажать кнопку [Нет],
открыть главное меню, а затем о подключении по Bluetooth отображения страницы появится экран телефона
нажмите [Bluetooth]. (при отсутствии сопряжения подключения Bluetooth. Bluetooth (клавиатура). Можно
телефонов). также выполнить сопряжение
устройства, нажав
[Подключить] в этом окне.
- Для добавления дополнительных устройств необходимо удалить одно из ранее добавленных устройств.
407
GETtheMANUALS.org
Главное меню Bluetooth
Главное меню Bluetooth
7 1 Отображение режима
1
2
2 История вызовов
Отображает журнал недавно набранных номеров/принятых/
3
8 пропущенных вызовов.
4 3 Контакты
Показывает список контактов.
5 * Контакты можно просматривать только если они загружены.
6 4 Клавиатура
Показывает клавиатуру для набора номера.
5 Подключить
Показывает экран подключения по Bluetooth.
Pусский
6 Настройки Bluetooth
Показывает экран настроек Bluetooth.
7 Значки состояния
Показывают текущее состояние телефона в правой верхней части
экрана.
8 Имя телефона
Показывает имя подключенного устройства.
408
GETtheMANUALS.org
Сопряжение устройств Bluetooth
Автоматическое
Поиск из автомобиля подключение
- Устройство Bluetooth будет
автоматически подключено
в соответствии с заданными
параметрами при включении
зажигания (ACC ON).
- Если выбранный
пользователем телефон не
удается подключить, система
1. Нажмите [Поиск из автомобиля]. 2. Выполните поиск устройств 3. Выберите имя устройства для автоматически попытается
(отключите скрытое состояние подключения. подключить самый последний
мобильного телефона). использованный телефон.
Если не удается подключить
последний использованный
телефон, система попытается
подключить все сопряженные
телефоны последовательно
(если подключение не
Pусский
удается установить за 1 цикл,
автоматическое подключение
4. Проверьте ключ доступа и 5. Отображается страница 6. После успешного подключения прекратится).
приступите к сопряжению с подключения Bluetooth. Bluetooth появится имя
устройством Bluetooth. подключенного мобильного
телефона.
- Макс. время поиска: 15 секунд, макс. количетсво устройств для поиска: 20 устройств
- Ключ доступа создается случайным образом.
- Если устройство не найдено, проверьте следующее.
* Включена ли функция Bluetooth на вашем устройстве с поддержкой Bluetooth?
* Не включено ли скрытое состояние Bluetooth?
- Если поиск и подключение по-прежнему не работают, перезагрузите устройство Bluetooth и повторите попытку.
- Если устройство уже было сопряжено ранее, выберите устройство из списка для подключения.
409
GETtheMANUALS.org
Поиск из устройства
1. Нажмите [Поиск из устройства]. 2. Найдите имя автомобиля и 3. Отображается страница 4. После успешного подключения
выполните сопряжение с ним. подключения Bluetooth. Bluetooth появится имя
Проверьте ключ доступа и подключенного мобильного
приступите к сопряжению с телефона.
устройством Bluetooth.
Pусский
- Ключ доступа создается случайным образом.
- Если устройство не найдено, проверьте следующее.
* Включена ли функция Bluetooth на вашем устройстве с поддержкой Bluetooth?
* Не включено ли скрытое состояние Bluetooth?
- Если поиск и подключение по-прежнему не работают, перезагрузите устройство Bluetooth и повторите попытку.
410
GETtheMANUALS.org
Отключение и удаление устройств Bluetooth
Отключение устройства Удаление устройства
1. На странице "Телефон Blue- 2. Выберите имя устройства для 1. На странице "Телефон Blue- 2. Поставьте флажок напротив
tooth" нажмите [Подключить]. отключения. tooth" нажмите [Подключить]. имени удаляемого устройства.
Pусский
3. Нажмите [OK] для отключения. 3. Нажмите на активный значок мусорного ведра, чтобы выбрать
устройство на экране "Удалить устройство".
-У
стройство нельзя удалить, если оно подключено (можно удалять только
отключенные устройства).
411
GETtheMANUALS.org
Экран вызова Bluetooth
Экран вызова Bluetooth
1 Имя телефона и имя/номер контакта
Показывает имя текущего подключенного устройства и имя/номер
3 4 5
собеседника во время звонка.
2 Длительность вызова
Показывает длительность вызова.
1 2
3 Гарнитура / Телефон
Показывает текущее состояние вызова (нажмите для переключения
между гарнитурой и телефоном Bluetooth).
4 Громкость микрофона
7
6 Регулирует громкость для собеседника во время вызовов. Задает
громкость вызова для собеседника (уровни 1~5) (эта функция может
использоваться только во время вызова по гарнитуре).
5 Отключить звук
Включает/выключает микрофон (эта функция может использоваться
только во время вызова по гарнитуре)
Pусский
6 Отправить / позвонить / завершить

Набирает номер / завершает вызов.
7 Клавиатура
Используется для ввода/удаления цифр.
412
GETtheMANUALS.org
Выполнение звонка
Выполнение звонка Загрузка контактов
1. Введите номер. 2. Нажмите кнопку вызова. 1. Нажмите кнопку "Контакт". 2. Проверьте телефон и подтвердите запрос
на загрузку (на телефоне требуется
Нажмите [Загрузка контактов]. дополнительное подтверждение).
Pусский
3. Показывает длительность 3. Нажмите [OK] 4. Загружаются контакты
вызова во время звонка. (предыдущее состояние
сохраняется до отмены).
-П ри загрузке на телефоне требуется дополнительное подтверждение (можно настроить отдельно
на вешм мобильном устройстве).
- Эта функция может не поддерживаться для некоторых типов контактов (Google, T-контакты и т. д.).
-З агрузка будет продолжаться даже при переходе в другой режим во время загрузки.
- Можно загрузить до 1000 контактов.
- Контакты можно загружать только с телефона. Удаление или добавление не поддерживается.
-П ри загрузке контактов также загружаются самые последние 150 записей журнала вызовов
(сохраняется до 50 набранных, входящих и пропущенных вызовов).
413
GETtheMANUALS.org
Вызов контакта
1. На странице "Телефон Blue- 2. Нажмите кнопку вызова, чтобы 3. Нажмите значок лупы, чтобы
tooth" нажмите [Контакты]. позвонить по номеру из списка. найти контакты.
Pусский
4. Введите имя или номер телефона и нажмите [Поиск]. 5. Нажмите кнопку вызова, чтобы 6. Начнется вызов по Bluetooth.
позвонить по номеру из списка.
414
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ответ на звонок
Ответ на звонок
1. При входящем вызове информация о 2. Показывает информацию и 3. После завершения вызова вы вернетесь
собеседнике показана во всплывающем длительность вызова собеседника. в предыдущий режим.
окне входящего вызова. Нажмите
[Гарнитура] или [Переключить на
телефон] для ответа на звонок (нажатие
[Отклонить] приведет к прекращению
вызова и возврату в предыдущий
Pусский
режим).
- При отображении всплывающего окна входящего вызова большинство функций в режиме AV не будет работать. После завершения вызова продолжится
воспроизведение мультимедиа.
- Однако показ слайдов с USB будет завершен.
- Громкость гарнитуры можно регулировать отдельно от громксти в режиме AV.
415
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки Bluetooth
Включение/выключение Bluetooth
1. На странице "Телефон Bluetooth" 2. Нажмите [Использовать Bluetooth]. 3. Определяет, следует ли использовать
нажмите [Настройки Bluetooth]. автоматическое подключение Bluetooth
Информация (по умолчанию: Использовать)
- Если нажать [Не использовать], то большинство функций будет отключено, кроме [Использовать Bluetooth] и [Сброс].
Изменение имени устройства

Pусский
1. На странице "Телефон Bluetooth" 2. Нажмите [Изменить имя устройства]. 3. Нажмите на имя и нажмите [Готово]
нажмите [Настройки Bluetooth]. (имя устройства по умолчанию —
SSANGYONG AVN).
416
GETtheMANUALS.org
Параметры автоматического подключения
1. На странице "Телефон Bluetooth" 2. Нажмите [Автоматическое подключение].

нажмите [Настройки Bluetooth].
Настройки контактов
Pусский
1. На странице "Телефон Bluetooth" 2. Нажмите [Контакты]. 3. Определяет, следует ли автоматически
нажмите [Настройки Bluetooth]. загружать контакты при подключении
по Bluetooth (по умолчанию: [Не
использовать]).
417
GETtheMANUALS.org
Удаление истории вызовов.
1. На странице "Телефон Blue- 2. Нажмите [Удалить историю 3. Нажмите [OK]. 4. История вызовов будет
tooth" нажмите [Настройки вызовов]. удалена.
Bluetooth].
Сброс Bluetooth
Pусский
1. На странице "Телефон Blue- 2. Нажмите [Сброс]. 3. Когда появится всплывающее

tooth" нажмите [Настройки окно с уведомлением, нажмите
Bluetooth]. [OK].
418
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки мелодии звонка
1. На странице "Телефон Bluetooth" 2. Нажмите [Мелодия звонка]. 3. Выберите нужную мелодию звонка.
нажмите [Настройки Bluetooth].
Pусский
- При выборе мелодии звонка она прозвучит один раз.
419
GETtheMANUALS.org
Музыка по Bluetooth
Перед использованием музыки по Bluetooth Страница «Музыка по Bluetooth»
1. Режим музыки по Bluetooth может использоваться только при
подключенном телефоне Bluetooth. 1
6
2. Когда подключение по Bluetooth выполнено, музыка будет
воспроизводиться автоматически при переходе в режим музыки по
Bluetooth.
- Если автовоспроизведение не работает, нажмите кнопку воспроизведения. 2
- Воспроизведение может не запускаться автоматически в зависимости
от проигрывателя на подключенном устройстве.
3 4 5
Pусский
2 Сведения о песне
Показывает название песни, имя исполнителя, сведения об альбоме.
Воспроизведение предыдущего файла.
Воспроизводит/ставит на паузу текущий файл.
6 Телефон с поддержкой Bluetooth
Включает режим телефона Bluetooth.
420
GETtheMANUALS.org
Моя музыка
Что такое "Моя музыка"? Страница «Моя музыка»
- Моя музыка – эта функция, 7 Следующий файл
1
которая сохраняет музыкальные 9 10 11
файлы, хранящиеся на USB- * Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл
воспроизводится, и отображается имя
накопителях или файлы записи следующего файла.
радио, в системе, для их 2
воспроизведения в автомобиле. 8 8 Обложка альбома
4 Показывает обложку альбома.
- Эта функция не будет работать, 9 Повторить

5 6 7 Повторение текущего файла или всех
если в системе нет ни одного
3 12 файлов в "Моей музыке".
музыкального файла.
* При каждом нажатии кнопки этот параметр
изменяется в следующем порядке: Повторить
Запуск "Моей музыки" файл → Повторить папку → Повторить один
раз.
10 Вперемешку
Воспроизведение файлов в произвольном
порядке.
Показывает текущий режим работы. 11 Удаление файла
Pусский
Удаляет текущий файл.
2 Папка для записи радиопередач
Показывает файлы записанных радиопередач, сохраненных в "Моей 12 Время воспроизведения
музыке". Показывает текущее / общее время
воспроизведения.
1. В главном меню нажмите 3 Плейлист * Прикоснитесь полоске или перетащите ее,
Показывает список музыкальных файлов в текущей папке. чтобы перейти на нужное время.
кнопку [Моя музыка].
* Выделяется название песни, которая воспроизводится в данный момент
4 Информация о файле
Отображение сведений о текущем файле.
* песня, исполнитель и альбом.
* Пока вы удерживаете кнопку, текущий файл воспроизводится, и
отображается имя следующего файла.
Воспроизводит/ставит на паузу текущий файл.
421
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим AUX
Запуск режима AUX Страница режима AUX
1 1 Отображение режима
2 3
2 Главная страница
Открывает главную страницу (PIP).
3 Назад
Переход к предыдущему экрану.
1. В главном меню нажмите
[AUX].
Pусский
2. Если к разъему AUX

подключено внешнее
устройство, будет включен
режим AUX.
Осторожно!
- При подключении внешнего устройства рекомендуется использовать 3-жильный кабель AUX.
- При подключении штекера AUX без подключенного внешнего устройства система переходит в режим AUX, но вы услышите только шум. Когда режим AUX не
используется, извлеките штекер из разъема.
- Когда питание внешнего устройства подключено к разъему питания, при воспроизведении с внешнего устройства вы можете слышать шум. В таких случаях
отключите питание перед использованием.
422
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки
Отображение страницы Отображение страницы
настроек радио
Настройки RDS настроек навигации
Настройки навигации
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1. Нажмите [RDS] и укажите, следует 1. Нажмите и держите (более 1. В на странице настроек
1,5 секунд) кнопку SETUP на ли использовать функцию RDS. 1,5 секунд) кнопку SETUP на навигации укажите, следует
устройстве. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней устройстве. ли автоматически запускать
правой части, чтобы сбросить
навигацию при запуске
настройки (по умолчанию: AF)
устройства. Нажмите кнопку
Настройки поиска PTY сброса в верхней правой
части, чтобы сбросить
настройки (по умолчанию:
Автозапуск)
Pусский
2. На странице настроек нажмите 2. На странице настроек нажмите
[Радио]. [Навигация].
1. Нажмите [Поиск PTY] и

выберите нужные параметры.
Нажмите кнопку сброса
в верхней правой части,
чтобы сбросить настройки (по
умолчанию: Нет)
423
GETtheMANUALS.org
Отображение страницы
настроек частов Настройки времени
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд) 1. Нажмите [Время], чтобы установить текущее
кнопку SETUP на устройстве. время. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней
правой части, чтобы сбросить настройки (по
умолчанию: 2015-01-01, время соответствует
показанному в системе)
Настройки часов
Pусский
2. На странице настроек нажмите [Часы].
1. Нажмите [Часы] для настройки типа

часов. Нажмите кнопку сброса в
верхней правой части, чтобы сбросить
настройки (по умолчанию: Аналоговый,
12 часов)
424
GETtheMANUALS.org
Отображение страницы настроек звука Параметры громкости/балансировки Настройки эквалайзера
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд) кнопку 1. Н

а странице настроек громкости/баланс нажимайте кнопки вверх/вниз/ 1. На странице настроек эквалайзера нажимайте
влево/вправо или нажмите на нужную точку, чтобы задать нужную зону
SETUP на устройстве. звука. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней правой части, чтобы
кнопку +/- для настройки уровней низких/
сбросить настройки (по умолчанию: Громкость 00, баланс 00) средних/высоких частот. Нажмите кнопку
Информация сброса в верхней правой части, чтобы
- Регулятор громкости/Балансировка используется для настройки
сбросить настройки (по умолчанию: Высокие
громкости динамиков в зависимости от их расположения. 00, средние 00, низкие 00)
Настройки звука Другие настройки
Pусский
2. На странице настроек нажмите [Звук].
1. Н
а странице настроек звука нажмите кнопку [Навигация] для установки 1. Нажмите [Др. настройки] для настройки звуковых
приоритета навигации. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней правой сигналов и AVC. Нажмите кнопку сброса в
части, чтобы сбросить настройки (по умолчанию: Приоритет навигации) верхней правой части, чтобы сбросить настройки (по
Информация умолчанию: Звуковой сигнал - вкл, AVC - выкл)
- Приоритет навигации: звук на передних сидениях отключается,
когда система произносит маршрутные инструкции Информация
- Приоритет звука: Навигационные инструкции имеют - Звуковой сигнал: звучит при каждом нажатии кнопки.
фиксированную громкость. - AVC (автоматическая регулировка громкости): Когда функция
- Одинаковое соотношение: Можно настроить громкость AVC включена, громкость регулируется автоматически в
навигационных инструкций с помощью регулятора громкости зависимости от скорости автомобиля.
425
GETtheMANUALS.org
Отображение страницы настроек
закладок Добавление закладки
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1. Н

ажмите и удерживайте элементы 2. Затем перетащите их в нужное 3. Пункты меню будут добавлены.
1,5 секунд) кнопку SETUP на меню, которые требуется добавить место справа. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней
устройстве. из списка слева. правой части, чтобы сбросить
настройки (по умолчанию: Нет)
Удаление закладки
Pусский
2. На странице настроек нажмите

[Закладка].
1. Нажмите и удерживайте пункт 2. Затем перетащите их в список 3. Пункты меню будут удалены.
меню, который вы хотите слева. Нажмите кнопку сброса
удалить. в верхней правой части,
чтобы сбросить настройки (по
умолчанию: Нет)
426
GETtheMANUALS.org
Изменение порядка закладок
1. Нажмите и удерживайте пункты меню, 2. Затем перетащите их в нужное место. 3. Пункты меню будут перемещены.
которые вы хотите переместить. Нажмите кнопку сброса в верхней
правой части, чтобы сбросить настройки
(по умолчанию: Нет)
Pусский
427
GETtheMANUALS.org
Отображение страницы настроек
языка Настройки языка
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1,5 секунд) 1. На странице настроек языка выберите
кнопку SETUP на устройстве. нужный язык и нажмите кнопку
«Подтвердить» в правой верхней
части. Система будет автоматически
перезапущена, а системный язык
изменится. Нажмите кнопку сброса в
верхней правой части, чтобы сбросить
Pусский
настройки (по умолчанию: Английский)
2. На странице настроек нажмите [Язык].
428
GETtheMANUALS.org
настроек радио Параметры подсветки
1. Нажмите и держите (более 1. Н

а странице настроек подсветки 2. Автоматическая подсветка 3. Дневной режим
1,5 секунд) кнопку SETUP на нажмите клавишу +/- для регулировки - Автоматически регулирует - Устанавливает высокую
яркости экрана (по умолчанию:
устройстве. Автоматическая подсветка) яркость и цвета экрана. яркость экрана и цвета карты в
дневном режиме.
Pусский
2. На странице настроек 4. Ночной режим 5. Синхронизация навигации
нажмите [Экран]. - Устанавливает низкую яркость - На странице навигации карта
экрана и цвета карты в ночном переходит в дневной или
режиме. ночной режим в соответствии с
настройками подсветки.
ажмите кнопку сброса

Н в
верхней правой части, чтобы
сбросить настройки.
429
GETtheMANUALS.org
Настройки формата экрана Настройки отключения экрана Другие настройки настроек системы
1. Нажмите [Формат экрана] для 1. Чтобы выключить экран, 1. Эта функция используется 1. Нажмите и держите (более
настройки соотношения сторон нажмите [Выключить экран]. для настройки пустого экрана, 1,5 секунд) кнопку SETUP на
изображения, часов и помощи при
видео. Нажмите кнопку сброса Нажмите кнопку сброса парковке. устройстве.
в верхней правой части, в верхней правой части,
чтобы сбросить настройки (по чтобы сбросить настройки (по
умолчанию: Полноэкранный умолчанию: Выкл)
режим)
Pусский
2. Н
ажмите кнопку сброса в верхней 2. На странице настроек нажмите
правой части, чтобы сбросить [Система].
настройки (по умолчанию: показывать
часы и помощь при парковке)
- При использовании устройства только - На странице прочих настроек можно
для прослушивания музыки эта функция настроить изображение при выключении
может оказаться очень полезной. питания.
- Функция просмотра изображений
- Даже если экран выключен, музыка
доступна при сохранении пользователем
будет воспроизводиться.
изображений в системе.
- Чтобы включить экран, коснитесь любой - Показывает выбранное пользователем
области экрана. изображение.
430
GETtheMANUALS.org
Версия Сброс Обновление Осторожно!
- При сбросе системы пользовательские
системные данные и заданные
пользователем параметры
восстанавливаются до заводских.
Функция Режим Состояние
Радио FM1 89,1 МГц
Вперемешку Выкл
Музыка
1. Нажмите [Версия], чтобы показать 2. На странице настроек системы 1. На странице настроек системы
Повторить Все
сведения о системе. Эта функция нажмите [Сброс]. нажмите [Обновить]. Размер

Небольшой
субтитров
используется для просмотра версии Видео
загрузчика, ОС, приложения, Мультимедиа Размер Полноэкранный
экрана режим
прошивки и других компонентов
системы. Показ
Выкл
слайдов
Изображение
По
Вращать
умолчанию
Отключает устройство
и удаляет всех
Bluetooth Гарнитура
2. Нажмите [OK]. сопряженные
2. Нажмите [OK] для обновления
Pусский
устройства
системы. Звук Приоритет навигации
Настройки Навигация Автозапуск
Закладка Удаляет элементы
3. С
брос продолжится после того, как
вы решите, удалять ли музыкальные
файлы из "Моей музыки".
- При сбросе системы восстанавливаются - Требуется USB-носитель с файлами
заводские настройки. обновления.
- Вы можете указать, удалять ли
музыкальные файлы, сохраненные в
"Моей музыке".
431
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим iPod
Перед использованием iPod Страница iPod
Рекомендуется использовать подлинные кабели iPod, 1
поставляемые Apple.
9 10
2
Функция Apple CarPlay недоступна, когда используется iPod.

8
ри использовании режима iPod на iPhone необходимо

П 4
отключить функцию «Использовать CarPlay» в настройках 3
iPhone. 5 6 7
11
1 Отображение режима 7 Следующий файл

Pусский
Показывает текущий режим работы. Воспроизведение следующего файла.

2 Категория *е
сли нажать и удерживать эту кнопку, будет
выполнена такая же функция, как на iPod.
Показывает текущую категорию.
8 Обложка альбома
3 Список категорий Показывает обложку альбома.
Показывает все списки категорий.
* Список категорий может отличаться 9 Повторить
Повторение текущего файла или всех
в зависимости от типа iPod.
файлов в "Моей музыке".
4 Информация о файле *П
ри каждом нажатии кнопки этот параметр
Отображение сведений о текущем файле. изменяется в следующем порядке: Повторение выкл
* песня, исполнитель, альбом и → Повторить один раз → Повторить все.
общее число файлов. 10 Вперемешку
Воспроизведение файлов в произвольном
5 Предыдущий файл порядке.
* если нажать и удерживать эту кнопку, будет 11 Время воспроизведения
выполнена такая же функция, как на iPod. Показывает текущее / общее время
6 Приостановка/воспроизведение воспроизведения.
Воспроизводит/ставит на паузу * Прикоснитесь полоске или перетащите ее, чтобы
перейти на нужное время (эти функции могут не
текущий файл. поддерживаться в зависимости от устройства).
432
GETtheMANUALS.org
Запуск режима iPod
Автоматический запуск iPod Ручной запуск iPod
1. Используйте соединительный кабель 1. Нажмите и держите кнопку MODE на 2. Проведите пальцем от нижнего к
iPod для подключения iPod к разъему устройстве. верхнему краю экрана или нажмите на
USB. область страницы в левой части экрана.
Pусский
2. После подключения iPod режим iPod 3. Нажмите [iPod] для включения режима iPod. 4. Отображается информация о песне, и
будет включен автоматически. песня воспроизводится автоматически.
Если iPod уже подключен, и вы хотите воспроизводить музыку с iPod в другом режиме, изучите раздел
"Ручной запуск iPod".
433
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Что такое Apple CarPlay? Страница Apple CarPlay
1. При подключении iPhone к системе можно использовать такие
2
функции телефона, как звонки, навигация, сообщения, музыка
и Siri.
2. Доступные функции и операции могут различаться в
зависимости от модели iPhone.
3. Функция Apple CarPlay может быть недоступна в вашей стране
или регионе. (http://www.apple.com/ios/feature-availability/#apple-
carplay-applecarplay)
Перед использованием Apple CarPlay 3

1. Перед подключением мобильного телефона проверьте, включен ли
Apple CarPlay в разделе Настройки → Общие → Ограничения.
2. Перед подключением мобильного телефона проверьте, включена ли Siri
в разделе Настройки → Общие → Siri.
3. Apple CarPlay работает с iPhone версии 5 или выше. 1
4. Apple CarPlay работает с iOS 7.1, но рекомендуется использовать самую
последнюю версию.
5. Невозможно одновременно использовать Oncar, iPod и Apple CarPlay.
Pусский
6. Рекомендуется использовать подлинные кабели iPhone, поставляемые 1 Главная

Apple. Переход к главной странице Apple CarPlay
7. При подключении и входе в Apple CarPlay продолжает воспроизводиться
музыка из предыдущего режима. Изменится только экран.
8. Невозможно одновременно использовать Apple CarPlay и музыку по 2 Главная страница
Bluetooth. Главная страница Apple CarPlay
9. Для большинства функций Apple CarPlay требуется подключение к
интернету. Перед использованием Apple CarPlay убедитесь, что ваш 3 Сейчас играет
телефон подключен к интернету. Переход к текущему источнику звука.
10. При подключении Apple CarPlay распознавание голоса происходит
за счет Siri. Функция распознавания голоса в автомобиле не будет
работать.
11. Дополнительную информацию можно найти на веб-сайте Apple (http://
www.apple.com/kr/ios/carplay/)
434
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим Apple CarPlay
Использование Siri Запуск режима Apply CarPlay
1. Нажмите кнопку голосового управления 2. Или нажмите и удерживайте кнопку 1. Подключите iPhone к автомобилю с
на руле, чтобы включить Siri. "Домой" на главной странице Apple помощью USB-кабеля.
CarPlay, чтобы работать с Siri.
Pусский
3. Или нажмите и удерживайте кнопку 2. Нажмите [Apple CarPlay].
"Домой" на iPhone для работы с Siri.
- Если Bluetooth подключен, он будет отключен
при подключении Apple CarPlay.
435
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Перед использованием Android Auto Страница Android Auto
1. Загрузите авто-приложение Android Auto на телефон под
6
управлением Android 5.0 Lollipop или более поздней версии. 7
2. Рекомендуется использовать оригинальные кабели для
телефонов Android.
3. При подключении к Android Auto будет автоматически
выполнено подключение по Bluetooth.
- При превышении максимального числа зарегистрированных
устройств удаляется устройство, которое давно не
подключалось.
4. Музыка по Bluetooth не подключена.
5. Невозможно одновременно использовать CarLink, iPod, Apple
CarPlay и Android Auto.
6. Функция Android Auto может быть недоступна в вашей стране
или регионе. Подробнее на странице: (http://www.android.com/
auto/#what-you-need) 1 2 3 4 5
7. При подключении и входе в Android Auto продолжает
воспроизводиться музыка из предыдущего режима. Изменится
Pусский
только экран.
9. Для большинства функций Android Auto требуется подключение 1 Карта 5 Возврат в систему
к интернету. Перед использованием Apple CarPlay убедитесь, что Управляет функцией карты Переход к странице главного
ваш телефон подключен к интернету. (навигация). меню системы.
9. Для получения дополнительных сведений об Android Auto 2 Телефон 6 Распознавание голоса
обращайтесь на сайт поддержки Google: (http://support.google. Управляет функцией телефона. Включает функцию
com/androidauto) распознавания голоса.
Открывает главную страницу.
Главная страница Android Auto.
4 Музыка * Показывает виджет музыки и
погоды.
Управляет функцией музыки.
436
GETtheMANUALS.org
Запуск режима Android Auto
Приступая к работе
1. Подключите телефон Android к 2. Главное меню появится автоматически, 3. Нажмите [Android Auto] для входа в
автомобилю с помощью USB-кабеля. кнопка Android Auto станет активной режим.
(если функция Android Auto уже
подключена, нажмите кнопку MODE
на устройстве для перехода в главное
меню).
Pусский
* При подключении к Android Auto будет
автоматически выполнено подключение
по Bluetooth.
* При подключении к Android Auto будет автоматически выполнено подключение по Bluetooth.
* Музыка по Bluetooth не подключена.
* Невозможно одновременно использовать iPod, Apple CarPlay и Android Auto.
* Рекомендуется использовать отдельный кабель.
437
GETtheMANUALS.org
Электронное руководство
Что такое электронное руководство?
Позволяет в удобном виде получать справку о клавишах и

функциях системы.
Электронное руководство может отличаться от реального

устройства.
1. Выберите нужное меню слева. Для получения подробных

Pусский
инструкций по работе с системой используйте кнопки / для

перемещения между страницами.
438
GETtheMANUALS.org
В
идео и некоторые другие функции будут отключены для вашей
безопасности при движении автомобиля.
- Воспроизведение видео недоступно во время движения.
Проигрыватель музыки работает, когда видео отключено.
- Слайдшоу недоступно во время движения.
Ограничения будут сняты при использовании стояночного тормоза.
Pусский
439
GETtheMANUALS.org
Система оснащена камерой заднего вида с широким углом обзора для вашей безопасности.
Задняя камера включается автоматически при переводе рычага КПП в положение R независимо от текущего режима.
Задняя камера автоматически отключается при переводе рычага КПП в другое положение.
Когда задняя камера работает, можно использовать функции регулировки и отключения громкости.
Pусский
1. Переведите ключ зажигания в положение ON или ACC.

2. Переведите рычаг КПП в положение R.
Осторожно!
- Изображение с камеры заднего вида может выглядеть по-другому в зависимости от фактического расстояния. В целях безопасности всегда будьте осторожны
и самостоятельно проверяйте пространство сзади и справа/слева.
- Когда камера заднего вида работает, поддерживаются только функции регулировки громкости и приема вызовов.
440
GETtheMANUALS.org
Режим AVM - необязательный
Это устройство также поддерживает систему кругового обзора для дополнительной безопасности.
Система кругового обзора - это дополнительная функция.
Нажмите выключатель системы или переведите рычаг КПП в положение R для перехода в режим кругового обзора вне зависимости от текущего режима.
Нажмите выключатель системы еще раз или переведите рычаг КПП в другое положение из R для автоматического отключения режима
кругового обзора и возврата в предыдущий режим.
Когда система кругового обзора работает, можно использовать функции регулировки и отключения громкости.
Чтобы переключаться между режимами 2- и 3-мерного вида, используйте функцию «Режим вида» в настройках системы кругового обзора.
2-мерный вид 3-мерный вид
Pусский
Осторожно!
- Экран системы кругового обзора может выглядеть по-другому в зависимости от фактического расстояния. В целях безопасности всегда будьте осторожны и
самостоятельно проверяйте пространство сзади и справа/слева.
- Когда система кругового обзора работает, поддерживаются только функции регулировки громкости и приема вызовов.
441
GETtheMANUALS.org
Параметры AVM
Указания по синхронизации PGS Предупреждение о столкновении PAS Режим просмотра
1. Определяет, следует ли использовать 1. Определяет, следует ли использовать 1. Определяет режим просмотра. (по
Указания по синхронизации PGS (по Предупреждение о столкновении PAS умолчанию: 2-мерный вид)
умолчанию: Вкл) (по умолчанию: Вкл)
Pусский
442
GETtheMANUALS.org
Характеристики изделия
Название Автомобильное устройство AVN с плоским ЖК-экраном Поддерживаемые MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
файлы TS, WMV
Питание 14,4 В пост. тока Видео MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Кодек
WMV7/8
Рабочее
9-16 В пост. тока
напряжение Поддержка/разрешение
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
субтитров
Потребление 2A
Общее тока Поддерживаемые
MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
файлы
Ток в режиме
3 мА (только головное устройство) Звук
ожидания Битрейт 32 ~ 320 кбит/с
Рабочая -30℃ ~ +75℃ Частота
температура 32 кГц, 44,1 кГц, 48 кГц
дискретизации
Температура
хранения
-40℃ ~ +85℃ Фото Формат файлов JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Совместимость BLUTOOTH V4.1

Габариты 278,4 (Ш) x 175,5 (В) x 191,5 (Г)
Диапазон частот 2402 - 2480 МГц
Масса 2,5 кг Поддерживаемые A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
профили
Размер экрана 203,90 мм (Ш) x 114,70 (В) мм (активная область) Bluetooth
Pусский
Выходной 3,0 дБм
Разрешение 921 600 пикселей сигнал
Экран
Технология TFT, активная матрица с плоскостным переключением (IPS) Тип модуляции FHSS(GFSK)
Подсветка Индикатор Канал 79
Диапазон частот FM : 87,5 ~ 108,0 МГц (шаг: 100 кГц)

AM : 522 ~ 1620 МГц (шаг: 9 кГц)
Радио
Чувствительность FM: 10 дБмкВ, АМ: 40 дБмкВ EMF
Карта памяти 1 слот, 16 ГБ Сертификация

Устройство
1 порт, ХОСТ USB2.0
хранения USB Настоящим Digen Co., Ltd. заявляет, что радиоаппаратура модели [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] соответствует директиве
2014/53/EU.
Полный текст декларации соответствия ЕС доступен по следующему адресу: http://www.digen.co.kr
Формат FAT 16/32 Копия декларации соответствия на исходном языке приложена к оборудованию.
443
GETtheMANUALS.org
Прежде чем думать, что устройство неисправно

Текущее местоположение, показанное на странице навигации, может отличаться от фактического местоположения (место и
условия движения) в следующих случаях.
Следующие ситуации не являются неисправностью.
При движении по Y-образным дорогам с малыми углами текущее При движении в интенсивном потоке или на перекрестках, когда
местоположение может отображаться в другом направлении приходится часто трогаться и останавливаться
Маркер текущего местоположения может отображаться в При движении по скользкому покрытию, например, тяжелый песок,
противоположном направлении. снег и т. д.
В пределах городских улиц текущее местоположение может При движении с цепями на шинах.
отображаться на противоположной стороне или вне дороги Если шины недавно были заменены (особенно при использовании
запасных или нешипованных шин).
При изменении уровня увеличения с максимального на другой уровень
текущее местоположение может показываться на другой дороге При использовании шин неправильного размера.
Если давление в 4 шинах отличается.
При погрузке автомобиля на паром или автовоз в качестве текущего
местоположения может показываться последнее положение до погрузки. Если запасная шина изношена или используется (особенно
нешипованные шины, используемые второй сезон подряд).
При отсоединении клеммы аккумуляторной батареи.
Pусский
При движении вблизи высотных зданий

При движении по спиральным дорогам.
Если был установлен каркас для съёмной крыши.
При движении в горных районах с резкими поворотами или Если был рассчитан длинный путь при движении по скоростному шоссе.
внезапным торможением.
Если в этом случае вы продолжите движение, система автоматически
При выезде на дорогу после движения по подземной стоянке, сравнит карты или будет использовать обновленную информацию
автостоянке или дорогам с множеством поворотов. GPS для определения текущего местоположения. (В таких случаях
может потребоваться до нескольких минут)
444
GETtheMANUALS.org
Возможны неправильные маршрутные инструкции из-за условий поиска или участка движения.

В процессе движения по прямой дороге система может советовать Система может давать инструкции для движения в запрещенную зону
двигаться прямо. (закрытая зона, зона дорожного строительства и т.д.)
Навигационные инструкции могут не выдаваться даже после поворота Навигация может осуществляться к месту, которое не является
на перекрестке. фактическим местом назначения, если дороги к нему отсутствуют ии
Существуют определенные перекрестки, на которых инструкции могут слишком узкие.
не выдаваться. При отклонении автомобиля от назначенного маршрута возможны
Инструкции по развороту могут выдаваться на перекрестках, где неправильные голосовые инструкции (например, если на перекрестке
разворот запрещен. выполняется поворот, хотя навигатор говорит ехать прямо).
Эти ситуации могут возникнуть после расчета маршрута.

Pусский
При повороте на перекрестке могут выдаваться инструкции до точки, Система может давать инструкции для движения в запрещенную зону
отличающейся от текущей точки (закрытая зона, зона дорожного строительства и т.д.)
Навигация может осуществляться к месту, которое не является
При движении на высокой скорости перерасчет маршрута может фактическим местом назначения, если дороги к нему отсутствуют ии
занять больше времени. слишком узкие.
При отклонении автомобиля от назначенного маршрута возможны
Инструкции по развороту могут выдаваться на перекрестках, где неправильные голосовые инструкции (например, если на перекрестке
разворот запрещен. выполняется поворот, хотя навигатор говорит ехать прямо).
445
GETtheMANUALS.org
1. Ошибки, возникающие во время работы или установки устройства, могут приниматься за неисправности устройства.
2. Если у вас возникли проблемы с устройством, попробуйте выполнить приведенные ниже указания.
3. Если проблемы сохраняются, обратитесь к продавцу или в сервисный центр.
Проблема Способ устранения

Повернут ли ключ зажигания в положение “ACC” или “ON”?
Звук или изображение отсутствуют.
Возможно, соединительный кабель подключен ненадежно
На экране есть изображение, но звук не Возможно, установлен низкий уровень громкости
работает. Возможно, соединительный кабель между АМР и динамиком подключен ненадежно Возможно, звук был отключен
Я включил питание, но углы экрана При использовании в течение длительного времени ЖК-экраны могут становиться темными, и это не является неисправностью.
выглядят темными. Если дисплей очень темный, свяжитесь с продавцом или сервисным центром.
Проверьте соединительный кабель динамиков.

Звук идет только из одного динамика.
Возможно, регуляторы громкости/балансировки настроены только для одной стороны
Pусский
Я подключил внешнее устройство, но

Все ли штекеры аудиосистемы полностью вставлены в разъем AUX?
оно работает неправильно.
446
GETtheMANUALS.org
Устранение неполадок
Проблема Возможная причина Способ устранения
Замените на подходящий предохранитель. Если предохранитель снова
Предохранитель отключен.
отключился, обратитесь к продавцу или в сервисный центр.
Питание не включается.
Устройство неправильно подключено. Проверьте, правильно ли подключено устройство.
Низкое качество цвета/ Уровни яркости, насыщенности, оттенка и Правильно настройте уровни яркости, насыщенности, оттенка и
оттенка изображения. контрастности установлены неправильно. контрастности в разделе настроек экрана.
Задан низкий уровень яркости. Отрегулируйте уровень яркости.
Изображение отсутствует.
Устройство неправильно подключено. Проверьте, правильно ли подключено устройство.
Задан низкий уровень громкости. Отрегулируйте уровень громкости
Звук не работает Устройство неправильно подключено. Проверьте, правильно ли подключено устройство.

В данный момент устройство выполняет перемотку Звук не будет работать, когда устройство выполняет перемотку вперед,
вперед, назад, сканирование или воспроизведение в
медленном режиме. назад, сканирование или воспроизведение в медленном режиме.
Используйте USB-ностель после форматирования в файловой системе FAT 12/16/32.
Поврежден USB-накопитель. Это устройство не распознает файлы в формате NTFS и exFAT.
Pусский
USB-носитель загрязнен. Очистите штекер USB-носителя и разъема от грязи.
Используется отдельно приобретенный USB-концентратор. Подключайте USB-устройство непосредственно к мультимедийному разъему автомобиля.
Подключайте USB-устройство непосредственно к мультимедийному

USB не работает. Используется удлинительный кабель USB
разъему автомобиля.
Используется USB-носитель в
Используйте стандартный USB-накопитель.
неметаллическом корпусе.
Используется память типа HDD, CF, SD. Используйте стандартный USB-накопитель.
Отсутствуют музыкальные файлы, которые Поддерживаются только форматы файлов MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC и
можно воспроизвести. WAV. Используйте только поддерживаемые форматы музыкальных файлов.
Информация - Е
сли эксплуатации устройства возникает ошибка, которую не удается исправлены с помощью указанных выше мер, выполните сброс системы.
- Одновременно нажмите клавиши HOME и SETUP. Питание устройства будет выключено, и система будет сброшена.
447
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Pусский
448
GETtheMANUALS.org
Araç Navigayon Sistemi KULLANIM KILAVUZU Y400 AVN
User Manual
Manuale dell'utente
Bedienungsanleitung
Manual del usuario
Kullanım Kılavuzu
Türkçe
Lütfen sisteminizi çalıştırmadan önce bu kılavuzu dikkatli bir şekilde okuyun ve ileride başvurmak üzere saklayın.
Tasarım ve teknik özellikler önceden haber verilmeksizin değiştirilebilir.
Araç Navigasyon sistemi hakkında daha detaylı bilgi için lütfen Ssangyong Motor internet sitesini ziyaret edin.
- AVN kullanım kılavuzunu indirmek için web adresi : http://www.smotor.com
449
GETtheMANUALS.org
İçindekiler
Temel
Önlemler 451 Bluetooth Cihazlarını Eşleştirme 473
Temel Ürün Bilgisi 452 Bluetooth Cihazlarının Bağlantısını Kesme ve Silme 475
Temel Ürün Özellikleri 453 Bluetooth Çağrı Ekranı 476
Bileşen Adları ve İşlevleri 454 Arama Yapma 477
Direksiyon Kumandası 456 Çağrı Yanıtlama 479
Bluetooth Ayarları 480
Temel Menülerin Kullanımı Bluetooth Müzik 484
Temel Kullanım 457 Müziğim Ekranı 485
Ana Ekran 459 AUX Modu 486
Yer imi 460 Ayarlar 487
iPod Modu 496
AV Modunun Kullanımı iPod Modunu Başlatma 497
Radyo Modu 461 Apple CarPlay 498
Ön Ayarların Kullanımı & Radyo Kaydetme 462 Apple CarPlay Modu 499
Ortam Modu 464 Android Auto Modunu Başlatma 501
e-Kılavuz 502
Türkçe
(1) USB Müzik Modu

USB Müzik Modu 465 Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde Uygulanan Kısıtlamalar 503
USB Müzik Ekranı 466 Arka Görüş Kamerası 504
(2) USB Video Modu AVM Modu - İsteğe Bağlı 505
USB Video Modunu Başlatma 467 AVM Ayarları 506
USB Video Ekranı 468 Ürün Özellikleri 507
(3) USB Görsel Modu
USB Görsel Modunu Başlatma 469
Ekler
USB Görsel Ekranı 470 Ürünün Arızalandığına Karar Vermeden Önce 508
Bluetooth Modu 471 Üründe bir Arıza Olduğuna Karar Vermeden Önce 510
Bluetooth Ana Menüsü 472 Sorun Giderme 511
450
GETtheMANUALS.org
Önlemler
Güvenlik Uyarıları Güvenlik İkazları

Çoklu ortam sisteminden yol yardımı alırken bile lütfen her zaman gerçek Sürüş esnasında trafik koşullarına dikkat ediniz.
trafik ve yol kurallarına uyunuz.
Bazı durumlarda, navigasyon sizi yasak bölgelerden geçmenize sebep
Yalnızca Navigasyonun yol yardımını izlemek, gerçek trafik ve yol kural- olacak şekilde yönlendirebilir.
larının ihlaline ve dolayısıyla trafik kazalarına neden olabilir.
Cihazın sürüş esnasında kullanılması, dikkatin çevreye yeterince veril-
Sürüş esnasında ekrana uzun süre bakmayınız. Ekrana uzun süre bak- memesi sebebiyle kazalara yol açabilir. Cihazı kullanmaya başlamadan
mak trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. önce aracınızı park edin. Bunun yanında, araç hareket halindeyken dokun-
Sürüş esnasında Çoklu Ortam Sistemini çalıştırmayın; POI girmek veya matik ekranda bazı işlevler çalışmayabilir. Dokunmatik ekran özelliği
yol araması yapmak gibi. Bu tür eylemler trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. sadece araç durduğunda çalışacaktır.
Cihazı kullanmaya başlamadan önce aracınızı park edin. Bu ürün sadece otomobillerde kullanılmak üzere tasarlanmıştır. Bu cihazı
otomobilden başka araçlara yüklemeyiniz.
Çoklu Ortam sistemini sökmeyin, takmayın ya da değiştirmeyin. Bu tür
eylemler trafik kazalarına, yangına veya elektrik çarpmalarına yol açabilir. Cihaz kurulumunun pozisyonunu değiştirmek isterseniz lütfen satın
aldığınız yerden veya hizmet bakım merkezinizden bilgi alınız. Cihazın
Cihaza su dökülmemesine ve içine yabancı madde kaçmamasına özellikle dikkat kurulumu veya sökülmesi için teknik uzmanlık gerekmektedir.
edin. Bu tür eylemler duman çıkmasına, yangına veya arızaya yol açabilir.
Cihazı temizlerken cihazın kapalı olduğundan emin olun ve kuru ve
Cihaza yabancı madde kaçması veya su dökülüp duman çıkması gibi pürüzsüz bir bez kullanın. Asla sert malzemeler, kimyasal bezler veya
anormal bir durumla karşılaşırsanız derhal cihazı kullanmayı bırakın ve çözücüler (alkol, benzen, tiner vb.) kullanmayın; bu tür maddeler cihaz
Türkçe
satın aldığınız yer veya yetki bakım merkezi ile iletişime geçiniz. paneline zarar verebileceği gibi renk/kalitenin bozulmasına da neden
Bu tür bir durumda cihazı kullanmaya devam etmek ürünün arızalanması- olabilir. Ürün arızalandığında, satın aldığınız yerden veya hizmet bakım
na neden olabilir. merkezinizden bilgi alınız.
Ekranda görüntü yoksa veya ses duyulmuyorsa cihazı kullanmaya devam et- Cihazı sert sarsıntılara veya darbelere maruz bırakmayın.
meyin. Bu işaretler ürünün arızalandığını gösterir. Bu durumda cihazı kullanmaya
devam etmek, trafik kazalarına (yangın, elektrik çarpmalarına) yol açabilir. Monitörün ön kısmına doğrudan basınç uygulamak LCD'nin ya da dokun-
matik ekranın zarar görmesine neden olabilir.
Ürünü kullanmak için aracınızı park yasağı olan bölgelere park etmeyin
veya buralarda durdurmayın. Bu tür eylemler trafik kazalarına yol açabilir. Kontak kapalıyken cihazı uzun süre kullanmak, ekranda akü boşalıyor
uyarısının görülmesine neden olur. Sistemi kontak açıkken kullanın.
451
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Dolby
iPod, Apple Inc.'in tescilli ticari markasıdır. Dolby Laboratories lisansıyla üretilmiştir.
Dolby ve çift-D sembolü Dolby Laboratories'in tescilli markalarıdır.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay, Apple Inc.'in tescilli ticari markasıdır. TomTom
Bluetooth © 1992-2017 TomTom. Her hakkı saklıdır.TomTom ve "iki el" logosu TomTom N.V.'nin veya
Bluetooth marka işareti ve logoları, Bluetooth SIG, Inc. şirketine ait tescilli bağlı kuruluşlarından birinin ticari markaları ya da tescilli ticari markalarıdır.
ticari markalardır ve bu işaretlerin kullanımı lisansa tabidir. © 1992-2017 TomTom. Her hakkı saklıdır. Bu materyal TomTom veya tedarikçilerinin mülki-
Bluetooth kablosuz (wireless) teknolojisini kullanmak için Bluetooth özellikli bir yeti olup, söz konusu şirketlerin telif hakkı koruması ve/veya veritabanı hakkı koruması ve/
cep telefonu gerekir. veya diğer fikri mülkiyet haklarının konusunu teşkil eder. Bu materyalin kullanımı, lisans
anlaşmasının hükümlerine tabidir. Bu materyalin izinsiz çoğaltılması veya açıklanması
DivX
cezai ve hukuki sorumluluklara yol açabilir.
DivX sertifikalı bir ürün olarak bu cihaz, yüksek kaliteli HD DivX videolarını
oynatabilir. (.avi ve .divX dahil)
DivX, DivX Certified ve ilişkili logolar, DivX ve LLC'nin tescilli markalarıdır ve
kullanımları lisansa tabidir.
Bunlar, aşağıdaki ABD patentlerinden en az biriyle korunmaktadır: : 7,295,673;
7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274
SD Hafıza Kartlarının Kullanımı

1. Bu cihazdaki SD Kart yuvası map dosyaları içindir.
2. Map dosyası, bu cihaz için SD karta kaydedilmiştir.
SD karttaki dosyalara eklemeyin, dosyaları silmeyin veya biçimlendirmeyin. SD kartı sadece haritayı yeni sürümüne güncelleyeceğinizde çıkarın/takın.
Türkçe
3. Lütfen sadece bayiden verilen SD kartı kullanın. Map dosyasını sahip olduğunuz başka bir SD karta yüklemeyin veya kopyalamayın.
Bu tür bir işlem arızaya veya hatalı çalışmaya neden olabilir.
4. Sistem çalışırken SD kartların çıkarılması ve takılması, SD kart veya Sistem hatalarına yol açabilir.
SD kartı çıkarmak veya takmak için önce aracın kontağını kapatın.
5. SD kartın kısa süre için ardı ardına sökülüp takılması cihaza zarar verebilir.
6. SD Kart sadece Map veri dosyasını içerecek şekilde biçimlendirilmiştir.
SD karta başka dosyaların kaydedilmesi sistem hatalarına veya arızalara neden olabilir.
Haritanın Sürümünün Yükseltilmesi & AVN Yazılımının İndirilmesi

1. SD kartınızı bilgisayarınıza bağlayın.
2. Sürüm yükseltme sayfasına gidin (URL).
452
GETtheMANUALS.org
Temel Ürün Özellikleri
Özellik Açıklama Özellik Açıklama

Apple CarPlay ile telefon görüşmesi yapabilir, kısa
Geniş LCD Ekran Apple CarPlay mesaj gönderip alabilir, haritayı kullanabilir, müzik
Ekran 9.2-inç geniş ekran ve ekstra dokunmatik ekran kolaylığı ile dinleyebilir ve Siri özelliklerini kullanabilirsiniz.
aynı anda yüksek kalite video ve müzik oynatır.
Android Auto ile Google harita, telefon, ses tanıma ve
Android Auto müzik özelliklerini kullanabilirsiniz.
Dijital Radyo Alıcısı Özelliği
Dijital Radyo; her bir FM1, FM2, AM ve DAB modu için ayrı
ayrı 12 yayın istasyonu kaydetme özelliğini destekler.
Radyo Bluetooth Bağlantı Özelliği
Sürüş esnasında sürücülerin kablosuz görüşme yapmalarını
RDS Hizmetleri Bluetooth ve aynı zamanda Ses Yayını ile müziğin keyfini çıkarmalarını
RDS Hizmetleri arasından AF, REG, TA/TP, PTY sağlayan Ahizesiz özelliğini sunar.
özelliklerini sağlar.
Otomatik Ortam Arama Özelliği

USB ve SD karta kaydedilmiş video, ses ve fotoğraf içeren Dijital Ekran Kontrolü Özellikleri
USB Ortamı ortam dosyalarını otomatik olarak tanımlar ve kolaylık İzleme rahatığı için ekran parlaklığının dokunmatik ekran
Türkçe
sağlamak için listeler halinde görüntüler. üzerinden kolay kontrolü.
Diğer Arka Görüş Kamerası

Geri vitese takınca, HD kamera ile arkanızı görmenizi sağlar.
TomTom Haritası kullanır
Navigasyon Yüksek duyarlılıklı anten ile GPS engine ve doğru bir harita
kullanılarak hatasız yol yardımı alınabilir. Çevre Görüş Monitörü - İsteğe bağlı
Araca yerleştirilen dört kamera ile ön, arka, sağ ve sol
tarafları görmenizi sağlar.
453
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bileşen Adları ve İşlevleri
Önden Görünüm
Düğme Açıklama
1 AÇMA-KAPAMA/SES
1. Gücü açık/kapalı konuma getirmek veya ses düzeyini kontrol etmek için
kullanılır.
2. Gücü kapatmak için basılı tutun (en az 1,5 saniye).
3. AV sistemini açık/kapalı konuma getirmek için kısa süre basın.
4. Ses seviyesini kontrol etmek için sağa/sola çevirin. (ses kontrol aralığı 0~45)
2 Ana
1. Ana ekrana gider (PIP, Resim içinde Resim)
1
2 3 4 5 2. Yer imi moduna geçmek için basılı tutun (en az 1,5 saniye).
3 MOD
1. Ana mod ekranına gider.
2. Navigasyon modunda, Navigasyon modundan önceki son
kullanılan AV modunu çalıştırmak için basılı tutun (en az 1,5
saniye).
Türkçe
4 NAVI
1. Navigasyon moduna geçer ve AV sisteminin Açık/Kapalı old-
uğuna bakılmaksızın mevcut konumu gösterir.
2. Varış noktanızı arayabileceğiniz ekrana gitmek için basılı tutun
(en az 1,5 saniye).
5 AYARLAR
Herhangi bir moddayken, Ayarlar ekranını görüntülemek için
düğmeye basılı tutun.
Radyo/Ses/Video/Navigasyon/Bluetooth Telefon modunda, ilgili
ayarlar ekranını görüntülemek için bir kere basın.
454
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arkadan Görünüm AVN 42P Konnektörü
AVN
A4 RR+ B4 ST REMO
1) Radyo Anten Girişi A7 ALT B7 NC AUX CVBS IN
- Radyo anten kablosunu takmak için A8 ILL+ B8 AUX R IN
2) GPS Anten Girişi A10 RL- B10 MIC+
- GPS anten kablosunu takmak için
Türkçe
A11 FL- B11 ACC
A12 FR- B12 BATT+
3) Arka görüş kamerası konnektörü A13 RR- B13 NC MM CAN L
- Bir arka görüş kamerası konnektörü bağlamak için A14 NC B / V VGND B14 CLUSTER CAN L
4) USB Portu A16 DOOR UNLOCK B16 SPEED
- USB işlevine yönelik bir USB konnektör bağlamak için A17 ILL- B17 ST GND
5) I/O Konnektörü (42 pin) B19 NC AUX VGND
B20 E-CALL MUTE
6) DAB Konnektörü B21 AUX L IN
B22 MIC-
- DAB anten kablosu bağlamak için B23 MIC GND
B24 PGND
455
GETtheMANUALS.org
Düğme Açıklama
1 Bluetooth Ahizesiz arama sırasında, aramayı sonlandırmak için düğmeye basılı tutun.
Görüşmede olmadığınız zaman, Sesi açmak/kapatmak için bir kere basın.
6
2 Herhangi bir moddayken
- Düğmeye her basıldığında mod Radyo→Ortam→Bluetooth
2 3 Müzik→iPod→Müziğim sırasıyla değişir. (Ortam cihazı bağlı değilse, ilgili
4 modlar devredışı olacaktır)
Radyo modundayken
5 1 - Radyo modunu FM1→FM2→AM→DAB sırasıyla değiştirmek için basılı tutun.
Ortam modundayken
- Modu USB Müzik→USB Video→USB Görsel sırasıyla değiştirmek için basılı
tutun.
3
Ses düzeyini ayarlar.
4 Oynatma sırasında
- önceki/sonraki dosyaya geçmek için yukarı/aşağı düğmesine basın.
Türkçe
Radyo modundayken
- önceki/sonraki ön ayarlı kanala geçmek için yukarı/aşağı düğmes-
ine basın.
- önceki/sonraki yayın frekansına geçmek için yukarı/aşağı düğmes-
ine basılı tutun.
5
Bluetooth ahizesiz modunu çalıştırır.
Apple CarPlay modundayken

6 -Siri'yi çalıştırır.
Android Auto modundayken
-Google Voice sistemini çalıştırır.
456
GETtheMANUALS.org
Temel Kullanım
Sistemi Başlatma Sistemi Kapatma
1. Sistem çalışırken, gücü kapatmak (OFF) için

1. Motor start düğmesine basın veya kontak 2. Sistem tekrar açıldığında, yükleme işlemi POWER/VOL düğmesine basılı tutun (en az 1,5
anahtarını ON veya ACC konumuna getirin. başlayacak ve logo ekranı görüntülenecektir. saniye). Sistem kapatıldığında, son kullanılan
mod kaydedilir.
Türkçe
3. Güvenlik uyarı sayfası görüntülenir ve kul- 4. En son kullanılan modu görüntülemek için [Ka- 2. Güç kapalıyken güncel saat gösterilir.
lanıcı içeri etkinleştirilir. bul Et] düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan mod Radyo
FM1'dir)
Bilgi Bilgi
En son kullanılan modu açmak için [Kabul Et] düğmesine basmadan [Oto Kaybol] kutusunu işaretleyin. - Kontak tekrar açıldığında, sistem en son kul-
lanılan modu otomatik olarak açacaktır.
- 3 dakikadan uzun süre kontak kapalı konumda
ve sürücü kapısı açık bırakılırsa sistem otomatik
olarak kapanacaktır.
457
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistemi Sıfırlama Ses Kapalı Ses Açık
1. MODE ve SETUP düğmesine aynı anda 1. AV açıkken, AV'yi kapatmak için PWR/VOL 1. AV kapalıyken, AV'yi açmak için PWR/VOL
basın. düğmesine kısa bir süre basın (en çok 1,5 düğmesine kısa bir süre basın (en çok 1,5
saniye). saniye).
Türkçe
2. Sistem kapanacak ve yeniden başlaya- 2. Ses kapatıldığında, en son kullanılan navi- 2. Ses açıldığında, navigasyon ekranı açık
caktır. gasyon modu ekranı görüntülenir. kalmaya devam ederken, en son kullanılan
Ses çalmaya başlayacaktır.
Bilgi
-Sistemi sıfırlama işlemi, mevcut tüm ayarları ve
kurulumları fabrika ayarlarına geri döndürecektir.
Bu işlem cihazın kararlılığını sağlamak için olup,
bir sistem hatası değildir.
458
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ana Ekran
Ana Ekran
1 Navigasyon haritasının ve yol ekranının özet görünümünü sunar. /
1
Navigasyon ekranının tam ekran görünümüne geçmek için ekran-
6
da herhangi bir alana dokunun.
2 O sırada oynatılan radyo ortamı ile ilgili özet bilgileri gösterir. / O

2 sırada oynatılan mod ekranına geçmek için ekrana dokunun.
3 Yer imi
Hızlı ve kolay erişim için Sık Kullanılanlar menüsü öğelerini ekleyin.
4 Mod
Sistem menüsündeki tüm öğeleri gösterir.
3 4 5
5 Varış Noktası
Varış noktanızı arayabileceğiniz ekrana geçer.
6 Ekran Kapalı
Ekranı kapatmak için basın. Ekranı tekrar açmak için ekranda
herhangi bir alana dokunun.
Türkçe
Bilgi
- Ana ekranı görüntülemek için [ANA] düğmesine basın.
- Yer imi ekranını görüntülemek için [ANA] düğmesine basılı tutun.
459
GETtheMANUALS.org
Yer imi
Yer İmini Başlatma Yer İmi Ekranı
4 2
1
1. Ana ekrandan [Yer İmi] öğesini 2. Yer İmleri Listesi ekranından
seçin. [Ekle] öğesini seçin.
1 Menü Listesi
Yer imi Menü Listesi
3. Menü öğelerine basılı tutun, 4. Yer imi Listesi 2 Onayla
Türkçe
ardından ilgili öğeyi eklemek/sil- Seçim yapıldıktan sonra değişiklikleri Yer imi menüsüne kaydeder ve
mek/taşımak için istediğiniz yere Ana ekranı geri yükler.
sürükleyip bırakın. Daha sonra Menü ekleme alanı
3
Onayla düğmesine basın.
Menü listesinin öğeleri ekleme alanına sürüklenip taşınarak Yer imi
menüleri olarak eklenir.
4 Sıfırla
Yer imi ayarlarını sıfırlar.
Bilgi Bilgi
Yer imi halihazırda eklenmiş ise, düzenle düğmesine basın. - Ana ekranı görüntülemek için [ANA] düğmesine basın.
- Yer imi ekranını görüntülemek için [ANA] düğmesine basılı tutun.
460
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radyo Modunu Başlatma
Radyo Modunu Başlatma Radyo Ekranı
1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
3
2
6 5
1. - Ana menü ekranını görüntülemek için 7

MOD düğmesine basın, ardından [Radyo]
öğesini seçin.
1 Mod Ekranı 7 Radyo Bandı Sekmesi
Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir. İstediğiniz sekmeyi seçerseniz, seçilen Radyo modu
başlatılacaktır.
2 Ön Ayar 8 Ana
Ön ayar listesini görüntüler. Ana ekrana gider.
* Çalmakta olan frekansı seçili ön ayar düğmesine
kaydetmek için ön ayar düğmesine basılı tutun. 9 Geri
* FM1/FM2/AM modları için 12 ön ayarlı frekans Önceki ekrana gider.
Türkçe
kaydedilebilir. 10 DAB
DAB modunu çalıştırır.
3 Frekans Bilgisi TA Açık / Kapalı
11
Çalmakta olan frekansı gösterir. Trafik Bilgilerini Açar/Kapatır. (ayrıntılar için “DAB” bölümüne bakınız.)
* Bu alan sağa sürüklendiğinde, mod FM1 → FM2 →
AM → FM1 sırasıyla değişir. 12 DLS Açık / Kapalı
DLS Metnini Açar/Kapatır. (ayrıntılar için “DAB” bölümüne bakınız.)
4 Gösterge 13 Frekans Tarama
REG/AF/TP/PTY/SCAN/AST/STEREO özelliklerin- Çekim gücü daha yüksek olan frekansların her
in Açık/Kapalı durumlarını gösterir. birini 5'er saniye çalar.
14 AST
5 Frekans Arama Yukarı Çekim gücü daha yüksek olan frekansları Ön ayar düğme-
Yukarı yönde arama yapmak için basın (FM:0. 1MHz, AM: 9KHz) lerine kaydeder.
6 Frekans Ayarlama Aşağı 15 Radyo Kaydetme

Aşağı yönde arama yapmak için basın (FM:0. 1MHz, AM: 9KHz) Çalmakta olan radyo yayınını kaydeder.
461
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ön Ayarların Kullanımı & Radyo Kaydetme
Otomatik Ön Ayar Kaydetme
(Otokaydet) Manuel Ön Ayar Kaydetme Radyo Kaydetme
1. Radyo ekranında [AST] simges- 1. Kaydetmek istediğiniz frekansı 1. Radyo ekranında simgesine 2. Size radyoyu kaydetmek isteyip
ine basın. seçin. basın. istemediğinizi soran ekranda [OK]'ye
basarak kaydetme işlemine başlayın.
2. Çekim gücü daha yüksek olan 2. Kaydetmek istediğiniz ön ayar 3. Durdur düğmesine basmak kaydetme işlemini durduracak ve ses do-
Türkçe
frekansları ön ayar düğmelerine düğmesine basılı tutun. Çalmak- syasını otomatik olarak Müziğim Radyo klasörüne kaydedecektir.
artan sıra ile kaydeder. ta olan frekans bir bip sesi ile
seçilen ön ayara kaydedilir.
Bilgi Bilgi
- Çekim gücü daha yüksek radyo frekansı sayısı 12'den az ise, önceden kaydedilm- - Kayıtlar 5 saniyeden uzun olmalıdır; bir kayıt işleminde en çok 60 dakika kaydedilebilir.
iş olan ön ayarlar kalan ön ayar kanallarına kaydedilecektir. - Kaydedilen radyo dosyalarına Müziğim'den ulaşılabilir.
- En fazla 100 dosya kaydedilebilir. Bellek kapasitesinin 100 dosyaya ulaşmadan dolması halinde,
- Otokaydet çalışırken AST düğmesine tekrar basarsanız işlev iptal edilir ve önceki
kayıt işlemi otomatik olarak durdurulur ve daha fazla kayıt yapılmasına izin verilmez.
frekans çalmaya başlar.
462
GETtheMANUALS.org
DAB
DAB Modunu Başlatma DAB Ekranı
1 8 Geri
9 10 11 12 13 Önceki ekrana gider.
7 8
9 FM/AM
FM/AM radyo modunu çalıştırır.
4
10 Hizmet Takibi Açık/Kapalı
SF(AF) ON / OFF
2 * SF(AF) : Bu özellik, çalmakta olan kanalın
5 3 6
çekim gücü zayıfladığında otomatik olarak yakın
1. DAB modunu etkinleştirmek için frekanslarda aynı kanalı aramaya başlayarak
Radyo ekranında DAB simges- kesintisiz çekim sağlar.
ine basın. TA (Trafik Bilgileri) Açık/Kapalı
11
Trafik Bilgilerini açar/kapatır.
* TA : Bu özellik gerçek zamanlı trafik bilgileri ve
anonslarını sunar.
12 DLS Metni (Dinamik Etiket Segment Metni) Açık/ Kapalı

1 Mod Ekranı DLS Metnini açar/kapatır.
Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir. * DLS Metni: Bu özellik, cihazda çalmakta
olan radyo istasyonunun yayınladığı metni
2 Ön Ayar görüntüler. Bilgi türleri; istasyon sloganları veya
Kullanıcı seçimi için kaydedilen istasyonu görüntüler. o sırada çalan şarkının adı ve sanatçısı gibi
* Çalmakta olan istasyonu seçili ön ayar düğmesine kaydetmek için ön ayar program bilgilerini içerir.
Türkçe
düğmesine basılı tutun.
* En fazla 12 istasyon kaydedilebilir. 13 Liste
3 İstasyon Bilgisi Otomatik güncellenen listeleri görüntüler.
Çalmakta olan istasyonu gösterir.
4 Gösterge
DAB/TP özelliklerinin açık/kapalı durumlarını gösterir.
5 Kanal Aşağı
Önceki istasyona geçer.
6 Kanal Yukarı
Sonraki istasyona geçer.
7 Ana
Ana ekrana gider.
463
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ortam Modu
USB Bellek Aygıtları Hakkında
1. Kontağı çalıştırdıktan sonra USB aygıtını bağlayın. USB aygıtı kontak açıldığında halihazırda bağlıysa aygıt zarar görebilir. USB aygıtları otomotiv elektronik
bileşenleri değildir.
2. Kontağı USB aygıtı bağlıyken açıp kapatmak USB'nin hatalı çalışmasına neden olabilir.
3. Harici USB aygıtlarını bağlarken/bağlantılarını keserken statik elektriğe çok dikkat ediniz.
4. Şifrelenmiş MP3 oynatıcılar harici aygıt olarak bağlandığında tanınmaz.
5. Harici bir USB aygıtı bağlarken, sistem bazı durumlarda USB aygıtını tanımayabilir.
6. Bu sistem, FAT16/32 dosyası olarak biçimlendirilmiş USB aygıtlarını tanır. NTFS veya exFAT türü dosya sistemleri USB ortamında desteklenmez.
7. Uyumluluk sorunları nedeniyle bazı USB aygıtları desteklenmeyebilir. Kullanmadan önce aygıtın normal bir şekilde çalışıp çalışmadığını kontrol edin.
8. USB aygıtın kısa süre için ardı ardına sökülüp takılması cihaza zarar verebilir.
9. USB aygıtının bağlantısı kesilirken anormal bir ses çıkabilir.
10. Ortam USB modda yürütülürken USB aygıtının sökülmesi arızaya veya aygıtın hatalı çalışmasına neden olabilir. USB aygıtının bağlantısını keserken önce
sistemi kapatın veya farklı bir moda geçin.
11. Harici bir USB aygıtını tanımak için gereken süre, USB'de saklanan dosyaların türüne, boyutuna veya dosya biçimlerine göre farklılık gösterebilir. Gerekli
süreye ilşkin tür farklılıklar herhangi bir arızaya işaret etmez.
12. USB aygıtlarının müzik veya görsel dosyaları yürütmek dışındaki amaçlar için kullanımına izin verilmez.
13. USB kablosunu pil veya ısı üreten USB aksesuarlarını şarj etmek için kullanmayın. Bu tür eylemler performans düşüklüğüne ya da sistem hasarına neden
olabilir.
14. Bu cihaz, ayrı satın alınmış USB hub'ları ve uzatma kabloları kullanıldığında USB aygıtını tanımayabilir. USB'yi doğrudan aracın çoklu ortam bağlantı
ucuna bağlayın.
15. USB yığın depolama aygıtları kullanılırken, kullanım kolaylığı için mantıksal sürücülerin ayrıldığı durumlar olabilir. Bu tür durumlarda, sadece kök dizinin
mantıksal sürücüsünde yer alan dosyalar yürütülecektir. USB'yi ayrı disk bölümleri (mantıksal sürücüler) ile kullanırken, yürütmek istediğiniz dosyaları kök
Türkçe
dizine kaydedin. Uygulama programları özel USB'lere yüklendiğinde, bu tür USB'lerde yer alan dosyalar yukarıda açıklanan sebeplerden dolayı düzgün bir
şekilde çalışmayabilir.
16. Bu cihaz, cihaza MP3 oynatıcılar, cep telefonları, dijital kameralar veya diğer elektronik cihazlar (USB cihazları taşınabilir disk sürücüleri olarak algılanmaz)
bağlıyken çalışmayabilir.
17. Bazı mobil cihazlar USB üzerinden şarj edilemeyebilir.
18. Normal çalışma garantisi sadece metal kapak tipli USB bellek aygıtları için verilir.
19. Bu cihaz, HDD Tip, CF veya SD Bellek gibi biçimler kullanıldığında düzgün çalışmayabilir.
20. SD Tipi USB bellekler ve CF Tipi USB bellekler de dahil olmak üzere, bir adaptör bağlanarak kullanılan USB bellekler düzgün bir şekilde tanınmayabilir.
464
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Müzik Modu
USB Müzik Modunu Başlatma Müzik dosyasını kaydetme
1. Ana menü ekranını görüntülemek için MOD düğme- 1. Kaydetmek istediğiniz dosyayı yürüttükten 2. Müzik Dosyasını Kaydet penceresinde
sine basın, ardından [Ortam] öğesini seçin. sonra, Müzik ekranında simgesine basın. [OK]'ye basın.
Türkçe
2. Varsayılan Ortam modu USB Müzik'tir. 3. Kaydettiğiniz dosyaları Müziğim'de göre-
Bilgi bilirsiniz.
USB aygıtında en azından bir adet müzik dosyası bulunmuy-
orsa, bu özellik çalışmayacaktır. (USB aygıtta ortam dosyası
yoksa bu özellik çalışmayacaktır)
- Ses Codec: MP3, OGG(Vorbis), AAC-LC, WMA9/10,
LPCM, FLAC
- Uzantı : MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
- Örnekleme Frekansı : 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
- Bit Hızı : 32Kbps~320Kbps
- Dikkat : Bu cihaz, 320Kbps bit hızı aralığını kullanan ses
dosyalarını destekler ve 192kbps bit hızı aralığındaki
dosyaların kullanımı önerilir. Sabit bit hızı olmayan Bilgi
dosyalar kullanılırken bazı özellikler (FF/REW [ileri-geri
sarma] özellikleri) düzgün çalışmayabilir. - 100 şarkıya kadar kayıt yapılabilir.
465
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Müzik Ekranı
USB Müzik Ekranı
6 Sonraki Dosya
1 Bir sonraki dosyayı yürütür.
9 10 11 * USB aygıttaki bir sonraki dosyayı hızlıca aramak için tuşa basılı tutun. Dosya adı
2 gösterilir. Tuşu bıraktığınızda dosya normal hızda yürütülmeye başlayacaktır.
7 Önceki Dosya
3 Bir önceki dosyayı yürütür.
12
* USB aygıttaki bir önceki dosyayı hızlıca aramak için tuşa basılı tutun. Dosya adı
5 gösterilir. Tuşu bıraktığınızda dosya normal hızda yürütülmeye başlayacaktır.
4 Duraklatma/Çalma
8
7 8 6 Mevcut dosyayı yürütür/duraklatır.
13 9 Yinele
Mevcut dosyayı veya USB aygıttaki tüm dosyaları tekrar çalar.
* Düğmeye her basıldığında, seçenek Dosyayı Yinele → Klasörü Yinele → Birini
Yinele şeklinde değişir.
14
10 Karıştır
Dosyaları rasgele bir sıra ile yürütür.
11 Müzik Dosyasını Kaydetme

1 Mod Ekranı Yürütülmekte olan dosyayı Müziğime kaydeder.
Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir.
Türkçe
12 Dosya Dizini
2 Ana Klasör Mevcut klasördeki yürütülen dosyayı/toplam dosyayı gösterir.
Ana Klasöre gider.
13 Çalma Süresi
3 Klasör Adı Mevcut çalma süresini/toplam çalma süresi gösterir.
Yürütülmekte olan klasörü gösterir. * İstediğiniz zamana gitmek için çubuğu sürükleyin ya da çubuk üzerinde gitmek
istediğiniz ana dokunun.
4 Müzik Listesi
Yürütülmekte olan klasörün müzik dosyası listesini gösterir. 14 USB Modu Sekmesi
* Çalmakta olan şarkının adı vurgulanır İstediğiniz sekmeyi seçerseniz, seçilen mod başlatılacaktır.
5 Şarkı Bilgisi
Yürütülmekte olan dosyanın klasör, sanatçı, ad, albüm, albüm kapağı bilgileri gösterilir.
466
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Video Modunu Başlatma
USB Video Modunu Başlatma
1. Ana menü ekranını görüntüle- 2 - 1. USB Müzik ekranı açıldığın- 2 - 2. Veya USB Video modunu 3. Video kontrol paneli açıldığında,
mek için MOD düğmesine basın, da, USB Video modunu başlatmak için USB Video Video tam ekranda oynatılacak-
ardından [Ortam] öğesini seçin. başlatmak için ekranı sağa sekmesine dokunun. tır.
sürükleyin.
Türkçe
Bilgi
USB aygıtında en azından bir adet video dosyası bulunmuyorsa, bu özellik çalışmayacaktır. (USB aygıtta ortam dosyası yoksa bu özellik çalışmayacaktır)
- Varsayılan Ortam modu USB Müzik'tir.
- Uzantılar : MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG, TS, WMV
- Resim Çözünürlüğü: D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
- Altyazılar : SMI (Video dosyasının adı altyazı dosyasının adından farklıysa altyazılar düzgün çalışmayabilir.)
- Dikkat : 2Mbps'den fazla bir hızı kullanan yüksek çözünürlüklü dosyalar düzgün çalışmayabilir.
467
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Video Ekranı
USB Video Ekranı
5 Sonraki Dosya
8 9 * Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve sonraki dosya adı görüntülenir.
2
6 Önceki Dosya
Bir önceki dosyayı yürütür.
3 * Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve önceki dosya adı görüntülenir.
10
4 Duraklatma/Çalma
7
Mevcut dosyayı yürütür/duraklatır.
6 7 5 8 Altyazı Boyutu
Altyazı büyüklüğünü değiştirir.
11 * Bu düğme sadece altyazı varken kullanılabilir.
9 Tam Ekran
Görüntüyü normal ekrandan tam ekrana değiştirir.
* Ekranda düğme olmayan bir alana dokunduğunuzda, ekran Tam Ekran moduna
12
geçecektir.
10 Dosya Dizini
Mevcut klasördeki yürütülen dosyayı/toplam dosyayı gösterir.
1 Mod Ekranı 11 Çalma Süresi
Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir. Mevcut çalma süresini/toplam çalma süresi gösterir.
Türkçe
* İstediğiniz zamana gitmek için çubuğu sürükleyin ya da çubuk üzerinde gitmek

2 Ana Klasör istediğiniz ana dokunun.
Ana Klasöre gider
3 Dosya/Klasör Adı 12 USB Modu Sekmesi

Yürütülmekte olan dosya ve klasörü gösterir. İstediğiniz sekmeyi seçerseniz, seçilen mod başlatılacaktır.
4 Video Listesi
Yürütülmekte olan klasörün video dosyası listesini gösterir.
* Çalmakta olan videonun adı vurgulanır
468
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Görsel Modunu Başlatma
USB Görsel Modunu Başlatma
1. Ana menü ekranını görüntüle- 2 - 1. USB Müzik ekranı açıldığın- 2 - 2. Veya USB Görsel modunu 3. Görsel kontrol paneli açıldığında,
mek için MOD düğmesine basın, da, USB Görsel modunu başlatmak için USB Görsel görsel tam ekranda oynatılacak-
ardından [Ortam] öğesini seçin. başlatmak için ekranı sağa sekmesine dokunun. tır.
sürükleyin. (Muzik → Video
→ Görsel)
Türkçe
Bilgi
USB aygıtında en azından bir adet görsel dosyası bulunmuyorsa, bu özellik çalışmayacaktır. (USB aygıtta ortam dosyası yoksa bu özellik çalışmayacaktır)
- Varsayılan Ortam modu USB Müzik'tir.
- Müzik modundan Görsel moda geçerken çalan Müzik parçası çalmaya devam edecektir.
- Video modundan Görsel moda geçerken çalan Müzik parçası çalmaya devam edecektir.
- Desteklenen Görsel biçimi : JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
469
GETtheMANUALS.org
USB Görsel Ekranı
USB Görsel Ekranı
4 Müzik Listesi
1
7 8 9 Yürütülmekte olan klasörün Görsel dosyası listesini gösterir.
* Çalmakta olan görselin adı vurgulanır
2
5 Sonraki Dosya
10
4 * Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve sonraki dosya adı görüntülenir.
6 Önceki Dosya
Bir sonraki dosyayı yürütür.
6 5 * Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve önceki dosya adı görüntülenir.
7 Slayt Gösterisi
USB aygıtındaki bütün görseller seçilen zaman aralığına göre sırasıyla gösterilir.
11 * Yakınlaştırma/uzaklaştırma özelliği desteklenmez.
* Slayt gösterisi sürüş sırasında kullanılamaz.
8 Döndür
Resimleri saat yönünde döndürür.
1 Mod Ekranı
Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir. 9 Görseli Kaydetme
Türkçe
Ekran kapatıldığında gösterilen resmi kaydeder.

2 Ana Klasör
Ana Klasöre gider 10 Dosya Dizini
3 Dosya/Klasör Adı Mevcut klasördeki yürütülen dosyayı/toplam dosyayı gösterir.
Görüntülenen resmin klasör, dosya adı, dosya tipi ve çözünürlüğünü gösterir.
11 USB Modu Sekmesi
İstediğiniz sekmeyi seçerseniz, seçilen mod başlatılacaktır.
470
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Modu
Bluetooth'u Kullanmadan Önce
1. Ana üniteyi cep telefonuna bağlamadan önce Bluetooh'u açın ve cep telefonunun gizli olma durumunu devredışı bırakın.
2. En çok beş Bluetooth aygıtı eşleştirilebilir.
3. Her seferinde tek bir Bluetooth aygıtı bağlanabilir.
4. Ahizesiz sesi için min. ses düzeyi 6, maks. ses düzeyi ise 40'dır.
Bluetooth Modunu Başlatma
Türkçe
1. Ana menü ekranını görüntüle- 2. Bluetooth bağlantı uyarısı 3-1. Bluetooth bağlantı ekranını 3.-2. [Hayır] seçilirse, Bluetooth
mek için MOD düğmesine basın, görüntülenir. (Hiçbir telefon görüntülemek için [Evet]'e Telefon ekranı (tuş takımı)
ardından [Bluetooth] öğesini eşleştirilmediğinde) basın. açılacaktır. İsterseniz
seçin. [Bağlan]'a basarak bu ekran
üzerinden bir cihaz da
eşleştirebilirsiniz.
Bilgi
- Daha fazla cihaz eklemek için daha önce eklenmiş olanlardan birini silmelisiniz.
471
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Ana Menüsü
Bluetooth Ana Menüsü
7 1 Mod Ekranı
1
2
2 Arama Geçmişi
En son yapılan/gelen/cevapsız arama geçmişini gösterir.
3
8
3 Kişiler
4
Kişiler listesi ekranını gösterir.
* Kişileri görebilmeniz için indirmiş olmanız gerekmektedir.
5
4 Tuş Takımı
6 Arama tuşları ekranını gösterir.
5 Bağlan
Bluetooth bağlantı ekranını görüntüler.
6 Bluetooth Ayarları
Bluetooth Ayarları ekranını görüntüler.
Durum Simgeleri
Türkçe
7
Telefon durumunu ekranın üst sağ kısmında gösterir.
8 Telefon Adı
Bağlı olan cihazın adını gösterir.
472
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Cihazlarını Eşleştirme
Arabadan Arama Otomatik Bağlantı
- Araba kontağı açıldığında (ACC
ON), Bluetooth aygıtı önceden
ayarlanmış seçeneğe göre otoma-
tik olarak bağlanacaktır.
- Kullanıcının seçtiği telefon ile
bağlantı kurulamadığında ise
sistem otomatik olarak en son
eşleştirilmiş telefona bağlanmaya
1. [Arabadan Ara]'ya basın. 2. Cihazları arayın. (Cep tele- 3. Bağlantı kurulacak cihazın adını çalışacaktır. En son eşleştirilen
fonunun gizli olma durumunu seçin. telefon ile bağlantı kurulam-
devredışı bırakın.) adığında ise sistem otomatik
olarak eşleştirilmiş tüm telefonlara
sırayla bağlanmaya çalışacaktır.
(Bütün denemeler başarısız olur-
sa, Otomatik Bağlantı denemesi
sonlandırılacaktır.)
4. Şifreyi doğrulayın ve Bluetooth 5. Bluetooth bağlantı ekranı açılır. 6. Bluetooth bağlantısı başarılı bir
Türkçe
cihazınızdan eşleştirme işlemine şekilde yapıldığında, bağlanan
devam edin. cep telefonunun adı görüntülenir.
Bilgi
- Maks. arama süresi: 15 saniye, maks. aranılan cihaz : 20 cihaz
- Şifre rasgele oluşturulur.
- Cihaz bulunamazsa, lütfen aşağıdakini kontrol edin.
* Bluetooth cihazınızın Bluetooth özelliği açık mı?
* Bluetooth gizli duruma mı ayarlı?
- Arama ve bağlantı çalışmamaya devam ederse, lütfen Bluetooth cihazınızı yeniden başlatın ve tekrar deneyin.
- Cihaz daha önce eşleştirildiyse, bağlamak istediğiniz cihazı listeden seçin.
473
GETtheMANUALS.org
Cihazdan Ara
1. [Cihazdan Ara]'ya basın. 2. Araba adını arayın ve cihazı 3. Bluetooth bağlantı ekranı açılır. 4. Bluetooth bağlantısı başarılı bir
eşleştirin. Şifreyi doğrulayın şekilde yapıldığında, bağlanan
ve Bluetooth cihazınızdan cep telefonunun adı görüntülenir.
eşleştirme işlemine devam edin.
Türkçe
Bilgi
- Şifre rasgele oluşturulur.
- Cihaz bulunamazsa, lütfen aşağıdakini kontrol edin.
* Bluetooth cihazınızın Bluetooth özelliği açık mı?
* Bluetooth gizli duruma mı ayarlı?
- Arama ve bağlantı çalışmamaya devam ederse, lütfen Bluetooth cihazınızı yeniden başlatın ve tekrar deneyin.
474
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Cihazlarının Bağlantısını Kesme ve Silme
Cihazın Bağlantısını Kesme Cihazı Silme
1. Bluetooth Telefon bağlantı 2. Bağlantısı kesilecek cihazın 1. Bluetooth Telefon bağlantı 2. Silinecek cihazın adının olduğu
ekranında [Bağlan]'a basın. adını seçin. ekranında [Bağlan]'a basın. kutuyu işaretleyin.
3. Bağlantıyı kesmek için [OK]'ye 3. Etkin hale gelen çöp kutusu simgesini seçerek Cihazı Sil ekranında
Türkçe
basın. seçtiğiniz cihazı silin.
Bilgi
- Bağlıyken bir cihazı silemezsiniz. (Sadece bağlantısı kesilmiş cihazlar silinebilir.)
475
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Çağrı Ekranı
Bluetooth Çağrı Ekranı
1 Telefon Adı ve Kişi Adı/Numarası
Bir görüşme sırasında bağlı olan cihazın adını ve karşı tarafın adını/nu-
3 4 5
marasını görüntüler.
2 Arama Süresi
Arama süresini gösterir.
1 2
3 Ahizesiz Arama / Özel Arama
Mevcut görüşmenin durumunu gösterir (Ahizesizden Bluetooth cep tele-
fonuna geçmek için basın).
4 MIC Sesi
7
6 Görüşme sırasında giden ses düzeyini ayarlar. Karşı tarafın duyduğu ses
düzeyini ayarlar (Seviye 1~5). (Bu özellik sadece Ahizesiz bir görüşmede
kullanılabilir)
5 Sesi Aç/Kapat
Mic Açar/Kapatır. (Bu özellik sadece Ahizesiz bir görüşmede kullanılabilir)
6 Gönder / Ara / Sonlandır

Numarayı arar / Aramayı sonlandırır.
Türkçe
7 Tuş Takımı
Numaraları girmek/silmek için kullanılır.
476
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arama Yapma
Arama Yapma Kişileri İndirme
1. Numarayı girin. 2. Arama düğmesine basın. 1. Kişiler menüsünü seçin. [Kişileri 2. Lütfen telefonunuzu kontrol ederek
İndir]'e basın. indirme talebini kabul edin. (Telefonlar
için ek bilgi gereklidir.)
3. Bir görüşme sırasında arama 3. [OK]'ye basın. 4. Kişiler indirildi. (İptal edildiğinde
Türkçe
zamanını gösterir. bir önceki durumunu muhafaza
eder)
Bilgi
- İndirme işlemi ile birlikte telefonlar için ekstra bilgi gereklidir. (Mobil cihazınızdan
ayrıca ayarlanabilir)
- Bu özellik bazı kişi türleri için desteklenmeyebilir (Google, T Kişileri vb.).
- İndirme işlemi devam ederken farklı bir moda geçseniz de indirme devam edece-
ktir.
- En çok 1.000 kişi indirilebilir.
- Kişiler sadece telefondan indirilebilir. Silme veya ekleme desteklenmez.
- Kişiler indirilirken, son 150 arama geçmişi de indirilir. (En çok 50'şer yapılan, gelen
ve cevapsız arama geçmişi listesi kaydedilir)
477
GETtheMANUALS.org
Kişilerden Arama Yapma
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında 2. Liste ekranından arama yapmak 3. Kişileri bulmak için büyüteç
[Kişiler]'e basın. için arama düğmesine basın. simgesine basın.
4. Bir isim veya telefon numarası girin ve [Ara]'ya basın. 5. Liste ekranından arama yapmak 6. Bluetooth görüşmesi başlaya-
Türkçe
için arama düğmesine basın. caktır.
478
GETtheMANUALS.org
Çağrı Yanıtlama
Çağrı Yanıtlama
1. Gelen bir arama olduğunda, gelen arama 2. Diğer tarafın bilgileri ve arama süresini 3. Görüşme sona erdikten sonra önceki
açılır penceresinde karşı tarafın bilgilerini gösterir. moda döner.
görüntüler. Bir aramayı yanıtlamak için
[Ahizesiz] veya [Özel]'e basın. ([Reddet]'e
basarak çağrıyı sonlandırabilir ve önceki
moda dönebilirsiniz.)
Türkçe
Bilgi
- Gelen arama penceresi açıldığında, AV modu işlevlerinin büyük kısmı çalışmayacaktır. Görüşme sona erdikten sonra önceki ortam yürütülecektir.
- Ancak USB Görsel Slayt Gösterisi sona erecektir.
- Ahizesiz ses düzeyi, AV modu ses düzeyinden ayrı ayarlanabilir.
479
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Ayarları
Bluetooth'u Açma/Kapama
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında [Bluetooth 2. [Bluetooth'u Kullan]'a basın. 3. Bluetooth Otomatik Bağlantı işlevinin
Ayarları]'na basın. kullanım durumunu ayarlar, (Varsayılan
Bilgi durum : Kullan)
- [Kullanma] seçeneğine basarsanız, [Bluetooth'u Kullan] ve [Sıfırla] dışındaki özellikleri birçoğu devredışı bırakılacaktır.
Cihaz Adını Değiştirme

Türkçe
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında [Bluetooth 2. [Cihaz Adını Değiştir]'e basın. 3. İsmi girin ve [Bitti]'ye basın. (Varsayılan
Ayarları]'na basın. cihaz adı SSANGYONG AVN'dir)
480
GETtheMANUALS.org
Otomatik Bağlantı Ayarları
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında [Bluetooth 2. [Oto Bağlan]'a basın.

Ayarları]'na basın.
Rehber Ayarları
Türkçe
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında [Bluetooth 2. [Kişiler]'e basın. 3. Bluetooth bağlantısı yapıldığında Kişilerin
Ayarları]'na basın. otomatik indirilme durumunu ayarlar, (Var-
sayılan durum : [Kullanma].)
481
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arama Geçmişini Silme
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında 2. [Arama Geçmişini Silme]'ye basın. 3. [OK]'ye basın. 4. Arama geçmişi silinir.
[Bluetooth Ayarları]'na basın.
Bluetooth'u Sıfırlama
Türkçe
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında 2. [Sıfırla]'ya basın. 3. Sıfırlama bildirim penceresi

[Bluetooth Ayarları]'na basın. açıldığında [OK]'ye basın.
482
GETtheMANUALS.org
Zil Sesi Ayarları
1. Bluetooth Telefon ekranında [Bluetooth 2. [Zil Sesi]'ne basın. 3. İstediğiniz çalma tonunu seçin.
Ayarları]'na basın.
Türkçe
Bilgi
- Bir çalma tonunu seçtiğinizde, bir kerelik kısaca çalacaktır.
483
GETtheMANUALS.org
Bluetooth Müzik
Bluetooth Müziği Kullanmadan Önce Bluetooth Müzik Ekranı
1. Bluetooth Müzik Modu sadece bir Bluetooth telefon bağlandığında kullanıla-
bilir. 1
6
2. Bluetooth bağlandıktan sonra Bluetooth Müzik Moduna girdiğinizde otomatik
olarak müzik çalmaya başlar.
- Oto Çalma çalışmıyorsa, oynat düğmesine tekrar basın.
2
- Bağlı cihazda kullanılan müzik çalar programa bağlı olarak, müzik otomatik
olarak çalmaya başlamayabilir.
3 4 5
1 Mod Ekranı
Türkçe
2 Şarkı Bilgisi
Şarkı, sanatçı, albüm bilgilerini gösterir.
3 Önceki Dosya
4 Duraklatma/Çalma
5 Sonraki Dosya
6 Bluetooth Telefon
Bluetooth Telefon modunu başlatır.
484
GETtheMANUALS.org
Müziğim
Müziğim Nedir? Müziğim Ekranı
- Müziğim, USB bellek sürücüler- 7 Sonraki Dosya
1
indeki müzik dosyalarının veya 9 10 11
radyo kayıt dosyalarının araç * Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve
sonraki dosya adı görüntülenir.
içinde çalınmak üzere bir sisteme
kaydedildiği özelliğin adıdır. 2 8 Albüm Kapağı
8 Albüm kapağını görüntüler.
- Sistemde en azından bir adet 4
müzik dosyası bulunmuyorsa, bu 9 Yinele
5 6 7 Mevcut dosyayı veya Müziğimdeki tüm dosy-
özellik çalışmayacaktır. aları tekrar çalar.
3 12 * Düğmeye her basıldığında, seçenek Dosyayı
Yinele → Klasörü Yinele → Birini Yinele şeklinde
değişir.
Müziğimi Başlatma
10 Karıştır
Dosyaları rasgele bir sıra ile yürütür.
11 Dosya Silme
1 Mod Ekranı Çalınan dosyayı siler.
2 Radyo Kayıt Klasörü 12 Çalma Süresi

Mevcut çalma süresini/toplam çalma süresi
Müziğime kaydedilen radyo kayıt dosyalarını gösterir.
gösterir.
Türkçe
3 Müzik Listesi * İstediğiniz zamana gitmek için çubuğu sürükleyin ya
1. Ana Menü ekranında [Müziğim]'e Yürütülmekte olan klasörün müzik listesini gösterir. da çubuk üzerinde gitmek istediğiniz ana dokunun.
* Çalmakta olan şarkının adı vurgulanır
basın.
4 Dosya Bilgisi
Yürütülmekte olan dosya ile ilgili bilgileri gösterir.
*şarkı, sanatçı ve albüm.
5 Önceki Dosya
* Düğmeye basıldığında, mevcut dosya yürütülür ve sonraki dosya adı
görüntülenir.
6 Duraklatma/Çalma
485
GETtheMANUALS.org
AUX Modu
AUX Modunu Başlatma AUX Modu Ekranı
1 1 Mod Ekranı
2 3
2 Ana Ekran
Ana ekrana gider (PIP).
3 Geri
Önceki ekrana gider.
1. Ana Menü ekranında [AUX]'a
basın.
2. - AUX bağlantı ucuna harici bir

Türkçe
cihaz konnektörü bağlandığında,

AUX modu çalışmaya başlaya-
caktır.
Dikkat!
- Harici bir cihaz bağlarken 3 kutuplu bir AUX kablosu kullanmanız önerilir.
- Diğer ucunda bağlı harici bir cihaz olmadan sisteme bir AUX konnektör bağlandığında, sistem AUX moduna otomatik olarak geçecektir fakat dışarıya sadece gürültü sesi
verir. AUX modu kullanılmadığı zaman kablo konnektörünün bağlantısını kestiğinizden emin olunuz.
- Harici cihaz güç kablosuna bağlandığında, bu cihazın yürütülürken bir ses çıkmasına neden olabilir. Bu tür durumlarda, kullanımdan önce güç bağlantısını kesin.
486
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ayarlar
Radyo Ayarları Ekranını Navigasyon Ayarları Ekranını
Görüntüleme
RDS Ayarları Görüntüleme Navigasyon Ayarları
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden 1. [RDS]'ye basarak, RDS özelliğinin 1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden 1. Navigasyon ayarları ekranın-
SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun. kullanım durumunu ayarlayın. Ayarları SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun. da, sistem çalıştırıldığında
ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ üst Navigasyonun otomatik olarak
taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın.
başlatılma durumunu ayarlar.
(Varsayılan durum : AF)
Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek
PTY Arama Ayarları için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan
durum : Oto Başlat)
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Radyo]'ya 2. Ayarlar ekranında [Navigasyon]'a
Türkçe
basın. basın.
1. [PTY Arama]'ya basın ve iste-

diğiniz seçenekleri işaretleyin.
Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek
için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan
durum : Yok)
487
GETtheMANUALS.org
Saat Ayarları Ekranını
Zaman Ayarları
Görüntüleme
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden SETUP 1. Zamanı ayarlamak için [Zaman]'a basın. Ayarları
düğmesine basılı tutun. ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan durum : 2015-
01-01, saat sistemde gösterildiği gibidir)
Saat Ayarları
Türkçe
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Saat]'e basın.
1. Saat türünü belirlemek için [Saat]'e basın.

Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ
üst taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın.
(Varsayılan durum: Analog, 12 saat)
488
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ses Ayarları Ekranını Görüntüleme Balans/Fader Ayarları EQ Ayarları
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden SETUP düğmes- 1. B

alans/Fader ayarları ekranında, istediğiniz ses konumunu ayarlamak 1. EQ ayarları ekranında, Bas/Orta/Tiz seviyelerini
için yukarı/aşağı/sağ/sol düğmelerine basın veya ekranda sesin gelmesini
ine basılı tutun. istediğiniz yere dokunun. Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ üst taraftaki ayarlamak için +/- düğmesine basın. Ayarları ilk
sıfırla düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan durum : Fader 00, Balans 00) durumuna getirmek için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan durum : Tiz 00,
Bilgi
Orta 00, Bas 00)
- Fader/Balans hoparlörlerin konuma göre şiddetini belirle-
mek için kullanılır.
Ses Ayarları Diğer Ayarlar
Türkçe
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Ses]'e basın.
1. Ses ayarları ekranında, Navigasyon önceliğini belirlemek 1. Bip ve AVC ayarlarını belirlemek için [Diğer]'e
için [Navigasyon]'a basın. Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek basın. Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ üst
için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın. (Var-
taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan
sayılan durum: Navigasyon Önceliği)
durum: Bip - Açık, AVC - Kapalı)
Bilgi
Bilgi
-N avigasyon Önceliği: Navigasyon Yardımı yapılırken ön
koltuğa gelen ses kısılır. - Bip : düğmeye her basıldığında ses verir.
- Ses Önceliği : Navigasyon sesi, sabit bir ses düzeyinde tutulur. - AVC(Oto Ses Kontrolü) : AVC açıkken ses düzeyi aracın
- Aynı Oran : Yol yardımı sesini, ses düzeyi kontrolü üzerinden hızına göre otomatik olarak kontrol edilir.
ayarlamak mümkündür.
489
GETtheMANUALS.org
Yer İmi Ayarları Ekranını
Yer İmi Ekleme
Görüntüleme
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden 1. Soldaki listeden eklemek iste- 2. Ardından ilgili öğeyi sağ tarafta 3. Menü öğeleri eklenir. Ayarları ilk
SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun. diğiniz menü öğelerine basılı yerleştirmek istediğiniz yere durumuna getirmek için sağ üst
tutun. sürükleyip bırakın. taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine
basın. (Varsayılan durum : Yok)
Yer İmini Silme
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Yer İmi]'ne

Türkçe
basın.
1. Silmek istediğiniz menü öğesine 2. Ardından ilgili öğeyi sol tarafa 3. Menü öğeleri silinir. Ayarları ilk
basılı tutun. sürükleyip bırakın. durumuna getirmek için sağ üst
taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine
basın. (Varsayılan durum : Yok)
490
GETtheMANUALS.org
Yer İmi Sırasını Değiştirme
1. Taşımak istediğiniz menü öğesine basılı 2. Ardından ilgili öğeyi istediğiniz yere sürük- 3. Menü öğeleri taşınır. Ayarları ilk durumuna
tutun. leyip bırakın. getirmek için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın. (Varsayılan durum : Yok)
Türkçe
491
GETtheMANUALS.org
Dil Ayarları Ekranını Görüntüleme Dil Ayarları
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden SETUP 1. Dil ayarları ekranında, istediğiniz dili seçin
düğmesine basılı tutun. ve sağ üst taraftaki Onayla simgesine
basın. Sistem otomatik olarak yeniden
başlatılacak ve sistem dili değiştirilecektir.
Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için sağ
üst taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine basın.
(Varsayılan dil : İngilizce)
Türkçe
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Dil]'e basın.
492
GETtheMANUALS.org
Radyo Ayarları Ekranını
Görüntüleme
Aydınlatma Ayarları
1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden 1. Aydınlatma ayarları ekranında, ekran 2. Otomatik Aydınlatma 3. Gündüz Modu
SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun. parlaklığını ayarlamak için +/- düğme- - Ekran parlaklığını parlak ayarda, harita - Ekran parlaklığını parlak ayarda,
sine basın. (Varsayılan durum : Oto renklerini de Gündüz modunda tutar.
Aydınlatma) harita renklerini de Gündüz
modunda tutar.
2. Ayarlar ekranında [Ekran]'a
Türkçe
4. Gece Modu 5. Navigasyon Senkronizasyonu
basın. - Ekran parlaklığını kısık ayarda, - Navigasyon harita ekranı
harita renklerini de Gece modun- görüntüsü, Aydınlatma Ayarına
da tutar. göre Gündüz veya Gece moduna
ayarlanır.
yarları ilk durumuna getirmek

A
için sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla
düğmesine basın.
493
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sistem Ayarları Ekranını
Oran Ayarları Ekranı Kapatma Ayarları Diğer Ayarlar Görüntüleme
1. Video görüntü oranını ayarlamak 1. Ekranı kapatmak için [Ekran 1. Bu özellik, boş ekran, görsel, 1. Sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden
için [Oran]'a basın. Ayarları ilk Kapalı]'ya basın. Ayarları ilk saat ve park yardımı ayarlarını SETUP düğmesine basılı tutun.
durumuna getirmek için sağ üst durumuna getirmek için sağ belirlemek için kullanılır.
taraftaki sıfırla düğmesine üst taraftaki sıfırla düğmes-
basın. (Varsayılan ayar: Tam ine basın. (Varsayılan durum :
Ekran) Kapalı)
2. Ayarları ilk durumuna getirmek için 2. Ayarlar ekranında [Sistem]'e

Türkçe
sağ üst taraftaki sıfırla düğme- basın.

sine basın. (Varsayılan durum:
Saat ve Park Yardımını göster)
Bilgi Bilgi
- Bu özellik, cihazı sadece ses din- -D
iğer ayarlarda güç kapalıyken
lemek için kullanırken çok yardımcı görüntünün nasıl olacağını belirleyebil-
olabilir. irsiniz.
- Ekran kapalıyken ses dosyası çalma- -G
örsel özelliği, kullanıcı sisteme görsel
ya devam eder. kaydettiği zaman kullanılabilir hale gelir.
-Ekranı tekrar açmak için ekranda -K
ullanıcı tarafından seçilen görseli
herhangi bir yere dokunun. gösterir.
494
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sürüm Sıfırla Güncelle Dikkat!
- Sistemi sıfırladıktan sonra kullanıcı
tarafından üretilmiş sistem verileri ve
kullanıcının belirlediği ayarlar fabrika çıkış
durumuna getirilir.
Özellik Mod Varsayılan Ayar
Radyo FM1 89.1 MHz
Karıştır Kapalı
Müzik
1. Sistem ayarları ekranında [Sıfırla]'ya Yinele Tümü
1. Sistem bilgilerini görüntülemek için 1. Sistem ayarları ekranında [Güncel-
basın.
[Sürüm]'e basın. Bu özellik açılış yük- le]'ye basın. Altyazı
Küçük
Boyutu
leyici, işletim sistemi, uygulama, aygıt Video
Ortam
yazılımı ve diğer sistem bilgilerini Ekran
Tam Ekran
görüntülemek için kullanılır. Boyutu
Slayt
Kapalı
Gösterisi
Görsel
Döndür Varsayılan
Cihazın bağlantısını
Bluetooth Ahizesiz keser ve eşleştirilmiş tüm
cihazları siler
2. [Tamam]'a basın.
2. Sistemi güncellemek için [Tamam]'a Ses Navigasyon Önceliği
basın.
Ayarlar Navigasyon Oto Başlat
Türkçe
Yer imi Öğeleri siler
3. Sıfırlama işlemi, Müziğimde kayıtlı olan

dosyaların da silineceğine ilişkin onay
alındıktan sonra devam edecektir.
Bilgi Bilgi
-Sistemi sıfırlama işlemi, mevcut tüm ayar- - Dosyaları güncellerken USB bellek
ları ve kurulumları fabrika ayarlarına geri gereklidir.
döndürecektir.
- Kullanıcı, Müziğimde kayıtlı olan dosyaları
silmemeyi de seçebilir.
495
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Modu
iPod'u Kullanmadan Önce iPod Ekranı
Apple tarafından sağlanan orijinal iPod kablolarının kullanımı önerilir. 1
9 10
2
iPod kullanılırken Apple CarPlay kullanılamaz.
8
ir iPhone üzerinden iPod modu kullanırken, iPhone ayarlarından
B
CarPlay Kullan ayarı devre dışı bırakılmalıdır. 4
3
5 6 7
11
1 Mod Ekranı 7 Sonraki Dosya

Kullanılmakta olan modu gösterir. Bir sonraki dosyayı yürütür.
2 Kategori *b
asılı tutulduğunda işlem, iPod cihazı işlemini takip eder.
Albüm Kapağı
Türkçe
Mevcut kategoriyi gösterir. 8

Kategori Listesi Albüm kapağını görüntüler.
3
Tüm kategori listelerini görüntüler. 9 Yinele
* Kategori listesi iPod cihazının tipine Mevcut dosyayı veya Müziğimdeki tüm dosy-
göre farklılık gösterebilir. aları tekrar çalar.
4 Dosya Bilgisi * Düğmeye her basıldığında, seçenek Yineleme Kapalı
→ Birini Yinele → Tümünü Yinele şeklinde değişir.
Yürütülmekte olan dosya ile ilgili
bilgileri gösterir. 10 Karıştır
*şarkı, sanatçı, albüm ve toplam dosya. Dosyaları rasgele bir sıra ile yürütür.
5 Önceki Dosya 11 Çalma Süresi
Bir önceki dosyayı yürütür. Mevcut çalma süresini/toplam çalma sür-
* basılı tutulduğunda işlem, iPod cihazı esi gösterir.
işlemini takip eder. * İstediğiniz zamana gitmek için çubuğu sürük-
leyin ya da çubuk üzerinde gitmek istediğiniz
6 Duraklatma/Çalma ana dokunun. (Bu özellikler cihaza bağlı
Mevcut dosyayı yürütür/duraklatır. olarak desteklenmeyebilir.)
496
GETtheMANUALS.org
iPod Modunu Başlatma
iPod'u Otomatik Başlatma iPod'u Manüel Başlatma
1. iPod cihazını USB bağlantı ucuna bağlam- 1. Sistem üzerindeki fiziksel düğmelerden, 2. Ekranın alt kısmından üst kısmına kay-
ak için bir iPod kablosu kullanın. MOD düğmesine basın. dırın veya ekranın sol tarafındaki sayfa
görüntüleme alanına dokunun.
Türkçe
2. iPod bağlandığında, iPod otomatik olarak 3. iPod modunu etkinleştirmek için [iPod]'a 4. Şarkı bilgileri görüntülenir ve şarkı otoma-
çalışmaya başlayacaktır. basın. tik olarak çalmaya başlar.
Bilgi
iPod halihazırda bağlıysa ve iPod'u farklı bir moddan çaıştırmak isterseniz "iPod'u Manuel Başlatma"
bölümüne bakınız.
497
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay nedir? Apple CarPlay Ekranı
1. iPhone cihazınızı sisteme bağladığınızda, Telefon, Navigasyon,
2
Mesajlar, Müzik ve Siri gibi çeşitli özellikleri kolayca kullanabilirsin-
iz.
2. Kullanılabilir işlev ve işlemler iPhone modeline göre farklılık göster-
ebilir.
3. Apple CarPlay ülkenizde veya bölgenizde kullanılmıyor olabilir.
carplay)
Apple CarPlay'i Kullanmadan Önce 3
1. Cep telefonunuzu bağlamadan önce Ayarlar → Genel → Kısıt-

lamalar'a bakarak Apple CarPlay'in kullanıma açık olup olmadığını
kontrol edin.
2. Cep telefonunuzu bağlamadan önce Ayarlar → Genel → Siri'ye 1
bakarak Siri'nin kullanıma açık olup olmadığını kontrol edin.
3. Apple CarPlay iPhone 5 ve üstü modeller ile çalışır.
4. Apple CarPlay iOS 7.1 işletim sistemi ile çalışabilmektedir fakat en
son sürümün kullanılması tavsiye edilir. 1 Ana
5. Arabada aynı anda iPod ve Apple CarPlay kullanılamaz. Apple CarPlay ana ekranına gider
6. Apple tarafından sağlanan orijinal iPhone kablolarının kullanımı
Türkçe
önerilir. 2 Ana Ekran

7. Apple CarPlay'e bağlanıp girdikten sonra, bir önceki modun sesi Apple CarPlay ana ekranı
çalmaya devam eder. Sadece ekran değişir.
8. Apple CarPlay ve Bluetooth Ses aynı anda kullanılamaz. 3 Şimdi Yürütülüyor
9. Apple CarPlay'in özelliklerinin birçoğu veri kullanımını gerektirir. Yürütlmekte olan ses kaynağına gider.
Apple CarPlay'i kullanmadan önce telefonunuzun veri planının açık
olduğundan emin olun.
10. Apple CarPlay bağlandığında, Siri tabanlı ses tanıma özelliği aktif
hale gelir. Aracın ses tanıma özelliği ise çalışmayacaktır.
11. Daha fazla bilgi için Apple internet sitesini ziyaret ediniz (http: //
www. apple. com/kr/ios/carplay/)
498
GETtheMANUALS.org
Apple CarPlay Modu
Siri'nin kullanımı Apple CarPlay Modunu Başlatma
1. Siri'yi çalıştırmak için direksiyondaki ses 2. Veya Apple CarPlay ana ekranında ana 1. Bir USB kablo kullanarak iPhone tele-
kontrol düğmesine basın. tuş simgesine basılı tutarak Siri'yi başlat- fonunuzu arabanıza bağlayın.
abilirsiniz.
Türkçe
3. Veya iPhone'nunuzun ana tuşuna basılı 2. [Apple CarPlay]'e basın.
tutarak Siri'yi başlatabilirsiniz.
Bilgi
- Bluetooth bağlıysa, Apple CarPlay'i bağlamanız
ile birlikte Bluetooth bağlantısı kesilecektir.
499
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto
Android Auto'yu Kullanmadan Önce Android Auto Ekranı
1. Android 5.0 Lollipop veya üstü Android telefonunuza Android Auto
6
uygulamasını indirin. 7
2. Orijinal Android telefon kablolarının kullanımı önerilir.
3. Android Auto bağlantısı yapıldığında, Bluetooth da otomatik olarak
bağlanacaktır.
- Maksimum kayıtlı cihaz sayısı aşıldığında, yakın zamanda
bağlantı kurulmayan bir cihaz silinir.
4. Bluetooth Müzik bağlı değildir.
5. CarLink, iPod, Apple CarPlay ve Android Auto aynı anda kul-
lanılamaz.
6. Android Auto ülkenizde veya bölgenizde kullanılmıyor olabilir. Lüt-
fen internet sitesine bakınız: (http://www.android.com/auto/#what-
you-need)
7. Android Auto'ya bağlanıp girdikten sonra, bir önceki modun sesi
çalmaya devam eder. Sadece ekran değişir. 1 2 3 4 5
8. Android Auto'nun özelliklerinin birçoğu veri kullanımını gerektirir.
Android Auto'yu kullanmadan önce telefonunuzun veri planının açık
olduğundan emin olun.
9. Android Auto ile ilgili ayrıntılı bilgi için Google destek sitesine 1 Harita 5 Sisteme dönüş
bakınız : (http://support.google.com/androidauto) Harita (navigasyon) özelliğini başlatır. Sistemin Ana Menü ekranına gider.
Türkçe
2 Telefon
Telefon özelliğini başlatır. 6 Ses Tanıma
3 Ana Ekran Ses tanıma özelliğini başlatır.
Ana ekrana geçer. 7 Ana Ekran
4 Müzik Android Auto'nun ana ekranı.
Müzik özelliğini başlatır. * Müzik ve hava durumu widget'ını
görüntüler.
500
GETtheMANUALS.org
Android Auto Modunu Başlatma
İlk adımlar
1. Bir USB kablo kullanarak Android tele- 2. Ana Menü ekranı otomatik olarak 3. Moda girmek için [Android Auto]'ya basın.
fonunuzu arabanıza bağlayın. görüntülenir ve Android Auto düğmesi
etkin hale gelir. (Android Auto halihazırda
bağlıysa, sistemin fiziksel düğmelerinden
[MODE] düğmesine basarak Ana Menü
ekranına gidebilirsiniz.)
Türkçe
* Android Auto bağlantısı yapıldığında, Blue-
tooth da otomatik olarak bağlanacaktır.
Bilgi
* Android Auto bağlantısı yapıldığında, Bluetooth da otomatik olarak bağlanacaktır.
* Bluetooth Müzik bağlı değildir.
* iPod, Apple CarPlay ve Android Auto aynı anda kullanılamaz.
* Orijinal kablo kullanımı önerilir.
501
GETtheMANUALS.org
e-Kılavuz
e-Kılavuz nedir?
u özellik, sistemin temel özelliklerini kullanım yöntemlerini kolay-

B
lıkla öğrenebilmenizi sağlar.
Bu e-kılavuz ürünün gerçek özelliklerinden farklı olabilir.
1. Sol taraftaki menülerden istediğinizi seçin. Ayrıntılı kullanım yöntemleri

için / düğmelerini kullanarak sayfalar arasında gezebilirsiniz.
Türkçe
502
GETtheMANUALS.org
Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde Uygulanan Kısıtlamalar
Güvenlik Önlemleri için Özellikler Üzerinde Uy-
gulanan Kısıtlamalar
G
üvenliğiniz için araç hareket halindeyken video ve diğer bazı özellikler
devredışı bırakılacaktır.
- Video sürüş esnasında kullanılamaz. Video kapalıyken ses çalar etkilen-
mez.
- Slayt gösterisi sürüş sırasında kullanılamaz.
El freni çekildiği zaman kısıtlama ekranı kaybolacaktır.
Türkçe
503
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arka Görüş Kamerası
Bu sistem güvenliğiniz için daha geniş bir görüş alanı sağlamak amacıyla bir arka görüş kamerasıyla donatılmıştır.
Arka kamera, vites kolu R konumuna geldiğinde, o sıradaki modunuz ne olursa olsun otomatik olarak devreye girecektir.
Vites başka bir konuma getirildiğinde, arka kamera otomatik olarak çalışmayı durduracaktır.
Arka kamera çalışırken, ses düzeyi ve sessiz özellikleri kullanılabilir.
Türkçe
1. Kontak anahtarını ON veya ACC konumuna getirin.

2. Vitesi R konumuna alın.
Dikkat!
- Arka görüş kamera ekranı gerçek mesafeden farklı görünebilir. Güvenliğiniz için dikkatli kullanın ve arkanızı ve sağ/solunuzu kendiniz kontrol edin.
- Arka görüş kamerası kullanılıyorken, yalnızca ses düzeyi ve gelen arama özellikleri desteklenir.
504
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Modu - İsteğe Bağlı
Bu cihaz aynı zamanda arttırılmış güvenlik önlemleri için Çevre Görüş Monitörü (AVM) sistemini destekler.
AVM isteğe bağlı bir özelliktir.
AVM düğmesine basmak veya vitesi R konumuna getirmek, kullandığınız mevcut moddan bağımsız olarak ekranı AVM moduna geçirir.
AVM düğmesine tekrar basmak veya vitesi R konumundan çıkararak başka konuma getirmek AVM modunu otomatik olarak kapatacak ve ekranı
önceki moduna geri döndürecektir.
AVM çalışırken, ses düzeyi ve sessiz özellikleri kullanılabilir.
2B ve 3B görüntüleme modları arasında değişim yapmak için AVM Ayarları içinde Görünüm Modu özelliklerini kullanın.
2B Görünüm 3B Görünüm
Türkçe
Dikkat!
- AVM ekranı, gerçek mesafeden farklı görünebilir. Güvenliğiniz için dikkatli kullanın ve arkanızı ve sağ/solunuzu kendiniz kontrol edin.
- AVM kullanılıyorken, yalnızca ses düzeyi ve gelen arama özellikleri desteklenir.
505
GETtheMANUALS.org
AVM Ayarları
PGS Kılavuz Çizgileri Senkronizasyonu PAS Yakınlık Uyarısı Görünüm Modu
1. PGS kılavuz çizgilerinin kullanım durumunu 1. PAS Yakınlık Uyarısı kullanım durumunu 1. Görünüm modunu ayarlar. (Varsayılan du-
belirler. (Varsayılan durum : Açık) belirler. (Varsayılan durum : Açık) rum : 2D Görünüm)
Türkçe
506
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ürün Özellikleri
Adı Araba TFT LCD Ekran AVN ÜNİTESİ Desteklenen MP4, MOV, 3GP, AVI, ASF, MKV, FLV, MPG, MPEG,
Formatlar TS, WMV
Güç Kaynağı DC 14.4V Video MPEG2, MPEG4, Xvid, H.264, MJPEG, VC-1, VP8,
Codec
WMV7/8
Çalışma Gücü DC 9V ~ DC 16V Altyazı Desteği/
SMI / D1 720X480(729X590), HD 1280X720P(1289X729)
Çözünürlük
Çalışma Akımı 2A Desteklenen MP3, M4A, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC, WAV
Formatlar
Genel Ses
Uyku Akımı 3mA (Sadece Ana Ünite) Bit Rate 32Kbps ~ 320 Kbps
Örnekleme 32KHz, 44.1KHz, 48KHz
Çalışma Sıcaklığı -30℃ ~ +75℃ Frekansı
Görsel Dosya Biçimi JPEG, JPG, BMP, PNG, GIF
Saklama Sıcaklığı -40℃ ~ +85℃
Uyumluluk BLUTOOTH V4.1
Boyutlar 278.4 (En) x 175.5 (Boy) x 191.5 (Derinlik) Frekans Bant
2402 ~ 2480MHz
Genişliği
Ağırlık 2.5 Kg Desteklenen A2DP, AVCP, HFP, PBAP
Bluetooth Profiller
Ekran Boyutu 203.90 mm (G) x 114.70 (Y) mm (Aktif alan)
İletim Çıkışı 3.0 dBm
Çözünürlük 921,600 pixel
Ekran
Çalışma Metodu Modülasyon Tipi FHSS(GFSK)
Türkçe
TFT, Düzlem İçi Anahtarlama (IPS), aktif matris
Arka Aydınlatma LED Kanal 79
Frekans Aralığı FM : 87.5 ~ 108.0 MHz (Adım: 100 kHz)

AM : 531 ~ 1602 kHz (Adım: 9 kHz)
Radyo
Hassasiyet FM: 10dBuV, AM: 40dBuV EMF
Serti-
SD 1 yuva, 16GB fikasyon
Depolama USB 1 port , USB2.0 HOST
Cihazı Digen Co., Ltd. işbu radyo teçhizat tipinin [AVN DGU-9745-Y400A] 2014/53/EU Direktifi ile uyumluluğunu beyan eder.
AB uygunluk beyanının tam metnine aşağıdaki adresten ulaşabilirsiniz: http://www.digen.co.kr
Format FAT 16/32 DoC belgesinin orijinal dildeki kopyası cihazda mevcuttur.
507
GETtheMANUALS.org
Ürünün Arızalandığına Karar Vermeden Önce
Navigasyonda gösterilen geçerli konum, aşağıdaki durumlarda gerçek konumdan (sürüş yeri ve koşulları) farklı olabilir.
Aşağıdaki olaylar arıza teşkil etmez.

Dar açılı Y-biçimli yollarda sürerken geçerli konum farklı bir yönde Sık sık dur-kalk'ların yapıldığı yoğun trafikte veya kavşaklarda sürerken
görüntülenebilir
Yoğun kum, kar vb. gibi kaygan koşullarda sürerken
Geçerli konum işareti zıt yönde görüntülenebilir. Zincirli lastiklerle sürerken.
Şehir sokaklarında, geçerli konum zıt yönde veya yolunda dışında Lastikler yeni değiştirildiğinde (Özellikle yedek veya dişsiz lastik kul-
görüntülenebilir. lanımında).
Yaklaştırma seviyesi, en yakın görüntüde giderken başka bir seviyeye Uygun olmayan büyüklükte lastik kullanıldığında.
ayarlandığında, geçerli konum farklı bir yol üzerinde görüntülenebilir 4 lastiğin basınçları birbirinden farklı olduğunda.
Araç feribota veya araba nakliye aracına bindirilmişse, geçerli konum Yedek lastik aşınmış veya kullanılmış ise (Özellikle ikinci sezonu bitirmiş
bindirilmeden önceki son konumda kalabilir. dişsiz lastikler).
Akü kutup başı sökülürken. Yüksek binaların yanından geçerken

Tavan bagajı varsa.
Türkçe
Sprial şeklindeki yollarda sürerken.

Otobanda sürüş halindeyken uzun mesafeli bir güzergah hesaplandığında.
Keskin virajlı ve ani fren gerektiren dağ yollarında sürerken.
Bu gibi durumlarda, sürüşe devam etmek, otomatik olarak sistemin harita
Kapalı otoparklardan veya çok dönüşlü yollardan çıkıp bir yola girerken. eşleştirme yapmasını veya güncel GPS bilgilerini kullanmasını sağlayacak ve
geçerli konum görüntülenecektir. (Bu tür durumlarda birkaç dakika gerekli olabilir)
508
GETtheMANUALS.org
Arama koşulları veya sürüş lokasyonundan dolayı yol yardımında hatalar olabilir.

Düz bir yolda giderken düz gitmeniz söylenebilir. Taşıt trafiğine kapalı bir yola girmenizi söyleyen yol yardımı (Araç trafiğine
kapalı yol, inşaat halindeki yol vb.)
Bir kavşaktan dönmüş olmanıza rağmen yol yardımı verilmeyebilir.
Gerçek varış noktasına giden yol yok veya çok dar ise gerçek varış nok-
Yol yardımının yapılmayabileceği belirli kavşaklar vardır. tası olmayan bir konuma yönlendirme yapılabilir.
U dönüşünün yasak olduğu bazı kavşaklarda u-dönüşü yapmak üzere Araç belirlenen rotadan ayrılırsa yanlış bir sesli yardım yapılabilir. (örn.
yönlendirilebilirsiniz. navigasyonun düz gitmenizi söylediği bir kavşakta sağa/sola dönerseniz.)
Bu durumlar, güzergah hesaplamanın ardından gerçekleşebilir.

Bir kavşaktan dönerken geçerli konumdan başka bir konuma yönlendirme Taşıt trafiğine kapalı bir yola girmenizi söyleyen yol yardımı (Araç trafiğine
yapılabilir. kapalı yol, inşaat halindeki yol vb.)
Türkçe
Yüksek hızda sürerken, güzergahın tekrar hesaplanması normalden uzun Gerçek varış noktasına giden yol yok veya çok dar ise gerçek varış nok-
sürebilir. tası olmayan bir konuma yönlendirme yapılabilir.
U dönüşünün yasak olduğu bazı kavşaklarda u-dönüşü yapmak üzere Araç belirlenen rotadan ayrılırsa yanlış bir sesli yardım yapılabilir. (örn.
yönlendirilebilirsiniz. navigasyonun düz gitmenizi söylediği bir kavşakta sağa/sola dönerseniz.)
509
GETtheMANUALS.org
Üründe bir Arıza Olduğuna Karar Vermeden Önce
Üründe bir Arıza Olduğuna Karar Vermeden Önce
1. Cihazın kullanımı veya kurulumu esnasında oluşan hatalar, gerçek cihazın arızalanması ile karıştırılabilir.
2. Cihazla sorun yaşıyorsanız, aşağıdaki önerileri deneyiniz.
3. Sorun devam ederse, bayiniz veya hizmet merkeziniz ile irtibata geçiniz.
Sorun Önlem
Aracın kontak anahtarı "ACC" veya "ON" konumunda mı?
Ses veya görüntü çalışmıyor.
Bağlantı kablosu oynak veya sökülmüş mü?
Ses düzeyi düşük seviyeye mi ayarlanmış?
Ekran çalışıyor fakat ses duyulmuyor.
AMP veya hoparlör bağlantı kablosu oynak veya sökülmüş mü? Ses kısık mı?
Sistemi açtım fakat ekranın köşeleri LCD panelleri uzun süre kullanıldığında karanlık görünebilir; bu bir arıza değildir.
karanlık görünüyor. Ekran çok karanlık ise bayiniz veya hizmet merkeziniz ile irtibata geçiniz.
Hoparlörün bağlantı kablosunu kontrol edin.
Ses tek bir taraftan geliyor.
Fader veya Balans ses kontrolleri tek bir tarafa ayarlanmış olabilir mi?
Harici bir cihaz bağladım ama düzgün
Ses konnektör kabloları AUX bağlantı ucuna tam olarak takılmış mı?
çalışmıyor.
Türkçe
510
GETtheMANUALS.org
Sorun Giderme
Sorun Olası Neden Önlem
Uygun bir sigorta ile değiştirin. Sigorta tekrar atarsa lütfen satın aldığınız yer
Sigorta atmış.
veya hizmet merkeziniz ile irtibata geçiniz.
Sistem gücü açılmıyor.
Cihaz düzgün bir şekilde bağlanmamış. Cihazın düzgün bağlandığından emin olmak için kontrol edin.
Görsel rengi/ton kalitesi Parlaklık, doygunluk, ton ve kontrast seviye- Parlaklık, doygunluk, ton ve kontrast seviyelerini Ekran Ayarlarından doğru bir
düşük. leri doğru şekilde ayarlanmamış. şekilde ayarlayın.
Parlaklık seviyesi düşük seviyeye ayarlanmış. Parlaklık seviyesini ayarlayın.
Görsel çalışmıyor.
Cihaz düzgün bir şekilde bağlanmamış. Cihazın düzgün bağlandığından emin olmak için kontrol edin.
Ses düzeyi düşük seviyeye ayarlanmış Ses düzeyini ayarlayın
Ses çalışmıyor Cihaz düzgün bir şekilde bağlanmamış. Cihazın düzgün bağlandığından emin olmak için kontrol edin.
Cihaz şu anda ileri-geri sarma, tarama veya Cihaz ileri-geri sarma, tarama veya yavaş modda çalma işlemleri yaparken
yavaş modda çalma işlemleri yapıyor. ses çalışmaz.
Lütfen USB'yi FAT 12/16/32 formatında biçimlendirdikten sonra kullanın. Bu cihaz NTFS
USB bellek hasarlı. ve exFAT formatındaki dosya biçimlerini tanımaz.
USB belleğin ve çoklu ortam bağlantı ucunun temas yüzeyindeki yabancı maddeleri
USB bellek kirlenmiş. temizleyin.
Türkçe
Ayrı satın alınmış USB hub kullanılıyor. USB'yi doğrudan aracın çoklu ortam bağlantı ucuna bağlayın.
USB çalışmıyor. USB uzatma kablosu kullanılıyor USB'yi doğrudan aracın çoklu ortam bağlantı ucuna bağlayın.
Metal Kapaklı USB Bellek dışında başka bir

Standart USB Bellek kullanın.
USB kullanılıyor.
HDD tipi, CF, SD Bellek kullanılıyor. Standart USB Bellek kullanın.
Sadece MP3, MP4, APE, OGG, WMA, FLAC ve WAV dosya biçimleri destekle-
Çalınabilecek müzik dosyası yok.
nir. Sadece desteklenen müzik dosyası biçimlerini kullanın.
Bilgi - Cihazı kullanırken, yukarıdaki önlemler ile düzeltilemeyen bir anormallik oluşursa sistemi sıfırlayın.
- HOME ve SETUP düğmelerine aynı anda basın. Cihaz kapanacak ve sistem sıfırlanacaktır.
511
GETtheMANUALS.org
MEMO
Türkçe
512
GETtheMANUALS.org

2017 Ssang Yong Rexton Y400 Om

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

2017 Ssang Yong Rexton Y400 Om

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2017 Ssang Yong Rexton Y400 Om

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Descriptions Capacity Specifications

D22DTR ≒ 10.2ℓ Ssangyong genuine coolant

6A/T ≒ 9.6ℓ Ssangyong genuine oil (NWS-9638)

Axle Oil Rigid ≒ 2.0ℓ

Brake / Clutch Fluid As required Ssangyong genuine oil (DOT4)

Ssangyong genuine oil (S-PSF3)

D22DTR: Diesel 2.2, G20GDi: Gasoline 2.0

0 General Information 2 Safety Unit 3 S

Front View Top View

Rear View Side View

1,640 (1,620) 895 2,865 1,090

0-2 General Information

Descriptions D22DTR G20GDi

Engine A/T 133.1 kw / 4,000 rpm 165 kw / 5,500 rpm

A/T 420 Nm / 1,600 ~ 2,600 rpm

General Information 0-3

Descriptions D22DTR G20GDi

Manual 3rd 1.350 ←

0-4 General Information

Descriptions D22DTR G20GDi

General Information 0-5

Descriptions D22DTR G20GDi

Refrigerant Type A R-1234yf / 520 ± 30g (R-1234yf / 800 ± 30g) -

0-6 General Information

1. Engine Number 3. Chassis Number

Gasoline Engine: The engine

Diesel Engine: The engine number is

General Information 0-7

1. Headlamp (HBA, DRL, HID)..................................4-43, 7-34 8. Windshield wiper............................................................ 7-29

0-8 General Information

1. Antenna..........................................................................4-85 8. Rear lamp....................................................................... 7-33

General Information 0-9

1. ESP OFF switch.............................................................3-45 8. Around view activation switch........................................3-67

0-10 General Information

General Information 0-11

1. Wiper and washer switch...............................................4-58 8. Hazard warning lamp switch..........................................4-48

0-12 General Information

General Information 0-13

1. Checking coolant.............................................................7-18 6. Checking Brake fluid...................................................... 7-23

0-14 General Information

1. Checking coolant.............................................................7-18 6. Checking Brake fluid...................................................... 7-23

General Information 0-15

Engine oil Engine Water

Auto cruise High beam assist

0-16 General Information

General Information 0-17

0-18 General Information

Certificate in the user manual due to product size

EAC mark in the user manual due to product size.

General Information 0-19

0-20 General Information

1-2 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-3

1-4 Safety Precautions

yy Adjust the driver’s seat, headrest and steering wheel for

Safety Precautions 1-5

1-6 Safety Precautions